Pricelist No 5023 Kohl Rich

Price List ho. 50, Vols. II and III.
Physical Apparatus.
VOL. II.
Apparatus and Supplies for general use. Introduction to Physics.
Mechanics. Wave Theory. Acoustics. Optics. Heat. Meteorology.
Cosmology.
Electrically driven Whirling Table with double Gearing.
MAX KOHL A. G
CHEMNITZ (GERMANY)
Adorfer Strasse 20.
Telegraphic Address: Physik. Fully paid-up Share Capital:

ABC- Code 5* Ed. used. 80,000.
50, II III e. All imitation or reproduction of Block strictly prohibited. 01.6224.

Printed by Hugo Wilisch, Chemnitz.
Preface. m
The present list forms the second portion of our Price List No. 50 published in the autumn
of 1909. The list here presented contains descriptions and prices of Physical Apparatus brought up
to date in accordance with the present state of instruction in Physics.
Wehave spared neither cost nor trouble to render the arrangement of the list as comprehensive
as possible and to facilitate the selection of apparatus by means of suitable illustrations. The latter
are reproduced from photographs almost without exception and therefore give an exact idea of the
apparatus, as in making illustrations from drawings a certain amount of discretion is generally left
to the draughtsman.
A carefully compiled index at the end of the list facilitates the selection of apparatus.
In presenting this Price List to physicists and others interested, we would ask that frequent
use might be made of it and that the list itself might be kept for reference.
It is always our endeavour to improve upon our apparatus and to make a thorough test of
all goods before despatch, with a view to giving complete satisfaction to our customers. The steady
increase in the output of our apparatus is proof that we are working in the right direction.
In order to fill orders as rapidly as possible we hold a large stock of Physical Apparatus to
the value of 20000 25000, while the completeness and modern character of the equipment of
our works renders it possible for us to execute even the largest orders in the minimum of time.
In order to shew the development of our 'works we append the following table shewing some
of the important points in its progress:
Year
IV Conditions of Sale.
Conditions of Sale.
The prices in this list are for nett cash payment without discount.
In liic case of Educational Institutions, time will be granted for-payment where orders re-
presenting large sums are concerned, should this be necessary.
The prices given are for delivery and payment at Chemnitz.

In the case of deliveries not on account of German officials or German State or Municipal
Educational Institutions, we reserve to ourselves the right to request the value of the account
before despatching the goods or to require payment on delivery, unless we are convinced from
previous dealings, or by obtaining references, as to solvency of customers.
Duties, payable in certain countries on accounts, should be met by the buyer.

stamp We
neither concern ourselves with stamping nor assume any responsibility for any omission in this
respect.
Timeof delivery is given where possible and is strictly adhered to, though we can take no
responsibility for the consequences of unavoidable delays.
In the case of foreign orders it is necessary to send us any special instructions as to con-
signment or the payment of Customs Duly.
Cases and packing are in all cases charged for separately at cost price. The prices ((noted
for packing in the case of the individual articles only apply to simple packing for land transit;
packing suitable for marine transit being as a rule charged double. We pack oversea consignments in
zinc-lined cases or in cases with oil-cloth lining, unless otherwise requested. Oversea consignments
to European Ports are sent in ordinary cases, unless marine packing is specially asked for.
Packing is carried out with great care by skilled packers; but we protect our clients from
loss by insuring consignments against breakage and loss, the lowest possible premium being
charged. If damage is reported we therefore replace articles free of cost.
Complaints are not considered unless made immediately on receipt of the goods.
The illustrations appended to the Price List do not always agree perfectly in all particulars
with the apparatus supplied, since in many cases alterations to and improvements in apparatus often
shew themselves practicable.
In the case of of the illustrations, Auxiliary Apparatus, etc. are included in the illu-
many
stration in order to facilitate the construction and use of the apparatus (e. g., Fig. 51,151, the
experimental apparatus); these articles are not included in the price of the object, being supplied
only when ordered separately.
The under the illustrations is intended to give a practical idea of the
scale of sizes given
>i/.r of the apparatus, but
not binding as regards the exact size of the article. In the case of
is
per>peetive drawings the scale usually applies to one dimension only.

In connection with larger articles we have in many cases appended the nett and gross \\eights.
Ml data as to weight are, however, only
approximate and not binding. .Marine packing as a rule
weighs about half as much again as packing for land transit.
View of Factory. Awards.
lANDINC'OFCOlUMBUS
Mncccxcii i
WXjXCIIl-
Gold Medal. Leipzig 1897.
Chicago 1893. Chicago 1893.
Administration Buildings, Mechanical Workshops and Cabinet Shops

of Messrs Max Kohl A. G. Chemnitz.
GRAND-PRIZE
LOVISIANA-PVRCHASE
EXPOSITION.
Gold Medal. International Exhibition. Paris 1900.
Grand Prix. St. Louis 1904.
Cl. 4780, 4790, 4781,5664,

4785,4786,4787,4784.
VI Awards.
3 Grands Prix.
International Exhibition
Brussels 1910.
We have obtained the following awards at exhibitions:
International Exhibition, Brussels, 1910. 3 Grands Prix.
International Exhibition, St. Louis, 1904. !

'
Gold Medal.
International Exhibition, Paris, 1900. Gold Medal.
International Exhibition, Chicago, 1893. Two Prizes.
Buenos Aires, 1910. Grand Prix.
Allahabad (India), 1911. Gold Medal.
Lemberg, 1907. Gold Medal.
Rome, 1907. Large silver Medal.
Liege, 1905. Two Grands Prix.
Athens, 1904. Gold Medal
Aussig, 1903. Gold Medal.
Diisseldorf, 1898. Two Diplomas.
Leipzig, 1897. Gold Medal.
Gold Medal.
GOLD MEDAL
St. Louis 1904. LOVIS1ANA-PVRCHASE
EXPOSITION.
2 Grands Prix.
Liege 1905.
Cl. 6589, 6590,

4783,4782,
4788.7489.
Contents. VH
Contents.
Page
vol. n.
General hints III-XVT
Preface Ill
Conditions of sale IV
Awards V, VI
Contents VII
Literature, together with abbreviations employed VIII
Some testimonials as to physical apparatus and mechanical
models IX XIV
Corrigenda for vol. I III XV
Apparatus and Supplies for General Use 201 250
Apparatus, Supplies and Materials for General Use 201 220
Measurement of lengths, angles, surfaces and volumes, Dividing
Engines, Slide Eules 221230
Balances and sets of weights 231 244
Measurement of time 244 250
Introduction to Physics 250
Mechanics (statics, dynamics and molecular effects) of solids, liquids
and gases 251 411
Wave motions 411 417
Acoustics 418 464
Optics 465 566
Heat 567649
Meteorology 650660
Cosmology 660 662
vol. m.
Magnetism 785796
Static Electricity 797838
Voltaic Electricity 839949
Electro-magnetism and Electro-dynamics 949 1030
Electrical Oscillations. Wireless Telegraphy. Telephony. Selenium
Cells. Thermoelectricity 10301064
Miscellanea 10641071
Appendix 1072 1074
Estimates of Cost for Physical apparatus 1075 1085
Estimates of Cost for Chemical supplies 1085 -1093
Physical apparatus for projection 1094 1096
Alphabetical Name and Subject-matter Index 1097 1131
Equipments: see List 50, Vol. I.

vm Literature, Abbreviations.
Literature
with List of Abbreviations.
In compiling this Price List use was made in the first instance of the text-books and periodicals mentioned
below -- both the older and newer editions of the text-books being considered. Where the edition is not expressly
mentioned in the literature, the reference is to the edition mentioned below. As many apparatus are described in
a number of text-books, preference is given in quoting the literature to the work giving the most complete ^details.
Text-books and journals mentioned here and there are not included below.
Abbreviations. Title.
W. D. We i nho d, Physikalische Demonstrationen, 4. Auf 1.
1 Leipzig 1905. Joh. Ambr. Earth
(friiher bei Quandt &
Handel). The references to the 3 rd ed. are enclosed in square
brackets.
W. V. d. E. We i n ho 1 d, 2. Aufl. Leipzig 1874, Quandt & Handel.
Vorechule der Experimentalphysik,
M. P. Miiller-Pouillet-Pfaundler, Lehrbuch der Physik und Meteorologie, 10. Aufl.
19061909, Bd. I, II 1 II III, IV 1 Braunschweig, Friedr. Vieweg & Sohn.
1
, , .
Chwolson, Lehrb. Chwolson, 0. D., Lehrbuch der Physik, Bd. I IV, Braunschweig 19021908. Friedr.
Vieweg & Sohn.
F r i c k, Phys. T. Dr. J. F r i c k s, Physikalische Technik von Dr. 0. Lehman n, 7. Aufl. 1904 1909. The
references to the 6* ed. are enclosed in square brackets.
M. T. Friedr. C. G. M ii 1 1 e r, Technik des physikalischen Unterrichts nebst Einfuhrung in
die Chemie. Otto S a 1 1 e, Berlin 1906.
Tyndall, Der Schall, deutsch von H. Helmholtz und C. Wiedemann. Braun-
schweig 1874. Friedr. Vieweg Sohn. &
Tyndall, Die Warme, deutsch von A. v. Helmholtz und C. Wiedemann,
nach der 8. Auflage des Originals, Braunschweig 1894. Friedr. Vieweg & Sohn.
Tyndall, Das Licht, deutsch von C. Wiedemann, 2. Aufl. 1895. Braunschweig.
Friedr. Vieweg & Sohn.
Helmholtz, Die Lehre von den Tonempfindungen, 4. Aufl. 1844. Braunschweig. Friedr.
Vieweg & Sohn.
Gr m s e h
i 1. E. Grimsehl, Lehrbuch der Physik, Leipzig 1909.
Hofler-Poske. P o s k e, Dr. P., Oberstufe der Naturlehre. Nach A. Hoflers Naturlehre fur die oberen
Klassen der osterreichischen Mittelschulen fur hohere Lehranstalten des Deutschen
Reichs bearheitet. Braunschweig 1907. Friedr. Vieweg & Sohn.
H 6 f 1 e r, Physik mit Zusatzen aus der angewandten Mathematik, aus der Logik und Psy-
chologie und mit 230 Leitaufgaben. Braunschweig 1904. Friedr. Vieweg & Sohn.
Kolbe, El.-L. B. Kolbe, Einfuhrung in die Elektrizitatslehre, 1. Aufl. 1893 u. 1895, 2. Aufl. 1904 n.
1905, Berlin, Jul. Springer.
Kolbe-Skellon. Introduction to Electricity; Kegan, Paul, Trench, Trubner & Co., Ltd. London 1908.
Gan.-Man. Ganot-Maneuvrier, Traite elementaire de physique, 23. Aufl. Paris 1905. Librairie
Hachette et Cie.
Gan.-Rein. Ganot-Atkinson- Reinold, Elementary Treatise on Physics experimental and
applied; London und Bombay 1906. Longmans, Green & Co.
G a n o t M ineuvrier-Brito, Tratado elemental de Fisica. Paris 1885. Librerfa
- i
de Ch. B o u r e t und Libreria de Hachette y Cia.

G a n o t - Dr. We i s k e, Lehrbuch der Physik und Meteorologie. Leipzig 1858. Loop.
V o s s.
Kleiber, Lehrb. f. Gymnas. Kleiber, Joh., Lehrbuch der Physik fur humanistische Gymnasien. 3. Aufl. Miinchen
und Berlin. 1904.
Kleiber, Joh., Physik fur die Oberstufe. Miinchen und Berlin 1905. R. Oldenbourg.
Kleiber und Scheffler, Elementar-Physik mit Chemie fur die Dnterstufe, 4. Aufl.,
Miinchen und Berlin 1908. R. Oldenbourg.
Meyer, K., Naturlehre (Physik und Chemie) fur hohere Madchenschulen, Lehrerinnen-
Seminare und Mittelschulen. 4. Aufl. Leipzig 1906.
Rosenberg, Dr. Karl, Experimentierbuch fur den Unterricht in der Naturlehre. 2. Aufl.
Wien und Leipzig 1908. Alfred Holder.
W. u. E., phys. Prakt. Wiedemann und E b e r t, Physikaliscb.es Praktikum, 4. Aufl. 1899. Braunschweig.
Friedr. Vieweg & Sohn.
H a h n, Herm., Handbuch fur physikalische Schiilerubungen. Berlin 1909. Julius
Springer.
Kaiser, W., Physikalische
Schiilerubungen. Leipzig 1908. Quelle & Meyer.
Ztechr. d.phys. u.chem.U. Zeitschrift fur den physikalischen und chemischen Unterricht. Herausgegeben von F. Poske.
f.
Jul. Springer, Berlin.

Pogg. Ann. Poggendorfs Annalen der Physik und Chemie.
Wied. Ann. Wiedemanns
Annalen der Physik und Chemie.
Drudes Ann. Drudes
Annalen der Physik
Compt. rend. Comptes rendues hebdomadaires des seances de 1'acaderaie des sciences.
Z. d. V. d. J. Zeitschrift des Vereins deutscher Ingenieure, Berlin.
Testimonials. IX
Some Testimonials as to Physical Apparatus.
Trier, 13 th April, 1911. Innsbruck, 15 th March, 1911.

1 beg to express my warmest thanks for the protecting We have often obtained apparatus from you for our
sheet for the Induction Apparatus as well as for the appa school and are very satisfied \\ith the same.
ratus subsequently supplied. These are very well con- Direktor L. Ostheimer,
structed and work faultlessly. Board School for Boys.
Oberlehrer Reimann.
Essen, 18 th 'February, 1911.

Vegesack Bremen, 13 th April, 1911.
b.
The apparatus recently supplied have met with our
I beg to inform you that the consignment of appa-
perfect satisfaction and will lead us to consider your firm
ratus for teaching purposes, which arrived a few days ago,
further when we require fresh equipment.
has met with my entire satisfaction.
Oberlehrer Dr. H. Kohlmann. Walter, Seminary Teacher,
Kgl. Seminar f. ev. Zoglinge.
Iterlin-Wilmersaorf, 14 th April, 1911.

I am very satisfied with the apparatus with which llalbstadt (Russia), 14
th
February, 1911.
you have supplied me. They can lay claim to the highest All apparatus which we have tested up to the present
precision and are characterised by thoroughness and work in an excellent manner and the school will therefore
neatness of construction, thus affording great pleasure to place further orders with you as required.
the eye. As a general rule these excellent qualities are Kommerzschule der Mennoniten-Gesellschait.
wanting in apparatus made by other firms. And no one
who has observed the steady perfection in construction
St. Petersburg, 3 rd /16 th February, 1911.
of Kohl's apparatus during the last few years can say
that the firm of Kohl has not endeavoured to establish The Acoustic Apparatus has met with the e_itire
its old and renowned reputation. satisfaction of the Baron.

firmly
Dr. Lotzbeyer, Leo v. Dabriansky,
Oberlehrer an der Oberrealschule nebst Imperial Court Orchestra.
Reformrealgy mnasium .
Marburg, 12 th February, 1911.

Gross- Lichterfelde, 14 th April, 1911. At the same time I feel impelled to express my satis-
You be glad to hear that nothing has gone
will also factionwith the Braun Electrometer recently obtained
astray or become broken amon<r the 21 cases of apparatus, from your esteemed house.
and that we wonder anew at the beauty and practicability Prof. Ferdinand Lang,
of the apparatus. an der k. k. Staatsrealschule.
Prof. M. Bienengraber, Realgymnasium.
th
Fiume, 11 February, 1911.
9 th April, 1911.
Culm, I am satisfied with the construction and
perfectly
The apparatus supplied at the beginning of March are
working of the apparatus.
to our entire satisfaction. A. Meichsner,
Dr. Wissemann, Civica Scuola Generate per G-arzoni industrial!.
Oberlehrer a. d. stadt. hoh. Madchenschule.
Ma lines, 11 th February, 1911.

Jena, 8 th April, 1911.
I take the opportunity of informing you that I am
I require a good
In addition apparatus for Lissajovs's
extremely satisfied with the Coil as well as with the other
Figures. ordered one of these from you some years ago
I
apparatus purchased from you. I recommend your firm.
from Danzig and was quite satisfied with it.
Institut Scheppers Malines.
Prof. M. Wien,
J. Victorin,
Physikal. Institut der Universitat Jena.
professeur de Physique.
Kesmark, 1
st
April, 1911.
Rocblitz, th
Saxony, 12 February, 1911.
We beg to express our fullest satisfaction with the
I beg to express my satisfaction with the Generator,
apparatus supplied.
Transformer and three-phase Motor obtained from you in
Direkt. der Webschule in Kesmark.
Autumn.
Seminaroberlehrer Rich. Miiller.
Berlin, 1 st April, 1911.
In acknowledging receipt of the Model Theodolite,
Rorschach, 9 th February, 1911.
I beg to inform you that I am quite satisfied with the in-
strument. It fulfils both as regards size and accuracy all We are very well satisfied indeed with your present
>vill gladly consider you in future orders.
the demands which one can place upon a school instrument. consignme.its and
Oberlehrer Jost, 11- Realschule. Prof. Hiiiimel, Seminar.
X Testimonials.
(Jlarisegg bei Steckborn, 9 th February. 1911. Go Id a p, 6 th December, 1910.
Finally, I must thank you for the good construction The apparatus supplied have arrived without fault
ol i lie apparatus. and work well.
Dr. Max OettL, Oberlehrer Franz Busch,
Schweizerisches Landerziehungsheim. Kgl. Realgymnasium.
Cu x hav e n, 1
st
February, 1911. Los Angeles, Cal., 22 nd November, 1910.
We shall require additional apparatus this year and Through local agents we are receiving now a number
I have no doubt that your esteemed firm will obtain the of pieces of apparatus of your make. are highly pleased We
order as the goods supplied by you have been found faultless. with these.
Manual Arts High School,
V. Worch.
Geo. E. Mitchell, Science Dc|.t.
Offenbach a./M., 24
th
January, 1911.
Lucca, 17 th November, 1910.
I must not inform you that the apparatus and
fail to
The Andrew Press has arrived in good condition and
equipment supplied to our School last summer satisfy all
works very well.
conditions required of them; especially is this the case for
R. Liceo.
the Projection Apparatus and Switchboard, with which
I am very satisfied.
Oberlehrer Richter,
hohere Madchenschule. Glogau, 17 th November, 1910.
Many thanks for sending Price List No. 21 with supple-
ments and for the excellence of construction of the goods
Campobasso, Italy, 19 th January, 1911. to our recent order, etc.
I have become acquainted with the good qualities of Oberlehrer G. Koch, hohere Madchenselmle.
apparatus constructed in your workshops in the Physical
Institute of the Royal University of Cattania (Sicily) where
I acted as Assistant up to last year, and I desire to obtain
Philadelphia, 12 th November, 1910.
apparatus of your construction.
Prof. C. Bellia, Referring to our order Mounted Chromatic Forks
ordered of us by the John Hopkins University, Dr. John
R. Liceo-Ginnasio ,,Mario Pagano".
B. Watson would take this occasion to express Dr. Watson's
appreciation of your manner of filling this order and to
state that other orders for apparatus will be placed by
Montreal, 16 th December, 1910.
Dr. Watson in the near future.
The cases last received from you have been opened
Arthur H. Thomas Company.
and I must inform you that I am perfectly satisfied with
their contents. The packing is perfect, etc.

ficole des Hautes Etudes Commerciales de Montreal. Rochlitz, 4 th November, 1910.
The consignment has met with my complete sat is -
I'iiction and I beg to thank you for it.

B o z e n, 16 th December, 1910.
I would remark, in conclusion, that we are perfectly Rich. Miiller, Seminaroberlehrer.

satisfied with the consignment received three years ago.
Convent vom Allerheiligst. Sacrament, Davos 3 rd

Platz, November, 1910.
Bozen, South Tyrol.
I am
very pleased with the Coil supplied on 5
th
Fe-
bruary, 1909, as the efficiency is nearly the same as ilie
Sarospatak (County Zemplen), Hungary,
modern apparatus without interrupter; and I hope that
14 th December, 1910. the Induction Coil ordered may turn out as good.
We are very satisfied with the Physical Apparatus A. Rzewuski.

ordered from you this year.
Alexander Mailer. Obergymn.-Lehrer. st

I) j u r s h o 1 in, Sweden, I November, 1910.
Since only during the last few days that we have

it is
\V i 1 m e r s d o r f, 9 th December, 1910. been able to deal with our new school buildings we have
only now been able to unpack the Physical Apparatus
The quality and practical arrangement of the goods We have found everything very t-atis-
supplied by you.
supplied arc in perfect accord with our wishes. we have
factory and great pleasure in giving you this
Dr. Meyer, testimonial.
Oberlehrer an ilcr Cecilienschule. Djursholms Samskola.
Testimonials. XI
Kecskemet i, 27 th October, 1910. A q u i 1 a, Italy, 15 th June, 1910.

I must inform you that everything has been received
Theodolite arrived in perfect condition. Am very
in good condition and that I am perfectly satisfied with
satisfied with it.
Dir. Racsch, P. D., Oberrealschule.

the fine and accurate construction of the apparatus supplied
to our Institute.
Ottaviano Loiif.o,
Professor of Physics.
St. G alien, 21 st
October. 1910.
I have great pleasure in repeating to-day my high

appreciation of the numerous apparatus supplied last P. erlin-Wilmersdorf, 11 th May, 1910.
winter for the St. Gallen Industrial and Realschule. The apparatus supplied are to my entire satisfaction.
Real- und Gewerbeschullehrer H. Schmid. Oberlehrer Dr. Lotzbeyer,

Oberrealschule.
Vilna, 3 rd October, 1910.

Pol?, 8 th May, 1910.
I beg herewith to express my thanks at the correct I am
also perfectly satisfied with the two pieces of
construction of my first order from you. 1 received both apparatus last supplied.
consignments in good condition. Ginnasio reale
Prof. A. Gregoretti.
Mannliches Gymnasium Pesotsky.
E s k t e r g o n n, 3 April, 1910. rd
Szaezvaros, th
Hungary, 8 September, 1910.
During the last four to five years in which I have had
We are eminently satisfied with the articles and the dealings with you, partly through Messrs. Calderoni &
work. Company, I have been able to convince myself of the
Franz Simon, Gymnasirldirektor. soundness and excellence of your firm.
Molakovszky Laszlo,
Bottyan Janos u. 11.
K i e f f, 3 rd September, 1910.
It is with pleasure that we inform you that the client
is very satisfied with the goods supplied and we take this
Astrachan, 1
st
April, 1910.
We have received the apparatus supplied. All the
opportunity of expressing our most sincere thanks for the
apparatus has arrived safely and is of excellent quality,
careful manner in which this order Has been executed.
for which we thank you.
Olszevitz and Kern. Realschule.
Berlin, 16 th August, 1910. St. Gallen, 28 th March, 1910.

We beg to inform you that we have received the goods The large consignment of Physical Apparatus intended
for the St. Gallen Industrial School, which are specially
and are extremely satisfied with the manner of coastruction.
intended for teaching Electricity, has arrived in good con-
Mechanics Laboratory oJ the Royal Mining .Academy, dition. All apparatus work faultlessly and their sound
Schmidt, Assistant. and exact construction eminently satisfactory. The appa-
ratus are a real ornament to the instructional collection
of the Municipal Industrial School.
(Translation.^ Ufa, 14 th August, 1910. H. Schmid, Reallehrer.
On opening the cases all the pieces of apparatus were
found to be in perfect condition, and I beg to express my
best thanks for the same. Holzmindeu, 26 th March, 1910.
Mannliches Gymnasium, Ufa.

It givjssme great pleasure to inform you that I am
very pleased with the precise manner in which our order
has been executed.
Th. Lehmann, Oberlehrer,
P f i b a m, 29 th July, 1910.
Landschulheim.
I feel it my duty to express my most sincere thanks
for the apparatus supplied during the school year 1908/9
through Messrs. J. & J. Iric, Prague, for our Electroteclmical Jaroslav, 23 rd March, 1910.
Collection. The working of all apparatus is perfect. The apparatus supplied in January last were all in
order and work well. We thank you for same.
Ing. W. Kazel.
Lehrer-Institut.
Go r 1 i t z, 21 st July, 1910.
10 th March, 1910.
Prague,
Everything with which you have supplied us is con- The Monochord is very nicely constructed and is in
structed in the best possible manner. accordance with my wishes.
Dr. Graetzer. Mathematico-Physical Institute oJ the German University.
XII Testimonials.
A u b u r n, Ala., 5 March, 1910. th

P
o z s o n y, 10 th January, 1910.
The of apparatus which I ordered in November
lot The instruments have evoked all-round approval and
was received a few days ago and is entirely satisfactory are faultless in every particular.
I wish to thank you for
in every way.
your efficient and Mather Oszwald & Tarsa.
prompt execution of my order in every detail.
Alabama Polytechnic Institute, Dept. of Physics.
Leipzig, 3 rd January, 1910.
Essen 22 nd At the commencement of the present ye?r I obtained

(Ruhr), February, 1910.
from you for the new Schiller- Realgymnasium here a double-
I
acknowledge receipt of your consignment of 19 th ult.
and after testing the apparatus beg to express my satis- crank Rheostat after Briisch for a D. C. supply of 220 volts.
I am very pleased with the
faction with the goods. apparatus.
Prof. Mathee, Professor Dr. Starke,
Direktor der Kgl. Maschinenbauschule. Oberlehrer am Schiller-Realgymnasium.
Komo t a u, 19 th February, 1910. Droyssig b. Zeitz, 27

th
December, 1909.
I am
again very satisfied with the reliable and sub- The apparatus which your firm has supplied are to
stantial construction of the apparatus.
my entire satisfaction; they work very well.
Prof. Dr. Franz Wolden, Seminarlehrer Jantzsch.
K. K. Staats-Gymnasium.
Etteaheim, 22 nd December, 1909.

Hartford, Conn., 12 th February, 1910.
The transformer works well and economically
The when
apparatus you shipped to me arrived some time
connected up as stated.
ago and is entirely satisfactory.
J. Ziegler,
Trinity College,
Prof, am Realgymnasium.
Jarois Physical Lab.
Ley sin, Canton de Vaud, 12 th February, 1910. Riga, 19 th December, 1909.

The apparatus for studying Radioactivity are espe- The consignment duly to hand io good condition.
last
cially characterised by their construction, and the mixture The precise and substantial manner of construction of the
of Radium and Zinc Sulphite is excellent from the apparatus leaves nothing to be desired. The apparatus
phos-
phorescence point of view, for which I am very much which you supplied a year ago also have been found ex-
obliged to Messrs. Max Kohl. cellent for teaching purposes.
W. Stefko, Moscow. C. Krause,

Hohere Tochterschule von 0. v. Hasford.
P a b i a n i c e, 1
st
February, 1910.
All articles received in good condition and
undamaged. Hermannstadt, 15 th December, 1909.
Directors of the Commercial Academy. The consignment for the Realschule received yesterday.
The apparatus are constructed in the excellent manner
BruckMur, 27 th January, 1910.
a. d. generally reputed to your firm and we are very pleased with
I am
them.
very pleased with the consignment just received.
Dr. Paul Gaulhoser, Direktion d. ev. Gymnasium A. B.
Physikalisches Kabinett der K, K. Staatsrealschule. (sd.) C. Albrlch.
Hernosand, 27 January, 1910.

th
C z e r n o w i t z, 25 th November, 1909.
I am very pleased with the apparatus supplied. 1 wish before all to emphasize the fact that every
E. Tham,
piece of apparatus is nicely and accurately constructed and
Technische Elementarschule. that tests have shewn the same to work faultlessly. I
therefore consider my
duty to express to you in the
it
25 th name which I work many thanks for

of the Institution for
Salzburg, January, 1910.
the care and precision with which you have filled this
Many thanks for the goods with which, as in previous
instances. I am satisfied.
order.
very
Professor Alexander Buga,
Karl Schnizer,
Teacher ;it the Public Commercial School. Kustos d. physksl. Kabinetts am III. Staatsgymnasiurn.
Sarospatek, 24 th January, 1910. Tar now. i_'r' November,

The Physical Apparatus ordered have arrived and the The Physical Apparatus supplied to our Gymnasium
packing is perfect. I am very well satisfied with the get- by your esteemed house have been received and we are
up of the- articles.
perfectly satisfied \vitli the eonstruelinn of the i-ame.
Alex. Mailer, I. Staatsgymnasiurn,
Teacher of Physics, Obergymnasium. Physikalisches Kabinett.
Testimonials. xni
Wo 1 o g d a, 9 th October, 1909. R a t i bo r, 26 th June, 1909.

The Physical Apparatus supplied by you to my order I beg to inform you that I am pleased with the Air
been received in good condition and well packed, and Pump as with all apparatus supplied by you.
have been found to justify themselves in use, for which Oberlehrer Langner,
please accept my best thanks. Realgymnasium.
II. Weibl. Gymnasium.
Villingen, 25 th June, 1909.

Rotterdam,
24 th October, 1909.
In conclusion. I feel compelled to express my best
I have obtained from you for my School (II. Hohere
thanks for the careful manner in which you have filled
Knabenschule) apparatus to the value of 100. The
the order and so far as I have been able to test for
entire consignment I find to be perfectly satisfactory.
the substantial and tasty manner in which the individual
Dr. D. de Lange.
pieces of apparatus have been constructed.
Prof. E. Hensel,
Leobschutz, 23 rd October, 1909.
Realgymnasium .
The apparatus are excellent.

Egl. Seminar.
r s c h a, Gouv. Mohileff, 30 th May, 1909.
T f s, th I now
find time to express my best thanks, for all
i 1 i October, 1909,
1 1
I
beg to express my thanks for the faultless and accurate apparatus have been received in excellent condition.
manner in which the apparatus are constructed. M. Vastschinski,
Teacher of Mathematics at the Girls' Gymnasium.
Commercial Academy.
G e b w e i 1 e r, 2f> th September, 1909. V a lie jo, Cal., 14 th May, 1909.

We must say that taking everything into consideration The goods arrived in fine condition. They were re-
we are very pleased with the objects supplied. In par- markably well made, and each piece of apparatus works
ticular the nice lecture table and the electrical plant have to perfection. I congratulate you upon 'the possession of
given us great pleasure, while the Projection Apparatus such skilled workmen.
fulfils all demanas that can be placed on a cheap instrument. Carl H. Nielsen, Principal,
Dr. Weill, Gymnasium. Vallejo High School.
17 th September, 1909.
Bologna, dense, 11 th May, 1909.
We are quite satisfied with the Pump supplied.
Ibeg herewith to confirm that the apparatus ordered
Societa Italiana Fabbriche Lampade Phoebus.
have been received in good condition and to express to
you my best thanks for same.
II e r mannstad t, 8 th September, 1909. Technische Schule.
I received your consignment a week ago and thank
you for prompt despatch. It is quite a festival to me when
I receive new apparatus from you of your wonderful con- Wilmersdorf-Berlin, May, 1911. 1
st
struction. Everything has arrived in good condition.

The equipment of the class rooms and museums
entire
Direktor C. Albrich junior, for Physics and Chemistry at the Cecilienschule, and the
Evang. Gymnasium A. B. equipment of the Chemical Laboratory, have met with

entire approval. Everything is constructed in a very
practical manner and .of faultless material and works with
Utrecht, 23 rd July, 1909.
me ease and certainty. The apparatus of our collection also,
It gives great pleasure to inform you that the in-
which almost without exception came from your factory,
struments manufactured by you, supplied to the Ludgers
Teachers Seminary, Hilversum, have met with the entire
have shewn themselves in vise to be thoroughly well and
satisfaction of the users. precisely constructed, work well, and are thoroughly sub-
Thanking you for the con-
stantial.
signment, etc. FT. Andreas,
Dietrich Meyer,
St. Gregoriushuis.
Ordinary Teacher at the Cecilienschule.
G r a z, 10 th July, 1909.
was very pleased with the apparatus (Spark Coil,
I th
Steglitz, near Berlin, 5 May, 1911.
Tcsla Apparatus, etc.) supplied to the Marine Institute.
During the last three years you have supplied the
E. Weber, K. K. Professor. internal equipment of our five Physics rooms, and supplied
the greatest part of our apparatus for demonstrations and
W o t k i n s k, 6 th July, 1909. students' use. It is with pleasure that I inform you that
Kindly accept my best thanks for filling in such a we are quite pleased with everything and that we all of
complete manner my order for Physical Apparatus which us teachers and students like to work with your goods
you supplied year for the Physics Dept. of the Technical
last since they are reliable and always nice in appearance.
School, Votkinsk. Oberlehrer C. Roebling,
Direktion der mittleren technischen Schule. Paulsen-Realgymnasium.
XIV Testimonials.
Some Testimonials
as to Mechanical Models after Prof. Eugen Meyer, Charlottenburg.
Royal Technical High School. Direktion des Thiiringischen Technikums.
Hanover, 23 rd April, 1910. 1 1 m e n a u, 28 th April, 1910.
In reply to your enquiry, I beg to say that from pre-
The construction of the model is very well thought
vious experience I am perfectly satisfied with the cons-
out and is very rigid in spite of the numerous movable
truction and action of the Models after Prof. Meyer.
sections. The use of this model greatly facilitates demons-
Prof. Dr. Ing. Michel.
trations so that it can be employed with advantage for
Royal Mining Academy.
teaching purposes.
th
Berlin, 7 April, 1910.
Direktion des Thuring. Technikums Ilmenau.
In reply to your enquiry of 5 th April, I have to say
Prof. 0. Schmidt.
that I am quite satisfied with the Meyer Models sent.
Prof. Dr. E. Jahnke.
Direction of the Technical State Institutions. Konigl. Sachs. Bauschule.
Chemnitz, 10 th May, 1910. Plauen i. V., 7

th
April, 1910.
In reply to your favour of 5 th April, 1910, I have to In regard to your enquiry of the 5 th inst., we have
inform you that the Models designed by Prof. Eugen Meyer pleasure in informing you that the Models Nos. 3 and 5
and supplied by you for instruction in Technical Mechanics, for technical Mechanics, after Prof. Dr. Meyer of Char-
intended for the Mechanics and Electrotechnical Depart- lottenburg, obtained from you, are considered as models
ments of the Academy of Crafts and for the School of very well adapted from their mode of construction and
Mechanics, and for instruction in Building in the Archi- capability of demonstration for explaining the principles of
tecturalDepartment of the Academy of Crafts, have been Bending Phenomena. The Models mentioned can be warmly
found satisfactory. recommended to all technical schools.
Die Direktion der Technischen Staatslehranstalten. Die Direktion der Koniglichen Bauschule.
Miihlmann. Baurat Prof. Albert.
The following institutions have already obtained from us Mechanical Models

as suggested by Prof. Eugen Meyer, Charlottenburg:
Staatliches Technikum, Hamburg. Technische Mittelschule Berlin.

Konigliche Bergakademie, Berlin. Konigl. Preufiische hohere Schiffs-
Technische Staatslehranstalten, Chemnitz. und Maschinenbauschule, Kiel.
Artillerie-Akademie Mechaniscb.es Konigl. Fachschule, Schmalkalden.
Laboratorium, St. Petersburg. Konigl. Fachschule, Leipzig.
Bergskolan, Falun (Sweden). Maschinen-Bauschule, Barmen-Elberfeld.
Konigl. Techn. Hochschule, Hanover. Grossherzogliche Baugewerk- und
Konigl. Sachs. Bauschule, Plauen (Vogtl.). Maschinenbauschule, Varel.
Thuringisclics Technikum, Ilmenau (Thur. ). Ingenieur- und Deckoffizierschule Wilhelmshaven.
Cniversity of Sydney, Sydney. Militartechnische Akademie, Charlottenburg.
Technikum, Winterthur. Technische Hochschule, Braunschweig.
T< rhimche Hochschule,
Danzig-Langfuhr. Eidgen. Polytechnikum, Ziirich.
Corrigenda. XV
Corrigenda to Vol. I.
Page 32, Fig. 50,199 B. A design not registered.

is
120, No. 50,494. The Figure refers to No. 50,500, not 50,490.
.. 121, No. 50.502. The voltage limits for one circuit are 03 110 and 160 volts respectively, not 0.03.
127, No. 50,534. This Sliding resistance is shown in fig. 50,534.
.. 133, No. 50,565. The price of the Gas Generator does not include motor drive,
ion Par 1 1
14o! line 6 The remarks re the switching out of the compound winding are not valid and should be deleted.
.. 142, line 5 and 6J
144. last par. but one 1
The final remark gôuld read: ,,In this manner the given speed at full load can be in-
creased by about 15% at full load." The speed cannot be decreased.
14(>. last par.but three J
186, No. 51,074. The reference to W. D. relates to the 3^ Edition [and the 2nd Edition], for the fourth [and
third] editions the following hold: W. D. 323 [305].
190 192. Physical Apparatus for Projection. Pages 190 192 no longer hold and should be replaced
by pp. 10941096.
.. 1221. Special optical outfit with Steinheil Group antiplanet. Read = 1 6,5, not 1 4,5. : :
1224, No. 9568. Biconcave lens costs 1. 0. 0, not 1. 5. 0.
1228, No. 9656. Projection screen with electric device and with tilting device costs 31.15.0, not 25. 10.0.
Corrigenda to Vols. II and III.
Page 218, No. 51,361. Carbon Capsule costs 0. 1. 6, not 0. 1. 0.

., 2>0, No. 51,413. Mohr's Burette with pinch cock, 100 ccm, costs 3 s. 6 d, not 4 S. 6 d.
.. 236, Nos. 51,569 and 51,570. The load which this balance may carry is expressed in kg.
,, 259, No. 51,819. Engelmeyer's Kinegraph costs, constructed as stated, 5. 10. and not 3. 0. 0. A simple
pattern for demonstrating the parallelogram of forces can be obtained for 3. 0. 0.
,. 2(il. No. 51,830. 3 Balance Pans of 50 g each and 1 Set of Weights with one 100 g weight, two 50 g, and twelve
10 g, suitable for the apparatus, cost 0. 15. extra.
,. 273. No. 51,904. 27 Double Hook Weights are supplied instead of 26.
.. 279, No. 51,959. The large Whirling Table has a width of 32 cm, not 37 cm.
.. 279, Nos. 51,951 51,958. 1 Whirling Tables. These numbers and prices no longer apply, being replaced by the
27!(. Xos. 51,961 51,968. / data given which is inserted between pp. 278 and 279.
.. 337, Nos. 52,465 and 52,466. The Hydraulic Press is equipped with a safety-valve for 20 atm., not 25.
., 340, No. 52,485. The last note above Pellat's apparatus: "The piston is packed with mercury" is belonging
to No. 52,483.
363, Pig. 52,589. This figure refers to No. 52 689, not 52,589.
.. 404, No. 53,058. Air reaction wheel. The figure of Fr. phys. Techn. is read: 3689, and not 2689.
.. 415. No. 53,171. The Wave Machine after Steindel is priced at 9.0.0 and not 6.0.0.
.. 4:w. No. 53,417- Tuning Forks with Electromagnetic Drive. The words: "By reducing the size of the orifice"
should only come in after "pitch".
488, No. 53,860. The addition to the optical disc gives only five cones of rays, not eight.
.. 532, Fig. 53,385. Read 54,385, not 53,385.
,, 545, No. 54,529. The price of Classen's interference apparatus is to be understood without glass plates. The
plates cost 1. 5. 0.
809, No. 60,261. Sheet Iron Cube, and not Tube, is intended.
',, 809, No. 60,266. 2 fixed Sounders, 2 solid and 2 hollow Spheres are supplied, not hollow cylinders.
860, Nos. 61,023 61,047. Thermopiles. "Hell's Dyaaphors" are no longer supplied.
865, Section 2. Leads and wires see vol. II, not vol. I.
,, 968, No. 62,400 e. Universal Stand after Kolbe The words "with two glass walk" should be deleted.
,, 980, Table. Induction Coils. The Figure No. 62,533 cited in type C applies only to the larger Induction
Coils from size 8 upwards. The smaller coils have instead of the pachytrope a simple
reversing switch tor double commutation.
,. 982, No. 62,666. The Wehnelt Interrupter now costs 3. 15. 0, and not 3. 10. 0.
.. 1009, Fig. 62.078 H. Read 62.97811, not 62,078 H.
,. 1010, No. 50,521. The Series Resistance can be used for 2 25 amps., not 5 24 amps.
No. 51 10051 103. Apparatus, Supplies and Materials for General Use. Work Stand. 201
51 100 A. 1:10. 51100B. 1:9.
Apparatus, Supplies and Materials for General Use.
51,100. Physical Work Stand (Edelmann's), Pigs. A and B, with case. Eegarding the em- s. d.
ployment of the work stand, see F i g. 51.103. Price, exclusive of the auxiliary parts
shown in Fig. 51,103 (see No. 51,103), of iron . . 4. 0.
The stand
consists of a tripod with pillar, 8 brass cross clamps which can be firmly clamped
to the pillar, and some ebonite, glass, iron and brass rods on to which electrodes, terminals, supports,
tongs and insulating handles may be screwed. The stand can be placed either vertically or horizon-
tally, and is widely used in physical experiments, e. g., for setting up lenses and prisms and spectrum
tubes and for experiments with Leyden jars, induction coils, etc.
."> 1 , 1 01. - -
Th e preceding, of Brass, tripod of zinc 4. 10.
.">!,! 02. --The preceding, of Brass, with half as many clamps, holders and accessories
again as in foregoing 6. 0.
Auxiliary Parts for Edelmann Work Stand, in accordance with Fig. 51,103, p. 202
1. '2 (Jlass Tubes for impact pressure of water (>. 1.
2. 6 Carbon Bods for demonstrating the electric arc ". 1.
3. The stand, assembled as a Henley discharger serves for the ignition of gun-cotton <>. 0.
4. Roget's Spiral and Bowl (>. 6.
.">.
Reading Telescope (see also Fig. 51,103, No. 8) 1. 12.
6. Glass Funnel with metal rod for igniting ether (>. 2.
7. Glass Vessel with 1 carbon plate, 1 zinc plate and copper plate for making up a cell
1 .... (). 4.
8. Scale for galvanometer readings (Telescope, see No. 5), with holder 0. 8.
9. 4 Lenses, 2 diaphragms, 1 preparation holder for making up a Galilean, a terrestrial and an astro-
nomical telescope as well as a microscope 1. 2.
10. Lamp, slit diaphragm, lens and prism for demonstrating the spectroscope (telescope, see No. 5) 0. . 10.
11. 2 Spectrum Tubes, with hydrogen and oxygen JO. 7.
13"
202 Apparatus,*" Supplies and Material for General Use. N.I. M 101 -
51100 and 51103. 1 : 9 and 1 : 14.
51.104. Universal Stand (Bunsen's), massive construction, on iron foot, (W. D., Figure d.
Fig. 35.
- - M.
T., p. 10), with the single parts ISTos. 1 9 listed underneath .11. . . . 2.
1. Iron Stand (Is. 8d.); 2. 2 Clamps, 1 small, without double socket (2s. 6 d.);
3. Clamps, k 2, large, without double socket (3 S.); 4. Eetort Holder, d, without double
socket (3s. 7 d.); 5. Double Sockets, m, 3 in number, together (6s.); 6. Eing, r 1,
with socket, 7 cm diameter (Is. 3d.); 7. Eing, r 2, with socket, 10 cm diameter
(Is. 5d.); 8. Eing, r3, with socket, 13 cm diameter (Is. 7d.); 9. Fork, h, for carry-
ing Bunsen burner or Berzelius lamp, with socket (1 s. 7 d.).
51.104 a. Bunsen Burner for above, with air neck-piece, star, chimney, forked piece and soldering tube device 0. 3. 6
51.105. Universal Double Socket, for the universal stand (W. D., Fig. 36. -- M. T., p. 10) 0. 3. 6
51. 105 a. Westien Universal Clamp (W. D., Fig. 37. M. T., p. 10) 0. 3. 6
51.106. Heavy Iron Tripod, with iron rod, 1 m

long, suitable for the clamps listed under Nos. 51,104, 2 9,
51,105, 51,105 a, for clamping long tubes, etc 0. 3.
51.107. Bunsen Universal Stand, light construction 0. 15.
51,108. Precision Work Stand (Weinhold's) (W. D., pp. 37 and 38, Figs. 3840), carefully
constructed, thus ensuring the accessory p;irts being accurately and firmly clamped . 3. 10.
The stand consists of 1 iron tripod with rod, 2 brass sockets with pressure screws, 1 small clamp
with socket, 1 large clamp with socket, 1 retort holder, 1 clamp for cylindrical or prismatic objects
(Fig. 39), 1
r.lanip" for conical, wedge-shaped or pyramidal objects (Fig. 40), 3 iron rods of 10, 30 and
50 cm length, 1 box for taking the accessories, 1 ring for funnels, 1 ebonite-rod for Geisslers nilie^. 1 rod
for suspending thermometers, 1 support to allow of using the stand in horizontal position, 1 clamp
for holding tubes and rods, 1 clamp with tongs, 1 retort hold.
Cl. 5488.
No. 51118. Work Stands, Clamp Stands. 203
51104. 1:9. 51110. 1:6. 51111. 1 : 8.
51112. 1:10. 51114. 1:0. 51116. 1:3. 51117. 1 : 3. 51119. 1:8.
8. d.
51.109. Stand with stays (Weinhold's) (W. D., Fig. 41), without weight 1. 16.
51.110. Retort Holder, Figure, with wood clamp and iron foot (W. D., Fig. 32) . . . 0. 5.
51.111. Filter Stand, iron, Figure, with two different size rings (W. D., Fig. 33) ... 0. 5. 6
51.112. Boiling Stand, iron, Figure (W. D., Fig. 34) 0. 3. 6
51.113. Cooler Stand, iron, F i

g. 51,241, p. 211 (W. D., Fig. 44 [40]) 0. 5.
51.114. Burette Stand (Kaehler's), with universal holder for 2 burettes, with brass rod,
Figure 0. 9.0
Burette Holder, brass, double-arm, with fixed arms,Figure 0. 3. 6
Burette Holder, brass, two-arm, with movable arms, Figure (Hofmann's) . . 0. 4.
idem, brass, single-arm, with semi-circular arms, Figure 0. 3.
Stand for preceding burette holders, iron tripod with brass rod, 13 mm diameter 0. 3.
0. 4.
Cl. 5855, 3872, 5513,

102,
5856, 101, 103, 104, 105.
204 Apparatus, Supplies and Materials for General Use. No. 51120
51 120 A. 1:7.
51 120 B.
f 1:7.
51120C. 1:7.
51139. 1:8.
51124. 1:15. 51128. 1:18. 1:10.

51126.
.li'o. Universal Clamp, Fi g s. A, B and C, for clamping reading telescopes as in Fig. A, a. l
scales as iii Fi-. I',, and rods, thermometers and the like, as in Fig. C, etc. . . . . 0. 9.
.-.l.lL'l. American Clamps, Figure, of iron (W. D., Fig. 45 [41]), 10 cm s pan 0. 2. 6
51,122.
- - i d e 111, spaii i:> cm 0. 3. 6
."i 1.1 23. -- idem, span 20 cm 0. I. (i
r
>U2l. Gauss Stand, heavy construction, F i gu re. of oak, metal parts of iron, table with
prismatic -uidc adjustable \crticidly (VV. I)., Fig. 30), with table, 40cm diameter; height,
nnextended, 8H cm, extended. lo cm 1
200
Cl. 5313,',5315, 5314,
110, 153,
106, 107, 3808.
Nr. 51 H4. Clamps, Table Stands, Levelling Boards. 205
51132. 51133. 51134.

1: 8. 1 : 8. 1: 8.
51130. 1 : 15. 51 131. 1 : 14. 51142. 1:9.
s. (I.
51,125. -The preceding, iron parts entirely excluded from construction 2. 5.
5J , 1 26. - -
The preceding, table adjustable by rack and pinion, Figure, metal
parts of iron 3. 5.
-
51.127.
-- idem, iron-free pattern 3. 15.
51.128. Laboratory Stand, lighter pattern, Figure, with table top, 50 cm diameter, ad-
justable by crank motion, metal parts of iron 3. 2.
51.129. -The preceding, free from iron . 3.12.
51.130. Gauss Stand, light pattern, Figure, of oak, free from iron, without crank motion,
table top 30 cm diameter 2.
51.131. --The preceding, simpler, fixed by pegs, Figure 0. 18.
Tables for setting up apparatus, Figures (W. D., Fig. 31), with iron foot, brass pillar and
polished wood top 15 cm diameter.
List No. 51,132 51,133 51,134
Adjustable from 20 30 25 40 35 50 cm height
0.6.0 0.7.0 0.8.0
The preceding, iron-free, with zinc tripod (M. T., p. 9).
List No. 51,135 51,136 51,137
0.8.0 0.9.0 0.10.0
The preceding, with double extension, thus increasing the range of adjustment,
Fig. 51,139, -p. 204.
List No. 51,138 51,139 51,140
0.12.0 0.14.0 0.16.0
51.141. Adjustable, rotary Table for prisms, etc 0. 15.
51.142. Levelling Board and Slate Slab, in oak frame, Figure, 50 cm long, 30 cm wide,
with 4 levelling screws, quite plane, for erecting apparatus 1.16.
51.143.
- The
preceding,
-
with cast iron top, 50 cm long, 35 cm wide, planed, with
4 levelling screws ,
1.12.
51,144. Levelling Board, round, 30 cm diameter, with 3 levelling screws. 0. 10.
Kl. 108, 3909, 5556,

152.
206 Apparatus, Supplees and Materials for General Use. No. 51145
51145. 1:10. 51151. 1:15. 51153. 1:12.
51.145. Levelling Board with micrometer adjustment, Figure, for accurately setting up
apparatus which have no levelling screws fitted, and for adjusting at small angles (M. P.,
Vol. 1, Fig. 73), with small discs for supporting the levelling screws. Without spirit
level
The top is of plane glass in a metal frame; the levelling screw, in the form of a micrometer
screw, has a disc graduated in degrees.
51.146. Parallelepipedic Wood Blocks, 15 cm square, 1, 2, 2 and 5 cm thick

51.147. Wood Supports, 15 cm square, 0.5, 1, 2, 2.5 and 10 cm high (M. T., p. 9). . . .
51.148. 2 Support Boxes with hole for gripping (M. T., p. 9), 20x30x40 cm
51.149. 1 Set of thin wood wedges serving as supports, 6 in set
51.150. 4 Wide wood wedges, 5 x 15 cm, width of back 0.5 and 1 cm (M. T., p. 10) ...
51.151. Frame Figure (W. D., Fig. 27), 1 m wide, 1 m high, with 8 small
Stand, of oak,
and 2 hooks for suspending pendulums, levers, Magdeburg hemispheres, electro-
large
magnets, etc. The frame can be taken apart. Price does not include experimental
apparatus
51.152. Portable Gallows for suspending heavy objects and for tensile tests, as suggested
by Friedr. C. G. Miiller (M. T., Fig. 3)
51.153. Mirror, on stand, Figure, for demonstrating phenomena in the horizontal plane,
e. g., Chladni's harmonic figures, before a
large audience (M. T., p. 9)
This mirror is inclined towards the stand at an angle of 45 .
Flexible Leads, Figure (W. D., Fig. 493 [468]), covered with wool and braided with
copper wires at ends.
Cross-section, sq. mm 1.5 2.5
For currents to amperes 14
-
51.154. -
Length 0.60 m, Price Is.
- -
51.155. Length 0.90 m, Price 1 s. 3 d.
51.156. - -
Length 1.20 m, Price. ..... 1 s. 6 d.
- -
51.157. Length 1.50 m, Price 1 S. 9 d.
These flcxibles can be thoroughly recommended on account of the convonioncc of manipulation.
Thicker leads quoted for on application.
.~>l.ir>s. 1 Set Flexible Leads, comprising two lengths each of 0.0 and l.l' in and 1.5, 2.5 and
ti
si|.inni cross-section - - 12 lengths in all
:<l.ir><i. Copper Wire, double silk covered.

Diameter nnii O.L' 0.3
Price per kg 16 s. 12 s.
Approx. length per kg 3600 1600
No. 51 180. Wires, Hoses, Taps. 207
5115451157. 1: 1.
51175. 1:3. 51176. 1:3. 51177. 1:4. 51178. 1:4. 51180. 1:5.
51.160. --The
preceding, 0.9 mm
thick, covered with gutta-percha and double cotton s. d
taped, for electric bell and telephone leads Price per 10 m 0. 0. 8
51.161. --The preceding, bare, 1 mm thick, or thicker per kg 0. 3.6

51.162. 0.5kg of various copper wire, bare and insulated
51.163. Rubber Tubing, of black rubber
Aperture
No.
Thickness of Wall
2/0
2
0.6
1/0
mm3
0.6
4
0.8
5
1.2
23468 1.4
6 8
1.7
100 grammes
10
2.0
0.
0.
4.
3. 6
Price per metre 3d. 4 d. 7 d. 1 s. 2 d. 1 s. 5 d. 1 s. 8 d. 3s.
51.165. Rubber Tubing, grey, 9 mm aperture, 2 mm thickness of wall, for connecting up gas
burners per metre 0. 1.
51.166. Metal Tubing, flexible, for gas and water leads, 8 mm internal diameter, 1.25 m long,
with rubber annex pieces 0. 3. 6
51.167. Bent Brass Tube for water-lead hose (M. T., p. 4) 0. 2.
51.168. T-Piece for hose unions, of brass, three-way piece (W. D., Fig. 42 [38]) 0. 1.
51.169. --The preceding, of glass 0. 0. 3
51.170. +-Piece for hose connections, of brass (W. D., Fig. 42 [38]) 0. 1. 6
51.171. --The preceding, of glass 0. 0. 4
51.172. Cock, of pressed glass, outlet about 2 mm in width 0. 1.
51.173. Three-way Cock, of glass, with 3 union pipes, with rectangular bore 0. 2.
51.174. Brass Tap, with 2 undulated hose pieces 0. 2. 6
51.175. Glass Cock with detachable hose-piece, Figure 0. 8.

This tap is used in particular at times when a tap with a long tube would be a hindrance when
not in use. The elbow, which is well ground on, and prevents kinking of the tubing on the tap, can
be turned outwards or sideways as desired and the tubing does not require to be taken off the elbow
after use. This operation can also be carried out with the utmost ease after removing the elbow from
the tap.
51.176. Double Regulating Cock, Figure (W. D., Fig. 457 [429]), for rapidly turning down
a jet without its being extinguished 0. 9.
51.177. Precision Gass Stopcock, Figure, for securing fine regulation of the gas current 0.10.
micrometer screw, for very high pressure 3. 0.

51.178. Precision Stopcock, Figure, with . .
51.179. Precision Water Tap, conical tap (M. 0. 15.

T., p. 107)
51.180. Gas Regulator (Reichert's), Figure, of glass, for low temperatures, with adjusting
screw . 0. 6. 6
Cl. 5526,
S.'i. 32i>fi. 3S5H. :,|
Xn. ,M 1^1
208 Apparatus, Supplies and Materials for General Use.
51184. 1:4. 51193. 1:3. 51195. 1 : 6.
51209. 1:6.
51181. 1 2. 51199. 1:4. 51201. 1:4. 51203. 1 -. 3.
51,181. Thermo-Regulator, Figure, for accurately adjusting within limits of 20'

to 50 C. .
The thermo-regulator
is inserted in the apparatus to be heated in such wise that the portion
filled with mercury can be completely heated. For transit purposes the tube D is packed by itself,
IN place being taken by a wire with bungs of cotton wool, which closes the ascension pipe at a. Before
UMIJJ; the regulator this wire is removed and the tube D inserted in such manner that the scale etched
on the tube, and corresponding to the desired temperature, is covered by the surface of the metal
cap d.
r>1.182. - - The preceding, for + 20 100 C
r.1,183.
-- idem, for + 20 150 C
51,184. Bunsen Burner, F i g u r e, can be screwed apart for demonstration purposes, simple
pattern, without tap but having air regulator
51,186. -The preceding, but with tap and air regulator
51. is?. Accessories for the previous gas burners Nos. 51,184 and 51,186, consisting of
Nos. 51,18851,192
51,188. Chimney, with holder
r, 1. 1 v.i. Annex for carrying small dishes, watch glasses, <)<
."i 1. 1 '.tit. Sieve Annex, with numerous apertures above
r>l.] !H. Crown Piece, with lateral openings, for obtaining a corona of flame
.~i I. l!i:>. Slit Annex, for obtaining a wide flame
."> 1.1 '.::. Iserlohn Burner (.Mast.- burner), with double draught channel. Figure
51, 104. Rabs Burner, with .'< movable tubes
r
Cl. -
>4K(l, 11B, f>481, 5478,
:,177.
r
1719, 5482, .
>483, 112.
No. :>iL'ii;. Thermo-Regulators, Burners. 209
51206. 1 : 6. 51207. 1:7. 51214. 1:10.
51.195. Universal Gas Burner (Teclu's), with burner pipe 145 in length and 16 mm mm s. d.
internal diameter, without the heads A, B, C, D, E 0. 4. 6

By the method of air regulation peculiar to this type of burner it can be used either as a Bunsen
or an automatic blast burner and it is very efficient in its action. The attachments illustrated above
are very suitable for use with this type of burner: (A) mushroom-shaped burner for obtaining a regular
distribution of the heat in evaporation work; (B) cross-slot attachment for boiling liquids in beakers, etc. :
gives a large amount of heat over a small space; (C) slot attachment for heating and bending tubes,
ment, and (E) chimney with holder.

Attachment
--The
A
0.1.7 0. 1. 7 0. 1.
BCD
being of great utility for this work. In addition, the following can be supplied: (D) star-shaped attach-
(star-shaped)
0. 3. 6
E (Chimney with holder)
0. 1.
mm and 10 mm
51.196. preceding, smaller, with burner pipe 100 in length
internal diameter 0. 3. 6
Attachement A B C D (star-shaped) E (Chimney with holder)
0. 0. 11 0. 1. 3 0. 0. 7 0. 2. 0. 0. 10
5J,197. Gas Burner (Finkener's), with simultaneous regulation for gas and air, single-jet type 0. 3.
51.198. -- idem, with star, chimney and air neck 0. 4.
51.199. --idem, as No. 51,197, triple-jet, Figure, with separate regulation for each jet 0. 9.
51. 200. --idem, six-jet .0.16.0

51,20.1.
--
with 4 burners arranged in a row, with attachments for wide jets
idem, . . 0.17.
j
51.202. Gas Burner (Dierbach's), horizontal burner with universal adjustment (M. T., p. 10) 0. 10.
!
51.203. Blast Burner for gas, Figure 0. 10.
51.204.
- -
idem, with sextuple flame, giving a large and very hot flame, Figure.. 0. 14.
51.205. Blast Burner for gas, Figure 0. 16.
51.206. Blast Burner for spirit, Figure, for the blowing table 0.10.0
51.207. Berzelius Lamp for spirit, with burner stand, Figure 0.12.0
Spirit Lamps, constructed of glass, with tube for filling and ground-in stopper, Fig. 51,209.
List No. 51,208 51,209 51,210 51,211
Capacity 50 100 150 200 ccm
Price 0. 0. 8 0. 0. 9 0. 0. 11 0. 1. 1
51.212. Spirit Lamp, of sheet brass, 75 ccm capacity, with wick-regulator 0. 1. 6
51.213.
- -
idem, capacity 150 ccm 0. 2.
51.214. Spirit Bunsen Burner, Figure, somewhat like a small Bunsen gas burner, with
x
reservoir, l / 2 m metal hose and tripod j
0. 14.
Bunsen Burner, larger, corresponding to 4 Bunsen gas burners, with tripod . 1. 2. 6

51,216. Spirit j
Cl. 3601, 3230,

5205, 130, 5450. 14
No.
Apparatus, Supplies and Materials for General Use.
.-ililT
210
51228. 51234. 1:4. 51252.
s. d.
51,217. Star Burner Attachment and Wide Burner Attachment for No. 51,216 0. 1. -'
51.220. Tripod, iron, 100 mm internal diameter of ring 0. 1. (>
120 1. 1
51.221. --idem, 0.
4
51.222. --idem, 150 0. 1.
51.223. Tripod with 2 inset plates, Figure, of iron 0. 3.
Wire Triangle 0. 0. 1
51.224.
51.225.
- -
idem, covered with small clay tube:
50 60 80 mm side of triangle
1
0. 0. 2 0. 0. 2 /, 0. 0. 3
51.226. Wire Net, of i r o n, 10 cm square 0. 0. 4
51.227. Wire Net, of b r a s s, 10 cm square 0. d. 5
51.228. Wire Nets,of asbestos wire, Figure, cap-shaped, for Bunsen stands; can also be
used as supports for beakers, flasks, evaporation dishes, crucibles, etc. which are being
heated. One Set comprising one each of 7, 10 and 13 cm diameter 0. 3.
51.229. Air Bath, Figure, Ostwald's, with lighting flames, round type 0. .">.<)
51.230. -- i d e m
(Muck's), rectangular, with arrangement for heating.
Figure, . . . 1. !.">. o
51.231. Asbestos Dishes (M. T., p. 11): Diameter cm 10 15 20

0. 0. 4 0. 0. 7 0. 0. 10
51.232. Water Bath, of copper, with insertion rings, Figure, 20 cm diameter 0. s. o
51.233. - -
The
preceding, with constant level, Figure, with insertion rings, plate
with small apertures, cover and tripod 0. is. o
51.234. Evaporation Apparatus (Water Bath) (Loessner's), without rings, with iris adjustment,
constant level, on tripod 1. 1.
Electrically-heated Water Baths, Figure, hemispherical,constructed of copper, with

copper inset rings, for 100 110 volts, 4 7amperes.
List No. 51,235 51,236 51,237 51,238
Diameter cm 12 15 18 '22
Price 1. 18. 2. 4. 2. 10. 2. 16.
The water baths can be supplied for either direct or alternating current voltages up to 250 volts.
\Vlion ordering, kindly mention voltage available.
Coolers (Liebig's), Fig. 51,241, with funnel pipe and brass jacket, on massive stand.
List No. 51,239 51,240 51,241
Size cm 40 55 65
Price 0. 15. 0. 16. 0. 18.
Cl. 324'.. M? '. I 4.'..
:!L'4I!, I IT 136.
No. 51 -..
Supplies for Warming and Cooling. Gasometers. 211
51250. 1:10. 51 243. 1 : 8. 51256. 1:12. 51257. 1:10.
Sand Baths, Figure

51,243, comprising: sheet metal dish with iron stand, heating coil ad- S. d.
justable vertically, with gas lead from both sides for obtaining an even flame.
List No. 51,242 51,243
Size of Dish cm 25 x 15 40 x 20
Price 0. 12. 0. 14.
Calibrated Glass Bells for measuring gas volumes (M. T., Fig. 5), with clamping rings.
List No. 51,244 51,245 51,246 51,247 51,248 51,249
Capacity ccm 100 250 500 1000 1500 2000
Size about cm 220x30 280x40 360x55 450x65 470x75 500x80
Price 0. 6. 0. 7. 0. 8. 0. 10. 0. 12. 0. 14.
51.250. Mercury Gasometer, Figure, with double-wall mercury chamber, collecting bell,
oak stand, without mercury, for 250 ccm :
1. 0.
51.251. --idem, for 1000 ccm 1. 5.
51.252. Gasometer (Pepys'), of stout lacquered sheet zinc, Figure, 30 1 capacity . . . 2. 5.
51.253. - - i d e m, 50 1 capacity 3. 0.
51.254. --idem, of copper, 30 1

capacity, cf. F i
g. 51,252 3. 0.
51.255. --idem, 50 1
capacity 4. 0.
51.256. Gasometer, of glass (Mitscherlich'p), Figure, with metal fittings, 15 1 capacity 2. 0.
51.257. --idem, 25 1
capacity, Figure 3. 0.
Cl. 5484, 148,

146, 3229,
3911, 3250, 137, 138. 14*
212 Apparatus, Supplies and Materials for General Use.
51258. 1:11. 51261. 1:12. 51266. 1:13.
Bell Gasometer, 51,258 and 51,261, with loading and unloading weight, the larger
Figs. s. d.
apparatus having guide rods for the weight.

Capacity litres 50 75 100 150
Of stout, List No. 51,258
i
51,259 51,260 51,261
lacquered sheet zinc \ Price 3.10.0 4.10.0 6.0.0 8.0.0
O, 9 heet
51,262 51,263 51,264 51,265
copper 5.0.0 6.0.0 11.10.0
{ 7.10.0
51.266. Universal Gasometer (Dr. Eichhorn's), Figure, for 120 1 volume, with water gauge,
pressure gauge and regulating cock (Ztschr. f. d. phys. u. chem. U., 4, 1891, p. 325) 6.10.0
The regulating cock has a pointer moving over a large dial, and has 5 positions marked in plain
lettering on same: (a) water and gas cut off, (b) water on, gas off, (c) water on, gas out, (d) water off,
gas out or in, (c) water out, gas in. The apparatus can be used (1) as an ordinary gasometer, ('2) as
a blower, (3) as a force pump, (4) as a suction apparatus and exhaust pump.
51.267. Rubber Bag, well constructed, Figure, for 110 1 oxygen, with tap and clamping
board 5. 0.0
51.268. --idem, for 165 1 content ti. 5. ii
- -
51.269. idem, for 210 1 content 7. 10.
."
1.270. --idem, for 280 1 content. . . . 10. 0.
51,271. Aspirator, of sheet zinc, with brass stopcock, with 1 vessel. Figure, 51 content 0. U.
.".1.272. -- idem, 10 1 content 1. 0.0
r. 1.2 73.Aspirator, with 2 vessels, Figure, 51 content 0.18.0
- -
r.l 274. <1
em, 10 1 content
i 1. 4.0
.">1,27.">. Aspirator, with 2 vessels rotary on a horizontal nxis, Figure, 5 1 content . . 2.10.0
51, 276. idem, 10 1 content 3. 5.0
l.
5891,
:iL'!7. 140, 141.
No. .M2S.1. Gasometers, Aspirators, Gas- and Steam-Generating Apparatus. 213
51279. 1:7. 51285. 1:5 51 278. 1 : 7.
51,277. Aspirator, Figure, with 2 glass flasks, tubulated, adjustable vertically, and of s. d.
12 1 content, with oak stand and braided rubber hose 6. 5.
51,278. Gas Generating Apparatus (v. Babo's), Figure, with rubber stoppers and gas
conduit pipes 0. 18.
51,279. Gas Generating Apparatus (Bardeleben's), Figure, consisting of a wide glass

cylinder with bell and inset vessel, brass cover, stiiffing box and glass stopcock . . 1. 5.
Gas Generating Apparatus (Kipp's), F i

g. 51,282, with rubber stoppers.
List No. 51,280 51,281 51,282 51,283
Capacity ccm 250 500 1000 2000
Price 0. 7. 6 0. 9. 0. 10. 0. 13.
51,284. Hydrogen Generating Apparatus, Figure, consisting of 2 tubulated flasks, rubber

hose, drying bulb with stopcock and adjustable stage. The apparatus can be, connected
direct to the burner . 0. 18.
51,285. Weinhold's Steam Boiler (W. D., Fig. 49 [45]), of sheet brass, Figure 0.16.
(1. 1 12. 11:1, in, il'.uo,
5875,
133, 149, 132, 3612.
214 Apparatus, Supplies and Materials for General Use. NO.
51287. 1:4.
51293. 1 : 5. 51288. 1 = 7.
51294. 1:3. 51297. 1:3. 51301. 1:5.
d
51,286. American Freezer, Figure, for making pure ice or preserving ice by a cold mixture; s- -
freezes 1V 2 1 water in 15 minutes, or ice-cream in 8 to 12 minutes. Convenient

to handle. With description and recipes 0. 12. o
The refrigerating medium in these machines is a mixture of ice or snow with salt.
."1,287. Ice Chopper for above, Figure 0. 1. 6
51,288. Ice Machine (Liebreich's), Figure, for making small quantities of absolutely pure
ice; produces 500 600 g ice in 15 minutes 1. 16.
The action of this machine is based on the fact thatammonium nitrate takes up heat on going
into solution so that the temperature falls about 25 C. The ammonium nitrate necessary for making
the ice is recovered by evaporation of the solution, and the ice is therefore very conveniently and
cheaply produced. Ice and salt are not used for freezing in this machine.
."l.L'89. --The preceding, for making from 1000 to 1200 g in 15 minutes .... 3. o. o
51,290. Enamelled kettle for the volatilisation of the ammonium nitrate 0. !. o
."I. _'!!. Vessel for preserving the ice blocks 0. 11. >
51,292. Mercury, chemically pure and dry Per kg 0. s. u
">l.i'!t:5. Mercury Board, can be used as a tray, 60x40 cm

Figure, 0. 7.
The mercury tray intended for taking the apparatus involving the use of mercury so that
is
any mercury which may be spilled is collected on the board. The board is of oak, and has a raised
edge 30 mmin height and, in one of the corners, an escape hole.
ci. l HI. is:..

1.V.. 1SI1.
Ice Machines, Supplies for Work with Mercury, other Supplies. 215
51 305. 1 : 2.
51306. 1:3. 51307. 1:3.
51302. 1:6.
51308. 1 : 3.
51 303. 1 : 5. 51304. 1:6. 51312. 1 : 4.
d.
51.294. Mercury Box, Figure, with outlet and screwed cap, constructed
s.
of box-wood,
with ivory top; capacity 1 kg 0. 5.
This box is very convenient to handle, the mercury being kept perfectly clean.
0. 6.
51.295. --idem, 3 kg capacity
0.
51.296. --idem, 5 kg capacity 7.
51.297. Mercury Box, of box-wood, with steel tap, 1 kg capacity, Figure 0. 9.
0. 10.
0. 12.
51.300. Mercury Dropping Vessel (Grimsehl's), Figure (Ztschr. f. d. phys. u. chem. U.,
18, 1905, p. 34). Price without mercury 0. 1. 2
51.301. Mercury Capillary Dropper, Figure, for pouring out small quantities of mercury . 0. 4.
0. 10.
51.302. Mercury Trap, Figure
This device is let into the floor and takes up the small quantities of mercury which have spurted
and collected together. The mercury can easily be removed from the trap by means of the inner chamber.
51.303. Mercury Tongs, Figure, for picking up drops of mercury 0. 2. 6
0. 12.
51.304. Mercury Press, Figure, for purifying mercury
51.305. Tweezers, German silver, double, with platinum tips, Figure . . 0. 6.0
51.306. Tweezers, brass, simple pattern, with bent ivory tips, Figure 0. 1. 6
51.307. Tweezers of brass, simple pattern, Figure 0. 0. 6
51.308. Crucible Tongs, iron, lacquered, Figure 0. 0.10

51.309. --idem, of iron, polished 0. 1.
51.310. --idem, of German silver 0. 2.
Spatulas, double-sided, of polished steel, Fig. 51,312.

List No. 51,311 51,312 51,313 51,314
Length cm 12 21 29 40
Price 0. 0. 4 0. 0. 6 0. 0. 10 0. 1. 6
Spoons, with spatulated handle, of nickel.

List No. 51,315 51,316 51,317
Length cm 12 15 21
Price 0. 1. 2 0. 1. 6 0. 2. 6
51.318. Spoon, of glass, 20 cm long 0. 0. 8

0. 0. 4
51.319. Phosphorus Spoons, of iron
51.320. Mortar, cast iron, with pestle, hollowed out, 15 cm diameter, 15 cm high .... 0. 15.
51.321. Agate Mortar, with pestle, external diameter 65 mm 0. 8.
51.322. Pulverising Dishes with spout and mortar.

70 100 130 mm diameter
0. 0. 10 0. 1. 1 0. 1. 6
Cl. 173,
3252. 4019, 171, 17:">,
5466, 3253, 4020, 15s. :;;;:,.

216' Apparatus, Supplies and Materials for General Use. NIL
r
51323. 1:5.
51325. 1:5.
51334. 1:2. 51326. 1:3. 51328. 1:3. 51331. 1:5. 51332. 1:5.
51.323. Blowpipe, collapsible, the tip having platinum discs, Figure 0.
51.324.
-- idem, collapsible, simpler, withoiit platinum tip 0.
51.325. idem, not collapsible, Figure 0.
51.326. Cork Borers, brass, 12 in set, Figure 0.
51.327. Cork Borers, brass, 9 in set 0.
51.328. Cork Borers, brass, 6 in set, Figure 0.
51.329. Cork Borers, steel, 6 in set 0.
51.330. Cork Borers, steel, 12 in set . 0.
51.331. Boring Apparatus, Figure, for firmly screwing to table, with 8 nickelled
Cork
steel piercers of 4 to 15 diameter mm
51.332. --idem, Figure, with srcew clamps for screwing on to edge of table ....
51.333. --idem, larger pattern, with screw clamp and with 15 nickelled steel piercers of
4 to 25 mm
diameter
51.334. Sharpener for cork borers, Figure
51.335. Cork Press, Figure
51.336. Rubber Stoppers, various sizes, 16 in set
No. 1 2
Diameter above 10
Diameter below 7
Length 20
Each */z d-
No. 9
Diameter above 28
Diameter below 22
l-etigth 28
Each 6 d.
For piercing the stopj
51.337. 100 Corks of various sizes, conical (M. T., p. 10)

51.338. 10 Glass Stoppers for closing hose and holes in corks (M. T., p. 10)
51.339. Pneumatic Trough for Water, of stout double glass, in brass frame, with adjustable
bridge of plate glass. Trough is 320 long, 160 mm
wide, H.T) high mm mm ....
-">!.:; Hi. Glass
Receiving Cylinder, Figure, tall form, with unpolished edge, without
-toppers and migniduated Per set of 5
Si/e mm 150x40 175x50 200x60 250x60 300 -SO
0.0.6 0.0.8 0.1.0 0.1.1 0.1.10
M..U1. Measuring Cylinders with lip Figure. I'er set of 10
10 25 50 100 150 200 L'.M) 500 1000 L'OOOrrm capaeit y
6d. 9d. lid. Is. 3d. Is. 6d. Is. 7d. Is. lOd. 2s. 3d. 4s. Id. 7s. Id.
Cl. 1 :..
N.I. :.l 358. Cork Borers, Stoppers, Hollow Ware. 217
51351.
51335. 1:5.
51348. 1:2.
51340. 51345. 1 ; 6. 51341. 51 342. 51354. 1:2.
51 342. Measuring Glasses with stopper (mixing cylinders), Figure, graduated in com. s- d.
Per set of 6 0. 16. 1

100 150 200 250 500 1000 ccm capacity
0.1.7 0.1.11 0.2.1 0.2.5 0.3.0 0.5.1
51.343. Preparation Cylinders, with wide stopper ground in (M. T., p. 11). Price per set of 3 0. 2. 6
100 200 400 ccm capacity
0. 0. 7 0. 0. 10 0. 1 1
51.344. Base for measuring glasses (Eebenstorff's), (Chemiker-Ztg., 1908, p. 177) ..... 0. 3. 6
51.345. Beakers, Figure.

6 8 10 12 in set
0.1.1 0.1.9 0.2.7 0.3.10
51.346. Test Glasses. One set of 30, 3 sorts 0. 1. 7
100 150 180 mm high
16 16 20 mm diameter
0. 0. 5 0. 0. 6 0. 0. 8 per set of 10.
51.347. Test Glass Stand, unpolished, for 12 glasses, with rods for drying the glasses ... 0. 1. 6
0. 0. 7
51.348. Test Glass Holders, Figure, of nickelled clockspring steel
51.349. Watch Glasses. Per set of 4 0. 1. 3

50 65 80 100 mm diameter
0. 0. 2V 2 0.0.3 0. 0. 3V 2 0.0.6 each.
Watch Glass Clamps, 1 set, suitable for preceding glasses, of sheet brass 0. 1. 3
51.350.
51.351. Crystallising Dishes, Figure, set of 10, 40 160 mm diameter, with lip .... 0. 6.
with lip, Figure. Set of 6 0. 2.

51.352. Porcelain Dishes,
60 70 85 100 125 155 mm diameter
j
0. 0. 2V 2 0. 0. 2V 2 0.0.3 0. 0. 3V 2 0. 0. 5V 0.0.7 each.

0. 4. 4
51.353. Porcelain Crucibles, with lids. Price per set of 8
3 10 18 30 135 220 ccm capacity
65 90
2 1 /,d. 2V,d. 3d. 4d. 9 d. Is. 6 d. each.
6 d. 7 d.
51.354. Holder for Porcelain Dishes and Crucibles, Figure, of nickelled clock spring steel 0. 0. 7
51.355. Iron Dish, flat, 80 diameter mm 0. 0. 4
51.356.
- -
idem, 100 diameter mm 0. 0. 5
51.357. -- idem, 150 diameter mm 0. 0. 7
Deep dishes are charged for at double the above prices.
51.358. Carbon Crucible, 50 high, 45 mm diameter mm . 0. 1.
tl. oJWi. 17(1,

179, 181,
5467, 162, 164, 5465, 180.
218 Apparatus, Supplies and Materials for General Use. No. 51 3.V.I
51 367. 1 : 4. 51374. 1:7. 51 386.
s. d.
51.359. Magnesite Crucible, 50 high, 45 mm mm diameter (I. 1.
51.360. Carbon Dish, 65 diameter mm 0. 1.
51.361.
- -
idem, 100 diameter mm 0. 1.
51.362. Graphite Dish, 150 diameter mm 0. 3. 6

51.363. 10 Smelting Crucibles, of fire clay, 5 different sizes 0. 3. 6
51.364. Hessian Crucibles, of clay, triangular, without lids. Per set of 3, 8 cm high . . . 0. 0. 3
51.365. idem, set of 5, 12 cm high 0. 0. 6
51.366. --idem, set of 7, 17 cm high 0. 1.0
Platinum Crucibles in any desired size and shape. Prices vary according to weight and
prevailing price of platinum.
51 367. Stand for Platinum Crucibles and Dishes, Figure, for setting on Bunsen burners,
adjustable for different sizes, with vertical adjustment and wind screen. Price, subject
to alteration without notice 0. 15.
This stand is for placing on the burner, and with its aid platinum dishes and crucibles of any
size can be firmly fixed without any bulging. The crucibles are hung in platinum slings and they
do not, therefore, even at high temperatures, come into contact with other metals.
51.368. Powder Jars with wide neck, Figure, with grips or flat stoppers of white glass.
Price, unfilled:
150 200 300 400 500 1000 ccm capacity
(a) With Grips 3 s. 3 d. 3
. . . s. 9 d. 5s. 5 s. 6 d. 6 s.6 d. 10 s. per 10
(b) With Flat Stoppers 4s. 4 s. 7 d. 6s. 7s. 8s. 12 s. per 10.
If without stoppers the bottles cost about half the price charged for these with squat stoppers.
51.369. Bottles for Liquids, with narrow necks, with tall or squat stoppers, F i
g u r e, of
white glass. Price, empty:
150 200 300 400 500 1000 ccm capacity
(a) With drips 2s. 3d. 2s. 6
. . . d. 3s. 6 d. 4s. 4s. 10 d. 7 s. 6 d. per 10
(b) With Flat Stoppers 3s. 3 s. 6 d. 4 s. 6 d. 5 s. 3 d. 6 s. 4 d. 9 s. 6 d. per 10
51.370. Bottles for Reagents or Powders, with enamel labels, burnt-in black or etched inscrip-
tions, with tall or squat stoppers and wide or narrow openings, Figure.
100 150 200 300 400 500 1000 grams capacity
Is. Id. Is. 2V 2 Is. 3V 2 d. d. 1 s. 5 d. Is. 6Vs& Is. 8'., d. 2 s. 1 d. each.
Prices 10% extra for brown or blue glass bottles.
( ]. Hi:.. 1W.
.M'.i-
No. :.! 399. Hollow Ware, Drying Apparatus. 219
51378. 51379. 51382. 51389. 51 397. 1 : 5.
Reagent Stands with Reagent Bottles, F i

g. 51,374, of polished wood.
List No. 51,371 51,372 51,373 51,374
Number of bottles without contents . 24 32 40 48
(a) In Alder Wood 2. 15. 3. 5. 3. 15. 4. 5.
(b) If in or Oak
Mahogany 0. 7. ....
0. 8. 0. 9. 0. 10. extra.
These stands have two drawers and 3 5 stages for taking the bottles of 33 125 com volume,
the bottles having well fitting squat stoppers. The inscription is burnt into these bottles. List of
to instructions supplied by clients.
inscriptions on application the inscriptions are also prepared according
;
51.375. Rotary Reagent Stand for placing on the table. Price, without bottles
51.376. Boiling Flasks, long-necked, or with short necks strengthened at the upper edge
100 150 200 250 400 500 1000 ccm capacity
IV, d. I1 /, d. 2 1 /, 2 1 /, d. 3d. 3V2 d. 5 1 /, d. (Per set of 7)
51.377. idem, of refractory glass.
4 d. 5 d. 7 d. 8d. Is. (Per set of 5)
Measuring Flasks, with a mark on neck.
25 50 100 250 500 1000 ccm capacity.
51.378. Without stoppers, Figure:
5 d. 4 d. 4 1 /, d. 7V, d. 10 d. 1 s. 2 d.
51.379. With stoppers, Figure:

7 d. 6V 2 d. 7 d. 11 d. 1 s. 2 d. 1 s. 6 d.
Woulff Flasks. Content 1 1.5 2 3 litres

51.380.
- - with 2 or 3 necks 1 s. 6 d. Is. lid. 2 s. 6 d. 3 s. 3 d.
- - with 2 or 3 necks and tube at bottom 2s. 2 s. 5 d. 3 s. 3 d. 4s. .
51.381.
51.382. Retorts, without tube, Figure. Per set of 6
100 150 250 400 500 1000 ccm capacity
Each 2 1 /, d. 3d. 4 d. 5 d. 5 1 /, d. 7d.
51.383.
- -
idem, with tubulure and ground-in stopper. Per set of 6
100 150 250 400 500 1000 ccm capacity
Each 5V 2 d. 6 d. 7V, 9d. 10 d. 1 s. 1 d.
Retorts of refractory glass. 50 100 250 500 ccm
51.384.
- - without tube 3d. 4cl. 6 a. 10 d. Per set (4)
tube, without stopper ... 6d. 9d. 1 s. 1 d. Per set (4)
- - with 5 d.
51.385.
Receivers for Retorts. 100 250 500 ccm
51.386.
- - without tube.
Figure 3d. 4d. 6d. Per set (3)
51.387.
- - with 1 tube 4 d. 6d. 7d. Per set (3)
51.388.
- - with 1 tube and
ground-in stopper ... 5 d. 7d. 10 d. Per set (3)
Oxygen Generating Retorts (see Nos. 50,960 and 50.961, p. 174)
51.389. Funnels. Figure.
50 ) 120
IV. d.
51.390. Funnel Tubes (Safety Tubes).
200 3
IV, d. 21
51.391. Safety Funnel with bulb
- - with 2 bulbs
51.392. idem,
51.393. Separating Funnels, round, with stoppers.
V 4 V 2
1 \itre capacity
3s. 3 s. 6 d. 4 s. 3 d. each.
51.394. Drying Cylinder (calcium chloride cylinder), as suggested by Fresenius, 250 high mm
51.395. Drying Tubes (Schmitz') (Fresenius, Ztschr. f. analytische Chemie, 23, 1884, p. 515)
51.396. Desiccators (Fresenius'), with ground-on cap and glass triangle, 80 mm diameter,
cf. Fig. 51,397
51.397.
- -
idem, 100 mm diameter, Figure
51.398.
- - idem. Scheibler's, with glass lid, 120 diameter, with porcelain inset mm .
51.399.
- - i d e m, for evacuating, with glass stopcock, glass plate and porcelain inset . .
220 Apparatus, Supplies and Materials for General Use. N.I. :.i Km
51412. 1 : 2. 51416. 1 : 10. 51414.

s. d.
51.400. Spray Flask (Fresenius') (W. D., p. 60 [54]) . . . . 0. 0. 7
51.401. Hardened Filters Per set of 50 0. 3. 5

Diameter cm 4 7 2411 15
Per 10 2V d. 3V 2 d. 7 d.
1 s. 6 d. 10 d.
51.402. Filter Paper, medium thick, absolutely white and specially pure; also suitable for
liquids difficult of filtration, 58 X 58 cm size. Price per 100 sheets 0. 13.
51.403. Gas Washing Flasks, Bunsen's. 250 500 ccm capacity

0.0.10 0.1.0
51.404. Combustion Boat, porcelain, 40x5 mm 0. 0. 4
mm
idem, larger, 62 x 7
123
- - 0. 5
51.405. 0.
51.406. Bent Tubing Per kg 0. 2.
51.407. Spherical Tubes (M. T., p. 11), with bulbs . . Per set (3) 0. 2.
th
6 d. 7V 2 d. lOVs d-
51.408. Combustion Tubes, thickness of wall, abt. Vio of the diameter, in lengths of 1 in. Per kg 0. 3. 3
51.409. U-Tubes (desiccating tubes) (M. T., p. 11). Per set of 3 0. 1. 1
80 130 180 length of limb mm
0.0.3 0.0.4 0.0.6
51.410. Stirring Rod, glass, 25 cm long, with round-fused ends 0. 0. 3
51.411. Overflow Pipettes Per set (9) 0. 5. 6
1 2 5 1020 25 50 100 200 ccm
4 d. 4 d. 4 1 /,. d. 5 d. 6 d. 7 1 /. d. 9 d. 11 d. 1 s. 3 d.
51.412. Pipette, for small vessels and tubes the lower orifice of which is plunged in a liquid 0. 3.
Burettes (Mohr's). 25 50 75 100 ccm capacity

V:in V. Vs V ccm graduation
51,413. with pinch cock, see Fig. 51,119, p. 203.
1 s. 7 d. 2 s. 6 d. 3s. 4 s. 6 d.
51.414. -- with glass stopcock, Figure. 2 s. 8 d. 3 s. 6 d. 4 s. 4 d. 4 s. 8 d.
51.415. Floater for above '0. 0. 8
51.416. Demonstration Gas Burette (Bunte's), modified by Bischbieth, Figure (Ztschr. f.
d. phys. u. chem. U. 15, 1902, p. 74), 100 ccm
capacity, graduated in fifths of a ccm,
with stand. The burette tube has at the top a branch tap, emission tube and funnel
for filling, with a simple tap at the bottom. The rubber tubing can be closed by a
pinch cock. With platinum wires 1. 4.
51.417. Eudiometer (Bunsen's). 300 500 800 graduation mm

0.3.2 0.4.0 0.5.6
.1 ,418. 6 Brushes for reagent glasses, beakers, boiling flasks and measuring glasses (M. T., p. 11) 0. 9.
51.419. Picein (Walter's): a cement for assembling physical apparatus; quite insoluble in water
and alcohol (Drudes Annalen d. Phys., Vol. 18, 1905, p. 860). Per 200 grams . . . 0. 2.
51.420. Various Materials for general purposes (as suggested by F. C. G. Miillci see No. 50,254, ;
p. 40) c. 10. o
51.421. Glass Pearls, abt. 3 1 mm
diameter (M. T., p. 11) Per kg o. r>. o
51.422. Glass Plates, round, ground matt one side, 50 210 nun diameter (M. T., p 10).
Per set of 7 0. 3. 3
(
I.
No. 51436. Measurement of Lengths. 221
51423. 1:4.
51426. 1: 10. 51425. 1 : 12.
51433. 1 : 9.
Measurement of Lengths, Angles, Surfaces and Volumes,

Dividing Engines, Slide Rules.
* 51,423. Linear Vernier Model for the projection lantern, with forward vernier, demonstrating
s. d.
barometer reading, Figure

(Ztschr. f. d. phys. u. chem. U. 16, 1903, p. 345), with
screw adjustment 1. 5.
* 51,424. - - idem, with rear vernier 1.5.0

51.425. Linear Vernier Model with forward and rear verniers, Figure, of wood (Fr. phys.
Techn. I, 2, Fig. 2025) 1. 0.
51.426. Linear Vernier Model, 1.10 m

long, Figure, graduations on lacquered paper,
with 1 cursor containing on one side the rear and on the other side the forward vernier
(W. & E. phys. Prakt., Figs. 7 and 8. - - Gan.-Man. Fig. 54 and 55. - - Gan.-Eein.
Fig. 1) 0. 10.
51.427.
- -
idem, \\einhold's, larger, 2.30 m long, with 2 cursors of 1 m length for the
forward and rear vernier 1. 0.
51.428. Millimeter Rule, of thin cardboard, 500 mm long, with horizontal or vertical figures,
or without figures (M. T., p. 24) Per 10 0. 3.
51.429. --idem, of wood, 500 mm long Each 0. 2.
51.430. Millimetre-Scale, paper pasted on wood, can be used vertically and horizontally,
50 cm long, with stand (M. T., p. 24) 0. 18.
51.431. Prismatic Rule, box-wood, 30 cm long 0. 1. 3
51.432. Metre Rule, wood, both sides graduated in millimetres, with brass bound ends . . 0. 3.
51.433. Metre Rule, wood, Figure, with coloured graduations in centimetres (W. D.,
Fig 46 [42]) 0. 2.
51.434. Ruler, white with black graduations

"
and large figures, with 4 graduations: metres,
0. 15.
yards, "saschen", "arschin"
51.435. Mirror Rule for the class, 5 cm wide, 60 cm long, graduated direct on the glass in
millimetres (Hahn, Handbuch fur physik. Schiilerubungen, p. 38. - - Kaiser, Physika-
lische Schiileriibungen, p. 19), with wood stand 0. 16.
51.436.
-- idem, simple pattern, graduations oh paper, with wood stand ....... 0. 10.
'
# Can be used with the Projection Apparatus. ',;_ r,- :i7
414.'
222 Measurement of Lengths, Angles, etc. No. 51437
51443. 1:11. 51457. 1:2. 51444. 1:10.
51.437. Steel Ruler, 1 m

long (Standard Rule), divided on one side in millimetres and on the s. d.
other in English inches, in case 0.
51.438. Dividing Ruler, with steel angle rail, for rapidly dividing a length into 10 equal parts
(Fr. phys. Techn., Vol. I, 2, Fig. 2018) 0. 10.
51.439. Standard Metre, divided in centimetres, of hard brass, 20 mm wide and 10 mm thick,
the first decimetre being divided into millimetres. In box 4. 0.
. 1 ,440. Standard Metre, of brass. Figure, with millimetre graduation on silver, for reading
in conjunction with a telescope or microscope, extremely accurate, serving as comparing
measure in physical experiments. In case 7. 0.
51.441. Standard Metre (H-section), with millimetre graduation on silver, the first and last
millimetres being divided in tenths, lines of extreme fineness on the neutral stratum,
for reading with the telescope or microscope 10. 0.
This rule is massively constructed of a suitable metal alloy and is in accordance with the con-
ditions laid down by the Bureau International for the standardisation of this class of rule. Standar-
disation fee is quoted on application.
51.442. Carrier for suspending rules Nos. 51,439 51,441 vertically, with clamps and ad-
justing device for the rule 6. 5.
51.443. Demonstration Rule, Figure, 1.15 m long, arranged for horizontal and vertical
measurements 1. 5.
51.444. Vertical Rule, Figure, 1.2 m

long, on iron stand, with cursor and pointer, with
coloured centimetre graduation visible from a distance, and millimetre graduation, for
conveniently measuring heights (W. D., Fig. 47 [43]) 0. 18.
."1,445. -- idem, with graduation 2 metres long 1. 4.

- - idem
."1,446. (Bebenstorff's), 1 m
long, with cursor, number scale and coloured scale
in the German military colours (Ztschr. f. d. phys. u. chem. II. 18, 1905, p. 346). . 0. 18.
In the coloured graduation from cm to cm gray signifies and 5, white 1 and 6, red 2 and 7,
yellow 3 and 8, blue 4 and 9.
51,447. Simple Vertical Rule (Grimsehl's), millimetre rule on iron base with brass cursor . 0. 12.
(l.
:,:IT.\ :i-j, 416,
413, 448K, 154.

No. 51402. Measurement of Lengths. 223
51459. 1:1.
51458. 1 : 1.
51460. 1:2. 51461. 1 : 5.
51,448. Vertical Rule for placing on wall (as suggested by F. C. G. Miiller: M. T., p. 23), with s. d.
projecting end plate and spring cursor 15.
51.450. Measuring Staff, 3 m in length (M. T., p. 24) 7.
51.451. Tape Measure, 20 m long, with metre and inch graduation, in leather case, with
turn-in handle 12.
51.452. Indicator Cylinder (Miiller's), Figure, for the magnification of small variations in
length (M. T., Fig. 4) 5.
51.453. Curvimeter, Figure, for measuring the length of curved lines, with 3 graduations
for scales of 1 :
15,000, 1 :
25,000 and 1 :
35,000, or with other graduations if required 8.
51.454. Pedometer, watch form, nickelled, counting to 100,000 steps, with press-knob zero
fly-back action, with 3 dials . 15.
51.455. Wire Gauge, Figure, for wires from 0.01 to 1 mm diameter 5.
51.456. Hole Gauge for cylindrical holes from 1 15 mm 2. 6
51.457. Vernier Caliper, Figure, with vernier for the millimetre graduation, also with
graduations in Khenish, English and Paris inches 0. 7. 6
51.458. Micrometer Gauge (Palmer's) (M. P. I, Fig. 52) for measuring thickness of wires,
sheets and the like, Figure, 15 mm
span, measuring accurately to 0.01 mm, with
feeler screw which secures that always just the same pressure may be exerted. In case 12.
51.459.
- - without feeler screw, nickelled, Figure, span 10 mm, reading 0.05
idem, mm 5. 6
51.460. Small Spherometer, Figure, with magnifying glass and black plate glass . . . 10.
51.461. Spherometer (W. & E. phys. Prakt. Fig. 17), Figure, with micrometer screw of
0.5 mm
pitch and head circle graduated in 500 parts, accurately measuring to 0.001 mm,
with plate, glass base 5.
- - with feeler lever 15.

51.462. idem,
CI. WH, 419,
46H2, 5391.
224 Measurement of Lengths, Angles, etc. No. M 1113
51464. 1:11. 51466. 1 : 10.
51463. 1:12. 51468. 1:8.
s. d.
51.463. Cathetometer, Figure, large, constant apparatus, telescope being regulated by
micrometer screw, graduation on silver, capable of reading by vernier to Vso"1 mm ;
in-
strument rotating on journals 65. 0.
Differences of height up to 1 m can be measured with the instrument; the prismatic, rotary
pillar has micrometer adjustment and 2 levels at right angles. A Fraunhofer magnifying glass with
micrometer and movable thread is fitted to the telescope slider for accurately reading the fine gradua-
tion. The reading telescope has a level fitted.
51.464. Cathetometer, Figure, first-class construction, with massive prismatic pillar capable
of rotation about its axis 22. 0.
The pillar of the instrument is 1.15 m high, is divided in millimetres, and is provided with a
vernier for Vo th mm. The telescope of 27 mm aperture, adjustable to any angle, and carrying a level,
permits of making readings at distances of from 0.6 to 10 m.
1.165. -- idem, telescope with micrometer screw and adjustable thread
."> 25. 0.
51,466. Cathetometer, Figure, telescope of 25 mm aperture, with rack and pinion focus-
sing; on steel pillar, and adjustable, for reading barometers and air thermometers, scale
and \cinici <>l dcrmaa silver 7. 0.
Tin- instrument has a range of 90 cm the vernier gives direct 0. 1 mm. The.instrument is main-
;
tained perpendicular by plummets. The telescope is provided with an inclinable level and has a fine
screw-adjustment.
1
i I. IL :!. :iL's;,
rjl. IL'.Y
No. :.I ITL'.
Comparators, Reading Telescopes, Screw Micrometers. 225
51469. 51470. 1 : 7.
51 472 A. 1:5. 51 472 B. 1:5. 51471. 1 : 4.
s. d.
51.467. Comparator ior rules divided with lines 47.10.0

Lengths up to 1 m can be compared with this instrument. It consists of an iron bench, and two
reading microscopes can be moved along the entire length of this bench, being also capable of lateral
motion. The microscopes have micrometer eyepieces with movable line. If desired, Fraunhofer micro-
meters are supplied at a proportionate increase in price.
51.468. Apparatus for Calibrating and Testing Thermometers (Comparator), Figure. . . 17.10.0
Two micrometrically adjustable reading microscopes can be moved along the length of a hori-
zontal rail.
51.469. Reading Telescope, on stand, Figure, rack and pinion focussing; objective 25 mm
aperture and 200 mm focal length, with two magnifications Xl2 and x24, astronomical;
quite free from iron parts so as to enable galvanometrical and magnetometrical read-
ings to be made with it 5.10.0
51.470. Simple Reading Telescope, Figure, with objective 24 in diameter mm and cross
lines, with horizontal and vertical rotation, and vertical adjustment 1.15.0
51.471. Screw Micrometer (Fraunhofer's), Figure, measuring accurately 30 to Vsoo mm mm ;
with low power microscope capable of rotation about a horizontal axis and sliding on a
pillar, so that measurements can be made in any direction 14. 0.0
51.472. Screw Micrometer (Fraunhofer's), Figs. A

and B, on a folding stand, for vertical
and horizontal observations; can also be used as a microscope with detachable and
sliding microscope table. Price, in box 37.10.0
d. iL'i;. .v,;iL'.
Reading Telescopes for Mirror-Reading see section: "Electricity". 42!), 4:ili, 4L-X.
15
226 Measuring of Lengths, Angles, etc. No. :.l 473
;!;-i!il^
51473. 1 : 5.
51474. 1:4.
51475. 1 : 3. 51 476 A. 1:2. 51 476 B, 51477. 1:2.
s. (1.
51.1 7.'5. Large Reading Microscope, on stand with levelling screws, with 3 oculars, Figure 19. 0.
The microscope can be raised and lowered, rotated and moved by means of fine adjustment <
The measuring graduations within the limits of about 20 mm are effected by a horizontal and vertical
motion. The objective is illuminated by a glass plate inclined at an angle of 45.
51,474. Reading Microscope, Figure, with extension and rack work for adjusting at
heights of from .34(1 to 550 mm, draw tube and prism are graduated; vernier residing
t<> mm; rotary in horizontal plane; with level, double objective for the 3 widths
'
of objective 50, 90 and 480 mm, eyepiece and micrometer eyepiece 6. 0.
5l.l 75. Reading Microscope for Thermometer Degrees, as suggested by Nansen, Figure :?. o. o
The microscope holder has a sprint; damping arrangement for fixinj; thermometers of various
thicknesses. The microscope has a micrometer eyepiece and a magnification of x 12.
cl. 1:11. 4:.

i::i, IX,,
No. M IM. Reading Microscopes, Longitudinal Dividing Engines. 227
51478. 1:8.
51 480. 1 : 7.
51.476. Reading Device for Thermometers, Burettes, etc. from 6 20 mm

diameter, Figs. A s. d.
and B, comprising stand with locking frame, mirror inserted for mirror readings
and glow lamp inserted for illuminating 0.13.0
The glow lamp is supplied for 2, 4 or 6 volts; if voltage is not stated when ordering, a 4 volt
lamp is supplied.
51.477. Magnifying Glass with Cross Wires, for high magnification (cf. Fig. 51,476 B) . . 0. 8.0
51.478. Dividing Engine for lengths to 500 mm, carefully and massively constructed,
Figure, with screw of 1 mm pitch, arrangement on the drawing mechanism for
drawing the 5
ths
and 10 lh8 longer, and with reading microscope 25. 0.0
The illustration does not now represent the drawing mechanism, this having been considerably
improved.
51.479.
- -
idem, without reading microscope 22.10.0
51.480. Longitudinal Dividing Engine for fine and coarse graduation, Figure, for lengths
to 350 mm, total length of machine 850 mm (Fr. phys. Techn. I, 1, Fig. 1963) 32.10.0 . .
mm
This machine divides accurately to l / la> by means of a dividing wheel and a screw with milli-
metre pitch; the drawing mechanism rests firmly on the powerful cheeks and permits of the mechanical
drawing of graduations of various lengths. For reading microscope for this engine, see No. 51,481.
51.481. Reading Microscope with adjustable wires, on a slider fitting the machine . Each 7.10.0
Cl. 3773,
3623. 15"
228 Measuring of Lengths, Angles, etc. N". M HL'
51482. 1:10. 51484. 1 : 6.
51485. 1:6. 51 486. 1 : 4,5.
51.482. Dividing Engine, Figure, 0.75 m

long, of polished oak, with adjustable, iron arm
s. d.
and female scale holder, iron runner, rails which can be conveniently adjusted as regards
height and sliders which may be firmly clamped, unscrewable bow, device for ob-
taining graduations of varying lengths, and with sliding drawing mechanism having
triple arresting device (Fr. phys. Techn. I, 1, Fig. 1959), without female scale . . . 8. 5.0
This machine is specially intended for glass and thermometer scales, also for simple scales on
wood, glass or opal glass.
51.483. Female Scale for above, with 360 divisions of each 2 mm on one and 180 divisions
of each 4 mm on the other side 1. 4.0
51.484. Circle Dividing Engine, Figure, with plate 250 mm diameter, graduated on silver
in V* and graduations for the verniers, tangential screw and dividing drum, with Micro-
scope (Chwolson, Physik, Vol. I, Fig. 131) 40. 0.0
51,485. Circle Dividing Engine, Figure, similar in construction to preceding, with plate
300 mmdiameter, graduated on brass, without microscope (Fr. phys. Techn. I, 1, '
Fig. 1970) 48.15.0

The circle is divided into 720 parts and has a tangent screw; one complete turn of this cone
sponds to '/t*-
f>l.4X(. Microscope for Circle Dividing Machine Xo. 51,485, Figure

X.i. :.l I'.i-J.
Dividing Engines, Circular Vernier Models, Goniometers. 229
51488. 1:3. 51490. 1 : 7. 51492. 2: 3. 51493. 2: 3.
51491. 1 : 8. 51 498. 1 : 6.
51.490. Circular Vernier Model, small pattern, sextant of 40 cm radius, giving 2 minutes d.
of arc, Figure 1. 0.
51.491. Wood Protractor on Stand, Figure

(F. C. G. Miiller's), with plumb bob (M. T.,
Figs. 6, 14, 15), for angular measurements in mechanics and optics 2. 10.
51.492. Plumb Bob, brass, Figure, with steel tip. for unscrewing 0. 2. 6
51.493. Plumb Bob with Spirit Level, Figure, of brass, with steel tip for unscrewing . 0. 5.
51.494. Simple Gnomon, for class use (Noack, Leitfaden, Fig. 6) 0. 13. 6
1
51.495. Surface Goniometer with fixed limbs, circle divided in /2 degrees, surface bar of steel,
radius of circle 70 mm, in case, Figure 1. 16.
51.496.
-- idem, smaller, Figure, with detachable limbs, in case, 80 mm diameter . 1.12.0
a. - - d e m, limbs undetachable 1. 0.
51,496 i i
51.497. Field Goniometer (Ohmann's), for class use (Ztschr. f. d. phys. u. chem. U., 5, 1892,
p. 166) 1. 15.
51.498. Plumb Line, Figure 0. 5.
For spirit and other Levels, see section

Equilibrium, etc. of Liquids.
"
f S
i.!^ uti.
^''' ^"'
49fl -
230 Measuring of Lengths, Angles, etc. No. 51
51504. 1 : 10.
51.499. Model of a Mirror Reading (W. & E. phys. Prakt., Fig. 19), Figure, for sub-
jective and objective reading
51.500. Planimeter (Amsler's), Figure, arranged for a vernier unit between 8 and 10 sq. mm,
as desired, with check ruler, in case .
The pole arm is 19 cm long, the travelling rod 16 cm.

51.501.
- -
idem, with micrometer and vernier on the travelling rod, for any values of the
vernier unit from 2 to 10 sq. mm, adjusted for 4 vernier units
- - with correction for parallel position of the and
51.502. idem, roller axis of the travel-
ling rod
51.503. Slide Rule with Instructions (M. T., p. 24), 27 cm long, readings accurate to 3 places
This slide rule
arranged for rapidly multiplying, dividing, squaring, cubing, obtaining square
is
and cube roots, for obtaining logarithms and numbers, sines and tangents. The slide rule is also used
as a scale for drawings and as a longitudinal rule for lengths up to 50 om.
1
51.504. Demonstration Slide Rule, Figure, 2 / 2 m long, without stand, graduations 8 times
as long as in rule No. 51,503
.".1.505. -- with stand (Fr. phys. Techn., Vol. I, 2, Fig. 2030)
idem,
51.506. Litre Vessel, cube shape, with black and white graduations in square centimetres
(M. T., p. 23; also see Meyer, Naturlehre, p. 7). The wood cube No. 51,514 fits this
51.507. -- idem, cylindrical (Meyer, Naturlehre, p. 7)
515 50S. Hollow Cube of thick sheet brass, volume 1 litre exactly, with white and black gra-
duation in square centimetres on two sides
51.50!) Hollow Cube of 3 cm length of side (W. D., p. 60 [54]), for reducing the gramme
weight to the metric measure
51.510. Vessel of 1 Cubic Inch, of brass, cuneiform
51.511. Metal Cube with Hollow Cube of 1 cm side, fitting one in the other
51.512. --idem, 2 cm side
51.513. --idem, 3 cm side
5J,514. Cubic Decimetre of Wood, cube shape, fitting the litre vessel No. 51,500 (Meyer,
Naturlehre, p. 7)
ci. HI;.
i:i!i.
5602.
No. .MM' I. Balances and Sets of Weights. Analytical Balances. 231
C5
51519. 1:6. 51523. 1:6.
Balances and Sets of Weights.
Analytical Balance, with short-arm triangular Aluminium Beam and rapid-oscillation pointer,
s. d.
o
F i g. 51,519, best nickelled brass pillar, with arrestment for beam and suspension,
also a device for shifting the rider when the case is closed. The balance has agate bearings,
gilt or platinised pans; the case is of dull, nickelled
brass and glass, the balance rests
I on a dead-black plate glass base with levelling screws; it has 4 aluminium and glass
sliding windows. A level is given in. The balance is very compact and very neat in
appearance.
List No. 51,517 51,518 51,519 51,520
To carry 5 50 200 1000 grams
Sensitivity 0.02 0.05 0.1 0.2 mg
Price with gilt steel axes 10. 10. 13. 0. 16. 0. 19. 10.
Prices without Rider Weights. For Sets of Weights and Rider Weights, see pp. 241243.
Without the lateral Rider Arrangement the prices of these balances are reduced by 5 s.
Analytical Balance with short-arm triangular Aluminium Beam and rapid-oscillation pointer,
Figure, with round, best nickelled brass pillar, with arrestment for the beam and
suspensions, also arrangement for shifting the rider without opening the case. The balance
has agate bearings, gilt or platinised pans, finely polished case of mahogany and glass,
with 2 glass sliding windows and 2 side doors; resting on dead-black plate glass base
with levelling screws and a level.
List No. 51,521 51,522 51,523 51,524
Sensitivity 0.02 0,05 0.1 0.2 mg
Price with gilt steel axes 7. 15. 9. 0. 11. 0. 13. 5.
Prices without Rider Weights. For Sets of Weights and Rider Weights, see pp. 241243.
If without the lateral Rider Arrangement these balances are reduced in price by 5 s.
Cl. :>4'JG, 5494.

232 Balances and Sets of Weights. No. r>i :.L'.-.
SO
51526. 1:6 51 528. 1 : 3.

o
Analytical Balance, with half-length Beam, Figure

51,526, with adjustable end knife
|
edges; round, best lacquered or nickelled brass pillar; with arrestment for the beam C
and suspensions, by means of which the centre and end knife edges can be removed
from the bearing; and with arrangement for shifting the rider and brush device for
I
arresting the pans. The bearings are of agate. The glass case has a walnut frame, a I
sliding door in front balanced by counterpoises, and side doors. The case is finely a
polished, the cornices and projecting ornamental parts being polished black. Levelling
screws and level are supplied.
List No. 51,525 51,526 51,527
To carry 50 200 1000 grams p
Sensitivity 0.1 0.1 0.5 mg
Price, lacquered or nickelled, with gilt axes 8. 15. 10. 10. 12.0.0
Prices without rider weights. For Sets of Weights, see pp. 241243.
The rider glide of this balance is arranged for the entire length of the beam. The two halves of
the beam are divided into 100 parts. The balance is so adjusted that its sensitivity when the maximum
load is applied is the same as when unloaded.
These balances are also, if desired, supplied with mahogany cases instead of walnut cases, with-
out extra price.
x
r>l,.~iL'S.Micro-Balance, Nernst's, Figure, a torsion balance for weights to 2 milligrams
and for an accuracy of Vioon to ''/, milligrams. (Berichte der Deutschen Chemischen
Gesellschaft, 36, No. 10, and 38, No. 1. - - Fr. physik. Techn. I, 2, Fig. 2251) . . . 5. 10.
Short Triangular Beam Analytical Balance, of lacquered brass,

quick-swinging type, with
pointer suitable for rapid work; plane, firm centre bearing. The pans are nickelled.
The balance has a black enamelled iron pillar with plummet. The arrestment of the
compensating suspenders moves in the are of oscillation of the beam. The rider scale
rests iii the axial plane and is divided on both sides into 100
parts. The glass case, resting
on a dead-black plate glass slab, is fitted with
levelling screws, and has a sliding
\\iudo\v in front balanced by
counterpoises. Figure 51,529.
List No. 51,529 51,530
To carry 200 50(1 grains
Sensitivity 0.2 0.5 mg
Price 6. 10. 7.10.0
Cl. 549:i.
No. :,1 .VI!).
Analytical Balances. Precision Balances. 233
51 529. 1 : 6. 51533 (51537), 51578. 1 : 8.
Analytical Balance, also suitable for specific gravity determinations, cf. Fig. 51,533, with s. d.
agate planes, gilt or platinised pans, mahogany-glass case with 4 sliding windows, alu-
minium beam with quick-swing pointer, on white or black plate glass base, with rider
slide when case is closed. The following are not included in the price: the stage, the
glass vessel, the Eeimann thermometer flask, the rider weights and counterpoises.
List No.
234 Balances and Sets of Weights. No. M .Mil
51539. 1:6.
51548. 1 : 8. 51556. 1 : 8.
51,541
200
4. 0.0
4. 10.
No. 51566. Precision Balances. Chemico-Technical Balances. 235
51 560 a. 1:8. 51 561 b. 1:8.
Precision Balances for technical purposes, Figs. 51 552 and 51,556. s. d.
On Iron Base On Wood Box In Glass Case with

levelling screws, plum-
met and rider slide
To carry grams 100 250 100 250 100 250
Sensitivity mg 2 3 2 3 1 2
51,552 51,553 51,554 51,555 51,556 51,557
Lacked { 1. 18. 2. 2. 2. 0. 2. 5. 3. 15. 4. 5.
The balances in glass cases can, if desired, be adjusted to be still more sensitive than here mentioned.
Chemico-Technical Precision Balance, with aluminium beam and brass stand (short beam),
with arrestments for beam and suspenders, brush pan-stops, Figs. 51,560 a and 51,561 b.
List No. 51,558 51,559 51,560 51,561
Sensitivity 1 2 4 10 mg
(a) In Glass Case 2. 12. 3. 5. 4. 0. 5. 5.
(b) On Box, with moulding 2. 5. 2. 12.

. 3. 5. 4. 2.
(c) On Board 1. 16. 2. 4. 2. 15. 3. 10.
Precision Balance for heavier Loads, with short aluminium beam, arrestments for beam and
suspender, brush pan-stops.
List No. 51,562 51,563 51,564 51,565 51,566
To carry 1 3 5 10 20 kg
Sensitivity 10 20 30 50 100 mg
(a) In Glass Case .... 4. 15. 6. 0. 7. 10. 9. 10. 12. 0.
(b) On Box, with cornice . 3. 12. 4. 6. 5. 10. 7. 5. 9. 10.
(c) On Board 3. 0. 3. 12. 4. 15. 6. 5. 8. 5.
Cl. 32(14 I.
5498, D499.
236 Balances and Sets of Weights. No. r.l :.i;7
51 569. 1 : 8.
51567. 1 : 6.
51573. 1 : 9. 51 571. 1 : 5.
51.567. Precision Tare Balance (Mach's), for rapid work, Figure, nickelled, with side s. d.
doors, on black plate glass base (Chemiker-Ztg. 25, 1901, p. 1139, and 27, 1903, p. 249) 6. 0.
The balance is set up so that the balance-beam is turned towards the viewer, the one weighing
pan being accessible for both hands. This balance is very convenient, especially when a large series
of samples of the same weight have to be weighed and the
weight has not often to be changed. If
specially desired, the balance is also supplied set up in the ordinary manner.
51.568. Set of Weights for above, 500, 200, 100, 50 grams, for placing inside the case . . 0. 18.
Mohr's Pillar Tare Balance, 51,569, beam working in the pillar, sensitivity 50 ing
Figure
for 1 kg load; constructed entirely of brass.
List No. 51,569 51,570
To carry 0.5 1
(a) Without box or base .... 1. 5. 1. 8.
(b) Polished box with 2 drawers 0. 11. 0. 11.
Tare Balance, Figure 51,571, with pierced gunmetal beam, prismatic axes, resting on
3 agate planes, with elegant brass pillar; the pointer
plays on an ivory scale.
List No. 51,571 51,572
To carry 1 3 kg
On Mahogany box with 2 drawers 2. 5. 2. 10.
51,573. Single Arm Balance \\Vst pual's) for specific gravity determinations,
(
Figure,
with adjustable, lacquered brass stand 1. 6.
With this balance the specific gravity of liquids can be determined to 4 \>\: s of .l.vimaK The
followiii}: pertain l> the balance: 1 glassplummet, 1 Koimann flask with tlicnimmrtrr stopper,
1 counterpoise, 8 ridcre, 1 pair forceps and 2 platinum wires, cii.se and instructions.
M, 3>7.
7:,7. L>li.
No. .-,l.-iso. Precision Balances, Tare Balances, Specific Gravity Balances. 237
51 576. 1 : 6. 51 578. 1 : 5.
51.574. Specific Gravity Balance (Mohr's), Figure, with arrestable stand and pans for s. d.
ordinary weighings, of lacquered brass with accessories illustrated 1.15.

This balarce serves for determining the specific gravity of liquids and solids to 4 decimal places.
All parts can be placed in the lock-up drawer of the support.
- - with nickelled brass parts 1.18.

51.575. idem,
51.576. Specific Gravity Balance, Figure, both arms graduated, with adjustable stand
with support and with spring arrestment, the latter being actuated by lightly pressing
the knob a. The central bearing and arrestment are of agate. The lock-up drawer
is arranged to take the entire balance and the lower base has levelling screws.
Price, including accessories illustrated, balance lacquered 2. 0.
- - the balance nickelled

51.577. idem, 2. 3.
51.578. Outfit for Specific Gravity Determinations on liquids and solids, for analytical balances
Nos. 51,519, 51,520 and 51,523, 51,524, Figure, owing to the height of the pans this
outfit can only be used for the balances to carry 200 grams and 1 kg 0. 9.
1 Reimann Thermometer, 15 g weight, displaces 5 g distilled water at 15 C. (4 S. 3d.), 1 ad-
justable stage for the glass jar (M. T., p. 103 [3 S.]), 1 counterpoise each of 10 and 5 grams each 6 d.
(1 S.), 1
glass plummet (9 d.).
51.579. Hydrometer (Eeimann's), Figs. A and B, for determining the specific gravity of
liquids, with a 1-gram patent body and a pan for use as substitution balance, resting
in polished box, with 2 glass jars 1.10.
5.1 ,580. --idem, in glass case 2. 5.
Cl. 200, 198, 199,

5497, ;,4'.IL'.
238 Balances and Sets of Weights.
k- Jf cm:
51 586. 1 : 10. 51 588. 1 : 51 589. 1 : 8.
Hydrostatic Balance, Figure 51,582. s. d.
List No. 51,581 51,588 51,583

Tocarry 1 2 5 kg
Sensitivity 10 20 50 mg
Price 3. 10. 4. 0. 5. 0.
Gunmetal Beam working on brass pillar, with beam arrestment, on mahogany board with two
long and one short brass pans and adjustable plate stand. Axes working on stones.
Hydrostatic Balance, sufficient where demands are not great, Fig. 51,586.
List No. 51,584 51,585 51,586 51,587
To carry 100 250 500 1000 grams
Price 0. 13. 6 0. 14. 6 0. 17. 1. 0.
51.588. Hydrostatic Balance, to carry 250 grams, Figure, with beam adjustable in an
up-and-down direction, 2 pans with long stirrup and 1 pan with short stirrup, brass
body, jar and plummet (for explaining the Archimedian principle) and with set of
weights from 1 mg to 200 grams. The balance indicates 5 mg !
1. 10.
- -
51.589. idem, without above-named accessories, Figure, with 3 pans 1. 0.
: l .590. Demonstration and Hydrostatic Balance, Figure, with 2 weights of 200 g and
1 weight of 100 g, also 2 long and 2 short pans 6. 10.
The balance is 60 cm high, fitted with rigid pillar and is very sensitive for its size, The de-
flections are large and can be read from a distance.
The balance permits of explaining: distribution of the lever shifting of centre of gravity
-
im-rea.se and decrease of sensitivity on lengthening and shortening the lever results of placing the
suspension axes above or below the central axis testing the balance for proportionality adjustim:
the inequality of arms correct weighing with an unequal arm balance determining the error of
the lever use of balance for determining the specific gravity of solids and liquids.
The balance can in addition be used as a tare balance for loads to 1 kg.
51.591. 1 Case iii which to lay and despatch the balance No. 51,590 1. 5.
.M.592. Arrangement for Hydrostatic Tests, Figure, for raising and lowering the glass
i li;mir;ill\ 1. (I. (I
:.l.."!i.'>. Large Demonstration and Hydrostatic Balance, Figure 10. 0.

The balance l.Kl in high ami lias a sensitivity of 10
in
mg
on each side \\ith its maximum load
nf .">
kg. thus rendering it suitable for use a.s an ordinary balance.
The balance lias excentric arrestment. rider scale and two pairs of pans of different sizes; as
the suspenders are exactly equal the smaller pans can be suspended instead nf (he larger.
ci.
i. 3793.
No. M .v.i I.
Demonstration and Hydrostatic Balances. 239
51590. 1:5. 51593. 1:11.
51 592. 1 : 5. 51594. 1
The beam has two pointers and the pillar two scales, one of each of these facing the lecturer s. d.
and the other the audience.
The following instructive experiments, amongst others, may be carried out with the balance:
(a) Equal and unequal arm balance with long pointer;
(b) Weighing with the rider scale;
(c) Equal arm balance with short pointer;
(d) Lengthening a lever arm;
(e) Shifting the line of axis above or below;
(f) Hydrostatic balance.
Outfit for Hydrostatic Experiments : see No. 51,592.
51,594. New Demonstration Balance (Buff's) (W. & E. phys. Prakt., Fig. 29) ...... 2. 10.
(1) The knife edges carrying the pans can be brought into the same plane as the central knife
edge or be removed from the latter. (2) The centre of gravity of the beam can be displaced, and (3) the
length of the arms of the beam can be varied.
ci. ;..>.').!. 211.

210, 3791.
240 Balances and Sets of Weights.
51597 51600. 1:10.
51 595. 1 : 10.
51.595. Chemical and Hydrostatic Demonstration Balance (Sehwedoff's), Figure (Ztschr.

f. d. phys. 11. chem. U. 16, 1903, p. 321. - Frick, Phys. Techn. II, 1, Fig. 2128)
-
. .
In order to obviate the tedious selection of suitable small weights and the inconvenience of laying
the rider on the beam during the lecture, and to facilitate reading from a distance, a spring pointer
is firmly fixed to the beam of the balance, this pointer being arranged in front of a semi-circular
scale. In using the balance the weight to be determined is first obtained roughly by adding tare
weights to the pan; the fine pointer is then guided by hand over the scale, this motion causing a small
knob, fixed in front, to move in the corresponding direction until the beam has reached the state of
equilibrium. In this position the fine pointer shows the fractions. With the aid of the arresting fork
it is possible to support both arms of the beam at once or each separately.
51.596. Weighing Pan for hydrostatic experiments, for preceding balance
51.597. Demonstration Indicating Balance (Hartl's), Figure, suitable for a large number
of experiments in statics, mechanics and electro-mechanics (Ztschr. f. d. phys. u. chem.
U. 10, p. 127), for 250 and 500 grams range, without accessories
The balance is used for measurement experiments as to adhesion and cohesion of liquids, fric-
tion, stability, magnetic attraction, etc.; also for demonstrating Archimedes' principle and for deter-
mining the density of solids and liquids.
51.598. Simple Accessories for Balance No. 51.597: 1 adhesion plate (glass), 1 tribometer with
slider, 1 glass jar and 1 glass flask, connected together by rubber tubing; 1 plunger,
1 holder with wire clamp, 1 massive iron
cylinder (see Figure)
51.599. Further Accessories for Balance No. 51,597: 1 floater, 1 glass jar with syphon, 1 beaker,
1 hollow cylinder, 1 solid cylinder, 1 sheet metal
plate, 1 wood block (cf. Ztschr. f. d.
phys. u. chem. I". 8, p. 207); in addition, for experiments on the dependence of wind
pressure on the shape of the impressed surface and the dependence of the resistance
a liquid against the motion of a solid in the same on the
<>!'
velocity and the shape
of the impact surface of the body: 1 hollow brass
cone, 1 hollow brass sphere. 1 base
support. There is also eomprised in the accessories 1 measuring flask (pycnometer)
for determining the density of pulverulent bodies (see Figure) 3. 0.
51.600. Solenoid on Stand, with soft iron core and hollow iron cylinder, for experiments on
magnetic attraction. Accessory for balance No. 51,597, see. Figure
.M.iiOl. Plane Plate and Hollow Hemisphere for impact experiments with liquids (M. 1.,
71 and p. 109) .............................. 0. 3.
.........
'
."il.tio:;. Table for Hydrostatic Balances, \\itli serpentine base, Figure JO. 3.
Cl. 3285, 3266.

No. liL'7
Balances and Weights.
.',1
241
51614. 1:10.
51 619. ; S. 51 609. 1 : 8. 51 624. 3 : 10.
51.604. Large Letter and Sorting Balance (German "rapid" balance), Figure, accurately
divided to 500 grams, compactly constructed for demonstrations and weighings in
rapid succession (Fr. phys. Techn., I, 2, Fig. 2122)
The manufacture of indicating balances is carried on as a spesial branch of our trade, and we supply
these as per special price list, especially for the textile and paper trades.
51.605. Bridge Balance for 200 kg carrying capacity (M. T., p. 28), of oak
Hand Balance with round horn pans, Figure 51,609.
List No. 51,606 51,607 51,608 51,609 51,610
Length of beam cm 10 13 17 22
To carry 5 20 50 200
Price 0. 2. 6. 0. 3. 3 0. 4. 0. 5.
242 Balances and Sets of Weights. No. 51
51635. 3:10.
51 631. 3 : 10. 51636 odor 51645. 1:3.
51 637. 1 : 3. 51638. 1:4.
Analytical Weights, somewhat simpler construction, accurately calibrated, Figure 51,631. s. d.
List No. 51,628 51,629 51,630 51,631 51,632 51,633 51,634

From 1 gr to 10 20 50 100 200 500 1000 gr
Comprising together 31 51 101 201 501 1001 2001 gr
Price per Set 0. 12. 0. 13. 6
0. 15. 0. 17. 1. 3. 1. 9. 1. 18.
The weights, together with brass forceps are contained in a polished mahogany case; in sizes
to 1 gram they are made of brass with heads screwed in and are gilt; the fractional grammes, of
German silver, are under glass.
We also supply sets Nos. 51,628 51,634 at the same price platinised instead of gilt.
51.635. Analytical Fractional Gram Weights of Platinum and Aluminium, from 1 gram to
500 mg, 0.1 and 0.01 mg in duplicate, 0.001 mg in triplicate, in elegant mahogany
case with stout glass lid, each lying in separate frame, Figure, 0.5 to 0.01 mg
weights of platinum, 5, 2 and 1 mg of aluminium. Per set 0.11.
51.636. Analytical Fractional Gram Weights, of platinum, from 1 mg to 500 mg, in mahogany
case with lid and forceps, Figure 0. 12. o
51.637. Rider Weights, Figure, of aluminium, in dull walnut case with forceps, con-
taining 9 aluminium riders from 10 to 500 mg, for the rider slides of the analytical
balances Nos. 51,517 51,527, 51,52951,534. The rider weights can easily be recog-
nised one from the other by the number of the rings; the 10 and 100 mg have each
one ring underneath on each side; the 20 and 200 mg have each two rings, and the
50 and 500 mg each 5 rings. Case with 9 riders and forceps 0. 5. 6
51,638. Precision Weights, Check Standards, with No. I extra fine calibration, in polished
mahogany case with forceps, Figure, going from 1 mg to 200 grams, all "twos"
in duplicate, containing altogether 611 The gram weights are gilt, and the
grams.
fractional grams arc of (lerinan 0.16.6
silver, under glass
Precision Weights, extra-fine calibration I, in polished pear-wood box with forceps, the
grains being o f phosphor bronze, the fractions of German silver, under glass, all the
"twos" being in duplicate. Figure 51,643.
List No. 51,639 51,640 51,641 51,642 51,643 51,644
1 mg to L'O 50 100 L'uo 500 1000 gr
Price per Set 0. 7. 0. 8. 6 0. 10. 0. 15. 6 1. 0. 1. 8.
Cl. 214, 215. 216,

5491, U'17.
Xo. 51667. Precision Weights. 243
51643. 1:4. 51 649. 3 : 10.
51655. 3:10. 51662. 3:10.
51 666. 1 : 4.
51,645. Precision Fractional Gram Weights, extra-fine calibration I, from Ifmg^to 500 grams; 8. d.
5, 2 and 1 mg of aluminium, the remainder of pure nickel, in mahogany case with

lid and forceps, Figure on p. 242 0. 5. 6
Precision Weights, with fine calibration II, Figure

51,649, in polished beech box, with
forceps, of nickelled brass, the fractions of German silver, under glass containing ;
100, 10, 2, 0.1, 0.01 g in duplicate; the 100 gram set has only one 100 gram weight.
List No. 51,646 51,647 51,648 51,649 51,650 51,651
10 mg to 20 50 100 200 500 1000 grams
Price per Set 0. 4. 6 0. 5. 0. 6. 0. 9. 0. 12. 0. 17.
Precision Weights, with fine calibration II, in polished beech block case, with forceps, of
brass, nickelled, the fractional grams of German silver, without glass. The
100, 10, 2, 0.1 grams are in duplicate. 51,655. Figure
List No. 51,652 51,653 51,654 51,655 51,656 51,657
100 mg to 20 50 100 200 500 1000 grams
Price per Set 0. 3. 6 0. 4. 6 0. 5. 6 0. 8. 0. 11. 6 6
0. 16.
Precision Weights, with No. Ill calibration, in polished beech block box, of nickelled brass,
the 100, 10 and 2 grams being in duplicate. 51,662. Figure
List No. 51,658 51,659 51,660 51,661 51,662 51,663
1 g to 20 50 100 200 500 1000 grams
Price per Set 0. 2. 6 0. 3. 0. 4. 0. 6. 0. 8. 6 0. 13.
Precision Weights, with No. Ill calibration, in sliding box with forceps, nickelled,
the "twos" being in duplicate, Figure 51,666.
List No. 51,664 51,665 51,666 51,667
1 mg to 1 2 5 10 grams
Price per Set 0. 2. 0. 2. 3 0. 2. 6 0. 2. 9
Cl. 218, 219,

220. 221,
222. 16*
244 Balances and Sets of Weights. Measurement of Time. No. :>i >;i;:i
51 670, 51 674. 1 : 4 51686. 1 : r,.
Precision Weights, with No. Ill calibration, in polished walnut case, upholstered plush, * <i.
with fork and forceps, nickelled, the "twos" being in duplicate, 51,670. Figure
List No. 51,669 51,670 51,671
1 gram to 2 5 10 kg
Price per Set 1. 17. 2. 17. 4. 12.
Precision Weights, same construction as Nos. 51,669 51,671, but of Phosphor Bronze, with
No. I extra-fine calibration, Figure
51,674.
List No. 51,673 51,674 51,675
1 gram to 2 5 10 kg
Price per Set 3. 3. 4. 13. 7. 10.
The analytical weights are most carefully calibrated, the single weights in each set being in per-
fect agreement among each other. They are adapted for the most accurate physical and chemisal
weighings.
The sets of weights with "Calibration I" have the accuracy required for Precision Check and
Ordinary Standards; they can replace the analytical weights in a number of cases.
The sets with "Calibration II" have the accuracy required for Commercial Check Standards and
Standards for ordinary use; they are employed for physical weighing operations.
The sets with "Calibration III" have the accuracy of the usual Precision and Medical Weights;
they are used in physical experiments in which absolute accuracy is not essential, e. g., hydrostatic
weighings.
Calibrated Iron Weights.

List No. 51,676 51,677 51,678 51,679 51,680 51,681 51,682 51,683 51,684
100 g 200 g 500 g 1 kg 2 kg 5 kg 10 kg 20 kg 50 kg
Each 0. 0. 7 0. 0. 8 0. 0. 9 0. 11. 0. 1.4 0. 2. 8 0. 4. 5 0. 9. 1. 0.
Measurement of Time.
;>l.;s<;. Sundial, simple form, Figure -'.
51 687. Simple Gnomon for school use (Noack, Leitfaden, Fig. 6), see No. 51,494 ....
51,688. Seconds Watch (Stop Watch or Chronoscope), Figure, keyless, "stop" and "zero"
1
positions, indicating /6 seconds
51,68!). Alarm Clock, simple (M. T., Fig. 27)

5 ],<>!<>. Alarm Clock with switch, Figure
This clock is employed for breaking an electric circuit automatically after a definite time has
lapsed. The apparatus can be used with advantage in charging accumulators and in physical and
chemical work, etc.
No. 51 697. Clocks and Pendulums. 245
51688. 1:1. 51 690. 1 : 3. 51 691. 1 : 4.
51 695. 1 : 5. 51 696. 1 : 5.
s. d.
51.691. Alarm Clock with switch (Gocht's), Figure, for accurate setting of the minutes 1. 5.
After reaching the minute for which it has been set this clock gives a ring of the bell, at the
same time putting out of circuit the current at its terminals.
51.692. Clock with 10-seconcl Signal, for Laboratories; the clock gives a soft signal every
10 seconds 1. 2.
51.693. --idem, with Half-minute Signal 1. 0.
51.694. --idem, with Minute Signal 0.17.6

51.695. Compensating Pendulum, on stand, Figure, with 9 brass and steel rods, swinging
to V 2 seconds i
2. 10.
51,695 a. - - i d e m, in simpler yet reliable form, with 2 zinc and 3 steel rods 1. 4.
51.696. Compensating Pendulum, Figure, on stand with levelling screws, swinging accu-
[
rately to / 2 second, with driving mechanism, escapement and electric contact device
1 i
5. 0.
>1,697.
-- idem, with dial 6. 5.
Cl. 466, 3130, 4983,

629, 630.
246 Measurement of Time. No. 51 OSS
51 698. 1 : 15. 51 701. 1 : 14. 51 703. 1 : 10.
51.698. Seconds Pendulum, in Cardanic suspension, with audible seconds beat, with firm iron
stand fitted with levelling screws, Figure (Fr. phys. Techn. I, 2, Fig. 3364) . .
The pendulum bob is adjustable, so that this pendulum is at the same time adapted for ex-
plaining the law of the pendulum.
- - with electric contact device for combining with the electric dial No. 51,705
51.699. idem,
51.700. Seconds Pendulum with wall bracket
51.701. Seconds Pendulum with audible beat, with dial and projecting pointer, on iron stand
with levelling screws, Figure
(Fr. phys. Techn. I, 2, Fig. 3372; Gan.-Man. Fig. 61) 6. 0.0
- -
51.702. idem, with electric Seconds Contact and an electric Dial 10. 5.
The set up at a spot in the lecture room which is easily visible by all.
dial is This arrange-
ment can be thoroughly recommended for larger lecture rooms. The dial can also be used as an electric
secondary clock with the aid of a clock having an electric contact.
51.703. Seconds Compensating Pendulum, Figure, with 5 brass and 4 steel rods, with
audible beat and electric seconds contact, on iron stand with levelling screws, and
electric dial
51.704. Clock with electric Minute Contact, Figure, for use in combination with an
electric Dial No. 51,705, neat construction; can also be used as a model of a clock
51.705. Electric Dial, Figures A and B

The used either with Clock No. 51,704 (having an electric minute contact) and
electric dial is
it then serves the function of a
secondary electric clock or with a seconds pendulum having an electric
;
contact, being then used as an electric seconds clock in fall experiments, etc.
51.706. Regulator Clock with seconds pendulum, case of oak, with compensating (or gridiron)
pendulum
(1. 4IH, -111:,, 3296.
No. :.l 717. Clocks. 247
51 705 A. 1:5. 51 705 B. 1:5. 51707. 1:8.
We supply School Clocks with automatic electric alarm, by which the commence-
s. d.
ment and finish of the studies are indicated with great punctuality; there are various
patterns, and prices are quoted on application.
51.707. Electric Standard Clock for Central Clock Systems, Figure, with seconds pendu-
lum, capable of simultaneously operating 40 secondary clocks; driven by weights; in
oak case 18.10.0
The clock is most
carefully constructed; the dial, of finely silvered brass, is accurately graduated.
This clock is also supplied in more richly designed cases in all kinds of woods, both as grandfather
clocks and brack 3t clocks. Further details on application. We shall be glad to supply detailed estimates
for the complete installation of clocks on receipt of precise plans.
51.708. Extra Price for a Nickel-steel Compensating Pendulum 15. 0.
51.709. Extra Price for a Mercury Compensating Pendulum . . . 10. 0.
51.710. Extra Price for a Metal Compensating Pendulum 7. 10.
51.711. Extra Price for a Seconds Contact, so as to be able to read seconds on the secondary clocks also . 4. 0.
51.712. Electric Standard Clock, as No. 51,707, with mechanical striking mechanism, by which the half and
whole hours can be struck on a bell at any other places 23.
3456
10.
Large Standard Clock for extensive Central Clock Systems, in elegant case.
List No. 51,713 51,714 51,715 51,716
With points of emission
Price 85. 0. 87. 10. 89. 0. 90. 0.
These clocks have a large and massively constructed mechanism and can also be supplied with
a mercury. or metal compensating pendulum (cf. No. 51,709 and 51,710). Up to 40 secondary clocks
can be connected up to each point of emission. The contacts are visible and easily accessible; they
can be cleaned without influencing the going of the clock.
51,717. Small Standard Clock with 8-day going and contact mechanism, for working small
electric clock systems 5. JO.
Cl. 5767,
2633, 2634, 2633.
248 Measurement of Time. Nil. .M 71
51727. 1:5. 51 728 B. 1:5. 51 728 A. 1 : 5.
Secondary Clock (sympathetic clock), in wood case with carved frame and shielding glass s. .1.
for protected rooms.

List No. 51,718 51,719 51,720 51,721 51,722 51 723 51,724
Diam. of dial cm 21 24 31 40 50 64 74
Price 3. 0. 3. 5. 4. 0. 5. 0. 7. 10. 10. 0. 11. 10
The dials have a white ground and black figures, also black pointers; other patterns can be sup-
plied at a proportionate increase in cost. The clocks are also supplied with carved frame at a corre-
sponding extra cost. If with double dial these clocks cost up to 31 cm diameter double, and the
larger ones 75 to 40% more.
Prices for secondary clocks in metal cases for unprotected rooms and for the open quoted on
application.
51.725. Metronome (Malzl's) with Bell, Figure, striking the 2 nd 3 rd 4 th and 6 th beats loud
,
0. 15.
51,725 a. - - i d e m, without bell 0.12.0

- -
51.726. idem, with bell and Electric Contact, Figure, for releasing the fall machine
and marking the closing of the circuit by striking a bell 1.10.0
51.727. Metronome with clockwork and mercurial contact, for Beckmann's experiments, Figure 1. 5.0
51.728. Chronoscope (Hipp's), Figures A and B 20. 0.0

This is a most accurately working instrument for
determining small intervals of time. It is
employed in the determination of the frequency of sounds, the velocity of free-falling bodies, the
velocity of flight of shots, etc. The instrument indicates accurately to 0.001 second. The arrestment
is released a\itomatically by means of two draw cords or
electrically by the aid of a double relay fitted
to the back.
51,720. Current Circuit Fall Trough (Kolbe's)

A traversing a fall channel closes an electric circuit during
ball a certain duration of time.
depending on the inclination of the channel.
51,730. Spark Chronograph (Tuning Fork Chronograph), as suggested by v. Beetz, F i g u r e
'
(Fogg. Ann., Vol. 135, 1868, p. 126) 7. Id. (I
A tuning fork of 250 vibrations, fixed to an axis of rotation, and sliding along a prism, writes
with its style upon a lacquered and sooted surface. By discharging an induction apparatus, the sparks
of which pass between the point of the style ami the soot -covered surface, time marks will be given.
The determination of time is accurate to within 0.0005 second.
"iI.T.'.l. Cylinder Chronograph, with Hipp Eegulator,
Figure, length of a second 10 mm;
time (it observation up to 00 minutes.
Price, without precision clock or chronometer 85. 0.
The paper-covered cylinder is actuated by a weight-driven clockwork having a Hipp regulator.
wo,
MO
No. 51738.
Chronometer, Reading Machine, Chronograph. 249
51730. 1:12.
51 731. 1 : 10.
51 736. 1 : 4. 51735. 1:4.
Two electro-magnets are moved along the cylinder, working two pens. One of the electro-magnets s. d.
receives a rush of current every second from a suitable precision pendulum clock or a chronometer
fitted with an electric contact, so that seconds marks are made in the form of projections on the screw
line which the pen leaves behind it on the cylinder. The other electro-magnet is actuated by rushes
of current, which are given off indirectly or directly by the phenomena to be registered.
The registrations of the scribing magnet are immediately alongside each other and can be measured
by means of a flexible millimetre rule or a reading machine. The clockwork can be wound up without
interrupting work.
51.732.
-- idem, length of a second 15 or 20 mm Extra Price 3. 0.0
51.733. Marine Chronometer with electric seconds contact (precision instrument) 120.0.0
51.734. Pocket Chronometer with electric seconds contact 23. 0.0
51.735. Reading Machine for cylinder diagrams, Figure, for dividing into 10, 100 or
1000 parts the seconds recorded by Chronographs Nos. 51,731 and 51,732 6. 0.0
51.736. Strip Chronograph, Figure, with spring clockwork; length of a second 10 mm;
time of observation: to 17 minutes; with 2 electromagnets 23. 0.0
The record is made in the same manner as with the previous cylinder chronographs; instead of j
the pencil a style can be inserted. If desired, a weight-driven clockwork arrangement can be sup-
plied at an extra price of 2. 15.0. This clockwork is arranged to run for 30 minutes; by lengthening
the Gall chain from which the weight is suspended it is possible to prolong the time of running. Extra
price on application.
51.737.
-- with 3 Electro-magnets, for registering the duration of two phenomena 26.10.0
idem,
51.738. Carrying Case for strip chronograph No. 51,736 2.10.0
Cl. 5706, 4849,

4848, 4888.
250 Measurement of Time. - Introduction to Physics. Xo. r.1739
51 744. 1 : 5.
51 746. 1 : 5. 51 749. 1 : 3. 51 751. 1 : 5.
51.739. Switch for putting the chronographs in and out of circuit from a distance. s ll
Extra Price 7. 5. o
51.740. Other lengths of seconds from 5 to 100 mm, as desired. Extra Price 1. 10. to 8. 15.
51.741. Device for two different lengths of seconds Extra Price 11. 10.
51.742. --idem, for 3 lengths of seconds Extra Price 14. 5.
51.743. Reading Machine (Oppolzer's) for strip chronographs (cf. Figure 51,744), con-
sisting of a system of hairs and levers forming a parallelogram 17.10.0
- - with Seconds and Minutes Counter,
51.744. idem, Figure 29. 0.
51.745. Reading Glass with finely diverging lines, in case 2. 0.
Introduction to Physics.
51.746. Displacing Cylinder for determining the Specific Gravity, Figure, with lateral s ''
eduction pipe (W. D., Fig. 57 [52]) 0. 5. n
51.747. Displacing Vessel (F. C. G. Muller's) (M. T., Fig. 68) 0. 6.
:!.74. Overflow Vessel (Grimsehl's) for volume determinations 0.1.0

51,749. Pycnometer, Figure, with lid ground on, pipette and tripod (W. D., Figs. 58
and 59 [53 and 54]j, without measuring glass 0. 3.
* :. 1 .7:.o. Disc with hole and glass lid, for showing the divisibility of fuchsia (\V. I)., Fig. 56 [51]) 0. 2.
51.751. Double Bulb on stand, Figure, for explaining the expansion of gases by means
of red nitrogen peroxide gas (W. D., Fig. 60 [55]), with 2 taps and 1 glass stopper 0. 10.
51.752. idem, without stand 0. 7.
Can be used with the projection apparatus. Cl. .
447, 41*, :KO.

No. 51 767. General Mechanics. 251
51 760. 1 : 6.
51 761. 1 : 6. 51766. 1:10.
General Mechanics.
(Motion and Forces.)
51.760. Inertia Top, Figure (W. D., Figs. 61 and 62 [56 and 57]), of brass with wood s. d.
stand for releasing 2. 15.
The top runs for 1 / 2 3 / 4 hour in a space filled with air and for 2 hours in vacuo. The steel
bearing in which the top turns must be oiled.
51.761. Carriage with movable rollers (Schultze's), Figure, for demonstrating inertia
(Inertia Apparatus) (Fr. phys. Techn. I, 1, Fig. 3170 [I, Fig. 452]), with rail track . 1. 16.
51.762. Mass Apparatus, for explaining the principles of the conservation of the centre of
gravity and of live force 6. 10.
A fixed to a small carriage, a reciprocal motion being imparted to the block

large iron block is
by a flywheel and crank. carriage is also set in motion, the latter travelling on a rail track in
The
a direction opposite to the direction of motion of the mass.
51.763. Apparatus for showing the Resistance of a body in repose to the reception of motion
(M. P., I, Fig. 227 [220]), consisting of a lead ball 1 kg weight, with two hooks joined
to hemp threads 0. 5.
51.764. Device for proving that an appreciable time is necessary for the change in the condition
of motion of a body, on p. 252, as suggested by Weinhold (W. D., Fig. 63 [58])
Figure 0. 12.
51.765. Device for showing the Inertia of a body in repose, Figure . 0. 16.
A card is projected away from under a ball by means of a spring, the ball remaining in position.
51,766 Inertia Pendulum (Maxwell's), Figure (Ztschr. f. d. phys. u. chem. U., 18, 1905,
P- 148) 0. 18.
If the wheel on the suspending threads rolled in

is an upward direction and then released, it
swings for some time in an up and down direction.
51,767. Spiral Spring, width 10 cm, for demonstrating the force-action of a weight (M. T., p. 31) 0. 3.
Cl. 450, 452,

451, 55BK.
General Mechanics. No. M 708
252
51 768. 1:15.
51769. 1:13. 51771. 1:8. 51 764. 1 : 9.
51.768. Dynamic Balance, Figure, with graduated rail track, adjustable holding pegs
and two carriages connected by spiral springs (M. P. I, Fig. 80) 5. 0.
51.769. Work Rail (Maey's), Figure, with 2 weights (Ztschr. f. d. phys. u. chem. U.,
rd
15, 1902, p. 268; Kleiber, Lehrb. d. Phys., 3 Edition, 1901, Fig. 38), for determining
the energy of motion - 10.
One of the weights is twice as heavy as the other. If the lighter weight is allowed to fall from
double the height that the heavier falls, the slab (pan of a spring balance) on which the weights fall
are depressed to an equal extent. During its downward motion the plate describes a mark in front
which remains at the lowest position.
51.770. Pistol for determinations of mass (Grimsehl's), 51,841, p. 263, with shots
Figure
and weigh pan, graduated (Ztschr. f. d. phys. u. chem. U., 16, 1903, p. 136) . . .
.M.771. Double Gun (Grimsehl's), Figure, for kinetic determinations of mass and for
ascertaining the relations between force, mass and motion, with 10 shots and 1 cleaner
(Ztschr. f. d. phys. u. chem. U., 16, 1903, p. 138) 1. 2.
51,772. Dynmeter (F. C. G. Miiller's), see Magnetism Section, No. 60,133.

Dynamometer (Fischinger's), Figure (Fr. phys. Techn. I, 2, Fig. 3292 3295 [I, Fig. 457
to 460]). This is a Rotary Steelyard Dynamometer, being arranged between the driving
machine or shafting and the work machine by a belt drive, so that readings can be
taken by a jockey weight after deducting for the tensile force of the belt.
List
No.
Work, Mechanical Effect. FaU Apparatus. 253
51 781. 1 : 15. 51782. 1:15.
51.777. 2 Fall Cords (Babinet's) (Bohn, Physikal. Apparate aus d. Schaeffer-Museum, Nr. 25, s. d.
rd
p. 19; Kleiber, Lehrb. f. Gymnas., 3 Edition, Fig. 373) 0.10.0
Of the two cords one is loaded at a distance of 0, 0.5, 2, 4.5 and 8 m from the end with a
wood ball. The cord is suspended in a stepped chamber and allowed to fall. The balls reach the
floor simultaneously. The reverse experiment is carried out with the second cord weighted at the
same intervals.
51.778. Fall Pipes (Newton's), see section dealing with Air Pumps and Accessories.
51.779. Rail Apparatus (Hofler's), see No. 51,807, p. 258 11. 0.0
51.780. Fall Apparatus (Barrel's) for determining the time of fall of a sphere by allowing
a large number of balls to fall immediately after each other (Aldous, Elementary
Course of Physics, London, 1900, p. 46, Fig. 22) *. 4. 0.0
A
ball falling freely actuates the electric releasing device of the next ball at the moment it en-
counters the end of its path of fall, so that a fresh ball commences to fall as soon as the previous
one has traversed the path of fall. The number of balls are calculated which fall from a certain height
in a given time, this number being divided into the time: the experiment is then repeated at different
heights of fall.
51.781. Atwood's Fall Machine, Figure, as suggested by Weinhold (W. D., Fig. 64 [59]),
with polished scale board, on firm iron stand with levelling screws, device for releasing
the fall weights, catch for the excess weights, and receiving platform: with two fall
weights composed of 3 single weights of 70, 98 and 98 grammes; with cord pulley of 50 g
moment of inertia; with 4 weights, 3 excess and 3 friction weights. In addition to per-
mitting of the carrying out the demonstration of the laws of fall proper, the machine
can be used for all experiments on Force, Mass and Acceleration suggested by Wein-
hold 3. 0.
- -
51.782. i d e
in, with seconds pendulum on the stand, in Cardan's suspension and with
audible seconds beat, Figure 4. 10.
The pendulum is also suitable for explaining the pendulum laws; this remark also applies to
the succeeding items.
CI. 455, 462S, 456.

254 General Mechanics. No. 51 783
51 783. 1 : 15. 51789. 1:16. 51790. 1:15.
51.783. Atwood's Fall Machine, Figure, constructed in the original Atwood form, :
s. d.
without pendulum, with polished wood stand; scale divided in 5 cm; total height of
machine: 2m 4.10.0
51.784. --idem, with a seconds pendulum fitted to the stand, in Cardan's suspension and
with audible seconds beat 6. 5.0
- -
r> 1.785. idem, seconds pendulum with dial and projecting pointer, audible beat . . . 9.10.0
51,786. -- idem, with friction rollers, without pendulum 10.10.0

- -
r>l ,787. idem, with friction rollers and seconds pendulum (with audible beat), in Cardan's
suspension (Gan.-Man. Figs. 38 45; Gan.-Eein. Fig. 61) 12. 5.0
51.788. Electromagnetic Release for the Falling Weights, Figure, suitable for all preceding
machines, very practical 1. 4.0
When this electromagnetic release is fitted the hand release given with the fall
machines can be dispensed with. The price of the
electromagnetic release is reduced
in this case by 8 s. to 16 s.
51.789. Large Atwood Fall Machine, Figure, with polished wood base on massive iron
stand fitted with levelling screws, rule of maple wood divided every 5 cm. Total height
of machine: 2 in. With friction rollers, seconds
pendulum with audible beat, dial and
projecting pointer; also with electromagnetic release, with key and 3 flexible leads;
Cl. 57(i:>, 4:.s. r.llul.

No. 517112. Fall Machines and Fall Apparatus. 255
51 791 and 51 728. 1 : 15. 51 792. 1 : 12.
cord roller of aluminium 100 g in weight, 2 dropping weights of 70 g, to which two s. d:
weights each of 98 g can be screwed, 4 weights and 3 excess weights 16.10.0

The machine is constructed with the very greatest care, and in addition to permitting of the de-
monstration of the laws of fall proper allows of all the experiments suggested by Weinhold on force,
mass and acceleration (W. D., pp. 74 and 75 [68 and 69]), without the use of friction weights.
51.790. Fall Machine mounted in glazed Cupboard, Figure, travelling on rubber rollers,
otherwise as No. 51,789. Own new type 22.10.0
This arrangement does away with the troublesome necessity of placing the machine in the
museum cupboard; the machine is always ready for use and easily accessible when the cupboard
is opened.
51.791. Atwood's Fall Machine, Figure, with levelling screws, on iron wall bracket.
The fall posts are easily detachable. Without table, metronome or cell 12. 0.0
The roller, 100 g in weight, is of aluminium, is most accurately balanced, and runs on friction
rollers. The following belong to the apparatus: the two dropping weights of 70 g on to which two
98 g weights can be screwed; also 4 weights and 3 over weights, and electric release. The latter can
be operated by means of an electric metronome (see No. 51,726) or a Morse key.
51.792. Fall Apparatus and Seconds Pendulum, with simultaneous electric release (as sug-
gested by Edelmann), Figure (Physikal. Ztschr., 1903, p. 413) 2.15.0
The falling ball and the body of the pendulum are held fast by an electric magnet, being released
simultaneously when the circuit is opened. The ball falls exactly on the pendulum body.
Cl. 457, 459, 5383.

256 General Mechanics. NIL :.l 7:1:1
51793. 1:13. 51 794. 1 : 7. 51796. 1:18.
51.793. Fall Apparatus (Kottenbach's), Figure (Ztschr. f. d. phys. u. chem. U., 18.
s fl -
1905, p. 79) 5.10.0

The time
of vibration of a slowly vibrating plate spring serves as a measure for the time of
fall of an iron In its passage through the position of rest the spring itself releases the ball by means
ball.
of the electromagnetic release, and at certain heights of fall the ball encounters the spring again in
passing through the state of rest, this being annunciated by an electric or mechanical signal.
When ordering kindly state whether Electric or Mechanical Signalling is desired.
51.794. Fall Apparatus for Free Fall (Edelmann's), for use with the v. Beetz Tuning Fork
Chronograph, Figure, without Tuning Fork Chronograph (No. 51,730) 6. 5.0
At the commencement and end of fall a freely falling ball opens two currents divided by an ;
induction apparatus. The induction sparks determine the time-measuring tuning fork curves. Height
of fall of ball adjustable from 1 60 cm.
51,705. Tuning Fork Chronograph (v. Beetz's), see Fig. 51,730 7.10.0
51.796. Fall Machine (Morin's), Figure, perfectly constructed, for indicating the para-
ixila of fall, for ascertaining the acceleration and testing the law of velocities (Chwolson,
Lehrb. I, Fig. 211; Fr. phys. Techn. I, 2, Fig. 2234; Gan.-Man. Fig. 33) 18. 0.0
51.797. Fall Machine (F. C. G. Miiller's) (M. T., Fig. 36), with electromagnetic-ally driven
tuning fork, for recording the vibration curve on a blackened glass disc. The tuning
fork can also be used by itself 4. 0.
:> 1,79*. Fall Machine for Free Fall (Pesograph, Lapsometer), Figure (M. P. I, Fig. 83
[81]; Friek phys. Tc-chn. I, 2, Fig. 3456 [I, Fig. 500]) 13. 0.
An oscillating pen records the vibration curve on a falling plate covered with paper.
cl.
Fall Machines. Inclined Planes. 257
51802. 1:21.
51803. I :30.
51 798. 1 : 8. 51804. 1:17.
51.799. Acceleration Apparatus (Bendtorff's), combined with an Atwood Fall Machine (School S. d.
Science and Mathematics, Vol. VIII, No. 3, March 1908, p. 228) 9. 0.0
A falling tuning fork (indicating) records its vibrations on a sooted glass plate. The glass plate
iscapable of lateral motion so that a number of curves can be described on it in succession. The
apparatus is supplied with the accessories which are necessary when it is used as a fall machine.
51.800. Tension and Acceleration Meter (Hrabowsky's) (Ztschr. f. d. phys. u. chem. U., 9,
1896, p. 24; Fr. phys. Techn. I, 2, Figs. 3165 and 3166), for graphically demonstrating
accelerated motion, for demonstrating the laws of fall, accelerated motion on a horizontal
path, equable motion, final velocity, and retarded motion 5.10.0
51.801. Poggendorff's Balance (Fall Machine) for determining the force necessary for accele-
rating a body (Fr. phys. Techn. I, 2, Fig. 3275) 1.10.0
51,802. Galilei's Inclined Plane for the descent of bodies (as suggested by Bertram), Figure,
1.90 m
long (Fr. phys. Techn. I, 2, Fig. 2235, 2236), with variable angle of inclination 1. 8.0
51.803. Inclined Plane (W. Konig's), Figure (Ztschr. f. d. phys. u. chem. U., 7, 1893/94,
p. 4), with 45 mm
diameter lignum vitae ball 3. 0.0
The inclined plane comprises 4 pieces each 1 m long, which can be inserted one in the other,
and 1 piece 0.5 m long. A number of wood blocks, supplied with the apparatus, serve to give the
plane different inclinations or to set it up "broken", i. e., with the lower part horizontal. Rotary
flags on small stands render the passage of the ball through certain points visible at a distance.
51.804. Quadruple Inclined Plane (Mach's), Figure, for allowing 4 balls to fall simultaneously
th
(Meyer, Naturlehre, Fig. 107, 4 Edn.) 2.15.0
Four sliding fillets are supplied with the apparatus so that each ball can be stopped at any
desired point.
CI. ?.:>7f>.
3299,
462, 4745. 17
258 General Mechanics.
51 805. 1 : 10.
51 807. 1 : 13.
51,805. Inclined Plane for the descent of bodies (Friedr. C. G. Miiller's), Figure, with track B. d.
of plate glass, 1 ivory ball and 1 small balance (M. T., Figs. 16 a and 35, and p. 60) 4. o. o
51.807. Rail Apparatus (Inclined Plane), Hoefler's, Figure, for demonstrating the laws
of gravitation of the inclined plane; the principle of Inertia, Independence. Reaction,'
the Sine Oscillations, etc, (Ztschr. f. d. phys. u. chem. U., 7, 1894, p. 276; Hoefler.
Physik, Figs. 1, 6, 3638
and 52; Fr. phys. Techn. II, 1, Figs. 2194, 3104 a, 3167).
with 1 small carriage, 1 spring balance of 20 g mass, 1 long carriage, 1 small table and
1 cord guide with pulley 11. o. o
51.808. Carriage with Spring Dynamometer for above, for measuring the friction (Hoefler-
Poske, Fig. 25) . . . 0.15.0
51.809. Apparatus for demonstrating the Fall of a Body through the chord, Figure, with
simultaneous mechanical release for the balls 2. 0.0
51.810. -- idem, simple, and without mechanical release (M. P., Fig. 118 [117]) .... 1. 0. o
51.811. Galilean Escapement Pendulum, for showing that the final velocity of a falling body
is
only dependent on the height through which it falls (W. D., Fig. 72 [65]) (fall on curved
path) and for confirming the law of Energy (M. T., Fig. 45), see Fig. 52,123 ... 0. !!.(>
51.812. Centrifugal Pendulum, for proving the energy of motion (Fr. phys. Techn. 1. o
I, 2, Fig. 3174) 1 .
51.813. Apparatus for the Parallelogram of Path and the Composition of Impact Forces,
Figure, with 2 hammers and 1 glass ball (W. D., Fig. 65 [60]); M. P. I, Fig. 98; Fr.
phys. Techn. H, 1, Fig. 3305) . (1.15.0
51.814. Apparatus for showing the resultant of 2 Directions, F i g u r e, with 2 spring pistols
which can lie shot off separately or together. The board is covered with green cloth.
being surrounded by a tall beading; with ivory ball 3. 0.
51.815. Slab for the Parallelogram of Motions and the projectile path (Penseler's). F g u r e i 1. lo.o
A piece of chalk, carried along in a perpendicular rail, and to which a regular upward motion
is given or a downward motion influenced
by the acceleration of descent, is simultaneously given a
lateral nuili in by hand, the resultant appearing as a chalk line.
1 1
,8 1 ii. Grimsehl's Apparatus for the Composition of uniform and non-uniform Motions (Xtschr.
f. d. phys. u. chem. r., 17, 1904, p. 257) 1.15.O
Graduated glass slabs can be slid along a board which sloping position. If a j;l;i"
is placed in a
slab and recording pencil are moved along a definite length in one direction and the' pencil is thru
moved along a divided edge of the glass slab in another direction, the point determined by the parallel..
of forecs is reached.
Cl. M-' I.
5081.
Inclined Planes for the Descent of Bodies. Composition of Forces and Movements. 259
51815. 1:18. 51 817. 1 : 7. 51 821. 1 : 10.
51.817. Apparatus for demonstrating the Composition of two Rotations (Biernacki's), Figure [
s. d.
(Ztschr. f. d. "phys. u. chem. IT., 19, 1906, p. 80), large pattern, suitable for explaining !
Fresnel's explanation of the rotation of the polarisation-plane of light 5. 0.0
51.818. idem, but smaller 3.10.0
1,819. Kinegraph (Engelmeyer's), for recording compound motions, their components and
resultants (Ztschr. f. d. phys. u. chem. U., 9, 1896, p. 134; Fr. phys. Techn. I, 2, Fig. 3176) 3. 0.0
51.820. Hartl's Apparatus for recording the Parallelograms of Motion (Ztschr. f. d. phys. u.
chem. U., 17, 1904, p. 226; Fr. phys. Techn. I, 2, Fig. 3177) 1. 5.0
51.821. Apparatus for explaining Compound Motions, Figure (Fr. phys. Techn. I, 2,
Fig. 2210), with movable stand, so that the diagonals may be set at various lengths,
and with graduated arc 2. 5.0
The wing mechanism of theatre stages can be explained with this apparatus.
Cl. 3T84,
497, 467.
528Z, 4128, 4S4. 1 7
260 General Mechanics. No,
51 822 B. 1:6.
51 822 A. 1:6.
3;
f-
51 824 b. 1:4. 51 824 c. 1:4. 51823. 1:10.
51.822. Circular Motion Diagraph (Salcher's), Figs. A

and B (Ztschr. f. d. phys. u. chem. U.,
17, p. 72), for the composition of two uniform circular motions 10. o. <>
Fig. B shows some of the curves resulting from the use of the apparatus.
51.823. Apparatus for demonstrating the Projection Theory (Cosine Theory) of Mechanics
(Grimsehl's), (Ztschr. f. d. phys. u. chem. U., 17, 1904, p. 262; Hofler-Poske,
Figure
2. 0.
Oberstufe, Fig. 21)
51.824. Apparatus for the Parallelogram of Forces and the Pendulum Laws (Weinhold's) (\\ '.
D., Figs. 69 A, B, C and 93 [62 A, B, C and 86]) 2. 5.
Single prices:
51,8-24 a. Oak Stand (W. D., Fig. 69 B [62 B]), with hooks for pendulums i 0. 12.
.. 2 Rollers on cramps (W. D., Fig. 69 A [62 A]), Figure 0. 15.
51,8-24 c.13 Double-hook Weights (W. D., Fig. 69 C [62 C]), each 50 g in weight, with 2 cords, ea -h with 1 T-hook
and 1 double hook, Figure 0.1,V II
Wood [86]), for explaining the laws

.-.l.s-24 ,1 3 Brass Balls and 1 Ball on double cords (W. D., Fig. 93 of
the pendulum ........................................ 0. 3.
.M.s-2.".. Parallelograms for above, of pasteboard, graduated (W. 1)., p. 83 [75]) ......... l'."'l> 0. 0. 7
51,82. Aluminium Ring and 3 Silk Threads with hooks for Varignon's experiment on the
parallelogram of forees (M. T., Figs. 912) .................. 0. 1.
T. Wood Rod, Figure, for the parallelogram of forees (M. T., Fig. 11; Ztschr. f. d.
u. ehem. U., 15, 1902, p. 9) 0. 0. in

phys.
I'l. 4?:.. 17.
477. I7H, Mil.
No. T.1832. Parallelogram of Forces. 261
51 831. 1 : 5. 51 832 A. 1:10.
d.
51.828. 1 Set Hooked Weights, Figure (as suggested by Friedr. C. G. Miiller) (M. T., p. 30),
6 of 10 g each, 6 of 20 g, 4 of 100 g, 2 of 200 g and 2 of 500 g 1. 8.0
51.829. Parallelogram of Forces Apparatus (Frick's) (Fr. phys. Techn. 1, 2, Fig. 2152 [I, Fig. 107]),
without weights 1.12.0
(For weights, see 51,824 c.)
51.830.
- - idem (Bertram's), Figure, entirely of metal (Fr. phys. Techn. I, 2, Fig. 2154
[I, Fig. 114]), without weights |
2. 0.0
51.831.
-- idem, constructed entirely of metal, in the form shown in Fig. 51,831 . . .
2.15.0
weights be suspended from the ends of the cords of the apparatus, the parallelogram
If suitable
assumes such form that its sides and diagonals are proportional to the suspended weights.
51.832. Parallelogram of Forces Apparatus (S'Gravesande's), Fig. A, with a number of

metal bars of various lengths, for obtaining parallelograms of different sizes, with
18 weights, Fig. B, suitable for the apparatus, in one wood block (Fr. phys. Techn.
I, 2, Fig. 2150) 4.16.0
Cl. 4518. 6023,
497:.. ITU. is::.
262 General Mechanics.
51 834. 1:12.
51833. 1:16.
.
51 832 a. 1:11. 51835. 1:12.
s. d.
51,832 a. Force Table (Millikan's), with 3 spring balances, Figure . . 2. <.<)
51.833. Model (No. 1) for combining forces in space, as suggested by Prof. E. Meyer, Figure
(Z. d. V. d. I., 53, 1909, pp. 1301 and seq., No. 1, and text-sheet 13, Figs. 13) . 8. 0.0
51.834. Model (No. 21)

for the equalisation of rotating Masses, Figure
(Prof. B. Meyer's)
(Z. d. 53, 1909, pp. 1301 et seq., No. 21, and text-sheet 16, Figs. 56 and 57),
V. d. I.,
for demonstrating the equalisation of locomotive driving axles and the discovery of
'
errors in steam turbines and turbo-generators . 10. 0.0
51.835. Cannon (Grimsehl's), Figure,for demonstrating the action of a couple on a freely

movable body (Xtschr. phys. u. chem. U., 17, 1904, pp. L'l et seq.), with plate
f. d.
glass base, clot hoovered; 2 cannons, 2 shots, stand, steel balls, etc 5.10.0
The demonstrated by the recoil which the centre of gravity of
action of the couple of forces is
the system of masses undergoes when the double cannon is fired off, the ma.->< - being formed by the
ciinnon, a board and a counterpoise. This board rests on steel balls and can be moved in any dire/lion
horizontally. Instead of using the double cannon, the single cannon No. 51,837 can be set up on the
board for tlie experiment with single forces.
51.836. Couple of Forces Water Wheel (Grimsehl's) (Ztschr. f. d. phys. u. eheia. U., 17, 1904,
p. 322), for demonstrating the independence of the action of one or more couples on
their position relative to the n\is ut' rotation of the body, and for comparing the action
of various large couples 3. 0.0
51.837. Reaction Cannon ((IriiuseliFs), for demonstrating the action of individual forces on
a movable body (Xlsclir. f. d. phys. u. chem. U., 17, J'.KH. p. 3137); to be used in con-
junction with the accessories to No. 51,835 0. 5.0
51,83*. Projectile Apparatus (Lowy's) (\V. I)., Fig. 66 [61]), Figure 0.17.0
The apparatus is employed for proving that a body thrown in a horizontal line is sinniltai n<
with the fall of one falling freely.
cl.
a, ma.
No. 5184:1. Composition of Forces. Projectile Apparatus. 263
a
51 838. 1 : 10. 51 839. 1 : 5. 51 843. 1 : 14.
51,839. Projectile Apparatus (Haiti's), with spring, for fixing to the wall, Figure (Ztschr. s. d.
f. d. phys. u. chem. U., 2, 1888/89, p. 81) 0.18.0

5I.S40. Fall Pistol (Projectile Pistol), Hartl's, Figure, for holding in the hand (Ztschr.
f. d. phys. u. chem. U., 7, 1893/94, p. 246; Fr. phys. Techn. I, 2, Figs. 3173 and
3180; M. T., p. 63) . . . 0. 6.0
51.841. Pistol, Target and Stand, with Rubber Ball, as suggested by Grimsehl, Figure, for
studying the trajectory (Ztschr. f. d. phys. u. chem. U., 17, 1904, p. 265) 2. 5. u
As to the employment of the pistol for determinations of mass, see No. 51,770, p. 252.
51.842. Apparatus (Hagenbach's), Figure, for explaining the influence of the angle of
elevation on the horizontal range (W. D., p. 80 [72]) 1.10. o
The curves of the projected body are demonstrated by pendulums rorn^ponding to the lengths
1. 4, 9, 16, etc., these pendulums being fixed to a rod at equal distances apart. The rod can be rotated
in a vertical plane and forms a variable angle with the divided horizontal bar, the angle being read
off on a graduated arc.
.">M43. -
idem, with diagrams ready drawn for angles of elevation of 0, 15, 30, 45,
60 and 75, Figure...
The diagramscan, to the illustration, be rolled together, so that the apparatus can
3. 0.0
contrary
easily be moved about, occupying but little space when folded up.
Cl.
W, 4TL', 47:t.
264 General Mechanics. ,,. :,iH44
51847. 1 : 18. 51 848. 1:10.
51,844. Water Jet Projectile Apparatus, combined with Hagenbach's Projectile Parabola, as a s. <i.
suggested by Weinhold (W. D., Fig. 68), Figure 1.16.0
5I.X45. Water Jet Projectile Apparatus (Friedr. C. G. Miillor's) (M. T., Fig. 37) 4. o.o
*:,l.si(i. Lantern Slide of the Trajectory of a Krupp 24-cm Gun (M. T., Fig. 33) 0. 1.6
~> I. si 7. Apparatus for showing the Projection Parabola (Ducrue's), Figure (Fr. phys.
Techn. I, 2, Fig. 3185; Bohn, Physikal. App. No. 28, p. 25) 1. 15.0
The missle, a chalk ball, rolls out of ;m adjustable bent tube, or iscast out of a straight tube
by means of a spring, leaving the parabola traversed on a dead-black board.
5l.si8. Projectile Diagraph (.Salchcr's), Figure

(Ztsohr. f. d. phys. u. diem. U., 17, l"oi.
page 60) 12. 0.0
The essential part of the apparatus is formed of a universal parallelograph consisting of 4 bars
of equal length and 4 of half this length, linked together. No matter how the .-tainl i- extended, the
4 external points 1, 2, 3 and 4
always define a parallelogram.
Can be used with the projection apparatus. Cl. 37

l, 474.
Mechanics of Solids (Statics and Dynamics). 265
51 850. 1 : 16. 51 851. 1 : 15.
51 851 b. 1:8.
Mechanics of Solids (Statics and Dynamics).

s. d.
51.850. Collection of Apparatus for demonstrating the Laws of Mechanics, . . .

Figure 9. 0.0
The following are included in the above price: 1 Oak Frame, 1 m high and 1 m wide; 1 Inclined
Pl'ane; 1 Wedge Apparatus; 2 Weigh Pans; 2 Aluminium Levers with steel axes and steel pins passing
through, one firmly fixed, the other arranged for suspending; 1 Set Pulley Blocks with 2 blocks and
3 pulleys arranged in series; 1 Tackle with 3 pulleys; 1 Arbor Wheel with cramp; 2 Disc-shaped
Pendulums of equal length, hanging in various planes, with swivel for adjusting the length; 3 Len-
ticular Pendulums of 90, 40 and 10 cm length, with swivels for adjusting; 3 Pulleys with
cramps
(W. D., Fig. 69 A [62 A]); 1 Loose Pulley, of aluminium, with steel axis, brass bow and with 1 hook;
1 Set of
Weights with iron weights of 50 g to 5 kg; 1 Set of Double-cheek Weights, each with
20 weights of 100 g and of 50 g.
51.851. Collection of Apparatus for demonstrating the Laws of Mechanics, Figure, con-
sisting of the following apparatus, these pieces of apparatus being also supplied singly
at the prices given: a, b, d 1, d 2, e, f, g 1, h m 5.18.0
(a) Frame, of oak, 1 m high, 1 m wide, with small hooks screwed in (W. D., Fig. 69 B
[62 B]) 0.12.0
(b) 1 Lever, of aluminium, with steel axis and with steel pins passing through at equal
intervals apart, lacquered in two colours, with metal bow, on cramp, Figure 0. 8.0
(c) Pulleys, aluminium, with steel axis and brass bow:

1) With 1 hook Bach 0. 2.0
2) With 2 hooks Each 0. 2.6
266 Mechanics of Solids (Statics and Dynamics). NY. .'.I >-.'>hl
51851dl. 51 851 d 2. 51 851 f.
1 : 6. 1 : 6. 1 : 10. 51 851 g. 1:4. 51 853. 1 = 12. 51851m. 1:6.
(d) Tackle with aluminium pulleys, with steel axis, in brass frame:
1) 2 Pulley Blocks, each with 3 pulleys, arranged one behind the other, Figure
(M. T., p. 33) O.ll'. (i
2) 2 Pulley Blocks, each with 3 pulleys, arranged alongside each other, Figure 0. 15.0
(e) Power Tackle, 4 aluminium pulleys 0. It.
(f ) Differential Tackle, Figure, 50 kg carrying capacity, with cast-iron pulley and

0. 18.
chain, self-locking
(g) Arbor Wheel, Figure, with 3 discs mounted on one axis, the diameters of the
discs being as 1 2 3, of aluminium, with steel axis, in iron clamp:
: :
1) 90 mm
diameter ^ 0. 9.0
2) 120 mm
diameter 0.10.0
(h) 2 Brass Pulleys on iron cramps, with conical pivots, for the parallelogram of forces,
Fig. 51,851, p. 265 (W. D., Fig. 69 A [62 A]), each 7 s. 6 d
0.15.0
(i) 3 Brass Pendulums and 1 Wood Pendulum, on double threads; ratio of lengths 1:4:9 0.
(k) Pendulum of variable length, round steel rod with suspension and adjustable brass ball 0. 4.
(1) Set of Weights, comprising 20 weights of 50 g each, provided with hooks on both
sides, mounted in wood block, 10 of the weights being nickellcd and 10 black
varnished, Figure 0.10.0
(m) Hook with cramp, Figure, for suspending heavy objects, electromagnets and
the like 0. 3.
51.853. Stand with Apparatus for demonstrating the Laws of Meelumics, Figure ... 2. (>. o
1 Stain! wood), polished, with hooks; 1 Lever with steel axis in metal l>w. with steel pins
i
passing through at equal intervals apart; also 1 loose and 1 fixed pulley in metal bow; 1 Arbor Wheel
with sheaves of ratio 1
:i 3; 2 Balance Pans; 1 Pendulum of variable length (brass ball on
: '2 :
double thread); G Weights of each 50 g with hooks <>n both sides.
51.854. Universal Apparatus for demonstrating the Laws of Mechanics (as suggested by Friedr.
C. (1. Miillei). Figure (Xtsehr. f. d. phys. u. chem. U., 14, 1901, p. 71; M. T.,
Fig. 33) 6. 0.0
iiiiiprisini::
i
Stand: Suspension Device: I Ring made of
I I nun thick brass wire, cm dia- 1 .'ill
meter; -2 Similar Rings, 2f> cm diameter; 1 Square and 1 Equilateral Triangle, made of the same sort,
For Haiti Indicating Balances with Accessories for experiments i
in Static* and Mechanics, see Xos. 51 597-51 601, p. 240. Ifl7, 488, 4M, 490, BWS, 4018.
No. 51862. Universal Apparatus. Inclined Planes. 267
51 856. 1 : 12. 51 859. 1 : 5.
51 860. 1 : 8. 51 862. 1 : 8.
of wire, both having 40 cm length of side; 1 Circular Disc of 30 cm diameter, of sheet aluminium; s. d.
1Equilateral Triangular Disc of 30 cm side and 1 Rectangular Disc 10x30 cm; 1 Driving Weight of
10 g, 1 of 5 g, 2 of 2 g, 2 of 1 g; 12 Paper Weights; 1 spare tip, spare thread.
The following can be demonstrated with the apparatus: 1) the Fundamental Principles of Me-
chanics; 2) the Laws of uniformly accelerated and retarded Motion; 3) Moments of Inertia; 4) the
Laws of periodic Oscillations.
51,850. Cycloidal Double Railway (Thierfelder's), Figure, for demonstrating the swinging
motion of the Cycloidal Pendulum, of the Parallelogram of Directions and the Impact
Action, with 3 steel balls, 2 electromagnets, cell, switch on terminal board and connect-
ing leads (Ztschr. f. d. phys. u. chem. U., 21, 1908, p. 244) 4.10.0
The railway consists of two hinged parts which can be set up at any angle relative to each
other. The electromagnets can be moved along the cycloidal track, being actuated simultaneously
by a switch.
51.857. Demonstration Apparatus for the Statics and Dynamics of Rigid Bodies (Topler's)
(Ztschr. f. d. phys. u. chem. U., 1, 1887/88, p. 137; Fr. phys. Techn. I, 2, Figs. 3278
to 3281) 17.10.0
For proving the hypothesis of the plane polygon of forces, of equilibrium and of the centre of
parallel forces, of the equilibrium of couples of force and any forces on the flat or in space, of the prin-
ciple of virtual velocities, of the equilibrium of forces on a body rotating on a fixed axis or movable
momentum of motion, of progressive motion, of the action of
in a fixed direction; of the centre of
the couple on the freely moving body, and of uniformly accelerated and oscillating Rotary Motion.
51.858. Accessories for explaining the Centre of Gravity (Eugen Meyer's) (Ztschr. d. V. d. I.,
Vol. 53, 1909, p. 1301, Xo. 14, and text-sheet 16, Fig. 44) 3.15.0
51.859. Apparatus for proving the Law of the Inclined Plane (Prick's) (Fr. phys. Techn. I, 2,
Fig. 2206 [Fig. 121]), Figure 0.12.0
The two rollers are in equilibrio, since their weights are as the lengths of the inclined planes
pertaining thereto.
51.860. Inclined Plane, simple, with metal roller, balance pan, graduated arc and height rule,
Figure 1.16.0
- - with iron
51.861. idem, feet, as Fig. 51,863 2. 0.0
51.862. Inclined Plane, Figure, of wood, with metal feet, 250 g roller, with 1 tared balance
pan and 6 hooked weights each of 50 g (Fr. phys. Techn. I, 2, Fig. 2202) 2. 5.0
This apparatus has a plain, 2-colour centimetre graduation.
Cl. .
493, 4'.ll.
268 Mechanics of Solids (Statics and Dynamics).
51 869. 1:10. 51 876 A. 1:10. 51 876 B. 1:10.
51.863. Inclined Plane (Weinhold's) (W. D., Fig. 71 [64]), with polished oak stand, carriage
and loading pan weighing together 500 g, with 2 tared balance pans of each 50 g . 3. 0. o
This inclined plane must only be used in conjunction with frame Xo. 51,851 a and pulleys
No. 51,851 b.
51.864. - -
idem, simpler wood pattern 2.14/0
51.865. Inclined Plane, as No. 51,863, but with a pulley on the upper end. Constructed in
this manner the apparatus can be used independently 3. 6.
51.866. idem, simpler wood pattern 3. 0.0
51.867. Plate Glass Slab, Sliding Body and light Balance Pan, for experiments on sliding friction
(W. D., p. 137 [116]) 0. 8.0
Tne
dull polished glass plate is laid upon the inclined plane so as to afford a uniform bearing
surface for the sliding body. The sliding body is of hard wood, and drawing paper is gummed on
3 different sized surfaces, two other surfaces being provided with small hooks.
:. l.s8. Inclined Plane (Bertram's), Figure, entirely of iron (M. P. I, Fig. 267, 268 |2ti-l.
265]; Fr. phys. Techn. I, 2, Figs. 2203 and 2204 [I, Figs. 122 and 123]) 4. 0.0
The bow carrying the guide pulley for the cord can be adjusted so that the force can I" applied 1
both parallel to and horizontal with the inclined plane
."> 1.869. -- idem, with graduated arc, Figure I. lu.o
51,870. Inclined Plane (Friedr. ('. O. Midler's), Figure, of wood, with graduated arc.
precision roller, small carriage (M. T., p. 36 and Fig. 16) and the following auxiliaries
Attachment witli inclined plane, for proving the action of the components of force in propellers,
windmills, sailing vessels (M. T.. Fig. 17); Sail Attachment M T., p. 37)j Wood Wedge iM. T.. p. 38):
i
.
Cl. 111'., inn.

:.:.L'
No. .M SSL'. Inclined Planes. Equal-arm Levers. 269
51 877. 1 : 10. 51 881. 1:10.
Couple of Forces Attachment (M. T., Fig. 22); Wood Blocks of 100 g for sliding friction; 1 each respec- s. d.
tively Slate, Sheet Metal and Plate Glass Slabs; 2 Sets of Wheels (M. T., Fig. 55); 1 Wood Roller
(M. T., p. 94).
51.876. Apparatus (Grimsehl's), Figs. A

and B, for demonstrating the tensive and com-
pressive strain in a solid, and for deriving the momentum theorem (Ztschr. f. d. phys.
u. chem. U., 16, 1903, p. 260) 2. 5.0
51.877. Apparatus for showing the Invariability of the static momentum on shifting the origin
of force in the direction of force, (W. D., Figs. 73 A, B, C [66, A, B, C])
Figure 0.18.0
51.878. Equal-arm Lever, of aluminium, with steel axis and steel pins passing through, lac-
quered in two colours, on stand, Figure.. 0.10.0
51.879. Equal-arm Lever, of metal, on iron stand, heavy type, Figure (W. D., Fig. 74
[67]). Without weights 0.12.0
For weights, see No. 51, 824 c, p. 260, or No. 51,904, p. 273.
51.880. 2 Metal Levers on metal stands, Figure, with 10 weights, specially suitable for
explaining the cooperation of parallel forces and for upwardly directed forces, and for
determining the bearing pressure 3. 0.0
Only one lever is shown in the illustration.
51.881. Metal Lever, in frame, with pulley, Figure, also for forces directed upwards,
with weights (Fr. phys. Techn., 7" Edn., 1
I, 2, Fig. 2095) 3. 0.
- -
51.882. idem, without weights 2. 5.
For weights, see No. 51, 824 c, p. 260.
Cl. 5703, 499, 503,

4S8, 500, 501
270 Mechanics of Solids (Statics and Dynamics;. Nil. .''1
51 883. 1 : 12. 51 886. 1 :
51 884. 1 : 10. 51 888. 1:12. 51 889. 1 : 4.
51.883. Lever Apparatus, for demonstrating the cooperation of parallel forces, Figure, i. (l.
with 12 weights in wood block (Fr. phys. Techn. I, 2, Fig. 2101) 3. 5.0
51.884. Lever Stand, Figure, for forces directed upwards and downwards; stand with
lever, 3 arms and 3 pulleys, on box, with drawer 2.15.0
For weights, see Xo. 51, 824 c, p. 260, or No. 51,904.
51,886. Apparatus fdr explaining the Different Levers and the Balance (Flick's), Figure (Fr.
phys. Teclm. I, 2, Fig. 2096 [I, Fig. 91]), of metal (without weights) j
2. 5.0
.") I ,X87. - - i d e in, of wood 1. I. (i
51.888. Angle Lever, Figure (W. D., Fig. 76 [69]), of metal, stand with levelling screws.
excluding weights
I
'rice, 1. 8.0
51.889. Lever Apparatus (Bertram's), Figure, for explaining the balance beam, entirely
of metal 1.16.0
51,891. Apparatus for the Theory of the Moments of Torsion and the Conditions of Equilibrium,
a> Miggested by Haiti, Figure (Ztschr. f. d. phys. u. cheni. I"., 14, 1901, p. 321) 7.10.0
Wood Fnmie. Stand with Circular Discs, 1 Cardboard !>isc with polyjron of forces on both
I I
sides. 1 I, ever. 1 Arbor Wheel. 2 C. I. Supports. 4 Hooked Weights each with 4 5o and 1 25 g
c;
weight for itddincr. -2 Hooked Weijrlit^ of i'u j;; 3 Pulleys on cramps; 1 Equilihrisin;; Weight with
hook: Tnreads with eqnilibrised hook-.
:>1.S92. Arbor Wheel (Kriedr. C. (J. M tiller's) (M. T., p. 42), the two wheels arc mounted on
one shaft with a space between 0.12.0
51,893. Precision Pulleys (Friedr. C. G. Muller's), Figure (M. T., Fig. 8). Price per two 1.10.0
CI. ."''C. ."''"''.
no
Lever Apparatus, Arbor Wheel, Tackle, Pulleys. 271
51891. 1 : 14.
51 894. 1 : 12. 51895. 1:11. 51896. 1:11.
s. d.
1.894. Tackle Frame, of iron, Figure, strongly constructed, with outfit 4. 0.0
1 Frame; 1 set Tackle, consisting of 2 blocks each with 3 pulleys in series; 1 set Tackle of two
blocks of each 3 pulleys placed in parallel; 1 set Differential Tackle, of metal; 6 loose Pulleys for
forming the power tackle and other combinations of pulleys.
1.895. Power Tackle with 4 iron pulleys, Figure, massively constructed 0.18.0
1,896. Tackle with 2 iron blocks, each with 3 pulleys in parallel, Figure, massively con-
structed 0.18.0
1.898. Differential Tackle, massively constructed, lifting power 100 kg, also adapted as a
model for instruction in mechanics, cf. Fig. 51,851 f 2. 0.0
1.899. 6 Loose Pulleys, of iron, for setting up the power tackle and other combinations
of pulleys. Each 4 s. d. . 1. 4.0
See also Pulleys, Tackle, etc. on pp. 265 and 266, in. :i:io2. 4r,44.
and Screw Tackle No. 50,116, p. 21. Ml. MX. 50il.

272 Mechanics oJ Solids (Statics and Dynamics). No. ftl
51900. 1 : 10.
51 901. 1 : 7.
51 905 1 : 4.
51 902. 1 : 10.
51,900. Wedge Apparatus (Frick's), Figure (Fr. phys. Techn. I, 2, Fig. 2216 [I, Fig. 127]),
with 3 different wedges and 1 balance pan 1. 4.0
51,901.
- -
idem, of brass and iron, Figure, with wedge-guide (Fr. phys. Techn., p. 721) 3. 0.0
:> 1.902. --idem (Hartl'.s), for demonstrating the pressure exerted by both
Figure,
sides of the wedge on the resistance-surfaces, with arrangement for equalising the iron
weight of the wedge and for showing the influence of sliding friction (Ztschr. f. d. phys.
u. c.hein. U., 5, 1892, p. 282, Fig. 1). Price, without weights 4. 0.0
There are given in: 3 equal-limb wedges of ratio 3 10, 4 10 and 5 : : : 10 of l>;i>'k in side, and
one unequilateral. red angular wedge with ratio of sides 3:4: ~>.
Cl. 510, 5096,

807,
No. 51911. Wedge, Screw, Equilibrium. 273
51 909 A. 1:5.
51 906. 1 : 6.
51 910. 1:10. 51 911. 1 : 9.
s. d.
51.904. 26 Double-hook Weights for Hartl's Wedge Apparatus 1. 6.0

Those weights can also be used for the experiments on levers, for the parallelogram of forces, etc.
51.905. Wood Cylinder, with paper surface, Figure, for showing the formation of the
screw line (Fr. phys. Techn. I, 2, Fig. 2013) 0. 3.0
51.906. Screw Apparatus (Frick's) for demonstrating the action of the screw, Figure (Fr.
phys. Techn. I, 2, Figs. 2219, 2220 [I, Fig. 130]), without weights 2. 0.0
51.907. -- idem, on stand, cf. Fig. 51,908, with loading weights and with one screw . 2. 0.0
51.908. -- idem, with 2 screws of different pitch, Figure 2.10.0
51.909. Screw Apparatus (Hartl's), Figs. A

and B, for the formation of the helical line
and the mode of action of the screw (Ztschr. f. d. phys. u. chem. U., 15, 1902, p. 318) j
2.15.0
The
cylinders forming the female thread are fixed to a base comprised of wood fillets, it being
possible to unwind the base.
51.910. Screw Apparatus (Grimsehl's), Figure, for explaining the action of physical forces
on the modus operandi of the screw (Ztschr. f. d. phys. u. chem. U., 17, 1904, p. 132) ;
3. 5.0
51.911. Equilibrium Apparatus, for explaining stable, unstable and indifferent equilibrium
(Fr. phys. Techn. I, 2, Fig. 2108) 0.12.0
By placing the spheres upwards or downwards stable or unstable equilibrium can be produced.
Models of Screws: see Section Cl. 3303, S304, 3f,05,
'Models of Machines and Machine Elements". 3306, 5529, 589. ] 8

274 Mechanics of Solids (Statics and Dynamics). No.
51 912. 1 : 9. 51 913. 1 : 9. 51 914. 1 : 7.
51 919. 1 : 6. 51 921. 1 : 4. 51 922. 1 : 5.
51.912. Apparatus (Frick's) for Stable Equilibrium (Fr. phys. Techn. Fig. 2107
* <i
I, 2, [I, Fig. 96]), i
Figure O.lo.u
51.913. --idem, in the form -shown in Fig. 51,913 (M. T., p. 44) 0.14.0
51.914. Apparatus (Bock's), Figure, for demonstrating the position of the centre of gra-
vity of a mass according as the individual parts are firmly or loosely combined (Fr.
phys. Techn. I, Fig. 97; M. P. I, Fig. 186) 1. o.o
If the pendulums are loosened, their origins of force are shifted to the points of suspension, and
the centre of gravity is accordingly situated above the point of support; the apparatus collapM s.
51.915. 3 Spheres, 1 Plane and 2 Arched Plates for demonstrating stable and unstable equi-
librium (Kleiber, Lehrb. d. Phys., Fig. 36) 0. 4.0
51.916. 3 Cones with Stands for the same purpose (Kleiber, Lehrb. f. Gymnas., Fig. 36) . 0.18.0
51.917. Solid and hollow Half-cylinder (M. T., p. 45) 0. 4.0
51.918. Solidand hollow Semi-circle (M. T., p. 45) 0. l.o
51.919. Double Cone on Inclined Stand, Figure (Fr. phys. Techn. I, 2, Fig. 2114 [I, Fig. 98]) 0. <>. o
51.920. Rolling Cylinder (Fr. phys. Techn. I, 2, Fig. 2116) 0. 7.
51.921. -- idem (Friedr. C. G. Miiller's), with lead pencil for recording the
Figure,
cycloidal path of the centre of gravity (M. T., Fig. 28) 0. 3.0
51.922. Leaning Tower, of two parts, with plummet (M. P. I, Fig. 187 [185]), Figure 0. 9. o
The tower remains standing as long as the centre of gravity is situated ]>ri ]>< ndirularly over
the base.
51.924. 2 Triangles on 1 Stand, Figure, for explaining the position of the centre of gravity 0. s. o
51.925. Equilibrium Figures, of .sheet metal: triangle, rectangle, trapeze, segment, semi-circle,
ellipse, ring, with stand 0.1 l.o
51.926. Equilibrium Figures, of brass, F i g u r e, with centre of gravity constructed on them:

circle, triangle, square, trapezoid and pentagon, with cap for setting on :i stand fitted
with a point (Fr. phys. Techn. I, 2, Fig. 2105), with stand 0. lli.d
51.927. 3 Centre Of Gravity Figures, of sheet /inc, with holes on the edges, for suspending,
and .! Centre of Gravity Figures, of wire (M. T., p. 44) . . . 0. (l.o
51.928. Stability Apparatus (VVcinhold's) (W. D., Fig. 77 [70]), Figure 1. 10.0
( 1 .!(), .VII. .-,112.

Centre of Gravity, Equilibrium, Arbor Wheel, Balance Beam. 275
51 932. 1:10. 51 935. 1 : 8.
Board with 3 Prismatic Blocks of various heights for stability experiments (Kleiber, s. d.
51,929.
Lehrb. d. Phys., Fig. 37) 0. 9.0
51,930. Stability Parallelepiped (Lichtenecker's), Figure, consisting of a prism with variable

angle of inclination, with centre of gravity plummet 0.18.0
51.931. Stability Prism (Friedr. C. G. Miiller's), with adjustable centre of gravity (M. T., Fig. 29) 1. 4.0
51.932. Lever Stand (Friedr. C. G. Miiller's), with auxiliaries for explaining the rod-shaped
lever, the disc-shaped lever, the centre of gravity of the lever balance and the pointer
balance (M. T., Figs. 20, 21, 23, 27, 30) 3.10.0
Stand with 2 rod -shape levers,
1 1 disc lever, 1 balance beam with pointer, scale, 2 balance
pans and 2 rider weights.
Hooked Weights: see No. 51,828.
51.933. Arbor Wheel (Friedr. C. G. Miiller's), suitable for previous lever stand (M. T., p. 42) 0. 3.0
51.934. Model of a Balance Beam (Weinhold's) (W. D., Figs. 7881 [7174]), with iron
pillar, beam of ebony, 2 double hooks of 1 and 5 grams and a small rider. 1. 4.0
5 1 ,935. --idem, Figure, with pointer and scale (W. u. E. phys. Prakt., Fig. 27) . 1.10.0
For Finished Balances ready for Demonstration Purposes (also suitable for demonstrating the olfl .^^
balance beam), Hydrostatic, Chemico-technical Balances, Sets of Weights, etc., see pp. 231 244. 4991,595! 18*
276 Mechanics of Solids (Statics and Dynamics). No. :>1 1136
51939. 1:8. 51941. 1:9.

a. d.
51.936. Model of a Roberval Weigh-bridge, Figure ................. 1. 6.4)
51.937. Model of a Roman Balance, Figure, beam of wood with steel axis, clip and jockey
weight of metal, with weigh pan ........................ 0. is. (i
51.938. Roman Balance, Figure, for carrying 25 kg, with 2 hooks, entirely ((instructed
of iron, with steel knife edges, calibrated and suitable for practical use ...... 0. 1C.
51.939. Model of a Platform Figure 10.0

(Trapeze balance after Quintenz)
1.
Weighing Machine,
51.940.
-- idem, different form, Figure .................... .
1. 10. o
51.941.
- - i (1 c
m, entirely of metal, with balance pans on the rods for explaining the dif-
ferent lever conditions, Figure ........................ ;
2.
r
Centrifugal Railway, with wood Techn. ll.o
.l,!t42. ball, Figure (Fr. phys. I, 2, Fig. 3188) 0.
r>!,!13. Centrifugal Railway, with small loading carriage. Figure ........... l. Ki.o
Cl. 5523, SS.M!.
.MK. 600,
tn,
No. 51917. Balance Beam. Centrifugal Force. 277
51942. 1:13.
51943. 1:10.
51944. 1:11.
51 946. 1 : 12. 51 945. 1:10.
d.
51.944. Apparatus (Schleiermacher's), Figure, for showing that the centrifugal force is
s.
th
inversely proportional to the square of the speed (M. P., 9 Edn., I, Fig. 135; Fr. phys.
Techn. I, 2, Fig. 3267 (I, 446]) 2.15.0
51.945. Centrifugal Force Apparatus (Bruno's), Figure, for introduction to the relations
between Force, Mass and Acceleration (Vierteljahresberichte des Wiener Vereins zur
Forderung des physikal. u. chem. Unterrichts, X, 4 (1905); Ztschr. f. d. phys. u. chem.
U. 19, 1906, p. 299) ........ 21. 0.0
An accurately measuring apparatus for determining the centrifugal force.
51.946. Regulator Model (as suggested by Prof. Eugen Meyer), Figure, for proving the
surface law, suitable for demonstrating the increase of angular velocity
specially
with decreasing moment of inertia (Z. d. V. d. I., 1909, p. 1301 et seq., No. 15, Fig. 45
on text-sheet 16) '>. 0.0
51.947. Centrifugal Apparatus for 2 samples (M. T., p. 72), with glasses and screw clamps 1. 2.0
Cl. 5735, 3316,
642,
5554, 5050.
278 Whirling Tables and Accessory Apparatus. No. Slew
51 949 A. 1:9.
51 952. 1 : 8. 51 949 B, 52043. 1:6.
51 948. 1 : 5. 51 959. 1 : 8.
51,948. Central Force Electromagnet and Iron Ball, the latter arranged for suspension, B. d.
Figure (M. P. I, Fig. 125) 1. 15. o

If the pendulum is moved from the position of rest and then simply released, it swings to
and fro in a straight line; if it is submitted to a slight lateral motion, it describes an ellipse, the
most distant focus of which lies over the point of the magnet. If the lateral motion is stronger,
circular motion results, and if still greater, elliptic motion again takes place, and the tip of the magnet
lies below the nearest focus.
Whirling Tables and Accessory Apparatus.

The machines have a massive iron frame, and they can be used both horizontally and verti-
cally; in the latter case they are screwed on to the table. The rotating parts are most carefully
((instructed; the axis being most accurately machined and ground in so as to run quite true. Bach
of the pieces of auxiliary apparatus made by us fits every machine which we construct. If we arc
required to fit apparatus to whirling tables constructed by other makers, it is desired that the axis
may be sent us, if the apparatus have only to be fitted to the axis. The frame is bored through
laterally from the axis, this boring being provided with a thread for taking various devices on either
side. There are supplied with the machines a disc with pin for inserting in the axis of the whirling
table and with nut for fixing siren-discs, colour-discs, a stroboscopic cylinder, or the like to the
lower end of the axis; also a hook at the lower end of the axis for suspending pendulums, etc.
Special attention may be directed to the larger Machines Nos. fd.it.V.i et se<|., which can be
screwed horizontally to the table and thus admit of being employed in many different wa\ s.
In order to show the many-sided uses of the whirling tables, the following apparatus, taken
from all branches of physics, can be used with the tables, and we would remark specially that they
mostly replace isolated apparatus, and are therefore much cheaper than the latter.
ri.
5681.
Whirling Tables. To pages 278 and 279.
62 '
Notice.
NEW! Whirling Table NEW!

with Electric Motor Drive and Double Wheel Gearing.
A. For Direct Current.
In the construction of this new pattern Whirling Table care has been taken that the revolutions
of the machine can be altered within the widest limits without the power applied to the axis dimi-
nishing appreciably. In the case of hand-driven Whirling Tables the speed and power can be chosen
;it will. If, however, the whirling table is driven by an electric motor, it generally runs at too great
a speed for most experiments. If the speed of the motor is decreased by inserting a
resistance, the
power applied to the axis is correspondingly reduced, and, in addition, the speed is influenced in
various manners by friction. A satisfactory mode of driving is therefore unobtainable in this manner.
These conditions are considerably ameliorated by our fitting the machine with a simple intermediate
gearing which considerably decreases the speed of the motor. The machine, however, was only
rendered perfect by fitting it with a double gearing. There are thus two driving pulleys running at
different speeds at our disposal. The speed of the two pulleys is as 1 4. :
The gearing of the motor axis on the first driving pulley is 3 10. The speed of the motor
:
can be further regulated within wide limits by a controlling resis-

tance. By selecting this arrangement it is possible to vary the
speed of the whirling table between 30 1100 r. p. m. From numerous
exhaustive experiments we have found that these limits suffice for
all experiments. The wheels are constructed partly of "Vulcan-
fibre" with a view to reducing noise to a minimum.
8951 A. 1:9. 8951 B. 1:6.
The whirling table has a massive iron frame and can be used both vertically and horizon-
tally. Fig. 8951 A
shews the whirling table arranged vertically, ready for use and for taking a colour
disc, siren discs, or the like; while Fig. 8951 B shews the machine placed horizontally. The rotating
parts are constructed in the best possible manner; the axis is very carefully machined and ground
in so as to run true. The arrangement of the axis and the fixing of the auxiliary apparatus are
the same as before. Auxiliary apparatus already available fit this machine without any alteration.
The frame is bored out laterally to the axis, and is tapped for taking different devices on
either one side or the other. A disc with pins for inserting in the axis of the machine, and with nut
for fixing siren discs, colour discs, a
stroboscopic drum, or the like, also a hook fitted to the lower
end of the axis, for suspending pendulums, etc., are given in with each whirling table.
The Electric Motor is fixed to the frame of the whirling table by means of a slider. The slider
can be moved by a screw, thus allowing the driving cord to be tightened or loosened. The regu-
lating resistance, a switch and a plug box are firmly fixed on the frame. This arrangement com-
bined everything necessary for working and the machine can be connected at once to the electric
supply: it is only necessary to set up the machine where it is desired to use it, connect the current
lead fitted to it to the electric supply with the aid of the plug contact, and the Whirling Table
is ready for use. No further wire connections require to be made beforehand. The weight of the
motor renders the machine so firm that it is only in exceptional cases necessary to screw it down
to the lecture table. In order to ensure the machine a firmer position and to prevent scratching
the lecture table, it is fitted with rubber feet.
M. 62 6. Cl. 207. 6224.

To pages 278 and 279. Whirling Tables.
The manipulation of the Whirling Table fitted with electric motor has been found to be most
advantageous since the experimenter has both his hands free and does not require to remain in he t
immediate neighbourhood of the machine in order to explain the phenomena being demonstrated,
but can even go to the blackboard.
The arrangement of this machine presents the further advantage that the motor can be used.
without removing it from the stand, for driving the influence machine or other apparatus, and this
at any speeds. Fig. 8051/60435 shews an influence machine being driven.
The Whirling Table fitted with motor drive is manufactured in two sizes: Fig. No. S!C>1
shews the smaller pattern, which is sufficient for most experiments.
Whirling Tables with D. C. Electric Motor Drive, Figs. 8951 A and B and 8951/60 435; small Pattern,
with electric motor, compound wheel gearing, regulating resistance, switch, plug contact and
J metres flexible.
Qf
Pressure, Volts
Hp ^
110 110
1/g ^220
1/g
220
With D. C. Motor
List No. 8951 8952 8953 8954
Price, 7.0.0 8.0.0 7.10.0 8.10.0
If the pressure is different from above the prices are varied accordingly.
Large Whirling Tables with D. C. Electric Motor Drive, with electric motor, compound wheel gearing,
regulating resistance, switch, plug contact and 2 m flexible, for connecting up to Direct Current.
Of Vl6 HP V. Vl6 Vg
Pressure, Volts 110 110 220 220
With D. C. Motor List No. 8962 8964
8961 8963
Price, 8. 0. 9. 0. 8. 10. 9. 10.
The prices are proportionately changed when the pressure varies.
B. For Alternating and Three-phase Current.

From the point of view of construction the Whirling Tables having Alternating Current
Motors do not differ in any way from those for Direct Current. The special nature of the A. ( .
motors does not, however, allow quite such a wide degree of variation in speed as the D. C. motor.
For this reason and, more especially, because in the case of the A. C. motors, the power decreases
with diminution in speed, it is desirable to give the preference to a Whirling Table with D. C. motor
in all cases in which Direct Current is available or
can be easily provided.
8951/60435. 1:12. 8965. 1 : 8.
Fig. 8965 shews a Whirling Table driven by Alternating Current. The speed can be varied
from about 80 1000p. m. r.
On three-phase networks A. C. motors arc also used, being connected up to one phase only.
This is permitted by most electricity works in view of the low efficiency of the motor in question.
Whirling Tables with A. C motor drive, Fig. 8965; small Pattern, with
electric motor, compound
wheel gearing, regulating resistance, switch, plug contact and 2 metres flexible, for connecting up
to an A.C. network or to one phase of a three-phase supply.
Wit li A. C. Motor, Of HP i
Vio Vio
Frequency 50 Pressure, Volts I
110
(100 pole alternations List No. 8965 8966
9. 10. 10. 0.
per second) Price,
wheel gearing, regulating
Large Whirling Tables with A. C. Motor Drive, with electric motor, compound
resistance, switch, plug contact and 2 metres flexible, for connecting up to an A. C. network
or to one phase of a three-phase supply.
With A. C. Motor Of HP V 10
Frequency 50 Pressure, Volts 110 220
100 pole alternations
(
I^l No. 8967 8968
Price, 1 10. 10. 11. 0.
per second)
C'l. 11229, 11227.
No. Centrifugal Force. Whirling Tables. 279
51 960. 51 969, 51 949, 51 975, 52 035. 1 : 7.
51.949. Whirling Table, for hand drive, Figs. A and B, small pattern (W. D., Fig. 75 A; s. d.
Fr. phys. Techn. I, 2, Fig. 3195) 1.15.0
51.950. --idem, with 3-stage Pulley (M. T., p. 66) . . 2. 2.0
Whirling Tables, driven by Electric Motor, Figure, small pattern, with plug contact and
2 m flexible.
With D. C. Motor
of HP VM Vs
Pressure 110 110 220 220 Volts
and
List No. 51,951 51,952 51,953 51,954
Begulator-Starter Price 8.0.0
6. 10. 6. 15. 8.5.0
With A r ( Of HP i/.. Vs V,e
i,. TVTntnr
^
VVUI1 A. ITlOlOr,
Pr^sure .110 110 220 220 Volts
Freauencv 50-
witE L st *" *** 51,958
Stfrter'
p
Price 6. 15. # 8. 5. 7. 0. 8. 10.
pressure and current differ from above the prices vary to correspond. )
If 1
51.959. Large Whirling Table,Figure, with massive frame, length: 80 cm, width: 37 cm,
with two screw clamps on the frame for firmly clamping the machine in a vertical
position. A clamp for clamping the table in a horizontal position is given in . . .
j
3.^0.0
- - with wide feet, Figure, for standing upright on the table instead
51.960. idem,
of clamping; can also be used horizontally 3. 5.0
Large Whirling Table, with Electric Motor Drive, Figure, length: 80 cm, width: 37 cm,!
with 2 screw clamps on the frame for firmly clamping in a vertical position; a screw
clamp for horizontal clamping is given in.
With D. C. Motor, of HP
without Tachometer,
but with
Eegulator Starter
With A. C. Motor,
Frequency 50,
without Tachometer
or Starter
280 Whirling Tables and Accessory Apparatus. No. :.i HO
51 972. 1 : 8. 51977. 1:10. 51978. 1:7. 51979. 1:10.
51.970. Counting Mechanism, Figure, fitted to the preceding whirling tables; after every
s. <l
100 revs, this device rings a bell O.ir.d

The above prise only holds good when the counter is ordered at the sano timo as the whirling
table. If required afterwards, the price is increased.
51.971. Tachometer, Fig. 51,962, fitted to the whirling table; this instruments always
shows the momentary r. p. m 6.15.0
51.972. Electric Motor, Figure, rotating on base with floor stand, with attachment for
using it as a whirling table; with cord pulley for driving stirrjcrs, electrolytic stands,
etc, For 110 volt D. C., 1 /a HP 7. O.o
51.973.
-- idem, for 220 volt D. C 7. 5.0
Prices quoted on application for other kinds of current and voltages.
-- with belt pulley instead of the cord pulley Extra 0. 5.0

51.974. idem,
force increases
51.975. Centrifugal Apparatus, Figure, for showing: (1) that the centrifugal
with the speed of rotation, and that it is greater with the same speed and with large
radius of rotation than with small; (2) that the centrifugal force at Ihe same speed is
greater the smaller the radius of rotation (W. D., Fig. 82 B [75 B]; Fr. phys. Techn. I.
0. 1S.O
2, Fig. 3219)
5 1 .976. 2 Cylinders of Wood and Cork, in iron frame, Figure (W. P., Fig. 76), Double-star
0- '' u
Apparatus
51.977. 2 Brass Balls, Figure, whose masses are as 1 :
2, in iron frame (Fr. phys. Techn.
0. 7.o
I, 2, Fig. 3216)
51.978. Cup and Ball (August's): (llass cup with balls of e<|iial diameter but different weights.
Figure (W. I)., p. 101 [93]; Fr. phys. Techn. I, 2, Fig. 3220; M. T., p. 71) ... 0. !.(
51.979.
_ i . 3:!I7,
4lis7, i:!2. :>71*.

No. 51998. Whirling Tables and Accessory Apparatus. 281
51 993. 1 : 8.
51983. 1:6. 51 987. 1 : 51 996. 1 : 6. 51 997. 1 : 6.
51.980. Whirling Apparatus with 8 Spherical Pendulums, for showing that the centrifugal force <1
increases with speed of rotation, and is higher when the radius of rotation is large than
when small, the time of run being the same in both cases 0.10.0
51.981. Pendulum Race (Puchs'), with double-cord pendulums of various lengths, the balls
of which are always raised to the same height (Ztschr. f. d. phys. u. chem. U., 16, 1903,
p. 343; Fr. phys. Techn. I, 2, Fig. 3222) . 0.10.0
51,98-'. Watt's Pendulum, Figure (W. D., p. 101 [93]) 0.11.0
51.983. Watt's Ball Governor, with a complete throttle flap valve, in section, Figure
(M. T., p. 71) 1. 8.0
51.984. Angle Lever Apparatus (Fr. phys. Techn. I, 2, Fig. 3203 [I, Fig. 426]) 0.16.6
51.985. Spring Balance, for showing the strength of centrifugal force, Figure (Fr. phys.
Techn. I, 2, Fig. 3200) 0. 15.
51.986.
- -
idem, measuring the centrifugal force (Ztschr.
Hartl's, for f. d. phys. u. chem.
V., 10, 1897, p. 123; Fr. phys. Techn. I, 2, Fig. 3204) 2.10.0
51.987. Centrifugal Balance, Figure 0.18.0
. 1 ,988. - - idem (Friedr. C. G. Miiller's) (M. T., Fig. 39), with variable centrifugal mass
and rule for measuring the radius of swing 1.12.0
51.989. Emery Disc for hardness tests: can also be used for grinding small tools (M. T., p. 51) 0. 6.0
51.990. Flattening Ring, Figure (W. D., p. 102 [93]) 0. 7.0
51.991. Sphere of Glycerine Clay, with suspension (W. D., Fig. 84 [77]; M. T., p. 71) . . 0. 6.0
51.992. Apparatus for showing the oblateness of a sphere of oil and Saturn's ring .... 1. 0.
This apparatus is well adapted for showing the flattening of plastic rotating bodies.
lh
51 .993. Glass Vessel for Mercury and Coloured Water, Figure (Fr. phys. Techn., 6 Edn.,
I, Fig. 546; M. T., p. 70) 0. 4.0
51.994. Glass Balloon for hanging on the lower end of the axis 0. 4.0
Tiie vessel is filled with water and closed with a sheet of cardboard, the air-pressure preventing
its escape. On rotating the balloon the cardboard can be taken away without any of the water escaping.
51.995. Cylindrical Attachment, with rule: can be used as a tachometer (M. T., p. 69) . . - 0. 5. it
51.996. Angle with 2 obliquely placed tubes for mercury and coloured water, Figure (Fr.
Edn., I, Fig. 545; M. T., p. 70)
th 0. 6
phys. Techn., 6 7.
51.997. Siphon, with marking rings, Figure (M. T., Fig. 41) 0. 9.0
j
51,99*. Attachment with 3 disconnected tubes (M. T., Fig. 42) 0.12.0
CI. 5731, 5729. .'.325.
65u', 4961, 5728, 57J2.

282 Whirling Tables and Accessory Apparatus. No. ">] 11119 -
51 999. 1 : 7.
52000. 1:10. 52 002. 1 : G. 52 003. 1 : 5.
52 008. 1 : 12. 52 009. 1 : 5. 52 015. 1 : 8.
s. d.
51,999. Apparatus (Bertram's) for clearing cloudy liquids by rotation, Figure (M. T., p. 72) 0.10. (I
The 2 glass vessels are placed horizontally during rotation.
52.000. Model of a Draining and Drying Apparatus, on the centrifugal principle, Figure 0. 15.
52.001.
-- idem, (Haiti's), with glass protecting cylinder (Ztschr. f. d. phys. u. chem. I"..
10, 1897, p. 125; M. T., p. 72) 1. 5.0
52.002.
- -
idem, consisting of glass globe and wire netting, Figure 0.12.0
52.003. Model of Ventilator, Figure (W. D., Fig. 86 [79]), with vane wheel 0.11.0
52.004.
- -
idem, better construction, one wall glazed 1. 5.0
52.005. Centrifugal Pump and Centrifugal Blower (Hartl's) (Ztschr. f. d. phys. u. chem. U.,
10, 1897, p. 125) 2. 15.0
52.006. Wind Vane and Wind Wheel (Friedr. C. G. Miiller's), for demonstrating the Propeller
Fan; the wind vane is to be placed on the whirling table and sets the ventilator in
motion (M. T., p. 38) 0. 9.0
52.007. Apparatus for Stable and Unstable Axes (Hartl's), masses adjustable, for varying tin-
centre of gravity and moment of mass (Ztschr. f. d. phys. u. chem. U., 10, 1897, p. 122; j
Fr. phys. 'Techn. I, 2, Fig. 3224, 3225) 2. 0.0
52.008. Apparatus for Free Axes, Figure (W. D., Fig. 87 [80]) 0. 12.0
52.009. Bohnenberger's Machine, Figure, improved by Poggendorff, for placing on the

whirling table (M. T., p. 72) 1. 7.0
52.010. Apparatus (Sire's) for showing, that rotational motions can generate successive motions,
consisting of a top suspended as a pendulum: for the whirling table (Fr. phys. Techn.
I, 2, Fig. 3252)
1. 10.0
52.011. i d e m, Koppe's (Ztschr. f. d. phys. u. chem. I".. 4, 1890, p. 77; Fr. phys. Techn.
I, 2, Fig. 3253) 0.18.0
52.012. Ring with Hook, for suspending from the lower cud of the axis by a cord (\V. !>..
Fi-. 88 [81]; M. T., Fig. 44) 0. 1.9

52.013. Rod with Hook, also for suspension 0. 1.3
. Pendulum with dissymmetrical system of masses (M. T., Fig. -10) 0. 4.0
ci. :.;:,(>. :,:isn, :.7i"

;>7'J7. f..12T, 4-.IH.Y
Auxiliary Apparatus for Whirling Tables. 283
52021. 1:5. 52025. 1 : 10.
52017. 1:9. 52028. 1:8. 52030. 1:9.
52.015. Apparatus (Eisenlohr's) for showing that the rotation of the plane of oscillation of s d
Foucault's pendulum is proportional to the sine, of the geographical latitude: for placing
on the whirling table (W. D., Fig. 95 [88]) 1. 5.0
52.016. Pendulum Ball, painted half black and
half yellow, for proving the conservation of
the plane of oscillation, Foucault's experiment (W. D., p. 117 [108]), for hanging on
the lower end of the axis of the whirling table 0. 1.6
52.017. Pendulum for Foucault's Experiment, Figure, with stage and suspension clip . 1. 0.0
52.018. 5 Stroboscopic Discs, with black and coloured moving images 0. 6.0
52.019. Stroboscopic Cylinder (Quincke's) with 1 set paper strips, for demonstrating pendulum
oscillations, longitudinal and transverse oscillations, vibrations of ether particles, the
reflection of cord undulations, vibrations of strings and air strata in pipes, the vibrations
of liquid particles and of successive transverse waves 0. 14.
52.020. Strips alone 0. 6.0

52.021. Siren-Disc, of metal, with 4 rows of holes, giving the major chord when blown,
F i g u r e, without' whirling table 0. 5.
52.022.
- -
idem, w'th 8 rows of holes, giving the major or minor common chord, or, if
specially desired, the chromatic scale , 0. 7.
- - with 4 rows of holes pierced obliquely

52.023. idem, 0. 9.
52.024. Wave Siren-Disc (Konig's), in disc form . . . 0.15.0

A wave line, formed by the algebraic additionof 4 sine curves, receives a current of air from a
slotted aperture, the air being made to vibrate as if 4 tones were sounded simultaneously. The human
ear then separates this compound form of vibration into its constituents in such manner that prima,
third, fifth and octave are separately heard.
51', 025. Wave Siren-Disc (Konig's), large pattern, of brass, Figure, in various tone ranges
Each 3. 6.0
52.026. Siren-Disc (Oppelt's) 0.16.0
52.027. Siren-Disc (Appunn's) 3. 6.0
For complete data regarding siren-discs, see Acoustics Section.
52.028. Savart's Toothed Wheels, 4 wheels mounted on one axis, giving a chord. Wheels
of zinc, Figure 0. 9.
- - with brass wheels
52.029. idem, 0.12.0
52.030. Apparatus for proving Doppler's principle, Figure, as suggested by van Gulik
(Ztschr. f. d. phys. u. chem. U., 14, p. 288), without whirling table 0.13.0
C'l. 1051 1, 659,

5390, 5724, 4963.
284 Whirling Tables and Accessory Apparatus. No. :,i'
B
i o
52 031. 1 : 7. 52 038. 1 : 6. 52 040. 1 : 6. 52 041 A. 1:6.
52 045. 1 : 7. 52046. 1:10.
52.031. Rotating Mirror Box, 120 mm side of cube, for analysing acoustic flame images, see
Figure, without gas-flame manometer
52.032. Rotating Mirror (Reichert's), with only one obliquely placed mirror (M.P.I, Fig. 648 [675])
V_',033. Gas Flame Manometer with rotating Burner, with rubber hose and sound glass, can
be used for flame images without mirror (cf. W. D., Fig. 243 [229]), for the whirling
table 1. I.
52.034. 1 Set Colour Discs, 7 different single-colour discs and 1 with the 7 spectrum tints
The single-colour discs are cut out radially as suggested by Maxwell, so as to mix the coloured
lights.
52.035. Colour Disc with the 7 spectrum colours, painted as clearly as possible on a metal disc,
giving white when rotated, size 120 mm, see F i g. 51,969
.">:.'. 036. i d e m, size 250 mm

52.037. Disc Apparatus for alternating mixed colours, for the whirling table
The colours of a sector disc can be exposed to any proportion by circular sections cut out of
a pasteboard disc, and be mixed by rotating.
52.038. Coloured Convex Surface (or Cylinder) (Kolbe's), Figure, serving as complement
to the colour discs (Ztschr. f. d. phys.
"
u. clieni. I"., 8, 1894/95, p. 243). without wood
cone (see No. 52,040) Each
52.039. 14 Colour Cylinders (Kolbe's), all different, without wood cone (see No. 52,040). .
::.'. u Hi. Wood Cone with pins, Figure, fitting the whirling table
i 1 r.r.sr, c.iii, fiiw. fir,:i,
664, 5723, :>3!i.V

No. 52051. Auxiliary Apparatus for Whirling Tables. 285
52 047. l : 0. 52 050. 1 : 5.
52 049. 1 : 8.
52,041. Screen of Bristol Board, graduated, Fig. A, and with 2 sliders, F i

g. B, on adjust- s. d.
able stand 0. 9.6
- - without stand
2,042. idem, 0. 4.6
52.043. Oscillating Prism, Fig. 51,949 B, p. 278, for mixing the spectrum tints (M. P.,
8 th Edn., 11,1, Fig. 137), the prism being 60x30 mm. Price, without whirling table 1. 5.0
2,044. --idem, 70 x35 mm 1.10.0
52,045. Glass Globe with a solution of Glycerine and Soap (as suggested
th
by Eisenlohr), Figure
(Fr. phys. Techn., 6 Edn., II, p. 788), for demonstrating Newton's rings of thin
liquid films 0. 7.0
The glass glote should be slightly warmed before the experiment is made until large soap films
form when it is shaken. One of these films is introduced into the upper half of the glass vessel so
that it is vertical to the axis; if now the globe is carefully rotated by means of the whirling table
the film referred to shows the colour rings in a very beautiful manner.
th
512.046. Phosphoroscope (Becquerel's), Figure (M. P., 9 Edn., 11,1, Fig. 257), with stand
and universal clamp for firmly fixing the various bodies 2. 0.0
5L'.i47. Polarisation Apparatus, Figure, for demonstrating the properties of polarised

light, for the whirling table (M. P., II, 1, Fig. 671 [634]) 1.10.0
512.048. Apparatus for boiling by friction water, alcohol or ether (W. D., Fig. 417 [393]) . 0. 5.0
- -
512.049. idem, wnth arrangement for igniting the vapour of the alcohol, Figure . 0. 6.0
512.050. Apparatus (Puluj's) for determining the mechanical equivalent of heat, Figure,
with a thermometer divided in 1 /10 and a screw clamp with pulley, for setting on the
whirling table (W. D., Figs. 418421 [394397]) 5. 5.0
The inner cone is completely insulated by ivory rings. The apparatus is constructed in a thorough
manner, and the experiment can be made with great accuracy.
2,051.
- -
idem, with Whirling Table 7. 0.0
Cl. 5321, 667, 668.

286 Whirling Tables and Accessory Apparatus.
1
52 052 A 52054. 1:8.
52 052 B, 52055. 1 : 10.
52,052. Apparatus (Puluj's), exactly as No. 52,050, with Whirling Table Xo. 51,959, driven s. d.
by electric motor, F i g s. A and B, with 110 volt D. C. Motor and starter for n-.iriilatin.ir
the speed, without wood stand, balance pan, spring balance or screw clamp ....
13. 0.0
Prices quoted on application for different voltages and types of current.
:>!.', or>3. Stand with iron tripod, see F i g. 52,052 A

Wood : . . . . n. <;.<>
52.054. Spring Balance for 250 grams, see Fig. 52,052 A 0. 4.0
52.055. Balance Pan, 50-g weight, see F i g. 52,052 B. For frame, sec No. :.l ,851 a, and pulley
with screw clamp, see No. 51,851 h (I. L'.li
52.056. Apparatus (Rosenberg's), Figure, for explaining the theory of cyclones, anti-
cyclones, monsoons and anti-monsoons (Ztschr. f. d. phys. u. chein. I"., 12, 1899, pp. 335
to 338), without whirling table 1. 1(1.0
Complete description and directions for use on application.
Cl. :l'<7, 3683.

No. 52 ,200. Auxiliary Apparatus for Whirling Tables. 287
..
J
52056,51949. 1:9. 52057, 51949. 1 : 10.
52058. 1 : 10.
52 059. 1 : 9. 52 060. 1 : 5.
52,057. Rotating Device for large Geissler Tubes of 30 50 cm long, Figure, with well s. d.
insulated lead, for induction coils giving a spark of 40 100 mm 1.18.0
52.058. Disc (Poggendorff's), illuminated by Geissler tube, Figure, for proving that the
th
light emitted by Geissler tubes is only apparently continuous (M. P., 9 Edn., Ill,
Fig. 763), with one Geissler tube 0.15.0
52.059. Apparatus for Arago's Magnetism of rotation, Figure (W. D., Fig. 560 [533]) . 1. 4.0
An adjustable glass slab with magnetic needle is arranged over a large rotating copper disc
1
.
On rotating the disc the needle is deflected in the direction of rotation, being itself finally set in
rotation.
52.060. Rotating Magnet, with rotary copper disc above it, Figure (Fr. phys. Techn. II,
1, Fig. 1086) 1. 0.0
Cl. 669. 670,
'
5721,
5719, 674.
288 Whirling Tables and Accessory Apparatus. No. T.2061
52 06ir 1 : 7.
52 062. 1 : 8. 52 065. 1 : 7.
52 064. 1 : 7. 52 086 A. 1:8. 52 066 B. 1:8.
52 067. 1 : 7.
Apparatus for generating Focault Currents in a copper disc rotating between the poles
of an electromagnet, Figure 1. <s.u
When the circuit of an elestro-magnet is closed, a large amount of power is necessary to rotate
the disc very rapidly.
r2,<)2. Apparatus for Unipolar Induction, Fessel and Pliicker's, Figure, with 2 rotating
bar magnets (M. P., <) lh Edn., Ill, Fig. 584) ................... 1. 8.0
52,063. Apparatus for Earth Induction, with rotary wire spiral and commutator, for taking
direct current (Fr. phys. Techn.
off Fig. 1118) ............... II, 1, l. 13.0
.~i2,<)64. idem, with commutator and

- -
rings, Figure, for taking direct and
slip off
alternating current ............................... 1. Kl.o
:>L'.()<;r>. Pacinotti's Ring, as suggested by Biihlmnnn, Figure, with conductor springs

(Fr. pliys. Tedm. II, 1,Fig. 1138), without horse-shoe magnet and vertical galvanometer 1. is. d
When
the ring is rotated ;md a magnet held above, a galvanometer joined up with tlic conductor
springs gives a considerable deflection.
.">-', odd. Apparatus for explaining the Magneto - electric and Dynamo - electric Principle,
Figs. A
The apparatus
and B ..............................
......................
consists of: (a) 1 Pacinotti ring
o.o
15.
(b) 1 Magnet ... ......................

(<) I
Klectni-magiift ......... ............ , 0. l.~>. o
(d) 1 Brush Conductor ..................... I
0. 15.
II. i;73. M22. 676,

675, 677. B7,
tn.
Auxiliary Apparatus for Whirling Table, Moment of Inertia. 289
R'Scmf '
?i)Gw.Og.
-J (
I* --2dm. i
Gew.735g.
2'icni.
* 32cm. - *
(|Antriebgew.50g.
52 069. 1 : 5. 52 070 A. 1:17. 52 070 B. 1 : 12. 52071. 1:15.
52.067. Model of Pacinotti-Gramme Machine, Figure, as suggested by Pfaundler (M. P., s. d.

9 th Edn., Ill, Fig. 659 and 660), for the whirling table, with device for rendering visible
the lines of force; this apparatus can be recommended for explaining the dynamo. Price,
without whirling table 6.10.0
The following pertain to the apparatus: an iron armature with winding, an iron armature, un-
wound, a wood armature with winding, and a frame with paper stretched across for demonstrating
the lines of force.
52.068. Model of a Short-circuited Armature in the Magnetic Field, Figure, Friedr. C.

G. Miiller's (M. T., Fig. 222), for setting on the whirling table, with a squirrel-cage rotor
which can be used either with or without an iron core 2.10.0
52.069. Rotating Thermocouple, Figure, cylindrical form, iron and German silver,
of
with contact spring sliding along the cylinder 0.15.0
When the apparatus is rotated the cylinder becomes heated by the friction of the spring, thus
producing a current which flows from the iron to the German silver according to the position of the
spring.
52.070. Apparatus for determining the Moment of Inertia, Hartl's, Figs. A and B (Ztschr.
f. d.
phys. u. chem. U., 6, 1892, p. 74, and 5, 1891, p. 76) 9. 0.0
The test pieces (rings, discs, bars, rectangular plate) the moment of inertia of which it is desired
to determine can be fixed to a spoke-cross. The release is electro-magnetic. Given in with the
apparatus are 6 test pieces, 2 falling weights, 1 Morse key and leads.
52.071. Moment of Inertia Apparatus (Kurz'), Figure (M. P. I, Figs. 291, 292 [280, 281]),
with cords, 2 loading weights each of J /2 kg and 2 kg, and an excess weight of 50 g;
apparatus 2 high m 3. 10.
For Apparatus for demonstrating the laws of continuity and Cl. 4684,
of inertia, see also p. 251. 680. 602, 603, 3896. 19
290 Mechanics of Solids (Statics and Dynamics). No. 52U7:;
52 075 A. 1:10.
52 073. 1 : 5.
52 076. 1 : 13. 52 075 B. 1 : 30.
52.072. Pendulum for Moment of Inertia (Weinhold's) (W. D., p. 112 [104]), iron rod with * <'
axis in the centre, with 2 bobs each 0.981 kg and 3 bobs each 0.245 kg in weight, with
iron stand and Cardan suspension 2. M.o
52.073. Apparatus for determining the Moment of Inertia by means of torsional oscillations,
Figure (W. u. E. phys. Prakt., Fig. 66), for mirror-reading 2. o. u
The duration of oscillation of the system is observed by means of a telescope \vith cross wires.
first with these bodies, and then without them.
This apparatus is employed in conjunction with a massive frame,, e. ., N'o. .">:_'. 195.
52.074. Moment of Inertia Apparatus (Grimsehl's) (Verh. d. Physikal. Gesellsch. VI,

Nos. 1519; Ztschr. f. d. phys. u. ehem. U., 18, 1905, p. 35) 4. n.o
The discs,arranged so as to rotate, only execute translatory motions when the system is in
oscillation; if the discs are firmly fixed, the total mass only of the system is taken into consideration
in determining the moment of inertia.
52.075. Rotating Disc and Weighted Bar, as suggested by Prof. L. Prandtl, Figs. A and B,
for showing the relations between Angular Velocity and Moment of Inertia (Ztschr. d.
Vercins dcutscher Ingenieure, 1909, pp. 1301 et sc<|.. No. 16, and Figs. 46 and 47 on
text-page 16) 5.1o.o
52.076. Apparatus for the Surface Principle, as suggested b\ I'rol. Hug. Meyer, Figure.
for proving that a rotating mass imparts in an opposite din-el ion an angular velocity
in a co-axial ly rotary mass, this angular velocity corri->pomliiiir to the ratio of the moment
of inertia. With 110 volt D. ('. motor (ZtBChr. d. V. d. I., 53, iw.i. pp. 1303 et wq.,
Xo. 17. and text-sheet 16, Fig. 48) 8. 0.0
Cl 51*.
.Miii'.i. 55511.
No. Moment of Inertion, Surface Principle, Counteraction, Tops. 291
52 080. 1 : 3. 52 082. 1 : 6.
52 083. 1 : 3. 52 084. 1 : 8.
52.077. Counteraction Apparatus (Fuchs'), for demonstrating the Surface Principle (Ztschr. s. d
f. d. phys. u. chem. TL, 15, 1902, p. 218; Fr. phys. Techn. I, 2, Fig. 3277) .... 1. 5.0
52.078. Schmidt's Top, Figs. A and B (W. D., Figs. 89 92 [8285]), with stand and
suspension 1. 2.0
52.079. --idem, Figure, in ring, with stand, can also be used suspended from a cord 1. 0.
52.080. 3 Tops of different sizes, for placing over each other, Figure (Fr. phys. Techn.
I, 2, Fig. 3248 [I, Fig. 438]) 2. 0.0
52.081.
- - i d e
m, with stand and suspension for 1 top, as No. 52,078, and with pointed
attachment and brass rod (Fr. phys. Techn. I, 2, Fig. 3249) 2. 8.0
52.082. Model for explaining the main phenomenon in the Gyroscope, F i

g u r o, as suggested
by Hammerl (Ztschr. f. d. phys. u. chem. U., 1892, p. 68) 1.10.0
52,083. Schmidt's Top with Hollow Sphere of sheet iron and with stand, Figure (Fr. phys.
Techn. I, 2, Fig. 3234 [I, p. 513]) . . . 1. 4.0
j
If it isattempted to place the sphere in another plane, with the moving top, by turning the !
hand, a resistance is felt as if the axis of the top were held firmly in its position by unseen forces.
52,084. Gyrostat (Gray's) Figure (Fr; phys. Techn. I, 2, Figs. 3235, 3236) C. 0.0
Cl. 605, 806, 607,
609, 532,
6'J8, 498 j. 19*
292 Mechanics of Solids (Statics and Dynamics). No. Bans:,.
52 089. 1 : 6.
52 086. 1 : 7.
52 088. 1 : 3. 52 092. 1 : 8. 52 093. 1 : 5.
52,085. Curve Top (Koppe's) (Ztschr. f. d. phys. u. chem. U., 4, 1890, p. 80; Fr. phys. Techn. I
s. d.
I, 2, Fig. 3244) 2.10.0
52.086. Fessel's Top, Figure, with 1 ring (Fr. phys. Techn. I, 2, Fig. 3239) 2. 0.0
52.087.
- -
idem, with 2 rings 2.10.0
52.088. Bohnenberger's Apparatus, with excess weight, for explaining the conservation of
the plane of rotation, with stand, (Fr. phys. Techn. I, 2, Fig. 3243; M. P. I,
Figure
Fig. 319) 1. 8.0
the disc is set into rapid rotation, the axis of rotation preserves its position in space, even
If
if the apparatus is moved in any manner by raising and turning the base.
If required to act as a Fessel top, the ring must be firmly fixed.
52.089.
- -
idem, improved by Poggendorff (Eisenlohr, Fig. 78), Figure, with device
for driving 3. 0.0
i
52.090.
- - i <1 <
in, for the whirling table, see No. 52,009, p. 282 1. 7.0
Trice
52.091. Top, as suggested by Schliek (Skutsch's model) (Ztschr. d. V. d. I., 52, 1908, p. 464) on appli-
cation.
52.092. Polytrope (Sire's), Figure, for combining a number of rotations (Fr. phys. Techn.
I, 2, Fig. 3254)
12. 0.0
The apparatus has a spur drive and allows of demonstrating the following: 1) That the axe>
of rotation endeavour to take a parallel position. 2) That the rotations always take place in the
same direction, thus showing: (a) the determination of meridian, (b) the determination of the ii^ra- iri
phical latitude of any pl.i -e. (c) the invariability of the plane of rotation, (d) the earl h's own rotation,
(e) the conical motion of the earth: the nocturnal equation, nutation, (f) parallel progressive motion
of the earth's axis in space.
Tops, Pendulum. 293
52 094. 1 : 5.
52 095 B. 1:4. 52099. 1:16. 52 098. 1 : 10.
52.093. Polygonal Pendulum (Gruey's), Figure, in cavdanic suspension, with frame (Fr. s. d.
phys. Techn. I, 2, Fig. 3384) 3.10.0

the top is wound up and the pendulum rotated out of the vertical, the point of the pendulum
If
describes a stellate, spherical polygon; if the top is not rotating, the pendulum swings as an ordinary
pendulum.
52.094. Conical Pendulum (Gruey's), Figure, with frame . 2.10.0

The suspension of the top, of rubber, is twisted a number and the top released in a
of times
vertical position without any jar. The pendulum then describes a gradually widening cone, which
again becomes narrow until the suspension cord is twisted in a vertical position in the opposite direction
and a reverse motion of the pendulum takes place, etc.
52.095. Top Apparatus (Wanka's), Figs. A

and B, with stand, for setting up and with
special clip device for suspending the top (Ztschr. f. d. phys. u. chem. U., 11, 1898,
P- 235) 2.14.0
Each top can be fixed in the three main positions perpendicular to each other.
52,096. Alternating Gyroscopic Tree (Gruey's) (Fr. phys. Techn. I, 2, Fig. 3250) 5. 0.0
52.097.
- -
idem, the top being rotated by its own weight instead of by rubber cords . 5. 0.0
52.098. Pendulum Stand, Figure, light wood frame, with 3 brass balls and 1 wood ball,
on single cords 0.15.0
52,099. --idem, of iron, Figure, with 6 pendulums on double threads, on massive

base, with adjustable swivels for the cords 0.18.0
Two pendulums with discs hanging in different planes, 2 with bobs, each 900 mm long, and
2 shorter, viz., 400 and 100 mm
long respectively.
Cl. 33 U, 3945,
4Kf>3, 17, 616.
294 Mechanics of Solids (Statics and Dynamics). X... 5!
52102. 1:12. 52105. 1:12. 52 109. 1 : 14.
52,100. Frame with Pendulums, of. F i g. 51,850, p. 265 (W. D., Fig. 93 [86]), with 3 brass s. d.
balls and 1 wood ball on double threads 0.15.0
52.101. 4 Pendulums, as No. 52,100, separately, for use with frame No. 51,151 0. 3.0
52.102. Pendulum Frame (Friedr. C. G. Miiller's), Figure, with 4 brass balls, 2 of these
with 2 hooks and 2 with 1; 1 wood ball with hook; 1 lead ball with hook; 1 bearing
for reversing pendulums; 1 knife-edge for disc pendulums, wire figures, etc.; 1 angle
piece; 4 spiral springs for demonstrating the spring pendulum; 1 physical and 1 re-
versing pendulum; 1 disc pendulum (M. T., Figs. 46 and 51) 3. 4.0
52.103. Pendulum for explaining the Laws of the Pendulum, simple type, iron rod, graduated,
with adjustable bob and wall arm 0. 18.
5LM04. Maxwell's Pendulum 0.12.0

The pendulum consists of a rod 80 cm in length, the upper end of which can turn about an
axis. A cord can be wound round this axis and a metal ball suspended from the cord, so that tin-
periodicity of both pendulums can be made to coincide.
52.105. Pendulum with directly measurable length, Figure, Grimsehl's (Ztschr. f. d. phys.
u. chem. U., 18, 1905, p. 36) 5.10.0
The pendulum has two knife-edges, 1m
apart; the, pendulum is hung upon the- upper knife
-
edg<-, tin- hob resting at its centre of gravity on the lower one, thus the pendulum only undergoes
a translatory, small circular motion when swung. The moment of insertia of the disc is negligible
when the pendulum is swinging. The pendulum accordingly swings like a mathematical pendulum
the length of which is equal to the distance between the two knife-edges.
52.106. Compensating Pendulum, on stand, pendulum 0.5 m long: see No. 51.<J!t:>;i . . . 1. 4.0
52.107.
- -
idem, with 9 brass and steel rods, beating l
/ seconds: see Fig. 51,695, p. 215 2. 10.
Kindly compare the Pendulum Stands for fitting to the Lecture Tables Nos. 50.097 and 50,098, pp. 18 and 19, and the
Frame No. 51,151, p. 206, and 51.851, p. 265.
I, .Mm',, r.lli
For Seconds Pendulums, see Section --Measurement of Time", pp. '24.', and -Mil.
No. .',2113 a.
Reversing Pendulums. 295
52110. 1:15. 52112. 1:13. 52113. 1:16. 52 113 a. 1:18.
s. d.
52.108. Reversing Pendulum (Weinhold's) (W. D., p. 115 [106]), of wood, with wall bracket 0. 9.0
- -
52.109. idem, Prick's (Fr. phys. Techn. I, 2, Fig. 3356 [Fig. 476]), Figure, iron rod
with 2 knife-edges and graduation, with 2 bobs (lead) and wall arm suspension . . 1. 0.0
52.110.
- -
idem, can also be used for experiments on the moment of inertia, Figure,
with 2 bobs each of 1 kg weight, 2 bobs each of 0.25 kg, and a small bob, with stand
and Cardan suspension (Fr. phys. Techn. I, 2, Fig. 3354 [I, Fig. 477]) . 2. 8.0
52.111. Demonstration Pendulum (reversible), of brass and iron, for showing the laws of motion
of the compound pendulum, swing I 1 /, seconds, with stand 6. 5.0
52.112. Reversing Pendulum (Kater's), simple pattern, Figure, with 1 bob and two ad-
justing weights, in Cardan suspension, on stand with levelling screws 2.15.0
52.113. Reversing Pendulum (Kater's), Figure, well and substantially constructed: length
between knife-edges, exactly 1 m; the weight adjusted by micrometer screw; graduation
with vernier, with wall bearing and arresting device. The total length of the pendulum
is 1.7 m
(Gan.-Man., Fig. 58). In box, without stand 12. 0.0
52,113 a. - - i d e m, with stand and box, Figure 14. 0.0
Cl. 620, 621, 1122, 5281.

296 Mechanics of Solids (Statics and Dynamics). No. 52114
52 116. 1 : 8. 52 117. 1 = 8. 52118. 1:6.
52120. 1:14. 52123. 1:10. 52 124 A. 1:15.
52.114. Sheet Iron Pendulum (W. D., Figs. 94, 73 B and C [Figs. 87, 66 B and C]), for proving,
that the periods of swing are equal for axes parallel to each other at the same distance
apart from the centre of gravity; the pendulum suspended as in Fig. 51,877, p. 269 0. !.">.(>
52.115.
-- idem, without suspension, assuming that Apparatus No. 51,877 is available . 0. 8.0
(Ilillig's), Figure, for demonstrating the change

52.116. Pendulum Apparatus of velocity
of a swinging motion, with stand and adjustable glass plate (Fr. phys. Techn. I, 2,
4. (i.o
Fig. 3460)
A load pendulum is suspended on a frame in such manner that swing* accurately in a plane.
it
The pendulum weight has a spring which can swing easily and -write on a blackened glass plate. (In one
side of the frame is an arresting device for releasing the pendulum weight, this devid- l>ein<: arranged
-ii ihiit the pen is released simultaneously i>y the lock action. An arresting device ia fitted at the otnei
side of the frame, for catching the pendulum. The tracing style leaves a waxy line behind it on the
glass slali; on the return journey, during which it docs not exert a -u inking motion of
itself, it traces
an arc. which cuts the sine line. The individual sections on this arc (pendulum line) are the tracks
traversed the pendulum during equal periods and they therefore demonstrate the various pendulum
by
velocities.
ci. IIL-:I. ii-M. B2->.

:.c,7i'. .V.7I. .'.7WI.
Single and Double Pendulums, Vibrations. 297
4:5
5:6
6:7
52 124 B. 52 126. 1 : 12. 52127. 1:13.
52,117. Pendulum Apparatus (Mach's), Figure, with adjustable pendulum plane and s. d.
graduated arc (M. P. I, Fig. 150 [157]; Fr. phys. Techn. I, 2, Fig, 3343 [I, Fig. 479]) 1.10.0
."2,118. Cross Pendulum (Oberbeck's), Figure, for demonstrating the laws of the physical
pendulum (Ztschr. f. d. phys. u. chem. U., 1, 1887/88, p. 253 Fr. phys. Techn. I, 2, Fig. 3355
;
[I, Fig. 480]) 1. 4.0
52.119.
- - i d c in, without stand, for use with the Mach pendulum apparatus stand No. 52,117 0. 16.0
52.120. Spring Pendulum (Prof. Eug. Meyer's), Figure, for demonstrating the individual
periodicity of a system, the periodicity of a periodic force, the forced oscillations, the
static deflection, resonance and the critical periodicity of a force (Z. d. V. d. I, 53, 1909,
pp. 1301 et seq., No. 18, and text-sheet 16, Fig. 49) 2. 5.0
52.121. Model for Ship Oscillations, as suggested by Schlick (Z. d. V. d. I., 53, 1909, p. 1301 Price
et seq., No. 20, and text-sheet 16, Fig. 51) on appli-
cation
.">-', 12.3. Galilean Escapement Pendulum, Figure: see also No. 51,811, p. 258 0.14.0
52,1.24. Double Pendulum (Airy's), Figs. A and B (Fr. phys. Techn. I, 2, Fig. 3389 [I,
Fig. 493]), for demonstrating Lissajous' curves by means of blue sand 1. 0.0
.">2.125. -- idem, without stand, for drawing the curve by ink (M. T., Fig. 50) . . . . 0.12.0
52.126. Double Pendulum (Oberbeck's), Figure, for demonstrating co-oscillation (Fr.

phys. Techn. I, 2, Fig. 3398 [I, Fig. 496]; Ztschr. f.d. phys. u. chem. U., 1,1887/88,
p. '254) 1. 0.0
52. 127. Double Pendulum (Lorenz'), Figure, for studying combined oscillations on the
flat, specially suitable for the oscillations of bells and clappers 6. 0.0
Cl. 627, 6iC, Mi:..

298 Mechanics of Solids (Statics and Dynamics).
52 128. 1 : 5. 52 129. 1 : 4.
s. d.
52.128. Apparatus for Foucault's Pendulum Experiment, Figure... 2.10.0

The 10 cm diameter iron ball, weighing about 4 kg, is suspended from an iron plate by means
of a fine steel wire. By unscrewing a milled screw this ball can be removed from the wire. The
centre of gravity of the ball is determined in mercury. The sheet metal disc is covered with sand
during the experiment. In ordering, please state length of suspension wire desired.
52.129.
-- idem (Weinhold's), Figure (W. D., Figs. 9698 [8991]) 4. 5.0
turned, cast iron ball, 10 cm in diameter and weighing 4 kg, is fastened to a
The accurately
steel Cardanic suspension by means of a fine steel wire. This ball swings over a paper-covered metal
disc which can be raised by a lever. A brush, filled with coloured glycerine, and inserted in the ball,
leaves a coloured line behind only when the plate is raised.
52,130.
- -
idem, with 20 cm diameter ball, weighing 30 kg, suitable for lofty rooms .
* 52,131. Apparatus (Edelmann's) for Foucault's Pendulum Experiment, for objective pro-
jection, Figure (Wied. Ann., 45, 1892, p. 187), with device for projecting . . . 9.10. (I
A magnet is inserted in the pendulum underneath. When the pendulum is swinging the niii.nnei
swings over a soft-iron knife-edge fitted on the rotary vertical axis. By magnetic attraction this knife-
edge is always brought into the predominating plane of the pendulum.
52,132. Projection Device, separately 5.10.0
52.133. Contact Device, Figure, for the balls used in the Foucault pendulum experiment,
Edn., Fig. 99; Ztschr. f. d. phys. u. chem. U.,
th
as suggested by Weinhold (W. D., 4
17, 1904, p. 198), with stand .......................... 1. 0.0
Contact is effected by the internal friction of a liquid (coloured water).
52.134. Haiti's Model for explaining Foucault's Gyroscope (Pendulum) Experiment (Fr. pli\>.
Techn. I, 2, Fig. 3259) ............................. o.o
52.135. Torsion Pendulum with Accessories, as suggested by Friedr. C. G. Miiller, comprising

an iron rod and a circular disc with clamp (M. T., Fig. 52), with lead weights inserted.
with 4 suspension wires of 3 different materials 0.0
U-Tube for oscillations of liquids (M. T., Fig. 49) 0. 8.0

52.136.
52.137. Apparatus for demonstrating and explaining the harmonically Oscillating Motion
of
the projection of a point moved in the circle on a straight line, as suggested 1>,\ \\eiler,
L. lli.H
Figure (Ztschr. f. d. phys. u. chem. U., 20, 1907, p. 105)
If the handle on the back of the disc is turned the hurmoiiie motion e;m be followed.
Can be used with (lie Projector.
For Apparatus for Foucault's Pendulum Experiment, suitable for the ;. c
Whirling Table, see Nos. 52,015-52,017, p. 283.

No. 52141. Foucault Pendulums, Harmonic Motion, Resonance. 299
52 137. 1 : 6.
52 131. 1 : 3.
52 140. 1 : 10. 52138. 1:14. 52 139. 1 : 6.
1
.".I , i:;,s. Apparatus for projecting harmonic vibration (sine vibration), as suggested by Hofler, s. d.
Figure (Hofler, Physik, Figs. 30 and 243; Hofler-Poske, Figs. 12 and 144) . . . 2. O.-O
For demonstrating the composition of two sine vibrations, two of the above apparatus and two
projectors are necessary.
52.139. Resonance Top (van Schaik's), Figure

(Ztschr. f. d. phys. u. chem. U., 7, 1893/94,
p. 181). Price, exclusive of vice 1. 2.0
The top is loaded on one side and produces considerable vibration, according to the free length
of the spring, and at high or low speed.
52.140. Resonance Top (Frahm's), Figure (Glaser's Ann., Vol. 59, 1906, pp. 697 et seq.) 2. 5.0
The rotating disc of the top is loaded on one side, so that the top when held in the hand makes
a considerable amount of vibration. A so-called Frahm comb with six spring tongues is fixed to tin-
top, these tongues having different numbers of vibrations. With decrease in the number of vibrations
one spring after another vibrates.
The principle is used in speed measurements on prime movers, and when the tongues are electri-
cally excited by means of an A. C. magnet, it can also be applied to frequency measurements.
52.141. --idem, in velvet case 2.10.0
For use with the projection apparatus.
Cl. 633, 3751. 3785.

3K-5, 5446, 3947.
300 Mechanics of Solids (Statics and Dynamics). No. :.:M!L'
52 144 A. 1:9. 52 144 B. 1 : 5.
52,142. Resonance Apparatus, as suggested by Prof. Bug. Meyer, for demonstrating torsional
i. S. (1.
vibrations of elastic waves by resonance (Z. d. V. d. I., 53, 1909, p. 1301 et seq., No. 19,
and text-sheet 16, Fig. 50) 6. 15.
52,143. Analysing Apparatus for vibrations, as suggested by Grimsehl, for analysing the vibra-
tions of tuning forks, strings, etc., and for determining the frequency of sirens, He. by
a photographic method (Ztschr. f. d. phys. u. chem. U., 17, 1904, p. 33) 1. 8.0
52,144. Apparatus for Cavendish's Experiment on the Attraction of Mass (Gravitation Balance),
as suggested by Boys, F i g s. A and B (Ztschr. f. d. phys. u. chem. U., 14, 1901, p. 381;
M. T., p. 86) 15. o.(t
Two small silver balls, each 0.75 g in weight, are suspended by means of a very fine quartz fibre
from a fine balance beam (torsion balance). The whole is enclosed in a glass case and has a firsi rate
arrestment device so that the instrument can be carried about from one place to another without fear
of damage. The small balls are influenced by large lead balls each 2800 grams in -weight which can be
moved along a frame to the two end positions by cords. In order to make the deflections visible to
a large audience, an image of the filament of a glow lamp is produced on a scale fixed to the wall
by the aid of a bi-convex lens and a light mirror fixed on tin apparatus.
To give an idea of the sensitiveness of lie apparatus, we might mention that an apparatus
I
installed in our test room gave a preliminary deflection of s of the scale distance in one direction
'
when the lead balls were moved from the centre to one of the end positions; alter some movement to
and fro of the balls the luminous pointer stopped at about 21 cm to the left or right according to
the direction of movement of the balls. The scale distance in this case was only 2.25 m. -- Com-
plete directions for use are given with each apparatus.
.M-M45. Attraction of Mass Apparatus, Wrinhold's (\V. I)., -l<" Kdn., Fi<r. 100) 17.10.0
ci. :<:
Molecular Effects of Solids. 301
52 148. 1 : 8. 52148. 1 : 11.
52 147. 1 : 6. 52149. 1 : 10.
Molecular Effects of Solids.

52,146. Molecule Model, as suggested by Korner, Figure, on stand (Fr. phys. Techn. d.
s.
I, 2, Fig. 3899) . 1.10.0

The balls are capable of easy motion round their position of equilibrium. A blow increases the
movement which is generally existent, and the development of heat by impact or friction can be shown.
A plate is placed on four of the uppermost layer of balls. This is loaded (in a positive or negative
sense) with weights. The molecules are compressed or expanded until the action of tensile or com-
pressive strength proceeding from them attains equilibrium.
52.147. Molecule Model, as suggested by Hartl, Figure . . . 0.15.0

This model has two spheres joined by a spiral spring, each ball representing a molecule. The
spring endeavours to bring these together. Two flat springs placed round the molecules represent
the surrounding ether envelopes, the molecules being held apart by these flat springs. The simul-
taneous attraction and repulsion is plainly observable in this model.
52.148. Tribometer (HartPs) (Ztschr. f. d. phys. u. chem. U., 7, 1893/94, p. 231), Figure,
for experiments on sliding friction, the inclined plane, etc 15. 0.0
The tribometer is a demonstration dynamometer, and permits of reading on a scale, even at
some distance away, the force used. A sliding track forms the lower surface, and this track can be
laidwith slabs of different materials. The sliding bodies are wood blocks covered with different materials.
Given in with the apparatus are 3 slabs, one of glass ground on one side and polished on the other;
one slab of cast iron, planed, and one of brass. An oak block is given in as a sliding body, as are also
a block covered with drawing paper and one covered with brass.
52.149. Tribometer for Sliding Friction, as suggested by Coulomb, Figure

(M. P. I, Fig. 341
[330]), with one pair horizontal bearing rails of wood and of iron, with roller and balance
pan, also a large selection of test materials 2.10.0
Cl. 3S91, 681,

For Brake Dynamometers (Prony Brakes), see Nos. 52,424 52,426, p. 332.
5279, 682.
302 Molecular Effects of Solids. X... .-.2150-
52 150. 1 : 8. 52 156. 1 : 5. 52 157. 1 : 6.
52163 (52164). 1 : 8. 52 165. 1
s. d.
52.150. Tribometer for Sliding Friction, Coulomb's, simpler than No. 52,149, Figure. . 1 1.0
52.151. Apparatus for testing the Friction of Journals (Midler's) (M. T., Fig. 54), with bearings
of brass, iron and wood, each with a polished and an unpolished cylinder of iron jind
wood with sheaves for inserting 1 10.0
52.152. Bicycle Ball Bearing (M. T., p. 94) o lo.o
Adhesion Plates, of glass, Figure 52,156.
List No. 52,153 52,154 52,155 52,156
Diameter of plates mm 80 120 150 2ou
0. 12. 1. 2. 1. 5. 1. 13.
52,157. Rubber Discs with handles, excellent in their action, Figure 1. 5.
52. 15X. Cylinder of Lead and Wax, for adhesion experiments (M. T., p. 51) o. 2.0
52,15<t. Ivory Ball with Marble Slab, for elastic impact (W. IX, p. 136 [115]), ball 30 mm
diameter
52,160. -- idem, with nickelled Iron Slab
the is breathed
If slali upon before the. experiment. :i
plainly visible Mirtace is produced by tin-
foiling ball caused by the elasticity of the ivory ball.
52.101. Percussion Trough, as .suggested by Tyndall, of wood, 1 m long, with levelling screws
;ind 7 lignum vitae balls. Figure
52.102. 3 Lead Balls and 3 Hardwood Balls with hooks, for impact experiments (M. T., p. 90)
(]. :it;:i'.i.
(748, U74,
:.L' IT.',.
Friction, Elasticity. 303
52161. 1:10. 52 167. 1 : 8.
52166. 1:12. 52 168. 1 : 6. 52 169. 1 : 7.
52.163. Percussion Apparatus, Figure, with 5 balls of the same size and 3 of different s. <l.
sizes, of lignum vitae, the ratio of weights of the latter balls being 1 / 2 1 2 ... : : 1. 16.
52.164.
- -
idem, with ivory balls, Figure (the balls of equal size being 35 mm diameter) 4. 16.
5i', 165. Percussion Apparatus, Figure, with 7 ivory and 3 lead balls 25 mm in diameter 2.14.0
51'. 166. --idem, Figure, with 6 ivory and 6 lead balls 25 mm, and 1 ivory and 1 lead
ball 30 mm in diameter, and comparison scale 3. 0.
52.167. Apparatus, Figure, for showing that the angle of reflection is equal to the angle
of incidence, with ivory ball (Fr. phys. Techn. I, 2, Fig. 3303) 2.10.0
52.168. -- idem (Frick's) (Fr. phys. Techn. I, 2, Fig. 3302 [I, Figure ..
Fig. 442]), 0.16.0
-- idem
5i'. 169. (Nollet's), with ivory ball falling perpendicularly, Figure (Fr. phys.
Techn. I, 2, Fig. 3304) 2. 10.
51'. 170. Glass Spiral of thin Glass Fibre, for proving elasticity, in preserving tube (W. D.,
p. 139) 0. 1.0
52.171. Glass Vessel, cracked spiral shape, Figure, for experiments in elasticity ... 0. 3.0
The flask forms a largo, closed, spring spiral, and can be taken apart.
52.172. Rubber Hose for Elasticity Experiments (W. D., p. 139 [118]), 40 cm long, with strong
hooks on the ends 0. 5.
52. 173. Apparatus for demonstrating and measuring the expansion and elasticity of wires of
different metals, by extension and heat (Fr. phys. Techn. I, 2, Fig. 3244) 3.10.0
52. 174. Wood Rod for experiments on elasticity in bending (Friedr. C. G. Mailer's) (M. T.,
p. 50) 0. 2.0
52.175. Apparatus (S'Gravesande's), for showing the elasticity of metal wires (M. P. I, Fig. 328
[320]) 1. 2.0
(1. ll>, !>TTO,

304 Molecular Effects of Solids. No. :,'2 176
52176. 1:8. 52 179 A. 1 : 20.
52 179 B. 1 : 20. 52 180. 1 : 13.
52,176. Apparatus for determining elasticity in bending, Figure

(W. u. E. phys. Prakt., s. (1.
Fig. 63) 1. IL'.O

The apparatus consists of two wood blocks fixed on boards, those blosks being fitted with clamps
for screwing down the wires; the blocks can be weighted by means of weights. In addition the fol-
lowing pertain to the apparatus: 1 vertical scale on base, one pointer for sliding along the rod to bo
tested; 3 steel rods and 1 copper rod. Weights not included in above price.
52.177. --idem, with small glass scale, graduated in mm, for reading with Reading
Microscope No. 51,474 2. 0.0
The soalc is fixed to the rod instead of the pointer.
52.178. One Set Weights, suitable for No. 52,176 and 52,177 1. 5.0
52.179. Transverse Strength Apparatus, as suggested by Prof. Fug. Meyer. F i g s. A and B,

for explaining the calculation of the transverse strength of straight bars, also for ex-
plaining the conception of bending moment (Z. d. V. d. I., 53. 1000, p. 1301 el se<|..
No. 3, and text-sheet 13, Figs. 7 and 8) 6.15.0
The wire maintained in tension at one end is loaded at the other end, Pig. A. The end of
the bar in tin- clip is then moved up to a nick F, at which the l>;ir run be dismounted: and forces
of such direction and magnitude are applied to the loaded portion that the portion of the bar in the
original position is again in a state of equilibrium. F i
g. B.
52.180. Bent Crankshaft, as suggested by Prof. Kug. Meyer. g 11 re. a model for demon-
I-' i
strating the bcndini: moment, the turning moment and the thrusts in a crankshaft (Z.
d. V. d. I., 53, 1000, pp. 1301 et se,.. No. }. and text-sheet 13, Figs. 1012) . . 10. i:>.0
Tile crankshaft can be divided in the centre of the crank pin in order to explain the actions
of the individual forces at this section.
.
Wi38,
Registering Apparatus for Sag in Bridge Constructions, etc. quoted for on application.
Elasticity of Bending, Bending Strength, Forces on Bearing. 305
52 181. 1 : 14. 52 182 A. 1:10.
52 182 B. 1 : 10. 52183. 1:18.
One half of the crank-shaft is taken forward, the other half being again brought to a state of s. d.
equilibrium in the original position by the introduction of single forces and couples, after removing
the bearing, so that all forces present and their action can be plainly demonstrated.
52.181. Bending Model (Prof. Eugen Meyer's), Figure, for demonstrating the deformation
of a bar by submitting it to bending: consisting of a bar formed of a number of parts
held together by springs which when loaded on one side form the elastic line as a poly-
gonal line (Ztschr. d. V. d. I. 53, 1909, pp. 1301 et seq., No. 5, and text-sheet 13,
Figs. 1315) 6.15.0
Instead of using the steel springs a brass spring can be used whose coefficient of expansion is
greater than that of the steel springs, so as to be able to analyse the conditions in the bending of
cast iron bars. Wood bars can be placed on the model which become as tangents on the elastic line
or which give the direction of the radius of curvature of the elastic line.
52.182. Crankshaft with moving parts, as suggested by Prof. E. Meyer, Figs. and B, A
for explaining the deformation of a crankshaft (Ztschr. d. V. d. I. 53, 1909, pp. 1301
et seq., No. 6, and text-sheet 14, Figs. 16 22) 5. 5.0
The model isprovided with joints at the sections" to be considered, so that the deformations
caused by all the prevailing forces can be shown separately.
52.183. Apparatus for Determining the Statically Indefinite Forces on a Bearing, on a bar with
three bearing surfaces, as suggested by Prof. E. Meyer, Figure
(Ztschr. d. V. d. I. 53,
1909, pp. 1301 et seq., No. 7, and text-sheet 14, Figs. 2325) 4.10.0
We will assume that the magnitude of the bearing force in the centre of the bar loaded as in
the illustration with P, and P is to be determined. The centre bearing is taken away and the sag
caused in the middle is measured by PI and P 2 PI and P 2 are then shifted and a force
; is applied W
to the centre which tends to bend the bar in an upward direction just as much as it was bent down-
wards by P, and P 2 If P,, P, and P 3 are applied simultaneously the resultant deflection is obtained
.
from the algebraic sum of both at zero.
Cl. 5643, 5641,

Complete description of Prof. Eugen Meyer's models on application. 5646, 5651. 20
306 Molecular Effects of Solids. X.i. :.L'184
52184. 1:10.
52185. 1:10. 52 186 A. 1:12. 52 186 B. 1 :12. 52 187. 1 : 13.
52.184. Model for Demonstrating Mohr's Law on the Elastic Line, as suggested by Prof. s <i.
Eugen Meyer, Figure (Ztschr. d. V. d. I. 53, 1909, pp. 1301 et seq., No. 8, Fig. L>7.
and text-sheet 14, Fig. 26) 5.10.0
The bar resting freely on bearings at the points a and b, loaded with the weight P, assumes the
same elastic line as the chain carried over the same bearing, since its horizontal tension is equal to
the modulus of elasticity, and as the line of load of the chain is equal to the line of the
-- deter-.
J
mined for the bar.
52.185. Rivetting Model, Prof. Eugen Meyer's, Figure, for explaining the strain on the
chord rivets and the shearing stress in compound girders which are submitted to a
bending strain (Ztschr. d. V. d. I. 53, 1909, pp. 1301 et seq., No. 9, Figs. 31 and 32, and
text-sheet 14, Figs. 28 30) 5. 5.0
The
rivet submitted to the different stresses can be taken out and it is possible that the shearing
or compressive stress present in the cross sections ee, ff, and which the rivet must take up can be
ascertained by a lateral movement of the angle iron with the chord piece opposite the web sheet. In
like manner the shearing force present in the section gg can be shown by loosening the connection.
52.186. Breaking Model (Bach's), Figs. A

and B (Ztschr. d. V. d. I. 53, 1909, pp. 1301 et
seq., No. 10, and text-sheet 14, Figs. 33 and 34), for showing that the resistance to
breaking strain is inversely proportional to the square of the length of the bar ... 1. 15.
On loading the bars, which are gripped vertically, stable equilibrium occurs between the bending
moment of the load and the elastic forces, either when the bars are in an extended or a curved posi-
tion; or when the load is considerable a condition of equilibrium does not take place and
the wood bars are fractured. Test bars are given in with the apparatus, these comprising bars of
various material in lengths of 30 and 60 cm.
52.187. Apparatus for Demonstrating Resistance to Breaking Strain of Bars, as suggested by

Prof. Michel, Figure 8. 0.0
With apparatus the resistance to breaking strain of bars of different lengths, varying section,
this
and of different materials can be determined and the bars can be gripped 'either on one side, or both
nds can be left free and be guided in the original axis or both ends can be gripped and guided in the
original axis.
52,187 a. idem, with automatic supply of the load 1

10. 10.
Cl. 5654,
Complete description of Prof. Eugen Meyer's models on application.
Xo. :a in.
Bending, Breaking, Tension. 307
52188. 1:10. 52 189. 1 : 12.
52 190. 1 : 13. 52191. 1:12.
52.188. Model for Explaining Tension, as suggested by Prof. Eugen Meyer, Figure (Ztschr. s. d.
d. V. d. I., 53,1909, pp. 1301 et seq., No. 11, Fig. 35, and text-sheet 14, Fig. 35) 1.15.0
The rubber plate submitted to the forces PI, P 2 P 3 and P 4 has a cut in the direction a b and
,
forms a gap.' The division of the forces working on the cut into normal tension and shearing stress
is explained.
52.189. Apparatus (PrandtPs), for Demonstrating the Angular Changes at the edges of a body
by shearing stresses occurring in pairs (Ztschr. d. V. d. I. 53, 1909, pp. 1301 et seq., Price
No. 12, Figs. 36 and 37, and text-sheet 14, Figs. 38 and 39) on appli-
cation
consists of a system of spiral springs arranged between two glass discs as in the
The apparatus
illustration. If these are pulled as shown in the illustration no angular changes result at the corners A,
B', C' and D; this case corresponds to ordinary bending. Shearing forces can be applied at the same
time; in this case angular changes also take place at the corners, i. e., the right angles are sometimes
acute and sometimes obtuse.
52.190. Apparatus for Demonstrating the Deformation of a Parallelepipedic Body on the end
surfaces of which normal shearing stresses act simultaneously, as suggested by Prof.
Eugen Meyer, (Ztschr. d. V. d. I. 53, 1909, pp. 1301 et seq., No. 13, and
Figure
text-sheet 13, Fig. 42) 10. 0.0
A base plate (angle iron W) can be raised and thus intercepts all the weights, and accordingly
the elastic slab is unloaded and it assumes its original rectangular shape.
52.191. --idem, Figure, constructed as per Fig.~43 in the publication mentioned . 6. 5.0
Cl. 5660, 5661,

Complete description of Prof. Eugen Meyer's models on application. 5663, 5664. 20*
308 Molecular Effects of Solids. No. 52 192
52201. 1:10. 52 195. 1
52,192. Apparatus for Determining Young's Modulus, F i gu r e, with the aid of the catheto- s. d.
meter (Chwolson-Pflaum, Lehrb. d. Phys., 1904, Vol. 1, p. 700) 9. 0.0

Rubber, steel and glass are given in as test materials.
52,193. Apparatus (Spring's), for proving that a peimanent deformation (plasticity) increasing
with time takes place when the elastic limit is exceeded, Figure
(Fr. phys. Teehn. I.
2, Fig. 2254 [I, Fig. 137]) 17.1(1.0
The apparatus consists of a massive oak frame, an iron T-shaped girder the thicker end of which
is curved The latter is loaded
upwards, and a wrought iron downing-levi r which MTV< s as bearing.
at its free cud with weights, as shown in the Figure, while the point of pressure is as close as possible
to the fulcrum. The pressure exerted can be easily calculated from the dimension. The apparatus
and a pressure mould, supplied by us, admit of a pressure of 10,000 atmospheres. The necessary
weights are included in the priee of the apparatus.
52,194. 2 Bars for Comparing Torsion of Elasticity, as suggested by Friedr. C. G. Miillcr (M.
T., p. 50), with clamping device 0. 2.
II IIKM.
.Mis. 690, 892.
No. 52202.
Elasticity. 309
T
52 196. 1 : 16. 52199. 1:10. 52 202. 1 : 5.
52.195. Apparatus for Determining Torsional Elasticity, Figure (W. and E. phys. Prakt., s. d.
Fig. 65) 5.10.0

The apparatus is (not as shown in figure) built into a massive frame 1.4 m
high and has an
adjustable tension clip at the top for the wire to be tested, 3-stage aluminium disc, ribbed and gra-
duated, 2 rollers turning about pillars and 1 vertical rule. Six different wires and 1 set of perforated
lead weights pcrtair>. to the apparatus.
52.196. Apparatus for Determining Torsional Elasticity, Figure

The apparatus is constructed in a similar manner to No. 52,195. Four scales can be fixed to
6.10.0
the wires to be tested at equal distances.
Weiler uses it (as per Ztschr. f. d. phys. u. chem. U. 11, 1898, p. 282) constructed in this manner
as a mechanical model for demonstrating the potential drop in electric conductors.
52.197. Apparatus for Testing the Torsional Strength of Metal Bars, Friedr. C. G. Miiller's
(M. T., p. 50), consisting of a shaft with crank and clamping device on one base-board 1.10.0
r>2.198. Torsional Force Model, Friedr. C. G. Muller's (M. T., Fig. 25) 0.15.0
52,199. Spring Balance (Jolly's), Figure

(M. P. I, Fig. 330 [322]), with three different
spiral springs, with metal stand, scale backed with silvered glass for avoiding parallax
in reading 3. 0.0
52,200. Simple Spring Balance for stress, Figure 0. 5.0

- -
VJ.201. idem, with stand and balance pan, as suggested by Kleiber, Figure. . 0.10.0
.~>L'.202. Spring Balance (Friedr. C. G. Muller's), Figure, going up to 300 g, with two marks
for showing maximum and minimum load (M. P., Fig. 7 and 74) .
J
1. 5.0
f'l. 3321, 691, 4181.

310 Molecular Effects of Solids.
52 203. 1 : 4.
52 205. 1 : 6.
52.203. Universal Spring Balance with large dial, Kleiber's, Figure

(Fr. phys. Techn. I, 2, s. d.
Figs. 2062, 2103, 2160, 2445; Ztschr. f. d. phys. u. chem. U. 17, 1904, p. 141) . . . 1. 6.0
Two balances are necessary for a number of experiments and should be ordered if opportunity
arises.
52.204. Model of a Spring Balance, so called Kitchen Balance, with plainly visible mechanism
and scale under glass, Figure 1. 5.0
52.205. Spring Balance, Figure, with range 5 kg and 25 kg, nickelled; can also
be used as a dynamometer for tensile forces 0. 5.0
52.206. Dynamometer (Spring Balance) for tensile forces, as suggested by Hesehus, Figure,
with scale from 15 kg (Gan.-Man. Figs. 6 and 7) 0.15.0
52.207. Dynamometer, Poncelet's, for 25 kg, Figure 3. O.o
52.208. Dynamometer with balance pan, of brass, nickelled 0.15.0
52.209. Dynamometer with stirrup and handle, with pointer, Figure, scale 250 kg . 3. 0.0
52.210. Spring Balance for Compression (M. P. I, Fig. 332) 1.12.0
52.211. Dynamometer for Compression, round scale, for 60 kg, with adjustable pointer,
Figure 2. 0.0
52.212. Dynamometer (Spring Balance) for Compression and Extension, F i

g u r e, scale from
250 kg, with adjustable pointer 2. 5.0
Tin- extension hooks are not inclmled in the illustration.
.">:.', LM3.Dynamometer for Compression (to .'?

kg) and extension to 25 kg (on stand), Figs. A
and B, with three hooked weights 2. 15.
Cl. Siitio. fin-,, r.'.i
WJ.
Xo r,2219. Dynamometers (Spring Balances), Resistance, Expansion. 311
52 212. 1 : 5.
52209. 1 : 10.
52 213 A. 1:6. 52 213 B. 1:6.
52,215. 6 Pieces of Wire, with lugs, for breaking tests, as suggested by Friedr. C. G. Miiller
s. d.
(M. T., Pigs. 31 and 3) 0.10.0

|
Portable gallows No. 51,152, the indicating cylinder No. 51,452, balance pan No. 52,216 and
one set of weights Nos. 51,676 51,684 are necessary for the experiments.
52,216. Balance Pan for heavy load (M. T., Fig. 3), see Figure 52,221 0. 6.0
.">2.217. Viscosity Test Pieces for hammering out; bars of lead, brass, wrought iron, zinc, cast
iron, wood and glass (M. T., p. 49), 3 pieces of each, 50 long, 10 thickmm mm . . 0. 8.0
52,218. Sheet Iron Strip for Determining Elastic Limit, Viscosity and Strength (M. T., p. 49) 0. 5.0
.
U-shaped Bar for Demonstrating Expansion and Jolting, Figure (M. T., Fig. 32) 0. 2.0
Cl. 5525, 695, 5116,

r,:il. 3640, 3641.
312 Models of Machine Elements, Machine Parts and Machines. \n. .".'_ -2'2 I -
arte-aeala.
ErlirUr drj>un-l. Srnlr
DarhBrrithaupt
52 221, 51 452, 52 216, 51 676 51 631, 51 121. 1 : 14. 52227. 1:3.
52 228. 1 : 9. 52230. 1:9. 52 232. 1 : 8.
52.221. Arrangement for Elasticity, Expansion and Breaking Tests, as suggested by Friedr. s d.
C. G. Miiller, for fitting to the lecture table, consisting of 1 screw clamp for securing
the test wires and 1 guide pulley, also 6 test wires 1. 0.0
The following are also necessary for the experiments: indicating cylinder No. 51,452, balance
pan No. 52,216, 1 set of weights Nos. 51,676 51,681 and 1 American screw clamp No. 51,121. For
measuring the expansion the test wire is simply laid over the axis of the indicating cylinder and not
slung round it.
52.222. Batavian Glass Drops per dozen 0. 0.6
52.223. Bologna Flasks per 10 0. 1.0
52.224. Press (Reusch's), for producing sliding surfaces in calc-spar and rock salt, with pre-
paration 1. 5.0
52.225. Pressed and Unpressed Preparations, singly 2 s. 6 d. to 0. 4.
52.226. Press (Baumhauer's) for producing the calc-spar doublets 1. 4.0

52.227. Hardness Scale (Mohr's), Figure, with large stone specimens, porcelain slab,
writing diamond and bar magnet, in wood box 0.18.0
Models of Machine Elements and Parts and of

complete Machines.
Machine Elements and Simple Machines.
52.228. Prism with wood, sliding on each other u
its hollow mould, Figure, of 0. 1<>.
52,22!. Shoe Guide, Figure, of wood 0. 12.0

:>2.2.'50. Journal with bearing, Figure, of wood, with 2 turning surfaces fitting in each
'
other 0.12.0
|
52.231. Circular Groove with Circular Slot (incomplete journal), of wood 0.18.0
52.232. Bolt and Nut, Figure, of wood 0.18.0
ci. :.T.M. 3i:>-'.
514, M:.. 614, 'i

No. 52211. Machine Elements, Simple Machines, Screw Gears. 313
52 237. 1 : 6.
52 238. 1 : 6.
52 239. 1 : 0.
52 241. 1 : 6. 52 240. 1 : 6.
s. d.
r>2.233. Triangular Screw Thread with Nut cut through, Figure, of wood ..... 0. 2.6
52,234. Square Screw Thead, with Nut cut through, Figure, of wood 0. 3.
52,235. Model of Screw with 4 threads of different shape and pitch, without nuts, of metal,
Figure 1.10.0
52,236. Simple Machines, Figure, Wedge, Windlass, Capstan, Toothed Gearing with fly-
wheel, Worm Gearing and Screw Jack, mounted on one baseboard. 4.15.0
Gearing with Screws, Cranks, Links, Rods, Joints and Discs.
52,237. Fixed Nut with Rotary Screw Spindle, Figure, with angular, accurately turned
thread, constructed entirely in iron 1. 0.0
:>-. 238. Fixed Screw Spindle, with Rotary Progressive Nut, Figure 1. 4.0
52.239. Screw Spindle, rotary, resting immovably in its bearings, with straight guided, pro-
gressive nut, Figure 1.10.0
52.240. Rotary Nut, incapable of lateral movement, with straight guided, progressive screw
spindle, Figure 1.10.0
52,241. Screw with Right-and-Left-Handed Thread, Figure, with nuts 2.10.0
Apparatus for showing the formation and mode of C1.518.M9, 8788, 621,8787,
action of the screw, see No. ~>l,i)05 51,910, p. 273. 5805, 3788, 520, 3789.
314 Models of Machine Elements, Machine Parts and Machines. Nn.
52244. 1:10. 52 248. 1 : 8.
52 243. 1 : 6. 52 250. 1 : 6. 52 252. 1 : 4.
52 253. 1 : 5.
s. <1.
52.242. Screw with two Threads of Different Pitch, with nuts (differential gear) 2.10.0
52.243. Screw Thread with Ratchet Brace, of metal, Figure (M. P. I, Fig. 275 [272]) 1.16.0
52.244. Screw Press, wood, Figure

of 0.10.0
52.245. Quadrilateral Crank Gear, with a rotating and an oscillating crank 4. 0.0
52.246. Rotating Double Crank 4. 0.0
52.247. Oscillating Double Crank 4. 0.0
52.248. Parallel Crank, Figure 4. 0.0
52.249. Counter-motion Anti-parallel Cranks 4. 0.0
52.250. Anti-parallel Cranks, working in same direction, Figure 4. 0.0
52.251. Equilateral Crank Gear (Galloway's) . 4. 0.0

A crank rectangle, in which the two adjacent sides are equal, and the opposite pairs of sides
differ in length.
52.252. Crank Shaft, Figure, of metal 2.10.0
52.253. Oscillating Thrust Crank, Driving Wheel with Connecting Rod, with cross head and
guide, F i g u r e, of metal 5. 0.0
52.254. Oscillating Slot and Crank, Connecting Eod in the form of a piston rod, cylinder
oscillating 5. 0.0
This mechanism is also employed in the sectional model of an oscillating cylinder of steam engine
to be mentioned later.
n. 53%. r..i.w.
144, :-!
No. 52 261. Screw, Crank~and Slot Gears. 315
MAX KOHL CHEMNITZ
52 259. 1 : 6.
52 255. 1 : 6.
52 256. 1 : 6. 52 258. 1 : 9.
'. N
52 260. 1 : 8. 52 261. 1 : 4.
d.
changes uniform rotation into unsymmetrical,
s.
52.255. Rotating Crank and Slot, Figure,
periodic rotation 4. 0.0
The axes of the crank and slot are placed so close to each other that the slot .rotates.
52.256. Crank and Slot, the slot arranged to rotate, Figure 4. 0.0
This gear is similar to the previous one; the axes of the crank and slot are, however, placed
at such a distance apart that the slot can no longer rotate but only oscillate.
52.257. Equal-limb Rotating Crank and Slot 4. 0.0
52.258. Oscillating Cross Slot, for versed sine motion, Figure 4. 0.0
52.259. Rotating Cross Slot, Figure 4. 0.0
52.260. Oldham's Coupling, Figure, serving as organ of transmission between two parallel
axes 4. 0.0
A practical application of the rotating cross slot. The two axes have the same angular velocity.
52.261. Model of the Bent Lever, Figure (Fr. phys. Techn. I, Figs. 124126; M. P. I,
0.0
282); testing of same Price without weights 3.
Figs. 280 by suspending weights. . .
Cl. 526, 3626,

5343, 528,
529, 4866.
316 Models of Machine Elements, Machine Parts and Machines. No. .V.'26->
52232. 1:12. 52 263. 1 : 6.
52 264. 1 : 6. 52 266. 1 : 7.
s. d.
52.262. Peaucellier's Guide, Figure, for transforming a circular into a straight motion 6. 0.0
52.263. Watt's Parallelogramm, Figure, of wood and metal 1.16.0
52.264. Beam for Steam Engines with counter-guide, Figure 4. O.(t
52.265. Beam without Rotating Axis 4. 0.0
52.266. Stephenson's Link, Figure, with section through a steam engine cylinder with
slide valve, of iron (Gan.-Man. Fig. 569) 12. 0.0
12. 0.0
52.267. Gooch's Link, of iron
52.268. Model Table for demonstrating the Static Equilibrium Conditions of the Centrifugal
Governor, as suggested by Prof. Eugen Meyer, Figure
(Ztschr. d. V. d. I., 1909,
6.15.0
pp. 1301 et seq., No. 2, and text-sheet 13, Figs. 4 7)
The model shows half of a centrifugal governor. At the points of support of the pendulum a,
the rod b and the bush c forces can be applied instead of the bearings. The model serves for deter-
mining the quantity of that horizontally directed force which maintains the equilibrium in the forces Q
(half the weight of the socket) and G (weight of the governor balls), this force C acting on the
centre
of the balls.
52.269. Conical Crank Rectangle, coupled conical cranks (i. 0.0

Thrust Crank Chain, connecting rod and guides running on
52. 2 70. Conical section of cylinder 6. 0.0
52.271. Rectangular Cross Sprocket Chain, simultaneous motion of a sphere about two axes 0. 0.0
52.272. Cardan's Coupling for transmitting a rotary motion at any angle, of metal . . . 1. :>.(>
r>i>, 273. - -
idem, with graduations on the axes and on the base-plate 2. 10.0
The angular velocities of the two axes are unequal. In order to show the lead and lag of the
driven shaft, in front of and behind the driving shaft a dial graduated in degree.- is fastened in front
of one each fixed pointer, and graduations are put on the base-plate on which the angular position of
the two nlative axes can he read off. The degree of lead or lag of the axes relatively to each other
If ..< and ..>, are the
depends on the angle which the directions of the axes form with each other.
anghs of rotation measured from lie same position of rest, of the driving and driven shafts respeo
I
ts
' a>i
tively, and the angle of direction of both, then DOSa.
Models of Strain Kngines and Steam Knginc Tails. Cl. 57N7. r.:n,
11:11. :.3a
see section on Heat.
Rod, Joint and Disc Gears. 317
52 276. 1 : 7. 52 278. 1 : 7.
52.274. Cardanic Double Coupling, Figure, for the uniform transmission of motion at 8. d.
any angle or on a parallel axis, "with degree graduation on the axes and on the base-
plate 7. 0.0
The two
cross joints of this model are equally placed. The dissymmetry of the transmission
"t motion of the single cross
joint is obviated by the use of the two equally placed cross joints when
tin- two external axes opposite the centre axes form the same angle either whether they form twice
this angle of inclination among themselves or whether they are parallel.
52.275. Goubet's Coupling (Double Universal Coupling), Figure, with sleeve, for two
intersecting axes, with graduations and pointers 6.10.0
The ratio of rotational speeds of the two axes is constant.
512,1276. Clemens' Coupling, Figure, with ball and socket joints for two intersecting axes 7. 0.0
The ratio of rotation of the two axes is constant.
Oldham's Coupling see No. 52,260, p. 315.
52,277. Excentric Slot . 4. 0.0
52,278. Excentric Drive with guides, Figure 4. 0.
Cl. 5632, 3959,

533. 535,
536, 5347.
318 Models of Machine Elements, Machine Parts and Machines. No. .-,iL'7 -
52279. 1:5. 52 283. 1 : 6.
52 284. 1 : 7. 52 285. 1 : 7. 52286. 1:5.
8. (1.
52.279. Simple Excentric, the excentricity adjustable, Figure, of metal 2.15.0

- - d
52.280. i e m, adjustable by toothed wheels 7. ().(
52.281. Excentric with Slot for versed sine motion 6. O.o
52.282. Double Excentric with reverse motion, for forward, and backward running of loco-
motive, Figure, of metal 5. 0.0
52.283. Cam Disc, Figure, of wood 0.1S.O
52.284. CamMotion (versed sine motion), Figure 2.10.0
52.285. Archimedian Spiral Disc, Figure, for uniform reciprocating motion 4. O.o
52.286. Arc Triangle, Figure, for intermittent motion 4. O.o

- - r
52.287. idem, smaller 2.1. i.o
52.288. Double Heart-Shaped Slot for uniform motion of rods 4.10.0

For two up and down strokes during one revolution of the heart-shaped cam.
Tooth and Worm Gears.
52.289. Model Table, demonstrating the formation of the Cycloid, the rolling curve of the
on a straight line
circle 16.0
52.290.
-- idem, the formation of the Epicycloid (circle rolled on the circle) L6.0
52.291.
-- idem, the formation of the Hypocycloid (circle described in the circle) . . . 16.0
52.292.
- -
idem, the formation of the Involute, Figure Ki.O
Cl. 53-<. :.:i7. :ts7i,

539, 54". .Ml
No 52304. Disc Gears, Toothed Gears. 319
. MAX KCHIL
CHEMNITZ
52 292. 1 : 7.
52295. 1:10. 52296. 1 : 10.
52 300. 1 : 10. 52 301. 1 : 5. 52 302. 1 : 6.
52,293. Model Table of a Cycloidal Gear System, containing a movable model and the precise I
s. d.
constructional drawing of the gear (ratchet with toothed wheel), cf. Figure 52 295 2. 10.
52.294.
- -
idem, Epicycloidal Gear System of Spur Wheels 2.10.0
52.295.
- -
idem, Hypocycloidal Gear System, with internal toothed wheels, Figure . 2.10.0
52.296.
- -
idem, Involute Gear System of Spur Wheels, Figure 2. 10.
52.297.
- -
idem, Rectilinear Face Toothing for wheels with external contact .... 2.10.0
52.298.
- - i d e m, Double Pin Gearing with four toothed drive 2.10.0
52.299.
- -
idem, Involute System for Back and Pinion 2.10.0
52.300.
- -
idem, General Gear System of Spur Wheels, Figure 3. 0.0
52.301. Two Spur Wheels with external topth-contact, Figure, of metal 2. 0.0
The direction of motion of the two pinions is opposite.
52.302. Spur Wheel Sector and Small Spur Wheel, Figure, with cycloidal profile . . 3.10.0
52.303. - -
idem, with involute profile 3.10.0
52.304. idem, with rectilinear face profile 3.10.0
Cl. 3627, lilias, 3629,

3t>30, 542, 3310.
320 Models of Machine Elements, Machine Parts and Machines.
52 311. 1 : 5. 52 312. 1 : 6.
52.305. Large Spur Wheel Sector with Small Spur Wheel, Figure, very largo pattern, for
demonstrating the Boiling of the Tooth-profiles on each other, with cycloidal profile . 5.1(>.(>
52.306.
- - i d e in, with involute profile 5. 10.
52.307. Two Toothed Wheels, with an intermediate wheel, for transmission without changing
direction or rotation 4. 0.0
52.308. Two Toothed Wheels with two intermediate wheels, for transforming into a reverse
direction of rotation 4.10.0
52.309. Wheel Suspension with five toothed wheels, Figure, for connecting up two parallel
axes of variable distance 6. 0.
52.310. Internal Toothed Wheel and Spur Wheel, Figure, of metal 2. lo.o
The direction of motion of the two wheels
the same. As a number of teeth are always in
is
contact at the same time greater power can be transmitted by this gear than with spur gearing pure
and simple.
.">:.'. .'ill. Rack with Spur Wheel Motion, Figure, of metal 2.ir..o
52,312. Universal Wheel Apparatus (Kmsmann's), (Fr. phys. Techn. I, 2, Fig. 2042
Figure
[I, Fig. 84]; Ztschr. f. d. phys. u. chem. U. 2, 1885, p. 5)
4. 0.0
Four different kinds of toothed wheels are used on the apparatus, viz., the. spur wheel, the hevel
wheel, the crown wheel and the lantern wheel. The crank can be placed on either the centre or
lower horizontal axis, and the ratio of gearing in the former ease on the upper vertical axis is 1 30, :
and in the latter' ease the ratio is 1 60. :
r>2,;>i3. Mangle Gear, of wood, hn-ge model 3. 0.0
52,314. idem, Figure, of metal . 2. 2.0
54.-.. :,:.'.
f,!4. 546.
No. ~.~2i. Toothed Gearing. 321
52 314. 1 : 4.
52 317. 1 : 7. 52 322. 1 : 9.
52313. 1:6.
52 324. 1 : 5. 52 323. 1 : 4.
52,315. Mangle Gear with external teeth: a movable model and accurate constructional s. d.
drawing of the gearing 2.14.0
52.316. Mangle Gear, rectangular: Crown Wheel with lantern wheels, Figure, of metal 5. 0.0
52.317. Mangle Gear with double lantern wheel drive and internal contact with 4 -toothed
channel cross-piece, Figure 4. 0.
t The transmission of motion of this toothed gearing is very smooth and uniform. The ratio of
t | gearing is 1:2, the lantern wheels being provided with small rollers.
52,318.
- - i d e m, with 3-wheeled drive and 6-toothed channel cross-piece 5.10.0
52 319. Two Cam-shaped Cogs with Excentric Axes for periodic motions 7. 10.
52.320. Two Toothed Wheels with Excentric Axes for alternately producing accelerated and
retarded motions 6. 0.
52.321. Two Cam-shaped Toothed Wheels, of different shape 10. 0.0
52.322. Two Congruent Elliptical Toothed Wheels, Figure . 6. 0.0

The model shows the conversion of a uniform rotation into a periodically varying one. For
facilitating the drive a spur gearing is fitted. The axes of rotation of the elliptical wheel each pass
through a focus of the ellipses.
52.323. Two Toothed Wheels shaped according to the logarithmic spiral, Figure . . . . 10. 0.0
">2,324. Mitre Gearing, small, Figure 1. 0.
Cl. 547, 527, 549,

MH -
01
6355, 3632. 21
52326. 1:6.
52 325. 1 : 4.
52 329. 1 : 6.
52 327. 1 = 6.
52 331. 1 : 6. 52332. 1:10.
s. <!.
52,325. Two Bevel Wheels, the axes of which intersect at right singles, Figure, of metal 2.10. (I
Two the axes of which intersect at an obi use angle o

52.326. Bevel Wheels, Figure, . . 3. o.
52.327. Gearing with 4 Spur Wheels, Figure, for connecting two intersecting axes with
a third 6. 0.
The extensions of the two intersecting axes are cut by the extensions of the intermediate axis.
r,i'. .528. Spur Wheels with Screw Toothing (Mitre teeth), Hook's Gearing with parallel axes 6. 0.
52,329. Two Wheels with Screw Toothing, the axes of which are perpendicular to each other,
Figure 6. 0.
< 1. 550, 33101,

:.i;4.
Ml,
No. 52340. Toothed Gears. 323
52 333. 1 : 4.
52 335. 1 : 3.
52 338. 1 : 7.
52339. 1 : 12. 52 340. 1 : 6.
>2,330. Two Pairs of Wheels with Screw Toothing, 1 pair for right hand and 1 pair for left S. d.
hand motion, driven by 1 shaft 12. 0.0
The axes of ihe screw wheels of each pair are perpendicular to each other, the driven wheels
rotating in opposite directions.
52,331. Two Wheels with Screw Toothing, with inclining axes, Figure 6. 0.0
52.332. Model Table of the Worm, with Worm-Wheel, Figure, comprising a movable
model and constructional drawing 3. 4.0
52.333. Worm and Wheel, very neatly constructed of wood, Figure 0.12.0
52.334. --idem, of metal, simple, with V-thread, wheel with flat faced teeth 1. 0.0
- -
"2,335. idem, with flat, double thread; wheel with concave teeth, Figure . . . . 1.16.0
52.336. Worm with Square Thread, large; brass wheel 10 cm diameter with concave teeth 3. 0.0
52.337. - -
idem, with V-thread, large, brass worm wheel with concave teeth 3. 0.0
52.338. Double-Thread Worm, large, Figure 3. 0.0
5i'.:j39. Screw Thread with Worm, in cylindrical casing, Figure 2.10.0
52..'540. Hyperbolical Toothed Wheels with inclining axes, Figure 12. 0.0
01. 3790, 554,
555,
556, 3633 21*
324 Models of Machine Elements, Machine Parts and Machines. No. 52341
52 341. 1 : 6. 52 342. 1 : 5.
52344. 1:5. 52 346. 1 : 8.
s. d.
52.341. Spiral Wheel with Toothed Wheel, Figure 6. 0.0

The two axes are perpendicular to each other and intersect (without meeting one another).
52.342. Counting Mechanism with Differential Wheels, Figure 5. I). (!
52.343. Reversing Gear with Spur Wheels 10. 0.
52.344. Differential Epicycloidal Gear with Spur Wheels, Figure, for the addition and
subtraction of two rotary motions 7. 10.
The resultant motion can be determined with the aid of a graduation and pointer.
52.345. Simple Epicycloidal Gear with 2 wheels, for simultaneous rotation of the body about
two parallel axes, for proving that this rotation is equivalent to the rolling motion of
a cylinder on the jacket of a fixed cylinder 6. 5.
52,340. Cycloidal Gear with Bevel Wheels (Taudin-Chabot's), Figure, quite tree from
iron parts .">. Id. I)
52.347. Lahire Guides, Figure, for versed sine motion 6. 0. d
52.348. Guides with 2 Cranks, coupled with each other by congruent toothed wheels . 7.10.
52.349. Planet Wheels (Watt's), Figure 6. 0.
- - i d c in, with counterpoise and fly-wheel 7.1(>. o

52.350.
52,351. Rack Motion, Guided Plate with groove, Toothed Wheel and Endless Rack; a toothed
piston with movable axis which engages alternately in both sides of the ruck, for con-
verting a continuous rotary motion into a uniform reciprocating motion 10. 0. d
rc'..';.")2. Rack Motion, partially Toothed Wheel and double Toothed Rack in slotted guide, for
reciprocating motion 8.10.0
:..-,7, 559.
i I
560, 4131!
Ko. 52360. Toothed Gears. 325
52347. 1 = 7. 52 349. 1 : 9.
52 357. 1 : 7. 52 360. 1 : 8.
">L',:;.Vi. Connecting Rod with Guides, Toothed Wheel and Toothed Racks, for doubling the stroke s. <1.
of alternating motion 8. 10.
2,354. Interference Mechanism, for the addition and subtraction of 2 oscillating versed sine
motions, for explaining interference phenomena 10. 0.0
Two toothed wheels, one having 66 and the other 67 teeth, are mounted on parallel axes and
fitted with cranks and connecting rods joined up to the same beam. The latter is fixed to the recti-
lineally reciprocating rod.
32,355. Masked Rotating Slot and Crank 7. 10.

This mechanism corresponds in its action to the rotating slot and crank No. 52,255; the motion
is, however, transmitted by toothed wheels instead of by a slot and crank.
>2,3r>f>. Toothed Gear for Oscillating Movement, Curved Back and partially Toothed Wheel 8. 0.0
">2.357. Mangle Wheel, Figure, for reciprocal rotation at constant speed 6. 0.0
>2,35H. Intermittent Wheel with External and Internal Teeth, for reciprocal rotation at dif-
ferent speeds; the teeth traverse each other in two places by small semi-circles. . 12. 10. .
>L.'..',5!i. Reversing Gear, with Bevel Wheels 13. 0.0
)2,36<>. Differential Epicycloidal Gear with Bevel Wheels, F i g u r e, for the addition and
subtraction of two rotary motions 7.10.0
The resultant motion can be followed by a pointer rotating in front of a circular graduation.
(I. !>!, 562,

563, 3634.
326 Models of Machine Elements, Machine Parts and Machines. No. .V23I11
52361. 1:7.
52 365. 1 : 7.
52 371. 1 : 4. 52 373. 1 : 6.
52.361. Epicycloidal Gear with Bevel Wheels, Figure, for demonstrating the simultaneous * '
rotation of a sphere about two intersecting axes j

7. 10. o
The model shows the simultaneous rotation of a sphere, about two intersecting axes, also, the
fact that this rotation is equivalent to the rolling of a cone on a fixed cone. The sphere in tins
system of wheels rotates about a momentary axis which is continually altering its position with refe-
rence to the sphere.
52.362. Turning Gear with partially Toothed Bevel Wheels 8. o. o

52.363. Single-tooth Wheel and Star Wheel (Maltese Cross) 6. lo. o
52.364. Counting Mechanism with single Tooth Wheels 10. o 0.
52.365. Ratchet Gear, working with half teeth, Figure 4.10. u

3. 10. o
52.366. Ratchet Gear, with continuous motion
52.367. Switch for Machine Tools 6.10.0
Couplings, Connecting and Disconnecting Devices.

52.368. Toothed Wheel connecting and disconnecting arrangement for two parallel axes, with
auxiliary wheel 6.10.
7.10. o
52.369. Coupling with Friction Cone
52.370. Coupling with Brake and Claws, for engaging slowly and smoothly by friction and "
!"
firmly coupling by means of the claws
(l
52.371. Coupling with Friction Cone and Claws, F i g u e. for engaging slowly and smoothly
i
by friction and obtaining a firm coupling by means of the claws 9.10.0

.")_',. '.72. Coupling with Brake and Planet Wheel, for smoothly engaging, with spur wheels . lo. lo. o
.">!'. .'{73. Change Gear with Bevel Wheels and Claw Coupling, Figure, for changing the
direction of rotation 9. lo. o
52,374. Clutch Engager with Screw for toothed wheels. Figure 6. o.
.">_'.. '575. Engaging and Disengaging Arrangement for toothed wheels by means of an inter-
mediate wheel . 13. o. o
il. :,<
N.I. Toothed Gears, Couplings, Engaging and Disengaging Gears. 327
52 374. 1 : 6. 52 376. 1 : 5.
52 379. 1 .- 6.
s. d.
52.376. Engaging Gear with Brake, Figure 9. 0.
t / B The belt pulley visible to the left of the illustration and connected with the driving mechanism
only moved by the crank fitted at the right hand side when the brake is put on, i. e., when the brake
'
is
| pulley is held fast. So long as the brake remains loose the belt pulley remains at rest consequent on
^ the resistance of the driving machine, and the brake pulley rotates with its driving mechanism. The
I action of engaging can be carried out smoothly by carefully manipulating the brake. The brake (con-
trary to the illustration) is applied by means of a handwheel and screw; it can therefore be put on
i u slowly and be left on at any position affording a more or less tight grip.
52.377. Engaging Gear for any Direction of Rotation, with spur wheels and pulley stand,
triple broad belt pulley with crank, moving fork for engaging, and driving belt . . 9. 0.
52.378. Engaging Gear for engaging in any Direction of Eotation by means of bevel wheels,
with pulley stand, triple broad belt pulley with crank, moving fork for engaging, and
with driving belt + 10. 0.
The engaging gear consist of three pulleys fitted on the same axis. The no-load pulley is in
the centre; one pulley for full load is fixed on the axis, the other pulley being connected to the last by
a spur wheel gear in such manner that it always rotates in the opposite direction. According as the
belt is thrown on to one or other of the two outer pulleys, the shaft runs in either direction.
52.379.
- -
idem, with Intermediate Gearing, in order to obtain another velocity in the
one direction of rotation . |12.
0.
52.380. Band Brake 8. 0.0
52.381. Wedge Friction Wheels 3.12.0
Cl. 569, 3635,

5777.
52 382. 1 : 5. 52383. 1 : .->.
52 386. 1 : 5. 52 389. 1 : 5.
Transmission of Motion by Belt, Cord and Chain.
52.382. Cord Drive, Figure, with metal pulleys 1. 4.
52.383. Step Cone Transmission by Belt, for two parallel axes, Figure 3.10.0
52.384. Cone Pulley Drive with automatically fed belt guide for producing an unsymmetrical
rotary motion 10. o. o
52.385.
-- idem, with curvilateral cones for uniformly accelerated motion 14. o. o
52.386. Belt Gear disengaged by a loose pulley, for two parallel axes, Figure .... 4. o. o
.'>.!. 387. Belt Gear for two axes which intersect 6. 5.

Oneof the belt pulleys, in addition to rotating about its own axis, can rotate about one which
is perpendicular to the same and to the axis of the other pulley.
52,388. Belt Gear for two axes inclined towards each other, with two belt pulleys lying in one
plane, one of these being connected with its axes by a Hook joint 7. 10.
."L'.3SJ. Belt Transmission with two Belt Pulleys with variable angles, F i
g u r e, with guide
pulley 5. 0.
-
52,390. Transmission by Cylindrical Spring between two axes in any positions 3.10.0
.">.!. :>!!. Gall Chain Transmission for two parallel axes, Figure 3. lo. u
Hoisting and Transporting Machines.

:.L'..;'.)2. Simple Windlass, of wood o. lo. o
.V_'.3<3. Simple Windlass, Figure, of metal o. is. o
For Models of Tackle, *<' No*. .->i.sr>id f. p. 260, . .
51,894 51,899, p. 271, and No. :>n.llii. p. 21. s,

Xn. .V-' inn. Pliable Chains. Hoisting and Transporting Machines. 329
52 391. 1 : 5. 52 393. 1 : 4.
'"MmBHBSBi:....
52395. 1:8. 52 396. 1 : 5. 52 397. 1 : 6.
52398. 1:7. 52 399. 1 : 4.
]
s. d.
52.394. Windlass with Crank, of wood ........................ 0. 16.
52.395. Differential Windlass, Figure, of wood (M. P. I, Fig. 242 [237]) ....... ; 1. 0.
52.396. Differential Windlass, Figure, of metal . . . . .............. 1.14.0
52.::97. Pair of Figure, for explaining the windlass

Spur Wheels with Weights, on stand, j. 14.
52,398. Windlass with simple Toothed Gearing, Figure, of wood ........... 0. 18.
52,:iM. Windlass with Toothed Wheel and Gearing, Figure, of metal (M. P. I, Fig. 245 [239]) 2. 0.
52.400. --
idem, of metal, with brake pulley, brake band, lever and catch ..... . 6. (t. o
3311, 578, 3308,

579, 580.
330 Models of Machine Elements, Machine Parts and Machines. i>. .M> Kll
52 401. 1 : 7.
52 402. 1 : 8.
52 405. 1 : 4. 52 408. 1 : 9.
52.401. Windlass with Double Gearing, Figure, with brake pulley, brake band and lever; s. <i.
alsowith ratchet and pawl 7. o. o
52.402. Windlass with Double Intermediate Gearing, Figure 8. o. o
52.403. Rung, of wood 1.15.0
52.404. Ship's Capstan, Figure, of wood 1. o. o
52.405.
-- d e m, Figure, of metal
i o. is. o
52.406. Jack, with 3 legs, Figure, with wood winding gear 1. 0.0
52.407.
-- idem, with 4 legs, wheel winding gear and tackle, of wood 2.10.0
52.408. German Hoisting Jack, Figure, of wood 2. o. o
No. 52,243, 314 (M. P. Fig. 275 [272]) Id. o

52.409. Screw Winding Gear, of metal, see p. I, . 1.
52.410. Crane with Invariable Jib 10. o. o
52.411. idem, different pattern, of metal, on wood base, with chain, Figure . . 0. 0.0
n. :.-
33IL>.
.'.-I
1X87,
No. 52421. Models of Hoisting and Transporting Machines. 331
52 411. 1 : 7. 52413. 1 : 10.
52414. 1:9. 52 416. 1 : 8.
8. d.
.-.2.412. Crane without Strut 10. 0.0
52,413. Crane with Variable Jib, Figure. . . . 12. 0.
:. 2.414. Wall Crane, constructed of iron, Figure 12. 0.0

.".-'.415. Shore Turning Crane, with fixed rotary axis 15. 0.
.-.2.416. Shore Turning Crane with a Rotary Axis sunk under the bottom, Figure . . . 15. 0.
52,417. Shore Turning Crane with Sheet Iron Staging 21.10.0

."2,418. Turning Crane, rotary on wheels 17.10.0
52,419. Travelling Crane, of iron 21.0.0
.".-'.420. Traverser with Pit 17. 10.
."-'.421. Turntable . 17. H>. o
fl. 4100, 585,

586, 363H.
52424. 1:8.
52 425. 1 : 7.
52 423. 1 : 7. 52427. 1:5.
5" 4""
No. M
1
i::::.
Pile Drivers, Brake Dynamometers, Clock Movements. 333
52428. 1:10. 52430. 1:12.
52431. 1:3. 52433. 1:10.
Clock Movements. s. ,1.
52,427. Model of a Pendulum Escapement, Figure, with detachable escapement; swing

second; can also be used as a chronometer
1
o 1. 0.
52,428. Model of a Clock, with complete movement and perforated dial 20 cm diameter,
Figure 2.10.0
52,429.
- -
idem, with electric minute contact, see No. 51,704, for connecting up with an
electric dial 3. 0.0
52,430. Model of a Clock from an old specimen dating back to the year 1640, Figure, of
wood, iron and stone 0.16.0
A
stone is used for the weight; the hook has a circular motion and releases the escape wheel,
whose teeth lie in the horizontal plane.
52,131. Model of an Anchor Escapement, with spring drive, Figure 3. 4.
52,432. Model of a Cylindrical Escapement . 3. 10.
52.133. Model of a Turret Clock Movement, Figure (Fr. phys. Techn. I, 2, Fig. 3286) 9. 0.0
Models of Water- Wheels, Turbines, Valves, Steam Cylinders, ci. STB-, ese,
Steam Engines, etc. are listed iurther on in this Catalogue. 637 502
<
-
334 Equilibrium, Motion and Molecular Effects of Liquids. No. 52434-
52434. 1:10.
52435. 1:10.
Equilibrium, Motion and Molecular Effects of Liquids.

.~>L'.134. Universal Hydrostatic Apparatus, Figure, suitable for a large number of experi- * l]
ments in the Mechanics of Liquids and Gases; can be used in a horizontal and vertical
position 10. 0.
The apparatus can be used :( 1 for the propagation of pressure of liquids and gases in
)
all directions ;
(2) as a hydraulic press; (3) for buoyancy experiments; (4) as a Pascal apparatus; (5) as communi-
cating tubes; (6) (7) as well-springs; (8) for outflow experiments; (9) for decrease
with capillary tubes;
of pressure in cylindrical tubes; (10) as Segner's water wheel; (11) for the hydraulic ram; (12) as
Heron's ball; (13) Cartesian divrr.
Complete description and directions for use on application.
~>L',135. -- idem, in box, Figure 11.10.0
52,43(i. Apparatus as No. 52,434, but constructed half as large again 14. 0.0
52,437. i d e in, in box 16.10.0
.">2.4:ts. Apparatus for showing Pressure Drop in Tubes of various widths, for use in conjunction with one
of the universal hydrostatic apparatus Nos. 52,434 52,437 1. 0.
.->2,4. f!i. Hartwich's Apparatus for the Hydrostatic Paradox (Ztschr. f. d. phys. n. chem. U. 16, 1903, p. ->7">) 3. 0.
This apparatus ran also tic used in conjunction with he universal hydrostatic apparatus.
I
( I. 723.
5530.
No. 524.M. Universal Apparatus, Spirit Levels, Propagation of Pressure. 335
52 442. 1 : 3.
52452. 1:7. 52 453. 1 : 8. 52 454. 1 : 6.
s. d.
Equilibrium of Liquids.
52. 440. Tube Level Model (Weinhold's), Figure (W. D., Figs. 104 and 105 [93 and 94]),
length 40 cm, with polished stand 0. 11.
- -
52.441. idem, stand unpolished 0. 9.
52.442. Tube Level with metal base, Figure (W. and E. phys. Prakt., Fig. 12) ... 0. 7.
52.443.
- -
idem, smaller and simpler pattern, with iron base 0. 3.
52.444. Spirit Level in cast iron case, Figure, for perpendicular and horizontal surfaces,
shafts, etc 0. 8.
Round Spirit Level, of brass, nickelled, Figure.

List No. 52,445 52,446 52,447 52,448
Diameter mm 25 30 40 50
0.3.6 0.4.6 0.5.0 0.5.6
52.449. Pressure Tube with Piston and Plugs, for showing the invariability in volume of liquids
and the difference between liquids and gases (M. T., p. 95) 0. 2.
52.450. Apparatus for Propagation of Pressure, hollow brass sphere with fine holes and force
pump placed on same, similar to Fig. 52,452 (W. D., Fig. 106 [95]), without pressure
gauge 0.13.0
52.451. --idem, of glass (spherical squirt) 0. 3.
52.452. Apparatus for the Propagation of Pressure in Liquids and Gases, of brass, with Pressure
j
Gauges, Figure 1. 0.
52.453. --idem, on stand, Figure, with pressure gauges and stop-cock (Fr. phys.
Techn. I, 2, Fig. 2692)
1. 16.
52.454. Brass Cube for Pressure Propagation, Figure, with six thin rubber membranes,
as suggested by Browne, with 2 stop-cocks for leading in and taking off the water or air,
on stand (Fr. phys. Techn. I, 2, Fig. 2333) 2. 0.
Cl. 701, 703,

702. 704.
70S, 3642, 706.
336 Equilibrium, Motion and Molecular Effects of Liquids. X" :.2)
52 456. 1 : 6.
52455. 1:5.
52 458. 1 : 6. 52 459. 1 : 12.
s. ,1.
52.455. Apparatus for demonstrating the Distribution of Pressure in Long Tubes, Figure o. Hi. o
Two communicating glass cylinders, qne being closed by a rubber membrane and the other by a '
rubber plug, have each a closed pressure gauge with rubber tubing (Piezometer). When pressure is
applied to the membrane the coloured liquids in the two gauges rise to the same height.
52.456. Wave Tube (Maxwell's), Figure, for explaining the formation of the residuum,
slow equalisation of pressure; can be used as an analogue for the charge and discharge
of a condenser (Fr. phys. Teehn. I, 2, Fig. 2392) Id. o
52.457. Tube with closed Pressure Gauges, for pressure distribution, as suggested by '
Friedr.
('. (I. Miiller (M. T., Fig. 57) . . . . I.
."ii',-158. Hydrostatic Apparatus (I'ecknager.s), modified by Friedr. ('. (!. Miiller, Figure,
for showing the distribution of pressure in liquids and the regularity of aetion on the
area of the walls of vessels (Pascal's Law); the apparatus can be used also as a demon-
stration model for the Hydraulic Press (Ztschr. f. d. phys. u. chem. U. 7, 1893/94, p. 7;
'
M. T., Fig. 58) 3. ti. (I
.':.'. l."i!>.
Hydraulic Bellows, Figu
re (W. 1)., p. 148 [127]), comprising rubber cushion with
hose, funnel tube and supporting board, without weight and stand l.ll'. u
A few litres (if water are tir>t poured into the tube, and the supporting board and a ~>0 kg li.">
weight are placed on the cushion, and the result shows that the weight i- raised by slowly filling with
water.
C I. 3324, 502:!,
3325, 3839.
No. 52466. Propagation of Pressure. Hydraulic Presses. 337
52 461. 1 : 6. 52465. 1:4.
52 463. 1 : 7. 52466. 1:8.
s. d.
52.460. Flat Sheet Iron Box, for storing the rubber cushion (W. D., p. 148) 0. 8.0
52.461. Hydraulic Press, (W. D., Fig. 107 [96]), massively constructed of iron
Figure
and be detachable, in special valve chambers, giving 3000 kg
steel; valves fitted, so as to
pressure, with safety valve for 60 atmospheres 12. 0.0
The ram has a cross-section of 50 sq. cm; each atmosphere of pressure thus corresponds to a
50 kg pressure. The press has an efficiency of 60 ats., which is equivalent to 3000 kg pressure.
- -
52,462. idem, with Pressure Gauge 14. 10.
52.463. Hydraulic Press, of metal, for a pressure of 1500 kg, Figure 8.10.0
52.464.
- -
idem, with Pressure Gauge 11. 0.0
52,465. Hydraulic Press with Glass Cylinder and visible valves, Figure, with safety valve
for 25 Atm., for preventing bursting of the cylinder, for 500 kg pressure 8. 0.0
52.466. - -
idem, with Pressure Gauge, Figure 10.10.0
Cl. 707, 709,

708, 5119. 22
338 Equilibrium of Liquids. No. 52 467
52 467. 1 : 7. 52468. 1:11. 52469. 1:13.
52.467. Hydraulic Press, Figure, with lever, arranged so as to be rotary, for moving same s. d.
from any side; arranged for breaking wood rods, etc 6. 0.0
52.468. Hydraulic Press for Compression and Lift, on wood stand, with safety valve, pressure
gauge and hook for weights, Figure 18.10.0
The press is mounted on a thick oak stand, is of the same type and efficiency as No. 52,461,
and is intended to be used for showing the considerable loads which can be lifted by means of the press.
52.469. Hydraulic Press, for Compression, Lift and Extension, with iron frame, Figure,
with safety valve and pressure gauge, suitable for strength tests 22. 10.
The press has a massive iron frame and is fitted with two stout clamps for gripping wires, bands,
etc. in elasticity experiments. Type and efficiency as in No. 52,461. Iron wire 7 mm in diameter
can easily be broken in the press.
52.470. Model for explaining the Hydraulic Press, Figure, of glass in metal frame,
lifting 100 g (I. 11'.
52.471. i d e m, without framework 0. 3.6
52.472. --idem, as No. 52,470, Double Size, with mount and vessel 1.10.0
52.473. Rubber Vessel, for showing the Increase of Pressure downwards, Figure (W. D.,
Fig. 109 [98]), to be filled with mercury 0. 8.0
52.474. Sheet Iron Cylinder with holes at different heights, Figure, for showing the in-
crease of pressure downwards (W. D., Fig. 108 [97]) 0. 6.0
Cli l'i'8. 710, 711.

Hydraulic Presses. Increase o! Pressure. Bottom Pressure. 339
52473. 1:3.
52 476. 1 : 8. 52 479. 1 : 5.
52,475. Pressure-Increase Apparatus (Hartl's), Figure, for showing the internal pressure- s. d.
relations in a liquid (Ztschr. f. d. phys. u. chem. U. 9, 1896, p. 120) 1. 0.
The inferior part of a glass tubs is connected to a pressure-chamber shut by 2 membranes and
turnable about a horizontal axis; in the superior part is fixed a manometer with scale.
5iM7i. Pressure-Increase Apparatus, after Hartl, with Pointer Reading, Figure (Ztschr.
f. d. phys. u. chem. U.
8, 1895, p. 204), complete, with glass vessel and bridge . . 3. 0.
The apparatus is used for showing (1) the increase of pressure downwards, (2) the independence
of pressure on the inclination of the compressed surface towards the level, (3) the dependence of pres-
sure on the density of the liquid.
52.477. Weighted Flask with Gauze Seal, after Eebenstorff, for depth measurement and
demonstrating the inertia of water (Ztschr. f. d. phys. u. chem. U. 21, 1908, p. 107);
capacity of flask, 100 ccm 0. 5.
52.478. Apparatus for proving Pascal's Law, after Friedr. C. G. Muller (M. T., Fig. 62 and 119),
to be used as an analogon of the Ordinary Barometer and of the Siphon Barometer . 0. 8.
The following are immersed in an upright cylinder filled with water: (1) 1 barometer tube open
at both ends, this being placed under the water in a dish containing mercury; and (2) 1 unequal-limb
hooked tube, which has to be filled with some mercury.
5L .17!. Pascal's Apparatus, for

>
showing that the pressure of liquids depends on their height

and the surface of the bottom of the columns and not upon the capacities of the vessels,
improved by Weinhold, Figure
(W. D., Fig. 110 [99]), with 4 different tubes . . 3. 5.
Cl. 712, 713,714,715,

4123,5*31. 22*
340 Equilibrium of Liquids. No. 52481-
*Z
52481. 1:7. 52 482. 1 : 8.
52 483. 1 : 6. 52485. 1:7.
52.481. Pascal's Apparatus, for showing that the pressure of liquids depends on their height s. d.
Figure, with triple tube, the parts of which can be shut off by cocks, with 3 bottom
pieces of different sizes 2.
52.482. Pascal's Apparatus, for showing that the pressure of liquids depends on their height
Figure, can also be used as a Hydrostatic Balance, on board with levelling screws,
with 3 tubes (M. P. I, Fig. 366 [360]) 7. 0.0
52.483. Hartl's Apparatus, for showing that the pressure of liquids depends on their height
with 3 different tubes. The height scale is fitted to the movable piston so that the
pressure-altitude and the magnitude of the pressure can be read off simultaneously (the
latter on the pointer of the balance) 4. 0.0
52.484. idem, with 3 different rams, with plane, concave and convex surfaces . . . 4.10.0
52.485. Pellat's Apparatus, for showing that the pressure of liquids depends on their height
and the surface of the bottom of the columns, Figure (Ztschr. f. d. phys. u. chem.
TJ. 3, 1889/90, p. 55) 3. 0.0
The apparatus consists of a metal ring fitted to a massive stand, this ring being provided with
a cock and a closing membrane acting on a pointer lever. An adjustable pointer is fitted to a vertical
lever which permits of 3 differently shaped vessels, fitting the ring and pertaining to the apparatus,
to be filled to the same level. The piston is packed with mercury.
52,487. Apparatus, for showing that the pressure of liquids depends on their height and the
surface of the bottom of the columns and not upon the rapacities of the vessels, witli
Spring Balance after Zahlbruckner, F i g u r e, with 3 different tubes 5. 0.0
The spring balance is contained in a brass tube with plain, two-coloured scale and pointer; a
1. 717, 718,
:;:;?-, 719.
NIL .V>490. Bottom Pressure. Hydrostatic Paradox. 341
52 487. 1 : 0. 52 488. 1 : 6.
52 489 A. 52 489 B. 52 489 C. 1:8. 5g 490. 1 : 7.
special scale provided for showing the level of the liquid. The different annexes have conical brass
is s. d.
mounts and can therefore easily be interchanged. The apparatus has a lateral annex-tube so as to
be able to connect it with another vessel.
The piston packing is of mercury; the regulating screw fitted at the top of the apparatus should
be turned in order to bring the pointer to zero.
52.488. Haldat's Apparatus, for showing that the pressure of liquids depends on their height
Figure, with 4 different tubes 2. 10.
52.489. Hartwich's Apparatus for the Hydrostatic Paradox, Figs. A, B and C

(Ztschr. f. d.
phys. u. chem. U. 16, 1903, p. 275), consisting of 3 single pieces of apparatus ... 4. 0.
If the vessels are filled with water, the vessel A is lifted up by buoyancy, vessel B sinks on
account of the action of bottom pressure, while the cylindrical vessel, Fig. C, remains motionless as
neither pressure at base nor buoyancy bring any action to bear on this.
52.490. Sire's Apparatus, Figure, for showing the Hydrostatic Paradox, with 2 connecting
cocks and 1 discharge cock 2. 10.
The following can be shown by the apparatus: (1) that the pressure at the base is independent
of the quantity of liquid; (2) that the pressure at base depends on the extent of surface at base and
on the level of the liquid; and (3) that this pressure is equal to the weight of a column of liquid
whose base is the compressed surface and whose height is the height of compression.
Cl. 721, 722,
726, 5824.
342 Equilibrium of Liquids. No. 52492-
52 495. 1 : 7. 52 496. 1 : 7.
52 492. 52 494. 1 : 6.
52497. 1:18.
52499. 1:14. 52 500. 1 = 12.
d.
52,492. Buoyancy Apparatus, simple, Figure, open glass cylinder closed by plane alumi- s.
nium plate 0. 4. 6
52.494. --idem, Figure, open glass cylinder with metal mount, aluminium plate and
glass vessel (Fr. phys. Techn. I, 2, Fig. 2395 [I, Fig. 169]; Gan.-Man., Fig. 97; Gan.-
Akt., Fig. 78) 0. 6.0
The bottom plate
of the inner cylinder is drawn up by a thread, the outer cylinder being filled
with water; the plate is then firmly held in place by the pressure at base. If now the inner cylinder
is filled with water to the level of the outer, the plate falls down.
52.495. 3 Communicating Tubes, on one wood board, Figure 0. 8.
52.496. Communicating Tubes, on stand, 4 different width and differently bent tubes, Figure 0. 4.0
52.497.
- -
idem, with large glass vessel and stopcock, Figure 1.12.0
52.498. Communicating Vessels (M. T., Fig. 59) 0. 2.
52.499. Communicating Water Vessels, Figure (Kolbe-Skellon, Introduction to Electricity,

Parti, Figs. 64 to 66), with graduation, two of equal and two of unequal diameter, con-
necting tube with cock, also suitable for Capacity Comparisons, with centimetre graduations 1 . I . n
52.500. Channel Balance, with simple stand, Figure 1. 0.
52.501.
-- idem, better type, dismountable, stand with ball bearings, in box, Figure i.io.
:!'. 502. Model of the Channel Balance, after Friedr. C. G. Miiller (M. T., Fig. 60) .... o. 8.
52.503. U-shaped Tubes for liquids of different gravity, Figure, on wood stand, with
0. 5.
graduation, simple
52.504.
- -
idem, 500 mm long, Figure, with white and red graduations, with polished
wood stand 0. in. n
52.505.
-- idem, with levelling screws (Gan.-Man., Fig. 104; Gan.-Akt., Fig. 84). ... 1. 4.0
52,507. idem, after Friedr. C. G. Miiller, with discharge cock (M. T., Fig. 61) ... 0.10.0
< I. :.H34, 730, 739,5828,
741, 2121, 745.
No. 52512. Buoyancy. Communicating Tubes. Archimedi's Principle.
52 508.
52501. 1:12. 52 509. 1:1.
52503. 1:10. 52504. 1: 10. 52505. 1 : 10. 52 512. 1 : 8.
s. d.
52.508. Apparatus for proving the Archimedian Law, Figure 0.14.0

The apparatus consists of 1 wide glass vessel and 1 glass cylinder 250 mm long, into which a
50 mm wide hollow brass cylinder fits so as to be liquid-tight. If the cylinder is sunk in a vessel
containing water, the piston is raised up, and it should now be noted that the piston is hollow, but
is heavier than the water which it displaces. The action of the suction pump can also be explained
with the apparatus.
52.509. Solid and Hollow Cylinders for explaining the Archimedian Principle, Figure (M.
P. I, Figs. 375, 376 [373, 374]) 0. 10.
52.510. idem, smaller 0. 8.0
52.511. Apparatus for explaining the Archimedian Principle, after Weinhold, Figure, in
order to enable the experiment to be made with dissymmetrically shaped bodies as
well (W. D., Fig. Ill [100]; Ztsohr. f. d. phys. u. chem. U. 2, 1888/1889, p. 35) . . 0. 9.0
Metal Cube with Hollow Cube: see Nos. 51,51151,513, p. 230.
52.512. Apparatus for demonstrating the Archimedian Principle, after Sire, Figure (Carls
Eepertorium 10, p. 451) 3. 5.0
The apparatus comprises: 1 flat balance with upper dish, 1 stand with 2 beakers and carrier (ad-
justable) for the body to be immersed; 1 overflow vessel and 1 discharge vessel with cock. It is pos-
sible to show with the apparatus: (1) that a body plunged in a liquid is submitted to an upward
pressure which is equal in magnitude to the weight of the quantity of liquid displaced; (2) that the
increase of pressure on the bottom of the vessel is equal to the pressure of the liquid on the immersed
body; (3) that a body floats when it displaces a volume of water whose weight is just as great as
that of the body itself.
Cl. 746, 5774, 747, 748,

Hydrostatic Balances: see Nos. 51,57351,602, pp. 236240. 5821, 749.
344 Equilibrium of Liquids. No. 52513
52 514. 1 : 5.
52 513. 1 : 8.
52 517. 1 : 3. 52519. 1:10. 52 520. 1 : 4.
52,513. Float Apparatus, after Schellen, Figure, for showing that a floating body becomes s. d.
immersed in the liquid until the volume of liquid displaced by it becomes equivalent
to its own weight (explanation of the hydrometer) 0. 15.
The apparatus consists of 1 glass cylinder with eduction tube, a 200 ccm hollow displacing float,
4 loading weights of 20 g and a measuring glass.
- -
52,514. idem, simpler, Figure (W. u. E. phys. Prakt., Fig. 46) 0. 10.
52.515. Float and Glass Cylinder with plane base, for float experiments (W. D., Fig. 116 [105]) 0. 6.0
52.516. --idem, in form shown in Fig. 52,516, for showing that the force compressed by
the body on the bottom depends on the height of the liquid column bearing on it . 0. 4.0
52.517. Float, Figure, after Haedicke, with Cylindrical Vessel, Glass Cylinder and Glass
Plate (W. D., Fig. 117 [106]) 0. 8.0
52,518. Apparatus for showing that a floating body displaces a certain quantity of water when
loaded corresponding to the weight of the load (Fr. phys. Techn. I, 2, Fig. 2420) . . 3.10.0
The floating body carries a collecting vessel, which is placed under the water trough, and into
this vessel water can flow out of the trough. The quantity of water bearing on the floater causes
the floater to sink down into the trough to such extent that the position of the water in the trough,
as shown by a water gauge, ramains unchanged in spite of the loss of water which occurs when it
flows out.
.~>L'..~ilii. Float Apparatus, after Vogel, Figure, with arrangement for eliminating buoyancy
(Fr. phys. Techn. I, Fig. 2417) 1.14.0
52,r>2<t. Float and Glass Cylinder, after Haedicke, new construction, Figure o. IL>. o
The bell is placed loosely <>n tin- bottom of the full vessel and a current of air blown through
the orifice c. The bell thereupon remains fixed as though attracted by suction.
Cl. 3330. 764, 5778,
73,-., .'.771, 73(i.
No. 52531. Floaters. Metacentres. Displacing Cylinders. 345
52523. 1:12. 52526. 1:3.
52521. 3: 10. 52 528. 1 : 2. 52 529. 1 : 2.
s. d.
52.521. Float, after Hartl, Figure (Ztschr. f. d. phys. u. chem. U. 9, 1896, p. 121) . 0. 18.
The apparatus is used for explaining the conditions for the floating of the body, and also for
explaining the difference between hydraulic and hydrostatic pressure.
52.522. - - idem, different pattern (Ztschr. f. d. phys. u. chem. U. 9, 1896, p. 122; Fr.
phys. Techn. I, 2, Fig. 2419) 0. 18.
52.523. Buoyancy and Metacentre Apparatus, as suggested by Haedicke, Figure, glass

vessel with discharge cock, floating body with adjustable web and stand with holder
(Fr. phys. Techn. I, 2, Fig. 2422) 3. 0.
52.524. Half-Cylinder for the Metacentre, of wood, as suggested by Friedr. C. G. Miiller (M.
T., Fig. 70) 0. 2.
52.525. Section of Cylinder with 2 equilibrium positions (Fr. phys. Techn. I, 2, Fig. 2423). 0. 3.0
52.526. Cold Water Float, Hollow Brass Sphere, Figure, for demonstrating the change in
specific gravity of water by heat, floating in cold water and sinking in warm, 40 mm
diameter, without glass vessel 0. 4.
52.528. Glass Body, Figure, floating in cold water, sinking in warm water or alcohol . 0. 1. 6
52.529. Small Flask and Watch Glass, as suggested by Al Biruni, for determining the specific
gravity of solids, Figure (W. u. E. phys. Prakt., Fig. 36; Fr. phys. Techn. I, 2,
Fig. 2303) 0. 2.
51,746. Displacing Cylinder, for determining the specific gravity of solids, Fig. 51,746, p. 250,
with lateral eduction pipe (W. D., Fig. 57 [52]) 0. 5.
52,531. Displacing Apparatus as suggested by Eebenstorff, cf. Fig. 52,533; specially suitable
for rapid density determinations on pieces of mineral as large as a man's fist, also
for students' use (Ztschr. f. d. phys. u. chem. U. 19, 1906, p. 149); small pattern . 1.16.0
The apparatus comprises: 1 vertical cylindrical glass with lateral tubulure, 3 stoppers with
different discharge tubes, 1 float going to 350 grams, 1 calibrated receiving vessel for 600 com, graduated
every 5 com, 1 linoleum disc for protecting the bottom of the cylindrical glass.
Cl. 731, 780,
737, 4162, 775.
346 Equilibrium of Liquids. No. 52532
52 533. 1 : 10. [52534. 1:10. 52 536. 1 : 9. 52 542. 1 : 6. 52 544. 1 : 8.
52.532. Glass Bell with lead weight, for determining volume of gases, for preceding Displacing
Apparatus, cf. Fig. 52,534
52.533. Displacing Apparatus, as suggested by Eebenstorff, large pattern, for pieces to 1 kg
weight, with 1000 ccm measuring glass, Figure
52.534. Large Glass Bell with lead weight, for volume determinations of gases, Figure
52.535. Measuring Cylinder for 200 ccm, for accurately measuring small pieces
52.536. Burette with Communicating Vessel, after Miihlenbein, Figure, for determining
the sp. gravity of solids (Ztschr. f. d. phys. u. chem. U. 7, 1893/94, p. 23; Fr. phys.
Techn. I, 2, Fig. 2304), with 3 test pieces of lead, brass and iron, each 150 g weight
Before starting the experiment the glass vessel is sunk until the coloured water contained in it
is at zero both in the glass tube and the observation tube; the body is then immersed and the liquid
surface is prevented from rising, by raising the glass vessel, until the meniscus is again on the mark
in the observation tube. The water displaced is now in the burette and the volume of the body can
be read direct in ccm. It is now only necessary to divide the absolute weight of the test body, in
grams, by the volume in ccm, in order to get the sp. gravity.
Overflow Vessels: see Nos. 51,746 51,748, p. 250.
Displacing Bodies.
List No. 52,537 52,538
Adjusted at 15 C. 17.5 C.
Displaces 5 g
0. 4.
52.542. Hydrometer, after Nicholson, Figure, of brass, with wide tube for obtaining con-
siderable buoyancy, and with arrangement for determining the specific gravity of solids
lighter than water; also suitable for determining the sp. gravity of liquids (M. P. I,
Fig. 392 [383]; Fr. phys. Techn. I, 2, Fig. 2408)
52.543. idem, of glass
52.544.
- -
idem, after Tralles (W. D., Fig. 118 [107]), Figure
- -
52.545. idem, after Fahrenheit, Hydrometer for liquids (Gan.-Akt.-Eein., Fjg. 102),
with glass cylinder
52.546. 2 Hydrometers, after Baume, for light and heavy liquids respectively
No. 52557. Specific Gravity. Hydrometers. 347
52 554. 1 : 5. 52 555. 1 : 9.
52 548. 1 : 5. 52 553. 1 : 5.
52 547. 1 : 5.
52 552. 1 : 5. 52 556. 1 : 6.
52.549. Hydrometer, high Sensitivity Pattern, for specific gravities of 0.997, 0.998, 0.999 and
a. d.
1.000, for measuring the density of water between and 25 C. and for showing the
Density Maximum 0. 15.
52.550. Universal Hydrometer, from 0.700 to 2.000, with thermometer 0. 4. 6
52.551.
- -
idem, without thermometer 0. 3. 6
52.552. Hydrometer, for very accurately determining the sp. gravity from 0.700 to 2.000,
comprising 4 spindles with thermometer in elegant case, and 1 measuring jar,
Figure 0.18.0
52.553. Large, Flat Hydrometer for measuring the Density of Acids, Figure, with large,
plain black and red scale from 1.180 to 1.240 0. 3.
The Hydrometer is quite flat in shape, thus enabling it to be immersed between the accumu-
lator plates of stationary batteries. The scale indicates thousandths. Not suitable for portable
accumulators.
52.554. Specific Gravity Indicator, Figure, Hydrometer with glass vessel, rubber ball and
tubing, for conveniently determining the sp. gr. of the acid in portable accumulators 0. 7.
If acid is sucked up by the rubber ball into the glass vessel the density of the acid can be easily
read off on a hydrometer contained in the vessel.
52.555. 27 Indicators, of glass, differently loaded, Figure, each Indicator plunges into a
liquid when the sp. gr. of the latter is equal to that marked on the indicator (Fr. phys.
Techn. I, 2, Fig. 2471) 1. 0.
The Indicators correspond to the sp. gravity of 0.7 to 2.0 in stages of 0.05.
52.556. Sike's Hydrometer, Figure, heavily gilt, with thermometer, instructions, tables
and comparison rule, in elegant mahogany box and with test glass 4. 10.
52.557. Alcoholimeter, after Tralles, for 30100%, graduated in

l
/2 % 0. 2.
l
Cl. 766, 767, 2276, 68, 779 ,
768, 3645.
348 Equilibrium of Liquids. \... .V2558
52 558. 1 : 8. 52 560 B. 1:6. 52562. 1:6.
52 560 A. 1:4. 52 566. 1 : 4.
52.558. Differential Hydro-Pycnometer, after Eebenstorff, Figure, without glass cylinder s. d.
(Ztschr. f. d. phys. u. chem. U. 17, 1904, p. 339) 1. 8.
The instrument is used for accurately determining the sp. gr. from 0.5 2.0, requires only a
very small quantity of liquid and can be used in the preparatory and laboratory work of the teacher
as a precision hydrometer. It gives an opportunity for exercises on the Archimedian Principle as
well as for discussing the advantages and disadvantages of the various methods for determining density
in the preparatory practical instruction.
52.559. Glass Cylinder for Differential Hydro-Pycnometer No. 52,558, 445 mm high, 90 mm
wide, all for Hydrometer No. 52,560 0. 3. 6
52.560. Hydrometer with Centigram Spindle, after Eebenstorff (Ztschr. f. d. phys. u. chem.
U. 19, 1906, p. 10), Figs. A and B, of glass, in elegant case, with 5 weights each
for water and air in separate wood box. Price without glass cylinder (see No. 52,559) 1. 4.
The Centigram Spindle is arranged so as to screw and is provided with coloured scale. This
off
Hydrometer is specially adapted for instruction in chemistry and mineralogy, it permits of rapid
working.
52.561. Pneumatic Densimeter, for determining the Specific Gravity of Liquids, after Boyle,
2 tubes with 1 pump, on graduated stand 1. 8.
52.562. idem, after Mohr (Alexander Hydrometer), Figure,

- - instead of being fitted
with pump, with rubber ball and valve (M. P. I, Fig. 399) i. :.. ii
52.563.
- -
idem, after Babinet, without bellows (M. P. I, Fig. 364), with 2 U-shaped tul><-s
and graduation for accurately reading differences of height 1. 0.
CI. 3332, 3329, 781,

-. 770.
Xo. 52 576. Pycnometers. Hydrometers. Densimeters. Comparison Bodies. 349
52567. 52568. 52569.

1:4. 1:4. 1:4. 52571. 1:7.
52570.
1 :2.
52574. 2:5. 52 572. 1 : 2.
52,564. 2 Immersion Tubes, after Friedr. C. G. Miiller, for light and heavy liquids respectively
!
'
s. d.
(M. P., Fig. 63) . . . 0. 8.
U-shaped Tubes: see p. 343.
51,749. Pycnometer, F i g. 51,749, p. 250, for determining the sp. gravity of solids and
liquids; comprising small flask with cover plate ground on, spherical pipette and tripod
(W. D., Figs. 58 and 59 [53 and 54]), without glass jar 0. 3.
- - with thermometer ground in and graduated tube, Figure, for deter-

52.566. idem,
mining the (W. and' E. phys. Prakt., Fig. 38)
sp. gravity of liquids 0. 5.
52.567. Small Flask, for determining the specif ic gravity of solid bodies soluble in water, but
insoluble in alcohol, Figure 0. 1. 6
52.568. i d e
- -
m, for substances insoluble in water, as suggested by Eegnault, Figure
(Gan.-Man., Fig. 116) 0. 1. 6
52.569.
- -
idem, simple, after Gay-Lussac, for liquids, Figure 0. 1.
52.570.
-- idem, straight pattern, after Eegnault, Figure (Gan.-Man., Fig. 117) . . 0. 1.
52.571. Pycnometer, after Sprengel, for determining the specific gravity of liquids, Figure
(W. u. E. phys. Prakt., Figs. 39 and 40) 0. 3.
52.572. --idem, Figure, with Thermometer fused in and Glass Cap ground on for
accurate measurements (M. P. I, Fig. 391), with filling tube 0. 9. 6
52,573. 1 Cubic Centimetre, of brass, copper, lead or aluminium. Price, each 0. 3.
52.574. 12 Cubic Centimetres in case, Figure, of magnesium, antimony, tin, German

silver, copper, silver, aluminium, zinc, iron, brass, bismuth, lead (Fr. phys. Techn. I,
2, Fig. 2240) 1. 4.
52.575. 12 Bars, all of same weight (10 g) and same section, in case (Fr. phys. Techn. I, 2,
1. 6.
Fig. 2241)
52.576. 4 Metal Strips, of aluminium, zinc, copper, lead, in case, of equal width, equal thickness
and equal weight, the lengths corresponding inversely to the different specific gravity 0. 8.
Cl. 771,772, 773, 777,

5552, 774, 48BO.
350 Equilibrium and Motion of Liquids. No. 52 577 -
PG BSKNMNSEZZ/VM
J.S so V.11588 nK i) Si n IS 70 It II
Metallbleche
La'ngen
'iimimgekehrtenVerhaltnisse
ftf specif techenGeiyichte
NachArendt,l_ehrbuchder
anorjanischen Chemie.
52 578. 1 : 5. 52580. 1:7.
52577. 1:13.
52 579. 1 : 5-
52 581. 1 = 15. 52582. 1:12. 52583. 1:13.
52.577. 14 Metal Strips, after Arendt, Figure, of platinum, gold, lead, silver, copper, s. d.
German silver, brass, nickel, steel, iron, tin, zinc, aluminium and magnesium, of same
thickness, width and weight; lengths inversely proportional to specific gravity . . . 1. 16.
The construction is very accurate and all metals are genuine.
52.578. 3 Cylindrical Bodies of the same weight, after Kolbe, Figure, of aluminium, iron
and lead 0. 18.
52.579. Cylindrical Glass Vessel with 4 Liquids of different specific gravity, Figure . . 0. 5.
52.580. 6 Liquids of different specific gravities, (Mercury, Sulphuric Acid, Glycerine, Figure
Water, Petroleum, Sulphuric Ether), in glass tubes of same length and width, in wood
frame. The lengths of the liquid columns are in inverse ratio to the specific gravities 0.16.0
Motion of Liquids.
52.581. Outflow Apparatus, for experiments on flow out of an orifice in a thin wall, Figure
(W. D., Figs. 119, 120 [108, 109]), consisting of Mariotte flask, rubber tubing, glass
tube, outflow vessel, 1 mouthpiece and small table 1.15.0
52.582. --idem, for experiments on outflow velocities at different pressures, Figure 1. 0.0
A sheet iron cylinder, 75 cm high, with a wide vessel at the top for more easily maintaining a
constant level, and with 3 orifices at distances of ratio 1:4:9 provided below the level, for showing
that the quantities flowing out are proportional to the square roots of the heights of pressure (Torri-
celli's Theorem).
52.583.
- -
idem, after Weisbach, with vessel 1 high, Figure, m with stuffing boxes
(M. P. I, Fig. 402 [392]), on plate with levelling screws 2.12.0
CI. 779,5079,3334.5775.
783, 784, 785.
No. 52 588. Comparison Bodies and Liquids. Outflowing Water Jet. 351
52 586. 1 : 15.
52.584. Outflow Apparatus, for proving Torricelli's Law on velocity and quantity of outflow s. d.
at different hydrostatic pressures, Figure, with 5 sliding plugs, constant level

overflow pipe, catching trough and table 11. 0.0
Each outflow support has a manometer and
3 different tubes are provided for each slider for
showing the increase in the quantities enanating through annex pipes; the catching trough is gra-
duated and has a sliding diaphragm. The whole rests on a wood table covered with sheet iron.
52.585. - -
idem, simpler, annex tubes without manometers 9. 0.0
52.586. Haiti's Apparatus for experiments on velocity and quantity of outflow at different
pressures, for showing the diminution of pressure, the reacting pressure of liquids, and
for demonstrating the projection parabola, Figure
(Fr. phys. Techn., Figs. 3530, 3538) 7. 0.0
52.587. Well Spring, of glass, comprising glass vessel with glass tube and point (Meyer, Natur-
lehre, Fig. 154; Gan.-Man., Fig. 127) 0. 2.0
* 52,588. Apparatus for showing that a Jet of Water flowing into the air is composed of drops,
Figure 1. 6.0
Suitable for setting up on the projection
lantern. A
stroboscopic disc is placed in front of the
water vessel with outflow aperture; with the aid of this disc it is possible to render visible (when the
disc is rapidly rotated) the composition of the water jet of drops.
Cl. 3335, 3283, 3336.

# Can be used with the projection apparatus.
352 Equilibrium of Liquids. No. 52 589 -
52 592. 1 : 7.
52590. 1:15.
52591. 1:10. 52 593. 1 : 10. 52 595. 1 : 10.
# 52,589. Apparatus for showing the parabolic form of the outflowing Water Jet; can be ,
* ''
used at same time for demonstrating total reflection in a water jet (W. D., Fig. 291 [274]) j
0. 16.
* 52,590. idem, with vessel 1 m high, Figure, on support, with 4 coloured discs for
inserting 2. 0.0
52,591. Reaction Float, Figure, for showing the back impact of outflowing liquids, with
water vessel (Weber, Lehrb. d. Phys., 10 th edn., 1897, Fig. 60) 0. 15.
52,592. Reaction Apparatus, Figure, for showing hydrodynamic lateral pressure. . . . 0.14.0
- -
VJ.593. idem, after Hartl, Figure, for showing the back impact of outflowing liquids,
gases and vapours (Ztschr. f. d. phys. u. chem. U. 10, 1897, p. 234) 1. 4.0
The apparatus consists of a stand carrying a metal tube hanging from a rubber tube, the metal
tube having two opposite apertures, a gram scale and a trough. The two apertures are in size as
1 :2 and can be alternately closed. At the, upper end of the rubber tubing either a funnel (for C\|M n-
meiits with liquids), a mouthpiece (for experiments with gases), or a sheet irqn sphere (for experiments
with vapours) can be arranged, these three latter being given in with the apparatus.
ft. 342, 5091,
('an be used \\ith the projection apparatus. 3337. 790. 789.
No. .V->603. Outflowing Water Jet and its Reaction-Pressure. 353
52596. 1:13. 52 597. 1 : 8. 52598. 1:10.
52 600. 1 : 10. 52 602. 1 : 4. 52 603. 1 : 10.
s d.
52,594. Lateral Pressure Apparatus, after Kleiber, for demonstrating hydrodynamic lateral -
pressure (Kleiber, Lehrb. d. Phys. f. Gymnas., Fig. 85), consisting of a small water
balance with aperture at the end j
0. 15. o
.vj.r>95. Apparatus (Haiti's), Figure, for experimental measurements on Velocities of

Outflow, Quantity of Outflow and Reaction-Pressure (Ztschr. f. d. phys. u. chem. U. 9,
1896, p. 234) 4. 4.
The outflow orifice can be placed either in the bottom or the side wall. Five different plates
permit of varying the form and size of the same, while the pressure is varied by small inset tubes
25 and 50 cm long. A sheet iron rule, on which the water jet gives its velocity direct, is used for deter-
mining the velocity of outflow. The reaction-pressure is given automatically on the pressure scale
which is divided in grams. The apparatus works with thorough accuracy without large quantities of
water being necessary.
52,596. Barker's Mill (Reaction Wheel), with water tank, Figure 1. 0.
-- idem, can also be used as a well-spring

.">L'..")97.
entirely of metal, Figure; . . . 1. 0.
52,598. Barker's Mill, Figure, of metal, with rotating vessel 0. 16.
- -
.~iL'.r>99. idem, smaller, with glass water vessel 0. 12.
52,600. --idem, Figure, of glass and metal, with polished wood stand 5.
52,602. Hydraulic Ram, after Montgolfier, of glass, Figure (W. D., Fig. 126 [114 B]) .0. 8.
of metal and glass, Figure (W. D., Fig. 125 [114 A]), with pipe line
-idem,
4 m long;
can be easily taken apart; excellent in action; with sheet iron vessel for placing
underneath for the water running out of the impact valve 3. 12.
Kl. 792,793, 791,

794,797,798.
354 Motion of Liquids. No. 52 604 -
52611. 1 : 1.
52 604.
52 616. 1 = 6. 52615. 1:13.
52,604. Hydraulic Ram, Figure, with water tank and vessel for setting underneath, on * ,-. d.
one stand 3. 15.
51,601. Plate and Hollow Hemisphere for measuring the Impact Pressure of Liquids (M. T..
pp. 108 and 109) 0. 3.
52.606. Water-Lead Mouthpiece, for experiments on Impact and Reaction-pressure (M. T.,
Figs. 74 and 75) 0. 2.
52.607. Indifferent Immersion Body, for impact pressure experiments (M. T., Fig. 76) . . 0. 2.
52.608. Model of a Dressing Machine (M. T., Fig. 77) (). 3.
52.609. Glass Vessel for Whirlpool (Hofler, Physik, Fig. 177) 0. 2. <l
52.610. Diminution of Pressure Apparatus, after Friedr. C. G. Miiller (M. T., Fig. 73) . . 0. 10.
52.611. Apparatus for showing Diminution of Pressure in Cylindrical Tubes, Figure (W. i
D., Fig. 121 [110]) 1. 0.
52.612. Attachment for above, for outflow experiments on an orifice in a thin wall (W. D., Fig. 120 [100]) (. 4. li
52.613. Two Glass Tubes, for showing pressure-change in bent or constricted tubes (W. 1)., Figs. 122 and !_':>
[Ill and 112]), for attaching to Apparatus No. 52,611 or directly to the water-lead 0. 4. it
.">:.'. til 4. Glass Tube, for showing the sucking action of flowing water (W. D., Fig. 124 [113]) 0. 1. H
52,615. Pitot Tube, modified by Darcy and Reichenbach, Figure, for measuring velocity
of flow .6. II.
This apparatus independent of a time observation. It has two upright tubes alongside each
is
other, which are horizontally bent underneath. One is for taking up the impart of flowing water, while
the other >hows the hydrostatic pressure of the surface of the water.
Both tubes have a suction tube connected to them at their upper ends: this suction tuhe can
be closed by a cock. By this arrangement it is possible to raise or lower the \\ater olumns, as re-<
quired, for convenience in reading, for carrying out the comparison in height.
The lower cock which cuts off the water columns from the lu)n> can lie closed and opened by '
two cords.
rl. 796,
799. SCO, 801.
No. 52 620. Impact Pressure. Velocity of Plow. Water Wheels. 355
52 624. 1 : 5. 52 626. 1 : 6.
52.616. Woltman's Mill, Figure, for measuring velocities of flow, improved pattern, d.
with counting mechanism for 1000 revolutions; axes running in agate and ball bearings;
bladevS 12.5 cm diameter and about 25 pitch mm 7. 10.
If desired, the apparatus can be calibrated in Berlin or Munich. The fee is about 2. 12. 0, ex-
clusive of cost of carriage both ways.
52.617. Rod for above, of glass tubing, 4 m

long, can be folded in 2 parts, with point and
detachable base-disc and decimetre graduation 1. 5.
52.618. Releasing Device, for fixing on the Eod, for use with small depths and velocities . 0. 18.
Hydrometrical Mills, large or small Patterns, for high Velocities, with Electrical
Contact, Self-recording Gauge Indicator quoted for on application.
52.619. Sectional Model of a Vane Water Meter, Figure . 4. 0.
After passing the sack-shape sieve the water passes through the sloping channels distributed over
the area of the measuring space proper (a bottom beaker) and meets the blade wheel in jets with
tangential contact. The revolutions of the blade wheel are transmitted to the counting and indicating
mechanism.
- - d
52.620. i e in, of a Disc Water Meter 7. 0.
2,621. --idem, of a Woltman Water Meter, for the passage of large quantities . . . 15.15.0
52,622. Model of an Overshot Water Wheel, Figure, of lacquered sheet zinc, with water
tank and collecting vessel 1. 4.
- -
2.623. idem, larger 1. 16.
2.624. Model of an Undershot Water Wheel, Figure, of lacquered sheet zinc, with water
tank and collecting vessel 1.4.0
- -
2.625. idem, larger 1. 16.
2.626. Overshot and Undershot Water Wheel, combined to form one model, Figure, of
lacquered sheet zinc, with hose for connecting to the water wheel. The lower gutter
can be detached . . . 2. 0.
Cl. 5604,802,
803. 3795. 23*
356 Motion of Liquids. No. .V_' _'-
52 628. 1 : 12.
52 630. 1 : 10.
52 633. 1 : 5. 52 634. 1 : 5
s. d.
t 52,627. Model of Overshot Water Wheel, Figure, large pattern 16.1(1.0
t 52,628. Model of an Undershot Water Wheel, with sliding sluice, Figure, large pattern 16.10.0
t 52,629. Model of a Middle-shot Water Wheel, with weir L6.10.0
t 52,630. Model of a Poncelet Wheel, Figure 20. 0. o
t 52.631. Model of a Tangential Wheel, inward flow partial turbine after Fourneyron . . . 34. 0.
52.632. Model of a Turbine, Figure, for connecting to the water-lead 1.16.0

- - d e o.o
52.633. i in, simple, after Weinhold, Figure (W. V. d. E., Fig. 146) 1.
52.634. Model of a Jonval Turbine (downward flow), F i

g u r e, for connecting to the water
supply 6. 0.
t 52,635. Large Model of a Jonval Turbine 15. 0.0
The items marked are carefully constructed model- I'm- I'niviTsitirs ;unl r.illc
r
I. -III. Ml.',, 806.
)
808, 807, s:il(i
o. 53642. Water Wheels. Turbines. Water Drawing Wheels. 357
52 637. 1 : 9. 52 638. 1 : 4.
52 836. 1 : 8.
52 639. 1 : 5. 52641. 1:3.
52,636. Model of a Fourneyron Turbine, Figure (outward flow Radial Turbine), with visible d.
guide blades which are covered by glass; the jacketting is glazed underneath. Model
is 85 cm high and 30 cm diameter 9. 0.
t 52,637. Model of a Fourneyron Turbine (outward flow Radial Turbine), Figure . . . . ,15. 0.0
52,638. Water Motor, Figure, suitable as a model of a piston water motor, also for working
easy running machines; with wide degree of speed regulation; capacity Vio" HP at 4 atm.
1
water pressure; with 2 lubricators 5. 0.0
52,638 a. - -
idem,
larger, output /5
1 th
HP
at 4 atm. water pressure 7. 5.0
This and the following size differ somewhat from construction shown in illustration.
~iL',(>38 b. - - i d e in, larger still, output

1
/8
rd
HP at 4 atm. water-pressure 9.10.0
.">LM>39. of the Ship's Screw, Figure, and of the Airship Propeller

Model 1. 4.0
The screw is fitted on a small carriage and can be rapidly rotated by pulling a cord, and the
carriage moved backwards or forwards.
t 52,640. Model of a Wheel with movable Paddles, for steamers 13. 0.0
52,641. Model of an Archimedian Water Screw, Figure (Fr. phys. Techn. I, 2, Fig. 2313
[I, Fig. 553]) 1 . 0.
52.K12. Model of a Discharging Water-drawing Wheel 30. 0.0

The items marked t are carefully constructed models for Universities and Colleges. cl 3647, io, 5161,
-
812,811.
358 Motion and Molecular Effects of Liquids. N... :..
52 643. 1 : 6. 52 644. 1 : 5.
52 645. 1 : 5.
f s. .1.
t 52,643. Model of a medium-high Discharging Water-drawing Wheel, Figure 15. d. (>
52,644. Model of an Apparatus for raising the Sluices, with rack and pinion, Figure. . 5. (>. (
52.645.
- - i d e in, with Screw and Spur Wheels, Figure ti. in. d
52.646. i d e m, with Switch-gear and with Chain-pull . 7.10. it
Molecular Effects of Liquids.

52.647. Piezometer, after Weiuhold, Figure
(W. D., Fig. 127 [115]), suitable for the Pro-
jection Lantern, for showing the small degree of compressibility of liquids _. .">. n
52.648.
--idem, after Grimsehl (Grimsehl, Lehrb. d. J'liys., 1909, Fig. 214; /tschr. f. d.
phys. u. chem. U. 20, 1907, p. 7). The compression vessel with the liquids in be tested
is kept at the same pressure inside and outside by mercury. Price without mercury 1. is. d
52.649. Piezometer, after Oersted, Figure, with Pressure Screw, with m:i>>i\e uhiss cylinder
for 10 atm., with insets (pressure vessel, thermometer, air manometer) 4.1(1.0
The items marked f are carefully constructed models for I'niversities anil Cl. 3646,3(11-
No. -.2657. Water Drawing Wheels, Sluica raising Apparatus. Piezometers and Accessories. 359
52 647. 1 : 5.
52649. 1:8.
52 650. 1 : 8.
52 657. 1 : 8. 52 654. 1 : 5. 52 656. 1 : 5.
2,650. Piezometer, after Oersted, Figure, with pressure pump and spring pressure gauge, s - d.
tested to 10 atm.; easy and convenient to manipulate and fill; with discharge cock,
1 pressure vessel, graduated, and mercury vessel (Fr. phys. Techn. I, 2, Fig. 2524) . i
8. 0.
- -
2.651. idem, with Safety Valve 8. 10.
2.652. Attachment with Pressure Vessel, Thermometer and Air Manometer for Piezometers Nos. 52,650 and
52,651, cf. Fig. 52,649 i. o. o
2.653. Attachment with two Gas Pressure Tubes, after Despretz, for comparing the differing compressibility
of gases (Chwolson, Lehrb. I, Pig. 227) 1. 0.
2.654. Attachment with 1 Ether Vessel and 1 Water Vessel, for the Oersted Piezometer, Figure, for
comparative experiments i. 10.
i,655. Attachment, consisting of Lead Plate and Ether Thermometer in protecting tube, and Manometer,
for demonstrating the lowering of the melting point of water by pressure, after Thomson (M. P., HI,
Fig. 327 [II, 2, Fig. 95]), for the Oersted Piezometer 2. 5.
'.
II
:,656. Attachment with Four Tubes, after Magnus, Figure, for liquifying gases by pressure (M. P., HI.
Fig. 306 [II, 2, Fig. 163]) 1. 10.
Four short barometer tubes are contained in one common vessel and can be fed with mercury
and with different gases which are present above them.
2,657. Piezometer, after Eegnault, Figure (M. P., HI, Fig. 152 [I, Fig. 412]), with glass
vessel and nickelled metal parts 6. 10.
Cl. 5768, 819, 5404,

822. 821, 3341.
360 Molecular Effects of Liquids. N.I. :._ i ;.-,;i
52 659. 1 : 5.
52 660. 1 : 6.
52 663. 1 : 3.
52,659. Plateau's Apparatus, for showing the flattening of a Sphere of Oil rotating in an alco-
holic solution, with rectangular glass box, Figure
(Fr. phys. Techn. I, 2, Fig. 3522) s. (>
* 52,660. --idem (Weinhold's) (W. D., Fig. 85 [78]), Figure, for use with the Projection
Apparatus by employing one of the apparatus for projecting horizontal objects, Nos. 51,032
to 51,039 1. o. (>
.~>2,661. 4 Cohesion Plates, for suspending on the balance, 40

Figure, diameter, of mm
ground glass, polished ebonite, brass and iron (W. D., p. 167 [144]), for showing the
cohesion of wetting liquids and the adhesion of non-wetting liquids on solids .... o. 6. o
.">i'.(62. 4 Hollow Spheres, of glass, 2 of these coated with paraffin, for demonstrating capillary
attraction and repulsion (M. P., Ill, Figs. 191 193 [I, Figs. 448 450]) u. I. (i
.M'. ii3. Plateau's Equal-weight Figures, for soap solution, set of 4, F i gu r e, circle with
feet, circle with handle, triangle and cube (cf. Fr. phys. Techn. I, 2, Figs. 2446 2450)
:>:_', uiil. Vacuum Syphon, after Weinhold - Stcinbrinek, Figure. Cohesion Syphon filled
with water, approx. 1 in long (Jahrliiicher 1'iir \\issenschaftl. Hotanik. Vol. ll', part 4,
pp. 585 et seq.), working by the cohesion of the liquid particles (>. If., u
# Can be used with Projection Apparatus. (1. sic, 5863, 83,

S'.'j.
N... .VJB73. Piezometers. Cohesion. Adhesion. Surface Tension. 361
52664. 1: 12. 52 666. 1 : 10. 52 672. 1 : 4.
52 668. 1 : 3. 52 673. 1 : 8.
s. d.
52,665. Vacuum Syphon as No. 52,664, with. Mercury and Water Filling 1. 1.0
52,066. -- idem, simple, after Weinhold, Figure (W. D., Fig. 171; Ztschr. d.
f. phys.
u. chem. U. 17, 1904, p. 152) 0. 6.
I
52,667. Cohesion and Adhesion Tube, after Leduc and Sacerdote (Gan.-Man., Figs. 26 and27)>
for showing the cohesion and adhesion of liquids, for connecting up to the Vacuum Pump 0. 12.
!
52,668. Apparatus for showing that Liquids endeavour to Contract, Figure, but with glass
cock (W. D., Fig. 130 [118]) 0. 6.
- -
2,670. idem, simple (W. D., Fig. 128 [116]) 0. 1.
* 52, 671. Apparatus for demonstrating Surface Tension (W. D., Fig. 131 [119]), U-shaped glass
tube with unequal limbs, with stand 0. 4.
52.672. Apparatus for showing and measuring Surface Tension, Figure (W. u. E. phys.
Prakt., Fig. 74) 3. 0.
The measurement carried out by observing the degree of ascension in capillary tubes which
is
are fastened on a glass scale by means of a rubber ring. The cubical trough containing the liquid
consists of plate glass sheets of 5 cm side.
52.673. Apparatus after Eebenstorff, for measuring Surface Tension, capillary ascension,
Figure (Ztschr. f. d. phys. u. chem. U. 19, 1906, p. 26, Fig. 2) . .' 1. 0.
The apparatus consists of a manometer for coloured water, a number of capillary tubes together
with stand and glasses, and a pressure tube extending in width downwards, with beaker and
2 hose pieces each of 15 cm length.
# Can be used with the Projection Apparatus. Cl. 4023, 3752, 827,
820, 4976.
362 Molecular Effects of Liquids. No.
52 679. 1 : 5.
52 674. 1 : 10. 52 676 A.

1 : 4.
52 676B.
1 : 1.
52 680. 1 : 5. 52 682. 1 : 2.
52,674. Apparatus after Eebenstorff, for reducing the Surface Tension of Water by Ether,
S. (1.
Figure (Ztschr. f. d. phys. u. chem. U. 19, 1906, p. 27, Fig. 3) 0. 13.
The apparatus consists of a glass bell with nozzle seal, a glass dish, a stand for holding the bell,
a weighted compression bell in a glass cylinder, a pipette for ether and a 30 cm length of rubber tubing.
* 52,675. Dropping Apparatus, after Friedr. C. G. Muller, for showing Surface Tension (M. T.,
Fig. 78), suitable for the Projection Lantern 0. 6.
The liquid used for dropping is coloured colza oil in a mixture of water and alcohol, of such density
that the drops fall slowly.
52,676. Dropping Pipette, for determining the Constant of Capillarity, Figures A and B
(W. u. E. phys. Prakt., Figs. 78 and 79) 0. 2. (>
Fig. B shows the lower smoothly polished end of the pipette with drop of liquid hanging on
the end.
* 52,677. Wide Tube and Capillary Tube, for capillary depression of non-wetting liquids (W.
D., Fig. 132 [120]) 0. I.
* 52,678.
-- idem, with short Capillary Limb, for demonstrating Surface Tension (M. T.,
0. 3.
Fig. 79)
* 52,679. 2 Wide Tubes with Capillary Tubes, for projection, F i g u r e, on stand, for demon-
strating Capillary Ascension of wetting and the Capillary Depression of non-wetting
water and mercury S. d
liquids, e. g. coloured 0.
* 52, 680. Wide Tube with 5 Communicating Capillary Tubes, Fign re, for the objective de-
monstration of the capillary ascension of wetting liquids or the capillary depression of
0. (i. u
non-wetting liquids
(1. 4984, 82S, 3650,
# Can be used with the Projection Apparatus.
3790, 829, 830.
No. 52691. Surface Tension, Capillarity. 363
Millimeter.
52 684. 1 : 4. 52 685. 1 : 2.
52 686. 1 : 2. 52 691. 1 : 4.
52.681. Apparatus for Capillary Depression and Ascension of Liquids, with 3 capillaries of d.
different widths, on graduated wood stand (Fr. phys. Techn. I, 2, Fig. 2451) .... 0. 8.
- - with 4 capillaries of different widths, on graduated wood stand,

52.682. idem, Figure 0. 12.
52.683. Stand with 10 Communicating Capillary Tubes, Figure, graduated 0. 12.
* 52,684. 5 different Capillary Tubes, with holder and glass vessel, Figure (Fr. phys. Techn.
I, 2, Fig. 2452) 0. 2.
- -
52,685. idem, with plane parallel glass vessel, Figure 0. 12.
52.686. 5 Capillary Tubes of different widths, with stand, Figure (W. D., Fig. 133 A
[121 A]) 0. 8.
52.687. Capillary Tubes alone (Gan.-Man., Figs. 208211) 0. 1.
52,688. 5 Capillary Tubes of different shapes, for showing that the capillary ascension at the
same temperature is independent of the shape of the tube (Gan.-Man., Fig. 218) . . 0. 3.
* 52,689. Apparatus for

showing the behaviour of wetting and non-wetting liquids in a conical
tube, Figure (W. D., Fig. 134 [122]), on stand 0. 2.
*>52.690. 1 Set Capillary Tubes for demonstrating capillary ascension and depression, the pro-
pagation of a drop in a conical tube, the independence of the capillary effect on the
form of tube, and the migration of a drop of mercury by inequality of the surface tension
produced electrolytically 0. 4.
52.691. Apparatus for demonstrating Migration of a Mercury Drop by the electrolytically-

produced inequality of surface tension, Figure, suitable for objective observation . 8.
Cl. 3342, 329,5790,

5846, 330, 3533.
364 Molecular Effects of Liquids. Equilibrium of Gases. N... .'.I' IlilL'
-
52692. 1:1. 52 693. 2 : 5.
52 694. 1 : 2.
52 695. 1 : 10. 52 697. 1 : 7. 52 698. 3 : 10. 52 699. 1 : 8.
* 52,692. Capillary Plates, maintained in correct position by a brass wedge and spring, Figure - cl -
(W. D., Fig. 133 B [121 B]), without stand 0. 3.
* 52,693. - -
idem, with stand, Figure I
0. 10.
* 52,694.
- -
idem, larger, with adjustable angle and with stand, Figure 0. 10.
52,695. Apparatus after Arrhenius, for determining the internal friction of Liquids, F i g u r e
(W. u. E. phys. Prakt,, Fig. 67) 3. 0.
In a brass box, let in at the front and back with windows, is a capillary tube with ball
and two marks. The specific coefficient of friction is determined by observing the times of outflow
of definite quantities of liquid.
With regard to Viscosimfters and Apparatus for testing Oils and Pats for their lubricating quality,
kindly ask for quotations.
52,696. Apparatus after Jamin, for demonstrating the absorption of liqtiids through porous
bodies (Chwolson, Lehrb. d. Phys., I, Fig. 328) o. Hi. ()
A cube of chalk contains a cavity for taking a manometer, the cube being immersed in water.
.)_', 097. Striation Apparatus, after Heumann, Figure, for demonstrating the dissolving
tension of salts (Fr. phys. Techn. I, 2, Fig. 2466) <)..!.(>
52,697 a. Tube with supersaturated Sodium Sulphate Solution: the solution crystallises when
tube i> opened (Chwolson, Physik, Vol. I, p. 620) 0. 1.0
52. !>(). Apparatus after Uppenborn, for the Diffusion of Liquids, Figure (W. I).,
Fig. 135 [123]) 0. 1.
52,09!). Endosmometer, after Dutrochet, Figure, with irnulnation on wood (M. P., HI,
Fig. 223 [I, Fig. 465]) 0. 5.
."'_'.700. -- idem, Figure, with horixontal ascension tube (\V. I)., Fig. 136 [124]) . I). 1(1.
# Can be used with tlir Projection Apparatus.

Cl. 33:>, 333,334,
837, 5360, 838, 839.
No. r,2 706. Capillarity. Endosmose of Liquids. Universal Apparatus for the Study of Gases. 365
52700. 1:6.
52 701. 1 : (5. 52 705. 1 : 30. 52706. 1:19.
s. d.
52,701. Endosmometer, after Niemoller, with vertical membranes, Figure 2. 0.
52.702. Endosmometer, after Pfeffer, with manometer (Liipke-Bose, Grundziige der Elektro-
th
chemie, 5 edn., Fig. 27) 0. 8.
52.703. Osmose Apparatus, after Friedr. C. G. Miiller (M. T., Fig. 81) , . 0. 10.
52,704. Vessel for Dialysis, after Weinhold (W.

D., p. 175 [153]) 0. 5. 0.
Two ebonite rings of 80 mm

diameter fitting in each other with a sheet of parchment stretched
between for receiving the white of an egg.
Equilibrium, Motion and Molecular Effects of Gases.
Equilibrium of Gases.
s
52.705. Apparatus after Schaffers, for Experiments with Gases and Vapours, Figure,
'
suitable for proving Boyle's (Mariotte's) Law for Pressures which are greater or smaller
than 1 atm. and for experiments on the Tensive Force of saturated and non-saturated
vapours in vacuo and in air (Ztschr. f. d. phys. u. chem. U. 18, 1905, p. 217) ... 6. 0.
The apparatus is a combination of the Feilitzsch -Weinhold Apparatus for proving Mariotte's
Law with the 3-tube apparatus as used for the laws relative to the tensive force of gases and vapours.
52.706. Apparatus for Demonstrating the Properties of Gases, after Lermantoff, Figure,
for demonstrating the Barometer, Mariotte's Law, the (Icissler Mercury Air Pump, the
Expansion of Air with constant volume and constant pressure respectively (Air Thermo-
meter), the Yolumnometer, the Tension of saturated and non-saturated vapours . . 5. 0.
For observing according to 0. Lehmann's method the growth of solid and

CM. 840.
liquid crystals which are apparently alive, kindly refer to the Projection 5S41.
4180.
Microscopes and Accessories Nos. 51,05751,061, pp. 183 and 184.
.->;V.!S,
366 EQuilibrium of Gases. No. 52707
52707. 1:12. 52709. 1:10. 52 710. 1 : 7.
52.707. Apparatus for Experiments with Gases, after Schneider, Figure, suitable for a s. d.
large number of experiments on the theory of the equilibrium of gases and on the theory
of heat; can also be used as a Gas Measuring Apparatus; suitable for school use . . 3. 12.
The apparatus consists of 2 separate stands provided with weights, with 3 burette tubes
each having two stopcocks and graduation; 1 rule with 2-coloured centimetre graduation on one side
and millimetre graduation on the other; 1 round flask with rubber stopper and angle tube.
The apparatus is intended for demonstration work in teaching and for students' exercises. It
is suitable for the following demonstration
experiments, among others: Demonstrating the Syphon
Barometer (also with variable vacuum); the Testing of Barometers; the Mercury Air Pump; for pro-
ducing a Vacuum Tube with the Torricellian vacuum; demonstrating boiling and re-boiling on cooling
in vacuo; demonstrating the MacLeod Vacuum Gauge; for experiments on the Vapour Pressure of
Ether in vacuo and in air; for the suction, conduction and measurement of quantities of gas; de-
monstrating the Pressure Gauge; Gay-Lussac's Law on the Expansion of Gases at constant pressure;
on the increase of Pressure of Gases when heating in constant volumes; on the variation in Volume of
Gases with variation of pressure and temperature; Solubility of Gases in liquids measuring the Vapour
;
Pressure of water, etc. etc.

- - with iron stand
52.708. idem, 4. 10.
52.709. Pressure Flask, after Schneider, Figure, for measuring the Pressure in Water Leads,
the Air Pressure produced by the water lead; for demonstrating Heron's Ball and the
Air Chamber 0. 18.
52.710. Diving Bell, Figure, of glass, with light-holder, suspended in stand, for showing
that air occupies a space 1. r>. o
52.711. -- idem, with rubber bellows 1. 1'2.
52.712. Indiarubber Balloon in wood box, Figure, with loosely fitting lid and 6 iron weight-
ing plates, for showing the elasticity of air 0. 0.
If the lid, and consequently the balloon, is weighted with the iron plates, this depresses the
balloon more or less.
.")!'. 7 1:{. Apparatus for showing the Elasticity of Air, Figs. A and B 1. 0.
A piston fitted with a handle and hook, moves in vacuo in a metal tube, Fig. A, provided witli
a bottom piece and a hook; the tube communicates with the outer atmosphere by a stopcock. If tin-
cock is closed and the piston pushed in, the piston tends to spring back when an attempt is made
to pull it out. A tripod and loading plate are supplied with the apparatus; the tripod being dctaelialile
;i
(Fig. B), in order to show also the Compressibility and Elasticity of the compressed air.
Double Sphere for showing the Expansion of Gases: see Nos. 51,751 and 51,752, p. 250.
Glass Sphere for weighing Air: see Auxiliary Apparatus for tin- Air Pump.
Cl. 5433,5422, 841.
-No. 52719. Universal Apparatus. Displacement in Space. Specific Gravity. 367
52712. 1:4. 52 713 B. 1:7. 52 717. 1 : 5.
52 713 A. 1:5.
52 718, 52 719 52 721. 1:10.
d.
52,715. Glass Tube, for determining the Specific Gravity of Gases, after Friedr. C. G. Miiller s.
(M. T., Fig. 83), for use in conjunction with pressure level No. 52,731 0. 6.
- - for the Grimsehl Gas Balance, with 3-way cock (Ztschr. f. d. phys. u.
.")!', 716. idem,
chem. TJ. 18, 1905, p. 200), for use with the Spirit Level Pressure Gauge No. 52,732 0. 3.
52.717. Baroscope after Schoentjes, Figure, for showing the Buoyancy of Air, with counter-
poise (Fr. phys. Techn. I, 2, Figs. 2708 and 2708 a; Ztschr. f. d. phys. u. chem. U. 14,
1901, p. 166) 1. 5.
By increasing the hermetically closed hollow body it is shown that this appears lighter when
it displaces more air. If air is allowed to force its way inside, the body then appears heavier.
52.718. Apparatus for Experimental Measurements with Air Balloons, Figure, after Eeben-
storff (Ztschr. f. d. phys. u. chem. U. 19, 1906, p. 98), complete, without clamping stand 2. 0.
For experimental measurements on the buoyancy of balloons filled with hydrogen or house gas.
The apparatus consists of 2 tubulated glass flasks with rubber connecting tubing; 1 clamp for tubing;
1 perforated rubber
stopper; 1 glass tube with stopcock; 1 rubber bellows; 1 glass tube in stopper;
1
piece thin walled tubing; 4 rubber balloons; 2 pieces chain; 1 adjustable small table; 2 small glass
stoppers; 2 distance pieces; 1 rule and 1 sheet iron case with projecting lid and moistening flask.
52.719. Single Constituents of preceding Apparatus, see Fig. 52,718, without clamping stand j
1. 8.
2 tubulated glass flasks with rubber tubing; 1 rubber stopper; 1 glass tube with stopcock; 1 small
adjustable table and 1 sheet iron case with overlapping lid and with moistening flask.
Cl. 842, 843, 5534, 844,
3651.
368 Equilibrium of Gases. No. >2 720-
52 730. 1 : 6.
52 734. 1 : 8.
52 733. 1 : 10. 52 735. 1 : 6.
52.720. Further Constituents of Apparatus for Experimental Measurements with Air Balloons, S. (1.
see Fig. 52,718 !t.
4 rubber balloons; 1 piece thin walled rubber tubing; 1 rubber ball; 1 glass tube in stopper;
2 glass stoppers; 2 distance pieces; 2 pieces chain and 1 rule.
52.721. Clamping Stand, of wood, with iron base (Retort Holder), see No. 51,110 0. 5.
Collodion Balloons.
List No. 52,722 52,723 52,724 52,725 52,726
Diameter cm 11 18 22 35
Each 0.0.9 0.1.0 0.1.7 0.2.0 0.3.0
Hydrogen Generating Apparatus: see under Nos. 51,278 51,284, p. 213.
52,737. Hollow Cylinder, of pasteboard, for Air Balloon Experiments, after Friedr. C. G. Miiller
(M. T., Fig. 105a) 0.
52.452. Apparatus for showing the uniform Propagation of Pressure of Gases: see Figure 52,452,
p. 335
52.453.
- -
idem, on stand and with stopcock: see Fig. 52,453, p. 335
52.730. Pressure Level, after Tb'pler, Figure, for measuring small pressure-differences
(W. D., Fig. 141 [187])
52.731. idem, after Friedr. C. G. Miiller (M. T., Fig. 67), with T-shaped horizontal
tube, with 2-colour centimetre graduation
~ii'.732. -- idem, after (Irimsehl, with air bubble in horizontal tube (Ztselir. t'. d. plivs.
u. chem. U. 18, 1905, p. 199, Fig. 2) .' .
52,733. Pressure Gauge Apparatus, Figure (W. D., Fig. 138 [126]), for comparing the
Specific Gravity. Propagation of Pressure. Pressure-Measurements on Gases. 369
52 744. 1 : 6.
52739. 1 : 18. 52742. 1:8. 52743. 1 : 8.
52.737. Sensitive Syphon Pressure Gauge, after Grimsehl, based on the difference in the S. d.
specific gravity of two liquids (Ztschr. f. d. phys. u. chem. U. 18, 1905, p. 199, Fig. 1) 0.18.0
25.738. Duplex Pressure Gauge, after Priedr. C. G. Miiller (M. T., Pig. 66), a syphon pressure
gauge for two liquids, for different ranges; can be used aerostatically and hydrostatically 0.16.0
52.739. Open Mercurial Pressure Gauge for 2 atm., Figure, on board with graduation. 1. 0.0
52.740. --idem, for 3 atm 2. 0.0
52.741. Closed Mercurial Pressure Gauge, cf. Pig. 52,742, to 12 atm., with silvered graduation,
with lateral tube supports with cock 2. 6.0
52.742. --idem, Figure, without cock 2. 0.0
52.743. Mercurial Vacuum Gauge, Figure, with 3-way cock, on polished board, with
silvered metal scale 2. 2.0
52.744. Recording Pressure Gauge, Figure, for indicating and recording from 20 kg
per sq. cm 12. 0.
When
ordering please state whether the records are required to be made with hygroscopic ink
or with lead pencil and whether the cylinder has to make a revolution once in 24 or once in 12 hours.
.vjTi.v 400 Pieces Paper Strip for above 0. 18.
Prices for Micromanometers quoted on application. Cl. 816, 5099, 5901,5902.

24
370 Equilibrium of Gases. NCI.
SS 746. 1:14. 52 747. 1 : 10. 58 749. 1 : 9. 52752. 1:12.
52,746. Vacuum Gauge, after MacLeod, Figure

(Ztschr. f. Instrumentenkunde, 15, 1895,
p. 191), for measuring high vacua. Price without mercury ............ 3. 15. o
This instrument is absolutely necessary when exhausting Geissler and Rontgen Tubes. The Oil
Vacuum Pumps and Mercury Vacuum Pumps supplied by us are tested exclusively \vith this instrument.
The Vacuum Gauge has a measuring bulb of 500 cem capacity and it permits of measuring high vacua
to th mm with accuracy. About 7 kg mercury is necessary for filling.
52.747. Vacuum Gauge, after MacLeod, smaller

board," Figure, and simpler, on wall without
mercury ................................... 1. Hi. o
About 2 kg mercury is necessary for filling.
52.748. Barometrical Pressure Gauge (Differential Barometer), after Eegnault-Leduc, con-

sisting of a mercury barometer and a pressure gauge having common vessel, suitable
for readings with the cathetometer (Gan.-Man., Fig. 158) ............. 8. o. o
52.749. Barometer Tube, without graduation, with cast iron mercury cup, for Torricelli's ex-
periment, Figiire (M. T., p. 116). Without mercury ............. 0. .'!. o
52.750.
- -
idem, with etched graduation, glass stopcock at lower end and iron cistern . <>. <.<>
52.751. Barometer Tube, piece of Rubber Tubing and short piece Tubing (Meyer, Naturli-hre,
Fig. 166) ................................... 0. 2. 6
52.752. 3 Barometer Tubes in mercury trough, Figure, with stand (M. P., HI, Fig. 236
[II, 2, Fig. 108]), for showing the difference between gases and vapours ...... 1. Hi. n
52.753.
- - i d e
in, tubes having etched graduation, with funnel-shaped opening and half-
perforated stopcocks on the upper end, for conveniently introducing the liquids to be
evaporated .................................. 2. it. n
(.'I. 967, 968. 853, 856

No. S3 764. Vacuum Gauges, Pressure Gauges, Barometer Tubes. 371
52 754. 1 : 7. 52756. 1:10. 52 758. 1 : 10. 52762. 1:15.
52.754. 4 Barometer Tubes, of 15, 12, 8 and 6 mm

width, Figure, for showing that the s. d.
height of the barometer is independent of the width of the tubes, but that the meniscus
influences the reading to a greater extent in the case of narrow tubes than in the case
of wide; with etched graduation (in millimetres at the upper end) and one iron trough,
iron stand with ribs for removing the tubes laterally 2. 2.0
One of the tubes is provided underneath with a stopcock for securing ease of manipulation in
the general experiments on the Torricellian vacuum.
- -
52.755. idem, without graduation 1. 12.
52.756. Demonstration Barometer Tube, after Kolbe, Figure (Ztschr. f. d. phys. u. chem.
U. 6, 1893, p. 31), of glass, with two stopcocks and glass vessel 0. 15.
"'-.757. - - idem, with one platinum electrode in the upper part . . 0.18.0
52,758. Barometer Tube, with 80 cm long iron tube vessel, .Figure 0.14.0
.">:.'. 759. -- idem, the glass tube, however, being fitted above with stopcock and etched
graduation 1. 0.0
52,700. Tripod Stand, of wood, for barometer tubes Nos. 52,758 and 52,759 0. 8.0
:>L'.761. Barometer Tube, with iron tripod stand (cf. M. P., I, Fig. 472 [513]), cf. Fig. 52,762;
the tube graduated, without tube holder and index, and without cock 1.10.0
:>L'.762. -- idem, with Tube Holder and Index, Figure 1.16.0
52,763. Duplex Barometer, suitable for explaining the Syphon (Fr. phys. Techn. I, 2, Fig. 2558),
with one vessel 0. 8.0
- -
"u.764. idem, with two vessels, for two liquids (Fr. phys. Techn. I, 2, Fig. 2559, see
also Ztschr. f. d. phys. u. chem. U. 14, 1901, p. 347) 1.10.0
Cl. 857, 3343, 854, 4538.

24*
372 Equilibrium of Gases. No. 52 765 -
52 766. 52767. 52774. 52776. 52777.

1 : 14. 1 : 12. 1 : 10. 1: 10. 1 : 10.
52.765. Duplex Barometer, after Kleiber, with two tubes connected under the mercury level |
s. d.
(Fr. phys. Techn. I, 2, Fig. 2560; Ztschr. f. d. phys. u. chem. U. 14, 1901, p. 247.
Fig. 2) 0.12.0
52.766. Apparatus for the Torricellian Experiment, after Dechant, Figure, can also be
used as an open or a closed Manometer 1. 2.0
The U-tube is filled with a sufficient quantity of mercury, and for demonstrating the baro-
meter, the apparatus, with stopcock open, is inclined to the right until mercury flows out of the cock;
the cock is then closed and the apparatus placed upright.
52.767. Demonstration Barometer, after Schulze, Figure, with 3 glass stopcocks . . . 1.10.0
Suitable for showing air-pressure and Marietta's Law.
52.768. Experimental Barometer, after Friedr. C. G. Miiller (M. T., Fig. 84), can also be used
as a Vacuum Gauge, with plain millimetre and centimetre graduation 1. It), o
52.769. Simple School Model of Barometer, with Fortin Vessel (Kleiber, Lehrb. f. Gymnasien.
Fig. 114), without mercury 0. is. o
52.770. --idem, of Syphon Barometer, with U-tube (Kleiber, Lehrb. f. Gymn., Fig. 115 a),
without mercury 0.12.0
52.771. Barometer, simple, on board with milk glass scale 0.12.0

d
52.772. Barometer, English form, Figure, ivory scale with vernier 2. d.
52.773. Standard Barometer, after Regnault (Gan.-Man., Fig. 141), for rending with the catheto-
ineler, with tube 2.5 cm wide and iron cistern 8. d. II
52,774. Barometer, on finely polished board, Figure, the sight vane adjusted by rack and
d
pinion, with 2 thermometers 2. d.
sight-vane without rack motion

- - ID.
52,775. idem, 1. It
Cl. 5363, 852, 859, 5061, 860, 5339.

Xo. 52 785. Barometers. 373
52 778. 52779. 52782. 52 783. 52785.

1 :8. 1: 10. 1: 9. 1: 9. 1: 10.
52.77. Syphon Barometer, after Brunn, Figure, can be used for accurate readings with s. d.
the cathetometer (Fr. phys. Techn. Fig. 2552)

I, 2, 1.14.0
The upper part of the tube is exhausted with the vacuum pump, the cock being then closed
and the apparatus tilted until the mercury has ascended into the upper vessel. When the instrument
is again placed upright the mercury divides and an absolute vacuum is formed in the main tube. If
air should collect in this later it can be shifted into the upper vessel quite easily by tilting.
.")!.'. 777. Syphon Barometer with Glass Verniers and graduations on glass, Figure, the
graduations being insensitive to the action of moisture 10. 0.
52,778. Syphon Barometer with sliding wood rule, Figure, on black, polished board, with
ebonite seal and two sighting vanes 1. 12.
5.!. 779. - -
idem, in case, portable, Figure, for measurements in mines, etc.; on black,
polished board, with adjustable wood rule, ebonite seal, sight-vanes and with thermo-
meter with Centigrade graduation 2. 6.
52,780. Syphon Barometer, with sliding metal rule, otherwise as No. 52,778 2. 0.
.")!', 78 1. Syphon Barometer, with etched graduations on the limbs, with 2 adjustable sight
vanes 1. 10.
52,782. Station Barometer, Figure, Eule adjustable by rack and pinion, verniers read
with magnifying glasses 8. 0.
52.7tf.'i. Syphon Barometer, after Krajevitch, Figure, with adjustable metal scale, with
rackwork and vernier, with cock on the short limb, plummet and thermometer graduated
in Vs C., in case 5. 0.
|
Air bubbles can easily be forced into the extension of the long limb by tilting.
- -
52.784. idem, simpler, scale adjustment without rack 4. 0.
52.785. Syphon Barometer, with adjustable Barometer Tube, Figure, with metal scale,
vernier and thermometer, the scales being silvered 3.10.0
Cl. 861, 3344, 862, 5439, 5393.

374 Equilibrium ol Gases. N.I. :V2786
\s
52 786. 1 : 7. 52 787. 1 : 9. 52 788. 1 : 7. 52 790. 1 : 7.
52,786. Fortin Station Barometer, Figure, in metal case, tube 19 internal width, verniermm 1 s. (1.
1
reading to /,
th
mm
and movable with rack; reading of vernier and level facilitated by
mirror illumination. The thermometer is in direct contact with the barometer tube
and can be read from the outside. The instrument is suspended on a hook and can be
centred at the lower end . IS. 10.
.">!'. 787. -- idem, with tube 12.5 mm wide, Figure 10. 0. (I
52.788. Travelling and Altitudinal Barometer, after Fortin, F i g u r e, with tube 10 width, mm
vernier giving Vio th """ wit h thermometer, Stand and Universal Suspension, also leather
case 7. 10.11
52.789.
-- idem, as Station Barometer, on -wood board, Figure (i. o. o
01. 865. 866, 867. 868. 869.

No. 52 796. Station Barometers. Aneroid Barometers. 375
52791. 1:3. 52 792. 1 : 4. 52 794. 1 : 4.
52 795. 1 52 796. l
52.790. Travelling ana Altitudinal Barometer after Gay-Lussac, Figure, syphon baro- s. d.
th
meter, with two verniers, giving /io mm, with thermometer, stand,
1
and universal
suspension and with leather case 7.10.
52.791. Bourdon's Tube, on stand, Figure, with pointer and scale, for placing on the
vacuum pump, for explaining the principle of the Aneroid Barometer 1. 2.0
52.792. Aneroid Barometer (Holosterical Barometer after Vidi), Figure, excellent mecha-
nism, mounted open, 100 mm
scale diameter, with glass plate, glass bell and rubber
tubing with mouthpiece 2. 4.0
the air under the glass globe is compressed or rarified by blowing through or applying suction
If
to the mouthpiece, the barometer gives these variations.
52.793.
- -
idem, scale 130 mm 2.10.
52.794. Demonstration Aneroid Barometer for the Vacuum Pump, Figure 2.10.0
52.795. Demonstration Aneroid Barometer, after Weiler, Figure 2.10.
52,796. Demonstration Aneroid Barometer, Figure, for suction, with rubber tubing and
mouthpiece, covered by glass bell, can be used horizontally and vertically 1.10.0
The instrument works very well and can be recommended.
C]. 870, 872,3345,
Cathetometers for accurately reading Barometers: see
4699, 873.
Nos. 51,46351,466, p. 224.
376 Equilibrium of Gases. No. 52 797
52 802. 1 : 3. 52 804. 1 : 2. 52810. 1 : 12.
52.797. Levelling Barometer, after Goldschmidt, Figure, for altitudes to 5000 m, accurate t
to approximately 2 m. with comparison table and thermometer, in case with carrying

straps 5. 0.
52.798.
- -
idem, accurate to approx. 1m 10.
52.799. Altitudinal Barometer, Figure, with rotary scale, for altitudes from to 2500 in 1 10.
52.800.
- -
idem, compensated and
finest construction, gilt, Figure, in case, to 5000 m 15.
52.801.
- - i d e m, with compass on back :<. Ki. ,
Compass and Thermometer, in case, Figure

52.802. Altitudinal Barometer, 2. 10.
52.803. -- idem, smaller, watch-pocket form and finest construction 4. 0.0

52.804. Aneroid Barometer, Figure, simple, in metal ease, with open mechanism of 9 em
scale diameter 0. 10.
52.,sor>. Good Round Pattern Barometers, in metal ease or in wood frame. Price according to
to construction i 0. 15. 1. 15.
When ordering kindly state prin .
I 'I. S74, S7.-I, JT0, -7

877, 878, 884.
Xo. 52812. Altitudinal Barometers, Barographs, Boyle's Law. 377
52 808. 1 : 3.
sol
52809. 1:7.
52812. 1:7. 52811. 1:10.
S. d.
52.806. Metal Barometer with Bourdon Tube, Figure, 130 mm diameter, very sensitive 1.10.0
52.807.
- -
idem, with scale 200 mm in diameter 1
2. 0.
52.808. Figure, with 8 boxes, 8-day mechanism

Aneroid Barograph, 6. 0.
52.809. --idem, Figure, highly sensitive, with large deflection combined with high
accuracy 17.10.0
This instrument, is employed for investigating sudden fluctuations of pressure attendant on the
occurrence of storms, cyclones and meteorological phenomena generally. As an amplitude of 10 or
25 mm
is recorded for 1 mm
pressure-difference, an estimation to 0.01 mm
can be made.
52.810. Recording Mercurial Barometer, Figure, a very accurately indicating instrument 15. 0.0
Deflection on the drum amounting to 3 mm for every 1 mm of the mercury column.
52.811. Boyle's Law Apparatus, Figure, after Feilitzsch, as altered by Weinhold (W. D.,
Fig. 139 [127]), 2.2 highm 2.14.0
52.812. --idem, with the addition of a Glass Vessel, (W. D., Fig. 344 [324]),
Figure
to enable the apparatus to be used for determining the coefficient of expansion of
gases at constant volume or as an Air Thermometer 3. 6.0
CI. 880,881,
886, 885.
378 Equilibrium of Gases. No. 52813
52813. 1 : 14. 52814. 1:18. 52 815 A. 1:14. 52 815 B. 1 : IT,
52.813. Boyle's (Mariotte's) Law Apparatus, after Friedr. C. G. Miiller, Figure (Ztschr.
f. d. phys. u. chem. U. 16, 1903, p. 18; M. T., Fig. 85), can also be used as an Air
Thermometer 4. d. d
The apparatus for use in conjunction with a vacuum pump. It is possible by this arrangement
is
to generate -over -pressures to 2 atm., while still keeping the construction of the apparatus of a short
form. In addition there is the advantage that the pressure gauge tube can be made entirely of glass
without the use of rubber connections and that valves can be omitted.
The horizontally arranged measuring tube is connected by a thick -walled rubber tube with the
manometer tube by means of a 3-way cock, which also admits of connecting up to the vacuum pump
by a separate attaching tube.
52.814.
- - i
d e m, after Pfaundler, Figure, 2.2 m
high, with coloured centimeter gra-
duation and with adjustable glass rule, 1 m
long, resting in the centre of the rail, the glass
rule, having etched millimetre graduation. Apparatus can also he used as an Air Thermo-
meter (i. o. (i
52.815. Boyle's (Mariotte's) Law Apparatus, large pattern, 2.8 high, A, with m Figure
glass vessel and accessories, .B, Figure
the use of the latter enabling the apparatus
to be used as an Air Thermometer 7. 0.0
52.816. Boyle's (Mariotte's) Law Apparatus, after S/.ekely, Figure, with spring pressure
gauge and small force pump 14. 0.0
The tubes are suitable for high pressure, lieini; constructed of Jena glass and provided with steel
I, 890.
Cl. 837, 888, 889,
No. 52821. Boyle's (Mariotte's) Law. 379
52 816. 1 : 20. 52817. 1:9. 52818. 1:12. 52820. 1:12. 52 8J51. 1 : 1U.
stopcocks. The scale is visible at a considerable distance, With both limbs the apparatus can be s. d.
used to 2.5 atm.
52.817. Boyle's (Mariotte's) Law Apparatus, after Huber, Figure, on iron stand and wood
board, with two-coloured scale; can be used as an Air Thermometer 2. 0.0
The pressure tube has a scale 1.10 m long with millimetre graduation and with black and white
centimetre graduation visible at a considerable distance. The short arm has a graduation on glass,
contains a thermometer closed by the upper aperture which must be pocked with mercury, and is en-
closed in a cylinder of large diameter so that a uniform temperature of the gas to be investigated
is maintained by a current of air or the like.
52.818. Boyle's (Mariotte's) Law Apparatus, Figure, small pattern, with fixed glass tube,
1 stopcock on the lower end, 1 stopcock on the short limb; scale with coloured gradua-
tion which is easily visible; on iron stand 1.1 long m 1. 4.0
- - with fixed glass tube, with stopcock on the short limb 0.0
52.819. idem, 1.
r>L'..s20. --idem, on polished board, with figured graduation, Figure, without glass
stopcock (Gan.-Man., Fig. 151, 152) 1.10.0
- -
.">_'. S21. idem, Hugh M. Browne, Figure, for pressures to 10 atm., with spring
after
manometer and easily visible scale 4. 0..0
The apparatus is easy to manipulate, is very substantially built and possesses steel stopcocks.
The pressure is generated by leading in compressed air.
Cl. 894. 3346, 4776,
See also the Apparatus after Schafiers, Schneider and Lermantoff, on pp. 365
and 366, also Barometer Tubles Nos. 52.75852,762, p. 371. 892, 893.
380 Equilibrium ol Gase?. X... .V.' v.'-j
52 823. 1 : 7. 52 824. 1 : 10. 52832. 1:7. 52834. I :
.. (1.
52.822. Air Thermometer, for proving Mariotte's Law (Kleiber, Lehrb. f. Gymn., p. 107) . 0. 1. (i
52.823. Volumnometer, after Eegnault, Figure, for volume determinations on pulverulent

and porous bodies; all stopcocks of steel (M. P., I, Figs. 488 492 [529533]) . . . 3. in. o
52.824.
- -
idem, after Paalzow, Figure, with vessel which can be closed by a ground
glass lid (Fr. phys. Techn. I, 2, Fig. 2764 [I, Fig. 291]; W. u. E. phys. Prakt,, Fig. 51) :>. o. o
52.825. Stereometer, after Say, Figure, for determining the volume and density of pul-
verulent bodies (M. P., I, Fig. 486 [527]) 0. 6.
52.826. Bathometer, of glass (W. D., Fig. 157 [144]) 0. 5.
52.827. Vestal Sieve 0. 5.
52.828. Magic Jug 0. LO

52.829. Tantalus Cup, Figure (Gan.-Man., Fig. 204) 0. 1. 8
52.830. Magic Pitcher D. 9.
52.831. Magic Tun, Figure I. I."
52.832. Magic Funnel, Figure o. l.o
52.833. Inverted Float, after Weinhold (W. D., Fig. 144 o. :;. u
[131])
with 3 emission apertures o
52.834. Mariotte's Bottle, Figure, o. Hi.
52.835.
- - i d e m, after Friedr. C. G. Muller (M. T., Fig. 72) 0. 6.
o
52.836. Mariotte's Bottle, with metal fittings, Figure (Gan.-.M;m.. Fijr. I'.io) o. i:>.
5L!.X37. Large Mariotte Bottle, 1 m high, Figure, with gnidiution and n>-iil;iting dis-
u
charge cock 3. lo.
52,838. Syphon, of glass, Figure, 500 mm |

0. 0. 6
(1. 3333,897, 898.
895, 5389, 3955. 334U.
X.i. :.2856. Effects of Air-pressure. Volumnometers. Syphons. Heron's Ball. 381
52849. 1:6. 52852. 1:5.
52838. 1:6. 52840. 1:6. 52837. 52856. 1:4.

s. d.
52.839. Connecting Syphon (M. ......................

T., Fig. 88) 0. 2.
52.840. Plunging Syphon, of glass, Figure ..................... 0. 0. 6

52, 841. Pipette (Luhme's), with gutta-percha slab ..................
. 0. 0. 9
52.842. Syphon for poisons, of with stopcock, Figure .............

glass, 0. 3.
52.843.
- - d e m, without stopcock .........................
i 0. 2.
52.844. Poison Syphon for easily flowing liquids, for use by blowing (W. D., Fig. 149) . . 0. 3.
52.845. Equal-limb Syphon (W. D., Fig. 151 [138]) .................. 0. 3.
52.846. Syphon (Weinhold's) (W. D., Fig. 152 [139]), with constricted tube ....... 0. 2.
52.847. Discontinous Syphon (W. D., Fig. 164) .................... I

0. 5.
52.848. Syphon Apparatus, after Schulze (Fr. phys. Techn. I, 2, Fig. 2561) ....... 2. 0.
52.849. Circulating Syphon, Figure (M. P., Fig. 530) ...............

I, 0. 9.
52.850. Apparatus for showing the circulation of the blood, 35 cm ........... 0. 10.
52.851. -- idem, larger, 75 cm ........................... 1. 5.
52.852. Heron's Ball, simple, with glass cock, Figure ................ 0. 3.
52.853. Small Heron's Ball, with brass cock, Figure ................ 0. 5.
52.854. Heron's Ball, screwed, with stopcock ..................... 0. 12.
52.855. d e m, with rubber bellows .......................

i 0. 16.
52.856. Heron's Ball with Force Pump, Figure, constructed entirely of brass and glass;
height: 30 cm ................................. 2. 0.
Cl. 899, 4862, 904, 3350,

901,902,900,903,905.
382 Equilibrium of Gases. No. 52 857
52 869.
52866. 1:8. 1 : 9.
52 860. 1 : 10. 52863. 1:10. 52 868. 1 : 5.
S.
52.857. Heron's Ball with Force Pump, entirely of metal, with spring pressure gauge, F i
gu r-e 1. 10.
52.858. Heron's Fountain, of glass, with base, Figure 0. 8.
52.859. Heron's Fountain, with wood stand, Figure II. IS.
52.860. Heron's Fountain, large, Figure, with metal mounting, durably constructed, can
be taken to pieces (Gan.-Man., Fig. 200) 2. 111.
52.861. Intermittent Fountain, of glass. Figure (W. D., Fig. 155 [142]) o. ;;.
- - with iron stand

52.862. idem, 0. 6.
52.863.
-- idem, large pattern, witli metal mounts and metal basin, Figure . . . . 1. 1 I.
52.864. Cartesian Diver, in cylindrical glass vessel with rubber bung 0. 2.
52.865.
- -
idem, after Weinhold (W. D., Fig. 156 with glass cylinder
[143]), (I. 4.
52.866. Cartesian Diver, Figure, in glass cylinder with metal screwed union and force pump (I. 12.
Cl. 4'J79, 906, 907, 911.913,

908, 5835, 910, 912.
No. 52 875. Heron's Ball, Heron's Fountain, Suction Pumps, Force Pumps. 383
\
52 870. 1 : 5.
52875. 1:9.
52 873. 1 : 6. 52 874. 1 : 4.
s. d.
52.867. 6 Glass Tubes, for setting up as a .Cartesian Diver (M. T., Fig. 69) 0. 1.0
52.868. Model of a Suction Pump, Figure, with movable piston and movable valves . 1. 4.0
52.869. Model of a Suction Figure

Pump, of glass, 0. 3.
52.870.
- - d o m, with metal stand, Figure
i 0.12.0
52.871. --idem, of glass and metal, Figure 1. 8.0
52.872. Model of a Suction Pump, large and massive pattern, Figure, with brass valves
visible at a distance, with iron stand; total height: 67 cm; diameter of cylinder: 57 mm 3. 4.0
52.873. Model Pump, French form, Figure,

of a Suction finely constructed
3.12.0
Suction Pump, with electric motor drive, Figure 2. .0.
52.874.
For 4-volt D. C. current consumption = 1 ampere.
0. 3.6
52.875. Model of a Force Pump, of glass, Figure
Cl. 914, 915,916,
917,923,5884.
384 Equilibrium of Gases. NU. .V2876
52 876. 1 : 5.
52 877. 1:5. 52 879. 1 : 6.
s. (1.
52,87<'.. Model of a Force Pump, of glass, with metal stand, Figure 0. 12. o
-- idem,
52,877. nf glass and metal, larger and stouter construction, Figure . . . . 1. It'.. (I
r>2.H78. --idem, larger and stouter construction, Figure, with brass valves visible
at a distance, with iron stand; total height: 67 cm; diameter of cylinder: 57 mm . :>. 12.
ci. nin. a-.'i,

No. 52883. Force Pumps, Fire Engines. 385
52881. 1:5.
52 882. 1 : 6. 52 883. 1 = 8.
j2,879. Model of a Force Pump, French form, Figure, of gla.-s and metal, finely con s. d.
struoted 4. 4.
52,880. Model of a Centrifugal Pump with glass ascension pipe, of metal. F i g u r e, mounted
with drive on wood board 5. 0.
52,005. Model of the Centrifugal Pump, with visible mechanism, for the whirling table, after
Hurt!, sec Xo. 52.005 on page 282 2.15.0
52.881. Model of a Fire Engine, of glass, in metal stand, Figure 1. 2.
52.882. -- idem, of metal and glass, Figure 2. 11. o
52.883. Model of a Fire Engine on Carriage, Figure 3. r.'.o
Cl. 924, 925,

92G, 926 .
386 Motion of Gaseous Bodies. No. 52884
rrj-Jj)
52 886 B. 1:5. 1:10.

52887.
52 885. 1 : 8.
52 886 A. 1 ; 8. 52888. 1 : 10.
Motion of Gaseous Bodies.
Piston Vacuum Pumps of various Systems.

I 8. (1.
52.884. Small Stopcock Vacuum Pump, on iron base, with obliquely inclined cylinder 28 nun
internal diameter and 230 mm length, glass plate 140 mm
diameter, piston for hand
motion, without receiver ............................ 2. 0.
.....................
Largest Receiver for use with above: No. 53 009 0. 2. n
52.885. idem, mounted on massive iron screw clamp, Figure, barrel 30 mm internal
- -
diameter, 300 mm long, piston for hand motion, glass plate 140 mm diameter (M. T. p. 121 )
i". <>. o
52.886. d e m, larger, Fig. 52,886 A, on massive Iron Base, with barrel 32 mm internal
- - i
diameter and 280 mm length, glass plate 180 mm diameter, with one iron Screw Clump.
Fig. 52,886 B, for firmly clamping to the table, without receiver ......... 3. 0. o
Largest Receiver for use with above: No. 53,011 ..................... d. 3. o
.")_'. SX7. Vacuum Pump, Figure, on heavy iron base, piston movable by rack and pinion.
cylinder 40 nun diameter, 290 long, glass plate 200 mm
diameter, steel cock, with mm
large jack, to enable it to be turned even when the tallow is hard, with Sîron *
Screw Clamps, see Fig. 52 886 B, without receiver ............. 6. 0.
The freezing experiment with water ;uid sulphuric acitl can lie carried out with this Vacuum
Pump: a vacuum up to 4 mercury mm column is attained in a receiver containing up to 2 litrc>.
-
Largest receiver for use with almve: No. ,'53,(ll-2 ....................... 0. 4.
.Vj.xss. Vacuum Pump, Figure, with cylinder 60 mm internal diameter and :'>5:!. Nr. Oil ..................... O. .">. (i
It is. however, advisable to select the next smallest. No. ."i3.OI3 .............. 0. 4. 8
52.XSH. idem, with Barometer Gauge attached, with two iron Screw Clamps,
FL<. :,:! s,s(i 1! . 9. n.
'
'i :;
Water Air Pumps: sec pp. L'-J _;.

9J9,
NIP. -V_'-!H. Stopcock Vacuum Pumps. 387
52 893. 1 : 4. 52894. 1:5.
52 892. 1 : 4.
s. d.
52,890. Device for considerably ratifying the ah in the clearance before each stroke. Extra price 1. 4.0
Can only be used for Pumps Nos. 52,887, 52,888 and 52,889.
52,893 .
Stopcock Vacuum Pump
with 2 Barrels, Figure, barrels 60 internal diameter mm
and length,
.'?.">() mm
with glass plate 280 diameter, with Grassmannmm
cock for entirely
obviating the influence of clearance; without receiver 15.10.0
This Vacuum Pump rarifies twice as quickly as a single-barrel one and exhausts up to 1.5 or 2 mm.
Largest Receiver for use with above: No. 53,015 0. 6. 6
52, 892. Model of a Babinet Vacuum Pump Stopcock, F i

g u r e, of wood 1. 0.
52,893. Model of a Grassmann Vacuum Pump Stopcock, F i

g u r e, of wood 1. 0.0
52.X91. Vacuum Pumpafter Bianchi, Figure, with Glass Barrel, double-acting, with
outside the barrel, with sleel Babinet stopcock, very nicely constructed,
steel valves placed
with neat, firm iron base; Glass Plate 280 mm
diameter on special tripod, with Baro-
meter Gauge, 300 mm
high, finnly attached; connecting tubing screwed at both ends 31. 0.
The Vacuum I'limp gives 4 mm

tor large and 2 mm
exhaustion for small receivers in an extra-
ordinarily >lmrl -|i;n-cof time. The valves contrary to (he original construction described in most
text-books being place:! outside the cylinder can be very easily cleaned. Price is exclusive of Re-
ceivers. Largest Receiver for use with above: No. .">:!. o|.~, i). 6. 6
Cl. 934, 996, 5894,

995.
388 Motion of Gaseous Bodies. NCI. -
52835. 1 : 12.
52898. 1:7. 52900. 1 :
fl. iCtli. !ISS.
'.i:i'i. '.mi.
XM. .VJ MOM. Stopcock Vacuum Pumps. 389
52 896. 1:11.
.">:_'. s<C. Vacuum Pump after Bianchi, with Electric Motor Drive, worm gearing and chain
transmission, F i g n r e, with glass barrel, double-acting, with Steel Valves placed
outside the barrel, with steel Babinet stopcock, with firm iron stand, Glass Plate 280 mm
diameter on special tripod with Barometer Gauge, 300 mm
high, firmly attached,
No. 50,142, of. Fig. 52,894 on p. 387, connecting tubing screwed at both ends . . . 55.0.
Price exclusive of Receivers. Largest Receiver for use with above: No. 53.(>l.~> 0. (i. (i
The pump driven by a '/ 3 r(l II. I'. Direct Current Motor.
is The following are included in the
price: Starting Rheostat, 1 double-pole Switch and 1 Plug Box with plug. When ordering, kindly state
kind of current and voltage. If this is not given we supply the motor for a pressure of 110 volts D. ('.
i, *!)(>. Vacuum Pump aftev Deleuil, Figure, with glass ban-el 90 mm

internal diameter
and 320 mm
height, metal piston with guide passing freely in the cylinder, with Babinet
cock, with neat iron stand; can be used for evacuating and compressing; all cocks of
steel; Glass Plate 280 mm
diameter on special tripod, with Barometer Gauge 300 high mm 33.0. (I
Price exclusive of Receivers. Largest Receiver for use with above: X<>. .>:!.<)].->
-,*97. Vacuum Pumpwith 2 Vertical Glass Barrels, Figure, 55 internal diameter mm

and 220 mm
height; with Glass Plate 250 mm
diameter and Barometer Gauge 300 mm
high, with steel valves fitted outside the cylinder and with steel Babinet cock; on
polished Oak Table 20. o. o
Price exclusive of Receivers. Largest Receiver for use with above: No. ,">:!. 014
It is advisable, however, to choose the next smallest. No. 53,013
VJ.S98. -- idem, on low oak block, Figure 18.0.0
">2,S!t!i. -- idem, with glass barrels 50 mm internal diameter, 200 mm high, Barometer
Gauge 200 mm high 15. 0.
">2.!M>o. Model of a Double Barrel Vacuum Pump, Figure, of wood, pasteboard and metal,
showing plainly the play of the pistons, valves and rods, with Babinet cock .... 3.0.0
Cl. 937.
390 Motion of Gaseous Bodies. No. iil'DOl
52 901. 1 : 10. 52 903. 1 : 10.
High -Vacuum Pumps with Oil-packed Piston, Kohl's System, German Patent.
The advantages of these Oil Vacuum Pumps are that they are very easy to work, generate
a high vacuum, arc rapid in their action, and can be run in a simple, convenient and clean manner
without any special preparation. The Oil Pumps yield in a few minutes what it takes the Sprengel
mercury vacuum pump 1 hour to attain. These pumps are therefore peculiarly adapted both for de-
monstration purposes and specially for rapid working in laboratories.
We would remark that in all pumps for which a vacuum of 0.0014 mm mercury column is
guaranteed, a vacuum of 0.0008 mm can be reached.
Every Oil Vacuum Pump is accompanied by a Test Certificate. The test is made in our simps
with the MacLeod Vacuum Gauge having a 500 com measuring bulb (see No. 52,746).
If, in the case of Pumps fitted with Electric Motors, a motor is desired for a different kind
of current or a different voltage from that quoted, a corresponding change in price is made. When
ordering pumps with electric motor drive, the type of current, network voltage (and in the case
of alternating or three-phase current, the freqency also) should be stated on each occasion.
Complete description sent if desired.
52.901. Vacuum Pump with Oil-packed Piston and non-return valve, Kohl's system, German tl.
oil 8.
Patent, Figure, with hand lever, with barrel 401 mm

internal diameter, stroke
160 mm; with Plate 180 mm diameter, without receiver 5. u. I)
Trie pump exhausts to '

.<!> mm. Largest Receiver which can be used: No. 53011 o. :). o
52.902. --idem, with Fly- Wheel, for Hand and Power Drive, cf. Fitr. :>L'.9d9 (i. 10. o
.">L'. 903. Vacuum Pump with Oil-packed Piston aiul oil non-return valve, Kohl's system, German
Patent; larger, Figure; with Hand Lever, with Barrel .~>d internal diameter; 1 mm
Stroke Itid mm; without Plate or Receiver <>. d.
T/ie pump exli;msl< id '
I0
th mm.
rtL',904. - - i (1 e m, with Hand Lever, with Plate -40 mm diameter, and Barometer Gauge
200 mm high, Figure s. 10.
Largest Receiver that ran be used: No. .">:!. U|:J I). I.'. I
:.L'.90.-). - - idem, with Fly-wheel, for Hand and Power Drive, \\ithoul Plate, cf. Fig. .VJ,909 7. Id.
rii,9d<;.
-- idem, with Fly-wheel and with Plate 240 mm diameter and Barometer-Gauge
200 mm Iii-h . . . Id. d. d
:.L'.'.id7. Vacuum Pump with Oil-packed Piston and oil non-return valve. Kohl's system. German
Patent. Figure, with Hand Lever, larger than preceding; with P.arrel 1 (Id mm
internal diameter; Stroke 190 mm; without Plate S. Id. d
The puiiiii exhaust*- to '
,">
M. 911. !U-.'
Xci. .V-MU1. High -Vacuum Pumps with Oil-packed Piston, Kohl's System. 391
52909. I ; 10.
52 904. 1 : 10.
.ff-vv, r )
ii* '
52 907. 1 : 9. 52911. 1:10.
52,908. Vacuum Pump with Oil-packed Piston and oil non-ivtum valve, Kohl's sysiciii. (Icnnaii * <1
Patent; with Hand Lever and with Plate 240 mm diameter and Barometer Gauge
200 mm high 11. 0.
-- with Fly-wheel, for Hand and Power Drive, without Plate, Figure 0.0
">2, !!()!. idem, 10.
2,910.
- -
idem, with Fly-wheel and with Plate 240
'
diameter and Barometer Gauge mm
200 mm high . . . . 12.10.0
Largest Receiver for use with above: No. 53,013 0. 4. 9
"2.!i 1 1 .
- - driven by a ' / 6 th H. P. Electric Motor with worm gearing, motor for 110 volt
idem,
Direct Current, with Starter, without Plate, Figure 22 10.0
I 'I.
1)43, 3B52,
Vacuum Pumps No. 52,90352,910 are specially
intended for rapid work in laboratories. 4711, 4713.
392 Motion of Gaseous Bodies. No.
52915. 1:10. 52 917. 1 : 8.
s. ,!.
52.012. Vacuum Pump as No. 52,911, with 220 volt I). ('. Motor 2:;. 5.0
52.013. - - i d e
m, with Plate 240 mm diameter and Barometer Gauge 200 mm high; 110 volt
D. C. Electric Motor . . . , 26. 0.
Largest Receiver for use with above: No. 53,013 li. 4. '.I
52.014. --idem, with 220 volt 1). f\ Electric Motor 25.15.0
52.015. Duplex Vacuum Pump with Oil-packed Piston and oil non-return valve. Kohl's system,
German Patent, Figure, with Hand Lever. 2 Barrels of the same size 50 in mm
iuiernal diameter; Stroke 120 mm, for exhausting glow lamps and X-Ray Tubes as well
as for rapidly obtaining a vacuum, without Plate 17. Hi. n
52,016. -
idem, with Plate 240 mm diameter and Barometer Gauge 200 mm high . . 20. 0. o
Largest Receiver for use with above: No. 53,013 0. 4. '.I
52.017. Duplex Vacuum Pump with Oil-packed Piston and oil non-relurn valve. Kohl's system,
del-man Patent, with Fly-wheel and Clearing, Figure, for Hand and Motor Drive.
with 2 Harrels of same si/,e of 50 mm internal diameter; Stroke 120 mm; without Plate 24. Hi.
Tin- pump e\liau>is to 0.0014 mm.
To faeililale the working of the Pump, especially when eoiimiencing to pump, we have provided
the pump with a toothed wheel gearing, as experience shows that it is much easier lo expend a small
amount ol eueruy in turning a wheel SO Km
times a minute than to turn times a minute '
with fi correspondingly larger amount of energy. Tue cog wheels are cased in.
52.018. -- idem, with Plate 240 mm diameter and Barometer Gauge 200 mm high . . 27. o. o
Largest Receiver for use with aliove: No. .Vt. (>]'> .
I. fl
52.'.M>. Duplex Vacuum Pump with Oil-packed Piston and oil non-return valve. Kohl's system,
(lermaii 1'alenl, Figure, with Fly-wheel, without gearing; arranged for Hand and
.Motor Drive; with 2 Harrels of equal si/e of 50 internal diameter; stroke 120 mm; mm
without Plate 22.10.0
The pump exhausts to 0.0014 mm.
52.020. - - i d e in. with Plate 240 mm diameter and Barometer Gauge 200 mm 25. 0.
'
Largest Receiver for use with ahove: No. .">.'!. Ol.'J o. i, '.i
52.021. - - d e m, driven by a
i
'
;
H. P. 110 volt Direct Current Electric Motor.
' '
F i
g n r e,
On table with polished oak top and iron frame; without Plate 15. o. O
The air pump is mounted on
with polished oak top and iron frame.
a talile The shelf under-
neath, as seen in the illustration, carries the ,rd
[| I>. |>. r. Klccttic Motor fitted with worm
'
The starling rheostat as well as thf necessary Mvilehgear- are mounted on the talile top.
il. 'Jit, 4712.

High Vacuum Pumps with Oil-packed Piston, Kohl's System. 393
52 919. 1:9. 52921. 1 : 13.
The price includes the jirce.-soi 'if- illustrated transmission, belt, motor, starter, .-witches and s. d.
lend* mounted on the table.
If desired we can supply an A. ('. or a :i-phase Motor for driving, the price beinji correspondingly
increased.
52.022. - - i (1 c in, with 220 volt Direct Current Electric Motor 46. 0.0
52.023. - - i(1 c in, as No. 52,021, with Plate 240 mm diameter and Barometer Gauge 200 mm
liiji'li, with 110 volt I). C. Electric Motor -
. . . 47. 10.0
52.024. idem, with 220 volt B.C. Electric Motor 48. 10.0
52.025. Duplex Vacuum Pump with Oil-packed Piston and oil non-return valve, Kohl's .system,
German Patent, for Motor Drive, larger, internal diameter of Barrels, 75 mm; Stroke
Kid mm; without Motor and Plate 27. 10.
The pliTiip exhausts lo 0.0014 mm.
.'.!)2ii. -id e m, with Plate 280 mm diameter and Barometer Gauge 300 mm liijrh . . 31. 0.0
Largest Receiver for use with above: No. 53,015 0.
"2.027. -- idem, driven by a H. P. Direct Current Electric Motor for

'
, 110 volts, on
table with polished top and iron frame, without Plate, cf. Fig. 52,021 50. 0.0
i,02.s. -id e m, with 220 volt D. C. Klectric Motor 51. 5.
"2,020. -- idem, with Alternating Current Asynchronous Motor and belt releasing device It. Ii
"2.030. - - d e m, with Plate 280

i mm diameter and Barometer Gauge 300 mm hijdi, with
110 volt D. C. Electric Motor 53. 10.
"2,031. -- idem, with 220 volt Direct Current Electric Motor 54. 15.0
vj,!32. - - i d e m, with Alternating Current Asynchronous Motor and belt releasing device 58. 10.
Cl. 04ia, 47H.

394 Motion of Gaseous Bodies. -\;i. .VJ933
52946. 1:4. 52949. 1:9.
52.933. Duplex Vacuum Pump with Oil-packed Piston and oil non-return valve, Kohl's System, s. tl.
C.erman Patent, for Motor Drive, still larger than preceding; internal diameter of Barrels,
100 mm; Stroke 220 mm; without Motor or Plate 40. (t.
52.934.
- - i d e m, with Plate 320 mm diameter and Barometer Gauge 300 mm high . . II. 5. o
Largest Receiver for use with above: No. 53,016 . .' 0. 11. 6
3
52.935. idem, driven by a / 4 H. P. Direct Current Electric Motor for 110 Volts, on
- -
table with polished top and iron frame; without Plate, cf. Fig. 52,921, p. 393 . . . til'. 1(1.0
- - d e m, with 220 volt D. Motor

52.936. i C. 5.0
52.937.
- -
idem, with Plate 320 mm diameter and Barometer Gauge 300 mm high, with
110 volt D. C. Motor 66. 15. o
Largest Receiver for use with above: No. 53,016 o. 11. is
52.938. --idem, with 220 volt D. C. Motor 117. 10.0
52.939. Duplex Vacuum Pump with Oil-packed Piston and oil non-return valve, Kohl's system.
(Jerman Patent, for Motor Drive, larger than preceding; internal diameter of Hariris.
125 mm; Stroke, 250 mm; without Plate, cf. Fig. 52,921, p. 393 47.10.0
52.940.
- -
idem, with Plate 320 mm diameter ;md Barometer Gauge 300 mm high . . 51. i:.. o
Largest Receiver for use with above: No. .->3,ll]6 0. II. (i
52. 941. - -
i d e
m, driven by a 1 H. P. 110 volt Direct Current Motor; on table with polished
top and iron frame, without Plate, cf. Fig. 52;921, p. 393 77. 10. (I
52.942. - -
idem, with 220 volt D. C. Motor 78. 5. o
52.943.
- -
idem, with Plate 320 mm diameter and Barometer Gauge 300 mm high; with
110 volt D. C. Motor 81. 15.
Largest Receiver for use with above: No. 5.'5,<Ki 0. 11. r,
52.944. idem, with 220 volt D. C. Motor S2. 10.
Rotary Oil Vacuum Pumps and Enclosed Vacuum Pumps.

Rotary Oil Vacuum Pump, Fig. 946, with driving wheel, arranged for Hand and Cord Drive:
."">!.',
suitable both for teaching and for Laboratories and Incandescent Lamp Factories; can be used
specially as a prcliminarv pump for the Pointing Mercury Vacuum Pump.
'
Sixe .' 1 '2 :; '....'

List Nd. 52,945 52.946 52,947
For Hand and Cord Drive I
Price t 7.0.0 8.0.0 t

10.0.0
Water Air Pumps: see ci. Mia

pp. 22 27.
High Vacuum Pumps with Oil Packing, Kohl's System. Rotary Enclosed Vacuum Pumps. 395
52955. 1 : 15. 52962. 1 : 15.
Size 3
Power required at 160 130 r. p. m. .
.approx. H. P. V. Va
With 110 volt Direct Current Motor, on board with List No. 52,948 52,949 52,950
[
(hiving cord, switch, starter, connecting lead]
4 m long, plug and plug-box (
Price 15. 0. 16. 0. 19. 0.
With 220 volt Direct Current Motor, Accessories as ( List No. 52,951 52,952 52,953
above \ Price 15. 10. 16. 10. 19. 10.
Rotary Enclosed Vacuum Pumps: can be used as Vacuum Pumps or Compressors, Figs. 52.955
and 52,962.
Maximum r. p. m approx.
396 Motion oi Gaseous Bodies. No. 52
52964. 1 : in.
52S83. 1:10. 52986. 1 : l.V 52987. 1 : 17.
Rotary Vacuum Pumps (Enclosed Air Pumps) with Electric Motors, mounted on one baseplate. F i >j.
with Oil box.

r>L.'.<i(;i,
-
with Direct Current Motor, F -. r>iV.Hii. i
Revolutions per minute approx. 1400 L350 1000 800 SOI)
(Quantity of air absorbed,

approxv. litres
Highest Vacuum, Mercurx Column
For 110 volts Direct Current
Rotary Enclosed Vacuum Pumps. Mercury Air Pumps. 397
52988. 1:15. 52989. 1 : 15.
">L',!)X3.Rotary High-Vacuum-Pump, Figure, Semi-Enclosed Vacuum Pump for belt or hand t s. d.
drive; gives alone up to 0.05 mm

mercury column (Ztschr. f. d. phys. u. elieni. 1". 19, *
I'.tOfi, p. 73) 15.15.0

A
vacuum than that mentioned above can be attained by using a separate preliminary
higher
pump. g. a water air pump.
<'. For obtaining a vacuum of O.li(i:{ nun it is advisable to use second a.
pump, built like the above, aa |ir'liininary pump (see also No. !)S.~>). The best speed is about 4nii i.
.">:>.
p. m. when working without preliminary pump, and when working with preliminary pump about
2(10 r. p. in.
-
">2,!>X4. - i d c in. with 110 volt Direct Current Motor, on one hoard, with starter . . . 30. 0.
The price varies if the motors a"e for a different current or voltage. In the ease of 3-phase or
alternating current, kindly state frequency.
>2.9X5. Two High Vacuum Pumps

with 110 volt Direct Current Motor, on one board, one working
as preliminary pump; vacuum attainable, 0.003 rnm mercury column; quantity of
a
air sucked up 70 and 35 litres per minute respectively 50. 0.0
Mercury Vacuum Pumps.

52. !*;. Mercury Vacuum Pump after Geissler, Figure, with polished oak stand; capacity
of transport vessel, 1 1.5 litre 10. 0.
The
glass parts are the best product of the glass blower and are fitted with first rate cocks: the
pump has three attachments for glass apparatus, massive and handy winding device; all metal parts
excellently finished. Can. it desired, be provided with Supports, so as to be able to connect the air
pump, by a length of tubing, with plates N'os. 50,139 50,142, p. 400.
52. !IS7. Mercury Vacuum Pump after Topler-Hagen-Neesen, Figure (M. P. I, Figs. 527 528
567]), with winding device, with all latest improvements 9. 0.0
,988. Mercury Vacuum Pump after Sprengel, Figure, without cocks, on stand, holding
1 litre mercury (W. 1). Fig. 175 [160]) 3. 15.
k[566
J,989.
- - i d e m, after (iieiner and Friedrichs, Figure (Fr. phys. Techn. I, 2, Fig. 2614
[I, Fig. 323]) . . 7. 10.
Cl. !4li, 950.

398 Motion of Gaseous Bodies.
52980. 1 : 15. 52991. 1:13. 52 992. 1 : 6.
52,990. Mercury Vacuum Pump after Spies, Figure (Ztschr. f. d. phys. u. chem. I". 8. s <'
1894/95, p. 336) . 7. 0. ()
r>L'. '.!!. Automatic, Constant-action Mercury Vacuum Pump after Kahlbaum, Figure, for
physical and chemical purposes; consisting of a Sprengel Mercury Air Pump combined
with a Mercury Hoisting Apparatus (Wied. Ann. 53, p. 199, 1894; Ztschr. f. Instru-
mentenkunde, 13, p. 73, 1893) 14.1(1.0
r>L', <Mi*. Rotary Mercury High-Vacuum Pump with iron Drum, Kohl's System, German Patent
applied for, Figure, with toothed gearing and driving wheel. The Pinup can be driven
r
either by hand or motor l. >. ().
With the aid Pump, of this in conjunction with

preliminary pumpa. must produce
(the hitter
a vacuum of 15 10 mm) it is possible to obtain the highest vacua that can possibly be obtained
with Mercury Vacuum Pumps, and this in the minimum of time. This Pump is therefore cminenth
suitable both for the manufacture of glow lamps. Ilontjien tubes, etc. and For demonstrating in physical
instruction, also for use in laboratories. As regards a Preliminary Pump it is advisable to use one of
the Rotary oil Vacuum Pumps Nos. 62,901 62,906, or aWaterAir Pump, A charge of about 1,6 litres
i-O k^) mercury i> neces-ary and should if required be ordered separately.
The Pump is of small and compact construction, is rapid in its action, and contains no vl -s. :i
porcelain, or rubber parts. Tue rotating part and the carcase are of iron, bciui; thus unbreakable.
The Pump is very smooth in its action.
Kvery Pump is tested in our works for its efficiency by means of a Mac l.eod Vacuum Cau.nc
and a certicate i;i\ iui: re.-nll of teM i> >npplied with the Pump.
r.L'.IMt:!. - - The same Rotary .Mercury High-Vacuum Pump with ',"' H. P. 110 volt
'
Direct Current Motor, Figure, with starter, switch, connecting lead m long, with i
o
plug box and plug, with Leather cord; the whole mounted on one board --. '.
Mercury Vacuum Pumps. 399
>
52 993. 1 : 8.
53 001. 1 : 6. 52998. 1:15. 53000. 1:18.
52, '.tin. Rotary Mercury High Vacuum Pump as No. 52,992, with 220 volt Direct Current 8 - d -
Motor 22.10.0
,~>o. I :>.">. Water Air Pump of glass, for preliminary exhausting, No. 50,135 0. 3. 6
51.292. Mercury, chemically pure 1 kg 0. 8.
52. !97. Rotary Mercury Vacuum Pump, Kohl's System, with rotary Oil Vacuum Pump (as
preliminary pump), both driven by one Motor for 110 volts Direct Current, mounted on j
baseboard with starter, switch, connecting leads, plug and box plug !32. 10.
Illustration sent if desired.
52. 998 Mercury Distilling Apparatus after WeinhoM, Figure, for gas heating; supplies
chemically pure, dry mercury and requires no attention (Carls Rep. 15, p. 1) ... 8. 0.0
The Apparatus consists of an oak stand, a Sprengel Mercury Vacuum Pump, the Distilling Appa-
ratus with gauz- burner, a ga< pressure regulator, a heat regulator, the necessary bottles, etc.; it works
quite automatically for hours and without any loss in mercury.
Indispensable for those possessing Mercury Vacuum Pumps.
5u. !>!((. - - i d e m, arranged for heating by Spirit 9. 0.0

Illustration sent on application.
r>:>.noo. -- idem, simpler, on wall board, Figure, with gas ring 2. 2.
5:5, ooi Mercury Filtration Apparatus after Wiedemann, F g u r e, consisting of a stand and
. i
funnel with long tube closed bv a piece of wash-leal her (\V. u. E. phys. I'rakt. Fig. 365;
Ztschr. f. d. phys. u. chem. U. 4, 1891, p. 255) 0. 8.
5 1. :;(M. Mercury Press, see Figure 51,304, p. 215 0.12.0

Cl. 5097,
95fi, H.1-1, '.!''>
400 Motion of Gaseous Bodies. n. ;,:,
50 139. 1 : 5 50140. 1:5.
53 Oil. 1 : 9.
50 141. 1 : 6. 53017. l : -I
Accessories for Vacuum Pumps.

. Plate for Vacuum Pump, 24 cm diameter, Figure
Without Receiver. LarêM Receiver that can in- used: No. .">:{. 013 4. <
:>n,i40. -- idem, with Barometer Gauge -Mio mm high; Finnic .......... i>. 14.0
."id, I IL'. -- idem, larger, 2S cm diameter, with Barometer Gauge .'WU mm high, sled cock
with brass handle ............................... 4. l.~. o
I.aijicsl Receiver tliat can l>c used: No. .">;!. 111.") ...................... I'. t>. l>
), 141. --
idem, larger still, .'>-! cm diameter, F i <_MI re; \\ith Barometer Gauge .Him nun
with electric lead under the receiver,
hijrli, plii.ir terminals can be taken off plate; steel
cock with brass handle ............................. 5. 5.
Largest Receiver iliai can In- n>cd: No. .).'{.(> it; ............... ....... .
ii. II. i>
\Vhcn usinjc Receivers Nos. 53,008 53.O14 it is not possible to employ tlie lead terminals of this
plate jis at least one terminal is COVITCI! over hy the receiver.
c 1. -.'1,22,
No. .'.3030. Accessories for Air Pumps. 401
53028. i : r>. 53029.
50,143. Rubber Tubing for Air Pumps, wire clad inside, braided; see No. 50,143, p. 25. Price g.
per metre 0. 3.
Receivers, F i
g. 53,011, of good glass with wide flange and grip, finely ground.
List No. 53,008 53,009 53,010 53,011 53,012 53,013 53,014 53,015 53,016
Internal Height mm 105 130 160 185 210 235 260 315 365
Internal Diam. mm 60 105 80 130 160 185 210 235 260
f a
P?mp Plate mm }
^0 140 140 180 200 240 250 280 320
ls.9d. 2s.0d. 2s.3d. 3s.0d. 4s.0d. 4s.9d. 5s.6d. 6s.6d. lls.6d.
The details given in the Table as to the diameter of air pump plates show the smallest glass
plate which can be used with the receiver. For instance, Receiver No. 53,014 is suitable for a plate
diameter of 250 mm; it is advisable, therefore to choose the smaller one, Nr. 53,013, if the larger is
not absolutely necessary. In addition to the largest Receivers suitable for each plate it is desirable
to select some smaller receivers for each air pump as the smaller the receiver the more favourable
the action of the pump. The largest item given should be selected as well as Nos. 53,008, 53,010 and
53,012. We
may say that the sizes of receivers suitable are appended to the description of the appa-
ratus concerned.
5 3,01 7. Stuffing Box Receiver, Figure, 105 mm internal diameter, 150 mm internal height,
for Bell No. 53,069 and Fan No. 53,066 0. 16.
The air pump plate for this receiver must be at least 140 mm diameter.
53.018. - - i d e
m, 120 mm
internal diameter, 160 mm internal height, for above experiments
and for Electric Cascade No. 53,085 . 0. 18.
The air pumn plate must be 180 mm.
53.019. - -
idem, 160 mm
internal diameter, 210 mm
internal height, for the largest air
pumps having a plate of 200 mm
diameter 1. 2.
This receiver is necessary for Bells Nos. 53,070 and 53,071 as well as for the double Pan No. 53,067.
Rubber Discs of soft, red patent rubber for placing on the plate of the air pump so as to do
away with the troublesome operation of smearing the receivers with tallow.
List No. 53,020 53,021 53,022 53,023 53,024 53,025 53,026
Diameter mm 145 185 205 245 255 285 325
0.4.0 0.6.0 0.7.0 0.9.0 0.10.0 0.14.0 0.18.0
53,028. Drying Apparatus for the air pump, Figure, with stopcock, mercury manometer
attachment and 6 Tube Attachments 1. 0.0
The apparatus
arranged for drying
is by concentrated sulphuric acid. It is ground with great
precision, being thus perfectly air-tight.
53,029. Barometric Gauge, small, Figure 0. 8.
5.S.030. -- idem, larger, tube 200mm long, in glass bell with iron base 1.0.0
fl. 962, 595i.
402 Motion of Gaseous Bodies.
53 033. 1 : 5. 53034. 1:7
53031. 1 : 10. 53032. 1 : 14. 53035. 1 : 6. 53038. I : 4
53.031. Standing Barometer in receiver 85 cm high, with iron base, F i

g u r e (\\ '. I). Fig. lf.7 *
[153]), filled 1. 14.
53.032. Receiver with Barometer and Manometer, Figure, the barometer with charge . o. 12.0
Auxiliary Apparatus for Air Pumps.

53.033. Glass Sphere for weighing air, Figure, with two stopcocks, 120 mm diameter
(W. D. Fig. 154 [168]) 0. Id.
53.034. Two Glass Spheres of 200 mm

diameter, for determining the specific gravity of air,
one of these being provided with foot for standing on the air pump, also with hook
and tare pan, Pigu re (M. P. Ill, Fig. 91 [IT, 2, Fig. 85]) 1. 10.
53.035. Magdeburg Hemispheres, Figure, 100 mm diameter, of iron, with brass stopcock
and ground base 0. in. H
53.036.
-- idem, 120 mm diameter 1. o. o
53.037. - - i d e m, 200 mm diameter 1 . HI.
53,038. Dasymeter (Baroscope), small, Figure (W. D. Fig. !<!> [155]) HI.
Dasymeters Nos. 53.03s und 53,039 are for use with Receiver No. 53,012, and I>;i*vnietei- No. .Vi.o-lii
with Receiver No. 53,015; for No. 53,038 No. 53,011 suffices, tmt the hirjrer receiver is pivtei ulile.
53,0311.
-
idem, larger, Figure 0. 12.
53.040.
-- idem, very large, for very large Air Pumps 1. H. H
53.041. Dasymeter (Baroscope) after Prof. Friedr. ('. (i. Midler, Figu re, with pointer and
scale, globe about 200 ecm (Miiller, Techn. d. phys. 1'iiteir., llioti. Fig. S7) .... 0. IS.
Smallest receiver that can be used: No. 53.011 0. :j o
52,794. Demonstration Aneroid Barometer, see Fig. 52,794, p. 375 Hi. (I
52,791. Bourdon Tube, si>e Fig. 52,791, p. 375, for explaining the principle of the Spring Mano-
meter and of the Aneroid Barometer, on base, with scale and pointer 1.
Cl. SS.Vi. 117(1.
!ii;i. ..714. :!:

No. 53 054 Accessories and Auxiliary Apparatus for Air Pumps. 403
53044. 1 : 6.
53039. 1:4. 53041. 1 : 3.
53 048. 1 : 5.
53052. 1:6.
53049. 1 : 6. 53050. 1 : 3. 53051. 1:2. 53053. 1
53.044. Apparatus for Bursting Bladders, Figure, 90 mm external diameter, of metal 0.
53.045. -- idem, 150 mm external diameter, of metal
53.046.
- - i d c in, 90 mm external diameter, of glass
53.047. - - i d
e in, 140 mm
external diameter, of glass
Nos. .">:!, O44 and 53,046 can be used with small air pump; for Nos. 53,045 and 53,047 the diameter
of tin; air pump plate, should be at least 180 mm.
53,04*. Apple Cutter, F i

g u re, consisting of a receiver with fitting on top for holding an
apple
53.ni!). Mercury Shower Apparatus, Figure, for showing the pressure of the air and the
porosity of solids, with stopcock and foot, arranged for taking various fabrics . . .
In tli is apparatus the forcing of mercury into the air pump is entirely obviated.
5:;, 050. -- idem, according to Figure 53,050, arranged for taking various materials
5.5. 051. Rubber Balloon, Figure, with stopcock, for showing the expansion of the en-
closed aii- under the receiver (Gan.-Man. Fig. 130; M. T. p. 122)
)3,05ii. Small Tripod with vessel underneath, Figure, for sucking a perforated egg by
means of the air pump |
3,o53. Apparatus for showing the uniform pressure of air in all directions, Figure .
Large white metal pipe, cross shaped, with three openings, covered over with rubber.
(3,054. - - id e in. with three brass hemispheres arranged above, sideways and underneath
53056. 1 : 3.
53057. 1 : 3.
53055. 1:9.
53 058. 1 : 6.
53 066. 1
fl
53059. 1:8. 53060. 1 : 12. 53063. 1 : in. 53067. 1:4.
s. d.
53.055. Syphon Fountain, Figure, svith stopcock and foot 0.

The apparatus after being exhausted is then placed in a water vessel.
. After the stopcock is
opened the water is driven in a jet into the tall glass tube by the action of the atmospheric air.
53.056. Small Heron's Ball, Figure, for placing under the receiver, with catching vessel 0. 2.
5 :;,057. Mercury Syphon, ceases to flow in vacno, Figure (W. D. Fig. 170 [156]) . . . 0. 4.
Receiver No. 53,011 is necessary.
53,058. Air Reaction Wheel, Figure (Fr. phys. Techn. I, 2, Fig. 2689) 0. 3.
llcreiver No. 53,011 is required.
53.05!t. Fall Cylinder after Weinhold, 0.6 m high, Figure (\V. I). Fig. 173 [158]), with
long rod so as to enable it to be used as a stuffing box receiver 1. 6.
The plate of air pump must be 180 mm in diameter.
53,060. Fall Tube (Newton's Tube), Figure, with stopcock and base, 70 cm high . . . 1. 1'.
">3.061. Fall Tube with stopcock and base. 1 in high 1. li.
53.062. - d e 1.5 in high

i
m, 1. IL'.
I
1. '.I'.ll. '.!-<-. ill.'i. .Ml-JC .
1I7II. !I77. !7v 183, M4.

V... .',3076. Auxiliary Apparatus for Air Pumps. 405
53070. 1 : 3. 53072. 1 : 8.
53 071 and 53 019. 1:8.
53073. 1 : 8. 53074. 1 : 4.
s. d.
53.063. Fall Tube after Puluj, Figure, evacuated and scaled up, 90 cm high, with base 1. 10.
An electromagnet is placed above the upper. end and when the current is closed this magnet
holds fast a small iron disc and a down feather provided with a light iron wire. When the, current
is opened both bodies drop simultaneously, reaching the bottom at the same time.
53.064. - -
idem, not evacuated, for showing, along with No. 53,063, the behaviour of the
two bodies in an air filled space 1. 8.
53.065. - - i d e m, with stopcock, for evacuating on the spot, for showing the fall in air and
in vacuo 1. 12.
53,066. Wind Fan, for air resistance, F i

g u r e (W. I). Fig. 174 [159]) . . . 0. 15.
53,067. Double Fan, with two adjustable vanes, set into uniform rotation by two heavy racks,
F i
g \\ r e
j
1. 10.
52,667. Cohesion and Adhesion Tube after Leduc and Sacerdote, see No. 52,667, p. 361 . 0. 12.
53,069. Bell with clockwork, for showing the small extent of the propagation of sound in
rarified air 0. 10.
No. 53,069 can be used with the small Stuffing Box Receiver No. 53,017; the largest receiver,
No. 53,019, is required for Nos. 53,07053,071.
- - with three cords in iron frame having rubber feet,
>3,070. idem, hung Figure, for
damping as far as possible the transmission of sound to the air pump 0. 14.
i,071. -- idem, with visible clockwork, suspended by means of fibres, Figure, with-
out receiver . 1. 0.
53,072. Electric Bell in a receiver, suspended from rubber, Figure (M. T. p. 123) . 0. 11'.
53.073. Apparatus for forming ice by evaporation of ether, F g i u r e, after Bottgor (W. V.
Fig. 409), without receiver 0.
53.074. Freezing Apparatus after Cane, Figure (W. D. Fig. 391 [371]), for producing
by evaporation, with enclosed ether vessel, on stand
ice
'
" 11.
--
53.075. idem, with stand, but without ether glass (W. D. Fig. 390 [370]) 0. 9.
53.076. - - id e in, for placing direct on the air pump plate, F i

g u r e (W. D. Fig. 392 [372]) 0. 10.
Ol. 980, 5991. !I82.
5312, 993, 994.

53077. 1:7. 53078. 1 : 9. 60577. 1 : 7. 60 577 a. I : 8.
53082. 1:9. 53083. 1:8. 60578. 1 : 4.
53,077. Apparatus after Davy, Figure, for the reflection of heat in vacuo, receiver with
two concave mirrors, heating wire and thermometer, for placing on the air pump (Gan.-
Rein. Fig. 408) ............. ................... 3. 3.
53,078. Apparatus for demonstrating the cooling Action of Gases, Figure, after Tyndall
(Tyndall, Warme, Fig. 83), with lateral hose stopcock for leading in gases and a stop-
cook connecting with the air pump; for placing on the air pump plate ...... 1'. (I. (I
60,577. Electric Egg, F i g. 60,577, with stopcock and base,

demonstrating for Geissler Tubes
(M. P., 9
lh
Edn., Ill, Fig. 240) ......................... 1. 7.0
- - with holders for carbon
60,577 a. i (1 e m, Figure, taking rods, demonstrating for t In-
electric arc .................................. 1. 10.
60,577 b. - - i d e m, entirely of without holders ................

glass, 0. 18.
53.082. Receiver with Carbon Rods for producing an electric arc, Figure 1. 12. (I
The air pump plate must be 240 mm diameter.
53.083. Glow Lamp Filament in Receiver, after Hartl, F i g u r e, for showing that the carbon
filament docs not burn up in vacuo, but does so easily in air (Ztschr. f. d. phys. u. diem. '
T. 10, 1897, p. 235) .' 0. 15. (I
<;<..">7S. Geissler Tube, with stopcock and base, for setting on the air pump, Figure. . (I. 16.
r>.",.oxr>. Electric Cascade, consisting of Stuffing Box Receiver No. 53,018 and rranium Glass
(\V. 1). p. X(>9 [807|) 0. lit.
The air pump plate must be 180 diameter. mm
.-.::.<ix<;. Rubber Bladder 0. 2. 6
53,0X7. Model of a Bellows, Figure, with glass window for demonstrating its mode of
action 0. it. (I
53.08S. Bellows, simple construction o. 2. 6
Cl. 3884, 4117, 4978, 5348,

989,4147,990.
No. :>:i lot. Auxiliary Apparatus for Air Pumps. Bellows. Compression Pump. Air Wheels. 407
53087. 1 : 5.
53089. 1:8.
53096. 1:8. 53099. 1:5.
53091. 1:7. 53101. 1 : 6. 53102. 1 : 6.
s. d.
53.089. Model of Compression Pump, Figure, with rubber ball 0. 12.
53.090. Sectional Model of a Compression Pump (Kleiber, Oberstufe, Fig. 241) 1. 5.
53.091. Compression Pump after Silbermann (M. P. I, Fig. 553 [851]), Figure . . . . 4.16.0
The pump has a massive iron base, being provided with two valves and three stopcocks. It
admits of compressing to 6 atm.
53.092.
- -
idem, with manometer 6. 0.
Gasometers and Aspirators, see under Nos. 51,244 51,277, pp. 211 213.
53.094. Compression Apparatus after Pouillet (M. P. I, Fig. 493 [534]), with compression
screw and hand-wheel, for demonstrating the deviations from Boyle's Law 17. 0.
The apparatus has two tubes of 2 m length, also rule, and is tested at 130 atmospheres pressure.
53.095. - - i d e m, with bevel gearing 20. 0.
53.096. Air Reaction Wheel, Figure (W. D. Fig. 178 [163]), of glass, with brass holder
and base, for blowing by the mouth 0. 6.
- - d
53.097. i e m, entirely of metal 0. 8.
53,058. Air Reaction Wheel for the Air Pump, see Fig. 53,058, p. 404 0. 3.
."3.099. Gas Reaction Wheel, Figure, for driving with house gas or under the air pump
receiver. When worked with gas the neck of the flask is half filled with water; the
house gas flowing out is ignited (Fr. phys. Techn. I, 2, Fig. 3690) 0. 6.
52,593. Repulsion Apparatus after Hartl, see Fig. 52,593, p. 352 1. 4.0
53,101. Steam Reaction Wheel (Heron's Rotating Ball) of glass, in iron stand, Figure
Techn. 0. 5.
(Fr. phys. I, 2, Fig. 3691 [I, Fig. 641]) . . .
-- idem, with spirit cup 0. 14. o

53.10:.'. entirely of metal, Figure,
C'l. 3797, 5219, 5988, 5519,
997, 5872, 999.
408 Motion of Gaseous Bodies. 8 in:;
53108. 1 : (i.
53103. 1:11.
53114. 1 : 4.
53105. 1 : 4. 53115. 1 : 4
53.103. Draught Apparatus after Meidinger, Figure, comprising wide tube with burner 8. il.
and three lateral openings on to which lights are fixed IS. II
It is possible to show with this apparatus the causes of

draught, also the back draught in
chimneys and the action of the wind on the draught in chimneys.
53.104. Sheet Iron Cone with lateral tube for showing the sucking action of chimney cowls
(M. T. p. 128) ; . . . 0. 3. (I
53.105. Apparatus for Suction Phenomena of. Outflowing Gases, after Clement and Desormes,
F i g u r e (M. P. I, Fig. 578 [596]) 0. S. I)
53.106. Apparatus for Suction Phenomena (W. D. Fig. 179 [164]), with tapered blow pipe 0. 2. (t
53.107.
-- idem, with constricted tube (W. IX Fig. 180 [165]) 0. 2.
53.108. Apparatus for Suction Phenomena, of glass, with brass mounts. Figure (M. 1'. I.
Fig. 580 [508 1) 0. 10.
53.109. Model of Injector (Steam Jet Pump) after Keichert, F g u r e, complete, i with stand,
wood clamp and beaker
boiling flask, spirit lamp, o. 1 I. o
-- idem, without accessories named above
53.110. (M. P. I, Fig. 581 [599]) 0. 3. (I
Sectional Model of the Steam Injector: see Section "Heat".

53.111. Pulverising Tube of glass (M. P. I, Fig. 582 [600]) o. o. 4
53.112. Apparatus for demonstrating the Breathing of human beings. Figure, after
Meut/uer (/tschr. f. d. phys. u. chem. I". 5, 1892, p. 305) (I. 10.
.">.',
113. - - id e m, with stand (t. 11
53,114. Sectional Model of a Clack Valve, of metal, Figure 0. 15. (I
5.",, 1 15. Sectional Model of a Ball Valve, of metal, Figure 0. 15. (I
53.116. Sectional Model of a Conical Valve, of metal, Figure II 15. (I
53. 11 7. Sectional Model of a Plate Valve, of metal. Figure II. 15.
i I. :>si;7. 3358, 1008, HUM.

Water Air Pumps: *< No*, .vi.127 .>o,K>f>. pp. -2-2 -2'
1000. 3 3.V.I. linrj.
No. .">:! I'.'S. Suction Phenomena, Valves, Wind Wheels, Screw Flyers. 409
53123. 1: 11. 53126. 1:7.

s. d.
53.1 ix. Sectional Model of a Membrane Valve, of metal, Figure 15.
53, 11 9. Sectional Model of a Safety Valve, with adjustable weight, of metal, Figure 15.
53,120. Robinson's Cross Cups, Models (M. T., Fig. 91) 6.
5.5.121. Windmill, of cardboard (M. T., Fig. 105) 3.
53.122. Screw Flyer (Propeller) free-flying, Figure (W. D. Figs. 183 and 184 [168 and 169]),
with throwing apparatus 0. 6.
53.123. - - i d e m, flying upwards on. a 1 m long wire, thus obviating any damage to objects.
Figure 16.
53.124. Throwing Apparatus wound by a spring, Figure, with one screw flyer . . . . rj. o
By winding up the spring to a greater or less degree it is possible to rcgnlutc the height to
which the flyer will ascend. The distance of ascent can be as much as 30 metres.
53.125. 10 Screw Flyers for above, as spares 0. 2.
53,126. Throwing Apparatus for Boomerangs, after Pfaundler, Figure, with 6 small alu-
minium boomerangs of different shapes (M. P., 10 th Edn. I, Fig. 327) 1. X.
0.
53,127. Boomerang (W. D. Fig. 185 [170]) 1.
53,1 2X. Model of a Parachute (M. T. I, Figs. 588 and 589 [605 and 606]) 0. 8.
Wind Vane and Wind Wheel for demonstrating the Propeller Fan: see No. 52,006.
Cl. 1009, 1003, 1004, lOOo, 1006,

Water Air Pumps: sec Nos. 50, 127 fiO,lor>, pp. 22 2~.
1010, 1011,4942.
Anemometers and Wind Vanes: sec Meteorology.
410 Molecular Effects of Gaseous Bodies. No. 53129
a
53 131. 1 : 0.
53132. 1:3. 53 134. 1 : 5. 53 136. 1:3. 53 137. 1 : 4.
Molecular Effects of Gaseous Bodies.

8. d.
53.129. Dobereiner's Tinder Box, Figure 0. 7.
53.130. Air Gun, Figu re, ;i

separate compression pump is not necessary 1. 4.
53.131. Brick with Fitting, Figure, for Pettenkofer's Experiment to show the Diffusion
of Gases through porous walls (Kleiber, Oberstufe, Fig. 18; M. T. p. 129) 0. 12. (i
53.132. Apparatus for showing the Diffusion of Gases through porous Partition Walls (Trans-
fusion), F i g u r e (M. P. Ill, Fig. 145 [I, Fig. 619]) 0. 4. II
53.133.
-- idem, with Manometer (M. T., Fig. 92) 0. 4. II
53.134. Gas Endosmose Apparatus, after Weinhold, Figure (W. I). Fig. 188 [173]) . . 0. >. u
51,751. Double Sphere on Stand, for showing the expansion of gases (\V. D. Fig. 60 [55]) and
The mixing (diffusion) of two -rases, after Berthollet (Gan.-Man., Fig. 163), see Fig. 51,751,
p. 250 0. 10.
53.13<>. Demonstration Gas Indicator, Figure 0. x. o
Mercury is I"-tul)c until the lower current terminal is immersed therein.

introduced into the
The upper contact is per illustration, the two terminal* arc then connected witli a cell and
inserted a,s
a bell, and house jâs is allowed to flow on to the diffusion partition. The fias diffuses in the funnel
and forces the mercury out of the left limb of the tube until lie circuit is finally closed.
I
.":;. i:{7. Gas Indicator after Ansel], Figure, for showing the presenee of firedamp . . . 1. 2.
.">3. 138. -- idem, as suggested liy Bunsen, Figure 0. 12.
53.139. Silver-Plated Copper Plate for Moser's breath figures (Fr. phys. Teolm. I. 2, p. 1031) 0. 5. li
53.140. Endosmometer alter Meelai, Figure 1. 0.
(
.|. 1012, 5880, 5115,
1015,1016, 5854, 1017.
No. ~>3 14.'.. Molecular Effects of Gaseous Bodies. Wave Motions. 411
53 138. 1 : 8. 53 140. 1 : 9. 53 143. 1 : 10.
53 144. 1 : 10.
V.i,l4l. Apparatus for showing the absorption of Gases through Solids and Liquids (M. P. II,
s. d.
Fig. 263 [I, Figs. 612 and 615]) 0. 2.
VJ.I42. Absorptiometer after Bunsen, for the Absorption of Gases through Liquids (M. P. Ill,
Fig. 265 [I, Fig. 616]) 6. 0.
V5,143. Effusiometer after Henniger, for determining the velocity of outflow of

Figure,
(lases (Kohlrausch, Praktische Physik, 10 th Edn., p. 91) 1. 6.
Wave Motions.
>3,144. Longitudinal Wave Machine after Weinhold, (W. D. Fig. 196 [181], Figure |
d.
plate IV), for explaining the reflection of waves at the free and fixed end, as well as
the existence of stationary waves, with copper spiral 170 cm long, fixed on rotary pegs 3. 12.
,145.
-- idem, each winding weighted with a lead ball I
4. 10.
CI. 1018,53.10. .v_>o:t.
Apparatus for showing the Elasticity of Air: see p. 366. 1020.

412 Wave Motions. No. 53 I Hi
53146. 1:10.
53 148. ] : 14
f>3,146. Wave Machineafter Much. F g u re, i for demonstrating progressive and stationary
Longitudinal and Transverse Waves, also for converting transverse waves into longi-
tudinal and vice versa ............................. .">.
The Machine is provided with a driving arrangement l>y moans

which the
of different waves can
ih be ]>ro<luccd. A precise description is appended to each machine.
r>.;.l47. Longitudinal and Transverse Wave Apparatus after van s< -haik (/tschr. f. d. phys.
T
11.cliein. 1 14, l!Mll. |i. X9; M. T. p. S(i), showing the longitudinal and transverse
.
oscillations simultaneously ........................... X. (i. o
r>.'{.lix. Wave Machine, Model for Hertzian Waves, alter Silvauus Thompson, Figure
(S. P. Thompson-Lummer. Sichthares mid unsichtharcs Ijicht, 1X!)X, Fig. 1 .-<); Slaliy.
Die Fnnkenteleg7'a])hie, \>. 11, 19(11) ................. ..... . (i. 0. (>
The radiator (primnrv station) forms a heavy mass suspended from fibres, and ha> a
of brass,
difinite period of oscillation, which is relatix'ely hi rye. The resomitor (secondary station) is a circle cut
out of brass, this al>o beinj; suspended from fibres.
No. 53 154. Wave Machines. 413
53149. 1 : 12.
53152. 1 : 17. 53153. 1:0.
5.3,149. Wave Machine after Hillig, Figure, with a .single and a double clamping board s. d.
and with two adjustable bell cups fixed on stands 4. 0.
The apparatus represents an ether stratum and consists of a wood frame 1.5 x 0.5 m upon which
a number of lead balls 1 cm in diameter are .strung, being connected with each other and with the
frame by means of spiral springs. It is possible to demonstrate with this apparatus (1) the longitu-
dinal wave; (2) the transverse wave; (3) the water wave (gravitation wave, in which the frame is placed
horizontally); (4) the velocity of propagation (if the centre is plucked both bells ring simultaneously:
equal velocity of propagation in the same medium); (5) polarisation; and (6) Huygens's Principle.
A description is appended to each apparatus.
* 53, 150. Apparatus for Demonstrating Wave Motions, after Grimsehl (Ztschr. f. d. phys. u.
cliem. U. 19, 1906, p. 271), for demonstrating the Propagation, Eeflection, and Inter-
ference of Water Waves 3. 15.
#5:5,151. Lantern Slide for explaining Wave Motions Each 0. 1. 6
5:5,152. Wave Trough after VVeher, Figure, with glass walls 2. 4.
5:5, 153. Apparatus for the Repulsion and Interference of Wave Motion, F i g u r e (Fr. phys.
Techn. I, 2, Figs. 3637 and 3639 [I, Figs. 565 and 566]), comprising an iron plate
and dropping vessel for mercury on a movable stand, and two different elliptical
vessels 1. 4.
One vessel is filled with mercury until a smooth surface is formed. If now mercury is allowed
to drop out of the dropping vessel in a focus of the ellipse, very visible waves are produced the repulsion
and interference of which are rendered visible in a very pretty manner. The phenomena can also be
projected by means of the mirror and lens No. 53.154.
53,154. Adjustable Mirror and Large Bi-convex Lens for above, to enable the phenomenon
to be projected by means of the lantern 2. 5.

5SOO, 338.
414 Wave Motions. Nc,. :,3155
53161. I:.",
53155.
53 162. 1 : 40.
53164. 1 : 12. 53 166. 1 : 9.
53,155. Rope Wave Apparatus after Volkinann, Figure

(Fr. phys. Techn. I, 2, Figs. 3426,
3436, 3437; Ztschr. ,,Natur und Schnle", Vol. I, pp. 273282 and pp. 342350), for
demonstrating the propagation, reflection, interference and polarisation of simple waves
and trains of waves, the influence of the cord tension and of the cord weight on the
wave-velocity, and of the compensation of waves of opposite phases 2. 5. o
The apparatus consists of two end supports with hooks, 1 swinging lever for interference experi-
ments. 2 polarisers, and 18 wire spirals. In addition, 3 to 4 stands are necessary for the experiments
and are not included in the price: it is also advisable to provide stand clamps.
53,15*!. 4 Stands for Yolkmann's Eope Wave Apparatus J. I), it
53.157. 4 Stand Clamps for preceding Stands 1. o. o
53.158. Indiarubber Cords for transverse waves. 3 m long (\Y. 1). p. 244 |217'J) 0. 3.
-- idem, for half their length with wood balls 0. 12.

5.").I.V.t. weighted
53,lfi(. Brass Wire Spiral on Silk Fibre, for reflection of transverse waxes (\V. I), p. 245 |218]) 0. 5. o
53. Hil. Brass Wire Spiral with Steel Rod for clamping, Figure (.M. T. pp. Sti and 87).
for generating transverse and longitudinal waves 0. 2.
53.1<>2. Apparatus after Rosenberg, Figure, for demonstrating the propagation and inter-
ference of oscillatory motions ,
0. 12.
The apparatus consists of a long metal wire to which small wood pieces of square section are
fixed at ecpial distances apart, these piece,s being of eqiuil length.
OL 3363.4516. 1031,
1036, 1037.
Nn. 53173. Wave Machines. 415
53 169. 1 53 172. 1 : 6.
53 173. 1 : 6.
s. d.
53.163. 2 Spiral Spring Models for imitating sound vibrations (M. T. Fig. 96) 0. 6.
53.164. Wave Apparatus after Melde; a gut string of 90 cm length which is set in synchronous
vibrations by a tuning fork, Figure
(M. P. I, Fig. 632 [659]) 2.10.0
53, 165. - - i d e in, with platinum wire string 0.35 mm
thick, which is rendered incandescent
by an electric current for making the experiment more apparent 4. 0.
- - i d e
53.166. in, larger, with very massive fork and electromagnetic drive for permanently
maintaining the vibrations, Figure, with gut string 5. 0.
53.167. -- idem, w-th platinum wire string 0.5 mm thick 7. 10.
53.168. Rotary Screw Spiral after Friedr. C. G. Miiller, for demonstrating progressive sine
waves (M. T. p. 87) 0. 12. <J
* 5:>,l 60. Transverse Wave Machine for the Projection Lantern, Figure
' (Fr. phys. Teclm.
1. L>, Fig. 3405) 2. 8.
53.170. - - i d c m, with 10 angle-shaped rods for demonstrating a longitudinal wave. . . 2. 1.2. o
53.171. NEW. Wave Machine after Steiudel, for transverse and longitudinal waves and for
demonstrating the interference of two waves !
6. 0.
Tin- Wave Machine of pattern No. 53,169, the excentrics of which -can
comprises two machines
be reciprocally adjusted so as to vary the phases of the two waves relatively to each other. The rods
of the 1\vo machines are connected with each other by levers and set a third row of rods into motion,
thus showing the interference of the two waves.
53.172. Transverse Wave Machine, Figure

53,1 73. Wave Machine after Fessel and Pliicker, Edn., II, 1, Figs. 817
th
(M. P., 9 Figure
to 821), with two adjustable wave troughs and two sets of pins with balls on the ends
for demonstrating transverse, circular and elliptic wave motion, of polished mahogany
with iron legs 6. 0.
Cl. 5761,336-.',
# Can be used with the Projection Apparatus. m-.':<.
416 Wave Motions.
53175. 1:7.
53 176 B. 1:12. 53 177 a. 1:7.
53,174. Wave Machine after Fessel and 1'liicker, F g u r e, with a number

i of wave troughs; s. d.
can he used .simultaneously for demonstrating double refraction 16. 10. (I
53,175. Wave Machine after Christian!, Figure (W. D. Fig. 190 [175]), for imitating
aqueous waves. The mechanism is visible, being closed in by glass plate 5, (i. o
53,176. Wave Machine after Wheatstone (M. P. I, Figs. 607 and 608 [636 and 637J), with
three different waves on one stand, 1 long, Figs. A m and B 4. 0.
* 53, 177. Projection Wave Machine, cf. Fig. 53,1 77 a, with four round and two rectangular
photographed discs; without box _'. o. u
The round demonstrate (1) the reflection of the elementary repulsion in a closed tulie;
discs
(2) the progressive longitudinal wave; (:i) the stationary longitudinal wave. i. e. the wave motion in an
open tube, which gives its fundamental tone; and (4) the stationary wave in a tube dosed on one side.
which gives the first o\er tone' (twelfth) of the fundamental tone.
The rectangular discs arc used for demonstrating the reflection of a single wave at the closed
and open end of a tnlic.
*53,177a. -- idem, Figure, with 1>"\ for keeping the glass discs in
* 53, 1 78. Wave Machine after ( 'ro va, Figure (M. I>. II, 1. Fig. 1<I3|~'71|; Fr. phys. '
Teclm.
I, 2, Fig. 310!t |
I. Figs. 5(18 and 50<]), with three discs L>. 0. (I
Stationary longitudinal
(1) wave. r.J) Progressive longitudinal wave. (.'!) Two longitudinal
waves with phase displacement.
01. i "-'.>. :>:>ti. 10:; l.
Can lie used with the Projection Apparatus. HlL'ti-
1
. 111'.'!!'-. 5041,
V
No. ,3 Wave Machines. 417
53 178. 1 : 6. 53179. 1:11.
53 180. 1 : 7.
53.179. Stroboscopic Cylinder, on stand, Figure, with 18 wave strips, after Quincke s. d.
(M. P. II, 1, Fig. 295 [394]) 0. 18.
For demonstrating pendulum oscillation, longitudinal and transverse oscillations, vibrations of

ether particles, reflection of cord waves, vibration of strings and of air strata in pipes, vibration of
liquid particles and of progressive transverse waves.
52.019.
- -
idem, fitting the Whirling Table, with 18 wave strips, after Quincke .... 0. 14.
52.020. Strips alone, 18 in number, in case, with description 0. 6.
53.180. Wave Apparatus for Explaining the Vibration of Sounds, Figure (W. D. Fig. 255
[241]) 2. 10.
53.181. Wave Machine after Pfaundler (M. P., 10 th Edn., I, Figs. 624 a e and 803; Ztschr.
f.
phys. u. chem. U. 1, 1888, p. 98), for deriving combined transverse waves,
d.
especially for the compounding of the wave of a fundamental tone with the waves of
the uneven overtones 5. 10.
53.182. Wave Machineafter Grimsehl, for the synthesis of vibrations, with the rod for the
sine of a fundamental tone and for two ovei tones (Ztschr. f. d. phys. u.
shaped wave
chem. U. 17, 1904, p. 34; Physikal. Ztschr. 1904) 8. 15.
Cl. 336, 1033,

1036. 27
418 Acoustics. No. 53183
53 183. 1 : 4.
53 187. 1 = 5 53 189. 1 :
53 184. 1 : 9.
53 185. 1 : 6. 53 186. 1 : 4. 53 191. 1 : 4.
Acoustics.
s. d.
Propagation of Sound, Pressure Changes, Reflection,
and Refraction of Sound.
Bell with Clockwork for proving that air carries the sound waves, for placing under air pump
receivers, see Nos. 53,069 53,071 on p. 405, also electric bell in receiver, No. 53,072.
53,183. 2 String Telephones, Figure (W. D. Fig. 204 [190]) 0. 8.0
53.184. Apparatus for demonstrating the Propagation of Sound in Liquids and Solids, F i g u r <
(Tyndall, Sound [der Schall], Fig. 28), comprising resonance box with attachments
and tuning fork 1. 10. (I
The tuning fork is struck or bowed after being, together with its small wood base, screwed off
the sound box, the sound, however, being scarcely audible. If it is now placed upon the box or on one
of the wood or brass rods screwed to the box, the sound is considerably intensified. This intensifi-
cation of sound also takes place when the tuning fork (together with wood base) is placed in the funnel
of the glass tube, filled with water, and screwed on to the sound box, even though the wood base of
the fork be not in contact with the wall of the funnel.
53.185. Sensitive Flame Burner, after Konig, Figure, working with certainty with the
usual gas pressure of 35 mm 1. 0.0
53,186.
- -
idem, after Weinhold, simpler, Figure, with wire net, without sound horn 0. 8.0
53,187. idem, after Weinhold (W. D. Fig. 198 [183]), Figure . 0. 6.0
For rubber bags for the latter apparatus, see Nos. 51,267 51,270, p. 21-2.
Cl. 5857. 1018, 1040,5788,

1038, 1039, 1759.
No. 53 197. Propagation, Velocity, Pressure-Variation, Reflection, Refraction of Sound. 419
53 193. 1 : 2. 53 197. 1 : 8.
53 196.
53 194. 1 : 24. 1 : 25.
53.188. Sensitive Flame, after Rebenstorff, generating its own gas (Ztschr. f. d. phys. u. chem.
U. 19, 1906, p. 281)
The apparatus is fed with a mixture of equal parts of ether and benzol; the gas issuing from
the burner nozzle becomes mixed with air and is ignited above the net. The sensitivity can be altered
by regulating the air current by means of the rubber bellows. The differences in sensitivity on pro-
nouncing different vowels can be shown.
53.189. Air Concussion Apparatus (Fr. phys. Techn. I, 2, Pig. 3708 [I, Fig. 668]), Figure,
funnel-shaped with drum-stick
- - Weinhold (W. D. Fig. 199 with drum-stick
53.190. idem, after [184]), cylindrical, .
53.191. Kundt's Manometer with stopcocks, after Trussevitch, Figure, with funnel and
indicator for the air currents, on stand (Fr. phys. Techn. I, 2, Figs. 3711 and 3735)
The flap valve, formed of a fish-bladder membrane, is placed inside a tight-fitting conical stop-
cock. By turning the stopcock through about 180 the valve can be used as a pressure or suction valve.
The pointer shows the direction in which the flap opens. The apparatus should be connected, by
means of a length of rubber tubing to be attached, with a suitable manometer, e. g., Kolbe's Thermo-
scope. The apparatus is peculiarly adapted for Rostovzev's experiment on the reflection of sound waves
(Ztschr. f. d. phys. u. chem. U. 16, 1903, p. 288), in conjunction with two concave mirrors and the
pipe No. 53,192.
53.192. Tuned Pipe for above, on stand, Figure (Fr. phys. Techn. I, 2, Figs. 3726 and 3735)
53.193. Apparatus for showing the Pressure Change in Sound Waves, after Szymanski,
Figure (Ztschr. f. d. phys. u. chem. U. 1, p. 148; W. D. Fig. 201 [186]) . . . .
52,730. Pressure Level, after Topler, Figure 52,730, p. 368 (W. D. Fig. 141 [187]) . .
53.194. Tyndall's Apparatus for showing the Propagation of Sound in Long Tubes, Figure
(Tyndall, Sound [der Schall], Fig. 4; Fr. phys. Techn. I, 2, Fig. 3709 [I, Fig. 669]), with
telescopic sheet iron tube 3 m
long, with supports
53.195. Drawn Brass Tube, after Eebenstorff, for demonstrating the conservation of the
density of sound without lateral propagation (Ztschr. f. d. phys. u. chem. U. 19, 1906, p. 279),
as well as for thermal expansion in large dimensions (Ztschr. f. d. phys. u. chem. U.
20, 1907, p. 248); total length 4 m; width 20 in two parts, for heating by steam
mm;
53 201. 1 : 7.
53 204. 1 : 3. 53 208. 1 : 3.
Sound Generation, Sirens and Blowers. s. d.
62,315. Apparatus after Wertheim, Figure

62,315, p. 957, for demonstrating the tones
of steel when magnetized (M. P., 9 th Edn., Ill, Fig. 530) i
2. 10.
53.199. Trevelyan's Rocker, Figure

(W. D. Fig. 206 [192]), with resonance box, for pro-
ducing tones by a succession of concussions 0. 15.
53.200.
- -
idem, without resonance box 0. 12.
53.201.
- -
idem, after Konig, Figure 0. 14.
52.028. Savart's Toothed Wheels, see Fig. 52,028, p. 283; 4 wheels, giving the common
chord, suitable for Whirling Table, of zinc 0. 9.
52.029. --idem, of brass 0. 12.
52,021. Siren Disc, g. 52,021, p. F i 283 (Seebeck's Siren), with four rows of holes, giving
the major chord, for placing on the whirling table 0. 5.
53,203 a. Siren Disc, with 8 rows of holes, giving the scale, for the Whirling Table ... 0. 7.
giving major and minor chords

- -
53,203 b. idem, with 8 rows of holes, 0. 7.
53,204. Pipe with 4 nozzles, blowing the preceding Siren Discs

Figure, for 0. 5.
52.026. Siren Disc after Oppelt, with 22 rows of holes, for placing on the Whirling Table 0. 16.
The disc has 22 rows of holes; 15 give simple tones, 7 give different intervals as combined tones.
52.027. Siren Disc after Appunn, for placing on the Whirling Table, with 32 rows of holes;
gives the simple chromatic scale, the passage of thirds, also the entire song, ,,Du Schwert
an meiner Linken" in the four parts 3. 6.
52.024. Wave
Siren Disc after Konig, for placing on the Whirling Table, with 2 tubes for
blowing the rows of holes and the wave line 0. 15. o
The Wave Siren Disc has 4 rows of holes having respectively 32, 40, 48 and 64 holes and a wave
line on the edge corresponding to the algebraic addition of 4 sine curves corresponding with the above
numbers of vibrations. When the wave line is blown upon, the result is a sound which is broken up
by the ear into its single constituents, prima, third, fifth and octave. The disc is excellently adapted
for explaining the sound action of the phonograph and gramaphone.
52.025.
- -
idem, after Konig, larger, shaped to correspond to the flame image of the tone.
Is supplied hi the intervals 8:9, 8 11, 8 12, 8 :
13, 8 :
15, 8 :
16, 8
:
18, 8
:
20,
: :
8 23, 8 24
: : Price each 3. 6.
53.208. Universal Mouthpiece for blowing the cavum oris, flasks etc.; comprising rubber tubing
with flat tapering brass tube (W. D. p. 312). with conical endpiece for inserting in a
valve aperture of the blowing table 0. 7. <)
53.209. Siren after Cagniard de Latour, Figure, small pattern, with row of 12 holes, with-
out counting mechanism (Helmholtz, Tonempfindungen, 4 th Kdn., 1877, p. 22), with
conical tube for placing on the wind chest. All holes are blown through simultaneously,
thus adding to the intensity of the effect 1 . 10.
53,2.10. with counting mechanism, Figure (M. P. I, Figs. 673 675 [699701])
i d e in, 2. 0. (
53.211.
-- idem, larger pattern, with series of 20 holes, without counting meetianism,
Figure, with conical tube attachment for placing on the wind chest and with wood
base for protecting
53.212.
- -
idem, with counting mechanism 4. 10.
'
i
:isoi, 1051.
1054, 4146.
No. 53214. Generation of Sound, Sirens, Blowers. 421
53 209. 1 : 4. 53 210. 1 : 4. 53 211. 1 : 4.
53 213 A. 1:4.
53 213 B. 1:3. 53 214. 1 : 6.
53,213. Chord Siren aftei Dove, Figs. A

and B, with 4 stops with stop catches, to enable
the tones to be sounded singly or together, and with counting mechanism (Helmholtz,
Tonempfindungen, 4 Edn., 1877, p. 23; M. P. I, Figs. 839, 840 [814, 815])
th .... 6. 14.
with glass vessel 6. 0.0

53,214. Siren arranged to sound under water, Figure,
This Siren, built on the principle of Cagniard de Latour, is placed in the glass vessel supplied
and connected by a length of tubing either with the water lead or with a tank placed on a higher level.
If the stopcock is opened the water flows through the siren and the latter sounds.
Cl. 3669. 3669, 3669 b. 3669 c,

3669 e, 36711.
53 215. 1 : 6. 53 216. 1 : 8.
53 219. 1 : 6.
53,215. Double Siren after Helmholtz, for working by means of compressed air, Figure, s. d.
with counting mechanism which closes an electric contact when (Helm- set into action
holtz,Tonempfindungen, Fig. 56, pp. 268, 291, 303, 652; M. P. I, Fig. 816 [841]; W. D.
pp. 260 and 330) 16. 0.
The Double Siren is very suitable for a large number of important experiments in acoustics and
the theory of music, being particularly adapted for these purposes since tin- ratio of the frequencies
of the single tones always remains unaltered. The following intervals of tone can lie produced: unison,
octaves, fifths, fourths, major third, minor third, whole tone and semi-tone. Special mention may be
made of the experiments on the interference of sound, on vibration, on deep and deepest tones, on
vibrations of the overtones, and on combined tones. The perforations of the one disc correspond to
the tone ratios c e g d,, the perforations of the other correspond to d g b c t
: : : : The upper wind
: : .
chest can be turned by a handle for the purpose of obtaining in the upper siren any phase difference
as against the lower one.
Cl. 1059, 1060,

1055.
No. 53220. Double Sirens, Wave Sirens, Siren with Blowing Table. 423
53 220. 1 : 13.
53.216. Double Siren after Hebnholtz, driven by a 110 volt D. C. electric motor, Figure, d
with counting mechanism which when inserted closes an electric contact 26. 10.
The electric motor has a regulating resistance and a controllable brake device so as to be able
to adjust the siren to any pitch with certainty. The apparatus is very simple to manipulate. The
siren is driven by a thin belt, the motor being adjustable so as to In
keep the belt always taut.
other respects the siren is similar to No. 53,215.
If a different kind of current or voltage is desired the
price is proportionately altered. When
ordering kindly state kind of current and voltage for the motor; in the case of alternating and three-
phase current the frequency should also be given.
53.217. Electric Motor alone, with board, adjusting arrangement and regulating resistance 10. 10.
Cf. the remarks mentioned under the preceding item.
53.218. Model of the Ship's Siren with concentric, pierced cylinder jackets, the innermost
being rotary (Bolte, Leitfaden f. d. Unterr. i. d. Physik an Navigationsschulen, 2 nd Edn.,
Fig. 108) the essential parts, visible through glass, should be placed on the wind chest
; 2. 10.
53.219. Large Wave Siren, after Konig, Figure, for investigating sound impulses with
wind chest and siren disc the rows of holes of which correspond to the periodicities of
the primary tone and the repelled tones 45. 0.
The apparatus is for showing impulses and impulse -tones produced by the tones of different
intervals; the impulses are attained when the rotation is slow and the impulse-tones when the rotation
is rapid. A siren disc with holes is used for comparison with the tones produced by the wave siren.
The curves, which are arranged cylindrically, result from the combination of the two sine curves
pertaining to the interval. When a blast is applied a motion of the air results corresponding to that
produced by the consonance of two actually simple tones, without any intermingling of overtones.
Given in with the apparatus are the waves for the eight intervals 8 9 to 8 16, and an arrangement
: :
is fitted to allow the sirens to sound

separately and together. The sirens are actuated by a cord pulley.
53.220. Blowing Table with Siren, Figure, for demonstration purposes (Model of the
German Museum, Munich), siren with Electric Motor Drive; the four rows of holes give
the major chord and can be blown either singly or together by using a keyboard. The
motor has a regulating resistance so as to be able to raise the fundamental tone an
octave, from 256 vibrations to 512 vibrations 22. 10.
Unless otherwise stated when ordering, we supply the motor for 110 volts Direct Current.
Cl. 4921.
53226. 1:12. 53 229, 53 492, 53 493, 53 494. 1 : 14.
Cl. 1061. 5980,

5108,3370.
No. 53232. Blowing Tables and Bellows. 425
53 232. 1 : 15.
53.221. Blowing Table for Acoustic Experiments, Figure, with two large and four small s. d.
tube attachments with valves |

7. 0.
The Blowing Table has a large valve for receiving large reed pipes, a tube attachment with plug
seal for the overtone apparatus or a special wind chest; four valves for sirens and pipes, and two
tube unions of different sizes with plugs, for various purposes. The table frame is constructed of pine,
the top of oak.
- - with eight valves, otherwise as No. 53,221
53.222. idem, 8. 0.
- - with thirteen valves, otherwise as No. 53.221

53.223. idem, 9. 0.
53.224. Blowing Table with Wind Chest and Keyboard, Figure, for all acoustic experiments;
with a large valve for a large reed pipe or a tonometer; with eight small valves and two
different pipe attachments for rubber tube connections. The valves are opened by
a keyboard which can be regulated and fixed in place. Size of bellows 37 X 57 cm |15. 0.
- - with twelve valves 18.

63.225. idem, 0.
53.226. Blowing Table with Electric Motor Drive, Figure, with 110 volt D. C. Motor, with
fuse, switch and starting resistance, in lock-up cabinet with doors 24. 0.
With two large conical pipe attachments with plug seals, for taking tonometers and overtone
apparatus; a large valve for large reed pipe; four valves for sirens and pipes and two hose unions of
different sizes with plug seals, for various purposes. The table frame is of pine, the top of oak.
- - with eight valves 25.
53.227. idem, 0.
- - with thirteen valves 26.

53.228. idem, 0.
53.229. Blowing Table for Constant Pressure, Figure, specially adapted for use in ex-
periments with tone variators Nos. 53,481 et seq., for continuous experiments with
Galton's whistle, Quincke's tubes, etc. Price without tone variators 9. 0.
53.230. Double Blower, after Whipple, for constant pressure, Figure, with two wind
chambers arranged as gasometers. The chambers are employed alternately, the transfer
being made quite easily {22.
0.
The blower gives a very uniform wind both when the chamber is and empty. The in-
filled
fluence of the alteration in water level on the height of pressure is compensated by efficient arrange-
ments. The pressure can be regulated. A Stern Tone Variator can be supplied with air for about
2 5 /2 minutes without interruption.
r>.'),231.Wind Chest on Table, with four small and three large valves, cf. F i
g. 53,506, for
use with the Whipple Double Blower No. 53,230 7. 10.
|
53,232. Acoustic Bellows, Figure, with four valves and a pipe attachment for taking
reed pipes j
4. 10.
01. 3371, 5995.

53 234. 1 : 9.
53 233. 1 : 10
53242. 1:8.
53 235. 1 : 5. 53 238. 1 : 7. 53238a. 1:4.
53.233. Acoustic Bellows after Bertram, Figure, hand driven, with four valves and a * ''
tube attachment for taking reed pipes 3.0.0

53.234. Wind Pressure Regulator for Sirens, Figure 1. 16.
The apparatus is employed for lessening the impulses which cannot to be entirely avoided when
foot bellows are used.
53.235. Wind Chest, Figure, with four valves, for placing on the blowing table having
no valves or for use in conjunction with the water jet blower l. r_'. o
The Wind Chest can also be worked with compressed air from steel bombs. In this case the
following are necessary: 1 Steel Bomb No. 50,947 1. 16. 0), 1 pressure reducing valve No. 50,953
(
( 2. 5. 0). The cost of charging the bomb (No. 50,947) is 0. 10. 0.
- - with eight valves

53.236. idem, 2. 10.
- - with thirteen valves

53.237. idem, 4. 0.
Vibrating Air Columns, Pipes, Sound Analysis.

53.238. 4 Tubes with pistons, Figure, giving a chord when the pistons are successively
drawn out 1. 16.
53,238 a. 3 Covered Pipes, Figure, of metal, with wood mouthpiece, for the tones c 8 1024, =
C4 = 2048 and c 5 = 4096 vibrations (ut s = 2048 v. s., ut 6 = 4096 v. s., ut 7 = 8192 v. s.) 0. 18.
53.239. Labial Pipe of wood, to be used open and closed 0. 10.
53.240. of tin, cf. Fig. 53,245 0. 8.
- -
53.241. of wood, with middle slide, giving the same tone open and closed 0. 16.
Cl. 5992, 5996, 1083,

1066, 4099, 5054.
No. 53259. Vibrating Air Columns, Pipes. 427
53254.
53 245. 1 : 8. 53 251. 1 : 3. 53 253. 1 : 3. 1: 25.
s. d.
53.242. Labial Pipe of wood, Figure, for opening out to explain the internal arrangement 0. 10.
53.243. Labial Pipe, with side holes which can be closed and with adjustable wind orifice 0. 12.
53.244. 2 Long Brass Pipes, one open, the other covered, for giving the succession of harmonic
tones 0. 16.
53.245. 4 Labial Pipes of Zinc, Figure, major chord c 1? e lt g 1; c 2 (ut 3 ,

mi a ,
so! 3 , ut 4 ) . 1. 4.
53.246. 4 Labial Pipes of wood, for the major chord c t , e 1? g 1; c 2 (ut 3 ,

mi 3 ,
so! 3 , ut 4 ), each
pipe with slide for accurately tuning 1. 12.
53.247. 8 Labial Pipes, Figure, for the diatonic scale Cj c 2 (ut s ut 4 ) 2. 16.
53.248.
- -
idem, larger, from c Cj (ut 2 ut 3 ) 4. 0.0
53.249. 13 Labial Pipes for the chromatic scale c t c 2 (ut 3 ut 4 )

4. 10.
53.250. i d e m, larger, from c c l (ut 2 ut 3 ), each pipe with slide 6. 0.
53.251. Organ Pipe Mouthpiece, Figure, with adjustable upper lip 0. 8.0
53.252. Cornet Mouthpiece, Figure 0. 4.0
53.253. Clarinet Mouthpiece, Figure 0. 4.0
53.254. Large Double Pipe with adjustable tone, Figure, 2m long, 10 cm square, with
one mouthpiece, with two slides and two adjustable pistons 3. 4.0
53.255. 2 Open Pipes, of the same tone, one of which can be tuned by a slide for producing
impulses 1. 2.0
53.256. Labial Pipe, with parchment wall, open, for putting out of tune by damping . . 0. 12.
53.257. Labial Pipe, Figure, with adjustable, graduated piston, for producing the tones
of the scale Cj c 2 (ut 3 ut 4 ) 0. 16.
53.258. Small Double Pipe, with two sliding pistons, for the chromatic scale from c 2 c3
(ut 4 ut 5 ), forblowing with the mouth 0. 16.
53,259. Horn without reed, after Dvorak, for the tone c x (ut 3 ) 0. 3.0
Cl. 5975, 4182,
For Wind Chests for Pipes: see Nos. 53,23553,237.
1087, 4149, 4159, 1086, 1084.
Blowing Tables and Blowers: see Nos. 53,22153,233.
53263. 1:11.
53260. 53261. A B
1 : 9. 1 : 10. 53262. 1:10. 53 265. 1 : 8. 53266. 1 : 13. 53 267. 1 : 8.
53.260. Labial Pipe with adjustable membrane, for showing the vibratory nodes, Figure, s - d.
of wood, with glass wall 0. 16.
53.261. Labial Pipe with adjustable membrane, Figure (M. P. I, Fig. 653 [687]), for
showing the vibratory nodes, with long glass tube 1. 0.
53.262. Labial Pipe with long glass tube and sliding piston, Figure 1. 4.
When
the piston is in a vibratory node, the fundamental tone of the pipe is maintained, while
in the other case it is altered.
* 53,263. Manometric Flame Pipe, after Konig, Figure, with three gas flame manometers,
for demonstrating the nodal points, with glass wall and brass fittings, also with sheet
iron inset so as to be able to project the phenomenon in reflected light by means of soap
bubbles (W. D. Fig. 209 A [195 A]) 1.16.0
The pipe is placed on the small table supplied with our Projection Lanterns. The objective,
however, must be set up, at right angles to its usual position, alongside the projection lantern, at a
corresponding height, e. g. on one of the small tables Nos. 51,133 4, 51,136 7, or 51,139 40. Tilt-
projection lantern itself is set up parallel to the screen. The optical bench is then unscrewed, tin-
lantern alone rotated, and the pipe, with the objective, placed on the optical bench (cf. W. I).
Fig. 210 [196]).
53.264.
-- with Topler's Flame Indicators (W. D. Fig. 209 B [195 B])
idem, L. 12. fl
53.265. Kundt's Covered Pipe, Figure, with 3 Water manometers and valves seals . . 2. s. o
53.266. Labial Pipe, Figure, in the nodes of which holes of different diameter can be
opened 0. 16.
53.267. 2 similar Labial Pipes, Figs. A & B, with mouthpieces in different directions, for
showing that the position of the mouthpiece is without influence on the tone ... 1. -4.0
53.268. 2 Labial Pipes, Figure, the open ones giving the tones, 1, 2, 3, 4, the closed ones
the tones 1, 3, 5, 7; with directions for use 1. TJ. n
lh
53.269. Open Pipe, of boxwood (Fr. phys. Techn., 6 Edn., II, Fig. 977), for showing tlmt
higher tones can be produced in a narrow pipe by intensified blowing; without wind
chamber 0. S.
53.270. Cubic Pipe with adjustable wall, Figure 0.16.0

53.271. Cubic Labial Pipe, open 0. 12. o
53.272. 2 Closed Cubic Pipes, of different size, Figs. A and B, for demonstrating I lit- influence
of the volume of air on the tone 0. 16.
53.273. 2 Covered Triangular Prismatic Labial Pipes, for the same law 0. 16.
Cl. 5982,
* Can be used with the Projection Apparatus. 4978, 1089, 1000, 5989, 5976, 5077.
No. 53285. Labial Pipes, Reed Pipes. 429
53 270. 1 : 5.
53284.
53268. 1:10. 53 272 A. 1:10. 53 272 B. 1:10. 53278. 1:10. 53 282. 1 : 10. 1 : 10.
53.274. 3 Open Labial Pipes, of same length and same air capacity, but of different tone; d.
for explaining that the tone is also dependent on the shape of the pipe; one in the form
of a truncated pyramid, the second of rectangular prismatic form, the third in the form
of a pyramid trunk widening out upwards 1. 13.
53.275. Tone Manometer, after Grimsehl (Ztschr. f. d. phys. u. chem. U. 2, 1888 89, p. 59),
a U-shaped water manometer with valves for hanging in pipes 0. 6.
53.276. Small Disc with rotary suspension, for showing the motion of air in singing air-columns,
after Grimsehl (Ztschr. f. d. phys. u. chem. U. 2, 1888 89, p. 59); it is placed, hori-
zontally, hung in the vibrating centre of a pipe I
0. 4.
nd
53.277. Steam Pipe (Bolte, Leitf. d. Phys., 2 Edn., Pig. 109), for placing on the wind chest 1. 10.
53.278. Reed Pipe, Figure, with freely vibrating reed, tone varied by making the reed
longer or shorter; with two resonators 0.18.0
- -
53.279. idem, with restricted-motion reed 0. 18.
53.280. Free-vibrating Reed Pipe, after Weber 3. 0.
arranged in such manner as to render it possible to use reeds constructed of sheets

This pipe is
of different thickness and material. The pipe rests in a glazed wind chest and carries its pipe, which
can be interchanged by a whole series of others of different length; such a pipe is formed of two pipes
sliding one in the other. If the tone of the pipe harmonises with that of the tube, and if the pipe
is gradually lengthened, the tone is not lowered
proportionally to this lengthening. The lowering takes
place slowly at first and then more rapidly until the lower octave exactly is reached when the tube is
drawn out double length. If now the tube be again increased by its own length the tone goes back first
to the initial pitch attained, being finally lowered as in the preceding case only, of course, by an
'-
interval of a fourth.
53.281. Membrane Reed Pipe (M. P. I, Fig. 777 and 778 [801 and 802]) 0. 5.
53.282. Reed Pipe with Sound Trumpet, Figure, c_ x = 64 vibrations (ut x = 128 v.s.), powerful tone 1. 6.0
53.283.
- - i d e m, c = 128 vibrations (ut a = 256 v. s.) 1.6.0
53.284. Horn with Reed, c : (ut 3 ), Figure, afterDvorak, for experiments on the mechanical
effects of sound (Ztschr. f. d. phys. u. chem. U. 6, 1893, p. 186) 0. 4.
|
nd
53.285. Foghorn, model for placing on the wind chest (Bolte, Leitfaden d. Phys., 2 Edn.,
Fig. 109) 2. 5.
Cl. 1097,
5979, 1098. 1099, 1103, 1106, 3384.
53 294 B. 1:1.
53289. 1:11.
53 287. 1 : 10. 53 290. 1 : 20. 53291. 1:8. 53 294 A. 1:8.
52.286. Chemical Harmonica (Apparatus

for singing Flames), cf. Fig. 63,287 (W. D. Fig. 211 s. d.
[197]), comprising 4 tubes tuned to give a chord, each provided with stopcock and with
cap for covering the tubes so that each tone can be sounded singly 2.16.0
- -
53.287. idem, with covering flaps, Figure (W. D. Fig. 211 [197]) 3. 4.0
53.288.
- - i d e m, with only 2 tubes and covering caps 2. 0.0
- -
53.289. idem, with 1 tube only, Figure 1. 6.0
53.290. Chemical Harmonica, after Dr. Bresina, Figure

(Carls Bepertorium, 18, 1882,
p. 84, and Ztschr. zur Forderung des physik. Unterr., 1884, p. 36), with 2 flames, and
3 burners on stand for analysing the flames 3. 12.
53.291. Gas Harmonica, Figure

(W. D. Fig. 213 [199]), 2 high, for showing the existencem
of overtones along with the fundamental tone, with burner for house gas and 6 conical
open resonators of sheet zinc for the overtones g , d 1? b x , d 2 f 2 (sol,, re 3 , si 3 re 4 fa 4 )
, , , j
2.1(1.
53.292. Pyrophone (W. D. Fig. 212 [198]), with one glass tube with two burners .... 0. lli.
53.293. Tube for Rijke's experiment (W. D. p. 269 [242]), on stand, with wire net and burner 0. 15.
53.294. Electric Harmonica, after Pflaum, Figs. A and B, for showing that the tone of the
gas harmonica is not produced by successive explosions 2. 10.
The tone is produced by an incandescent platinum win- net. shown plainly in Fie- 53,294 B.
As the net is provided with suitable pieces for connecting up to the current it can easily be inter-
changed.
53,294 B. Platinum Wire Netting alone, Figure 0. 15.
(1. 1073, 1068,

1067, 1070, 1071, 1072.
No. 53301. Chemical Harmonicas (Singing Flames). Rotating Mirrors. 431
61 490. 1 : 10.
61 494. 1 : 8.
53 297. 1 = 6.
53 298. 1 : 5. 61491. 1:7. 53 301. 1 : 7.
52,031. Rotating Mirror Box (Cube Mirror), F i

g. 52,031, p. 284, with mirrors 12 cm length
8. d.
and width, for placing on the whirling table, for demonstrating the flame images . . 0. 13.
61,490. --idem, with toothed-wheel drive, Figure 2. 10.
- -
61,494. idem, with clockwork which can be regulated, Figure 5. 10.
The speed can be regulated within very wide limits.
53.297.
- -
idem, with Electric Motor Drive, Figure, for connecting up to 2 volts and
8 amperes Direct Current 2. 4.0
The electric motor can be used also for explaining Ritchie's Top.
53.298. Rotating Mirror Box, larger, Figure, on stand, with mirror of 20 cm height and
12 cm width, for hand or cord drive 1. 0.0
61,491.
- -
idem, driven by 110 volts Direct Current Motor, .Figure 6.10.0
If the motor is required for a different kind of current or voltage the price is altered accor-
dingly.
61,493.
- -
idem, with Alternating Current Synchronous Motor 7. 0.0
When ordering, the network voltage and frequency (number of pole-changes per second) should
be quoted.
52,032. Rotating Mirror, after Eeichert, with circular mirror set obliquely; for placing on
the whirling table (M. P. I, Fig. 648 [675]) 0. 16.
on stand, with clockwork, 2. 14.

53,301. --idem, Figure
Cl. 6029,380, 1075,
1074, 3368, 5550.
432 Acoustics. No. 53302-
53 302. 1 : 9. 53 304. 1 : 6. 53 306. 1 : 4.
53305. 1:5. 53 307. 1 : 4.
53,302. Stroboscopic Disc, after Topler, with clockwork drive, Figure, for analysing oscil- s. (1.
lating planes, on stand 3. 0.0
53,303. --idem, for hand drive 2. 0.
53.304. Stroboscopic Disc, with 110 volts Direct Current Electric Motor and Tachometer,
Figure, with series and shunt regulator for obtaining a wide degree of regulation 12. (. (i
If it is necessary to have a motor for a different voltage, kindly mention this when ordering.
53.305. Stroboscopic Disc, after Samojloff, Figure, for analysing sounds before a large
audience (M. P., 10 th Edn., Vol. I, Fig. 825), for use in conjunction with gas flame
Manometer No. 53,306, which should be used with acetylene for this experiment. Tin-
disc is placed on the whirling table (say, one with motor drive) and can also be used
as a Siren Disc 0. 12.
The acetylene is generated from calcium carbide with the aid of a Kipp Apparatus, a smal
gasometer being placed in front of the flame.
53.306. Gas Flame Manometer, after Weinhold, Figure, with rubber tubing and with
resonator (W. D. Fig. 242 [228]) 0. 10.
53.307.
-- idem, Figure, with rotating burner and driving device, can be used without
rotating mirrors (W. D. Fig. 243 [229]) 1. 16.
Cl. 3369, 3949, 861,

4943, 1079.
No. 53314. Stroboscopic Discs. Flame Manometers. Vibrating Bars. 433
53 309, 53 304. 1 : 8.
53 313. 1 : 6.
53 308. 1 : 8. 53 311. 1 : 9. 53314. 1:10.
s. d.
r>2,<>33. Gas Flame Manometer after Weinhold, as No. 53,307, suitable for the whirling table 1. 4.
.Vi..'iox. -- idem, Figure, with a rotating mirror; the two mounted on one stand . . 2. 0.
The manometer is constructed in accordance with Figure 53,306.
53.309. Mach's Organ Pipe for the stroboscopic demonstration of the vibrations of an air
column, cf. Figure (M. P. I, p. 669 [739]), without stroboscopic disc or electric motor ">
2. 8.
'
The pipe has a membrane at the position of the nodal point corresponding to the fundamental
tone; this membrane holds off the air current from the halves of the pipe, glazed on two sides, and situated
between this nodal point and the end. A platinum wire is stretched in the interior of the pipe and connected
with two external terminals, plainly visible in the Figure. If a small sponge, fixed on a glass rod and satu-
rated with sulphuric acid is passed over the wire and the wire heated by an electric current, the vibrations
can be observed from the vapours given off, by means of an intermittent light. Tne intermittent illu-
mination is obtained with the Stroboscopic Disc No. 53 304 or with Tuning Fork No. 53 310.
53.310. Stroboscopic Tuning Fork c = 128 vibrations (ut 2 = 256 v. s.), with electric drive, with
two diaphragms, on stand 4. 10.
Vibrating Bars, Velocity of Sound.

53.311. Apparatus for the Longitudinal Vibration of Bars, Figure (M. P. I, Fig. 761 [785]) 0. 8.0
53.312. 4 Wood Bars, which sound a chord when thrown on the ground 0. 3.0
53.313. 8 Wood Bars, giving the gamut, Figure 0. 6.
53.314. Apparatus for showing the Expansion and Contraction of a Longitudinally Vibrating
Bar, after Koenig (Tyndall, Schall [Sound], Fig. 82) j
1. 16.
CI. 1116, 1117a,

1080, 5997, 6017. 28
434 Acoustics. No. 5331.>-
53 315 a. 1 = 20.
53316. 1:10.
53 317. 1 : 8. 53320. 1:6.
53 327. 1 : 3.
53,315. Kundt's Dust Figure Apparatus, for showing the longitudinal vibrations of bars and *'
for determining the velocity of propagation of sound in air (W. D. Figs. 214 21(1
with 4 screw and 2 tubes 1. Hi. o
[200 202]), ciamps glass
53,315 a. --idem, Figure, the glass tube with mounts and unions without stopcock,
in order to enable them to be filled with gases 1. Hi. o
-- the tube with mounts and stopcocks, but without screw

5.'>, .'516. idem, Figure,
chimps 1. 14. o
53,317. Apparatus after Quincke, Figure, for determining the Velocity of Sound by ob-
serving stationary vibrations; on wood stand (cf. W.' u. E. Phys. Prakt. Fig. 87), with
millimetre graduation on one side and plain two-colour centimetre graduation on the
other side for measuring the length of the vibrating air column 1. s. o
It is advisable to provide for use with the apparatus Tuning Fork No. 53,318 or 53,319.
f>:i.:tix. 2 Suitable Tuning Forks for the above c., and c 3 (ut 4 and tit-,), on nxmancr box . Each 1.0.0
.">:). :)I9. idem, without resonance box, with handle Each 0.18.0
53,320. 8 Steel Bars on one resonance box, Figure, giving the scale, with violin bow,
for producing transverse vibrations of rods !.<>.(>
cl. S033, 1114,
3800, 1122, 1120.

No. 53 328. Dust Figures of Vibrating Air Colums. Tuning Forks. 435
53 326. 1 : 7. 53 328. 1 : 3.
d.
Tuning Forks and Accessories.
s.
We give special attention to the manufacture of tuning forks. The forks are, in
accordance with the suggestions of the Physikalisch-Technische Reichsanstalt. Char-
lottenburg, constructed of solid steel and calibrated against standard forks. The re-
sonance boxes are prepared of suitable wood and each box is tuned to the tone of the
fork.
If desired, and on payment of the necessary fees, we send the tuning forks and
boxes to the Physikalisch-Technische Eeichsanstalt for test and certificate. The fees
are for a standard fork a x = 435 vibrations, with box, 0. 3. 6 for a precision fork a 1 = 435
:
;
vibrations, with box, 0. 5. 6; transit charges extra. Only those forks having the tone
a t = 435 compound vibrations (Ia 3 = 870 v. s.) are certified as Precision Forks. The test
fees for forks having a different number of vibrations vary from those quoted above.
The number of vibrations are given in the following items as whole or compound
vibrations, and, in addition (mostly in brackets) as half or simple vibrations, with the
French abbreviation "v. s. == vibrations simples".
The physical pitchbased on the tone c t = 2 s = 256 compound vibrations
is
(ut s = 2 = 512 v. = 435 com-

9
s.); the base of the International Pitch being the tone a x
pound vibrations (^3-= 870 v. s.).
53.321. Tuning Fork a! = 435 compound vibrations (Ia = 870 v. 3 s.), with handle, without box 0. 4.0
53.322. Tuning Fork Cj = 256 compound vibrations (ut = 512 v. s.), 3 large pattern, with handle,
without resonance box . 1. 0.0
53.323.
-- idem, C2 = 512 compound = 1024 v. s.)
vibrations (ut 4 . 0. 18.
53.324.
-- idem, g2 =768 compound vibrations (so! = 1536 v. s.) 4 . 0. 18.
53.325.
-- idem, c3 = 1024 compound vibrations (ut = 2048 v. s.) 5
0. 18.
53.326. 12 Massive Forks with Stand, after Koenig, (cf. Koenig, Quelques ex-
th
Figure
periences d'acoustique, 1882, pp. 102 and 123), 3c c 4, d 4, e 4
f 4 , 11 harmonic of c 1? g 4
, , ,
th
13 harmonic of c 1? a 4 14 th
harmonic of c 1} b,, c 5 (ut s ut 8 re 6 mi g fa 6 11 th harmonic
, , , , , ,
of ut 3 so! 6 ; 13 th harmonic of ut 3
,
Ia 6 14 th harmonic of ut 3 si 6 ut 7 )
, ,
28.15.0 , ,
This set of tuning forks is used for showing that the vibrations of the first and second order become
tones if they occur with sufficient intensity. The stand is arranged in such manner that two forks can
be clamped for conveniently bowing or striking simultaneously.
53.327. 4 Tuning Forks, c,, c 5 , c 6 , c 7 , (ut 6 , ut 7 ,

ut g ,
ut 9 ), Figure, for demonstrating the
limit of audibility 2. 8.0
53.328. Tuning Fork, Figure (W, D. Fig. 258 [244]), of 2000 compound vibrations, for
proving Doppler's Theorem 1. 10.
Cl. 3375, 1125.
28*
53333 (53334). 1 : 5.
53329 (53330). 1 : G. 53335. 1 : 6. 53337. 1 : 6.
53338. 1 : 12.
d.
53.329. 13 Standard Tuning Forks in International Pitch, Figure,' in box, giving the
s.
chromatic scale c x to c 2 (ut 3 to ut 4 ), without resonance box, with box for containing 9. 0.
53.330. idem, physical pitch 9. 0.
53,331. 8 Standard Tuning Forks in international Pitch, same construction as above, giving
the diatonic scale Cj to c., (ut 3 to ut 4 ), without resonance box, with box for containing 6.0.
i d e
- - 6.0.
53.332. m, physical pitch
Resonance Boxes increase the price of the preceding Forks Nos. 53,329 53,332 by 0. 6. each.
53.333. Tuning Fork with electromagnetic drive, c-! = 64 compound vibrations (utj = 128 v. s.),
Figure, large massive pattern, with/ steel mirrors and counterpoise, on wood base 6. 0.0
53.334.
-- idem, c =128 compound vibrations (ut 2 = 256 v. s.) ">. o. o
53.335. 2 Small Tuning Forks, Figure, ax = 435 compound vibrations (Ia 3

= 870 v. s.),
two o
singly on resonance boxes, one with sliding weights 0. is.
53.336. 2 Small Tuning Forks C 2 = .512 compound vibrations (ut 4 = 1024 v. s.). on resonance
box, one with two sliding weights 0. IS. o
53.337. 4 Small Tuning Forks on one Resonance Box, F i

g u r e, for the tones c,. e,. g 2 and
c 3 (ut 4 , mi 4 ,
so! 4 , ut 5 )
0. 16.o
53.338. 8 Small Tuning Forks, F i

g u r e, each on a resonance box. giving the diatonic scale
from {., to c., (nt, to nt s )
3. 12.0
53.339. 14 Tuning Forks on Resonance Boxes, Figure, giving the first 14 overtones to
C-j^ 64 compound vibrations (ut, 128 v. s.) = 17.10.0
These tuning forks, like the overtone apparatus, serve for selecting easily the overtones when in-
vest igat ing sounds with resonators or with the Koenig Apparatus for splitting up sounds.
The individual forks are:
c go ci ei gi cz d e* gz bz
128 192 256 320 384 448 512 576 640 704 768 832 896 960 Compound vilnations
256 384 512 640 768 896 1024 1152 1280 1408 1536 1664 1792 1920 v. 8.
ut, so! 2 ut 3 mi 3 sol, ut 4
2nd 3rd 4th 5th 6'h' 7> 8'h gth IQth llih I2ili 13'1> 14tl> lf>'i> Partial Tone.
CI. 3954, 11X1,

1126, 53S9, 3862.
. 53373. Standard Tuning Forks. Tuning Forks with Resonators. 437
53339. 1 : 10.
53340 (53341). 1 : 7.
53,340. 2 Tuning Forks Cj =

256 compound vibrations (ut 3 512 v. s.), large pattern, on = s. d.
accurately adjusted resonance box, one with two sliding weights, for producing vibrations
Figure Together .2. 8.0
These tuning' forks have exactly the same pitch and are used for the experiment on co-vibration
by resonance. The experiments succeed at a few metres distance if the open sides of the resonance
boxes are turned towards each other and one fork is smartly struck repeatedly.
53.341. 2 Tuning Forks a! = 435 compound vibrations (Ia 3 = 870 v. s.), Figure, same
pattern as No. 53,340 Together 2. 4.0
53.342. 2 Tuning Forks c.,

"
= 512 compound vibrations (ut 4 = 1024 v. s.), same pattern as
No. 53,340 . . . . 2. 2.0
53.343. 4 Large Tuning Forks, each on a resonance box, giving the major chord c,=256
.compound vibrations, e 1? g x c 2 (ut 3 = 512 v. s., mi 3 so! 3 ut 4
, , , ) 4. 16.
53.344. -- idem, with the fundamental tones C = 128 compound vibrations, e g c t (ut 2 = 256 , ,
v. s., mi 2 so! 2 ut 3
, , ) 6. 0.0
53.345. 16 Tuning Forks on Resonance Boxes, cf. Figures 53,340 and 53,341, very massive
pattern, Physical Pitch 21. 5.0
List No. 53 345 a 53346 53 347 53 348 53349 53350 53 351 53 352
d 1= 288 g 1 =384 a 1 = 426 2 / 3 b t = 480 c 2 = 512 vibrations
re 3 = 576 mi 3 =640 so! 3 = 768 la 3 = 853V 3 si 3 = 960 ut 4 =1024 v. s.
1. 10. 1. 10. i.io.o 1. 10. 1. 10. 1.5.0 1. 5. 1. 5.
List No. 53 353 53 354 53 355 53356 53357 53358 53 359 53 360
d,=576 g 2 =768 b,= 960 c,= 1024 c 4 = 2048 vibrations
re 4 =1152 mi 4 =1280 fa 4 =1365V 3 so! 4 =1536 la 4 =1706 2 / 3 si 4 =1920 ut, = 2048 ut 6 = 4096 v. s.
1. 5. 1. 5. 1. 5. 1. 5. 1. 5. 1. 5. L 5. 1. 5.
Tnese forks are accurately constructed in accordance with Standard Forks and with carefully
tuned boxes.
53,361. 13 Tuning Forks on resonance boxes, cf. Figures

53,340 and 53,341, very massive
pattern, in International Tempered Pitch 18. 10.
List No. 53 361 a 53362 53363 53364 53365 53366
^ = 258. 652 c#! = 274. 033 d t = 290. 327 d*, = 307. 592 6i = 325. 881 f 1= 345. 259 vibrations
ut 3 = 517.305 ut* 3 =548.066 re 3 =580.655 re# 3 =615.183 mi 3 =651. 763 fa 3 = 690. 519 v. s.
1.10.0 1.10.0 1.10.0 i. 10.0 i.io.o 1.10.0
List No. 53 367 53 368 53 369 53 370 53 371 53 372 53 373
f*!=365.790 g, = 387.541 g#! = 410.585 a, = 435 ^, = 460.866 bj = 488.271 c 2 =517. 305 vibr.
=
fa# 3 = 731.580 sol a = 775.082 sol* .,= 821.171 Ia3 = 870 la# 3 921.733 si 3 =976.542 ut 4 1034. 610 v. s.
=
1. 10. 1. 10. 1. 10. 1. 5. 1. 5. 1. 5. 1. 5.
Cl. 1133. 6025.

53381. 1:6. 53382. 1:6. 53383. 1:4.
53398. 1: 12. 53404. 1 : 4.
53413. 1 : 5. 53414. l : 7.
Standard Forks on Resonance Boxes. 8. (1.
List No. 53 374 53 375 53 376 53377 53378 53379

a, = 435 <= 512 f,= 1024 c4 = 2048 compound vibrations
lit, = 256 ut 3 = 512 la,
= 870 utj = 1024 ut 6 = 2048 ut 6 = 4096 v. s.
2. 0. 1. 16. 1. 10. 1. 10. 1. 10. 1. 10.
The Standard Forks are very specially and carefully constructed and finely polished
to prevent oxidation.
53.380. Containing Box
one of the tuning forks Nos. 53,374
for 53,379 1.
53.381. Tuning Fork c t

= 256 compound vibrations (ut s = 512 v. s.), on Resonance Box.
Figure, with detachable electromagnetic drive 2. 8. o
53.382. -- idem, & l = 435 compound vibrations, Figure (Ia 3 =870 v. s.) 2. 6.
'583.
.").;.. 2 Large Tuning Forks, Figure, with sliding weights, on hollow wood base, tor
producing the chromatic scale Cj c 2 (ut 3 ut 4 ), International Pitch 3. 0. o
14 Tuning Forks with sliding weights, cf. Figure 53,383, for producing the tones and semi-
tones from c tog 3 (utj sol-), in International Pitch, for testing church bells for their
1
overtones.
53387
ut., mij
2. 4.0
53394
er-g+i
ni 4 sol*
2.0.0
Xo. 53417. Standard Tuning Forks on Resonance Boxes. Standard Tuning Forks with Sliding Weights. 439
53415. 1 : 8. 53417. 1 : 6.
'JUS.
.">:>.. Large Tuning Fork for 16 24 vibrations, c- 3 g- 3 (ut- 2 sol-.,), F i
gu r e, for deter-
mining the limit of audibility of the deepest tones
- -
.~>3,3!Mi. idem, smaller
Tuning Forks with sliding weight for Bezold's continuous progression of tones, for testing
the sensitivity of the ear to sound, Figure 53,404.
List No. 53400
<
'ompound vibrations
V. s.
Tone Compass j
Pitch, unloadedj
53418. 1 : 5.
53420. 1 : 5. 53421. 1 : 5. 53425. 2 : 3.
53426. 1 : 8.
53429. 1 : 12.
53.418. Recording Tuning Fork C = 128 compound vibrations (at.,

= 256 v. s.), with style, i S. (I.
Figure 0.18.0
l>Yr<>rding Tuning Forks with electric drive, chronographically, see p. 455.
53.419. Shoe with Writing Point for Fork No. 53,382 (M. T. Fig. 36) 0. 3.
53.420. Ivory Hammer for striking Tuning Forks, Figure 0. !).
53.421. Hammer with rubber strikers, Figure 0. !>. o
53.422. Metal Drum Stick with leather discs 0. (J.
53.423. Cello Bow 0. 4.0

53.424. Bass Fiddle Bow, can be used for experiments with heavy tuning forks 0. ;. u
53.425. Tuning Fork Exciter Clamp after Db'lger, F g u r e, to enable the tuning forks always
i
to be vibrated to the same intensity, with screw adjustement, rule, and in box . . . 1. 15.0
Vibrating Strings, Plates, Bells, etc.

53.426. Monochord, Figure, useful string-length 1.2 m, with 3 strings, 2 with pegs and
one with weight for stretching, with centimetre scale, movable bridge and damper clamp.
of polished mahogany (only two strings are shown in illustration), without weights . 1. 11'.
53.427.
-- idem, of alder wood, same .-i/.e as above, simpler pattern 1. 4.0
cl. 1124,3378,4519, 51)27,
1149, 1150.
No. r>3436. Accessories for Tuning Forks. Monochords. 441
53431. 1:15.
53434. 1 : 9.
53436. 1 : 10.
s. d.
53,428. Monochord. smaller and simpler, with two strings stretched from pegs 0. 15.
53,429. Monochord with 4 Strings, two stretched by pegs and two by weights ,
F i
g u r e,
on iron legs 3. 0.0
53.430. 4 Iron Weights with Hooks, 20, 10, 5 and 1 kg, for stretching the centre strings (W. D. p. 279 [253]) 1. 2. i)
If the above Monochords are desired to be divided in millimetres the price is increased by 0. 15.
each.
53.431. Monochord for School Use, after Hahn, Figure (Halm, Schiileriibungen Fig. 155),
with spring balance and striking hammer 0. 12.
53.432. Tuning Fork for above, with groove in the base of the fork handle, c,
= 256 compound vibrations
(ut 3= 512 v. s.) 0. 10.
.Vi.433. idem, d l = 288 compound vibrations (re 3 = 576 v. s.) . 0. lo. o
53,434. Polychord after Antolik, Figure, with 12 strings, iron frame and stretching device 20. 0.0
Two metal rails are arranged laterally on the iron frame of the Polychord, and clamps can be
slipped along the rails. Each clamp has a compression cheek with the aid of which the lengths vibrating
ran be shortened to any extent. Tne length is read off on two metal rules. Trie apparatus can be. used
advantageously for forming musical scales. See: Tonleitersystem von Prof. Dr. Karl Antolik, Pressburg,
and Ztschr. f. d. phys. u. chem. U. 4, 1890/91, p. 177).
53,435. 10 Riders of Aluminium Wire, after Antolik, for the Monochord 0. 1.
53,43(>. Monochord after Zahlbruckner, Figure, with two strings, with tension indicators.
Can be used also as a Tensile Apparatus to 50 kg pull, for metal wires, etc. With 4 bridges |17.
0.
The two metal

strings are connected at one end with spring dynamometers for 50kg tension and at the
other end with stretching devices actuated by worm gearing. The tensive forces exerted on the dynamo-
meters can be read off on a scale. In order to render the measurements accurate the bridges are lifted
by wedges only when the strings are stretched. A plain centimetre scale is fitted on the side of the re-
sonance box for showing the position of the bridges.
(.']. 5053, 1151, 1152.

442 Acoustics. No. :>3437-
53 441 A. 1:6.
53438. 1:4.
^
53 441 B. 1:6. 53443 and 53 441 C. 1: 9.
53 445. 1 : 6. 53452. 1:3.
53. 437. Apparatus for showing the position of the Nodes on the opposite sides of a longitudinally
-
vibrating Horse Hair 0. 6. o
53.438. Apparatus for Chladni's Figures, Figure, consisting of one iron clamp, one
rectangular and one round glass slab 28 cm diameter, in box with sand and case of
resin (W. D. Fig. 220 [206]) 1. 2.0
53,43!).
- -
idem, with two Metal Discs of 28 cm diameter or length of side respectively 1. 8.
53.440. Black Board for No. 53,438, for showing the dust figures in air plates (W. D.
p. 285 [258])
0. 1.0
53.441. Chladni's Sound Figure Disc, of metal, Figures A and B, see also Figures
53,443 and 43,441 C, with heavy iron base, round, rectangular or triangular, 30 cm dia-
meter or length of side . Each 1. i>. o
53,153. Mirror on Stand, Figure 51,153, p. 206 (M. T. p. !>), for rendering the sound figures
more visible 1. S. o
.V..143. Tube with Stand for Chladni's Discs, for Ilopkins's Experiment on Resonance,
Figure 53,443, without sound figure disc (). IS. (I
53.444. Sound Figure Disc with Resonance Tube for Ilopkins's Kxpcriment. fitted together
on massive base 1. Hi. o
53.445. 2 Metal Discs of same shape, Figure, one with foot, the other with handle . . 1. 10. (I
These plates are of the same pilch. If the one with the handle is bowed and held above the other,
the latter shows the same figure by resonance.
5.".. I Hi. Brass Plate with steel mil attached for concentric nodal lines (M. 1'. I, Fig. 736 [76<>|) o. 1'J. (I
53, 117. Square Paper Membrane, 30 cm side, on support with wind tube 1.16.0
53. 14'.!. Round Paper Membrane of 3d cm diameter, for above o. o. o
Cl. 1155, 1154. 1156,59111.

5998, 5010.
No. 53459. Sound Figures. Resonance Phenomena. 443
53 453. 1 : 6. 53454. 1:9. 53 456. 1 : 7.
53455. 1:1-2. 53458. 1:10. 53459. 1:8.
s. d.
5.5,450. Triangular Paper Membrane for preceding, length of side 30 cm 0. 6.
53, 151. 3 Small Paper Membranes, round, rectangular and triangular, for preceding ... 0.10.0
53,452. Powder Spray, Figure, for powdering the colour figure discs 0. 5.
With the aid of the above the discs can be coated quite evenly with lycopodium.
5.3,453. Apparatus for showing the Vibration of Liquid Films, Figure, with three metal
plates of round, rectangular, and triangular aperture 1. 2.
53.454. Glass Bell on wood base, Figure, for showing the nodes 0. 4.
The bell is filled with water and when sounded shows the vibration-nodes by a rippling of the liquid.
53.455. Glass Bell with 4 Pendulums in contact with its periphery, Figure, on stand . 1. 4.
Resonance Phenomena. Organs of Human Speech and Hearing.

* 53,456. 2 Tuning Forks, one with small pendulum,
Figure, on resonance box, c t =256
(ut 3 = 512 v. s.), for showing the resonance of this tuning fork when the other, of the
same pitch, is struck (Ztschr. f. d. phys. u. chem. U. 7, 1894, p. 272) !
2. 12.
53.457. Cylindrical Glass, 1 m lh

high, for showing resonance (M. P. 9 Edn. I, Fig. 663) . . 0. 8.
The cylindrical glass is filled with water to such height that the air column above corresponds to a
tuning fork set into vibration and held over a glass; use can be made, say, of a, (ut ). :)
53.458. Resonance Apparatus after Savart, Figure (M. P. I, Fig. 638 [665]) 2. 4.
The glass bell is made to sound by stroking with a violin bow and the resonator tube (in two parts)
is varied until resonance takes place.
53.459. Resonance Apparatus after Drenteln, Figure, consisting of a tall glass cylinder,
forming the source of sound, a lamp glass, closed on one side, as resonator, a brass tube
for blowing the cylinder and a small lamp (Ztschr. f. d. phys. u. chem. U. 7, 1894, p. 273) 0. 6.
By blowing aside cork dust or lycopodium. spread on the inner edge of the glass resonator, or by
blowing out the lamp, resonance is shown, when the cylindrical glass is blown with the blowing tube, after
its tone is timed to the tone of the resonator by filling with water.
* Can be used with the Pro- Cl. 6031, 5792, 4974,

Resonators for Sound Analysis, etc.
see p. 449 451. 6000, 1046, 5859.
jection A]>i>aratu>.
444 Acoustics. \i. ..1461
53464. 1 : 4.
53462. 1 : 3.
53469. 1 = 9.
53463. 1 : 4. 53471. 1 : 7.
8. d.
Membrane Pipe serving as model of the Larynx: see No. 53,281 (cf. W. D. Fig. 225 [211]) 0. 5.11
Model of Larynx, after Bock, simple 0. (i. d

53.461.
53.462.
- i d e m, with hyoid bone, Figure (I. IS.
53.463.
-
idem, with view of the pharyngeal space and nasal cavity, Figure . . . 0.15.
53.464. Model of Ear, Figure, can be taken entirely apart, very carefully constructed.
five times actual size 0.12. O
- ten times actual size 0. 15.

53,465. idem,
53,468. 4 Steel Bars, c,, c6 ,
ce ,
c 7 (ut g , ut v.
ut g ,
ut 9 ), lor testing the upper limit of audibility,
in case (M. P. I, Fig. 679 [705]) 1. 4.0
53,461). 5 Steel Bars, c 4 ,

c 5 , c 6 , c,, c g (ut g ,ut 7 , ut 8 ,
ut 9 ,
ut, ),
F g i u r e, for the same purpose,
with suspension and steel hammer I. Ul.
53,470. 10 Steel Cylinders, c s e s g s c 6 e ? g 6 c 7 c : g 7 c 8 (ut 7 mi 7 sol T ut H mi s sol,, ul,,.

, , , , , , . , . . , . . ,
mi 9 sol,,, lit,,,), for testing the upper limit of audibility, with steel hammer, cf. Fig. .VS.
,
I , 1 3. 10.
53.47.1. 22 Steel Cylinders, from c- to <

(lit, u1, n ), for the same purpose. Figure, with
steel hammer . 7. II d
4 Tuning Forks for showing the upper limit of audibility, see Fig. 53,327, p. !""> L'. S.
Cl. 1192, 1194. 1118.

Large Tuning Forks lor shouini: the lower limit of audibility:
II 113. 6001.
sec \os. .vs. :i!is .- ;,:!. mo, |>. 439.
No. .'.3480. Models of Larynx and Ear. Limit of Audibility. 445
53473. 1 : 8. 53480. 1 : C.
53478. 1 : 2.
s. d.
53.473. Bezold's Continuous Progression of Sounds Apparatus, Figure, for investigating
the tone-sensitivity of the ear, consisting of 10 tuning forks with sliding weights
Nos. 53,401 to 53,410, for the compass c- 3 a 2 (nt- 2 Ia 4 ), 1 drum stick No. 53 411 for
the forks, each one pipe Nos. 53,476 and 53,477 for compass e> a 4 (mi 4 Ia 6 ) and a
Galton's Whistle No. 53,479 of compass a 4 (Ia 6 ) onwards to beyond the limit of audibility;
I lie whole in box, the Galton Whistle being contained in a separate case 22. 10.
Further particulars as to the individual tuning forks are given on p. 439 and for the pipes, below.
53.474. Additional Series of unloaded Tuning Forks for the tones g 3 ,

c4 , g4 ,
c 5 (so! 5 , ut 6 , sol e ,
ut 7 ), with drum stick and case 4. 15.0
r)3,475. Further complementary series, comprising a loaded tuning fork No. 53,400 for 12 18
compound vibrations, and unloaded forks a ,
a 1? and n., (Ia 2 , Ia 3 ,
Ia 4 ) ....... 4. 0.0
53,476. Pipe for the Higher Tones of Bezold's Continuous Tone Progression, large, for the
tones between e 2 and a 3 (mi 4 and Ia 5 ) . . 2. 5.0
").">. 177. -- idem, small, for the tones between a 3 and a 4 (Ia 5 and Ia 6 ) 1.15.0
V>. 178. Galton's Whistle, F i g u r e, for producing the highest tones and 'for demonstrating
the higher limit of audibility, simple pattern 0. 16.
i d e
in, new improved pattern, for the tones from
- - to
."3. 179. Figure, ;ij (Ia 6 ) beyond
2. 15.
tlie limit of audibility (3480 30,000 compound vibrations), in case
53,480. Dust Figure Apparatus for Galton's Whistle, F i

g u r e, consisting of screw clamp
and 6 different glass tubes 0. 10.
C1.4702, 3372, 4698,

11-21.
446 Acoustics. NIL 53481
53 500. 1 : 6.
53 485. 1 : 4. 53486. 1:7. 53492. 1:4.
Tonometric Apparatus and Resonators. s. (1.
Tone Variators after Prof. Stern, Figures 53,485, 53,486, cf. also Fig. 53,506, the tone
being varied steadily and uniformly (Ztschr. f. Psychologic und Physiologic der Sinnes-
organe, Vol. 30, 1902,
List No. 53,481
Size 1
No. 53502. Tonometric Apparatus. 447
53 497. 1 : 10.
53 501. 1 : 6.
53.496. Tonometer No. 2 of 65 tones: Fundamental tone c 128 to c, =256 compound vi- = s. d.
brations (ut, 256 v. s. to ut 3 = =

512 v. s.) each succeeding tone about two compound
vibrations higher than the preceding 15. 0.0
53.497. Tonometer No. 3 of 65 tones, Figure: Fundamental Tone c l 256 to c 2 512 com- = =
=
pound vibrations (ut 3 512 v. s. to ut 4 1024 v. s.), each succeeding tone about four=
compound vibrations higher than the preceding 15. 0.
53.498. Tonometer No. 4 of 129 tones: Fundamental Tone c t 256 to c 2 512 compound vi- = =
brations (ut 3 512 v. s. to ut 4 = =
1024 v. s.), each succeeding tone about two compound
vibrations higher . . 22. 10.
53.499. Tonometer of 129 tones: Fundamental Tone c 3 512 to c 3 1024 compound vibrations = =
(ut 4 =
1024 v. s. to ut s =
2048 v. s.), each succeeding tone about four vibrations higher 22. 10.
53.500. Overtone Apparatus, (W. D. Fig. 224 [210]), consisting of 9 reed pipes
Figure
with wind chest and wind regulator, for the 1 st to 9 th overtone of c-, 64 compound vi- =
brations (ut! 128 v. s.) = 4. 4.
Resonators for above: see pp. 450 and 451.
53.501. - - i d e rn, Figure, the first 32 overtones of c-! = 64 compound vibrations (utj = 128
v. s.) to c 4 = 2048 (ut 6 = 4096 v. s.) with wind chest and air regulation.
9. 0.0
If desired we also supply overtone apparatus for other fundamental tones.
53.502. Interval Apparatus after Htumpf, with 20 tones in the compass of an octave and funda-
mental tone of 400 compound vibrations (800 v. s.) 7. 10.
In addition to the fundamental tone (1:1; 400 compound vibrations) the apparatus has: chro-
matic second (25 -24; 410.66), minor second (16 15; 426.66), major second (9 8; 450), Pythagorean
: : :
minor third (32 27; 474.1), tempered minor third (363 305; 476), pure minor third (6 5; 480), pure
: : :
major third (5 4; 500), tempered major third (635 504; 504), Pythagorean major third (81 64; 506.25)
: : :
pure fourth (3 4; 533.33) augmented fourth (45 32; 562.5), tempered fifth (2655 1772; 599.3), perfect
: : :
fifth (3 2; 600), perfect minor sixth (8

:
5; 640), perfect major sixth (5 3; 666.66), natural seventh
: :
tone ,,i" (7 4; 700), minor seventh (9 5; 720), major seventh (15 8; 750), and octave (2:1; 800).
: : :
Cl. llll, 1110.

448 Acoustics. NIL
53506 (53230, 53231, 53503, 53482, Tone Variator 275 550, 53485, 53487, 53282). 1 : 12.
r>.'5,r>o:5.Interval Apparatus and Tonometer after Prof. Ebbin;haiis. cf. r>:5,ro< Figure s. d.
(the box-shaped apparatus in the forejjround of the table), with 22 interval tones within
an octave, having the fundamental tone of 400 compound vibrations (800 v. s.) with
28 tones for tone-measuring at corresponding intervals between .'50 and 1600 compound
vibrations (60 and 3200 v. s.) and with 16 tones for tone-measuring between the
fundamental tone of 400 compound vibrations (800 v. s.) and its major second . . IS. 0.0
The following reed pipes are fitted for demonstrating the intervals: fundamental tone (1:1: 4(M
augmented fourth (%' 1: 502.5), tempered fifth cjli.Vi

,
: 177-2: r,!t!l.:!). perfect fifth (3
:
'2: (ioo). perfect
4:700). seventh
:
3:666.66), natural seventh (7

'
iiiinor sixth (8 :5: (i4n). perfect ui:ijor sixth (5 : : 1 i

.. : ,
: :
711.1), minor seventh (!( 5: 72u). major seventh (15 : 8; 750) and the octave _'
:
I: son). i :
The reed pipes mentioned above can lie used in part for tonometric purposes: for this special purpose
the ii]iparatns has reeds with :i(i. 4o. .VI. (in. To. so. !tn. Inn. |-2(i. L>r>. l.Vi. no. -2011. -2 in. I'.Vi. :inu. :\2(>.
I 1
3liO. 4(1(1. 48(1, 50(1, (>(Kl. sun. linn. '.Kill, lllllll. 1-20(1. Kidll compound vibrations.
Cl. 4139.
NIL 3511. Interval Apparatus, Triad Apparatus, Resonators. 449
53507. 1:7. 53508. 1:6.
A! so with 404, 408, 412, 416, 420, 424, 428, 432, 436, 438, 440, 442, 444, 446, 448, 449 com- s. d.
pound vibrations.
As blower for this apparatus the most suitable to use is the blowing table for constant pressure,
No. 53,229, or the Whipple Double Blower, No. 53,230, with wind chest and Table No. 53,231.
53.504. Triad Apparatus, after Prof. Stumpf, Berlin, for demonstrating the major and minor
triad at four different positions 9. 0.
With this apparatus it is possible to demonstrate the major triad (4:5: 6) and the minor triad
(10 12 15) iii four different pitches, and to determine by this means the pitch which forms the most
: :
perfect harmony. The chords are based on a frequency of 100. Number of vibrations: (a) 100, 120, 125,
l.">0; (b) 200, 240, 250, 300; (c) 400, 480,500, 600; (d) 800, 960, 1000, 1200; as complements for the
difference-tones and overtones: (e) 80, 160, 640, 720; (f) 700, 900, 1100.
53.505. Triad Apparatus of 24 Massive Tuning Forks on Resonance Boxes 30. 0.0
Fequencies: 100, 120, 125, 150; 200, 240, 250, 300; 400, 480, 500, 600'; 800, 960, 1000, 1200; 1600,
1920, 2000, 2400; 3200, 3840, 4000, 4800.
53.506. Acoustic Apparatus after Prof. Ebbinghaus, Figure, comprising Whipple Double
Blower No. 53,230, a Wind Chest with Table No. 53,231, and Interval Apparatus and
Tonometer after Ebbinghaus No. 53,503, one each Tone Variator after Stern for
.150 300 compound vibrations No. 53,482, for 275 550 compound vibrations (by
special arrangement), for 400 800 compound vibrations No. 53,485, for 600 1200 vi-
brations No. 53,487, and a Eeed Pipe with sound horn and deep tone c_ x 64 compound =
vibrations (ut x 128 v. s.) No. 53,282 = 74. 6.
As to the individual apparatus, kindly refer to the text under the List Nos. given.
53.507. 3 Resonators, Figure, of different shape (spherical, conical, and prismatic), of

different material (glass, pasteboard, wood) and of different pitch (g 1( e 1 c, sol,, mi 3) ;
ut.,) 0. 12.
53,508. Resonance Tube on Base, can be closed at one end, Figure 1. 8.0
With which replapes the labial pipe, it is explained that when the pipe is open
this resonance tube,
the overtones are the even quadruples of the fundamental tone, and when the pipe is closed, that the
overtones are the odd quadruples of the fundamental tone, and that the fundamental tone of the open
pipe is the octave of the fundamental tone given by the covered pipe of equal length. The open pipe
vibrates therefore in a half wave, the covered pipe in a quarter wave.
Tne lube is tuned in such manner that when closed on one side it gives the fundamental tone c t
(ut 3 ) clearly and resonantly. For this purpose the tuning fork Cj (ut s ) is struck smartly and held in front
of the free aperture. Even with tuning fork g 2 (so! 4 ) (the overtone with thrice the number of vibrations)
the tube resonates clearly, while it does not resonate with fork c 2 (ut 4 ), the octave of the fundamental
tone. Tais, however, becomes the case when the resonator tube is opened so that it corresponds to the
open labial pipe, which gives a tone twice as high as the covered pipe of the same length.
.->:>. .in!). Tuning Fork for above, Ci = 256 compound vibrations (ut 3 = 512 v. s.), with handle o. o
.").'{..") 10. id em, c2 = 512 compound vibrations (ut,

= 1024 v. s.), with handle 18.
.">:'.. ."ill. idem, g, = 768 compound vibrations (sol,

= 1536 v. s.), with handle 18
Cl. 4693, 1105.

29
53518. 1 : 6.
53.282. Reed Pipe, Figure 53,282, p. 429, with sound horn, c_ 1 = 64 compound vibrations * (1
(ut 1 = 128 v. s.), deep tone 1. <i. o
53.512. 9 Resonators for above, spherical, open, of shoot zinc, accurately adjusted, from L)nci t<>
10 th overtone of c.j (ut,) l.lo.
53.513.
- - i d e in, closed 1. 12.
53.514. 11 Cylindrical Resonators, of pasteboard, Figure, covered, for the 2 nd to 12 th

pai t ial
tone of c_! (ut x ) 1. 0.
st th nd
53.515. 15. Resonators for Pipe No. 53,282, conical, covered, from 1 to 15 overtone (2 to
16 th partial tone) of c_ t (utj 2. 5. o
53.516. 19 Resonators for Pipe No. 53,282, after Ilolmholtz, Figure, spherical, for the
first 19 overtones of c_! =
64 compound vibrations (utj =
128 \ s.), guaranteed accurate.
in tone and well constructed, on board, with wood handles 7. 10. o

The resonators are constructed of stout sheet brass and accurately adjusted.
In view of its bulky nature the fundamental tone is not included in the sei.
53.283. Reed Pipe with Hound Horn, of. Figure 53,282, p. -129, e = 128 compound vibrations
(ut 2 = 256 v. s.), with deep tone 1. (I.
(I. 5311, 5445,

1107,5033.
No. 53 523. Resonators. Frequency Curves. 451
53519. 1 : 8.
53521. 1 : 8. 53 522. 1 : 8.
53.517. 10 Resonators for preceding, after Helmholtz, Figure, spherical, in perfect tone, s- d.
for fundamental tone c =
128 compound vibrations (ut.2 256 v. s.) and its first nine =
overtones, on board, with wood pegs 5. 0.
In this set of resonators the fundamental tone c (ut 2 ) (first partial tone) is not included.
53.518. 14 Universal Resonators after Konig, Figure, consisting of two cylinders sliding
one in the other, with graduation, to be employed for all tones from g- l (solj) to e s (mi 5 ),
the tones of the chromatic scale being indicated singly 18. 0.
The compassof the individual resonators is as follows: (1) g_, to b-, (so^tosi,); (2) b_, to d* (sij to
re* 2 ; (3) d* to f*(re* 2 to fa* 2 ); (4) M= to a (fa* 2 to Ia 2 ); (5) a to c t (Ia 2 to ut 3 ); (6) c l to e t (ut 3 to mi 3 );
(7) eô a t (mi 3 to Ia 3 ); (8) aisj to d 2 (la* 3 to re,); (9) c, to e. (ut 4 to mi 4 ); (10) d 2 to f 2 (re 4 tofa 4 ): (11) e 2 i
to g*jj (mi 4 to sol* 4 ); (12) L, to a 2 (fa 4 to Ia 4 ); (13) g* 2 to c 3 (sol* 4 to ut s ); (14) c 3 to e 3 (ut s to mi 5 ). !
Demonstration of Lissajous Curves.

* 53,519. Apparatus for Demonstrating the Lissajous Curves by Crank Motion, Figure, for
projection as well as for drawing the curves on blackened glass plates (Fr. phys. Techn. 1, 2,
Fig. 3393 [I, 494]; W. D. Fig. 234, 220), with wheels for obtaining the ratios 20, 24, 30,
36, 40, 48, 50, 59 and 60 60 : 4. 4.
53.520. Kaleidophone after Wheatstone, simple, one steel bar with spherical mirror on metal
base (M. P. I, Fig. 704, 728) 0. 10.
53.521. Kaleidophone (Wheatstone's), Figure, with 6 rods having spherical metal mirrors,
on iron stand with levelling screw, for producing 6 phases (M. P. I., Fig. 706 [730]) 2. 10.
When
struck, the differently shaped rods give directly the corresponding Lissajous curves The
figures shine well and large on the ceiling under incident light.
53.522. Universal Kaleidophone, after Melde, Figure, with adjustable metal strips and
spherical metal mirror (M. P. I., Fig. 707 [731]), with screw clamp 1. 10.
52,124. Double Pendulum after Airy, Fig. 52,124 A and B, pp. 296 and 297 1. 0.
53.523. Pendulum Apparatus for obtaining the vibration curves of Wheatstone and Lissajous,
Figure (Eisenlohr, Lehrb. d. Phys., Fig. 181) 1.16.0
Cl. 5842,
* Can be used with the Projection Apparatus.
6032, 6008, 4014. 29*
53 524. 1 : 5. 53 528. 1 : 7.
* 53,524. Apparatus Demonstrating the Lissajous Figures by means of vibrating springs

for
with mirrors, Figure,
with electromagnetic drive in order to maintain the vibrations
to any length of time 4. 16.
- -
53,525. idem, without electromagnetic drive . 2. 0.
* 53,526.
- - after Pfaundler, with two vibrating steel springs
idem, and crossed gaps (M. P. I,
Fig. 702 [726]), one spring with variable time of vibration i 1. 4.
53.528. Electric Glow Lamp with straight Filament, Figure, on stand, with shielding
chimney and small hole, for use with preceding apparatuses or with the following Tuning-
Fork Apparatuses 0. 18.
The working voltage should be quoted when ordering. If this is not given we supply the lamp for
110 volts.
53.529. Tuning Fork Apparatus for subjectively and objectively demonstrating the Lissajous
Curves (W. I). Fig. 236 [222]), with two massive tuning forks < 128 compound vi- =
brations (ut., =
256 v. s.), one fork with sliding weights, with glass mirrors, on polished
wood stand 5. 0.
53.530. The same Apparatus, Figure, both forks with electromagnetic drive 8. 0.
53.531. The same Apparatus, with thoroughly well ground steel mirrors, without electro-
magnetic drive (i. 0.
32. - idem, with steel mirrors and with electromagnetic drive for both forks . . 0. 0.0
Tuning Forks for above for demonstrating the curves (Lissajous) of varions phase-differences (M. P. 1. l-'ig. 71!i).
53,533. Phase Differences, 1
53,534.
53,535.
63,536
63,638.
53,53!).
No. 53542. Frequency Curves. Tuning Fork Apparatus. 453
53530. 1:6. 53 542 A. 1:10.
53541. 1:6. 53542B. 1 : 10.
large vibrations. Tney are provided with steel mirrors and adjusted at 20 C. Both forks nave electro- s. d.
magnetic drive.
By means of two sliding weights one fork can be put out of tune for producing tremors.
By aid of the Projection Lantern and a Lens the curves can be very beautifully projected on to
a screen.
* 53,542.
- - i d e
in, with arrangement, in addition, to enable compound parallel vibrations
to be objectively demonstrated, with two diaphragms on one fork and a string support
on the other, one Stand, Fig. A, and a Lath on which a catgut cord is to be stretched,
Figure B 15. 0.
The five following very beautiful experiments can be carried out with the apparatus:
(1) Subjective observation of the Lissajous Curves (M. P. I, Fig. 688 [712]);
(2) Objective demonstration of the Lissajous Curves on the sc.?en by means of the Projection Lantern;
(3) Objective demonstration of the sine curves produced by compound parallel vibrations (M. P. I, Fig 808
[832]);
(4) Observation of the Vibrations of a Fork by Mach's Stroboscopic Method (M. P. I, p. 668 [738]);
(5) Observation of the vibrations of string by the same method (M. P. I, p. 670 [740]).
Complete description is appended to the apparatus.
- - see
Stroboscopic Disc driven by Electric Motor, for observing the condition of vibration
under No. 53,304, p. 432 12. 0.
Cl. 1137. 1139,

1138, 1110.
454 Acoustics. No. 53 543
53 560. 1 : 5.
53 543. 1 : 7. 53 544 B.
53 544 A. 1:8.
53,543. Tuning Fork Apparatus as No. 53,592, F i

g u r e, new Model, with fork-holder capable 8. d.
of reciprocal rotation 0.0
* 53,544. Large Tuning Fork Apparatus, K g u s A and B, for subjective and objective
i i <
Demonstration of the Lissajous Curves, and for the graphical demonstration of the
vibrations of two Timing Porks (M. P. I, Figs. 80li and 807 [830 and 831]), with two
forks, two sliding weights, one cramp with glass plate, one style, two counterpoises and
a rase for the tuning forks 18. 0.0
The apparatus consists of two very massive tall stands to which thr tuning forks ;uv fixed. One
of the forks is movable on a sliding carriage. Both forks arc provided \\ith electromagnetic drive and
carry steel mirrors. The forks are very massively constructed and are tuned to L'S compound vi-
< 1
brations (ut 2 = 256 v. s). Tlie vibrations of the fork can lie placed parallel and perpendicular (o each
other. A sooted f^lass plate and style can lie clumped on the forks. The curves obtained can lie projected
direct. For obtaining different curves the forks listed on the next pai;c are employed.
Cl. 1108, 3377, 1142.
* Can be used with the Projection Apparatus. 1141.
No. 53 560. Tuning Fork Apparatus. Recording Tuning Forks. 455
53 553/58. 1 : 0. 53559. 1:10.
Tuning Forks, Fi g u r e, for the preceding apparatuses for demonstrating the Lissajous Curves with various phase dif-
ferences (M. P. Fig. 695 [719]), very large and massive pattern.
I,
(a) With Steel Mirror (b) With Glass Mirror

53,545. Phase Difference 1 Compd. Vib., ut 3 =512v. s.
53564. 1:11.
53 568. 1 : 7. 53 567. 1 = 7.
53.561. 2 Tuning Forks with Recording Device on Wood Stand, c 128 compound vibrations = s. d.
(ut, =
256 v. s.), one fork fixed, the other movable and provided with sliders for gra-
phically demonstrating the vibrations of two tuning forks (M. P. I, Figs. 806 and 807 i
[830 and 831]) 6. 0.
By means of the sliders one fork can be altered in relation to the other by 4 5. :
53.562. Forks for above with different number of vibrations Each 1. 10.
53.563. 2 Tuning Forks with Recording Device, large pattern, on Iron Stand, cf .
Figure 53,564 i
with two forks, c =128 compound vibrations (ut 2 256 v. s.) = 10. 0. o
53.564.
- -
idem, with electromagnetic drive for both forks, Figure 13. 0.
53,56o. Forks for above, of different frequency Each 2. (i. <>
53.567. Vibrograph after Duhamel, Figure, for determining graphically the frequencies
of tuning forks (Pisko, Die neueren Apparate der Akustik, Fig. 11) 3. 0.
53.568. Recording Drum with Clockwork, F i g u r e, can be used vertically and horizontally ;
speed variable from 40

1
/2 mm
per second by friction; the drum can be moved along
the axis and easily removed 6. 0.
53.569. idem, wit-h electric contact >. 1<>. i>
53.570. Phonautograph after Konig, with tuning fork stand, Figure (M. P. I, Fig. 668
[694]). Price without forks 11. 0.
The tuning
forks to use are the chronographic forks with electromagnetic drive. \<>s. ~>3,553 53. .v.s
Tne tuniiii;
lurk curves can also be taken on sensitied paper and fixed permanently in accordance
with Nimt'iilir's process (Drudes \mialen der I'liysik. IV.. I'.ioii. Vol. 111. p. tiJTl.
.
53.571. Phonautographic Cylinder alone, on iron stand, sec Figure 53,570; without base-
plate, tuning fork stand or tuning forks n.
!t. (i
53,57'-'. Membrane Phonautograph after Scott and Konig (with comparison tuning forks).
(Pisko, neuere Apparate Fig. 23) -'">.
A tmiinu lork of c, --'."Hi

riini|miuid vibrations iul : ,
~>\- with style U placed in Iiout ol'
V. %.)
the movable cylinder. liehind the fork is a parabolic Inline], do-ed with a membrane, lie latter also
t
Cl. 5515,
5357. 3379.
No. 53575. Recording Tuning Forks, Phonautographs, Vibration Microscopes. 457
53570. 1:14. 53 575 A. 1:8.
53 574. 1 : 6. 53 575 B. 1
having a style. The vibrations of a tone acting on the membrane are recorded along with the curve s. d.
of the fork having a known frequency, thus rendering it possible to determine the vibrations of a tone.
Fortuning forks with other frequencies: see Nos. 53,553 53,558.
53,573. Phonautograph after Scott, without tuning forks (M. P. I, Fig. 804 [828]) .... 21. 0.0
53,57-4. Vibration Microscope after von Helmholtz, Figure (Lissajous's Improved Com-
parator), with a very massive tuning fork c = 128 compound vibrations (ut 2 = 256 v. s.),
with electromagnetic drive for permanently maintaining the vibrations and with two
sliders for varying the pitch (M. P. I, Fig. 701 [725]) 7. 10.0
53,575. --idem, Figures A and B, with two stands and five massive tuning forks,
each provided with objective, steel mirror and slider 33. 0.
All tuning forks are arranged for working with electromagnets; the two electromagnets and the
forks can be adjusted; the eyepiece also is adjustable vertically and horizontally by micrometer
Cl. 3380, 1170,

1169, 1171.
458 Acoustics. No. :>:if>76
53577 (53578). 1:8. 53583. 1:11.
53,576. Vibration Microscope, after Weinhold, Figure (W. D. Fig. 239 [225]); can be s. d.
used at same time as a Topler Vibroscope .......... ........ 6. 0.0
* 53,577. 2 Massive Tuning Forks on Stand for the tone c =

128 compound vibrations ut.2 256 =
v. s.); the pitch of one can be varied by filling with mercury; both with steel mirror and
large resonator, Figure
(Pogg. Ann. d. Phys. u. Chemie, Vol. 157, 1876, p. 621), for
producing any phase differences and impact tones, also for Lissajous's Figures . . . L'7. 10.0
One of the two tuning forks hat; both limbs bored out and is provided at the yoke with a screw
press by means of which mercury can be forced into the limb. In this manner the frequency can bo altered
by 8 compound vibrations ( = 16 v. s.). The resonator of each fork is provided with a i;ap which can he
increased or decreased by means of a screw so as to suit its tone to that of the fork. The forks have electro
magnetic drive.
.">:;, 57S. Variable Tuning Fork c c = 128 compound vibrations alone (iiU -"' v -
*) .-
u ' (l -
on stand and with variable resonator ........ . . : 19. 5. (i
."i. 2 Tuning Forks with Resonators, same pattern as No. 53.577. but smaller, for
'..:> T'.i. i In-
tone Cj = 256 compound vibrations (ut 3 = 5l2 v. s.) 21. 0.0
.>:. :so. Variable Tuning Fork GI = 25(> compound vibrations (ut 3 = 512 v. s.), alone, on stand
\\ilh variable resonator 15. 10.
C'l. 1172. 5814,

* Can be used with the Projection Apparatus
1173, 3381.
No. 53 585. Vibration Microscopes. Sound Analysis and Synthesis. 459
53 585. 1 = 7.
5.3,581. 2 Tuning Forks with Resonators, same pattern as No. 53,577, for tone g a = 192 com- I
s. d.
pound vibrations (so! 2 = 384 v. s.) 25. 0.0

53,582. Variable Tuning Fork g 192 = compound vibrations (so! 2 = 384 v. s.) alone, on stand
and with variable resonator 18. 0.0
53.583. Sound Analysis Apparatus Figure, for fundamental tone c = 128

after Konig,
compound vibrations (ut., = 256 v. s.),
with 8 spherical Resonators for tones c CD g x c 2 , , ,
e 2> 82* 7, ,
ut 4 mi 4 so! 4 7, ut 6 ), and 8 gas-flame manometers, on stand
c 3 (ut 2 ut 3 so! 3
, , , , ,
with rotating mirror (M. P. I, Fig. 822 [847]) 15. 0.0
53,283. Reed Pipe with Sound Horn, Figure 53,282, p. 429, fitting above apparatus, for
tone c = 128 compound vibrations (ut,=256 v. s.), very full tone 1. 6.0
53.584. Sound Analysis Apparatus after Konig, larger, Figure, with arbitrary fundamental
tone and 14 Universal Resonators (see No. 53,518), for the 46 tones g-j 96 to e 3 1280 = =
= =
compound vibrations (so^ 192 to mi 5 2560 v. s.) lowest arbitrary fundamental tones ;
g_ 2 (sol_,) (Pogg. Ann. 146, p. 189) 30. 0.0

The apparatus is built into a massive frame and is provided with hand-driven rotating mirror the
mechanism of which is so arranged as to run absolutely silently. The 14 Universal Resonators can be
regulated in such manner that the highest tone of the larger always reaches the deepest tone of the smaller.
They can therefore be set for any fundamental tone. The deepest arbitrary fundamental tone is
g = 48 compound vibrations (sol! = 96 v. s.). The resonators are connected with manometric flames.
The latter are protected from air currents by mica strips, which entirely obviate any breaking or spurting
of the flame.
For suitable Reed Pipe see No. 53,282, p. 429.
53,339. 14 Tuning Forks on Resonance Boxes, Figure 53,339 on p. 437, giving the first
14 overtones of c_, =
64 compound vibrations (ut] = 128 v. s.), for comparing with
the resonators 17.10.0
53.585. Vowel Apparatus after von Helmholtz, with 8 harmonic tones, Figure, for de-
monstrating sounds of different timbre, and more especially the vowels of the human
voice (H. Helmholtz, Die Lehre von den Tonempfindungen, 4 th Edn., Brunswick, 1877,
pp. 194 et seq.) 60. 0.
The apparatus consists of 8 tuning forks forming the first harmonic tones of the fundamental tone
c (ut s and which are fixed between electromagnets. The electromagnets are traversed by a current rendered
)
intermittent by an interrupting tuning fork making 128 compound vibrations (256 v. s.). Each tuning
fork possesses a resonator which can be closed by a flap; the resonators can be opened more or less by
means of a keyboard. When the resonators are closed the tuning forks are scarcely audible, but they
sound immediately with the desired intensity when the corresponding keys on the keyboard are depressed.
The interrupter circuit can be regulated by a resistance appended to the apparatus. The point of inter-
ruption itself is provided with massive platinum contact. Each electromagnet can be cut out singly; by
using corresponding additional resistance it is possible to obviate any variations in the current conditions.
Cl. 1176.
53 586. 1 : 8. 53 587 B. 1:4.
53588. 1:10. 53589. 1 : 10.
53.586. Vowel Apparatus after von Helinholtz, as No. 53,585, but larger, Figure, with s '
10 harmonic tones TO. o. <>
53.587. Telephone after Ph. Keis, consisting of transmitter (Fig. 53,587 A) and receiver
(Fig. 53,587 B) 4.0.0
'
Between the transmitter and receiver called by Reis himself tin- reproducing apparatus a
battery is so inserted that both are traversed in series by the current. The strength of the current
should be such that the armature of the small magnet on the transmitter is attracted: to 4 Bunscn
.'i
cells or accumulators are sufficient for the purpose according to the distance lietwecn both stations.
Further Telephones see Section "Electricity".
53.588. Large Edison Phonograph for Wax Cylinders, F g 11 r e. with recorder and reproducer
i
for speeches, musical selections, etc., with clockwork in base, with one recording and
one reproducing membrane, and one sound horn 6. '_'.
Given inwith the phonograph are blank record anil record with nm-ieal Delect ion. Tin- a;>p;ratus
1 1
can be set into action without any previous knowledge or special skill, both for recording and reproducing
-peeches. songs, etc. Tne reproclnel ion is so loud that it is possible to hear cuc'i uord plainly, even in sonirs.
in a large room 10 x 10 m. Kadi cylinder can be used many hundreds of time-.
Cl. 1177. 3fi71, 1178,
117(1, I.', U.
No. 53 598. Vowel Apparatus. Phonographs, etc. Impact Tones. Interference of Sound. 461
53 592. 1 : 7.
53594. 1: 11.
53595. 1:11. 53 597. 1 : 5.
with d.
53.589. Small Edison Phonograph, similar in construction to preceding, Figure, s.
open clockwork, with one recording and one reproducing membrane, one sound horn,
with oak containing case 3. 2.
53.590. Wax Cylinder, suitable for above phonographs, blank 0. 1.
- - d e m, with music, speech or song 0. 1.

53.591. i
53.592. Gramophone with Clockwork, Figui e, for reproducing instrumental music, songs
and speeches 6. 0.
53.593. Ebonite Disc, suitable for above Gramophone, with instrumental music, song or speech,
as desired 0. 3.
Telegraphone after Paulson: see section on "Electricity".

53, 5! i4. Tone Impact Apparatus after Konig, Figure 20.- 0.
The apparatus has an iron frame upon which a wheel covered with cloth can move. Four clamps
can be moved on two movable spring arms, these clamps taking glass tubes. These bars are clamped on
the cloth covered wheel; and as soon as the wheel, whose lower part is immersed in water, is set into motion,
impact tones of high intensity occur (Wied. Ann. 12, p. 351, 1881).
53.595. Sound Interference Tube, Figure (W. D. Figs. 253, 254 [239, 240]), of metal, with
adjustable closing bows 1. 10.
The apparatus should be used with the exciter rod and the clamps of the Kundt Dust Figure
Apparatus No. 53,315. If this apparatus is not available, No. 53,596 should be ordered.
53.596. - - idem, with Dust Figure Exciter Tube, for the tone a, = 435 compound vi-
brations (Ia 3 870 v. s.)= 2. 5.0
- -
53.597. idem, after Quincke, Figure, of glass with rubber tubing (M. P. I, Fig. 789 j
[813]) 0. 5.0
53.598. idem, after Norrcnberg (M. P. I, Fig. 788 [812]), of wood, for building into
a wall 0. 18.
C'l. 1181, 5176,

1182, 554S.
53599. 1:8. 53 600. 1 : 5. 53 601. 1 : 10.
53 602. 53 603, 53 339, 53 517, 53 298. 1:12.
53.599. Sound Interference Apparatus after Drenteln, Figure, consisting of two tuned s. d.
glass resonators with three attachments, two india-rubber tubes each 35 cm long, and
one ditto 70 cm long (Ztschr. d. phys. u. chem. U., 7, p. 273)
. 0. 6.
The glass cylinder with blowing tube and small lamp No. 53,459 should be used in conjunction
with this apparatus.
53.600. Sound Interference Apparatus with Tuning Fork and Receiver Membrane, F g u i r e,
with two indiarubber tubes and drum-stick (Fr. phys. Techn. IT, 2, Fig. 3088) . . . 0. 18.
53.601. Apparatus for Comparing Two Tones of Pipes by Konig's Manometric Flame Method,
Figure (Pogg. Ann. 146, l.STii, p. 166) 10. 0.0
The apparatus consists of a wind chest with two valves. pipes (e,. c,. c,. g,, c.,
.">
[ut.,. nt :)
. mi 3 , so! 3 ,
ut 4 ]), 1 stand for 2 manometer flames and a rotating mirror on stand No. (il.4!in.
53.602. Fork-shaped Tube, F i g u re (M. P. I, Fig. 787 [811]), for demonstrating the inter-
ference of sound waves by the aid of Chladni's Sound Figure Disc.
'i ice without Sound Figure Disc
I li. 15.0
53,603. Sound Interference Apparatus after Konig, Figure, with (luce manometer flames
and one small mirror (ef. I'ogg. Ann. 1872, Vol. 146, p. 195) II. 0.
The apparatus consists of a stand uilh tulie. the latter being divided at the ends into two :inn-.
one of which can lie lengthened at will, and a, stand with three <;a~ flame manometers. If the innermost
gas flame i.; replaced by a small mirror the upper edge of which readies to half the height of the gas flame,
rl. ;.860, 5741. 6029 1 .
1184, 1185.
Xn. :>3609. Sound Interference. Tuning Fork Clock. Phonic Wheel. Mechanical Effects. 463
53 605. 1 : 6.
53 604. 1 : 7. 53608. 1:5.
and the eye is directed in such manner that the directly visible upper part of the one flame appears to s. d.
form the direct continuation of the reflected lower part of the other flame, the image is not disturbed when
the tubes of the apparatus are of the same length. If, however, the tube lengths are not equal, phase dif-
ferences occur between the two flames and the two -visible halves will appear to be laterally displaced
relatively to each other. Tuning fork, resonator and rotating mirror on base are not included in the price.
51,730. Spark Chronograph after v. Beetz, Figure 51,730, p. 249 7. 10.
53,604. Tuning Fork Clock after Maudet, Figure, with tuning fork making 64 compound
vibrations (128 v. s.) (Koenig, Quelques experiences d'acoustique, p. 173) 48. 0.
For very accurate determinations of the frequencies of standard forks by comparing the tuning
fork clock with a standard clock at different temperatures. The fork is set into vibration and replaces
the pendulum of the clock in that it regulates the motion of the clock by means of the escapement; the
clock can be also used as a Vibration Microscope.
53.605. Phonic Wheel after La Cour, Figure, for accurately determining the frequencies
of tuning forks and
for similar purposes 7. 10.
A toothed armature with 20 teeth moves in front of the poles of a horse-shoe shaped multipolar
electromagnet. The electromagnet is periodically excited by means of a tuning fork with electromagnetic
drive, which opens and closes the circuit. The axis is provided with a counting mechanism which permits
of the number of rotations being read off. Exhaustive information as to the manipulation and method
of employing the Phonic Wheel may be found in the original work: ,,Das phonische Ead von Paul La
Cour", published by Quandt and Handel, Leipsig, 1880.
The phonic wheel can be driven with a fork making up to 128 compound vibrations (256 v. s.).
53.606. Tuning fork Jor above, c = 128 compound vibrations (ut 2 = 256 v. s.), with electromagnetic drive for
maintaining the vibrations 4. 10.
Mechanical Effects of Sound.

53.607. Acoustic Apparatus after Dvorak (Ztschr. f. d. phys. u. chem. U., 6, p. 186), being
a selection from the individual apparatus, Nos. 53,60853,610 and 53,613 53,623,
listed below 5.17.0
The smaller apparatus are placed in a containing box.
The Figure Nos. in brackets relate to Dvorak's article (loc. cit.).
The experiments are very interesting.
53.608. Device for Acoustic Attraction and Repulsion, Figure (Fig. 1)

0. 3.0
53,609. Device for Acoustic Attraction and Repulsion for Gases which are lighter than Air
(Fig. 2) 0. 3.6
Cl. 5206,
5760, 1195.
53 610. 1 : 5.
53 612. 1 : 3. 53 615 an.l 53 617. I : '>. 53 619. 1 :
53.610. Acoustic Reaction Wheel, Figure (Fig. 5), tuned to the tone g, (so! 3 ), with glass s. d.
resonators, without glass vessel 0. (i. o
- - tuned to g t with spherical Aluminium Resonators

53.611. idem, (so! 3 ), 1. 0.0
53.612.
- - id e m, tuned to c 2 (ut 4 ), Figure, consisting of 4 aluminium Resonators joined
by a light aluminium cross-piece, on stand 1. 16. o
A tuning fork c, (ut,) with resonance box is necessary for working this apparatus.
53.613. Resonator with 4 Apertures (Fig. 4) u. 7. n

'
53.614. Glass Cylinder for the Acoustic Reaction Wheel (Fig. 5) 0. l.o
53.615. Stand with Steel Pivot for setting up the rotating bodies, Figure, adjustable 0. 4.0
53.616. Reed Pipe (Fig. 7) 1. 4. o

The horn without reed, No. 53,622, is inserted into the aperture of the same.
53.617. Small Paper Wheel (Wind Wheel), Figure (Fig. 8) 0. 2. 6
53.618. Glass Resonator, arranged to float (Fig. 3) 0. (i. o
53.619. Resonator for Tone g, (so! 3 ) with stand, Figure (Fig. 8) 0. 10.
53.620. Massive Tuning Fork g, (so! 3 ), with resonance box 1. -'. o
53,62.1. Sound Radiometer, consisting of four perforated sheets of paper fixed on a wood cross
(Ztschr. f. Instrumentenkunde, 3, 1883, p. 130) . 0.6.0
53,284. Horn, with Reed, g, (so! 8 ) (Fig. 6), see Figure 53,284, p. 429 0. -I. o
53.622. Horn without R*ed, g, (sol,) (p. 186 and Fig. 6) 0. 3.
on stand and with board o

53.623. Phonometer (of. Fig. 9), tilting 0. 12.
Cl. 1196.11U7. lliis. HOT.

Xo. 53629. Optics. 465
53 624 A. 53 624 B. 53 624 C.
/.: /X,
53626. 1:11. 53 629. 1 : 2.
Optics.
Propagation and Intensity of Light.

53.624. 1 Photometer Screen, Fig. A; 1 white screen with centimetre net, 1 screen with
s. d.
square centre-piece cut away, Fig. B ; 1 screen with 5 diaphragms for inserting, Fig. C;
2 dull white screens, of metal, with eyes for hanging and with 3 stands (M. T., p. 167
and Fig. 121) . 3. 0.0
51,028. Projection Screen with Stand for raising and lowering (M. T., Fig. 122) 0.16.0
53.625. Sal-ammoniac Vapour Apparatus (M. T., Fig. 123) 0. 3.0
53.626. Apparatus for Demonstrating the Rectilinear Propagation of Light, (W. Figure
D., Fig. 260 [246]) 0. 16.
The apparatus consists of a paper screen on metal stand, a large pasteboard diaphragm screen,
and a stand (see above figure) with three small paraffin lamps, arranged triangularly.
Measurement of the Velocity of Light after Fizeau and Foucault. Cf. Auxiliary Apparatus
to Rosenberg's Universal Optical Apparatus No. 53,866.
53.627. Apparatus after Grimsehl for Determining the Ratio of the Velocity of Light in Air
and Water (Phys. Ztschr. 7, 1906, p. 472, Fig. 1) 2. 5.
53.628.
- -
idem, for air and glass (Phys. Ztschr. 7, 1906, p. 473, Fig. 2) 1.16.0
53.629. Light -Angle -Measurer after Weber, Figure, for determining the luminosity
of places (Ztschr. fiir Instrumentenkunde 4, 1884, p. 343), can be folded up .... 4. 10.
This apparatus is used for measuring the angle from which the open sky is visible from the place
being investigated, and the angle of elevation at which the light falls upon the place.
C'l. 5103, 5104, 5102,
1200, 1204. 30
466 Propagation and Intensity of Light. No. 53 630
53 630. 1 : 3. 53631. 1:5.
53 633. 1 : 6. 53 637. 1 = 4. 53 639. 1 : 8.
53.630. Aperture Goniometer after Gotschlich, F i g u r e, for the same purpose, giving simul- 8 - d -
taneously the upper and central angle of incidence 2.4.0

The apparatus consists of a stand with graduated arc in the centre of which are two rotary
mirrors. The axes of rotation of the mirrors are indicated by engraved lines Two pointers are con-
nected with the mirrors and show the predominating inclination on the graduated arc. By means of
a spectacle-shaped sighting arrangement with fine ilirends a sight is taken of the mirror, which is
adjusted in such manner that the engraved axis of the one mirror falls in a line with the upper edge
of the window, while the axis of the other is made to coincide with the ridge of the opposite house.
The portion of the arc situated between the two pointers is equal to half tin- angle of aperture.
53.631. Photometer after \Vingen, Figure, for directly determining the luminosity of
workplaces in metric candles (range 10 50 metric candles) 2. 0.0
The area to be investigated is compared by observing with a red glass with a rotary surface
inside the apparatus, this latter surface being illuminated by a small benzene lamp, the height of flame
of which can be regulated. By rotating the comparison area relatively to this lamp, an external pointer
is actuated, and permits the luminous value of the area investigated to be read off on a scale direct
in metric candles.
53.632. Carrying Case for above, lock-up, with handle 0. 10.
Cl. 1205,5930,
59'.>9, 372, 1209.
No. 53 644. Luminosity. Photometers. 467
53 640. 1 : 2,5.
53 643. 1 : 12. 53 644. 1 : 15.
d
53,633. Photometer after Wingen, for determining intrinsic brilliancy, Figure; benzene
s -
lamp with optical flame measuring apparatus after Kriiss, for a range of 1 500 metric
candles . 4. 0.
This photometer is constructed on the same principle as the preceding apparatus, hut admits
of more accurate and extensive measurements.
- - with Hefner 10.10.0

53.634. idem, Lamp
53.635. 3 Demonstration Photometers after Lambert (Eumford), Eitchie and Bunsen, modified
by Kolbe (Ztschr. f. d. phys. u. chcm. U. 1, 1887 88, p. 193), without optical bench,
together 3. 5.0
53.636. Photometer Screen after Topler, on stand 0. 12.
53.637. Photometer after Bunsen, (cf. W. u. E. phys. Prakt., p. 231, Fig. 130),
Figure
with house, on stand 1. 10.
The photometer corresponds to that used in practice. The grease-spot screen is enclosed, along
with two tilted mirrors, in a sheet iron box open at both sides; to the side of this is the adjustable
candle holder.
- - with tape measure, for determining the distance of the source of light
53.638. idem,
to be measured from the photometer 1.16.0
53.639. Photometer after Bunsen, Figure, with divided circle and rotary photometer
house, to enable measurements to be made upon light sources from various angles . 3. 0.0
53.640. Standard Photometer Bench, Figure, for testing gas flames, with two graduations,
which give the candle power direct, with Photometer Head after Bunsen, cf. No. 53,637 10. 10.
The bench is constructed of iron and is 2,50 m long; the one graduation enables readings to
be taken when the distance between Hefner lamp and photometer screen is invariable, i. e. when the
lamp is on the carriage; the other graduation corresponds to the case of botli luminous sources per-
manently set up on the ends of the bench.
- - with Lumner-Brodhun Photometer Head, No. 53,653, for setting at
53,641. idem, cf.
Equality . . 15. 10.
53.642. --idem, for setting at Equality and Contrast; for the most accurate measurements 17. 0.0
53.643. Photometer after Eumford (W. D., Fig. 261 [247]), Figure, with 2 rules . . . 0. 10.
53.644. Photometer after Bouguer, Figure, foi measuring luminous intensity by com-
paring two adjacent illuminated surfaces, with 2 rules 1. 4.
Regarding Apparatus for Testing Illuminating Gas for its sulphuretted -hydrogen content (also self-recording), its ammonia
and carbonmonoxide and for testing the specific gravity, etc., kindly ask for quotations. Cl. 6040, 5999, 6034. 30*
468 Propagation and Intensity of Light. No. 53 645
53646. 1 : 10. 53 647. 1 : 5. 53 649. 1 : 4.
53 650. 1 : 2. 53 651. 1 : 2.
s. d.
53.645. Photometer after Foucault, Figure (Chwolson II, Fig. 350), with observing tube 2. 8.0
In this photometer the screen is formed by a glass plate covered with dry milk, this arrange-
ment being very sensitive.
53.646. Photometer after Ritchie, Figure (Fr. phys. Techn. II, 2, Fig. 3379 [II, Fig. 693]) 1. 4.0
In this apparatus observations are taken on two white surfaces inclined towards each other.
53.647. Demonstration Photometer after Eitchie-Weinhold, arranged for objective demon-

stration, Figure
(W. D., Fig. 263 [249]) |
1. 2.
53.648. Diffusion Photometer after Joly, Figure (W. u. E. phys. Prakt,, Fig. 131) . . 2. 0.
The photometer consists of a screen, carrying in front of an aperture two small paraffin blocks
with the plane surfaces pressed on each other. The paraffin blocks appear equally bright when
illuminated to the same intensity and the partition joint disappears entirely. Absorption glasses run
be inserted at M.
53.649. Photometer after Wheatstone, Figure (Gan.-Eein., Figs. 484 [485]) 1. 16.
The apparatus consists of a spherical mirror moved in a curve by means of a set of wheels.
The luminous sources to be compared are reflected in the small mirror as two luminous points, which
shine as two curviform image* of different brilliancy when the mirror is rotated and when the illu-
mination is unequal.
I 'I. 1212,1213, 1210, I'.Ml, 1214.
5931, 5932.
No. 53 655. Photometers. 469
53 652. 1 : 2. 53 653. 2 : 5.
53 654. 1 : 9. 53 655. 1 : 14.
s. d.
53.650. Flicker Photometer Head, Figure, with sector disc 5. 0.0

The Flicker Photometer is based on the fact that two illuminated surfaces coming alternately
before the eye only show a flickering if differently illuminated.
53.651.
-- idem, with rotating flicker body, Figure, with inclining device and degree
graduation, for measurements from different directions 6. 15.
53,652. Lummer-Brodhun Photometer Head, with stand, Figure (Ztschr. fiir Instru-
mentenkunde 9, 1899, p. 41) 5. 0.0
53.653.
- -
idem, for viewing perpendicular to the luminous sources, Figure . . . . 6. 5.0
53.654. Photometer after Leonh. Weber, Figure, with complete accessories, in polished
wood box 20. 0.0
The photometerbased on the comparison of two illuminated ground discs, one of which is
is
arranged so as to be movable in a horizontal tube; the tube perpendicular to the latter tube, and
containing the other ground disc, contains a Lummer-Brodhun Cube, is arranged to rotate, and can
be conveniently focussed on the luminous source to be investigated. A graduated arc permits the
angle described to be read off. As comparison light source use is made of a small benzine lamp
having a flame-height of 20 mm; the correct height can be read off on a scale pasted on plate glass,
and can be adjusted by a rack.
53.655. Photometer after Eousseau, Figure, for photometering arc lamps in various
directions (Elektrot. Ztschr. 8, 1887, p. 356) 9. 0.0
Cl. 1216, 3385,
5442, 1219.
470 Propagation and Intensity of Light. No. 5365(5
53657. 1:16.
53.656. Glow Lamp Photometer, Figure, with comparison apparatus on Joly's principle, d.
which permits of very sharp focussing 7. 10.

The photometer is 1 m long and is arranged in such manner that the candle powers of glow-
lamps can be compared without a dark room, the ratio of intensity being read direct on a scale. The
range extends in" both directions from 1 to 10 times. The exchange of the glow lamps under test
proceeds very rapidly. Calibrated glow lamps are used as standards. The apparatus is fitted with
Edison Glow lamps sockets, but can be arranged for any other holder.
Comparison Glow Lamps see Nos. 53,660 53,662.
53.657. Large Photometer Bench, 3 m long, Figure, with millimetre graduation, 3 Stands
on Carriage, fitted with Lummer-Brodhun Photometer Head, Hefner Lamp, Candle
Holder, Lamp Table, Photometry Stand for glow lamps and a Mirror for determining the
luminous intensity of arc lamps at various angles of emission 34. 0.
The photometer bench should be placed on a table of suitable height so that the graduations
can be conveniently read off: see also No. 53,659.
53.658. Angle Mirror for photometering glow lamps in accordance with the Rules of the Verband Deutscher
Elektrotechniker 1. Hi. n
53.659. Portable Iron Table for the large Photometer Bench No. 53,657, with Rotary Switch-
board and Regulating Resistance, Figure. Price exclusive of measuring instruments,
regulating resistance, and photometer bench 17. 0.
The switchboard carries 1 voltmeter, 1 ammeter, and 1 wattmeter, also the requisite plug-
contacts. The regulating resistance can also be manipulated from the farthest end of the bench. The
prices of the measuring instruments and regulating resistance vary according to local current and
voltage conditions, as to which we should require precise details.
This table used in conjunction with photometer Bench No. 53,657 is intended for testing the
luminous intensity of glow lamps in factories and electricity works.
53 ;660. Glow Lamp for use as Comparison Lamp, of appmx. 5, 8, 10, 16, 25, and 32 Candles
(Hefner), specially for photometering glow lamps with Apparatus No. 53,656, for an
0. 5.
accurately prescribed voltage
These comparison glow lamps are supplied calibrated at an accurately prescibed voltage and for
a luminous intensity in one direction, approximately as ordered, e. g. for 16.6 Standard Candles (Hefner)
at 110 volts.
The lamps are supplied for the usual voltage-: when ordering the Voltage available and desired
candle-power should be stated; in every case only one of these two values can be strictly adhered to.
Zinc-Bulb Photometer for Determining the ultra-viole C'l. 6039, 1217.

Radiation of the Sun quoted for on application.
NIL r.3668. Photometers. Hefner Lamp. 471
53 659, 53 657. 1 : 23.
53 668. 1 : 2.
It is advisable always to obtain 2 comparison lamps of the same sort, keeping one as a chief standard, i
s. a.
and comparing it from time to time with the standard in use.
- - calibrated for an accurately prescribed Candle-power in one direction,

53.661. idem,
for working on the photometer bench 0. 5.0
accurate measurements are desired with these glow lamps -- especially in the photometry
If
of arc light the voltage obtained for the candle-power in question when calibrated must be adhered to.
53.662. idem, calibrated for an accurately prescribed mean horizontal Candle-power,

- -
for glow lamp measurements, in accordance with the rules of the Verband Deutscher
Elektrotechniker, on Photometer Bench No. 53,657 and with the aid of the Angle Mirror
No. 53,658 0. 7.0
53.663. Hefner Lamp, admitted for test by the Physikalisch-Technische Eeichsanstalt (Ztschr.
fur Instrumentenkunde, 13, p. 257), with optical flame measuring apparatus (after
Kriiss), check gauge and scissors 2. 2.0
53.664.
- -
idem, verified 2. 6.0
53.665.
- - with flame meter after v. Hefner- Alteneck, check gauge and scissors 2. 2.0
53.666.
- - i d e m, verified I
2. 6.
53.667.
- - with 2 flame measuring apparatus, check gauge and scissors, cf. Fig. 53,668 . 2. 10.
53.668.
- - i d e m, verified, Figure 2. 16.
Cl. 4500, 1221.

472 Propagation and Intensity of Light. No. 5369 -
53 676 A, 53 678 (53 683). 1 : 20.
L L
53 676 B. 1 : 20.
8. <1.
53,669. Spare Wick Tube for the Hefner Lamp, verified

*
0. 4.0
53.671. 6 Standard Candles 0. 3.0
53.672. Optical Bench after Weinhold, cf. Figure 53,675 (W. D., Edn., Fig. 237), 2 nd
constructed in one part of wood, 4 m
long, with scale on both sides and with 3 saddle-
stands; in addition to being used as a photometer bench it can be employed for a large
number of optical experiments. Price, without photometer screen, paraffin burner or
comparison lamp 3. 0.
For accessories: see Nos. 53,678 53,695.
53.673. --idem, ofwood and constructed in two parts 3.12.
53.674.
- - i d e m, 3 m long, of wood and in one part, cf. Figure 53,675, without acces-
sories . 2. 10.
53,675.
- -
idem, constructed in two parts, 3 m long, Figure, without accessories
No. 53,684 illustrated 3. 2.0
53.676. Optical Bench after Weinhold, entirely of metal, graduation 4 long, and constructed m
in two parts, Figures A
and B (W. D., Fig. 262 [248]), without the comparison
lamps set up on the saddle-stands and without photometer 4. 16.0
Fig. A shows only one-half of the bench.
53.677.
- -
idem, graduation 3 m long, entirely of metal and constructed in two parts,
cf. Figure 53,676 B 4. 10.
53.678. Photometrical Accessories with electric light, for the Weinhold Optical Benches, with Bunson Photo-
meter, see Fig. 53,076 A and 53,678 a and b ;
2. 16. i>
(a) Carrier with 4 tubular glow lamps and movable diaphragmic screen ( 1.4.0); (b) 1 Com-
parison Glow Lamp together with connecting leads and double plug-contact, arranged for inserting
in the saddle-stands of the optical bench ( 0.10.0); (c) 1 Bunsen Photometi-i No. 53,683 ( 1.2.0). .
53.679. idem, with Topler Photometer Screen No. 53,680 instead of the Bunsen Photometer. SIT
Fig. 53,675 _>. II. O
53.680. Photometer Screen (after Topler) alone, for inserting in the saddle-stands of ihr ITIU-II. MT l-'ig. 53,675 (I. 6.
53.681. Photometrical Accessories forGas Light, for Weinhold Photometer and Optical Hem-hes, see Fig. 53,681b
and c, with Topler Photometer Screen (see Fig. 53,675), without stands 1. 6.
(a) Incandescent Gas Burner 0. 5. 0); (b) Carrier with 4 small gas jets and movable Diapin aizm
(
(Fig. 53,681 b) ( 0.12.0); (C) Small Comparison Lamp for gas (Fig. 53,681 c) 0.3.0); (d) Topler (
Photometer Screen (see Fig. 53,675) 0. 6. 0). (
53.682. idem,with Bunsen Photometer (see Fig. 53,676 A) instead of the Topler Photometer Screen . -'. L'. II
53.683. Bunsen Photometer Head, alone, for inserting in the saddle-stands, of the brnrh (see Fig. 53.67UA) 1. 2.
Cl. 3674, 1223.

Xn. 53698. Optical Benches. 473
53 678 a, 53 678 b, 53686. 1: 8.
53 689, 53 684a (53688).

1: 7. 53 684 b. 1:4. 53690. 1:5. 53681b, 53686. 1: 7. 53 681 c, 53686. 1:7.
53.684. Photometric Accessories with paraffin light for the Weinhold Photometer and Optical Benches, of. s. d.
Fig. 53,675, with Topler Photometer Screen, without stands 1. 7.
(a) Paraffin Lamp, ( 0. 6. 0); (b) Carrier with 4 small Paraffin Lamps and movable
Figure
diaphragm, ( Figure
0.12.0); (c) Carrier with small Paraffin Comparison Lamp ( 0.3.0);
(d) Topler Photometer Screen, see Fig. 53,675 ( 0. 6. 0).
53.685. idem, with Bunsen Photometer No. 53,683 instead of Topler Photometer Screen 2. 3.
53.686. Stands for preceding Accessories in order to enable them to be used independently on the lecture table
in conjunction with any photometer (see pp. 467, 468) or to enable the accessories to be more conve-
niently stored, see Figures Each 0. 5.
Three or four at least should be ordered.
53.687. Glow Lamp for 110 volts, with socket and haft, for concave mirror and lens experiments (W. D.,
p. 356 [329]) 0. 5.
53.688. Perforated Cylinder for concave mirror and lens experiments (W. D., Fig. 272 [258]), fitting Argand
Gas Burner No. 53,681 a 0. 1. 6
53.689. idem, Burner No. 53,684 a, Figure, without burner
for the Paraffin 0. 1. 6
53.690. Diaphragmic Cylinder, Figure, with 5 diaphragms of different sizes, for Gas Lamps 0. 12.
The cylinder is 48 mm diameter. The diaphragm apertures are 0,5, 4, 10, 15 and 30 mm.
53,<>91. idem, for Paraffin Lamps 0. 12.
.-,:;. ii<2. 2 Screens for Concave Mirror and Lens Images (W. D., Fig. 273 [259]) 0. 8.
53.693. 4 Lenses in brass mounts with haft, 3 bi-convex, 1 bi-concave, for demonstrating the terrestrial,
astronomical and Galilean Telescope and the Microscope 0. 16.
53.694. Convex Lens, exact focus 600 mm, 60 mm

diameter, in mount with haft 0. 12.
53.695. Lens Holder with Haft, for inserting one or two lenses for investigating the focal length of a lense
system, fitting Lenses No. 53,894 (W. D., p. 386 [354]) 0. 5.
53.696. Optical Bench after Friedr. C. G. Miiller (M. T., Fig. 114 and pp. 166 to 171, 173, 174,
175), 3 m
long, with 4 saddle-stands 1. 10.
For screen for above, see No. 53,624.
53.697. Punctiform Limelight after Friedr. C. G. Miiller, for feeding with a gas blast burner
(M. T., Fig. 115) 0. 6.
53.698. Arc Light after Friedr. C. G. Miiller (M. T., Fig. 116) 0. 6.
Cl. 6022, 3674,

1227, 1224, 1228, 1225. 1226.
474 Reflection of Light. No. 53699-
53 707. 1 : 4.
537P3. 1:10.
53708. 1:8. 53709. 1:3.
53,699. Rectangular Platinum Wire Glow-Light (M. T., Fig. 117), serving as luminous source s. d.
for concave mirror and lens images 0. 8.
53,70.1. Candle Holder for 5 Candles, with stand with height adjustment (M. T., Fig. 118) 0. 6.
53.702. Storing Box for the preceding luminous sources and the screens of No. 53,624 . . 0. 6.
53.703. Incandescent Gas Lamp, Figure, adjustable, with 5 diaphragms (M. T., Fig. 119) 1. 6.0
53.704. Arc Light Lantern (M. T., Fig. 120) 1. 4.
53.705. Prism, Disc and Cylinder of Cardboard, for showing the dependence of the luminous
intensity on the angle of incidence and for photometric experiments (M. T., Figs. 125
[126]) 0. 4.0
53.706. Photometer Screen with grease spot for Fried r. C. G. Miiller's optical bench (M. T.,
p. 175), cf. Figure
53,624 A, without stand 0.10.0
Reflection of Light.
53.707. Apparatus for Explaining the Laws of Reflection, after Weinhold, Figure (\V. V.
d. B., Fig. 245) 0.14.0
th
53.708. idem, after J. Miiller, Figure (M. P., 9 Edn., II, 1, Fig. 27; Fr. phys. Teclm.
II, 2, Fig. 2019 [II, Fig. 700])
1. 0.
53.709. Apparatus for Explaining the Laws of Reflection, after Tyndall, F i g u r , varied
2.
by Prof. Mciit/ncr 1.
The scale of the apparatus moves of itself so as to make its zero point agree with the incident
ray of light. The apparatus can be used without darkening the room.
53.710. Reflection Apparatus after Stahlberg, Figure

(Ztschr. f. d. phys. u. cliein. I'. 15,
p. 73), on adjustable stand with foot-screw 1. 8.
The hinge-pin of two metal bars carries a mirror and. perpendicular to ihc latter, a rod which
always forms the angle-bisector for the two bars and thus forms the axis of incidence. The luminous
ray along the one limb encounters the mirror and is always reflected along the other limb. The
apparatus can be employed for light falling from the right or (lie left.
For further apparatus for Reflection of d. 'ilin. r.oii.
123(1, 1231.
Light: see Section "Light Helraction".
No. 53741. Reflection of Light. 475
53 737. 1 : 5.
53710. 1:10.
53 740. 1 : 5.
53.711. Reflection Apparatus after Eosenberg (Kleiber, Gymnas., Fig. 206), for showing that s. d.
the reflected rays of a punctifoim source of light appear to proceed from a point
situated on the rear elongation of all the rays 1. 4.
53.712. Reflection Apparatus after Friedr. C. G. Miiller (M. T., Fig. 127), for showing that
the reflected ray lies in one plane with the incident ray and with the axis of incidence 0. 18.
53.713. Polemoscope (Magic Mirror) (M. T., Fig. 128) . 0. 14.
53.714. Mirror Arrangement after Porro (M. T., Fig. 129), for reversing an image .... 0. 16.
Reflecting Prisms (Reversing Prisms), with round base surfaces, of Crown Glass, strictly
accurate at all angles, without pyramidal error:
List No. 53,715 53,716 53,717 53,718 53,719
Aperture of polished ) 07 . ._ .
47
base-surface mm ?
1.17.0 2.9.0 3.0.0 4.3.0 5.15.0

List No. 53,721 53,722 53,723 53,724 53,725
Aperture of polished
base-surface mm J
j
9.15.0 14.10.0 17.5.0 28.15.0 46.0.0

- i d e m, sharp-edged, with polished base surfaces :
List No. 53,726 53,727 53,728 53,729 53,730

Base-length mm 14 20 27 34 41
0.18.6 1.10.0 2.2.0 3.12.0 4.18.0
List No. 53,732 53,733 53,734 53,735 53,736
Base-length mm 54 61 68 75 81
7.0.0 9.5.0 12.15.0 17.5.0 23.0.0
Intermediate sizes are the same price as the next largest size. The height of
prisms is equal to the length of the base.
53,737. Angle Mirrors, Figure, with a fixed mirror and a mirror movable in
an easilv visible stav
476 Reflection of Light. No. 53742
53 747. 1 : 7. 53 750. 1 : 3.
Kaleidoscopes, with movable front part, simple construction, on wood stand: s. ,1.
List No. 53,743 53,744

Diameter of Image 65 mm 80
0. 5. 0. 10.
53,745.
- -
idem, good pattern, on stand L>. 0. O
* 53,746. Projection Kaleidoscope on stand, Figure, giving very pretty images 1.10.0
53.747. Kaleidoscope for polarised light, Figure, with dark minor. Ts'icol prism, and
gypsum objects ". 3. (>. o
53.748. Conical Mirror, Figure, with 6 images (anamorphoses) (). in. (i
53.749. Cylindrical Mirror, Figure, with 6 images (anamorphoses) 0. 10.
53.750. Parabolic and Cylindrical Mirror after Rebenstorff, F g u r e, with indication of the
i
path of rays for parallcly striking rays, for demonstrating reflection and the caustic
line, with a template according to which the curvatures are produced 0. If,. ()
* Can be used with ri. 1268, 1266. 1207,

the Projection Apparatus.
4515, 510!).
No. 53 778. Kaleidoscopes. Concave Mirrors. Covex Mirrors. 477
53752. 1:10. 53753. 1 : 10. 53 757. 1 : 6. 53775. 1:6.
53.751. Parabolic and Circular Mirror Ring for Demonstrating Catacautery, after Friedr. C.
G. Miiller (M. T., Fig. 130)
53.752. Model of a Concave Mirror after Muhlenbein, Figure, with fixed and movable
coloured rods for demonstrating the path of the rays and the relations between object
and image
53.753. Model of a Convex Mirror after Muhlenbein, Figure

Spherical Concave Mirrors and Convex Mirrors, of Glass, of exactly 600 focal length,mm
Figure 53,757, ground optically true and silvered, in metal mount with haft and cover,
without stand, for use on the optical bench, for demonstrating the images and laws
relative to concave mirrors.
Concave Mirrors
silvered on front
53779. 1:8. 53 795. 1 : 6.
53,779. Spherical Concave Mirror, of glass, with small box, bouquet and vase, for producing t: s. d.
real images, Figure 4. 10.
is arranged, inverted, a bouquet, which has to be strongly illuminated.

In a black box By
means of a concave mirror an upright, real image is produced of this bouquet, this image appearing
to issue from the glass when the correct position is given to the rotary mirror and on glancing, a
suitable distance off, at the glass and the mirror.
Spherical Concave Mirrors, of Glass, ground, fixed on Stand, silvered on the back, focal
length 600 mm.
List No. 53,789 53,790 53,791 53,792
Diameter mm 200 300 400 500
Each 3. 0. 4. 0. 6. 0. 9. 0.
Style: as Nos. 53,780/84.
53,794. Spherical Mirror (M. T., p. 177), 100 mm diameter, on stand 0. 10.
53.795. Japanese Mirror (Magic Mirror), Figure, of metal, with force-pump 5. Hi. (i
The images can be rendered visible both by sunlight and with the projection lantern.
53.796. Glow Lamp Ring after Grimsehl, for concave minor experiments (Fr. phys. Tcehn.
II, 2, Fig. 2648), stand with 16 7-volt electric glow lamps in scries 2. 1.0
53.797. Black Mirror, for drawing, in case, 11 cm long, 8 cm wide (I. 10.0
53.798.
- -
idem, 16 cm long, 13 cm wide 0. 18.
53.799. Plane Mirror, of silvered glass, in frame 0. 4.0
Mirrors of perfectly plane parallel glass, coaled with silvei. for instruments read by a mirror.
List No. 53800 53,801 53,802

Thickness mm 0.51 0.51 0.51
Diameter mm 510 1115 1620
Kaeh t 0. 4. 0. 7. 0. 10.
Concave Mirrors for instruments with mirror-reading, silvered on back; focal length 100 cm.
List No. 53,803 53,804 53,805
Diameter mm 10 !."> 2(1
Each 0. 6. 0. 9. 0. 12.
C.'l. 1237, 123'J.

No. 53 809. Concave Mirrors. Plane Mirrors. 479
53 806. 1 : 8. 53 807. 1 : 7.
53809,53806. 1:6.
53.806. Demonstration Goniometer after Weinhold, of. F i g u d.

r e, large Pattern (W. D., I
s.
Figs. 265267 and 286288 [251253 and 270271]) 118. 0.
The Goniometer can be used It is used for more accurate experiments

horizontally and vertically.
on reflection, refraction and colour-dissipation,
determining the angles of prisms and refractive
for
indices by Fraunhofer's, Meyerstein's or Listing-Abbe's Method, as a Goniometer and Spectrum Appa-
ratus. Height, 50 cm; diameter of circle, 55 cm. The apparatus is graduated in whole degrees.
The accessories comprise a centering plate for crystals, a plane mirror in mount, a water-vessel
with gap, a gap with illuminating mirror, one index, two lenses, one collimator tube, one observing
telescope, one prism of flint glass, 45 mm
side, and a key. All parts placed in a box.
- - i d e
53.807. m, with a second graduation on brass in whole degrees and with vernier
reading, for subjective observations, Figure 21. 0.
- - the same
53.808. apparatus as No. 53,806, but without Telescopes, without prism or box;
cannot be used as a Spectrometer, etc 15. 0.
53.809. Ocular with Gap for the observation telescope, and Symmetrical Double Gap after
Vierordt (v. Konkoly, Handbuch der Spektroskopiker, Halle, 1890, pp. 388 390), for
the collimator tube 'of the Weinhold Goniometer No. 53,806 or 53,807 (cf. F i g. 53,809),
in order to enable the apparatus to be used in addition as a Spectrophotometer . . i
7. 10.
Ocular and double gap can be set up forthwith on the observation telescope or collimator tele-
scope supplied with NOB. 53,806 or 53,807. The illustration shows the demonstration goniometer
arranged in the manner in which it is used as a Spectrophotometer.
Cl. 6057, 5317,
3076.
53 810 A. 1:7. 53 810 B. 1:7.
53 814 A. 1:5. 53 814 B. 1:6.
S. (1.
53,810. Demonstration Goniometer after Weinhold, small pattern, cf. Figures A and B 14. 0.0
The Goniometer is used as No. 53,806. The height is 13 cm, diameter of circle 38 cm. The
apparatus is divided in whole degrees.
Accessories as No. 53,806.
53,811.
- -
idem, with a second graduation on brass, in half degrees, and with vernier reading,
for subjective observations 16. (I. (I
53.812. - - the same apparatus as No. 53,810, but without telescopes, prism or box . . . 11. 10.
53.813. Simple Goniometer for students' use, after Noack (Noaek, Leitfaden t'iir Schiiler-
iibungen, p. 9), for use with accessories No. 53,815 53,817 and 51,851 1; can be used
as a Demonstration Goniometer for subjective and objective observation, as a Spec-
trum Apparatus and for various other optical experiments; as a Magnetometer, Galvano-
meter, and Tangent Galvanometer; for Demonstrating the Parallelogram of Forces,
the Reflection of Impact and of Torsional Effects 0.0
.~>.'5,814. Demonstration Goniometer after Noack, Figures A and B (/tschr. f. d. phys.

u. chem. U. 3, 188990, pp. 1 and 57) 15. 0.0
The divided with German silver edge,
circle of zinc, is very accurately graduated in half-degrees
and permits of readings being made to 5 minutes with the aid of the vernier provided on the 3 alidades
Cl. 3942, 3941.

1250, Ii55.
No. 53821. Demonstration Goniometer. Reflecting Goniometers. 481
53 819. 1 : 3. 53 820. 1 : 3.
pertaining to the apparatus. Hollow brass pillars can be screwed into the alidades, and various acces- -3 s. d.
sories can be fitted into the pillars, e. g., for optical experiments, two massive brass forks with lateral
levelling screws and two brass heads pointed at the top, and these accessories are interchangeable.
The following are supplied along with the apparatus: 4 small pillars, 4 cylinders, 1 movable table
top, 1 key, 2 brass forks, 2 brass pivots, 1 gas burner, 1 glow light and 1 camera obscura.
53.815. Accessories for Optical Experiments for the Noack Goniometer 3. 0.0
(a) Telescope ( 1.10.0); (b) Slotted Tube ( 1.10.0).
53.816. Accessories for Magnetic and Electric Experiments with the Noack Goniometer,
Nos. 53,813 and 53,814 9. 2.0
(a) Magnetometer with bar magnet ( 2.14.0); (b) Compass with Binnacle ( 1.16.0); (c) Gal-
vanometer (without compass, 3.12.0); (d) Tangent Galvanometer 1.0.0).
(
53.817. Accessories for Demonstrations in Mechanics with Goniometers Nos. 53,813 and 53,814 1. 18.
(a) 3 Pulleys, Fig. 53,814 B 0.15.0); (b) Cubical Tube with Sphere
( 0.5.0); ( (c) Ring for
Tissue Paper ( 6.6.0); (d) Torsion Head 0.12.0). (
51,85l'. Set of Weights, comprising 20 weights of 50 g each, with small hooks 0. 10.
53.818. Goniometer and Spectrum Apparatus for Students' Exercises, after Grimsehl (Ztschr.
f. d. phys. u. chem. U.
17, 1904, p. 207) 2. 8.0
53.819. Reflecting Goniometer after Wollaston, Figure, with telescope: the crystals are
centered by a centering needle 9. 0.0
The divided circle is graduated in half degrees, of brass, silvered, and provided with vernier for
reading to 2 minutes. The telescope aperture is 15 mm, the focal length 104 mm, and the power, 4.
53.820. --idem, Fig. 53,820, with Fine Motion and Magnifier reading 12.10.0
The divided circle is 108 mm diameter, the fine motion being secured by worm and rack; with
round pattern spirit level.
- - 0.0
53,821. idem, simple, for students' use (Wied. u. Ebert, Fig. 135) 6.
On tripod with levelling screws, graduated in /,

Q
vernier read by magnifying glass up
1
,
to
minute.
Cl. 1243, 1244.

31
53 823. 1 : 6.
53826. 1:5. 53 827. 1 : 5.
53 822. Large Reflecting Goniometer with circle 230 mm

diameter, with concealed graduation
on silver, objective aperture 31 mm, reading by magnifying glass with 2 verniers for
10 seconds, with Centering Apparatus 50. 0.
The circle and observing telescope have independent motion about the central axis, with screw
motion. The measurements can be taken either by firmly clamping the circle carrying the crystal,
and by turning the alidade along with the telescope, or by clamping the alidade with the telescope
and rotating the circle with the crystal. The instrument has two oculars and a number of slots for
the collimator; the observing telescope is provided with an extra objective, thus facilitating the focussing
of the objects under test. Illustration on application.
53.823. Reflecting Goniometer, can also be used as a Spectroscope, K g u r e, with circle i
150 mm diameter, concealed, on silver, with reading by means of magnifying glass

to 20 seconds; objective aperture 27 mm. Without Centering Apparatus 27.10.0
53.824. Reflecting Goniometer for the Laboratory, with circle 150 mm

diameter, graduated |
in l / 3 , with telescope having an objective aperture of 22 mm, with magnifying glass,

reading to 30 seconds. Without Centering Apparatus 19.0. i)
53,825. Centering Device for the crystals, fitting the two preceding goniometers 3. in. o
53.826. Reflecting Goniometer, smaller, without magnifying glass reading. Fig. 53,826, prac-
tical model for laboratories; telescope of 19 mm
aperture, graduated in '/2 an 'l w fn '
vernier for reading to 1 Minute 13. o. o
53.827. --idem, Figure, with concealed Divided Circle and 2 magnifiers for reading,
without prism illustrated in figure 1<>. 0. o
This pattern can be highly recommended as tl,<> graduation cannot lir touched by the fingers.
53.828. Model of a Mirror Sextant, of wood, Figure 2. 0.
Cl. 5081,
Contact Goniometers and Survey Goniometers: sec p. :>-'!>. 1248. l-'l'.i.
No. 53835. Mirror Sextants. Reflection. Refraction. 483
53 828. 1 : 5.
53 833. 1 : 7.
53 829. 1 : 4.
53 830. 1 : 4. 53 832. 1 : 2. 53 835. 1 : 6.
53.829. Mirror Sextant, Figure, entirely of brass, with telescope and 4 screening glasses,
. s. d.
the vernier giving 5 minutes 4. 10.
53.830. Mirror Sextant, Figure, Large Pattern, entirely of brass, with circle divided on
silver, witli telescope, screening glasses, vernier with magnifying glass 10.10.
53.831. Level Quadrant, for determining angles of altitude to an accuracy of 1 minute . . 3. 15.
The level and the object are observed simultaneously in the telescope. The instruments can also
be used on vehicles, ships, airships, etc.
53,832. Pocket Heliotrope after Steinheil, Figure, in case . 4. 0.
The apparatus gives luminous signals to a distance of 50 km.
Refraction, Total Reflection.

33,833. Light-Refraction Apparatus, after Miiller, Figure, for showing the refraction of light-
rays in liquids, with etched graduation on ground glass, metal vessel with gap . . . 0. 16.
- - 0. 12.
53.834. idem, entirely of glass
53.835. Light-Refraction Apparatus after Miihlenbein, Figure, for demonstrating the

laws of reflection and of refraction for solids and liquids; also total reflection; can also
he used as a camera obscura (Prakt. Phys., Vol. 2, Part 1) 8. 0.0
The apparatus lias circular and sine graduation, and has, as accessories, a Plane Mirror, two
Half -cylinders of crown and flint glass respectively, also a hollow cylinder for liquids.
Cl. 1257, 5299, 6041,
Heliographs for Signalling Particulars on Application. 1259, 1261, 1296. 31*
484 Refraction. Total Reflection. No. 53836-
53 836. 1 : 5.
M
53 839. 1 53 839, 53 840. 1 : 8.
53.836. Light-Refraction Apparatus after Neumann, Figure, also for experiments on simple s d.
and total reflection, on stand with levelling screws, vertical adjustment, with head
graduated for convenience of reading (Ztschr. f. d. phys. u. chem. U. 8. 1894/5, p. 357) 4. 10.
d.
53.837. Light-Refraction Trough after Neumann, Figure, simple pattern (Ztschr. f.
phys. u. chem. U. 7, 1893/4, p. 29), on stand with glass vessel and rubber connecting
0. 16.
tubing
53.838. Rectangular Glass Box for Experiments on Refraction and Total Reflection (W. D.
Fig. 277283 [263 269]) and for the curvilinear propagation of light (W.I)., p. 7 .'5.'!
[310]), 25 cm long, 8 cm wide and 16 cm high 0. 18.
53.839.
- - i d e in, with support and adjustable mirror, F g
i u r e s, otherwise as No. 53,838 2. 8.
53.840. Rotary Mirror for inserting the glass box of the preceding apparatus, sec Figure,
with lever for conveniently adjusting; for use under water 0. 18.
53.841. Refraction Box after Stahlberg, F i g u re (Xtschr. f. d. phys. u. chem. V. 15, 1901,
p. 65), with 2 watch glasses inserted in one of the side walls 2. 8.
One half of the box is filled with floure.-eent water, thr oilier half with tol>;iei-o nmke. A mirror,
which can be rotated and adjusted from the outside, is filled on the lid.
In order to observe simultaneously the refraction and reflection occurring for different angles.
use is made of a small glass, uith slot diaphragm, which has to lie fixed between the wo longitudinal I
s; this glass reflects (by total reflection) the transmitted light in single cones in every dim-lion.
CI. I2l)8, 1299,

1286, 1287.
No. 53849. Refraction and Reflection. 485
53 849 B. 1:10. 53 849 A. 1:10.
2 watch glasses, one with the convex and the other with the concave side facing outwards, allow the . s. d.
phenomena to be demonstrated experimentally on spherical surfaces. The apparatus can be used
either with the light entering from the left or the right.
53.842.
- -
idem, without Watch Glasses 2. 2.
53.843. Light-Refraction Apparatus after Kepler (M. T. Fig. 133) 0. 16.0
53.844. Refraction and Reflection Apparatus, after Weinhold (W. D. Figs. 284, 285), after
the style of apparatus No. 53,849, casting the luminous rays in all directions . . . 0. 16.
- -
53.845. idem, aftei Grimsehl (Ztschr. f. d. phys. u. chem. U. 20, 1907, p. 214), with
glass vessel 1. 2.0
The apparatus can be used with the room half darkened. An arc lamp should be employed as
the luminous source.
53.846. Rectangular Glass Vessel, Figure, for showing the curvilinear course of the rays
through a medium of unequal optical density, 1 in long 1. 6.0
53.847. Apparatus after Hartl for showing the curvilinear path of the rays through a medium
of unequal optical density, Figure
(Ztschr. f. d. phys. u. chem. U. 9, 1896, p. 116) 2. 0.0
The apparatus can be filled in a few minutes; the. filling device consists of a funnel, a length
of tubing and a tube having a number of small apertures directed downwards and terminating in
the bottom of the apparatus. By means of this device the layers can be drawn off and kept for further
experiments.
53.848. 10 Bottles, with Glycerine -Water mixtures for above, with 10 100% solutions . . 0. 6.0
53.849. Apparatus for Reflection and Refraction in Water, after Kolbe, Figs. A
and B (Ztschr.
f. d. phys. u. chem. U. 19, 1906, p. 1) 3. 4.0
A glow lamp having a straight filament can be placed inside and above the vessel (surrounded
by corresponding slotted cylinders).
Given in are 2 Half Cylinders and 3 Whole Cylinders with slots, also 2 white screens. Fig. 53,849 A
shows the path of the, rays in demonstrating Kemna's experiment on the refraction and reflection of
light when the light passes from water to air. Fig. 53,849 B when passing from air to water.
Cl. 6003, 4694, 1321,
3831, 3830.
486 Refraction. Total Reflection. No. 53 850
53 850. 1 : 7. 53 851. 1 : 6.
53852. 1:6. 53 853. 1 : 5
#53,850. Light-Refraction Apparatus, after Tyndall (Tyndall's Drum), Figure, for objective i. d.
demonstration (M. P. II, 1, Fig. 31 [26]) 2. 0.0

A
cylindrical metal vessel 300 mm
diameter can rotate about a polished wood base. In front
of a gap a mirror is fitted wth the aid of which a ray of light may be made to penetrate at various
angles, according to the rotation of the vessel. The water is coloured with a fluorescent liquid; the ail-
space being filled with smoke.
# 53,851. --idem, Figure, with a second Mirror and Gap underneath, for 1ot:il reflect ion 2. 10.0
I
* 53,852. Light-Refraction Apparatus after Mach, Figure (M. P. 8

lh
Edn., II, 1, Figs. 64
and 65; Carls Repertorium 7, 1871) 3. 0.
Tiie illustration shows the apparatus from the back, with the device for reflecting the luminous
pencil. Tue front of the \csscl is
glazed.
* 53,853. Apparatus for Determining the Refractive Indices of Liquids, after Bliimd, F i
- u i <
(Xtschr. f. (1. phys. u. clicni. I". 2, 1888/9, p. 163) 2. 8.
The apparatus con<ist> "I a vessel with plale glass walls, and a graduated disk oflJennan silver.
about the centre of which 2 levers can rotate. Two rules permit of reading the sine of the incident
and refractive angle. The apparatus is arranged for subjective and objective demonstration.
CI. 1285, 3952,
* Can be used with the Projection Apparatus. 5066, l.".cj.
No. 53 858. Refraction and Reflection. 487
53 855. 1 : 7. 53 857. 1 : 5.
* 53,854. Optical Demonstration Apparatus, after Stromann, Figure (Ztschr. f. d. phys. u. s- d -
chem. U. 18, 1905, p. 71), for demonstrating various fundamental laws relative to ;
the theory of light j

8. 0.
The following can be proved: Refraction of light; Reflection on Plane and Cylindrical Surfaces;
the Bounding Angle and Total Reflection; the passage of the rays through plane parallel plates through ;
plano-convex and bi-convex lenses; Polarisation; the warped band of light; Total Reflection in a jet
of water; the various properties of refraction possessed by different coloured lights; Chromatic Ab-
erration and combination; the Curvilinear path of the rays in a substance of varying density, etc. etc.
*.">;?, 855. Apparatus for the Laws of Refraction, Reflection, Total Reflection, etc., Figure 4. 0/0
In the centre a mirror can be introduced for experiments on reflection, or a lens for demonstrating
the path of rays in lenses.
* 53,856.
- -
idem, with Perfect Circle 4. 12.
* 53,857. Reflection and Refraction Apparatus, Figure 5. 10.
The semi-cylindrical glass vessel can be replaced by a plane mirror. The circle is 30 cm diameter
and carries two alidades for measuring the angles, and two graduated sliding rules for directly de-
termining the sines.
53,858. Reflection and Refraction Apparatus after Silbermann, Figure 8. 0.
ci. 4174,
* Can be used with the projection Apparatus. 3389,5880, 1290.
53 859 A. 1:6.
53 860. 1 : 6.
53,859. Optical Disc after Hartl, Figs. A

and B (Nos. 1 17), fordemonstrating the laws of s. d.
elementary optics (Ztschr. f. d. phys. u. chem. U. 9, 1896, p. 113; M. T. Fig. 134), for
experiments with single rays and parallel rays 3. 18.
The apparatus is used in an undarkened room with direct sunlight; the entire arrangement is
very comprehensive. The following can be demonstrated: the Law of Reflection for PlaneJ Mirrors; the
effects and laws relative to the concave and convex mirror; Refraction by a plane parallel plate;
prismatic refraction and chromatic aberration; the action of condensing and dispersion lenses; expla-
nation of the rainbow.
The following pertain to the apparatus: 2 Slotted Sheets with three and seven gaps; Coloured
Glass Plates and small Brass Plates; 1 Glass Plane Mirror; 1 Concave and 1 Convex Mirror, of .<Jass :
1 each semi-circular, circular, and trapezoidal Crystal Plate; 1 Bi-convex and Bi-concave Cylindrical
Lens of crystal glass, also a rectangular prism with members of equal length.
Fig. 53,589 B shows the path of the rays in the following experiments: (1) Reflection on plane
surfaces; (2) Parallel Rays parallely reflected; (3) Reflection on the Concave Mirror; (4) incident parallel
Rays are reflected to the focus; after removing the slot diaphragm, demonstration of Catacautery;
(5) corresponding Phenomena on the Convex Mirror; (6) Refraction and Reflection of Light between
Air and Glass, determination of the refractive indices; (7) the same, between Glass and Air; (8) total
Reflection in Glass; (9) Refraction in a plane Plate; (10) Refraction on the 45 prism; chromatic- all
erration; (11) minimum deflection with symmetrical Ray; (12) Refraction at condensing lens, focus;
(13) collecting parallel Rays at the focus; (14) Diacautery; (15) aberration of parallel Rays; (16) com-
bination of Lenses; (17) explanation of the Rainbow; (18) Reflection of a central pencil of rays on a
plane surface; (19) idem, on the concave Mirror; (20) central pencil of rays, rendered parallel.
53,860. Addition to the Optical Disc, Figure, for experiments with central pencils of rays
(Ztsclir. f. d. phys. u. chem. V. 10, 1897, p. 236), see also Figure r>3,sr>!) B, Nos. 1820 1. 6.
Eight cones of rays, proceeding divergently from a point, are produced with this apparatus.
The following can be demonstrated: the Rule of the Image for the Plane Mirror; the Reflection of the
Luminous Rays issuing from a point, on Concave and Convex Mirrors; existence of the real Image;
Refraction by a Condensing Lens or Aberrating Lens of the Rays issuing from one point; Action of
Spectacles; Action of Diaphragms.
TJe additional apparatus consists of a separate ground crystal phite on iron stand, one bi-conrex
crystal glass lens and one diaphragm.
53,861. Reflector for reflecting the Solar Rays (I. \-2.
Liquid Prisms for determining Kei'rurtive CI. 6100, 3677.

Indices: see page 501 and ">02.
Kr>. 533S1. Refraction and Reflection. 489
17
53859 B, 53860. 1: 11. Demonstrations with the Hartl Optical Disc.
Cl. 6511.
490 Refraction. Total Reflection. No. 33362
53 862, 53 859, 53 863. 1 : 6. 53863. 1:4.
53,862. Polarisation Apparatus for placing on the Hartl Optical Disc, Figure (Ztschr. f.
d. phys. 11. chem. U. 19, 1906, p. 105), without glass preparations ......... 2. 8.
The following can be shown: uniform reflection of ordinary unpolarised Light; Polarisation by
Reflection; Polarisation by repeated Refraction; chromatic Polarisation; Phenomena in convergii
Polarised Light.
The apparatus consists of 1 rectangular Sheet Iron Plate fixed on the optical disc; 1 plate
Slab and 1 set glass Plates as interchangeable Polarisers; 1 rotary black plate glass Slab as Analyser;
1 Stage arranged between the former; 1 small Projection Screen; 1 Condensing Lens for producing
converging Light and 1 Sheet Iron Scren for completely shadowing the Projection Screen.
Fig. 53,862 shows the image when using an unaxial crystal of sodium nitrate.
53,863. Rapidly annealed Glasses, Figure, for the Hartl Polarisation Apparatus, in wood
mount, for producing interference images. Each (from selection) o. .!.
The glasses show in polarised light the inteiference images obtained in Fig. 53,863. Two crossed
glasses can also be used (see No. 26a and 27 a in Fig. 53,863): it is advisable in this case to employ
the baseplates listed under No. 53,864, which are supplied with a separate mount so as to allow the
upper plates to be easily interchanged.
53,864. Baseplate for Crossed Glasses for producing Interference linages, comprising a rapidlv
annealed glass with special wood mount; for use in conjunction with the rapidly annealed
glasses listed in the preceding item Kadi (I. 4. <>
The type of glasses (1) (2) and (7) as per Fig. 53,863 is specially .-unable inr baseplates. l'nle>
otherwise stated, triangular baseplate No. -2 is supplied. The mount of the baseplate is provided with
special clamps, one of which can easily be loosened so that the upper plate eau lie quickly interchanged.
53,864 a. Projection Lens for projecting the interference figures on the screen, the si/e of
the image being 50 cm diameter. This lens is fitted on the Polarisation Apparatus in
place of the small screen o. 4. t>
C1.3877<1, 3678 '.

53 866. 1 : 12. 53 869. 1 : 6.
53.865. Universal Optical Apparatus after Bosenberg, Pigs. A

and B (Ztschr. f. Instrumenten- .
,8.
(1.
kunde 7, 1887, p. 323) 18. 0.

It is possible to show with the apparatus all the laws of reflection and retraction on minors,
lenses and prisms as well as the splitting up of white light into the spectrum colours and the recorn-
position of the same. In addition, the microscope and the telescope can be explained with the apparatus.
The upper part of the apparatus can be fixed on the frame in three different positions.
Accessories: 2 Paraffin Lamps of special type; 1 plane Mirror; 1 concave Mirror 1 convex Mirror;
;
4 bi-convex Lenses of different focal length and diameter; 1 bi-concave Lens; 1 plano-convex Lens;
1 glass Cube; 1
Apparatus for proving reflection and refraction, Fig. B; 2 Prisms, one of these being
of flint glass. (For larger pattern apparatus see No. 53,867.)
53.866. Auxiliary Apparatus for explaining the Measurement of the Velocity of Light by the
Fizeau and Foucault methods, Figure 3. 0.0
53.867. Universal Optical Apparatus after Bosenberg, larger pattern, 2 m higher 30. 0.
53.868. Apparatus for Demonstration of the Refraction of Light in Glass and in a Glass Prism,
Figure 2. 10.
On a stand is iixcd a divided circle, which is capable of rotation, and in the centre of wnich can
be fitted a semi-circular ground glass body or a prism of 30 mm
side.
53.869. Hollow Prism after Silbermann, Figure, for showing that the deflection increases
when the refractive angle increases (M. P., 8 th Edn., II, 1, Figs. 84 86) '. 3. 12:
The prism can be filled with any aqueous, alcoholic or corrosive liquid, as it is cemented in the
fire. The box is rotary and has a graduation.
53.870. Glass Plate for Refraction Experiments (M. T. p. 179), 2 cm thick, si/e 10x15 cm 0. 4.0
Cl. 1313, 1315, 1293,
4671, 1294.
492 Refraction. Total Reflection. No. 53871
on Refraction when passing 6. Refraction in Prism. 10. Bi-conyex Lens

1 Reflection! plane 3.
Mirror. from Glass to Air. 7. Refraction in Liquids. 11. Reflection <
Plano-concave Lent. Mirror.

2. Refraction when passing 4. Total Reflection in Glaat. 8.
from Air to Gla.-s. 5. Refraction inl'laneGlasses 9. Bi-eoncave Lens. 12. Reflection on Convex
Mirror.
53 871 B. 1 : 5. Some Demonstrations with the Kolbe Refraction Apparatus.
CI. 1300,5795,5017, 6512.
No. 53 878 b. Light Refraction Apparatus. 493
53 876. 1 : 5.
53878. 1:8. 53 878 a. 1:9.
53.871. Light-Refraction Apparatus after B. Kolbe (Ztsehr. f. d. phys. u. chem. U. 9, 1896,

d.
p. 20, and 13, 1900, p. 9), Figs. A

and B, diameter of glass disc 360 mm ..... 9. 10.
When using parallel light experiments can be made with the apparatus on reflection on plane
mirrors, refraction of the light when the rays pass from the thin into the denser medium and vice-versa
(air-glass, glass-air, water-air, etc.), total reflection, refraction in plane parallel glasses, minimum of de-
flection, refraction in prisms and lenses, reflection on cylindrical mirrors.
The apparatus consists essentially of a ground glass disc capable of rotation in rollers, provided
with a suitable sine graduation and carrying a spring clip in order to easily interchange the light-
refracting bodies. The following are given in with the apparatus: 1 Screen with two diaphragms;
1 cardboard Disc with marked degree graduation; 4 Diaphragms with 1, 3, 7 and 9 gaps; 1 Reflecting
Mirror; 1 solid half -cylinder of Glass; 1 hollow half-cylinder of Glass; 1 flint Glass Prism; 1 Glass Block;
1 cylindrical Cendensing Lens and 1 cylindrical dispersion Lens each 60 mm
focus 1 concave and 1 con-
;
vex Mirror each 100 mm

radius of curvature; 1 Glass Body with two plane parallel surfaces and a
refracting angle of 45 and one of 60.
53.872.
- -
idem, with glass disc 240 mm diameter 8. 0.
53.873. Light-Refraction Apparatus after Reusch, movable (W. D. Fig. 289 [272]) .... 1. 4.0
* 53,874. --idem, for the Projection Lantern, Figure 0. 16.
53,875. Light-Refraction Apparatus after Pfaundler (M. P., 9 Edn., II, 1, Figs. 46
lh
and 47),
for demonstrating the minimum deflection in the prism 2. 0.
* 53,876. Apparatus for Refraction in Plane Glasses, Figure, for showing the apparent
displacement of the object by moving a plane parallel plate in front of an object . 0. 6.
53.877. Niemoller's Apparatus for the Mechanical Demonstration of the Law of Refraction,
Figure (Fr. phys. Techn. I, 2, Fig. 2212; Ztsehr. f. d. phys. u. chem. U. 5, 1892,
p. 139) 1.16.0
Wood Protractor on Stand, Fig. 51,491, p. 229, after Friedr. C. G. Miiller (M. T., Figs. 6, 14,
15), for measuring angles in mechanics and optics 2. 10.
53.878. Collection of Apparatus for Demonstrating the Laws of Reflection and Refraction,
Figure, in box |
7. 0.
Plane Mirror 100

1 mm
diameter; 1 Concave Cylindrical Mirror 90 mm
diameter; 1 Convex
Cylindrical Mirror 90 mm
diameter; 1 Convex Lens 100 mm
diameter; 1 Flint Glass Prism 45 mm
side; 1 Water Trough, 1 Ground Glass Screen.
53,878 a. Refraction Apparatus after Stahlberg (Ztsehr. f. d. phys. u. chem. U. 15, 1902, p. 69),
Figure, on stand with one tube each for water and benzol 3. 0.
This apparatus is constructed after the style of the Reusch light-refraction apparatus. It can
be adjusted for the refraction-ratio 4 3 (air to water) and 3 2 air to glass and air to benzol) and
: :
can be used with the light penetrating either from the right or left.
53,878 b. Light-Refraction Apparatus after Stahlberg, exactly as No. 53,878 a, but without
benzol tube .
2. 15.
Cl. 5794, 1355, 1291.

53 886. 1 : 3.
53 880. 1 : 3.
O 53881. 1:6. 53 883. 1 : 7. 53 884. 1 : 4. 53 888. 1 : 5.
. s. (1.
53,879. Small Tube with Mercury, for demonstrating Total Eeflection (W. D., Fig. 290 [273]) 0. 4.0
53,880. Small Tube with Cedarwood Oil, P i g u r e, for showing the disappearance of reflection
at the edge of equally refractive media (W. D., Fig. 292 [275]) 0. 4.
* 53,881. 2 Glass Plates with air gap, F i

g u r e, for proving Total Eeflection (W. D.,
p. 378 [346]) 0. I. o
* 52,590. Calladon's Apparatus for Total Reflection in a Jet of Water (Light Fountain): see
Fig. 52590, p. 352) 2. 0.
* 52,589.
- - smaller and without base, see Fig. 52,589, p. 352 0. 16.
53,882. Prism in which a vertical edge is cut away in the form of a vase. The figure appears,
lh
by total reflection, as a hexagonal bodv with glistening silvery surfaces (M. P., 8 Edn.,
II, 1, Fig. 80) 0. 5.
* 53,883. Apparatus for Total and Partial Reflection in Glass Rods, after Hartl (Ztschr. f. d.
phys. u. chem. U. 19, 1906, p. 134), Figure, with 1 bent rod of transparent glass
which reflects the entire light on a small screen, and two frosted glass rods which reflect
only a portion of the light; with stand 1. 5.
53.884. 2 Rectangular Prisms of Plate Glass, Figure, 30 base and 30 height, mm mm j
on Stand, for showing the difference between ordinary

*
reflection in glass and total reflec-
tion (M. P., 8 th Edn., II, 1, Figs. 77 and 78) . . 1. 10.
53.885.
- - i d e m, 45 mm base-length and 45 mm height 2. 0.
53.886. Glass Cube, after Rosenberg, for total reflection, Figure 0. 4.

The light does not pass through two adjacent walls of the transparent cube.
53.887. Glass Body after Kolbe, with two plane parallel surfaces, a refracting angle of 45
and one of 60 0. 8.
53.888. Glass Box

for Total Reflection, after Hartl, Figure 0. 8.
The boxhalf filled with water; the corrugated glass bottom appears of silvery
is brightness on
on the under
upper surface when viewed from above,
the and as if the vessel were filled with ink,
side. When viewed laterally the contents can be recognised as water. Looked at from the back, the
upper part seems darker than the lower, by virtue of total reflection, when the box is held up to a
strong light.
53.889. Built-up Model of a Convex Lens and of a Concave Lens (Polyprism), after (irimsehl,
for demonstrating the path of the lays (/tschr. f. d. pliys. u. chem. V. 20, 1!H)7, p. 215).
consisting of two parallelepepedic glass vessels for filling with water, two similar vessels
of trapezoidal section, which can be built up together into lenticular bodies; table 1
stand for same and 1 stand with 4 mirrors for conducting the luminous rays ... 2. 14.
53.890. Model of a Convex Lens, after Miililenbein. Figure, \\ith fixed and movable
coloured rods for demonstrating the path of the rays and the relations between object
and image 1. 4.
53.891. Model of a Concave Lens, after Miililenbein, same pattern as above I. I.
C'l. 1316. 13-Jci,

* Can be used with the Projection Apparatus. i;m, 3927, 1319, .v.:i.
53892. 1: 10.
53 898. 1 : 10. 53 895. 1 = 2.
53.892. Demonstration Apparatus for the Refraction of Light by convex and concave lenses, s. d.
Figure, after Neumann (Ztschr. f. d. phys. "u. chem. U. 8, 1895, p. 268) 1. 16.
The apparatus comprises two angles formed of brass strips (incident and refracted ray). The
149 angle is for the convex and that of 154 for the concave lens.
The variable size and width of image can be demonstrated with the aid of the apparatus.
53.893. 2 Slabs with Pair of Pulleys and velvet Supports, for showing mechanically the deflection
of the luminous rays in prisms, plates and lenses (M. P., 8 th Edn., II, 1, Fig. 370) . 1. 12.
53.894. 6 Lenses in simple Case, Figure, plano-convex, bi-convex, concave-convex, plano-

concave, bi-concave, convex-concave, 50 diameter, mm Figure 0. 10.
53.895. 6 Lenses in case, Figure, plano-convex, bi-convex, concave-convex, plano-con-

cave, bi-concave, convex-concave, 65 diameter mm 0. 16.
53.896. 6 Lenses in Case, smaller: plano-convex, bi-convex, concave-convex, plano-concave,

bi-concave, convex-concave, 40 mm
diameter, in mount with metal hafts 1. 10.
- -
53.897. idem, and, in addition, 2 Cylindrical Lenses and 1 Achromatic Lens, also 2 Stands 2. 16.
."..'i.sux. Piano-Convex-Lens 200 mm

diameter, Figure, on tripod, for demonstrating
spherical aberration and chromatic aberration of the refracting light-rays with the aid
of two diaphragms, one with a number of holes on the edge and one with round hole
in centre 2. 10.
.">.'!, *99. Achromatic Lens System, on Stand, one lens fixed and the other movable in hinge;
diain. 30 mm, focal length 30 cm 1. 5.
r>:;.'.Mto.
--idem, 40 mm diameter, focal length 30 cm 1.10.0
Achromatic Lenses, in mount with haft, without stand.
List No. 53,901 53,902 53,903 53,904 53,905
Diameter mm 50 60 70 80 100
Focal Length mm 300 500 500 500 800
1.0.0 1.10.0 2.0.0 2.10.0 3.12.0
53.906. Stand for above . . 0. 5.
Cl. 1348, 1349,

1353, 1352.
,
53 920. 1 : 5. 53 924. 1 : 8.
. s. (1.
53.907. Cylindrical Lens 60 mm diameter, in mount, on stand 1. 4.
53.908. idem, 80 mm diameter 1. 10.
53.909. 2 Convex Lenses 80 mm

diameter and 500 mm focal length, on tall stands; can be ;
used for a number of experiments, together 1. 10.
Hollow Lenses, bi-convex, with lateral opening for introducing liquids:

List No. 53,910 53,911 53,912 53,913 53,914
Diameter mm 50 80 105 130 155
f 0.5.0 0.7.0 0.8.0 0.10.0 0.13.0
-
idem, plano-convex:
List No. 53,915 53,916 53,917 53,918 53,919
Diameter mm 50 80 100 130 160
0.5.0 0.7.0 0.8.0 0.10.0 0.13.0
53.920. Lens Stand, Figure, which can be mounted any
in lens from 25 to 50 mm diameter 1. 0.
53.921. --idem, for lenses from 50 to 100 mm diameter 1. 4.0
53.922. idem, for lenses from 100 to 150 mm diameter 1. 10.
53.923. Hollow Concave Lens (plano-concave) for use as a condensing lens under water
(W. D., p. 384) 0. 10.
53.924. Lens Apparatus after Dr. Zwick, Figure. (Dr. Zwick, 150 optische Versuche usw.,
pp. 49 et seq. ; see No. 53,928), with lenses 50 mm
diameter, for showing the action
of condensing and dispersing lenses and the camera obscura, the human eye and
spectacles 4. 0.0
The apparatus one optical bench of 60 cm useful length, 1 Lens Holder; 2 curved
consists of
Glass Disks, for representing the cornea and the iris, with the pupil, of the eye; 3 convex Lenses of 6,
8 and 11 cm focal length, in mount; 1 bi-convex Lens of 30 cm focal length with mount and haft;
1 bi-concave Lens of 15 cm focal
length, with mount and haft; 1 Stage; 3 Stands; 1 Ground Glass
Disk with mount; 1 Wire Cone; 1 Disk perforated in centre, with rotary disk and various diaphragm -
apertures; 1 Ring for stretching paper; 1 small Tripod.
53.925. - -
idem, larger Pattern; diameter of Lenses 80 mm (i. 0.
53.926. Optical Apparatus ufter Dr. Zwick, for the Fundamental Theories of Optics, with optical
bench 2 m
long and the accessories listed below, which also contain the accessories of
the lens-apparatus after Dr. Zwick, No. 53924 (Dr. Zwick, 150 optische Versuche /m
Veranschaulichung der Grundlehren der Ausbreitung, Spirgeliing und Bret-hung des
Lichts; sec No. 53,928) 11.0.0
The constituents of the apparatus are: 1 optical Bench; 1 Lens Holder (as No. 53,924); 2 curved
Glass l>isks representing the cornea and the iris, with the pupil, of the human eye; 3 bi-conve\ I.rn-"-
of 9, 11, 15 cm focal length, with mounts; 1 bi-convex Lens of 30 mm focal length, with mount and
haft; 1 Bi-concave Lens of 15 cm focal length with mount and haft; Stage; Stands; 1 Ground Glass
1 :>
Disk with mount; 1 Wire Cone; centrally pierced disk with pivoting disk and different diaphragms
1
Cl. 1354. 4002.

No. 53 930. Lenses and Lens Apparatus. 497
53926. 1:14.
53929. 1:16.
1 ring for stretching paper, 1 small tripod, 1 carrier for 1 candle, 1 carrier for 4 candles, s. d.
1 pivot holder, 3 silvered plane mirrors (glass) 10, 5 and 3 cm diam., 1 Concave Mirror (German Silver)
15 cm diam. and 5 cm focal length, 1 flint glass Prism, 1 Screen with adjustable gap, 1 Glass Cube
5 cm side, 1 Glass Lens for supplementing the terrestrial telescope, 4 Glass Plates (window glass,
ground, red and green glass 8 cm square), 1 rectangular Trough 8 cm square, 1 Paper Screen, 1 Light
Screen, 1 Spirit Lamp, 1 Protractor, 1 small Glass Flask 4 cm diam., also Diaphragms, Pasteboard
and Tissue Paper.
53.927. --the sameapparatus, fitted with the accessories of the larger Lens Appa-
ratus No. 53,925, instead of No. 53,924, fittings otherwise the same as before . . . 13. 0.0
53.928. Pamphlet by Dr. Zwick: "150 optische Versuche zur Veranschaulichung der Grund-
lehren der Ausbreitung, Spiegelung und Brechung des Lichtes", bound 0. 3.0
53.929. Optical Bench, Figure, with accessories for demonstrating the path of rays in
lenses and concave mirrors, for demonstrating the microscope and telescope, the Bunsen
Photometer, etc 12.10.0
The optical bench consists of a 2 m long measuring bar, divided in centimetres, and constructed
of maple-wood; it rests on two massive brass pillars, is mounted on a mahogany board and provided
with 14 stands for raising and lowering the lenses, diaphragms, etc.
The following are included with the apparatus: 3 bi-convex Lenses, 1 bi-concave Lens, these
being selected so that they can be used for setting up the microscope and the terrestrial, astronomical
and Galilean telescope; also 1 concave Mirror (glass) 120 mm
diam., silvered on front and closed by
a cap; 1 flint glass Prism, 1 paraffin Lamp, 1 Gap with micrometer screw, 1 white Screen for receiving
the images, 1 Screen for concave mirror images, 1 Diaphragm, 1 Light Holder with one light, 1 Light
Holder with 4 small lamps for photometry, and 1 White Screen with grease spot.
- -
53.930. idem, fittings of simpler pattern, with the accessories previously mentioned,
but without Prism; mirror only 90 mm diam.; gap without micrometer; and with only
6 stands 9. 0.0
Optical Benches Nos. 53,929 and 53,930 can also be used as Melloni Apparatuses: all parts fitting
the same can be obtained from us.
Further Optical Benches for explaining the Telescope, Microscope, etc., etc.: see later on
in list.
Cl. 4001. 1358.

32
498 Refraction, Total Reflection. Optical Measuring Instruments. Spectrum Analysis and Synthesis. NO. 53931-
53 932. 1 : 6. 53 933. 1 : 6.
53.931. Optical Apparatus after Mach, Figure, as improved by Kolbe, for explaining
s. (1.
the phenomena of reflection and refraction with visible beams of light (Ztschr. f. d.
phys. u. chem. U. 7, 1887, p. 77) lo. 10.0
The apparatus consists of a box 1 in long, with iron legs, the walls being formed by glas> plates.
and in which an optical bench is set up. The sliders of the bench can be adjusted from outside.
A graduation is provided on the front wall and permits of reading the distances between lenses. By
inserting various gratings and frames with differently arranged coloured glasses at the narrow end,
the experiments are carried out in the box, which is filled with smoke (reflection of spherical mirrors,
refraction of light in lenses and prisms, demonstration of chromatic and spherical aberration).
The following pertain to above: 3 lenses in mounts, 120 mm
diam.: 2 ground mirrors, convex
and concave, 120 mm diam.; 1 prism, 1 screen, 3 gratings of different fineness, 1 small plane mirror
on adjustable stand, 2 sliders with coloured glass, 2 cover plates.
53.932. Supplementary Apparatus for Refraction and Total Reflection in Liquids, Figure,
and Stand with 2 adjustable plane mirrors, for Apparatus No. 53,931 3. 0.
The apparatus is provided on front side with circular graduation, degree and sine graduation.
53,932a. Fillet with 2 lens mounts and small glow lamp, also lens mount on base, after (irim-
sclil, for measuring the radius of curvature of a convex lens; for Students' use (K. (irim-
selil, Ausgewahlte pliysikal. Sehiileriibungen, Fig. 13) 0. lo.o
53,932b. 30 Lenses, arranged in dioptres, in box, for use with preceding apparatus and with
apparatus for determining focal length. No. 53,932c, and the Grinisehl Diffraction
Apparatus No. 54,549, etc 1. 10.
Cl. 1369, 1360, 1367.

No. 53974. Optical Measuring Instruments. 499
53 934. 1 : 7. 53935. 1:3.
53,932 c. 2 Glow Lamp Holders and 1 Lens Mount on wood pillar, with glow lamps and mea- s. d.
suring rod, after Grimsehl, for determining the focal length of convex lenses and of
concave lenses in practical school work (E. Grimsehl, Ausgewahlte physikal. Schiiler-
iibungen, Figs. 2326) 0. 12.
Lenses for above: see No. 53,932 b.
Optical Measuring Instruments.

53.933. Jamin's Circle, Figure, for all kinds of measurements on reflection, refraction
and polarisation (Jamin, cours de physique) 52.10.0
53.934. Total Reflectometer after Kohlrausch, Figure (W. u. E. phys. prakt. Fig. 159),
for determining the refractive indices of liquids and solids 9. 0.0
Spectrum Analysis and Synthesis.

53,!35. Glass Prism, F i
g u r c,
polished, 100 mm high and equal-sided, length of side 25 mm 0. 2.0
Plate Glass Prisms, equilateral, with three polished surfaces; height length of side:
List No. 53,936 53,937 53,938 53,939 53,940 53,941
Length of Side mm 30 35 40 45 50 60
0.5.0 0.6.0 0.8.0 0.10.0 0.12.0 0.15.0
Plate Glass Prisms, long pattern, equilateral, with three polished surfaces:
List No. 53,942 53,943 53,944 53,945 53,946 53,947 53,948
Length of Side mm 25 30 35 40 45 50 60
Height mm 50 60 70 80 90 100 120
0. 8. 0. 10. 0. 12. 0. 16. 1. 0. 1. 4. 1. 10.
Crown Glass Prisms, equilateral, with three polished surfaces; height == length of side:
List No. 53,949 53,950 53,951 53,952 53,953 53,954
Approx. Length of Side mm 30 35 40 45 50 60
0. 10. 0. 12. 0. 15. 0. 18. 1. 0. 1. 5.
Crown Glass Prisms, long pattern, equilateral, with three polished surfaces:
List No. 53,955 53,956 53,957 53,958 53,959 53,960 53,961
Approx. Length of Side mm 25 30 35 40 45 50 60
Approx. Height mm 50 60 70 80 90 100 120
0. 15. 1. 0. 1. 5. 1. 10. 1. 15. 2. 0. 2. 10.
Prisms made of glasses whose refractive index is greater than 1.7,icrease 100% in price.
Flint Glass Prisms, equilateral, with three polished surfaces; height == length of side:
List No. 53,962 53,963 53,964 53,965 53,966 53,967
Approx. Length of Side mm
30 35 40 45 50 60
0. 10. 0. 12. 0. 15. 0. 18. 1. 0. 1. 5.
Flint Glass Prisms, long pattern, equilateral, with three polished surfaces:
List No. 53,968 53,969 53,970 53,971 53,972 53,973 53,974
Approx. Length of Side 25mm 30 35 40 45 50 60
Approx. Height mm 50 60 70 80 90 100 120
0. 15. 1. 0. 1. 5. 1. 10. 1. 15. 2. 0. 2. 10.
(Jl. 6030, 1323.

32*
500 Spectrum Analysis and Synthesis. No. 53975 -
53 988/94. 1 : 4. 53 995. 1 : 3. 53 996. 1 : 6.
Prisms of Rock Crystal, the refracting edge ground perpendicular to the optical axis, with s. d.
two polished square surfaces:
List No. 53,975 53,976 53,977 53,978 53,979 53,980
Side, approx. 20 mm25 30 35 40 50
1.5.0 1.10.0 2.0.0 2.10.0 3.5.0 4.10.0
The rays which traverse the prism at minimum deflection are parallel to the optical axis.
Prisms of Rock Crystal, the refracting edge ground parallel to the optical axis, with three
polished square surfaces, showing double refraction:
List No. 53,981 53,982 53,983 53,984 53,985 53,986
Side, approx. 20 mm25 30 35 40 50
1.5.0 1.10.0 2.0.0 2.10.0 3.5.0 4.10.0
Prism Stands, with height adjustment, cf. Figs. 53,987 94; the prisms can be rotated about
two horizontal axes perpendicular to each other.
List No. 53,988 53,989 53,990 53,991 53,992 53,993 53,994
Without Prism 0. 18. 0. 18. 1. 0. 1. 0. 1. 4. 1. 4. 1. 10.

The preceding prices include the cementing in of the prisms if the latter are ordered at the same
time as the Stands.
53.995. Crossed Prisms after Newton, Fig. 53,995, of plate glass, side 30 mm (Gan.-Man.
Fig. 364; Gan.-Atk. Fig. 554) ............ .............. 2.16.0
53.996. Double Prism on Stand, Figure, of Crown and Flint Glass cemented together,
25 mmside, 50mm length; for showing the varying refraction of different media . 1.16.0
53.997. --idem, 30 mm side, 60 mm long ..................... 2. 0.
53.998. Polyprism on Stand, of three kinds of glass cemented together, 25 nun side, 40 mm
long ..................................... 2. 0.0
53,999.
- - ide 30 mm
in,60 mm long .....................
side, 2. 10.
54.000. --id o in, F i

g n r c, of five kinds of glass cemented together, 25 mm side, 40 nun
long, on Stand ................................ 2. lo. u
54.001.
-- idem, .30 mm 60 mm long .....................
side, 3. 5.
54.002. Polyprism, of four kinds of glass :ui<! a Quartz Prism cemented together. '2~> mm side,
40 mmlong, on Stand ............................. 3. 0. d
54.003. --idem, 30 mm 60 mm long .....................

side, 4. 0.
Stages for Prisms: see. Nos. 54,061, p. 503. ci. 1324, isss, 5769.
Nci. 54015. Solid Prisms. Hollow Prisms. 501
54 007. 1 : 2.
54 006. 1 : 2.
54012. 2:5.
54000. 1:4.
54009. 54 010. 1 : 5. 54015. 3
s. d.
54.004. Carbon Bisulphide Prism, flask form, Figure . 0. 16.
54.005. --idem, of black glass, with plate glass sides . 0. 18.
54.006. Hollow Prism of solid glass with a perforated aperture and two plate glass discs,
Figure(Gan.-Atk. Fig. 535) 0. 14.
54.007. Hollow Prism after Meyerstein, pierced, Figure, with detachable surfaces and
accurately ground angle of 35, in metal mount, aperture 20 (M. P. II, 1, Fig. 159 mm
[177]; W. u. E. phys. Prakt., Fig. 147), for determining the refractive indices of liquids 3. 0.0
VI, 008. -- idem, with quartz walls 4.10.0
54.009. Hollow Prism of solid glass, after Steinheil, Figure, with pierced aperture 20 mm
diameter, closed by two plane parallel glasses which are pressed on to the glass body 4. 10.
54.010. Hollow Prism on Stand, with two compartments, Figure, in brass mount . . 2. 4.
- - with three compartments

54.011. idem, 2. 16.
54.012. Hollow Prism of Crystal Glass, Figure, assembled with acid-proof cement fused
in the fire, for any liquids alcohol, water, acids, etc.; one side blackened, with care-
fully ground in glass stopper; outside dimensions: height 75 mm, side 35 mm ... -0.10.0
54.013.
-- idem, height 90 mm, side 60 mm 0.16.0
54.014.
- -
idem, height 100 mm, side 80 mm 1. 0.
54.015. Hollow Prism with Partition Wall, of crystal glass, Figure, for filling simulta-
neously with two different liquids, with wood support. Outside dimensions: Height
100 mm, side 60 mm . . 1. 0.
Cl. 1328, 1321), 1330, 1333. 1335,

1334, 1331, 1336.
502 Spectrum Analysis and Synthesis. No. 54016
;
54019, 1:4.
54022/27. 1:2-1:4.
54 020. 1 : 2.
54 029/54 031. 1 : 6. 54 033. 1 : 6. 54034. 1:8.
54,016. Hollow Prism, trough form, with loose cover, with one compartment, 50 mm lorn:,
s. d
55 mm side . 0. 9.0
54.017. --idem, with two compartments 0. 16.
- - with three compartments O.o

54.018. idem, 1.
- -
54.019. idem, with four compartments, Figure 1. 6. (I
54,020. Differential Prism (Double Trough) after Hallwachs, Figure, for determining
small differences in refractive ratios of liquids (Wied. Ann. 50, p. 577; Kohlrausch,
Lehrb. d. prakt. Phys., 10th. Edn., p. 260); all three sides traversed by the light are
of plate glass 1.13.0
54,021. --idem, all three surfaces of plane parallel glass 5. 0.0
Wernicke Liquid Prisms, Figure:

List No. 54,022 54,023 54,024 54,025 54,026 54,027
Free Aperture, abt. 20x20 27x27 mm 34x34 41x41 45x45 50x50
2. 15. 3. 0. 4. 0. 5. 0. 8. 0. 13. 0.
The prism is filled with cinnamic ethyl ether; it is mounted in wood to prevent temperature
variations: it is supplied with direct or deflected ray.
54,028.
- -
idem, constructed round; can be taken apart for cleaning, aperture 30 mm . 5. 0.0
In this type all cement is eliminated.
Direct-Vision Prisms after Konigsberger, F i g u r e, filled with durable liquid (Ztschr. f. d.
phys. u. chem. U. 22, 1909, p. Ill; Phys. Ztschr. 9, p. 727):

List No. 54,029 54,030 54,031
Free Aperture mm 25 X 25 40 x 40 55 X 55
1.10.0 2.10.0 4.10.0
54.032. Gas Prism after Biot and Arago,

for determining the absolute coefficient of refraction
of air and other
gases,, with barometer gauge, brass mount and stopcock, for setting
up on the air-pump (Gan.-Atk. Fig. 536) 3. 0.0
54.033. Variable Angle Prism, Figure, for taking various liquids, simple pattern . . . 13. 2.0
- - d
54.034. i e in,Figure, better construction, with degree graduation 2. 10.
54.035. Prism Apparatus, Figure, with three prisms for demonstrating the achromatic
Prism and the Direct-Vision Prism (W. D. Fig. 298 [281]) 1'. 8.0
Cl. 1338,^98.
Diffraction Gratings: see Section "Diffraction of Light".

1341.
Xo. 54069. Hollow Prisms, Prim-Combinations. Rainbow. 503
54 068. 1 : 5.
54 035. 1 : 6. 54 036/39. 1 : 5. 54 062. 1 : 4. 54 063. 1 : 6.
Achromatic Prisms, on stand, arranged for separating the prisms

Figure, : B. d.
List No. 54,036 54,037 54,038 54,039
Side-Length, abt. 30 mm
35 40 50
1.8.0 1.12.0 2.0.0 2.8.0
Prism System after Amici, with direct vision, triple, consisting of 1 flint glass prisma and two
crown glass prisms:
List No. 54,040 54,041 54,042 54,043 54,044 54,045
Side, abt. mm 10 15 20 25 30 35
(a) Without Mount . 1.0.0 1.10.0 2.0.0 2.10.0 3.5.0 4.5.0
(b) With Mount, Dia-
phragm and Stand 2.0.0 2.10.0 3.0.0 3.10.0 4.10.0 5.10.0
-
idem, quintuple, consisting of two flint glass and three crown glass prisms :
List No. 54,046 54,047 54,048 54,049 54,050 54,051 54,052

Side, abt, mm 10 15 20 25 30 35 38
(a) Without Mount .1.5.0 2.5.0 3.5.0 4.10.0 5.15.0 7.0.0 8.0.0
(b) With Mount, Dia-
phragm and Stand 2. 5. 3. 5. 4. 5. 5. 10. 7. 0. 8. 5. 9. 10.
Rutherford's Prisms:
List No. 54,053 54,054 54,055 54,056 54,057 54,058 54,059
Aperture, mm 25 30 35 40 45 50 60
2. 10. 3. 0. 3. 15. 5. 0. 6. 5. 9. 0. 12. 10.
54.060. Model Prism-combination after Weinhold (W. D. Fig. 319)

of the Porro 1. 4.0
54.061. Adjustable Rotary Stage for setting up any kind of Prism 0.16.0
54.062. Pyramidal Rectangular Prism, Figure, of crystal glass, in mount on stand, for
producing four spectra 2. 0.0
54.063. Crystal Glass Cone, F i
g u r p.,
in Mount on Stand, for producing a round spectrum
(rainbow) 1. 5.0
- -
54.064. i (I e m, of flint glass, in mount, on Stand 2. 5.0
- - d
54.065. i e m, of crown glass, in mount, on Stand 2. 0.0
54.066. Crystal Glass Cone, without mount or stand 0. 10.
54.067. Cone, after Thompson, for producing a Rainbow, on Stand, cf. Fig. 54,068 . . . 5.15.0
The vessel above the cone is filled with cinnamic ethyl ether.
- - without stand, Figure... 5.0
54.068. idem, 4.
4,069. Rainbow Apparatus after Grimsehl (Ztschr. f. d. phys. u. chem. U. 20, 1907, p. 213),
consisting of a glass vessel representing the rain-drop, on Stand, and a receiving screen
with gap 2. 0.0
CI. 4924,
Large Optical Benches with Accessories for Objectively
8107.1343,1346,1347.
Projecting the Spectrum, etc.: see further on in list.
L
504 Spectrum Analysis and Synthesis. No. 54070 -
11
54070. 1:8. 54 072. 1 : 16. 54078. 1:9.
* 54,070. Apparatus for Demonstrating the Spectrum and the Fraunhofer Lines, Figure, s. d.
consisting of a flint glass prism of 40 mm

side and an achromatic lens 50 diam., mm
fitted together on one stand, the prism rotary 3. 0.
The apparatus can be placed both in front of the heliostat or the projection lantern, as it has
a tall adjustable stand.
* 54,071.
- -
idem, with prism of 45 mm side and achromatic lens 60 mm diameter ... 4. 0.
* 54,072. Apparatus with 7 Mirrors, Figure, for re-combining the light split up into the
spectrum colours; consisting of 7 plane mirrors 55 diam., in mounts, movable in mm
all directions, on adjustable stand 4. 0.
* 54,073. - -
idem, smaller, with mirrors 40 mm diameter 3. 0.
* 54,074. - -
idem, with three mirrors 40 mm diameter 1. 10.
* 54,075. Laminated Mirror after Costing (Ztschr. f. d. phys. u. chem. U. 11, 1898, p. 132;
M. T. p. 186) 2. 10.0
* 52,043. Oscillating Prism, Fig. 51,949 B, p. 278, for mixing the spectrum colours, for the Whir-
ling Table (M. P., 8th. Edn., II, 1, Fig. 137), prism 60x30 price without Whirlin- mm;
Table '. 1.5.0
#52,044. -- idem, prism 70x35 mm, see No. 52,044, p. 285 1.10.0
52.034. One Set Colour Discs, 7 different mono-chromatic discs and one with the seven colours
of the spectrum (Gan.-Atk. Figs. 562/64), see No. 52,034, p. 284 0. 5.0
The mono-chromatic discs are slotted in accordance with Maxwell's method, in order to produce
mixed colours and white.
52.035. Newton's Colour Disc with the 7 Spectrum Colours, painted as clearly as possible on
a metal disc, giving white when rotated, 120 mm
size; see No. 52,035, p. 284 ... 0. 4.0
52.036.
- -
idem, larger, 250 mm diameter, see No. 52,036 on p. 284 0. 6.
54,076. Top for Rotating Colour Discs, Figure, with flywheel and grip, without Colour Disc 0. 10.
54,078. Colour Disc with Rotating Apparatus, Figure 1. 5.0

The coloured sectors are on the back of the disc and are not visible in the illustration.
51,969. Cord Gearing for setting colour discs and the like into very rapid rotation, fitting
Whirling Tables Nos. 51,949/51,968, cf. Fig. 51,969, p. 279; without Colour Disc or
Whirling Table 1. 0.0
In addition to the Whirling Table and a Colour Disc being necessary for this collect inn, the
larger Cord Pulley of Apparatus No. 51,975 is required, and this Apparatus should be ordered separately
if not available.
* 54,079. Transparent Colour Disc (Newton's) with 7 colours on glass, for objective projection,
with device for rotating 1. 0.0
The colour disc gives a good white.
Cl. 1365,
* Can be used with Projection Apparatus. isei, 1364, taue.
No. 54082. Spectrum, Colour Mixing, Spectrometers. 505
54 080. 1 : 6.
54081. 1:6.
s. d.
Spectrum Apparatus and Accessories, Spectrometers,
Spectographs, etc.
54,080. Large Precision Spectrometer, Figure, with rotary divided circle 255 mm
diameter 75. 0.0
The divided circle is graduated in Viz an d has alidade and two microscopes for estimating to
1 . The telescopes, with 33,5 mm aperture, can be adjusted vertically. The entire instrument can
be rotated about its vertical axis, has a symmetrical gap with comparison prism, reflecting eyepiece
and an adjustable prism of 50 mm.
54.081. Spectrometer after Bunsen, Figure, with fixed divided circle 270 mm diameter 45. 0.0
circle isdivided in Ye the vernier reading gives 10". The objectives have a focal length
_The ,
of 325 mm and aperture of 33,5 mm. The gap with comparison prism opens symmetrically to the
right and left. The apparatus has a rotary table for taking a number of prisms. Two oculars (one
after Gauss) and a prism pertain to the^ apparatus. The entire apparatus can be rotated about a
vertical axis.
54.082. Polarisation Outfit for above, with two nicols and two position circles 100 mm diameter, graduated
on silver, vernier for 1 / lt> and Babinet Compensator for elliptic polarisation 22. lit. d
Cl. 1373, 1374.

506 Spectrum Apparatus. No. 54 083
54 083 B. 1:5. 54086. 1:5.
Repeating Spectrometer, A and B, with two telescopes of 2(! nun aperture

Figs. s. d.
and 234 mm Gauss Ocular, with concealed circle and arrangement,

focal length, with
for carrying out goniometric measurements by Wollaston's method 41. 5.0
The circle is divided in '/4 on silver and permits of readings by a magnifying glass and two
verniers to 2o". Fig. A shows the instrument set up for use as a spectrometer, and Fig. B for use
as a goniometer.
- -
54,084. idem, without concealed graduated circle or arrangement to permit of gonio-
metric measurements being made by Wollaston's method 33. 0. o
A Gauss Ocular is given in for goniometric measurements.
Spectrometer after v. Lang, see Fig. 53,827, p. 482, practical school model for laboratories,
with concealed circle and magnifier reading; also adaptable as goniometer, without
prism 15. 0.
54.086. Wave Length Spectrometer with variable Deflection, Figure, especially adapted
for rapid and accurate measurements 32. 10. o
The apparatus has a <|iiadrilatcral prism which totally reflects and refracts the light. The stage
is arranged to rotate so as to be able to determine the wave lengths of the spectrum-lines observed. The
wave lengths are read direct on a spiral drum.
Focal length of observing telescope and of the gap tuhe 2!).-J"> cm. aperture :il.:> nun.
- - i de
54.087. m, with lengthened arm for the gap-tube in order to be able to place on it
a Michelson Echelon Grating (No. 54,090) a Lummer-dehreke Plate (No. 51,0*9) "i
a Fabry and Perot Air-plate (No. 54,091) 45. 0. d
54.088. Micrometer Ocular for above, for measuring lie diameter of the Haidinger Intciiercnec-
t
ring System when using the Fabry and Perot Interference Air-plate No. 51. (MM as an
auxiliary to the Echelon grating and the Lummer-Gehroke Parallel Plate 8.15.0
(1. 1376,
Diffraction Gratings: see Section "Diffraction of Light". 1377,771
No. 54 096. Spectrum Apparatus and Accessories. 507
54092. 1:8. 54 095. 1 : 6.
54.089. Interference Plate after Lummer-Gehrcke, Figure, in mount, for using ordinary s. d.
spectroscopes as Interference Spectroscopes, for demonstrating the Zeeman effect, etc. ;
also specially adapted for Spectrometer No. 54,087, for obtaining high resolving power 12. 10.
54.090. Echelon Grating after Michelson, Figure, for the same purpose 12. 10.
54.091. Interference Plate after Fabry and Perot, standard of approximately 10 air mm
distance, for measuring wave lengths by utilising Haidinger's Interference Rings; can
be used with Spectrometer No. 54,087, with quartz hollow cylinder of low temperature
coefficient between the boundary plates 11. 5.0
54.092. Spectrum Apparatus with a Rutherford Prism, Figure 23. 0.0

The observing telescope and gap-tube have an aperture of 30 mm and focal length of 312 mm.
The telescope is a power 10 instrument; diameter of plate 180 mm; telescope focussed by micrometer
screw; arc divided in '/u with vernier, in one piece with the alidade of the telescope, permitting a
reading of 12", by which the position of the lines in the spectrum is determined. Gap with micro-
meter screw and comparison prism. The dispersion from A H 2 is 14. The two D-lines are at an
angle of 1' 36" to each other; the fine nickel line should be plainly visible between these when the
instrument is correctly focussed.
54.093. --the same apparatus, with arrangement for convenient reading of the
scale parts 26. 0.
Areading tolescope is fixed above the observing telescope and parallel to the same. The former
telescope has a right-angled prism at the end and brings to the vision of the observer by reflection
the graduation of the divided arc and of the vernier.
54.094. Spectrum Apparatus, as No. 54,092, but smaller pattern; observing telescope with
aperture of 27 mm and focal length of 230 mm, power 8; a gap-tube of the same dimen-
sions; with brass plate on which both tubes are mounted, of 155 mm
diameter; graduated
arc divided in 1 / 6 vernier giving 30"
,
18. 0.
54.095. Spectrum Apparatus, F i g u r e, same size as No. 54,092, but instead of having a
Eutherford Prism is fitted with a 60 prism constmcted of extra heavy flint glass and
with a dispersion of 7. The position of the lines in the spectrum is in this case de-
termined by a telescope with photographic scale instead of by divided circle. The
observing tube can be adjusted by micrometer screw. Gap with micrometer screw and
comparison prism 14. 0.
54.096. Spectrum Apparatus with observing telescope and gap-tube of 27 aperture and mm
230 mm
focal length, with the scale telescope mounted on a brass plate 135 in mm
diameter; observing tube without rack or micrometer screw; gap with micrometer
screw and comparison prism 7. 10.
This apparatus is very efficient in spite of its low price; externally it resembles very closely
Fig. 54,095.
Cl. 5595, 5372,

6055, 1384.
508 Spectrum Apparatus. No. 54 097
54 100. 1 : 7. 54 101. 1 : 6.
s. d
54,097. School Spectrum Apparatus, Figure 4. 10.

The apparatus has a 60" prism constructed of medium heavy flint glass and fitted on a brass
plate 92 mm diameter on which is mounted the telescope, with scale. The observing telescope and
gap tube are placed on the two arms, rotating on a trunnion, and situated underneath the plate.
The arm carrying the observing telescope is movable and can be firmly clamped in any position in order
to observe the spectrum conveniently. The observing telescope and gap tube have an aperture of
20 mm, a focal length of 150 mm, and a magnification of 5. The gap has a micrometer screw and,
for the purposes of better demonstration, a Comparison Prism which can be switched out of operation.
Dispersion 4". The stand has height adjustment.
54,098. the same Apparatus, but without Telescope and Scale or Comparison
Prism 4. 0.0
Goniometers and Spectrum Apparatus for students' exercises, after Grimsehl (Ztschr. f. d.
phys. u. chem. U. 17, 1904, p. 207), see No. 53,818, p. 481 2. 8.
54.099. Spectrum Apparatus for Chemical and Pharmaceutical Researches, F g u i r c, arranged

for setting up horizontally and vertically 10. 0.
When the apparatus is set up vertically both the sunlight and flames various heights can be
tit
observed. A heavy flint glass prism (60) is enclosed in a tightly fitting cap.
54.100. Spectrograph, F g u r c, consisting of a Spectroscope combined with a Photographic
i
Camera 13x18 cm ,12. 10.

The spectroscope contains <|iiintuple direct-vision pri-m. 1 triple eollimator objective of 20
1 mm
aperture, 1 single micrometer gup slider with divided drum. The camera r;m lie rotated in the vertical
plane and a rack is provided tor sharp focussing. The ground gluss disc aud the dark slide can be
displaced vertically so as to admit of exposures being made on one plute. The apparat us is specially
,">
suitable for investigating colour-sensitive plates and for teaching purposes.
CI. 1385, 1387,

1388. 1388.
No. 54110. Spectrum Apparatus. Zeenian Phenomenon. 509
54103,54108. 1:8. 54 110. 1 : 9.
54.101. Direct-vision Spectroscope after Janssen-Hofmann, Figure (Fr. phys. Techn. II,
. s. d.
2, Fig. 2818 [II, 904]) 16. 0.0

Observing telescope and gap-tube with 22 mm aperture, 182 mm
focal length and approx.
power 7. Gap with micrometer screw and comparison prism. On the middle cylindrical portion, in
which the prism-system is fixed, a telescope with photographic scale is arranged laterally. The move-
ment of the observing tube is carried out by a micrometer screw with a view to controlling the very
extended spectrum, while focussing is carried out by rack and pinion. The apparatus is mounted on
a stand having universal motion. Dispersion from A H 1 approx. 9. ,
54.102.
- -
idem, with two prism-systems and twice the dispersion (approx. 18) .... 20. 0.0
54.103. Interference Spectroscope after Lummer-Gehrcke, Figure

(Verhandl. d. Deutschen
Physikal. Gesellschaft 9, 1907, p. 529), also adapted as an ordinary spectrum apparatus
with low dispersion and, in conjunction with the necessary accessories, for demonstrating
the Zeeman effect 18. 0.0
The
resolving power of this apparatus is extraordinarily high so great that '/too of the distance
of the D-lines can be resolved. The apparatus has a simple gap, one ocular with cross wires, one plane
parallel glass strip and a reflecting prism. It is for use as a low-dispersion spectrum apparatus.
54.104. Wollaston Prism, in Mount, for sliding over the ocular of the Spectroscope 1. 7.
1
54.105. Wollaston Prism with /t wave-length plate, in mount 2. 0.0
54.106. Spectrum Tube with H or Hg 0. 7.0
54.107. Spectrum Tube Stand with Condenser and Electromagnet for 6 volts, for demonstrating the Zeeman effect 5. 5.
54.108. idem, with double Electromagnet, Figure, for the Zeeman transverse and longitudinal effect 10. 10.0
54.109. Interference Spectroscope as No. 54,103, for use as a

Spectrum Apparatus with strong
dispersion ................................... 32. 0.0
The apparatus has a second flint glass prism and direct-vision prism body which can be switched
into operation, simple gap, one Ramsden ocular of 28 mm
and a similar one of 19 focal length mm
with cross wires and plane parallel glass strip.
54.110. Grating Spectroscope for the Zeeman Phenomenon, after Weinhold, Figure, with
aEowland Plane Grating and an Electromagnet, for observing in a longitudinal direction
and in a direction transverse to the lines of force ................ 60. 0.
The apparatus
arranged in such manner that the observing telescope can be shifted over for
is
observations with the right or left eye. The electromagnet can be rotated about its vertical axis
and, at the positions in which the magnetic axis coincides with the axial direction of the collimator
tube, or perpendicular to this, it can be clamped with a securing pin. If a mercury spectrum tube,
fixed between the magnet poles, is illuminated by a spark-coil, it shows the characteristic green line
of mercury in a simple manner as long as the magnet is unexcited, but an extended line is shown
when (lie magnet is excited. In addition the observed line of the spectrum is polarised. In observing
perpendicular to the lines of force three single lines result (a triplet) which are rendered the most plain
when the S6narmont Prism, given in with the apparatus, is placed on the ocular which, acting as an
analyser, shows two spectra which are brought above each other by rotating; two lines then appear
in the deflected polarised part, and a single line in the unpolarised. In observing in the direction
of the lines of force a doublet is produced consisting of two circular -polarised lines.
Cl. 6050, 5533.

510 Spectrum Apparatus. N'o. 54111
54 113 A. 1:2.
54113B. 1:2.
54 112. 1 : 6.
54 117. 1 : 2.
54116. 1=4.
54 118. 1 : 2. 54 119. 1 : 4.
s. d.
54.111. Spectroscope after Mousson, very simple (M. P., 9th. Edn., II, 1, Pig. 196) . . . 3. 0.0
The spectroscope has an adjustable stand, gap with comparison prism and micrometer screw,
gap-tube with lens of 160 mm focal length, also an extra heavy flint glass prism.
54.112.
-- idem, without comparison prism, Figure '2.16.0
54.113. School Spectroscope, F g s. A

and B, consisting of a Gap-tube with gap and Ions
i
and two extensions, one with a direct-vision prism and a second with a Flint Glass
Prism 1. 15.
54.114. Cap for above with aperture for containing reagent glasses, with 6 reagent glasses 0. 7.0
54.115. Stand for No. 54,113 to enable the apparatus to be tilted 0.11.0
54.116. Students' Spectroscope, very simple pattern, Figure, with triple prism (direct-
vision), non-adjustable gap, on wood stand for convenience of manipulation .... 1. 6.0
54.117. Pocket Spectroscope with Diffraction Grating, Figure, showing hundreds of lines
in the solar spectrum; the D
line is split up 3. 0.0
A good imitation of a genuine Rowland Grating is used as Diffraction Grating for the instrument.
54.118. Pocket Spectroscope with Diffraction Grating and Reading Device, F g u r < i 5. 0.0
A brilliantly illuminating arrow, visible above the spectrum, can be placed on a difinite line by
means of a milled wheel. By means of a special lens, fitted alongside the eyepiece, tin- position of the
arrow can be read off externally on a scale; the readings correspond to the momentary wave-lengths.
fl. 13<in. .1040, BMQ,
4151, 1393,
4152, 1395
Xo. 54 126. Spectroscopes and Stands. 511
54 123 C, 54126. 1:4. 54 123 A. 1: 1.
s. d.
54.119. Pocket Spectroscope after Hofmann, Figure 5. 10.

The spectroscope is provided with a telescope of approx. power 4, movable between pivot screws,
also with a prism-system of 9 dispersion. The spectrum is consequently greatly extended. The
construction is similar to that of the Janssen- Hofmann Spectroscopes and the gap is very accurately
T'onstriifted and adjustable^ With scale and comparison prism, in case.
54.120. Pocket Spectroscope after Vogel, Figure, with direct-vision prism and with com-
parison prism in case 2. 5.0
- -
54.121. i d e m, without comparison prism, Figure, in case 1. 13.
54.122. Stand for Vogel Spectroscopes Nos. 54,120/1, cf. Figure, without Spectroscopes . . 0. 12.
54.123. Pocket Spectroscope after Browning, Figs. A, B, C, with scale, comparison prism,
symmetrical gap and lens disc after Martens, in case 4. 15.
The gap distance in this instrument is fixed. The sharp focussing for different eyes is brought
about by an excentric disc with six louses of different powers.
54.124. Pocket Spectroscope as No. 54,123, but with easily removable cap, reflecting prism
and Beckmann electric illuminating device, with three dry cells in small box . . . 7. 10.0
54.125. -> idem, with wave-length scale 8. 0.0

7
54.126. Universal Stand, for use with lS os. 54,120/5, Figs. 54,123 B and C, with illuminating
mirror, stage and clamp for the spectroscope, one absorption trough, one absorption
tube. Price without Spectroscope 3. 5.0
I'm investigations on weakly absorbent solutions or on solids the spectroscope is placed verti-
cally see illustration.
Cl. 1396, 5951, 3802, 1400,

1401, 1398.
512 Accessories for Spectrum Apparatus. No. 54127
54131. 1:6.
~-^*B F
54 128. 1:5. 54 133. 1 : 5. 54 134. 1 : 2.
54.127. Double Gap with micrometer adjustment, Figure, for comparing the luminous <*
intensities of two spectra, for demonstrations 2. 8.

The colours of one spectrum are conducted through the gap by the aid of a total reflecting prism. :
54.128. Universal Stand for Spectrum experiments, Figure 3. 0.

The Stand serves for holding small glass troughs, spectrum tubes, the Delachanal and Mermet
spark tubes, and as a holder for glass tubes having platinum lugs.
54.129. Small Glass Tube with platinum lugs. Price per 12 0. 6.
54.130. Stand for holding the small glass tubes (M. P. II, 1, Fig. 475 [216]) 0. 4.
'
54.131. Burner for Monochromatic light, after Terquem, Figure 1. 10.
54.132. Burner for monochromatic light, after Noack, Figure (Ztschr. z. Ford. d. phys.
U., 2, p. 67) .' . 0. Hi. o
54.133. Breitenlohner's Spirit Lamp, Figure, with Bunsen burner attachment and safety
tube, on tripod 0. 16.
Spirit Bunsen Burners, substitute for Gas Burners: see Nos. 51,214 and 51,216, p. 209.
54.134. Spirit Lamp, Figure, with adjustable holder for platinum wires, of brass ... 0.12.0
Bunsen Burners: see Nos. 51,184 et seq.
54.135. Spectrum Lamp for continuous Vapour Spectra, after Eder andValenta, with a rotating
platinum wire net which plunges in the liquid (M. P. II, 1, Fig. 479), without plati-
num net 5. 0.
The price of the platinum net (based on the current price of platinum) quoted on application.
Cl. 5212, 3390, 1409,
1408, 1410, 3391.
No. 54 144. Spectrum Lamps. 513
54136. 1:3.
54137. 1:12. 54 143. 1 : 8.
54139. 1:6. 54142. 1:5. 54144. 1:3.
51,130. Spectrum with angular pulveriser after Beckmann, Figure (Ztschr. f. phys.
Lamp s. d.
Chemie, 40, p. 470), with burner, rubber tubing and pinch-cock, especially for labo-
ratory work 0. 12.
54.137. Large Spectrum Lamp for chemical pulverisation, after Beckmann, Figure, for
demonstrating the influence of coloured flames on environment (Ztschr. f. phys.
Chemie, 57, 1907, p. 641) 1.10.0
54.138. 7 Diaphragms for Relief Spectra (M. T. p. 187 [188]) 1. 4.0

* r>4,139. Lantern for objective Chemical Spectra, Figure
(W. D. Fig. 295 [278]), for demon-
strating the principal spectra by means of sets of Bengal Lights 1. 6.0
54,140. Lantern with Nernst Lamp, after Grimsehl, for optical experiments (Sonderhefte d.
Xtsehr. f. d. phys. u. chem. U. 1, p. 53), with lens mount, diaphragms, gap, etc. . . 2.18.0
* r>4,141. Collimator Tube with Micrometer Gap after Grimsehl, on Stand, for demonstrating
the spectrum objectively (Ztschr. f. d. phys. u. chem. U. 20, 1907, p. 209, Fig. 1C) 1. 4.0
54.142. Mitscherlich's Apparatus, F i g u r e, with 8 glass tubes with platinum wicks, for
permanent spectra 1. 6.0
54.143. Revolving Device on Stand, Figure, for observing 6 spectra consecutively, con-
sisting of six carbon rods impregnated with different salts 2. 10.
t,144. Revolving Device for Arc Lamps, Figure, for rapidly alternating six carbon rods;
to be used instead of the lower carbon of the projection arc lamp 1. 0.
50,922. 6 bored Carbons with Solid Carbons, the former filled with salts, for spectrum e
ments (see No. 50,922, p. 171) 0. 9.0
* Can be used with Projection Apparatus. ci. Mil, 5928, 5871,
1362, 1412, 1414. 33
514 Accessories for Spectrum Apparatus. No. 54145
54 145. 1 : 7. 54 146. 1 : 8. 54 147. 1 : 2. 54 149. 1 : 4.
54 150 54 154. 1 : 8. 54 155 54 159. 1 : 8.
54.145. Apparatus for investigating Metal Spectra by the aid of the spark intensified by the *
Leyden Jar, Figure 1.12.0

There ;ire supplied with the apparatus metal points of copper, brass, iron, aluminium and German
silver. For Condensers: see Electricity Section.
54.146.
- -
idem, simpler, Figure.... i 0. 16.
54.147. Spark Tube after Delachanel and Merniet (Fulgurator), Figure (W. u. E. phys.
prakt., Fig. 189) o. ;;. d
- - with stand
54.148. idem, 0. 12.
th
54.149. i d e m, after Vogel, Figure (M. P. 9 Edn., II, 1, Fig. 219 )
0.15.0
Sparking Pillars for Metal Spectra and Spark Tubes for Liquids, after Browning, combined with
Condenser for intensifying the spark, Figure.
List No. 54,150 54,151 54,152 54,153 54,154
For induction Coils
with Spark Lengths of 60 mm100 150 200 LT.O
5.0.0 6.0.0 9.0.0 12.0.0 15.0.0
Sparking Pillars after Browning, Figure, as before, but witli device for inserting 2, 4,
6, 8, 10 20 condenser plates for intensifying the spark as desired.
List No. 54,155 '54,156 54,157 54,158 54,159
For Induction ('oils
with Spark Lengths of o mm
100 150 200 250
7.0.0 8.0.0 11.0.0. 14.0.0 17.0.0
54,160. 2 Sheet Iron Electrodes for producing the Spectra of incandescent Vapours (M. T.
0. 4.
Fig. 145)
C'l. 1415,1416, 1419,3838,
1417. 1418
X.i. S4 174.
Spark Tubes, Spectrum Tubes, Spectrum Lamps. 515
54173. 1:3. 54174A. 1:4.
54 168. 1 : 3. 54 172. 1 : 4. 54 174 B. 1:4.
54.161. Spectrum Tube after Geissler, Figure, thoroughly well constructed, with O, H, s. d.
N, CO. CO 2 H 2O, Cl,

, HC1, Br, I, Cy, HOy, NO, NO 2 Carburetted Hydrogen; Solids:
,
S, Se, Hg or Hg S 2 each 0. 3. 6
54.162. Spectrum Tube, filled with argon (A) or helium (He) 0. 10.
54.163. Spectrum Tube with 2 cocks, Figure, for evacuating and filling automatically 0. 5.0
54.164. Stand for Spectrum Tubes, Figure 0. 18.
63,071. -- idem, simpler 0.10.0

- -
54.165. idem, after Friedr. C. G. Miiller (M. T. Fig. 144) 0. 12.
54.167. Spectrum Tube, end-on pattern, filled with O, H, N, CO, CO 2, H O,

2 Cl, HC1, Br, I,
Cy, HCy, NO, NO NH 3 SO SO 3 H
2, , 2, , 2 S, SnCl 2 etc
,
each 0. 5.0
54.168. Spectrum Tube with Capillary, with Cylindrical Electrodes, Figure, for viewing
cnd-ori and side-on from both sides, can be supplied filled with the same gases as
No. 54,167 0.10/0
- -
54.169. idem, filled with argon (A), helium (He) or a mixture of argon and helium |
0. 18.
54.172. Stand with Fine Motion for Spectrum Tubes, Figure, for concentric adjustment
of the capillary with the spectrum apparatus, vertical fine motion by screw M, hori-
zontal fine motion by lever H, vertical motion by lever V 2. 0.
54.173. Mercury Spectrum Lamp, Figure

This lamp generates an intense white light well adapted for optical purposes.
0. 10.
It is worked by
a not too small induction apparatus and requires no water cooling.
The lamp is arranged so that only the cross-section of the capillary tube is utilised; the luminous
source then shines as a small circular spot of great intensity.
54.174. Mercury Arc Lamp after Lummer-Straubel, Fig. A, with water box on adjustable
stand, Fig. B 4. 0.
The lamp
requires a pressure of 25 30 volts for working; even if it can stand a considerably
higher voltage than this it is not advisable to go above 30 volts if the lamp lias to be durable.
If it has only to be used for a very short time it will be sufficient simply to till the box witL
water; if, however, it is intended to work it for some hours the water must be made to circulate.
54, 174 A. Spare Mercury Arc Lamp, Figure 1. 5.
Cl. 1421, 1422, 1421 >. 1423, 1425.

4820,4841,1424. 33*
516 Accessories for Spectrum Apparatus. No. 54 176 -
54 192/93. 1 : 5. 54 189. 1 : 3. 54 195. 2. 54 196. 1 : 4.
Small Flasks with absorbent Liquids, with parallel walls, in case: s. d.

List No. 54,176 54,177 54,178
Quantity 6 9 12
0.10.0 0.15.0 1.0.0
54,179. Absorption Box with plane parallel detachable walls and Schulz Glass Block, F i-
Edn., II, 1, Fig. 241; W. u. E. phys. Prakt., Fig. 250)
th
gure(M. P. 9 0.18.0
54.180. Absorption Box, rectangular form, Figure, with wide projecting bottom plate
and loose cover; inside measurements: 55 x 35 x 10 mm 0. 3.0
54.181. -- idem, U-shaped, Figure; inside measurements: 30 x 20 x 5 mm . . . . 0. 2.0
54.182. -- idem, inside measurements: 50 x 20 x 5 mm 0. 2.6
54.183. --idem, bottle-shaped, Figure; inside measurements : 20x4 mm 0. 2.0
Hollow Crystal Glass Cubes, Fig. 54,187, open on one side:
List No. 54,184 54,185 54,186 54,187 54,188
External Size mm 30 40 50 60 80
0.1.6 0.2.0 0.3.0 0.4.0 0.6.0
54.189. Absorption Box with lid cemented on and ground-in stopper, Figure, 40 X 40 X 10 mm 0. 8.
54.190. Double Absorption Box, Figure, for simultaneously observing two different
liquids inside dimensions of each compartment 40 x 25 X 10
;
mm 0.12.
54.191. Absorption Vessel, wedge-shaped, 150 x 4x 25 mm 0. 12.
Prismatic Troughs, Figure, each pair similar. Combined these vessels form an absorption
stratum with parallel walls in which, by moving the single troughs, liquid strata of
different density can be rapidly produced.
List No. 54,192 54,193
mm 100x40 150x50
Per pair 0. 12. 1. 0.
54.194. Absorption Vessel, spherical, for gases, on Stand with lateral opening (M. P., 9
lh
Kdn.,
II.. 1, Fig. 222) 1.10.0
54.195. Absorption Trough for filling with <!ases. Figure, with two tubes ground in,
">:> mm
long, 35 wide, 10 mm deep mm 0. 8.
54, !<*;. Stand for holding Absorption Boxes, Troughs, Preparations, etc., Figure, with
arrangement for raising and lowering by hand and with micrometer. The objects art-
placed between two spring clamps and can be conveniently set up or removed ... 1. 0.0
51,197. 3 Gelatine Plates for Absorption Kxpeiiments (M. T. p. 198) 0. 2.
5J.I9S. 3 Coloured Glass Plates for Absorption (Experiments (M. T. p. 198) |

0. ".
Cl. 1426,1428,
1429,299,1430,1432.
1433,1431.1434,1435.
No. 54221. Absorption Vessels, Reagents. Reversal of Sodium Line. 517
54 214. 1 : 6.
54 217. 1 : 6.
54 199. 2 : 5. 54 203. 1 : 5.
54218. 4. 54221. 1
54.199. Coloured Plate with Coal-tar colours, for absorption experiments with transmitted s. d.
light, Figure 0. 13.

The slab contains eight different colours and a dark and a light tint for each colour. As shown
in illustration, white strips are free between the colours so that the absorption spectrum can be con-
veniently compared with the pure spectrum.
- -
54.200. idem, simpler, with only one tint for each colour; the single colours are sepa-
rated by black strips 0. 6.
54.201. Absorption Colour Plate for absorption experiments with reflected light, with seven
coloured cross strips 0. 4.
54.202. Crystal Plates showing absorption phenomena: Uranite, Chalcolite, Parisite, Zir-
conium, Didymium Glass each 0. 6. to 0. 10.
54.203. Preparations for Spectrum Experiments, in box, Figure, containing: 6 pairs rods
of silver, platinum, aluminium, zinc, copper, iron; 12 small bottles with parallel walls,
filled with absorbent liquids; 6 spectrum tubes; 10 small bottles with chlorides; 10 glass
tubes with platinum lugs 4. 4.
Salts for Spectrum Experiments, chemically pure, in preparation glasses:

List No. 54,204 54,205 54,206 54,207 54,208 54,209 54,210
Na K Li Ba Sr Ca Eb
0.0.6 0.0.6 0.0.6 0.0.6 0.0.6 0.0.6 0.1.0
54.214. 10 Reagents, Figure, in small bottles with ground-in stoppers, fitted in block
for storing 0. 15.
54.215. --idem, 6 Reagents 0. 10.
54.216. Box with Salts and Small Bottles, of mahogany, containing 10 Salts in small flasks,
and 14 small bottles for absorption phenomena 1. 16.
54.217. Box with Tubes, small Glass Vessels and Reagents, containing: 5 tubes of 2, 3, 10,
15, 20 cm length with ground end surfaces; a flat glass vessel with detachable parts;
2 glasses filled with NO 2 and Iodine; 10 glasses filled with salts; 12 glasses for absorption
phenomena; 10 glass tubes with platinum lugs 3.12.0
54.218. Collection of 18 Preparations, Figure, for Spectroscopic investigations, in glass
vessels having platinum wires, as follows: Ba 2 Cl 2 2H 2 O; CuCl 2 2H 2 O; CsCl; CaCl, + +
+6H 2 0;KaCl;In 2 Cl 6 ;LiCl; XaCl; PbCl 2 BbCl; SrCl a 6H 2 O; T1C1; Se; ZnCl 2 ; TeCl^
; +
and solutions of Di (NO 3 ) 3 ; 4 KaMnO
Er (NO 3 ) 3 in box ; ,
2. 4.
54.220. Apparatus for Reversal of the Sodium Line, after Bunsen (W. D. Fig. 297 [280]; M. P.,
9 th Edn., II, 1, Fig. 234) 0. 18.
- Bunsen
Weinhold, Figure 408 [375]), 1 Teclu and
-
54.221. idem, after (W. D. p. 1
Burner on one base, and one asbestos slab 0. 16.
Cl. 3633,1436, 1437, 1438,

3302, 1440.
518 Accessories for Spectrum Apparatus. Fluorescence. Phosphorescence. No. 54 222
SOLAR -SPECTRUM.
m n
A a B3D C D El) F
TO 4* :n o in so K HO 170 1M 140 ISO 1SQ 1/0
limiliiiiliimlmilfiiilfltifiifiiniMl '
inlimlliHlimliiuhtithiti
Max Kohl Chemnitz.
54 222.
1: 15. 54231. 1 : 11.
54.222. Apparatus for reversing the Sodium Line after Frankland, Figure (M. P., II, 1,
s. d.
Figs. 543 and 544 [231]), with platinum spoon and wire net 1.10. o
54.223. Sodium Tube forReversing the Sodium Lines of refractory glass, evacuated with H 0. 10.
- -
54.224. idem, with three bulbs 0. 10.
* 54,225. Bunsen-Burner with Pan and Sheet-iron Cylinder, after Grimsehl, for reversing the ,
sodium line, for objective demonstration (Ztschr. f. d. phys. u. chem. U. 20, 1907, p. 2<M>.
Fig. 1 [B] and Fig. 2) 0. 14.
* 54,226. Stand with illuminating Tube for reversing the strontium line, after Grimsehl, for
objective demonstration (Ztschr. f. d. phys. u. chem. U. 20, 1907, p. 211, Fig. 3 [B]) 0. 16.
54.227. Table of Spectra after Kirchoff and Bunsen, containing the solar spectrum and the
spectra of K, Eb, Cs, Tl, Na, Li, Ca, Sr, Ba 0. 7.
54.228.
- -
idem, containing the spectra of In, C, Bo, Mn, Pb, Cu, Co, Ni, Fe .... 0. 7.
54.229. Star Spectra Table after Vogel, containing the spectra of Sirius, ft Lyrae, Sun, B. D.
34 4001, new star in Cygnus, a Orionis, Schjell. 152, and Carburetted Hydrogen Spec-
trum for comparison 0. 7.
- -
54.230. containing the spectra of a nebula, of Uranus, of a comet, of carburet ted
idem,
hydrogen for comparison, of the Sun's limb and illustration of spectrum of the Sun's
limb with strong dispersion (displacement of lines) 0. 7.
54.231. Solar Spectrum, Figure, painted on linen, with frame, very pretty pattern . . 3.10.0
54.232.
- -
idem, with wood rods for rolling up, as Fig. 52,227, p. 36 ......... 3. 0.
* 54,233.
-- idem, transparent, coloured 1.0.0
Fluorescence.
54.234. 3 Cubes of fluorspar, uranium and didymium glass, fluorescing blue, green and red
respectively, 13 mm
side, in box 1.16.
54.235. Cube of Fluorspar, fluorescing blue, 13 mm side 1. 0.0
54.236.
- - of uranium glass, fluorescing green, 30 mm side 0. -. o
54.237.
-- idem, 50mm side 0. 1. (i
54.238. - - of
Didymium Glass, fluorescing red, 13 mm side 0. 12. o
54.239. Holder for Fluorescent Cubes, Figure, adjustable, with mount 0.18.0
When ordering kindly sliitc si/.c of rube to be inserted.
54.240. Uranium Glass Plate, 150 x 60 x 8 mm 0. :>. u
54.241.
-- i d e m, 300x60x8 mm 0. !<>. o
54.242. Collection for Fluorescence Experiments, Figure, consist in.-: of 4 hollow glass
cubes for liquids, rranium glass plate. Cranium glass cube, Didymium glass and fluor-
spar, also condenser lens on stand 3.10.0
* t'iiu be used with Projection Ap|Ki';itn- Cl. 1441, 142
No. 54257. Reversal of Sodium Line. Spectrum Tables. Fluorescence. Phosphorescence. 519
54 239. 1 : 4. 54 242. 1 : 7.
54 244. 1 : 6. 54 255/57. 1 : 3
Collection of Fluorescent Liquids, Fig. 54,244, named, in wood frame with covers: s. d.
List No. 54,243 54,244 54,245 54,243

6 8 10 12 solutions
0. 12. 0. 16. 1. 0. 1. 4.
54,247. Fluorescent Liquids for filling troughs 100 ccm 0. 2. 6
Quartz Lenses, bi-convex, radius of curvature 150 or 300 mm:

List No. 54,248 54,249 54,250
0.12.0 1.0.0 1.10.0
Geissler Tubes with Fluorescence Phenomena: see Section "Electricity".
54.251. Apparatus for Demonstrating the Fluorescence Spectrum of the Electric Light, after
Stokes (M. P., 9 lh Edn., II, 1, Fig. 250), consisting of 2 quartz prisms of 30 side, mm
ground perpendicular to optical axis, two sides polished; 1 quartz lens 40 diameter, mm
IlO mm
focal length, bi-convex and 1 Uranium glass plate 150 x 60 x 8 mm, on stand
;
8. 0.
th
54.252. Violet Glass Plate 150 /. 150 mm, for Stokes's Experiment (M. P., 9 Edn., II, 1, p. 360) 0. 6.
54.253. Paper Strip prepared with barium platino -cyanide, 6 x 4 cm 0. 5.
54.254. Fluorescent Portfolio, with barium platino-cyanide Writing, in portfolio of blue and
yellow glass 0. 5.
Phosphorescence.
Phosphorescent Substances, in case, Figure:
List No. 54,255 54,256 54,257
3 5 7 substances
0.5.0 0. 7. 0. 10.
Cl. 5215, 1443,

1444, 1445.
520 Phosphorescence. Photography. No. 54 258
54 258 B. 1:4.
54 258 A. 1:4.
54259. 1:8. 54 261. 1 : 6. 54 260. 1 : 7.
54.258. Case with 6 Phosphorescent Substances, shown open in Fig. A, and closed in s. d.
Fig. B 0.12.0
The case containssix small tlat glass tubes sealed up and containing pulverulent substances of
different colours hick phosphoresce.
v. In the lid there is a small wood slab let in under glass which
:-; coated with a paint which shines a brilliant violet.
54.259. 7 Phosphorescent Substances, in eye tube, Figure. The back wall can be let
down 1. 0.0
NEW.Phosphoroscope after Lenard, F i g u r e, adapted for single experiments and

1
54.260.
for demonstration purposes (Hausser, Ztschr. f. Instrkd. 30, 1910, p. 278), with a pre-
paration holder with 6 preparations, a trough with quartz lid for powdery substances,
and a pair of tongs for holding any object; with 110 volt Direct Current Electric Motor,
tachometer and motor interrupter IS. 0.
The phosphorescent body is illuminated by an electric spark generated from an induction coil
of 10 20 cm stroke between zinc electrodes, these electrodes being very rich in light exciting ultra-
violet phosphorescence. The duration between lighting and observation is quite small. The apparatus
is used when
demonstrating from the side illustrated, and in individual experiments from the opposite side.
54.261. Phosphoroscope after Becquerel, Figure (M. P., II, 1, Figs. 590592 [253]), on
firm stand 6. 0.0
54.262.
-
idem, large pattern, Figure, on cast-iron stand with toothed wheel
20. 0.
gearing
52,046. Phosphoroscope arranged to fit Whirling Table: see Fig. 52,046, p. 284 2. 0.0
54,263. Phosphorescent Paint (Balmain's) can be used in conjunction with water or oil colour.
Per half-kilogramme o. 15.0
Photography.
54,261. Folding Camera, Figure, for plates and films 9 x 12 cm, aluminium body covered
fine leather, with double bottom extension, thus allowing the hack lens alone to be
used. Objective adjustable laterally and vertically; three metal dark slides and intro-
duction to photography. Price with Extra-rapid Aplanat 5. 10.
The objective has -.n iris diaphragm and shutter for time photographs of any dur.it ion and in
stantaneous exposures from '/too to 1 second. 'Ihe apparatus has a leather bellows, is fitted with a
good finder and is arranged for vertical and horizontal pictures. The picture can e f.>russed either 1
by the scale or on the ground glass screen. Outside dimensions approx. 15.5 x 3.8 x 11.5 cm. For
Stands see Nos. 54 288 and 54 289.
Cl. 1446, 1447,
3843, 1448, 5450.
No. 54272. Phosphorescence. Photographic Apparatus. 521
54 262. 1 : 6. 54 264. 1 : 3.
54 269. 1 : 3. 54 272. 1 : 5.
s. d.
54.265. Folding Camera exactly as No. 54,264, with Zeiss Double Amatar 1 : 6.8 .... 10. 5.0
54.266. --idem, with Zeiss Double Protar 1 : 6.3 13. 0.0

54.267. Film Pack Slide for Apparatus Nos. 54,264 54,266 0. 8.
54.268. Cow Hide Bag 0. 14.
54.269. Stereoscopic Camera, Figure, for taking sterescopic pictures and ordinary pictures
(Panorama form), body of mahogany, leather covered, with triple bottom extension,
objective adjustable vertically and laterally, 3 metal dark slides and instructions, with
Extra Rapid Aplanats 10. o.
The objective has iris diaphragm, shutter for any time exposures and for instantaneous exposures
from 1 to Vsso second. The apparatus has a leather bellows, is fitted with a finder and arranged for
111
vertical or horizontal portrait.?. Focussing can either be carried out by the scale or on the ground glas*
screen. External dimensions approximately, 18.5 x 5.5 x 13cm. For Stands, see Nos. 54,288 and 54,289.
- - with Zeiss Double Amatars, 1 a

54.270. idem, : 6.8 19. 10.
54.271. Cow Hide Bag o. 15. a
54,272. Scholars' Stand Camere, Figure, for plates 9x 12 cm, walnut body with long
calico bellows, shutter for instantaneous and time exposures, for vertical or horizontal
pictures, with three double dark slides, stand in two parts, and Periscopic Aplanat and
revolving diaphragm 1. 15.
Cl. 1449, 5948,

5946, 5945.
522 Photography. Eye and Vision. NIL .14273
54 2S6. 1 : 4.
54274. 1:6. 54 290. 1 : 5.
54.273. Stand Camera, cf. Fig. 54,274, for plates 9x 12 cm, polished mahogany body, calico
. s. d.
bellows with leather edges, conical and rotary; objective board having height and lateral
adjustment; with plummet, spirit level, 'three double dark slides; with Extra Rapid
Aplanat, iris diaphragm, Objective Shutter for time and instantaneous exposures, and
tripod stand 4. 0.0
54.274. --idem, Figure, for plates 13 X 18 cm 4. .12. d
54.275. --idem, cf. Fig. 54,274, for plates 18 X 24 cm 6. 4.0

54.276. --idem, cf. Fig. 54,274, for plates 24 X 30 cm 9. 10.
54.277. Bags of gray sail-cloth, can' also be carried as a knapsack.

For Apparatus of plate-size 9x12 13 x 18 18 X 24 24 x 30
0. 10. 0. 10. 0. 12. 0. 18.
Photographic Outfits, containing everything necessary for finishing photographs:

List No." 54,278 54,279 54,280 54,281
For Cameras of plate-size 9 X 12 13 x 18 18 X 24 24 x 30 cm
0.9.0 0.15.0 1.10.0 2.6.0
The one dark room lamp, 12 plates, 1 packet Celloidin paper, 25 mounts, deve-
outfit consists of
and fixing bath, papier mache dish, enamel dish, glass dish, glass measure,
loper, fixing bath, toning
printing frame, mountant, brush, and instructions.
Supplementary Outfits for Photography:

List No. 54,282 54,283 54,284 54,285
For Cameras of plate-size 9x12 13x18 18x24 24x30 cm
0.10.0 0.12.0 0.14.0 0.16.0
Glass funnel, dropping bottle, plate grips for small plates, plate lifter, small brush, drying clips,
draining rack, trimming glass, trimming springs, glossing slab, squeegee, flaslilight bag, flashlight
powder, filter paper.
54,286. Magnesium Lamp with clockwork, Figure 1. 4.0

The clockwork runs 6 8 minutes and can be released and stopped by a lever.
54.287. S^pare Magnesium Tape 0. 1.6
54.288. Tripod Stand for Apparatus Nos. 54,264 54,270, of ash, brass bound 1. 0.
54.289. Tubular Stand of brass, in five parts; length folded up 36 centimetres 0. 14.
For Dark-room Fittings see pp. 79 82.
The Eye and Phenomena of Vision.

54.290. Model of the Eye, after Bock, Figure, 80 nun diameter 0.10.
54.291.
- -
larger, 130 mm diameter 0. 12.
54.292. Ophthalmotrope after Knapp, Figure, for demonstrating the motions

of the eye
and the action of the single musi-le* concerned therein J. 8.0
I'l. 1472,
,W47. 1477.
No. 54301. Photographic Apparatus. Models of Eyes. 523
54 298. 1 : 14. 54 299. 1 : 6. 54 301. 1 : 10.
54.293. Device for receiving an Ox's Eye, Figure, with small stand for the eye lens (W. D. s. d.
Fig. 300302 [283285]) , 0. 6.
54.294. Optical Eye after Kiihne, Figure, for showing the part of the rays in the eye at
a magnification of 10 times, myopia and presbyopia, Schemer's experiment, the path
of the luminous rays after operation for cataract, astigmatism and accommodation of
the eye. The trough is arranged for filling with a fluorescent liquid 5. 10.
Instructions for use are supplied with the Apparatus.
54.295. Water Chamber after Friedr. C. G. Miiller (M. T. Fig. 147) 1. 0.
54.296. Optical Eye after Grimsehl, arranged for filling with water, with diaphragm for the
insertion of spectacle lenses. The variations in magnitude occurring in a short-sighted
or long-sighted eye when a spectacle lens is inserted can be measured 1. 18.
54.297. Glow-lamp Filament, for use as an illuminating object to the preceding Apparatus 2. 0.
54.298. NEW.Optical Eye after Lichtenecker, Figure, with adjustable iris diaphragm,
movable retina screen, diaphragm tube for shielding disturbing light, a second screen,
with handle, in order to enable the position of a retina to be shown rapidly in the short-
sighted or long-sighted eye; a convex lens and a concave lens with handle, and a piece
of plaster showing the aspect of the interior of the eye 4. 10.
54.299. Optical Eye, Figure, with two spectacle lenses for explaining their action . . 1.16.0
Lens Apparatus after Dr. Zwick, see Nos. 53,924 53,928, pp. 496 and 497, for explaining
myopia and presbyopia and the path of the rays in the eye, with lenses 50 diameter, mm
for showing the action of lenses in general and of the camera obscura.
54.300. 30 Drawings for showing the blind spot, Figure, after Weinhold (W. D. Fig. 303
[286]) 0. 1.6
54.301 Astigmatic Test Card after Dr. .Frankel,

.
Figure, for ophthalmologists and schools,
for quickly determining astigmatism 0. 2.
CI. 1478, 1479, 1480, 1482,

5426,5591, 1483.
524 Eye and Phenomena of Vision. No. 54 302 -
54 303. 1 : 9. 54304. 1 : 11.
54305. 1:5. 54 306. 1 : 5. 54 307. 1 : 6.
s. (1.
54.302. Device after Steinhauser, for Schemer's experiment (M. P., II, 1, Fig. 263 [359]) . 0. G.
54.303. Apparatus for explaining the plastic Vision of both Eyes and of the Stereoscope, Figure 1.12.
The distance apart of the two telescopes is variable as is also the place at which the two spheres
are set up.
54.304. Wheatstone's Mirror Stereoscope, with three pairs of drawings, Figure (M. P., II,
1, Figs. 276 and 277 [377]) 1. 2. (l
54.305. Stereoscope after Brewster, of mahogany, with movable mirror, Figure. . . . 0. 5.
- -
54.306. idem, with variable ocular distance, Figure 0. IT).
54.307. Stereoscope, mounted open, Figure, of polished mahogany 0. 5.0
Revolving Stereoscope Apparatus, for rapidly changing the images, with variable ocular
distance:
List No. 54,308 54,309
Arranged for 25 50 views
Without Views 2. 2. 2. 10.
54.310. Stereoscopic Views on paper Each 0. 0.6
54.311. 12 Demonstrations of Stereoscopic Lustre, after Martius-Matzdorf 0. 4.0
54.312. 36 Stereoscopic Drawings after Martius-Matzdorf, for demonstrating the overlapping

of the images, the emulation of the visual fields, the artificially produced movement
of the single images, the spatial vision (images of the better-known crystalline forms).
the occurrence of stereoscopic lustre from the surface of image (e. g., in reproductions) 0. 8.0
54.313. 12 Stereoscopic Views of the Firmament from excellent photographs by Prof. Max
Wolf (Heidelburg). First series of 12 plates with explanatory text, in portfolio . . 0. 8.0
The motions of planets and comets and the motion of the fixed stars can be rendered quite
comprehensive by the views. The photographs of the moon's landscape are shown in such great relief
that the height of the mountains and depth of the valleys can be gauged.
54.315. Stereoscopic View (Girl's Head) on glass, after Ives, for explaining the spatial vision
of both eyes, Figure 1.10.0
A
grating having black lines is set up in front of the parallax stcrt-ogram which is formed of
perpendicular lines. The stereogram consists of two images composed of lines; the lines pertain alter-
nately to an image for the left and for the right eye. Kaeh eye sees its view through the spaces of tin-
grating and the result is a plastic image.
54.316.
-- idem, with view of moon, specially adapted for also introducing pgeudoacopic
vision. When the right eye assumes the position intended for the left and vice versa
the moon appears as a hollow sphere 1.10.0
CM. 3395, 6094,
1484. 1485, I486.
No. 54 322. Stereoscopy. Plastic Vision. Stroboscopy. 525
54318. 1:8.
54 315.
54 320. 2 : 5. 54 322. 1 : 5.
54.317. Schroeder's Step View, as diapositive (W. D. Fig. 312 A [295 A]) for demonstrating
s. d.
the impression of raised and deepened relief 0. 1.6

54.318. Pasteboard Model of the Shroeder Step View, Figure, for facilitating the perception
of the different impressions of relief 0. 4.0
* 54,319. Apparatus for imitating the Irradiation of the Moon's Crescent, Figure (W. D.,
Fig. 311 [294]) 0. 8.0
* 54,320. 2 Lantern Slides for demonstrating Irradiation, after Plateau, Figure (M. P., II,
1, Fig. 291 [388 and 389]) 0. 3.0
54.321. Disc with sectors cut out, for showing the duration of luminous impression in the
eye; for the Whiiling Table (W. D. p. 416) 0. 6.0
54.322. Stroboscopic Disc, Figure (M. P., II, 1, Fig. 292 [393]) 0. 18.
Rotating Mirrors: see p. 431.

.").'). 179. Stroboscopic Drum (cylinder), see Fig. 53,179, p. 417, with 18 Quincke Wave Strips 0. 18.
- - 0.14.0
52,019. idem, fitting the Whirling Table: see No. 52,019, p. 283
51'. (120. Strips alone, 18 in all, with description: see No. 52,020 on p. 283 0. 6.0
* Can be used with the Projection Apparatus. Cl. 3683, 5516, 343,
3397, U88.
526 Eye and Phenomena of Vision. No. 54323
54326.
54323. 1: 12.
54327. 1:4.
54324. 1 : 4.
54325. 54328. 1:4.

s. d.
53.302. Stroboscopic Disc after Topler, with clockwork drive, see Fig. 53,302, p. 432 ... 3. 0.
53.303. - - i d e m, for hand drive, see No. 53,303, p. 432 2. 0.
54,323. Stroboscope after Anschiitz, large pattern, Figure, with 10 rows of views ... 2. 0.
* 54,324. Stroboscope, Figure, for the Projection Lantern, with 1 disc (W. D. Fig. 304 [287]) 1. 0.
* 54,325. 3 Extra Discs for above, Figure, each 0. 2 0. 6.
* 54,326. Projection Stroboscope, Figure, with 2 discs, showing dancers .1. 4.0
* 51,067. Cinematograph, sec Fig. 51,067, p. 185 . . . . : 7. 10.
* 51,068. Films for Cinematographs: 16, 24, 32, 48 m long: see No. 51,068, p. 186
per metre length 0. 1. 6
60,642. Lens Disc after Boys for the Stroboscopic analysis of spark discharges : see Fig. 60,642,
p. 837 4. 0.0
* 54,327. Anorthoscope for the Projection Lantern, Figure (Fr. Phys. Techn. II, 2, Fig. 3362
[II, Fig. 881]), with 4 discs with distorted images, which on rotating appear in tin-
correct form but five times as large !.(>.(>
* 54,328. Apparatus for Optical Fatigue and the successive Colour-contrast, (Fr. Figure
phys. Techn. II, 2, Fig. 3497 [II, Fig. 894]) 0. <i. o
The apparatus consists of a small wood frame and a glass disc half ground and half clear, with
a point in the middle. When the eye is fixed on this point for some time and the glass disc <|iiirkly
drawn away the section which previously was dark appears brighter to the eye. If the iina^r r:i-t
on the screen is coloured by the insertion of the coloured glass disc tin- design appears in the coin
plcmentary colours when the coloured disc is suddenly drawn away.
54.329. White and Gray Cardboard for Fatigue Phenomena (M. T. p. 205) 0. 3. o
54.330. 6 Different Coloured Pasteboard Squares with \Vhit<- St-am (M. T. p. 205) .... 0. I. o
(1.1491,345,
* Can be used with the Projection Apparatus. 6089,6082,
6091/93, 6079.
No. 54 337. Stroboscopy. Eye Fatigue. Subjective Colours. 527
54 333. 1 : 3.
54 332. 1 : 4.
54 331. 1 : 4.
54 334. 1 : 4. 54336. 1:11.
54 335. 1 : 6. 54 337. 1 : 2.
* 54,331. Apparatus for Eye Fatigue and the successive Colour-contrast, Figure (W. D., s. d.
Fig. 308 [291]) 0. 10.
* 54,332. Apparatus for Successive and Simultaneous Colour-contrast, Figure; perception of

subjective Colours (Fr. phys. Techn. II, 2, Fig. 3498) 0. 8.0
* 54,333. 2 Coloured Glass Plates for simultaneous Contrast, 8 J /2 x 10 cm, Figure (W. D.
Fig. 310 [293]) 0. 6.0
The plates fit the lantern slide holder of the Projection Lantern.
54,334. Apparatus for Showing the Contrasted Colours as Coloured Shadows, Figure (cf.
M. P., II, 1, p. 393 [446]), with 2 coloured plates 0.12.0-
A coloured glass disc mounted in a frame has a round hole and, in front of the latter, a bi-convex
lens. In this manner a coloured ground can be covered over on the screen by a white sphere of light.
If a rod is held in the latter the half-shades occurring appear in the complementary colours and the
principal shades in the more vivid colour of the background. In this experiment the objective head of
the lantern must be removed, and the rod held behind the focus of the luminous pencil.
54.335. Apparatus for Coloured Shadows, Figure.... o.i6. a
54.336. Apparatus for Explaining the subjective Colours, after Norrenberg, Figure (M. P. '
II, 1, Fig. 297 [396]) 0. 12. 0-
54.337. Apparatus for showing the contrasted Colours, after Eagona Scina, Figure (M. P.,
II, 1, Fig. 298 [398]), with four coloured glasses 0. 8.
i

Cl. 6090, 350, 348, 6084, 6088,
1501, 1502.
528 Eye and Phenomena of Vision. No. 54 338
54 338. 1 : 4. 54339. 1:4. 54 340. 1 : 4.
54 341. 1 : 5. 54 345. 1 = 6.
* 54,338. Projection Plate for Optical Illusions, Figure

(W. D. Fig. 313 [296]), consisting 8. d.
of one wood frame and one pair plates showing parallel lines apparently diverging from
top to bottom and bottom to top respectively 0. 6.0
* 54,339. 2 Plates for above (W. D. Fig. 314 [297]), showing parallel lines apparently bent in
the middle 0. 3.
* 54,340. 2 Plates for above (W. D. 315 [298]) four right angles having a common apex showing
apparently acute and obtuse in pairs o. 3. o
54.341. Cylindrical Lens with Prism, of small refractive angle, on stand, (M. P., Figure
II, 1, Fig. 137 [153]), for re-combining the light resolved by a prism and for producing
complementary colours 2. s. o
The cylindrical lens is 80 mm diameter. The prism is cemented on to a sliding glass disc in
such manner that it can be conducted over the whole width of the lens.
54.342. 7 different coloured Gelatine Slabs, 100 sq. cm., for use as a colour filter .... o. o. o
* 54,343. 2 Plane parallel Glass Vessels for objectively Demonstrating the Colours of Pigment
Mixtures (W. I)., p. 425 [392]) 20 mm
wide, with 2 pasteboard screens having circular
opening o.
54,344. Apparatus after Rosenberg, Figure, for experiments on the dependence of the
body colour on the angle of inclination of the incident light (Ztschr. f. d. phys. u. chem.
U. 2, 1888/89, p. 38) 1.10.0
54,345. Apparatus for Mixing Coloured Rays and Material Colours, after Rosenberg. i
g u r e. I-'
with 2 paraffin lamps and 2 plane parallel glass vessels for solutions of potassium bi-
chromate and copper sulphate respectively with the addition of liquid ammonia in the
surplus (Ztschr. f. d. phys. u. chem. I". 2, 1888/89, p. 296) 1. Hi.
Cl. 6095, 6096, 6085,

C;i!i lie used with the Projection Apparatus.
1505, 1504, 1506.
No. 54354. Optical Illusions. Additive and Subtractive Colour Synthesis. 529
54 353. 1 : 8. 54 354. 1 : 8.
5 54,346. 2 Colour Discs, 8V 2 x 10 cm, for explaining the Mixing of coloured Lights, Fig. A, I
d.
and for demonstrating the Superposing of layers of Transparent Colours, Fig. B (Fr. |
phys. Techn. II, 2, Figs. 3467 and 3495) 1. 5.

j
54,347. Anaglyphon, after Ducos du Hauron (Plastoscope) (W. D., p. 433) 0. 2.

The two-colour image is observed through spectacles having a red and a blue glass, and this
image appears plastic.
1 * 9605. Projection Chromoscope after Ives, for obtaining photographs in natural tints by addi-
tive colour synthesis (Fr. phys. Techn. II, 2, Fig. 3484) 13. 0.
The apparatus can also be used for explaining mixed and complementary colours, absorption
phenomena, etc.
* 9606. Photos for above, 3 diapositives on one plate Each 0. 7.
Colour Discs and Colour Jackets for use with the Whirling Table, see Nos. 52,034 52,042,
pp. 284 and 285.
54,076. Top for rotating Colour Discs, with flywheel and handle : see Fig. 54,076, p. 504 . 0. 10.
54,078. Colour Disc with Rotating Apparatus: see Fig. 54,078, p. 504 1. 5.
* 54,079. Transparent Colour Disc after Newton, with 7 colours on glass, for .objective pro-
jection, with device for rotating: see No. 54,079, p. 504 1. .0.0
* 54,350. Colour Top with alternating mixed colour effects 1. 0.
54.351. Coloured Wool in Portfolio, pink and orange, for demonstrating the influence of mode
of illumination on colour impression (W. D. p. 429) 0. 3.
54.352. Model of the Perspective Images of a Cube, Figure, with transparent image-
plane 1. 5.
The Cube is placed behind the transparent plane. corners are connected with the visual
Its
point by cords carried through corresponding perforations in the disc of the image. The connecting
lines of the holes in the disc demonstrate the perspective image. The model has two visual points
for two different images.
- -
54.353. idem, with Cone, Figure 1. 5.
- - with Small House, with 1 visual point 1.

54.354. idem, Figure, 5.

530 Optical Instruments. No. 54 355
54 355. 1 : 8. 54356. 1: 12.
54 366. 1 : 6. 54 367. 1 : 6. 54 368. 1 : (i. 54 358. 1 : 3.
54 369. 1 : 7. 54 370. 1 : 7.
s. d.
Optical Instruments.
54.355. Camera obscura, Figure; size of image 140x100 mm 1. 0.0
54.356. Camera obscura, Figure, with Chevalier convex prism; size of image 400 x 400 mm 4.16.0
54.358. Camera lucida, after Wollaston, Figure, with extending stand and two shielding
glasses 1.16.0
54.359.
- - without stand or shielding glasses, prism only in metal mount o. 15.0
54.360. Simple Magnifying Glass, diameter 20 mm, magnification 10 times 0. 4.0
54.361. Cylindrical Magnifying Glass (Coddington (Mass), 22 mm diameter 0. 4.0
54.362. --idem, 30mm diameter 0. 5.0
Folding Magnifier, 35 mm lens diameter, in horn mount:

List No. 54,363 54,364 54,365
With 1 '-' 3 Lenses
0.3.0 0.4.0 0.5.0
CI. 6103, 1516,4530, 4531,
4529, 1517, 4527, 6077.
Ni>. S4 379. Camera obscura, Camera lucida. Magnifying Glasses. Microscope. Telescope. 531
54 374. 1 : 6.
54 371. 1 = 4.
54 372. 1 : 4. 54 379. 1 : 8.
54.366. Model of the Compound Microscope, Figure, constructed open, on wood base, the 8. d.
path of ray being indicated 0. 15.
54.367. Model of the Galilean Telescope, Figure, constructed open 0. 8.
54.368. Model of the Astronomical Telescope, Figure, constructed open 0. 10.
54.369. Model of the Terrestrial Telescope, Figure, constructed open . 0. 16.
54.370. Model of Newton's Reflecting Telescope, Figure 0.18.0
54.371. Model of the Brachio-Telescope, Figure, constructed open 1. 0.
54.372. Model of a Meridian Circle, of wood, Figure, with metal circle and indices, dia-
meter of circles 120 mm 2. 14.
- - of metal
54.373. idem, 5. 8.
54.374. Small Weinhold Optical Bench, Figure, for Explaining the Microscope, the Astro-
nomical, Terrestrial and Galilean Telescopes, on pillar base; lenses 20 diameter, mm
objective 70 mm; all lenses mounted in metal (W. D. Fig. 317 [300]) 1. 6.
Perforated Cylindrical Pillar: see Nos. 53,688 and 53,689; Gas Burner: see No. 53,681a; Paraffin Burner: see
No. 53,684a; Ligroin Lamps: see No. 54,375.
">4. :;;.">. 3 Ligroin Lamps, arranged close together (W. D. p. 440), cf. Fig. 53,626 0. 6.
54.376. Optical Bench as No. 54,374, without pillar, on two short legs 1. 2.
54.377. --idem, on pillar base, but with larger lenses (40 mm) and an objective 120 mm
diameter 2. 0.
54.378. Small Mirror on Stand and Total Reflection Prism on Sliding Blocks, for demonstrating the Herschel
Telescope and the Newton Reflecting Telescope; for use with Optical Bench No. 54,374 or 54,377
(W. D. Fig. 320A and B [302A and B]) 0. 16.
54,370. Small Optical Bench with Glass Box, Figure, for demonstrating the path of nivs
in. lenses, telescopes of different systems and in microscopes, with 11 lenses and 5 dia-
phragms 7. 0.
Cl. 4528, 1522,

1521, 5316. 34*
532 Optical Instruments. Microscopes. No. 54380
54 382. 1 : 5.
54386, 54 386 f, 54 386 h. 1 : 5.
54 380. 1 : 5. 53 385. 1 = 6.
54,380. Model Theodolite, Figure, with level and cross-wires, can be used as a
of metal, * '
sight. The circles are divided in 360 and verniers permit of reading to Vio" Circle 1
.
rotary for repetition, telescope without lenses i

4. 0. o
54,381. --idem, with Telescope, ocular movable by rack and pinion 6. 0.0
54,382. --idem, Figure, with Telescope, Ocular Prism, and Sun Glass, for astronomic:*!
observations (M. T. p. 26) 6.12.0
54.383. Stand for Model Theodolites Nos. 54,380/2 (W. D. Fig. 29), with- stem screw . . . 1.10.0
54.384. Carrying Case for Model Theodolites Nos. 54,380/2, for use in field work .... 1 . 6.
54.385. Model Theodolite for Students' Exercises, Figure, with Telescope and Carrying Case,
Folding Stand, Measuring Chain, and folding Measuring Stave 3 in long. The horizontal
circle is 10 cm diameter and the altitudinal circle !l.5 cm 8. 0.0
54.386. Theodolite, cf. Figure, horizontal circle 120 mm

diameter divided in 1 /2 , verniers
giving 1', graduated on brass, silvered, uncovered. Reading by means of hand glass;
telescope 200mm
focal length, power 20, inclusive of bolts and stand witli tribrach . 12.10.0
Extras: (a) for repetition 2.0.0; (b) for telescope a\is Imvinji clamp and fine adjustment
1.5.0: (<) for rotary "magnifying glasses 1.4.0: (d) levelling bubble i 1.4.0: (e) for graduating
the horizontal circle on (ieriiian silver 0.15.0: (f) for spherical stand \vitli tribrach instead of the
bolting stand 0.10.0; (g) for graduating the horizontal circle on silver in 1 / 3 verniers giving 30"
,
covered, \vitli rotary magnifiers, 4.5.0; (h) for dividing the altitudinal circle in Vz on brass and
silvering, verniers Diving 1', 3.0.0: (i) for telescopes arranged for throwing back, with adjustable
carrier 1. 7. 0.
Cl. 1528.
1527,8098, 1529.
No 54389. Theodolites. Microscopes. 533
54 387. 1 = 5. 54 388. 1 : 3.
54,387. Repeating Theodolite, Figure, with drop-screw, for distance measurements; s. d.
telescope arranged for tunneling and canting back, with steel axes, rotary magnifiers;
Horizontal Circle concealed by glass, and silver limb; Striding Level, round pattern Level
on vernier circle; horizontal circle 140 mm
diameter divided in l /3 verniers giving 20"; ,
altitudinal circle 120 diameter inmm

Vs on silver, concealed, with verniers inserted
*
giving 30", with alidade level and micrometer screw; telescope 250 focal length, mm
power 25; with carrying case, shoulder straps and spherical stand 35.0.0
The telescope has an orthoscopic ocular and a range of 7 km; it is provided with clamp and fine
adjustment, being arranged for measuring distances.
Extra Prices: (a) for levelling bubble on telescope 1. 7.
(b) Transit Level 1. 14. 0.
Particulars and prices of Larger Theodolites on application.
Microscopes.
54.388. Large Microscope, Stand I, Figure, with socket for tilting down; round, rotary
and centering stage, coarse and fine tube focussing, millimetre graduation on draw tube;
large illuminating device, after Abbe; Abbe Indicating Apparatus; optical outfit for
14 1400 diameters, and case 30. 0.
.The coarse tube focussing is by rack and pinion, the fine by worm and worm wheel; a complete
turn of the wormcorresponds to raising or lowering the tube by 0.1 mm. The optical outfit consists
of 1 micrometer ocular, 4 Huyghenian oculars, 3 achromatic objectives, 1 homogeneous oil-immersion
objective and triple nose-piece.
54.389.
- -
idem, with fixed stage, simple illuminating apparatus and simple optical equip-
ment, for 20 1400 diameters, without indicating apparatus 24.0.0
Cl. 1530, 5936.

For Model Microscopes: see previous section.
534 Microscopes. No. 54 390
54 390. 1 : 3. 54 392. 1 : 3.
54.390. Large Microscope, Stand la, Figure, with canting joint, with round centering s. d.
stage, coarse and fine tube focussing, millimetre graduation on draw tube; large Abbe
Illuminating Apparatus; with iris diaphragm; optical outfit for 26 1400 diameters,
together with box 21. 0. o
The Optical outfit comprises 4 Huyghenian oculars, 3 achromatic objectives, 1 homogeneous oil-
immersion, and triple nose-piece.
54.391.
- -
idem, with fixed stage, simple illuminating Apparatus and simple Optical Out-
fit for 60 800 diametors 19. 5.0
optical Outfit is correspondingly simpler. The coarse tube focussing
The is effected by rack and
pinion, and the fine by a low-pitch micrometer screw.
54.392. Large Microscope, Stand B, Figure, with tilting joint, large round centering stage,
coarse and fine tube focussing, millimetre graduation on draw lube, large Abbe Illumi-
nating Apparatus, Optical Outfit for 60 1400 diameters, together with box 21. .... 5.0
The coarse tube focussing is by rack and pinion and the fine by a worm and worm wheel. Tne
optical outfit comprises 2 achromatic objectives, one homogeneous oil-immersion objective. triple 1
in ise-piece and 3 Huyghenian oculars.
54.393.
- - id
em, with Abbe Illuminating Apparatus of smaller pattern, arranged for raising
and lowering 18. 0.0
54.394. Large Microscope, Stand Ic, Figure, with tilting joint, with rectangular fixed
stage, base and pillar in one pieee, coarse and fine tube focussing, millimetre gradual ion
on draw tube, Abbe Illuminating Apparatus with iris diaphragm, Optical Outfit for
26 1400 diameters, together with box 17.
7. o.O
The coarsi tube fnriii-siiii;- i< i-H'rcted by rack
1
anil pinion. Mini the fine by low-pitch micromi-ti-r
scrrw. The Optical Outfit comprises H achromatic objectives, 1 homogeneous oil-immersion, triple 1
revolving nose-piece and 3 Huygheniao oculars.
54,39.").
- i d e
m, with simple Illuminating Apparatus and simpler Optical Outfit for 60 to
800 diameters 1.",. 10. o
n. 51137, 5941.
No. 54 401. Microscopes. 535
54 394. 1 : 3. 54 396. 1 : 3. 54400. 1:3.
54.396. Medium Microscope, Stand Ha, Figure, with joint for tilting, large rectangular s. d.
and fine tube focussing, millimetre graduation on draw tube, Abbe

fixed stage, coarse
Illuminating Apparatus with iris diaphragm, Optical Outfit for 26 1400 diameters,
together with box 18. 5.0
The coarse tube focussing is effected by rack and pinion, and the fine by low-pitch micrometer
screw. The Optical Outfit comprises 3 achromatic objectives, 1 homogeneous oil-immersion, 1 triple
revolving nose-piece and 3 Huyghenian oculars.
54.397.
- -
idem, with simple Illuminating Apparatus and simpler Optical Outfit for 60 to
800 diameters 16. 5.0
54.398. Medium cf. Fig. 54,392, with joint for tilting, rectangiilar fixed
Microscope, Stand C,
stage, coarse fine tube focussing, millimetre graduation on draw tube, Abbe Illu-
and
minating Apparatus, Optical Outfit for 60 1400 diameters, together with box . . . 16. 10.
The coarse tube focussing is effected by rack and pinion, and the fine by worm and worm wheel.
The Optical Outfit comprises 2 achromatic objectives, 1 homogenous oil-immersion, 1 triple revolving
nose-piece, and 3 Huyghenian oculars.
- -
54.399. idem, with simple Illuminating Apparatus with iris diaphragm, and simpler
Optical Outfit, for 60 800 diameters 15. 0.0
54.400. Medium Microscope, Stand lid, Figure, with joint for tilting, large rectangular
fixed stage, coarse and fine tube focussing, millimetre graduation on draw tube, Abbe
Illuminating Apparatus with iris diaphragm, can be f ocussed under the stage Optical ;
Outfit for 60 1400 diameters, and box 15. O.'O
The coarse tube focussing is effected by rack and pinion, and the fine by small-pitch micro-
meter screw. The Optical Outfit comprises 2 achromatic objectives, 1 homogeneous oil-immersion
objective, 1 triple nose-piece and 3 Huyghenian oculars.
54,401.
-- idem, with simple Illuminating Apparatus, and simpler Optical Outfit for
60730 diameters . 12. 0.
Cl. 5940, 5935, 5939.

536 Microscopes and Auxiliary Apparatus. No. 54 402 -
54402. 1 : 3. 54407. 1:3,5. 54409. 1:4.
54.402. Medium Microscope, Stand III, Figure, not tiltable, with rectangular fixed stage, s. d.
coarse and fine tube focussing, millimetre graduation on draw tube, Abbe Illuminating
Apparatus, with iris diaphragm; Optical Outfit for 60 1000 diameters, together with box 13. 10.
The coarse tube focussing is effected by rack and pinion, and the fine by micrometer screw.
The Optical Outfit comprises 2 achromatic objectives, 1 homogeneous oil-immersion objective, 1 triple
revolving nose-piece and 2 Huyghenian oculars.
- -
54.403. idem, with simple Illuminating Apparatus with iris diaphragm, and simpler
Optical Outfit for 60730
diameters 10. 0.0
54.404. Medium Microscope, Stand IV, with rectangular fixed stage, coarse focussing by sliding
tube, fine focussing by micrometer screw, millimetre graduation on draw tube. Abbe
Illuminating Apparatus with iris diaphragm, Optical Outfit for 60 1000 diameters,
together with box 12. 0.0
The Optical Outfit consists of 2 achromatic objectives, 1 homogeneous oil-immersion objective,
and 2 Huyghenian oculars.
54.405. idem, with simple Illuminating Apparatus, and simpler Optical Outfit, for
60 730 diameters 9. 0.0
54.406.
- -
idem, without Illuminating Apparatus, with concave and plane mirror, with
Optical Outfit for 70 575 diameters 5.15.0
54.407. Laboratory Microscope, Stand V, Figure, focussing by fine rack and pinion motion,
largo, stage, draw tube, concave and plane mirror, with 2 achromatic objectives and
2 Huyghenian oculars, for 20 280 diameters 4. 10.
- - i d o
54.408. m, simpler, tube without extension, with triple objective, 2 Huyghenian
oculars, and box 3.
54.409. Crystallisation Microscope after Lehmann, for observing the physical behaviour of
preparations, specially of liquid and apparently live crystals, of. Fig. 54,409, with heating
and cooling device, for observations in direct ami polarised light, with simple Optical
Outfit with micrometer ocular and 2 objectives, with arrangement for testing the axial
emissions in converging light 30. (I.
The Stand has two stages rotary about the optical axis. The lower one is concealed and has
C'l. 5938, 5934 a, 439.

No. 51423. Microscopes and Auxiliary Apparatus. 537
54 415. 1 : 3.
a graduation of 360; it can easily be rotated and rapidly returned to the zero position. Two blow- s. d.
tubes can be fixed to the stage for cooling the preparations, a rapid and fine temperature regulation
being rendered possible by this means. Three mirrors are used as polarisers; the illuminating mirror
is arranged to rotate so that rapid change is possible from direct to parallel, polarised illumination.
The burner has a regulating air and gas lead. The tube possesses a rack and pinion coarse focussing
and micrometer screw fine focussing.
Supplied with the instrument are two burners, two blow-pipes, one blue glass, three plano-
convex lenses as cover glasses (for determining the refractive index), one heater, one double bellows,
and one mahogany case for storing the instrument.
Projection Microscopes as suggested by Lehmann: see No.. 51,057 51,061, p. 183.
54,410. Mineralogical Stand, with tongs objective changer having three inset rings, achromatic
objectives Nos. 1, 3 and 6, oculars I and III, micrometer ocular II, also gypsum and
mica plates l /t wave-length 19. 0.0
The coarse focussing is secured by rack and pinion, and the fine by micrometer screw. The tube
has a graduation and a centering head with locking gap for taking gypsum and mica compensators.
The tube analyser can be switched in and out of the path of the rays. The condenser and
polariser can be raised and lowered by a lateral screw. The change from converging to parallel light
is done by a quarter-turn of a lateral knob and the polariser can be taken out of the condenser lens.
The stage is graduated in 1 /, and permits of reading by vernier accurately to 1 / 10 - The surface of
the stage has a position-finding graduation.
54.415. Large Preparation Stand, Figure, with heavy horse-shoe shape base, stage
100 xlOO mmwith glass plate and hollowed metal trough; focussing by rack and pinion;
cheeks for supporting the hands. With movable mirror, lens system comprising
3 aplanatic magnifiers, for magnifications of 8, 14 and 20 4. 0.0
54.416. idem, with 2 aplanatic magnifiers for 8 and 14 diameters, and with a Preparation
- -
System consisting of 3 aplanatic lenses (as objective) and an achromatic ocular, for 15,
20 und 30 diameters when not using ocular, and 40, 60 and 100 with use of ocular. 5. 0.0
Auxiliary Apparatus for Microscopes.

54.417. Micrometer Ocular, with lateral slot for inserting the micrometer 0.12.0
54.418. Ocular Glass Micrometer, for inserting in the ocular, 5 mm = 100 divisions 0. 4.0
54.419. --idem, 5 mm = 50 divisions 0. 3.0
54.420. Object Micrometer, 1 mm = 100 divisions, glass graduation 0. 6.0
54,421. Ocular Net Micrometer for counting objects strewn over the field of view, in mount,
distance apart of lines 0.5 mm 0. 5.0
54,422. Indicating Apparatus after Abbe 2. 2.0
54,423. Microtome, simple pattern, for freehand cutting 0.18.0

The specimen is clamped in a cylinder which can be screwed 10 mm below the surface of the
table. One graduation of the micrometer screw is equivalent to raising the object 0.01 mm. The blade
of the knife is guided over the glass table, the diameter of which is 70 mm.
Cl. 5933.
538 Auxiliary Apparatus Jor Microscopes. Solar Microscopes. No. 54 424 -
54432. 2:3.
54427. 1:2. 54440. 1:4.

s. (1.
54.424. Microtome Knife, fitting Microtome No. 54,423 0. 4.0
54.425. Slide-rest Microtome with automatic arrangement for raising the specimens 0.005 mm
or multiples of this, without cutter . . 6. 0.0
The conducted to and fro after the manner of a lathe slide-rest thus rendering
cutter slider is
manipulation rapid and certain. The clamping device for the specimen is arranged movable on two
intersecting axes.
54.426. Microtome Cutter after Jung, for preceding Microtome, 16 cm long 0. 18.
Heating Boxes for embedding specimens in paraffin quoted for on application.

54.427. Hematometer after Thoma, Figure, with counting chamber and calibrating pipette
for white and red blood corpuscles 1.10.0
54.428. Polarisation Apparatus for investigations on minerals and foodstuffs, analyser with
divided circle 3. 0.0
If this apparatus is not ordered at the same time as the Microscope, the instrument must be sent
to us.
54.429. Gypsum and Mica Plates, set of 8 0. 18.
54.430. Object Carrier with hollow ground out 16 mm diameter . Per 10 0. 2.0
54.431. Object Carrier, 76x26 mm, with ground edges Per 100 0. 3.0
54,432. Cover Glass Calipers, Figure 1. 10. (i
The graduation gives hundredths of a millimetre direct. Range, over 5 mm.

Cover Glasses, square, 0.14 0.17 mm thick:
List No. 54,433 54,434 54,435 54,435 a
Length of Side mm 15 18 20 24
Per Hundred 0.1.6 0.2.0 0.2.6 0.3.6
-
idem, round:
List No. 54,436 54,437 54,438 54,439
Per Hundred 0.1.6 0.2.3 0.2.9 0.3.6
51.062. Collection of Microscopical Preparations for School Use, 50 specimens in small bag,
with description: sec No. 51,062, p. 184 1. 15.
51.063.
-- idem,
50 specimens (different collection): see p. 184 1.18.0
Glass Rods, Platinum Spatulse and small Scoops, etc. quoted for on application.
Materials for Microscopy, as Canada Balsam, Lacquer, etc., of the best quality.
54.440. Set of Accessories for Microscopy, F i g u r c, case containing a razor, spatula. '2 small
knives, straight and bent scissors, forceps, 2 preparation needles. 2 lancets (I. 15.0
54.441. idem, case with razor, spatula, small knife. 2 preparation needles, scissors,
II. 12.
forceps
54.442.
- -
idem, case with small knife, scissors, forceps, 2 needles 0. 7.0
I'l. 1555.
Microscopy Lamps: sec pp. 20 and 71. 4842. 1558.
No. 54 449. Auxiliary Apparatus for Microscopes. Solar Microscopes. 539
54443. 1:5.
50 212. 1 : 7. 54 444. 1 : 4.
54.443. 6 Small Coloured Bottles in Stand with Droppers which serve as stoppers, Figure, s. d.
for making coloured microscopical specimens 1. 0.0
54.444. Micro-photographic Apparatus, Figure, with 2 dark slides, 1 ground glass and
1 transparent plate, 1 ground glass plate on stand, yellow, green and blue glass discs:
price without microscope stand 6. 0.0
Two metal columns sliding in each other are mounted on an iron base, the camera resting on
these columns. Any microscope stand can be used with the apparatus. By sliding the camera it is
possible to compensate for the in equality in height of the different stands. The diaphragms whict
can be slipped into the neck of the camera fix the limits of the image on the plate. A magnifier placed
above the camera permits of fine focussing. The slides are suitable for plates 9 x 12 and 13 x 18 cm.
54.445. Focussing Stage or above 0. 15.
54 446. Auer Lamp with Reflector 0. 18.
54,447. Illuminating Lens 100 mm diameter, on stand 1. 4.
Solar Microscopes.
54,448. Solar Microscope, Figure, constructed entirely of brass, arranged for fitting on
one of the hcliostats Xos. 50,205 50,212, with alum trough for absorbing the heat
rays; the objective and illuminating lenses are focussed by two racks having sloping
teeth, thus seQiiring quite uniform motion. For objective see Nos. 54,453 54,455 . 6. 0.0
54,449. Solar Microscope combined with Heliostat No. 50,212, Figure. Solar Microscope
as before, Heliostat for screwing to the shutter; with horizontal toothed-wheel motion;
mirror actuated by endless screw; with one attachment having a straight gap and one at-
tachment with rotary disc which contains a wavy gap and holes of different size . . 12. 0.
C'l. 3804, 1565.

Tables for Microscope work: see Nos. 50,362 50,367, pp. 69 and 70. 156B, 1560.
540 Solar Microscopes. No. 54450
54461 54463. 1:4 1:8.
54 457. 1 : 2.
54 460. 1:3 1:4.
d.
54,450. Solar Microscope combined with Wall Heliostat No. 50,208, wall thickness to
for s.
54 cm 12. 10.
54.451. - -
idem, with Wall Heliostat No. 50,209, for wall thickness of 60 cm 13. 5.0
54.452. idem, with Wall Heliostat No. 50,210 for 78 cm wall thickness . 14. 0.0
Objectives for preceding Solar Microscopes:

List No. 54,453 54,454 54,455
Size 1 2 3a
0.18.0 0.18.0 1.4.0
51.054. Revolving Nose-piece for 2 Objectives, for rapidly changing the magnification . . . 0. 16.
51.055. Revolving Nose-piece for 3 Objectives . . 1. 2.0
54,456. Microscopical Specimens Each 7 d., 10 d., 1 s. d. and 0. 1.6

Complete price list on application. See also Nos. 51,062 51,063.
Hand Telescopes.
Goerz "Trieder" Binoculars, Figure:
List No. 54,457 54,458 54,459
Power 6 8 1:.'
Weight 360 515 590 grams

6. 10. 7. 0. 9. 10.
54,460. Field and Opera Glasses, Figure, with 6 and 12 lenses. Prices according to style
and quality .... 0. 15. 0, 0. 18. 0, 1. 0. 0, 1. 4. 0, 1. 7. 0, 1. 10. 0, 1. 13. to 5. 0.
Telescopes with extensions, with strap; Figure:

List No. 54,461 54,462 54,463
Diam. of Objective mm 29 .'?(> (.">
1.0.0 1.5.0 2.0.0

Cl. 1524, 1523.
1525. 1567.
No. 54473. Solar Microscopes. Opera, etc. Glasses. Telescopes. 541
54472, 54472a. 1: 16. 54473, 54 473 a, 54 473 b. 1:11.
Astronomical Telescopes.
Telescopes, Fig. 54,470, on metal stands having horizontal and vertical hand motion, in
lock-up box:
Diameter of
542 Telescopes. Interference and Diffraction. No. 54 474
54 474 a. 1:13. 54488. 1:14.
Telescopes with heavy Wood Tripod Stands, Fig. 54,474, for setting up on the floor, up-and- s. d.
down motion by crank, horizontal and vertical hand motion for telescope; with Finder:
List
No.
No. 54 501. Telescopes. Interference of Thin Sheets. 543
54500. 1:1 54501. 1:3.
astronomical ocular, with smoked glass, stand for erecting at the height of the table,
and box
If desired, instead of supplying the terrestrial eyepiece, 2 astronomical eyepieces (power 24 and
96 respectively) are provided with the instrument. The axial system is arranged for a mean polar
height of 50, but the polar height can be varied between 48 and 53.
54.482. Graduated Circle for right ascension and declination, reading to 1 Extra
54.483. Ocular Prism for observing objects in the neighbourhood of zenith
54.484. Astronomical Eyepiece for powers 32, 72, or 120 Each
Telescopes, mounted parallactically and balanced, with metal stand, F i g. 54,488, for setting
up at table height, with lock-up box. for the tube.
List
No.
544 Interference and Diffraction. No. 54 502
54 504. 1 : 2. 54 514. 1 : 3.
54509 54512. 1:7. 54 517 A. 1:2. 54 517 B. 1:2.
d.
54.502. 2 Glass Discs clamped together, with layer between, for demonstrating interference
s.
in wedge-shape air plates (M. T. p. 211; M. P. 10

th
Edn., II, 1, Fig. 608) 0. 4.0
54.503. 2 Gold Leaves between Glass Plates, one appearing green and one blue when light
is transmitted 0. 3.0
54.504. Comparison of Superficial Colours, after Hartl, Figure; in reflected and incident
light the colours of the four different thin plates appear in the complementary colours
* Newton's Colour Glasses, in brass mounts, with 6 pressure screws, for observing the inter-
ference rings in a subjective and objective manner:
List No. 54,505 54,506 54,507 54,508
Diameter mm 70 100 120 150
0.16.0 1.0.0 1.4.0 1.12.0
* -- idem, rotary on stand, Figure.
List No. 54,509 54,510 54,511 54,512
Diameter mm 70 100 120 150
1.12.0 1.18.0 2.4.0 2.10.0
for determining wa\e-

54,513. Colour Ring Apparatus for Students' Exercises, after Grimsehl,
lengths by the aid of Newton's Colour Kings: comprising a reflector, a spectacle lens,
a small auxiliary apparatus and an attachment for producing monochromatic light
for Bunsen burners (E. Grimsehl, Ausgewahlte Schuleriibungen, Fig. 11) 0.14. (>
54,514. Interference Apparatus for Fresnel's Mirror Experiment, Figure,

* for screwing
into the objective holder of the Projection Apparatus, in place of the objective, with
adjustable gap, adjustable black mirrors and diaphragm;
for Projection Apparatuses
having 43 mm cliam. objective 4. o. <t
This apparatus considerably facilitates the carrying out of Fresnel's Experiment, since the gap
and mirrors are combined ready for use.
* 54,515. --idem, for Projection Apparatuses having 55 mm diam. objective 4. 0. (>
* 54,516. idem, for Projection Apparatuses having 60 mm diam. objective . . . 4. <>. it
Cl. 4938, 5791,

* Can be used with th? Projection Apparatus. 353. 1577, 1578.
No. 54531. Interference Mirrors. Adjustable Gaps. 545
54 523. 1 : 4.
54525 (54540). 1 : 4. 54 530. 1 : 7. 54 531. 1 : 6.
* Fresnel's Mirror Apparatus, Figs. 54,517 A and B, with two black ground mirrors; one mirror s. d.
centered by three screws, the other adjustable relatively to the others by fine screw,
on Stand:
List No. 54,517 54,518 54,519
Size of Mirrors mm 30x40 40x50 50x60
2.2.0 2.8.0 3.0.0
Fig. 54,517 A shows the front, and Fig. 54,5178 the back of the interference mirror.
* -- idem, simple, with cemented, ground mirrors:
List No. 54,520 54,521 54,522
Size of Mirrors 30x40 mm
40x50 50x60
1.4.0 1.12.0 2.0.0
* 54,523. Interference Mirror after Fresnel, Figure, with parallel micrometer motion, micro-
meter screw with drum and graduation, on stand, most carefully constructed .... 7. 0.0
* 54,524.
- -
idem, without micrometer motion 4. 16.
* 54,525. Ocular Micrometer after Fresnel, Figure, for measuring interference bands, on
stand 6. 0.0
54,526. Fresnel's Mirror for Students' Use, after Grimsehl, for determining the wave length
of light, with gap, micrometer graduation and two mounts (E. Grimsehl, Ausgewahlte
Schuleriibungen, Figs. 2 and 3) 0.14.0
Lenses: see No. 53,932 b.
Adjustable Gaps: see Nos. 54,53054,535.
* 54,527. Interference Apparatus after Grimsehl, constructed on the Lloyd single mirror prin-
ciple, thus doing away with adjustment of the mirrors. The direct and the reflected
image of the gap are used together for interference (Ztschr. f. d. phys. u. chem. U. 20,
1907, p. 217). The gap with micrometer screw for adjusting and screw for narrowing
and widening are on stand 3. 10.
54.528. Screen with ground glass disc and millimetre graduation for determining wave length;
for use with red and blue glass discs, and especially with the preceding Grimsehl Inter-
ference Apparatus (Ztschr. f. d. phys. u. chem. U. 20, 1907, p. 218) 1. 10.
54.529. Interference Apparatus after Classen, for demonstrating the phenomena before a
large audience interference is produced by reflection on two glass plates (Hassack-Rosen-
;
berg, Projektionsapparate, p. 230; Classen, Natur des Lichts, Fig. 9) 2.10.0
54.530. Adjustable Gap, Figure, with diaphragm screen, on stand, cf. No. 50,985 ... 1. 3.
-- idem, No. 50,986 1.13.0

54.531. with Micrometer Screw, Figure, on Stand, cf.
* Can be used with the Projec- Small transparent Projection Screen:

ii02.326.32o. 35
tion Apparatus. see No. 51,003, p. 179.
54 539. 1 : 2.
54 532. 1 : 9. 54536. 1:10. 54 537. 1 : 4.
54 540 A. 1:9.
s. d.
54.532. Adjustable Gap, can be used vertically and horizontally, Figure, on Stand . . 1. 6.0
- - with Micrometer Screw
54.533. idem, . 1. Iti.
54.534. Adjustable Gap with iris diaphragm, cf. Fig. 50,988, p. 176, on stand; the length of
the gap can also be altered by the iris diaphragm L>. 11.0
54.535.
- -
idem, with Micrometer Screw 3. 1.0
Adjustable Gaps for the Projection Lantern: sec under Nos. 50,985 50,988 a, pp. 175 and 176.
54.536. Interference Prism (bi-prism) after Fresnel, Figure, with diaphragm (M. P.,
10 th Edn. II, 1, Fig. 604), 30x40 mm, on Stand 1. 8.0
54.537. Billet's Half-lenses, Figure, plano-convex, adjustable by micrometer screw, on

stand, 60 mmdiameter (M. P. II, 1, Fig. 605 [587]) 2.10.0
54.538. Lens of short focal length, for observing the interference bands, on Stand .... 0.16.0
for the inter-

54.539. Analyser after Dele/cnne, Figure, with two small parallel mirrors,
ference bands, in brass mount with haft 1. *.<>
M. 3408,
1581, 326", 1583,
308.
No. 54 541. Interference Bands, Diffraction Phenomena. 547
54 540 B (54668). 1 : 6. 54541. 1:8.
* 54,540. Large Optical Bench for Interference and Diffraction Experiments, Figs. 54,540 A J s. d.
and 54,525, with auxiliary apparatus and box for same; for use with the Heliostat or
Projection Lantern 27.0.0
The bench is of iron, 1.20 m long, and is provided with levelling screws. It has a graduation in
millimetres. Each of the three sliders has an index, one of these indices having cross motion for accurate
adjustment. The screens fitted for taking the various gaps, gratings, apertures, lenses, etc. can be
adjusted vertically on the pillars, in addition to being adjustable laterally. The following pertain to
the bench: 1 cylindrical lens, 1 interference prism, 1 Fresnel ocular micrometer (Fig. 54,525) for
measuring wave length, with red observation glass; 1 double adjustable rotary micrometer gap, Fig. C;
1 rotary gap with screw adjustment, 1 rotary double grating on glass, 3 screens for taking 12 diaphragms
having apertures of different shape and with gratings and gaps of different width. The set of dia-
phragms consists of: 1 diaphragm with sharp edge, Fig. D; 1 diaphragm with thick needle. Fig. E;
1 slot
diaphragm with a hair, Fig. F; 1 diaphragm with a thick opaque fibre, Fig. G; 1 diaphragm
with a small round aperture for Grimaldi's experiment, Fig. H; 1 diaphragm with large round aperture;
1
diaphragm with aperture half covered over with mica, Fig. J; 1 diaphragm with rhombic aperture.
1 diaphragm with
triangle of holes, 1 diaphragm with two holes, 1 diaphragm with network of holes,
and 1 diaphragm with a row of holes.
* 54,541 Diaphragmic Disc with 9 Schwerd apertures for diffraction

.
phenomena, Figure,
rotary, on Stand, for use with sunlight or electric light 1.10.0
* Can be used with the Projection Apparatus. Cl. 309, 327,
310 35*
54 544 A. 1:6. 54 544 B. 1:4. 54 547. 1 : 10.
53,907. Cylindrical Lens, in mount, on Stand, 60 mm diameter, for observing the Fresnel
diffraction bands (M. P. II, 1, p. 793 [944])
53,908. --idem, 80 mm diameter
54.544. Diffraction Apparatus, Figs. A and B, consisting of an achromatic telescope of 30 mm

aperture, on Stand 7.10.0
The following pertain to above: 1 gap attachment with micrometer screw, 2 attachments with
rotary diaphragm discs having the following apertures: 1 round hole, 2 round holes, 3 round holes,
4 round holes, 1 triangle, 1 rectangle, 1 rhomb, 1 row of holes, 1 sieve, 1 double gap, 1 triple gap,
1 wire grating, 1 grating on glass (1 cm in 100 parts), 2 rhombs. The sets of gaps and diaphragms
are contained in a case, Pig. B.
- -
54.545. idem, with larger telescope having aperture of 40 mm, gap with micrometer
screw and divided drum, fitted with finer glass grating and a larger number of diaphragms 11. 0.0
In addition to the diaphragms listed in previous item, this apparatus contains: 1 rotary dia-
phragm disc with: 1 hole 0.4 mm
diameter, 1 crossed wire grating, 1 needle, 1 hair, 1 small rod, 1 sharp
edge, 1 small rod half covered with mica for showing the distortion of the interference bands.
54.546. Nickelled Metal Sphere, on stand, for producing a luminous point by reflection of
sunlight 0.16.0
54.547. Diffraction Apparatus for determing the wave length of light, after Hoffmann,
Figure (Ztschr. f. d. phys. u. chem. U. 14, 1901, p. 32), with three coloured discs 6. 0.0
The apparatus consists of an optical bench fixed on a stand and rotating about a horizontal
axis, on which are placed a grating with observation tube and a diaphragm having a screen. These
apparatus are capable of movement along the bench. The diaphragm consists of 3 parallel 0.5 mm
wide gaps of different length placed at distances apart of 10 mm. Covers with coloured discs can be
placed on the diaphragm. Three of these coloured discs (red, green and blue) are supplied with each
apparatus.
- -
54.548. idem, after Grimsehl (Ztschr. f. d. phys. u. chem. U. 17, 1904, p. 135) . . . 2. 10.
54.549.
- -
idem,for Students' Use, after Grimsehl, comprising Xernst Lamp on stand,
diaphragm with aperture, 4 coloured glasses, small optical bench, glass micrometer
(E. Grimsehl, Ausgewahlte physikalische Schuleriibungen, Figs. 8 10) 2. 15.0
Glass Gratings:
List No. 54,550 54,551 54,552 54,553 54,554 54,555 54,556 54,557
Lines to 1 cm 50 100 200 300 500 1000 2000 3(lO<)
0.5.0 0.7.0 0.14.0 1.2.0 1.16.0 2.16.0 3. 10. 4. 0.
54,558. Double Grating, in Brass Mount, rotary one above the other, Figure, 1 mm in
13 parts 0. 18.0
54,559. Wire Grating i

0. 10.0
Cl. 1585, 1586, 1584

No. 54 576. Diffraction Apparatus. Diffraction Gratings. 549
54 558. 2 : 3.
54 568. 1 : 3.
MAX KOHL. CHEMNITZ
54 561. 1 : 2. 54 566, 54 568. 1 : 2. 54 576. 1 :
54.560. Photographed Grating after Xobert, 3 cm wide with lines 3 cm long; 1000 lines to s. d.
1 cm , 0.18.0
On account of its brightness this grating is well adapted for demonstration purposes, but not
for accurate measurements.
54.561. Copy of a genuine Rowland Grating, Figure, 50 x35 mm area of grating, in case 1. 4.0
54.562.
- -
idem, smaller, 25 X 20 mm area of grating 0.15.0
54.563.
- -
idem, between two glass prisms inclined 7 and 32 mm square, Figure . 2. 0.0
54.564. Photographed Diffraction Grating, cemented as a lantern slide between glass plates,
115 lines to the millimetre, area 63 square millimetres 0.10.0
54,565.
- -
idem, photographed area 25 x 25 mm 0. 5.0
54,566. Diffraction Grating after Henry A. Eowland, with 14,438 rulings to one inch, Figure, Price on
plane or concave, of the highest perfection appli-
As a rule we keep a number of such gratings in stock; kindly state requirements. cation
Stands for Rowland's Diffraction Gratings, Figs. 54,568, accurately constructed:

List No. 54,567 54,568 54,569 54,570 54,570 a
Suitable for Gratings of 1.4" 2.5" 4" 5" 6"
2.10.0 3.10.0 4.0.0 4.10.0 5.0.0
Fig. 54,566 shows the stand with the grating set up on it.
-
idem, simple pattern :
List No. 54,571 54,572 54,573 54,574 54,574 a

Suitable for Gratings of 1.4" 2.5" 4" 5" 6"
0. 12. 0. 18. 1. 4. 1. 10. 1. 16.
* 54,575. Phase Reversing Plate, after E. W. Wood, consisting of a glass plate covered with a,
large number
of concentric rings of different fineness and acting as a lens, 180 cm focal
length (Phil. Mag. 1898, p. 511) 0.10.0
The plate of 180 cm focal length gives an image of the arc at a distance of approximately 2.5 m
from an arc light regulator at a distance of approx. 4 m. The plate of 40 cm focal length can be
used as landscape objective with the aid of a weak convex lens.
* 54,576. Circular Photographed Grating, Figure, graduated area 76 diameter, about mm

200 lines to the millimetre 1. 0.0
If an image of tlie arc of an electric projection lamp is cast on the screen and if the circular
grating is placed on it centrally in front of the objective, an annular rainbow results.
# Can be used with the Projection Apparatus. Cl. 1588, 3685, 1590,
1591, 1589, 3686.
550 Interference and Diffraction. No 54 577 -
54 585. 1 : 2.
54 577. 1 : 8. 54 588. 1 : 6.
54,577. Diffraction Chromoscope after Ives, cf. Figure, with binocular objective and with s. d.
6 image plates, size of image approx. 6.5 cm 5. 0.0

The photo plates are made by Wood's process; they consist of three superposed photographed
grating plates each of which has small grating surfaces corresponding to the individual shapes of the
image. The gratings of the three plates have graduation of different widths thus producing spectra
of different lengths. If lateral illumination is applied to an image plate in the apparatus, the portions
of the image plate, which contain only one portion of the grating, cast a definite colour of the spectrum
towards the point at which the eye is situated; immediately two or three gratings act simultaneously
on the eye, the eye itself perceives a corresponding mixed light. At the places on which the image
plate contains no grating the light is not diffracted and no luminous rays pass through the plate
to the eye, since the source of light is situated laterally to the photo plate; consequently these portions
appear black. The image plates can also be used for objective demonstration (cf. B. Donath: Ad-
ditive Farbenwiedergabe nach Wood mit Hilfe von Beugungsspektren, Brunswick, 1906, pp. 125 et seq.).
Diffraction Chromoscopes for Projection: see Nos. 51,066 and 51,066 a, p. 185.
Interference Plate after Lumner-Gehrcke see No. 54,089, p. 507. :
Echelon Grating after Michelson: see No. 54,090, p. 507.

Interference Air Plate after Fabry and Perot: see No. 54,091, p. 507.
54.579. Photographs of the Solar Spectrum, after H. A. Eowland . . . 7.10.0

Sulliman's Journal of Science, 1887/8. Complete series of 10 plates, size 90 x 30 cm, drawn on
lines, provided with the normal wave length scale as corrected by Rowland. The series contains all
wave lengths from 300 to 695 fifi.
54.580.
- - A single plate 0.18.0
54.581. Extra Plate of the B lines in same size 0.18.0
54.582. Extra Plate of the D
lines, same size 0.18.0
The B lines have an expansion of 600 mm, the D lines a distance of 75 mm.
54.583. 4 Extra Plates with the carbon lines Each 0. 18. 3.12.0
* 54,584. Dust Glass for colour rings, very pretty experiment by means of the Projection
Lantern . . . , 0. 4.0
The objective head should be removed from the lantern and a diaphragm having a small round
aperture placed in front of the condenser; a bi-convex lens of approx. 50 cm focal distance should
now be placed in the luminous pencil so as to render the rays convergent. The dust glass is held
immediately behind the lens.
* 54,585. Reflecting Stephanoscope after von Lommel, small pattern, for demonstrating inter-
ference of diffracted light, Figure (Fr. phys. Techn. II, 2, Fig. 2877 [II, Fig. 844]) 0.16.0
* - - demonstration 6.0
54,586. idem, larger, for objective 1.
Polarisation of Light.
54.587. Polariser and Analyser after Mace* de Le"pinay, for explaining the polarisation of light
on a vibrating fibre which is actuated by an electrom&gnetically driven tuning fork,
1.5 mlong (Ztschr. f. d. phys. u. ohem. TJ. 2, 1888, p. 87; W. D., p. 454 [416]) . . 11. 0.0
54.588. Model for Explaining Polarisation by Reflection and Refraction, Figure .... 0.18.0
The different directions in which the ether particles vibrate are demonstrated by small cross rods.
* Can be used with the Projection Apparatus. Cl. 3675, 3805, 1598.
No. 54594. Polarisation of Light. 551
54 593. 1 : 12. 54 594. 1 : 5.
Apparatus for Fresnel's Explanation of the Rotation of the Plane of Polarisation; see Nos. 51,817 s. d.
and 51,818, p. 259.
54,589. Model for showing the Rotation of the Plane of Polarisation in quartz and in a sugar
solution, after Grimsehl (Ztschr. f. d. phys. u. chem. U. 20, 1907, p. 220) 3. 0.0
* 52,047. Polarisation Apparatus for Demonstrating the Properties of Polarised Light, for the
Whirling Table (M. P. II, 1, Fig. 693 [671]), see Fig. 52,047, p. 285 1.10.0
* 54,590. Polarisation Apparatus for the Projection Lantern, Figure
(W. D., Fig. 322 [304]) 2. 8.0
The apparatus consists of a screen with tube, an uncoated mirror as polariser, a black mirror
and a set of glass plates each with tube and rotary mount, as analysers.
* ~>4,o!)l. Further Set of Glass Plates for No. 54,590, for use as polariser (W. D. p. 451 [414]) 0. 18.
* 54,592. Polarisation Apparatus after Duboscq, Figure, for the Projection Lantern (M. P.,
9 th Edn., II, 1, Fig. 638), with two mirrors, lens and receiving screen, on stands . . 3.12.0
* 54,593. Polarisation Apparatus, Figure, for objective demonstration of the phenomena
of polarisation by reflection and refraction (M. P. II, 1, Fig. 699 [677]), with 2 glass plate
columns, diaphragm and lens, on tall stands; can be used with the heliostat or a
projection lantern 4.15.0
* 54,594. Demonstration Polariser after Grimsehl, (Ztschr. f. d. phys. u. chem. U.
Figure
18, 1905, p. 321), with direct vision for demonstrations 1. 2.0
In this very neatly constructed apparatus a coated mirror and a blask mirror a.e filled as
reflection polariser. The apparatus can be rotated about the axis formed by the incident ray of light.
The angle at which the ray of light falls on the polariser is 55. A convex lens given in is used for
experiments with converging polarised light. No. 54,595 is used as analyser.
* Can be used with the Projection Apparatus. Cl. 313, 314,
31fi
l
, 315 2 , 3806.
552 Polarisation of Light. No. 54595
54597. 1 : 10.
54 595 A. 1:10.
54 595 B. 1:10. 51 074. 1 : 4. 54 600. 1 : 6.
* 54,595. Demonstration Analyser for polarised light, after Grimsehl, Figs. and B (Ztschr. A s. d.
f. phys. u. chem. U. 18, 1905, p. 322), consisting of a screen on stand with one
d.
four-sided pyramid of black glass plate and one black glass sphere on haft .... 1.15.0
Fig. A shows a reflected image of the pyramid produced on the analyser screen by the polariser
No. 54,594; Fig. B showing a reflected image of the glass sphere. When the polariser is rotated the
images rotate along with it.
* 54,596. Plate of Mirror Glass with Haft, for insertion as an analyser in the screen of No. 54,595
#54,597. Glass Tube for Polarisation Experiments with Liquids, aftor Grimsehl, Figure
(Ztschr. f. d. phys. u. chem. U. 18, 1905, p. 324), with two stands, closed on one side
by a plane glass disc, with stopper; for use with polariser No. 54,594 1. 8.0
The liquids to be tested water or sugar solution are rendered cloudy by the addition of
a considerably diluted alcoholic mastic solution. The illuminated straight zone of the water and the
spirally twisted zone of the sugar solution respectively rotate when the polariser is rotated.
* 54,598. Auxiliary Apparatus after Grimsehl, for objectively demonstrating the Calc-spar cross
(Ztschr. f. d. phys. u. chem. U. 20, 1907, p. 219, Fig. 11), with reflex polariser . . 2. 0.0
* 54,599. Demonstration Polarisation Apparatus, direct vision, after Grimsehl, arranged for
inserting preparations (Xtsclir. f. d. phys. u. chem. U. 18, 1905, p. 325, 326, Fig. 6) 1.10.0
This apparatus consists of two movable polarisers No. .~>4.."i!l4 connected together, one of which
acts as an analyser. It is possible to demonstrate objectively with them the ordinary phenomena of
polarisation by using a projection lantern arid a transparent screen No. 51.003.
* Can be used with the Projection Apparatus. a. 3807, 3809, .
3808,317. 3:.
No. 54 605. Polarisation Apparatus. 553
54 602. 1 : 4. 54 604. 1 : 6.
* 54,600. Simple Polarisation Apparatus, Figure (Tyndall, Das Licht [Light], p. 125), with two s. d.
large tourmaline plates 5x15 mm, fastened on the glass, one of which 0.0
is rotary . . 3.
* 51,074. Polarisation Apparatus for Objective Demonstration, Figure (W. D., Fig. 323 [305]) 7. 0.0
* 54,601. 1 Set of Preparations for preceding apparatus: 2 gypsum figures, 2 rapidly annealed
glasses, 2 gypsum plates, calc-spar, rock crystal, aragonite, potassium-cyanide, strontium
copper acetate and tourmaline 3. 5.0
54.602. Large Projection-Polarisation Apparatus after Duboscq and von Lang, Figure (M. P.,
9 th Edn., II, 1, Figs. 746 and 747), for use with the heliostat or projection lantern and
for demonstrating all phenomena of double refraction and polarisation 34. 0.0
The apparatus consists of a rotary stand adjustable vertically containing one fixed and three
sliding attachments; one condenser; 3 lenses; 4 calc-spar prisms as polariser; 1 Nicol as analyser
and
1 bi-concave lens on stand for rendering the luminous rays of the projection lantern parallel. To the
apparatus appertain: 1 Delezenne polariser; 1 black mirror; 1 gap; 1 set glass plates; 1 quartz plate
cut parallel to the axis; 1 ditto cut perpendicular to the axis; 2 quarter-wave mica plates; 1 direct
vision prism; 1 wedge compensator with quartz plate after Soleil and 1 double quartz plate; 2 gypsum
plates: 1 piece aragonite; 1 piece tourmaline; 1 piece calc-spar; 1 gypsum figure.
54.603. Polarisation Apparatus after Norrenberg, simple, of brass, with coarsely divided
circle, with rotary stage and with black mirror as analyser 2. 0.0
54,603 a.
-- idem, with Glass Plate Column as analyser 2. 5.0
54.604. --idem, F i
g u r e, with Nicol prism as analyser 2.10.0
54.605.
- - id e m, with black mirror and glass plate column, without Nicol 2.10.0
54.606.
- - i d e
in, with black mirror, glass plate column and Nicol prism (Gan.-Atk.,
Figs. 654, 655; Gan.-Man., Figs. 439, 440) 3. 5.0
Can be used with Projection Apparatus. ci. 318, 1614.

554 Polarisation of Light. No. 54 607
54 607. 1 : 5. 54 609. 1 : 6. 54 610. 1 : 6. 54 612. 1 : 4.
54.607. Polarisation Apparatus after Norrenberg, Figure, entirely of brass, with finely s. d.
divided circles, glass stage rotary and movable about the horizontal axis, with one lens,
1 black mirror, 1 column of glass plates (M. P. II, 1,
Fig. 698 [676]) 4.16.0
For simpler patterns, see preceding page.
- - with 3 lenses, also with a Nicol prism as analyser

54.608. idem, 6. 0.0
54.609. idem, Figure, with 3 lenses, black mirror, column of glass plates, Nicol prism
and tube for circular-polarising liquids 6.10.0
54.610. --idem, as No. 54,609, with a Vogel Pocket Spectroscope, for use as a Polarisation
Spectroscope, Figure 9. 0.0
54.611. Collection of Polarisation Preparations, suitable for Apparatus Nos. 54,602/9 and
54,618/20, consisting of 6 crystals and 2 rapidly annealed glasses 1.16. d
54.612. Simple Polarisation Apparatus after Hartl, Figure, with wood stand, for taking
preparations, and in particular the rapidly annealed glasses No. 53,863 (Fr. phys. Techn.
II, 2, Fig. 2954) 0.10.0
54.613. Polarisation Apparatus for Students' Use, after Grimsehl (Grimsehl, Ausgewahlte
physikalische Schtilerubungen, pp. 19 31) 4. 0.0
(a) Vertical and inclined glass plate with bases and Glow Lamp Holder on base for measuring
the angle of polarisation on glass plates 0.7.0); (b) Polarisation Apparatus with 2 inclined black
(
glass plates, with preparation holder, for investigations between parallel polarisers ( 0.4.0); (c) Po-
larisation Apparatus with crossed polarisers, with preparation holder ( 0.4.0); (d) Polarisation Appa-
ratus arranged on Norrenberg's principle, with rotary set of glass plates 1.10.0): (e) Preparations (
suitable for above: calc-spar, aragonite, gypsum plate 2 mm thick, gypsum plate 0.5 mm thick, gypsum
image, butterfly ( 1. 15. 0).
For lenses, see No. 53, 932 b; for model for explaining polarisation in a thin gypsum sheet, see
No. 54,686.
* 54,614. Column of Glass Plates, Figure, formed of 15 20 thin plate glass sheets, in round
mount with lateral opening so as to be capable of use in transmitted and reflect cd light,
65 mm diameter, 110 mm long 1.16.0
Black Mirrors, in mahogany frame:

List No. 54,615 54,616 54,617
Size cm 10x20 15x30 20x40
0. 10. 0. 18. 1. 10.
* Can be used with the Projection Apparatus. Cl. 1615, 1616,4814,5569.

No. 54025. Polarisation Apparatus. Tourmaline Tongs. 555
54 621. 1 : 6. 54 622. 1 : 2. 54 624. 1 : 5.
54.618. Microscopic Polarisation Apparatus, Figure

(M. P. II, 2, Fig. 802 [II, 1, 763]), s. d.
with draw tube and lens system, for magnifying the axial images 0.0
The apparatus possesses a very large field of view and permits of viewing simultaneously the
poles of the rings in sodium hyposulphite.
54.619. --idem, Figure, with rack on draw tube and Goniometer for measuring the
axial angles of the crystals 10. 0.0
- - with polished mahogany storing box
54.620. idem, 11. 0.0
With the last three apparatus listed it is possible to observe the axial images and other pheno-
mena on crystal plates, gypsum and mica combinations, etc.
54.621. Large Polarisation Apparatus, Figure, with black mirror, Nicol prism, 3 lenses,
preparation holder on one axis, with divided drum, provided with vernier and magnifier
for reading off the rotation. The preparation holder can be rotated horizontally and
vertically thus rendering possible the focussing of the axial images to a nicety. The
apparatus has cross wires which can be adjusted symmetrically narrower and wider
by a screw. The apparatus gives a very large and beautiful image 15. 0.
54.622. Tourmaline Tongs, Figure. Price according to beauty and purity of the tourma-
lines (M. P. II, 1, Fig. 680 [654]) 0. 15. 0, 1. 0. 0, 1. 5. .. 1.10.0
54.623. --idem, Figure, with device for automatically securing the preparations
(M. P. II, 2, Fig. 799 [II, 1, 758]) 1.10.0
54.624. Tourmaline Tongs with 6 different preparations, Figure, with box ...... 2.12.0
Preparations: sugar, amethyst, calc-spar (Iceland), smoky quartz, potassium-cyanide, aragonite.
54.625. Tourmaline Plates, green, singly Each 0. 6. to 0. 10.
Cl. 321, 1617, 1618, 1621,

1619. 1620, 1622.
556 Polarisation of Light. Xo. 54 620 -
54 628. 1 : 3.
54 626. 1 : 4.
54 633. 2 : 5. 54 627. 1 = 2.
* 54,626. Polarisation Apparatus after Mach, Figure, with rotary analyser (M. P. II, 2,
s. d.
Fig. 812 [II, 1, 749]), with 2 Nicol prisms, one of which rotates, with gap attachment,
diaphragm attachment, glass press, object holder and direct-vision prism 13. 0.0
* 54,627. Wedge Compensator after Babinet, F i g u r (M. P. II, 2, Figs. 764, 765 [II, 1,
Figs. 814, 815]), 2 wedges cut parallel to the axis, in mount 5. 0.0
* 54,628. Compensator
th
after Soleil, 2 wedges and compensating plate, in brass mount, Figure
(M. P., 10 Edn., II, 2, Fig. 766) 6. 10.
54.629. Polariscope after Savart, in brass mount 0.18.0
54.630.
- - after Babinet 1. 4.0
54.631.
- - after Se"narmont 1.10.0
54.632.
- - after Bravais 1.10.0
54.633. Fresnel's Parallelepiped, Figure, in brass mount (M. P. II, 2, Fig. 884 [II, 1, 827]) 2. 8.0
Paalzow Optical Benches.

* 54,634. Large Paalzow Optical Bench, F g u r e, for experiments on Double Eefraction, on
i
Polarisation in parallel and converging light, on Interference and Diffraction, on Spec-

trum Phenomena and on Microscopic Phenomena, by means of sunlight, electric light.
or limelight; fitting all our projection apparatus 34. 0.0
The optical bench consists of an iron cheek I. in long, pinned and ground, resting
-2 on legs having
provided with a rule accurately divided in millimetres and has 7 brass stands.
levelling screws. It is
Cl. 320, 294,

1628, 293.
No. 54 634. Paalzow Optical Benches. 557
54634. Large Paalzow Optical Bench, 1 7. :
Fitted with the undermentioned accessories and auxiliary apparatus No. 50,982, 50,986, 54,022, three of No. 54,180,
Nos. 54,627, 54,637, 54,641, 54,644, 54,648, 54,650, 54,653, 54,664, 54,665 and 9 additional preparations.
6 of which can be adjusted vertically by rack and pinion; one of these can be adjusted laterally by a s. d.
micrometer screw for carrying out interference experiments.
The following experiments are possible when an appropriate selection of the accessories Nos. 54,636
to 54,669 is made.
1. Double refraction with one or two double
refracting prisms, Fig. 54,635 d.
2. Breaking up of the unpolarised light into 2 or 4 polarised rays by double-refracting prism.
3. Polarisation by using a Nicol and a double-refracting prism, Fig. 54, 635 b.
4. Polarisation by a Nicol prism and a column of glass plates.
5. Polarisation by a Nicol prism and a black mirror.
6. Polarisation by a glass plate column and a black mirror, Fig. 54, 635 c.
7. Polarisation by 2 Nicol prisms in parallel light.
8. Polarisation by 2- Nicol prisms in strongly converging light, for monaxial and bi-axial crystals,
Fig. 54,635 a.
9. Explanation of the scientific and technical polarisation apparatuses; Soleil's wedge compensation,
colour apparatus and half-shadow apparatus by means of Lippich's polariser.
10. Demonstration of interference and diffraction phenomena.
11. Demonstration of spectrum phenomena by a gap, a collimator lens and a large direct-vision prism,
Fig. 54,635e.
12. Demonstration of Microscopic phenomena in polarised light, Fig. 54,635 f.
13. Projection 01 microscopical preparations.
As luminous source use can be made of a heliostat, of one of the projection apparatrs listed
under Nos. 50,730 50,744, 50,783 50,806, or of the Megadiascopes Nos. 9500 9519. The most
advantageous sources to use for these experiments are the apparatus having an electric arc lamp or,
perhaps, limelight. The path of rays can be followed freely by the audience and the entire arrange-
ment of lenses, objects, etc. is such that an image is first cast on the projection screen in unpolarised
light, the objects then appearing in polarised light when the polarisers are inserted.
Supplied with the apparatus are:

6 Stands, with up and down adjustment, five of these with rack and pinion.
1 Stand with lateral screw displacement for interference experiments.
1 Water Trough ( 2. 0. 0) for continuous cooling, for condensers to 122 mm diameter (when using
projection lanterns having larger condenser use should be made of larger troughs at an extra
price of 0. 10. 0, see List No. 50,977).
1 Bi-concave Lens in mount ( 1. 5. 0) for producing parallel rays (when ordering the size of condenser
of the lantern should be given).
1 Rotary Object Holder ( 1. 5. 0).
1 Open Objective ( 1. 10. 0).
2 Bearings for the Nicol prisms ( 0. 15. 0).
2 Condensers 4. 0. 0) for producing strongly converging rays.
( One of these condensers is fitted with
preparation holder.
If desired, the accessories,
together with any auxiliary parts ordered at the same time, are fitted
in a durable box, at lowest
possible price.
Auxiliary parts for definite optical experiments: see Nos. 54,636 54,669.
01. 2S9.
558 Polarisation of Light. No. 54 635
N O K K N L TV
- 1
'!
54641. 1:3.
54 635 a (50 789, 54 635, 54 639). 1 : 10.
Polarisation in converging light with 2 Xicol prisms and

2 condensers, for uniaxial and bi-axial crystals.
H W
54 635 b (54 635, 54 639, 54 649). 1 : 10. 54 635 c (54 635, 54 645, 54 647). 1 : 10.
Polarisation in parallel light with 1 Nicol as polariser Polarisation with Column of Glass Plates
and 1 double-refracting prism. and Black Mirror.
The collections for different experiments are represented in Figs. 54,635 a f; the projection apparatus,
should be imagined as being to the right of the optical bench and the projection screen to the left.
In the illustrations
C = Collimator Lens, K = Condenser with Preparation O = Open Objective,
D = Direct -vision Prism, Holder. P = Double refract in.u
-
F = Adjustable Gap, L = Bi-concave Lens, Prism,

= Glass Plate Column. M = Projection Microscope, S = Black Mirror,
H = Rotary Object Holder, N = Nicol Prism. W = Water Trough.
* 54,635. Small Paalzow Optical Bench, Figs, a f, with tall legs, for experiments on Double i s. d.
Infraction, Polarisation in parallel and converging Light, on Spectrum Phenomena

and on Microscopical Phenomena 16. 0. O
This optical bench consists of a polished stand of mahogany with two metal rails.
Given in are the following:

7 simple stands sliding on the rails.
1 Water Trough ( 2.0.0) for continuous cooling, for condensers to 122 mm

diameter (when using
em
projection lantern having larger condensers
projection a larger trough, at an extra price of i 0. 10. 0, should
be employed, see List No. 50,977).
* Can be used with the Projection Apparatus. 'l. 302, 291.

303. 304.
No. 54647. Paalzow Optical Benches. 559
54 635 d (54 635, 54 649). 1:10. 54635e (54635, 54666, 50982, 50986). 1 10. :
Double refraction with 1 or 2 double-refracting prisms. Spectrum Phenomena with a direct-vision prism.
N M N
54635! (54635, 54639, 51048, 54639). 1 : 10.
Microscopic Polarisation Phenomena in converging light

(can also be used as Projection Microscope). 54643. 1 : 3.
1 Bi-concave Lens in mount 0. 18. 0) for producing parallel rays (when ordering size of condenser
(
s. d.
of lantern should be quoted).
1 Rotary Object Holder ( 1. 5. 0).
1 Open Objective ( 1. 10. 0).
2 Bearings for Nicol Prisms ( 0. 10. 0).
2 Condensers ( 4. 0. 0) for producing converging rays, with preparation holder.
The preceding
optical bench is specially adapted for experiments Nos. 1 9 and 11 13 included
in the remark to List No. 54,634. If the bench has to be arranged for interference and diffraction
experiments (see No. 10) also, it must be constructed longer, the extra cost being 2. 0. 0.
Auxiliary Apparatus for Experiments on Polarisation and Double Refraction, Figs. 54635 a, i>.
c, d.
For large For small For large For small

Paalzow Paalzow Paalzow Paalzow
Bench Bench Bench Bench
No. 54,634 No. 54,635 No. 54,634 No. 54,635
54,636. Nicol Prisms in brass S. d. s. d. 1 54,641. Glass Press, Figure, s. d. s. d.
mount, polariscr 35 mm, ana- with 2 glasses, for showing that

lyser 28 mm 50. 0.
Prices glass becomes double refracting
idem, polariser 30 mm, by pressure (M. P. II, 2,
f 54,637.
analyser 24 mm 30. 0.
vary
Fig. 797 [II, 1, 790]) .... 1. 2. 1. 2.
The of the Nicol f 54,642. Fresnel's Press, for showing

prices that makes
pressure glass
prisms are only approximate double refracting (M. P. II,
and liable to vary.
1, 753 [734]) 2. 15. 2. 15.
54,638. Divided and Index
Circle t 54,643. Glass Bending Press, F i-
on the prism mounts .... 1. 10. g u r e, with 2 glass strips, for
t 54,639. 2 Prisms in brass
Nicol producing double refraction
2.
(M. P. II, 2, 796 [II, 1, 789]) 1. 2. 1.
mount, polariser 25 mm, ana-
t 54,644. Black Mirror, with mount
lyser 22 mm, Fig. 54,635 b (N) and haft 1. 2.
and 54,635 f (N), quality I . 22 10 '
- idem,
-
Prices t 54,645.
-
smaller, Fi-
.54,640. idem, polariser 25 mm, gure 54,635 c (S)
0. 16.
analyser 20 mm, 1 20. 0.
quality I .
t 54,646.Column of Glass Plate, with
The prices of Nicol prisms mount and haft 3. 0.
are only approximate and sub- t 54,647. idem,
smaller, Fi-
2. 0.
ject to variation. gure 54,635 c (G)
Cl. 305, 306,
The items marked f are absolutely necessary
307, 292.
for carrying out the experiments.
560 Paalzow Optical Benches. No. 5464S
1234
54 653. 1 : 3.
A
54654. 1:4. 54655. 1:1.
For large For small For large For small

Paalzow Paalzow Paalzow Paalzow
Bench Bench Benth Bench
No. 54,631 No. 51,635 No. 54,634 No, 64,885
t 54,648. 2 Double-refracting Prisms s. d. 1 54,651. Small Window, half red, d. s. d.
20 mm
diameter, in one mount half blue glass 0. . 7.
with haft 3. 10. t 54,652. Nicol with sharp edges for
t 54,649.
-- 13.5 mm
diameter, Fi- making the Lippich polariser,
gure 54,635 b (P) and 54,635 d with suitable mount for the
(P) 2. 5. wedge compensation .... 1. 5. 1. 5.
t 54,628. Complete Soleil Wedge Com- 1 54,653. Observation Tube, with

pensation 6. 10. 6. 10. haft, Figure, for filling
1 54,650. Right- and Left-rotating with rotating solutions . . . 0. 18. 0. 18.
quartz plate, mounted in cork 0. 15. 15.
Polarisation Apparatus for the Paalzow Optical Bench.

s. d. s. d.
t 54,654. 8 Rapidly Annealed Glasses of different t 54,659. Gypsum with movable hyperbolae . . 0. 7.
shapes, Figure 2. 10. t 54,660. 2 Gypsum Plates for complementary

t 54,655. 2 Crossed, Annealed Glasses in cork colours, mounted in cork. Each 0. 3. 6 0. 7.
mount, Figure 0. 10. t 54,661. idem, 4 wave length. Each

V 0.4.0 0. 8.
1 54,656. Rock Crystal 0. 6. t 54,662. 2 Figures, star and butterfly

Gypsum 1. 10.
t 54,657. Aragonite 0. 8. Further preparations listed on pp. 564
1 54,658. Calc-spar 0. 6. to 567.
Auxiliary Apparatus for Experiments on Spectrum Phenomena, Fig. 54 635 e.

t 50,986. Adjustable Gap, with micrometer screw, s. d. 54,042. Direct-vision Prisms, consisting of s. d.
Fig. 54,635 e (F) and 50,986, p. 176, with 2 crown glass and 1 flint glass prism,
round screen and haft 1. 8. 20 mm
high, without mount 2. 0.
50,988a. idem, with iris diaphragm . . 2. 16. 54,052. idem, consisting of 3 crown glass
t 54,663. Cylinder Lens with screen and haft . 0. 15. and 2 flint glass prisms, 38 side, mm
f 50,982. Collimator Lens with diaphragm and 180 mm long, without mount, for placing
haft, Fig. 54,635 e (C) 0. 18. on stage No. 54,665 8. 0. o
54,664. Flint Glass Prism, 27 high mm ... 0. 10. f 54,665. Stage for preceding prisms, with rotary
1 54,022. Wernicke's Liquid Prism, 20 mm plate and haft 0. 10.
aperture 2. 15. 54,666. Direct - vision compound Prism as

54.028. idem, built round, can be taken No. 54,052, quintuple, 38 side, hi mm
apart for cleaning, 30 mm 5. 0. mount with haft, Fig. 54,635e (D) . . . 9.10
54.029. Direct-vision Prism after Koenigs- t 54, 180. Absorption Box, Fig. 54,180, p. 516,
berger, 25 mm aperture 1. 10. 55 x 35 x 10 inside mm 0. 3.
Liquid Prisms and Direct- vision Prisms (com-

pound): see Nos. 54,022/059, p. 502.
Auxiliary Apparatus for Experiments on Microscopic Phenomena, Fig. 54 635 f.

1 51,048. Projection Microscope, Fig. 54,635f s. d. Objectives for above: see Nos. 51,049 51,i>.~>3.
(M) and 51,048, p. 183, with object holder, t Collection of Microscopical Specimens for School
rack and fine motion and condenser lens, Use: see Nos. 51,062 and 51.O63. p. 184.
without objective 4. 0.
Auxiliary Apparatus for Experiments on Interference and Diffraction

for the large Optical Bench No. 54634.
54,668. Complete Installation for Interference s. d. gap with screw adjustment, 1 rotary .
and Diffraction Experiments, I-'ig. r>4..y<p I',. double grating on glass, 3 screens for
p. 547, comprising: 1 cylinder lens, 1 inter- taking 12 diaphragms IS. o.
ference prism, 1 ocular micrometer (Fres- lie the construction of the diaphragm^
nel's). Fig. 54,525, for measuring wave supplied and of (lit- phenomena obtained
lenjit h, with red observation glass, 1 doubly by t lie same, iciilars will be loutxi
flirt her part
adjustable, rotary micrometer gap, Irotary in the optical bench for interference and
The items marked t are absolutely neces>aiv rl. 5276. 295. 298.
for carrying out I lie experiments.
No. 54 673. Technical Polarisation Apparatus. 561
54 670, 54 684. 1 : 6. 54 672. 1 = 6.
diffraction experiments under No. 54,540; s. d. Diffraction Chromoscope on the Paalzow s. d.

the set there mentioned comprises a com- Optical Bench, fitting the large Optical
plete and independent bench. As to the Bench No. 54,634 or the small bench
employment of device No. 54,668 with a No. 54,635 with extension. Given in are
small Paalzow Bench, see remark under 6 image plates with, grating images after
No. 54,635. Wood, size of images about 6.5 cm . . 8. 0.
54.523. Interference Mirror after Fresnel,

The outfit comprises screening fold-
1
Fig: 54,523, p. 545, with parallel micro- ing box with one simple gap, 1 photo holder
meter motion, micrometer screw with with change frame, 1 bi-convex lens, 1 gap
drum and graduation, on stand, carefully adjustable as regards height and width
constructed 7. 0. and 1 achromatic objective with up-and-
54.524. i d e in, without parallel micro- down adjustment.
meter motion 4. 16. Further details as to the Diffraction Chromoscope given
54,669. Complete Installation for setting up the on p. 185, No. 51,066.
s. d.
Polarisation Apparatus for Technical Purposes.
(Polariscopes.)
54,670. Polarisation Apparatus with Divided Circle, after Mitscherlich, Figure, with
Laurent Polariser, for urine analyses, reading accurately to 0.1, with observing tube
1.4 inni and one tube 94.7 mm
long, without sodium lamp ... ........ 8. 5,0
By using the 189.4 mm
long tube the angle of rotation in degrees gives direct the amount in
grammes com of the urine investigated. With rotations of more than
of dextrose contained in 100
5 the sodium light must be purified by a light filter filled with potassium bicliromate solution (see
next item). For gas sodium lamp see No. 54 684.
.54.<i71. Absorption Vessel for Potassium Bichromate Solution, for screwing in the end of the apparatus opposite
the source of light ...................................... 0. 10.
54.672. Simple Polarisation Apparatus with Divided Circle, after Lippich, Figure, mounted
on pillar with tripod, with two verniers and magnifiers; also with Lippich Polariser in
two parts and absorption vessel and containing box for tubes to 220 length, without mm
......................
;
observing tubes (see Nos. 54,677/81) 23. 5.0
54.673. idem, for tubes to 400 mm length, without observing tubes (see Nos. 54,677/82) 26. 10.0
If specially desired, apparatus Nos. 54,672 and 54,673 can also be fitted with a second graduation
in Ventzke degrees, this graduation rendering it possible to read the percentage dextrose direct. Fill inn
this second graduation costs ................................. 2. 19.
If a Lippich Polariser with tripartite field of view

apparatus, price is desired in these the of the
latter is increased by ..................................... 5. 10.
The half-shadow can be varied within the limits 20 and read off on a small scale.
Cl. 1632. 1633.

36
562 Polarisation. Double Refraction. No. 54 674
54674. 1 : 6.
54,674. Polarisation Apparatus with Divided Circle, after Lippich, on trestle stand, Figure,
with measurable, variable, half-shadow, with tripartite Lippich Polariser. The circle
can be rotated by hand or micrometrically. Readings to 0.01. The apparatus is
nvianged for observing tubes 220 long.mm Price without observing tubes (see
Nos. 54,677/81)
54,075.
-- idem, for observing tubes 400 mm long; without observing tubes (see
Nos. 54,677/82)
54,676.
- -
idem, for observing tubes 600 mm long; without observing tubes (see
Nos. 54,677/83)
Observing Tubes, Fig. 5- 681.

List No. 54,
Length mm 94.
5-1,084. Gas Sodium Lamp, latest pattern, Fig. 54,670, p. 561; Bunsen burner with platinum
ling for taking sodium-chloride
54,685 Spirit Sodium Lamp, similar pattern to above

No. 64701. Technical Polarisation Apparatus. Double Refraction. 563
54681. 1:3.
54690. 1:7.
54 689 A. 1:5.
54692. 1:8.
54693. 1:2.
54 689 B. 1:5.
54 700 A. 1:1.
54 689 C. 1:5. 54700B. 1 : 1. 54701. 1:5.
54.689. 10 Pasteboard Models, after J. Miiller, Figs. A, B and C, for explaining the Ring Systems
in uniaxial and biaxial Crystals, after Fresnel (M. P. II, 1, Fig. 724, 725, 736 740 [658,
702, 703, 717, 718, 719. 720,. 729]), with two stands in boxes
54.690. 2 Plaster Models for the isochromatic wave- surf aces, Figure, after Bertin . . .
54.691. 2 WoodPrisms (can be taken to pieces) with Drawings on cardboard and Ellipsoids
after Pfaundler, for deriving the phenomena in uniaxial, negative crystals from the wave-
area by means of the Huyghenian construction (M. P. II, 1, Figs. 726
'
734 [704 707,
709, 711713, 715])
54.692. Model of the Vibration Planes of the Light in the Polarisation Apparatus, Figure,
after Prof. Triepel, Breslau, with description
54.693. Glass Plate with Letters and Calc-spar Plate, Figure, for showing double refraction
(Gan.-Man., Fig. 420) ..."
Double Refracting Prisms, of Calc-spar, achromatised by a glass prism (M. P. II, 1, Fig. 696
[674]).
List No. 54,694 54,695 54,696 54,697 54,698
Aperture mm 10 15 20 25 30
0.10.0 0.16.0 1.2.0 1.15.0 2.5.0
Triple achromatised prisms arc double the price of above.
54.699. Fresnel's Prism, consisting of three quartz prisms of reverse rotation, for showing
circular double refraction (M. P., 9 th Edn., II, 1, Fig
Fig. 835)
54.700. Dichroscopic Magnifier after Haidinger, Figs. A and B
54.701. Polarisation Polyoscope after Dove, Figure
564 Double Refraction. No. 54 702
54 702 A. 4:5.
54 702 B. 4:5. 54 703 B. 2:3.
54 703 A. 2:3. 54 70S. 1 : 4. 54 754. 1 : 5.
54,539. Analyser after Delezenne, with two small parallel mirrors, in brass mount,
s (1
Fisr. 54,539,
p. 546 1. 8.0
53,747. Kaleidoscope for polarised light, Fig. 53,747, p. 476, with black mirror, Nicol prism
and gypsum objects 3. 0.
54.702. Hamilton's (or Lloyd's) Apparatus, Figs. A and B, for subjective observation of conic
refraction 1. 10.
54.703. Apparatus after Beer. Figs. A and B, for demonstrating double refraction, with two
rotary rhombohedra and diaphragms 2. 0.
* 54,641. Glass Press, with two glasses, for showing that glass becomes double refract in<r by
the application of pressure (M. P. II, 2, Fig. 797 [II, 1, 790]), see Fig. 54,641, p. 55* 1. 2. o
# 54,642. Fresnel's Press for showing that pressure renders glass double refracting (M. P. IT, 1,
Fig. 753 [734]) ." 2.15.0

*:.l,643. Press for bending Glass, with two glass strips (M. P. II, 2, Fig. 796 [II, 1, 789]) . 1. 2.0
* 54,654. 8 rapidly annealed Glasses of different shapes, see Fig. 54,654, p. 560 2. Id. o
Nos 1, 2, 3 and 4 cost singly 0. 5. each; No. 5, 0. 8. 0; and Nos. 6, 7 and 8, 0. 12. t-aHi.
# .VI, 655. 2 crossed annealed Glasses, consisting of 2 single glasses mounted in cork, see Fiir. Vl,6.">."(,
p. 560 0. lo.o
These glasses show hyperbolae.
.">l.704. 4 Coloured Plates, after Brezina, on interference phenomena in crystal plates, with
text '. together
. . . . 0. 16.0
shows a uniaxial crystal, ruby; plate 2 circular-polarising quartz: plates 3 and 4 a biaxial
Plate 1
prismatic crystal ground perpendicular to optical centre line, in cross and hyperbola position (Cerussite
Gypsum and Mica Preparations.

54,70."). Gypsum Wedge, 45 mm long, 1
st
to 2 nd order 0. l.">.o
st nd 0.12.0
.M.706. - -
1 to 3 order
- st th
54,707.
-
1 to 5 order o. HI.
.M. "OH. Convex and Concave Gypsum Plates, Figure, in mount; can he rotated over each
by means of rack and pinion for varying (lie colour ring 2. 0.
(1. 164!!. Hill. 1646.

* (an be used with the Projection Apparatus 164S J>w lfi5J
No. 54 759. Gypsum, Mica and Calc-spar Preparations. 565
54,709. Gypsum Plates of 1

/1 ,
3
/4 ,
9
/
4 wave length; thirteen different wave retardations can be s. d.
produced with the same by alternating them; in round pasteboard mounts 0.15.0
Gypsum Figures, appearing in the different colours in polarised light.

List No. 54,710 54,711 54,712 54,713 54,714
4 different-coloured Lamellae Cube Octahedron Star Butterfly
0.5.0 0.6.0 0.7.0 0.10.0 0.18.0
List No. 54,715 54,716
Flower Bouquet
1. 0. 1. 16.
54.717. Double Plate after Bravais 0. 10.
54.718. Small Gypsum Plate between two 1

/1 mica plates, aperture 40 mm 0. 8.
54.719. idem,
- - von Mohl, collection of 8, comprising 4 gypsum
after plates, read first
to fourth order, and 4 small mica plates of 1 / 8 /a wave-length 30
J
mm diameter . . 0.12.0
st
54.720. Single Gypsum Plate, in 1 order colours 0. 3.
- - in -colours of higher order 0. 3.

54.721.
54.722. Quarter-wave Mica Plate, for investigating the character of double refraction in un-
axial crystals, large and rectangular 0. 4.
51.723. Gypsum and Mica Combination, after Wright, giving the most beautiful phenomena,
collection of 6 1. 4.
These preparations are only suitable for Polarisation Apparatus No. 54,618.
54.724. Mica Combinations after Norrenberg, for shewing how uniaxial mica is formed out
of biaxial, collection of 6 pieces 1. 4.
54.725.
- - in a preparation with mica segments crossed at right angles 1. 6.
54.726. Uniaxial circular-polarising Mica Combinations after Eeusch, left and right rotating,
crossed at an angle of 60 Per pair 1. 4.
Calc-spar Preparations.
54.693. Calc-spar Plate and Glass Plate with lettering, see Fig. 54,693, p. 563 0. 16.
54,728. Calc-spar Prism for demonstrating decomposition and simultaneous double-refraction,

showing two spectra (W. D. p. 452) 1. 0.
Nicol Prisms, with oblique end surfaces:

List No. 54,729 54,730 54,731 54,732 54,733 54,734 54,735 54,736
Side 4 mm 5 6 7 8 9 10 11
0. 4. 0. 5. 0. 6. 0. 7. 0. 8. 0. 9. 0. 10. 0. 12.
List No. 54,737 54,738 54,739 54,740 54,741 54,742 54,743
Side mm 12 13 14 15 16 18 20
0. 14. 0. 16. 1. 0. 1. 4. 1. 10. 22. 10. 3-3. 10.
The length 01 the prisms is about 2'/ 2 times the length of side. Prices for larger Nicols quoted
on application.
Glan-Thompson Prisms, with perpendicular end surfaces:

List No. 54,744 54,745 54,746 54,747 54,748 54,749 54,750 54.751 54,752 54,753
Length mm 15 18 20 22 24 26 28 30 35 40
0. 10. 0. 14. 0. 18. 1. 4. 1. 12. 2. 0. 2. 10. 3. 5. 5. 10. 8. 0.
The width is approximately hal! the length of the prism. The prices for prisms above 24 mm
length fluctuate.
Mounts for Nicol Prisms with divided circle on stand, Figure.

List No. 54,754 54,755
For Nicols to 20 35 mm
2. 0. 2. 10.
54,756. Senarmont's Prism, made up of two calc-spar prisms (M. P. TI, 1, Fig. 711 [689]). I
Prices according to size 1. 4. to 2. 0.
Foucault Prisms (M. P. II, 1, Fig. 717 [695]), without cement, with air stratum:
List No. 54,757 54,758 54,759
Side mm 20 30
1. 10. 2. 10. 3. 15.
566 Gale-spar and Quartz Preparations. No. 54 760
54 776. 1 : 2. 54777. 3. 54 785.
Clan's Prisms (M. P. II, 1, Fig. 854 [1018]), with air stratum, without cement, optical axis
parallel to refracting edge, end surfaces perpendicular to direction of rays:
List No. 54,760 54,761 54,762
Free Aperture 12 16 20 mm
1.4.0 1.16.0 3.6.0
54.763. Wild's Double Plate
54.764. Calderon's Double Plate
54.765. Three Different Calc-spar Rhombohedra, Figure, with 6, 8 and 10 polished sur-
faces, 20 mm
side, in case
Rhombohedra with the 6 natural cleavage surfaces, all 6 surfaces polished:
List No. 54,766 54,767 54,768
Side mm20 25 27
0.16.0 1.6.0 1.15.0
idem, having two surfaces (ground and polished) perpendicular to the axis
-
also (8 polished
surfaces). List No. 54,769 54,770 54,771
Side 20 mm 25 27
1.0.0 1.12.0 2.5.0
-
idem, each having in addition two ground and polished surfaces perpendicular and parallel
to the axis (10 polished surfaces).
List No. 54,772 54,773 54,774
Side mm 20 25 27
1.4.0 1.16.0 2.10.0
54.775. Calc-spar Cube, ground perpendicular and parallel to the axis
54.776. Calc-spar Plate between two Glass Prisms, Figure, shewing from one side the
ring system and from the other double-refraction
and rock
52.224. Press for producing the sliding surfaces in calc-spar salt, after Reusch, with
preparations
52.225. Pressed and unpressed Preparations, singly 0. 2. 6 to
52.226. Press after Baumliauer, for producing calc-spar doublets .
54.777. 2 Large Calc-spar Rhombohedra on stands, Figure, in mount, rotary, approx.

25 mm
side, for demonstrating all phenomena of double-refraction and polarisation
peculiar to calc-spar 6. 0.0
Quartz Preparations.
Quartz and Rock Crystal Prisms: sec Nos. 53, 975 53,986.
Quartz Lenses, bi-c<mve\, perpendicular to axis, in two different radii of curvature, 300 or
150 mm, first quality:
List No. 54,778 54,779 54,780 54,781 54,782
Diameter inn; 40 45 50 (ill 7<>
0.15.0 1.0.0 1.5.0 1.10.0 2.0.0

54,78/5. Double Plate, of right and
rotating quart/, left 0. 1L'. (I
54,784. Bertrand's quadruple Quartz Plate 1. -4.0
CI. 1858,
3873, 1058', lii.v.l.
No. 54 792. Heat. 567
54 787. 1 : 6.
54786. 1:10 54788. 1:3. 54 789. 1 : 3. 54 791. 1 : 10.
Heat.
General. Thermal Expansion. s. d.
52,146. Molecule Model after Korner Fig. 54 216, p. 301, for explaining heat and its gene-
ration by impact or friction (Fr. Phys. Techn. I, 2, Fig. 3899) 1.10.0
54,785. Brass Sphere with Ring, after S'Gravesande, Figure, for showing the expansion
of solids by heat and contraction by cooling (W. D. Fig. 324 [306]), diameter of sphere
24 mm 0. 5.0
54,786.
- -
idem, larger. Figure, with sphere 75 mm diameter 1. 8.0
54,787. Brass Sphere on stem, Figure, with small tripod having a circular opening, for the
same experiment 0. 8.0
* 54,788. Glass Sphere with tube closed at top, for showing the expansion of liquids, Figure,
filled with coloured petroleum (W. D. Fig. 326 [308]) 0. 1.8
* 54,789. Glass Sphere with Capillary Tube open at top, Figure (Gan.-Man. Fig. 462; Gan.-
Eein. Fig. 300) 0. 1.8
* 54,790.
- -
idem, without filling, for use for demonstrating expansion of air when a mercury
thread is introduced (Gan.-Man. Fig. 463; Gan.-Rein. Fig. 301) 0. 1.8
54.791. Square formed of Tubes, with two open limbs, Figure, for the
expansion of liquids 0. 3.0
If the square of tubes is nearly filled with coloured water and one limb heated by a spirit
lamp the water rises in this limb.
th
54.792. Air Thermoscope after Galilei (M. P., 10 Edn., Ill, p. 6; Meyer, Naturlehre, Fig. 11) 0. 2/8
ci. 6078,
( 'an be used with the Projection Apparatus.
3410, 354, 355, 5798.
568 Heat. No. 54 793
A).
54 795. 1 : 8.
54 799. 1 : 8.
54 802. 1 : 5. 54 800. 1 : 8.
54.793. Thermoscope after Drebbel. for showing the expansion of gases, Figure, consisting s. d.
of a bulb, with tube attached, the former half-filled with a liquid, length of tube 75 cm,
with graduation (Fr. Phys. Techn. I, 2, Fig. 2848) ................ 0.10.0
54.794. Tyndall's Apparatus for showing the Expansion of Gases, F g u e (Tyndall, Die i r
Warme. Fig. 43, 1894)
Prom
.............................
the boiling fla'jk, tilled with air, a small tube leads into a wider, shortened barometer tube
1. 0.0
(to be filled witfi coloured water) clamped on the same stand. If the air in the flask is heated it expands
and rises in bubbles into the barometer tube.
54.795. Contraction Apparatus alter Tyndall, Figure, for demonstrating expansion by

heating and elementary force on contraction by cooling (M. P. II, Figs. " 34 and 35 [II.
2, Figs. 32 and 33]), with 12 cast-iron rods . . . . ....... ...... '. . 0. 14.
A 9 mm thick cast-iron rod is fractured by the roiicra -lion of a thick square-section rod after
heating. For Bunsen Burners and Heating Stand, see following items.
54.796. 4 Bunsen Burners, arranged .................
in a row, for heating the iron bar (I. 14. u
"i4.7!(ti a. Simple Stand on which to set the iron bar while heating, together with wire stirrup for supporting
the bar ........................................... 0. 4. II
M.T'.t". Contraction Apparatus with Fletcher Burner, for use without heating stand . . . 1. 0.0
54.798. Contraction Apparatus after Tyndall, as No. 54,795, but double the size ..... 1.16.0
51.799. Pyrometer. F g u r e (Kr. phys. Techn. I, 2. Fig. 2990 I, Fig. 337]), for demonstrating
i
|
linear expansion, with three bars of brass, iron and /inc; with gas burner, graduation
n ;, mm
(dan. -Man. Fig. 460: Can. -Rein. Fig. 298) 1. 8.0
54.800. --id e m, F i
g u r e, with Spirit Burner 1. 8.0
54.801. 3 Bars for .Nos. 54,799 and 54,800, of Copper, German Silver, and Aluminium 0. 3.0
01. 618*,
5772. liifit. 5413,
Compensating Pendulums: see Nos. 01,01)0,7 and ol,7U3. 1667 ', 1667.
No. 54 806. Thermal Expansion. 569
54 803. 1 : 6. 54 805. 1 : 6.
54 806. 1:11.
54.802. Pyrometer with 2 Pointers, F i u r e, for comparing the expansion of tw > bars of s. d.
iron and zinc 2.10.0
54.803. Pyrometer, steam heated, F i

g u r e, with tubes of brass, copper and iron . . . 1.16.0
51,285. Small Weinhold Steam Boiler, Fig. 51,285, p. 213 (W. D. Pig. 49 [45]), for producing steam at boiling
temperature and higher, of sheet brass 0. 16.
54,804. i d e ni, with tripod 1. 3.
54.805. Drum Pyrometer, F g u r e, i with thermometer and spirit lamp (Fr. phys. Techn. I.
2, Fig. 2994) 5.10.0

The six bars of copper, brass, aluminium and German silver respectively, contained
iron, zinc,
in a water bath, can be successively rotated under a "feeler lever". The bars are adjustable by
micrometer screws. The indicating mechanism is very sensitive, the scale peimitting of reading direct
to '/no mm The box has a lateral copper tube for heating and a stirring device.
-
54.806. Apparatus for measuring the linear Expansion of Rigid Bodies, after Weinhold.
Figure (W. D. Fig. 334 [315]), for objective demonstration, with three lubes of brass,
iron, and glass respectively, the tubes heated by steam direct reading on glass
scale f
2. 10.
53,195. Drawn Brass Tube,after Eebenstoiff, for thermal expansion in large dimensions (Ztschr.
f. d. chem. U. 20, 1907, p. 248), also for conserving the acoustic intensity
phys. u.
without lateral expansion (Ztschr. f. d. phys. u. chem. U. 19, 1906, p. 279); total length
4 m, 20 mm
wide, in two parts, for steam-heating in the heat experiment 0. 10.
Cl. 6143, 6141,

6178.
570 Heat. No. 54807
54 808. 1
54 810. 1 : 6. 54 812. 1 ; 20.
54,807. Tube Expansion Apparatus after Friedr. C. G. Miiller (M. T. Figs. 101 and 10-'), suitable s. d.
for observations at great distances 3.12.0
54.808. Apparatus for the Linear Expansion of Steel and Zinc after Borda (Dulong and Petit),
by the differential method, Figure, with two bars 120 cm lotiu. wide, and
'_'."> mm
4 mmthick (M. P. Ill, Fig. 32 [II, 2, Fig. 30 ]) . ... j
3.12.
54.809.
- - ide m, smaller, with 6 bars of iron, brass, copper, /inc. aluminium, and (iernian
Silver, Figure, with two thermometers to + 240C. and Stirrer 6. 0.
The apparatus consists of a copper hov in which the bars to be compared rest on fillets. These
bars arc pierced at one end so as to enable them to be firmly connected by a bolt; at their tree ends
they ca'Tv rectangular attachments allowing them to project out of the bath as shown in the Figure.
On the upper sides of these angle pieces are placed graduations. Accurate reading with a vcrni'T
can lie made since the comparison bar (of iron) ha- a millimetre graduation J(I
-
mmlong and the ba-s
to be compared are scaled ]!> in long with 20 divisions.
Cl. 1673.
1074,
3411, Ifl77.
No. 54 814. Coefficient of Expansion. 571
54 813. 1 : 6. 54 814. 1 : 6.
54,810. Apparatus for determining the Linear Expansion Coefficient of Bars, after Lavoisier s. d.
and Laplace, for mirror reading, Figure, with heating apparatus and water jacket,
with inlet pnd outlet for cooling the frame (W. u. E. phys. Prakt., Fig. 91; M. P., 9 th Edn.,
II, 2, Figs. 28 and 29) 7.10.0
Given in as test pieces are bars, 0.5 m long, of copper, iron, glass, and ebonite (the latter
resting on a somewhat shorter glass rod).
- -
54,811. idem, with Micrometer Reading, Figure, with heating apparatus, copper
bath and one thermometer to 250 C. . 12. 0.0
The apparatus is easy to manipulate. The alterations in length are read off on the micrometer
direct to 0.01 mm. We supply as test pieces rods, 0.5 m long, of iron, copper, zinc, brass, glass, and
aluminium.
54.812. Apparatus for shewing the Contraction of an expanded Rubber Tube by Heat, Figure
(W. D., Figs. 335, 336 B [316, 317 B]), comprising rubber tubing with hooks at the
ends, balance pan, and steam conduit pipe 1. 6.0
The accessories illustrated, i. e., steam boiler with stand, tackle, and weights, are not included
in the price. Price of Boiler and Stand 1. 13. 6; Balance Pan No. 52,216, 0. 6. 0.
54.813. Dilatometer. Figure

(Chwolson, Lehrb. d. Phys., Vol. Ill, Fig. 39), for deter-
mining the cubical expansion coefficient of solids, with iron bar 100 g weight . . . 0.12.0
54.814. Weight Dilatometer, Figure, for determining the cubical expansion coefficient of
liquids and glass (W. u. E. phys. Prakt., Fig. 92) 0.10.0
Cl. 1676,
3963, 1679.
572 Heat. No. 54 815
54816. 1:5.
54819. 1:3.
54815. 1 = 2.
54817. 1 : 3. 54821. 1 : 7.
54822. 1 : 5. 54823. 1 :
54.815. Weight Dilatometer (Weight Thermometer), Figure, for the same purpose, with s. d.
stand and receiving vessel (W. u. E. phys. Prakt., Fig. 93; cf. Chwolson, Physik,
pp. 58 and 95) 0.16.0
The vessel D
is filled with mercury by the aid of the air pump by plunging it completely in
a second vessel containing mercury. When heated in an air bath the mercury passes into the vessel V.
54.816.
- -
idem, without stand or catching vessel, Figure (M. P. Ill, Fig. 50 [II, 2,
Fig. 48]), without mercury 0. 3.
54.817.
- -
idem, with straight outflow tube and ground-on cap, Figure (M. P. Ill,
Fig. 51 [II, 2, Fig. 49]), without mercury
0.5.0
54.818. 3 Expansion Flasks with very plain graduation on neck, 100 ccm (M. T., Fig. 103) 0. 4.0
* 54,819. Projection Water Dilatometer, Figure, simply and conveniently arranged (Fr.
0.
phys. Techn. I, 2, Fig. 3041) 7.
54.820. Compensated after Xoack (M. T., p. Ii5; /tschr. f. d. phys. u.

Water Dilatometer
chem. V. 2, 159); the expansion of the vessel is compensated by mercury;
1S8!>. n.
with stirring device acting by blowing air in 2. 0.
54.821. idem, after I'oske, Figure (Hofler-Poske, Oberstnfe, Fig. 283 and p. 89:!;
Ztschr. f. d. phys. u. chem. V. 2. 1888, p. 12) 1. 5.
-- idem, after (irimsehl-Kebensrorff, Figure (Ztschr. f. d. phys. u. chem. U.

54.822.
18, 1905, p. 92), with stirrer. The expansion of the glass vessel is compensated by a
0. 18.
corresponding quantity of air |
ci. ono,
* Can be used with the Projection Apparatus. 1680,6111.6193,5715,
4703,6142.
No. 54 829. Dilatometers. Expansion Anomaly of Water. 573
54825. 1:3. 54827. 1:5. 52549. 1 : 5.
54.823. Glass Cylinder with Heating Device, Figure. (1) for investigating the stratifi-
s. d.
cation of liquid masses in accordance with their specific gravity; (2) the circulation of
water, in which the thermometer shows a lower temperature in spite of its proximity
to the thermal source; (3) convection of water. With two thermometers 1. 4.0
54.824. Glass Cylinder with Cooling Ring, after Hope, Figure, for investigating the strati-
fication of aqueous masses according to their specific gravity and for determining
maximum density (Gan.-Man., Fig. 478; Gan.-Eein., Fig. 323), for cooling by ice . . 0.16.0
54.825. 2 Thermometers with annular, horizontally arranged Vessels, after Weinhold, Figure,
for measuring the temperature-differences in different layers of water, particularly also
for measuring the temperature in the lower aqueous layers of a vessel on reaching maxi-
mum density (\V. D., 4
th
Edn., Fig. 339) 1. 5.0
The attainment of maximum density is determined by the Looser or Kolbe Thermoscope (or in
another manner, e. g. with Weinhold's Apparatus No. 54,826) and the temperature measured in the
undermost and uppermost aqueous layers.
The thermometer intended for the lower aqueous layer has a capillary tube 20 cm long beetween
vesseland scale in order that the readings of the instrument may not be appreciably influenced by the
temperature of the upper aqueous layers. The thermometers are alcohol-filled, 1" = 5 mm length.
54,826. Thermoscope after Weinhold, Figure, for 'measuring the maximum Density of
Water (W. D., 2 nd Edn., p. 304) 0. 6.0
* .VI, 827. Apparatus after Wais, Figure, for shewing the Expansion Anomaly of Water by
cooling by means of ether evaporation; wide test tube with water thermoscope, inlet
and outlet tube for gas or air blowing, and piece inserted having narrow test tube. Can
be used with the Projection Apparatus (Ztschr. f. d. phys. u. chem. U. 13, 1900, p. 219) 0. 8.0
52,549. Hydrometer, very sensitive, F gu i r e, for measuring the Density of Water at tem-
peratures between and 25 C. and for proving Maximum Density: large pattern . 0.15.0
Cold-water Floats: see Nos. .->:>, 526 and 52,528, p. 345.
:>I.X29. Lantern Slide of the curve of maximum density of water in relation to that of glass
(W. D., Fig. 340 [320]) 0. 1.6
Cl. 6144.
3753, 1884, 359, 787.
574 Heat. No. 54 830
548
-A.
No. 54 841. Expansion of Liquids and Gases. 575
54 839. 1 : 9. 54 841. 1 : 8.
54,839. --idem, Figure, the gases heated by water vapour and by alcohol vapour, with s. d.
cock for regulating the pressure (Fr. phys. Techn. I, 2, Fig. 2840) 1. 7.
Further Apparatus for determining the Expansion Coefficient of Gases: see Nos. 52,706, 52,707,
52,812 and following items.
"> l.* -10. Apparatus for the Expansion of Gases at constant pressure, after Kegnault, Figure,
for accurate measurements (M. P. Ill, Fig. 61 [II, 2, Fig. 59]) 8. 0.
.Gas Dilatometer. after Gay-Lussac, Figure, for determining the Expansion of

Gases at constant pressure (M. P. Ill, Fig. 58 [II, 2, Fig. 56]; Gan.-Eein., Fig. 324) 4. 0.
Cl. 6530, 4708, 1695,

3851, 4547.
576 Heat. No. .14 842 -
54842. 1:7.
54848. 1 : 6.
54 845. 1 : 7. 54 846. 1 : 4. 54847. 1:10. 54849. 1:8. 54850. 1 : 8.
*
54.842. Apparatus for determining the Coefficient of Expansion (pressure-increase Coefficient)
i]
of Gases at constant volume. Figure

(W. D., Fig. 344 [324]) 0. 10.
The vessel can also be used for Apparatus N'o. 52,811 in order to admit of the latter being
used as an air thermometer: see Fig. 52,81 1, p. 377.
54.843. Large Glass Flask for determining the Coefficient of Expansion of Air, also the Specific
Gravity, with glass stopcock (4 litres capacity) 1. o. o
t'f.
Fig. 53,034, p. 402.
53,033. Glass Sphere with two Stopcocks, for the same purpose (Fr. phys. Teclm. I, 2, Fig. 2837) 0. 10.
54.844. Gas Dilatometer, after Friedr. C. G. Miiller (M. T. Fig. 104), consisting of boiling
flask (1 litre), large beaker, glass cylinder, calibrated bell, 2 iudiarubber stoppers,
3 glass tubes with stopcocks and rubber tubing o. 15.
53.121. Windmill for showing the Motion of Heated Air (M. T. Fig. 105) 0. 3.0
Thermometers, Pyrometers, and Thermoscopes.

5I.SJ5. Thermometer Tube, with bulb blown on, F g u r e. so as to i fill and make a thermo-
meter oneself for 100" ('. A diagram of he scale is appended I to the tube (dan. -.Man.,
Fig. 480; Can.- Rein.. Fig. 302) 0. 0. 6
5i.x if>. Thermometer with ground milk-glass plate, Figure o. 2. o
The thermometer mercury filled and ha- a ground milk-glass plate the rough side being in front.
is
The apparatus is intended for demonstration experiments, being ungraduated tin- yraduation can be :
attached by the- lecturer as occasion demand- and removed aûin. The thermometer is dimensioned
for 01 ''
C.
5I.X.J7. The Thermometer in 7 Stages of Construction, Figu re; 2 half-finished Maximum

Thermometers and a high-range Thermometer in three stages of construction .... 1.10.0
54,8-is. Thermometer with 3 Scales on wood. Figu re, 350 x 50 mm, graduations in Reaumur.
Centigrade and Fahrenheit degrees, from --20" to -100" Centigrade 0. 2.0
cl. ss. r.i.-ifi.
1697, 1698, 4195. 3412, 6120.

No. 54 863. Thermometers. 577
54852. 2:7. 54853. 1:5. 54 854. 1 : 4.

578 Thennometry. No. 54 864
54 876. 1 : 6.
54867. 1:6. 54871. 1:5. 54872. 1 = 6. 54875. 1:10. 54 877. 1 : 3.
54.864. Cylindrical Thermometer for temperatures of to +550C., filled with carbonic acid *
gas over the mercury at 20 atmospheres 1.10.0
54.865. Cylindrical Thermometer for temperatures of 100 to -f- 50 C., for cold mixtures,
divided in whole degrees 1. 5. o
54.866. Cylindrical Thermometer for temperatures of 200 to C., for cold mixtures . 1. 8. n
54.867. Standard Thermometer, Figure, from --5 to

1
4-50 C., divided in / m ,
with
calibrated tube, with glass lug at top, in wood box o. 15. o
- -
54.868. idem, tested every 10, with Test Certificate of the Physikalisch-Technische
Eeichsanstalt, Charlottenburg 1. 0.0
54.869. Standard Thermometer from --5 to +100 C., constructed as No. 54,867 ... 1. o. o
54.870.
-- idem, tested every 10, with Test Certificate of the Char-
Eeichsanstalt,
lottenburg 1. 10. o
54.871. Thermometer on Wood Board, for schools, Figure, from --40 to +50 C.,
30 cm long Each o. 1. o
Per dozen <>. Hi. o
54.872. Thermometer for screwing to the window, Figure, round, 25 cm long, with Centi-
grade graduation from --40 to -f- 50 C., with porcelain scale enclosed in glass tube.
with brass fittings 0. I. (
54.873. Clinical Thermometer (M. T., p. 138) 0. 3.
54.874. Metastatic Thermometer of Walferdin (Beckmann's Thermometer), for accurately

measuring small temperature differences, for comparison with a standard thermometer
(M. P. Ill, Fig. 16) 1. Hi. i
'1,874 Hypsometric Thermometer (for altitude measurements), 22 cm long, from 87

a. 102 ( '.
l
graduated in /20 1. 1 '>.(>
54871 b. -- idem, 50 cm long, from 92 to' 102 C., divided in Vso 2. 6.
54.875. Long Stem Thermometer with metal mount, Figure, range to 200 C., length
of immersion tube 60 cm 1. d. d
.'1.876. Angle Thermometer in Metal Mount, F gu

i
re, range to 200 ('., with side tube
24 cm long .1. o. o
Thermometers Nos. 54,875 and 54,876 are arranged such manner that the mercury bulb
in i
in the inside of a boiler, box, etc.. while the scale (surrounded l>y a metal mount to protect it from
knnckl) is placed outside lie vessel
t in question.
Cl. 1711.
170'A 61J5, 0157. 1710, 1703.
Xo. 54 885. Maximum and Minimum Thermometers. Recording Thermometers. 579
54880. 1:5. 54 881. 1 : 5.
54878.
1 : 5. 54879. 1:5. 54 882. 1 : 5.
54 884. 1 : 5. 54885. 1:6.
54.877. 1 Maximum and 1 Minimum Thermometer, Figure, divided in, Y8 ,

with gradua- s. d.
tion etched on glass. Both in one case 0. 18.
54.878. Thermometrograph after Six, Figure, on. wood board, 320x65 mm, with Centi-
grade graduation from 35 to +
50 C 0. 6.
- -
54.879. idem, after Six, with milk glass scale, in copper chamber, Figure, 320
X60 mm, with Centigrade graduation from 35 to -(- 50 C 0.12.0
54 880. Minimum Thermometer, Figure, with porcelain scale in mahogany frame ... 0. 15.
54 881. Maximum Thermometer, Figure, same pattern as above 0. 15.
54.882. Thermograph, Figure, with 14-day movement and 2 drums so that a whole week's
diagram can be seen, with walnut case 8. 15.
54.883. -- idem, with electric contacts for maximum and minimum 9.10.0
reports
54.884. Small Thermograph, Figure, with scale from 10 to -f- 40 C., in mahogany
case 5. 0.0
54,885. Thermograph, Figure, with flexible connecting tube 2 long, for determining m
temperatures of liquids and for observing the temperature in rooms and in the open ,10. 0.
C1. 6153, 6154,
6151, 6152, 6533,
6534, 17,?2. 37*
580 Thermometry. No. 54 886
54886. 1:4. 54887B. 1:7.
54 887 A. 1:6.
54888. I:.',.
54 889. I : 10. 54 890. 1 : 8. 54 893. 1 : 6.
54,886. Electric contact Thermometer from --30 to +80 C., cf. Figure, with double * ''
tnbr with platinum wires and sixterminals, making contact every l_'(i". commencing
at --20 C., for maximum and minimum registrations 1. l.o
.>l.s,s7. Boiling point Determination Apparatus for Thermometers, Figs. A and B (M. P. II,
2, Fig. 4; W. E. phys. I'rakt., Fig. 95; (.Jan. -Man. Fig. 468), with simple thermometer 0. Hi. o
I'm. A is a view and Fij;. B a section of the apparatus.
-- idem, Figure, for travelling purposes, used as a Hypso-

54.888. eollapsible. ran lie
meter, without thermometer, with spirit lamp for attaching -'. s. o
54.889. Freezing Point Determination Apparatus, Figure, with waste tor the water (dan.-
Man. Fig. 466), without thermometer or catching vessel 0.10.0
Calibration Apparatus for Thermometers (Comparators) see p. L'L';>; Dividing Engines, p. -'US.
CL 8309, 1T1S, 1713,1714.

1715,3938. Kiii.
No. 54900. Freezing and Boiling Point Determination. Metalic Thermometers, Air Thermometers. 581
54 894. 1 : 2. 54 897. 1 : 3. 54 898. 1 : 5. 54900. 1:15.
54.890. Thermometer Testing Apparatus, Figure, Budberg's boiling tube with return s. d.
flow cooling (Ztschr. f. Instrkde. 11, 1891, p. 1), without air chamber 4.10.0
Thermometer Testing Apparatus, electrically heated, quoted for on application.

Reading Microscopes for Thermometers, see p. 226.
Thermo-Regulators, see p. 208.
54.891. Strips of Steel and Zinc, curling when heated

.">4,X92. --idem, of Steel and Ebonite 0. 3.0
54,893. Strips of Steel and Zinc, with pointer and scale, Figure 0.16.0
54.894. Metallic Thermometer, Figure, Swiss pattern (M. P. III., Fig. 39 [II, 2, Fig. 38]),
with maximum and minimum pointers, very reliable ............... 1.16.0
54.895.
-- idem, with electric contact, without maximum and minimum 2. 5.0
pointers . . .
J.s'.iG. Metallic Thermometer after Breguet, Figure (M. P. Ill, Fig. 41 [II, 2, Fig. 39]),
with platinum silver spiral, with connecting terminals for measuring weak galvanic
currents ................................... ! 2. 6.0
-!, s'.(7.Metallic contact Thermometer, Figure, round pattern, 130 diameter, very mm
sensitively constructed, with contacts for maximum and minimum registration, from
- 20 to +
40 C. .............................. 1.10.0
T.1.S98. -- idem, Figure, to 100 C 1.16.0
range
54,792. Air Thermometer after Galilei (M. P., 10 th
Edn. Ill, p. 6; Meyer, Natmi., Fig. 11) . 0. 2.8
54,900. Air Thermometer after Eegnault, (M. P. Ill, Figs. 71 and 72 [II, 2,
Figure
Fig. 70]), with unscrewable air chamber, fittings well constructed of steel, wood frame 4.10.0
Cl. 1722,
1721, 4008, 5418, 1724.
582 Thermometry. No. 54 901
54 901. 1 : 16. 54 902. 1 : 12. 54903. 1:12.
54.901. Gas Thermometer after Chappuis, Figure (M. P. Ill, Fig. 79; Chwolson, Physik, s. d.
Vol. Ill, Figs. 6 and 7), model of the Bureau International des poids et mesuros,
Paris, with platinum capillary i!8. 0. o
This apparatus is especially adapted for very accurate measurements; only two readings are
necessary for the single temperature measurements so that the sources of error are not so great as in
instruments which necessitate four reading*. The tubes are wide enough to exclude any error of
capillarity. The readings are made by means of a cathetometer and with the aid of an accurate rule.
54.902. Air Thermometer after Jolly, Figure

(M. P. Ill, Fig. 73 [II, 2, Fig. 72]), con-
structed entirely of iron, steel stopcocks. The apparatus has a height of 1.6 when m
the rule is not extended. All bare parts are heavily nickelled. The thermometer Chamber
is filled with dried air 12. 0.
For filling, 5 kg mercury ( 2. 0. 0) is necessary.
54.903. Air Thermometer after Jolly, Figure (M. P. Ill, Figs. 74 and 75 [II, 2, Fig. 73]), j
with plate glass scale 5. 0.
54,904. Air Thermometer after Jolly, Figure (W. u. E., phys. Prakt., Fig. 52). with plate
glass scale and micrometer adjustment for one limb 0. 10.
r. I.'.HM;. Air Thermometer alter Berthelot-Alvergniat, Figure, on wood stand with fixed
scale 2. 5.0
r,.,,,r.Double-chamber Air Thermometer (Differential Air Thermometer), after I'laumller

(M. P. Ill, Fig. 81 [II, 2, Fig. 80]). without stand 0.
The two vessels eonlain air at different pressure, beiiij; exposed to he same temperatures. I
54,908.
-- idem, on stand, with scale. Figure 1. 4.0
As air thermometers use may be made of the apparatus for Boyle's (Marriot.te's) Law alter
Feilitzsch, Friedr. ('. <J. Midler. I'faundler. and Hulier. Xos. 52,812 et seq., also the apparatus
r
after Lermantoff and Schneider. Xos. >2,706 52,70*. . ci. 5376, 1725. 1726.
No 54910. Air Thermometers. 583
54906. 1:14.
54 908. 1 : 8. 54 909. 10. 54910. 1:11.
54,909. Self-correcting Air Thermometer after Prof. Friedr. C. G. Miiller, Figure (Ztschr. s. d.
f. d. phys. u. chem. U. 8, p. 308; M. T., p. 139), on metal stand, wood parts of polished
mahogany, rules of boxwood and celluloid, all parts most thoroughly constructed . . 5.10.0
1
I Hll
to
sypkn
be transported in the filled condition.
- -
54,910. idem, simplified pattern, Figure, with scale visible at a distance, 1 about
mm
|
12 long (M. T., Fig. 97) j

2. 2.
C'l. 1727,5297,
1729, 1730, 5286.
584 Thermometry. No. 51911
54 911 A. 1:14. 54 911 B. 1:14. 54912. 1 : :i. 54913. 1:3.
54.911. Demonstration Air Thermometer after Weinhold, Fig. A (looked at I'mni the front)
s ''
and B (looked at from back (W. D., Figs. 345/7 [325/7]) 22. 0.
The temperature is adjusted automatically by a small electric motor which carries the mano-
meter tube up and down. The thermometer chamber is connected to the manometer by a long flexil>l<-
silver tube, the silver tube being protected from external damage by a rubber coating. The apparatus
gives very reliable results.
-" -
F-
54.912. Thermocouple (Electric Pyrometer), Chatelier, F i g u r e, in conjunction
after Le
with one of the Galvanometers Nos. 54,917/9, for use for temperatures to 900" C., with
platinum and platinum-rhodium couple of 0.6 mm
wires, with shielding and insulating
tube of Marquardt porcelain and with steel sheath 130 cm long, for continuous measure-
ments, provided with Test Certificate of the Physikalisch-Teclmische Keichsanstalt
'
:
without galvanometer !.">. ln.o
54.913.
--idem, for temperatures to 1500" C. (in conjunction with one of tin- galvano-
meters Nos. 54920/2), with porcelain tube mounting, Figu re, with .Marquanlt por-
celain tube 130 cm long projecting freely out of the iron lube; for continuous measure-
ments, with Test Certificate of the Beichsanstalt without galvanometer
;
!.">. lu.n
All abrupt temperature variations or mechanical strains should be avoided.
54.914.
-- idem, for temporary measurements of temperatures io 1400 C. (to be used
in conjunction with one of the galvanometers Nos. f>4 9lii) _'). with silica mounting
which can be subjected to the most abrupt temperature changes. l.'iOemlong; \\ith
Test Certificate of the Kcichsanstalt without galvanometer
: 1. VI 0.0
cl. 1731'. 17:;,-. >;:,!>.
No. 54 927. Air Thermometers. Pyrometers. 585
54 916. 1 : 3.
54917. 1:4. 54 918. 1 : 5. 54 919. 1 : 4.
54,915.
- -
idem, 150 cm long, for temperatures to 1100 C., in refractory fireclay tubes (to be s. a.
used in conjunction with one of the galvanometers Nos. 54,917/9); with Test Certi-
ficate of the Physikalisch-Technische Eeichsanstalt without galvanometer ;
16. 10.
54,916. --idem, Figure, with small platinum tube of about 55 grammes weight in
the lower part, for temperatures to 1600 C. (for use in conjunction with one of Ilic
galvanometers Nos. 54,920/2). Extra price according to the prevalent price of platinum
(without Galvanometer) 17. 10. to 22. 10.
54,917. Galvanometer for Thermocouples Nos. 54,912 and 54,915, with temperature scale
from to 1100 C., Figure, with pivot bearing, portable in case 11. 5.0
54.918.
- - i d e m, with fibre suspension, Figure 10. 10.0
54.919.
- -
idem, with perpendicular scale, Figure, wall pattern instrument .... 11. 5.0
54.920. Galvanometer for Thermocouples Nos. 54,913, 54,914 and 54,916, with temperature
scale from to 1600 C., with pivot bearings, portable, in case 11. 5.0
54,921.
- -
idem, with fibre suspension 10.10.0
."i-1, 922. -- idem, with vertical scale, wall pattern instrument 11. 5.0
54,923. Electric Resistance Thermometer, Figure, for temperatures between 200 and
900 C., within the ranges named under No. 54,928, 20 cm long, can be used for
+
distance reading, distance registration and registration in conjunction with one of the
indicating apparatus mentioned further on 2. 10.
The resistance consists of a fine platinum wire fused into quartz glass in such manner as to protect
it entirely from external influences. The resistance wire takes up the external temperature very rapidly
(more quickly, for instance, than a mercury thermometer); the thermometer is insensitive to abrup,
temperature change owing to the excellent properties of the quartz glass.
A complete installation consists of: (1) one of the thermometers Nos. 54,923/6; (2) an Indicator
for stationary use No. 54,928 or 54,929, fitted perhaps with signalling device No. 54,930; or a portable
Indicator No. 54,931 or 54,932; and (3) one or two Accumulators Nos. 54,936/7, according to the sen-
sitivity desired; or a Compensator No. 54,938. If recording is desired, use should, be made of (4) :,
Recording Galvanometer No. 54,933. If a number of thermometers are to be connected to the measuiiii".
arrangement, (5) a Plug Commutator No. 54,934 or 54,935 should be added.
."11.1124. Extending the Thermometer every 10 cm costs in addition 0. 8.0
54,925. The same Thermometer with iron sheet, 50 cm long, with terminals on the por-
celain head 3. 0.0
54.926. Extending this Pattern every 50 cm 0. 6.
54.927. Test Certificate of the Physikalisch-Technische Eeichsanstalt for one Thermometer .

j
0. 18.
Cl. 1737,
6540, 6547, 6518.
586 Thermometry. No. .'.4928
54 929 A. 1:5. 54 929 B. 1 : .5.
54 938. 1 : 5. 54941. 1:7.
54.928. Indicator for stationary use, cf. Fig. 54,929 A

and B, for Resistance Thermometer t g. d.
NOs. 54,923/6, consisting of a pointer galvanometer and a slate slab with switching
and regulating devices for one range from 300 to 700 C., with one lead, without lead
mountings . '. . 9. 0.0
The minimum range can be selected for 200 to + 100 or for 100 to 0, or for to + 150.
for + 100 to + 300, for + 200 to + 500,tor + 300 to + 700.
It specially desired the indicating apparatus is supplied for still smaller ranges (say. .'ill to 4u")
at an extra price.
The range desired should be quoted when ordering.
It is advisable to order at the same time the connecting leads (double stranded copper) lieiween
the thermometers and the indicating apparatus, in order that their resistance can be taken into account
in calibrating. See No. 54,940.
54.929.
- -
idem, Figs. A
and B, for 6 connections with the same range 10. Id. D
For a larger number of connections and for connections having a different range, prices are quote!!
on application.
Price
54.930. Signalling Device for maximum and minimum distance recording; leads unmounted mi appli-
cation
54.931. Portable Indicator with one range, not smaller than in the case of No. 54.92S . . 11. O.tl
51.932. -- idem, with two ranges, not smaller than in No. 54,928 12. 0.0
Price
54.933. Recording Galvanometer mi appli-
raliun
54.934. Adaptor for eonneeting a number of thermometers with the measuring arrangement,
up to ti connections 1. 2.0
"1.935. -- idem, witli compensating resistances for the Thermometer leads 1. it;, o
54.936. Accumulator, 13 ampere-hour capacity; can be used for about five days \vith one
charge when worked continuously 0. s. d
54.937. 2 Accumulators in transport case 1. l.u

fl. 654l.(;:, i:;.
:.! i
No. 54 949. Pyrometers. 587
54 945. 1 = 5.
54 943. 1 : 4.
54948. 1:8. 54 949. 1 : 8.
Compensator for connecting the Measuring Arrangement to a 110 volt D. C. Power

S. d.
:>!.!;>.
Supply, Figure 1.16.0
54.939.
- -
idem, for 220 volts D. C 2. 2.0
54.940. Double Strand, the resistance of which is taken into account during the adjustment.
In lengths to 30 m 0. 1. 6 to 1. 2.0
54.941. Optical Pyrometer after Wanner (Photometer), Figure, for measuring tempe-
ratures from 840 to 2000 C., with regulating resistance, adjusting device and battery
of accumulators 25. 0.0
54.942.
- -
idem, with direct reading for temperature 27. 0.0
54.943. Optical Pyrometer after Wanner (Photometer), for temperatures from 900 C. to 4000 C. 31.10.0
54.944.
- -
idem, with direct temperature reading, Figure 34. 5.0
54.945. Pyrometer after Wedgwood, Figure, for Determining high Temperatures in

accordance with the concretion of clay cylinders exposed to the heat, with 12 plate
cylinders (Fr. phys. Techn. I., 2, Fig. 3054) 1. 5.0
54.946. Clay Cylinders for above Per dozen ,

0. 3.0
54.947. Seger Cones, one set (20) 590 1850 C 0. 4.0
54.948. Water Pyrometer after Siemens, Figure, for temperatures to 1,000 C. with thermo-
meter and six copper cylinders each of 137 grammes weight . 5. 0.0
of the copper cylinders is inserted into the furnace space, the temperature of which it is
One
desired to measure, until such time as it has taken up the temperature of the same. It is then
placed in the water of the calorimeter after the pointer of the sliding scale has been set to the tem-
perature of the water, and during heating the maximum position of the mercury on the thermometer
and on the sliding scale is read off. The sum of these two readings is the temperature which the
iron body has attained in the furnace.
54.949. Water Pyrometer after Fischer, copper vessel with wood jacket, iron
Figure,
case, protecting screen, stirrer, with three similar cylinders of pure nickel,
without thermo-
meters (Fr. phys. Techn., 7 th
Edn., I, 2, Fig. 3081) 2. 0.0
Cl. 6541, 1744,
6125, 612C.
588 Thermoscopy. NIL ,04950
54 951. 1 : 9. 54952. 1:7.
54 953. 1 : 8. 54 954. 1 : 6.
Thermoscopes after Galilei and Drebbel: see Xos. 54,792 and 54,793. s. d.
54,950. Thermoscope after Weinhold, Figure (W. D. Fig. 368 [348]), very sensitive in-
strument for radiation experiments 0. 3.0
54,951. Aneroid Thermoscope, Figure (Ztschr. f. d. phys. u. chem. U. 3, p. 141), very

sensitive apparatus . . 2.10.0
54,952. Leslie's Differential Thermometer, Figure, with detachable ground-on bulbs for
automatic filling (M. T., p. 142), with a blackened bulb; also for use for measuring the
0. 10.
intensity of radiant heat (M. P. Ill, Fig. 82 [II, 2, Fig. 81])
54,953. Dilatation Thermometer after Rumford, Figure (M. P. Ill, Fig. 83 [II, 2, Fig. 82]),
with short liquid threads, with detachable bulbs and glass stopcocks o. Ki.o
54,953 a.
- - i d e
m, after Friedr. C. G. Miiller, with connecting tube and cock for equalising
0. If., o
pressure (M. T., Fig. 100)
54,954. Differential Thermoscope, Figure, with detachable ground-on glass bulbs, a glass
bulb with wire spiral and terminals, Figure, for experiments on the thermal effects
of the electric current; and two glass bulbs, each with one bismuth-antimony rod and
terminals, Figure, for proving the Peltier effect 1.15.0
For shewing the thermal effect tln> l>ull> with wire spiral is placed on one end of the tlienno-
scope, the. other being left open, and a supply of 2 4 volts together with a regulating resistance is
connected In the terminals. For showing the 'Peltier effect the two bulbs with the I>ismu1h-antimon\
rod are placed on the hennnscopc. the poles of the same name, e. g.. the nicUelled terminals of the
t
bismuth, which are connected up by a lead and two accumulators in series, loget her wit h a regulating resi
Matice and a pole commutator, being connected up to the free end. In one gl;:s> luilli heat in;: takes
place when the current direction is from bismuth to antimony, a cooling effect taking place in the other.
By 7-cvcrsing the current the opposite effect ensues. The current density should be aUmt amps. Too r>
high a current generates too much heat in the rod and should be avoided.
CI. I/IS. 6123,
f.'l. :C53.
No. 54957. Thermoscopy. 589
54 955. 1 : 6. 54957. 1:14.
54,955. Double Thermoscope after Looser, Figure, for a large number of experiments
s. d.
on heat, electricity, etc. (W. D. Fig. 32? [309]; Ztschr. f. d. phys. u. chem. U. 8,
p. 291; 9, p. 265; 11, p. 105; 15, p. 257; 19, p. 333 Looser, Versuche aus der Warme-
;
lehre und verwandten Gebieten) -

;
2.10.0
The apparatus consists of two manometers filled with coloured liquid, the long limbs of which
are carried upwards quite parallely. A scale graduated in half centimeters admits of easy reading for
the students; the lecturer himself can observe the height of the liquid on a second scale at the back.
The shorter limbs of the manometer are cut off by wider vessels each having a cock and an attachment
for rubber tubing. By means of the rubber tubing the sensitive air capsules (receivers) are connected
with the manometers. The air capsules are constructed in suitable forms for the various experiments
(see below).
The following experiments can be carried out with the apparatus when use is made of the acces-
sories pertaining thereto which should be selected from Nos. 54,956 54,972:
Expansion of Bodies, E. Heat and Work,
Specific Heat and Atomic Heat, Heat on change of state,
F.
Thermal Conduction in Solids, Liquids and Heat by Compression of Gases and Vapours,
G.
Gases, II. Heat during Chemical Reactions.
D. Radiant Heat, I. Thermal Effects of the Electric Current.
In addition the apparatus can be used as a Manometer.

We supply with the apparatus two capsules with ccm graduation for liquids, two wide and four
narrow glass beakers, one scourer, one bottle of filling liquid, two pieces rubber tubing.
The accessories are set forth in accordance with definite series of experiments in such manner
that under a List No. always all the objects necessary for the series of experiments are listed irrespective
of whether they are mentioned again previously or subsequently.
-
In subsequent orders it should be stated paying due attention to what has been said above
whether such accessory parts are already available, in case it is not desired to duplicate them in the
collection. The items marked \ are also contained in the "Small Collections ef Accessories" mentioned
for the second time.
The Figure Numbers in brackets appended to the accessories refer to the "Introduction" No. 54,956.
54.956. Introduction to above (Looser, Versuche aus der Warmelehre und verwandten Ge-
th
bictcn, mit Benutzung des Doppel-Thermoskops), 3 Edn., 148 pages 0. 4. 6
54.957. Accessories for Experiments on Thermal Expansion, Figure (Experiments Nos. 1 9) 3. 4.
For experiments on the dilatation of vessels and rods, the floating of heated liquids on colder
<>nrs. the irregular dilatation of water, change of volume and convection.
1 Boiling Flask, 1 litre, with tripod, cork, and 1 Standing Vessel of Zinc with 5 openings and
connecting tube (Fig. 2). 2 spherical air capsules (Fig. 5 and p. 14).
1 porous Pot with tube connection (Fig. 46). 2 large Hemispheres of glass with bent tube
1 Sheet Iron Box with corrugated lid, with stand, (Fig. 6).
2 Pasteboard Cylinders with stand and beaker
test bars of brass and glass (Fig. 3).
(Fig. 7).
1 indicating Device. 2 large Hemispheres (glass) with straight tube
1 Gauge Glass. (Fig. 7).
2 Capsules weighted with shot (Figs. 4 and 31). 1 Rod with ring (p. 16).
54.95, a. Small Collection of Accessories for Experiments on Thermal Expansion (for Experiments Nos. 1, 2,
3, 4 and 6), consist ins solely of the accessories marked j in No. 54,957 0. 8.
Cl. 1754, (U89.

590 Thermoscopy. No. 54 958
54 959. 1 : 9.
54962. 1:10.
54,958. Accessories for Experiments on Specific Heats, Figure (Experiments Nos. 10 14) ....... 0. IL; . n
For shewing the different specific heats of metals and liquids, for determining the ratio of specific
heats with unchanged pressure and volume, and for confirming Dulong and Petit's Law on Atomic cat. 1 1
2 Copper Pieces and 1 Lead Piece of the same 1 Lead Piece three times as heavy.
weight and area. 1 Pressure Flask (Fig. 9).
54,959. Accessories for Experiments on Thermal Conduction, Figure (Experiments Nos. 15 26) .... I!. II
For demonstrating the different thermal conduction of metals, the influence of the direction of
grain in wood, the axial direction in crystals, bad conductors, the influence of specific heat on thermal
conduction, the so-called cold conduction, thermal insulators, thermal conduction of different liquids
and gases, the decrease of thermal conduction with decreasing gas-density.
f3 rectangular bent Rods, two of copper and one f2 Zinc Beakers (Fig. 11).
of iron (Fig. 10). Slabs of iron, silk, cotton, copper, lead and marble.
2 Rods twice bent, of copper and lead. 2 Capsules weighted with shot,
1 Glass Capsule with lead rod. f 2 Vessels with cylindrical capsules and with
1 Glass Capsule with
copper rod. si
uppers (Fig. 13).
f2 small ground Glass Hemispheres (Fig. 11), with 2 Vessels for liquids, 2 small hemispheres, 2 sheet
cork and board. iron holders (Fig. 14).
f 2 Wood Slabs, one cut parallel and the other per- 2 Vessels with cylindrical capsules. 2 jjla^s tubes
pendicular to the grain. and pierced rubber bungs (Fig. 15).
54,959a. Small Collection of Accessories for Experiments on Thermal Conduction (Experiments 15. l and L';!). ,
consisting solely of the accessories marked t in No. 54,959, for demonstrating thermal conduction in
metal rods, wood slabs and liquids 0. 12. (
54,960. 2 Crystal Plates cut parallel and perpendicular to axis (Experiment No. 19) 1. 4.
Cl. 6191, 6186,

6189.
Xo. 54 964. Looser Thermoscope. 591
54 963. 1:12. 54 964. 1 : 9.
54,962. Accessories lor] Experiments on Radiant Heat (Experiments Nos. 27 to 53), without concave mirror, s. d.
Figure 9. 0. O
For demonstrating the unequal absorption of luminous and dark rays through rock salt and
glass, total thermal reflection, thermal absorption of different materials and surfaces (also when thermal
sources are unequal), thermal emission of various surfaces, thermal reflection, dependence of radiation
on the incident angle.
2 Teclu Burners (Fig. 15 b). 2 cylindrical Sheet Iron Capsules for steam
2 Attachments with slotted burner for luminous heating, with a bare and a sooted surface
flames (Fig. 15 b). (cf. Fig. 19
1
and 4 ).
2 Attachments for non-luminous flames (Fig. 15 b). Boiling Flask with T-tube and 2 lengths rubber
f 2 large Glass Hemispheres (lamp-blacked) (also tubing.
2 Capsules with glass attachments (Figs. 19 2
Fig. 22)
2 four-sided prismatic reflectors, nickelled (Figs.
and 19 3 ).
15 b and 20). f 1 Leslie Cube.
1 four-sided prismatic Reflector sooted inside
f 4 thick and 4 thin Glass Plates.
.
2 Rock Salt Slabs. (Fig. 15 b).
1 Rock Salt Cube.
f 2 Stands with rings.
1 bare and 1 sooted Metal Vessel.
2 small ground Hemispheres.
2 Capsules weighted with shot.
2 Mica Discs and 1 bare and 1 sooted Beaker with thermometers.
1 Gypsum Slab for heat-absorption.
2 ground Glass Discs.
f 1 Screen (Fig. 21).
fl white metal Reflector (Fig. 21).
2 Glass Troughs for water and solution of iodine
f 2 Holders for 4 candles each, with 8 candles.
in carbon-disulphide respectively. 1 Card with circular hole (Fig. 22).
_'
Stages for the reflectors with wire stands and 1 Gas Burner or Candle Holder with pivotted
holders for the glass troughs, on stands arm, on stand (Fig. 22).
(Fig. 15 b). Tube
for thermal absorption (Fig. 23).
1
Concave Mirrors for Experiments No. 51, p. 48: see Nos. 55,328 55,336.
54,962. a Small Collection of Accessories for Experiments on Radiant Heat (Experiments Nos. 45, 45b, 46, 48,
49), consisting solely of accessories marked t in No. 54,962, for demonstrating thermal absorption,
thermal emission of different surfaces, a luminous and a non-luminous flame, thermal reflection, de-
crease of thermal radiation with distance . 1. 12. O
54.963. Accessories for Experiments on Heat and Work, Figure (Experiments Nos. 54 64 and 67) .. 2. 6. O
The following can be demonstrated generation of heat by friction, striking or bending, by shaking
:
mercury and outflowing air; the freeing of heat by condensation, thermal consumption on rarifying
gases.
f 1 Small ground Hemisphere with cork and board. 1 double Capsule, open (Fig. 24).
f 1 Board with emery cloth pasted on. 1 pressure flask (Fig. 25).
f 1 Wood Block. 1 suction flask.
Wire with a piece of raw
f 1 tin. Sheet Metal Box with corrugated lid, stand and
fl Lead Slab. indicating device, brass rod and glass tube. )
1
1 Capsule with mercury (Fig. 24), with long handle.

Friction Apparatus for the Whirling Table: see No. 52,048.
Bellows for Experiments Nos. 17, 67 and 77: see No. 53,088.
1
) If No. 54,957 is already available, the price is decreased by the following amount owing to the
omission of metal box with corrugated lid, stand and indicating device 0. 18. 0'
54,963 a. Small Collection of Accessories for Experiments on Heat and Work (Experiments Nos. 54, 55 and 59),
consisting solely of the accessories marked | in No. 54,963, for demonstrating heat produced by friction,
striking and bending 0. 4.
54.964. Accessory Apparatus, Figure, for shewing that the cooling of a gas when the pressure is reduced
is proportional to the difference between initial and terminal pressure (Experiments Nos. 65 and 66) 1. 10. 0-
2 large Compression Flasks, 4 litres capacity, with 1 Compression Flask, 8 litres capacity, with con-
connecting tubes; one with cork (Fig. 26), the necting tubes and cork.
other with cylindrical capsule, screw stopper
and air-pressure manometer (p. 61).
Cl. 6180, 6187.

592 Thermoscopy. No. .4965
54 965. 1 : 12.
54966. 1:13. 54 967. 1 : 8.
s. d.
54,965. Accessories for Experiments on Change of State (Experiments NOs. 68 ill). Fig. 54.965. 1. 4. (I
The following can be demonstrated; different thermal consumptions on melting and dissolving:
the action of the August psychrometer; the heat on increasing the disgregation (formation of i<m>):
crystallising heat; cooling by evaporation; the degree of evaporation; velocity of evaporation; formation
of ice on evaporation; formation of heat on freezing; cooling on evaporation in porous vessels: different
heat of evaporation; constancy of the boiling point and melting point; raising and lowering of Mime
by salts; the fact that the temperature of the water vapour formed from boiling salt solutions has
the temperature of the solution; lowering the boiling point with decreasing pressure and raising it with
increasing; the air thrown off from a rotating top.
f 2 double Capsules (Fig. 28), one with wax, one 1 Cryophoms.

with cetin. 1 Porous Pot.
f 2 large Glass Hemispheres with straight tube. 2 Impulse Hammers (Fig. 30).
2 spherical Capsules (Fig. 28 a), one covered witli 2 Capsules with shot.
muslin. 1
Boiling Flask with capsule, syphon tube and
1 Device for evaporating ether by means of illu- closed tube (Fig. 32).
minating gas (Fig. 29). 1 short and 1 long syphon tube.
5i.'.M;.-,it.Small Collection of Accessories for Experiments on Change of State (Experiments Nos. 68, 69, 70, 7i>a.
71, 72, 73, 74, 75, 77), consisting solely of the items marked f under No. 54.1Mi5. for demonstrating
the consumption of heat on melting, dissolving and evaporating, and of the heat on increasing the dis-
gregation (formation of ions), of the influence of the degree of saturation, and of the formation of ice
o. Id. n
by evaporation
Tops for Experiment No. 91, p. 78: see No. 52.O78/83, p. 291.
5.;iiiii. Accessories for Heat Experiments on Condensation of Gases and Vapours (Experiment N< 92--!i9) n. K; \\
For demonstrating the heat during tin- absorptions of gases through solids and liquids, the con-
densing of gases and water vapour on wearing apparel.
1 Gas Conduit, 1'ipe (Fig. 33). 1 Boiling Flask with cork and glass tube.
1 large Hemisphere with straight tube, with i-ork 1 loin sided Class Plate.
.mil board. :!
cylindrical Capsules, two covered with wool,
1 beaker (Fig. .35). one with cotton, with plugs and boanl>
I <.l;i , VCSM-|> fur Milphnrie acid and water Pig. 36).
respectively (
Fi>;. :i<i).
01 B194,
618:!, filSl.
Xo. 54 968. Looser Thermoscope. 593
Pi
54 968. 1 : 9.
54,967. Accessories for Experiments on Heat from chemical combinations, Figure (Experiments Nos. 100 s. d.
to 115) 10.
f large Hemisphere with straight tube.

1 1 Apparatus for combining ammoniacal gas with
spherically widened Vessel (Pig. 47).
1 carbonic acid, with rubber bellows (Fig. 39).
It
f 1 large Beaker. 2 rectangular bent Copper Rods.
1 cylindrical Glass with lid (Fig. 38). 2 Bunsen Burners No. 51,184.
1 Receiver with capsule and cover (Fig. 38).
54,9&7a. Small Collection of Accessories for Experiments on Heat from chemical Combinations (Experiments
Nos. 100, 100 a, 101, 102 105, 107, 108, 109, 114), consisting solely of the apparatus marked f 'n
No. 54,967 I
0. 3.
54,968. Accessories for Experiments on Thermal Effects of the Electric Current, F i ;ure
i (Experiments Nos. 110
to 136 'rice (subject to fluctuation) 8. 5.
For showing that heating is proportional to the length of the conductor, that it is proportional
to the square of the current density, that it is independent of the specific resistance and thickness
of conductor, demonstration and propagation of electric current lines, heat on decomposition of water,
heat during electrical work, heating of wires by a discharge impulse, heat of the induction current,
heating in a Hittorf Tube and in a thermocouple, formation of ozone by electric sparks.
f2 platinum wire Spirals 15 and 30 cm long resp., 1 large Capsule for above.
0.2 mm thick. 2 platinum Wires of 2.5 and 1.5 ohm respectively.

f2 parrs adjustable Copper Electrodes (Fig. 40). 1 pair Copper Electrodes.
2 further platinum wire Spirals 15 cm long, with 2 small zinc-carbon Electrodes.
plugs, 0.2 mm
thick. 1 small electric Motor.
2 platinum wires in glass bulbs, single and double rubber Bung with manometer and 3-way cock,
1
wire-lengths. also with 2 platinum electrodes 1 sq. cm.

1 Silver Wire and 1 Copper Wire 15 cm long, with 1 large Capsule for. above.
plugs. f 1 Riess Bulb with tube attachment.

1platinum Wire of double thickness, 15 cm long, 2 Glass Bulbs with thermocouples.
0.4 mm
diameter with plugs. 1 rubber Bung with thick copper wires and eye
2 small Boards with tinfoil slabs, 2 connecting for potassium iodide starch-paste paper, after
blocks, and some sheets tinfoil. Liidke (Fig. 45).
2 small Hemispheres. 1 Wood Box for containing
preceding parts, see
2 pair platinum Electrodes. Fig. 54,968.
1 Stopper with accumulator plates, size of
3,5 x9 cm.
Batteries of Accumulators with pachytrope for connecting the cells singly and in parallel: see Nos. 60,946/93.
Influence Machines, Leyden Jar Batteries, Measuring Flasks, spark-drawing Devices, Induction Coils, Hittorf
Tube: see "Electricity" Section.
54,968a. Small Collection of Accessories for Experiments on Thermal Effects of the Electric Current (Experiment*
Nos. 116, 117, 118, 1 119, 120, 121), comprising solely the items marked f in No. 54,968 0. 16.
Cl. 6199.
38
54 969. 1 : 9. 54 969 A. 1:8.
54 970. 1 : 8.
54,969. Accessories for using the Thermoscope as a Manometer (Experiments Nos. 137 157a), Fig. 54,969 . s. (1.
and 54.969A 1. 16.
For experiments on gas osmose, the absorption and ejection of gases, relations between carbonic
acid and lime water (formation of stalactites), demonstration of water content and of carbon dioxide
in air, vapour tension of water, alcohol and ether; buoyancy of gases, propagation of pressure, suction
effect of outflowing air, measurement of adhesion in capillary tubes, pressure of a liquid column,
demonstration of tension in soap bubbles, Newton's colour rings, porosity of clay.
Porous Pot.
1 1 Model of water air pump (Fig. 49).
Glass Beaker for above.
1 1 Vaporiser (Fig. 50).
f 2 Osmose Apparatus after Niemoller (Fig. 46 a). 1 Tube for suction and pressure effects (Fig. 51).
j-2 Vessels for inserting. 3 different Capillary Tubes.

1 1 Bell Funnel after Steinbrinck. 1 wide Glass Tube with point.
f2 spherical Capsules with constriction (Fig. 47). 1 soap-bubble Apparatus (Fig. 53).
1 forked Tube (Figs. 48 and 52). 1 Clay Slab with funnels attached
1 multiple bent Glass Tube on stand (Fig. 54.969A)
(Fig. 48).
54.969 Small Collection of Accessories for using the Thermoscope as a Manometer (Experiments Nos. 137a,
a.
137 b, 138 149, 157), comprising solely the items marked fin No. 54, 969, for experiments on gas osmose,
12.
alisorption and ejection, tension in soap-bubbles
11. (i
:>4.'.i7o. Accessories for various Experiments, Figure (Experiments Nos. 158 161)
Demonstration of heat by physiological processes, proving that solutions of salts take up some
times a smaller and sometimes a larger space than the individual substances together, inequality of
ililatcitinn of two liquids.
2 Capsules filled with shot. 2 Erlenmeyer Flasks with stoppers, spherical

Cylindrical Vessel with tube attached. tubes and water bath.
Stopper with glass rod and perforated reagent Apparatus for expansion of water on frcezinic
(Fig. .-,.-,).
r.i.'.iTi. Accessory Apparatus for Determining the absolute Expansion of Water, Figure (Figs. 5658) i. 10.
o. to.
Figure (Experiment No. 163, Fig. 59)
II
.".t .'.17:.'.
Dew-point Finder after Looser, .
Boxes and Stands for taking the various accessories are prepared on application and chained
at lowest possible cost. \Ve would ask in this ease that the collections of accessories
should he mentioned which are to he placed in boxes or on stands.
. .v>09,
6197.
No. 54 975. Kolbe Thermoscope. 595
54971. 1:11.
54 972. 1 : 6. 54975. 1:10. 54973,54975,54976. 1:10.
54,973. Differential and Double Thermoscope after Kolbe, Figure, for experiments on heat s. d.
and electricity (Ztschr. f. d. phys. u. chem. U. 15, 1902, p. 333; Kolbe, ,,Anleitung zu
30 der wichtigsten Schulversuche", see No. 54,974). For making the experiments
a suitable selection should be ordered with the apparatus from Nos. 54,975 54,997 . 4. 8.
In some
of the collections of accessories, e. g., in No. 54,995, a few necessary apparatus for the
experiments are mentioned at the end, these not being included in the price. These articles must be
specially ordered unless already available.
The Figure Numbers mentioned in the Accessories refer to the Introduction Number 54,974.
The apparatus consists of a polished wood stand to the back wall of which are fixed two mano-
meters having plain scale. The two limbs of the manometers are provided with enlargements and have
e?ch at their upper end a stopcock and a funnel-shaped opening for filling. The enlargements have
tube attachments HO as to be capable of being connected to receivers by lengths of rubber tubing.
The receivers are attached to sliders which can be slipped along a bar, provided with a scale and fixed
above the stand.
Supplied with the apparatus are: 9 sliders, four with long tubes for the receivers, three with
medium long tubes for the double screens, two with short tubes for the thermal sources; 1 attachable
tube for the sources of heat (box shape); 4 lengths rubber tubing, each 400 mm
long; 1 filler (Fig. 2);
1 piece cardboard for
concealing the second scale; 1 small funnel for flushing the manometer tubes;
1 small flask with 100 ccm of
aqueous solution of ocetine blue (ready for use); 1 double screen without
piece cut out.
.">4.974. Introduction to 30 of the most important School Experiments with the Kolbe Diffe-
rential and Double Thermoscope (48 pages, 34 illustrations) (in German). Gratis and
post-free.
The Figure Numbers mentioned in the following lists of accessories refer to this Introduction.
54,975. General Accessories for Experiments on Heat, F i

g. 54,973 (Fig. 1, Experiments
Nus. 116) 1. 6.
(a) Boiling Flask with rubber bung; 1 Tube with 2 stopcocks; 1 thick walled Rubber Tube
1
4i> cm
long; 1 fork-shaped Glass Tube with 2 short lengths rubber tubing and 1 metal stand for the
lioiling flask ( 0. 11. 0); (b) 1 small Stand with spirit lamp and wire gauze globe 50 cm high (0.6. 0);
I
(c) 1 (How Lamp with socket, on plate with two terminals ( 0.9.6).
Cl. 6190,
6195, 6103, .6179. 33*
54976,54977. 1:10.
54983. 1:16.
54 984. 1 : 10. 54 985. 1 : 7.
54.976. Accessories for Experiments on Absorption, Emission and Permeability of Heat Rays,
s. d.
Figure (Experiments Nos. 1 4) 4.10.0

(a) Thermal Sources: 4 Metal Boxes for steam heating, black-black, black-white, black-polished,
polished-dull (Figs. 3 and 4, 1.2.0); (b) Receivers: 5 Metal Receivers, round pattern, 2 black-white,
1 each black-polished, white-dull, polished-dull (Figs. 3 and 4, 1. 7. 0); (c) 2 double Screens with rect-
angular piece cut away for taking rock salt, plate glass, etc. slabs (Fig. 4, 0. 6. 0); (d) 2 U-shaped Alu-
minium Sheets for closing the apertures 0. 2. 0); (e) 2 Slabs mounted in cork, 40 x30 mm. of rock salt
(
and plate glass (Fig. 4, 0. 13. 0); (f) 2 double Screens with round opening 75 mm diameter for taking
the flat glass vassels (Fig. 5a, 0.7. 0); (g) 4 flat thin-walled Glass Vessels for distilled water, alcohol,
iodine solution and concentrated ferrous sulphate solution (Fig. 5b, 0. 13. 0). The accessories No. 54,975
should also be ordered and possibly also Nos. 54,978 54,982.
54.977. Board with 15 Brass Sockets for containing the Metal Eeceivers, with pasteboard cover,
see Fig. 54,976 '. 1.12.0
54.978. Alum Slab, mounted in cork, (addition to Expt. No. 3) ,.
0. 11.
ditto 11.
54.979. Gypsum Slab ditto ( 3) I). II
54,980. Mica Slab ditto ditto 3) 0. 11.
Rock mounted in cork (addition to 14. o

54.981. Crystal Slab, cut perpendicular to axis, Expt. No. 3) 0.
54.982. Rock Crystal Slab, cut parallel to axis, mounted in cork (addition to Expt. No. 3) 0. 14. It
54.983. Accessories for Experiments on Reflection of Thermal Rays on concave Mirrors, double and triple
reflection, cold rays (Experiment No. 5, I III), Figure 7. 0.
(a) 2 spherical concave Mirrors, 400 mm

diameter and 175 mm
focal distance, of German Silver.
on adjustable stands (Figs. 6 and 31, 6. 0. 0); (b) 1 small Metal Receiver 65 mm
diameter on adjustable
stand, and 1 rubber tube 55 cm long, and 1 small Glass Tube (Figs. 6 and 31, 0. 13. 0): (c) 1 adjustable
Stand for the spirit lamp stage, with wire gauze globe (Figs. 6 and 31, 0.6. 0); (d) 1 White-metal Slab,
600 and 400 mm
(Fig. 7, 0.1.0); Accessories No. 54,975 should also be ordered.
54.984. Accessories for Experiments on Refraction of Thermal Rays (Experiment No. 6, Fig. 8), Figure . . 7. 8.
(a) 1 semi-cylindrical Double Screen with adjustable gap ( 1.0.0); (b) 1 equilateral Rock Salt
Prism, 35 mm side and 70 mm
height, with stage ( 3.17.0); (C) 1 rotary Bar with divided circle
( 1.8.0); (d) 1 simple plane Gap 0.12.0); (e) 1 semi-cylindrical Receiver, the plane side black
(
( 0. 9. 0); (f) 1 Wire Gauze Globe 70 mm

high, on thick wire stirrup ( 0. 2. 0). Accessories No. 54,975
should also be ordered.
54.985. Accessories for Experiments on Total Reflection and Reflection on plane Metal Mirrors (Experiments
Nos. 7 and 8, Fig. 8), Figure 4. 1.
(a) 1 rectangular Rock Salt Prism, 35 side and 70 mm mm height, with stage ( 3. 17. 0);
(b) 1 nickelled plane Mirror, o. metal, 100 x 100 ( 0.4.0). mm Accessories Nos. 54,975 and 54,984
should also lie ordered.
54.986. Accessories for Experiments on Thermal Conduction of Solids (Experiments No. 9, Fig. 9), Figure 1. -2. u
(a) 2 Metal Receivers in the form of truncated cones 0. 11. 0): (b) 2 Sheet Iron Flasks for hot
(
water or steam heating ( 0. 9. 0); (C) 2 each round Wood Slabs cut with and across the Limin. ><( pine,
poplar and oak, 50 mm
diameter, 10 nun thick 0. 2. 0). Accessories No. 54,1)75 should also be ordered
(
and perhaps also Nos. 54,987/90. |

fl.6166, 6164,
0188, 617.'..
Xo. 54995. Kolbe Thermoscope. 597
54992. 1 : 10.
54 991. 1 : 7.
54 994. 1 : 6.
54 993. 1 : 7. 54 995. 1 : 7.
S. d.
54.987. Gypsum mm diameter, 10 mm thick (addition to Expt. No. 9)

Slab, round, 50 0. 10.
54.988. Alum Slab, round, 50 mm diameter, 10 mm thick (addition to Expt. No. 9) 0. 10.
54.989. Rock Crystal Slab, round, 50 mm diameter, 10 mm thick, cut parallel to axis (addition to Expt. No. 9) 0. 13.
54.990. Rock Crystal Slab, round, 50 mm diameter, 10 mm thick, cut perpendicular to axis (addition to Ex-
periment No. 9) 0. 13.
54.991. Accessories for Experiments on Thermal Conduction of Metal Rods (Experiment No. 10, Fig. 10), Figure 0. 16.
(a) 1 Sheet Metal Vessel with 3 necks ( 0. 7. 0); (b) 2 Copper Rods, 250 long, 6 thick, mm mm
in tubular glass receivers 0. 6. 0); (c) 1 Lead Rod, 250
( long, 6 mm mm
thick, in tubular glass receiver
( 0. 3. 0).
The following rods are also intended for these experiments.
54.992. 6 further Metal Rods, Figure, 250 mm long, 6 mm thick, in tubular glass receivers 0. 18.
(a) Aluminium ( 0. 3. 0); (b) Brass ( 0. 3. 0); (c) German Silver ( 0. 3. 0); (d) Zinc 0. 3. 0); (
(e) Tin ( 0. 3. 0); (f) Iron ( 0. 3. 0).
54.993. Accessories for Experiments on Thermal Conduction of Liquids and Gases (Experiment No. 11), Figure
without box 3. 2.
(a) 4 Double Vessels of glass, for water, alcohol, oil and mercury; 1 length Rubber Tubing with
glass tube. 0. 18. 0); (b) 1 Wood Fillet with hinge, for taking two double vessels (
( 0. 3. 0); (c) 5 Glass
Double Vessels, filled with air, oxygen, hydrogen, illuminating gas, and carbon dioxide, sealed up
( 1.8.0): (d) 1 evacuated Double Vessel, unsilvered 0.5.0); (e) 1 evacuated Double Vessel silvered
(
inside ( 0. 8. 0).
54.994. Accessories for Experiments on Sp33lfic H?at 0? Solids and Liquids (Experiments Nos. 12 and 13)
Figure 0. 18.
2 Double-walled Glass Receivers with com graduation and wood lids (Fig.
(a) 12. 0. 9. 0) (b) 5 Metal :
Bodies of same weight ii-id sa'iic area. 2 of copper, 1 eaoh of lead, tin and iron ( 0. 9. 0). In addition,
the sheet iron vessel No. 54, 991 a must be available.
."i4.ii!)."). Accessories for Experiments on Thermal Consumption on Evaporating, Generation of Heat by Mechanical
Work, Decrease of Heating with the Square of the Distance (Experiment No. 14 16), Figure . 0. 4.
(a) 2 thick artificial Corks, f>0 mm

diameter, 12 round blotting paper discs, 50 diameter and mm
1
piece sandpaper ( 0.2.0); (b) 1 Wire Gauze Globe, 30 high, on wire stirrup (mm0.2.0). In
addition, the two Receivers Xo. 54.9S(i a and the two Rer.eivo.rs No. 54,976 b, black-white, must be
: "ailable.
Cl. 6160, 6170,
6165, 61B2,
6172 8159.
598 Thermoscopy. N... :,4996
54 996. > : 7.
54 997. 1 : 7. 54998. 1:10.
54,996. Accessories for Experiments on the Heating Effect of the electric Current (Experiments Nos. 17 23), s. d.
Figure 5. 10.
(a) 1 tubular Receiver with a constantan wire 100 long (Fig. 13, mm
0.4.0); (b) 2 tubular
Receivers each with constantan wire 200 mm
long (Figs. 13 and 15, 0.9.0); (c) 1 Series Resistance
with a constantan wire 200 mm
long (Fig. 15, 0.4.0); (d) 1 Closed Circuit Fall Trough No. 51,729
(Fig. 14, 1.6.0); (e) 2 Constantan Wire Spirals with cork mount, contained in reagent glasses
(Fig. 16, 0.5.0); (f) 2 tubular Receivers each with 2 constantan wires (0. 9. 0); (g) 1 tubular Recei\ IT
with three wires of copper, iron, and constantan (Fig. 18, 0.5.0); (h) 1 tubular Receiver with three
wires of different diameter (Fig. 19, 0.5.0); (i) 1 Lamp Resistance with three 110 volt Glow lamps
( 0.16.0); (j) Double Conductor 2 m
long with screw plug and plug contact and simple connecting
lead 40 cm long ( 0. 5. 0); (k) 2 pair Copper and Zinc Rods in cork mount (Fig. 20, 0. 4. 0); (1) 2 tu-
bular Receivers with double rods of antimony and bismuth (Fig. 21, 0.18.0).
If the network voltage is other than 110 volts kindly quote pie-sure when ordering, The two
double-walled Receivers No. 54,994 a are also used.
54,997. Accessories for Experiments on Gas Osmose (Experiments Nos. 24 and 25), Figure d. .V n
1 Porous Pot with rubber stopper and glass tube and a gla-s beaUer (Figs. 22 and 23).
54.99S. Accessories for Manometric Experiments, F i g u r e (Experiments Nos. 2*>. 27. 20. 3D). Action <>i
l)ubrol'ski Aspirator. Itoflection of Sound Waves after Trussevitch- Rostov/eft'. Absorption of
u
through a rotating body carries air with it 2. In.
(a) Vaporiser as aspirator (Fig. 24,

1 0.2.0); (b) 1 Kiunlt Manometer in a Trusscvitcli Mop-
cock arrangement, No. 53,1!U, with sound horn and with pointer for direction of air current, on stand
'
(Figs. 25 and 32, 1.0.0); (c) 1 tuned Pipe on Maud (Fius. :>.-, and 32. 0.12.0): (d) 1
Absorption
Vessel, consisting of two tall cylinders, one spring wire net and one irhiss plate ( 0.10.0); (e) pair I
Wire Net Tongs (Fig. 34, 0.4.0); (f) 1 Pasteboard Cylinder with bottom, for fixing on the \Vbirlinir
Table ( 0.2.0). In addition, spherical concave Mirror No. 54,983 a is used for xperimenl No. L'7 I-',
and one black-polished l!ecei\er No. 54.976)) for Experiment. No. 30.
Boxes and Stands for Inking the in<li\ idual parts arc constructed desired and dialled at it'
lowest possible rate. It is requested that the collections o!' accessories thai are to In-
fitted in boxes or on stands should be stated.
Speaking generally, it i- advisable to provide a -eparate box for eacli of the collection.- listed under
a separate List No.; only the smaller collections are combined with the larger. The boxes and stand-
are made of wood or pasteboard.
cl. 173,
Bin, 6167.
No. 5J 009. Kolbe Thermoscope and Sextuple Manometer. 599
55 001. 1 : 8.
54 999, 55 000. 1 : 8. 55002, 54 986 b. 1: 55 005. 1 : 7.
54,999. Sextuple Manometer after Kolbe, Figure, for demonstrating simultaneously the I B. d.
thermal conduction of six different solids, the temperature drop in a solid, the thermal
conduction in a liquid from top to bottom and vice versa; and electric conductivity, in
conjunction with the accessories listed under Nos. 55 000 55 009 and 54,975, which
should be ordered separately. The price does not include the receivers for heat experi-
ments, illustrated in the Figure, or the heating'
box (Kolbe - Skellon, Introduction to
electricity, part 2, Fig. 127) 3. 17.
A detailed description of the apparatus and the experiments which can be made with it is
contained in the Introduction Nr. 54,974 (sent free on application). The illustration numbers mentioned
in the accessories refer to this Introduction.
55,000. 6 Receivers with Metal Rods and Heating Box, Fig. 54,999, for demonstrating the thermal conduction
of different metals (Fig. 28), with rods of copper, brass, zinc, tin, German Silver, and lead, coated
with thermo-paint 1. 0.
j
,001. Copper Rod with 6 Receivers, for the thermal drop, Figure (Fig. 29) 1. 0.
,002. Tall Glass Vessel with 6 Receivers (Glass) und 1 Heating Box for Experiments on Thermal Conduction
in Liquids, Figure, arranged for heating the liquid columns from below and from above .... 1. 8.
For heating from above one Sheet Iron Flask Xo. 54,986 b is necessary, this being excluded from
the price 0. 4. 6
.v>.( HI:;. 6 Tube Receivers with Metal Wires for electric Resistance Comparisons, Figure, with wood fillet
'
for placing on the sextuple manometer 1. 4.

The wires included in the Receivers are of equal length and thieknr .
These Receivers can also be inserted in the heating boxes contained in No. 55,000.
A
closed -circuit fall trough No. 54,996 d is
necessary for the experiment and should be ordered
with the above if not already available.
00,00.4. - idem, without the receiver with platinum wire 1. 0.
55,005. 6 Double Glass Vessels for Comparison of electrical Resistance (Kolbe -Skellon, Introduction to
electricity, part 2, Fig. 128), divided in cubic centimetres, and 6 Wires conducted through Corks, with
wood fillet for placing on the sextuple manometer, for the Lenz-Looser experiment, Figure ... 2. 0.
55.008. Box for storing the glass parts of Xos. 55,000 55,005 0. 15.
5,009. idem, the removable lid being provided with 15 sockets j

2. 0.
Cl. 1764,
6169,
1763, 3414. 6161.
600 Thermoscopy. Heat and Change of State. No. 55010
55 013. 1 : 4. 55016. 1:3. 55019. 1:12,
55.010. Colour Thermoscope after H. Eebenstorff, Figs. A D

(Ztschr. f. d. phys. u. chem. i s. d.
U. 9, 1896, p. 227; and 15, 1902, p. 145; W. D., 4 th Edn., pp. 568 et seq.) .... 1. 2.
The mode of action is based on the fact that mercuric iodide with which the apparatus in
question is coated changes its colour when submitted to temperature variations. While it is quite
yellow at ordinary temperature, it becomes red when heated to from 45 to 50 C., assuming the yellow
colour when cooled below 35 C.
The complete set of apparatus comprises: 1 Card with 5 thermopaints, 80 x 160 mm; Glass
Tubes filled with hydrogen and air, Pig. C; 1 Tinfoil Screen, Fig. A; 1 Screen with rock salt and glass
slab, Fig. D; 1 Sheet Iron Screen with two wood wedges, Fig. B; and 1 Brass Stand with polished
wood base.
55.011. 10 thermoscopic coloured Sheets after Eebenstorff (Ztschr. f. d. phys. u. chem. U. 21,
1908, pp. 291 and 304) 0. 4.
55.012. Autogram Discs for colour thermoscopes, Figure 0. 3.

The coated half yellow and half red (with silver mercury iodide and copper mercury iodide
disc is ,
respectively) and transparent sections cut away. When held high above a flame the temperatures of
the enantiomorphic molecular changes (45 and 70 C.) are shewn.
55.013. Sensitive thermoscopic Sound, Figure 0. 10.

The Sound, coated with thermoscopic paint, consists of a sheet iron capsule for lukewarm water
or thermophoric substance.
Change of State.
55.014. Freezing Thermometer, for shewing the over-cooling of water and the generation of
heat on freezing, with stand (M. P. Ill, Fig. 320 [II, 2, Fig. 88]; Gan.-Eein., Fig. 336) 0. H). u
55.015. idem, Figure, with transparent scale for objective demonstration, small
pattern, with stand 0. 7.
55,016. Hollow Iron Sphere with closing screw (Explosion Ball), Figure, for shewing the
increase of volume when water freezes (W. D., Fig. 351 [331]; Gan.-Eein., Fig. 33H;
M. T., p. 153) 0. 1. 8
The closing screw need only be provided once and can be used for a number of experiments. !
'<>. ol 7. Iron Sphere alone, as spare 0. o. 10
55,018. Cooling Vessel of stout wood, for above, with lid, for holding the fractured pieces
of the bursting sphere 0. 5.
Ice Machines for generating Ice by a freezing Mixture or by the combinal ion of Heat on dissolving
Ammonium Nitrate: see p. 214.
Ice Machines after Carre", Figure, with air pump (M. P. Ill, Fig. 360 [II, 2, Fig 217];
Gan.-Man., Fig. 172, I, II; Gan.-Eein., Fi<r. 363).
List No. 55,019 55,020 55,021 55,022
Generates Ice, kg 2 34 46 1012
11.0.0 13.10.0 15.0.0 30.0.0
Cl. 1705, 1766, 1767. 170S,
* Can lit- used with tlir lYoji'ction App;r;i' u-
4504, 6207, 1777.
No. So 032. Heat and Change of State. 601
55 015. 1 : 3. 55 029 A. 1 : 2. 55 029 B. 1:2. 55 031. 1 : 9.
55.023. Ice-breaking Machine, 300 mm high, 165x125 mm upper aperture, width of rolls s. d.
90 mm 0.16.0
55.024.
- -
idem, 340 mm high, 165 X 130 mm opening above, width of rolls 120 mm . 1. 4.0
These machines break up the ice with great ease and rapidity. They are supplied either tin-plated,
galvanised or lacquered.
55,025. Wood's Metal in bars, melting at 65 C. (W. D., p. 512) per 50 g 0. 2.0
55.026. Mousson's Apparatus, Figure

(M. P. Ill, Figs. 330/2 [II, 2, Fig. 98100]; Gan.-
Eein., Fig. 333), for liquefying ice under high pressure at low temperatures, with stand,
key and reversible wood vessel for inserting the apparatus and the cold mixture . . 2. 10.
55.027. Small Thermocouple of iron and German Silver, for inserting with ice in the hydraulic
press in order to shew that melting brought about by pressure increase, and the com-
bination of heat taking place, causes a decrease in temperature (W. D., Fig. 414 [390]) 0. 5.0
55,028 Wood Frame, Hook and Wire after Bottomley, for melting an ice block through by
means of a heavily loaded wire (W. D., Fig. 415 [391]) 0. 5.0
55.029. 3 Moulds for Ice Regelation, Figs. A and B, of brass (W. D., Figs. 411413 [387389]),
for use under the hydraulic press Price, each 0. 6. 0.18.0
55.030. 2 Iodine Tubes, one filled with Air, the other exhausted (W. D., pp. 535 and 536),
for shewing the vapour in the air-filled space and demonstrating critical pressure . . 0. 7.
55.031. Steam Barometer, Figure, filled, for shewing the tension of water vapour with
increasing temperature (W. D., Fig. 353 [333]), with stand, ready for use 1. 4.
I
55.032. Detonation Balls (W. D., p. 518 [479]) Per dozen 0. 0.6
Cl. 4044, 1778,
6184, 1780, 1781, 1782.
602 Heat and Change of State. No. 55 033
55 036. 1 : 7. 55 037. 1 : 12. 55039. 1:10.
55.033. Copper Dish with Wire Triangle, for Leidenfrost's Experiment (W. I)., Fiirs. 355
and [335]; M. T., p. 112) 0. 2. o
55.034. Aluminium Dish after Bebenstorff (Ztschr. f. d. phys. u. chem. U. 19, 1906, p. 29) 0. l.o
55.035. Platinum Dish with Wire Triangle, for the same experiment o. is. o
* 55,036. Apparatus after Boutigny for the Leidenfrost Experiment, Figure, also adapted
for projecting the phenomenon, with copper dish, Teclu burner, and glass rod, on tripod
with levelling screws 2. <>. o
55.037. Apparatus after Weinhold, F i g u i e, for shewing the behaviour of Saturated and
Superheated Steam (W. D., Fig. 357 [337]), height of apparatus 1.20 m 2. 0.
55.038. idem, with iron stand (W. D., Fig. 357 [337] and p. 523 [485] Bemavk) . 2. 10.
55.039. Apparatus after Dalton-Be"gnault, Figure, for Measuring the Tension of Steam
below the Boiling Point (M. P. Ill, Fig. 249 [II, 2, Fig. 121); the steam vessel is placed,
together with the barometer, in one bath. The difference between the mercury columns
(reduced to 0) gives the pressure 2. 10.
55.040. Apparatus after Dalton, Figure, for Measuring the Tension of Water Vapour
between and 100 C., with stand, burner, tripod, heating vessel, and thermometer
3. lo. o
(Gan.-Bein., Fig. 344)
55.041. Apparatus for Measuring the Tension of Vapour from Salt Solutions, Figure (\V.
I)., Fig. 358 [338]) 1. 0. o
5^.762. Barometer Tube with iron tripod stand, Fig. 52.762. p. 371, for shewing the difference
between gases and vapours (M. P. Ill, Fig. 237 [II, 2, Fig. 1
0!>|), the, glass tube with
graduation, with Tube Holder and Index 1. 16.
52,752. 3 Barometer Tubes in mercury bath, Pig. 52,752, p. 370, with stand (M. I'. III. l-'ig. 236
[II, 2, Fig. 108]), suitable for shewing the difference between gases and vapours . . 1.10. u
51,412. Filling Pipette, Fig. 51.112, p. 220, for tubes the lower' opening of which plunges in
a liquid 0. 3.
* Can In- used witli the Projection Apparatus. U. 1783. 17S5, 178S
No. 55047. LeidenJrost's Experiment. Dalton's Law. 603
55 041. 1 : 5. 55 042. 1 : 2.
JJdw*
55040. 1:14. 55 043. I : 6. 55 044. 1 55047. 1 : 1C.
51', 753. 3 Barometer Tubes as No. 52,752, the tubes having etched graduation, with funnel- s - <i-
aperture and half-pierced stopcocks on the upper end, for conveniently introducing the
liquids to be evaporated "2. 0.
52,653. Piezometer inset with two gas pressure tubes, after Despretz, for comparing the dif-
ferent tension of two gases at different pressures (different compressibility) 1. 0.0
55.042. Apparatus after Gay-Lussac, Figure, for proving Dalton's Law on the ratio of
tension in gas-filled spaces and in vacuo (M. P. Ill, Fig. 267 [II, 2, Fig. 134]), with
glass stopcock 0. 4.
55.043. Dalton's Law Apparatus, Figure 0. 5.

Ether or the like should be introduced drop by drop into the flask through the funnel. The
gla^s tube passing through the second hole in the bung is connected up to an open manometer.
55.044. Dalton's Law Apparatus after Frick, Figure (M. P. Ill, Fig. 269 [II, 2, Fig. 136]) 0. 6.
55.045. Apparatus for Measuring the Vapour Tension in an air-filled Space by means of Ether,
Figure (W. 1)., Fig. 361 [34T 0. 10.
55,046. Apparatus for Measuring the Tension of Water Vapour in a non-vacuous space (W. D.,
Fig. 362 [342]), of glass, with rubber tubing 0. 10.
55,047. idem, on stand, Figure 1. 2.
( 1. 1790,1791,1795,
1789,5797, 1787, 179R.
55048. 1:15. 55049. 1:14.
55 051. 1 : 3. 55 052. 1 : 3. 55053. 1:10.
55,048. Apparatus for the Tension of Water Vapour, after Watt-Eegnault, Figure, for
s (1
temperatures from to +50 C. (M. P. Ill, Fig. 254 [II, 2, Fig. 126]; Gan.-Man.,
Fig. 494; Gan.-Eein., Fig. 345), for readings with the cathetometer 8.10.0
55,04!i. Apparatus after Gay-Lussac, Figure, for Determining the Tensions of Water
Vapour for Temperatures below Zero (M. P. Ill, Fig. 243 [II, 2, Fig. 115]; Gan.-Man.,
Fig. 492; Gan.-Eein., Fig. 343); with iron stand 2.16.0
55,050. --idem, Figure, with wood stand and graduation 2. 4.0
55,05J. Tube after Lehmann, Figure, for Determining the Vapour Tension of Liquids
(Fr. phys. Techn. I, 2, Fig. 2781), for connecting lip to the air pump 0. 2.
55.052. --idem, Figure, with vessels fitting into each other (Fr. phys. Techn. I, 2,
Fig. 2782) 0. 3.
55.053. Apparatus after Dalton, Figure, for Shewing that the Tension of Vapours in a gas-
filled Space is the same as in Vacuo (diwulson, Lehrb. d. I'hys., Ill, Fig. -11). with
union tube tor tin- air pump, dropping vessel and barometer tube 2. 1 1.
55.054. Apparatus for Measuring the Expansibility of Saturated Steam at temperatures of

from +42to + 140 ('.. after Eegnault, Figure
(M. P. III. Fig. 2:>* [II, 2, Fig. 12!|;
Gan.-Man., Fig. 495; Gan.-Eein., Fig. 347), by observing the boiling point at diffe-
rent pressures 16.0. (I
.
Apparatus after (lay-Lussae and Theiiard. Figure, for Determining the Tension
Of Vapours mixed with Cases (dan. -Man., Fig. 4!S; Gau.-Hein., Fig. 378) t. 0.0
CI. 1797. 41.17,3417,
2
.021', 5024 , 341."..
No. 55061. Tension of Vapour. 605
55055. 1:11.
55 054. 1 : 20.
55 060. 1 : 6. 55057. 1:12.
com- s. d.
55.057. Apparatus for Shewing the Equilibrium of Vapour Tensions in unequally heated
municating Spaces, Fignte
(M. P. Ill, Fig. 216 [II, 2, Fig. 133]), on stand . . . 0.18.0
55.058. Boiling Vessel for Shewing Ebullition at higher or lower Pressure than the atmospheric,
with tall cylinder and angle tube (W. D., Fig. 354 [334]) 0. 6.0
55.059. Apparatus for Delaying Ebullition by a Soap Solution, Figure (W. D., Fig. 359 [339]) 0. 3.0
55.060. Apparatus for Retarding Ebullition with pure Water, Figure (W. D., Fig. 360
[340]), so-called Water-Hammer, for shewing the force with which the water is impelled
when the "retardation of ebullition" disappears; with sheet iron tube for heating by
steam 0. 4.0
- - without sheet iron tube
55,061. idem, Cl.
0. 3.
1794, 6200,
3418,
4810.3866.
606 Heat and Change of State. Xo. 55 062
55064. 1:10.
55 063.
1 : 10.
55 067. 1 : 5.
* 3*
55 066. 1:5. 55 069. 1:6. 55 072, 55 074. 1 : 6.
s. d.
55,062. Water Hammer Techn. I, 2, Fig. 2197 [I. Fig. 371])

(Fr. phys. 0. 2.
The water hammer used, for example, in the following demonstrations: for Shewing Retar-
is
dation of Ebullition; Retardation in Freezing (cooling down of water when freezing, M. T., p. 152), the
lowest position of boiling point at low pressure (when warmed with the hand, M. T., p. 157), the Falling
of a liquid in vacuo without splitting up.
.">:>, 063. idem, with constriction and point (Singing Water Hammer), Figure (Fr. phys.
Techn. I, 2, Fig. 2919) 0. 2.
55.064. -- idem, after Donney, Figure o. 3. o
55.065. Pulse Hammer

(Fr. phys. Techn. I, 2, Fig. 2916 [I, Fig. 373]), for shewing the boiling
of ether in vacuo 0. 1. r>
55.066. Apparatus, F i g u r o, for Shewing that the Boiling Point of Salt Solutions is higher
than of pure Water, with thermocouple (W. D., Fig. 356 [336]) 0. (i. o
.").">. oJ7. Apparatus for Determining Boiling Point, Figaro, with thermometer (W. u. Iv.
]>hy,s. Prakt., Fig. 101), especially for water, ethyl and amyl alcohol 0. 1'2. u
:>:>.06N. Apparatus for Ebullition under low Pressure at low Temperature (M. P. Ill, Fig. 256
[II, 2, Fig. 127]) 0. 6.
.V), <)(><>. Papin's Digester, of brass, on tripod, for l

l
/.t atmospheres, with safety valve and
thermometer 2. 0. (I
\V> *\iM lie picked to hiivc the I'apin Digesters tested officially on receipt of tin- fees ( 1.0.0
to 1. 5. 0) for lln- tests.
.":>. 070. - -
idem, with Spring Manometer 70 mm diameter 2. 8.
.">.">. 071. Papin's Digester, larger, Figu re, of stout brass, for 10 atmospheres, with safety
valve and thermometer 3.16.0 i
.">.". 072.
- -
idem, with Spring Manometer 70 mm diameter 4. .10. o
Cl .Wli. 1M03, 1881,

1784, 4704. 180.'..
No. 55081. Ebullition, Solidification, Fusion. 607
55 080. 1 : 5.
r
55079A 1 : 12. 55 079 B. 1:3.
55.073. Papin's Digester for 20 atmospheres, of stout copper with gunmetal top, with safety s. d.
valve, thermometer and cock (M. P. Ill, Fig. 257). The thermometer is divided to
250 C. and plunges in an iron box which "should be filled with mercury . . . . . 5. 4.0
55.074.
- -
idem, with Spring Manometer 100 mm diameter, Figure (M. T., p. 159). 6. 4.0
55.075. Device after Faraday, for freezing mercury in a powerful flame by means of solid
carbon-dioxide, Figure
(W. D., Figs. 401 and 402 [381 and 382]; M. P. Ill, Fig. 304
[II, 2, Fig. 161]), consisting of cloth bag, stand, plate, small iron vessel on long stem
and platinum wound wire triangle; but without platinum crucible and blast lamp . 1. 4.0
55.076. Apparatus for Freezing Mercury by Evaporating Sulphurous Acid, (W. D., Figure
Fig. 405 [385]), consisting of a flask with inset, a drying flask, and 6 condensing vessels 0.15.0
- - without drying flask
55,077. idem, 0. 10.
- - f or
V).078. idem,
producing temperatures to about 101 C. by a mixture of solid
carbon dioxide and ether (W. D., Fig. 406 [386]) 0. 12.
52,655. Inset for the Oersted Piezometer, for demonstrating the lowering of the melting point
of water by pressure, after Thomson (M. P. Ill,
Fig. 327 [II, 2, Fig. 95]; Gan.-Eein.,
Fig. 332) 2. 5.0
This apparatus consists of a lead slab, a sensitive ether thermometer in protecting tube and a
manometer.
55.079. Melting Point Determination Apparatus, Figs. A and B, with stand and thermometer
to 360 C. (W. u. E. phys. Prakt., Fig. 98) 1. 0.0
55.080. Apparatus for Producing Ice by the Evaporation of Sulphuric Acid in Vacuo, Figure,
after Leslie (M. P. Ill, Fig. 358 [II, 2, Fig. 215]), consisting of one small receiver, sul-
phuric acid vessel, and cork dish on tripod, for the air pump 0. 3.0
.V>.osi. Thin-walled Dish of Sheet Copper with Wood Slab after Bb'ttger, for producing ice
by evaporation of ether or carbon-disulphide (M. P. Ill, Fig. 362 [II, 2, Fig. 219]) 0. 1. 3
53,073. - - i d e m, for the air pump (W. V., Fig. 409), see Fig. 53,073, p. 405, without receiver !
0. 3.
Cl. 4545, 1821,

1820, 1801, 1802.
55 087. 1 : 5.
55 089. 1 : r>. 55 088. 1 : 3. 55 090. 1 : 4.
53.074. Refrigerator after Carre Fig. 53,074, p. 405 (W. D., Fig. 391 [371]), for producing ice
,
s. d.
by evaporation, and with enclosed ether glass for demonstration of the heat freed by
condensation of steam, on stand 0. 11/0
- - without ether
53.075. idem, glass, after Berberich (W. D., Fig. 390 [370]; Fr. phys.
Techn. II, 2, Fig. 3631) 0. 9.0
53.076. Refrigerator after Weinhold, Fig. 53,076, p. 405, completely assembled for setting
on the plate of the air pump (W. D., Fig. 392 [372]) . 0. 10.
55.083. Apparatus for the Retardation of Freezing, after Weinhold (W. D., Fig. 350 [330]) 0. 2.0
55.084. Cryophorous after Wollaston (M. P. Ill, Fig. 361 [II, 2, Fig. 218]) (i. 2.6
55.085. Cryophorous after Weinhold (W. D., Fig. 393 [373]) 0. 3.0
55.086. Cryophorous after Grimsehl, specially adapted for demonstrating ebullition at low
temperature (Ztschr. f. d. phys. u. chem. U. 16, 1903, p. 376), with thermometer. . 0. 10.
55.087. Sulphuric Acid Cryophorous after Weinhold, Figure (W. D., Fig. 394 [374]), with
funnel for filling 0. 4.0
55.088. Apparatus for Evaporating Ice, F gu

i r e (W. D., Fig. 395 [375]) 0. 10.
55.089. --idem, Figure, with platinum gauze for rendering incandescent by ;i voltaic
current (W. D. Fig. 396 [376]) 0.15.0
* 55, (i(o. Andrews' Press for Compressing and Liquefying Carbonic Acid, F g n r c, arranged i
for the Projection Lantern (W. D., Fig. 363 [343]) 2. 4.0
The carbonic acid tube is protected for transit by a screw-on metal sheath. The liquefaction
of the carbon dioxide is plainly visible. If the apparatus is set up before the Projection Lantern
(which can be done very conveniently), the carbonic acid tube is cooled by blowing air front above
through a clean glass tube screwed on, see Pig. 55090.
Cl. 1808,
4890, 1814
No. 55097. Solidification. Liquefaction. 609
55 096. 1 : 6.
s. d.
55.091. Carbonic Acid Generator, Figure (W. D., Fig. 398 [378]) 3. 6.
55.092. Steel Cylinder, 3 litres capacity, Figure, filled with 2 kg Carbonic Acid (W. D.,
Fig. 397 [377]), without tipping device 1.10.0
55.093. Filling No. 55,092 with 2 kg Carbonic Acid 0. 5.
55.094. Tipping Device for the Carbonic Acid Cylinder, Fig. 55,092, without steel cylinder,
reducing valve, or capacity indicator 1. 16.
55, 094 a. Portable Stand for large Steel Cylinders 10 12 litres, Figure I
1. 10.
55. 005. Stamp, Plate, Mould and Frame for pressing carbonic acid plates, also polished Brass
Ball 2 cm diameter (Krdmann, Anorganische Chemie, Figs. 187 190) 0. 8.
55.090. Apparatus for Demonstrating the Liquefaction of Gases, after Cailletet, Figure
(M. P., Ill, Fig. 309 [II, 2, Fig. 166]), for a pressure of 300 atmospheres, with Steel ,
Pump and reservoir 32. 10.

- - d 40.
"'"'.097. i e in, for a pressure of 1000 at 0.
Cl. 4105, 1818, 6218,

1819. 39
610 Heat and Change of State. No. 55 098 -
55 098. 1 : 8. 55 103. 1 :
7,5.
55,098. Demonstration Apparatus for Generating Liquid 7 Air after Heylandt (Ztschr. . d. phys. a s. d.
u. chem. U., 22, 1909, p. 360), Figure...* 6.10. (I
55.099. Steel Cylinder containing Compressed Air for above 2. u.
55.100. Auxiliary Apparatus for Generating Solid Air . . 1.10.
55.101. Refrigeration Thermometer i. o.
55.102. Pressure Gauge for valve-regulation 1. 4.
55,103. Demonstration Apparatus for Generating Liquid Air after Olszevski, Figure (Drudes
Annalen der Physik, 10, 1903, p. 776) 31. n.(t
It is possible to make in a few minutes with this apparatus and the aid of two cylinders of com-
pressed air of 13 litres capacity, 100 ccm of liquid air.
Steel Cylinders: see No. 55,099.

If a compressor of at least 7 HP. is used instead of the steel cylinders it is possible to produce
about 600 ccm of liquid air per hour with the apparatus. Prices of compressors quoted on'application.
55,103 a. Apparatus for the Liquefaction of Air and Hydrogen in large quantities, Figure,
after Olszevski, for use with steel cylinders or with a compressor; with spare glass
reservoirs 70.
Generates about 1 litre compressed air per hour with a 7 HP compressor and about 3 litres with
a 19 HP compressor.
55, 103 b.Apparatus for the Liquefaction of Air in large quantities, Figure, entirely of
metal in wood casing ,->.-,. (i.
The output is the same as with No. 55, 103 a.
55, 103 c. Plate of Sketches for Explaining Linde's Counter-current Machine (M. T., S 68) . 0. 3.
Liquid air can be obtained ready for use, ci. 6-213, 6555.
immediately before using, from the suppliers.
No. 55 115. Liquefaction of Air. 611
55106. 1:10. 55113. 1:10.
55 103 a. 1:7. 55103b. 1:6. 55115A. 1:8. 55115B. 1:6.
Cylindrical Beakers with Evacuated Double Wall after Dewar, Figure, for keeping cool
liquid air, liquid hydrogen, etc., silvered inside.
List No.
External Height, mm
Internal Width, mm
(a) .Beaker
612 Heat and Change of State. No. 55116 -
55 117. 1 : 5.
55 123. 3 : 4. 55 125. 1:16. 55 126. 1:10.
55.116. Double-walled Capsule for obtaining solid air by means of liquid hydrogen (Erdmann, s. d.
Anor. Chemie, Fig. 43), 80 diameter mm 0. 5. II
55.117. Lead Plate on Wood Base together with Hammer and Porcelain Bowl, Figure,
for shewing the change in state of the lead plate when placed in liquid air (W. D.,
4 th 0. 6.0
Edn., Fig. 408)
55.118. 2 small Glasses, with Ether and Alcohol, in one cork mount, fitting cylindrical Beaker
No. 55,115 (W. D., 4 th Edn., Fig. 409) 0. 8.0
When plunged in liquid air the ether is converted into a crystalline mass: the alcohol first be-
comes viscous, solidifying finally into a transparent mass.
54,188. Hollow Cube of Crystal Glass, 8 cm side, for demonstrating the attraction of liquid
air by an electromagnet (W. D., 4 th Edn., p. 615) ................ I 0. 6.
A suitable Electromagnet to use is No. 62,280.
55,119. Apparatus for the Liquefaction and Freezing of Oxygen by the aid of liquid air
th
(W. D., 4 Edn., Fig. 410) ........................... 1. 6.0
th
Ozone Tubes, for producing solid ozone by means of liquid air (W. D., 4 Edn., p. 619): sec
Section "Electricity", p. 1017.
55.1-M. Apparatus after Erdmann for Freezing Water in liquid air (Erdmann, Anor. Chcmic.
Fig. 97) ................................... 0.10.0
*5:>,iL'3. Apparatus for the Critical Temperature Phenomena, Figure (W. D., Fig. 365
[345]), with instructions for use, for objective projection ............. 0.0.0
* .">."). TJ.'Ja. Protecting Case for above of black sheet iron ................. 0. 11'.
I. Apparatus for the Liquefaction of Sulphurous Acid (W. !>.. Fig. 366 [346]) .... o. 4.0
:."., I
Apparatus after Ndack
!'.">. for Liquefying Gases by Pressure and Cooling (Xtschr. z. Fonle-
rung d. plus. I'.. 1886. p. UOS), simple pattern. Figure ............ 1.13. II
# t';m be used with the Projection A|>|i;u iitns. Cl. 5596, 364, 1S21, 1825.
Xo. 55 137. Liquefaction of Gases. Gas and Vapour Density. 613
55 136. 1 : 6. 55 137. 1 : 8.
55.126. Apparatus for the Liquefaction of Gases by Cooling, without the application of pressure, s. A.
Figure 0. 10.
The lower part of the apparatus placed in a cold mixture while the lower
the small flask is
eduction pipe, which is provided with a U-tube connected to the small flask and is also surrounded
by a cold mixture, is traversed by the gas being dealt with. The following are well adapted for this
experiment: sulphurous acid, nitrous acid, ammonium cyanide and methyl chloride gas.
52,656. Piezometer inset with Four Tubes, after Magnus, for the liquefaction of Gases by pres-
sure, Fig. 52,656, p. 359 (M. P., Ill, Fig. 306 [II, 2, Fig. 163]) 1.10.0
Three short syphon barometers are contained in one vessel and can be fed with mercury and
various gases above the latter, while the fourth barometer serves as a manometer.
55.127. Carbonic Acid Gas Tube, appearing vacuous at ordinary temperature; only when
cooled does some liquid carbon dioxide become visible. In box 0. 18.
- - d e with perfectly anhydrous, pure carbonic acid
55.128. i
m, 1. 5.
55.129. Carbonic Acid Tube with some liquid Carbonic Acid, Figure. At ordinary tempe-
rature 2 5 ccm are visible, but when heated with the hand the tube appears empty.
In small box .' 0.18.0.
>>. 130. --
idem, with perfectly anhydrous, pure carbonic acid 1. 5.
55.131. Carbonic Acid Tube, about half-filled with liquid carbonic acid, for shewing the great
mobility of the same. In case 0. 18.
55.132.
-- idem, with perfectly anhydrous, pure carbonic acid 1. 8.
.V>, 133. Carbonic Acid Tube, entirely filled with liquid at 25 C. In case 0.18.0
55.134.
- - i d e m, with perfectly anhydrous, pure carbonic acid 1. 8.
55.135. Tubes with Liquefied Gases:

(a) Ammonia .... 0. 12. (e) Carbonic Acid . 0. 18. (i) Sulphurous Acid . 0. 10.
(b) Chlorine 0.12.0 (f) Nitrosy] Chloride 0.18.0 (j) Sulphuretted Hy-
(c) Cyanogen .... 0. 18. (g) Phosgene ... 0. 10. drogen 0. 18.
(d) Carbon Oxysulphide 0.18.0 (h) Muriatic Acid . 0.15.0 (k) Nitrous Oxide. . 0.18.0
(1) Nitrogen Dioxide 0. 18.
55.136. Apparatus for Determining Gas and Vapour Densities by Dumas' Method, Figure,
by (Iclermining the weight of a definite vapour volume (W. u. E., phys. Prakt., Fig. 56;
Chwolson, I, Fig. 225) 1. 6.
1 Stand, 3 narrow-necked glass Flasks, 1 Thermometer, 1 Stirrer and 1 Wire Triangle.
55.137. Apparatus for Determining Vapour Density by Gay-Lussae's method, (De- Figure
termination of Volume of the Vapour yielded by a given weight of Liquid), complete
with stand, graduated tube, thermometer, stirrer and burner, but without mercury
(M. P., Ill, Fig. 134 [II, 2, Fig. 142]) 3. 15.
Cl. 1809, 1822, 1810.

55138, 55139. 1 : 10. 55 140. 1 : 10. 55 141. 1 : 6.
55,138. Apparatus for Determining Vapour Density by A. W. Hofmann's method (Deter- s. d.
mining the Volume of Vapour yielded by a given weight of Liquid) see Figure, with
barometer tube, steam jacket, mercury bath, steam boiler, burner and small flask with
glass stopper, stand and stage (W. u. E. phys. Prakt., Figs. 57 59; M. P., Ill, Fig. 135
[II, 2, Fig. 143]); without Mercury or Cooling Vessel 3. 0.
55.139. Cooling Vessel for above, see Fig. 55,138, of copper 2. 10.
55.140. Apparatus for Determining Vapour Density by the Air-displacement method of

V. Meyer, Figure, with measuring glass for catching the gas and with water vessel
(W. u. E. phys. Prakt., Fig. 60), without bracket 1.16.0
55.141. Effusiometer after Bunsen for Determining Vapour Density by the Efflux Met hud.
Figure, with threeway cock and platinum diaphragm (W. u. E. phys. Prakt., Fig. 61 ;
M. P. I, Fig. 574 [592]), without Mercury 2. 0.
53,143.
-- idem, after Henniger, Fig. 53,143, p. 411 1. 6.
Cl. 1811, 1812, 1813.

No. 55 148 a. Vapour Density. Molecular Weight. 615
55 142, 54 874, 55 144, 51 727. 1 : 5. 55 146, 55 147, 54 874, 55 148. 1 : 5.
Beckmann's Apparatus for Molecular d.

Weight Determination by the Freezing Method, Fig. 55,142, s.
improved pattern (Ztschr. fur phys. Chemie, 21, p. 239; W. u. B. phys. Prakt., Fig. 105),
consisting of articles Nos. 55,14255,144, 54,874, 51,727, 55,145.
oo,142. Glass Cylinder with lid and stirrer, 4 air jackets, 2 freezing tubes, 3 filling pipettes, Figure . . 0. is. o
55.143. Platinum Stirrer, according to market price (Subject to fluctuation) . 2. o. o
54,874. Metastatic Thermometer after Walferdin, divided in 0,01 C., see Fig. 55,142 1. 10. o
55.144. Electromagnet, see Fig. 55,142 0. 15.
51,727. Metronome with electric contacts, see Fig. 55,142 1. 5.

The use of a thermopile, as the illustration shews, is only necessary when no other electric
source is available. Prices of thermopiles are given in "Electricity" Section.
55,145. Pastille Press with steel mould 1. 4.
Beckmann's Apparatus for Molecular Weight Determination by the Ebullition Method,

Fig. 55,146, also in improved pattern (Ztschr. fur phys. Chemie, 21, p. 245; W. u. E.
phys. Prakt., Fig. 109), for solvents with a boiling point to about 130 C., comprising
articles Nos. 55,14655,148, 54,874.
r)j,14(i. Boiling Tube with internal cooler and ground-on stopper, 2 air jackets with mica slab, stand on tripod
with clamp, sleeve, ring with asbestos wire net, Figure 1. 0.
55.147. Micro Gas Burner, see Fig. 55,146 0. 6.
54,874. Metastatic Thermometer after Walferdin, divided in 0.01 C., see Fig. 55,146 1. 10.
55.148. Platinum Tetrahedron, according to market value; about 8 10 g platinum tetrahedron is necessary, Price
see Fig. 55,146 on appli-
cation
55,148 a. Reduction Table for Gas Volumes measured wet, after Friedr. C. G. Miiller (Ztschr.
f. d. phys. u. chem. U., 23, 1910, p. 354), magnified five-fold 1. 8.
Cl. 1829, 1830.

616 Specific Heat. No. 55 149
55152. 1 = 11. 55 151 B. 1:5. 55 151 C. 1:5.
s. d.
Specific Heat. Calorimetry. Determination of Calorific Value.

55.149. Apparatus after Tyndall for Shewing the Relative Magnitude of Specific Heat of Dif-
ferent Metals, (W. D., Fig. 385 [365]; M. P., Ill, Fig. 97 [II, 2, Fig. 175]),
Figure
with five metal spheres of iron, zinc, copper, bismuth and lead, tripod and six paraffin
slabs 0.12.0
55.150.
- - i (1 e in, after Kolbe, Figure, with device for scraping the spheres, heating
vessel, tripod and glass cylinder with vaseline mixture for catching the heated spheres
of iron, zinc, copper, bismuth and brass (Ztschr. f. d. phys. u. chem. V., 14, 1901,
1. -2.0
page 160)
55.151. Apparatus for Specific Heat, after Schoentje-s, Figs. A, B and C (Ztschr. f. d. phys.
u. chem. U., 14, 1901, p. 31) . . . 3. 5.
four parts: a gas burner, a easting mould for paraffin slabs, Fig. A;
The apparatus comprises
a heating vessel, Fig. B; and tin; main part a stand and a frame with four cylinders (of the same
weight), of iron, brass, tin and lead, which are of the same external diameter and the same height
and which are fastened on sliding rods, Fig. C.
After the cylinders have been sufficiently heated in the bath. Fig. B, the frame is placed on the
stand in which ft paraffin slali has been fixed'; the cylinder- arc then allowed to fall simultaneously
on the slab by releasing a catch. The four cylinders then sink into the slab to different depths in
proportion to their specific heat (see Fig. C).
:>.">. 1 Ice Calorimeter after Lavoisier and Laplace,

.")!'. Figure (M. P., Ill, Fig. 99 [II, 2,
Fig. 177]; Gan.-Eein., Fig. 426; M. T., p. 151)
2. 0.
-,:,,! 53. _ idem, after Bunsen, Figure (M. P., Ill, Fig. 101 [II, 2, Fig. 179]; Gan.-
1. Mi.
.Man., Fig. 528; Gan.-Eein., Fig. 427)
Cl. 1833, 1334, 1836,
1833, 1835,1837.
N.I. :,5164. Calorimeters. 617
55 157. 1 : 4. 55 158. 1 : 2.
55.154. Ice Calorimeter after Eeichert, F i

g u re ,
for lecture purposes (Fr. phys. Techn., '
8. d.
I, 2, Fig. 3091 [I, Fig. 391]) 0.15.0
55.155. Heating Apparatus for Calorimetric Experiments, after Eegnault (M. P., Ill, Fig. 104
[II, 2, Fig. 182]; Gan.-Eein., Fig. 428), with tripod and burner 1. 0.0
55.156.
- -
idem, after Pfaundler, Figure (W. u. E. phys. Prakt,, Fig. Ill) .... 1. 0.0
55.157. Heating Apparatus after Pettersson, Figure, of copper (W. u. E. phys. Prakt.,
Fig. 112) 1.13.0
.Vi.l58. - -
idem, after Neumann (Neumann's Tap), with thermometer, Figure (M. P.,
Ill, Fig. 114 [II, 2, Fig. 192]; W. u. E. phys. Prakt., Fig. 113), very neatly constructed
of brass 3.12.0
.
Metallic Bodies after Bebenstorff, for determining Specific Heat and proving Dulong und
Petit' s Law, calibrated to 10 grammes atomic weight.
Material Zinc Aluminium Magnesium Tin Cadmium
List No. 55,159 55,160 55,161 55,162 55,163
0. 8. 0. 11. 1. 0. 0. 14. 1. 10.
."i5,l<>4. Semi-cylindrically bent Plates with eyes, of lead, copper and iron, with boiling flask
for 1 kg mercury, for determining Specific Heat by the Mixing Method (M. T., p. 148) 0. 12. .0
Cl. 1839, 1840, 1841,

1842, 1843.
55 170.
8. d.
55.165. Calorimeter Vessel after Friedr. C. G. Miiller (M. T., Fig. 98), capacity 1.2 litres 0. 10.
1
55.166. --idem, / t litre capacity 0. 8.0
55.167. Calorimeter after Weinhold, Figs. A and B (W. D., Figs. 386 and 387 [366 and 367]),
with heating vessel, double-walled measuring vessel and cylindrical test piece 1 /2 kg
weight for determining the specific heat of a metal, the latent heat of melting of ice,
and - - in conjunction with No. 55,168 - - the latent heat of vaporisation of water . 0.18.0
55.168. Water Trap for No. 55,167, for keeping the water of condensation from the calori-
meter in the experiment on the latent heat of vaporisation (W. D., Fig. 389 [369]) . 0. ;:. u
55,160. Water Calorimeter, Figure, for determining Specific Heats by the Mixing Method,
with thermometer divided in 0.2 1. !.(>
55,170. Double Calorimeter, Figure, for rapidly comparing the specific heat of two bodies,
with two test pieces of brass and lead of the same weight, two thermometers and steam-
heating vessel for two bodies 2. 8.0
.">r. 171. 3 Test Pieces of Copper, Iron and Zinc, of same weight 0.18.0
.V>. 171'. Calorimeter after Wiedeniann and Ebert, with wood block, stirrer, double-walled
sheathing vessel and cover (\V. u. E. phys. Prakt., Fig. 114) 1. LM)
.V>.17:!. Calorimeter after B^gnault, Figure, with two thermometers divided in 0.5, for
solids and liquids (M. I'., Ill, Figs. Ill and 112 [II, 2, Figs. 189 and 190]) .... 4. 4.0
Cl. IS 14,
1815, 1846, 1853,
5783, 1848.
No. 65178. Calorimeters. 619
55 177. 1 : 10.
55 175. 1 = 9. 55 176. 1 : 8.
55.174. Mercury Calorimeter after Favre and Silbermann, Figure (M. P., Ill, Fig. 119 s. d.
[II, 2, Fig. 197]), on polished oak stand; all metal parts of iron and heavily nickelled.
Glass bulb 130 mm diameter, embedded in insulating material; capillary in front of
a millimetre ssale 500 mm
long; with two retorts but without mercury 4. 0.0
55.175. Calorimeter for Liquids after Wiedemann, Figure, consisting of a double-walled

heating vessel with iron cylinder for taking mercury; with steel cock and, underneath
same, a flat, hollow metal screen for holding off the heat rays; double-walled calori-
meter with lateral thermometer, fixed on a slider movable in the base of the apparatus
(Fr. phys. Techn., I, 2, Fig. 3074) 7. 0.0
55,176. Calorimeter for Liquids, Figure, after Eegnault, for determining specific heat by
the mixing method . . . 12.10.0
55.177. Calorimeter for Liquids, after Kopp, Figure

(W. u. E. phys. Prakt., Fig. 194)
One filling vessel with wire holder, six glass vessels (long necked) for the liquids, one small
2. 8.0
base for same for holding when weighing; one calorimeter vessel of brass with wood block and stirrer,
one iron mercury-vessel with wire triangle and glass stirrer, one double-walled sheathing vessel of
brass with cardboard lid, one stand with two holders and one ring, and one thermometer.
55.178. Calorifere after Andrews, modified by Pfaundler, Figure

(M. P., Ill, Fig. 118
[II, 2, Fig. 196]; W. u. E. phys. Prakt., Fig. 115) 0. 15.
The bulb is 44 mm diameter and holds 606 g mercury; the space between the two marks m
and m' holds 6,8 g mercury.
Cl. 1851, 1853,
1819, 4502.
55 179. 1 : 0. 55 181. 1 : 15.
55182. 1:14. 55 183. 1:10.
d
55.179. Calorimeter after Dulong and Petit, for the radiation method, Figure (.M. P.,
s - -
III, Fig. 124 [II, 2, Fig. 201]; W. u. E. phys. Prakt,, Fig. 117), with niekelled radi-
ation vessel ;ind thermometer 1.1 2.
55.180. Calorimeter after Weinhold, for high temperatures (M. P., Ill, Figs. H'7 and 128
[II, -, Fi.u>. -<i:; and -01]), arranged for tipping hack, with iron bulb 4. 4.
Calorimeters (Water Pyrometers) after Siemens and after Fiseher: see items Nos. 54,948
and 54,949, page 587.
Cl. 1854, 1856,
1857. 3!>53.
No. 55 187. Calorimeters. 631
'55185. 1:8. 55 187. 1 = 6.
55.181. Apparatus after De la Eoche and Be"rard, Figure, for determining the Specific
s. d.
Heat of Gases at Constant Pressure (M. P., Ill, Fig. 129 [II, 2, Fig. 205]) 12. 0.0
55.182. Gas Calorimeter after Be'gnault, for the same purpose, Figure (M. P., Ill, Figs. 130
and 131 [II, 2, Figs. 206/7]; Gan.-Kein., Fig. 433) 15. 0.0
55.183. Calorimeter after Eilhard Wiedemann, for determining the Specific Heat of Gases at
constant Pressure, Figure (Pogg. Ann. d. Phys. u. Chemie, Vol. 157, 1876, p. 1;
.M. P., Ill, Fig. 132 [II, 2, Fig. 208]) 17.10.0
Theillustration includes only the Heating Apparatus with Water Bath and the Calorimeter.
The following pertain to the complete apparatus: 1 flask with rubber ball, 1 water flask with tube and
lead pipe, 1 large glass flask. -2 manometers, thermometer screen with thermometer. The heating bath
has a stirring device, 1 thermometer and 1 burner; while the calorimeter vessel contains a measuring
vessel with three small silver cylinders, filled with silver turnings.
Given in is one thermometer divided in Vio" C.
55.184. Pendulum Clock with electric 1 / 4 -minute contact, for calorimetric work, mounted
open, at same time serving as model of a pendulum clock, see Fig. 52,428, p. 333 . 3. 0.0
Chronoscopes: see p. 248.
.">.">. I S5. Apparatus after Clement and De"sonues, Figure, for determining the Specific Heat
of Gases at Constant Volume (M. P., Ill, Fig. 133 [II, 2, Fig. 209]), also for shewing the
temperature change on the expansion and contraction of gases (W. D., Fig. 416 [392]) 1.16.0
.">."). isii. Calorimeter after Brix, for determining Heat of Vaporisation, Figure (M. P., Ill,
Fig. 371 [II, 2, Fig. 227]) 1. 10.
55,187. Calorimeter after Schiff, for determining Heat of Vaporisation, Figure, with thermo-
meter, flask, stand, tripod, and wire netting (W. u. E., phys. Prakt., Fig. 124) ... 4. 0.
Cl. 1858, 1859, 1860.

622 Specific Heat. Determination of Calorific Value. No. 55 188
55 188. 1 : 5. 55 189. 1 : 6.
55 192. 1 : 7. 55 191. 1 : 6. 55 193. 1 : 7.
55,188. Berthelot's Apparatus for determination of the total Heat of Steam, F i g u r e (M. P., * s <'
III, Fig. 370 [II, 2, Fig. 226]; Gan.-Man., Fig. 530; Gan.-Eein., Fig. 435) 3. 0.
- - 220 without
.").">. 1 89. idem, electrically heated, Figure, for connecting up to 65 volts,
current regulator 4. 4.
Current Regulator: (a) for 65 V., 1.16.0; (b) for 110 V. 2.6.0; (c) for 220 V., 3.6.0.
55,190. Apparatus for determining Calorific Value of Hydrogen (Calorimeter) after Friedr. C.
G. Miiller (M. T., p. 148 and Fig. 245 on p. 351), consisting of an apparatus for t1u>
Synthesis of Water o. 1C.
55,191. Demonstration Calorimeter after Friedr. C. G. Miiller, Figure, for determining

the Calorific Value of solid fuels such as charcoal, lignite, wood (M. T., Fig. 106), of
glass 0. 14.
Cl. 1861, 3888,

18G2, 5405, 5018.
No. 55 199. Calorimeters for Calorific Value Determinations. 623
55 199. 1 : 3.
E5 194, 55 195, 55 197. 1 :
55.192. Calorimeter after Favre and Silbermann, for determining the Heat of Combustion
s. d.
of solid and liquid fuels at constant pressure, Figure

(M. P., Ill, Figs. 377/80 [II, 2,
Fig. 231]) 11. 0.
The apparatus consists of a double-walled outer vessel with cock, which is filled with water. In
this vessel is contained, insulated by a cork, the calorimeter vessel, which likewise should be filled
with water. The combustion vessel is freely suspended in a calorimeter vessel. The combustion vessel
possesses a gas lead, an oxygen lead, and a tube with spiral for carrying off the gases of combustion.
In the combustion vessel it is possible to suspend one Platinum Crucible, with sieve bottom for burning
coal, one Porcelain Crucible for burning sulphur, and one small Flask for the combustion of liquids;
these three items are supplied with the apparatus. The combustion vessel is closed by a glass above
which is a mirror for observing the process of combustion. All metal parts of brass.
55.193. Demonstration Calorimeter after Eumford, Figure, for determining the Calorific
Value of liquid fuels (Fr. phys. Techn., I, 2, Fig. 3158) 2. 4.
55.194. Calorimeter after Parr, Figure, for technical Calorific Value determinations of
fuels, with Sieve, Eeagent Flask with rubber stopper, Measuring Beaker, 12 small
Ignition Eods, Tongs, Magnifier with stem, Spanner, and high-grade Thermometer
divided in Vso C. Price without motor or driving stand 10. 0.
The calorimeter supplies a convenient, cheap, reliable and indispensable means for officials and
manufacturers for carrying out comparative determinations of the value of fuels (lignite, coal, coke, etc.)
employed. An experiment, including the necessary weighings, occupies but half an hour. In this appa-
ratus high pressure is neither used nor is it produced in the reaction, as a chemical auxiliary reagent
gives the necessary oxygen for the combustion and, on the other hand, binds the products of combustion.
Complete description and instructions for use gladly sent on application.
Accessories for the Parr Calorimeter: see Nos. 55,195 et seq.
55.195. Electric Motor for 110 Volts D. C., with driving stand, see Fig. 55,194 . . . 3. 10.
If type of current or voltage differ from above, prices vary accordingly.
55.196. Turbine after Eabe, with driving stand, for connecting to the water lead . . 1. 5.
55.197. Spare Cartridge (Reaction Vessel), see Fig. 55,194 1. 11.
55,198. Spare Thermometer, divided in 0.02 C., with value for water given 1. 10.
51,546. Chemico-technical Balance in glazed walnut case, with arrestment and levelling screws, sensitivity
1 mg, to carry 20 g, cf. Fig. 51,548, p. 234 2. 0.
Set Of Weights, from 1 mg to 20 g, of brass, gilt 1. 0.
55,199. Steel Cylinder for Calorimetric Experiments, after Dr. Koneck, Figure 2. 0.
Cl. 1863, 3420 a.
151,622.
624 Technical Calorimeters. No. 55 200
55200 55211. 1:15 55 211. 1 : 5. 55204,55212. 1:15.
55.200. Calorimeter after Junkers, Figure, for technical Calorific Value Determinations of s. d.
Gases and, in connection with auxiliary outfit No. 55,213, for calorific value determina-
tions of Liquids, of copper and brass, carefully nickelled, with gas burner 17. 0.
For Accessories see Nos. 55,201 55,213.
The apparatus works continuously

(since combustion is continuous), and even in the open air
and, in view of the fact that a steady flow of water is used which carries from the instrument in each
moment as much heat as is conducted into it. Two thermometer readings and the determination of
gas and water volume suffice for estimating the calorific value. This can be done even by the unskilled
and with an accuracy which attains, if not surpasses, the best of the scientific methods used up to now.
The calorimeter consists essentially of a special tube boiler which, while very compactly constructed
allows the flame sufficient room to expand and permits of complete combustion, while at the same time
it effects very energetic cooling of the gases in such a way that the heat is entirely taken up by the
water current. At the same time sufficient draught is produced. The regularity of the water flow is
secured by a special arrangement serving to keep the pressure of the water perfectly constant. A
cock permits of adjusting the strength of the water flow and consequently of varying the temperature
of eduction. By means of a throttle valve fitted in the flue it is possible to regulate the quantity
of air necessary for combustion.
In order to avoid the absorption and emission of heat at the surroundings, the calorimeter is
covered by a well-polished nickelled jacket. Between the two is a still stratum of air. Thermal trans-
mission is therefore reduced to the lowest minimum and can even be avoided altogether by making
the mean temperature of the instrument equal the room-temperature, which can easily be done by
the regulating cock mentioned above. After the calorimeter is started, the water placed in it and the
burner introduced, the steady state is attained in a few minutes and the measurements can be proceeded
with.
55.201. 2 Thermometers for to + 50 C., divided in >/ 10 Each 0.7.6 0. 15. .
55.202. 2 Magnifiers for reading Each 0. 7. 6 0. 15.
55.203. Case for the Calorimeter, very neat pattern 1. '2.
55.204. Gas Meter for 3 litres. Figs. 55,200 and 55,204 4. 16.
55.205. 2 Thermometers for to + 50 ('., divided in whole degrees Eacli 0.2.6 0. 5.
55.206. Cylindrical Glass Measure for 2000 ccm, graduated every 20 ccm, for measuring the eduction water 0. 7.
55.207. idem, for 100 ccm, divided in ]

/i ccm, for measuring the condensing water 0. -2.
55.208. Case for the Gas Meter 0. 17.
55,2O!I. 4 Rubber Stoppers fur inserting the thermometer i). 1.
55,21(1. 5 m Rubber Tubing 0. 7.
.V,.:MI. Gas Pressure Governor, of bra.-, finely niekelled. with reservoir. Figure, with (i l.rass plates and
1 extra valve 2. I.'.,
.V>.-M_! Gas-Meter Calibrating Device, !'!. 204, for 1 litre calibration-volume, consisting of calibration
.">">. fla-k.
liras.- stand, nicely nieUelled. and water vessel, without gas-meter 3. 15.
.>.-).213. Auxiliary Outfit for Calorific Value determinations of liquid fuels. Figure 8. H.
The outfit consists of a Precision Balance, 1 Carburetting Lamp for liquid fuel- and 1 extra Burner
Head for spirit.
Cl. 1SU4, 18(15. 1866.

No. 55217. Calorimetry. 625
55213. 1:15.
55 217. 1 : 8. 55 214. 1 : 10.
55,214. Calorimeter after Bertholet-Mahler, improved by Kroeker, Figure, for calori- s. d.
nictric determinations by means of a combustion bomb, for Technical Purposes . . . 24. 15.
Liable to
alteration
consists of a steel bomb 300 com content, enamelled inside, polished and nickcllcd
The apparatus
owing to
outside, with insulated platinum pole and platinum tube carried to the bottom of the bomb; Stirrer fluctuating
arranged for hand and motor drive; a nickelled Water Vessel with oak insulating jacket and thermo- price of
meter holder; a Thermometer divided in Vso C.; a Manometer on stand with parts for connecting platinum
to the bomb and to the oxygen cylinder; a Steel Mould for making coal briquettes; a Support for the
Bomb for use while screwing down the lid; a Clay Capsule; various spanners; a Valve Adjusting
Pin ;
Ignition Wire and spare Lead Packing Rings.
The bomb is filled with oxygen from a steel cylinder; this should be ordered separately if not
available.
-- Use
55,215. idem, for Scientific 38. 10.
Liable to
This apparatus differs from the preceding in that the inner surface of the bomb lid is coated with alteration
owing to
platinum iind that the valve points are of platinum-indium. Instead of the clay capsule there is a fluctuating
Platinum Crucible with platinum holder and clamping screw. The insulating vessel consists of ;i
price of
double-walled copper jacket and should be filled with water at room temperature. The thermometer platinum
is divided in
Vioo" C., is provided with a Test Certificate from the Physikalisch-Technische Reichs-
anstalt, and has a magnifier for reading.
55,2 1<. Apparatus for determining the Generation of Heat by the simple Mixing of different
1
Liquids, after Bussy and Buignet, Figure, with thermometer divided in 0.2 C . . 3. 15.
>5,217. Apparatus for determining the Heat of Neutralisation on mixing Acids and Bases,
Figure (W. u. E., phys. Prakt., Fig. 126) 1. 4.
Cl. 1867, 1863,

1869, 41G3. 40
626 Heat and Work. X(,. .-._> (US
55 218. 1 : 9.
55 220. 1 : 9. 55 221. 1 : 3.
d.
Heat and Work. s.
52.048. Apparatus for boiling Water, Alcohol or Ether by Friction; for the whirling table (W.
D., Fig. 417 [393]; Gan.-Eein., Fig. 451) 0. 5.
- - i d
with arrangement in order to enable the
e wine to be ignited,
52.049. m, spirit of
Fig. 52,049, p. 285 0. >. o
55,185. Apparatus for showing Temperature-change on Expansion and Contraction of Gases,

Fig. 55,185, p. 621 (W. D., Fig. 416 [392]), and for determining the specific heat of --uses
at constant volume 1. K'.. u
55,218. Apparatus for showing the Temperature-change on the Compression and Expansion
Of Gases, after Tyndall, (Tyndall, Die Warme [Heat], Fig. (i, p. IcS; Gan.-
Figure
Man., Fig. 546; Gan.-Eein., Fig. 464) 2.10.0
1 st Experiment. Air at the temperature of the surrounding space compressed in the vessel some
hours previous to the experiment shows a cooling effect whan flowing against a thermocouple.
2nd Experiment. If air which has just been compressed in the flask and thereby become heated
is allowed to flow against a thermopile, the latter indicates heat; on repeating this a number of times
this heat is exhausted and the galvanometer pointer finally shows cold.
55.220. Apparatus after Favre and Silbermann, for showing Heating of the Air on Compression
and Cooling on Expansion, Figure, with .sensitive spiral thermometer (M. P., Ill,
Fig. 400 [II, 2, Fig. 248]) (i. Hi.
A pointer is suspended on a Breguet platinum-silver spiral, above a graduation, in a glass vessel

which is in direct communication with the pump cylinder (ef. Pig. 54.SIH1. p. 581). This sensitive
thermometer shows the increase of temperature ensuing when the air is compressed by pressing down
the piston, and, inversely, the lowering of the temperature on rarifying.
55.221. Apparatus after Behrendsen for the same purpose, Figure, with stoprock and
base for setting up on the air pump 1- I.
A thermocouple is contained in the upper part of the apparatus, its ends leading to two terminals
tor the galvanometer lead-.
55.222. Pneumatic Fire Syringe, of metal, Figure (Gan.-Man., Kig. 5-15; Gan.-Atk..
Fig. 452) 0. 7.
55,22.".. -idem,of glass. Figure ,

0.16.0
is constmete:! in such mn-incr tli.it the luminous phenomena occurrim; on ignition
The syringe
can plainly be seen through the glass. To make the experiment, the syringe should be pressed firmly
against the wall of lecture table with the left hand and the piston pressed in smartly with the light
hand, being drawn out immcdiat-ly so that the tinder continues to smoulder. The slow match must
be quite dry and hav'e been previously ignited and extinguished once.
55.22-1. Apparatus for showing the Action of Gunpowder, after Friedr. 0. (i. Miiller (Ztsrhr.
ph.ys. 11. di.Mii. U., 2, p. 170; M. T., Fig. 89)

f. d. 0. 1".
Cl. 1871, 1873. 1874.

\,.. .-,:, i'.'T. Heat on Compression. Mechanical Equivalent of Heat. 627
55 222. 1:4. 55 223. 1 : 4. 55 226. 1 : 9.
55225. 1:7. 55 227. 1 : 10.
s. d.
55.L'L'5. Gore's Ball, Figure, rotating by heat (Eisenlohr, p. 532) 1.14.0

The ball, 30 mm diameter, is solid so as to ensure good contact. If the ball and the track are
well polished the experiment acts very well with an accumulator cell or a good Bunsen cell.
53,199. Trevelyan's Rocker: see Pig. 53,199, p. 420 0. 15.
For other patterns, see Xos. 53,200/1, p. 420.
.").:, 050. Apparatus after Puluj, for determining the Mechanical Equivalent of Heat; for placing
on the whirling table, F i g. 52,050 p. 285 5. 5.0
52.051. -- idem, with Whirling Table No. 51,949 7. 0.0
55.226. - - id e m, with large Driving Stand, Figure, and with thermometer divided in
V 10 (W. D., Figs. 418 421 [394397]; M. P., Ill, Fig. 406 [II, 2, Fig. 254]) . . . 9. 0.0
The inner cone
completely insulated by ivory. The type of instrument is excellent, and the
is
experiment can be carried out with great accuracy. The driving stand can be used as a whirling table
on removing the device for Puluj 's experiment.
Km Patterns with Electric Motor drive, also Accessories for same, see under Nos. 52,052
52.055 and the illustrations on p. 286.
55.227. Apparatus after Grimsehl, for Determining the Mechanical Equivalent of Heat, F i-
g u r e, witli manometer, which serves as an air thermometer (/tsehr. f. d. phys. u. chem. '
I"., 16, 1903, p. 290), with cramps for screwing to the lecture table 3. 10.
f.'l. 1013, 1014, 4102,

1877,3861. 40*
628 Heat and Work. No. ">."> 228
55 232 B. l . lo. 55 232 A. 1:15.

CI. 3420*. 1886.
S230,
1880, 4204.
. 55242. Mechanical Equivalent of Heat. Heat Engines. 629
55 241. 1 : 4.
52,228. Apparatus after Christiansen for determining the Mechanical Equivalent of Heat,
(1
F i g u r e (M. P., Ill, Fig. 407 [II, 2, Fig. 255]; W. u. E. phys. Prakt., Fig. 121), with
110 volt D. C. motor, the accuracy of the apparatus is about 1% 16. 0.0
55,230. Apparatus after Callendar, Figure, for determining the Mechanical Equivalent
1
Of Heat, driven by a 110 volt D. C. Motor. Including motor 16. 0.
The work of friction is generated by loaded silk brake bands laid round a rotating cylinder of thin
luass filled with a certain quantity of water. The heat is measured by a thermometer introduced
through a central aperture into one of the cylinder bases. The number of revolutions is indicated
by a speed connter. Thermal loss can be eliminated by Rumford's compensation method by two
measurements with different load. The lecturer can obtain values accurate to approx. */s% in the
presence of the audience within 10 minutes.
.V>. 231. -- idem, for working by hand, without motor 12.10.0
.V..232. Apparatus after Joule, Figs. A and B, for determining the Mechanical Equivalent
Of Heat (M. P., Ill, Figs. 404/5 [II, 2, Figs. 252/3]; Gan.-Man., Fig. 517; Gan.-Bein.,
Fig. 462), with Wood Stand and vertical rules |l6. 0.0
Heat Engines.
Hot Air Engines with Ribbed Cooler. F i g. 55,234.
List Xo. 55,233 55,234 55,235 55,236 55,237 55,238 55,239 55,240
Piston Diamr., . mm 30 40
Flywheel Diamr., mm 118
Efficiency ... HP V, M
(a) Spirit-heated . 1. 16.
(b) Gas-heated t . .
(c) Petroleum-heated
630 Heat and Work. No. .V, -Jl.'!
55 249. 1 : 5. 55 250. 1 : 6. 55 251. 1 : 7.
.v>,:M.'3. Gas Engine No. 55,242 with Dynamo, mounted on one baseplate, Figure, with
glow lamp on stand -!. o. <>
The generator pves -2

amps, at 12 volts.
r.U<)l. Steam Reaction Wheel (Heron's Rotating Sphere), of glass, in iron stand, Fig. 53,101.
p. 407 0. 5.
:..; loi>. Steam Reaction Wheel, <>r 407 o. ll.it

entirely metal, Fig. 53,loi>, p.
:..VJ14. Aeolipile, \vitli safety valve (Fr. phys. Teehn., I, 2, Fig. 3668) 0. 1S.O
.V>.L' 15. Model Geyser after Wiedemann, Figure

:i|>]iar!ilns >h<i\\> t hr ]ilic-nomena of the throwing >i]>
of liol water and steam.
Cl. 1888, 1883,
3810,
1
1882, 34'21, IJ'i-. .

No. Heat Engines. 631
55 253. 1 : 7.
55 254. 1 : 4. 55 255. 1 : 6.
55.246. Apparatus for demonstrating the Geyser, after Tyndall, (Tyndall, Die Figure s. d.
Warme [Heat], 4 th Edn., 1894, Fig. 54), for gas heating 2.16.0
The apparatus is heated by placing a Bunsen burner underneath and by the gas ring given
with the apparatus, and shows an eruption about every minute.
55.247. Steam Piston, for showing the action of Water Vapour, of glass, with holder . . . 0. 3.0
55.249.
-- idem, Figure, of Metal, with handle 0. 8.0
- - d
55.250. i e in, larger, Figure, of glass, with metal mounts and handle, on stand 1. 4.0
55.251. Sectional Model of a Steam Engine Cylinder, Figure, with Slide Valve gearing,
large type, of Metal 2. 4.0
55.252. Sectional Model of a Steam Engine Cylinder, Figure, with flywheel, entirely of
metal, cylinder bore 36 mm, length 80 mm 2. 2.0
- - d
.">"). 253. i e in, Figure, with governor and throttle valve 4. 4.0
#55,254. Sectional Model of a Steam Cylinder, Figure, transparent, for projection . . . 2. 6.0
The path of the steam can be demonstrated by blowing in some cigar smoke.
55,255. Sectional Model of an Oscillating Steam Engine Cylinder, Figure, movable, of

wood and iron 4.16.0
* Can be used with the projection apparatus. Cl. 1890,4200,
305, 3957.
632 Heat and Work. NIL .'.:. _ ifl
55257. 1:10.
55 262. 55 263. 1
s. d.
:.:. LT(>. Sectional Model of a Cylinder with simple Slide Valve, F i g u r e, of wood 5. 0.
.V>._':>6 a. - - (1 c in,
i of iron, smaller, about 3 /s the si/e ,
8. 0.
::.. -':>7. -
idem, with Farcot Slide Valve, F i
$ \\ r e, of wood 7. 0. (
V..258. - - i d e m, of iron, smaller, about

:!
. the si/e 12. 0. d
55,2f>!t.
- - i d <
MI, with Meyer Compound Slide Valve, F i <r u r e, of wood . . . .
7. 0.
3 12. 0.
55,260. --idem, of iron, smaller, about /5 the size ,
:>:>._'<>!. -- idem, with Rider Slide Valve, Figure, of iron 12. d.
- - d e m, with Woolf Slide Valve, F <r u i i e. of wood , . . 6. 0. U

55,262. i ,
55,262 ;i.
- - i d e m, of iron, smaller, about 3 / 5 the si/,e 8. 0.
55,268. idem, different -pattern, Figure, of iron

(I
!>. 0. (I
6217,
4899, IN'.i.l.
BM1,
3691, 1884
No. 55 -Ji;!'.. Steam Engines. 633
55 264 A. 1:16. 52266. 1:7.
55264B. 1:16. 55264C. 1:16.
55 265. 1 : 5. 55 266. 1 : 4.
55.264. Sectional Model of a Steam Engine Cylinder, after Prof. Vater, Pigs. A, B ana C, large
s. d.
plainly understandable model, with adjustable advance and eccentricity, with inter-
changeable cylinder and valve parts for the ordinary three-port slide valve, Fig. A, the
double-inlet channel slide-valve, Fig. B, and the Penn slide valve with double port
"
for inlet and exhaust, Fig. C, painted in clear colours . . 15.0.
52,266. Sectional Model of a Steam Engine Cylinder with Slide Valve and Link (reverse gear
for locomotives), after Stephenson, F i g u r e, of iron (Gan.-Man., Fig. 569) .... 12.0.0
55.265. Sectional Model of a Horizontal Steam Engine, F i

g u r e, of metal, with valve gearing,
governor and throttle vavle 3. 4.
55,266. Sectional Model of a Compound Steam Engine, Figure 15.0.0

The high and low pressure cylinders, the simple slide valve motion and the receiver are repre-
sented in section.
Cl. 6037, 532,
6035,
1895, 18!W
634 Heat and Work.
55 268. 1 : 7. 55 269. 1 : 7.
55 270. 1 : 12. 55 271. 1 : 5.
8. (1.
55,268. Model of a Watt Low-pressure Engine, of metal and cardboard, movable, Figure 1. .">.>
.V..-J6J). Sectional Model of a Watt Low-pressure Steam Engine, F i g u r e, of metal; showing

in section the cylinder, valve-chest, condenser and pumps; cylinder bore 32 mm . . 11.
55,270. High Pressure Iron Boiler, Figure, after Friedr. C. G. Miiller, for 6 Atmosphere*
(M. T., p. 165), with Fletcher gas-burner, water gauge, discharge-cock, pressure-gauge.
.-upports tin In- checkI
manometer, safety valve, steam pipe cock and feed pump . . IS. 0.0
.V>.L'71. Model Steam Engine, Figure, with brass boiler. Bafetj \alve. water discharge-
cock, testing cock, steam pipe cock, water gauge, whistle, pressure-gauge and feed pump;
also with a complete sectional model of a steam cylinder. With gas burner .... 11.
Fitted, it clcMivd. uitli spirit Inirner in place of the gas burner.
01. 1897, 1880,

5836,1899.
No. ;>527S. Steam Engines. 635
55274 (55272, 55273). 1 : 8.
55275. 1:10.
s. d.
55 272. Model of a Horizontal Steam Engine, cf. Fig. 55 272, without boiler 9. 0.
Dimensions: piston diam. 40 mm; stroke 60 mm; flywheel diam. 330 mm; length, breadth and
height of the entire engine 660 x 310 x 340 mm.
55,273. Boiler for above, of Copper, with Safety Valve, pressure-gauge, water gauge, test cocks,
check valve, whistle; can be heated with gas or spirit; length 500 mm, diam. 220 mm,
cf. Fig. 55,272 10. 0.
.">:>. 274. Steam Engine No. 55,272, with Boiler No. 55,273, both built on to one baseboard,
Figure 20. 0.
r>.">,275. Horizontal Steam Engine, Vio HP, with Cylindrical Boiler and Dynamo, Figure 30. 0.
The. illustration shows a single tube boiler. Instead of this,however, a simple cylindrical boiler
is supplied. Size of boiler: length 600mm, diam. 220mm. Dimensions of engine: piston diam. 55 mm,
flywheel diam. 400 mm. Output of dynamo: 2 amps, at 10 volts.
Ci. 1900,
1901.
636 Heat and Work.
55 276. 1 : 9.
55 277. l : 0. 55278. 1:10.
s
55,276. Watt's Low-pressure Engine with Condenser, Figure, with Boiler No. 55,273;
'
piston diam. 40 mm; stroke 80 mm; flywheel diam. 315 mm 50.0.0

Steam cylinder, condenser cylinder and pump bodies are of glass: the valve gearing is also arranged
under glass so that all processes can be observed when the engine is working.
The engine has simple valve gearing, Watt's parallelogram, cold water pump for keeping the
water in a reservoir at constant level, condenser, hot water pump for emptying the condenser, feed
pump for the boiler, and flywheel.
.Vi.L'77. Model Of a Thornycroft Boiler, Figure, entirely of copper, with manometer for
'/> atin., safety valve, and pipe union -40.0.0
In order to observe the process of boiling, the steam space is closed in on both front sides by wired
Heating is effected by 4 Fletcher IIUIIH-I-.
55,278. Model of a Diirr Boiler, Figure, entirely of copper, with manometer for
'
., atin..
safety valve and pipe union
With front sides of the steam space cln-ed by glass and Fletcher burner ten heatin.i;.
(1. 8124,
1909, 1910
Steam Engines. 637
55 282. 1 : 6. 55 285. 1 : 7.
55 288. 1 : 3.
s. d.
">, i'7!t. Sectional Model of Locomotive, F g

i u i
c, movable, with reversing gear 1. 5.0
55.281. Locomotivo with valve gear, brass boiler, running in one direction only. Length 370 mm,
height 230 nun, construction similar to Fig. 55,282 7. 0.0
55.282. Locomotive, F g u r e, with Reversing Gear, running backwards and forwards, with
i
brass boiler, 2 safety valves, water gauge, whistle and cocks; for spirit fuel .... 15. 0.
Dimensions: diain. of driving wheel 100 mm. Size of entire engine 520 x 180 x 370 mm.
55.283. Locomotive Chassis, Figure, with cylinder and valve-chest in section, same size
as loco. Xo. 55,282 12. 0.
55.284. Piston Rod in oscillating cylinder 7. 10.
55.285. Watt's Governor, Figure . . 6. 0.0
Watt's Pendulum, Flywheel Governor and Throttle Valve: sec Nos. 51,982 and 51,983,
p. 281, No. 55,253, p. 631 and 55,265, p. 633.
55.286. Parabolic Governor after Farcot 8. 15.
55.287. Ring Governor 7.15.0
55.288. Section Model of an Injector after Giffard, of bronze, Figure . . 5. 0.0

Cl. 1911, 1910.
1912, 1904,
3692.
638 Propagation of Heat. Xn. .V. 289
55 291. 1 : 3.
55 289. 1 : 8.
55 292. 1 : 8.
55 294. 1 : 5.
55 290. 1 : 5. 55 293. 1 : 8. 55 295. 1 : 7.
I s. d.
Propagation of Heat.
55,289. Apparatus for demonstrating Thermal Conduction in Metal Rods, after Ingenhouss,
Figure (W. D., Fig. 379 [359]; Gan.-Eein., Fig. 390), with rods of copper, brass,
zinc, tin, iron and lead, coated with silver mercury iodide i. o.o
The having a beautiful yellow colour in the cold state,
paint, becomes brown when heated,
resuming, however, its yellow colour some time after cooling.
">, 290. - -
idem, with vertical Rules, Figure 1. 2.0
* 55. -Jill. - -
idem, smaller, Figure, with 5 rods to which metal rings are stuck on with
wax, for lantern projection (Fr. phys. Techn., I, 2, Fig. 3861) .......... 0. 12.
55,:_'92. Apparatus after Miihlenbein, with Bunsen Burner, Figure, with bars, arranged
star-shape. of brass, zinc, tin, iron, German silver and wood, painted with silver mercury
iodide; they ;m- heated from the centre (Fr. phys. Techn., I, 2, Fii, .'5*64) r
. .... 1. 10.0
- - d e
.V>.293. i
in, with Spirit Burner, cf. Fig. 55,293 (Fr. phys. Techn., I, 2, Fig. 3865) . 1. 10.
55.294. Apparatus for showing the Conduction of Heat in Metal Rods, F i g u r e, after Rebens-
torff, for steam heating (W. I)., p. 568 [527]; Ztschr. f. d. phys. u. ehein. I'.. 21. 1908,
p. 297), with rods of copper, brass, zinc, tin, iron and lead, coated on one side with
mercury copper iodide (red) and on the other witli mercury silver iodide (yellow) . . 1. I. U
.".".2 95. Apparatus for demonstrating the different Thermal Conductivity of Copper and Iron,
Figure, coated with thermoscopic paint ................... 01. 6206. 1919, 5887,
0. 12. d
* Ciin lie used with the projection ;i)>|i;ini1 us. 3693,

1916, 1918, 3691.
No. Thermal Conductivity. 639
55303.
55 301. 55 302. 1 : 5. 1 : 8.
* 55,296. Apparatus for demonstrating the different Thermal Conductivity of copper, lead and s. d.
wood, for steam heating, Figure, arranged for the projection lantern (Fr. phys.
0. 14.
Techn., I, 2, Fig. 3859)
55.297. Copper-Mercury Iodide, for experiments on thermal conduction and thermal radiation
50 grams 0. 5.6
55.298. Rods of Copper, Brass, Iron, Glass, Wood and 12 small Lead Spheres, after Friedr.
C. G. Miiller, for showing different thermal conductivities (M. T., p. 162) 0. 4.0
The spheres are attached to the rods by wax, the ends of the rods being then exposed to heat
singly or together, and the pendulum beats being observed.
5."). 299. Thermal Conduction Apparatus after Looser, with air thermoscopes (Looser, Versuche
aus der Warmelehre, 3 rd Edn., p. 131 [2 nd Edn., p. 113]; Fr. phys. Techn., I, 2, Fig. 3867),
with 8 bars and octuple thermoseope 6. 0.0
55,300. Apparatus after Wiedemann and Franz, Figure, for Thermal Conduction in Metal
Rods, with 6 Rods (M. P., Ill, p. 775 [II, 2, p. 607]; Pogg. Ann. d. Physik u. Chemie,
3 rd Series, Vol. 89, 1853, p. 501, and 4 th Series, Vol. 95, 1855, p. 337) 15. 0.0
The 6 rods consist of iron, aluminium, zinc, tin, brass and German silver. The measurement
is made in vacuo and in an air-filled space by means of a thermocouple.
* 55,301. Gypsum Slab and Heating Rod, for showing the elliptical Propagation of Heat in
Crystals, Figure (W. D., Fig. 380 [360]) 0. 5.
The small gypsum slab coated with paraffin wax is provided with a hole into which is inserted
a copper rod which can easily be heated by a flame. A pasteboard screen holds off any disturbing
light. The apparatus is used with the horizontal projection apparatus.
55,302. Apparatus for explaining unequal Thermal Conduction in Crystals, after Senarmont,
F i g u r e, with 4 pierced crystal plates, quartz ground parallel to axis, quartz perpen-
dicular to axis, calc-spar perpendicular to axis, and gypsum (Fr. phys. Techn. I, 2,
Fig. 3829) 2. 8.0
55. .',03. Wood Pyramid with Brass Tube carried through, F i g u e, for showing the difference
i-
in thermal conduction in wood in a direction along the grain and across the grain (Ztschr.
f. d. phys. u. chem. U., 21, 1908, p. 298) 0. 5.0
* Can be used with the projection apparatus Cl. 1923, 384-2,
368, 0131, 1709.
640 Propagation of Heat. No. ."..". :!04
55 311. 1 : 3 55 312. 1
55.304. Wood Cone for showing the Influence of Direction of Grain, after Eebenstorff
Figure, with stand, boiling flask, rubber tubing and glass dish (Ztschr. f. d. phys.
u. chem. TL, 21, 1908, p. 298)
0.16.0
55.305. Wire Gauze Cylinder, for demonstrating the safety lamp (M. T., pp. 162/3) ... 0. 1.
55.306. Davy's Safety Lamp (M. P., Ill, Fig. 457 [II, 2, Fig. 295]) 0. 8.0
n
55.307. Wolf's Safety Lamp, Figure, ignited from outside 0. is.
In practical use in most German coal-mines.
55.308. Apparatus after Despretz, for showing Decrease of Temperature with distance from
Thermal Source (M. P., II, 2, Fig. 297), with 7 thermometers 3. 4. o
--
55.309. idem, with 5 thermometers, Figure 2. 1 1.
* 55,310. - -
idem, with 3 thermometers 2. 8.
55.311. -- idem, smaller, for objective demonstration, with 3 thermometers, Figure, o. H'>.
55.312. Apparatus after Dcspict/.. for showing Decrease of Temperature with distance from
Thermal Source (M. P., Ill, Fig. 459 [II, 2, Fig. 297]; (Ian. -.Man.. Fig. 535; Gan.-Kcin..
Fig. 391), the rod being heated by oil or water bath. Figure, with 7 thermometers 3.12.0
V>.313. -- idem, with 5 thermometers 3. <>.
V),314. -- idem, with 3 thermometers 2.14.0
55,315. Apparatus for investigating the Thermal Conduction of Liquids, Figure, gla>>
eylim'er with differential thermosenpe and vessel for placing above this to contain the
heated liquid (Gan.-Kein., Fig. 393) ;
1. o. ()
* Can ri. 1920. .-,"77. MUI.

! used with projection apparatus.
-'
No. 53321. Thermal Conduction in Solids, Liquids and Gases. 641
* 1
55 315. 1 : 6. 55 316. 1 : 5. 55 317. 1 : 7. 5S318. 1 : 5.
55 320. 1 : 5. 55 321. 1 : 8.
d.
55,316. Tube with Heating Bulb for Thermal Conduction and Convection in liquids, after
S.
Eebenstorff, Figure, for steam heating (Ztschr. f. d. phys. "

u. chem. U., 21, 1908,
p. 298) 0. 6.0
Two bushes made of thermoscopic paper are slipped on the glass tube. In the vertical position
the difference between conduction and convection of the liquid in the tube is shown.
55,317. Apparatus for investigating the Thermal Conduction of Liquids, Figure, cylindrical
glass vessel with steam capsule, on stand (W. D., Fig. 381 B [361 B]) 0. 14.
55,318. Apparatus for thermal Conduction of Gases, after Grove, Figure (M. P., Ill,
Fig. 469 [II, 2, Fig. 306]) 0. 14.
55.319. 2 Glow Lamps after Grimsehl, one evacuated, the other filled with hydrogen, also
2 Chromothermoscope Screens, one backed with black paper and the other with tin-
foil, for showing variation in thermal conduction and convection (Grimsehl: Die elek-
trische Gliihlampe im Dienste des physikalischen Unterrichts, pp. 13 and 50) .... 0. 15.
55.320. Apparatus for thermal Conduction of Gases, after Magnus, Figure (M. P., Ill,
Fig. 470 [II, 2, Fig. 307]) ........................... 1. 8.0
55.321. --idem, Figure, fitted up more completely ............... 3. 0.0

Cl. 3423, 4148, 6203, 1926,
1927, 192S. 41
642 Thermal Conduction, etc. No. 55322 -
55 322. 1 : 3.
55 325, 55 326. 1 : 12. 55 326. 1 : 7.
55 323. 1 : 8.
53 078. 1 : 9. 53 077. 1 : 7. 55330. 1:10.
d.
55,322. Apparatus for Thermal Conduction of Gases, after Weinhold, Figure (W. D., s.
Fi. 383 [363]) ................................ 0. 8.
55,323. Apparatus for Thermal Conduction and Convection in Gases, Figure, after Bebens-
torff, on stand, tilting back on hinges, for steam heating (Ztschr. f. d. phys. u. chem.
U., 21, 1908, p. 300) ....... ........ .............. 1.10.0
The two comparison glass tubes are filled with, say, hydrogen and air. They are fitted with
conical jackets of thermoscopic paper, wound round the heating tubes. The apparatus is used suc-
cessively in a vertical and horizontal position.
53,078. Apparatus for demonstrating the Cooling Effect of Gases, Figure, after Tyndall
(Tyndall, Warine [Heat], Fig. 83), with lateral flexible tube stopcock for introducing
gases, and a cock for connecting up to the air pump, for placing on the air pump plate !
2. 0.0
55,325. Radiation Tube after Eebenstorff, F i g u r e, with 3 telescopic tube parts, a detachable
radiation cone, a slide tube of pasteboard, blackened inside (Ztschr. f. d. phys. u. chem.
U., 21, 1908, p. 303), can also be used for experiments on the propagation of air-impulses
(Fr. phys. Techn., I, 2, Fig. 3709), price exclusive of thermal source or coloured leaves d. 18.0
55,320. Thermal Supply for Radiant Heat, after Rebenstorff, Figure, consisting of a Bunsen burner with
slotted head and gauze rectangle (Ztschr. f. d. phys. u. chem. V., 21, 1908, p. 300) ........ 0. in. it
55,011. 10 Thermoscopic coloured Leaves after Eebenstorff 0. 4.0
53,077. Apparatus after Davy, Figure, for Thermal Reflection in vacuo, receiver with
two concave minors, thermometer and heating wire, for setting up on the air-pump
(Gan.-Eein., Fig. 408) 3.3.
53,750. Parabolic and Cylindrical Mirrors alter RebenstoilT, see Fig. 53,750, p. 476, for reflection
experiments (Ztschr. f. d. phys. u. chem. I'., 21, 1908, p. 302) 0.16.
Cl. 1929,
4150, 5070, 4160,
4117,3884, 6056.
No. 55341. Thermal Conduction of Gases. Thermal Radiation. 643
55 338. 1 : 6.
55 331, 55 337. 1:12. 55341. 2:3.
55,328
644 Thermal Conduction, etc. No. 55 342
55 350 A (55 351, 55.352, 55 353, 55 354, 55 355, 55 356a, 55 358, 55 361). 1 : 8.
55 342. 1 : 2. 55 343. 1 : 2. 55 345. 3 : 10. 55 349. 1 : 4.
* 55,342. Small Flat Flask for filling with Carbon Bisulphide and Iodine, Figure, for showing
s. d.
the Dark Kays (W. D., Fig. 370 [350]), without charging material, in sheet metal flask 0. 1.9
The small flask is supplied with a larger sheet iron flask in which it, is kept, after filling, pro-
tected from light or fire. The flask cannot be delivered filled and is therefore provided with stopper.
Filling must not be done near an open flame; even a glowing cigar should be avoided.
* 55,343. Spherical Flask, Figure, working as Burning Glass for Dark Bays (W. D., Fig. 371
[351]), in mount, for filling with iodine and carbon bisulphide, with Tinder Holder,
uncharged, in sheet iron bottle 0. 8.
With sunlight
or an arc lamp the flask acts as a burning glass und ignites the tinder. Kindly
observe the remarks to preceding item.
55,343 a. 1 Silvered and 1 blackened Glass Flask, for showing the dependence of absorption
and emission of heat on the nature of the surface (M. T., p. 164) (). 0.0
Cl. 1937,
Can be used with the projection apparatus.
1933. 1934.370, 1936.
No. 55357. Radiant Heat. 645
55 350 B (55 362, 55 348, 55 365, 55 366), 55 369, 55 388. 1 : 8.
55,344. Thermometer in vacuo, after Rumford, for showing the rapid propagation of Radiant s. d.
Heat through a vacuum (Gan.-Man., Fig. 537; Gan.-Rein., Fig. 400) 1. 4.0
* 55,345. Plane Parallel Vessel for alum solution, Figure, collapsible (W. D., Fig. 307 [290]) 0.12.0
The vessel consists of two plane parallel glass slabs with a piece of rubber laid between
# 55,346.
- -
idem, composed entirely of glass, 100 x 100 x 10 mm 0. 5.0
* 55,347. Device for Absorption of Heat Rays by Coloured Glasses 0.16.0

The apparatus consists of a radiometer, a flat flask with concentrated alum solution and a
number of coloured glasses in wood frames.
55.348. Apparatus for the Absorption of Heat Rays in Gases and Vapours (W. D., Fig. 372
[352]), a brass tube, closed at the ends with rock salt plates, on stand 1.12.0
55.349. Apparatus for showing that air is not heated by Thermal Rays, Figure (W. D.,
Fig. 373 [353]) 2. 4.0
A hollow brass cylinder is closed by two rock salt slabs 45 x 45 mm and 6 mm thick.
55.350. Melloni's Apparatus for Experiments on Radiation, Refraction, Absorption and Re-
flection of Heat, Figs. A
and B (M. P., 9 th Edn., II, 1, Fig. 523; Gan.-Rein., Fig. 406,
411 414, 419), without thermopile or rock salt prism 14.4.0
The apparatus comprises parts Nos. 55,35155,355, 55,356 a, 55,357, 55,358, 55,348, 55,36155,366
and 55,367. For preparations see Nos. 55,368 55,385.
55.351. The Stand, with a 2 m long rule, divided in cm, of maple and fixed to a baseboard by two pillars 2. 0.
This stand as well as the following ones can be used simultaneously as an optical bench; also
all apparatus fit the stands of optical benches 53,929 53,930, so that one frame only is necessary for
the optical bench and Melloni Apparatus.
55.352. 8 Brass Stands, arranged for clamping to the rule Each 0. 5. 6 2. 4.
55.353. Locatelli Lamp, with square wick and reflector 0. 16.
55.354. Weinhold Steam Capsule, polished on one side and blackened on the other, 95 mm diameter . . . 0. 10.
55.355. Stage with Stand, Platinum Spiral and Spirit Lamp 0. 18.
55.356. Copper Screen, blackened, for use as constant thermal source

(a) without stage or spirit lamp 0. 8.
(b) with stage and spirit lamp 0. 18.
55,357. Platinum Cap No. 55,341 with Bunsen Burner and with shank for inserting in a
stand No. 55,352 1. 6.
* Can be used witli the projection apparatus. Cl. 1938.

646 Thermal Conductivity, etc. No. 55358
*
1
55 364. 1 : 7.
55 359. 1 : 7. 55 386. 1 : 6.
55.358. Cube alter LesLe, 10 cm side, with 4 different surfaces, polished metal, dull white, dull black and . ,1.
shiny black, with Thermometer and Heating Box 0. 18.
55.359. idem, with 4 thermometers, divided in 1 / 5 Figure , 2. 4.
55.360. Cube after Leslie, with 4 polished surfaces of different metals: brass, steel, zinc and iron I. 4.
55.361. Double Screen, of sheet zinc, on hinge 0. 16.
55.362. Screen with rotary disk, with holes of different diameter 0. 18.
55,348 Brass Tube with Rock Salt Slabs, closed, without stand, Pig. 55,350 B, or
a. 1. 8.
55.364. Glass Tube, with brass mount, Figure, closed by rock salt slabs 3. 4
55.365. Holder for carrying Crystal and Gypsum Plates o 8.
55.366. Rotary Bar with divided circle and adjustable stage 1. 10. (I
55,388. Thermopile of 36 elements, arranged square, in mount with polished funnel 2. 14.
55.367. Stages for setting up Rock Salt Prisms and the like o. 4.
Galvanometer (Multiplier): see under "Electricity".

Rock Salt Prisms. List No. 55,368 55,369 55,370
Side x Height 30x40 mm
35x45 40x50
1.0.0 1.4.0 1.8.0
Rock Salt Slabs. List No. 55,371 55,372 55,373 55,374
Size mm 25x25 30x30 40x40 50x50
0.8.0 0. 10. 0. 18. 1.6.0
55.375. Plates of Alum, Borax, Sugar, Calc-spar, Agate, Crown and Flint Glass, Sal-ammoniac
Each 0. 4.
55.376. Plates of Black Glass, Citric Acid and Mica Each 0. 3.
55.377. Quartz Plates, ground perpendicular or parallel to axis, of Heavy Spar, Fluorspar
Each 0. 8.
Rock Salt Cylindrical Lenses, radius of curvature 300 mm.
List No. 55,378 55,379 55,380 55,381
Diameter mm 30 40 :><> ()
0.18.0 1.4.0 1.12.0 2.0.0

Rock Salt Lenses, bi-convex, 300 mm radius of curvature.
List No. 55,382 55,383 55,384 55,385
0.14.0 1.0.0 1.8.0 1.18.0
55,386. Melloni Pile, linear, Figure, on stand with slider and graduation and with thernm-
pilr No. .V>,392 12. 0.
Thermopiles, Figure, arranged square, in mount with polished reflector.

List No. 55,387 55,388 55,389 55,390
Number of elements '>*>
'-'"> I'.i r. |
2. 2. 2. 14. 3. 6. 4. 8.
Cl. 3425, 5123, 1939.

No. 55 398. Radiant Heat. 647
5538755390. 1:4. 55391 55394. 1:6. 55 395. 1 : 4.
55 397. 1 : 5. 55 398. 1 : 7.
Thermopiles, Figure, arranged oblong, with mount, and gap opening symmetrically. s. d.
List No. 55,391 55,392 55,393 55,394

Number of Elements 24 36 48 60
2.14.0 3.6.0 4.4.0 5.0.0
55.395. Linear Thermopile after Eubens, Figure, consisting of 20 elements of iron and
constantan, in mount, with German silver reflector polished inside, on adjustable stand
(Ztsehr. fur Instrumentenkunde, 18, 1898, p. 64; Ztschr. f. d. phys. u. chem. U., 11,
1898, p. 126) 3. 14.
55.396. Tinfoil Screen, on Base, Fig. 55,010 A, p. 600 (W. D., Fig. 374 [354]), with silver-
mercury iodide paint and black ring, for explaining Power of Absorption and Eeflection 0. 8.0
55.397. Steam Capsule after Weinhold, for Radiation Experiments, Figure (W. D., Fig. 369
[349]), on stand 0.12.0
55.398. Apparatus after Eitchie, Figure, for showing the relation between Emissive and
Absorptive Power (Gan.-Eein., Fig. 410) > . 2. 2.0
The apparatus, having the form of a differential thermometer, possesses two similar metallic air
capsules and one of medium size intended 1<> he tilled with warm water. All capsules are white on
one side and black on the other.
Cl. 1040, 1041, 1942,

1948, 1919.
648 Thermal Conduction, etc. .
:)99
55 402. 1 : 5. 55 403. 1 : 6.
55.399. Thermal Radiation Apparatus after Bumford, consisting of 2 cylindrical vessels, one s. d.
with smooth and the other with rough surface, for comparing surface radiation, with
2 thermometers divided in 1 / 2 degrees 2. 0.
Both vessels are filled with boiling water and the time is measured which is required for cooling
;
down to a definite temperature.
55.400. Thermal Radiation Apparatus after Dulong and Petit, consisting of a mercurial thermo-
meter with large thermometer vessel and with holder and screens 2. 8.0
The thermometer is heated to a definite temperature and the time measured for the thermo-
meter to cool down to the surrounding temperature. The experiment is repeated after covering the
thermometer chamber with lamp black, leaf gold, leaf silver or with different dyes.
54,531. Gap with Micrometer Screw and Divided Drum, Fig. 54,531, p. 545 1. 13.
- - without Micrometer Screw or Divided Drum, Fig. 54,530, p. 545 3.0

54,530. idem, . . . 1.
55,401. Surface Bolometer for measuring Badiant Heat, cf. Fig. 55,402, after Lurnmer and
Kurlbaum, with two Branches and protecting box with slider (Ztschr. f. Instrumenten-
kunde, 12, p. 81; Wied. Ann. 1892, Vol. 46, pp. 204 et seq.) 3. 0.0
The bolometer is based on the change in electrical conducting resistance produced by the heating,
on radiation, of a lamp-blacked platinum grating of extreme fineness (0.001 mm
thick) fixed to a small
slate frame. The change in resistance is measured by means of the Wheatstone bridge combination.
402. -- idem, with 4 Branches, with protecting box, and central

.">".
Figure, sliders
diaphragm 4. 10.
55.403. idem, Figure, with 4 branches, two of which can be illuminated alternatively
by lateral displacement of the apparatus (Physikalisch-Technische Beichsanstalt pattern) 5. 0.0
The detachable protecting box is provided with a pipe for the introduction of a thermometer.
55.404. Linear Bolometer after Lummer and Kurlbaum, Figs. A and B, with 2 branches,
with mount 3. 0.0
In this apparatus the slate frame is provided with two fine platinum strips which are connected
up as adjacent branches of the Wheatstone bridge and one of which is screened off from the rays. The
apparatus is employed in conjunction with a spectrometer, this method of using being explained by
F i
K. .V>.404 B.
v>.lor>. Capsule with Slate Frame, Fig. 55,404 A, for forming a 4-branch Bolometer I' rum the
preceding apparatus ]. 6.
Very sensitive galvanometers should be used for connecting with the bolometers (10~ 8 to 10- 9 amp.
sensitivity), see section "Electricity".
Cl. 1945, 1946,

4104, 4543, 1951.
No. 55418. Radiometers and Radiophones. 649
55 414. 1 : 2. 55 416. 1 : 8 55 418. 1
d.
Radiometers and Radiophonic Apparatus. s.
55.406. Radiometer after Crookes, ordinary pattern 0. 5.0
55.407. idem, with two vanes rotating in opposite directions, Figure 0.10.0
55.408.
- - with aluminium vanes, covered with mica one side 0. 6.0
55.409. with semi-cylindrical vanes (aluminium) . . . 0. 6.0
55.410.
- - with hemispherical aluminium vanes 0. 6.0
55,411. Radiometer after Eebenstorff, Figure, with one vane having lengthened surface
in order to enable the revolutions to be counted, with screen and two wire nets wood
of nickel; also adapted for experiments on Absorption and Eeflection of radiant heat
after Freuchen (Ztschr. f. d. phys. u. chem. U., 20, 1907, p. 28) 0. 10.
55,326. Heat Supply for Radiant Heat, for above, F i

g. 55,326, p. 642 0. 10.
55,412. Radiometer with fixed metal disc (aluminium, copper) and rotary cross above same
of transparent mica 0. 8.0
- - d e with fixed cross and rotating disc above 0. 8.0
55,413. i
m,
* 55,414. Radiophone after Weinhold, Figure (W. D., Figs. 375 and 377 [355 and 357]),
apparatus for producing a tone by rapidly repeated radiation, consisting of a plate glass
sector disc for the whirling table, and the receiver 0.18.0
* 55,415.
- - i d o m, with a zinc sector disc (W. D., Fig. 376 [356]), fitting the whirling table 0.14.0
55,416. Electric Motor with Stand for driving the sector disc, Figure, without disc . . 2.14.0
55,417. 2 Lenses, bi-convex, 80 diam., 500 mm mm

focal length, in mount, on stands for the
preceding radiophones (W. D., Fig. 378 [358]) Price, together 1. 6.0
th
55,418. Radiophone after Mercadier, (M. P., 9 Edn., II, 2, Fig. 338), with 4 rows
Figure
of holes giving a chord, keyboard, receiver and sound horn; without wMrling table . 18. 0.
* Can be used with the projection apparatus. Cl. 5157,

1
1952, 1953, 1953 .
650 Meteorological Appa-atus. No. 55 420 -
55420. 1:|10.
55 425. 1 : 5.
55423. 1:11. 55 426. 1 : 4. 55 427. 1 : 6.
s. d.
Meteorological Apparatus.
Chamber and Siphon Barometers, Staton and Travelling Barometers, Altitudinal Barometers and Aneroid
Barometers: sec pp. 372377, Nos. 52,771 52,806.
Recording Aneroid and Mercurial Barometers: see p. 377, Nos. 52,8(1852,810.
Cathetometers: see pp. 224, Nos. 51,463 51,466.
Reading Microscopes: see pp. 226 and 227, Nos. 51,473 51,477.
Thermometers: sec pp. 576 579, 54.845 54,877.
Thermographs: sec p. :,'<>. Xos. 54,878 54,885.
Boiling and Freezing Point Determination Apparatus: see p. 580, Nos. 54.8H7 54,889.
Thermometer Comparators and Calibrating Apparatus: see p. 225, Nos. 51,467 51,468.
Distance Thermometers: sec pp. 584 587, Xos. 54,912 54,944.
Thermometer Testing and Comparing Apparatus: see p. 581.
55,420. Thermometer Screen alter atephenson, Figure, for 4 or more thermometers,

with double blinds . 2.10.0
Vi.lLM. Earth Thermometer after Lament, divided in l
jb ,
from 10 to + 50" <'., for 0.25 in
depth, in brass mount with steel point 0. 18.0
.V>. 122. -- idem, for 0.5 m depth 1. 2. I"
."..">. 123. -- idem, for 0,75 m depth, Figure 1. 4.0

.">.">, H'l. - -
idem, for 1 m depth l. Ki.o
55,425. Earth Minimum Thermometer, F g i u r e, very sensitive, spirit filled and with thermo-
meter vessel in form of hollow cylinder 1. 0.0
Cl. 1968, 1971
4106, 197-2, 3829.
No. 55 438. Thermometers. Recording Instruments. Actinometers. 651
55 437. 1 : 5. 55438. 1:10.

s. d.
55.426. Spring Thermometer, Figure 0. 10.

The maximum system thermometer is divided iu 1 / 6 from 10" to + 100" C. and has a pro-
tecting ring for the mercury bulb, the latter being provided with a tuft of hair for holding the spring
water.
55.427. Baro-Thermograph, Figure, combined recording instrument for air-pressure and

temperature, in walnut case 12. 10.
55.428. aluminium casing

--idem, in 15. 0.
55.429. Baro-Hygrograph, in walnut case 13. 0.
55.430. Baro-Psychograph 15. 0.
55.431. Thermo-Hygrograph 12. 10.
55.432. Baro-Hygro-Thermograph 18. 0.

All recording instruments are also supplied in a metal casing at the same price.
55, -133. Statoscope for observing the ascent and descent of a balloon, model of the Eoyal
Aeronautical Batallion 4. 10.
55.434. Aneroid Barograph, one rotation of drum in 12 hours, with leather case, straps and
rifle hook 7. 10.
55.435. Solar Radiation Thermometer, Figure, on stand 1. 4.

The mercury vessel is surrounded by an evacuated bulb; the thermometer is provided with
maximum device, being graduated fiom 10 to + 70 C. in l /z-
55.436.
- -
Two of the preceding, without stand, in case 1. 16.
The bulb of one thermometer is blackened, the other plain.
55.437. Pair of Bulbs after Violle, Figure, for measuring solar 'radiation 4. 0.
Of the two bulbs, consist ing <>f thin sheet copper, one is dull black on the outside, the other
polished and gilded; both bulbs are jet black internally. Each carries a thermometer divided in / t ".
1
55.438. Actinometer after Violle, Figure, recording, with two scribing levers writing
on drums .31. 10.
Two thermometers are, together with their sensitive vessels, enclosed in metal spheres, one of
the latter being polished and the other jet black.
Cl. 1973,
1974.3429.
652 Meteorological Apparatus. No. 55 439 -
55 441 B. 1:8.
55 439. 1 : 5. 55 441 A. 1 : 7.
55 443. 1 : 6. 55 444. 1 : 8. 55 446. 1 : 10.
55.439. Pyrheliometer after Pouillet, Figure, for showing the total amount of solar heat i
s. d.
absorbed by the earth (M. P., Ill, Fig. 473 [II, 2, Fig. 340]; Gan.-Eein., Fig. 453) . 4.10.0
55.440. Sunshine Recorder after Campbell-Stokes, for automatically recording the duration
of sunshine, with adjustable polar altitude, centering device and sensitive sheets for
one year's records 9. 0.0
54,888. Hypsometer after Wollaston, see Fig. 54,888, p. 580, with one thermometer No. 54,874a 4. 3.0
55.441. Hypsometer after Geissler, Figs. A

and B, for altitudinal determinations from the
boiling point of water by means of thermometers, with lamp and boiler, in box . . 3. 5.0
The thermometer is divided in 1 /, from + 95 to + 102 C.
55.442. idem, with large thermometer divided in 1

/ 50 C 5. 0.0
55.443. Hygrometer after Daniell, (M. P., 9

th
Figure
Edn., II, 2, Fig. 352; W. u. E.
phys. Prakt,, Fig. 102; Gan.-Man., Fig. 522; Gan.-Eein., Fig. 386) 0. 15.
55.444. Hygrometer after Dobereiner-Ke'gnault, Figure

(W. u. E. phys. Prakt., Fig. 103;
Gan.-Eein.. Fig. 387), with two polished silver vessels and two thermometers divided
m Vio> on brass stand, without aspirator 2. 10.
- -
55.445. idem, with simple aspirator of 5 litres capacity (M. P., Ill, Fig. 480 [II, '2,
Fig. 353]) 3.10.0
v> (10. Hygrometer after Be"gnault, Figure, with polished silver vessel for the ether,
with extra-sensitive thermometer, in box s 4. 0.
55,447. Hygrometer after Alluard, Figure, with accessories (Gan.-Man., Fig. 523) . 4.16.0
Cl. 1976, 1977, 1978,
1979, 1980, 1982.
No. 55 451. Actinometers. Hypsometers. Hygrometers. 653
55 449. 1 : 4. 55 451. 1 : 3. 55 453. 1 :
55.448. Capillary Hygrometer after Saussure. Figure

(M. P., Ill, Fig 481 [II, 2, Fig. 357]; s. d.
Gan.-Man., Fig. 520; Gan.-Eein., Fig. 389), with thermometer 1. 5.
55.449. Capillary Hygrometer after Koppe, Figure, with adjusting device and with
thermometer 1. 16.
55 450. Hygrometer after Mithof, scale diam. 80 mm, in black polished wood mount ... 0. 4.
55.451. --idem, on base, Figure 0. 8.
55.452.
- -
idem, with rain shade and arm for fixing to window 1.5.0
55.453. Polymeter after Lambrecbt, Figure, in brass case (M. T., p. 161 and 162) . . 1. 0.
--
55.454. idem, in phosphor-bronze case (non-oxidisable) . . . . 1. 5.
Cl. 1983, 1984,

1985, 1980. 1988.
654 Meteorological Apparatus. No. 55 4.i,">
55 455. 1 : 5 55 458. 1 : 7.
55456. 1 : 18 55 457. 1 : 6.
55.455. Weather Telegraph after Lambrecht, Figure, with barometer, thermometer and s. (1.
(i
hygrometer it.
The which the observations are

place at to be conducted should be mentioned when ordering,
as also height above sea-level.
55.456. Compression Hygrometer after Kolosy, Figure, with millimetre scale, for exact
measurements of the humidity-content of the atmosphere, with thermometer in 1 / 8 C.,
for 20 to 40 C + .
This new hygrometer is based on the measurement of the tensive force of the moisture contained
in the air at the time of the observation. The quantity of moisture is given in accordance With Dalton's
law of partial pressures, being read off direct in whole percents and of a per cent. A fresh filling
'
,
is rc(|iiired for each measurement. Directions for use and a Table for facilitating measurements are
supplied with the apparatus.
The relative humidity is determined by direct measurement, and the instrument can be used
for calibrating and determining the constants of other hygrometers.
."..">. I."i 7. Recording Hygrometer, Figure, with clockwork cylinder, making one turn every
week; very accurate movement
55.458. Psychrometer after August, Figure, with two accurate thermometers in Vio
from --15 to + 50 C., with wood stand (M. T.,
8.0
p. 101)
-- idem, with metal stand 1. 1(1. (t
55.459.
Cl. 6558, 621i,
4706, 5208.
No. 55 464. Hygrometers. Psy chrome ters. 655
55 462. 1 : 5. 55 463. 1 : 4.
55 464. 1 : 4.
55,460. Psychrometer, simple, with large water vessel and two thermometers divided in 1
/2 , j
s. d.
with Table 0. 10.
55 461.
; --idem, Figure, with lacquered zinc case for protection from weather . . . 0.15.0
55.462. Centrifugal Psychrometer after Schubert (Ztschr. f. Instrumentenkunde, 16, 1896,

p. 329), Figure, with wood handle arranged for swinging, giving very rapid and
accurate results, with two thermometers divided in 1 / 10 C 2. 8.0
In order to calculate the results, it is desirable to employ the Psychrometer Tables by J e 1 i n e k, II a n n
and P e r n t e r, to be obtained from any bookseller.
55.463. Aspiration Psychrometer after Lambrecht, Figure, with two sensitive, tested
thermometers, with hand motor 5. 0.0
55,464. Aspiration Psychrograph after Lambrecht, Figure, with two sensitive, tested
thermometers, with hand motor 5. 10.
The apparatus differs from the preceding that the thermometers are provided with marks,
in
which follow the temperature variations during aspiration and fix the difference in the two thermo-
meters after aspiration has ceased, so as to enable it to be read closely and carefully, with a magnifier
if
necessary.
C). 1902,
1993, 1994,
1995.
656 Meteorological Apparatus. No. 55 465
55465. 1:0. 55 466. 1 : 5.
55 467. 1 : 3. 55 468. 1 : 7. 55 469. 1 : 7.
d.
55.465. Direct Reading] Psychrometer after Lowe, giving relative humidity, dew-point, and s.
water vapour tension. Can be used without Table 2. 10.
In order to make a reading, the index knob is moved up or down until the upper index gives
the same value on the temperature scale to the left as the dry-bulb thermometer to the right. The
index knob is then turned, without being moved, until the lower index gives the temperature-value
of the wet-bulb thermometer. The point at which the tip of the indicator is situated gives simultaneously
the relative humidity, dew-point, and the tension of water-vapour.
55.466. Recording Psychrometer, Figure, with 7-day clockwork movement making one
rotation in this time, with two thermometers and two levers, writing on a drum . . 9. 0.0
55.467. Air Tester after Wolpert, Figure, for determining the amount of carbonic acid
in the air in rooms; specially recommended for schools. Accurate determinations in
a short time. With the necessary reagents in bottles 0. 12.
55.468. Rain Gauge, Figure, 125 sq. cm surface, with cylindrical measure 1 . 10.
55.469. --idem, Figure, larger, 250 sq. cm surface 2. 10.
V>.17<>.Rain Gauge after Bruhns, Figure, 500 sq. cm surface, with cylindrical measure
and 2 rods with branded marks (Ztschr. f. Instrk., 8, 1888, p. 208) '2. M. '
55,471. Rain Gauge, ef. Fig. 55,472, consisting of graduated glass jar, brass cock, white
enamelled lead funnel and arbor screw, indicating to 10 rainfall mm 0. 5.0
55,471'.
-- idem, larger, Figure, indicating up to 15 mm rainfall 0. 6.0
Cl. 6219, 1997,
1998, 1999, 2000.
No. 5547S. Psychrometers, Rain Gauges. 657
HejRimnur
Pref Helliut"
~3
55 473. 1 : 8.
55 474. 1 : 20. 55 475. 1 : 7.
56.473. Rain Gauge after Prof. Hellmann, for catchment area of 100 sq. cm; the measuring j
s. d.
glass gives the rainfall in millimetres 0. 9.0
55.474. Recording Rain Gauge, Figure, working very reliably, 8-day mechanism, on iron
base, with reservoir and test vessel . . . 27. 10.
55,475. Recording Rain Gauge, Figure 12. 10.

The catchment vessel is separate from the recording mechanism, in order to be able to set up
the latter in the observing room and the former in the open air.
Cl. 2001,4612, 3430.

4952, 2003.
658 Meteorological Apparatus. No. 5S478 -
55478. 2:3. 55 482. 1
glazed iron house, lower and front plate mo\ ing

s.
55.476. Recording Water Gauge, F g u
il
i i
e, in
in hinges, with copper float on 2 m long rods and the necessary leads for snme . . 23. 0.0
55.477. Wind Vane after Wild, Figure, with scale of forces 3. 0.0
Anemometer counting to 10000000 metres, in case 5. 0.0
55.478. after Robinson, Figure,
55,470.
-- idem, counting up to 10000 metres, Figure. . . . . . . . . 3.10.0
55.480.
- - id em, counting to loo metres 2.10.0
55.481.
-- counting to 10000 metres, large pattern, working from
idem, 1 metres p.-r
minute; diameter of protecting ring about IfiO mm 6. 10.
.V..IS2. Anemometer after Becklcy, Figure, with counting mechanism and Robinson
crossed cups 4. 10.
52,056. Apparatus alter Rosenberg. F g u re, for Explaining the Theory of Cyclones, Anti-
i
cyclones, Trade Winds and Counter Trade Winds (Ztschr. f. d. plus. u. chem. t'., 12,
4. 10.
pp. 335338)
Tilt- apparatus is used in conjunction with a Whirling Table (see No. .M.'.4!l cl scq.): the above
price is exclusive ot the I'ltlcr.

Accurate description and instructions tor use of the apparatus sent on application.
55,484. Apparatus for producing Smoke Eddies, Figu

re. after Rosenberg, for Explaining
the Existence of Cyclones
'
and Ant i-cvclones (/tschr. f. d. phys. u. chem. I'., 12, IS'.t'.l. '
338) 1. 4.0
p. '.
The nhis> cylinder, open at both ends, can be detached from the wood base. The hitter carries
'
Cl. 2017,6559,
2005. 2^07.
No. 55 486. Water Gauge. Wind. Eddies. Storms. 659
52 056, 51 949. 1 : 9. 55 484. 1 : 8.
55 485. 1 : 10. 55 486. 1 : 10.
a small metal plate on which German tinder or the like is allowed to burn in order to fill the cylinder s. d.
with smoke. Air is then blown by means of a bellow through the upper pipe, cyclonic smoke eddies
thereupon ensuing.
55,485. Eddy Apparatus after Collation, Figure, for producing eddies in a mass of water
similar to atmospheric eddy winds (Comptes Bendus, April, 1887) 6. 0.
55,480. Storm Recorder after P. J. Schreiber, Figure 9. 0.
This apparatus automatically shows storms within a radius of 20 km and records them on a
paper disc connected to a 24-hour clockwork arrangement. To the apparatus pertain the coherer,
together with shaking device, built into a well-closing chamber (the coherer, etc. serving simultaneously as
1
an acoustic indicator); a sensitive relay and shunt resistance for a cell, together ivith ink writer in a
separate glass car. and three dry cells.
In spite of its simplicity, the apparatus is very sensitive. The determination of the time of the
individual electrical discharges can be carried out with accuracy, as the pen describes a distance of 10 to
12 metres in 24 hours.
Complete description is appended to the apparatus.
Cl. 66tf, 3434,

5085,2012. 42*
660 Meteorology. Cosmology. No. 55487 -
55 491. 1 : 7.
55493. 1:8. 55492. 10.
55,487. 6 Meteorological Charts, mounted on linen, with rods for rolling up: (1) Isotherms il s. tl.
for the mean annual temperature of the earth; (2) Isotherms for the mean .July tem-
perature of the earth; (3) Isobars and Winds predominant in January; (4) idem in July;
(5) Isanormals of temperature for January; (6) idem for July 1. 8.0
Cosmology.
55,488. Terrestrial Globe, Figure, on wood base, with nickelled meridian circle, oblique,
33 cm diameter 1. 4. (l
55.489.
-- idem, on tripod, with compass, 40 cm diameter J. 4.
55.490.
- - i d e i n tripod with compass, 48 em diameter 3. 10.
We quote on application for every kind of Globe for the teaching of Political and Physical
Geography, Geology and Cosmology, such as Terrestrial Globes in relief, Geological
Earth Globes, Lunar Globes in relief, Terrestrial Globes, etc.
Cl. 3690, 2015,
3435, 2016.
No. 55 497. Cosmology. 661
55 495. 1 = 9. 55 496. 1 : 8. 55497. 1:6.
s. d.
55,491. Apparatus for Demonstrating Equinoctial Precession 1.16.0
55,492. Horizon after Bath, Fig are 4. 16.
This apparatus permits of explaining the terms: "Plane, Horizon, Dead Level, East, West, North
and South Points, East-West Line, North-South Line, Diurnal Circle, Diurnal and Nocturnal Arc, Point
of Sunrise and Sunset, Eastern and Western Amplitude, Point of Culmination, Equator, Tropics, Sun's
Altitude on the meridian and Altitude of the Pole", and answers the questions: When and how far
does the sun set or rise from the Eastern and Western points? How large is the diurnal or nocturnal
arc? At what altitude is the Sun (angle of the horizontal surface)? What is the inclination of the
horizontal surface to the earth's axis (polar altitude)?
These questions can be put for any part of the Northern Hemisphere and for any day of the year.
55,493. Apparatus for Explaining Ebb and Flow, after Archenhold, Figure 4. 4.0
Alarge white sphere represents the solid interior of the earth which is supposed to be com-
pletely surrounded by water. The aqueous masses are represented by a white wire frame and a small
sphere, representing the moon, is connected with springs to the earth's core. If the lunar sphere is
taken away from the earth the aqueous masses (as in the case of ebb and flow) are changed from
the spherical shape, and the tidal wave is shewn on the side turned towards and away from the
moon: this tidal wave being smaller on the side turned away from the moon, corresponding to the
greater distance from the latter. The earth can be rotated thus rendering the change from ebb and
flow every six hours plainly visible. The action of the solar flow, amounting to about 2 / 6 ths of the
lunar flow, can be represented for the case of new and full moon by drawing away the lunar sphere
to a greater extent, and for the case of the first and last quarters by drawing it away to a lesser
extent.
55,495. Celestial Globe after Haller, Figure, with movable socket, adjusted for one degree
of latitude . 4. 0.
When ordering it should be stated for which degree of latitude the apparatus is intended.
The globe can be The invisible part of the heavens is con-
set for any month, day or hour.
cealed by the socket. The apparatus is applicable
shewing the stars of the firmament visible at
for
any time and also for solving a few astronomical problems, e. g., determining the rising and setting
and the highest position of the stars.
55,496. --idem, Figure, with fixed socket and movable globe; can be set for any degree
of latitude 7. 10.
By arranging the globe to be movable the apparatus, in addition to being used for the purposes
mentioned, can also be employed for demonstrating the apparent rotation of the heavens during
twenty-four hours by observing the same from any position on the earth.
55,497. Uranotrope after Dr. Wislicenus, Figure 2. 4.0

The Uranotrope serves for demonstrating the apparent rotation of the heavens and the apparent
motions of the stars. It is formed essentially of a hollow brass sphere of about 20 cm diameter capable
of rotation about an axis passing through it, in the centre of which axis placed a small terrestrial
globe. This glass sphere represents the apparent terrestrial sphere, the terrestrial equator, the ecliptic,
the tropic and polar circle, also the coloures of the equinoxes and solstices being etched on and painted
in different colours Other entries should be made by the students during instruction by means of a
coloured pencil supplied, with ink, or by pasting small paper pieces on the globe; the paper can be
removed by washing off. Complete description and instructions for use are appended to the ap-
paratus.
01. 5313 1 , 6228, 3811.
662 Cosmology. No. 55498-55504.
55499. 55 504. 1 : 2.
55,498. Mang's collapsible Horizontarium; can be used at same time for demonstrating tlic s- d.
apparent motion of tlie stars for any point of the earth. With directions and box .
j
2.10.0
55.499. Mang's collapsible Armillary Sphere, F i g n r e, consisting of tlie preceding Hori-

zontarium with a simple terrestrial sphere; with directions and box 4. 0.
55.500. Mang's collapsible Telurion-Lunarion, shewing the actual motions, proof of sphericity,
oblate ring, existence of day and night, time, the degree in perpendicular axial position;
with a powerful lamp, sliding concave mirror, directions and box 2.10.0
55,501. Extra Globe with water and land 0. 8.0
55,502. Mang's Apparatus for Astronomical Geography, containing a

collapsible Universal
Horizontarium, an Armillary Sphere, Tellurion with Lunarion, a Planetarium; com-
prises all motions of the celestical bodies, enables demonstration of the lunar epicycloid,
demonstration of the precession, migration of the apparent lunar orbit, parallax of the
fixed stars, etc.; on stand with instructions 16.10.0
* :>.~>,r><>3. Rotary Star Chart of the Northern altitudes, Figure, for the latitude of Leipzig,
with a disc having network of degrees and a disc without network; arranged for the
Projection Lantern 2. 0.0
For demonstrating the motion of the circumpolar stars. The firmament can he set for any hour
of tlie day. It is
jiossihle
with the chart to solve the problems of the rising and settini; of the stars
and their culminations.
#.">.">,."> I) I.Universal Clock, Figure, for explaining the times in different parts of the world,
with the times of the most important towns noted, for objective projection; with
rntai-v disc 1. 8.0
X-
* Can Cl. 410,

lie used with the Projection apparatus.
309.'),409.
Price List ho. 50, Vols. II and III.
Physical Apparatus -IC8I-
VOL. III.
Magnetism, Electricity, Radioactivity, Miscellanea.
Kolbe School Rheostat.
MAX KOHL A. G
CHEMNITZ (GERMANY)
Adorfer Strasse 20.
Telegraphic Adress: Physik. Fully paid-up Share Capital:

ABC-Code 5tn Ed. used. 80,000.
L. 50, Hie. Reproduction or imitation of Blocks strictly prohibited. C1. 5179,5180.

Pages 663 784 have been omitted.
Pages 1201 1240 are bound in with Vol. I
(Equipements, Switchboards and Projectors).

No. 60001-60025. Magnetism. 785
60 005. 1 : 6.
60 001 60 004. 1 : 2. 60 016. 1 : 5.
Magnetism.
Lodestone, stone in iron mount, Figure.
List No. 60,001 60,002 60,003 60,004
According to size and beauty 0. 12. 0. 15. 0. 18. 1. 4.
60,005. 2 Bar Magnets and 2 Horse Shoe Magnets, Figure, with soft iron keeper, inserted
in wood block
Bar Magnets, of tungsten steel, round section, thoroughly magnetic, as per German designation.
North pole lacquered red, South pole blue.
List No. 60,006 60,007 60,008 60,009
Length 100 mm 150 200 250
Diameter 8 mm 10 10 14
0.1.6 0.2.0 0.2.6 0.3.0
Bar Magnets, tungsten steel, of rectangular section and thoroughly magnetic. North pole
lacquered red, South pole blue.
List No. 60,010 60,011 60,012 60,013 60,014
Length mm 100 150 200 250 300
0.1.10 0.2.0 0.2.6 0.3.0 0.4.0
2 Bar Magnets, Figure, best construction, rectangular section, with keepers and hanging
lug, in case.
List No. 60,015 60,016 60,017
Length mm 150 200 300
0. 10. 0. 12. 0. 15.
60,018. 2 Bar Magnets, 100x10x6 mm, one of them being provided with a cap and with
divided brass rail, for use with the Miiller Dynmeter in case, with keepers (M. T.,
pp. 212 and 220), and with tapered stand
Horse Shoe Magnet, excellently magnetic, with keeper.

teeper.
List No. 60,019 60,020
Length of limb 100 mm
0. 2. 6
Horse Shoe Magnet, with 3 segments.

List No. 60,023
Length of limb mm 150
0.18.0
786 Magnetism. No. 80
60 036. 1 : 4.
60 027. 1 : 5. 60 034. 1 : 7. 60 039. 1 : 3. 60043,60058. 1:5. 60 059.
Horse Shoe Magnets, with 5 segments, Figure. s. d.

List No. 60,026 60,027 60,028
Length of limb mm 150 200 250
1. 4. 1. 10. 1. 16.
Horse Shoe Magnet, with 7 segments.

List No. 60,029 60,030 60,031
Length of limb mm 150 200 250
1.10.0 1. 16. 2.5.0
Laminated Magnet (Jamin's), Figure (Gan.-Man., Fig. 599).
Length of limb, mm No. of laminae Barrying capacity, kg
60.032. 170 20 12 . . 1. 15. U
60.033. 210 20 17 2. 5.0
60.034. 300 20 20 3. 0.0
60.035. 400 35 70 6. 0.0
Magnetic Magazine, Coulomb's, Figure (M. P. 10 edn., IV,
Gan.-Man., Fig. 596; Gan.-Eein., Fig. 684).
List No. 60,036
With
60,037
369
1.4.0
60.039. 12 Steel Rings for magnetizing, Figure, only appearing magnetic after being
cut, as suggested by Friedr. C. G. Miiller (M. T., p. 214)
th
1.10.0
1, Fig. 9; 9
60,038
2.5.0
rods
th
edn., Ill, Fig. 21;
0. 1 . li
60.040. 1 Piece Thin Sheet Steel, for cutting up for magnetic tests (M. T., p. 213). . . . 0. 0.6
Magnetic Needle, Rhombic form, with agate cap, Figure, without the stand illustrated.
List No. 60,041 60,042 60,043 60,044 60,045 60,046 60,047 60,048 60,049 60,050
Length mm
30 50 60 70 80 100 120 150 200 LT.O
0. 1. 3 0. 1. 6 0. 1. 10 0. 2. 1 0. 2. 5 0. 3. 0. 3. 10 0. 4. 6 0.5.6 0.6.6
Compass Needle, with agate cap, best construction.
List No. 60,051 60,052 60,053 60,054 60,055 60,056 60,057
Length mm 80 100 120 l.~>o L'OO 250 300
0. 3. 0. 4. 0. 5. 0. 6. 6 0. 8. 0. 10. 0. 13.
60,058. Stand for Magnetic Needles, serpentine base, brass column and point, Figure
((Ian. -Man., Fig. 577), without magnetic needle illustrated (i. '_'. (i
Test Needle in glass cylinder,

tin. O.V.i. (M. P. 10
th
Figure
edn., IV, 1, Fig. 10) . . . . (I. 10.0
Astatic Magnetic Needle, with stand (Gan.-Man., Fig. 612).
List No. 60,060 60,061
Length mm 60 loo
.
0. 9. 0.10.
2023,
yi'2\. L'"22. 4143,5587,5622.
Xo. 60068. Fundamental Magnetic Experiments. 787
60 063. 1 : 5. 60 065. 1 = 6.
60 064. 1 : 6. 60 067. 1 : 6.
s. a.
60,062. Astatic Magnetic Needle, Tremery's, with stand 0. 10.

This needle consists of two magnets, whose similar poles are turned outwards, the other poles
being fastened to a piece of ebonite provided with a lug. The needle is thoroughly astatic.
60,06.3. Apparatus for explaining the Fundamental Laws of Magnetism, Figure: magnetic
needle on stand, compass, simple dipping needle, bar magnet, steel bars for breaking,
iron filings in box, with sieve and slab for sprinkling the same 1. 2.
60,064. Apparatus for Magnetic Experiments; can also be used as a dip circle 5. 10.
1 stand with brass base, 1 rotary needle holder, 1 needle holder for needles with caps, 1 com-
pass card, 1 graduated circle, 4 various magnetic needles, 1 magnetic and 1 non-magnetic iron rod,
with case.
60 065. Collection of apparatus for the fundamental experiments in magnetism, frictional

contact and thermo-electricity, in wood box, Figure 2. 6.
The box contains: 2 magnet bars, 1 doublo hook for suspending these, 1 magnetic needle, 1 ebonite
rod, 1 glass rod, 1 rubbsr, 1 insulating stand, 1 elestric needle, pithballs with holder, 1 glass rod
with brass cap, 1 ebonite rod with brass cap, 1 Voltais coll with closing bow and one thermo-electric
rectangle.
60.066. Cylindrical Nickel Piece, for magnetic experiments 0. 2.
60.067. Magnetic Double Pendulum, Figure 0. 5.

Two
pieses of soft iron are su?p3nded vertisally from two threads on a stand. On approaching
one pole of a powerful magnet the iron pieie? are attrasted, at the same time repelling each other
smartly.
60.068. Iron and Steel Bars, for magnetic distribution, 6 of soft iron, 6 of hardened steel,
6 mm
thick, 20 long mm . . . 0. 3.
Cl. 3450, 5555,

4114, 2021. 50*
Magnetism. "169
788
60 069. 1 : 4.
60 071. 1 = 5.
60 073. 1 : 6. 60 075. 1 : 8.
60 074. 1 : 4.
60.069. 12 Round Soft Iron Bars, 15 mm thick, Figure, two 150 mm and ten 20 mm
long * d.
th
(M. P. 10 edn., IV, 1, Figs. 4 and 5; 9 th
edn., Ill, Figs. 6 and 7; Gan.-Man., Fig. 585;:
0. :.". r>
Gan.-Eein., Fig. 677)
and breaking up 0. o
60.070. 12 Tempered Steel Wires, for magnetising L'.
60.071. Molecular Magnet Model, Figure, consisting of 24 small magnets, 20 mm long,

o
moving on points 1. 4.
l<U)72. --idem, for objective projection by means of the Horizontal Projection Apparatus 1. 1<>.
consists of a wood frame with a mica disc, the points carrying the magnets
The apparatus
being fixed to this frame. The phenomenon is in this manner rendered plainly visible. 1 ..
k
60.073. Molecular Magnet Model, Figure, consisting of 16 small magnets, 20 mm long,

o
moving on points, each on separate base, on one baseboard 1. o.
60.074. Molecular Magnet Model, von Beetz's, Figure, consisting of 8 magnetic needles
tinning about the horizontal axis with red and white discs visible at a distance, for
experimentally proving Ampere's hypothesis 1.14.0
60.075. Apparatus for determining the distribution of Magnetism in a bar magnet by measuring
its carrying power, Figure
(W. and E. Phys. Prakt., Fig. 360), with 2 magnets,
1 normal and 1 with consequent poles 2. 5.
The carrying capacity is determined at the individual points of the bar magnet by the spring
tension (proportional to the extension of spring), which suffices to pull the small iron ball from the
magnetic body.
i;o.o7(i. Set Cardboard Sheets with magnetized sheet steel strips, F g u r e, as suggested
One i
by Friedr. ('. (',. Miiller (M. T., Fig. 148), for demonstrating the path of the lines of
force in simple and compound fields 0. 1*.
for
60,077. Cardboard Sheet with magnetic bars placed perpendicularly to same, Figure,
demonstrating the path of the lines of force of simple and compound fields in a plane
perpendicular to the longitudinal axis of the bar magnets, as suggested by Friedr. C.
G. Miiller (M. T., Fig. 14t) 0. 5.
CI. 2025, S71,

5503. LML'-.I.
W88.
No. lit) 085. Molecular Theory, Lines of Force Theory. 789
60084. 1:21.
60 076. 1 : 6.
u
60 078. 1 : 8. 60 079. 1 : 8. 60 085. 1 : 6.
60.078. Horse Shoe Magnet, of sheet steel, Figure, for demonstrating an approximately s. d.
homogeneous field (Grimsehl, p. 648) 0. 15.0
60.079. 2 Small Magnets, 1 horseshoe and 1 bar magnet, Figure, cemented to glass
slabs, for objectively demonstrating the magnetic lines of force 0. 5.0
Apparatus for explaining the theory of the lines of force (Berghoff's), see Electricity Section.
60.080. Glass Tube, half filled with iron filings, and with closed ends, for explaining the exci-
tation of magnetism 0. 1.6
60.081. Iron Filings, strained per 250 g 0. 1.0
60.082. Iron Powder (Limatura Ferri alcoholisata) '.

per 250 g 0. 1.9
60.083. Sifter for above 0. 1.6
60.084. Soft Iron Rod for magnetic experiments, Figure (Friedr. C. G. Miiller's), 1.5 m
long, 2 cm thick (M. T., p. 218) 0. 5.0
60.085. Apparatus for explaining declination and inclination, as suggested by Prof. Zahl-
bruckner, Figure
(Fr. phys. Techn. II, 1, Fig. 566) 8. 0.0
The tripod with pillar carries a short arm, on which is fastened a globe and a rotary meridian
arc. Inside the globe is a straight vertical electro-magnet, whose field corresponds to that of terrestrial
magnetism. The conducting wires for the magnetising coil pass through the hollow axis and end in
two terminals fitted to the stand. A slider is fixed to the arc of meridian with a magnetic needle,
which serves as the inclinator and declinator. By adjusting the slider and turning the arc of meridian
the needle can be turned in any vertical or horizontal plane. The globe is therefore fixed on the
horizontal arm and the inclinator can consequently be brought to the lower magnet pole, which corre-
sponds to the South pole of the earth.
With the exception of the core of the electro-magnet and the magnetic needle the entire appa-
ratus is free from iron.
Cl. 4178, 4177, 4176, 4192,
414-1.
5580, 5586, 5587, 2030.
790 Magnetism. \,,. I'.ll UVIi
60 088. 1 : 3.
60094. 1:2.
60 086. 1 : 5.
60 091. 1 : 4.
60089. 1:3.
r
60092. 1:7. 60 093. 1 : 7. 60 095. 1 : 3.
60.086. Apparatus for Explaining the Varying Magnitude of Inclination on the Earth, Figure t
(Fr. phys. Techn. II, 1, Fig. 567) ....... ................. 1. 0.

The apparatus consists of a semi-circular magnet, which can turn about a circle in a stand, and
a dipping needle placed above it. According to the position of the magnet relatively to the needle
the latter shews none or different inclination.
60.087. Declination Needle, swinging on a brass divided circle 12 cm in diameter .... 0.18.0
60.088.
-- idem, simpler, on wood, Figure ................... 0. 7. d
60,089. Declination Needle, on glass graduated circle, Figure, for objective demonstration
with the aid of the horizontal projection apparatus d. 9. d
lh
60.090. Dipping Needle, simple, for suspending from a thread (M. P. 10 edn., IV, 1, Fig. 39;
th
edn., Ill, Fig. 34; Gan.-Man., Fig. 604), with well adjusted needle
9 o. 10.
60.091. Dipping Needle, simple, on stand, Figure, with well adjusted needle 0.15.0
60.092. Inclination Apparatus with magnetizing spiral, for demonstration purposes, F i

g u r e.
for remagnetizing the needle 2. S. d
o
60.093. Inclinator, with electro-magnet, Figure (Fr. phys. Techn. II, 1, Fig. 577). . . 2. o.
60,09-1. Indicator of Direction of Field, Figure, consisting of a magnetic needle freely

movable in space, in solid frame, with extensible haft, in case 0.12.0
lid. d95. Declinator and Inclinator, Figure, can be used at same time as a galvanoseope;
turning in tripod, well constructed and carefully balanced needle J. s. it
pillar
60.096. Dipping Circle, Figure, for the projection lantern, with glass scale, with t\\<>
d
terminals; can also be used as galvanoseope 1. 1.
with canying ring, in mahogany carrying case 1. Id. d

60.097. Dip Circle, Figure,
5188, L'II:I:I. *<:;>
5(191.'.
Xu. >:
Declination, Inclination. 791
60 096. 1 : 3. 63097. 1:4. 60 098. 1 : 5. 60100. 1:5.
tt
60 101. 1 : 5. 60 102. 1 : 4. 60 103. 2 : 5.
60.098. Dip Circle, can also be used as galvanoscope, Figure, with carefully balanced s. d.
magnetic needle, column turning in base divided circle, movable on hinge 2.8.0
60.099. Dip Circle, Figure 60,064, p. 787, can also be used for the fundamental magnetic
experiments (see under No. 60,064) 5. 10.
60.100. Dip Circle, Figure, with horizontal and vertical circle, on tripod with levelling
screws, the needle works in agate bearings. The vertical circle is movable, being 110 mm
in diameter
'
3. 10.
60.101.
- -
idem, larger, F i g u r e, vertical circle 150 mm, horizontal circle 100 mm
diameter, with round spirit level 7. 10.
th
60.102. Dip Circle, large type, Figure
(M. P. 9 edn., Ill, Fig. 35; Gan.-Man., Fig. 611;
Gan.-Eein. Fig. 703), with detachable needle working in carnelian bearings, vertical
circle 190 mm
diameter. The instrument gives accurate data [12. 10.
60.103. Dip Circle, Figure, with vernier reading for the circle and with micrometer adjust-
ment of the vertical circle; diameter of upper circle: 180 mm 11. 0.
Cl. 2037, 2038, 5750,

.i7:>:!,
2040, 2041, 2042.

792 Magnetism. N,, tin in:,
60 116. 1 : 2.
60 118. 1 : 1
60 120. 1 : 4. 60 121. 60 119. 1 : 4.
Compass with nickel case, watch form, stops when cover is closed. s. d.
List No. 60,105 60,106 60,107

Diameter of cap 35 40 45
0.5.0 0.5.6 0.6.0
Compasses, Magnetometers. 793
60123. 1 : 12.
60125. 1:10.
60126. 1 : 10.
60,121. Apparatus for Proving that the Total Free Magnetism is equal to Zero, Figure d.
(M. P. 10"' edn., IV, 1, Fig. 43) 0.12.0
60,122. Compass (Friedr. C. G. Muller's) (M. T., Fig. 151) 1.10.0
60,123. Compass (W. Weber's), Figure, graduated in 1 / i on silvered brass ,

..... 7. 10.
A 20 cm diameter compass with a short powerful magnetic needle is fixed on a polished wood
rail,1.5 m
long, divided in centimetres. The needle is suspended on a raw silk fibre and carries a
long aluminium pointer and a sheet of mica swinging in a box, for damping purposes. The compass
can be moved up and down by means of a screw for the purpose of bringing the magnetic needle
into the axis of the magnets to be investigated.
60,124.
- -
idem, graduated in on silver, with magnifying glass for reading 11. 0.0
lh th
60.125.
- -
idem, simple (M. P. 10 edn., IV, 1, Fig. 45; 9 edn., Ill, Fig. 88), Figure 2. 5.0
60.126. Magnetometer (Salcher's), Figure (Ztschr. f. d. phys. u. chem. U. 3, p. 195), very

finely constructed, with 2 magnet suspensions in case and 6 bars of Swedish Charcoal Iron 32.10.0
A graduated rail turns on a vertical pin, to which a cord pulley is firmly fixed. The rotary
bearing for the magnet bars to be tested and for the iron rods possesses a cord pulley of the same
size as the one just mentioned, being connected to it by a length of cord. On rotating the rail the
bar set up maintains its initial position to the magnetic meridian. The compass case and the disc of
the bar-bearing are graduated; the compass itself has a graduation in / 5 on silver, read by a magni-
1
fying glass. The magnetometer is especially adapted for nautical schools.

Of the 6 soft iron bars 1 each is 10, 15, 20 mm thick and 30 cm long, 1 each 25 and 30 mm
Iliick and 40 cm long, and 1 35 mm thick and 60 cm long.
Cl. 2047, 204S, 204.

794 Magnetism.
60 127. 1 : 6.
60 129. 1 : 4. 60130. 1:10.
60,127. School Magnetometer, Figure, consisting of a School Galvanometer (see under), s. el.
a Resistance Bridge (see under), a Slider for taking magnets of any shape, a Stage for
the galvanometer and an Aluminium Bush, graduated, for taking annular weights of
each 20 g 7. lo. o
The apparatus are set up in the manner shown in the Figure.
60,128. Slider, Stage and Aluminium Bush, alone 1. in. o
th
60,12!). Magnetometer (Weber's), Figure (M. P. 10 th edn., IV, 1, Fig. 48; 9 edn., Ill,
Fig. 91), for proving the intensity of terrestrial magnetism, with good plane mirror . 3. 15.
60,130. Coulomb's Torsion Balance, Figure, for measuring magnetic forces and for
experiments on electric attraction and repulsion (Gan.-Eein. Fig. 690). 3.15.0
The following are supplied as accessories to the balance: (1) for experiments on magnetic repnl
-ion: 1 magnetic needle uiih Mand. 1 bar magnet for setting in the suspension l>n\\. liar magnet 1
for deflecting the previous magnet, 1 brass bar of the same si/.e as llie first magnet. 2 brass rods with
knobs; (2) for the experiments nn electric repulsion: ebonite rods with niekelled balls. -
.'i
give We
complete description and directions for use with the apparatus from which the experiment- can be
made with ease and certainty.
cl.
9051,
So. BO 134. Magnetometers. 795
60132. 1:17.
60131. 1:7.
60 134. 1 : 9. 60 133. 1 : 10.
00,1.'51. Apparatus as suggested by Fischer-Meutzner, Figure, for Coulomb's Law on s. d.
the Decrease of Magnetic Force with Distance (Ztschr. z. Ford. d. phys. U. 1885, p. 229) 2. 0.0
An astatic needle is suspended in front of a vertically placed bar magnet. The time of swing
is altered by approaching or removing the bar from the needle.
OOJ.Hii. Luminous Needle (Friedr. C. G. Miiller's), for magnetometry and galvanometry

(Ztschr. phys. u. chem. U. 22, p. 1), Figure, with following accessories: short
f. d.
magnet bar with lug and cap, 2 long steel wire magnets, 2 m
long; 1 coil for Eemancnce
experiments with compensating winding and 4 test bars; 1 tangent galvanometer ring
300 mmin diameter; 1 idem 100 mm
diameter; 1 multiplier frame; 1 astaticising
magnet; 1 wire figure in circular, square and triangular form for shewing a special
of the Biot-Savart Law.
The luminous needle has an excellent damping system 10.0
133. Dynmeter (Friedr. C. G. Miiller's), Figure (M. T., Fig. 157), with a small bar magnet
for same 100x10x6 mm, with agate cap, on stand . . . 2.10.0
^0,134. Magnetic Balance (Kleiber's), Figure (Kleiber, Physik f. Gynm., Fig. 293) . . 1. 0.
C'l. 5505. .-.Till.
5U5S, 4508.
796 Magnetism. No. (id IX,
60 139. 1 : 7. 60137. 1:10. 60 140. 1 : 8.
60.135. Pole Balance (Grimsehl's), for determining the pole-density of magnetic needles,
Figure (Ztschr. f. d. phys. u. chem. U. 16, p. 334)
Three stands carry: 1 knitting needle which takes the form of a balance with rider scale; 1
vertical rule and 1 horizontally arranged magnetic knitting needle which is adjustable vertically. The
repulsion of the two similar poles of the knitting needles is taken up by rider weights and so measured.
- -
60.136. idem, especially for determining the horizontal intensity of terrestrial magnetism,
Figs. 60,135 and 60,136 (Ztschr. f. d. phys. u. chem. U. 16, p. 337)
60.137. Magnetic Pendulum, Figure, as suggested by Bussner (Ztschr. f. d. phys. u.

chem. U. 20, 1907, p. 96), for subjective and objective observation; independent appa-
ratus, on polished stand
The apparatus is used for proving Coulomb's Magnetic Law, for proving that the total affect
of a short magnetic rod on a single pole equals
-'
for determining the magnetic moment and
the pole-density of a magnetic bar, the field-density of a short and a long coil (Biot-Savart's Law),
the magnetic induction and hysteresis of iron. A complete description and instructions sent on
application.
Given in are: 1 short and 1 long bar magnet; 1 short and 1 long magnet coil, and 1 adjustable
projection lens.
60.138. -The same apparatus, for placing on the optical bench of projection
apparatus. Price without stand or projection lens ii.
39. Apparatus for determining the horizontal component of terrestrial magnetism, F

<>o, 1
i
g u r e,
Kussnci's (Zlschr. f. d. phys. u. chem. V. 20, 1907, p. 172) I.
Complete description on application.
60,140. Thermo-magnetic Apparatus,

A star formed of iron bars
Figure .................... _. 5.
arranged to rotate in front of the poles of a powerful magnet.
is
In the position where ;m iron bar is attracted by the magnet, the latter is heated to a red heat b\ a
Bunsen burner which is set up and it thereby loses the magnetism produced in it by distribution.
and the next bar is attrarted by the magnet. The star is therefore set into slow rotation.
01. 5580. 5589,

60 156.
.So. Static Electricity. 797
60 141. 1 : 5. 60 153. 1 : 6. 60 155. 1 : 5.
Static Electricity.
60.141. 1 Flint Glass Rod, 1 Ebonite Rod, 1 Piece Catskin and 1 Piece Amalgamated Felt, s. d.
Figure 5.0
60.142. 4 Rods of Glass, Ebonite, Sealing Wax and Sulphur, 1 Rubber of Amalgamated Felt,
1 Piece Catskin, 1 Brass Rod with glass handle, 1 Piece Steatite with ebonite handle 0.0
60.143. Collection of Apparatus for the Fundamental Experiments on Magnetism, Frictional,

Contact and Thermo-electricity, in wood box, F i g. 60,065, p. 787 6.0
The box contains: 2 bar magnets, 1 double hook for suspending the magnets; 1 magnetic needle;
1 ebonite rod; 1 glass rod; 1 rubber; 1 insulating stand; 1 electric needle; pithballs with stand; 1 glass
rod with brass c*.p; 1 ebonite rod with brass cap; 1 Voltaic cell with contact bow, and 1 thermo-
electric rectangle.
60.144. Flint Glass Rod, 350 mm long, 15 mm thick, with amalgamated felt rubber, for gene-
rating positive electricity 0.
60.145.
- -
idem, larger, 500 mm long, 20 mm thick, with amalgamated felt rubber . .
60.146. Ebonite Rod, 350 long, 15 mm mm thick, with 1 Piece Catskin as rubber, for gene-
rating negative electricity
60,147.
- - i d e m, larger, 500 mm long, 25 mm thick, with catskin rubber j
<>(U 48. Flint Glass Tube, with amalgamated felt rubber
60.149. Fox-tail Rubber

60.150. Catskin Rubber JO
60.151. 2 Ebonite Rods, 300 long, 12 mm mm
thick, with rubber and with double hooks for
suspending on silk threads, for showing the repulsion of the same kinds of electricity
60.152. Brass Rod, with ebonite handle and rubber (Gan.-Eein, Fig. 708)
60.153. Steatite Piece with ebonite handle (Kolbe's), Figure, for electrostatic experiments
798 Static Electricity. No. 60 l.-,7
60160. 1:6. 60 162. 1 : 6. 60 163 and 60 164. 1 : 6.
60158. 1:12.
60 166. 1 : 4.
60.157. 5 Rods of Wood, Glass, Ebonite, Sealing Wax and Sulphur, suspending byfor means * <i-
of the double hooks, No. 60,155, each 60 cm long ................ 0. lo. <>
60.158. Electric Horizontal Pendulum, Figure

(W. D., Fig. 425 [408]), with hollow alu-
minium ball, on glass rod, on stand with levelling screws. Highly sensitive and protected
by the use of the aluminium ball instead of the glue ball ............ 1. 4. u
60.159. Simple Electric Pendulum (Gan.-Man., Fig. 615, and Gan.-Eein., Fig. 705) .... 0. >. o
60.160. Double Electric Pendulum, Figure, on insulated stand

(Gan.-Man., Fig. 617, and
Gan.-Eein., Fig. 709) ............................. 8. 5.
60.161. Double Electric Pendulum, Kolbe's, Figure, with two rotary arms (Kolbe-Skellon,
Introduction to Electricity, Part I, Fig. 2) ................... 0. s. n
60.162. Apparatus for the Fundamental Electrical Experiments, as suggested by Gustav Wiedc-
tnann, Figure, comprising a- stand to which is fitted an insulated needle on which
a glass rod turns. At the ends of this rod are fitted each 1 ebonite and glass disc.
In addition there are: 2 ebonite and glass slabs on insulating handles, 2 rubbers, 1 of
amalgamated felt, the other of cat-skin, and 1 rod with amalgamated leather on one
end and catskin on the other, in case (Ztschr. f. d. phys. u. cliein. I". 4, p. 196) . . 1. l.o
60.163. Glass Tube, closed at the ends, and with cap fused in, turning on insulating stand.
Figure ......................... .......... 0. T.d
60.164. Ebonite Rod, with brass cap, on insulating stand, rotary, Figure ....... 0. 9.
60.165. Insulating Stand of No. 60,163, alone ..................... 0. 6.0

i;<Ufi<>. Horizontal Pendulum with two balls, on
2 quid- thin, light, glass balls,
stand, Figure ...........
heam
0. IS. (I
1 being metallically covered, or carried by a thin balance

which rests on a, point.
Insulating Stand (Mentzner's) (Fr. phys. Techn. II, 1, Fig.

<;<i,ir,7. ..........
L') 0. 12. (
60,168. Insulating Stand (Friedr. C. G. Mailer's) (M. T., Fig. 161) ........... 0.12.0
ci. :.TL':.. L'niKP. :.
L'l'l'il. '.'(I
No. 00 176. Fundamental Experiments, Electroscopes. 799
60 169.
60 170.
60 171.
60 172. 1 = 4.
60173. 1:7. 60174. 1:7. 60 175. 1 : 5. 60 176. 1 : 5.
s. d.
60,169. Simple Paper Electroscope (Lehmann's), Figure (Fr. phys. Techn. II, 1, Fig. 6) 0.12.0
60,170. idem, double (Fr. phys. Techn. II, 1, Fig. 7), Figure 0. 8.
60,171. Parchment Strips, as suggested by Kiessling, on insulating stand, Figure (Fr.

phys. Techn. II, 1, Fig. 5) 0. 3.0
60.172. Foot or Stand Clamp (Holtz's), Figure, with ribbed ebonite insulation (Ztschr. f.
d. phys. u. chem. U. 2, p. 55) 0. 6.
Parts of apparatus for use with Holtz clamps: see under.
60.173. Insulating Stand (Mascart's), Figure, consisting of a bottle to be partly filled

with sulphuric acid, and with a support passing through the neck for taking a stage
(Fr. phys. Techn. II, 1, Fig. 26; Gan.-Eein., Fig. 707) 0.13.0
60.174. Apparatus for Demonstrating the Neutralisation of Opposite Kinds of Electricity, con-
0. 14.
sisting of rod and rubber (Franklin's Law), (Fr. phys. Techn. II, 1, Fig. 38)
Figure
60.175. Paper Electroscope (Kolbe's), Figure, with amber insulating neck (Kolbe-Skellon,
Introduction to Electricity, Part I, Fig. 3) 0.12.0
60.176. Aluminium Leaf Electroscope, Figure, with amber insulating neck 0. 10.
Cl. r,(112. 5008. 5B09,
55S4,
5125, 5613, 2061, 2065.
800 Static Electricity. No. 60 177
60 181. 1 : 6.
60179. 1:4.
60 183. 1 : 8.
60177. 1:4.
60 180. 1 : 6. 60 182 A. 1:5. 60 182 B. 1:5. 60 184. 1 : 4.
60.177. Aluminium Leaf Electroscope, larger, with condenser and mica disc, Figure, with * '
amber insulating neck and with detachable base for inserting calcium chloride . . . 1. -. o
- -
60.178. idem, without condenser 0. 15. <>
60.179. Aluminium Leaf Electroscope, as No. 60,178, with celluloid graduated arc, Figure 0. 1(>. o
o
60.180. Electroscope for placing on the air pump,
The glass bulb can be detached from the base and be placed with
Figure 0. is.
its polished edge on the
air pump.
no. 1*1. Electroscope, Chatlock's, with first-rate ebonite
Figure, and air insulation, with
aluminium leaf, also suitable for projection 0.18.0
60.isi. Aluminium Leaf Electroscope, with unscrewable point, condenser and mica disc,
F i <; s. A and B 1, 6.
60,183. Aluminium Leaf Electroscope (Kolbe's), Figure, with degree scale 0. 18.
(0,1X1. Electroscope, Figure, with separate condenser and mica disc, for explaining
elect roplmnis (\V. D., Fig. 434 [407]) 1. 6.
(10.1X5. Condenser alone, with mica disc 0.15.0
60.1S6. Electroscope (v. Bcet/.'s), Figure, for objective demonstration (\V. D., Fig. 4:51}
[405]: M. I'. 10"' edn., IV, 1, Fig. Ill !)"' edn., 'ill. Fig. 10!!; Gan.-Man., Fig. 618; (lan.-
;
Eein., Fig. 710) 1. 2.

If not otherwise desired we supply the elertrox-ope with aluminium leaves, but also witli paper
strips if required.
Cl. 20t>. 20B7. 410.-I. LM7i>.

DIM. liiuw. -Jiw/.i. -JHTI
N"0. 60195*. Electrometers. 801
60 186. 1 : 6.
60 189.
60195. 3. 60 195 a. 5.
s. d.
60.187. Paper Tube Electroscope (Weinhold's) (W. D., Fig. 433 [406]) .......... 0.12.0
60.188. 2 Cylindrical Wire Baskets, for screwing on Electroscope No. 60,175 to 60,180 (W.
D., p. 668 [609]), and 1 Hollow Sphere on insulating handle 0.12.0
60.189. Fork Electroscope (Fischer's), Figure (Fr. phys. Techn. II, 1, Fig. 14) .... 0.16.0
60.190. Electrometer, Szymansky's, Figure, giving deflections to 180 (Ztschr. f. d. phys.
u. chem. U. 4, p. 60), with gilt metal parts 2.10.0
60.191. Portable Electrometer, for measuring atmospheric electricity, as suggested by Exner,
Figure (M. P. 9
th
edn., Ill, Fig. 259), in case ....'. 2. 5.0
60,191 a. Flame Collector for above, with supports in walking stick form 1.10.0
60.192. Portable Electrometer (Elster and Geitel's), with mirror for reading without parallax
th
(M. P. 10 edn., IV, 1, Fig. 112) -. 3. 0.
60.193. Tangent Electrometer (Carl's), with condenser (Fr. phys. Techn. II, 1, Figs. 22 and 23) 2.10.0
60.194. 2 Glass Rods with glass balls, for enabling the Griinsehl Pole Balance No. 60,135 to
be used also as an absolute electrometer 0. 8.0
60.195. Electrometer (Dellmann's) (M. P. 9
th
edn., Ill, Fig. 177), Figure 2.14.0
60,195 Electrometer (Kohlrausch's),
a. F i
g u r e (M. P. 9
th
edn., Ill, Fig. 178), with magni-
fying glass reading, platinum or <|ii;ntz suspension 5. 10.
il. :,B1R, 3R9, 5810,5815,

2076, 2080. 51
60 200. 1 : 4. 60 201. 1 : 5.
60200a. 1:3. 60 200 b. 1:3.

60 202. 1 : 6.
60 196. 1 : 4.
60 203. 1 : 6. 60 205. 1 : 6.
60.196. Aluminium Electrometer (Kolbe's), Figure (Kolbe-Skellon, Introduction to Electri-

s. d.
city, Parti, Fig. 15) similar to Gan.-Man., Fig. 659, with projection scale for calibrating
and amber tubes in ebonite plug, one ball 10 mm
diameter, two condenser plates
(lacquered) with one ebonite handle, one extra ebonite plug with amber tubes, con-
ductor rod and paper leaves 3. o.
The sheet iron house of the instrument is 130 mm high, 140 mm wide, 95 mm deep.
60.197. Projection Grade Scale, for inserting in above, divided on mica 0. <>. o
60.198. 2 Sheet Metal Pieces with C-shaped pieces cut away, for quantitative experiments 0. 4.
60.199. Hollow Ball, for screwing on, 50 mm

diameter, and 2 insulated test balls for graduating 0. 6.
60.200. Testing Electroscope (Kolbe's), Figure (Kolbe-Skellon, Introduction to Electricity,

Part II, Fig. 79) [
0. 6.
60,200 a. Auxiliary Electroscope (Kolbe's), Figure (Kolbe-Skellon, Introduction to Electri-
city, Part II, Fig. 109) 0. 3.
60,200 b. Testing Electroscope with long insulated metal handle, Figure 0. 3.
60.201. Insulated Wire Fork, as suggested by Kolbe, Figure (Kolbe-Skellon, Introduction

to Electricity, Part II, Fig. 81) 0.18.0
60.202. Aluminium Leaf Electrometer (Grimsehl's) (Ztschr. f. d. phys. u. chem. U. 16, p. 5),
suitable for projection, Figure 3.10.0
Tnis electrometer extremely sensitive. An extra ebonite plug, in two parts, and a clamping
is
screw for inserting are given in with the instrument.
Tne instrument is built into a brass case and possesses a graduation, going up to 30, on a mica
disc. Glass windows fitted in front and behind render it
possible to employ the instrument in con-
junction with the projection apparatus.
An adjustable discharging electrode serves both for arresting and for increasing the sensitivity
of the instrument.
Cl. 3454. 4977,

390. 572li. 5711, 3812,
3813, 3X11.
No. 60217. Electrometers. 803
60 206. 1 : 6. 60 211 60 215. 1 : 6.
s, d.
60,203. 2 Brass Condenser Plates with one insulated metal handle, Figure 0. 12.
60,204. 1 Copper Condenser Plate and 1 Zinc Condenser Plate 0. 6.0
60.205. Additional Accessories for Grimsehl's Electrometer, Figure 0.15.

A zinc and a brass plate, both on brass rods, for showing the varying potential of these metals
plunged in an electrolyte; 2 platinum sheets on brass rods for immersing in the same or in different
electrolytes; cylindrical dissipation body for showing the discharge action of air, which is ionised by
fog, radio-active substances, Rontgen Rays or by an Auer Incandescent Mantle brought near to it;
amalgamed zinc plate with brass pin soldered on for showing the discharge action of magnesium tape
burned in the neighbourhood of the apparatus on the aluminium leaf charged with negative electri-
city; also connecting tube and clamping pieces.
60.206. Graphite Conductor for demonstrating the potential drop in electric leads, as suggested
by Grimsehl, Figure
(Ztschr. f. d. phys. u. chem. U. 16, p. 11). Price, exclusive
of cover plates and without graduation 1.10.0
- - with graduation
60,207. idem, 1.17.0
i
60,208. Liquid Resistance for the Electrometer Leaf 0. 1. 6
- - for the Electrometer Case

60,209. idem,
60,210. Yarn for connecting the apparatus
Electrometers for investigating Radio-active Substances: "see section on "Radio-Activity".
Absolute Lecture Electrometer, as suggested by Prof. F. Braun (Tubingen), Figure (Wied.

Ann. 44, p. 771, 1891; Ztschr. f. d. phys. u. chem. U. 5, p. 61; W. and E., Fig. 252).
These electrometers can be used as a substitute for the aluminium leaf electroscopes. When a
lamp is placed behind them, the readings are visible at a great distance.
The electrometers are supplied with the following ranges, and are carefully calibrated.
List No. 60,211 60,212
Volts 01500 01500
Graduated from 100 to 100 500 to 500
2.12.0 2.1.0
804 Static Electricity. No 60218
60 218. 1 : 8 60219. 1:3. 60221. 1:10.
60222. 1:13. 60223. .1:6.
60.218. Electric Balance (Kleiber's), Figure (Kleiber, Phys. Gymn., Fig. f. 261) . . . 1. 0.
60.219. Sine Electrometer (Schwedoff's), Figure (Ztschr. d. phys. chcm.

f. 11. I'. 5. p. 235) 2. 10.
The rod with the movable can turn about a horizontal axis.
leaf After charging the hitter is
rotated until the electric repulsion is compensated by the weight of the leaf itself. The capacity of
the instrument thereby always remains the same.
(io.220. Absolute Electrometer (Korolkow's) (Ztschr. f. d. phys. u. chcm. ['. 20, p. 287), without
the apparatus there illustrated (inductor, Leyden jar, Kolbe electrometer) 3. 0. It
60,221. Pendulum Electrometer, Odstrcil's, Figure, simpler pattern, for demonstrating

Coulomb's Law (Kolbc-Skellon, Introduction to Electricity, Part I, Fig. 30) .... 1. 0.
lilt. 222. Odstrcil's Apparatus, more complete pattern, Figure, for demonstrating Cou-
lomb's Law (Xtschr.f. d. phys. n. chem. U. 6, p. 224)
3. 10.
60,223. Pendulum Electrometer for verifying Coulomb's Law on the action of electricity at
o
a distance, as suggested by \\Vinhold. Figure (\V. !>., Fig. 120) i. :..
Coulomb's Torsion Balance: see No. 60,130, p. 7ot.

Pile Electrometers and Quadrant Electrometers: sec under Voltaic Electricity.
i I. .Ml! I. 5(111. 4'.H.\

N... Electrometer, Distributing Apparatus. 805
60224 and 60225.
60 229. 1 : 5.
60 226. 1 : 9. 60 230. 1:5 60231.
(iu,224. Conductor Ball, 10 cm diameter, on glass pillar with base, with opening at the upper s. d.
th
end (M. P. 10 th edn., IV, 1, Fig. 124; 9 edn., Ill, Fig. 124; Gan.-Man. Fig. 625;
Gan.-Eein., Fig. 716) 0. 13.
(ill. 225. Electric Pendulum on insulated stand, Figure, for verifying Coulomb's Law by
the swing of the pendulum at various distances (Fr. phys. Techn. II, 1, Fig. 37; M. P.
10 th edn., IV, 1, p. 225) 0. 8.
<>(). 226. 2 Conductor Balls, on 50 cm high glass pillars with bases, Figure
(W. D., Fig. 427
[403]), with brass rod pointed at one end and provided with a ball at the other (W. D.,
Fig. 436 [409]), and with a connecting tube 1 m long 1. 14.
60.227. Test Ball on Ebonite Rod (M. P. 9 th edn., Ill, Fig. 115) 0. 1.0
60,22S. Test Disc on Ebonite Rod (M. P. 10

th
edn., IV, 1, Fig. 125; 9
th
edn., Ill, Fig. 116) 0. 1.
60.229. 2 Conductors, one of which can be lengthened or shortened by a sliding bush, on

th
insulating ebonite handle, Figure
(M. P. 9 edn., Ill, Fig. 121) 0.18.0
60.230. Distributing Apparatus (Eiess Figure

1
),
th
(W. D., Fig. 431 [404]; M. P. 9 edn.,
Ill, Fig. 114) 1. O.o
60.231. Distributing Apparatus (Wesselhoft's), Figure (Fr. phys. Techn. II, 1, Fig. 45) . 0. 15.
Cl. 5614, 2087,

9086, 2088, &607.
806 Static Electricity. Xn. Ill i
232
- B A *
- " 3S
.
.-
:
..-;=^-= o ,
60 234. 1 : 8. 60 235. 1 : 8. 60236. 1 : 6. 60 238. 1 : 5.
60.232. Distributing Apparatus, Kreb's, Figure (Ztschr. z. Ford. d. phys. U. 1, p. 56),

with 2 different distributing cylinders 1. 16. o
60.233. Apparatus for Generating Electricity by Influence, consisting of 2 conductors on

2 electroscopes, (W. and E., Fig. 253)
Figure 1. 4.
60.234. Hemispherical-Ended Cylinder, on glass pillar with base, F i <; u e (M. P. 10 lh edn., i
lh
IV, 1, Fig. 130; 9 edn., Ill, Fig. 131; Gan.-Man., Fig. 628), for showing that the density
of electricity at the ends of an elongated conductor is greater than in the centre . . 0. 16. o
60.235. Large Egg-Shaped Conductor, for the same experiment, Figure, nickelled (Gan.-
Eein., Fig. 721) I.Jo,
60.236. Weinhold's Apparatus, Figure (W. D. Fig. 439 [412]; M. P., 10 th edn., IV, 1, Fig. 131;
9 th edn., Ill, Fig. LSI'), for the same experiment 0. 6. <>
60.237. Sheet Iron Hollow Sphere, with copper wire 1.5 m long and 0.4 thick, on insu- mm
lating handle (W. 1)., Fig. 442 [415]), for placing on balls No. 60,226 0. 1. <>
60.238. Electric Blind for varying the density of electricity with the si/.e of conductor.
th lh o
Figure (M. P. 10 edn., IV, Fig. 134; 9 edn., Ill, Fig. 175) o. li'.
I, L>'W,
2095, 20%, L'n'.i?.
No. 60245. Conductors. 807
60 240 A. 1:6. 60 242. 1 : 5. 60245. 1:9.
60,239. Conductor with sharp point, on stand (Kleiber, Phys. f. Gymn., Fig. 272; Gan.-Man., .
. d.
Fig. 626; Gan.-Eein., Fig. 755) 0.15.0
60,240. Apparatus (Mach's), Figs. A

and B, for demonstrating the variation of density of
electricity with the size of the conductor 0. 18.
The apparatus consists of 4 brass caps telescoping one in the other on insulating stand, with
paper pendulums and with glass hooks for withdrawing.
- - double the 0.0

60,241. idem, size of preceding 2.
60.242. Faraday's Beaker, Figure, for showing that the electric charge of a body is pro-
portional to the quantity of electricity conducted into it (Fr. phys. Techn. II, 1, Fig. 100) 0. 15.
The apparatus consists of a beaker of wire netting on insulating stand. The metal bottom of
the beaker possesses a hook for a connection with the electroscope; 6 balls of equal size serve for
conducting an increasing load to the beaker.
60.243. Hollow Cylinder of Metal, for showing that free electricity is present on the surface,
Figure, on stand 1. 0.0
The cylinder carries 2 pairs of elder -pithballs; when charged the external balls only diverge.
60.244. Brass Ball on Insulating Stand, with 2 surrounding hemispheres with glass handles,
as suggested by Coulomb, Figure (M. P. 9 th edn., Ill, Fig. 125; Gan.-Eein., Fig. 717),
for demonstrating that electricity resides on the surface 0. 18.
th
60.245. Pfaundler's Apparatus for the same experiment, Figure
(M. P. 10 edn., IV, 1,
th
Fig. 127; 9 edn., Ill, Fig. 127), consisting of a wire cage and insulated metal plate
with conducting and insulating lead to the electroscope. Price, without electroscope 1. 7.0
CI. 2100, 2091, 2092,

2099. 2101, 2093.
808 Static Electricity. NIL (ill 246
60252. 1:7.
60 249. 1 : 7.
60253. 1:10. 60 258. 1 : 6.
60.246. Aluminium Leaf Electroscope with Lead Cap (W. D., Fig. 438 [411]) and glass vessel,
for the same experiment 0. 10. o
60.247. Lead Cap alone, fitting No. 60,176 0. 3. ()
Faraday's Muslin Net, for the same experiment (M. P. 10 edn., IV, 1, Fig. 129; 9" edn.,
lfi 1
60.248.
Ill, Fig. 130; Gan.-Eein., Fig. 720) 0. 8.
60.249. Leyden Jar with large Hollow Ball having a wide opening, and with Test Ball, F i g u r <,
for the same experiment 0. 12.
60.250. Apparatus for the same experiment, consisting of a metallic hemisphere on base and
a spherical dish for covering the same at some millimetres distance from the top, tin-
dish having a metal pin with insulating handle for establishing a metallic connection
with the hemisphere (Gan.-Eein., Fig. 718) 1. 0.
60.251. Wire Cage in the form of a cheese-plate cover, with a vane inside and outside, tot
the same experiment, on insulated stand 0. 15. o
0(1,252. Spiral with ebonite handle and pithballs, as suggested by Kebenstorff, for
Wire
showing that a free charge is not present in the interior of a hollow body, Figure.
without the elect ropliorus illustrated (. 6.
The wire spiral is placed upon a charged electrophorus and the balls are placed inside: they
remain motionless as no free charge is present here. If. however, the spiral is compressed, the balls
fly apart.
0(1,253. Lippmann's Apparatus for Demonstrating the Equality of Induced and Inducing Elec-
tricity and the Screen Action, Figure (Fr. phys. Teclwi. II, 1, Fig. 143; Can. -Man..
Fig. 030). Price, without the electroscope illustrated 2. 5.
The shows the twn experiments which can lie carried out with the apparatus. The
illustration
experimental arrangement on the rifjht hand side shows the complete apparatus and also an electro-
scope not included in the price.
ci. M74, -'<>:u.

"266. Noack's Apparatus for the Study of Potential. 809
60261, 60268, 60269, 60271, 60274, 60275. 1 : 10. 60262. 1 : 16.
60 263 60 265, 60 267. 1:16. 60266,60274. 1:16.
d.
Noack's Apparatus for the Study of Potential. s.
(Ztschr. f. d. phys. u. chem. U. 6, 1892/93, p. 221.)
(10,196. Aluminium Electrometer (Kolbe's), Fig.' 60,196, p. 802 (Kolbe-Skellon, Introduction

to Electricity, Part I, Fig. 15), with calibrated projection scale and amber tube in
mm
j
ebonite plug, 1 ball 10 in diameter, 2 condenser plates (varnished) with ebonite

handle, 1 extra ebonite plug with amber tube, conductor rod and paper leaf .... 3. 0.
Zamboni Pile (Elster and Geitel's), modified by Noack, of gold and silver paper with inlaid
brass discs with projecting tongues, for taking off a divided potential also
List No. 60,255 60,256
No. of pairs of plates 1000 2000
Diameter of plates mm 28 28
1. 0. 1. 7.
60.257. Electrometer (Bohnenberger's) 2. 15.
60.258. Water Battery, F i

g u r e, with 144 copper-zinc cells in ebonite frame 3. 0.
60,222. Odstrcil's Apparatus, F i

g. 60,222, p. 804, proving Coulomb's Law . . 3.10.
60.260. 2 Small Electroscopes 1. 13.
60.261. Sheet Iron Tube, 30 cm length of side, Figure 0. 5.
60.262. 2 Sheet Brass Hollow Cylinders, F i g u r e, 50 cm long, 20 cm diameter, open at

both ends, one of which can be closed by a lid, on ebonite pillar with iron base . . 2. .5.
60.263. Sheet Brass Hollow Cylinder, Figure, 20 cm long, 8 cm diameter, with carrier
bent at right angles on iron base 0.12.0
60.264. Insulating Table, of ebonite, F i

g u r e, 20 cm diameter, with ebonite pillar 50 cm
high, on iron base . . . . 0.12.0
60,265. Paraffin Plate, Figure, 20 cm diameter, 5 cm thick 0. 4.6
tio.'j(>6. 2 Fixed Sounders, with ebonite pillar and porcelain base, Figure, with solid balls
of 2 cm and hollow cylinders of 6 cm . 0. 10.
Cl. 2102, 2103,

2104, 2105.
810 Static Electricity. No. 60267
60 279. 1 : 15. 60300. 1 : 10.
60.267. Adjustable Sounder with brass ball, rubber hose and gas outlet tip, on ebonite pillar
<i
with iron base, Figure 0. 12.
60.268. 2 Pairs Conducting Wires with lugs and pins, Figure on p. 809 0. 1. 6
60.269. Connecting Wire, 50 cm long, with ebonite handle, Figure on p. 809 .... (). a.o
60.270. Bridge, Figure, hollow rail with wire inlaid, brass discs and ebonite handles . 0. 10.0
60.271. Test Disc, 1 sq. m., with ebonite handle, Figure on p. 809 1.6
60.272. 1 Test Ball 1.0
60.273. 1 Large Leyden Jar, excellent insulation, of flint glass, 26 cm high o 8.0
60.274. 2 Heavy Iron Stands and 1 Small Double Cone of gold paper and silk cord, Figure
on p. 809 0. 8.0
60.275. Porcelain Rod and Ebonite Rod, with rubbers, Figure on p. 809 o 7.0
60.276. 2 Condenser Plates 16.0

60.277. 1 Square Glass Slab 4.0
60.278. 6 Ebonite Discs 1.
60.279. Apparatus for Measuring the Potential Drop in the Neighbourhood of a Conductor
Figure 1 10.0
Apparatus for Elementary Electrostatic Measurements as

suggested by Dr. Carl Noack, Giessen.
(Abhandlungen zur Didaktik und Philosophic der Naturwissenschaften, Vol. II, part 1,
Berlin 1906, published by Julius Springer.)
60.280. Leaf Electrometer with 2 insets with aluminium and paper leaves respectively, trans-
parent scale for projection and plate glass scale for subjective reading, Faraday's
receptacle and double needle for smoothing the leaf (pp. 14 20, Fig. 7 13) .... 2. S.
60.281. Accessories for graduating the Electrometer with a pointed conductor, ('(insisting of:
wire net cage, conductor with fine point, wire netting for making the earth connection,
also 1 each test ball of 10, 15 and 20 mm
diameter, on long handle (pp. 20 23,
Figs. 15 and 16) 2. 8.0
60.282. Large Leyden Jar, 50 cm high, for graduating the electrometer (pp. 23 24) . . .
1. I. (i
60.283. Accessories for graduating the electrometer by Faraday's method (p. 24, Fig. 18),
consisting of: 2 sheet iron cylinders of different si/e, amber ball and insulating cable
16.0
Zamboni Pile for calibrating the electrometer in potential degrees (p. 25, Fig. 19) 2 14.0
60.284. .
60.285. Sheet Iron Cube for placing on Leyden Jar No. 60,282 (p. 27, Fig. 20)
i
I. .ML'Ci, r.743.
No. 60300. Electrostatic Apparatus as suggested by Noack and Kolbe. 811
I I
60 270. 1 : 30.
60297. 1:10.
60.286. Spherical Condenser, for external earthing, for determining the capacity of the electro-
A.
meter (p. 31, Figs. 23 and 24) . 0. 12.
60.287. --idem, for internal earthing (p. 32, Figs. 25 and 26) 0. 12.
60.288. Pendulum Discharger, for measuring the electrometer capacity (pp. 35 38, Fig. 27) 0. 15.
60.289. Double Spherical Condenser, for accurately determining the capacity of the electro- '
meter (pp. 4041, Fig. 28) 1. 2.
60.290. Plate Condenser, for measuring the dielectric constants and cumulative values of
condensers (pp. 42 45, Bigs. 29 and 30) 4. 5.
60.291. High Tension Battery of 200 Daniell Cells, built in wood box for determining the cumu-
lative values of condensers and for calibrating the electrometer (pp. 48 51, Fig. 31) 3. 12.
60.292. Simplified Absolute Cylindrical Electrometer, as suggested by E. Bichat and E. Blond-

lot (see also Journal de Physique, Series II, 5, p. 325, 1886), with case and protecting
cylinder (pp. 5153, Fig. 32) 5.10.0
60.293. Spark Micrometer, for determining spark potentials, with pillar adjustable in the
guides by means of micrometer screw (pp. 53 55, Fig. 33) 2. 8.
60.294. idem, with pillar which, however, is adjusted scissor- wise by a joint (pp. 53 55,
Fig. 34) 1. 7.0
Electrostatic Apparatus as suggested by Bruno Kolbe.

The figures in brackets refer, when not otherwise stated, to the corresponding numbers in the
book entitled: Kolbe - Skellon, Introduction to Electricity, I. Part, London, Kegan Paul, Treuch,
Triibner & Co., Ltd. 1908.
60,161. Double Electrical Pendulum with two rotary arms, F i g. 60,161, p. 798 (Fig. 2) . . 0. 8.
60,175. Paper Electroscope, F i

g. 60,175, p. 799 (Fig. 3), with nickelled fittings 0. 12.
60.297. 2 Paper Electroscopes, (Figs. 3, 4, 7, 22, 24, etc.), with nickelled fittings,
Figure
both balls having holes for inserting the point and the holder for the rods. The fol-
lowing are supplied as accessories: each 1 rod of flint glass, wood, ebonite, sealing wax
and fishbone of 350 mm
length, 1 discharger (Fig. 24), 1 test ball with 10 metres fine
German Silver wire, 1 point bent at right angles (Fig. 22) and 2 holders for the rods 1. 8.
The ball on glass pillar illustrated in the figure is not included in the price.
60.298. Electric Pendulum with long arm and 2 balls of different colour (Fig. 5) .... |
0. 4.
60.299. Electric Needle, as suggested by Gustav Wiedemann (Fig. 6), consisting of a light
ebonite tube with 1 glass and 1 ebonite disc at the ends, 1 wire bow with silk thread
and 1 second ebonite tube with leather and catskin disc on wood board at the ends 0. 12.
For the same apparatus swinging on insulated stand with point, see No. 60,162, p. 798.
60.300. Flexible Wire Netting, as suggested by Vanderfliet and Kolbe, for demonstrating
electric distribution, Figure(Figs. 9 and 10), with a number of movable paper
leaves and with 2 insulated stands 0. 12.
When the wire netting in the charged state is bent, the paper leaves are more strongly repelled
on the external curved side, corresponding to the accumulation of electricity, while the leaves on
the inner side no longer show any repulsion.
Cl. 2106, 2109.

812 Electrostatic Apparatus. No. 60:ii'l
60301. 1 : 10. 60307. 1:10. 60316. 1:12.
60,301. Soap Bubble Apparatus, for proving electrical density, Figure (Fig. 12), with test
0. 12. o
electroscope and rubber bulbs
If the soap bubble is blown up, the leaves of the electroscope collapse proportionally to the
slight electric density on the larger surface of the soap
bubble.
60.196. Aluminium Electrometer, F i g. 60,196, p. 802 (Fig. 15), with calibrated pro-
jection scale and amber tube in ebonite plug, 1 ball 10 diameter, 2 condenser plates mm
(varnished) with 1 ebonite handle, 1 extra ebonite plug with amber tube, conducting
rod and paper leaves 3. 0.
The sheet iron case is 130 mm high, 140 wide and 95 mm deep. mm
Accessories for Aluminium Electrometer.
60.197. Projection Degree Scale for inserting, divided on mica 0. 6.
60.198. 2 Pieces Sheet Iron for inserting, with C-shaped pieces cut out, for quantitative
ex-
0. -1.
periments
60.199. Hollow Ball for screwing on, 50 mm diameter, and 2 Insulated Test Balls for graduating 0. <;. <>
60.306. Brass Rod with 2 Balls, nickelled (Fig. 26 a) ... 1 0.1.0

For Kolbe Projection Apparatus: see Vol. I of this Price List, p. 167, Nos. 50,855 50,866.
60.307. Conical Conductor, Figure

(Fig. 14), for proving the different distribution of
electricity on the surface of an insulated conductor, nickelled,
with 3 test balls of 15,
10 and 5 mm, on ebonite hafts 1. o. >
60.200. Test Electroscope, F i

g. 60,200 on p. 802 (Fig. 17) 0. >. u
Wire Net Cylinder with sheet iron bottom, for screwing on the electrometer (Fig. 20) o. 3. o
60.309.
60.310. Ebonite Rod with amalgamed leather rubber (Fig. 20) 0. 2.
60.311. 4 Nickelled Hollow Balls of 20, 10, 10 and 5 cm diameter on insulating stands (Fig. 22),
for experiments on electric density with equal charge 2. (i. <>
If Ball No. 60,199 is already available, this can be omitted, and the price it then reduced to
1. 16. 0.
Aluminium Electroscope with degree Fig. 60,183 on p. 800 (Fig. 26 B) . . 0. is. o

60,183. scale,
<iO,3L3. Glass Plate for the screening effect of electricity (Fig. 27) 0. 1.6
60,314. Ebonite Plate for the same (Fig. 27) 0. 3.
r>. White Metal Sheet Plate for the same (Fig. 27)
0. l.o
60,3.1
60.316. Wire Net Cylinder and Sheet Iron Plate, Figure (Fig. 28), for showing that elec-
tricity resides only on the surface

0.10.0
same o
60.317. Candle Holder with wire net for placing on
0. .">.
(Fig. 29)
Pendulum Electrometer (Odstreil's), simple construction (Fig. 30), sec Fig. 60,221
60,221.
on p. 804 I. 0.0
60,319. 1 Pair Air Condenser Plates (Fig. 34), 15 cm diameter, polished quite plane,
nickclled.
with ebonite handle, on insulating stand and with 1 mica plate lit cm diameter . . 1. 8. u
CI. 2111, 2114, 2116.

No. 80 337. Electrostatic Apparatus as suggested by Kolbe. 813
60 325 B. 1:8.
60 325 A. 1:5.
60 337. 1 : 4. 60334. 1:10.
Mica Plates for Condensers, singly. s. d.
List No. 60,320 60,321 60,322

Each 0. 1. 0, 2. 6 0. 5.
60,200 Small Auxiliary Electroscope, on base (Fig. 34), Fig. 60 200 a on p. 802
a. .... 0. 3.0
(ill, 324. Standard Condenser (Fig. 37), for screwing on aluminium electroscope No. 60,183,
80 mm
diameter, polished quite plane and varnished, in case, for calibrating the
electrometer 0. 18.
60.325. Capacity Meter, Figs. A

and B (Fig. 42), for Leyden jars, hollow balls, etc., without
the Leyden jar and electrometer illustrated in Fig. B 1. 8.
For the experiment the extra ebonite plug with the paper leaf must be inserted in the electrometer.
60.326. Air Condenser, on Stand, with sliding plates and millimetre graduation
(Fig. 43) . 2. 5.0
60.327. Paraffin Plate, 180 mm in diameter, 20 mmthick, with ebonite handle, for the Air
Condenser . . 0. 3.0
60.328. Ebonite Plate, 180 mm diameter, 10 mm thick 0. 6.0
60.329. Mica Disc, 180 mm in diameter, 1 mm thick 0. 6.
60.330. Mica Disc, thin, lacquered on both sides 0. 4.0

60,540. Apparatus for Igniting Ether or the like (Fig. 47), F g. 60,540 on p. 826 i . . . 0.10.
60,388. Model of a Dubrowsky Influence Machine, Figs. 60,388 A and B on p. 817, with
fixing clamp (Fig. 48, see also Ztschr. i. d. phys. u. chem. U. 9, p. 223), with an
exciter plate, a Leyden jar and connecting leads, without Geissler tube 2. 8.0
60,333. Small Amalgamated Zinc Plate with hook (Fig. 53) 0. 0.6
iio..'13-l. 2 Induction Spirals, Figure (Fig. 57), on ebonite plates with handles, for demon-
strating electric induction (Gan.-Kein., Fig. 969) 1. 4.
60,335. Candle Holder with ebonite handle and platinum wire (Fig. 60) 0. 4.0
<i(i. :>3<. Paraffin Block for insulating the electrometer (Fig. 60) 0. 6.
<;<..">37. Apparatus for Electric Lines of Force, Figure (Fig. 62), with brass ring fur screen
effect . 0. (i.
Cl. 5585, 2118

5417, 2119.
814 Electrostatic Apparatus. Electrophorus. No. 60338
60340. 1:14. 60 358. 1 : 6.
60338 and 60339. 1 : 10.
60 362. 1 : 5.
60.338. Electrometer for Atmospheric Electricity, Figure

(Fig. 63), with volt scale on plate <i
glass and with long wood rod 3. 0.

The instrument is very finely constructed and has a good suspension for the leaf.
60.339. Flame Collector, Figure (Fig. 63), with 3 wood rods which may be screwed
1. 10.
together
60.340. Communicating Water Vessels, Figure (Figs. 64 and 65), with depth graduation,
2 of equal and 2 of unequal diameter, connecting tube with stop-cock 1. 4.
60.341. Small Lead Plate on ebonite rod (Fig. 67)

0. 1.0
Auxiliary Apparatus and other Accessories.

60.342. 50 m of Fine, Bare Copper Wire . . -. 0. 1.
60.343. 25 Sheets Aluminium Foil 0. 0. 9

60.344. Forceps for smoothing the aluminium leaves 0. 1 . o
60.345. Amber, long piece with natural surface 0. 5.
60.346. Glass Rod (Fig. 1), 40 cm long, 20 25 mm thick, with amalgamated leather . . 0. r>. o
60.347. Ebonite Rod (Fig. 1), 40 cm long, 2025 mm thick 0. 5. ()
60.348. Piece of Steatite, with ebonite handle (for experiments on pp. 13 and 15), with borinu
fitting for the stand of the conical conductor (Fig. 18) j
0. 5. o
60,360. Ebonite Electrophorus, 32 cm diameter 0. 18.
60,583. Leyden Jar, collapsible, 26 cm high (Figs. 39 and 42) 0.14.0

60,580 Leyden Jar with fixed foiling, 26 cm high (Fig. 56) 0. 8.
60,365. Winter's Frictional Electricity Machine (Fig. 44), 36 cm diameter, with iron base and
ebonite axis 4. 0.
60,370. idem, with wood base and glass axis

- - 3. 10.
60,301. Topler's Self-Exciting Influence Machine, 36 cmdiameter 3. H>. )
60,435. Wimshurst's Machine (.self-exciting), with ebonite plates 35 cm diameter 3.10.0
Electrophorus.
Electrophorus, of ebonite, F g u r e, with metal base, double walled metal cover on ebonite
i
handle and with burled silk rubber ((Ian. -Rein., Fig. 738).
List No. 60,357 60,358 60,359 60,360
Diameter cm 17 '2\ L'<> 32
0. 10. 0. 12. 0. 15. 0. 18.
Cl. 2121. 2IL"_'.

2tL'ti, 2123.
No. 60369. Electrophorus. Electrical Machines. 815
60 363. 1 : 9.
60 364. 60365 60369. 1:8 1:16.
60.361. Electrophorus of Palmier! insulating material (W. D., p. 659 [600]), 26 cm, with metal s. d
base, double walled metal cover with ebonite handle and burled silk rubber .... 0. 12.
60.362. Electrophorus of ebonite, Figure, 21 cm diameter, with metal cover and auxiliary
apparatus, both in box 0. 18.
Auxiliary apparatus: 1 small Leyden jar, 1 chime of bells, 1 electric wheel, 1 set dancing balls,
3 elder pith figures, 1 discharger, 2 electric pendulums, 1 ebonite plate for Lichtenberg's dust figures,
1 set instructions.
60.363. Tyndall's Electrophorus, Figure (Tyndall, Heat, Fig. 23) 4. 0.
The cover of the electrophorus is suspended from a balance. When the Electrophorus is excited
and the cover placed on, a considerable weight is necessary to lift it off. The beam can be used both
as an ordinary balance and a hydrostatic balance when the electrophorus is detached.
Frictional Electric Machines, Influence Machines and

Auxiliary Apparatus.
60.364. Figure (Ztschr. f. d. phys. u. chem. U. 15, p. 284),
Bar Machine (Grimsehl's),
for demonstrating the mode of action of the frictional electricity machine, especially
the electricity of the rubber -
|
1. 8.
Disc Machine, Figure (W. D., Fig. 446 [419]), with iron base and ebonite axis, solidly
constructed.
List No. 60,365 60,366 60,367 60,368 60,369
Diameter of Discs cm 36 42 50 60 70
-
4. 0. 5. 0. 6. 10. 8. 0. 0. 10. 0.
Cl. 2124,
5615, 2125.
816 Frictional Electric Machines, Influence Machines and Auxiliary Apparatus. No. 60 370
60 380. 1 : 8.
60370 60374. 1:61:12.
60 381. 1 : 6. 60 384. 1 : 8.
Disc Electric Machine, Figure, with wood base and glass axis, disc mounted in wood: s. il.
List No. 60,370 60,371 60,372 60,373 60,374

Diameter of Discs em 36 42 50 HO 70
3. 10. 4. 0. 5. 0. 6. 10. 8. 0.
Winter's Ring for the preceding machines, for considerably increasing the percussive distance.
List No. 60,375 60,376 60,377 60,378 60,379
Diameter cm 36 42 (id 70
0.15.0 0. 18. 1.4.0 1. 10. 1. 16.
60,380. Electric Machine, Figure, simple construction, with 26 em diameter disc, without
ring 1. Ki.o
60,381. Small Electrical Machine, Figure, for exciting influence machines l.io. o
00,:W2. Machine (Ramsden's), Figure, with 2 rubbers and 2 conductors, on

Electrical
polished wood table, elegantly const meted, disc 05 cm diameter ((Ian. -Man., Fig. 661;
(lan.-Kein.. Hg. 736) 16. (i.o
Amalgam per 75 g o. l.o

60,383. Kienmayer's
o
00,384. Water Influence Machine, Figure (VV. I)., Fig. 444 [417])
2. lo.
<;o.:;.s5. Sand Influence Machine 3. o. o
o
60,386. Armstrong's Steam Electrical Machine, simplified model, without steam boiler . . 6. o.
heated S. 0.
00,387. Steam Generator for above, gas
Cl. 5715, 5803,

;V>I, 21:111.
No. 6039. Influence Machines. 817
60382. 1 : 10. 60 388 B. 1:10.
60 388 A. 1 : 10. 60389 60396. 1:51:13.
t'.o.MXS. Model of a Dubrowski Influence Machine, F i g s. A and B, with fixing clamp (Ztschr. s (1
f. d. phys. u. chem. r. 9, p. 223), with an exciter plate, a Leyden jar and connecting
leads, without Geissler tube 2. 8.
Self-Exciting Influence Machine, as suggested by Topler, with 1 fixed and 1 rotating plate,
can be recommended as most practical in all respects; without ebonite pillars, combs
resting on the fixed axis, stand of polished alder wood.
List No. 60,389 60,390 60,391 60,392 60,393 60,394 60,395 60,396
Diameter of rotating 1 no 01 KO
of> 41 47 57 62 cm
plates J
1. 15. 2. 10. 3. 10. 4. 5. 6. 0. 7. 0. 11. 10. 16. 0.
Cl. 2129. 4109,

4108, 2131. 52
818 Static Electricity. NIL tin :;:i7
6039760406. 1:6 1:24.
6041760424. 1:11 1:27
60426 60430. 2:71:7. 60407 60416. 1:81:27.
Self-Exciting Influence Machine, as suggested by Topler, with 1 fixed and 1 rotating plate, *
Figure, with massive ebonite pillars on which the discharging combs are placed,
in order to be able to remove the plates forth; with stand of polished mahogany.
List No. 60397 60,398 60,399 60,400 60,401 60,402 60,403 60,404 60,405 60,406
26 31 36 41 47 52 57 62 75 !>() cm
3. 10. 4. 10. 6. 0. 7. 5. 9. 5. 10. 10. 15. 15. 20. 0. 27. 0. 30. 0.
Self-Exciting Influence Machine, as suggested by Topler, Figure, with 2 fixed and 2 ro-
tating plates, base and pillars of mahogany, discharging cumtis fixed on ebonite pillars,
very neatly constructed and producing twice the <|iiantity of electricity as those with
only two plates.
List Xo. 60,407 60,408 60,409 60,410 60,411 60,412 60,413 60,414 60,415 60,416
26 31 36 41 47 52 57 62 75 90 cm
6.15.0 8.10.0 11.0.0 13.10.0 17.5.0 19.0.0 25.0.0 29.5.0 32.10.0 41.5.0
Cl. 5707, .V.1I9.
2134, 5709.
No. 60441. Influence Machines. 819
60431 and 60432. 1 : 10 and 1 : 12. 60433 60438. 1:5 1:10.
Self-Exciting Influence Machine, as suggested by Topler, Figure, with 4 rotating and s. d.

4 fixed plates, wood parts of walnut, very elegantly constructed:
List No. 60,417 60,418 60,419 60,420 60,421 60,422 60,423 60,424
)iamet f rotatin S
^ a t eg }
36 41 47 52 57 62 75 90cm
15. 0. 18. 0. 21. 0. 24. 0. 29. 5. 37. 10. 45. 0. 56. 5.
Self-Exciting Influence Machine, as suggested by Topler,"* Figure, with 2 rotating and

1
1 fixed plate, without ebonite pillars, producing half as much electricity again as the
machines with only 2 plates.
List No. 60,425 60,426 60,427 60,428 60,429 60,430
Diameter of rotating plates 26 31 36 41 47 52 cm
2. 0. 2. 15. 4. 0. 4. 15. 6. 15. 8. 5.
Self-Exciting Influence Machine (Wimshurst's), Figure, with double rotation, with 2 glass
plates, polished base. These machines work without alternation and are independent of
atmospheric humidity (Gan.-Man. Fig. 667; Gan.-Kein. Fig. 747).
List No. 60,431 60,432
Diameter of plates 26 31 cm
1.10.0 2.0.0
Self-Exciting Influence Machine (Wimshurst's), Figure, with double rotation, with two
ebonite plates and wood stand.
List No. 60,433 60,434 60,435 60,436 60,437 60,438
Diameter of plates 25 30 35 40 '45 50 cm
1. 10. 2. 10. 3. 10. 4. 10. 6. 0. 7. 0.
Self-Exciting Influence Machine (Wimshurst's), Figure on p. 820, with double rotation

and 2 glass plates, base-board of mahogany, insulating pillars of ebonite, with iron
supports and drive.
List No. 60,439 60,440 60,441
Diameter of plates 41 52 62 cm
4.15.0 6.15.0 8.5.0
Cl. 5710, 29 F.
52*
820 Static Electricity.
60439 60441. 1:8 1:12.
60442 60463/69. 1:16
60450 60453. 1:101:18.
60448 and 60449. 1:10-1:17 Cl. 570H, 21 in.

2137, i?:i3.
Xn. IW461. Influence Machines. 821
60458 60461. 1:101:18. 60 470. 1:7 1:14.
Self-Exciting Influence Machine (Wimshurst's), double rotation, with 2 glass plates, specially s. d.
suitable for Franklinization, Fig. 60,442, without table and other accessories illustrated.
List No. 60,442 60,443
With Glass Cupboard 16. 0. 18. 0.
List No. 60,444 60,445
Without Glass Cupboard 11. 0. 13. 0.
Self-Exciting Influence Machine (Wimshurst's), with double rotation, with 4 glass plates.
List No. 60,446 60,447
With Glass Cupboard, F i g. GO 442 18. 0. 20. 0.
List No. 60,448 60,449
Without Glass Cupboard, F i g u r e 13. 0. 15. 0.
Self-Exciting Influence Machine (Wimshurst's), with double rotation, with 8 glass plates,
Figure, with four times the effect of the 2-plate machines.
List No. 60,450 60,451 60,452 60,453
Diameter of plates 52 62 75 90 cm
18. 10. 22. 10. 32. 10. 40. 0.
-
idem, with 12 glass plates, with six times the effect of the 2-plate machines.
List No. 60,454 60,455 60,456 60,457
27. 10. 32. 10. 37. 10. 55. 0.
- d e m, with 16 glass plates,

i
Figure, with eight times the effect of the 2-plate machines.
List No. 60,458 60,459 60,460 60,461
35. 0. 40. 0. 60. 0. 80. 0.
Cl. 5734, 2142.

822 Static Electricity. \.l
60471. 1:8.
Accessories for Franklinization. s. -d.
60.463. Rubber Slab, 70x100 cm, 3 thick, mm Figure

(p. 820) 1. 4.
This slab, of soft rubber, is used in connection with the metal coating listed under No. 60.464
instead of the insulating stool.
60.464. Metal Coating, 50x80 cm, for preceding rubber slab, Figure
(p. 820) .... 0. :.. n
This metal covering consists of a 0.5 mm
thick nickelled zinc sheet with a plug-box.
60.465. 2 Connecting Leads, thickly insulated with rubber, with spring-hook, Figure (p. 820) 0. 12.
60.466. Globe on Insulated Stand, Figure

(p. 820) 1.10.0
The device can be raised and lowered as well as rotated laterally.
60.467. Franklin Electrode Holder, 50 cm long, with terminal, Figure (p. 820) .... 0. 6.
60.468. Brass Sphere, for screwing on the electrode holder, Figure (p. 820) 0. 1. 6
.
60.469. Franklin's Rose, for screwing on the electrode holder, Figure (p. 820) .... 0. lo. d
The rose is 13 cm in diameter, being provided with a number of metal points covered \vitli
ebonite sleeves.
60,470. Influence Machine, as suggested by Weinhold, on p. 821, plate diameter

Figure
45 cm (W. D. Fig. 453 [430]), without alternation, not self excited, with iron frame 5.10.0
New High-Capacity Influence Machines.

60,471. Self-Exciting Influence Machine, as suggested by Wommelsdorf, Figure, with
sectors embedded on all sides (Ann. d. Phys., 4 th Series, Vol. 23, 1907, p. 609), for hand
and motor drive, with plates 35 cm in diameter; spark length: 130 175 mm, current
to 90 micro-amperes 13. lo. o
The machines are of very high efficiency and work exceedingly w( .n. They are only constructed
with simple rotation and the sectors are completely embedded in ebonite discs.
Cl. 4948.
No. fill Ml. Influence Machines, Influence Machine Plates. 823
60473 60476. 1:61:7.
High-Capacity Influence Machines, Figure, suitable for teaching purposes as well as for
working Rontgen Ray Tubes and for electrotherapeutics, with embedded corrugated
sectors.
List
No.
824 Static Electricity. 1112
60512. 1:8.
60 526. 1 : 5.
60525. 1 = 3. 60 527. 1 : 8.
s. d.
Glass Plates for Topler Influence Machines.
List No. 60,492 60,493 60,494 60,495 60,496
For machines with rotating plate of 52 !><> cm (liain.
Rotating plate 0. 9. 6 0. 12. 0. 15. 1. 5. 1. 15.

Fixed plate 0. 17. 1. 1.0 1. 5. 1. 15. 2. 5.
Glass Plates for Wimshurst Machines, with double rotation, Nos. 60,431 and 60,431*. and
Nos. 60,439 to 60,461.
List No. 60,497 60,498 60,499 60,500 60,501 60,502 63,503 60,504
Diameter of plates 26 31 36 41 52 62 75 (() cm
Price each 0. 4. 6 0. 5. 6 0. 7. 0. 9. 0. 12. 0. 15. 1. 5. 1. 15.
Ebonite Plates for Wimshurst Double Rotation Machines Nos. 60,433 to 60,438.
List No. 60,505 60,506 60,507 60,508 60,509 60,510
Diameter of plates 25 30 35 40 45 50 cm
Price each 0. 7. 0. 9. 0. 12. 1. 0. 1. 5. 2. 5.
Motor Driving Stand for Influence Machines, comprising direct current motor for connecting
ii]) to 65, 110 125 or 220 240 volts, with speed regulator and gearing:
60,512. For machines with 2 plates to 41 cm diameter, Figure 5. 10.
60,513. For machines with 2 plates to 62 cm diameter or with 4 plates to II cm diameter 6. 10. o
For other Voltages, Larger Machines and for Alternating and Three-phase Current applications
should be made to us.
Dust-proof Lock-up Cupboards for Influence Machine, simple construction.
List No. 60,514 60 515 60,516 60,517 60,518 60,519 60,520
Suitable for Machines 1 -o cm diam.
26 ;]1 36 41 47 ;,7
with a plate of J
0. 15. 0. 18. 1. 2. 1. 6. 1. 12 2. 0. 2. 8.
the ends metre o. 1.0

60,521. Connecting Chain, with hooks at
1
i i. :,:.;:(. 21 IK.
19811. Jl IT.
Auxiliary Apparatus for Influence Machines. 825
60 529. 1 : 5. 60530. 1:3.
60 528. 1 : 3.
\
\
60 531. 1 : 3. 60 532. 1 : 7. uO 534. 1 : 4. 60 535. 1 : 7.
s. d.
60,522. Elastics, lined with Copper Wire and hooks at the ends (W. D., p. 676 [618]) . . 0. 1.0
(io.523. Argand Burner, with short base, for placing in the influence machine (W. D., Fig. 456 [428]) 0. 5.0
51,176. Double Regulating Cock for above, for quickly turning down the jet without extin-
guishing it, see No. 51,176 on p. 207 (W. D., Fig. 457 [429]) 9.0
60,525. Hygrometer, Figure, for placing in the neighbourhood of influence machine for
determining the humidity 0. 8.0
th
60,526. Insulating Stool, wood, with unscrewable porcelain legs, Figure (M. P. 9 edn.,
Ill, Fig. 164) 0. 7.0
60.527. Collection of Auxiliary Apparatus for the Influence Machine, Figure 0. 15.0
The collection is well got up and comprises: 1 general stand, 1 apparatus for condensing smoke,
1 paper tassel, chimes, 1 electric whirl, 1 fulminating pane and 2 brass chains.
A complete description is appended to each collection.
60.528. Chime, Figure (W. D., Fig. 448 [421]), on iron stand 0. 9.
60.529. Chime with Leyden Jar, Figure, can be used at the same time as a Capacity Meter
(Gan.-Eein., Fig. 767) 16.0
60.530. Apparatus for Igniting Gases, Figure 4.0
(W. D. Fig. 449 [422]; M. P. 10

th
60.531. Electric Pistol, Figure edn., IV, 1, Fig. 153;
9 th edn., Ill, Fig. 165) 0. 5.
lh th
60.532. Electric Whirl, on stand, Figure
(M. P. 10 edn., IV, 1, Fig. 155; 9 edn., Ill,
Fig. 169; Gan.-Man., Fig. 627; Gan.-Eein., Fig. 755) 4.0
60.533. - -
idem, larger 6.0
60.534. Double Electric Whirl, Figure 10.0

on.535. Paper Tassel, on stand, Figure (M. P. 10
th
edn., IV, 1, Fig. 152; 9
th
edn., Fig. 163) 4.0
Cl. 214H, 2149, 2150,

2151. 5738, 2152, 5737.
826 Static Electricity. No. 6o:.:w
60 538. 1 : 2. 60539. 1:3.
60 540. 1 : G.
60536. 1:4.
60 541. 1 : 30.
60542. 1:15. 60 543. 1 : 5.
th
60.536. Electric Dancing Balls, Figure, with metal mounts, on stand (M. P. 10
s. d.
edn.,
th
IV, 1, Fig. 150; 9 edn., Ill, Fig. 162; Gan.-Eein., Fig. 754) O.JO.
60.537. Electric Mortar (W. D., Fig. 477 [452]) 0. L'.
60.538. Apparatus for Igniting Ether, F i.g u r e (W. D., Fig. 450 [423]) 0. 1.6
U0.539. -- idem, different pattern, Figure (M. P. 9
th
edn., Ill, Fig. 166) 0. 1'.
60,540. --idem, Figure (Kolbe-Skellon, Introduction to Electricity, Part I, Fig. 47) 0.10.
<>o,54l. Apparatus for explaining Potential Difference and Potential Drop, Figure (Hb'fler,
Physik, 1904, p. 438), comprising 1 small table with ebonite top, 2 insulating stands,
2 wood rods 3 m
long (folding), and 6 electroscopes, without influence machine . . . 1.10. (I
60.542. - -
idem, vertical pattern, Figure 0. 15. I)
60.543. Press with Portrait Pattern, Figure, for producing a portrait of Benjamin Frank-
lin by an electric discharge 0.13. o
A placed on the baseboard of the press and on top
piece of silk is of this silk ;i pattern portrait
of cardboard; the pattern is coated externally on one side with tinfoil,this side must face upwards.
The pattern is then covered with a piere of gold leaf in such manner that it also touches the (wo
tinfoil sheets; a second piece of board is placed on top and the press screwed down so as to expose
the gold leaf to the discharge.
60.544. Electrostatic Motor, on stand, Figure (Fr. phys. Techn. II, 1, Fig. 88). . . . 0. .
(1. si:.:.. :.Ti7. :,; is. :.u.->.

ran
5739, ::<*(..
Auxiliary Apparatus for Influence Machines. 827
60 544. 60545. 1:4. 60 545 a. 1:5.
60 546. 1 : 6.
60547. 1:8. 60 549. 1 : 4. 60 550. 1 : 5.
60.545. Electrostatic Rotary Field Motor, as suggested by Arno, Figure (Ztschr. f.'d. phys.
u. chem. U. 7, p. 2) ~. . .' . 1. 5.
- - i d e m,
(50,545 a. Figure, for building up with Holtz clamps. Price, without latter
(cf. No. 60,172) (Ztschr. f. d. phys. u. chem. U. 7, p. 4) 0.10.0
- -
60.546. idem, with electric needle, Figure (Ztschr. f. d. phys. u. chem. U. 7, p. 3),
without the Holtz clamps illustrated (cf. No. 60,172) 0. 8.
60.547. Electrostatic Double Roller, Figure (Ztschr. f. d. phys. u. chem. U. 7, p. 2) . 2. 10.
60.548. Electric Thunder Cloud (Kohler's) (Ztschr. f. d. phys. u. chem. U. 21, p. 113) . . 0. 10.
th
60.549. Apparatus for Demonstrating the Electric Action of Points,
th
Figure (M. P. 10 edn.,
IV, 1, Fig. 154; 9 edn., Ill, Fig. 167) 0.12.0
60.550. Smoke Condenser, Figure, for demonstrating the disappearance of smoke by

radiant electricity; height of glass: 31 cm (Gan.-Eein. Fig. 758) 1. 0.
Cl. 5016, 5701, 5700,

5702,
5704, 2153, 2151.
828 Static Electricity. No. fiu
60 555. 1 : (i.
60556. 1 : 10.
60 554. 1 : 4.
60552. 1:4.
60 557. 1 : 5. 60 558. 1 : 4. 60 559. 1 : 5. 60 560. 1 : 3.
s. (1.
60.552. Fulminating Tube, Fig u r c, 40 cm long 0. 4.
60.553. --idem, 75 cm long 0. 6.0

60.554. Fulminating Flask, Leyden jar 160 mm high and 80 mm wide, coated externally
with square shaped pieces 0. 6.0
60.555. Fulminating Slab, of glass, Figure, with tinfoil figure pasted on, 22x28 cm,
on stand 0. 18.
60.556. Fulminating Slab (Pfaundler's), Figure, with circular shape magnesium powder
coating 1. 0.0
This fulminating slab is worked by a continuous spark-current of an induction coil or an in-
fluence machine. The sparks jump from the pointed electrode on to the plate, glide over the magm-sinm
coating with an accompaniment of striking luminous phenomena, being finally carried off on the
external annular coating of tinfoil.
60.557. Electric Tourbillion, as suggested by Griiel, for showing the electric effect
Figure,
of points (Kleiber, Pliys. f. Gymn. Fig. 287) o. 18.0
60.558. Cup and Ball, Figure, on stand 0.12.0
th
60.559. Henley's Quadrant Electrometer (M. P. lo lh edn., IV, 1, Fig. 138; 9 edn., Ill, Fig. 144;
Gan.-.Man. Fig. till); (lan.-Kcin. Fig. 711), with base, Figure 0. 12.0
60.560. Apparatus Proving that the same Kinds of Electricity repel each other, F i g u r e,
for
consisting of three metal rings which assume right angles relative to each other when
charged with electricity 0. ll'.
io,56l. Apparatus for piercing Thin Glass, Figure (W. D. Fig. 473 [448]) 0. 5. (I
(1. 2155,21:16. 1711. 171)6,

57&I, 21B1.21f,L', I'liiH.
NO. IKK.Tn. Auxiliary Apparatus for Influence Machines. 829
60 567. 1 : 3. 60 568. 1 : 3.
60.562. Apparatus for Piercing Glass up to 2 thick, mm Figure th

(M. P. 9 edn., Ill, Fig. 218; s. d.
Gan.-Man. Fig. 670; Gan.-Eein. Fig. 793) . . . 1. 4.
60.563. i d e m,
- -
horizontal pattern, for piercing Glass Plates up to 15 thickness, mm
Fig u r e (M. P. 9 th edn., Ill, Fig. 219), by means of the sparks from an influence
machine or an induction coil 1. 4.0
60.564. Apparatus for splintering Glass Vessels (W. D. Fig. 474 [449]) 0. 2.0
60.565. idem (M. P. 10 edn., IV, 1, Fig. 202; 9 edn., Ill, Fig. 220; M. T., Fig. 168),
- - th th
with shielding tube and 6 spare tubes 0. 6.
60.566. Insulating Stand with wood base, ebonite pillar and hollow metallic table, Figure 1. 4.
60.567. Apparatus for showing the difference between the two kinds of electricity, Figure
(W. D., Fig. 451 [424]) 1. 0.
60.568. Electric Thermometer (Kinnerslcy's), Figure (W. D., Fig. 476 [451]) 0. 6.
60.569. Electric Air Thermometer (Riess'), Figure (W. D., Fig. 478 [453]; Gan.-Eein..
Fig. 790; Gan.-Man. Fig. 669) 2. 0.
60.570. Electric Air Thermometer (Grimsehl's) (Grimsehl, Fig. 753) 0. 12.
Cl. 1717, 2166. 2168,

171*. 2171.
2169, 217U.
830 Static Electricity. No. 60571
60571. 1:3. 60 573. 1 : 8.
60 576 A. 60 576 B.
60.571. Apparatus for showing the magnetic effect of the Discharge Shock, Figure (M. P.
(1.
9 lh edn., Ill, Fig. 251; Gan.-Rein., Fig. 792). Price without the Leyden jar shown in the
illustration 0. 7. (I
60.572. Apparatus for showing the inductive effect of a Discharge Shock, as suggested by
Friedr. C. G. Miiller (M. T. Fig. 169) ,
1.10.0
th
60.573. --idem, as suggested by Eiess, Figure (M. P. 9 edn., Ill, Fig. 738) . . . 3. (i. I)
see No. 60,334 u

idem, as suggested by Kolbe, 1. I.
Apparatus for demonstrating Lines of Force, as suggested by Kolbe, see No. 60,337 . 0. 6. (>
60.576. Apparatus for demonstrating Lines of Force, as suggested by Seddig (Phys. Ztschr. 5,
th
1904, p. 403; M. P. 10 edn., IV, 1, p. 231), for the line of force images illustrated
in Figs. 60,576 A D
(cf. also Gan.-Rein., Fig. 727)
1. 4.0
60.577. Electric Egg, Figure, for demonstrating the Electric Phenomena in Vacuo (Gan.-
1. 7.
Man., Fig. 677; Gan.-Rein., Fig. 788)
60,577 a. --
idem, Figure, with holders for inserting carbons for producing an arc . 1.10.0
60,577 b. - - idem, entirely of glass
0. 18.0
00,578. Geissler Tube, Figure, with glass stopcock and base, for placing on the air pump,
for the same purpose 0. 16.0
Shaking and Rubbing Tubes, as suggested by Geissler. for phenomena in vacuo or in spaces
filledwith gases, also for flmiresccncc phenomena: see under Geissler Tubes in section
Galvanism.
Leyden Jars, F g u re, with excellent insulating properties of flint glass (Gan.-Man., Fig. 653;
i
(Ian. -Rein.. Fig. 765).

List No. 60,579 60,580 60,581
16 26 -10 cm high
0. 4. 0. 8. 0. 12.
Cl. L'172, 1'MVl.

.M;J:I. 5626.
No fifljsl. Demonstration of Lines of Force. Leyden Jars. 831
60 576 C. 60 576 D.
60 577 a. 1:8. 60 580. 1 : 6. 60 582. 1 : 8.
60 583. 1 : 4. 60577. 1:7. 60 584. 1 : 8.
s. d.
60.582. Leyden Jar, 26 cm high, Figure, with terminals for both coatings, on wood board 1. 0.
60.583. Leyden Jar, Figure, with removable coating, conical Form, with ebonite handle
(Gan.-Man. Fig. 657; Gan.-Eein. Fig. 768) 0. 8.
60.584.
-- idem, cylindrical form, 26 cm high, Figure j
0. 14.
I 1.5627, 562S.
5348. 2174.217.'i.4511,
2176, JII7K. 2177.
832 Static Electricity. No. 60 ;><:.
60 585 60 587. 1:5 1:12. 60 596 60 598. 1 : 8 1 : 20.
60 606. 1 : 5. 60 607. 1 : 6.
s. d.
Leyden Jar Battery, Figure, consisting of 4 jars (Gan.-Man., Fig. 654; Gan.-Bein., Fig. 771,
without the electrometer illustrated in the book).
List No. 60,585 60,586 60,587
16 26 40 cm high
1.12.0 2.8.0 3. 10.
Leyden Jar Battery of 6 jars.

List No. 60,588 60,589 60,590
16 26 40 cm high
2. 8. 3. 12. 4. 10.
Leyden Jar Battery of 9 jars.

List No. 60,591 60,592 60,593
16 26 40 cm hiirh
3. 4. 4. 16. 6.0.0
60,594. Cascade Battery with 4 Leyden jars in series, 16 cm high (M. P.

10 th edn., I\. 1.
2. 10.
Fig. 205; 9"> edn., Ill, Fig. 214; Gan.-Rein., Fig. 77M)
with 6 jars 3. Id. d

t;ii..v.t5. idem,
Cascade Battery with Mach Commutating Device for put ting the Leyden jars in parallel also.
Figure (M. P. 10 th edn.. IV. 1, Fig. 20S; it" edn.. III. Fig. 215). with
1
jars. ''>
List No. 60,596 60,597 60,598

16 26 40 cm liiuli
4.0.0 6. 10. 9.0.0

- i d c in, with <;
jar>.
List No. 60,599 60,600 60,601
16 L'fi Iti cm high
6.0.0 10. 0. 13. 10.
Cl. 2178, L'lT'.l.
2180, 21808.
No. 60612. Condensers. 833
60 611. 1 : 8.
60 608. 1 : 5.
60 612. 1 : 7. 60 613. 1 : 6.
Cascade Battery with commutating device, with 9 jars. s. d.
List No. 60,602 60,603 60,604

16 26 40 cm high
8. 0. 13. 0. 17. 10.
60,605. Lane's Measuring Jar, with 1 jar, on iron base (M. P. 10 th edn., IV, 1, Fig. 209;
9 th edn., Ill, Fig. 199) 1. 0.0
60,606.
- -
idem, with micrometer adjustment, Figure 1.14.0
60.607.
- -
idem, with 2 jars, Figure (W. D. Fig. 469 [444]), can also be used for the
Knochenhauer-v. Oettingen Experiment for showing the oscillating discharge .... 1. 4.0
60.608. Condenser (Weinhold's), Figure

(W. D. Fig. 459 [434]), for accumulation experi-
ments. Diameter of metal plates: 21 cm, on glass pillar and base, with elder pith pendu-
lums and a copper- and zinc-strip for galvanic electricity 1.10.0
60.609. --idem, as modified by Prof. Motz, with 1 ball underneath and 2 balls above 1. 10.
Condensers, as suggested by Bruno Kolbe: see No. 60,319 on p. 812 ( 1. 8. 0) and No. 60,326
on p. 813 ( 2. 5. 0).
60.611. Condenser, as suggested by Kohlrausch, Figure th

(M. P. 10 edn., IV, 1, Fig. 185;
9 th edn., Ill, Fig. 198), with round plates of 160 mmuniversally adjustable and pris-
matic guide 4. 0.0
60.612.
- - i d e m, F i
g u r e, with Micrometer Adjustment for the plate distance . . . . 5. 0.0
Cl. 2186, 2187,
3855, 2188. 53
834 Static Electricity. No. 60613-
60 614 A. 60 614 B.
60 620. 2 : 5. 60 623. 1 : 5.
60.613. Condenser, as No. 60,611, very massive pattern, Figure on p. 833, without micro- s- d.
meter adjustment for the plate distance 6. 10.
60.614. Cylindrical Condenser, as suggested by Gerdium, Pigs. and B, permitting of aA

measurable variation of capacity between 20 and 500 cm (Ztschr. f. d. phys. u. chem.
U. 18, p. 291; M. P. 10 th edn., IV, 1, Figs. 186 and 187) '. 7. 0.
60.615. idem, with Certificate of Calibration of the Physikalisch-Technische Eeichs-

anstalt 8. 5.
th
60.620. Spark Micrometer, as suggested by Eiess, Figure
(M. P. 9 edn., Ill, Fig. 202),
comprising 2 metal spheres on glass pillars, 1 of which can be adjusted by a micrometer
screw in a graduated .slider 2.10.0
60.621. Discharger, simple, with ebonite handle 0. 4.
60.622. idem, with 2 ebonite handles and knuckle joint,

- -
Figure (Gan.-Man. Fig. 655;
Gan.-Eein. Fig. 761) 0. 8.
60.623.
-- idem, with 1 glass handle and knuckle joint, span 35 cm. Figure . , . o. 10.
60.624. Discharger, as suggested by Eiess, Figure

(W. D., Fig. 468 [443]; Gan.-Eein.,
Fig. 772), for Leyden jar batteries, on iron base 1. 0.
Cl. 5678, .1077, 2182,

2181,2183.
No. GO 633. Condensers, Dischargers 835
60 627. 1 : 6. 60 628. 1 : 10. 60 633. 1 : 8.
S. d.
60.625. Henley's Discharger, Figure (W. D. Fig. 466 [441]) 1. 0.0

60.626.
- -
idem, with interchangeable zinc balls specially given in 1. 2.0
th
(M. P. 10 edn., IV, 1, Figs. 178 and 179; 9 edn., Ill,
th
60.627. Franklin's Plate, Figure
Figs. 193 and 194; Gan.-Rein. Fig. 764), of glass, on insulating base and with suspended
pendulum 0.15.0
th
60.628. Franklin's Fulminating Plate, Figure (M. P. 9 edn., Ill, Fig. 237), with a connected
coating on one side and a cut out coating on the other 0.18.0
60.629. Rosetti's Fulminating Plate, Figure (W. D. Fig. 460 [435]), with stand . . . 0. 18.
60.630. Glass Slab, with connected coating, for using Eosetti's Fulminating Plate as a Frank-
lin Plate 0. 3.0
60.631. Glass Slab, with cut out coating, for using Eosetti's Fulminating Plate as a Franklin
Fulminating Plate 0. 3.0
60.632. Tower with Lightning Conductor, Figure, for igniting ether 0.10.0
60.633. Apparatus for Explaining the Action of the Lightning Conductor, as suggested by
Harris, Figure 2. 0.0
Cl. 2184, 5752, 2185, 2192,
2189,2190,2193. 53*
836 Static Electricity. Nil. 60634
60 634. 1 : 6.
60 635. 1 : 8.
60640. 1 : 10. 60637. 1:16. 60 639.
B. a.
60.634. House with Tower and Lightning Conductor, Figure 2. 8.0

A small vessel, containing spirit, is placed in the
tower and the sheet iron vessel placed in the
house is filled with a mixture of house gas and airi and well corked. A charged Leyden Jar is
placed in the neighbourhood of the sphere of the lightning conductor and discharged. The spirit- and
the gas-mixture are then ignited; the former commences to burn and the latter forces the stopper
out with a bang; the roof of the house is forced out and the walls collapse.
60.635. Aluminium LeafElectroscope, as suggested by Saussure, for Atmospheric Electricity,

Figure, with ivory scale and brass conducting rod, 70 cm higli the base can be ;
detached (Gan.-Man. Fig. 871; Gan.-Eein. Fig. 1043) 1. 10. o
Portable Electrometer and Flame Collector, as suggested by Exner : see Nos. 60,191 and 60,191 a
on p. 801.
Electrometer for Atmospheric Electricity, as suggested by Bruno Kolbe: see No. 60,338 on
p. 814.
60.637. Leyden Jar (Lodge's), Figure, with elder pith pendulums on both coatings (Lot! in .
Neueste Anschauungen iiber Elektrizitat [Modern Views of Electricity], German by

Wachsnnith, Leipzig, 1896, Fig. 9 d) 1. o. o
60.638. Hydraulic Model of a Lodge Leyden Jar, Figure (loo. cit. Fig. 12) 4. 0. o
By the aid of this model all phenomena attendant on the charging and discharging of Leyden
.lars and the analogous mechanical actions can be clearly explained. A rubber bellows represents the
dielectric,and the inner space of the rubber bellows, which is tilled with water, corresponds to the
internal coating, while the intermediate space between the rubber bellows and the glass bulb visible
in the illustration (which, as well as the entire apparatus, is filled with water) represents the. outer
coating. The two elder pith pendulums of Apparatus No. (in.ti.'JT are represented by pressure gauges
and the source of electricity by a water pump. .
[_"; ^
60.639. Apparatus for showing Electric Constriction (change of volume of a l.rvilrii ,Iar when
charged), as suggested by IMitor, Figure (Fr. phys. Teohn. II, 1, p. 100) .... 1. .">.<>
The internal coating is represented by the liquid in A. and the outer coating by the liquid be-
tween A and B. The two conducting liquids in Aa and lib are electrified by opposite kinds of electri-
CI 4IMIS, 1MIII 'il:
No. 60 644. Oscillatory Discharges. 837
60643. 1 : 10. 60644.
city when the cocks R and R' are closed. The liquid rises in T
and falls in T. After discharge d.
the difference in level disappears suddenly to the amount corresponding to the residuum.
60,640. Hydraulic Analogon of the oscillatory discharge of a Leyden Jar, Figure (Gan.- '
Eein. Fig. 786) 1. 0.
60.641. Apparatus for Demonstrating the Oscillatory Character of Leyden Jar Discharges,
Figure 4. 10.
Asheet of cardboard is rapidly passed by the points of a discharger. Tne secondary coil of an
induction coil is connected up at the points, the interrupter of this induction coil being short circuited
and replaced by the interrupter fitted on the apparatus, and the latter interrupter interrupting the current
at the moment the cardboard sheet begins its motion. A more or less narrow row of holes is produced
on the cardboard strips according as whether a large or small capacity is switched on to the points
of the discharger.
60.642. Lens Disc, as suggested by Boys, for the same purpose, Figure 4. 0.0
An accurately balanced metal disc carries 6 lenses, of which each two are at the same distance
from the axis. Each of these pairs is therefore at a different distance from the axis. If the axis is set
rotating quickly and the image of a spark projected on to a screen by the three pairs of lenses the
result is a concentric ring of light in which the oscillations can be plainly seen.
60.643. --idem,
Figure, with protecting box, D. C. motor for 65, 110 125 or 220
to 240 volts, current regulator, spark gap and screen mounted on a board 12. 0.0
Oscillation Analysing Apparatus, as suggested by Grimsehl: see Section on Mechanics.
Wave Tube, as suggested by Maxwell, for demonstrating the charge and discharge from a
Mechanical Point of view: see Section on Mechanics.
60.644. Apparatus (Lippmann's), Figure, for showing that the discharge of a Leyden Jar
can produce mechanical motion and that by the same motion the Jar can again receive
a charge (Fr. phys. Techn. II, 1, Fig. 187; Gan.-Man. Fig. 668) 3. 0.
Cl. 5281, 5353,

5378, 5605.
60 645. 1 : 8. 60 646. 1 : 8.
60 648. 1 : 6. 60 649. 1 : 5. 60 651. 1 : 4. 60 652. 1 : 4.
60.645. Apparatus for approximately determining Dielectric Constants, as suggested s. <\.

by Mach,
th
Figure (M. P. 10
ttt
edn., IV, 1, Fig. 212; 9 edn., Ill, Fig. 212) 2. 6.
60.646. 2 Lodge Leyden Jars, Figure, for demonstrating Electric Resonance (Ztschr. f.
(1. phys. u. chem. U. 3, p. 249), 16 cm-high 1. 6. <>
One provided with a closing wire which contains a spark gap bounded by 2 brass
of the jars is
spheres; the other contains a fully closed circuit, which, however, is variable along its length by a
sliding piece of wire. In addition, the inner coating of this latter jar is connected to the outer coating
by a closing circuit interrupted only by a small spark gap. Both jars are placed alongside each other
in such manner, that the closing circuits run parallel to each other (not as shown in the above figure).
If now the first jar is excited with the fixed circuit by means of an induction apparatus, the second
jar is also discharged at each passage of the spark by the action of resonance, assuming, of course,
that the sliding contact occupies the correct position. Not too slight a motion of the sliding contact
disturbs the resonance and stops the secondary discharge. Induction is also avoided by interposing
a metal screen between the two jars; glass plates or wood screens have, on the other hand, no influence, j
60.647. idem, 26 cm high .1.16.0
60,648. Indicator (Discharge Tube) (Noack's), Figure, for demonstrating Resonance

Vibrations with the apparatus No. 60,646 and 60,647 (Ztschr. f. d. phys. u. chem. U. 15.
0. 4.
p. 95)
indicator consists of an angular shaped Geissler tube which is fixed to the Lodge Jar with
The
threads instead of the spark gap, in such manner that the tinfoil coatings on both ends make good
contact with the metal parts of the jars. The tube is rendered luminous with each discharge.
60,649. Apparatus, as suggested by Puccianti, Figure, for the projection lantern (cf. M
P. 10 lh edn., IV, 1, 'p. 272) 0.16.0
A
a glass tube filled with cotton wool, this tube (icing continued as a capillary B.
is If air
bubbles are then passed through A into the vessel filled with petroleum, the bubbles are repelled by
the metal sphere P when this is electrified, equally so whether the electricity is positive or negative.
60,650. Rubber Bellows for above 0. 4.0
60,65 1 .
Hauy's Apparatus for investigating the Electricity produced in Minerals by Temperat urc-
for fluorspar and tourmaline, with insulating stand 0. is. o
clianges or by 'Pressure, Figure,
60.652. Kundt's Pyro-Electric Apparatus, Figure (Wiedem. Annul. 20, p. 592, 1883; 2s.
p. 145, 1886; Chwolson, IV, 1, p. 253) 2. o.o
Cl. 5685, 2195,

2196,5025.2058,5624.
No. 60684. Voltaic Electricity. Section 1: Galvanic Sources of Supply. 839
60 682. 1 : 2.
60 680. 1 : 5.
60 684. 1 : 6. 60 683. 1 : 4.
Voltaic Electricity.
Section I: Galvanic Sources of Current.
Apparatus for demonstrating Potential Drop along a Conductor traversed by a Current gene- d.
rated by means of an Influence Machine or an Electric Machine: see Nos. 60,541 and
60,542 on p. 826.
60.680. Bow-shaped Joint of Copper and Zinc, for Galvani's Experiment on the frog's leg,
th th
Figure (M. P. 10 edn., IV, 1, p. 315; 9 edn., Ill, p. 326; Gan.-Man. Fig. 690;
Gan.-Eein. Fig. 802) 0. 3.
Accessories for the Voltaic Fundamental Experiments as

suggested by Noack.
(Ztschr. z. Ford. d. phys. U. 1885, p. 177, cf. also Gan.-Man., p. 757.)
60.681. 2 Zinc Plates, 80 mm

diameter, quite plane, 1 varnished on one side, the other metallic;
2 similar Copper Plates, 2 Handles for these plates 1 Flexible, Circular Copper Strip and
;
1 Zinc Strip, with ebonite handles; 1 Mica Disc, 160 mm

diameter, and an 80 Cloth Disc. mm 1. 8.0
As regards an electrometer for No. 60,681 we can recommend No. 60,704, or, better
No. 60,705.
still,
60.682. 3 Copper and 3 Zinc Plates and 2 insulating handles for the Fundamental Voltaic Ex-
periment, as suggested by Grimsehl, Figure, for use with Grimsehl Electrometer
No. 60,202, or any other sensitive leaf electrometer (M. P. 10 th edn., IV, 1, p. 320).
2 Copper Plates and 1 Zinc Plate are lacquered, the remaining plates being bare. . 1.10.0
60.683. Lead Base, Copper and Zinc Strips, Leather Disc and Beaker, for carrying out the
th
experiments as in Fig. 60,683 with plates 60,682 (M. P. 10 edn., IV, 1, Fig. 288) . 1. 0.
60.684. Volta's Pair of Plates with magnetic needle, Figure i

0.-16.
Cl. 3456, 5683.

5561, 56S1.
840 Voltaic Electricity. Section 1: Galvanic Sources of Current. No. 60 KH~> -
60685 60688. 1 : 5 1 : 12
60 693. 1 : 8. 60 703. 1 : 5. 60734. 1:5.
Volta's Pile, Figure, of copper and zinc plates with felt between, insulated with ebonite
(Gan.-Man., Fig. 687; Gan.-Eein. Fig. 806).
List No. 60,685 60,686 60,687 60,688
No. of pairs of Plates 20 30 40 50
Diameter of Plates 40 50 60 60 mm
1. 0. 1. 10. 2. 0. 3. 0.
Zambonic Pile, Figure, of gold and silver paper, in glass tube with terminals at the poles.
List No. 60,689 60,690 60,691 60,692 60,693 60,694
No. of pairs of Plates 1000 2000 3000 4000 5000 6000
Diameter of Plates 28 28 35 35 40 50 mm
1.4.0 1.10.0 1.16.0 2.5.0 3.10.0 5.0.0
- i d ein, open, the discs strung on ebonite rod, with terminals at the ends. The internal
resistance can be regulated within certain limits by pressing the discs together by means
of a screw device. Any pressures can be taken off by the aid of a needle with terminal
let into the pile at the side.
List No. 60,695 60,696 60,697 60,698 60,699 60,700
No. of pairs of Plates 1000 2000 3000 4000 5000 6000
Diameter of Plates 28 28 .'55 .'.."> 40 50 mm
0. 18. 1. 4. 1. 10. 1. 16. 3. 0. 4. 0.
60,257. Pile Electrometer (Bohnenberger-Fechner's), Figure . . . . 2. 15.0
60,702. idem (Bennet's), Figure (M. P. 9

th
edn., Ill, Fig. 292) 2. 0.0
60.703. Pile Electrometer (/tschr. z. Ford. d. phys. I".. 18S6. p. 11!>), F g u re. for objective i
demonstration, with degree graduation on glass, pile conducted off in the centre . . 3. 5.0
60.704.
-- idem, Figure, with open piles, variable sensitivity 3.15.0
Cl. 219S, 2200, 2201,
2199, 391, 392.
No. 60 710. Voltaic Piles, Electrometers. 841
60 705.
60 708.
60 709. 1 : 4. 60 710. 1 : 6.
s. d.
th
60,705. Electrometer (HankePs) (M. P. 10 edn., IV, 1, Fig. 257), Figure, amber-insulated 9. 10.
60,258. Water-Battery for charging Quadrant Electrometers and the Hankel Electrometer,
Figure 60,258 on p. 808, 144 copper-zinc cells on ebonite stand (W. D. p. 759 [700]) 3. 0.0
60.707. Water Battery (Rowland's), 400 cells (Ztschr. f. d. phys. u. chem. U. 1, p. 120; W.
D. p. 760) 3. 5.0
60.708. Electrometer with Quartz Fibres and microscopic reading, as suggested by Prof.
E. Wichert, Figure, very sensitive and provided with excellent insulation. In case 9.10.0
60,709. Discharge Electrometer (Weinhold's), Figure (W. D., Fig. 506 [479]) 1. 7.0
th
60,710. Quadrant Electrometer (Thomson-Mascart's),
th
Figure
(M. P. 10 edn., IV, 1,
Fig. 253; 9 edn., Ill, Fig. 180), without replenisher, with adjustable bifilar suspension,
closed by metal cylinder, Maxwell vane, quadrants heavily gilt, excellent amber-
insulation . 11. 0.
Cl. 5688, 5691,

2204, 4094.
842 Voltaic Electricity. Section 1: Galvanic Sources of Current. Xo. 60711
60711. 1 : 5. 60719. 1 : G. 60720. 1 : 3.
60,711. Quadrant Electrometer (Thomson-Weinhold's), (W. 1). Figs. 499503

Figure i * 1-
th
[472 476]; Gan.-Man., Fig. 649), with replenisher; Maxwell vane (M. P. 10 edn., IV,
th
1, Fig. 254; 9 edn., Ill, Fig. 182), all internal parts heavily gilt; with mirror, and
arranged for subjective as well as objective reading, with excellent amber insulation IL'. o. o
(Hi. 7 12. Replenisher (Thomson's), for explaining the mode of action and for practical use,
Figure (cf. Fr. phys. Techn. II, 1, Fig. 65) 1. 4.
Accessories for Quadrant Electrometers Nos. 60710 and 60711.
60,713. Wall Bracket and Wall Arm" for a paraffin, gas or incandescent lam]) (i. is. o
lid, 714. Protecting Case for Quadrant Electrometers Nos. lio.710 and 60,711 0.10.
The protecting case is made of pasteboard covered with calico, ocing suspended from a ceiling
pulley. When the electrometer is in use, the case is raised up, and v lien the' electrometer is not in use.
the case protects it entirely from dust. The electrometer can thus always maintain one. position.
Cl. 5255. 33,
2206, 2214, 220S.
No. 60724. Quadrant Electrometers. 843
60 721. 1 = 6. 60 723. 1 : 6. 60 724. 1 : 9.
60,715. Scale for Objective Reading, 2 m long, of /paper, with wood frame and legs, divided s. d.
every 5 cm 0. 8.
(in. 710. Paraffin Lamp with slotted chimney, on raised base 0. 8.
60.717. Argand or Auer Burner with slotted chimney, on adjustabel raised base 0.15.0
60.718. Electric Incandescent Lamp, on stand and with shielding cylinder, Figure, for
quadrant electrometers and mirror galvanometers 0. 18.
The glow lamp is of the long filament type. The voltage should be given when ordering. If
this is not stated we supply 110-volt lamps.
(in. 719. Demonstration Quadrant Electrometer, Figure, simple pattern, in wood house,
well suited for teaching purposes (Stewart &
Gee, Practical Physics, Fig. 114) ... 3. 4.0
00,720. Quadrant Electrometer (Dolezalek's), Figure

(Ztschr. fur Instrumentenkunde, 21,
p. 345), for measuring small potential differences .of approx. 1 to 0.001 volt .... 8. 0.
The needle is of a very light type, its weight with mirror being only 0.2 gram. It is suspended
from a quartz fibre rendered conductive by hygroscopic salts and is so formed as to be self-damping, j
It is charged with 50 to 200 volts.
00,721. - - idem, modified by Wien, Figure, with tall base and platinum point, in order
to enable the electrometer to be charged from underneath, also with calcium chloride
desiccator; for measuring small potential differences of approx. 1 to 0.001 volt; with
amber insulation and case of Quartz Fibres 10. 0.
60,722. Case of Quartz Fibres for Nos. 60,720 and 60,721 0. 5.
iid.723. Quadrant Electrometer (Elster &

Geitel's), Figure, with first quality insulation,
also suitable for investigating radio-active substances (Wiedem. Ann. 64, p. 680) 12. 10.
. .
The damping, needle adjustment, torsion of the suspension device and the drying arrangement
(with sodium) can be regulated independently of each other.
The instrument has variable sensitivity. A deflection of 1000 scale divisions can be attained
with 1 volt.
(io.724. Cylindrical Quadrant Electrometer (Edelmann's), Figure, with cast zinc wall
bracket (Fr. phys. Techn. II, 1, p. 98) 14.10.0
The vane and quadrants consist of elongated cylindrical sections, the vane being adjusted by '
a small magnet. Raw silk fibre suspension; vane charged by water battery Nos. 60,706 or 60,707.
The instrument is very sensitive and easy to manipulate.
For Dry Piles Jor Charging Needles of Quadrant Electrometers see Nos. 60,689 to 60,700.
Cl. 3951, 5201, 5776.

844 Voltaic Electricity. Section 1: Galvanic Sources of Current. Xo. 60 72 J
60 725 B. 1:4.
60727. 1:6.
60 725 A. 1 : 8.
60 726. 1 : 6. 60729. 1:4.
60.725. Mirror Electrometer for High Potentials, as suggested by Heydweiler, Figs. A

and B (Ztschr. f. d. phys. u. chem. U. 6, p. 255; Ztschr. fur Instrumentenkunde 12,
p. 377; Elektrotechnische Ztschr. 1893, p. 29), with 2 bifilar suspensions, easily inter-
'
changeable, for measurements of 3000 to 27,000 volts and of 6000 to 50,000 volts. . 10. 0.
The instrument is essentially a torsion balance and has the advantage that the potentials to
be measured are nearly proportional to the square root of the scale readings. The results are very
accurate.
The electrometer has a good damping arrangement.
Subjective and Objective Reading Devices for Electrometers Nos. 60719 to 60725: see Mirror
Galvanometers.
60.726. Absolute Electrometer (Electrometer Balance with protecting ring condenser), as

suggested by Thomson-Kirchhoff Figure, without balance
,
16. 0. d
The lower of two circular plane parallel condenser plates of gilt brass is fixed in an insulating
material, while the upper is suspended on a sensitive balance in the manner of a balance pan.
The balance suitable for the above is No. 51,542 on p. 234.
Standard Cells.
60.727. Standard Copper-Zinc Cell (Weinhold's), Figure (\V. I), p. 752 [694]) 0.10.
60.728. Standard Cell (Kittler's), with chemically pure copper and zinc plates, in polished
oak case with handles 2.10. (i
Sulphuric acid of 1.075 specific gravity at 80 C. and a solution of copper-sulphate of 1.19 sp.
gravity is used for charging. E. M. F. 1.182 v. at 15.5 C.
60.729. Standard Cell (Fleeming's),

th
Figure
(M. P. 9 edn., Ill, Fig. 304; Kolbe-Skellon,
Introduction to Electricity, Part II, Fig. 113; Can. -Man. Fig. 726) 1.1-2.0
60.730. Clark Standard Cell, self-filling type as suggested by Ostwald, Figure, with
pole terminals 0. 1.
<
1.2211, 2212, 5793 .
2213, S850.
No. 60 738. Standard Cells, Demonstration Cells. 845
60730. 1:3. 60 731. 1 : 3. 60732. 1:2. 60 734. 1 : 4.
60737. 1:3. 60 737 a. 1:6. 60738. 1:6.
60.731. Standard Cell (Clark's), Figure, prepared in accordance with the instructions s. d.
of the Eeichsanstalt, with Test Certificate. (M. P. 10 th edn., IV, 1, Fig. 489; Gan.-Eein.,
Fig. 817) 2. 0.
60.732. Standard Cell (Weston's), Figure, with a not fully concentrated solution of cadmium
sulphate, Original Weston Standard Cell, with low internal resistance, without temperature
coefficient, usual type for precision measurements; average value of e. m. f. 1.0190 volt,
th
(M. P. 10 edn., IV, 1, Fig. 490) 2. 0.
- - double form
60.733. idem, (2 separate cells in one case) 3. 0.
60.734. International Weston Standard Cell, Figure, prepared in accordance with the
specification of the International Congress of Electrical Units and Standards, London,
1908, with saturated cadmium sulphate solution with excess of cadmium sulphate
crystals; temperature coefficient: 0.004 per cent per degree, in case suitable for petroleum
bath; without thermometer 1.15.0
60.735.
- -
idem, double form (2 separate cells in one case) 2.15.0
60.736. Thermometer, suitable for above 0. 5.

The testing, verification and determination of temperature coefficient of cells
Nos. 60,732 to 60,735 by the Eeichsanstalt are carried out by the Eeichsanstalt at cus-
tomers' expense.
Galvanic Demonstration-Cells.
60.737. Zinc-Copper Cell with separate carbon electrode, Figure
(Gan.-Man. Fig. 688;
Gan.-Eein. Fig. 803). Dilute sulphuric acid 1 10 used for charging
: is 0. 3.
60,737 a. Demonstration Cell, Figure, for use with Holtz Clamps, without the latter
(see Xo. 60,172, p. 799), with 2 copper plates, 1 zinc and 1 iron plate 0. 8.
60.738. Small Voltaic Cell, as suggested by Kolbe, Figure (Kolbe-Skellon, Introduction to

Electricity, Part II, Fig. 85), on wood board, for charging with dilute sulphuric acid (1 10) : 0. 2.
01.2222, 2220, 2219. 34',

2221, 5760, 579>-.
846 Voltaic Electricity. Section 1: Galvanic Sources of Current. No. 60739
60 741. 1 : 4.
60 740. 3 : 4.
60743. 1 : 3. 60 744. 1:5
60.739. Small Projection Cell (Kolbe's), Figure

(Kolbe-Skcllon, Introduction to Elec- S. (I.
tricity, Part II, Fig. 87), for charging with dilute sulphuric acid (1 10) : i
0. .S.
60.740. Small Constant Cell, as suggested by Kolbe (Kolbe-Skellon, Introduction to Elec-

tricity, Part II, Fig. 92), on wood base, Figure 0. :>. (I
The cell is a sin nil U-shaped Daniell cell, the centre part of which at the lie-nil is pliifij:<'<l
with glass wool so that the liquids slowly ooze through without, however, becoming mixed if tin n 11
is kept still.
60.741. Small Constant Battery, Figure, 5 small Daniell cells as per last item mounted
on a board . 0. 16.0
60.742. 10 Batteries of preceding construction, for high voltages 7. 10.0
60.743. Zinc-Copper Cell, with thermometer between electrodes, F i g 11 r e. for demonstrating

internal heating (M. P. 10 th edn., IV, 1, Fig. 298). Dilute sulphuric acid (1 10) is used :
as electrolyte 0. (i. I)
Cl. 2223. 3465, 5793 b,

5690, 5689.
No. 60 752. Demonstration Cells. 847
60748. 1 : 5. 60747 and 60748. 1 : 8.
60745. 1 :
4.j
60750. 1 : 5. 60751. 60752. 1 : 4.
including stand and seat

d.
60.744. Zinc-Copper Cell, with gas generating tube, Figure, s.
(M. P. 10
th
edn., IV, 1, Fig. 299) 0.12.0
60.745. Connecting Piece with platinum foil, for proving the heating of the external circuit,
Figure; price does not include the Holtz Clamps illustrated, No. 60,172 (M. P. 10 th edn.,
IV, "1, Fig. 301). The cell most suitable for this is No. 60,746 0. 3.0
60.746. Wollaston Cell, Figure, with simple carbon plate and U-shaped zinc plate . . 0. 6.0
60.747. Cell (Kolbe's), Figure, with, however, only 1 each zinc and carbon plate,
Trough
for demonstrating the influence of internal resistance (Kolbe-Skellon, Introduction to
Electricity, Part II, Figs. 120 and 121) 1.10.0
60.748.
-- idem, with separating wall and a pair of extra plates, F i
g .u r e 2. 0.0
60.749. Folding Cell (Grimsehl's) (Ztschr. f. d. phys. u. chem. U. 8, 1894, p. 209, Fig. 1). 0.15.0
60.750. Zinc-Copper Cell, as suggested by Friedr. C. G. Miiller, F i

g u r e, for demonstrating
the action of the polarisers (M. T. Fig. 206) 0. 8.0
60.751. Apparatus for demonstrating the E. M. F. at the limits of 2 electrolytes, Figure

(Fr. phys. Techn. II, 1, Fig. 503) 0. 4.0
th
60.752. Reduction-Oxidation Cells, Figure
(Liipke, Eiidorffs Grundrifi der Chemie, 12 edn.,
1902, p. 286) 1. 5.0
The two cells of the series contain each 1 platinum electrode connected by wire leads to a galvano-
meter. 1 cell is charged with a solution of stannic chloride, the other one as well as the syphon
connecting the cells containing an acidulated solution of common salt. If a crystal of mercuric chloride
is placed on the electrode of the last-named cell, the galvanoscope needle deflects in such manner
that this electrode appears as a positive pole.
Cl. 5682, 3504, 2480,
3S74, 5010, 3704.
848 Voltaic Electricity. Section 1 : Galvanic Sources of Current. No. 60753
1 fflWa
3
60 753. 60754 60756. 1:51:6. 60 759 A. 1:4.
60 758 a. 1:3.
60 759 B. 1:9.
60,753. Apparatus as suggested by F. Dolezalek and F. Kriiger, Figure, for demonstrating

the current flowing through a circuit consisting of liquids only (M. P. 10 th edn., IV,
1, Fig. 495 b)
The annular vessel is half filled with a
35% solution of sulphuric acid, the surface of this vessel
being covered with cork discs. A 30%
solution of sodium acetate is introduced above these cork
discs, at one side, up to 20 mm, the other side containing a 20% solution of lithiumchloride up to
the upper edge of the ring. If the circuit so prepared is placed above the small system of magnets
suspended from the stand (the deflections being observed by means of luminous pointer and scale), a
deflection of the luminous index is obtained. If the ring is rotated the pointer moves to the other
side. If the solution is mixed by shaking no deflection is obtained.
Galvanic Cells for Ordinary Use.

The prices of all cells, with the exception of Nos. 60,78560,788 are exclusive of electrolyte.
Bunsen Cell, Figure, with heavily amalgamated zinc cylinder, porous pot and natural
carbon plate, with zinc and carbon pole terminals (Gan.-Man. Fig. 723; Gan.-Kcin.
Fig. 813).
List No. 60,754 60,755 60,756
Length of Carbon Plato 160 210 260 mm
0. 7. 0. 8. 0. 10.
Electrolyte: /inr Cylinder in dilute sulphuric arid. l.Oli sp. gr. (about .~>u rrm II,S0 4 to 1 liter
water), carbon plate in concentrated nitric acid.

-
idem, with tall and wide glass vessel and ebonite cross on bottom, for continuous
working, charging of accumulators, etc.
List No. 60,757 60,758
Length of Carbon Plate 210 2<>U mm
0. 10. 0. 12.
60,758 a. Celluloid Top for Bunsen Cells Nos. iio,7:>7 ami ti(i.7.")S (M. T. Fig. 172), Figure 0.
Cl. 5679, 5781'-, 2^26,

2227, 4517.
No. 60784. Cells for ordinary use. 849
60763. 1:6. 60765. 1:6.
Grove Cell, F i
60,759 A, with zinc cylinder and S-shaped platinum sheet.
g.
List No. 60,759 60,760 60,761
Length and width of platinum sheet 160x60 100x50 60x40 mm
2.0.0 1.4.0 0.16.0
Fig. B shows a battery consisting of 60 cells.
Electrolyte: as in Bunsen Cell.
Daniell Cells, with copper cylinder and zinc cross, Figure (Gan.-Eein., Fig. 809) :
List No. 60,762 60,763 60,764

Height of glass 160 200 250 mm
0.5.0 0.6.6 0.8.0
Electrolyte: porous pot with zinc cross in dilute sulphuric acid 1.06 sp. gr. (about 50 com pure
sulphuric acid to 1 litre water); copper cylinder in saturated solution of sulphate of copper (about
1 part crystallised copper sulphate to 3
parts water).
Cupron Cells, Figure, improved Lelande Cell, regenerable (Cupric oxide-alkali-zinc) ;

ter-
minal voltage per cell about 0.8 volts.
Type I II III IV
List No. 60,765 60,766 60,767 60,768
Length X Width x Height 190x55x170 190x75x240 200x110x280 250x140 370 mm
Normal Current 12 24
8 16 amps. 48
Approx. capacity 50 100 200 400 amp.-hrs.
Caustic Soda with 1%\
0.2 0.4 0.8
Sodium Hyposulphite)
Water
I
60,770
0.0.4
850 Voltaic Electricity. Section 1: Primary Batteries. No. 1:1
60 785. 1 : 6. 60 788. 1 : 7. 60 789. 1 : 6. 60791. 1:5.
Leclanche Cells, Figure, with manganese dioxide cylinder, zinc rod and electrolyte of
sal-ammoniac; used formerly chiefly for house telegraphy and telephony (Gan.-M;m.,
Fig. 725; Gan.-Kein., Fig. 818).
List No. 60,785 60,786
Height 160 250 mm
0. 2. 6 0. 3. 6
Electrolyte: at a height of 16 cm 50 60 grams and at 25 cm 100 grams of sal-ammoniac are
dissolved in water and this is introduced to about 3 cm from the upper edge.
Cells (Fleischer's), Figure, chiefly used at the present time for house telegraphy and
telephony; it is also very practicable for physical purposes with feeble currents.
List No. 60,787 60,788
Height 160 250 mm
0. 3. 0. 4.
Electrolyte: as No. 60,785 and 60,786.
Meidinger's Cell, Figure, balloon cell, chiefly used for telegraphy with closed circuit
current.
List No. 60,789 60,790
Total Height 240 300 mm
0.3.6 0.5.6
Helleson Dry Cells, F i

g u r e,
rements, etc.
List NO. 60,797 60,798 60,799

Total height mm 122 155 180
Mase nun 57x57 63x63
Approx. internal resistance ohms 0.30 <l.2.~>
0. 2. 0. 2. 6
No. i;osi-.'. Primary Batteries. 851
60 806. 1 : 9.
60795. 1 = 4. 60809. 1
Immersion Batteries for potassium bichromate electrolyte, Figure, size of plates s. d.
200 x 100 mm, the plates being raised by means of a handle on stand, with pulleys.
List No. 60,801 60,802 60,803 60,804 60,805 60,806
With 6 8 10 12 16 20 cells
5.2.0 6.16.0 8.5.0 9.12.0 12.16.0 16.0.0
2.5 litres electrolyte as in Nr. 60,780 is necessary for one cell of this size.
The carbon plates of immersion batteries consist of natural gas carbon, the zinc plates of
all
best quality rolled zinc. Tho immersion batteries are so arranged that the glass vessels can be easily
taken out for cleaning.
-idem, Figure, size of plates 180 x 90 mm; the plates are raised by means of a handle
on stand, with pulleys.
List No. 60,807 60,808 60,809 60,810 60,811 60,812
With 6 8 10 12 16 20 cell*
4.10.0 6.0.0 7.5.0 8.8.0 11.4.0 14.0.0
1.4 litre electrolyte as in NO. iiu.780 is necessary for one cell of this size.
(Jl. 2233,
2230, 2234. 54*
852 Voltaic Electricity. Section 1: Primary Batteries. No. 60813-
Si
PIT*
60 840. 1 : 8.
60813. 1:10.
60 825. 1 : 9.
60820. 1:8. 60 841. 1 : 4. 60 844.
Immersion Batteries, simple construction, Figure, size of plates 200 x 100 mm. Plates s. d.
raised by both hands by means of two handles.

List No. 60,813 ^60,814 60,815 60,816 60,817 60,818
With 2 4 6 8 10 12 cells
1.18.0 2.16.0 4.4.0 5.12.0 7.0.0 8.8.0
2.5 litres electrolyte as in No. 60,780 are necessary for one cell of this size.
-idem, Figure, size of plates 180 x 90 mm. Plates raised by both hands by means
of two handles.
List No. 60,819 60,820 60,821 60,822 60,823 60,824
With 2 4 6 8 10 12 cells
1.14.0 2.8.0 3.12.0 4.16.0 6.0.0 7.4.0
1.4 litre electrolyte as in No. 60,780 is necessary for one cell of this size.
60,825. Immersion Battery No. 60,808 mounted ready with Multiple Commutator, Figure 9. 16.
The multiple commutator permits of putting all 8 cells in parallel or series or in two groups of
4 cells each, or, finally, in 4 groups of 2 cells each.
60,82<;. Spare Glass Vessel for Nos. 60,80160,806 and 60,81360,818 0. 3. U
60,827. i d e m, for Xos. 60,80760,812 and 60,81960,824 o. 2.
60.828. Spare Carbon Plate for Immersion Batteries, 200xl(H nun, for Nos. 60,80160,806
and 60,81360,818 0. 2. 6
-- idem, 180x90
60.829. mm, for Nos. 60,80760,812 and Nos. 60,81960,824 . . . 0. 1.8
60.830. Spare Zinc Plate, 1'OOxlOO mm, for Nos. 60,80160,806 ;md Nos. 60,813 60,s 18 0. 2.
60.831.
-- idem, 180x!0 mm, for Nos. 60,8(1760,811' :m<l Nos. C.O.s I '.
60,824. . . . 0. 1. 6
ci. >:>:(... .'_':!, 5100,

.'.':;. Mtt,
No. K0851. Primary Cells, Polarising Cells. 853
60 846. 1 : 5. 60 848. 1 : 5. 60 850. 60851.
60.832. Battery of 30 small Grove Cells (platinum-zinc cells), for working a projection lantern, s. d.
in carrying case 22. 10.

- - with 50 37.10.0
60.833. idem, cells
For Multiple Commutators (Pachy tropes), see Section: Current Conduction and
Distribution.
Electrolytes for Cells.

60.835. Copper Sulphate, crystallised per kg 0. 1.6
60.836. Potassium Bichromate per kg 0. 1.9
60.837. Sodium Bichromate per kg 0. 1.6
60.838. Sal-Ammoniac, technically pure per kg 0. 1.6
60.839. Magnesium Sulphate per kg 0. 0. !)
Polarising Cells and Batteries.

60.840. Polarising Cell with platinum electrodes, Figure 1. 0.0
60.841. Polarising Battery (Weinhold's), Figure (W. D., Fig. 527 [500]), for decomposing
water by means of a single Bunsen or Grove Cell, with four small platinum cells . . 3. 0.0
lh
60.842. Polarising Battery (Poggendorff's) (M. P., 9 edn., Ill, Figs. 418420), with 4 cells
and with mercury switch 3. 6.0
60.843. Poggendorff's Switch, for 4 cells. Price without cells 1. 4.0
60.844. Plante Cell (Secondary Cell), Figure (Gan.-Eein., Figs. 958 and 959), 26 cm high 1. 4.0
60.845. --idem, high 20 cm 0.18.0
60.846.
- -
idem, with commutator for putting in circuit an incandescent wire while dis-
charging, Figure (Gan.-Man., Fig. 830, without the cells illustrated in the book) 1.16.0
60.848. Grove's Gas Cell, Figure (M. P., 10

th
edn., IV, 1, Fig. 502; 9
th
edn., Ill, Fig. 422;
Gan.-Eein., Fig. 957) 1. 1.0
60.849. Gas Cell (W. D., Fig. 526 [499]) 0.15.0
60.850. v. Babo's Apparatus, Figure, for showing the elongation of paladium on absorbing
hydrogen (Fr. phys. Techn. H, 1, Fig. 284) 1. 4.0
60.851. Landolt's Apparatus for the same purpose, Figure, suitable for projection (Fr.
phys. Techn. II, 1, Fig. 285) 1. 4.0
Cl. 4950, 2265, 5016, 5023.

854 Voltaic Electricity. Section 1: Secondary Cells and Batteries. X,,. fill S.VJ
60 854. 1 : 5.
60 953 B. 1 : 8 (Ocelli*).
60 859. 1 : 0. 60878. 1 : 10.
60 855. 1 : 0. 60 953 A. 1:8(6 cells). 60 953 C. 1 : 8 (6 colls).
Accumulators and Accessories.

The use
Accumulators for obtaining a constant and reliable supply of current which
of
is always ready for use cannot be too highly recommended. They are never superfluous
in places where a central station is available. The charging of the accumulators is
carried out either on any direct current plant, a lamp resistance being in circuit, or by
the aid of a switchboard; or supposing that a direct current installation is not available,
they can be charged by a thermopile; or, if this is impossible, with 3 or 4 Bunsen cells.
If an alternating or a 3-phase current lighting plant is available, it is advisable to employ
a rectifier. Precise instructions for the charging and manipulation of the accumulators
arc supplied with each battery. As a rule the battery can be set up in the lecture table.
The mean discharge voltage is about 2 volts per cell.
batteries supplied by us are excellent in their action even when not in constant use.
The Repairs
are practically excluded if the batteries are used to some extent in an appropriate manner.
C.o.sr.i
1
. One each Positive and Negative Accumulator Plate, for demonstration purposes,
o. i. o
grid plates
60.S53. - - i (1 e in, 0. 5.6
60,854. -- idem, large-surface plates. Figure (I. (i.
<;o.x.V>. Demonstration Accumulator, open. Figure, for taking t<> pieces, also suitable for
n
practical purposes; capacity on 3-hour discharge, \'2 ampere-hours 0. In.
Single Accumulators for School use, Figure, portable, built into glass vessels, with
terminals.
Si/e I II III IV V
.Max. charge and discharge current
Amps. 1.5 4
Capacity on 3-hour discharge Amp.-hrs. 4.5
(
'apacit y on 10-hour discharge Amp.-hr. 6.7
List No. 60,856
0. 5.
i (I e m, built into ebonite cell.
List No.
No. tid-ii;'... Accumulators. 855
Batteries of Accumulators, portable, without Multiple

856 Voltaic Electricity. Section 1: Galvanic Sources oJ Current. No. 60870
60 994. 1 : 7.
60 995. 1 : 6. 60 996 A. 1 : 12.
discharging, an ammeter. In addition it is desirable to have a regulating resistance so as to be able to take off
current of any current-density according to requirements. The multiple commutator permits of the cells being
put in parallel for charging and putting them both in series, in groups and in parallel when discharging. For
most purposes an 8-cell battery No. 60,954 at 10. 14. OJsize III) is sufficient. With reference to tho chiiryin.i;-
of accumulators, vide Prof. Friedr. C. G. Muller's work: fiber Aufstellung und Betrieb von Akkumulatorm fin-
den Schulgebrauch", Ztschr. f. d. phys. u. chem. U. 11, p. 124.
Batteries for School Use, with multiple commutator. The cells are built into ebonite vessels.
Size II III IV V
Max. charge and discharge current)
Amps. }
Capacity when discharged for 3 hours )
Ampere hours}
Capacity when discharged for lOhours \
Ampere hours)
Price of a 4-cell battery
6 ,
12
16
24
Stationary Battery quoted for on application.

No. 61 007. Accumulators. 857
60 998 61 003. 61 007. 1 : 5.
60.996. Battery of Accumulators (Feussner's), comprising 20 Cells. The Batteries can be s. d.

combined in any number to form High Voltage Batteries as shown e. g. in Fig. 60,996 A 2. 5.0
The capacity is about 0.8 ampere-hours, the charging current being 0.1 ampere. The cells are
firmly set in with paraffin and soldered together. Terminals are fitted on the end poles of the battery.
- -
60.997. idem, comprising 25 cells 2. 15.
Cupboards for High Voltage Batteries quoted for on application. Pig. 60,996 A, for example,
shows a Battery of 500 Feussner Cells.
Edison Accumulators, Figure, in nickelled sheet steel boxes, imperishable electrically and
mechanically.
List
No.
858 Voltaic Electricity. Section 1: Galvanic Sources of Current. No. <>1008-
61014. 1:1.
61 008. 1 : 2.
POLE INDICATOR
illDICATEUR DE POLES
POLSUUHER
V r-SlZOVDlTS
No. in 022. Accessories -for Accumulators. 859
61 018. 1 : 12.
61019. 1:7. 61 021. 1 : 8.
61 022. 1 : 7.
til, OH). Charging Switchboard on marble slab for a battery of accumulators in conjunction B-
*' ''
with <if> 220 volt Direct Current, charging current to 3 amperes at 110 volts and
1.5 ampere at 220 volts; with precision voltmeter for measuring the battery and net-
work voltage, voltmeter switch, fuses and switch, Figure 5. 5.
til. 020. - - id e in, for charging currents to 6 amperes at 110 volts and 3 amperes at 220 volts 6. 0.0
(11.021. Giilcher's Thermopile, Figure, with 66 cells; excellently adapted for continuous
work, especially for charging accumulators. Gas consumption, 170 litres per hour;
useful terminal voltage, 2 volts; current 2 amperes 11.10.0
til. 022. Biernacki's Gas Tap, Figure (Fr. phys. Techn. I, Fig. 132), turning off auto-
matically and opening an electric circuit when the flow of gas is small 1. 5.0
Cl. 5261,5071,5209, 2279,
3921.
860 Voltaic Electricity. Section 1: Galvanic Sources of Current. Nn. IH023
New Thermopiles "Heil's Dynaphor", Figure, for working with gas.
List
No.
No. 61053. Thermopiles. 861
"
'W T* u
I
61050 and 61052. 1 : 15. 61 027. 1 : 7.
61.051. Switchboard for accumulators with 2 supply-points for 20 amperes maximum, s. d.
Figure 12. 0.0

The switchboard, of polished oak, contains 2 resistances, 1 precision voltmeter and 1 precision
ammeter, 2 plug boxes, 1 voltmeter switch, 1 lamp bracket, 1 ammeter switch and 2 fuses. If with
marble slab the extra price of switchboard is 1. 5.
It is very often desirable to have to branch off two circuits from a
battery, the current strengths
of which have to be regulated separately. The switchboard is excellently adapted for this purpose.
61.052. Cupboard for containing the Accumulators and a Thermopile, Figure, with the
necessary connecting leads, but exclusive of thermopiles and accumulators 4.10.0
According to the conditions existing relative to space, it will be necessary to settle the question
of where to place the accumulators and the thermopile.
Fig. 61,052 shows a cupboard fitted up with the thermopile and a 12-cell battery. The cup-
board has a sheet iron grating at the upper part; the accumulators can therefore be charged with the
cupboard completely closed without the latter becoming appreciably heated. The cupboard is provided
with locks and keys in order to prevent any tampering with the contents. The length of the cup-
board is 1.2 m, the height 0.8 m, and the depth 0.45 m, assuming that only 1 Gulcher thermopile
is to be installed therein. If it is intended to contain 2 thermopiles the depth is then 0.6 m.
- - d c m,
61,053. i for 2 thermopiles 5.10.0
Experimental Switchboards for charging purposes and for use in connection with
Accumulators: see Vol. I of this Price List, pp. 107 125; Resistances: see pp. 125 128,
also following section on Apparatus for Current Conduction and Distribution.
Cl.
75, 33 r
862 Voltaic Electricity. Section 1: Galvanic Sources of Current. NIL (II O.'.l
* *
SffiHI >
ii
61 054. 61 056.
s. d.
Rectifiers for Charging Accumulators with Alternating or
Three-phase Current.
61.054. Single Phase Alternating Current Rectifier, Koch system, for charging from 1 12 cells
with 5 amperes maximum inclusive of charging resistance; without measuring instru-
ments, as Fig. 61,054, but for fixing to the wall, also for connecting to one phase of a
3-phase system 12. 10.0
- -
61.055. idem, for charging 25 40 cells with 15 amperes maximum, with voltmeter
and ammeter . 10.0
The following is mode
of action of this Rectifier: The armature of a polarised interrupter
the
oscillates synchronously in the exciter circuit and in phase with the alternating current, by the appropriate
employment of self-induction and capacity. Influenced by the voltage of the battery to be charged,
this armature puts a contact into the main circuit in such manner that only current impulses in the
same direction are admitted and the closing and opening take place exactly at the times of voltage
equalisation between battery and alternating current. The contact thus works sparklessly and current
losses are excluded.
The apparatus can be used for all practical A. C. voltages to 240. When ordering, precise in-
formation should be given as to number of cells, charging current, voltage and periodicity of the
Alternating Current.
61.056. Mercury Vapour Rectifier, Figure, high efficiency, for charging Accumulators
with single phase A. C., also for connecting up to one phase of a 3-phase system, for
A. C. pressures from 105 120 or 200 240 volts and 50 cycles, for 6 14 cells; charging
current 3 5 amperes, including a regulating resistance 13. 0.0
61,056 a. - - i d e m, for 1526 cells, 35 amps 14. o. o
- -
61.057. idem, for 6 14 cells, charging current 4 10 amps., for connecting up to
105 120 volts A. C., 50 cycles 17.10.0
- - 50 cycles, 4
61.058. idem, for connecting up to 200 240 volts A. C., 10 amps. . . 17. IT), it
61.059. -- idem, for 15 26 cells, charging current 4 10 amps., for connecting up to

105120 volts A. C., 50 cycles III. 0.0
61.060. - -
idem, for connecting up to 200 240 volts A. C., 50 cycles, 4 10 amps. . . 18. 10. d
61.061. --idem, for 27 44 cells, charging current 4 10 amps., for connect ing up to
105 120 volts A. C., 50 cycles L'J. r>.
61,062. -- idem, for connecting up to 200 240 volts A. (\, 50 cycles. 1 10 ;nnps. . . jo. i:..o
Mercury Vapour Rectifiers for heavier Currents quoted for on application.

The action of the mercury vapour reel il'i'T is based on the valvular action which lakes place al.
the electrodes in a lilass vessel filled with mercury vapour. Its advantages consist in the hi<:!i efl'i
ciency. the lack of actuated pails anil in the fact thai it is always ready for use. The number of
cells, periodicity and voltage of the A. C. should be given when ordering.
.
Xo. filllliT. Alternating Current Rectifiers. 863
61 065 B. 61 065 A. 61 065 C.
Single-Phase Alternating Current Electrolytic Rectifiers, Figs. A C, for converting single s. d.
phase alternating current up to 120 volts into Direct Current; also for connecting up
to one phase of a 3-phase system: comprising 4 cells, 1 insulating stool, 1 starter and
electrolytic salt sufficient for one charge. Fig. 61,065 A shows the complete rectifier,
61,065 B the arrangement of a cell, and 61,065 C the method of connecting up.
List No. 61,063 61,064 61,065 61,066 61,067
Max. load Amps. 5 10 25 50 100
Constant load Amps. 1 2 5 10 20
3.15.0 5.0.0 8.15.0 11.5.0 18.15.0
Each rectifier for A. C. consists of 4 cells each with an aluminium electrode in a solution of
electrolyte salt, these cells allowing the current to flow in one direction only. By a suitable system
of connections aU current rushes flow to the supply terminals in the same direction; a Direct Current
is thus obtained. The method of connecting up for monophase A. C. is shown in Fig. 61,065 C for
120 volts. Each cell is suitable for rectifying 60 volts, so that the connections shown in Fig. 61,065 C
are thus arranged for 120 volts, as only two cells are in series. By putting more cells in series a pro-
portionately higher voltage is obtained and by connecting in parallel a higher current. controller-starter A
is used for working the rectifier, this device
consisting of a number of glow lamps, a short circuit switch
and 2 connecting terminals for the A. C. lead. The A. C. switch should be closed when the short
circuiting switch is open; the lamps then burn brightly until the cells have formed. As soon as the
lamps become dim the forming is finished, the short circuit switch is closed and Direct Current can then
be taken off. The D. C. thus obtained can be used forthwith for most purposes, e. g. for charging
accumulators, exciting magnets, working X-ray apparatus with Wehnelt interrupters, etc. The use of
a Condenser Cell, F i g. 61,084, is only necessary where a Direct Current of absolutely regular voltage
is required. In conjunction with a cell of this kind the rectifier can be used with advantage for working
a D. C. Arc Lamp in conjunction with an A. C. Network.
The D. C. voltages are approximately as follows for the sizes for 25 amps, maximum load:
Direct Current Supply Amperes 1 5 10
Alternating Current, 110 volts 50 cycles:

D. C. Pressure Volts 135 112 96 92 86
3-Phase Current, 120 volts, 50 cycles:
D. C. Pressure . Volts 167 152 141.5 139 134
For charging acrumiil;ilors a proportionate number of resistances should be put in series when
the number of cells is smaller (e. g. Nos. 61,015 61,018).
C). 43111, 5874, 439'2.

864 Voltaic Electricity. Section 1: Galvanic Sources of Current. No. 1068
61 084. 1 : 6.
Single-Phase Alternating Current Electrolytic Rectifiers, for Single-Phase A. C. to 240 volts; s. d.
also for connecting up to one phase of a 3-phase system comprising 8 cells, 2 insulating :
stools, 1 starter and electrolyte salt for one charge.

List No. 61,068 61,069 61,070 61,071 61,072
Max. load Amps. 5 10 25 50 100
5. 15. 8. 5. 13. 15. 18. 15. 32. 10.
volt A. C. can, however, be transformed down to 120 volts by means of an A. C. trans-
The 240
former and rectifier No. 61,06361,067, D. C. of about 110 volts being obtained with a smaller load
while the D. C. obtained with Nos. 61.068 61,072 has a pressure of approx. 220 volts.
61,073. Alternating Current Transformer 240/120 volts, secondary current 25 amps, maximum 5. 0.0
Three-Phase Electrolytic Rectifiers for converting Three Phase Current to 100 volts into Direct
Current: compirisng 6 cells, 1 insulating stool, 2 starters and electrolyte salt for one
charge.
List No. 61,074 61,075 61,076 61,077 61,078
Max. load Amps. 5 10 25 50 100
6.15.0 8.5.0 13.15.0 18.15.0 31.5.0
The cells are the same as in the previously listed rectifiers for A. C., but they are a correspon-
dingly larger number, and 2 starters instead of 1 are necessary.
-
idem, for Three-Phase Current to 220 volts: comprising 12 cells, insulating stool, 2 starters
and electrolyte salt for one charge.
List No. 61,079 61,080 61,081 61,082 61,083
Max. load Amps. 5 10 25 50 100
9.10.0 13.5.0 22.10.0 30.0.0 50.0.0
As regards voltage, cf. remark in connection with Nos. 61,068 61,072.
61,084. Electrolytic Condenser, can be used for D. C. or A. C. to 120 volts, Figure, approx.
250 microfarads . 1.10.0
61.085.
- -
idem, approx. 500 microfarads . 1'. 10.0
61.086. Electrolyte Salt, )><x containing 1.25 kg 0. !.'.<>
Spare Electrodes.
For max. load Amps. ."> 1(1 50 100
I.Nt No. 61,087 61,088 61,089 61,090 61,091
Kadi 0. 1. 3 0. 1. 10 0.3.8 0.6.0 0. 12.
1
C ]. 4396.
No. 81 114. Voltaic Electricity. Section 2: Current Conduction and Distribution. 865
>
61 092 A. 1:10.
866 Voltaic Electricity. Section 2: Current Conduction and Distribution. No. 61 115
60 172 B. 1:6.
60 172 C.
61115. 61116. 61117. 61118.

1:3. 1:1. 1:1. 1: 1.
61119. 1:10. 61 120. 1 : 5. 61 121. 1 : 5.
on p. 799, with grooved ebonite in- d.

60,172. Foot or Stand Terminal (Holtz's), Figure s.
sulation (Ztschr. f. d. phys. u. chem. U. 2, p. 55)

0. 6.
The terminals hav heavy lead feet and are very useful for the greatest variety of experiments.
Figs. 61,072B and C s!.o v some adaptations.
61.115. Clip for Branches, Figure (M. T., Fig. 200) , 0. 4.
61.116. Pressure Terminal as suggested by Kolbe, nickelled, Figure, with 1 screw head.
for sen wing in wood, ebonite or the like ,0. 0. 10
61.117. Double Pressure Terminal (Kolbe's), nickelled, Figure (Kolbe-Skellon, Introduction

to Elec'.ricity, Part II, Fig. 117 K) 0. 1.
61.118. Triple Pressure Terminal (Kolbe's), nickelled, Figure, with screw nut for fixim: 0.
61.119. Ebonite Rod, 60 cm long, with 2 brass terminals having crossed holes, Figure
0. 12.
(W. D., Fig. 504 [477])
61,120. Single-pole Interrupter for Battery Currents, Figure (W. D., Fig. 489 [464]), on
slate base, can also be used as a single-pole commutator 0.12.
61,121. Single-pole Interrupter (Du Bois-Beymond's), Figure, on slate base and th

with
screw clamp, very convenient to manipulate (M. P., 10 lh edn., IV, 1, Fig. 329; 9 edn.,
0.18.
HI, Fig. 334)
Quick-Break Lever Switches, Figure, for Heavy Currents, on slate, for voltages up to 550.
Amperes 35 60 100 200

Single-pole, List No. 61,122 61,123 61,124 61,125
0.3.6 0.5.0 0.6.6 0.9.6
Double-pole, List No. 61,126 61,127 61,128 61,129
0. 6. 6 0. 9. 6 6
0. 12. 0. 19.
Triple-pole, List No. 61,130 61,131 61,132 61,133

0. 10. 0. 14. 0. 19. 1. 8.
th
61.134. Commutator, KuhmkorlTs. Figure (M. P., 10 edn., IV. 1. Fig. 33S; <>"' edn., III.
0.16.
Fig. 335)
61.135. Commutator, Knhmkort'fs, with Kolbe automatic current-direction indicator, Figure

5.
(Kolbe-Skellon, Introduction to Kleet ricity. Part II. Fig. !>".)
1.
01. -'-''.:'. 5T48, li:n

4175,5833, 'J'J ....
Xo (!1 142. Terminals. Switches. Reversing Switches. 867
61 126. 1 : G 61 134. 1 : 4. 61 135. 1 : 4.
61 136. 1 : 0. 61 137. 1 : 4. 61 139. 1 : 5.
61 138. 1 : 3.
61 140. I : 6. 61 141. 1 : 6. 61 142. 1 : 4.
s. d.
61.136. Commutator (Hermann's), Figure (W. D., Fig. 490 [465]), very neat type . 1. 0.
61.137. Commutator (Berlin's), Figure, easily understandable and very neat (Gan.-Man.,
!
Fig. 741) 1. 4.
61.138. Mercury Switch (Pohl's), Figure, can be used both as a commutator and a
reversing switch (M. P., 10
th
edn., IV, 1, Fig. 339 b; 9
th
edn., Ill, Fig. 337) .... 1. 4.
61.139. Plug Commutator, Figure, on ebonite slab and with screw clamp 1. 2.
61.140. Commutator (Haiti's), for Heavy Currents 3. 0.

The apparatus is mounted on a stand on round slate base; the connections made can be easily follow-
ed by the audience.
61,111. Press Contact on wood board, with terminals, Figure (M. P., 10 edn.,IV, l,Fig. 334) lh
j
0. 5.
61,142. Key with Mercury Contact (Kolbc's), Figure (Kolbe-Skellon, Introduction to

Klcctricity, Part II, Fig. 102) 0. 6.
Cl. 5807, 5830, 5816, 5829, 2258, 2260,

2259, 2261, 5809, 4549. 55*
868 Voltaic Electricity. Section 2: Current Conduction and Distribution. Nu. 61 143
61143. 1:3. 61 144. 1 : 3. 61 146. 1 : 6.
61 153 B. 1:5. 61 156. 1 : 5.
s. d.
61.143. Key, Figure, for temporary or permanent closing of a circuit 0. 10.
The key is mounted on ebonite and can be fixed to the table by two screws.
61.144. Double Key (Successive Key), for the Wheatstone Bridge, Figure 1. 5.0
One circuit is closed first by pressing the knob, stronger pressure closing a second.
61.145.
-- idem, with galvanometer Back Key, specially for moving-coil galvanometers 1. 10.0
61.146. Discharge Key (Heim's), Figure, for capacity determination (E. T. Z. 11, 1890,
p. 556)
L'. 10.0
61,147. Morse Key, Figure, with platinum contact, for weak currents 0. 1(1.0
Multiple Commutators, Figure (W. D., Fig. 486 [461]), arranged so that the cells or
accumulators to be connected up can be put in scries, in groups or in parallel, with
wood cylinder.
List No. 61,148 61,149 61,150 61,151
For 4 (I 8 1- cells
Voltage available on connecting up) A

4 * >
t i\ * i-> >
i
-'
single accumulators
'
volts) . . .
2.0.0 2.8.0 3.4.0 5.8.0
Multiple Commutators with Stabilit Cylinder and Slate Insulation, for currents to 10 amperes.
Figs. A and B.
No. 61,152 61,153 61,154 61,155
For 6 1L> cells
Voltage available on connect ing ,,,,| 12

single accumulators ....
volts j
4. 16. 6.0.0 7.4.0 9.0.0
Cl. 4676. 4540. U
'. .-,s(ii;, L'-.'tn, -.".'41.
No. 61237. Keys. Sliding Resistances. 869
61 174. 1 : 3. 61 206. 1 : 3.
s. d.
61.156. Multiple Commutator for Heavy Currents, Figure, for 4 groups of 20 amperes each 7. 0.
The commutator is used for connecting up 4 groups

of primary or secondary cells in three
different (20 amps, with quadruple the voltage of a
ways according to requirements: (1) all 4 in series
group); (2) 2 groups in parallel (40 amps, with double the voltage of one group); (3) all 4 groups in
parallel (80 amps, with the voltage of one group).
61.157.
-- idem, larger, for 4x80 amperes 11.0.0
Sliding Resistances, Figure, for table use and for firmly fixing, of constantan wire wound on an
insulating weldless steel tube.
Model
870 Voltaic Electricity. Section 2: Current Conduction and Distribution. N.I. (il -.MS
61 246. 5.
Universal Sliding Resistances, Figure, comprising a combination of 2 sliding resistances whose

resistances are of different magnitude and varying loading capacity, it being possible to use
these as required in series, parallel, or singly by means of a connecting strap. An extermdy
complete range of tine adjustment of the current-value to be regulated is possible with these
resistances and in consequence they can be highly recommended both for this reason and by-
virtue of their many sided uses for practical and scientific purposes.
Max.
Load
MAX KOHL A. G., CHEMNITZ, GERMANY.
Notice No. 18.
Experimental Resistances with Z Weft Contacts,

as suggested by Dr. W. Briisch, Liibeck, constructed by Max Kohl, Ltd., Chemnitz.
We have, at the instigation of Dr. W. Briisch of Liibeck, con-

structed the Experimental Resistances with 2 Switch Contacts, described
below. This type of resistance admits of a variety of adaptations,
being particularly suitable for taking from heavy current supplies
any large or small currents at low terminal voltage.
Type A, Fig. 1, with 39 contacts Resistance, 36 ohms -
maximum permissible load, 5 to 30 Amps, according to the position
of the contact handles for taking currents of from 0.03 to 30 Amps,
and pressures of 0.3 to 110 Volts from the network.
with 39 contacts - - 48 ohms resistance -
Type B, Fig. 1,
max. permissible load 5 to 20 Amps, according to the position of

the switch handle - - for taking currents of 0.08 to 20 Amps, and
pressures of 0.8 to 220 Volts from the network.

with 21 contacts 24 ohms resistance -
Type C, Fig. 2,
max. permissible load 5 to 20 Amps, according to the position of
the switch handles -- for taking currents of from 0.08 to 20 Amps.
and pressures of 0.8 to 110 Volts from the network.
The terminal designated "O" is connected up to the zero
end designated ///. is connected with
of the resistance, while that Type A and B. Fig.T. 1 : 8.
the other end of the same; terminal /. is connected up to Switch Contact /. and terminal //. to Switch Contact //.
The resistances can be used in three different manners.

Grouping No. I. As a Series Resistance, Fig. 3.
This method of using the resistances can be recommended in the case
of apparatus where there is no interruption of the current, for taking heavy
currents where the terminal voltage at the apparatus is fairly high (e, g., for
working an arc lamp). Coarse regulation is obtained by Switch Contact

No. /., while
finer steps can
be had by em-
ploying No. //.
I.
Grouping as In this connec-
a Series
tion, the fol-
Resistance.
lowing current-
To the Apparatus strengths should
not be exceeded
in the case of
each type: -
Type C. Fig. 2. 1 : S.
Fig. 3.
Type A.
Max Kohl A. G., Chemnitz, Germany.
Grouping No. II. As a Shunt Resistance, Fig. 4, for taking off any Currents (within the limits of load)
at low Pressure.
Net- Ammeter
It is advisable first of all to place work
Switch Contact /.on the highest resistance-
value and Contact //, on "O", the latter
being moved forward until the desired Grouping as
II.
current-density is reached. a Shunt Resistance.

If Switch Contact //. is still near
to "O" and should a further slight increase
in the current still be necessary, it is better
To the Apparatus
to move Switch Handle /. back than No. //.
forward. In feeding apparatus which work
with an interrupted current (e. g. induction

coils with platinum interrupters) too high
a tension should not predominate when the
current is admitted otherwise there is danger
of the contacts getting burned. When heavy
currents are being used, Switch Contact No. //. should be left near to O and Contact /. moved back
cautiously. The pressure at the apparatus when the current being admitted
is to the
working voltage
is
as the resistance-values given alongside the contact studs on which the Handles are placed are to each other.
The maximum permissible currents given under (1) should in no case be exceeded.
Grouping No. III. As a Shunt Re-
sistance, Fig. 5, for taking off small Currents .!?",". 4 (C ^ Ammeter
up to 2 Amps.
As a rule both Switch Contact Handles
are first of all placed on the zero contacts, the
current in the apparatus being slowly increas- III Grouping as Shunt
ed by adjusting one of the Contact Handles. Resistance
Handle No. for small currents.
If
placed on the spot
//. is
where No. /.
previously stood, and vice-versa,
this changes the poles at the apparatus.
Under no circumstances whatever
must this method of grouping be used for To the Apparatus
taking off higher current- densities than 2
Amps. A too heavy current - - with con- Fig. s.
-
is particularly liable to take place when one Handle is near the
-
sequent burning out of the resistances
highest resistance-valueand the other close to the zero-value and the resistance of the apparatus itself is
small. The latter would cause most of the spirals to short-circuit and the thin spirals, in series, near to
the maximum resistance-value would then be charged with a current exceeding that prescribed.
It is
always advisable (as also in the case of other methods of employing the resistances) to connect
up a reliable ammeter for protecting the resistance and the apparatus connected up. The total current flowing
through the resistance, when connected up in accordance with Scheme No. ///. should not exceed 5 Amps.
PRICES.
50516. Experimental Resistance, Type A, Fig. Handles, 39 Contacts; Resistance
1, with 2 Switch
36 Ohms; maximum permissible load, to 30 Amps., according to position of Contact
5
Handles; for taking currents of 0.03 to 30 Amps, and pressures of 0.3 to 110 Volts from
the supply line .'6.15.0.
50517. Experimental Resistance, Type B, Fig. 1, with 2 Switch Handles, 39 Contacts; Resistance
48 Ohms; maximum permissible load 5 to 20 Amps., according to the position of the Switch
the supply line ,,6.15.0.
50518. Experimental Resistance, Type C, Fig. 2, with 2 Switch Handles, 39 Contacts; Resistance
24 Ohms; maximum permissible load, 5 to 20 Amps, according to the position of the Switch
the supply line ,4.1.0.0.
Max Kohl A. G., Chemnitz (Germany).
Supplement to Notice No. 18.
Simple Experimental Switchboards.

In addition to being makers of the most complete patterns of experimental switchboards, we
ul so manufacture those of a lighter and simpler pattern, which, however, permit of being used in a
multiplicity of ways.
On the one hand they permit of connecting up the apparatus which are being used for teaching
purposes (and which are usually intended for working on low pressure) to the heavy current from
electricity works; while on the other hand they permit of carrying out those experiments which imply
the use of a heavy current, e. g., demonstrating the electric arc.
The switchboards are accordingly arranged in such manner that it is possible to work with small
or large current-densities at high or low pressures when the supply is
obtained from a heavy current system. The condition as regards low
voltage, which is rendered possible by a shunt method of connecting
(division of pressure), is particulary important in the case of apparatus
working with interruption of the current, the contact parts of which
are burnt outwhen a high voltage is applied or even when a large
series resistance is employed, since the full supply voltage prevails
at the contact parts at the moment of interruption of the current.

The switchboards are fitted either with Deprez-d'Arsonval
precision measuring instruments or with air-damped electromagnetic
instruments, as desired. The former are rather advisable, as they have
a uniform scale and are dead-beat. They are only applicable for
direct current. The electromagnetic instruments possess a scale which
commences only at approx. 1/5 of the maximum deflection. Smaller
currents and voltages can thus only be read approximately. On the
other hand, however, these instruments can b&--used both on direct Fig- 6. l : 10.
and alternating current. Alternating current, however, is only directly

applicable for a few experiments, so that it is usually necessary to trans-
form it into direct current.
The construction of the switchboards may be seen on reference to
Figs. 6 and 7. A marble slab is placed on one of the Double Switch
Contact Resistances already described, this slab containing the necessary
fuses, switches and measuring instruments. The method of connecting is
generally in accordance with that described on pp. Ill and 112 of our
Price List No. 50, with the exception that the measuring instruments cannot
be commutated, and that they give the voltage and current in the
apparatus direct.
The switchboards are designed for fixing on the wall. Directions
for use and a diagram of connections are appended to each switchboard,
l : 9. The metering instruments have an approx. base diameter of 130 mm.
Prices.
7086. Simple Experimental Switchboard, Type EA\, for connecting up to 110 volts D. C.,
Fig. 6, with Double Switch Contact Eesistance, 39 contacts, 36 ohms; max. permissible
load 5 to 30 amps, according to position of Switch Contacts; for taking currents of
0.03 to 30 amps, and pressures of 0.3 to 110 volts from the supply with Precision ;
Instruments 13. o.
The marble slab contains: 2 terminals for the supply current 2 fuses; 1 main switch; 1 switch
;
lor the shunt; 1 Precision Ammeter; 1 Precision Voltmeter; 2 terminals for connecting up the apparatus.
7087. -- idem, Type EB\, Fig. 6, style as No. 7086, but for connecting up to 220 volts
D. C., with 2 Switch Contacts, 39 contacts, 48 ohms; max. permissible load, 5 to 20 amps,
according to position of switch contacts; for taking currents of 0.08 to 20 amps, and
pressures of 0.8 to 220 volts from the supply 13. 5.
M. 18 A e. Cl.
6234.
6231,
Max Kohl A. G., Chemnitz (Germany i.
Fig. 7, Fittings as No. 7086, for connecting up to 110 volts

-
7088. -
idem, Type EC\,
D. C., with Double Switch Contact Eesistance, 21 contacts, 24 ohms: max. permissible
load, 5 to 20 amps, according to position of switch contacts; for taking currents of
0.08 to 20 amps, and pressures of 0.8 to 110 volts from the supply 10. :>. it
7089. Simple Experimental Switchboard, Type EA.lt Fig. 6; fittings and load-limits as
No. 7086, but with electromagnetic Measuring Instruments, can be used for D. C. and A. C. 11. \~>. <i
7090. - -
idem, Type EB^, Fig. 6, fittings and load-limits as No. 7087, but with electro-
magnetic Measuring Instruments, can be used for D. C. and A. C 12. o. o
7091. - -
idem, Type EC.lt and load-limits as No. 7088, but with electro-
Fig. 7; fittings
magnetic Measuring Instruments, can be used for D. C. or A. C 9. 0. n
The remarks apply fortemporary loading. When ordering, kindly state precisely the network
voltage, and, in the case of A. C., the frequency.
HUGO WILISCH. CHEMNITZ.

NO. n 1270. Voltaic Electricity. Section 3: Electro-Magnetic Current Measurements. Tangent Galvanometers. 871
61 268. 1 : 6.
61 269. 1 : 0. 61270. 1:7.
Section 3: Electro -Magnetic Current Measurements.
Tangent Galvanometers.
The n"i'(llcs. r;i]is and pivots of the galvanometers arc most can-fully constructed and the magnets
are very accurately balanced.
Tangent Galvanometer, F i g u r e (W. D., Fig. 507 [480]), very suitable for school
use, noodle with agate cap working on steel pivot: reading facilitated by a mirror; with
arrest incut, brass tripod, brass box, copper ring 300 diameter. mm 2.10.0
Tangent Galvanometer, Figure, needle suspended on raw silk fibre; with air
damping; graduation on silvered brass; reading facilitated by an inlaid mirror (Gan.-

Rein., Fig. 825) 6. 10.
61.268. Tangent Galvanometer (Poske's), (Ztschr. Figure

phys. u. chem. U. 3, p. 103),
f. d.
with vortical transparent scale on a 270 mm
diameter glass ring, needle resting on pivot ;
7. 0.0
61.269. Tangent Galvanometer, Figure, with vertical scale for demonstration purposes
and with horizontal scale for measurements, with group winding !io. o.o
61.270. Tangent Galvanometer, student's pattern as suggested by Hahn, (Hahn, Figure
Handbuch f. Schuleriibungen, 1909, Fig. 257), with 3 groups of windings (500, 50 and
4 turns) 1. 10.0
( '1.2310, 2311, 2312,
2313. 5813
872 Voltaic Electricity. Section 3: Electro-Magnetic Current Measurements. \n. ill 271-
61 271. 1 : 6. 61 272. 1 : 5.
61 273. 1 : 6. 61274A. 1:3.
61.271. Detachable Tangent Galvanometer (Grimsehl's), Figure (Kolbe-Skellon, Introduction

* d.
to Electricity, Part II, Fig. 159), specially adapted for practical use by students (Unter-
richtsblatter f. Math. u. Naturw. 8, 1902, p. 104; Physikal. Ztschr. 3, 1902, p. 462; Ztschr.
f. d. phys. u. chem. U. 15, 1902, p. 292) . . . '. ................ 3. 0. (I
61.272. Tangent Galvanometer (Kolbe's), student's pattern, can also be used as a Sine-Tangent
Galvanometer, Figure (Kolbe-Skellon, Introduction to Electricity, Part II, Fig. 112;
Ztschr. f. d. phys. u. cheni. V. 4, p. 31), with Obacli movable copper ring and vertical
scale and sight -vane .............................. 7. 0.0
T (inlvanometer has a degree and tangent scale, the diameter of scale ring being 160
ie mm.
Tne ni'cdlr is provided with mica vane for air damping.
Luminous Index as suggested by Friedr. C. G. Miiller: see No. 60,132, p.
Tangent Galvanometer Ring for School Galvanometer: see p. 877, No. 61,300.
th
61.273. Tangent Galvanometer (Gauguin's), (M. P., 9 edn., in, Fig. 486). with
Figure
4 laterally arranged windings for putting in parallel or series ........... 7.10.0
Cl. .1070, fiS41.
2314, 2317.
No. 61 279. Tangent Galvanometers. 873
61 274 B. 61 274 C. 61 274 D.

1 : 5. 1 : 5. 1 : 5.
61 277. 1 : 4. 61 278. 1 : 5.
61.274. Sine and Tangent Galvanometer, Siemens type, Figs. (M. P., Ill, 9
th
edn., A D S. d.
1 J
Fig. 488), with 2 windings, with shunt (Fig. B) of three sections ( /9 , / 4 and Vi for the
thinner winding, needles set up in elegant case (Figs. C and D), diameter of galvano-
meter 120 mm 12.10.0
The needles with sapphires
rest on pivots; the winding ring together with the compass can be
rotated in the graduated circle. The winding ring has two different windings of 0.1 and 150 ohms
resistance. All parts are most carefully constructed.
- -
61.275. idem, smaller, diameter of compass 100 mm, with shunt 11. 0.0
61.276. Shunt, separately, Figure 61,274 B 1.15.0
lh
61.277. Sine and Tangent Galvanometer, Pouillet's Model, (M. P., 9 edn., Ill, Figure
Fig. 487; Gan.-Eein., Fig. 827), with two different windings and two needles, movable
on horizontal graduated circle; with mircometer and vernier; box 200 14. mm 0.0
61.278. Tangent Galvanometer (Trowbridge's), Figure, with movable wire spiral, needle
on raw silk fibre suspension 11. 0.0
61.279. Sine Galvanometer; also at same time a Differential Galvanometer, Figure . . 6. 10.
Cl. 2318/19/20, 2323,

2321,2322
874 Voltaic Electricity. Section 3: Electro-Magnetic Current Measurements. No. Ill 2MI -
61 283. 1 : 4. 61 284 A. 1 ; 7. 61 285. 1 : 6.
Moving Magnet Galvanometers.

All mirror galvanometers are fitted with simple plane mirror unless otherwise specified.
If speciallyordered, and at an extra cost, we can insert a polished plane mirror or a concave
mirror for scale-reading apparatus for 1 or 2 metres distance. In the latter case the
distance desired should be stated.
(il.L'HO. Vertical Galvanometer, F i \t u re. with massive magnet working on steel knife cdjjv.
adjustable coil with coarse and fine winding; well adapted fur induction and thermo-
electric experiments 2. lo.o
(11,281. idem, larger, turning on tripod and with greater sensitivity. Figure. . . .'5.12.0
<i 1,282. Vertical Galvanometer with 2 interchangeable coils and with circular and tangent
graduation. Figure 2.11.0
61,283. Vertical Galvanometer, F <r u re. with fixed i coil having a coarse and fine winding.
with arrestment and controlling magnet 1. 10.0
(
I. Jltl'.l, -.'Ht.i, -13M,
j:i-.i. sssi. -j.-i.-..'.
No. fil 293. Vertical Galvanometers. 875
61 287. 1 = 6. 61 291. 1 : 3.
61 289. 1 : 8. 61 293. 1 : 4.
A.
61,284. Galvanometers Nos. 61,280 61,282 can be fitted with a Directing Magnet for increasing i
the Sensitivity, of. Fig. No. 6 1,284 A Extra Price 0. 5.0
61
61
til
876 Voltaic Electricity. Section 3: Electo Magnetic Current Measurement?. NO.
61 295. 1 : .-..
61 297. 1:2.
61 294. 1 : 5.
61 296. 1 : 2.
61299. 1:.8. 61 300 A. 1:8.
61,294. Model of a Multiplier, Figure, as suggested by Friedr. C. G. Miiller (M. T.,

s. d.
p. 256) 0. 10.
61,295 Simple Horizontal Galvanoscope, Figure (M. P., 9"' edn., m, Fig. 474) . ... 0.18.0
61.296. Horizontal Galvanoscope, round pattern, with arrestmert, Figure 0.15.0
61.297. Horizontal Galvanometer, Figure, with bell-shaped magnet, suspended on raw

silk fibre, (mite aperiodic, with copper damper and pointer reading; extremely useful
for resistance measurements and the like when a permanently fixed instrument is not
available and without extensive preparation being necessary; with low resistance of
about 50 ohms; the two halves of the winding can lie used by the aid of 4 terminals either
singly, in series or differentially. The instrument is provided with reliable arrest ment
rendering it easily portable. Sensitivity: 1 deflection approx. 0.00002 amp. = . . . 5.10.0
61.298.
-- with high resistance of about 1000 ohms.
idem, Sensitivity: 1
"
deflection
approx. 0.000005 amp 6. 0.
(11,299. School Galvanometer, F g u re. i can also be used as a compass, differential galvano-
meter, and astatic galvanometer 3. 15.0
The galvanometer is constructed in such manner that it can be taken to pieces and the individual
parts built up again and explained by the teacher.
If one of the two magnets which is constructed of thin walled steel tube is
slipped into the
lower sleeve., a compass or a magnet omrNer is obtained.
If one (it the coils is placed parallel with the magnet a Minple galvanometer is the result. If
the other coil is added, the sensitivity can lie varied by putting in parallel or series or by displacing
in relation to the magnets.
Damped vibrations are obtained liy placing the copper sleeve in the space between the coils.
c . usso, .-,*.-,:!. 2:i:,<;. ->:i7l.
.iS.f 1 , ,'i.s j'2 .

No. (il ::<>:!. Moving Magnet Galvanometers. 877
61302, 50119 and 61310. 1 : 10. 61 303. 1 : 6.
If the two coils are connected in opposition a differential galvanometer results.
If the second magnet is moved into the upper half of the suspension an astatic galvanometer j
is obtained.
The galvanometer has a scale divided every 10 for the scholars, a second scale, divided in single
degrees, being provided for the teacher. As the pointer is arranged to rotate relatively to the magnet,
its point can always be directed towards the scholars after the winding plane of the coils have been
placed in the magnetic meridian.
Sensitivity with one magnet

-- e. g., without - - with coils in series: 1 deflection
astaticity
=
approx. 0.00004 ampere. Each coil has a resistance of about 3.5 ohms. The sensitivity is ample
for all ordinary school experiments.
61.300. Tangent Galvanometer Ring for above, of copper, on wood tripod, the baseplate of
the galvanometer fitting and rotating about the round top of this tripod, cf. Fig. 61,300 A 1.10.0
Set up as a tangent galvanometer the instrument is suitable for measuring currents to 15 amperes
(10 amps. = approx. 60 deflection).
For accurate reading the large pointer is changed for another intended for reading the fine scale.
61.301. Accessories for carrying out magnetometrical measurements in conjunction with

No. 61,299, cf. Fig. 60,127, comprising: Aluminium Case with marks for taking 20 gram
brass weights for determining the moment of inertia; Graduated Slider; Bar Magnet;
Table for the Galvanometer and Graduated Bar with Measuring Wire, which can be
used at the same time as a Wheatstone Bridge 3. 10.0
61.302. Reflecting Galvanometer, Weinhold pattern, Figure

(W. D., Figs. 508, 509 [481,
482]), cf. also Fig. 61,303, for setting up permanently on wall bracket or suspended
board, with one coil having two different windings. Price exclusive of suspended
board and lamp ,
10.0
The galvanometer has a Topler adjustable air damping arrangement, astatic needle with pointer
reading, mirror for reading by lamp and scale, transmission chamber with lens and one coil, the latter
being provided with one group of windings of thick wire (approx. resistance 0.5 ohm) and one group
of fine wire (approx. resistance 500 ohms). The ends of both windings are carried to three terminals,
the latter being connected by three wires and three terminals alongside the lecture table. If required
the thick or fine winding can be used in this manner and without altering anything on the galvano-
meter. The precise resistance of the two windings is given on the coil. The following sensitivities
are obtained with a medium period of swing (about 20 seconds for the complete period): 1 de- mm
flection at a distance of 1 == m
approx. 1.5 xlO
8
amp. or approx. 7 xlO-' amp.
61.303. --idem, Figure, with two coils, one with thick and one with fine winding;
with change-over switch so as to enable the groups of windings to be put in series or
punillel 9. 0.0
Cl. 1'324, (104.

878 Voltaic Electricity. Section 3: Electro-Magnetic Current Measurements. No. 61 304
61 304. 1 : 5. 61 308. 1 : 4.
61.304. Reflecting Galvanometer, F i g u r e, arranged as ^"o. 61,302, but with copper damper s. d.
and hell-shaped magnet; it is therefore less sensitive than No. 61,302. With transmission
chamber and one pair cylinders with two different windings 7. 10.0
61.305. m, with two pairs cylinders, one with thick and one with fine winding
- - i d e . . !
8.15.0
61.306. Reflecting Galvanometer, Figure, smaller, with detachable oil damper, pointer
and mirror reading, transmission chamber and lens, with one coil having two different
windings 4. 0.0
61.307. Reflecting Galvanometer with two coils, one having thick and the other fine winding,
otherwise exactly as No. 61,306 5. 0.
61.308. Model of a Reflecting Galvanometer, Figure, as suggested by Weinhold, with air

damping (\V. I')., Figs. 543 a c [516 a c]) 1. 8.0
Moving Coil Reflecting Galvanometers: see further on in List.
Reflecting Galvanometers Nos. 61,302 61,307 can also be employed with Telescope
Reading. It is advisable, however, to insert a polished plane mirror so as to obtain a
clear image.
61.309. Extra Price for a polished plane mirror 0. 8.0
Accessories for Reflecting Galvanometers.

61.310. Paraffin Lamp with slotted chimney, for Reflecting Galvanometers, F i
g u r e, on
stand 0. 8.0
til. 311. Incandescent Gas Burner for Reflecting Galvanometers, on stand and with slotted
chimney, Figure 0.12.0
60,71H. Electric Incandescent Lamp on stand with protecting chimney, Fig. ;u.71.s, p. 842,
for Reflecting Galvanometers 0. 18.
The glow lamp is of the long filament type. Vulture to he staled ulien ordering. If this is
not <|iioteil ue supply 1 1<> volt lamps.
<il. .">!.">. Spare Glow Lamp for pressures to lio volts o. 3.0
61.311. -- idem, for 150 or 220 volts 0. 4.0
I!l.:;i5. Nernst Lamp on stand and with protecting cylinder; I'm
1
use only mi Direct Cm-rent

at 110 220 volts; giving a very bright image 1. 4.0
Cl. 2326, 2328. 2358

No. 61321. Reflecting Galvanometers. 879
61 310. 1 : 6. 61 311. 1 : 6.
61 316. 1 : 8.
61 320 A. 1:3. 61 320 B. 1:3.
01.310. Nernst Lamp, Figure, with Condenser and Projection Lens, for projecting the \
& d.
diaphragm placed in front of the condenser on to the scale; for 110 220 volts Direct i
Current only, with wall bracket j

5. 0.
50. 121. Terminal Board with 3 terminals on serpentine base, for fixing on the wall, also 7 metres
triple flexible cord and 6 porcelain cylinders, for Galvanometers Nos. 01,302, 01,304,
'
61,300 . 0.12.0
61,317. Terminal Board with 2 terminals and triple flex, as No. 50,121, for Galvanometers
Nos. 61,303, 61,305, 61,307 j
0. 10.
01.320. Shunt for Reflecting Galvanometers, Figures A

and B (W. D., Figs. 510 and 511
[483 and 484]), consisting of a resistance box with resistances of / 7 "', Vg"'? /97
3 3 lhs 1 tll
/99 > >
3 ths 3 "
/997 V999" ) /9997>
1'
/9999 value of the 1
galvanometer resistance, for enabling

0.3, 0.1, 0.03, 0.01, 0.003, 0.001, 0.0003, 0.0001 of the current to be. measured to be
passed through the galvanometer 2. 14.
When
ordering the resistance of the galvanometer coil for which the arrangement is intended
should bo given or the coil sent to us. In galvanometers having two coils the shunt is usually wound
for the high resistance coil.
61.321. -- idem, smaller, for shunting 0.1, 0.01, 0.001 and 0.0001 of the current to be
measured 2. 6.0
50,118. Bracket for Reflecting Galvanometers, Figure 50,118, p. 21. Price without Gal-
vanometer and Scale 0. 8.
It is preferable to set up the instrument on a bracket
fixod to the wall if space permits rather
than on a suspended board fixed to the ceiling as the vibrations of the ceiling have a disturbing action
in many cases.
50,119. Suspended Board for Reflecting Galvanometers, Figure 50,119, p. 22, with nickelled
brass rods and polished board. Price, excluding Galvanometer 1. 10.0
50,112. Galvanometer Scale, 4 m

long, painted on linen, divided in decimetres, the metres
figured, for fixing to the wall 0. ]2.0
50, 123.
-
idem, 6 m long ! 0. 16.
CI. 2330, 2332,

IS'-',
2333, 2334.
880 Voltaic Electricity. Section 3: Electro-Magnetic Current Measurements. No. 81 322
61 329. l : r>. 61 327. 1 = 5.
50,124. Transparent Galvanometer Scale, 2 m

long, of ground glass, in wood frame, divided s. d.
every centimetres, with lugs for suspending on the ceiling,

.">
Figure on p. 21. . 0. 17.0
Tiiis scale is suspended at a distance of about 2 rn from the galvanometer. U'itli its aid it is
possible to iiiTiiiifff the âlvanoinctcr and scale in front of the audience.
61.322. School Galvanometer (Nobili Multiplier), Figure, with astatic needle and detachable
oil damping, with one coil having thick winding; to he used mainly for thermal currents.
with pointer reading (cf. (Jan.- Rein.. Fig. 830) 3. O.Oj
61.323.
-- idem, with one coil having two windings of different resistance, for thermal
and induction currents 3. 10.0
61,324.
--idem, with two interchangeable coils (if different resistance, for thermal and
induction currents .
4. 0.
ci. 23:c.'
2348, 2:ill.
Nn. lil Ml. Moving-Magnet Mirror Galvanometers. 881
61 331 B. 1:3.
61 331 A. 1:4.
Luminous Pointer for Galvanometry and Magnetometry after Friedr. C. G. Miiller: see under d.
No. 60,132, p. 795.
61.325. Lecture Galvanometer after v. Beetz, Figure, with pointer reading, with one Coil
with thick wire 6. 0.0
61.326.
- - i d e in, with two Coils, one with thick and one with fine wire 7. 5.0
This galvanometer has been essentially improved by us especially as regards ease of changing the
coils. It has a bell-shaped magnet and large copper damper, vertical scale visible at a distance, with
Mack graduations and figures on white ground, and directing magnet. The whole instrument can
turn about a tripod.
61.327. Lecture Galvanometer after v. Beet/, Figure, with pointer and mirror reading,
with polished plane mirror, and with one Coil with thick wire 7. 10.
61.328.
-- idem, with two Coils, one with thick and one with fine wire ....... 8. 15.0
T
61.329. School Galvanometer Noack, after

(Ztschr. Figure
phys. f. d.
5, u. chem. 1 .
p. 103) . . . . 8. 0.0
The galvanometer has two adjustable coils, vortical tangent and degree graduations easily visible,
bell-shaped magnet with copper damper, and can rotate on the base. It can be used both as a demon-
stration and differential galvanometer, as also for measurements, and can even serve as a voltmeter.
Total resistance, approx. 350 ohms. The scales are capable of rotation so as to be able to turn the
zero point towards the audience. For thermo-electric currents the galvanometer is supplied if desired
with coils of lower resistance.
61.330.
-- idem, with mirror, so as to be used as a reflecting galvanometer 9. 10.
61.331. Large Mirror Galvanometer after Wiedemann, Figs. A and B, rotating on tripod,
with graduated metal prism and adjustable coils, with bell-shaped magnet and spherical
damper, and with ring magnet, with auxiliary weight and adjustable plate damper, with
polished plane mirror for telescope reading or objective projection; also with improved
magnet- and mirror-suspension; with one pair coils having 4x500 == 2000 turns, diffe-
rentially wound; the mairncts and damper pertaining thereto are each placed in one case,
F i g. 61,331 B . . . 22. 10.0
With annular magnet and auxiliary weight the galvanometer can be used as a ballistic instrument.
Cl. 2365, 2366.

882 Voltaic Electricity. Section 3: Electro-Magnetic Current Measurements.
61333. 1 : 7.
61 34.2 1 : G. 61842, 61848 end 61846. 1:8.
61.332. Large Mirror Galvanometer, as preeediiv:, but with bell-shaped magnet and spherical,
8. (1.
(1
unper. Magnet and damper in case 18. 0.
61.333.
- -
idem, but with annular magnet, weight and adjustable plate damper. Magnet,
and damper in ease !'.. 0.
Can l>e n>ed as hall's) ir j;;dv;monieter.
61.334. Extra price for Screw Motion for tin- Coils in Galvanometers Nos. (51,331 01.333 3. 0.
t i I, :t::tr>. Pair of Coils for Wiedemann Galvanometer.

Thickness of Wire Kuinlirr of Tunis
differentially wound I 10.
For thermo-electric currents ... 2. 12.
For Ordinary Galvanic \Vor! . . n.~> nun 4 x '.on L'lliin dillevenlially 1. in. (i
(
4 x!500 = IK H in _'. I--', ii
For Physiological purpoi'-s. for 4 X3IHIII 2. is. ii
Muscle and Nerve Currents . .

I
I
(| '
.,_ () ^ mm J
X5000
ll'IIIMI
'JIM II II I .'!. III. II
xSOOO = 3-_'i MII i .->. III. II
Cl. 'JSG^, 58..-

No. 61 346. Moving-Magnet Mirror Galvanometers. 883
50 119, 61 345, 61 389. 1 : 9.
61,336. Astatic 4-Coil Mirror Galvanometer after Du Bois and Eubens, Figure, with i
s. d.
4 coils each of 20 ohms; one massive magnet system with rotary mirror, about 1 gramme
in weight, 1 medium-heavy magnet system 0.25 g weight (Electrot. Ztschr., 1894, p. 321;
cf. Gan.-Man., Fig. 761; Gan.-Bein., Fig. 832) 22.10.0
The following should be ordered separate for above:
61.337. Protecting Case ................ '
1. (I. O
61.338. 1 Light Magnet System, approx. weight 0,1 g 1. 10.
61.339. 4 Coils of each 2000 ohms 5. 0.
61.340. 4 Metres Quartz Fibres in wood case 0. 8.
l l
61.341. 1 Shunt Resistance, /9 , /,, g , V the galvanometer resistance 5. 0.
The preceding instrument is of extraordinarily high sensitivity.
61.342. Mirror Galvanometer after Thomson-Szymanski, Figure, with astatic magnet-

system and directing magnet, with wire connecting blocks for putting the coils in parallel,
in two groups and in series (cf. also Gan.-Man., Fig. 761; Gan.-Eein., Fig. 832) . . 6. 0.0
The four coils have a resistance of 4 ohms each. By removing the front wall the galvanometer
can be opened and therefore easily and quickly adjusted. The instrument is highly sensitive and is
very suitable for experiments with thermo-electric currents, for telephone currents, and for demon-
strating hi' ruiTcnts on cutting the lines of force.
i The case is of mahogany.
61.343. Wall Bracket for above with lens and Glow Lamp for 110 220 volts, Figure,
for enabling the instrument to be used as a reflecting galvanometer ........ 2. 5.0
The voltage should be quoted in ordering; if not stated we supply a 110 volt lamp.
61,344. Extra Price for a Nernst Lamp, which gives a bright luminous pointer. For D. C.
110220 volts only 0. 8.0
61,345. Fixing Device for suspended board No. 50,119, Figure, also rotary arm with lens
and scale-lamp. Price without suspended board 2. 0.0
By means of this device the galvanometer is firmly fixed on the suspended board, but in such
manner that it can be easily set up by adjusting the three levelling screws.
The illustration shows a suspended board No. 50,119 with a Deprez-d'Aisonval Galvanometer
No. 61,389 with mirror reading used as a Reflecting Galvanometer; illumination by a single filament
electric lamp and with the above fixing device and rotary arm for the lamp. The device can, how-
ever, also be used with Galvanometer No. 61,342 and similar ones. As regards voltage etc. the same
remark applies as in No. 61,343.
<>!..!!(>. Commutator for placing alongside the Lecture Table, for enabling the coils
Multiple
of Galvanometer No. 61,342 to be put in parallel, series, and in two groups, F g u r e, i
without conned ing leads 3. 0.0
56*
884 Voltaic Electricity. Section 3: Electro- Magnetic Current Measurements. No. in :;t:
61 347 A. 1:5. 61 347 B. 1:5. 61 354. 1:6.
61,347. Iron-Clad-Galvanometer after Du Bois-Kubens, A and B (Ztschr. f. In-

Figures (1
strumentenkunde, 1900, p. 65), with a light and a heavy magnet suspension with plane
mirror, two pairs interchangeable internal directing magnets, one pair external directing
magnets and two coils of 2000 ohms each in cast steel sheath, with spherical sheath as
a second magnetic shield and cast steel cylinder as third magnetic shield 37.10.0
Fig. 61,347 A shows the outside appearance in conjunction with an anti-vibration suspension
No. 61,357; Fig. 61,347 B illustrating the instrument with the second and third shield removed.
This type of galvanometer is constructed in view of the disturbing magnetic influences of 1
electric tramways; the steel envelopes have a strong protecting action against these influences. Each
suspension is supplied packed in a small box with a plane mirror.
61,348. Iron-Clad Galvanometer after Du Bois-Eubens, as No. 61,347,-but with eight terminals
and one pair of coils with differential winding each of 2 x 1000 ohms in cast steel envelope 1 1 . 5.0
Accessories and Spares for Nos. 61,347 and 61,348:

61,349. 2 Coils each of 5 ohms in cast steel sheath <>. 10. O
61,350. 2 Coils each of 100 ohms in cast steel sheath >. 10. O
61,351. 2 Coils with differential winding each of 2 x20 ohms, in cast steel sheath 7. !.->. ii
61,352. 1 Light Magnet Suspension including Mirror, 35 mg 1. ,-). I >
61,353. 1 Heavy Magnet Suspension including Mirror, 165 mg .' 1. 13. O

61.354. Metal Stand, with glass bell, Figure, for suspending the magnet stirrups 0. IS. o
61.355. 1 Small Box with 10 Quartz Fibres on mirror base o. :..
Shunt of Copper Wire for the coil resistance of 2 x2000 ohms:

61.356. 1/9. Vti. Vt.i -
o o
61,356 a. 1/9. V.9, V*
V,9. V,.., V.. ....- 7. 1.-.. n
61, 356 b. I/
/49>
I/
19 Id. 10. O
61,357. Arrangement for the anti-vibration suspension of the Du Bois-Rubens Iron-Clad Galvano-
meter, as suggested by Hagen 6. t.
The device, like that of the Julius method, is fitted directly on the east steel cylinder; when ordering,
the iron-clad Galvanometer should be sent us or the instrument should be ordered together with the
device.
Moving Coil Galvanometers.

The generally recognised advantages of the Deprez-d'Arsonval Galvanometers with
fixed magnet and moving coil are: independence of external magnetic influences; good
damping and insensitivity to rough treatment render the instruments specially suitable
for educational and practical purposes. We are therefore including in the following pages
an extensive selection of these instruments.
61,358. Portable Moving Coil Needle Galvanometer, with hand suspension for the coil. F g n e. i t
suitable for /,ero methods (Whcatstone Bridge and lie like) and for stii<lenl>' exercises.
t
approx. resistance 150 ohms; 1 degree deflection approx. -10 amps. 1

' ;
1'. KM)
61,350. -- idem, arranged for hanging on the wall 3. 15.0
(1. .-,11(11. .'SHIP. -JU

. in :t74. Moving Coil Needle Galvanometers. 885
61 362 A. 1:5. 61 362 B. 1:5.
61.360. Portable Moving Coil Needle Galvanometer, Figure; approx. resistance 150 ohms; 5. d.
1 degree deflection approx. 0.000 006 amp= 3. 0.0
61.361. Portable Moving Coil Needle Galvanometer after Weston, of very highFigure,
sensitivity, completely replacing a mirror galvanometer for technical resistance-measu-
rements and other zero methods; approx. resistance 300 ohms; 1 degree deflection
= approx. 5xlO~ 7 amp. The coil rests on pivots and the instrument does not there-
fore require any special setting up 8. 5.0
61.362. Precision Moving Coil Universal Galvanometer, Figures A and B, for the direct
measurement of currents to 0.15 ampere, voltages to 150 volts, e. m. f.'s, battery and
wire resistances from 0.03 to about 30,000 ohms, and for determining errors' in leads:
comprising a precision Millivolt- and Ampere-Meter of 1 ohm resistance and a spheri-
cally stretched measuring wire the graduations of which permit of the resistances being
read direct. By using a 110 volt battery insulation resistances to approx. 1,000,000 ohms
can be measured. For measuring currents above 0.15 ampere the undermentioned
shunts are used. A carrying case is included in the price; there is room for 4 shunts
in the case . 21.15.0
The scheme
of connections together with explanatory signs in German (or if desired, in French
or Russian) are etched into the cover plate of the instrument.
Accessories for No. 61,362:
Manganin Shunts for placing on the instrument:

61.363. For Currents to 0.75 Ampere
61.364. 1.5
11.365. .. 3
<>!.. !(;<>. 7.5
61.367. 15
61.368. ,, 30
Manganin Shunts including leads for connecting to the instrument:

61.369. For Currents to 75 Amperes
886 Voltaic Electricity. Section 3: Electro-Magnetic Current Measurements. No. til 375-
61 384. 1 : 5. 61 385. 1 : 8.
Manganin Series Resistances: s. d.
01.375. With \ section for 300 volts 2. 10.

61.376. 2 sections for 300, 450 volts 3. 16.
61.377. 2 for 300, 750 volts 6. 0.
61.378. 3 300, 750, 1500 volts lo. n. n

01.379. Shunt Plug, */ ohm, for converting the comparing resistance from 1 ohm to 0.1 ohm n. ]:,. i>
(i 1,380. Resistance Plug, 300 ohms; for putting in circuit as a safety resistance in the measurement of battery
resistances 0. in. n
61.381. Battery Box with 72 Dry Cells, in 6 compartments with 4 cells eaih and 4 compartments with 2 cells
each, with terminals for each compartment 7. 1". u
1
61.382. Induction Coil for generating A. C. for measuring electrolytic resistances (Kohlrausch method), for
connecting up to from 1 to 2 dry cells 1. l."i. n
61.383. Telephone for use in measurements with preceding Induction Coil |

0. 8.
61.384. Projection Moving Coil Galvanometer, Figure, on adjustable stand 4. 0.0

The galvanometer proper is completely enclosed in a mahogany box and the long horizontal
needle plays between two glass plates one of which is provided with a projection scale.
This very sensitive instrument is intended to be used with the projection lantern and is put in
circuit by pressing a button on the top of the apparatus.
Needle Galvanometers with moving Coil: see below, under the Technical Measuring Instruments.
61,38."). Model of a Moving Coil Galvanometer with Bifilar Suspension, F g i u r e, after Friedr.
C. G. Mtiller (M. T., Fig. 185) 1. 16.0
61.386. Model of a Moving Coil Galvanometer after Kolbe, Figure (Kolbe-Skellon, Introduction
to Electricity, Part 11, Fig. Ill), very compact instrument with scale visible at a distance;
can also be used for zero methods 3. ."i.o
61.387.
- -
idem, larger and more sensitive 5. 0.
61.388. Galvanometer after Deprez-d'Arsonval, Figure, with mirror and needle reading,
on ebonite base-plate with glass bell (\V. und K. phys. Prakt., Fig. 27!>; (Ian. -.Man.,
Fig. 762; Gan.-Kcin., Fig. 897), witli polished plane mirror 8. 0. l
61.389. -- idem, for mirror reading only, without needle 7. in. o
61.390. Galvanometer after Deprez-d'Arsonval. with mirror reading, on tripod stand, F i

g u r e
(W. u. K. phys. Prakt., Fig. 280), with polished plane mirror 7. 1 .">.(
The following are given in: 1

steadying resistance, 1 pair vibrating weights for ballistic purpo.-es
and 2 damping suspension frames. Sensitivity at I in scale-distance: nun deflection with approx.
I
1x10 amp.: resistance of coil, approx. 250 ohms.

H
The time of swing without weights is about
d seconds, with weights about 15 second-.
<>1,3!1. Moving Coil Mirror Galvanometer after K. \\iedemann. Figure, with 3 different
interchangeable coils; very neat instrument and highly sensitive
a 7. .">.
'oil I has a resistance of approx. 100 ohms. Coil II of approx. 20 ohms;

' Coil III is formed of
.'!..") turns of 1 mm thick wire.
The instrument is covered off on both sides by plate glass which can be raised up for I lie insertion
of rubber coils.
The sensitivity is, when Coil I is used: 1 mm deflection at 1 in scale-distance approx.
3xlO- amp.: with Coil II approx. lxlO- s amp The duration of the full period of swing is about
15 20 seconds.
ri. 395. 4507.

No. 61393. Moving Coil Mirror Galvanometers. 887
61 386. 1 : 6. 61 388. 1 : 4.
61 390. 1 : 5.
61 392. 1 : .
For using Xos. <>1,3S8 (il.391 as a Reflecting Galvanometer the Accessories listed in connect ion s. d.
with No. 61,342 are employed.
61.392. Reflecting Moving Coil Galvanometer, Figure

(German design), with rotary arm
for lens and glow lam]) (Ztschr. f. d. phys. u. chem. U. 22, p. 138). Price with single
filament glow lamp of 110 220 volts pressure I 8. 5.
This galvanometer has been specially designed by us for lecture purposes and has the following ad van -
t i- -: (1 simplicity and complete comprehensiveness of the cons traction. (2) High sensitivity with light treat-
)
ment. (3) Two groups of turns of different resistance on the same moving coil; the galvanometer can conse-
quently be iis"d for all purposes with advantage without the coils first having to be changed, and the,
damping can be easily regulated. (4) The period of swing can be easily increased for ballistic purposes.
(5) The instrument can be conveniently set up and adjusted as a Reflecting Galvanometer.
The galvanometer has one group of turns of approx. 100 ohms (1 mm
deflection at 1 in distance
=
approx. 1 xlO- amp.) and a second group of turns of approx. 10 ohms (1
8 mm
deflection at 1 m
distance = approx. 3 xH)- amp.). The duration of the complete period of swing is 10 seconds without
H
weights and about 18 seconds with weights.
Complete description sent on application.
61.393. --idem, with Nernst Lamp (can only he supplied for 110220 volt D. C.) . . 8.10.0
Unless otherwise stated, Lamp is supplied for llO volts.
Accessories: see Nos. 61,313, 61,314, 50,121, 50,119, 50,122, 50,123, 50,124, on p. 879.
Cl. 5107, 2375, 237(!,
2378, 5!>'J4.
888 Voltaic Electricity. Section 3: Electro-Magnetic Current Measurements. No. HI ::'.il
-
61 394. 1 : 6. 61 395. 1 : 6. 61 396. 1 : 6.
61 397. 1 : 10. 61 398. 1 : 4.
61.394. Universal Shunt connected up by Ayrton's method, for No. 61,392, F i g u r e, also
suitable for other Galvanometers of 100 ohms max. resistance; total resistance 10,000 ohms
with stages of 1, 1 / 10 1 / 100 Viooo> Vioooo- The ratio of damping therefore remains approxi-
, ,
mately constant 3. n. o
61.395. Connecting Switchboard for No. 61,392, Figure, for regulating the sensitivity and
damping 3. I. o
The variation of sensitivity cannot, of course, be measured in this instance, but can easily be i
manipulated so that the device is very practical especially for zero methods.
61.396. Simple Moving Coil Mirror Galvanometer, for school use, Figure; approx. resis-
tance of coil, 20 ohms 1. 10.
61.397.
-- idem, with Reading Telescope, Figure, for firmly fixing, preferably to a
wall between two windows 3. '). ()
61.398. Moving Coil Mirror Galvanometer after Ayrton-Mather, Figure :>. o. o

As a rule the resistance of the coil is about 325 ohms. If desired we can supply, in place of this,
cods with other resistances, e. g., about 14, 95, 1000 ohms or any other values. Coils of 325 loon ohm--
are charged 0. 10, extra. In ordering it should be stated whether the coils arc to be used aperiodi-
c-ally or ballistic-ally. The coils together with suspension can be, interchanged forthwith, cf. Fig. (i 1.399.
The time of swing of the ballistic coils is about seconds. The chief advantage of these Calvano-
.'!
meiers is their simple, massive construction and ease of manipulation. The sensitivity at .'i2."> ohms
is: 1mm at 1 mdistance =- approx. 2xlO~ 8 amp.
Interchangeable Coil together with Tube Suspension, F i

g u r e, for preceding ('.ah -anomeier,
aperiodic or ballistic construction.
List No. 61,399 61,400 61,401 61,402
Approx. Resistance 14 95 .">l'."i l(KM) ohms
2.0.0 2.0.0 2.0.0 2.10.0
61,403. Moving Coil Mirror Galvanometer after A\ rion -.Mather, specially constructed for
school use, Figure 6. <. (i
This iralvanoineter is arranged so that the outer covering can lie reinoM-d lor showing thu
internal construction. As regards resistance of the coils, sensitivity and prices of -pan il>. the same
remarks applies as in No. (il .3!)S--(il .402.
cl. .-.Till, .-.IIP.'. 55I7,

5508, 5384.
No. fil 407. Moving Coil Mirror Galvanometers. 889
61 406. 1 : 5. 61 407. 1 : 6.
61,404. Mirror Galvanometer after Ayrton-Mather Type No. 61,398, with three interchangeable s. d.
coils, 1 aperiodic coil of 30 ohms; one 325 ohm coil, aperiodic; one 1000 ohm coil, ballistic;
in mahogany carrying case 9. 0.
The Ayrton-Mather Type Galvanometers are, unless otherwise stated, arranged for objective
reading and 2 metres scale distance, which permits of reading by a telescope at about 3.5 in distance.
They can also if necessary be provided with a plane mirror for telescope reading at any distance.
61,40F>. Galvanometer after Ayrton-Mather Type No. 61,398, with arrangement for reading
by lamp and scale for zero methods, Figure, for fixing to the wall. In spite of the
small scale distance and small amount of space necessary, the sensitivity is increased
by interpolating a cylindrical mirror 8. 0.
Unless otherwise staled, the singl" filament glow lamp pertaining to the instrument is supplied
for 110 volts
61.406. Laboratory Galvanometer after Ayrton, with moving coil, Figure, for fixing to
wall. The instrument is always ready for use and takes up but little room. With
600 ohms resistance 1" N
deflection = approx. 3xlO~ amp \
9. 0.
61.407. Moving Coil Mirror Galvanometer for fixing to wall, Figure, very simple and
practical type; sensitivity: at 1 1 mm
in scale distance and 300 ohms resistance =
approx. 6xlo- amp

!P
5. 0.
Cl. 2383, 5385, 5329,

2334, 5078.
890 Voltaic Electricity. Section 3: Electro-Magnetic Current Measurements. \0. fil
61 411. 1 : r.
61 407 and 61 409. 12.
0*0
<> 1 W
0*0* ".s
61 412 A. 61 412. 1 : 3.
61.408. Simple Reading Telescope for preceding, for fixing direct on galvanometer, similar
to Fig. 61,397, p. 888 J. 10.
61.409. Objective Reading Device for Wall Galvanometer, Figure, for fixing to roof,
illuminated by a glow lamp; scale 0.5 m
long, with vertical adjustment: without leads 1. 10. n
The apparatus on which measurements are to be taken can be set up on a table immediately
below the reading device, thus saving a good deal of room. The galvanometer deflections can conve-
niently be observed. The galvanometer must have a concave mirror.
61.410.
- -
idem, with Nernst Lamp, giving a veiv briirht image, suitable only for 110 to
220 volt D. C 5. o.o
Unless otherwise ordered, Nos. 61,409 and 61,410 are supplied for IK) volts.
61.411. Moving Coil Mirror Galvanometer for demonstration purposes. Figure, with two
different groups of windings on the same moving coil, one of which can lie used for
damping; also with arrangement for increasing the period of swing for ballistic purposes;
including fixed damping resistance 9. 0.0
The sensitivity is: for the group of turns of approx. 100 ohms: nun deflection at m = approx.
1 1
-
4 xlO-'-' amp.; for the second group of 10 ohms, approx. 4 xlll amp. The duration of the complete
period of swing without weights
is
approx. 6 seconds: with weights, approx. !."> second-.
For using this galvanometer as a reflecting instrument, the bracket, etc. listed under No. >1,342
is suitable.
n. 49:<fi, 3832,
\... lil 422. Moving Coil Mirror Galvanometers. String Galvanometers. 891
Moving Galvanometer of max. sensitivity, Figure, with two different groups

Coil Mirror I
s. d.
of windings on the same coil, one of which can be used for damping, with a fixed damping
resistance. The second group of windings in Xos. 61,412 61,414 is approx. one-tenth
the resistance and sensitivity of the main group. Fig. 61,412 A shows the connections
of Xos. 61,412 61,414, the arrangement for ballistic measurements being shown dia-
grammatically in the illustration. The instruments are provided with polished plane
mirror.
List
892 Voltaic Electricity. Section 3: Electro-Magnetic Current Measurements. No. til (_:;
61 441. 1 : 0.
61 443 A. 1:7. 61 443 B.
Zeiss Optical Apparatus for No. 61,422. s. (1.
61.423. Achromat A 1 i'. o
61.424. Achromat A with iris diaphragm 2 0. ii
61.425. Achromat AA 1 13. (I
61.426. Achromat C 13.0
61.427. Achromat DD 15. o
61.428. Micrometer Ocular 3 graduated over the entire field of view 3.0
61.429. Projection Ocular No. 2 4.0
61.430. Projection Ocular No. 4 4.0
61,431. Small Permanent Magnet String Galvanometer, Figure, with simple microscope
for direct reading with micrometer ocidar of approx. magnification of 60, including case 9. 5.0
This small simplified string galvanometer is very practical for many experiments where the maximum
sensitivity is not required. It can be also used for projection for photographic recording and if desired
is arranged to fit the optical bench of a projection lantern. Further particulars on application.
With quartz fibre (approx. lo.ooo ohms resistance) and a magnification of 100 the following
sensitivity can be reached when adjusted aperiodically 1 : mm
deflection = 8 x!0~ 7 amp.; with cxtra-
aperindic adjustment 1 mm = 3.2xlO~ 10 amp.; with 140 ohm gold fibres the corresponding sensi-
tivities are: 7.5xlO- 8 and 3xlO~ 8 amp.
t;i,.|32. Small Electro-Magnet String Galvanometer, Figure, with simple microscope as

in No. (il.131 13. 0.0
The sensitivity is about 3 4 times as great a in No. 61,431.
Photographic Recording Apparatus and other Accessories for String Galvanometers quoted
for on application.
(il.133. Alternating Current Reflecting Galvanoscope after \\einhold (\\. I)., Fig. 5X8) . . 2. o. o
< 1. :u>, 3.'i>. '.'389,
SIM, .'illlli.
Nil. lil 444. String Galvanometers. Shunts. 893
61 444. 1
8. d.
Shunts for Mirror Galvanometers.
Galvanometer Shunts, Figure, for varying the sensitivity :
For 1 Galvanometer with Eeduction of Maximum

a Kesistance Sensitivity to
61,438. to 1 Ohm 0.1 0.01 2. 0.0

,
61,439. 100 Ohms 0.1 0.01 0.001 12. 10.
61,441. 100 1000 0.1 0.01 0.001 0.0001 . 3. 0.0

Shunt Resistances Nos. 61,438 61,441 have a short circuit plug. The resistance coils are wound
on copper and connected up in such manner that 1 / 9 1 / 99 1 / 99e etc. of its resistance is connected in
, ,
parallel with the galvanometer. These shunts are therefore chiefly suitable for Moving Needle Galvano-
meters, as they do not give constant damping with Moving Coil Galvanometers. When ordering, the
resistance of galvanometer should be quoted.
61,394. Universal Shunt connected up according to Ayrton's method, 61,394, Figure

p. 888, for Needle Galvanometers and Moving Coil Galvanometers; damping ratio appro x.
constant; suitable for all galvanometer resistances up to 100 ohms; total resistance
1
10,000 ohms; stages, 1, / 10 Vioo> Viooo? Vioooo! constructed of manganin
,
3. 0.
61.442. --idem, total resistance 100000 ohms, for Galvanometers up to 1000 ohms
resistance 4. 10.0
61.443. Power Shunt after Prof. Kommerell, German Design, Figures A and B (Ztschr.
f. d. phys. 11. chem. U. 22, 1909, p. 13) 9. 0.0
The object of the power shunt is to enable Galvanometers to be used not only
sensitive Mirror
for their original purposes demonstrating and measuring very small currents but also for measuring
currents to about 15 amperes. Fig. 61,443 B shows the connections of the apparatus. Complete
description forwarded if desired.
Reading Devices for Mirrors Instruments.
The angle
of rotation of Mirror Instruments is measured either in a subjective
manner, accordance with Poggendorff's suggestion, with the aid of a Telescqpe and
in
Scale, or, in an objective manner, by projecting the filament of an electric, glow lamp
or the shadow-image given by a wire stretched in front of a brilliantly lighted aperture,
on to a scale. In the first case the rotating mirror must be a Plane Mirror; in the second
case either a Plane .Mirror with projection lens in front, or a Concave Mirror, is used.
61.444. Simple Reading Telescope with paper scale, Figure, for" schools and exercises , 5.0
The Telescope is fitted with a 24 mm diameter objective and cross wires; it has a vertical
adjustment and can rotate about the horizontal and vertical axis.
Cl. 239.1.
894 Voltaic Electricity. Section 3: Electro-Magnetic Current Measurements. NIL Ill I I
-
61 449. 1 : G. 61 448. 1 : 0. 61 446. 1 : 6.
1
Reading Telescopes with Universal Scale Holders (but without Scale), Figures. S. (].
List Xo. Objective Aperture Magnification Price Remarks

mm
61,445. 10 .6 3.15.0) Telescope without Rack, I'ni-
61,446. 15 12 4. 5. )
versal Scale Holder without fine
adjustment.
61,447. 20 16 5. 10. I
Telescope with Rack, Uni-
61,448. 25 16 6. 5. versal Scale Holder without
61,449. 30 20 7. 5.0 |
fine adjustment,
61,450. 25 16 10. 5. ( Telescope with Rack, Uni-
61,451. 30 20 11. 0.0) versal Telescope Holder with
micrometer tip motion.
Telescope with Rack, Tni-
61,45'J. 30 20 12. 10. )
versa! Telescope Holder with
61,453. 40 L'ti 13.15.0 ) fine adjustment in vertical direc-
tion as well as about two hori-
zontal axes.
Telescope with Rack, Uni-
61,454. 20 16 9. 5. I versal Telescope Holder with
61,4:.:). 25 16 10. 0.0 I micrometer tip motion. The
61,456. 30 20 10.15.0 I illustration is not exactly in
61,457. 40 26 11.15.0 I
accordance with the construc-
tion.
No. IU.448 is (contrary to the illustration) supplied with Telescope having rark adjustment.
The scalea -uitable arc Nos. 61,458 61,475.
Wood Scales with T-shaped cross section, of old, dry material, with narrow paper strip, accu-
rately graduated by means of the dividing engine when first obtained, with mirror
figures, when ordinary figures are not expressly desired.
A) Graduated every 2 Millimetres*) Length loo mm
(ill!)
List No. 61,458 61,459

0. 6. 0.8.0
I?) Graduated in Millimetres: List No. 61,462 61,463
t 0.7.0 0.9.0
*) Can be highly reeiuimnMid'-d for low magnification l!":i(lini; Telrsropr>.
No. 01 480. Reading Telescopes. 895
61 452. 1 : 6. 61 454. 1 : 12. 61 478 61 480. 1 : 5.
Plate Glass and Milk Glass Scales, manufactured of glass plates specially prepared for this s. (1.
purpose and plane polished on both sides; with finely etched millimetre graduation
and mirror figures.
Length mm
List No.
Plate Cilass
List No.
Milk Glass
896 Voltaic Electricity. Section 3: Electro-Magnetic Current Measurements. Nil. HI 480 a
61 481. 1 :
61 480 a. 1 : 10. 61 483.
61,480 a. Simple Lamp Reading Apparatus, with puniffin lain]), Figure

61.481. Lamp Reading Apparatus, for objective reading, Figure, with single filament
glow lamp together with switch and plug contact
The scale is adjustable vertically and has a lateral motion with fine adjustment. A rending
mirror permits of a number of observers reading simultaneously without error.
61.482. Lamp Reading Apparatus with Nernst Lamp and slot diaphragm, F i g u r e, with
switch, 2 metres lamp flex., plug contact and plug; for 110 220 volt 1). ('. only. .
Lamp Reading Apparatus for fixing to Ceiling: see Nos. 61,409and 61,410, p. 890.
61.483. Lamp Reading Apparatus for objective reading, Figure, on wood stand, with
electric glow lamp and pliable Celluloid Scale, adjustable vertically
The light from the lamp falls on a universal motion mirror. It is piojectcd thence on to
the mirror of the measuring instrument through a rectangular aperture acnnss which a vertical thread
is stretched. When the lamp reading apparatus is properly set up a strongly illuminated spot appears
on the transparent celluloid scale, a fine black line appearing in the centre of this spot. l.y means
of a screw the scale of the apparatus can be moved along its length in order to adjust the lim line
on the zero point of the scale. The scale can be spherically curved or stretched straight.
61.484. -- idem, with NeriiM Lamp, for I). ('. of 110 220 volts only ">.
61,4X.~>.
-- idem, with incandescent gas burner I.
61.486. --idem,with paraffin lamp. Figure '
61.487. Extra Price for a Stand for Nos. (il. is:! (iljsii lor placing on the floor. V \
g u re 1.
61.488. Lamp Reading Apparatus, Figure, as No. t;i.is:i, but without Lamp I-
Items Nos. 61,31061,315 can be used as Lamps for above.

I'nlcss otherwise stated, the apparatus arc supplied with 111! volt lamps.
Lamp Reading Apparatus Nos. 61,481 61,488 for objective reading require a Con-
cave Mirror on the apparatus to be read the radius of curvature of which is equal to the
scale distance. In all cases a Plane Mirror with projection lens can be used in front of
them. Suitable lenses for the individual instruments quoted on application.
<
i. iioi. 4:11--',
2403.
N<>. lil 489. Glow Light Oscillographs. 897
61488. 1:10.
61486 and 61487. 1 : 12.
61 489 A. 61 489 B.
Demonstration and Graphic Reproduction

of Current Curves.
<; 1.489. Glow Light Oscillograph Tube, Figure, after Gehrcke-Buhmer, for demonstrations
and investigations, comprising oscillograph tube and stand 2. 10.
Two axially arranged electrode wires are enclosed in an evacuated tube divided by an insulating
partition. The predominating cathodeis covered over by a bluish glow at intervals when the current flows
through, this glow being proportional to the momentary current. The curve shape is rendered visible by
the aid of a rotating mirror and can be photographed when a certain rotational velocity is imparted to the
mirror. The velocity of the mirror can easily be made to suit the current-frequency predominating.
The tube can be used in a horizontal position for cinematographic photos.
Pig. 61,489 A shows a photograph of an A. C. curve, and Fig. 61,4898 that of a condenser discharge.
If desired, and at an increased price, tubes can be supplied of quartz or Uviol glass.
Cl. 3524, 5820, G009,
3540, 3541.
898 Voltaic Electricity. Section 3: Electro-Magnetic Current Measurements. No. 61 490-
61 490. 1 : 10. 61 491 and 61 496. 1 : 6. 61 493. 1 : 8.
61 499. 1 : 6.
-'ft'
61 500. I : 9.
61502 and 61499. 1:8,
s. d.
10.0
61.490. Rotating Mirror Box driven by a handle, Figure 2.
The mirrorsof the box are of the best possible quality. If desired they can be supplied coated with
silver or platinum on front at a proportionately higher price.
61.491.
- - i d e
m, driven by a 110 volt D. C. Motor, F i
gu r e, with rheostat, but without
10.
arrangement No. 61,496 shown in illustration (i. (I
61.492. The Motor c;in also be supplied for 24, 65, 150 and 220 volts I). ('. Extra price (t. 10.
The working voltage should be given when ordering.
o
61,49.''.. idem, driven by a synchronous A. (\ Motor. Figure 7. <>.
When ordering, kindly state working voltage and frequency.
61. 1!H. - idem, with clockwork drive. The speed can be regulated within wide limits
in. o
liv means of a centrifugal regulator
:..
Transformer t'n r transforming the A. C. to be investigated to the high voltage necessary;

61,49."i.
for 100 120 volts primary and .">(> cycles
When ordering, kindly quote voltage and frequency.
i i. M 3MJ,
No. 61 504. Oscillographs, Braun Tubes. 899
61 503 a. 1:8.
61,496. Arrangement on the mirror for alternating charges and discharges of Condensers, for d.
observing the charge and discharge curves, Figure j

1. 15.
61,497. Falling Slide for cinematographic photos. Price according to size of plates
3. 0. to 6. 0.
61,499. Cathode Ray Tube after F. Braun, Figure 1. 0.
The mode of action of this vacuum tube

based on the fact that a cone of cathode rays supplied by
is
an influence machine or a rapidly working spark coil (the rays being restricted by a narrow diaphragm)
produces on the glow screen, which is coated with phosphorescent paint, a spot which is as small and bright
as possible, the behaviour of this spot being observed through the glass and mica.
If a small magnetizing coil, the axis of which is placed fairly vertical to the tube, is slipped along the
tube, and a current allowed to traverse the latter, the cathode rays are deflected. If in addition an A. C.
is used, the spot of light is set into synchronous vibrations. If now a rotating mirror is placed opposite the
tube, the light spot is dissolved for the purposes of the curve. Ample means are therefore available for
studying the rapid variations of a magnetic field as well as the secular course of such fields. The current
curves of A. C. generating stations are adapted for such observations, as well as the curves of the
primary an secondary circuits of an induction coil. For suitable mirrors see Nos. 61,490 61,494.
The rotation of the luminous point in magnetic rotating field is specially adapted for demonstration
purposes (of. List Nos. 61,503 and 61, 503 a).
61.500.
-- idem, larger, Figure, 1m long, with screen 130 mm diameter . 3. 0.0
-- idem, after
61.501. Braun-Wehnelt, Figure, for electrostatic deflections 1. 15.
61,502. Two
Coils on Stand, Figure, one arranged to rotate 1. 10.
The luminous point describes Lissajous's and similar curves if alternating current is conducted
through two coils placed on the diaphragm of the Braun tube. By rotating one of the magnetizing coils,
and thereby altering the angle enclosed by the two coils, the various figures are obtained.
If current from a central station is employed, a glow lamp resistance must be placed in series (see
N.I. 61,504).
(!!,.")().5. Magnetizing Ring for Two-phase Current, fitting the stand of preceding apparatus.
Price without stand . . 1. 16.
61,50.'! a.
-
idem, for .'{-phase current, Figure, without the retort holder illustrated
and without stand . 1. 16.
c.l.r.o.'l l>. Stand for Xos. 6 1.503 and 61,503 a 0. (i.
('.1,504. Glow Lamp Resistance 1. 4.
Tiiis resistance consists of 4 glow lamp holders each with two current terminals, mounted on a slate
slab. It is used when apparatus Nos. 61,502 60,503a are to be worked connected direct to a network.
Cl. 2740.
900 Voltaic Electricity. Section 3: Electro-Magnetic Current Measurements. N.I. 61 ;,n.-i
61 505. 1 : 6. 50796, 61505, 61507, 61509, 61510, 61511. 1 : 6.
01,5(1."). Demonstration Double Oscillograph with two measuring loops, after AVehnelt, s. (1.
Figures (E. T. Z., 1903, p. 703 and 1904, p. 416), on stand 0. (I
Between the poles of an electromagnet excited by D. C., a loop of hard drawn silver wire carries a
glass mirror. If this moving system is traversed by fluctuating, pulsating or oscillating currents, and pro-
vided that the apparatus is arranged as in above illustration, luminous curves, corresponding to the current
curves, are projected on to a screen placed opposite the projection lantern. If now the moving systems of
the double oscillograph are connected in parallel on an A. C. network, the current curves can be made
to coincide exactly. If now by means of the switch apparatus No. 61,510 a non-inductive re-
sistance, then an inductive resistance, and finally a capacity or the two latter simultaneously -- are
put in series with the moving system of one of the oscillographs, the resultant current reductions and
phase lead and lag, or in other words, the phase displacement between current and voltage, can be shown
in a very pretty manner. We send complete description on demand. For Rotating Mirrors see
N'os. 61,490 61,494.
Ol,:>lo. NEW! Switch Apparatus (German Design) for producing Phase Displacements with
leading and lagging current, Figure. Price without lantern or other accessories
illustrated 6. 12.
The apparatus on mahogany frame, two non-inductive resistances, one
consists of a marble slab
sliding resistance, one coil with large, adjustable self induction, one change-over switch, and the necessary
terminals for 'connecting a capacity, the oscillograph and the A. C. source.
61,507. Diaphragm with two holes, fitting projection lanterns 0. 10.
61.508. Screen with clamp, for screening the secondary radiation i

0. 0. o
61.509. Large Lens on Stand 0. 16.
61,511. Condenser insulated with paraffined paper, about 12 mfd., for voltages to 120 2. 14.
61,512. Photograph on glass of the scheme of connections of the double oscillograph in con-
junction with Switch Apparatus No. 61,510 0. 1. c>
01. 500. Oscillograph after Wehnelt, with a metal loop . 3. 0. o
specially adapted for investigating and demonstrating the curve of the ;irc of A. C. arc lamps and
the influence of the choking coil on the same, for checking the working of interrupters etc.
ill. .">!:'>.Oscillograph after \Vittmann, with a metal loop, Figure 11. o. o

The oscillograph IKUS converging pole pieces the distance apart of which can be varied. A small
ebonite frame is placed in the air gap, which is about 4 mm wide, a current loop of tinsel being stretched
across this frame. The loop is conducted over a small ivory pulley and can be evenly adjusted by micro-
metrical arrangement. For damping the oscillations of the loop itself, use is made of a very light aluminium
frame which is insulated and cemented on to the loop. The electromagnet is arranged to rotate about a
vertical a*is so as to render possible to place the loop vertically.
it
The apparatus is used same manner as the Wehnelt Hscillographs. the present instrument
in the
however being much more sensitive
Cl. 2740 ', 4957.

Xo. 61 522. Oscillographs. Ammeters and Voltmeters. 901
61 513. 1 : 6. 61 520. 1 : 6.
61 521. 1 : 6. 61 521 and 61 522. 1 : 6.
Ammeters and Voltmeters.

Demonstration Instruments.
61.520. Direct Current Demonstrating Ammeter, Kohlrausch's system, Figure, range
0.2 2 amps., with 20 ampere shunt , 2. 10.
The instrument is fitted with a scale visible from a distance and explains the construction of the
ammeter in a very comprehensive manner, as all parts are arranged open. The scale can be read from
both sides.
61.521. Direct Current Demonstration Voltmeter, Kohlrausch's system, Figure, range

0.5 3 volts, with additional resistance for multiplying the range ten times 2. 10.
The Voltmeter the same in construction as Ammeter No. 61,520 and differs from the latter
is
simply in the winding and calibration. Scale can be read from both sides.
The current led into both instruments by the left hand terminals. While in the case of the volt-
is
meter the sensitivity varied and the range increased by releasing the connection between the right hand
is
terminals, in the case of the ammeter the shunt fitted on the back of the instrument is set into action by
inserting the connecting piece between these right-hand terminals. If approximate knowledge of the
voltage or current available is not known before hand, this measurement is attempled always with reduced
sensitivity, i. e. with resistance in series and with shunt connected.
61.522. Glass Case with brass mount for Nos. 61,520 or 61,521, Figure. Price, each . . 0. 15.
Cl. 3344, 5838,

5839, 5840.
902 Voltaic Electricity. Section 3: Electro-Magnetic Current Measurements. No. 61523
61 523 A. 1:6. 61 523 B. 1:6.
61 527. 1 : 5.
in. :.L'.{. Dead Beat Universal Moving Coil Measuring Instrument, Deprez-d'Arsonval system, * () 50 volts, (3) as a Vertical Galvanometer, range 2 2 milliamps. and
2000200 millivolts. Can be. read from both sides (see Figs. A and B) r. 1(1. n
The instrument is constructed on the Deprez-d'Arsonval system; it has a moving coil in a very
powerful magnetic field. Consequently it is independent of its position in regard to the magnetic meridian
and of external magnetic influences. The instrument has three pairs of terminals designated respectively
"Amp."; "Volts": "Galv.''; the leads are to be connected to these in accordance with the various modes
of employment. Two flex Me cords wit h plugs on the ends are fitted on the moving coil. These plugs are inserted
i
in the ping-holes of the terminals designated

"Amp." or "Galv." when it is desired to use the instrument
.i> an Ammeter or a
galvanometer. When used as a voltmeter one plug is placed in one of the terminals
designated. "Volts", the other being inserted in the plui;- hole of the resistance coil (see l-'ii;. li l..~>2.'! A).
(i !..")!' I. -- idem, moving system cannot be withdrawn ft. U.
HI. .vjft. Glass Case with brass mount for Nos. ui. :>>:> or til. 524 Price, cadi o. i.v o
il. 2421,2420,
2432.
No. 61 531. Demonstration Instruments. 903
61 528. 1 : 6. 61 531. 1 : 6.
61,526. Additional Voltage Coils for increasing the voltage range of Nos. 61,523 and 61,524 \
s. d.
in stages of 50 volts each, so that e. g. four extra coils are used for a range of
250 volts Price each 0. 8.
61,527. Universal Measuring Instrument for Direct Current, Deprez-d'Arsonval system,

Figure, suitable for current and voltage measurements and for use as a galvanometer 5. 0.
The instrument has a scale visible from both sides. The following are the ranges:
As a Galvanometer: 0.015 .0 0.015 amp with upprox. 10 ohms resistance.
As an Ammeter:
As a Voltmeter: 3
and .
3 and 50
202 amps.15015
50 volts.
r.l.:>i>8. Universal Demonstration Moving Coil Galvanometer with scale visible at a distance,
for Direct Current, Deprez-d'AreonvaJ system, Figure, can be used both as a pointer
galvanometer for zero methods (resistance measurements and the like) and as a volt-
meter and an ammeter. Total height 450 mm, in glass case 7. 0.
This instrument has been designed to satisfy the need of an apparatus adaptable for use in as many
ways as possible as well as for technical measurements of large current-densities. The graduation is visible
at a distance. We have thus five instruments comprised in one, i. e. :
(1) Galvanometer.
(2) Voltmeter to 3 volts.
(3) Voltmeter to 30 volts.
(4) Ammeter to 3 amperes.
(5) Ammeter to 30 amperes.
All leads are laid in the open and can be seen easily at a distance. The connections are changed
over by plugs.
61,529.
- -
idem, considerably larger, total height 60 cm 8. 8.
<> 1, 530. Demonstration Moving Coil Voltmeter, for Direct Current, Deprez-d'Arsonval system,
cf.Fig. 61,531, with scale visible at a distance; with two ranges, 3 and 30 volts,
in glass case. Total height 450 mm. Can also be used as a Galvanometer .... 6. 0.
This instrument has the same advantages as No. 61,528; change-over by plugs.
is 1. .vj l. Demonstration Moving Coil Ammeter for Direct Current, Deprez-d'Arsonval system,
Figure, with scale visible at a "distance; with two ranges, 3 and 30 amps. :
In glass case. Total height 450 mm; can also be used as a Galvanometer .... 6. 0.
In this instrument, constructed in a similar manner to No. 61,528, change over is effected
I
iy plugs.
Cl. 6005, 6002.

61534. 1:6. 61 562. 1 : 5. 61 572. 1 : 6.
61 563. 1 : 5. 61565. 1 :/>. 61 570. 1 : .
Electromagnetic Soft Iron Demonstration Ammeters for Direct or Alternating Current, with
Air Damping, Fig. 61,534, with moving system (can be taken out), in glass ease:
Range 0.2 2
61,532
4. 10.
List No.
For A. C.
\
I Price
Nil. lil 573. Demonstration Instruments. 905
61 573. 61 574. 61 575.
u
61.563. Demonstration Hot Wire Ammeter after Grimsehl (Ztschr. f. d. phys. u. chem. U. 16,
s - -
1903, p. 282 Grimsehl, p. 764), Figure; can be used for Direct and Alternating Current;
;
with shunts , 1. 8.
The instrument possesses a degree scale and a calibrating scale
for the permissible currents up to
1
ampere. By using the shunts the range can be increased to 10 times that of the calibrated scale.
The pointer can be bent back so as to use either one or other of the scales.
61.564. Dead Beat Demonstration Hot Wire Ammeter, of. P i

g. 61,565, for Direct and Alter-
nating Current of from 5 amperes, in glass case 5. 5. ()
61.565.
- -
idem, with 2 ranges, F i g u r e, for 5 and 25 amperes 6. 15.
- -
61.566. idem, with 3 ranges, for 5, 25 and 50 amperes 7. 10.
61.567. Dead Beat Demonstration Hot Wire Voltmeter for Direct and Alternating Current,
of. Fig. 61,565, for 15 volts, with fuses, in glass case 5. 15.
61.568.
-- idem, with 2 ranges, for 30 and 150 volts 6. 15.
61.569.
-- idem, with 3 ranges, for 30, 60 and 150 volts 7.10.0
(i 1,570. Electrostatic Demonstration Voltmeter for Direct and Alternating Current, F i
g u re,
for 1000 volts, with damping magnet 9. 0.
61,571.
-
idem, for 0500 volts 9. 0.
(i 1,572. Demonstration Wattmeter for Direct and Alternating Current, F i

g u r e, for 10 amps.
and 125 volts, with damping 8. 0.
and at a proportionate variation in price, the wattmeters can be supplied for other current
If desired,
maxima between and 50 amps, and for other voltages.
61, 573. Demonstration Ammeter, Hummel-Schuckert system, Figure, from 1.3 amps.,
for projection 3. 15.
til, 571. Demonstration Ammeter, Dobrovolski system, Figure, from to 10 amps., for
projection 3. 15.
61,575. Demonstration Galvanometer, Deprez-d'Arsonval system, Figure, graduated from

30 milliarnperes, for projection 5. 10.
This instrument can also be supplied graduated as a volt- or ammeter.
Technical Measuring Instruments.

Precision instruments constructed on the Depree-d'Ajsonval system can be recommended
before all others for Direct Current, as they are most accurate, dead-beat and possess an even gra-
duation commencing from zero. The electromagnetic instruments for direct or alternating current
have an air damping arrangement which is efficient in its action. Their finer graduation commences
at about 5 of the maximum deflection.
'
'
When ordering it should be precisely stated whether these
instruments are intended for Direct or Alternating Current. In addition, the periodicity should be
given, otherwise instruments for 50 cycles are supplied.
For accurate measurements on Alternating Current it is advisable to use Hot Wire Instruments
and Dynamometrical Instruments. In these instruments also the finer graduation commences at
about V 5 of the total deflection. The round pattern instruments are, unless otherwise stated, sup-
plied for front connection.
61 583. 1 : 2. 61 605. 1 : 3.
Round Pattern Instruments for permanently fixing on switchboards or stands.
Ranfjr
No. 61 704. Technical Voltmeters and Ammeters. 907
61 644. 1 : 2.
61 655. 1 : 3.
'*'*, ^^^^^^_
61 700. 1 : 3. 61 704 and 61 628. 1 : 3.
61.675. Extra Price for the 200 mm diameter Voltmeters, with a third terminal for sub-
|
s. d.
dividing the series resistance and obtaining a second range I 0. 12.
61.676. Extra Price for the Electromagnetic Instruments if fitted with a spiral spring for
enabling them to read correctly in any position 0. 2.
Dead Beat Hot Wire Measuring Instruments for Direct and Alternating Current, Figure, round
.
pattern, independent of magnetic influences (and, in the case of Alternating Current, independent
of the current curve and periodicity as well); Base plate 246 mm diameter.
Ammeters:
908 Voltaic Electricity. Section 3: Electro-Magnetic Current Measurements. N.I 01 705
61706. 1:8. 61 717 and 61 725. 1 : 5. 61 731. 1 : 4.
Wood Stand for Instruments Nos. 61,576 61,702, for placing on a table, Figure.
List No. 61,705 61,706 61,707
For instruments of 246 200 125 diameter Base platemm
0.12.0 0.10.0 0.8.0
Precision Milliammeters, Deprez-d'Arsonval system, Figure.
Range
Milliamperes
No. lil 7S7. Technical Voltmeters and Ammeters. 909
61 769. 1 : 5. 61 776. 1 : 5. 61 784. 1
Dead Beat Precision Instruments, Deprez-d'Arsonval system, for Direct Current only, with 8 d -
knife-edge pointer and mirror scale, Figure.

I
Eange 12.5 75 125 250 12.5 and 125 125 and 250 volts
List No. 61,755 61,756
*.,,<> 61,757 61,758 61,759 61,760
meters 4.10.0 5.2.0 5.2.0
\ Price 4 5 4 5 4.6.0
( Eange 1.5 15 30 50 75 100 amps.
List' No. 61,761 61,762 61,763 61,764 61,765 61,766
meters Pl k e
\
. ,
4 5 Q 4.5.0 4.8.0 4.8.0 4.10.0 4.12.0
Instruments with different ranges, also Ammeters with external shunt, quoted for on application.
Compare also Universal Galvanometer No. 61,362, p. 885.
Series Resistances for Precision Voltmeters, Figure, for increasing the range.
Maximum Range 15 75 150 200 250 300 600 750 volts
List NO. 61,767 61,768 61,769 61,770 61,771 61,772 61,773 61,774
Price 1. 2. 1. 2. 1. 6. 1. 8. 1. 8. 1. 10. 1. 18. 2. 10.
Each Series Resistance can be divided up into as many as five ranges.
61,775. Extra Price for each subdivision 0. 9.
61.776. Dead Beat Precision Voltmeter, Deprez-d'Arsonval system,for Direct Current only,
Figure, can also be used for measuring insulations with the working voltage; with
three ranges, 0120, 0240 and 480 Volts i
2. 6.
61.777. Dead Beat Precision Volt- and Ammeter, Deprez-d'Arsonval system, for Direct Current :
only, Figure, with six ranges, 0.15, 1.5 and 15 Amps.; 3, 15 and 150 volts . . . 12. 10.
Shunts, of Manganin, for above, with leads.

Range 30 75 150 amperes
List No. 61,778 61,779 61,780
Price 2. 0. 3. 0. 3. 6.
Precision Hot Wire Voltmeters for Alternating and Direct Current, Figure.
Range 5 :W 75 125 250 6 and 120 125 and 250 volts
List Xo. 61,781 61,782 61,783 61,784 61,785 61,786 61,787
Price 5. 6. 5. 6. 5. 12. 5. 12. 6. 0. 6. 6. 6. 10.
<]. 40', 41 K, 56 "',
5524, 39"", 38 r.
910 Voltaic Electricity. Section 3: Electro-Magnetic Current Measurements. No. 61789-
61800. 61 810.
61,789. Precision Hot Wire Ammeter for Alternating and Direct Current, with external s. d.
shunts (Millivoltmeter), these shunts not being included in the price, cf. Fig. 61,784 . 5. 6.
Shunts for above.

Eange 10 20 40 60 100 150 200 amperes
List No. 61,790 61,791 61,792 61,793 61,794 61,795 61,796
Price 0. 10. 0. 10. 0. 10. 0. 12. 0. 14. 0. 16. 1.2.0
Precision Instruments constructed on the dynamometrical principle, for Alternating and Direct Current,
Figures. The graduation on the Voltmeters and Ammeters commences at one-fifth of the
maximum scale value. The instruments are provided with leather carrying cases and currying
boxes respectively.
Voltmeters :
No. 61 836. Voltaic Electricity. Section 4: Ohm's, KirchhoH's and Joule's Laws. 911
61 833. 1 : 8.
108 OHM
'
SILBER
KUPFER
UStN
NEUSIIBER
COHSTANSTAN
61835. 1:11.
Ammeters :
List No.
912 Voltaic Electricity. Section 4: Ohm's, Kirchhoff's and Joule's Laws. No. 61837 -
61 839. 1 : 9.
61843. I: 10.
61 837. 1 : 5.
61 841. 1 : 0.
..... ..Mt *.....
61 843. 1 : 4. 61 846. 1 : 6.
h th
61.837. Rheostat after Whcatstone (M. P., 10' Edn., IV, 1, Figs. 343 a and b; 9
s. il.
Edn.,
Ill, Pigs. 361 and 362), Figu
re, with 1 slate cylinder 160 long. The resist mice mm
corresponding to one turn should be quoted 3. 0.
61.838.
- - i d e m, with 1 cylinder 250 mm long 3. 6.
61.839. Rheochord after Poggendorff, r e (M. P., 9 Figu th

Edn., Ill, Fig. 364), with 2 pla-
t ilium wires 1 m
long and mercury contact vessel 4. 0.
61.840. Rheochord, Figure, simple, with sliding contact, measuring wire 500 nun long '
1. 10.
61.841. 4 Resistance Spirals of thick Manganin Wire, F g n re. i after Friedr. C. G. Miiller
(M. T. Fig. 194) one. each of 1, 0.5, 0.2 and 0.1 ohm 0. 16.
61.842. Resistance of 0.01 ohm, for Shunt Experiments, after Friedr. ('. G. Miiller (M. T.
1. 0.
Fig. 1!5)
61.843. 3 Resistance Spirals, after I-Yiedr. C. G. Miiller, Figure (M. T. Fig. 191), of copper,
German silver and manganin, of equal length and cross section, for demonstrating
0. 0.
temperature coefficient
61.844. Device for explaining that the conducting resistance of a metallic conductor depends
upon the temperature; with platinum wire (\Y. I). Fig. 514 [487J) n. 4.
61.845. Device for the same Purpose, for liquids (W. D. Fig. 515 [488]) 0. 1.0
(]. 24 II-.'. 21110, 24(53,
4 133, 4809, 2474.
No. til 87'.'. Resistances. 913
61 848, 61 849. 1 : 4. 61 854. 1 : 4. 61 871. 1 : 20.
61847. 1:8. 61 872. 1 = 10.
61,846. Apparatus for showing the Influence of Temperature on Resistance, Figure s. d.
(W. u. E., Fig. 301), with one spiral each of platinum, nickelin, iron and copper on
wood reels in two reagent flasks, with heating vessel, stirrer and thermometer . . 2. 0.
(> 1,847. Apparatus for the same purposes, after Grimsehl, Figure, with iron wire and
manganin spiral heated by a Bunsen burner. '
A small glow lamp serves as indicator
'
(Grimsehl, Fig. 819) . . 0.11.0
61,848. 1 Ohm
for School Use, of manganin, bifilar wound, adjusted at 20 C., Figure,
in metal case arranged to receive petroleum for maintaining a constant temperature j
0. 16.
61,849. Siemens Unit, of manganin, bifilar wound, Figure, adjusted at 20C., in metal case,
arranged to receive petroleum for maintaining a constant temperature
'
. . 0. 16.
We still supply this unit as being of historica interest.
Single Resistances for forming sets, Figure, of constantan, in metal case, bifilar wound,
calibrated at 20 0., with connecting links for forming complete sets of resistances;
also suitable for scholars' exercises. The terminals have double nuts so as to be able
conveniently to introduce branches.
List No. 61,850 61,851 61,852 61,853 61,854 61,855 61,856 61,856 a 61,857 61,858 61,859
Resistance 0.1 0.2 0.3 0.4 1 2 3 4 10 20 30 ohms
0. 3. 0. 3. 0. 3. 0. 3. 0. 3. 0. 3. 0. 3. 0. 3. 0. 3. 0. 3. 0. 3.
List No. 61,860 61,861 61,862 61,863 61,864 61,865 61,866 61,867 61,868 61,869
Resistance 40 100 200 300 400 1000 2000 3000 4000 10,000 ohms
0. 3. 0. 4. 0. 4. 0. 4. 0. 4. 0. 4. 0. 4. 0. 4. 0. 4. 0. 5.
61,s7(. 3 Resistance Coils each of 100 ohms, on wood board (W. D. Fig. 516 [489]) . . 0. 16.
61,871. Conductor after Kolbe, Figure (Kollie

-
Skellon, Introduction to Electricity,
Part I, Fig. 3) 1. 5.
<> 1.872. Rheostat after Kolbe, for demonstrating relative resistance, Figure (Ztschr. f.
d. phys. u. chem. U. 20, 1907, p. 82); can also be used as a bridge and for students'
exercises 5. 0.
A baseboard (which is also arranged for hanging on the wall) has four wires of constantan, iron,
and copper of the same cross section, the three first named being provided with a sliding contact.
brass
The constantan wire is provided with double push terminals and scale for use, thus enabling it to be used
also as a bridge wire.
Cl. 2464, 5518, 5730,

5971,5216. 58
914 Voltaic Electricity. Section 4: Ohm's, Kirchhofi's and Joule's Laws. No. 61873
6 1 873 A. Fi-ont View. 1:8. 61 873 B. Back View. 1 : 8.
61,873. School Rheostat after Kolbe, Figs. A and B (Ztschr. f. d. phys. u. chem. U. 21, t <'
1908, p. 217), with supplementary rheostat and table of resistances on the back . 7. 0.
Fig. A
shows the front of the apparatus. Upon a white lacquered, vertical wood slab is arranged ;
first of alla single ohm of bare constantan wire, which can be regulated between and 1 ohm without
intermediate steps, by means of a reliable sliding contact. The resistance values corresponding can be
read off on an easily interchangeable cardboard scale. This cardboard scale is interchangeable in order
that it can be arranged properly when the constantan wire has undergone some wear. To the right of the
single ohm is a switch handle rheostat of constantan wire, consisting of 20 spirals of 0.5 ohm each, covered
green, and two spirals of red-covered manganin wire (visible on the back) of 5 ohms each. All spirals
can be got at easily by the employment of push terminals and can easily be re-calibrated should this
prove necessary after long use. All connections are laid open, being comprehensively arranged. The single
ohm and the switch handle rheostat are connected in series but can also be used independently. All values
between and 21 ohms can be got in fine stages by means of two handles.
On the back of the rheostat (Fig. B) is fixed a table containing the resistances of the commoner
metals together with the resistance per metre and the length per ohm for wires of one mm
diameter, also
the relative resistances. In addition there is also a supplementary rheostat consisting of >/i metre of 0.3 mm
thick platinum, iron, brass, and copper wire and 1 m each constantan wire 0.3 and 0.6 mm
thick and man-
ganin wire 0.3 and 0.9 mm
thick. All these wires are accessible singly.
All numbers are painted on very distinctly and are visible at a distance.
in. XT 1. -
idem, without supplementary resistance and without table of resistances
on the back 6. 0. o
61,875. Demonstration Sliding and Plug Rheostat, after Krlemann, Figs. A, B and (.'

The rheostat consists of two upright boards joined together by a hinge and a single board for the
single ohm, it being possible to attach this smaller board to the large one. Fig. A shows the front with
the single ohm 1 ohm attached, plug resistance 210 ohms, and sliding resistance o In ohms. A
copper, iron and Herman silver wire of equal length and equal cross section are stretched zig-zag fashion
across the back (Fig. B). In addition the back contains s \\ire- of :>(> cm length (3 each of cross Section 1.
2 of cross section -J. ami :; of cross section 3). Fig. C shows the front folded up with the single ohm taken
off and fixed on a special baseboard.
This rheostat can be used in a great variety of ways and the zig-zag arrangement of the resistances
assists the comprehension of the students.
f.l.XTti. - - idem, with back blank 10.10.0
M. 5179,5180.
No. C1881. School Rheostats. 915
61 875 A. 1:10. 61 875 C. l:ld.
61 880. 1 : <>.
s. (1.
<>1.X77. Single Ohm, alone, cf. Fig. 61,875 C, to the right 1.10.0
<il,-s79. Switch Contact Rheostat for school use, Figure 5. 5.
The resistance comprises three decades of 10 x 1, 10 x 10 and
10 x 100 ohms, a total of 1100 ohms,
which can be used both in series and, by loosening the two connecting bars, separately in single decades
for different circuits. The handle, which is manipulated backwards and from the front serves at the same
time as a resistance indicator. The non-inductively wound resistances are placed on the back of the appa-
ralus in a comprehensive fashion, being laid open. The maximum load is for the units, 2 amperes; for
tin' tens, 0.8 ampere; and for the hundreds, 0.2
ampere.
<H.X80. --id e m, with slide wire resistance, Figure, of 1 ohm, divided into 0.1 ohm,
for maximum load of 2.5 amps 6. 10.0
<>l,ssi. Slide Wire Resistance alone ... l- r>. o
Cl. 5369, 537 1 , 5370, 2472,

3937. 58*
916 Voltaic Electricity. Section 4: Ohm's, Kirchhoff's and Joule's Laws. N... r.l 883
61 888. 1 : 5.
61 892. 1 : 10. 61893. 1:13.
61.882. Switch Contact Rheostat, Figure, in wood case with ebonite top, with 22 stages,
0, 1, 2, 4, 6, 8, 10, 15, 20, 30, 40, 50, 60, 75, 100, 150, 200, 300, 400, 500, 750,
and 1000 ohms (total resistance) ....................... 3. o. o
61.883. --idem, in 22 stages, total 2000 ohms .................. 3.10.0

61.884. - -
idem, in 22 stages, total 3000 ohms .................. 4. o. o
61.885.
-- idem, in 22 stages, total 4000 ohms .................. 5. 0.0
61.886. idem, in 27 stages, 0, 1, 2, 4, 6, 8, 10, 15, 20, 30, 40, 50, 60, 75, 100. 150.
L'OO, 300, 400, 500, 750, 1000, 1500, 2000, 3000, 4000, 5(100 ohms (total resistance) (i. 0.0
The maximum load for Rheostats Nos. 61,882 61,886 is, for the units. o,:t ampere: for the tens.
o. I
ampere: for the hundreds, 0.05 ampere; and for the thousands. n.O-J ampere. The resistances are only
approximately correct .
<il,X,SX. Rheostat after Friedr. ('. (',. Miiller, F j; 11 re (/tschr.

Drum i f. d. pliys. 11. ehein.
U. 10, p. 12; M. T. p. 275) ......... ................ 7. 0.
On a wood drum are stretched vertically 100 man<::inin wires of which 10 ohm. The drum is <>..">
rotary and thus more or less resistance can lie put in. <>M a hoard are titled four coils with lo. and '2<> ."). l.~>
ohm and a rheochord with 0.1 ohm resistance. Total resistance. .~>o ohms. The apparatus is vry compact,
and the scale visihle at a distance.
61,115. Forceps for Shunting, for above, Figure on p. *<!<; (M. T. Fig. L'OO) .... o. 1. o
C|. 217:!. -J471. .
4118, ll'.'T.
No. Ill S'.i.-,. Explanation of Ohm's Laws. 917
61894. 1:12.
61895. 1:12.
61.889. Model for explaining the Galvanic Current and Ohm's Law by comparison with s. d.
th
a water lead (Eiidorff-Liipkc, GrundriP der Chorine, 12 Edn., Fig. 219), Figure 1. 15.0
61.890. Model for explaining the Phenomena in Electric Circuits by liquid currents, after
Grim.sehl (Ztschr. f. d. phys. u. chem. U. 8, p. 210), single 2. 0.0
61,891.
- - i d e in, double 2. 15.
61.892. Apparatus after Go'tze, for explaining that three Conductors in parallel act the same
as one Conductor of three times the cross section, Figure 7.10.0
61.893. Apparatus for explaining Ohm's Law, Figure, after Gotze, with precision in-
struments one ammeter, one voltmeter, one ohmmeter, resistance with contact
- -
circuit, and plug arrangement for connecting up the voltmeter to any parts of the
resistance ,> 18. 0.0
61.894.
- -
idem, with Resistances which can be put in parallel or series, Figure, with
a precision ammeter
for the main circuit, 4 small ammeters, 3 change-over switches,
and 1
switches, also a precision voltmeter with plug cords 24. 0.
61.895. Apparatus for explaining the Wheatstone Bridge hydrodynamically, after Noack,
Figure
(Ztschr. f. d. phys. u. chem. U. 1, p. 236), with Current Indicator after
Szymanski (Ztschr. f. d. phys. u. chem. U. 2, p. 272) 4. 0.0
Cl. 4124,5881.
918 Voltaic Electricity. Section 4: Ohm's, Kirchhorf's and Joule's Laws. N... Ill 896
61897. 1 :
61 896. 1 : 9. 61 898. 1 : 12.
MAX KOHL, CHEMNITZ.
61899. 1 : 10. 61 900. 1 : 8. 61 901. 1 : 3.
61.896. Apparatus for explaining the Wheatstone Bridge, after Spies, Figure, with t
4 glow lamp brunches (Ztschr. f. d. phys. u. chem. ['. 12, p. 78) . l'. 8.
The glow lamps can be switched out singly and resistances connected to the terminals pertaining
to the lamps for comparison purposes.
01.897. School Pattern Wheatstone Bridge a fter Kolbe, Figure, for demonstration and
students' exercises (Ztschr. f. d. phys. u. chem. I'. 20, 1907, p. 78) . I. Hi. o
In constructing this apparatus the value, has been emphasized of comprehensiveness, plain figuring
visible at a distance, and ease of manipulation. The connections have been made on the principle of Kohl-
rausch's bridge. The measuring wire with its slider (',.,, comparison resistances of U.I, 1 and Id ohms.
,'i
a reversing switch G,, 1 key, also the terminals, are mounted on one baseboard. The slider of the pilot
wire slides over two different scales, one of these being provided with a graduation in hundred! hs, the
other the scale used being divided according to the quotient . The bridge can also be hung
Jdd a
upon the wall.
Ji.x98. Wheatstone Bridge for teaching purposes, Figure, with stretched measuring
wire, 1 long, of constantan, divided in half-decimetres for the audience, and in
ni
millimetres .for the teacher; without comparison resistances 1. Hi. d
61,89. 4 Comparison Resistances for above, of o.l, 1. r> and f>

ohms, Figure .... i'. u. it
The comparison resistances are prepared of manganiii, the temperature coefficient of which is negli-
gible. The wires are stretched in the open and are non-inductive; and the individual amounts can lie
easily put in circuit by drawing out the corresponding plug. Very neat and convenient to manipulate
til ,9d(). 3 Comparison Resistances for No. 61,898, of o.l, 1 and 10 ohms. Figure . . 1. Id. o
The smallest resistance of 0.1 ohm is of copper: the other two resistances of and 10 ohms respec- 1
tively being made of constantan wire, so that it is possible to show the ratio of the specific resistances.
The exact resistance values are given on the upper edge of the board.
til, 901. 4 Simple Comparison Resistances, Figu re, of manganin, wound on wood reels;
0.1, 1, 5 and 5 ohms |
1. 0.
Cl. 2489, .1234, MM,

-.'ttlii. .YS'.til -.>467.
No. 61913. Simple Wheatstone Bridges. Standard Resistances. 919
61 902. 1 : 10.
61905. 1:8. 61 906 61 911. 1 : 4. 61 912. 1 : 4.
61.902. Simple Wheatstone Slide Wire Bridge for students' use, after Halm, (Hahn, Figure * <i.
Schiileriibungen, Fig. 314; cf. Gan.-Man. Fig. 768; Gan.-Eein., Fig. 936), without
comparison resistances 0.11.0
For comparison resistances use can be made of Nos. 62,000 62,011 or the resistancas NOR. 61,850
to 61.865.
61.903. Simple Wheatstone Bridge for school use, after Friedr. C. G. Miiller (M. T. Fig. 196),
without comparison resistances 1. 4.0
61.904. Double Key above (M. T. Fig. 197)
for 0.12.0
For further Double Keys see Nos. 61,144 and 61,145, p. 868.
(i 1.005. Simple Wheatstone Bridge, Figure (M. P., 9 th Edn., Ill, Fig. 395), without
comparison resistances . . . 0. 15.
Standard Resistances.
Please Note. We attach special value to the construction of accurate standard resistances
and our laboratory is thoroughly well equipped for satisfying all requirements in this
connection.
If desired, and on payment of the usual fees and postal charges, we will send
our standard resistances to the Physikalisch-Technische Keichsanstalt for certifi-
cation as precision resistances.
Standard Resistances, Figures, of Manganin Wire, wound on metal cylinder, impre-
gnated with shellac and heated to 140 C. before adjustment. Enclosed in a metal
case and provided with bent copper leads for hanging in the mercury cups of a petro-
leum bath. These resistances, like all other resistances of our manufacture, are cali-
brated in International Ohms (1 ohm = the resistance of a column of mercury 106.3 cm
long and of 1 sq. mm
cross section at C.
List No. 61,906 61,907 61,908 61,909 61,910 61,911 61,912
Resistance 0.1 1 10 100 1000 10,000 100,000 Ohms
2. 14. 2. 8. 2. 8. 2. 8. 2. 12. 2. 14. 3. 10.
The load permissible for these resistances is up to 1 watt when used in the petroleum bath without
cooling, and for a short time in air for precision measurements and resistance-comparisons; for technical
current measurements the load can be as much as 10 watts. The maximum permissible currents in the
petroleum bath are consequently:
Current measurements
Resistance Precision measurements for technical purposes
Ohms Amperes Amperes
100.000 0.003 .01
10.000 0.01 0.03
1.000 0.03 0.1
100 0.1 0.3
10 0.3 1
1 1 3
0.1 3 10
0.01 10 30
0.001 30 100
0.0001 100 300
Standard Resistance No. 61,912 of 100,000 ohms has special terminals on the limbs, see Fig. 61,912.
61,913. Extra price for Nos. 61,906 61,911 constmcted with special terminals as per
Fig. 61,912 to enable the resistances to be connected direct to wires 0. 5.0
Cl. 5744,
5547,4691,4692.
920 Voltaic Electricity. Section 4: Ohm's, KirchhoK's and Joule's Laws. .i. IH914
61 914 61 917. 1 : 4. 81918 61921. 1:4. 61 924 61 926. 1 : 3.
61 927. 1 : 6. 61 928. 1 : 10.
Standard Resistances with separate Shunt Terminals for current measurements, of manganin
wire, Figure
List No. 61,914 61,915 61,916 61,917
Eesistance 0.001 0.01 0.1 1 ohm
3.0.0 3.0.0 3.0.0 2.14.0
Standard Resistances of small values, for current measurements, of manganin sheet. F i
g u r e.
List Xo. 61,918 61,919 61,920 61,921
Eesistance 0.00001 0.0001 0.001 0.01 ohm
12. 0. 6. 0. 4. 0. 4. 0.
The sheet
resistances can be loaded up to 100 watts for technical current measurement's in petroleum
bath No. 61,927 if well cooled.
-
idem, for heavy Currents, with case formed to suit petroleum hath and with turbine.
For currents to 2000 800 amps.
List No. 61,922 61,923
Eesistance 0.0001 0.001 ohm
18. 15. 16. 0.
Shunt Resistances with interpolation, Figu r e.

No.
List 61,924 61,925 61,926
Eesistance 10 100 1000 ohms
4. 10. 4. 10. 4. 10.
two similar resistances of the magnitude given. These resistances serve also as the two arms
\Vitli
of a Wheat stone Bridge for the purpose of accurately comparing two .-tandard resistances of the same
value in petroleum bath No. 111,928 or 61,932. By means of a reversing switch one of the resistances
can be increased or decreased by i tm or ,,, of its value as compared with the other. As a ride these
1 '
resistances are supplied to change by Viooo-
61,927. Petroleum Bath for one standard resistaiu-r. Figure, witli Turhine and Cooler .">. 0.
This hath arranged for using standard resistances Nos. 61,906 61,921 for current measurements.
is
The resistances are suspended in two fixed mercury cups insulated by ebonite, these cups having each
U. lii-i'.l, Iti'.MP. I'.ITI.
3892. 41USI.
No. 01832. Standard Resistance. Petroleum Baths. 921
61 932 A. 1:8. 61 932 B. 1:3.
one massive binding screw for leading in the current and each a second for the potential lead. In the case of s. d.
the resistances with special shunt terminals the potential lead is fixed to these. The petroleum bath contains
a cooling vessel for water circulation and an efficient turbine for circulating the petroleum. The turbine
lias a cord drive, being actuated by a small electric motor or a water motor.
61,928. Petroleum Bath for 4 Eesistances, with one turbine, 5 short bars with terminals and
mercury cups for series connection and 2 long bars for parallel connection of the re-
sistances, Figure 7. 0.0
61.929.
- - i d e in, without the two paralleling rails 6. 0.0
61.930.
- - i d e in, for 5 resistances, with turbine, 6 short and 2 long copper bars 9. 0.0
61.931.
- - i d e in, without the 2 copper paralleling bars 7. 15.
61,932. Petroleum Bath, Figs. A

and B, own new pattern, for comparing single resistances
and two resistances in series and for determining temperature coefficients; with heating
and cooling arrangements, Fig. B ; can also be used as it stands for the Thomson
method of connecting 16. 0.
Standard Resistances can be compared both by the Wheatstone and the Thomson method with
tlie aid of the shunting resistances Xos. 61,924 61,926. The heating is done by a glow lamp and the
cooling by a water jacket and stirring turbine.
Resistances and Bridges for Scientific and Technical

Purposes.
Precision Rheostats of Manganin Wire, impregnated with shellac and heated for 10 hours
to 140 C. before calibration. The ends of the resistance coils are silver soldered flush
on to copper pieces and the latter can be soldered with tin to the bolts which are used
us conductors. The plugs have ebonite grips.
The plug blocks
are provided with special plug-holes for in selling wire connected
terminals so as to be able to use each resistance coil singly. The resistance coils to
5 ohms are wound bifilar (non-inductive), those above 5 ohms in accordance with
Chapron's method (non-inductive and anti-capacity). Each resistance box has openings
which may be closed, for steadying the temperature, and opening for taking a thermo-
meter. The error of calibration of the precision resistances is within one part in one
thousand. The resistances are calibrated in International Ohms.
The following is the permissible load :
Resistance in Ohms 0.1 0.4 1 4 100400 10004000 10 00040 000

Permissible Current, Amps. 1 0.4 0.04 0.015 0.003
Cl. 4968, 4972.

922 Voltaic Electricity. Section 4: Ohm's, KirchhoH's and Joule's Laws. X<>. l 933
61 948. 1 = 8. Gl 951. 1 : 8.
Precision Series Rheostats, Figure

(cf. Gan.-Man. Fig. 769; Gan.-Eein. Fig. 844).
s. d.
61,933.
- - With 6
Plugs: 0.1; 0.1; 0.2; 0.3; 0.4; 1 Ohm 5. o. (>
61,934.
- 6 , 1; 1; 2; 3; 4; 10 Ohms 4. 4.
61,935. 6 , 10; 10; 20; 30; 40; 100 Ohms 4. 8.0

61,936.
-
6 , 100; 100; 200; 300; 400; 1000 Ohms 4. 14.0
61,937. 6 , 1000; 1000; 2000; 3000; 4000; 10000 Ohms 8. 0.0
61,938. 6 , 10,000; 10,000; 20,000; 30,000; 40,000; 100,000 Ohms .... 11. 0.0
61,939. 8 , 1; 1; 2; 3; 4; 10; 20; 30 Ohms 5. 10.
61,940. 8 , 1; 2; 3; 4; 10; 20; 30; 40 Ohms 5. 10.0
61,941. 8 , 10; 10; 20; 30; 40; 100; 200; 300 Ohms . 5. 10.
61,942. 8 , 10; 20; 30; 40; 100; 200; 300; 400 Ohms 5. 10.
61,943. 8 , 100; 200; 300; 400; 1000; 2000; 3000; 4000 Ohms (i. 10.
61,944. 12 , 1; 1; 2; 3; 4; 10; 20; 30; 40; 100; 200; 300 Ohms 7. o.it
61,945. 12 , 0.1; 0,1; 0.2; 0.3; 0.4; 1; 1; 2; 3; 4; 10; 20 Ohms 7. o. o
61,946. 14 , 1; 1; 2; 3; 4; 10; 20; 30; 40; 100; 200; 300; 400; 1000 Ohms S. (I.
61,947. 14 , 0.1; 0.1; 0.2; 0.3; 0.4; 1; 1; 2; 3; 4; 10; 20; 30; 40 Ohms . 8. (I. (I
61,948. 18 0.1; 1; 1; 2; 3; 4; 10; 20; 30; 40; 100; 200; 300; 400; 1000;
2000; 3000; 4000 Ohms 11. o.o
61,949. 18 0.01; 0.1; 0.2; 0.3; 0.4; 1; 1; 2; 3; 4; 10; 20; 30;
'
40; 100;
200; 300; 400 Ohms 10. 10.0
61,950. 22 0.1; 0.2; 0.3; 0.4; 1; 1; 2; 3; 4; 10; 20; 30; 40; 100; 200; 300;
400; 1000; 2000; 3000; 4000; 10,000 Ohms 13.li>. <
61,951. Extra Price for constructing the Rheostats with two glass side walls, Figure, for
demonstrating the internal arrangement 0. ('.
Precision Decade Resistances of manganin, comprising 10 similar resistances totalled by

a plug.
List No. 61,952 61,953 61,954 61,955 61,956 61,957 61,958
Resistance 10 x 0.1 10x1 10 x 10 10x100 10x1000 10x10,000 10x100,000 ohms
7.0.0 6. 10. 6. 10. 6.10.0 7.10.0 9.0.0 25.00
The decimal
resistances possess the advantage in accurate working that one plug only is always
inserted so that the contact resistance is always the same. A second plug is supplied in order thai the
may remain uninterrupted.
circuit
Precision Decade Resistances of manganin, grouped up to a contact handle, Figs. A and B,

with covered contacts; the resistance indicated by projecting figures. Fig. B shows
the contacts (covers removed).
One Decade:
List No. 61,960
Resistance 10x0.
6.0.0
Two Decades:
List No. I
.,966
RcsistancelO 0.1 &1
1 10.0
Three Decades:
ListN<>. 61,971
HcsistancelOxO.l, 1 & 10
15. 10.
No. 61 996. Precision-Rheostats. Rheostats for Technical Purposes. 923
sis
61 977 A.
61 977 B. 61 996.
Four Decades: * <*
List No. 61,974 61,975 61,976

Resistance 10 X 0.1,1, 10 & 100 10x1, 10, 100 & 1000 10x10, 100, 1000 & 10,000 ohms
20. 10. 20. 10. 20. 10.
<il.!>77. Five Decades: 10x1, 10, 100, 1000 & 10,000 ohms i>r>. !().(
Technical Decade Resistances, of Manganin, Figure, connected up to switch contacts;

adjustment accurate to at least 0.5%.
One Decade:
List No. 61,979 61,980 61,981 61,982 61,983 61,984
Resistance 10x0.1 10x1 10x10 10x100 10x1000 10 x 10,000 ohms
3. 0. 3. 0. 3. 0. 3. 0. 3. 10. 4. 10.
Two Decades:
List No. 61,985 61,986 61,987 61,988 61,989
Resistance lOxO.l&l 10x1 & 10 10x10 & 100 10 x 100 & 1000 10 x 1000 & 10,000 ohms
5.5.0 5.5.0 5.5.0 5.5.0 5.10.0
Three Decades:
List No. 61,990 61.991 61,992
Resistance 10x0.1, 1 & 10 10x1, 10 & 100 10x10, 100 & 1000 ohms
7.15.0 7.15.0 7.15.0
Four Decades:
List No. 61,993 61,994 61,995
Resistance 10x0.1, 1, 10 & 100 10x1, 10, 100 & 1000 10x10, 100, 1000 & 10,000 ohms
10.5.0 10.5.0 10.5.
;i,<t<ii. Five Decades: 10 xl, 10, 100, 1000 & 10,000 ohms 12.10.0
Cl. 51 f, 53 f, 68 r.
924 Voltaic Electricity. Section 4: Ohm's, Kirchhoff's and Joule's Laws. N.I. 111997
82 006. 1 : 6.
62 014. 1 : 6. 62 015. 1 : 5.
61.997. High-Tension Rheostat, Figure, with 14 plugs: 1, 2, 3, 4, 10, 20, 30, 40, 100,
200, 300, 400, 1000, 2000 ohms 9.
In this apparatus, which is intended to be used as an additional resistance, etc. in circuits charged
with potentials dangerous to life, the metal parts are protected with ebonite against accidental contact
with the hands, the plugs having long ebonite grips.
61.998. idem, with 14 plugs: 5, 10, 20, 30, 40, 100, 200, 300, 400, 1000, 2000, 2000,
2000, 2000 ohms 10. I)
61,9J9. High Tension Decade Resistance with 10x10,000 ohms . 11' II. (I
Each two are connected with a piece of cable, highly insulated, and plugs provided with long ebonite
grips form the connection between the common rails and the individual segments. The winding is sub-
divided a number of times.
School Rheostats of Manganin, F i g u r e, with resistance coils mounted open, Ihus securing
comprehensiveness. Each plug block is provided with a conical hole for inserting shunt
terminal. The accuracy of adjustment exceeds by 0.5 per cent the standard prescribed
by the Physikalisch Technisehe Reichsanstalt for technical resistances. Two shunl
terminals are given in with each resistance.
62,000. Plugs: 0.1; 0.2; 0.3; 0.4 ohms
1; 2 3 ; 4 ohms
;
.
10; 20; 30; 40 ohms

100; 200; 300; 400 ohms
1000; 2000; 3000; 4000 ohms
0.1; 0.2; 0.3; 0.4; 1; 2; 3; 4 ohms
1; 2; 3; 4; 10; 20; 30; 40 ohms
10; 20; 30; 40; 100; 200; 300; 400 ohms
100; 200; 300; 400; 1000; 2000; 3000; 4000 ohms
0.1; 0.2; 0.3; 0.4; 1; 2; 3; 4; 10; 20; 30; 40 ohms
1; 2; 3; 4; 10; 20; 30; 40; 100; 200; 300; 400 ohms ....
No. li'2018. Simple Rheostats. Bridges. 925
62 016. 1
62 017. 1 : 6.
62.013. with 22 plugs: in the ratio arms: 1; 10; 100; 100; 10; 1; in the variable arm:
- - :
*.
0.1; 1; 1; 2; 3; 4; 10; 20; 30; 40; 100; 200; 300; 400; 1000; 2000 ohms; measuring
capacity 0.001 to 411,110 ohms 15. 0.
62.014. with 30 plugs, in the ratio arms: 1; 10; 100; 1000; 1000; 100; 10; 1;
Figure;
in the variable arm:
0.1; 0.2; 0.3; 0.4; 1; 1; 2; 3; 4; 10; 20; 30; 40; 100; 200; 300;
400; 1000; 2000; 3000; 4000; 10,000 ohms; measuring capacity 0.0001 to 21,111,000
ohms 19. 0.
(iL',015. Precision Bridge, Figure, compact pattern, size of case about 225 x 215 x 130 mm,
especially suitable for cable measurements etc., with 24 plugs; in the ratio arms: 1; 10;
KM); 1000; 1000; 100; 10; 1; in the variable arm: 1; 2; 3; 4; 10;-20; 30; 40; 100; 200;
300; 400; 1000; 2000; 3000; 4000 ohms; measuring capacity 0.001 to 11,110,000 ohms 16.0.0
62.016. Large Precision Bridge (in Decades) with Switch Contacts, reversible; ratio arms:
1; 10; 100; 1000; 1000; 100; 10; 1; variable arm: 10x0.1; 10x1; 10x10; 10x100;
10x1000 ohms, with covered contact circuits, Figure; measuring capacity 0.0001
to 11, 111,000 ohms 43.0.0
26.017. Large Precision Decade Bridge with Plugs, otherwise exactly as Xo. 62,016, Figure 36. 0.
62.018. Wheatstone Bridge (School Pattern) of Manganin, with resistance coils mounted open,
thus being very comprehensive (of. Fig. 62,006), with 18 plugs; in the ratio arms: 1; 10;
100; 100; 10; 1; in the variable arm 1 2; 3; 4; 10; 20; 30; 40; 100; 200; 300; 400 ohms;
i
;
measuring capacity 0.01 to 111,000 ohms 8.0.0
(Jl. 2498, 49C9.

926 Voltaic Electricity. Section 4: Ohm's, KirchhoH's and Joule's Laws. No. 62 021
62 021. 1 :. 3. 62 023. 1 : 5.
62 026. 1 : 8.
02.021. Wheatstone Bridge after Weinhold, Figure, with 16 plugs (W. D. Fig. 517 [490]), * <>
with ratio arms: 10; 100; 100; 10; and comparison rheostat: 1; 2; 3; 4; 10; 20; 30; 40;
100; 200; 300; 400 ohms 10. 0. n
62.022. - -
idem,with 20 plugs, with the same ratio arms and with comparison rheostat :
0.1; 0.2; 0.3; 0.4; 1; 2; 3; 4; 10; 20; 30; 40; 100; 200; 300; 400 ohms |12.
0.0
;:.'. 023. Universal Pattern Wheatstone Bridge after Kohlrausch, Figure, with 5 com-
parison resistances: 0.1, 1, 10, 100 and 1000 ohms; very practical for rapid measure-
ments on wire resistances and electrolytic resistances 7. 10.0
The resistances are read direct (without table) on a scale. In conjunction with a suitable galvano-
meter, e. g. No. 61,297 or 61,360, the apparatus serves for resistance measurements of from 0.05 to 20.000
ohms of solid conductors. By using alternating currents, generated by a small induction coil on the appa-
ratus, and a telephone instead of the galvanometer, it is possible to determine resistances of electrolytes,
the internal resistances of cells, also the contact resistances of earth plates of lightning anvstrrs.
tii'.OiM. Box Telephone for above, for determining the resistance of electrolytes, with coil
wound to suit 0.
r
l. >.
02.025. Kohlrausch Bridge, without induction coil, otherwise as No. 62,023; range 0.05 to
20,000 ohms; can only be used for wire resistances by employing a suitable galvano-
meter, e. g., No. 61,297 or 61,360 '....' G. 0.
2.o2G. Portable Resistance Testing Set, Figure, comprising Universal Mridge No. 62,023,
tialvanometer No. 61,297, Telephone No. 62,024 and 3 Dry Cells, the whole in a solid
lock-up oak carrying case, with handle 15. 15.
62.027. --idem, but with Galvanometer No. 61,360, which is independent of external
magnetic influences and requires no special adjustment 13. .V <l
liL'.OL'x. Wheatstone-Kirchhoff Bridge without comparison resistances. Figure, with

stretched wire 1 m
long. The resistance of the measuring wire can be trebled by in-
serting wires of the same material, stretched in the open, at both ends. The Bridge
has a well-guided slider with sliding contact which can be raised up, and an accurately
divided millimetre rule 8. 10.0
62.029. Second Slider with the slide wire, for calibrating the measuring wire and enabling the
bridge to be used as a du Bois-Keymond current compensator or as a Thomson Double
'
Bridge 1. 10. o
Cl. 2001, 5826,

S251.
Ko. 62033. Bridges. Potentiometers. 927
I I I I I I |IIM|IMI|llll|llll|IHI|HII|llll|lllf| I I I
10 20 30 40 50 60 70 80 90 100
62031. 1:8.
62033. 1:5.
Second Graduation for reading direct the resistance, obtained from the simple mea- s. d.
suring wire, without the additional resistances 0. 12.
Compare also the Universal Galvanometer No. 61,362, p. 885, which can be used also as a
Wheatstone Bridge.
62,03 1 . Portable Bridge, Figure, comprising a plug resistance of 1 to 500 ohms, 2 shunt
resistances each of 1, 10, 100 ohms, Deprez-d'Arsonval Galvanoscope, 3 dry cells and
2 keys. Eange 0.1 to 100,000 ohms. With leather case and carrying strap 11. .... 0.0
<)'_'. <32. Thomson Double Bridge for Measuring Small Eesistances, Figure 11. 10.0
The apparatus consists of a measuring wire with millimetre scale and two knife edges, and clipping
arrangement on wood base, on 'which are placed two shunt knife edges which can be adjusted at different
distances, also two comparison rheostats having resistances of 1000, 100, 10, 10 ohms. In addition terminals,
battery keys and connecting cables as well as a test bar of copper of 1100 mm
length and 10 mm
diameter
are given in with the apparatus. The instrument can also be used as a single Wheatstone Bridge and as
a du Rois-Reymond current compensator.
<>'_', 033. Potentiometer for measuring potential differences of 0.001 190 volts by comparison
with a standard cell, Figure. Price without standard cell, but with galvanometer 25. 0.
The apparatus contains:a switch contact resistance, 2 slide wire resistances, a pointer galvanometer,
a change over switch for the standard cell and the potential difference to be measured, also a galvano-
mctcr switch. In addition to measurements of potential the apparatus can, with the aid of standard re-
MMaiirrs Nos. 01,914 61,923, be used for accurate current measurements. As standard cells, we give the
preference to the use of a Weston No. 60,732, p. 845, but a Clark No. 00.731, p. 845, can also be used.
Cl. 3528,2505, 5910 ,
5909 a.
928 Voltaic Electricity. Section 4: Ohm's, Kirchhoff's and Joule's Laws. No. 62034
62 035. 1 : 5.
62 036 62 039. 62 040. 1 : r>.
32,034. Telephone Bridge after Nippoldt, Figure, range from 0.01 to 100 and 0.1 to 1000
ohms, comprising measuring wire, 2 comparison resistances, 1 telephone; can also he
used for measurements with galvanometers and by the Wiechert method 5.10.0
62,035. Lightning Arrester Test Apparatus, comprising a Nippoldt Telephone Bridge No. 62.0.51.
an extra-current apparatus as generator of alternating currents, and dry cell, in wallnut
box, with leather case and carrying strap, Figure !l. 0.
Ohmmeter for reading resistances direct, Figure, for connecting up to accumulators,

with magnetic shunt to render the readings independent of the working voltage.
List No. 62,036 62,037 62,038 62,039

Pressure necessary. Volts 4 4 12 20
Ohms ( 0250 & 0500 & 02:100 05000

Hang.-. .>-_.-(,<, 5001000 1>500 5000 5000
|
10,000
t 7. 10. 7. 10. 8.0.0 8.5.0
i2.oio. Induction Apparatus with current-interrupting tuning fork, alter rppcnhorn.

Figure, for resistance-determinations of electrolytes in conjunction with a bridge
mid a telephone 1. L5. it
(1. 2515, 5908",

55 F, 5849.
No. 62047. Resistance of Electrolytes. 929
62 042. 1 : 8.
inO
<jj^
62 046. 1 ; c>. 62 047. 1 : 6.
02,041. Electrolytic Interrupter, after Wehnelt-Starke, Figure (Verb. d. Deutsch. Phys. s. d.
Ccsellsch. 1901, p. 128) .' .' . 0. 15.
This interrupter is used as a silent exciter of pulsating currents for the determination of the re-
sistance of electrolytes in conjunction with a bridge and a telephone, for determining capacity constants,
etc. Owing to its high frequency the apparatus is well adapted for these purposes.
A mean current density of 0.02 amp. is sufficient for working this interrupter.
Resistance of Electrolytes.
62.042. Apparatus after Horsford for Determining the Conducting Resistance of Liquids,
F i g u ] e (M. P. Ill, Fig. 405), comprising "lass trough on wood board with conducting
rods and throe pairs of copper, zinc and lead plates i 2. 0.
62.043.
-- idem, :<lso with two platinum electrodes 80x80 mm 4.10.0
02. 0-14. Plate Glass Box for experiments on Conductor Resistance, after Kolbe (Kolbe-Skellon,
Introduction to Electricity. Part II, Figs. 120 122), with millimetre scale, cf. Fig. 60,747,
p. SJT. Without electrodes or partition wall 1. 0.
02,045. - - i d c m ,
as >'o. 62,044, with 2 zinc plates (Kolbe-Skellon, Introduction to Electri-
city. I 'ait IT, Fig. 124), for use as a current damper and for demonstrating electrolytic
resistance I
1. 10.
60,747.
-- idem, with a zinc and a carbon plate 1.10.0
(cf. Fig. 60,747, p. 847)
60,748. -- idem, with partition and a pair of extra plates, Fig. 60,748, p. 847 2. 0.0
62,040. Apparatus for Electrolytic Conduction, after (Irimsehl, for showing that pure water
has a very high resistance and that only by the addition of a few drops of sulphuric
acid is the current rendered appreciably conductive. Figure 1. 12.0
62,047. Apparatus for determining the Conductivity of Electrolytes, F i g u r e, after Friedr. i
C. G. Miiller (M. T. Fig. 199), with one pair electrodes each of iron and of lead. . 0.18.0
Cl. 2517,2479,
5983, 4194. =.n
930 Voltaic Electricity. Section 4: Ohm's, Kirchhoff's and Joule's Laws. No. (V204S
62048, 62051, 62053, 62054, 61946, 62056, 62057, 62058, 62060. 1:11. 62048. 1 : 11.
'"Fnmnrr.nn
62 052. 1 : 8.
Apparatus after Prof. Ostwald, for Determining the Conductivity of Electrolytes, Figures <i-
nd The apparatus
(Ostwald-Luther, Physikochemische Messungen, 2 Edn., p. 395).
comprises :
62.048. Thermostat after Ostwald, Figure, vessel with felt insulating jacket, on tripod,
with stirrer, mica vanes and gas burner (the old type of regulator is shown in the illu-
stration) 3. 15. d
or
62.049. Thermostat after Ostwald, with cord pulley for motor drive 3.12.d
62.050. Thermometer, graduated 60 C. in 0.1 0. 8.
62.051. Measuring Wire after Ostwald, with platinum-iridium wire, old pattern 1. in. d
62.052.
- -
idem, most recent pattern, Figure 1. 12.
62.053. Conductivity Vessel after Ostwald, Figure 1. 5.0
62,05-1. Holder for above, for thermostat use 0. 10.
61,946. Precision Rheostat with 14 plugs, 11000 ohms, total 2111 ohms 8. d.
62.056. Induction Apparatus, Figure, for producing buzzing sound, with adjust ing re-
sistance, thus rendering the tone minimum more sensitive 1. Id. d
62.057. Telephone Receiver with antiphone*, round pattern d. 12. d
<i2,o5s. Current Key 0. 6.
62.059. Measuring Accumulator d. id. d
Lead with connecting ends d. 12. d

62.060. Connecting
*
An antiphone is a small piece of rubber for inserting in one ear while holding the telephone
to tin- other; it holds off any external sound.
No, 'i-'Ofili. Resistance of Electrolytes. 931
62 082. 1 -. (i.
62 053.
1 : 3.
\ 62 356. I : 3.
62 063.
1 : 4. 62064. 1:8. 62 065. 1 : 2. 62 066. 1 : 3.
*
<;2,o>l. Apparatus for Determining Conductivity, after Ostwald, portable pattern, built into l]
lock-up wood box, with bridge, precision resistance, 1 500 ohms, induction apparatus
for producing buzzing sound in sound insulating box, round-shaped telephone with
antiphone*, current key, and accumulator 17. 0.
The Kohlrausch Bridge No. 62,023, p. 926, is also very well adapted for Determining the Conduc-
tivity of Electrolytes.
<;_', oi;2. 3 Resistance Vessels for Electrolytes and 2 Platinised Platinum Electrodes, after Kohl-
th
rausch, Figure
(M. P., 10'" Edn., IV., 1, Fig. 479; 9 Edn., Ill, Fig. 406; Gan.-
Rein., Fig. 956), with tubes 8, 14 and 25 mm
diameter, each vessel having a stand 4. 0.
<;2.oi>3. Resistance Vessel for Electrolytes, after Kohlrausch, Figure, with thermometer
and graduation on the vessel 1. 10.
<i~',064. -- idem, after Kohlrausch, different pattern, Figure (M. P., J0 lh Edn., IV,
1, Fig. 480; 9 th Edn., Ill, Fig. 407) 1.12.0
fi2.065. - - id e m, after Kohlrausch, with variable capacity, Figure (W. u. E. Fig. 304) 0. 16.
(i2,066. -- idem, after Arrhenius,

Figure (W. u. E. Fig. 302), with electrodes 40 mm
diameter and 0.1 thick mm 2. 10.
Selenium Cells and Apparatus for demonstrating the Alteration in the Resistance of Selenium
by Light: see "Optics" Section.
* Sec note on last Cl. 5892, 5449, 2484,
2485, 2486, 2487, 2488. 59*
932 Voltaic Electricity. Section 4: Ohm's, Kirchhoifs and Joule's Laws. No. (IJIIliT
62 067 B. 1 : 1-.'. 62 067 D. 1
<>:.', u<;7. Apparatus for Demonstrating Phototelegraphy, after Kom. roniprisinji 1 table with * '
complete Transmitting Apparatus, lid or i>iio volt I). <'. I>rivin<r Motor; :in<l 1 table
coiitainin<r the complete Receiving Apparatus, Fiys. A. H. (' and D. Fig. A shows the
complete apparatus, consist iur of a talile containing the transinittin.ir a|i))arutus and a
talile with (lie receiving a p|iai'at us. In Fijr. K the latter is shown larger <><i. Id.
Kni-n's system of riiolotclcyr.-ipli y is li:isnl ti|ioii tlic |ird|icrty jKissosccl liy SiOrniuin for assuming
:i low electric i'c>islancc wlicti >lroni;ly illiiiiiiii:ilc<t Mini a liifjli resist mice ulien \\eaUly illuminated. The
Cl. 41IIU;. ;-,Ofl,
IOST,
Phototelegraphy. Baretters. Condensers. 933
62 080. 1 : 5.
through a film constructed cylindrically and arranged to move after the manner
Si-leniuin Cell is illuininatod
of the phonograph cylinder. The cell is connected up in common with supply at constant pressure, with
the travelling lead, and at the receiving station, with the movable system of a light relay. All fluctuations
caused by the successive and variable degrees of illumination of the Selenium Cell produce corresponding
variations in the moving system of the light relay. The latter is placed between a Nernst lamp and a
second photographic film, also cylindrical in form and arranged so as to be movable, this second film ro-
tating synchronously with the film at the transmitting station. An opaque aluminium leaf in the moving
system of the relay allows more or less light according to the current density prevailing to pass
through a triangular diaphragm on to the photographic film, the latter being developed after completely
passing the diaphragm. Tue apparatus works in subdued daylight. The movements of the light relay
are followed by mean-* of an observing tube (see Fig. B) and a reflecting mirror. In the foreground of
Pig. A, to the right, is shown the table with the transmitting apparatus and, in the background, to the
left,the table with the receiving apparatus. Fig. B contains simply the table with the receiving apparatus
completely fitted up, Figs. C and D show (in actual size) the reproduction of two tele-photographs made
with the demonstration apparatus. In the case of the demonstration apparatus the transmitting table
is placed immediately alongside the receiving table.
The apparatus must only be used for demonstration purposes. A complete description will be sent
if desired.
li:.', (iii8. Two Protecting Cases, frame of polished wood, glazed, doors and detachable tops,
cf. Fig. 02 067 A 4. 15.
(i2,o<;<). Spare Selenium Cell 2. 15.
<>2,07o. Diapositives of Tele-photographs 0. 1.0

(i2,071. Baretter Set after BC'la Gati, for measuring telephone and high frequency currents,
built into portable mahogany case 14. 0.0
T, e Baretters a v e fine wires of high temperature coefficient, being heated by the currents to be
measured. Their change in resistance, which gives a measure for the current, is measured by the bridge
connections of the Baretter set. In this manner it is possible to measure weak alternating currents, e. g.
telephone currents, by means of a portable moving coil pointer galvanometer.
fii'. 072. Baretters of Platinum or Gold, without vacuum, 0.002 mm diameter quoted for on
application.
i;2.07.'i. Baretter of thin wire or in evacuated vessel. Price according to sensitivity 2. 0. to 2. 10. (I
D2.071. Moving Coil Pointer Galvanometer for above, 1 degree = 0.000,000,1. amp., for maxi-
mum sensitivity 10. 0. (I
This instrument requires a perfectly steady base.
ti2.i>7r>. Moving Coil Pointer Galvanometer for above, 1 = 0.000,001 amp., sufficient for
most purposes, also for use on ships 10. 0.
<;2.n7(i. 2 Measuring Accumulators for above, built into wood case 2. ;-.. O
Condensers.
For Condensers for Electrostatic Measurements, see pp. 833 834.
\Vc supply two patterns of condensers for galvanic measurements. Our precision
condensers are intended for accurate measurements, having as dielectric first-quality
mica, the constant being scrupulously determined in our laboratory; their capacity is
constant and the insulation excellent.
For technical purposes, in which the maximum accuracy is not necessary. \ve can
recommend our paraffin-paper condensers, which can stand voltages up to about .'500.
The paper condensers are calibrated accurately to within about !<>",, and the exact
capacity is stilted on delivery.
Precision Condensers with mica dielectric, with one section, Figure.
No,
List 62,077 62,080 62,081 62,082
Capacity, mfds. 0.01 0.1 o.r> 1
l 4. 0. 4. 10. 8. 0. 10. 0.
Cl. 2523.
934 Voltaic Electricity. Section 4: Ohm's, KirchhotTs and Joule's Laws. NIL (i-Ji
62 085. 1 : 5.
62101. 1:8. 62102. I: 12.
Precision Condensers with mica dielectric, with more than one section; the sections can be
added by pluming, F i
g n r e.
List No. 62,085 62,086

Capacities of Sections, mfds. 0.1; 0.1 0.1; 0.1; 0.2; 0.3; d. I
Total capacity, mfds. 0.2 1.1

6. 0. 12. 10.
List No. 62,087 62,088

f
0.01; 0.02; 0.03; 0.001; 0.002; 0.003; 0.004;
Capacities of [Sections, mfds. 0.04; OJ 0.2;; 0.01; 0.02; 0.03; 0.0 1;
0.3; 0.4 0.1; 0.2; 0.3; 0.4
Total capacity, mfds. 1.1 1.11
15. 0. 20. 0.
Condensers with paraffined paper dielectric, in mahogany box. with one section:
List No. 62,090 62,091 62,092 62,093 62,094 62,095 62,096 62,097
Capacity, mfds. o.i 0.2 0.6 1 10 20
2.0.0 2.5.0 2.10.0 3.10.0 4.10.0 6.0.0 8. 0. 10. 0.
-
idem, \\illi a number of sections:
List No. 62,098 62,099 62,100

I; 2; 2 1; 2: 2; * ;
1(1
Capacities of Sections, mfds. |
'
I o..>; l
Total capacity, mfds. 2 20
6. 0. 8.0.0 16. 0.
If de.sired we also supply the paper condensers with lie stages arranged in any other iniinner desired
I
to suit special circumstances, and shall be jilad to quote prices on application.

i-l. J.-.24,
411'J. l'.i.'.
No. 62113. Condensers. Determination of Capacity. 935
62 103 62 108. 1 : 9.
62,101. Double Commutator, Figure, after Ayrton and Perry (Elektrot. Ztschr., 1889,
p. 412), for measuring capacities and coefficients of self induction and of mutual induction
by means of the Wheatstone Bridge; on board with 110 volt D. C. motor, tachometer,
regulating resistances for securing wide degree of regulation, stepped pulley, switch,
plug contact with plug and 2 metres flexible 16. 0.
The measurements can be made with much more certainty with the aid of a mirror galvanometer
than with a telephone.
<>2,102. - -
i (1 e
m, built into a table, Figure. On the table are placed the arrangement
for measuring insulation resistances as well as various instruments for measuring capa-
cities and coefficients of induction . . :27. 0.
In addition to showing the apparatus mentioned under No. 62,101, the Figure illustrates the switch,
plug boxes, 6 terminals, 1 motor switch. 1 key (all fitted to ebonite slabs), fixed on to the table-top; these
articles are included in above price. Not included in the price are: the Plug Rheostat, the Cells, and the
Galvanometer Shunt. The resistance coils of the precision rheostat should be wound so as to be non-
inductive and anti-capacity (Chaperon's method). As a suitable Mirror Galvanometer we can recommend '.
our Galvanometer No. 61,407, with Reading Device No. 61,409 for fitting to the ceiling.
Apparatus for determining Dielectric Constants, chiefly of Liquids, after Nernst (Kohlrausch,
Praktisehe Physik, 10 lh Edn., p. 575), Figure, comprising:
62.103. String Induction Coil with shunt liquid resistances j

1. 12.
62.104. 2 Measuring Condensers with shunt liquids resistances 6. 10.
62.105. Testing Condenser for the liquid to be tested 0. 9.
62.106. Round Pattern Telephone with antiphone* 0. 9.
62.107. Thermometer 0. 3.
62.108. Connecting Flexibles 0. 2.
Apparatus for determining Dielectric Constants of Solids, for demonstration purposes, after
Grimsehl (Ztschr. f. d. phys. u. chem. U. 16, 1903, p. 21), consisting of:
62.109. Condenser with 3 Plates, the centre one being fixed and the two outer ones movable,
with arrangement for carrying the plates which are to be inserted and tested ... 2. 5.
62,103. String Induction Coil with liquid shunt resistances 1.12.0
Round Pattern Telephone with antiphone * 0. 9.

62,106.
2.112. Dry Cell 0. 3.0
In place of No. 62,103 a small electric machine can be used, in which case the shunt
resistances are formed of.
62,113. 2 Glow Lamps with Holders, mounted on slate j

0. 6.
* See note on p. 930. c| 52 ., 7

936 Voltaic Electricity. Section 4: Ohm's, Kirchhoff's and Joule's Laws. No.
62116. 1:8. 62 117. 1 : 5
62 115. 1 : 5. 62120. 1:7.
Heating Effects of the Electric Current, Joule's Law.

ti-.lll. Apparatus for showing the Generation of Heat by the Electric Current, F i u re
(M. P., 10 th Edn., IV, 1, Fig. 454; 9"' Kdn., Ill, Fig. -430), with thermometer . . . 0. Hi.
(LMI5. -- idem, for demonstrating objectively. Figure 0. Id. (>
lii'.llt;. Caloriscope after Lermantoff, Figure, for the same purpose !.<;.<)
The, apparatus can also be used ;i^ ;i
simple thermoecope.
C'-M17. Apparatus after Foster, Figure (\V. I). Fig. 531 [504 1), tor showing that the
liealiug effect on a conducting wire is proportional to (lie resistance and as the stpiare
of the current . 1. Iti. o
lii'.li*. Current Conductor of Silver and Platinum Wires soldered together (M. 1'.. K)" Kdu.. 1
IV, I. Fig. 455; !)'" Kdn.. Ill, Fig. I:!'-': \V. D. p. S15 [754 |). for explaining the diffe-
rence in specific resistance of two metals 0. 10. #
It is also possible to show the heating effect of the electric current and the comparison of re-
sistances heated by the current, by the aid of Kolbe's and Looser 's Thermoscopes ("Heat"
Section'.
<;LM lit. Calorimeter for demonstrating Joule's Law, after Friedr. C. d. .M filler (M. T. Fig. iM3) o. s. n
(Ji'.iiiu. Calorimeter for demonstrating Joule's Law, for students exercises, after Halm,
Figure (Halm. Schiilcriibungen. Fig. L'SJ), with thermometer 0.1-'. (I
ci. J.vjc.. :
396,
Joule's Law. 937
62 123. 1 : 10. 62124.
62 121. 1 : 5.
62 122. 1 : 6. 62 125. 1 : 0.
H2.121. Current Calorimeter after Pfaundler, Figure (Fr. phys. Techn. II, 1, Fig. 459;
<!
M. P., 9 th Edn., Ill, p. 511) ', 10. 0.
12.122. Apparatus for deriving Joule's Law, after Grimschl, Figure (Ztschr. f. d. phys.
11. chein. U. 15, 1902, p. 347; Grimsehl, p. 777) 0.12.0
1:2. 123. Glow Lamp numerical determination of the Electric Equivalent of Heat, after
for the
Grimsehl, F i
arranged to burn under water (Ztschr. f. d. phys. u. chem. U.
g u r e,
16, 1903, p. 211, Fig. 1; Grimsehl, Fig. 821). The lamp can be supplied for pressures
of 65 220 volts. The voltage desired should be quoted when ordering, otherwise 110 volt
lamps are supplied. Price without stand, beaker, stirrer or thermometer 0. 10.
12.124. Glow Lamp for demonstrating the difference between Thermal Energy and Total
Energy, after Grimsehl, Figu re (Ztschr. f. d. phys. u. chem. U. 16, 1903, p. 213,
Fig. 2). The lamp is generally supplied for 15 volts, but it can be supplied for any oilier
voltage up to 3( . . ().<.(
(2.125. U-shaped Tube for Demonstrating the Heating of Mercury by the Electric Current
after Friedr. ('. ('.. .Miillei. Figure (M. T. Fig. 209)
62.126. Mercury Resistance Thermometer after Friedr. ('. G. Miillcr, for demonstrating Joule's
Law quantitatively (M. T. Fig. 210) . . . o. :;. u
2.127. Apparatus for Proving Joule's Law by the elongation of a wire, after Friedr. (\ G.
Miillei' (.M. T. Fig. 212) '..... 0. u;. (i
62.12*. Apparatus for the same purpose, after Kann; can also be used as a demonstration
hot-wire ammeter (Zlschr. f. d. phys. u. chem. U. 15, 1902, p. 286) 1. in. d
For further Demonstration Hot-Wire Ammeters see p. 904.

C'l. SOlil, .,!!(>:{. 5090,
509-1, 5!)81.
938 Voltaic Electricity. Section 4: Ohm's, Kirchhofi's and Joule's Laws. NIL I!'.' 129
62134. 1:5. 62 131. 1 : !).
62,129. Apparatus after I'ensder, F i g u r e, for showing the mode of action of heavy current
fuses (Ztschr. f. d. phys. u. chem. U. 16, p. 84), with 3 glow lamps with fuses for the
single lamps and for the groups 2. 10. o
:>3,os2. Apparatus for Demonstrating the Arc in Vacuo, Figure, tubulated receiver with
carbon holders and clamps 1. 12.0
62.131. Carbon Clamps as suggested by Dr. Uriisch (Liibeek), with 1 thick carbon and 1 carbon
crucible, for use as electrical assay furnace, Figure, without the Runsen stand
illustrated .'
I. 12. o
62.132. Extra Carbons for above Kadi o. 0.3
62.133. Spare Carbon Crucible for above Kadi o. o. 6
<;_>. l.'M. Demonstration Electric Melting Furnace for 20 30 amperes, Figu re, with horse
shoe magnet; without melting crucible and protecting screen 7.10.0
The furnace is of iron with an inner clay lining- A fire-proof block provided with an adjusting screw
can be moved up and down on the health of the furnace. This hearth block carries the small crucible,
which is made of graphite, lime, niagnesite. etc. according to the operation to be carried out. The carbon
electrodes, to which the current is conducted, project into the crucible. The furnace space is closed off
by mica plates back and front, thus allowing the inside of the furnace and also the process of melting
to be observed. By fixing a powerful magnet, as shown in the figure, the arc~ can he made to take the
shape of a pointed flame The furnace is intended for 20 .'id amps, and ."ill volts. The carbons are
HI mm in diameter
cl. >:,:',, sisii. f-'s.
3529, 521IO.
No. BJ 183. Electric Furnaces. 939
62 144. 1 : 7.
62,13.5. One Pair Cables for above, each 1,5 in long, with cable lugs
940 Voltaic Electricity. Section 4: Ohm's, Kirchhoff's and Joule's Laws.
62 165. 1 :- 8.
62 isa. i : s.
62 182. 1 : 6. 62 183. 1 : 4.
Electrically Heated Laboratory Furnaces for high temperatures, horizontal pattern, Figure, with an
inner porcelain tube heated by a spiral of thin platinum sheet; for maximum temperatures of
1400 C.
List Tube Current Consumption Price of Furnaces Heatmg;mdRegulat

TkT _ 1 -.J-1_ A.1 f\ 17" >i.ki T "\ _l_4: \ -C^."U ^.1-1
(without
,^14-r* tvV 110
J-J-" V.
* instances
*J<"
<*l' * -
at 220 Y. platinum) for both voltages

-1 k
No. length at 110 V.

Price List No. Price
62165 60 cm 22 Amps. 11 Amps. 90 s. plus 9 g Platinum 62168 5.10 62169 4.16
62166 44cm 16 Amps. 8 /Amps.
1
85 s. plus TgPlatinum 62170 3.2 62171 2.18
62167 22 cm 10 Amps. (For 110 V. only) 75 s. plus 4 g Platinum 62172 2.2
1 Gram Platinum, worked up in the furnaces; price (varying according to the state of the
0. 5. to 0. s. n
market)
Larger Laboratory Furnaces and other Electric Furnaces <|iiot<-d for on application.
Section 5: Electro-chemistry.
As regards Apparatus after Liipke-Bose, Kohlrausch-Holborn and Hofmann, we shall be pleased to send
separate price list on application.
Voltameters.
(iL'.lso. Water Decomposing Apparatus, simple pattern on wood stand. Figure, with
graduated lubes ................................ (I. S.
i'.L'.181. -- idem, on iron stand. Figure ..................... o. ll!. o

Xi>. IK 191. Voltaic Electricity. Section 5: Electrochemistry. 941
62 189. l
62 190. l : <J. 62 191. 1 : 5.
d
02,182. Water Decomposing Apparatus after Weinhold (Weinhold, Vorschulo, 2" Edn., s '.
Fig. 346), Figure (M. P., 9

th
Edn., Ill, Fig. 447; Gau.-Man. Fig. 715; Gan.-Eein.
Fig. 945), with flat glass vessel, round pierced iron base and 2 glass tubes "divided !
in coins 0. 16.
Voltameter, Figure (M. P., 10

th th
111.'.] s;5. Edn., IV, 1, Fig. 460; 9 Edn., Ill, Fig. 338),
with platinum electrodes 1. 0.0
-- idem, after Kehenstorff, the current being conducted by means of a
62,184. mercury
((intact. Figure (Ztsohr. f. d. phys. u. cheni. I". 21, 1908, p. 181) 1. 0.0
O2.lsr>. Gas Measuring Jar for above, for simple volumetric determinations on gases . . . 0. 4. (I
62. is:. Eudiometer and Glass Cup (M. P., 10 th Edn., IV, 1, Fig. 461 a; 9 lh Edn., Ill,
Fig. 339) 1. 0.
62.1SS. Voltameter for Objective Demonstration, Figure (W. 1). Fig. 528 [501]) . . . 0.12.0
02, 1 Sit. Voltameter (Bunsen's), Figure (M. I'., 10 th Edn., IV, 1, Fig. 462; 9 th Edn.,
Ill, Fig. 340) 0. 18.
O2.l!t0. Voltameter after Zwio.k, Figure 1. 6.

The apparatus serves for producing oxy-hydrogen j;as. for decomposing water (separating and
measuring Imlrci^rn and oxygen), electrolysis of Glauber salt, decomposition of copper sulphate.
62,191. Voltameter, Figure, with variable level j
3.10.0
Cl. 4S. .'-'!)(), 5873,
5864, 2290.
942 Voltaic Electricity. Section 5: Electrochemistry. NIL <!_' I'M
a, a.
62 193. 1 : 7. 62 196. 1 : 10. 62 197. 1 : 10. 62 198. 1 : 5. 62200. 1 : 10.
62.193. Voltameter after Hofmann, Figure, with platinum electrodes, with two glass d.
tubes of 75 ccm, divided in 1 /6 ccm 1. 12.
- - with carbon electrodes

62.194. idem, 1. 10.
62.195. --idem, modified by Friedr. C. G. Miiller (M. T. Fig. 202) 1. 4.0
62.196. Voltameter after Hofmann, improved by Kolbe, Figure (Kolbe-Skellon, Intro-

duction to Electricity, Part II, Fig. 134 B ; Ztschr. f. d. phys. u. chem. U. 14, 1901,
p. 77), with platinum electrodes 7x40x0.3 mm 2. 15. o
62.197. Gas Voltameter after Kolbe, Figure (Kolbe-Skellon, Introduction to Electricity,

Part II, Fig. 134 A; Ztschr. f. d. phys. u. chem. U. 10, 1897, p. 75), for quantitative
experiments, with platinum electrodes 7x40x0.3 mm 2.10.0
th
62.198. Voltameter after Kohlrausch, Figure
(M. P., 10"' Edn., IV, 1, Fig. 463; 9 Edn.,
Ill, Fig. 343), with thermometer fused in and with large platinum electrodes, can be
used up to 30 amps 3. IL'. t>
This voltameter very well adapted for quickly checking ammeters.

is To fill it is only neressai \
to invert it. The bung should be removed when in use.
62.199. Voltameter after Friedr. C. G. Miiller, in glass jar for water cooling (M. T. Fig. 201) 0. 12. ti
62.200. Precision Gas Voltameter after Friedr. C. G. Miiller, F g u r e (Ztschr. f. d. phys. i
u. chem. U. 14, 1901, p. 140; M.T. p. 288), for quickly and conveniently calibrating
ammeters, also well adapted for practical school work. The apparatus can remain per-
manently filled ready for use 2. s. o
62.201. Water Decomposing Apparatus for laryc quantities of oxyiren and hydrogen, F i
g u r e,
for potentials of 820 volts (M. P., 9 th Edn., Ill, Fig. 449) . 3. 0.
62.202. Voltameter after (Jrimsehl, for catching separated gases; is inverted for filling; also
suitable for practical school use (Ztschr. f. d. phys. u. chem. I'. 18. l'.'o:>, p. 2s:; '
Figs. 1 and la; Grimselil, Fig. 852) 0. 16.0
62.203. Gas Voltameter after Grimselil, for trapping the gases in general; of low resistance.
rapidly decomposing with 3 4 volts (Ztschr. f. d. phys. u. chem. I". 18, 1905, p. 2SI. '
Figs. 2 and I' a) 0. 10. o

Six of these apparatus can be used for demonstrating Faraday's first law (<(. < 'liinsfhl. Fi.n. 850).
Cl. 5959, 3482, 3481. 2304, 5380.

No. 62215. Voltameters. 943
62 209. 1 : 6. 62210. 1:8. 62 212. 1 : 5. 62 213. 1 : 4.
62.204. Gas Coulomb-meter for practical school use, Figure (Hahn, Schiileriibungen,
d.
p. 381) 0. 12.
62.205. Copper Voltameter, Figure, with 2 copper plates and surface of 2 sq decimetres
for 1 platinum plate, for a current of 5 amperes; without Platinum Plate 3. 10.
62.206. Platinum Plate for above, according to weight and state of market Approximately 6. 0.0
62.207. Silver Voltameter, Figure, with rod-shaped silver anode, for a current density
of 0.25 ampere- without Platinum Bowl (M. P., 10 th Edn., IV, 1, Fig. 468) .... 3. 0. (t
62.208. Platinum Bowl for above, according to weight and state of market Approximately 3. 8.0
62.209. U-shaped Decomposing Cell with platinum electrodes, after Friedr. C. G. Miiller
(M. T. Fig. 204), Figure 0. 10.
t>2,2lo. ElectrolyticApparatus after Grimsehl, with lead electrodes, Figure; chiefly for
decomposing water with currents of up to 20 amperes (Ztschr. f. d. phys. u. chem. U.
16, 1903, p. 162, Fig. 3; Grimsehl, Fig. 846) 0. 10.0
62.211. -- idem, with carbon electrodes, chiefly for generating chlorine 0. 10.
62.212. U-shaped Glass Tube with platinum electrodes and glass base, Figure (M. P.,
9 th Edn., Ill, Fig. 457; Gan.-Man. Fig. 717; Gan.-Kein. Fig. 946) 0. 8.
62.213. Copper Voltameter, Figure, after Friedr. C. G. Miiller (M. T. p. 290) 0. 8.
62.214. Copper Voltameter, Figure, with 3 copper plates of electrolytic copper . . . .11. 4.
62.215. Grooved Glass after Friedr. C. G. Miiller, with two electrodes each of copper, lead,
carbon, zinc and platinum. The latter are clamped in with the aid of clamps No. 60,172,
p. 799 (M. T. p. 291), without base clamps 1. 16.
I'l. 2540, 5823, 5985, 5825,

4171, S361 5901, 4323, 2309.
,
844 Voltaic Electricity. Section 5: Electrochemistry. N.I. 62216
62216. 1:3.
62 221.
62 217. 1 : :s.
62 218. 1 : 10. 62220. 1 : 11. 62 225. 1 : 10.
62.216. Apparatus for Objectively Demonstrating Electrolytic Decompositions and Crystalli-

zations, Figure
(M. P., 9
th
Edn., Ill, Fig. 45!)) 0.14.0
62.217. Saturn's Tree Inset for above, Figure (M. P., 9

th
Edn., Ill, Fig. 460) .... 0. 4.
th
62.218. V-shaped Glass Tube with Platinum Electrode and stand, Figure (M. P., 9 Edn.,
III, Fig. 458) 0. IS. o
62.219. Electrolytic Apparatus after Griiusehl, with gas conduit tubes, for small currents
(/tschr. f. d. phys. 11. chem. I*. 16, 1903, p. 162, Figs. 1 and 2), comprising 2 glass bell
jars with platinum electrodes and 1 glass bell jar with carbon electrodes and a glass jar
in which the glass bells are suspended
12,220. Demonstration Experiment for Faraday's second Law, as suggested by A. W. Hofmann,

Figure (M. P.. 9 th Edn., Ill, Fig. 461), consisting of 3 water decomposing apparat uses.
one with platinum and the others with carbon electrodes, for decomposing muriatic
acid, acidulated water and liquid ammonia 3.1(1.0
tL'. 221. Demonstration Experiment for Faraday's second Law, F g i u r e. without the ammeter
illustrated; also without accumulator or current key (M. P., 10'" Edn., IV, 1, Fig. l.V.i) 3. 0. (I
62,222. U-shaped Decomposing Vessel after (Jrimschl, with water-cooling, for showing that
in the electrolysis of dilute sulphuric acid the concentration of acid at the anode con-
tinually increases and at the cathode continuously decreases (drimsehl. Fig. 847) . . 0. IS.
12.22.'!. W-shaped Decomposition Cell after (irimsehl. for showing the migration of sulphuric
acid from the cathode to the anode (Crimsehl. Fig. S|S) .' . . . 1. (I. (I
112.221. Sliding Resistance for above, for no volts 1. l.o
112.225. Apparatus after Nernst for showing the velocity of migration of violet coloured Mn<),
Ions, Figure (.M. I'.. 10"' Edn.. IV, 1. Fig. 472)
'
1. 4.0
12,22(1. Apparatus after NYiedciiiann, for the Electrolysis of Salt Solutions and the Migration
of Ions (.M. P., ll"
1
Edn.. III. Fig. 151) 2.10.0

cl. :,<<!. 6884,
,3946, .Mil
Electrolytic Apparatus. 945
62 231. 1 : 4.
62 229. 1 : 10.
62235. 1: 3. 62 232.
62.227. Electrolytic Demonstration Apparatus, after Hillig, for demonstrating the main pro- * (1
cesses in the electrolysis in the coloured solution of sodium chloride (Ztschr. f. d. phys.
u. chem. U. 16, 1903, p. 222) 0. IS. (I
62.228. Electrolytic Demonstration Apparatus after Grimsehl, for explaining the mechanism
of the transportation of electricity, after Hittorf (Grimsehl, Fig. 862) 0. 12.
'
62.229. Apparatus after Hofmann, Figure, proving that hydrogen and oxygen combine
for
only in the proportion in which they are developed from water j
2. 16.
The apparatus consists of 2 U- tubes with 2 stopcocks, 1 similar tube with 1 stopcock and 3 brass
stands on iron tripod with carriers and holders.
62.230. Apparatus for Electric Endosmose, U-shaped bent glass tube with porous partition
wall (M. P., 9"' Edn., Ill, Fig. 464) 0. 3.
62.231.
-- idem, for projection, Figure
;
0. 10.
Electrodes of sheet copper are inserted on both sides by means of rubber bungs, in a glass tube
fixed on a board. A porous partition is fixed in the centre of the glass tube. A glass
horizontally
tube is filled on both sides and the narrow perpendicular glass tube inserted; the liquid then ascends
to an equal height in both tubes. If now the current is introduced the liquid falls in one tube and
ascends in the other.
62.232. Apparatus for Electric Endosmose, Figure, for connecting '

up to 110 220 volts
th
I). 0. (M. P., 10 Edn., IV, 1, Fig. 527) 1. 4.
62.233. Apparatus after Wiedemann, for accurately measuring the liquid carried over to the !
negative pole (M. P., 9" Edn., Ill, Fig. 465), with copper cylinder 1. 10.
1
62.234. -- idem, with platinum cylinder 3. 0.
62.235. Mechanical Model for demonstrating Electrolysis, after Egyed, Figure . . . . i 0. 16.
A mechanical model for separating and displacing the electrolyte molecules by the electric current. <
The atoms of the elements of which the electrolyte is comprised are each demonstrated as a
quarter-circle. Each two of these combine to a semi-circle, which demonstrates a molecule of the elec-
trolyte. The decomposition of the molecules is shown by the mutual displacement of the quarter-
cire.les, so that on the left and right sides one atom each of the elements comprising the electrolyte
are freed.
Cl. 2546, 5808,

4254, 5680.
946 Voltaic Electricity. Section 5: Electrochemistry.
62 237. 1 : 4. 62 238. 1 . 4.
62 236. 62239. 1:4.
62,2.36. Mechanical Model for demonstrating the velocity of migration of the Ions, utter
F. Kohlrauseh, Figure (Fr. pliys. techn. II, 1, Fig. 481) 2.10.0
62,237. Apparatus for demonstrating the migration of a drop of mercury by the inequality
of surface tension produced electrolytic-ally, Figure, for projection 0. S. o
62,2.38. Capillary Galvanoscope, after \Yeinhold, for projection, Figure (W. 1). Fig. 5.30
[503]), with glass scale 0. 12. o
62,2.3!. Capillary Electrometer, after Ostwald, Figure, vertical pattern, on stand with
holder, mirror, microscope, throe small tube's and 4 volt Osram lamp for illuminating 2. 10.
62,2 to. Precision Capillary Electrometer, after Ostwald, Figure, with fine universal ad-
justment, on stand, with holder, microscope, mirror, and illuminating device for gas
or with 4 volt Osram lamp. The illustration deviates somewhat from the pattern now
constructed 10. 0.0
62,241. Capillary Electrometer, after Lippmann, Figure, with microscope' ((Jan. -Man.
Fig. 651; (Jan. -Rein. Fig. 962) L5. 0.
02,212. Electrolytic Forge, Figure (M. T. p. 299) o. <;. o
Tin- lieaUer is filled with a 10% solution of boiling potash and the lead plate connected witli
the positive and the iron wire with the negative pole of a 110 220 volt network, a resistance bein^
inserted. When the iron wire is immersed to a distance of a few centimetres thr end is immediately
rendered white hot and commences to dropoff. The current density should be approximately In amps.
which is not sufficient l>y far to alone render the iron wire incandescent.
.-.ll-.'l, '...-, I, -'.'.

N.I. t;-2 >:,{<. Capillary Electrometers. Electrodes. 947
62 242. 1 : 5.
62 246. 4 : 3. 62 249. 1 : 9.
62241. 1:9. 62 244. 1 : 6. 62 250. 1 : 6.
s. d.
<;_'. iM.'i. 2 Concentration Cells after Grimsehl, on one stand (Grimsehl, Fig. 863) 0. 18.
lii',i'44. Electrolytic Stand t'ur Rotating Platinum Electrode, Figure; price, including
motor and gearing, but excluding electrodes 4. 10.
The one kept continually in motion by a 110 220 volt electric motor with cord and
electrode is
grin-ing: the elertrolytic processes are therefore not appreciably accelerated. We supply platinum
electrodes and platinum dishes at as low a price possible, according to weight and with the addition
of the* charges for shaping.
(52,245.
- - i d e m, with larger motor so as to enable the apparatus to be used as a Stirrer also 5. 10.
62,24(i. Flat Electrode, F i

g u r e, for Laboratory experiments, with platinum sheet having
;i surface of 15x20 mm 0. 3.
This electrode consists of a rectangular piece of the thinnest platinum foil welded on to two
i'orksli;i|ii'd stiff platinum wires sealed in a glass tube; connection is made by a copper cord in the in-
terior of the small glass tube.
62.247.
- -
idem, area 20x30 mm 0. 3.6
62.248. idem; area 30x40 mm 0. 4.0
<;_..! J!. Stand for above Platinum Electrodes, Figure. Price without Electrodes . . . . 1. 2.0
The rods on the insulating stand, for clamping the electrodes, can be adjusted both vertically
:ui<l laterally.
62,250. Apparatus for demonstrating Nobili's Colour Rings, F i

g u i e th
(M. P., 9 Edn., Ill,
p. 576), with platinum electrode 0. 14.
Cl. 5987, 2562, 5974,

2082, 3228, 5965. 60 *
948 Voltaic Electricity. Section 5: Electrochemistry.
62 258. 1 : 6. 62 259. 1 : 6.
d.
62.251. Electro-plating Apparatus, simple, Figure, consisting of glass vessel with lid,
s.
j
porous pot, zinc croSvS and copper plate; working without special current supply ((Iriin-
sehl, Fig. 870) 0. 7.0
The matrices, preferably of gutta-percha, are laid on the copper plate.
62.252. Copper-plating Apparatus, Figure 0. 14. (
The apparatus requires a special source of current. Tin- rod-shaped cathode enclosed in a glass
tulie. is placed on the edge of the matrix.
62.253. Matrices (Reprints of Coins, Medals), for obtaining galvanic deposits,

of paraffin Kadi (I. 0. 7
-- idem, of gutta-percha Kadi 0. 1.0

62.254.
62.256. Electro-plating Apparatus for Copper Deposits, Figure, comprising: 1 Kunsen

cell. glass trough 10 -'10x12 cm, 1 anode rod with connecting screws, 2 earthenware
1
rods with connecting screws, leads, copper-sulphate, copper anode, galvano-graphite,

black lead brush, and directions, in lacquered box 1. 0.0
20x20x20 cm d
62.257. -- idem, larger, with earllienwarc trough 1. 10.
Cl. .'ii'711. -'.M $984,

_'.".<;."> -ii
No. li-J 263. Galvano-plastic Arts. Galvano-plastics. 949
62 261. 1 : 4. 62 262. 1 : 6. 62 263. 1 : 7.
(ii','258. Complete Apparatus for Silvering and Gilding, Figure, comprising: 1 Bunsen cell, 8. d.
1 enamelled dish, copper wires, copper, silver and gold hath, brush for removing grease,
hand scratching brush, pumice stone, sawdust, scouring leather, and directions, in
lac(|ueivd box ................................. j
1. 5.
(>2,ii5<). Complete Apparatus

Nickel-plating, Figure, comprising:
for cells, 2 Bunsen
1 glass trough 10x10x15 cm,
2 anode rods with clamping screws, 1 earthenware rod
with clamping screws, leads, piepared Nickel Salts, Nickel anodes and nickel hook,
brush for removing grease, pumice stone, sawdust, scouring leather, and directions, in
lacquered box ..................... ........... 1. 4.
<;_', 2<<). -- idem, larger, with earthenware

trough 20x20x20 cm ........... 1.15.0
Electrolytic Rectifiers: see p. 863.
Section 6: Electro-magnetism and Electro-dynamics.

s. d.
Deflection of the Magnetic Needle.
fi2,261. Oersted's Apparatus for the Deflection of the Magnetic Needle by the Electric Current,
Figure (M. I'., !)'" Edn., Ill, Fig. 471 cf. Gan.-Man. Fig. 727; Gan.-Rein. Fig. 823),
;
with 2 magnetic needles 0. 18.
til', 262. - - i d m, different pattern,

e Figure 0. 16.
The apparatus has i> terminals so as to allow the most varied parts of the rectangle to act on
the needles.
62,263. Apparatus with two astatically arranged Magnetic Needles, Figure, for showing
deflection bv the electric current 0. 18.0
Cl. 2567,
2568, 5966, 2570.
950 Voltaic Electricity. Section 6: Electro-magnetism and Electro-dynamics. No. 62 204
62 265. 1 : 0.
62 264. 1 : 6. 62 266. 1 : 5. 62268. 1:7.
62 269 72. 1 : 8. 62 273. 1 : 6.
62.264. Apparatus for Deflecting the Magnetic Needle by the Electric Current, F i
g u r e,
comprising a voltaic cell, a brass stirrup and a magnetic needle on stand 0. Hi. n
62.265. Current Conductor for Experiments on the Deflection of the Magnetic Needle by the
Electric Current, after Kolbe, Figure
(Kolbe-Skellon, Introduction to Electricity,
Part II, Fig. 105) 0. s. n
Suitable Magnetic Needles and Stands for above: see Nos. 00,043 60,046 and 60,058, p. 786.
Electromagnets.
Unless stated to the contrary, the Electromagnets are provided with a winding of thick wire
for connecting up with Bunsen Cells or Accumulators.
62,266. Magnetising Spiral, (M. P., 9

th
Figure
Edn., Ill, Fig. 517), wood reel wound
with wire '2 mm
thick, with iron core which can be drawn out 0. Hi. u
<;_'. 267. idem, smaller and wound with wire 1 nun thick 0. lo. o
62,268. Iron Bar on Stand and 2 Wire Spirals wound in contrary dierctions, F i
g u r e, for
showing the reversal of the magnetic poles when the current-direction is reversed . . 0. ll.'.
Electromagnets, Figure, horse-shoe shaped, with suspension ring and armature (cf. (lan.-
Man. Fig. 7r>7; (ian.-Rein. Fig. 909).
List No. 62,269 62,270 62,271 62,272
Length of Limbs mm 100 150 200 L'.MI
0. 8. 0. 12. 0. 16. 0. 20.
The, armature is fastened to a chain, as suggested by Grimsehl, to prevent its falling down.
62.273. 2 Coils with winding of different thickness, with handles, and with 2 solid, 2 hollow
soft iron cores for same; 2 hollow cylinders of thin sheet iron, 1 steel wire bundle and 1 soft
iron wire bundle, Figure, after Friedr. <'. (',. Miillei (M. T. Fig. 187), for electro-
magnetic experiments 1. (1.0
Solenoid on Stand for Electro-magnetic Experiments with the Hartl Pointer Malance: see
Xo. 51,600, p. 2-10.
( 'I. ,-i973,2572,2.'>73. .'.>!.
2576,4166.
.No. l!-.'-JTS. Electromagnets. 951
62 277. 1 = 9. 62 278 A. 1:9. 62 278 B. 1:9.
C>1'. L'74. Joule's Electromagnet, with broad, flat pole surfaces (Kolbe-Skellon, Introduction I s. d.
to Electricity, Part II, Fig. 104 B), of horse-.shoe section, with suspension rings and
armature, Figure; carrying capacity when supplied with current by an accumulator
or a bichromate cell, about 120 and 70 kg respectively; own weight 1 kg 0. 18.
r
!7. >. Elektromagnet, Figure, with suspension ring and armature 1. 4. d
Tin- electromagnet carries 50 kg.
!7(i. Electromagnet carrying 50 kg, in wood frame, F i g u r e, arranged to rotate about

the horizontal axis, with armature, balance pan and armature chain (Gan.-Kein.
Fig. 1(07) 1. 4.0
As the electromagnet run be removed from the fillet by loosening two screws it is possible to
u*e tin- magnet alone without frame.
<>2,277. Electromagnet carrying 100 kg, F i

g u r e, in wood frame, with limbs 250 mm long,
armature and balance pan 1 . 18.
The armature is, as in the preceding item, fastened to a chain in accordance with Grimsehl's
suggestion.
<ii'.278. - -
idem, arranged so as to rotate, F g i s. A and B, with wood frame stretched
with cardboard, armature and balance pan 2. 4.0
In addition to being used in experiments on can vin raparity this Electromagnet can be employed
for other purposes, e. g., for demonstrating the lines of force by using the wood frame intended for
the purpose, cf. Fig. t>'2 '278 B.
Cl. 3472, 2577, 2578,

2579, 2580, 2581.
952 Voltaic Electricity. Section 6: Electro-magnetism and Electro-dynamics.
62 280. 1 : 4. 62 281. 1 : 6. 62 282 B. 1:6.
62.279. Electromagnet carrying 150 kg, Figure, with " lever stand for measuring the car- t
th o
rying capacity (M. P., 9 Edn., Ill, Fig. 520) . . <i. o.
62.280. Electromagnet after Weinhold, Figure (W. D. Figs. 551553 [524 520 1), with
armature. Suited both for experiments on the carrying capacity of magnets and for
para- and diamagnetic experiments with the Projection Lantern. For the latter ex-
periments we supply along with the magnet: 2 half-armatures with conical poles;
1 ebonite slab with arm for suspending the bismuth and nickel rods; and a small glass
tube for filling with ferric chloride; 1 glass cube 2. l.<i
('2.280 a. v. Waltenhofen's Pendulum, suitable for No. 62,280, with plain and toothed copper
piece I. Id. (i
('2.281. Electromagnet ior Experiments on Diamagnetism and Paramagnetism, Figure.

with upright magnet coils 200 height and 100 mm diameter, magnet core 225 mm mm
length, 60 mm
diameter; with 1 pair pole pieces tapered on one side and truncated on
the other S. d. d
Auxiliary Apparatus for preceding Electromagnets:
(2.2*2. Device for Experiments on Paramagnetism and Diamagnetism, F g s. A and H. i
comprising one stand for suspending the objects experimented on. one stage with vertical
adjustment, for setting up the glass cube and the Faraday glass parallelepiped, 1 pointed
holder for the experiments on the separation of the aureole of sparks, 1 Light Holder
for diamagnetic investigations of the flame, and 1 case of test bodies 2. Id. o
\Ve supply the follow iiiy test material alnni; with the apparatus: s bars of iron, nickel. ;iht-
miiiiuin, bismuth, antimony, zinc, platinum, silver: I wood rod: 1 lead -rlass rod: I
jrlass tulie for
filling with liquid: also small dish for liquids and 1 plate
I i;lass hollow cube of .'!."> mm length of side
for holding on air currents when the bars are swinînj;.
02.2s.'i. v. Waltenhofen's Pendulum, Figure, for showing the damping effect of induction,
with plain and toothed copper piece 2. Id. o
('2,28-1. Foucault's Rotating Copper Disc, Figure, with wheel gearing, for demonstrating
eddy currents and the heating of the disc when rotated between the magnetic poles .'{. 0. d
CLU8S,M00,
..I-".!, 2585, 2591.
N... (!.> -.'si. Electromagnets. 953
62281,62286. 1:6. 62 288, 62 282, 62 283, 62 287. 1 : 10.
02.285. Silver Coin with Pyramid Mirror, after Tyndall, for showing damping of a metallic s
body when rotated in the magnetic field, Figure (Tyndall, Heat [Die Warme] r
h
4' German Edn., p. 87), with suspension device 1. 4.
62.286. Device for Melting easily Liquefying Metals by rotating in the magnetic field, after
Tyndall, Figure
(Tyndall, Heat [Die Warme], 4
lh
German Edn., p. 91) 4. 10.0
A copper bush filled with solid metal is rotated rapidly between the pole pieces of an electro-
magnet; after short time the metal is melted by the eddy currents present.
62.287. Polarisation Apparatus, Figure, for showing the Rotation of the Plane of Polari-
sation by magnetizing forces, with two nicols 12 mm, one double quartz plate and
divided circle with index; Faraday Glass Parallelepiped 70x18x18 mm, in box with
two pierced pole pieces j
5. 0.
Bismuth Spirals for measuring Field Density: sec Nos. 62,306 and 62,307, p. 956.
02.288. Large Electromagnet, V i g u r e, for all paramagnetic and diamagnetic experiments,

with magnets vertically arranged, with 4 coils with device for putting the windings
in series or parallel, with commutator and interrupter, frame running on rollers. Length
of magnel cores 430 mm, diameter 67 mm; length of each coil 200 mm, diameter 130 mm;
with massive pierced pole pieces and two pair differently shaped conical attachments
for same 30. 0.
The electromagnet is momentary loads of 30 amps, which are applied when tin-
constructed for
windings of the electromagnet are in series and connected direct to 65 volts D. C. working pressure.
If the working pressure is 110 volts a proportionate resistance should be inserted in series. If desired,
and at an extra cost of 1, the electromagnet is also supplied for connecting direct on to 1 10 or 220 volts.
The maximum current density is then correspondingly lower, but the number of windings higher, so
that tin- total number of ampere-turns is approximately the same.
As Accessories we recommend the same as those for Electromagnet No. 62,281; the prices
being the same as in that case.
Cl. 2592, 2593, 2588, 2586,
2587, 2589.
954 Voltaic Electricity. Section 6: Electro-magnetism and Electro-dynamics. No. 62 2X9
62 290. 1 : 10. 62282C. 1:8.
62 283 C. 1:8.
62 284 C. 1:10. 62 285 C. 1 62 286 C. 1:8.
62,289. Electromagnet with Vertical Magnet Limbs, somewhat smaller pattern; magnet limbs
350 mm long and 52 mm diameter; length of each coil 160 mm, diameter 100 mm . 22. 10. o
The electromagnet is built for a maximum momentary current density of 25 amperes in con-
ith 65 volts. As regards other voltages and accessories, the same remarks hold as for No. 62.-JSS.
junction with
62,290. Large Electromagnet after Ruhmkorff, F i g u re for para- and diamagnetic ex-
,
periments, with horizontal magnet limbs 70 diameter and 220 mm length, pierced mm
for taking the polarisation apparatus; coils 200 long and 130 mm
diameter, with mm
two pair different shaped pole-pieces, with pole commutator and interrupter (M. P.,
9'" Edn., Ill, Fig. 854) 25.
As to current density and voltage all the remarks made under No. 62,288 hold good here also.
The accessories are also the same as for No. 62,281 and are supplied at the same price. Figs. 62,282 C
to 62,286 C show the construction of these accessories for No. 62,290.
62,291. Electromagnet, Figure, with arrangement for enabling the magnet limbs to be
used vertically and horizontally: coil 150 length, 120 mm
diameter; magnet limbs mm
170 mmlong, 60 mm
diameter 2-1. 0.0
As regards current and voltage, also accessories: cf. remarks under No. 62,288.
02.292. Large Half-ring Electromagnet after du Bois, cf. Fig. 02,299, p. 950; with arc-shaped
magnet limbs on a massive base-plate forming the yoke; with one pair cylindrical and
one pair conical pole pieces, one distance piece for 1 mm
pole distance of the conical
pole pieces, Stand and Spanners (Ztschr. f. lust rumentenkunde. 1899, p. 357). ... 1 0.
By loosening the fixing screws the limbs can be moved apart and rotated with reference to each
(
'1.2595, 2596. 2598,
2599,2600,2601.
Nn. H-2'298. Electromagnets. 955
62291,62282. 1:7.
62 294. 1 : 4. 62 296.
other. The entire magnet can be tilted over and employed, in conjunction with the levelling screws s. (1.
supplied, with lines of force running perpendicularly.

The stage fixed between the magnet limbs is rotary, can be adjusted in the plane and can also
IK- screwed in laterally in the baseplate. 2 iron cores are inserted above in the magnet limbs and can
removed for optical experiments.
The winding is arranged for 20 amperes, consists of 2500 turns, and when in series has a resistance
of approx. 3.3 ohms and is intended for connecting up to 65 volts.
With the (inical pole pieces the pole distance is about 1 mm (30 sq. mm cross section) and
.
with -lo.uiMi ampere-turns the field is approx. 38,0(Hi gaii**.
Accessories for preceding Electromagnet.
t;iM'<:}. One Pair Cylindrical Pieces of Dynamo Steel with attachment pieces worked in, for
making further pole pieces 1. 10.
ii'J.L'04. Universal Slider with rotating plate and correcting device, niicroinetrically adjustable
in both planes, Figure 4. 15. I)
<;:.'. L".tr>. v. Waltenhofen's Pendulum with gallows and interchangeable suspension for various
objects 3. 10.
(iL',L".M). Flat Induction Coil of about 5 mm diameter, with intermediate pole piece, F gu
i r e,
for measuring field-densities with a ballistic galvanometer 3. 0.
<iL'.2!)7. Polarisation Apparatus with divided circle, fitting the tappings of the magnet limb,
with Faraday's Glass Block 7. 15.
;L'.L".,S. Holder for one Bismuth Spiral 0. 10.
For Bismuth Spirals for measuring Field Densities, see Xos. 62,306 and 62,307.
Cl. 2602,
5J14, 5381.
956 Voltaic Electricity. Section 6: Electo-magnetism and Electro-dynamics. \ii.li-_' -'!(
62299,62302. 1:7.
62 306. 1 : 4. 62308. 1 : 7..V
62.299. Small Half-Ring Electromagnet after du Bois, F g u i with one pair cylindrical
r e, ^
and one pair conical pole pieces, one distance piece for 1 mm
pole distance of the conical
pole pieces, Stand and Spanner (Ztschr. f. Instrnmentenknnde, 1899, p. 363) 30. .... .">. (i
This magnet is constructed in a similar manner to No. 62,292 but is of only half the linear
dimensions. The -winding is arranged for 8 amps., and when the coils are in series tin- resist mice i-;
approximately 4 ohms; the apparatus can therefore be conveniently connected up to 32 volts.
Accessories for preceding Electromagnet.
62.300. One Pair Cylindrical Pieces for making additional pole pieces, of dynamo steel . . 1. 10.
62.301 . Universal Slider, cf. Fig. 62,294 , . I. l.V
62,302.' v. Waltenhofen's Pendulum 3. 0.
.62,303. Flat Induction Coil, cf. Fig. 62,296 :;. o. o
62,304. Polarisation Apparatus with divided circle and Faraday's Glass Block 7. :>. o
02,3or>. Holder for a Bismuth Spiral o. HI.O

02. .">()(>. Bismuth Spiral after Lenard, F g n r e, for determining the Field Density
i of Magnetic
Fields by the change in the Conducting Resistance which bismuth undergoes in the field;
in case,with calibration curve; approx. 20 diameter mm 3. o. o
62,3d7.
- id e
in, 5 to 6 mm
diameter 3. o. o
The bismuth spirals afford a very convenient means of measuring the field-densities by means
of a resistance measurement with a \Vlieatstone Bridge. The thickness of the spirals is only about
1 mm
so that they can be introduced into very narrow fields, e. g. between armature and pole pieces
of a An average change of resistance of .">",, is produced by 1000 lines per sq. cm: accurate
dynamo.
data can be obtained from the calibration curve supplied with each spiral.
111',.''.OX.Electromagnet after Prof. P. Weiss, with coils for water cooling which can be loaded
twice as much as in the ease of air cooling; F g n r e; diameter of pole pieces 1(10 mm;
i
with one pair cylindrical and one pair conical pole pieces; on stonl wood board S7. . . in. O
The pole pieces can be adjusted by a micrometer motion. The coils are arranged as near as
possible to the pole pieces and the cross section of the iron increases steadily from the pole pieces up
to the centre of the magnetic circuit, so that leakage is avoided as much as possible and a very
high
degree of magnetization attained. I'nless otherwise requested the winding U
dimensioned for 120 volts.
A great advantage lies in the fact that the entire apparatus remains quite cool.
02.309. -- idem, arranged to rotate on iron base so that the magnet can easily be placed
in any position,with horizontal divided circle in:,, o. o
Hi.'..'110. Electromagnet after Prof. \Veiss, as No. 02.30H, but with pole pieces 92 mm diameter 73. 10.0
62,311. idem, on tripod, as No. 62,309 s.v it. o
CI. .-.CHI. .-.ilSIl, lilt I

Electromagnets. 957
62 314. 1 : 6. 62 316. 1 : 9
62317. 1:3.
62 319. I : 9.
s. d.
62.312. Electromagnet after Prof. Weiss, as No. 62,308, but with pole pieces 80 mm diameter 52. 10.
62.313. --idem, on iron base, as No. 62,309 62. 10.
The Weiss Electromagnets Nos. 62,308 62,313 can be fitted with the same accessories as the
Half-ring Electromagnet No. 62,292 for the same price.
62.314. Band Spiral for magnetizing (M. P., 9"' Edn., Ill, Fig. 526), Figure 1. 4.0
62.315. Apparatus after Wertheim, Figure, for the singing of steel when magnetized
th
(M. P., 9 Edn., Ill, Fig. 530) 2. 10.
th
62.316. Apparatus after v. Waltenhofen, Figure
(M. P., 9 Edn., Ill, Fig. 891 Fr. phys. ;
Techn. II, 1, Fig. 650), for demonstrating saturation, in accordance with which thin
iron tubes become more magnetic at low current densities than massive bars; the reverse
takes place, however, when the current densities are high 4. 10.
th
62.317. Electromagnetic Motor after Eitchie (Ritchie's Top), Figure (M. P., 9 Edn.,
Ill, Fig. 540) 1.10.
Contrary to the illustration the apparatus is constructed with a 4-pole armature.
62.318. Electric Motor after Ritchie 1. 12.0

This is constructed exactly like the preceding, but it has an electromagnet instead of the per-
manent magnet.
th
62.319. Electromagnetic Motor after Page, Figure (M. P., 9 Edn., Ill, Fig. 607), with
4 upright coils 6. 0.0
Cl. 1050, 5972, 2606n 2607,
2608.
958 Voltaic Electricity. Section 6 : Electro-magnetism and Electro-dynamics. No. (W320
62 320. 1 : 5.
62 321. 1 : 3. 62 323 A. 1:6.
62 324. 1 : 4.
62 322. 1 : 4. 62 325. 1 : r,.
(iLViL'O. Electromagnetic Motor after Froment, Figure (M. P., !'" Kdn., III. Fig. 542),
<>
<S. <>.
large pattern
62.321. Electromagnetic Motor for rotating (leissler Tulies (if up to L'O cm length, F i
g u re,
without tube illustrated () - "' "
62.322. Electromagnetic Motor with suction pump, Figure -. <>- <
Electro-magnetic Telegraphy.
r,-_'.:iU3. Needle Telegraph, Figs. A and H, with a signal transmitter and a receiver, letters
visible at a distance .
'* 1-
(il',324. Morse Telegraph, Figure, small, for rotating with the hand
All Morse Telegraphs have a coloured |>in in pliu-e of the ordinary printing pin. the resultant
\vritini; appearing in colour.
'I. 2613.2610. JlilL', -.'ill 4.

I
.'i(l,
923, 5908.
No o-.' :!;;.'. Electro-magnetic Telegraphy. 959
62 327. 1 : 4. 62329. 1:5.
62328. 1 : 7.
62.325. Morse Telegraph for Schools (Ink Writer), with open clockwork, key, and wet cell,
s. <!.
Figure 2. 4.0
02.326. - - d e without cell
i
m, 2. 0.
62.327. Morse Ink Writer, Figure, with clockwork under glass, on polished mahogany
hoard (ef. Gan.-Man. Fig.' 847; Gan.-Rein. Fig. 925) 4. 0.0
62,32X. Model of a Telegraph Station, F g u r e, comprising a Moise Ink Writer, a compre-
i
hensive relay, a .Morse key and a galvanometer with open wire connections to show
plainly the course of the current. The connections are so arranged that the station
\\oiks in itself. If desired the connections are so arranged that two such stations can
he worked reciprocally 10. 0.0
62,329. Standard Ink Writer for direct Printing, model of the Prussian State Eailway,
Figure, with reinovahle spring drum, horizontal detachable paper roll in the base;
on polished mahogany board, for open current; resistance of magnet coils 15 ohms . . 12. 10.0
12, 330. Extra price for insulated translator pillar 1. 5.0
t>2,331. Extra price for adjustable magnet system 0. 12.
62,332. Extra price for automatic release, especially for wireless telegraphy 1. 10.0
Cl. 2616, 2619,
2617.
960 Voltaic Electricity. Section 6: Electro-magnetism and Electro-dynamics. X<>. -' 340
62 347. 1 : 3. 62 349. 1 : 3. 62 346. 1 : .V
s. (1.
62,340. Morse Telegraph for instruction purposes, F i

g u 2 stations together
r e I). 111.
On a polished stand are conveniently arranged the Morse Apparatus with clockwork under glas,
the key, a porcelain insulator and a cell, and provided with different coloured leads. By this arrange-
ment and the employment of two stations the understanding is aided considerably in following the
processes of telegraphing.
62.341. Morse Telegraph for instruction purposes as preceding, without clockwork, for rotating
with the hand by means of wheel gearing. 2 stations together 5. '0.
62.342. Morse Telegraph, as No. 62,340, each station with relay for open circuit and provided '
with 2 cells. 2 stations together 10. 0. o
62.343. Morse Telegraph, as No. 62,341, each station provided with relay
'
for open ciicuit and
with 2 cells. 2 stations together 8. 10.0
61,147. Morse Key, Figure

on p. 868, fitting apparatus Nos. 62,32462,327 (Gan.-Mau.
Fig. 846; Gan.-Rein. Fig. 927) 0.10.0
62.34-1. Morse Key, large pattern 1. o.o
Morse Keys for heavy current; see "Radio-telegraphy" Section.

62, .'545. Polarised Relay, re, Figu in metal case with glass lid, for telegraph purposes, for
open or closed circuit current '. 3. 0.
(J2.346. Polarised Relay, highly sensitive 1
Figure, with resistance of

. approximately
7000 ohms, chiefly for wireless telegraphy, for open or closed circuits !). 0.
62.347. Relay, Figure, very comprehensively arranged, can be used on closed or open
circuits (cf. Can. -Man. F'ig. 853; (lan.-Kein. Fig. !28) 2. '8.0
62. 3 IN. Polarised Relay, simple, with adjustable sensitivity, resistance l.'iO ohms, in walnut
case, for closed or open circuit working. Figure 1 . o.
Cl. 20'JO, 5832, 59'', -'-'.',
-'824, 58 ''.31150.
No. 62359. Telegraphy. House Telegraphy. 961
62 358. 1 : 4.
62 350. 1 : 8.
62355. 1:3 62 359. 1 : 4.
62351. 1:8. 62 357. 1 = 5.
S. d.
62.349. Simple Relay for closed or open circuit, F i

g u r e, approx. 100 ohms resistance 0. 6.0
62.350. Electric Bell, fitted with key on stand, Figure 0.16.0
62.351. Electric Bell, Figure, on stand (Gan.-Man. Fig. 852) 0. 8.

The can be arranged either as a striking or trembling bell. In the first case the two terminals
bell
visible to the left of the figure are used, these leading to the magnet winding; in the latter case the two
outer terminals are connected, thus putting into circuit the automatic interrupting device of the bell.
Electric Bells, .for House Telegraph Connections, in polished walnut case

List No. 62,352 62,353 62,354
Diameter of Bell Dome 60 80 100 mm
0.2.0 0.2.6 0.4.0
62.355. Electric Bell with indicator disc drop and continuously ringing contact, Figure 0. 7.
For suitable Cells for House Telegraphs: see Nos. 60,78760,800, p. 850.
62.356. Waxed Wire for House Telegraph and Ivxpci iniental purposes, 0,9mm copper dia-
meter, approx. 170 m to 1
kg. Price per kg 0. 4.
62.357. Alternating Current Bell in walnut case, for working with magneto generators; internal
arrangement similar to Fig. 62,357 0. 10.
f
62.358. Magneto Generator for alarm installations. Figure, open, with two magnets,
with automatic short circuiting contact by displacing the crank axis I
0. 15.
62.359. Magneto Generator, with three magnets, Figure, German Post Office pattern,
Figure 1. 3.
Cl. 1027, 57 r, 61 r, 62 >%
2628, 63 f.
61
962 Voltaic Electricity. Section 6: Electro-magnetism and Electro-dynamics. No. 62 360
=
62 360. 1 : 4.
62 361. 1 : 4
62 365. 1 : 4.
62 367, 62 368. 1 : 4. 62 369. 1 : 5.
62,360. Magneto Generator with five magnets, Figure 1. in. o
62.361. Magneto Generator, large, with six magnets, Figure 3. 5.0
62.362. Sections of Telegraph Cables, for subterranean and submarine laying, each 0. 10.
to 1. 0. 0.
Apparatus for Phototelegraphy, Prof. Korn's system, constructed by us, quoted for on
application.
Theory of Lines of Force.

62.363. Wood Frame, 400 mm side, stretched with cardboard, for demonstrating lines of
magnetic force, with sieve and filings, for use with permanent magnet and electromagnets 0. 3.
62.364. 20 Steel Spheres, 3,5 mm diameter, for demonstrating lines of force curves (\V. I).
Fig. 549 [522]) 0. 2.
62.365. Apparatus after To'pler, Figure, for demonstrating objectively the existence of
the magnetic curves between the poles of an electromagnet 1. 4.0
The glass trough is filled with glycerine, and finely powdered iron (previously uniformly mixed
with sonic glycerine) is distributed in same. The curves form when the circuit is closed.
62.366. Model for explaining the Direction in which the lines of Magnetic Force encircle a
Conductor (W. D. Fig. 548 [521]) 0. ir>. o
62.367. Wire Coil, can also be used for Ampere's stand No. 62,383, Figure (W. l>.
Fig. 537 |510|), without /.inc plates 0. 8.
62.368. Zinc Plate for above, in two parts, for producing lines of force, F i
g 11 r e, to be used
in conjunction with No. 62,367 (W. D. Fig. 547 [520]) 0. 4.
( 1.60 f, 64 r, 5869,
MM. MSI
No. 6-2370. Magnetos. Theory o! Lines of Force. 963
<>
Q R
62 370. 1 : 8.
i;.!,:3t)<). Apparatus for demonstrating the Lines of Force of Current Conductors, sifter Bauern- s. d.
berger, Figure 0. 18.
iL'..'>70. 1 Set Apparatus for explaining the Lines of Force Theory, after Berghoff, Figs. A 8 4. 0.
For producing the magnetic fields use is made firstly of needle-shaped magnets and secondly of
copper wires, traversed by tin- current, and bent to correspond. The former are enclosed between two
glass plates size 130 x 180 mm: in the latter case a glass plate of the. same size is mounted in a wood frame
and drilled out to correspond with the shape of wire; the wood frame also carries the terminals for connecting
ui) ''"' current.
Constructed in this manner the apparatus are durable and can be easily cleaned. By strewing iron
on the glass plates the lines of force can be demonstrated visibly. We recommend for use in these
filings
experiments ordinary iron filings carefully strained to different sizes; it is less advantageous to use ferrum
alcoholisatum.
The following pertain to the complete set: (1)1 bar magnet, Fig. A; (2) 2 magnets, the opposite
poles being opposite each other, Fig. B; (3) 2 magnets whose similar poles are opposite each other, Fig. C;
(4) horse-shoe magnet, Fig. D; (5) 2 parallel magnets whose poles of similar name are alongside each
other, Fig. E; (6) 2 parallel magnets whose dissimilar poles are alongside each other, Fig. F; (7) deformation
of lines of force. Fig. G and II; (8) homogeneous field, Fig. J and K; (9) magnetic field of a current,
Fig. Ij and M; (10) magnetic field of a current perpendicular to direction of current. Fig. N; (11) magnetic
field of two parallel currents flowing in opposite directions. Fig. 0; (12) magnetic, field of two parallel
currents flowing in same direction, Fig. P ( 13) magnetic field of a number of circuits in series (of a solenoid),
;
Fig. Q; (14) solenoid with a number of windings, Fig. R: (15) earth's magnetic field, Fig. 8.
For objective demonstration necessary to use an Apparatus for horizontal pro-

it is
jection (List Nos. 51,032 to 51,039) or a Megadiascope.
Cl. 372-38T.
61*
964 Voltaic Electricity. Section 6: Electro-magnetism and Electro-dynamics. N... M371
62 371 C. 1:6.
62 371 A. 1:7.
62 371 D. 1:30. 62 372. 1 : 8.
62 373. 1 : 12. 62 374. 1 : 10.
62,371. Apparatus for explaining the Theory of Lines of Magnetic Force, after s/ymansky,
Figs. A I) (Ztschr. f. d. phys. u. ehem. I'., 7, p. 10).
'
The host galvanometer to use-
is S/ymansky's, No. 61,342 3. Id.
(1) Horse-shoe shaped electromagnet Fig. A.

t-2) 2 Attachments for the magnet and 2 small rectilinear adjustable parallel slide rails with sni;ill _'
sliding conductors, nickelled, Fig. 6.

(3) 1 Set lines of force rails, Fig. A, nickelled.
(4) Diverging slide rails with sliding conductors, nickelled. Fig. C.
(5) 2 Large slide rails with large sliding conductor, for explaining the earth's mamietic field, nickelled.
Fie. D.
62,372. Apparatus for Demonstrating the Lines of Force Image of Lineally Directed Currents,
perpendicular to the axis, after Fricdr. C. (1. Miiller (M. '!'. Fin. 173), F <; u r o i . . II. 12. d
62,373. 2 Sheets Cardboard with eoiulnetin.u wires, after Friodr. C. (1. .Miillor (M. T. p. 253),
for demonstrating the magnetic field of straight and In-lit conductors parallel to the
axis, F i
jr u r e d. 2.
62,374. Apparatus for Demonstrating the Magnetic Field of Lineally Directed Currents, after
(lot/o, with two magnetic noodles, Figure 1. Id. d
( '1. 2056, 2657, 2658, 2(i5, 4811,
4141, 414.'. 4 '.".I. I
NIL (i->381. Theory of Lines of Force. 965
62 376. 1 = 6.
62 379. 1 : 6.
MAX KOHL CHEMNITZ

62 380. 1 : 4.
62377. 1 = 11-
Mf'MNMfffift
J
62 378. 1 : .-,. 62 381. 1 : 5.
62,37~>. 2 Wire Coils on wood frame,

for demonstrating the magnetic fields of a single con- : s. (I.
ductor, of two
parallel currents in the same and two parallel currents in opposite direc-
tions (W. u. E., phys. prakt. 4 th Edn., p. 492). A current density of only 1 2 amps,
is necessary 2. 5.
62.376. Apparatus for the Magnetic Field of a Circular Current, Figure 0. 18.
62.377. Demonstration Apparatus for Field of an Annular Conductor, after Gotze, with five
magnetic needles, Figure ;
2. 10.
62.378. Apparatus for Demonstrating the Multiplication of the Current Effect when a Magnetic
Field is generated, after Friedr. C. G. Miiller, Figure
(M. T. Fig. 176), with a single
and a quintuple coil 0. 10.
62.379. Demonstration Apparatus for the Magnetic Field of a Solenoid and of a bar-shaped
Electromagnet, after Gotze, Figure. The iron core can be taken out 3. 10.
62.380. Apparatus for Demonstrating the Flow of the Magnetic Field in a Solenoid, after
Bauernberger, Figure 1. 4.
62.381. Apparatus for the Magnetic Field of a Solenoid, after Friedr. C. G. Miiller, Figure
(M. T. Fig. 177) 0. 10.0
Cl. 5549, 4116, 4107, 3558,
3878,6012.
966 Voltaic Electricity. Section 6: Electro-magnetism and Electro-dynamics.
62 382. 1 : 8.
62 383. 1 : 6.
62 387. 1 : .-,. 62 386. 1:10.
;:.'. 3*2. Demonstration Apparatus for the Magnetic Field of a horse-shoe Electromagnet, after *'
Gotze, Figure l.ln. <>
112,383. Ampere's Stand, Figure, reliable pattern, with separate stands; main stand on
metal tripod with levelling screws, rotary and fixed in position by screw; wire fignrc.-.
of aluminium with silver points. The following appertain to above: solenoid (\V. I). 1
Fig. 536 [509]), 1 simple rectangle (\V. 1). Fig. 531' [505]). double (astatic) rectangle 1
(W. 1). Fig. 534 [507]), wire stirrup with wire coil (W. D. Fig. 535 |508|),
1 boxwood 1
bowl with - concentric rings, boxwood bowl with partition wall. Also adapted for
I
experiments as suggested in (Ian. -.Man. Figs. 739, 740, 746, 751; Gan.-Rein. Fiirs. S'.tl.
893, 877 4. 4.
This pattern enables the experiments lo succeed with ease. Tne primary condition is that absolutely
pure and dry mercury should be employed. This we supply if desired at a charge of 0. 8. per kilo.
A current density of 1.5 'Jo amps, is necessary. Precise instructions for use arc jjiven in.
;2,3t!7. Wire Coil for Ampere's Stand (W. D. Fig. 537 [510]), Figure on p. 962 I). S. It
(I. .'(,73,3878,
2675, 267.
No. 62 390. Ampere's Stands. 967
62 389. 1 : 5.
62388. 1:12. 62 390. 1 : 4.
62, 368. Zinc Plate, in two parts, for demonstrating lines of force, for vise in conjunction with s. d.
No. 62,367 (W. D. Fig. 547 [520]) 0. 4. (I
(iL'..">sf;. Ampere's Stand, large pattern, Figure, with aluminium solenoid working on
sapphire rap; height of stand 75 cm. The lateral flat wire coil moves in hinges, as does
also the lower wire holder 7. 10.0
The apparatus works very well with a few Bunsen Cells and permits of proving the laws of
attraction and repulsion of currents flowing in the same and opposite directions.
62.387. Ampere's Stand, simple, Figure, with a rectangular, a circular, an astatic and
a solenoid-shaped conductor 1. 10.
62.388. Apparatus after Friedr. C. G. Miiller, for demonstrating the electro-dynamic action
upon each other of currents flowing in the same and opposite directions. F i g u r e, com-
prising two bundles of Lametta strips stretched between terminals, and a Eoget spiral
(M. T. Fig. 214) 1. 16.
<;.;. is (.. Apparatus after .Miihlenbein, Figure for demonstrating the alternating action
of currents and magnets (Ztschr. f. d. phys. u. chem. U., 1, p. 203) 2. 14.0
The apparatus admits of proving Ampere's Laws easily and visibly for teaching purposes.
62,390. Apparatus for Muhlenbein's experiment, Figure, after Kolbe (Kolbe-Skellon,

Introduction to Electricity, Part II, Fig. 96), consisting of 1 wire frame on wood board
(No. 62,392, 0.15.0), I'Ruhmkorff Commutator (No. 61,135, 1.5.0) and 1 movable
Conductor as suggested by Miihlenbein (No. 62,391, 0.15.0) 2. 15.
Cl. 2676, 3887, 395G.

968 Voltaic Electricity. Section 6: Electro-magnetism and Electro-dynamics. No. 02391
62404. 1 : 10.
62 400. 1 : 10. 62403. 1 : 13.
62.391. Movable Conductor after Miihlenbein, cf. Fig u r e 62,390, suitable for placing in s. d.
the terminals of the commutator Xo. 61,135 0. 15. o
62.392. Wire Frame on Wood Board (Kolbe-Skellon, Introduction to Electricity, Part II, '
Fig. 96) for Miihlenbein's experiment, cf. F i g u r e 62,390 0. IT., o
62.393. Ampere's Stand, after Kolbe (Kolbe-Skellon, '

Introduction to Electricity, Part II,
Fig. 98) 1.15.0
For above:
62.394. Simple Solenoid \\illi pointer (Fig. 98 B) 0.12.0
62.395. Tenfold Solenoid 0. 14. o
62.396. Curled Solenoid (Fig. 101) o. 12. o

All solenoids have platinum points.
62.397. Fixed Wire Frame (Fig. 98 B 2)

on slider, with two adjustable current-direction
indicators 1. o.
62.398. Tenfold Wire Frame for placing in the -slider; can also be used for demonstrating
the multiplier 1. o. o
62,:5!9. Magnetic Needle (Fig. 110) with glass tube, on slider o. 12. o
62.400. Universal Stand, after Kolbe (Kolbe-Skellon, Introduction to Electricity, Part. II,
Figs. 98101, 110, 111, 137), Figure
(Ztschr. f. d. phys. u. chem. F/8, 1894/95,
p. 155) s. 0.
The following pertain to the apparatus:
(a) 'The Stand (Fig. 98 A or 110 A).
(b) Parts to enable it to be used as an Ampere stand (Figs. 98 101 ): the movable conductors of aluminium
with platinum points; all current conductors with adjustable current direction indicators.
(c) Parts for the model of a multiplier and a tangent galvanometer (Figs. 110 and 111).
(d) Parts for the sensitive galvanometer (Fig. 137), with astatic needle and copper damper, also
an insertion mirror; for showing thermo-electric currents (Fig. 135) and magnetic induction
(Figs. 138140, 148).
(e) 1 Zinc Protecting Box with two glass walls, for finer experiments with the mirror.
(f) 1 Box for storing the solenoids, needles, etc.
62.401. 1 Accurately Ground Mirror for No. 62,400 Extra o. 12. n
62.402. 1 Double Needle with 2 unidirected magnets for No. 62,400 Extra 0. s. u
62.403. Square Conductor for explaining Ampere's Rule, F i

g u r e, after Friedr. ('. (!. Miiller
(M. T. Fig. 180) 0. li. o
J2.lol. De la Rive's Floating Current, F g u re (M. P.

i 9' h
Edn. Ill, Fig. 602; (ian.-Uein.
Fig. 884), without glass vessel or magnet 0. S. I)
62,40."). Rotary Solenoid with Iron Stopper, Figure, after (Jotxc, tor demonstrating the action
of a magnetic field on the position of the solenoid \\liicli is traversed by the current 4. 0.0
62.406. Apparatus for demonstrating the Alternating Effect of Crossed Currents, after Fried r.
C. (i. Miiller, at the same time a model of a dynamometer (M. T. Fig. 215) .... .'{. 12.0
62.407. Apparatus after Buff, Figure, for the attraction of parallel unidirected and the
repulsion of parallel opposed currents (M. P. 9" Kdn. III. Figs. "()> and 707)
1
... 2. lo. o
Cl. 2673, 2078, 4155.

No. 6'.' 412. Interaction of Currents. 969
62407.
S. d.
62.408. Roget's Spiral for the Attraction of rectified parallel Currents, Figure 0. 16.
02.409. Apparatus after Garthe, Figure, for the action of crossed currents (M. P. 9 lh Edn. Ill,
Fig. 712) 1. 4.0
02.410. Electro-dynamic Double Pendulum, after Kolhe, Figure, for showing the mutual
attraction and repulsion of conductors and magnets (Ztschr. f. d. phys. u. chem. U. 23,
1910, p. 201) 6. 0.
This newly-designed apparatus is very certain in its action and requires a current of only -2 3 amps.
at 8 volts. A special advantage of the apparatus rests in the fact that one of the solenoids can be turned
li
through 180" so that the current flows in an inverse direction in relation to the other solenoid or the magnet,
without a commutator being necessary.
62.411. Barlow's Wheel, Figure (M. P. 9

th
Edn. III. Fig. 577; Gan.-Eein. Fig. 886) . 1. 0.
62.412.
- -
idem, different pattern, Figure (M. P. 9 lh
Edn., Figs. 574 576), with a
massive horse-shoe magnet which is set into motion 1. 10.
Cl. 4161, 2802, 2803, 6020,

2801, 2862, 2661.
970 Voltaic Electricity. Section 6: Electro-magnetism and Electro-dynamics. No. 62413
62 417. 1 : 4.
iii-'.li:;. Apparatus for the Rotation of a Movable Current about a Magnet, V i

g u i c (M.
P. 9 lb Edn. Ill, Fig. 579; Gan.-Man. Fig. 736; Gan.-Rein. Fig. 885) 1. 4.0
62,414. Apparatus for the Rotation of a Magnet about a Fixed Current, Figure (.M. I'.
9 th Edn. Ill, Fig. 583) 1. 4. o
i'.L'.H5. Apparatus for the Rotation of a Magnet about its own Axis under tlic Influence of a
Current, Figure (M. P. 9 th Edn. Ill, Fig. 587) 1. 4. (
Apparatus for the Rotation of a Current by the Action of another, F i <r u r e (M. r.
9 th Edn. Ill, Fig. 719; Gan.-Man. Fig. 748, Gan.-Rein. Fig. S78) 1. 4.
T. Apparatus for the Rotation: (1) of a Movable Current about a Magnet; (2) of a Magnet
about a fixed Current; (3) of a Magnet about its own Axis under the Influence of a Current;
(4) of a Current by the Action of another, Figure 3. 1L'. o
This apparatus is a combination of tin- four preceding apparatus.
Apparatus after Faraday, Figure, for the Rotation of a Movable Conductor, tra-
versed by a Current, about a Magnet (M. P. 9 lh Edn. Ill, Fig. 580) 2. 8.
<>nc of tin- poles (if vertical horse-shoe magnet (to the right of the illustration) is fitted with a
:i
wood bush having a mercury gutter into which a copper wire stirrup plunges. The mercury is connected
with the one connecting terminal and the copper stirrup with the other (both shown in illustration). The
other pole of the magnet (to the left) carries a zinc vessel in which is fitted a copper ring suspended on a
copper stirrup. As both stirrups are pivotted the first device is set into rotation when the current passes
through and the second when the zinc vessel is filled with dilute sulphuric acid.
CI. IMS, MM, MM. MM,

2667.
No. 624i5. Voltaic Electricity. Section 7: Induction Currents. 971
62 420. 1 : 9.
62418. 1:3. 62 419. 1 : 3.
62 422. 1 : -2. 62 423. 1 : 4. 62 424. 1 : 3.
s. d.
62.419. Apparatus after Faraday, simpler, Figure 1. 10.
A arranged to move in a hook, rotates about the pole of a magnet when traversed by
rigid wire,
the current, thus describing the outer surface of a cone. The current is conducted (1) by the hook-suspension,
(2) by a mercury gutter into which is plunged the free movable end of the wire.
62.420. Apparatus for the Electromagnetic Action on Flexible Conductors, (M. Figure
P. 9 th Edn. Ill, Fig. 582) 2. 0.
A very flexible copper rope, loosely guided upon the elongated conical core of an electromagnet,
winds itself spiral-form on the latter when traversed by a powerful current. If the current is reversed by
the commutator it unwinds itself and again winds itself up in the reserve direction.
112,421. -- idem, double preceding size 4. 10.0

(12,422. Apparatus after Weinhold, Figure (W. D. Fig. 539 [512]), for the rotation of liquid
conductors as showing the action of crossed currents; for the Horizontal Projection
Apparatus |
0. 12.
Section 7: Induction Currents.

62.423. Horse-shoe Magnet with Armature and Induction Coil, after Friedr. 0. G. Miillet (M.
* d.
T. Fig. 217), for proving the laws of induction <>. 12.
62.424. Model for explaining the Laws of Magnetic Induction for actuated conductors,
Figure (W. D. Fig. 556 [529]) 0. 3.
The apparatus
consists of three sheet iron strips soldered together at one end at right angles to
each other being tapered at the other end and painted in different colours; they are marked B, E. M
(Bewegungsrichtung des Leiters [Direction of Motion of the Conductor], Electromotive Force, Magnetic
Field).
(12.425. Automatic Induction Indicator after Pfaundler (M. P. 9 th Edn. Ill, Fig. 566) ... 0. 5.
01. 2668, 2669, 2670,

4U5, 4679, 2654.
972 Voltaic Electricity. Section 7: Induction Currents. No. 62 426 -
63427. 1:10.
62426. 1:7.
62 429. 1 : 8. 62 430. 1 : 10. 52064. 1:7.
62.426. Apparatus for Explaining the Existence of the Magnetic Induction Current and the
i s. d.
rule for its direction, Figure

(M. P. 9
th
Edn. Ill, Fig. 565); Electromagnet with in-
dication of lines of force and device for the presence of the induction current . . . 1. 12.
62.427. Simple Earth Inductor for Direct and Alternating Current, alter s/ymansky,
1. 10.0
The most suitable galvanometer to use for above is Szymansky's, No. 61,342, p. 883.
62.428. Coil for showing Induction by the Earth's Field after Weinhold (\V. I), p. 853 [791]) 0. 10.0
62.429. Earth Inductor after Friedr. ('. (1. Miiller, F i

g u r <
(M. T. Fig. 220), with 200 turns
and a winding surface of 200 sq. cm 3. 10.
(M. P. 9 Edn. Ill, Fig. 644), with round

Figure th
62.430. Earth Inductor after Palmieri,
frame 300 mm
diameter, with 100 turns of 1 mm
thick wire, with commutator and slip
rings for taking off D. C. and A. C. and with device for rotating the winding frame hori-
x.ontally and vertically 3. 0.
52.064. Earth Inductor, F i g u re, \\ith commutator and slip rings for taking off 1). C. and
A. C., for the Whirling Table (Frick, phys. Techn. II, 1, Fig. 1118) 1. 16.
52,063.
-- idem, for taking off I). C. only 1. 13.
62.433. Iron Bar, 60 cm long, with copper wire winding (.M. P. 9

th
Edn. Ill, Fig. (554). for
showing that an induction current occurs when a bar magnet is passed along the winding 0. 7.
62.434. Induction Coil F g u re, fixed horizontally on a stand, with a powerful bar magnet,
i
for showing the presence of an induction current when the magnet is introduced into
the coil 0. IS.
<1. 2655, 2660,

4122,6007, MM.
No. 62 442. Earth Inductors, Induction Machines. 973
62 434. 1 : 6. 63 435. 1 : 10.
62 440. 1 : 4.
62 436. 1 : 6. 62442. 1 : 16.
62,435. Apparatus after Faraday, for showing the induction currents present when an electro-
. d.
magnet is magnetized, F i g u r e (Kolbe-Skellon, Introduction to Electricity, Part II,

Fig. 142), with two handles as electrodes 1. 8.
Magnetic Induction Machine after Stohrer, Figure (M. P. 9 Edn. Ill, Fig. 613),
lh
;_>. -I'M.
for demonstrating induction phenomena, water-decomposition, incandescent light, arc
light and electro-magnetism, with commutator and device to enable the two armature
coils to be put in parallel or series 10. 0.
Accessories for No. 62,436:

62,437. 2 Grips with connecting leads , . . . 0. 3.
62,212. U-shaped Glass Tuhe with platinum electrodes for electrolysis of water 0. 8.
t>2,43X. Glow Lamp Stand with Edison Socket and Glow Lamp 0. 6.
<>2,43M. Stand for clamping thin Carbon Rods, for arc light 0. 8.
t>2.L'f>!). Horse-shoe Electromagnet with suspension ring and armature 0. 8.
For Magnetos: see Nos. 62,35862,361, p. 961.
<2,44o. Magneto-electric Induction Apparatus, Figure 0.
62,442. Apparatus for Experiments on Induction, after Kolbe, (Kolbe-Skellon,Figure

Introduction to Electricity, Part II, Fig. 143) consisting of a 350 long electromagnet mm
on wood rod, with 100 turns copper wire, and a second wire coil on base with 100 turns,
;il so two wooden gallows for same for screwing on to the Lecture Table 2. 8.
( 'I. 2679, 2680, 5539,

2681.5762.
974 Voltaic Electricity. Section 7; Induction Currents. No. 62444
62 444. 1 : 5.
62461. 1:4. 62 448. I : .->. 62 462. 1 : 4.
62.444. 2 Induction Coils after Weinhold, Figure

(W. D. Fig. 555 [528]), for the funda- s. d.
mental experiments on induction; can also be placed crosswise over each other; with
bar magnet 120 long and 12 mm
thick mm 0. 16.0
- - d e m,
62.445. i
larger pattern 1. 0.
io.oo7. Cylindrical Bar Magnet for above, 150 mm long, 10 mm thick 0. "2. I)
62.447. Induction Coil (M. P. 9

th
Edn. Ill, Fig. 732), with two different coloured wires wound
in parallel 0. 10.0
02.448. 2 Wire Coils (M. P. 9"' Edn. Ill, Fig. 729, Gan.-Man. Fig. 773; Gan.-Rein. Fig. 966),
for inserting one in the other, with bundle of iron wires as core, Figure . . . . 0. IS. (I
62.449. Cylindrical Bar Magnet for above |

0. 2.
62.450. Induction Coil with Interrupting Wheel, Figure |

1. Hi. I)
The consists of a largo wood reel wound with thin copper wire. The following fit into
:i|>|iar;itns
this coil: ] solid soft iron core with suspension hook which can be screwed out; I iron wire bundle for
self-induction experiments; and 1 coil for mutual induction, wound with thick copper wire, into which
a thinner iron wire bundle fits.
In addition an interrupting wheel is supplied for physiological effeci-
02,15 i. Cylindrical Bar Magnet for above 0. 2.
62,437. 2 Handles for above with flexible leads 0. ,S. o
62,452. Interrupting Wheel alone, cf. Figure 62,450, to the right 0. 12.
62.461. 2 Wire Coils for inserting one in the other, F g n re. the inner one wound with i
thick wire, with bundle of soft iron wire and with an interrupting wheel; the external
coil wound with fine wire; on base 1. 10.
62.462. --idem, larger, Figure, mounted on wood board, with interrupting wlierl,
iron wire bundle, bar magnet, and two handles for physiological purposes 2. 0.
62.463. 2 Induction Coils, F g

i uwith iron bar, bar magnet, and membrane
r e, .... .">. 5.
The primary wire coil, the magnet and the membrane are mounted on a carriage frame with rollers
so that they be conveniently introduced into the secondary coil.
may
The apparatus can be used at the same lime for explaining the telephone.
( '1.6027, 2805,
2806. 2807.
No. 62469. Mutual Induction. 975
62 463. 1 : 6.
62 467. 1 : 3.
62 466. 1 : 4.
62 469. 1 : 6.
<i-.n;4. Magnetic Hammer Break lh

(M. P. 9 Edn. Ill, Fig. 735), for automatically interrupting S. d.
a current 0. 16.
;
th
<>2,4<>5. Circuit-breaking Device after Buff (M. P. 9 Edn. Ill, Figs. 750752) !
2. 0.0
>2.4t>>. Induction Coils with Magnetic Hammer Break, Figure, for demonstrating; the
fundamental phenomena of induction and of the extra current . 2. 8.0
(ii',407. Slide Induction Apparatus with Magnetic Hammer Break, Figure, for physiological
purposes 1. 10.
t)L'.4(i8. Apparatus, after Branly, for Induction Currents of the higher order 17.10.0
Ifthe primary current of a spark coil connected with the apparatus is opened, a current is induced
in the secondary winding and traverses a spark gap and one of two spirals wound on the same ebonite
cylinder. An induced current is consequently produced in the second winding on opening and closing,
and ignites a gas jet and flows through a spark gap and a second inductor, as a primary current. Use
is made of four spark
gaps, five gas burners and three ebonite cylinders having two windings each.
62,469. Slide Induction Apparatus, after Dubois-Beymond, for all fundamental experiments
on induction, Figure, with one iron core, one bar magnet and two handles . . 3. 10.
Cl. 2808. 2811 5740,

5128.
976 Voltaic Electricity. Section 7 : Induction Currents. Xd. 62470-
62470. 1:3. 62 471. 1 = 5.
62 478. 1 : fi. 62480. 1:8.
62.470. Apparatus for showing the Extra Current, after Dr. Geschbser, F i
g u r e (Ztschr. t
f. (1. phys. u. chem. U. 11, 1898, p. 83) 1. 1. tl
62.471. Apparatus for demonstrating the Extra Current, Figure (M. P. 9"> Edn. III.
Fig. 742) 1. 12.
62.472. Experimental Arrangement for proving Self-induction, after Kann. with a glow lamp
connected in parallel to a coil of high self-induction (Ztschr. f. d. phys. u. chein. U. 16,
1903, p. 284) 1. 10. (i
Standards of Self-Induction after \Vien, Figure, constructed in accordance with the data
of the Physikalisch-Teehnische KVichsanstalt (E. T. Z. 1903, p. 504).
Henries 0,0001 0,001 0,01 0,1 0,5 1
H 7 s s
Value cm
:> 1
10 10 10 ln 5 10 K)'
List Xo. 62,473 62,474 62,475 62,476 62,477 62,478
1.5.0 1.5.0 1.12.0 2.5.0 3.10.0 4.10.0
These standards arc wound on iron-free reels of serpentine stout- aud fixed so as to allow of no play.
By obviating all metal parts with the except ion of the small terminals and by sub-dividing the winding
the occurrence of eddy currents is prevented.
The standards arc calibrated to within U.IMi-J of their value and can be, provided with certificates
from the I'hysikalisch-Technische Rcichsanstall on payment of the necessary fees.
02, 479. Induction Coil for calibrating Ballistic Galvanometers, consisting of a long coil thr
field density of which can he calculated from the dimensions, and a short coil slipped
over the former 1. 5.
02,4X0. Apparatus after I'liicker and Fessel, Figure, for causing an induction current
by rotating two magnets (M. I'. 9"' Fdn. III. Fig. 58 4) 1. 10. o
52,062. -- idem, for the Whirling Table. Figure on p. 2SS 1. 8.0

62,4-si. Apparatus for Unipolar Induction, alter Weber (M. I>. 9 th Edn. Ill, Figs. 590 and :.'.!) 5. o. o
62,4X2. Apparatus for showing Damping by Induction, Figure (W. I). Fig. r>:>7 |5.".o|),
o
copper stirrup with magnetic needle swinging therein 0. is.
ti-.is.',.Apparatus for showing Damping by Induction, after Weinhold, Figure (W. l>.
Fig. 558 [531 j), for the horizontal Projection Apparatus <>. is. o
02.4X4. v. Waltenhofen's Pendulum for showing the Damping Effect of Induction, F i

g u r e
(W. I). Fig. 559 |532|) 2.10.0

OL inis, 3708.
J8I9. 267-2.
No. 62 489. Sell-Induction. Damping Action of Induction. 977
62 482. 1 : 4. 62 483. 1 : 4. 62 484. 1 : 9. 62 485. 1 : 4.
MAX KOHL, CHEMNITZ
62 486. 1 : 8. 62 489. 1 : 4.
62,485. Accessories for Dia- and Paramagnetic Experiments, Figure, consisting of: 2 pole d.
pieces with conical ends, 1 stand for suspending the dia- and paramagnetic bodies, a glass
tube for holding off air currents, and 3 small bars of antimony, bismuth and glass . 1. 0.
62,486. Apparatus for showing the Damping Action of Induction, Figure 5. 0.0
A suspended in a glass box having levelling screws. On the bottom of the box four
bar magnet is
copper plates of different thickness and a brass plate of the same size can be laid in such manner that the
distance from the magnet is always equal. The variation of damping is very striking.
52,059. Apparatus for Arago's Magnetism of Rotation, Figure on p. 287 (W. D. Fig. 560
[533]), for the Whirling Table 1. 4.0
An
adjustable glass plate with magnetic needle is arranged above a large rotating copper disc. On
rotating the disc the needle is deflected in the direction of rotation, it being itself finally set in rotation.
:>L'.iKiO. Rotating Magnet with rotary Copper Disc placed above it, Figure, on p. 287, for
the Whirling Table 1. 0.0
When the magnet is rotated the copper disc rotates in the same direction and almost as quickly
as the magnet (as the armature in an asynchronous three-phase motor).
62,489. Apparatus for Generating Eddy Currents in a Copper Disc rotating between the Poles
th
of an Electromagnet, Figure (cf. M. P. 9 Edn. Ill, Fig. 691), with stand . . . 3. 0.0
52,061. --idem, for the Whirling Table, Figure on p. 288 1. 8.0

The copper disc is rotated at a moderate speed without allowing the current at first to pass into
.the electromagnet. As soon as the current is closed it is noticed that a considerably larger expenditure
o-*. force is necessary to rotate the disc rapidly.
Cl. 2688, 2691, 6026, 2690,
Regarding above, cf. also Accessories to
2692, 2695. go
Electromagnets Nos. 62,28162,313.
978 Voltaic Electricity. Section 7 : Induction Currents.
62513. 1:7.
62 533. 1 : 10.
Induction Coils and Accessories.

Our output up to the present amounts to over 3500.
of Induction Coils
Our Induction
Coils, which are constructed from an experience extending over many years,
and which are unsurpassed in efficiency by any other make, are built of the best materials, which are
submitted to the most stringent tests before being worked up. The reels are made of stout tubes with
end discs and ebonite jacket and, with the exception of the very small apparatus, can be detached
from the stands. The method of constructing the secondary coils ensures that each individual winding
is thoroughly well insulated.
In the case of sizes 7 15 a, types A, B, C, D and E, the Primary Coils arc enclosed in a separate
ebonite tube from which they can be taken out.
We supply the Induction Coils either with a base to enable them to be placed on a table, or,
if desired, with Wall Bracket, the prices of both patterns being the same.
For working with Wehnelt "Interrupters the coils are fitted with controllable self-induction
(thus varying also the ratio of transformation and the secondary voltage attained). This regulation
can either be carried out by Plugs or with a Pachytrope (Multiple Commutator).
We supply our Induction Coils in the following patterns:
I. Induction Coils with Normal Winding.

(l) For Wehnelt Interrupters, with Condenser, viz:
(a) Type A, with Multiple Commutator for varying the self induction of the primary coil. 112.533.
ct. I'ii:
(b) Type B, with Plug Commutation for varying the self induct ion of the primary coil, cf. Fig. 62,513.
(-') For Wehnelt and Motor Interrupter, with Condenser:
(a) Type C, with Multiple Commutator for varying the sell-induction ot the primary coil.
cf. Fig. ti-J.fi.'iN
~
ef. Fig. 1)2. 1S
(b) Type I), with I'lug Commutation for varying the sr]t' induct ion of the primary coil,
-
C\. 2831. 2835.

Induction Coils. 979
62 571. 1 : 10.
(3) For Motor Interrupters, with Condenser, without commutation or Primary Coil. Type E, cf. Fig. 62,571.
(4) With Mercury Interrupter, with Condenser and Ruhmkorff Commutator. Type F, cf. Fig. 62,613.
(5) With Platinum Interrupter, with Condenser and Ruhmkorff Commutator. Type G, cf. Fig. 62,624.
(6) With Mercury and Platinum Interrupters, with Condenser and Ruhmkorff Commutator. Type H, cf. Fig. 62,636.
(7) With Platinum Interrupter of special construction having very thick platinum contacts, with Condenser, Ruhmkorff
Commutator and Spark Gap for Wireless Telegraphy and Rontgen Ray purposes. Coil not detachable. In carrying
case. Type J, cf. Fig. 62,641.
(8) With Platinum Interrupter, as before, and with Mercury Interrupter; with Condenser, Ruhmkorff Commutator and Spark
Gap for Wireless Telegraphy and Rontgen Ray purposes. Coil not detachable. In carrying case. Type K.
(9) With Platinum Interrupter: for Glow Lamp Factories; with Condenser, Ruhmkorff Commutator and Glow Lamp Holder.
Type L, cf. Figs. 62,624 and 62,624 a.
II. Rontgen Ray Induction Coils,

with low -resistance Secondary Winding, specially for Rapid Radiographic Work,
and for Charging Condensers.
(MM For Wehnelt Interrupters, without Condenser, viz:
(a) Type R J A, with Multiple Commutator for varying the self-induction of the primary coil.
(b) Type R .1 B. with Plug Commutation for varying the self-induction of the primary coil.
(11) For Wehnelt and Motor Interrupters, with Condenser:
(a) Type R J C, with Multiple Commutator for varying the self-induction of the primary coil.
(b) Type R JD, with Plug Commutation for varying the self-induction of the primary coil.
(12) For Motor Interrupters, with Condenser, without Commutation of Primary Coil Type R J E.
The induction coils with Wehnelt and Motor Interrupters are worked as a rule with Direct Current from heavy current
mains. The most useful voltage for hoth types of interrupter and for coils having a spark length of over 300 mm, is 110.
Induction coils of below 300 mm
spark-length work better with a pressure of 65 volts when Wehnelt Interrupters are used.
The Motor Interrupter yields good results with the considerably lower voltage, and can also be worked with cells or accumu-
lators. The minimum voltages necessary for the same are the following; which also hold good for mercury and platinum
interrupters:
I'p to 200 mm spark-length 12 volts
350 16
400 24
450 32
500 48
600 64
The current consumption for the maximum spark-length is, for Motor Interrupters, about 3 5 amps.: for Welmelt
Interrupters with spark -lengths to 300 mm, approx. 30 amps.; above 300, approx. 20 25 amps.
With pressures above 130 volts shunt resistances are absolutely necessary, and when possible they should be used
when employing Motor Interrupters.
When ordering, kindly give particulars as to kind of current and voltage.
A test certificate and directions for using are appended to each Induction Coil.
If desired, andat an extra cost of 5 per cent, we fit all our Induction Coils with suitable mica insulation for hot coun-
tries; this prevents deformation taking place in the insulating material.
CJ. 28S7.
62*
980 Voltaic Electricity. Section 7: Induction Currents. No. 62 491
62 636. 1 : 6. 62 607. 1 : 8.
Induction Coils without Interrupter, Type A, B, C, D and E, on Table Stand.
Spark-
length
with
Wehnelt -
Inter-
rupter
No. 61' 649. Induction Coils. 981
62 624. 1 : 8.
62 624 a. 1:6. 62649. 1:8.
62.607. Pachytrope (Multiple Commutator) with quintuple connections, for sizes 11 15 a, Figure, with s. d.
plugs and leads 7. 0.
62.608. idem, with fourfold connections, for sizes 810 6. 0.

The Pachytrope with quadruple connections is intended for subsequently fitting to Induction Coils
sizes 8 10, and the^Pachytrope with sextuple connections for Induction Coils sizes 11 15 a.
Induction Coils with Mercury and Platinum Interrupters, with normal winding, type F, G, H, I, K and L.
Spark-length
982 Voltaic Electricity. Section 7: Induction Currents. No. 62650
62 661. 1 : 4. 62 666. l : r>.
Small Induction Coils, simple pattern, Figure, with Platinum Interrupter, without Commit- * (1
tator, on polished mahogany box, coil of wood, not detachable

List No. 62,652 62,653 62,654 62,655 62,656
Spark -length 6 mm 10 15 20 30
0.10.0 0.15.0 1.13.0 2.0.0 2.10.0
i d e m, with simple Commutator.
List No. 62,657 62,658 62,659 62,660
Spark-length mm 12 15 20 30
1.0.0 1.18.0 2.5.0 2.15.0
62,661. Induction Coil, for demonstration purposes, can be taken to pieces, Figure, with
adjustable secondary coil and Condenser which can he drawn out; spark-length 40 mm 6. u.
Carrying Cases for Induction Coils.

List No. 62,662 62,663 62,664 62,665
For Size 0000 15 68 911
1.5.0 1.10.0 1.15.0 2.10.0
Interrupters.
(a) Electrolytic Interrupters for Direct and Alternating Current.
The Electrolytic Interrupters are charged with dilute sulphuric acid (if 1,06 to 1.12 sp. gr.
i'nr prices of Wehnelt Interrupters arc liable to alteration without notice on account of the fluc-
tuations in the price of platinum.
62.666. Wehnelt Interrupter for Direct Current with platinum pin 1 1 nun thick, with large
glass vessel, Figure, with conical porcelain tube ............... 3. Id. u
02.667. Wehnelt Interrupter for Direct Current, with 3 platinum pins l mm thick, with large
glass vessel .................................. 6.16.0
62.668. Wehnelt Interrupter with platinum pin 3

1 mm
thick, for working with Alternating
Current, ef. Figure
62,666 ..........................
but this cannot l>e recommended as the platinum
:. Id.
It is possible to work with Alternat mi; Current
pin is rapidly consumed and regulation difficult.

The primary coil also must lie specially tuned".
5345, 2850.
No. 62673. Small Induction Coils. Interrupters. 983
^s^^m-
62 670. 1 : 4.
62 672. 1 : 4. 62 673. 1 : 5.
(b) Motor Mercury Interrupters for Direct Current. a. d.
We supply the following Motor Interrupters for pressures of 16, 24, 32, 65, 110,
150 and 220 Volts and would ask that the voltage desired be stated when ordering. If
this is not given we supply the Interrupters for 110 volts.
The price of all Interrupters is exclusive of the mercury necessary for charging.
62.669. Motor Mercury Interrupter (Kohl's pattern) with immersion contact, without tachometer 7. 15.
62.670.
-- idem, with tachometer, Figure ; 11.15.0
62.671.
- -
idem, without switch or commutator 7. o.'O
62.672. Motor Mercury Interrupter with Immersion Contact (Kohl's design), light pattern,
Figure 5. 0.
62.673. Centrifugal Mercury Interrupter, F i g u r e, including mercury charge, for Direct

Current pressures of 32, 110, or 220 volts 9. 0.0
In this Interrupter the mercury is successively centrifvigated during rotation, thus preventing
enmlsionising. In this manner a regular, certain contact is assured as well as great certainty in action,
and constant cleaning and recharging, necessary with other mercury interrupters, is but seldom required.
The number of interruptions can be regulated within wide limits.
-
< l. 2856,
2S62, 845?.
62 674. 1 : 6. 62 676. 1 : 4.
62 679. 1 : 5. 62 681. 1 : 5. 62 682. 1 : 6.
s. d.
62.674. Mercury Jet Interrupter, without tachometer, Figure (cf. Gan.-Eein. Fig. 1030) 9. 0.0
Charge: 8000 g mercury and 1500 g petroleum.
- - with tachometer
62.675. idem, 14. 0.
62.676. Turbine Interrupter, without tachometer, Figure 10. 0.0

The Interrupter is filled with 2000 g (150 ccm) mercury and 1250g (1400 com) alcohol of at Vast 8,3 ".
62.677. idem, with tachometer . . .- 15. 0.0

.
62.678. Contact Ring for the Turbine Interrupter with different number of hollows .... 0.15.0
62.679. Turbine Interrupter, simpler, Figure 6. 0.0

Charge 1250 g mercury and 1000 g (1120 ccm) alcohol.
62.680. Regulating Resistance for the Motors of the Direct Current Interrupters . . . 1. 0.0
(c) Motor Mercury Interrupters for Alternating Current.
62.681. Turbine Interrupter for Alternating Current, Figure, with synchronism indicator;
also suitiihlr for charging accumulators 16. 111.
The exact frequency and volta^r should be given when ordering.
We have a special price list dealing with Switchboards and Resistances for working Induction
Coils, especially those used for X-Ray purposes; we shall be pleased to send this on appli-
cation.
(I. 2857, 28S8,
2858, 2863, 2873.
No. 62 702. Interrupter, Sparking Pillars, X-Ray Tubes. 985
62 699. 1 : 5.
62 683. 1 : 8.
62 691. 1 : 4. 62 685. 1 : 5.
s. d.
Sparking Pillars and X-Ray Tubes.
62.682. Sparking Pillars for spark-lengths to 200 mm, Figure 1. 0.0
02.683.
- -
idem, for spark-lengths to 450 mm, Figure. . 1.16.0
62.684.
- - i (I e m, for spark-lengths to 1000 mm 2.10.0
62,685. Sparking Pillars, Figure, with joints so as to be able to set the spark gap hori-
zontally and vertically, for metallic spectra, for spark-lengths to 450 mm 2.14.0
X-Ray Tubes, for small load, for working in connection with Induction Coils having platinum,
mercury and motor interrupters, also with influence machines, Figure, with osmose
regeneration.
List No. 62,687 62,688 62,689 62,690 62,691 62,692 62,693 62,694 62,695
Spark-length to mm 100 120 200 300 400 500 600 700 800
0.14.00.17.00.18.61.0.0 1.2.3 1.4.6 1.6.6 1.8.61.10.6
X-Ray Tubes, with massive anticathode, for heavy loads and for working with Wehnelt or
Motor Interrupters, with regeneration by osmose, Figure
List No. 62,697 62,698 62,699 62,700 62,701 62,702
Spark-length to 200 300 400 500 600 700 mm
1.10.0 1.14.6 1.19.0 2.3.6 2.8.0 2. 13. 6
As the vacuum of the X-Ray Tubes intensifies by use
they must be fitted with a so-called regene-
rating device has to be prolonged to any extent.
if the life
The tubes have osmose regeneration; this is based on the property possessed by palladium to be
permeable to hydrogen when in the incandescent state. The device consists of a small palladium tube
fused in. When the vacuum in the tube has become too high, i. e. when the tube has become hard, the
end of the small palladium tube is made red-hot for a few seconds by means of a spirit lamp, without
the flame being allowed to come into contact with the fused part of the glass. Hydrogen is diffused into
the tube from the core of the flame through the incandescent palladium tube and the vacuum is
lowered, i. e. the tube is rendered softer. The tube should be allowed to cool thoroughly before being
used again.
X-Ray Tubes for Medical Purposes supplied in all patterns - - see special list.
Cl. 5409, 12 1-,
2882, 2874.
986 Voltaic Electricity. Section 7: Induction Currents. Xo. 62 704
51 110. 1 : 8. 62 705. 1 : 6. 62 721. 1 : 8.
51,110. Simple Wood Stand for holding X-Ray Tubes, Figure. Price without Tube
illustrated 0.
62.704. Milliammeter for High Tension Currents; base-diameter approximately 120 mm;
for measuring the current flowing into the X-Eay Tube; Weston type instrument with
range to 5 milliamperes, on serpentine base 3. Hi. o
62.705.
- - i d e m, with two ranges (to 5 and 50 milliamperes), Figure 4. :>.
Fluorescent Screens coated with Barium platinocyanide, excellent in action, in wood frame.
The Barium platinocyanide Screens are covered with a slab of stout lead-baryta glass
which protects the observer from the action of the Bontgen Bays but allows the image
to appear without any change.
List No. 62,706 62,707 62,708 62,709 62,710 62,711
Size cm 9x12 13x18 18x24 24x30 30x40 40x50
0.17.0 1.10.0 2.7.0 3.13.0 6.0.0 9.13.0
provided with handles and protecting sheets, the price of each screen is increased by
If 0. s. o.
The prices of all Fluorescent Screens are liable to change without notice owing to the fluctuations
in the price of platinum.
Fluorescent Screens coated with Barium platinocyanide, very efficient, in wood frame, without
protective lead glass.
List No. 62,712 62,713 62,714 62,715 62,716 62,717
Size cm 9x12 13x18 18x24 24x30 30x40 40x50
0.14.0 1.6.0 2.2.0 3.6.0 5.11.0 9.0.0
Cryptoscopes, with Fluorescent Screen which can be withdrawn.

Figure,
List No. 62,718 62,719 62,720 62,721 62,722 62,723
Size of Fluorescent Screen cm ... 9x12 13x18 18x24 24x30 30X40 40x50
(a) Without Lead Shielding Glass . 1. 4. 1. 17. 2. 15. 4. 1. 6. 16. 10. 5.
(b) With Lead Shielding Glass ... 1. 7. 2. 1. 3. 0. 4. 8. 7. 5. 10. 18.
-
idem, without Fluorescent Screen
List No. 62,724 62,725 62,726 62,727 62,728 62,729
For Fluorescent Screen cm 9 X 12 13 X 18 18 X 24 24 x 30 30 X 40 40 > .")()
0. 10. 0. 11. 0. 13. 0. 16. 1. 5. 1. 10.

By using the Cryptoscopes radioscopy can be carried on without darkening the room
62.730. Cardboard with Strips of different Metals, for checking the penetrative power of X-Rays 0. in. o
62.731. Apparatus for Demonstrating that the Air is Ionised by X-Rays. Price without X-Ray
tube or electrometer, but with bellows 2. 0.
The apparatus consists of a wood box (lined with sheet lead) which encloses one of the X-Ray tubes
NIIS. (32,687 62,691 or 62,697 62,699. The \-Kays issue out of an aperture placed opposite the anti-
cathode and discharge an electroscope opposite. If the electrometer is set up somewhat laterally ii ran
also be discharged if the ionised air is deflected on to it by the bellows.
A suitable electrometer to use is liraun's. No. (iO.21 1 60,215, p. Sil.'t. or Kolhc's No. till. 1!M>. p. 8M:>.
It is advisable, however, to place a plate of large surface on the electrometer.
(iL'.732. Plate for plariiig on the Kleet rometer (

Bnmn's or Kolbe's) 0. 2.
See complete special list for further Accessories for Rontgen CL i .

5635, 288.
Ray Investigations. This is sent on receipt of a card.
N.I. Ii2737. Dynamos. Explanatory Models. 987
62 734. 1 : 7. 62 735. 1 : 0.
62733. 1:8. 62737. 1:12.
Dynamos.
Explanatory Models.
62.733. Apparatus for Explaining the Magnetic Induction of Magneto Electric Machines and
s. d.
for explaining the Pacinotti and Gramme Rings, Figure. Stand with two fixed wire
th
coils and two rotary semi-circular magnets (M. P. 9 Edn. Ill, Fig. 649) 2. 8.
62.734. Model of a Pacinotti-Gramme Machine, after Pfaundler, Figure 5. 0.
The Model can be worked, can be used as a series or shunt motor, and, used as a dynamo, gives a
current which can be shown by a vertical galvanometer. If the magnets are excited by a separate source
of electricity the current generated is strong enough to work a bell.
62.735. Model of a Pacinotti-Gramme Machine, Figure (W. D. Fig. 565 [538]), with ring
armature arranged very comprehensively. The machine can be used to generate a current,
also to rotate under the influence of a current 2. 15.
52,067. Modelof a Pacinotti-Gramme Machine, after Pfaundler, F i g u r e, on p. 288 (M.

P. !"' Kdn. Ill, Figs. 659 and 660), for the Whirling Table, with device tor demonstrating
the lines of force 6. 10.
The following pertain to the apparatus: an iron armature, wound; an iron armature, unwound;
a wood armature with winding and a frame stretched with paper for demonstrating the lines of force.
62,737. Model of a Magneto Electric Machine, Figure, after Friedr. C. G. Miiller (M. T.
Figs. 227 230), with one each wound Siemens H
Armature, ring armature, drum armature
and an unwound drum- armature . 4. 4.0
Cl. 2691). f.Hii,
2697, 4511.
988 Dynamos. Explanatory Models. No. 62 738
62738. 1:10.
62.738. Magnet Stand and Movable Armature Coil, Figure, for explaining the dynamo- s. d.
electric induction in dynamos, after Gb'tze, with a wood rail, and an iron rail to serve as
track or core of the movable coil 9. 0.0
52,066. Apparatus for explaining the Magneto-electric and Dynamo-electric Principle, for the
Whirling Table, Figures A
and B on p. 288 3. 0.0
The apparatus consists of: 1 Pacinotti Ring, 1 Magnet, 1 Electromagnet, 1 Brush Conductor.
--idem, without magnet, as effective model of a dynamo, for placing on the

62.739.
Whirling Table 2. 5.0
62.741. Model Dynamo; can also be used as a Direct Current Motor,

of a Direct Current
Figure, machine and the most usual methods of connection and
for explaining the
adaptations with a ring armature and a drum armature which can be easily interchanged
;
9. 0.0
The Machine can be used either as a series or shunt dynamo; when connected in shunt it can also
be worked with separate excitation. In addition it works as a series or shunt motor and it is possible to
demonstrate with it the action of the shunt regulator. Given in are one ring armature and one drum arma-
ture, which can be easily interchanged. All windings are composed of as few turns as possible so as to
increase the comprehensiveness; the individual armature coils are wound alternately with two different
coloured wires to facilitate the explanation of the machine. The current obtained when driven by hand
can be shown by a galvanometer and a small glow lamp. Used as a motor the machine actuates the fly-
wheel together with the handle. If the machine is worked more rapidly by means of a driving frame its
output is correspondingly larger.
62.742. Sliding Resistance, for use as Shunt Eegulator 1. 0. o
Apparatus after Grimsehl for explaining the Dynamo (Ztsohr. f. d. phys. u. diem. U. 6, 1893,
p. 240), comprising:
62,743. Electromagnet with horizontal cores and iron frame (Fig. 1) 7. 0.0
62,744. Current Conductor for above, showing the presence of the electric current when
the lines of force intersect, for rectilinear motion (Fig.2) 0. 10.
62.745. idem, for rotary motion (Fig. 3) , 0. 8.0
62.746.
-- idem, rectangular form, without commutator (Fig. 4) 0.11.0
d rectangular form, with commutator (Fig. 6) 0.15.0

- - e
62.747. i m, . ,
62.748.
-- idem, with a number of wire turns (Fig. 7) . . . . , 0. 19.
62.749. Siemens H-Armature (Fig. 8) , 0.19.0
CI. 413fl
No. 62 756. Dynamos. Explanatory Models. 989
62 741. 1 : 5. 62 753. 1 : 4.
62 754. 1 : 12. 62 755 A. l ; in. 62 755 B. 1:20.
62.750. Iron Ring with a group of wire turns and commutator for explaining the s. d.
Gramme Eing 1.12.0
62.751. Gramme Ring with 12 groups of turns and commutator in 12 parts .... 2. 2.
62.752. 3 Drawings for explaining Nos. 62,750 and 62,751, on cardboard 0. 3.
62.753. Model of a Dynamo with Gramme Ring, Figure, constructed of wood and metal;
cannot be worked; for explaining construction only 1.10.0
62.754. Apparatus for explaining the Direct Current Machine having Ring Armature, after
Pfaundler, Figure, very large model of wood and pasteboard; cannot be worked 2. 0.0
62.755. Apparatus for Demonstrating the Passage of the Current in the Gramme Ring when
Direct, Alternating or Three-phase Current is taken off; after Hammerl, Figures A
and B (Ztschr. f. d. phys. u. chein. V. 9, p. 33), with 10 discs; cannot be worked . 4. 0.
The apparatus consists of a firmly fixed round glass disc having an axis in the centre for a movable
glass disc of the same size. Pasteboard discs with a drawing ot the Gramme Ring can be placed on the
latter disc corresponding to the various cases. The windings and commutator segments are cut out and
transparent coloured silk paper is pasted on behind, so that by using a black pasteboard disc cut out in lines,
;md covering the fixed glass disc, luminous points occur (by illuminating by means of a powerful source
of light set up behind the apparatus) which are displaced when the movable disc is rotated and in this
manner render visible the course of the currents.
Fig. Ashows the apparatus set up with a pasteboard disc, while the remaining 9 pasteboard discs
are illustrated in Fig. B.
Cl. 3817, 2704,
2795, 2706, 2707

990 Dynamos. Explanatory Models. No. 62 756
62756B. 1:11.
62 756 A. 1:11.
62757. 1:10.
62758. 1:8. 62 759. 1 : 4.
62.756. 4 Mechanically Movable Plates for illustrating Dynamos and Motors, after ( .
Kreyer, s. d.
Figures A and B 1.10.0

The following demonstrations can be carried out with these plates: (1) Magneto -electric Machine
with double T armature (Alternating Current); (2) idem (Direct Current); (3) Dynamo with double T arma-
ture; (4) Dynamo with Gramme Ring; (5) Electric Motor (Direct Current) with double T armature;
(6) Electric Motor with Gramme Ring; (7) Alternating Current Machine; (8) Alternating Current .Motor
(three-phase motor).
To Plate I (double plate), which is suitable for demonstrations Nos. 1 6, the following accessories ,
are supplied: 1 folding disc for dynamo, 1 ditto for motor, 2 disc* for Gramme Ring, 1 coloured disc for
the magnetic field, 1 commutator in two parts, and 1 ditto in 8 parts, 2 brushes. 4 connerting loads. Plate
II is used for Demonstration No. 7, Plate III for Demonstration No. 8.
62.757. Model Of a Gramme Ring, F i g u r (W. D. p. 883 [818]), of pasteboard, 50 cm dia-

meter, divided, the path of current and the poles are given 0.16.0
In the illustration one half of the ring is turned round: the poles of -iiiiil.il name go together.
62.758. Model of a Schuckert Flat Ring, with winding, Figure, with ring, commutator.
and axis of wood 1. u.
i-,7.~)!(. Model of a Siemens Armature, with winding, of wood. Figure 1. o.
til'. 7<;o. Model of a Gramme Ring Armature, same construction .... 1. 0.0
'l. '2708, 2708a, '.'709.
2711, 3818.
Dynamos. Explanatory Models. 991
62761. 1:4. 62 762. 1 : 3.
'
62 762 a. 1:9. 62 763. 1 : 8. 62 766 a. 1:4.
s. d.
til'. 7(11. Model of a Drum Armature, same construction as preceding, Figure 1. 0.0
62,762. Model of a Drum Armature, after Weinhold, Figure (W. D. Fig. 572 [545]), very
comprehensive, for demonstrating the mode of winding and current action, rotating,
and generating current, with magnet 3. 10.
62, 762 a. Model of a Drum Armature, after Weinhold, of pasteboard, Figure (W. D.
p. 889 [827]) 1. 5.0
62.763. Iron Ring for making a Ring Armature Winding, Figure, after Friedr. C. G. Miiller
(M. T. Fig. 226) 0. 1.8
- - d e with winding
62.764. i
in, 0. 4.0
62.765. Winding Formers, after Friedr. C. G. Miiller, for making a drum armature winding
(M. T. Fig. 229), of cardboard. Price per 10 0. 3.0
- - armature winding (M. T. Fig. 225).

62.766. idem, for ring Price per 10 0. 3.0
>2. 766 a. Closed Iron Ring with 2 sliding coils, after Friedr. C. G. Miiller (M. T. Fig. 216), for
induction experiments and as transformer model 1. 4.0
C'l. 2712, 2710,

4139, 2715,4521.
992 Dynamos for Generating Direct, Alternating and Three-phase Current; also Accessories. NO. 62 76-
Dynamos
for Generating Direct, Alternating and Three-phase Current;
also Accessories.
62767. 1:8. 62777. 1:12.
62,767. Direct Current Dynamo, Figure, with crossed armature and commutator in four * <'
sections, driving frame on polished wood board, with compound gearing, for turning
by hand 3. !.">. n
62,768. Machine alone, can also be used as Motor 2.10. (I
The Machine is constructed as a shunt dynamo; it gives 15 volts und 2 amps., feeds 2 3 small glow-
lamps or self-regulating arc lamp No. 62,815. It is possible to fuse a steel wire 0,15 mm
thick and 8cm long.
Shunt Dynamos for Direct Current, cf. Fig. 62,774; also constructed as Universal Dynamos, with 4 slip
rings, for Direct, Alternating and Three-phase Current, with Drum Armature (cf. Gan.-Man.
Fig. 806).
Appro:
out
Volts
No. 62783a. Dynamos, etc. 993
62782. 1:8.
62 783 b. 1:12. 62774a. 1:12.
wpiking. also be used as D. C. Motors.

They can Nos. 62744 62 776 a and 62,781 to 62,783 a each have four
slip rings which the corresponding points of the armature winding are connected and can also be used
to
for converting Direct Current into Alternating or
Three-phase Current by allowing them to run as electric
motors and taking off Alternating or Three-phase Current at the corresponding terminals. With Machines
Nos. 62,770/3 it is possible to drive, at the corresponding voltages, the D. C. Motors Nos. 62,768 and 62,834 (which
should in this case be ordered for the proper D. C. voltage); and with Nos. 62,774/6 a the 2-phase A. C. Motors
Nos. 62,909/14 and the 3-phase Motors Nos. 62,906, 62,907 and 62,912 (of. the precise details in the list of Motors
referred to). With the A. C. transformer No. 62,967 or 62,968 and the 3-phase transformer No. 62,974 or 62,975
respectively the voltage can be increased and this transformation shown by glow lamps. For this purpose use is made
of the lamp stands Nos. 62,797, 62,802 and 62,803
respectively. With each Machine are supplied four metal blocks and
four screws by the aid of which the dynamos are screwed on to the lecture table. The blocks are let into the wood
by a joiner.
A pamphlet describing experiments is supplied with the Machine.
It is well to mention here that hand drive with the

driving stand is a somewhat tiring operation being only
adapted for short experiments. The driving stand for Nos. 62,780 and 62,783 a is driven by two persons (cf.Pig. 62,783 b).
for Power: see Vol. I of this Cl.

Larger Dynamos 2749,
Price List, p. 147. 6015, 2750, 4953. 63
62737. 1:4. 62790. 1:12.
62 797. 1 : 5.
62796. 1:1-2. 62 799. 1 : 5.
Direct Current ShuntDynamos; also constructed as Universal Dynamos, with four slip rings, for Direct,
Alternating and Three-phase Current, round pattern, with ball bearings, cf. Fig. 62,787.
No. 62 807. Dynamos. Electric Lighting. 995
MAX KOHL CHEMNITZ
62 802. 1 : 5.
62807. 1:4. 62 806. 1 : 6.
Electric Lighting and Power Transmission.

Glow Lamps and Arc Lamps.
62.797. Glow Lamp Stand with small Edison Socket and Glow Lamp, from 2 65 volts, . s. d.
Figure, on serpentine stone base with ebonite pillar 0. 6.0

Unless otherwise stated we supply a 20-volt lamp.
62.798. Glow Lamp with small Edison Screw, 2 65 volts 0. 1.0
Glow Lamp Stands, Figure:

List No. 62,799 62,800 62,801
With 3 4 6 Glow Lamps
0.16.0 1.0.0 1.8.0
We supply the Lamps in voltages suiting those of the machines just listed (10, 15, 20, 35, 50
and 65 volts): kindly quote pressure when ordering. Unless this is stated we supply 20-volt lamps.
Glow Lamp Stands with Plugging Device to enable the Lamps to be put in parallel and series,
F i
g u r e :
List No. 62,802 62,803

With 4 6 Glow Lamps
1.12.0 2.4.0
As regards the Lamps, vide remarks under No. 62799.
62.804. Osram Metal-filament Glow-Lamps with small Edison screw, for pressures from
28 volts 0. 1.6
62.805.
- -
idem, for 1020 volts 0. 2.0
62.806. Electric Glow Lamp in the various stages of manufacture, Figure, in case . . 1.10.0
62.807. Demonstration Nernst Lamp after Grimsehl (Ztschr. f. d. phys. u. chem. U. 16, 1903,
p. 263), Figure, for connecting to 110 220 volts Direct Current 1.10.0
The individual parts of a Nernst Lamp are arranged on one serpentine (ophite) slab in such
manner as to enable the action of the same and the path of the current to be followed quite well.
The voltage desired should be quoted when ordering; otherwise a 110 volt lamp is supplied.
Cl. 2760,
3550, 3549. 63*
62808. 1:8. 62809. 1:5.
62810. 1:4. 62 816. 1 : 4. 62820, 62821. 1:5.
62.808. Glow Lamp Filament in Receiver, after Hartl, Figure, for showing that the carbon . s. d.
filament does not burn up in vacua but that it does in air (Ztschr. f. d. phys. u. chem.
U. 10, 1897, p. 235) 1. 6.0
62.809. Carbon Filament Lamp after Grimsehl, Figure
(Abhandlungen z. Didaktik u. Philo-
sophic d. Naturwissenschaft, Nr. 1, Fig. 3; published by J. Springer, Berlin, 1904) . 0. 18.
62.810. Glow Lamp Model after Grimsehl, Figure (Ibid., Fig. 4) 0. 8.0
Steel Wire for Glowing Experiments:
List No. 62,811 62,812 62,813 62,814
Diameter mm 0.15 0.2 0.3 0.4
1 Small Coil 0.0.7 0.0.7 0.0.7 0.0.7
62.815. Small Arc Lamp, cf. Fig. 62,816, self -regulating, with reflector; can be worked by
Dynamo No. 62,767 2. 0.0
62.816. Arc Lamp,
larger, with reflector, suitable for Machines Nos. 62,771 to
Figure,
62,783 also 62,786 and 62,789
a, 2. 10.
62.817. Carbon Rods for above Per metre 0. 0.6

62.818. Contac 'Lamp after Eeynier, with fine carbon rod for sliding on carbon roller . . 1.10.0
62.819. Carbon Rods for above Per metre 0. 0.6
62.820. Jablochkofi's Candle (Gan.-Man., Fig. 836), Figure 0. 1.0
62.821. Holder with Terminals for above, Figure 0. 8.0
62.822. Carbon Terminals after Briisch, Figure, without the Bunsen Stand figured, but
inclusive of 2 carbon rods for 10 20 amps., cf. Fig. No. 62,131 1.12.0
Carbon Rods for above for 10 20 amps per pair 0. 0.5
(I. 4147, 5925, 5291.
5926, 2766, 6016.

No. 02 884. Electric Lighting. Motors. 997
62 838. 1 : o. 62 838 A. 1:5. 62 854. 1 : 6.
s. d.
Electric Motors.
Cf. also Nos. 62,31762,322 and 62,768.
62,823. Small D. C. Electric Motor, Figure, with double T-armature 0. 12.
62.830. Direct Current Motor, Figure, Vi2th H .

P., for 12 volts, series wound and with
ring armature; speed 1200 r. p. m. (approx.) at full load 4. 0.
This motor is very well adapted for demonstrations owing to its compact construction.
62.831. --idem, for 110 volts 4. 10.
62.832. --idem, for 220 volts 5. 0.
Direct Current Motors, Figures, with Drum Armatures.

993 Voltaic Electricity. Section 7: Induction Currents. No. 62884-
62884. 1:5. 51 972. 1 : 8.
62 888. 1 : 6. 62889. 1:7.
62.884. Direct Current Motor, series wound, on low base, Figure; output W' 1
H. P., for
. 8. d.
110 volt D. C., with switch, regulating resistance, tachometer and terminals .... 8. 0. Oj
62.885. i d e m, for 220 volts Direct Current 8. 10.
51,972. Direct Current Motor (shunt wound), Figure, rotary on base having vertical
bearing; can also be used as Whirling Table; with cord pulley for driving Stirrers, electro-
lytic stands, etc., and with attachment for inserting colour discs, etc; for 110 volts
Direct Current. V 8 th P H - 7. 0.0
i d e
- - for 220 volts Direct Current 7. r>. <>
51,973. in,
For other kinds of current and other voltages prices on application.
62.887. Sliding Resistance for regulating the speed of Nos. 51,972 and 51,973 1. 5.0
62.888. Stepped Gearing for Laboratories, Figure 2. 0.0
62.889. Direct Current Motor (shunt wound), F i g u re, with 4 -stepped cord pulley for ver-
tical drive, and with gearing for horizontal drive, 110 volts, Vie" H. P., with regulating
1
resistance and switch on one board 6. 0.0
62.890. Electric Railway, Figure, with Track and special stand 4. 16.0
The motor can be removed from the chassis by loosening a few screws, and fixed on the stand.
when it N used as a high-speed motor for rotating colour discs, etc.
62.891. Electric Railway, F i

g u r e, with complete overhead system, on board, for working
with 4 6 volts 3. 0.0
62.892. Model of a Controller as used on electric trains, with small motor (/tschr. f. d. phys.
u. ehem. U. 17, 1904, p. 95) 9. 10.
CI. 4670, 4687,

4955, 4196.
No. 62895. Electric Motors. Electric Power Transmission. 999
62890. 1:6. 62894. 2:3.
62891. 1:8.
62.893. Speed Counter with 2 spindles for working in both directions, Figure, counting
t. 8. d.
from 5000, nickelled, with three different attachments for the spindles, in case . 0. 10.
The attachment is intended for centre-point shafts, the second for tapering shafts. The
first
third attachment is used when neither centre-point nor taper is available or if the end of the shaft is
not accessible. It is formed by a disc 24 mm
diameter which is pressed on to the outer periphery
of the shaft to be measured.
62.894. Hand Tachometer with spring axis for automatically setting the ranges, Figure,
for 100 4000 revs., for dynamos and shafting, with attachment, in case, 60 mm scale
diameter ,
.... 5. 0.0
The tachometer has three different ranges: 100 400, 3001200, 1000 4000. In this new in-
strument, provided with spring axis, the trouble of setting the range and transferring the cam to other
axes is obviated. It is also impossible to damage the tachometer by over-running the pendulum shaft.
62,895. --idem, for 300 12 000 revs., with attachments, in case 5. 0.0
The ranges are: 3001200, 9003600, 300012000.
Cl. 2781, 2795, 6501,

2792.
1000 Voltaic Electricity. Section 7: Induction Currents. No. 62 896-
62898. 1:4. 62 899. 1 : 4.
Alternating and Three-phase Current.

Universal Dynamos for generating Direct Current, Alternating and Three-phase Current: see
pp. 992 and 994.
62,896. Alternating and Three-phase Current Machine after Weinhold, (W. D.

Figure
Fig. 578); can be used as a generator for single and three-phase current; as a Synchronous
Motor or as an Asynchronous Motor (Induction Motor) for Alternating or Three-phase
Current
The Machine can easily be taken apart and a 4-pole rotor inserted for excitation with Direct
Current (for using the machine as a generator or synchronous motor for mono-phase or three-phase
current); or a short-circuited rotor can be inserted (for using the machine as an asynchronous motor
for mono-phase or three-phase current).
This Machine is excellently adapted for demonstrating the mode of action of the model machinas
actually used in practice, as its construction is in accordance with that of such machines.
Lantern Slides for explaining the connections and method of working of this small machine:
gee No. 62,901.
62.897. Driving Device for hand drive, for above

As a driving motor for above we can recommend No. 51,972 or 51,973, p. 998
(cf. the illustration).
62.898. Model of a Three-phase Motor, after Weinhold, Figure (W. D. Fig. 595) . . .
This Model used for studying the behaviour of a three-phase motor when various types of
is
rotor are inserted. The model can be operated with machine No. 62,896 as used as a three-phase
dynamo. Supplied with the model are a squirrel-cage rotor composed of laminated iron sheets and
provided with copper bars; also a copperless rotor of sheet iron with paper layers between, and held
together with four brass rivets; a solid wrought iron rotor and a hollow drum composed of sheet iron.
62.899. Reversing Switch for above, Figure (W. D. Fig. 599), to enable the model to be
used also as a mono-phase motor 0. 16.
62.900. Polarisation Battery for starting or driving Motor No. 62,898 with mono-phase A. C.
(W. D. p. 928)
Cl. 4709,
5558, 55S7.
No. 62 904. Alternating and Three-phase Current. 1001
62 902 C. 1:3. 62902D. 1:3. 62902E. 1:3.
62.901. Lantern Slides for Explaining the Connections and Mode o! Action of Generator . s. d.
No. 62,896, of A. C. Motor Model No. 62,898 and of the Demonstration Apparatus for
rotary field experiments, No. 62,902 (W. D. Figs. 579581, 583587, 596 and 598).
Each 0. 1.6
(a) Alternator (Fig. 579),
(b) Magnetic Axis of the Alternator (Fig. 580),
(c) Stator Winding of the Three-phase Machine I (Fig. 581),
(d) Curve for Mono-phase A. C. (Fig. 583),
(e) Curve for two-phase A. C. (Fig. 584),
(f) Curve for three-phase Current (Fig. 585),
(g) Star and Delta Connection (Fig. 586),
(h) Stator Winding of three-phase machine II (Fig. 587),
(i) Connections used as three-phase motor (Fig. 596),
(k) Connections used as mono-phase motor (Fig. 598).
62.902. Demonstration Apparatus for Rotating Field Experiments (Battery A. C. Apparatus),

after Weinhold, Figs. A E (Ztschr. f. d. phys. u. chem. U. 6, p. 7; W. D. Fig. 582) 5. 10.
The complete apparatus consists of: current distributing apparatus, Fig. A; Ferraris Double Coil
Fig. B; Ferraris triple coil, Fig. C; 4-coil iron ring, Fig. D; 6-coil iron ring, Fig. E; magnetic needle
and sheet-iron disc with agate cap; squirrel-cage rotor; glass disc with iron filings.
The apparatus permits of carrying out the Alternating and Three-phase Current experiments in
a convenient and practical manner. The following pertain to the apparatus: 1 2 Bunsen cells or an
accumulator the current of which is transformed into Alternating or Three-phase Current by the
distributing apparatus, Fig. A. This current flows through double or triple crossed different-coloured
wire rings, Fig. B or C, in which a magnetic needle or an iron disc can be inserted. The bodies in-
serted in the coils rotate under the influence of the rotating field. Instead of these iron rings an iron
ring can be attached consisting of four or six coils and wound' with covered wires of different colour
(Tesla Ring), Figs. D and E; with these it is possible to obtain synchronous rotation by inserting a
magnetic needle or an iron disc; or asynchronous rotation may be produced by an iron ring wound
with copper wire (short-circuited rotor). It is possible to show the migration of the lines of force of
the field in a very pretty manner by means of a glass disc over which iron filings have been strewn.
- - but with Weinhold
62.903. idem, Coils, for the Horizontal Projection Apparatus, instead
of the crossed coils after Ferraris (W. D. Fig. 592) 6. 0.
62.904. Glow Wires above (W. D. Fig. 591), consisting of three marble sockets, one with
for
one wire, one with two wires in star connection, and one with three wires connected in
delta, with protecting caps 0. 15.
Cl. 2721, 2722,

2723, 2742, 2725.
62 905. 1 : 4. 62 908 A. 1:5.
62912. 1:5. 62 915. 1 : 10.
62,905. Model of a Three-phase Motor (Tesla Motor), for a pressure of approximately 2 volts, t. B. i.
Figure, with six groups of turns and short-circuited rotor. The winding is done in
three colours and the connections are laid open, being connected in star and coloured.
The apparatus is very comprehensive and suits No. 62,902 3. 0.
62.906.
- -
idem, for pressures of 6 12 volts, suitable for Dynamos No. 62,774 and 62,787/9 3. 0.0
62.907.
- - i d e
m, for pressures of 20 40 volts, suitable for Dynamos Nos. 62,775/6 a, and
suitable also for connecting to heavy current three-phase networks by the aid of Lamp
Eesistance No. 61,504 3. 0.0
62,908. Model of a Two-phase A. C. Motor for a pressure of approx. 2 volts, same pattern !
as No. 62,905, with 4 coloured groups of turns, short-circuited rotor and coloured con-
nections laid in the open, suiting No. 62,902 . 3. 0.
62.909.
- -
idem, for pressures of 6 12 volts, suiting Dynamos Nos. 62,774 and 62,787/9 3. 0.0
62.910.
- -
idem, for pressures of 20 40 volts, suiting Dynamos Nos. 62,775/6 a, and also
for connecting to heavy current two-phase networks by using Lamp Eesistance No. 61 ,.">(> I 3. 0.0
62.911. Extra Price for Models Nos. 62,905 62,910 constructed as in Fig. 62,908 . . A . 1. 0.0
In this ronsti -iiciioii the motor can be canted over and the rotor easily removed. In addition
to the short-circuited rotor are given in: test magnetic needle in mount with handle; 1 iron cross:
1
1 iron disc divided into coloured plots: glass disc and iron filings for demonstration the migration
1
of the lines of force in the rotating field. With this apparatus it is possible to explain the three-phase
or two-phase motors quite well.
CI. 2726. 2727.

2728. 5572.
X.i. 62 922. Models of Alternating and Three-phase Motors. 1003
62920. 1:5.
62916. 1 : 10.
62921. 1 : 6. 62922. 1 : 8.
62.912. Three-phase Motor and Two-phase Motor; both can be tilted over; on one board; s. d.
Figure, with the same accessories as under No. 62,911, for approx. 2 volts, suiting
No." 62,902 7. 10.
62.913. --idem, for pressures of 6 12 volts, suitable for Dynamos Nos. 62,774 and 62,787
to 62,789 7. 10.
62.914.
- -
idem, for pressures of 20 40 volts, suitable for Dynamos Nos. 62, 775/6 a and
for connecting to heavy current networks by using No. 61,504 7. 10.
62.915. Alternator after Braun, Figure 6. 10.
62.916. Three-phase Motor after Braun, Figure, suitable for No. 62,915 (Ztschr. f. d. phys.
u. chem. U. 5, p. 186) 7.10.0
Following are supplied as Accessories: magnetic needle rotating in fork; light iron cross on stand;
sheet iron strip (with spring) on base; light iron piece with base; iron cross; iron ring and ring wound
with copper wire as rotor; different coloured flexible leads.
62.917. Two-phase Alternator after Braun, construction as No. 62,915 6. 0.
62.918. Two-phase A. C. Motor after Braun, construction and accessories as No. 62,916 . 7. 0.
Apparatus Nos. 62,915 8 are very comprehensively built and permit of demonstrating in a very
pretty manner the electrical transmission of power with polyphase A. C.
Three-phase Current Model after Prof. Weiler (Ztschr. f. d. phys. u. chem. U. 5, p. 189;
6, p. 53), comprising:
62.920. Double Pachytrope after Weiler, Figure 2. 10.
62.921. Tesla Motor after Weiler, can be tilted back, Figure, with test magnetic needle,
iron disc, iron cross for insertion, also glass plate for rendering the lines of force visible
by means of the iron filings supplied 5. 0.
62.922. Crossed Coils after Ferraris, Figure 5. 0.
Cl. 5570, 2729.

6051, 4097.
1004 Voltaic Electricity. Section 7: Induction Currents. No. 62 923 -
O-J-O
62 923. 1 : 6. 52 068. 1 : 6.
62 924. 1 : 5. 62926. 1:16.
62.923. Two-phase Alternator, Figure, with driving stand. The machine can be used . s. d.
instead of the double pachy trope for working Nos. 62,921 and 62,922 8. 0.
The machine can be employed for taking off both single-phase and two-phase alternating current.
Two to three accumulators are used for exciting. Its mode of action is easily understandable as the
coils are of different colours.
62.924. Commutator for Transforming Low Pressure D. C. into A. C., Figure, for the
Whirling Table 0. 18.
52,068. Model for Demonstrating the Behaviour of a Short-circuited Rotor

in the Rotary Magnetic
Field, after Friedr. C. G. Miiller (M. T., Fig. 222), for placing on the Whirling
Figure,
Table; with a squirrelcage rotor which can be used both with and without an iron core 2. 10.
62,926. Apparatus for Demonstrating Synchronism and Asynchronism, Figure, after Gotze 10. 0.
A cord rotates (1) the 4-pole periphery, representing the rotating field; and (2) the innermost
disc provided with a thick point at the periphery (rotor as tunnel armature). The ring (stator) placed
between these has black strips on the outer periphery (slots). The rotor disc can be rotated at the
same speed or at a lower velocity by means of a stepped pulley, so that in the first place
synchronism is present and in the other case asynchronism (slip)-
62,927.
- -
idem, smaller 7. 0.0
62,928. Aluminium Egg after Thomson 0. 6.
The hollow
bipartite egg, which can be used either filled with iron filings or without these, rotates
on point in the rotating field.
its For making the experiment, use is made of one the Apparatus
Nog. 62,905/14 in the tiltable pattern by placing the ring horizontally on a glass plate and inserting
the egg in it.
Cl. 6054, 4684,

2719, 4013.
No. 62935. Alternating and Three-phase Current. 1005
62 933. 1 : 6.
62 930 B, 62931. 1 : 10 and 1 : 2. 62 932. 1 : 7. 62 934. 1 : 6.
62 935. 1 : 9.
62.930. Apparatus after Behrend for Demonstrating the Flow of Current in Three-phase Con- s. d.
ductors, Figs. A
and B (Ztschr. f. d. phys. u. chem. U. 5, p, 44) 0. 14.
-- 1.10.0
62.931. idem, transparent, for the Projection Lantern, Figures
62.932. Apparatus after Moser, Figure, for showing the flow of current in three-phase leads 2. 8.0
By means
of a gearing three glass tubes combined on a wood stand are rotated at the same
speed. These glass tubes, representing sections of the three-phase leads traversed by the current, are
provided with sheet iron strips. One side of all the latter is painted red and provided with an arrow,
the others being blue and having arrows pointing in the opposite direction. Since these Iron strips are
placed at angles of each 120 relative to each other, the apparatus gives, according to the different
positions of the observer, a clear image of the momentary current-density (apparent width of metal strips)
and of the current-direction (colour of the strip and direction of arrow) in the individual leads.
62.933. Model of a Star Connection, with three glow-lamps, on marble, Figure . . . . 1. 10.
62.934. Model of a Delta Connection, with three glow-lamps, on marble, Figure . . . 1. 10.
62.935. Board for Explaining the Star and Delta Methods of connecting in Three-phase Plants,
after Gb'tze, Figure 5. 10.
Cl. 2732, 407, 6059,

406, 2735, 6062, 3S89.
62964. 1:4. 62966. 1 : 3.
Electric Motors for Alternating and Three-phase Current, Figures:
Type of
Current
No. 62972. Alternating and Three-phase Motors. Transformers. 1007
62 967 A. 1:5. 62 967 B. 1:5. 62 970. 1 : 6.
62 969 A. 1:5. 62 969 B. 1:5.
62,967. Alternating Current Transformer (Core Transformer), Figs. A and B, for demon- s. d.
stration purposes; it can be taken entirely to pieces ............... I

3. 12.
The transformer has the following coils: (1) the inner one having 196 turns; (2) an outer one with
28 turns; (3) an outer one with 686 turns. The following ratios can thus be established: 1:7; 3.5 1; :
1 : 24.
The transformer is suitable for A. C. pressures from 24 to 44 volts when the inner coils is used
as a primary coil, and the instrument therefore suits Machines Nos. 62,775/6 a. Suppose, for instance,
that it is used with Machine No. 62,776; the following pressures can be obtained:
34 .
7
= 4.8 Volts; 34 .
3 "5J
1
= 119 Volts; 34 .=24
l
1.4 Volts.
These pressures apply on no-load; they fall somewhat when load is applied. The thin wire ex-
ternal coil can also be connected for a short time to 110 120 volts.
- -
62,968. idem, for A. C. pressures from 7 14 volts, suiting Machines Nos. 62,774 and
62 787/9; Ratios: 1 7; 3.5:
1; 1 : : 24 3. 12.
62,969. Alternating Current Transformer, Figs. A and B, completely dismountable ;

total
capacity up to 120 watts .... 6. 0.0
The
inner coil has 1000 turns; the five outer coils have 200 turns each and can be put in parallel
and series with the copper pieces supplied. The ratios 1:5, 1 2.5, 1 1.67, 1 1.25, 1 1 can be : : : :
established and it can be easily shown that the secondary pressure increases with the number of turns
of secondary. When using the inner coil as a primary the transformer can be connected to pressures
of 80 125 volts.
62.970. Alternating Current Transformer (Core Transformer), Figure; ratio 1 10, for :
primary pressures of 80 125 volts, secondary giving 8 12 volts; output about 100 watts 3. 12.
On each core are wound a primary and a secondary coil over each other.
- - for connecting to pressures of 24 44 volts, suiting Machines Nos. 62,775/6a 3.12.0

62.971. idem,
- -
62.972. idem, for connecting to pressures of 4 14 volts; ratio 10 :
1, suiting Machines
Xos. 62,774 and 62,78762,789 3.12.0
Cl. 2778, 2777, 6052,
5095, 5093.
62 978 A, 62981. 1:7.
62.973. Three-phase Transformer (Core Transformer), Figure, with star connections;

. s. d.
ratio 1 10; for primary pressure of 80 -125 volts, secondary giving 8

: 12 volts; output
about 150 watts 4. 10.
62.974.
- -
idem, for connecting to pressures of 20 40 volts, suiting Machines Nos. 62,775/6a 4. 10.
-- for connecting to pressures of 6 12 volts, suiting Machines Nos. 62774

62.975. idem,
and 62,787/9 4. 10.
62.976. Alternating Current Transformer (Shell Type), Figure; ratio 5:1, for connecting
to 24 44 volts primary pressure, for transforming the current of Machines Nos. 62, 775/6 a
to five times the voltage 2. 10.
62.977. idem, for pressures of 7 14 volts, suiting Machines Nos. 62,774, 62,787/9 . 2. 10.
Inductive Repulsion.
62,978. Apparatus after Elihu Thomson, with complete Accessories, F i g s. A H, for proving
the repelling action of a Magnetic Field, generated by A. C.. on good conducting metal
masses (Elektrotechn. Ztschr. 1890, pp. 387, 399 and 435) 7. 10.
Thefollowing pertain to the complete apparatus and are supplied with it: 1 magnetizing Coil,
renting on three pillars, with stage and apparatus holder, with sliding core formed of a bundle of thin
iron wire; 1 Iron Membrane with tube (fastened to the apparatus itself in Fig. A) attached; 1 Balance
with copper disc. Fig. B; 1 Grip with Fork for fixing one copper disc and one iron disc having copper
rim, both painted with coloured sectors, Figs. C and D; 1 Iron Prism for tin- iron disc having copper
rim, Fig. D; 1 Copper Hollow Sphere with wood ring and watch-glass as support, Fig. E; 1 Coil of
coloured Aluminium Wire with cork and glow-lamp, also 1 Glass Vessel for carrying out he experiment
I
under water, Fig. F; 1 Copper, 1 Iron, and 1 Glass Disc; 1 Wood Frame with a copper ring suspended
on fibres; Fig. G; 1 Copper Hollow Ring with attachment tube; 1 Copper Ring with pendulum suspension,
Fig. H; 1 Wide Copper Ring; 1 Wide Aluminium Ring; 1 Mercury Gutter.
For making the experiments with this apparatus an alternating current (110 120 volts) supplied
direct from a power station, is suitable, of which 12 16 amperes are used for working the apparatus;
when using D. C. this must be converted into a pulsating current by means of the \\elmelt Inter-
rupter (No. 62,666, see below).
Cl. 2780, 5379,
2820.
No. 62 978. Transformers. Inductive Repulsion. 1009
62978C. 1:5 62 978 F. 1:5. 629780. 1:5. 62 078 H. 1:5.
The experiments which can be carried out with the above collection of apparatus are essentially
the following:
1 .
Singing Membrane, Fig. A. The iron core is slipped down to its lowest point in the coil and the
ironmembrane, with a space of approximately one millimetre, fastened above it. When the
magnet is excited the membrane gives a tone corresponding with the frequency of the alternating
current.
2. Balance with Copper Disc, Fig. B. The balance is inserted on the apparatus holder in such manner
that the copper disc is 2 mm above this when the magnet is unexcited. When the current is closed
the copper disc is then repelled.
3. Rotating Copper Disc, Fig. C. In the fork intended for the purpose is inserted the copper disc,
fitted with coloured sectors and with axis; the disc is held horizontally above the magnet while the
thick copper disc is inserted in such manner that one-half of the field is covered.
4. Rotating Iron Disc with Copper Rim, Fig. D. This is inserted in the fork in place of the
previous disc; it is characterised by having two parts, a central iron part and an outer narrow
copper margin. In this experiment it is best to raise the iron core somewhat so that it is projecting
about 3 centimetres above the coil, and the iron prism is then set upon it. The fork is held in such
wise that the disc is perpendicular; moreover, as in the preceding experiment, the field is partially
covered by the stout copper disc.
5. Rotating Ball, Fig. E. If one-half of the electromagnet is covered with the thick copper disc and
the wood ring, together with watch-glass and ball placed on the magnet, the ball is set rolling.
This experiment works particularly well if instead of the wood ring and watch-glass the glass vessel
is used and filled with enough water to allow the hollow ball to float. The rotation of the ball
is then extremely rapid and takes place about a horizontal axis.
6. Spiral with Glow Lamp, Fig. F. Owing to the use of light material this device is so- constructed
that it can only just sink under water. If the device, together with the water-vessel, is placed
on the electromagnet and the latter excited, the lamp is rendered brightly incandescent. On the
other hand a repulsion occurs; the spiral with the glow lamp is raised up in the water and the
luminosity of the lamp appreciably decreases at the same time owing to the field becoming weaker.
This is a very striking experiment.
It is also possible to show with this arrangement the damping effect of different materials.
If the copper plate is placed under the glass vessel the whole phenomenon almost disappears this;
is also the case to a lesser degree when the iron

plate is used, while the glass plate is without influence.
7. Wood Frame with Ring, the latter suspended on fibres, Fig. G. The magnet core is lifted as far
as possible out of the magnetizing coil, the frame and ring slipped over the same and the latter
fastened to the carrier. Under the influence of the current the ring is raised up and is held sus-
pended by the fibres.
Owing to eddy currents in the ring this becomes considerably heated in a very short time;
this heating also takes place to a corresponding extent in the other experiments.
8. Broad Aluminium and Copper Ring. The copper ring remains suspended approximately in the
centre of the excited magnet core when placed above it, while the aluminium ring is entirely hurled
away.
9. Ring with Pendulum Suspension. Fig. H. The apparatus is placed horizontally as shown in
Figure and the core pushed into the coil somewhat so that the oscillating ring can swing out.
The experiment is a variation of the preceding one.
10. Hollow Copper Ring with Attachment Tube. Some water is poured into the vessel and the small
tube closed with a cork. The water, being heated by the eddy currents, evaporates; the cork is
driven out with a pop and a jet of steam issues from the small tube.
1 1 .
Mercury Trough. If this is filled with mercury and set upon the upright apparatus, the mercury
is set into a wavy motion by inductive influence.
Cl. 2821,2823, 2824,

2822, 2825. 2826, 2827. 64
62 979. 1 : 7. 62 980. 1 : 5.
s. d.
62,989. Apparatus after Elihu Thomson, same style as No. 62,978, but considerably larger 12. 0.
62.979. Apparatus after Elihu Thomson, smaller pattern than No. 62,978 and with simpler
fittings, Figure 4. 4.0
The following are delivered with the apparatus as auxiliaries: 1 thick Copper Ring with 3 Cords,
1 Aluminium Ring, 1 Spiral with Glow Lamp, 1 large Copper Disc, 1 small Copper Disc with agate
pivot, Stand and semi-circular Copper Disc, 1 Copper hollow Ring with annex tube, 1 Metal Cylinder.
62.980. Apparatus after Elihu Thomson, Figure, simple, with 4 rings, one each wide and
narrow, of copper and aluminium 1. 8.0
This apparatus can be connected direct to a 110 120 volt lighting circuit, but a Resistance must
be connected up between (e. g., No. 50,521, 2. 15. 0).
62,981. Magnetizing Ring after Elihu Thomson, Figure, as addition to Apparatus

No. 62,978 1. 0.
This magnetizing ring, constructed of fine iron wire, slotted and wound, repels with a consi-
derable amount of force a precious-metal coin, e. g., a half-crown or five-shilling piece, which is held
in the narrow space between its poles, when the ring is excited by alternating current.
With this apparatus also (which takes 5 7 amps.) use is made, as in the case of No. 62,980,
of a series resistance (e. g., No. 50,521, 2.15.0) when the apparatus is used on 110 120 volt A. C.
62,666. Wehnelt Interrupter with 1 mm thick platinum pin, F i g. 62,666, p. 982, for con-
necting apparatus Nos. 62,978 62,981 to 65 220 volt Direct Current 3. 15.
50,521. Series Resistance for above, 30 ohms, 5 25 amps. 2.15.0
Prof. E. Grimsel's Apparatus for the Experimental Introduction

of Electromagnetic Units.
The references refer to Vol. II, No. 2 of the Abhandlungen zur Didaktik und Phi- s. d.
losophic der Naturwissenschaf ten E. Grimsehl, Experimentelle Einfiihrung der Elektro-

:
magnetischen Einheiten, published by Julius Springer, Berlin, 1907.
60,135. Magnetic Pole Balance after Grimsehl, Figure on p. 796 (also p. 3 of above work)
60,194. 2 Glass Rods with glass spheres in order to enable the pole balance to be used also
No. 63005. Induction Repulsion. Apparatus for the Electromagnetic Units. 1011
J
63 003. 1 : 6.
63 004. 1 : 4.
63 002. 1 : 8. 63 005, 60 135. 1 : 7.
63,001 . Brass Rod 50 cm long, with base and magnetic rod with suspension hook, Figure s. d.
(see Figs. 3 and 4 of Grimsehl's work), without cell 0. 7.0
63,002. Brass Disc with 3 Magnetic Needles for quantitative investigation of the magnetic
field, Figure(loc. cit. Fig. 5) 0. 12.
63,003. Apparatus for Measurements of the Density of the Magnetic Field of Circular Currents,
Figure (loc. eft. Fig. 8) 1. 0.0
63.004. Device for showing the Dependence of the Density of the Magnetic Field on the Radius
of the Current-carrying Ring, Figure
(loc. cit. Fig. 9)
[
2. 8.
63.005. Complementary Parts to Pole Balance No. 60,135, in order to show with it the unit
of electric current-density, Figure
(loc. cit. Fig. 10) 0. 12.
Cl. 5921, 5922, 5919,

5917, 5920. 64 *
1012 Voltaic Electricity. Section 7: Induction Currents. ND. 1)3006 -
63 006 A. 1: 12. 63 006 C. 1: 12.
63006B. 1: 12. 63 006 D. 1 : 12
03.006. Coil for Generating a Homogeneous Magnetic Field, g n. A to E (cf. (irimsehl, -. d.

<?
i I
Figs. 960, 964, 967), with accessories for demonstrating following experiments: . . . 15.0.0
(a) Ponderomotive Effect, Fig. B (loc. tit. Figs. 12 and 13) and Fig. C (foe.
cit. Figs. 14 and 15);
(1>) Quantitative Measurements on Electromagnetic Induction, Fig. D (loc. cit.
Fig. 19);
(c) Generation of Alternating Current, Fig. E (loc. cit. Fig. 23);
(d) Calibration of a Ballistic Galvanometer (loc. cit. p. 35).
63.007. Electromagnet with 2 Foot Terminals, 1 Switch and Flexible, F g i u r e (loc. cit.
Fig. 17; Griinsehl, Fig. 958), without cells 2. 5.
03,00*. Pole-determining Cell (loc. cit. p. 26) with double flexible soldered on 0. 3.0
( 1. 5909, 913,
5911,5912.
Xn. 63010. Apparatus for the Electromagnetic Units. 1013
63 006 E. 1: 12.
63 007. 63009. 1:5.
63 010 A.
63.009. Device for Generating a powerful Induction Current by moving a single conductor in a 8. d.
magnetic field, Figure (loc. cit. Fig. 18 cf Grimsehl, Fig. 959), consisting of ring
;
.
magnet, galvanoscope and a low resistance conductor 2. 16.
63.010. Device for Shunting small Potential-differences for Galvanometer Calibrations and
the like, Figs. A
and B (loc. cit. Figs. 20 and 21) 2. 5.
62,094. Paper Condenser, 2 mfds., for calibrating a ballistic galvanometer (Joe. cit. p. 36). 4. 10.
61.138. PohPs Mercury Switch for above , 1. 4.0
61,302. Mirror Galvanometer after Weinhold, cf. Figure on p. 877 7. 10.
Cl. 5910, 5918, 5910,

5915, 5914, 5923.
1014 Voltaic Electricity. Section 8: Electric Conduction in Gases. No. 63 020
bed
63 020/24 a-e. 63028. 1 : 5. 63032. 1 : 6
Section 8: Electric Conduction in Gases.

'
~
<" . r-
.......
8. d.
Geissler Tubes.
Electric Eggs and Geissler Tubes evacuating automatically: see p. 830, items Nos. 60,577/8. ,
6 Geissler Tubes of different shape and colour, in cardboard box. Figs. 63,020 to 63,024 a e
show a few of the shapes.
List No. 63,020 63,021 63,022 63,023 63,024
Approx. length cm 12 16 20 25 30
0.5.0 0.6.0 0.8.0 0.10.0 0.12.0
63.025. New Geissler Tubes consisting of five kinds of glass and lighting up in different colours
(dark red, violet-purple, yellow, uranium green and neutral), about 20 cm long . . . 0. 3.
63.026.
- -
idem, approximately 30 cm long 0. 4.
63.027.
- -
idem, approximately 40 cm long o. :>. n
63.028. 6 Geissler Tubes of different shape and colour, Figure, each about 20 cm long,
in small wood box with glass lid, with switch to permit of one tube after the other being
lit up without having to change the leads 1. 12. o
63.029.
- -
idem, the tubes approx. 25 cm long .
1. IS. o
63.030.
- -
idem, the tubes approx. 30 cm long 2.
63.031. 4 Geissler Tubes approx. 20 cm long, in cardboard box, as follows:

1 tube with fluorescent liquid, 1 dittowith phosphorescent substance, 1 ditto with uranium
glass beaker, 1 ditto with spirals 0. 12.
63.032. 6 Geissler Tubes, Figure, approx. 25 cm long, in cardboard box, as follows:

tube with fluorescent liquid, 1 ditto with phosphorescent substance, 1 ditto with 2 gases,
1
1 ditto with uranium and white glass, 1 ditto changing colour when heated, 1 ditto containing mercury
which lights up when shaken 0.16.0
63.033. 7 Geissler Tubes approx. 35 cm long, in cardboard box, as follows:

1 tube with 2 fluorescent
liquids, 1 ditto with 2 phosphorescent siilistiinco, ditto with 2 Gases, 1
1 ditto with uranium and white

glass, 1 ditto changing colour when heated, 1 ditto lighting up when
shaken, 1 ditto with stratified light 1. 10. (>
63.034. Geissler Tube, with 1 fluorescent liquid, cylindrical, F i

g 11 r e, approx. 25 cm long 0. 3.
63,035.
-- idem, with 2 liquids, cylindrical, approx. 35 cm long 0. 6.
63.036. Geissler Tube, Figure, with four fluorescent liquids, with wood base, 30 cm high 0. 10.
63.037.
-- idem, with 2 fluorescent liquids, on wood base, approx. 25 cm high . . . . 0. 5.0
( 'I. G.'.lfi, 6520, 6517, 6518, 6519, 2898, 2899.

No. 63 051. Geissler Tubes. 1015
feOP=^rr,. - ... .-...^csi>3

63039.
63 040. 1 : 4.
63042. 1 : 10.
63043. 1 : 5.
63046. 1:5.
63036. 1:4. 63048. 1:7.
63,038. Geissler Tube, large pattern, with 2 fluorescent liquids, approx. 50 cm high, Figure, s. d.
on base 1. 0.
Geissler Tubes, Figures,

List No.
Number of Substances
Approx. Length cm
63,039
25
124
with pulverulent phosphorescent substances
63,040
35
0.3.0
63,041
50
0.5.0 0.12.0
63.042. Geissler Tube, Figure, with luminescent gas, bent simply, approx. 60 cm long 0. 15.
63.043. Geissler Tube, Figure, with stratified light, cylindrical, approx. 35 cm long . . 0. 4.0
63.044.
- - i d e m, 50 cm long o. 6.;o
63.045.
- - i d e m, 100 cm long 0. 10.
63.046. Geissler Tube with stratified light, Figure, with bulbs, approx. 50 cm long (cf.
Gan.-Man. Fig. 678; Gan.-Kcin. Fig. 993) 0.10.0
63.047.
- -
idem, approx. 100 cm long 0. 18.
63.048. Geissler Tube, Figure, filled with three different gases, approx. 75 cm long . 0. 15.
63.049.
- -
idem, approx. 100 cm long 1. 0.0
63 050. - -
idem, approx. 150 cm long 1.10.0
63,051.
- -
idem, filled with 2 gases, approx. 35 cm long 0. 5.0
ci. 6585,
6522,
Spectrum Tubes: see p. 515 of this price list. 6521, 2904,
2905,
2901, 2906,
2900, 2907.
:
63 052. 1 : 6.
63 055. 1 : 6.
63 058. 1 : 6.
63 057. 1 : 4. 63 060.
63 059. 1 : 5. 63 061. 1 : 9. 63 062.
63.052. Geissler Tube, Figure, with uranium glass bulbs outside and stratified light in s. d.
the centre, 60 cm long 0. 9.
63.053.
-- idem, 100 cm long 0.15.0
63.054.
- -
idem, 150 cm long 1. 5.
63.055. Geissler Tube lighting up by friction, Figure, 50 cm long 0. 8.
63.056. Geissler Tube, Figure, with mercury, lighting up by shaking, 35 cm long. . . 0. :.. u
These tjibes are used in spiritualistic demonstrations for producing "spirit hands".
63.057. Geissler Tube, Figure, with mercury salts, the colour changing when heated,
35 cm long 0. 3.
63.058. Holtz's Tube, Figure, 40 cm long, double 0. 10.

The glow light passes in one direction only through the funicular apertures. The induction coil
used must work without closing current.
63.059. Hittorff 's Tube, Figure, with base 0. 15.

The current takes the longer path through the spiral-shape bent tube, since the discharge at
the points of the electrodes is prevented by the static electricity of the tube surrounding them.
63.060. Absolute Vacuum Tube, Figure 0. li'. n
63.061. Vacuum Scale after Cross, Figure, with stand and change-over switch, with tubes
50 cm long 2. 4.
scale consists of six vacuum tubes evacuated to different degrees, viz., (1) luminous thu-ad
The
(de la Rive's apparatus); (2) luminous band; (3) stratified formation; (4) Geissler vacuum; (5) Tesla
vacuum; (6) Crookes's vacuum - Rontgen vacuum. The change-over arrangement
-
is double-pole
thus obviating any illumination of the tubes which are not connected up.
Vacuum Bulbs with different degree of vacuum and differently illuminating types of glass:
63.062. with luminous strips, with base, Figure 0. 6. (I
63.063. with luminous band, with base 0. 6.
63.064. with Geissler light, with base (I. 6.
63.065. with white stratified light (CO 2 ), with base o. 7.
63.066. with Tesla vacuum, with base. K g u r e i 0. 7.
63.067. - with Crookes vacuum and green phosphorescent glass, with base 0. 8.
f>X. 068. with Crookes vacuum and bluish-white phosplmi ex-cut glass, with base 0. 8.
63,069. with Crookes vacuum and red phosphorescent glass (didyminm-oerinm gloss), with base .... 0. 10.
63070. X-EayTube, for automatic evacution, with rubber tube attachemet, Figure . . 1. 0.
(
I. li'.IOS. 6524, 6523, 2911, 2910, 2913.
For X-Ray Tubes for Practical Purposes: see p. 985. 211 1^.29 14,6506.
No. 63 580. Vacuum Tubes. 1017
63 066. 63 070. 1 : 6.
63071. 1:5.
63 075. 1 : 10.
63 076. 63077. 1:6. 63079. 1:5.
123
Stands for clamping Geissler Tubes, F gu
i r e, for tubes to 30 cm length; prices without s. d.
tubes :
List No. 63,071 63,072 63,073

For tubes
0.10.0 0.12.0 0.15.0
63.074.
- -
idem, for a Geissler tube to 60 cm length 0. 15.
63.075. Ozone Generating Tube after Siemens, Figure 0. 15.
63.076.
-- idem, after G. Miiller, Figure : 0. 12.
63.077. Angle Mirror for Geissler Tubes, for manifolding the phenomenon, for tubes of 30 cm
length, Figure 1. 10.0
62,321. Electromagnetic Motor for rotating Geissler Tubes of length up to 20 cm, Figure
on p. 958 0. 16.
52.057. Rotating Device for Geissler Tubes of 30 50 cm length, for the Whirling Table,
Figure on p. 287 1.18.0
52.058. Poggendorff's Disc, for illuminating by Geissler Tube, Figure on p. 287, for shewing
the intermittent course of the luminous flux (M. P. 9 th Edn., Ill, Fig. 763), with a
Geissler tube 0. 15.
63.078. Apparatus after De la Eive, for shewing the rotation of the electric luminous flux
about an electromagnet, on stand, without commutator 1. 2.
63.079.
- - i d e
m, with commutator, Figure 1. 8.
63.080.
- -
idem, arranged so that it can be evacuated, with glass stopcock 1. 10.
Cl. 6504, 5362, 5538,
5003,
3022, 3859, 2916.
1018 Voltaic Electricity. Section 8: Electric Conduction in Gases. No. ii:u>8i
63 087. 1 = 5. 63 088 a. 1 : 4. 63 088 b. 63089. 1:4.
Cookes Apparatus
for Experiments on Radiant Matter.
The numbers of the tubes correspond to the figure-numbers of the work:
63.081. Radiant Matter, or the fourth Aggregate Condition, by William Crookes, German
text by Dr. H. Gretschel, Leipsig, Quandt and Handel, 1879 0.
\l. 2.6
The text beyond the bracket corresponds to the titles of the chapters.
63.082. No. 1. With l>;isc. Figure (M. I'. 9 th Edn., Ill, Fig. 769), for demonstrating
the dark space 0.
63.083. No. 2. Without stand, 3 tubes, Figure

63.084. --idem, 5 tubes, Figure
Kadiant Matter exerts
63,085. No. 4. With base, Figure (M. P. 9 th Edn., Ill, a powerful phosphoro-
Fig. 766) genic action where it
th
occurs.
63,086. No. 5. With stand, Figure (M. P. 9 Edn., Ill,
Fig. 772)
No. 63 098. Crookes Tubes. 1019
63 093.
8. d.
63.087. No. 6. With Stand, Figure 1. 0.
63.088. No. 7 a and b. With base, Figures (M. P.,

9 th Edn., Eadiant Matter moves
Ill, Fig. 770; Gan.-Eein. Fig. 994) 0. 16.
in straight lines.
63.089. No. 8. With base, Figure 0. 8.0
63.090. No. 9. With
base, Figure
(M. P., 9
th
Edn., Ill, Fig. 771; Gan.-Man. Fig. 681;
Gan.-Kein., Fig. 995) (radiant matter intercepted by a solid casts a shadow) .... 0. 12.
63,019. Cross-shadow Tube after Crookes-Fleming, Figure, for use with the magnet coil
listed below 0. 15.
63.091. Tubular Magnet

Coil for above, Figure 1. 0.0
If this magnet over the tube the crossed shadow
coil is slipped is deflected to one side or the
other according to the direction of the current in the winding.
63.092. No. 11. With stand, Figure (M. P., 9 th Edn.,

Ill, Fig. 773; Gan.-Eein., Fig. 996) Eadiant Matter exerts 0. 16.
a powerful mechanical
action where occurring.
63.095. No. 14. With Stand, but without magnet, Figure
(M. P., 9 th Edn., Ill, Fig. 780) 0.11.0
With Stand, but without magnet, Eadiant Matter is de-
63.096. No. 15. Figure flected by a magnet.
0.11.0
63.097. No. 16. With Stand, but without magnet, Figure 0. 4.0
63.098. No. 17. With Stand, but without magnet, Figure] 0. 16.
CM. 2925, 3563, 2928, 3564, 2930,
?928, 2931,
2927, 2929, 2932.
1020 Voltaic Electricity. Section 8: Electric Conduction in Gases. No. 63099 -
63099. 1:3. 63105. 1:5.
63100. 1:6. 63 101. 1 : 4. 63 103. 1 : 5. 63 104. 1 : 6. 63 106. l : 5.
s. d.
63.099. No. 18. With Stand, Figure 0. 13.

Eadiant Matter gene-
j
63.101. No. 21. With base, Figure (M. P., 9

lh
Edn., Ill, rates heat when im-
j
Fig. 774; Gan.-Eein. Fig. 997) I

peded. 0. 12. (I
Apparatus Puluj's
for Experiments on Radiant Electrode Matter.
The numbers in brackets refer to the figure-numbers in the work:
63.102. Strahlende Elektroden-Materie, by Dr. J. Puluj, Vienna: Carl Gerolds Sohn . . . 0. 2.6
63.103. (3) Apparatus for Demonstrating the Conduction of Heat in Mica and the phos-
phorescence phenomenon connected therewith, Figure 0. 12.
03.104. (4) Apparatus for Phosphorescence in the Electric Shadow, Figure 0.32.0
63.105. (7) Tube with light and dark Cross, Figure 0. 12.
63.106. (38) Electric Radiometer, F i

g u r e, with rotating mica cylinder . . 1. 0.0
63.107. (40)
- - with semi-cylindrical vanes 0. 9.0
63,108. (43)
- - with phosphorescent vanes, Figure |
0. 15.
Cl. 2933, 2937,

2934, 2935, 2936, 0515, 2038.
No. 63118. Puluj Tubes. 1021
63 113. 1 : 5.
63 108. 1 : 5. 63 111. 1:5. 63 112. 1 : 6. 63 114. 1 : 5.
63 115. 1 : 5. 63 116. 1 : 5. 63 117. 1 : 5. 63 118. 1 : 5.
s. d.
63.109. (44) Electric Radiometer, with fixed vanes and rotating phosphorescent disc . 0. 15.
63.110. (45)
- - with fixed vanes and 2 discs rotating in opposite, directions 1. 2.0
63.111. (46) Phosphorescent Lamp, Figure 0. 14.
<;:;.lli}. Puluj 's Lamp with 2 phosphorescent colours, Figure 0. 18.

Under the action of cathode rays the two circular halves light up in the same colour but sub-
sequently phosphoresce in different colours.
63.113. (50) Valve Tube, Figure 0. 8.
When
the vacuum is high the discharge can only pass in one direction through the tube, since
this charge is influenced by the static charge of the glass walls. This tube is the original copy of
the valve-tubes now used in X-ray practice for suppressing the light occurring on making.
63.114. (54) Zollner's Double Radiometer, Figure, with normal and abnormal rotation,
with base 1. 0.
63,115. Vacuum Tube with phosphorescent mineral, Figure, with base 0. 13.
63,116. Vacuum Tube with three different phosphorescent minerals, constructed of phos-
phorescent glass, Figure 1. 4.
63.117. Vacuum Bulb with butterfly, Figure, with base o.'ie. o
63.118. Radiometer with bouquet, Figure, with base . . 1. 10. 0-
Cl. 2939, 2941, 3565, 2941 a, 2942,

2!i43, 2944, 2946, 2947.
1022 Voltaic Electricity. Section 8: Electric Conduction in Gases. .No. 63 119
Tube with 5 Radiometer with Geissler Tube with Tube with

63 124.
phosphorescent Bouquet Tube Coral Dolomite
Minerals Tube with 2 Cape Dia-
Tube with Tube with artif- Tube with monds and 2 Ceylon
Lava icial Ruby Double Spar Rubies and 1 Apatite.
63 119. 1 : 8.
63,119. Collection of 8 Vacuum Tubes and 1 Geissler Tube, 55 cm high, with 2 fluorescent
s. d.
liquids, Figure 9. 10.
set comprises: 1 Tube with Coral

The 0.12.6); 1 Tube with Dolomite ( 0.12.6); 1 Tube (
with Double Spar ( 0.12.6); 1 Tube with Lava 0.12.6); 1 Tube with 5 different Phosphorescent
(
Minerals 0.16.0); 1 Tube with artificial Ruby

( 1.2.0); 1 Tube with 2 Cape Diamonds, 2 Ceylon
(
Rubies, and 1 Apatite 2.10.0); 1 Radiometer with bouquet

( 1.10.0) and 1 Geissler Tube with (
2 fluorescent liquids ( 1. 5. 0).
63.122. Vacuum Tube with 2 Cape Diamonds, 2 Ceylon Rubies, 1 Apatite (cf. Fig. 63,119) . 2. 10.
63.123. Vacuum Tube of Didymium-cerium Glass, phosphorescing red, with 7 ground glass
stones, which when mixed with metallic oxides phosphoresce differently 1. 7.0
63.124. Vacuum Double Bulb, after Winkelmann, Figure, for showing oscillatory dis-
charges with spark-gap connected in parallel (Ztschr. f. d. phys. u. chem. U. 17, 1904,
p. 37) 1. 4.0
Goldstein Tubes.
63.125. Deflection Tube, cathode consisting of 2 parallel aluminium wires, with base . . . 0.11.
63.126.
-- idem, cathode consisting o.f a star-shaped bent wire, Figure, with bu.sc. . 0. 11.
63.127.
- -
idem, cathode consisting of star-shaped cut-out concave mirror, F i g u r e,
w ith base
r 0. 11.0
63,128. Vacuum Tube, with piece of gold or stamped aluminium sheet, with base, Figure 0.11.0
63,129. Canal Ray Tube, F i

g u i
>,
with base 0. 17.0
The cathode (a) consists of a grill-shaped aluminium sheet, while (b) is the anode. Violet rays
are emitted from the canals formed by the grill. These rays are difficult to influence, and indeed
this can only be done by powerful magnets, while the cathode rays which cause the phosphorescence
of the glass and also the anode light-pencil in the lower tube can, as is well known, easily be deflected.
Cl. 2948, 6509.

NIL G3 135. Goldstein's Tubes. 1023
63 126. 1:5. 63 127. 1 : 5
63 128. 63 129.
63 132.
63 133. 63 134. 1131. 1:4.
63,130. Canal Ray Tube after Goldstein, new, simpler pattern; with polished wood base, s. d.
Figure 0. 15.
--
63.131. idem, after Wien, with polished wood base, Figure 1. 4.
This tube permits of showing the positive and negative charges of the cathode and canal rays.
The perforated plate is earthed, the aluminium wire being the anode. If, then, the first electrode disc
is connected with the negative terminal of a well-insulated induction coil, the cathode rays pass through
the perforated plate, strike on the other disc and give a current of negative electricity if this latter disc
is connected with a sensitive electrometer. If, now, the negative terminal of the induction coil is con-
nected with the perforated plate (the earth connection remaining) instead of with the disc, a current
of positive electricity is obtained from the cathode rays which are then emitted.
63.132. Goldstein Tube, Figure, filled with powdered sodium chloride, potassium chloride,
potassium iodide, or potassium bromide. The substances mentioned change colour under
the action of the cathode rays (Annalen der Physik und Chemie, Vol. 60, 1897, p. 491) 0. 6.0
(a quite flexible stranded conductor) from a small induction coil (of not more than
The lead
3 cm spark-length) is slung fast to the platinum eyes. The thinner portion of the tube is clamped
in a wood retort-holder or the like and while the current is passing through, the powder is approriately
shaken up. In a few seconds this powder has assumed the characteristic colouring under the influence
of the cathode rays, and this colour only disappears after a fairly considerable lapse of time. If only
a large induction coil is available a 2 3 centimetre spark-gap must be put in parallel with the tube.
63.133. Goldstein Tube with powders phosphorescing in different colours; for tilting over,
Figure 0. 12.
Cathode Ray Tubes after Braun: see p. 899.
63.134. Vacuum Tube after Thomson, Figure, for studying the deflectivity of the cathode
rays by static electricity and by magnets, with osmose regeneration to enable the vacuum
to be maintained uniform 2. 5.0
63,135. Wood Stand for above 0. 6.0

Cl. 2949, 2950, 6507, 6505, 3560,
6508,
(5502,6503,3572.
63136. 1:4.
63137. 1:4. 63138. 1:4.
s. .I.
Wehnelt Valve Tubes.

63.136. Small Valve Tube Wehnelt, Figure (Drudes Ann. d. Phys. 1904, Vol. 14,
after
p. 425; Ztschr. phys. u. chem. U. 18, 1905, p. 193)
f. d. 1. 2.
This tube is used more particularly for converting weak currents of high frequency into pulsating
direct current, and can be employed as a wave-detector (audion) for wireless telegraphy, as well as
for demonstrating saturation -current phenomena. It has a cylindrical metal anode, and wire-shaped
cathode coated with a metallic oxide.
Metals coated with oxides behave very differently at high temperatures as regards the emission j
of electrons. If a discharge tube having an incandescent electrode coated with an oxide and one or
more metal electrodes is connected up to an A. C. circuit, the tube acts as a valve to the current,
allowing the current to flow in one direction only. By utilising a number of tubes both phases of the
A. C. can be used for conversion into pulsating D. C., or it is even possible to employ all phases of a
triphase current. The oxide-coated metal electrode of the valve tube is heated by means of a small
transformer or a few accumulators, a suitable regulating resistance being inserted until a yellow
glow is attained (1300 to 1400 C.).
63.137. Large Valve Tube after Wehnelt, Figure, for transforming heavy currents, with
base 1. 10.
This tube has a second anode contained in a cylindrical annex, by using which a magnificent
stratified discharge is obtained.
63.138. Cathode Ray Tube (Valve Tube), Figure, with base 1.10.0
This used for demonstrating the diffraction of the cathode rays into a circle in a homogeneous
is
magnetic field (determining the ratio of charge to mass and velocity of the cathode ray particles) and ,
the practically parobolic curvature of the rays in the electrostatic field in this instance.
The cathode has only a small oxide-spot from which a sharply defined cathode ray pencil issues
when the current passes through. The experiments in which the tube has not to act as a valve are mosi
conveniently carried out with a 110 120 volt D. C., in which case the incandescent oxide electrode
serves as a cathode.
63.139. Liquid Resistance for putting in series with the Valve Tubes for preventing distur-
bance at the electrodes o. i.o
The liquid used is water, which can be rendered slightly alkaline for reducing the resistance.
63.140. Vacuum Tube for Deflection Experiments after Braun-Wehnelt, with oxide cathode
(Physikal. Ztschr. 6, p. 732), Figure, with small horse-shoe magnet and stand . 2. 0. l>
63.141. Vacuum Tube with Oxide Cathode and Phosphorescent Mineral, Figure, with base 1. 10. It
63,144. Thomson's Luminous Sphere for demonstrating the luminous zones in vacuum bulbs
inside a discharge circuit (Ztschr. f. d. phys. u. chem. U. 5, 1892, p. 207) 0. 3.
63,145. - - d c m, larger, specially adapted for the experiment for demonstrating the elec-
i
tmdcless circular current in gases o. 14. o;
rl. 5402. 3588, 3509.

No. 63 156. Wehnelt Valve Tubes. Vacuum Tube Illumination. Theory oJ Electrons. 1025
63 141. 1 : 4. 63 148. 1 : 5.
Vacuum Tube Illumination after Mac Farlane Moore.

63.146. Vacuum Vibrator, Figure, with holder, magnet coil, and connecting terminals
(Elektrotechn. Ztschr. 1896, p. 637) 2. 14.
A Wagner hammer interrupter vibrating in an evacuated glass tube produces such clear inter-
ruptions that the self-induction currents induced in the magnet coil are sufficient to excite vacuum
tubes.
63.147. Vacuum Vibrator alone 1.2.0

63.148. Electrodeless Tube, Figure, 0.5 m long 0. 6.
Section 9: Electron Theory and Radioactivity.

s. d.
Apparatusfor School Experiments on theTheory of Electrons,
after Prof. G. Mahler.
(cf. Ztschr. f. d. phys. u. chem. U., 22, 1909, p. 98.)
63,149. Elder Pith Ball on 3 m long silk fibre 0. 0.6

63.150. Hollow Polished Metal Sphere, 100 mm diameter, on insulating stand 0.18.0
60,176. 2 Leaf Electroscopes Each 0. 10. 1. 0.0
63.151. Small Wood Board with 2 terminals for stretching glow wires 0. 4.0
Glass Rods, Ebonite Rods, see p. 797; Influence Machines, p. 819; Electric Needles, p. 798
of this price list.
63.152. Leyden Jar, 16 cm high, with hollow ball 100 mm diameter 0.14.0
63.153. Ebonite Disc 200 mm
diameter, coated one side with tinfoil 0. 3.0
63.154. Cardboard Disc with hole 6 diameter mm 0. 0.3
63.155.
- -
idem, with a number of concentric holes 0. 0.4
63.156. Electroscopic Powder with pulverising apparatus 0.10.0
62,731. Apparatus for showing that the Air is Ionised by Rontgen Rays, cf. p. 986 . . . 2. 0.0
63,046. Vacuum Tube with stratified light 0.10.0
60,012. 2 Bar Magnets for above Each 0. 2. 6 0. 5.0
Tubes for Deflecting Cathode Rays: see p. 1019.
Cl. 3570, 2958,
3571,2959. 65
1026 Voltaic Electricity. Section 9: Electron Theory and Radioactivity. No. 63 159
63 159. 63163. 63 163. 63168. 1 : 1.
63.159. Vacuum Tube after for demonstrating the negative charge produced by
Perrin, s. d.
cathode rays, Figure, on base 1.10.0

63.160. Glow Lamp for the Edison Effect, Figure 1.14.0
Theelectrons issuing from the incandescent carbon loop give a negative charge to an insulated
aluminium sheet contained in the same. A sensitive galvanoscope between aluminium sheet and posi-
tive of the lamp, gives a deflection, while showing no current between aluminium sheet and
pole
negative lead of lamp.
63.161. Glass Plate with covering, for the Hall Effect 0. 4.0
Apparate for Opto-electrical Experiments.

63.162. Zinc Disc, amalgamated, with insulating holder, with terminal 0. 5.0
The zinc discconnected with a sensitive electrometer by a thin wire.
is If the electrometer
be negatively charged, a quick discharge occurs when the zinc disc is brilliantly lighted by an elec-
tric arc lamp, or, better still, by a mercury vapour lamp made of glass permeable to ultra-violet
rays (Uviol Lamp No. 63,198). When the electrometer is positively charged no discharge occurs on
illumination. The uncharged electrometer becomes positively charged when the illumination is applied.
The first two experiments can be carried out with a sensitive leaf electroscope (e. g., 60,176, 60,186,
60,196, 60,202); a sensitive electrometer (e. g., quadrant electrometer No. 60,720) is necessary for the
third experiment. The zinc disc must be freshly amalgamated before use.
When ultra-violet light is allowed to fall upon a spark gap connected up to an induction coil
it is bridged over at a considerable distance, as without the action of light (cf. Gratz, Die Elektrizi-
tat, 15th Edn., p. 348).

A transparent gypsum slab does not effect the discharge much, while a glass plate annuls it,
since the action chiefly depends on the ultra-violet light.
63.198. Uviol Mercury Vapour Lamp with Stand, for connecting to 65 220 volts D. C. . 5.10.0
63.163. Potassium Cell after Elster Geitel, & (Wied. Ann. d. Phys., 1894, Vol.
Figure
52, p. 433) 2. 0.0
The cell also acts with white light and gives an opto -electrical current. It is placed in a dar-
kened box and put in series with a very sensitive mirror galvanometer of high resistance and with
a 100 200 volt battery, the tension being regulated in such manner that no current overflows at
the cell. The surface of the potassium metal is connected to the negative pole and a wire-shaped
aluminium electrode with a positive pole. If the surface of the potassium is lighted by sunlight or
a sufficiently strong source of light, a passage of the current takes place in the cell, the intensity
of which is proportional to the strength of the light.
63.164. Sodium same experiment

Cell for the 1. 15.0
63.165. Potassium-Sodium Amalgamating Cell 3. 0.0

63.166. Sodium Cell with Quartz Window 3. 0.0
63.199. Sodium-Amalgam Cell for opto-electrical discharge by daylight (cf. Gratz, Die Elek-
trizitat, 15"' Edn., Fig. 337) 1. 2.
Radioactivity.
63,167. Radium Cell, F gu
r e, without charge
i 0. 3.0
The radium cell consists of an ebonite chamber containing on one side a small flat cavity fur
the radium bromide charge. A mica plate secured by a metal cover having a hole in the middle,
closes the cell off on this side. The active rays of the radium bromide can issue at this open side
of the cell through the mica plate, the back of the cell acting as a screen.
Radium Bromide for above quoted for on application.

For tilling the cell ."> to In milligramme radium bromide are employed.
Cl. 1965,
6510,5277,3821.1966
No. 63 180. Opto-electricity. Radioactivity. 1027
63 170. 1 : 3. 63 180. 1 : 2.
i s. d.
63.168. Spinthariscope, Figure 1. 8.0

The apparatus
consists of a small brass tube on the back end of which is a small light screen
of zinc sulphide. In front of this screen a metal pointer is fitted which can be moved up and down
over the screen externally by the finger. At the lower side (i. e., the side opposite the luminous
screen) the indicator contains a little radium bromide. The radium-bromide permanently radiates
and the rays encounter the zinc sulphide screen, which lights up like a billowy, sparkling sea of light
when the screen is looked at through the magnifier placed on the front of the apparatus.
The observation must be made in a perfectly dark room and the eye must rest for some time
(5 to 10 minutes) so as to become rid of other impressions and thus observe the phenomenon tho-
roughly well.
63.169. Spinthariscope without Magnifier, for use under the microscope 0.12.0
63.170. Case containing Collection of Radioactive Preparations, Figure 5. 0.0

The case contains: spinthariscope (No. 1); 1 piece uranium pitch blende (No. 2); 1 piece wille-
1
mite (No. 3); 1 piece Kunzite (No. 4); 1 piece calc-spar (No. 5); 1 radium cell (No. 6); 1 cube
fluorspar, 13 mm side (No. 7); 1 barium platino-cyanide screen (No. 8) and one zinc-sulphide screen
(No. 9).
The various apparatus and preparations contained in the collection are also sold singly at the
prices named below.
The radium cell included in the collection is unfilled. If it is desired that it should be supplied
filledwith radium-bromide the quantity and quality of the material desired should be specially in-
dicated. Prices quoted on application.
63.171. Uranium Pitchblende for comparative experiments on radium, in pieces of 50 300 grammes. Per 100 g 0. 6.
63,17'2. Uranium metal, quite pure, for use as unit of radiation Per gramme 0. 3.
03,17.'!. Willemite, phosphorescent, in pieces of approx 30 g 0. 8.
63.174. Kunzite, fluorescent, in pieces of 6 8 grammes 0. 10.
63.175. Calc-spar, approx. 40x15x6 mm 0. 6.
63.176. Fluorspar Cube, approx. 13 mm side 0. 12.
63.177. Barium platinocyanide Screen, 65 x45 mm 0. 8.
63.178. Zinc-sulphide Screen, 65x45 mm 0. 6.
63.179. Mixture of Radium and Zinc-sulphide, in small sealed glass tube, phosphorescing in the dark . . . 1. 0.
63.180. Apparatus for Studying Induced Radioactivity, (cf. Besson, Le radium et

Figure
la radioactivite, Paris, 1904, Fig. 21) 0. 8.0
The apparatus consists of a small cylinder and a glass flask connected by a double-bent tube;
the tube is provided with a stopcock. The cylinder receives the concentrated solution of a radium
salt and the glass flask the material which it is desired to render active, or the preparation which
it is desired to render phosphorescent. The communication is effected by opening the stopcock and
interrupted again by closing it. Both the cylinder and the glass flask are provided with tube and stopper
in order that the materials can be changed.
Cl. 1967, 3126.

65*
1028 Voltaic Electricity. Section 9: Electron Theory and Radioactivity. No. 63 181
63 181. 1 : 4.
63 184. 1 : 4. 63 182. 1 : 6.
s. d.
63.181. Electrometer, Figure, specially arranged for investigating radioactive substances. 4. 0.0
The apparatus corresponds to a Kolbe No. 61,096 Aluminium Leaf Electrometer, p. 802, and has
a projection-calibration scale and amber tube in ebonite plug, one extra ebonite plug with amber tube,
conductor rod and paper leaves. The instrument has a small stage at the side on which are placed
the substances to be investigated.
The electrometer is charged by influence by allowing an ebonite rod, electrified by friction, to

act on the upper plate. The aluminium leaf is deflected from its perpendicular position and conserves this
deflection for a very long period, provided no radioactive substances are allowed to act on it. If,
however, radioactive substances in the form of fine powder are placed in a thin layer in a special sheet
iron plate, and put on the lower slab, the rays emitted render the air between the two plates conduc-
tive, thus discharging the electrometer. The velocity with the which the aluminium leaf moves during the
discharge gives a measure for the intensity of the radiation of radioactive substances.
63.182. Electrometer after Curie, Figure, on wood stand, with reading microscope . . 7. 10.
The Electrometer is built into a metal housing covered by two glass plates. The two horizon-
tal metal plates are covered by a cap, this being removed when introducing the substances and replaced
for carrying out the 'measurement. This part of the apparatus can be easily cleaned and any trace
of dust of radioactive substances should be avoided. The electrometer proper is well closed, since
the necessary cleaning would be attended with difficulties. The electrometer is charged at the upper
knob, protected by a special cap. For taking the substances to be introduced special small plates
are supplied with the apparatus.
In order to estimate the velocity of the leaf the lower and of the same should be observed by
means of the fixed microscope having micrometer ocular. With the aid of a seconds clock the linn-
is noted which is necessary for the image of the front edge of the leaf in the micrometer to move
over a definite number of divisions.
63,183. idem, without reading microscope 6. 0.
63,184. Simple Portable Electroscope for investigating weakly radioactive substances,

Figure 2. 0.
Cl. 2078,
6114,3699.
No. 63 204. Radioactivity. 1029
63 200. 1 : 8. 63 204. 1 : 10.
Accessories : s. d.
63,185. Reading Telescope with micrometer ocular for same (for accurate measurements) 2. 16.
63,186. Ebonite Rod with Rubber '. I

0. 3.
63.187. 6 Closing Discs 0. 8.
63.188. Disc with Uranium Oxide a* radioactivity standard 1. 0.
63.189. Carrying Case for the Electroscope with accessories 0. 18.
63.200. Fontactoscope after Engler and Sieveking, Figure, for determining the radioac-
tivity of waters (Schiffner, Eadioaktive Wasser in Sachsen), with accessories 12.10.0 ....
The foregoing price includes:
(a) 1 Electroscope after Elster & Geitel, modified by Engler & Sieveking, with amber insulation
( 3.5.0);
(b) 1 Arrangement Jor Parallax-free Reading of the Deflection of the Leaves, consisting of a scale
with mirror and sliding magnifier ( 1.13.0);
(c) 1 Dissipation Cylinder for suspending ( 0.10.0);
(d) 1 Can of nickelled brass sheet, 10 litres content, for spring water testing ( 1.0.0);
(e) 1 Can with plate, of nickelled sheet brass, for investigating solids ( 1.3.0);
(f) 1 Rubber Stopper with glass stopcock, for closing the aperture at the bottom of the can ( 0. 7. 0);
(g) 1 Rubber Stopper for closing this aperture during transit ( 0.1.0);
(h) 1 Large Rubber Stopper for closing the neck of .the can ( 0.4.0);
( i) 1 Melta Lid for the neck of the can, arranged for setting up the electroscope ( 0.15.0);
(k) 1 Zamboni ,Drv Pile, 300 350 volt pole-tension, for charging the electroscope; as desired, with
a stand for suspending the pile, or with a metal sheath, in which both poles are insulated, so
that the pile keeps well ( 1.13.0);
(1) 1 Transit Cass with leather carrier ( 2.2.0).
Instead of the dry pile listed under No. 63,200k we supply, if desired:
63.201. Zamboni Pile with protecting neck. The poles of the pile are laid in ebonite
plates having artificially enlarged surfaces. A
special needle permits of utilising also
sub-divisions of the pile (alone 2. 18. 0) Extra price 1. 5.0
63.202. Case for Electrometers Xos. 63,200 a and 63,200 b, for use where a carrying case
is not desired. Decrease in price for this Case instead of Transit Case 1.10.0
63.203. Case, for Electrometer No. 63,200 a and b alone 0. 8.0
63,204. Electrometer Jor Radioactive Measurements, especially on waters, after H. W.

Schmidt, Figure, Travelling Apparatus with reading microscope, dissipation vessel
with level, stand, agitating flask, rubber bellows, rubber tubing, stop-watch, thermo-
meter and charging rod (Physikal. Ztschr. Vol. 6, 1905, p. 561) |14. 0.
A complete special list concerning apparatus 63,200 63,204 sent on application. Cl. 5388, 5265.
Exact directions for use are appended to each apparatus.
1030 Voltaic Electricity. Section 10: Electrical Oscillations. No. 63206
Section 10: Electrical Oscillations. Wireless Telegraphy.
63 206. 1 : 8.
Apparatus for Tesla's Experiments with Currents of High

Frequency and Tension.
(cL in this respect Ztschr. f. d. phys. u. chem. U. 9, 1896, p. 139.)
(a) For small-scale Experiments with an induction coil of 60-150 mm spark-length.
63,206. Complete Apparatus for the Experiments with Currents of High Frequency and Ten-
sion, after Tesla, with Elster & Geitel High Tension Transformer, Figure. . . . ,
9. 10.
The apparatus consists of: 1 Leyden jar 40 cm high and 1 spark micrometer with zinc points,
all mounted on polished oak board; 1 Elster & Geitel high tension transformer, of. Fig. 63,210, and
1 sparking pillar, cf. Fig. 63,216; 2 induction spirals insulated from each other by a glass cylinder,
the secondary spiral carrying a glow lamp, cf. Fig. 63,213; 1 copper stirrup with gl&w lamp for the 1
impedance phenomenon, cf. Fig. 63,219; 2 brass plates as conductors, cf. Fig. <>.'?. 222; 2 circular
thick copper wires for concentrating the brush discharges, cf. Fig. 63,225; 2 parallel wires for the
same experiment, cf. Fig. 63,226; 1 Tesla lamp with a fine, long filament and an external electrode
and with fittings, cf. Fig. 63,227; and 1 electrodeless Tesla tube 50 cm long, cf. Fig. 63,228.
In addition it is advisable to provide a few of the Tesla Tubes listed under Nos. 63,232 63,240.
(b) For Large-scale Experiments with an Induction Coil of 200600 mm spark-length.
The most important apparatus and those suitable for forming a collection of in-
struments on the subject are marked f.
t 63,207. Leyden Jar Battery, Figure, with 2 jars 40 cm high, for connecting in sc-
ries, on polished wood board j

2. 6.
CI. 6118.
No. 63211. Tesla Experiments. 1031
63 207. 1 : 6. 63 208. 1 : 5.
63 210. 1 : 6. 63 211. 1 : 9.
s. d.
t 63,208. Spark Micrometer, Figure, in black glass box, on serpentine stone base 1. 6.0
63,209.
- -
idem, with silencing box of wood 1.16.0
t 63,210. High Tension Transformer, Figure, without oil insulation, after Elster & Geitel,
with two differently wound secondary coils, 425 mm high, for induction coils to
250 mm
spark-length 3.10.0
t 63,211.
-- idem, considerably larger, Figure, 640 mm high, for induction coils of
250 600 mm
spark-length 5. 0.0
Cl. 3039, 2981,
2970, 2984.
63215. 1:17.
63,212. High Tension Transformer with Oil Insulation, after Klstcr ^ C.eitel, Figure, .-. (I.
with a secondary coil, 700 mm high, for induction coils of 300 600 inin spark-
length ....'. 6. o.o
with Figure 1. 2.0
f 63.21:5. 2 Induction Spirals separated by a glass cylinder, glow lamp.
Apparatus after d'Arsonval, Figure, comprising a 1.7 m hijrli s]>iral for con-
(i.i.-'ll.
taining a man, with a spiral having glow lamp fixed on a belt 5. 10.0
63,215.
-- idem, of. Fig. 63,215, 1.75 m high and 0.75 m diameter, provided with a
door for convenience ol entry. Price without accessories illustrated . . ; II. o.<>
A complete description and din-rtiops for u<o for ( '1.2072. 2985, 6132.
the experiments arc appended to c;irli apparatus. 2986, 2987.

No. 63 224. Tesla Experiments. 1033
63 216. 1 : 5. 63217. 1:7.
63 219.
1: 17. 63216, 63221. I : 6. 63222. 1:12. 63 224. 1 : 30.
s. d.
t 63,216. Discharger, Figure, with ebonite pillars on polished wood board 1. 0.0
--
63.217. idem, larger, on iron feet, Figure .. 1.16.0
63.218. Whirl, Figure, for fitting on the high tension transformer 0. 4.0
t 63,219. Copper Stirrup, Figure, with 1 glow lamp, for the phenomenon of impedance 0.12.0
t 63,220. --id e m, with 4 glow of 35, 20, 10 and 5 volts pressure 1. 8.0
63,221.
- -
idem, after Kann, Figure, with 1 glow lamp and with folding stirrup,
for showing that self-induction is the cause of the phenomenon (Ztschr. f. d. phys. u.
chem. U., 20, 1907, p. 247). Without the dischargers No. 63,216 illustrated .... 0.16.0
f 63,222. 2 Brass Plates, Figure, as conductors for producing a high frequency field 0.18.0
63,223. Leyden Jar, 16 cm high, with detachable point, for proving the positive flow
in the neighbourhood of the transformer pole 0. 5.0
63,224. Large Brass Conductor, Figure, for experiments on distance effect, 90 cm

long, 26 cm diameter, nickclled, on 1.5 m high glass pillar, with large iron tripod . 5. 0.0
CI. 2971, 2988,
2973,6116,2974,2990.
1034 Voltaic Electricity. Section 10: Electrical Oscillations. No. 0322.-)
63228 63231.
63225. 1:18.
63235. 1:9.
63 227. 1 : 7. 63226. 1:11.
63 233. 1 : 5. 63 236. 1 : 6. 63 237. 1 : 6.
t 63,225. 2 Circular Stout Copper Wires, Figure, for concentrating the brush dis-
charges 0. 8.
t 63,226. 2 Parallel Copper Wires, Figure, for producing a luminous band 0. 6.
t 63,227. Tesla Lamp with a fine long Filament and an external Electrode, Figure,
with fitting for fixing to high tension transformer 0. 8.
63.228. Electrodeless Tube, jagged shape, 0.5 m long, Figure 0. 4. o
63.229.
- -
idem, 1 m long 0. 6.0
t 63,230.
-- idem, 1.5 m long 0. 8. o
63,231.
-- i d e m, 2 m long 0. 10. (I
t 63,232. Electrodeless Tube, straight pattern, 0.4 m long 0. !.<>
63,233.
-- idem, with two external electrodes, Figure 0. 5.
t 63,234. Evacuated Bulb without electrodes, Figure 0. 5. o

o
63,235. Rectangle of Tubes without electrodes, Figure 0. (i.
t 63,236. Evacuated Bulb with one electrode, o

Figure 0. (i.
63,237. Bulb with an Electrode and phosphorescent cross, Figure 0. 12.
t 63,238. Bulb with an Electrode and phosphorescent mineral, Figure 0.15.0

t 63,239. Ebert's Phosphorescent Lamp with 13
electrodes, Figure (Wied. Annalen, Vol. 53,
1894, p. 159) 0.16.0
63.240. Vacuum Tube after Elster & Geitel, for deflection experiments, Figure ... 0.12.0
For further details as to the tubes, kindly refer to directions for use which will be sent on
application.
63.241. Complete Set of Tesla Apparatus after Weinhold, for induction coils of 60 150 mm
spark-length (W. TL, pp. 939944 [832837], Figs. 605607 [550552]) 6. 10.
The following are fitted on a wood board: 1 large Leyden Jar. spark micrometer, oil-insu-
I 1
lated transformer (Pig. 63,242). In addition the following are supplied: 1 copper wire ring for the
impedance experiment (Pig. 63, 241 A). 1 impedance stirrup, 2 wire spirals, one with glow lamp for
Cl 2975,2978,
6113,2976,2994,2995,
2983,2996,2997.
No. 63 250. Tesla Experiments. 1035
/I
63 238. 1 : 6. 63 239. 1 : 6.
63 241 A. 1:4.
63240. 1
63242. 1:4. 63 249. 1 : 8. 63250. 1:8.
transformation; 2 insulating stands, 2 copper rings and 2 copper wires for producing a luminous wall, s. d.
2 wire nets for generating a high frequency field, 1 electrodeless tube, 1 glow lamp with one elec-
trode, 1 wood piece with two terminals.
63.242. Oil-insulated High Tension Transformer after Weinhold, separately, Figure (W.
D., Pig. 607 [552]), for induction coils of spark-length 60150 mm 2. 10.
- - 3.12.0
63.243. idem, larger, for larger spark coils
Leyden Jars after Lodge, for demonstrating Electric Resonance: see p. 838, Nos. 60,646 30,648.
63.249. Leyden Jars for Lodge's Resonance Experiment, after Weinhold, Figure (W. D.,
Fig. 608 [553]) 1. 10.
63.250. Apparatus for Generating Currents of High Frequency and Voltage by Resonance,
after Oudin, Figure, consisting of 1 spark micrometer with zinc bulbs and protec-
ting case, with ebonite grip; 2 Leyden jars each 160 high and 1 Oudin Eesonator, mm
mounted on one polished base together with all necessary connections 7. 10.
Cl. 2998, 2999, 3000, 6528,

6527,6531,3003.
1036 Voltaic Electricity. Section 10: Electrical Oscillations. Xo. 63251
63 252, 63 210, 63 259, 63 209, 62 513. 1 : 12.
Apparatus after Seibt for demonstrating stationary electric waves.
Vacuum Tube for demonstrating the oscillatory character of Leyden Jar Discharges, 8 - d -
63,2'ti.
after Paalzow (M. P. !"' K.ln. III., p. 892) 0. 3.
Tlic nine, fed from an induction coil, gives a luminous band which is deflected to cither side
of the tulic. according to the direction of the current in the tube, when a strong magnet is Id-ought
near it. If a small I.eyden jar is inserted in the circuit of the induction coil the band is always de-
flected in both directions.
Cl. 5126.
No. 63256. Resonance of Electric Waves. 1037
63 256, 63 254, 63 259, 63 209, 62 513. 1:10.

Set for demonstrating the resonance of electric waves by Seibt's Method.
63 255. 1 : 5.
s. d.
Seibt's Apparatus for demonstrating the Resonance of
Electric Waves.
(E. T. Z., 1902, pp. 315 et seq; Phys. Ztschr., 4, 1902, p. 99.)
63.252. Large Resonance Coil after Seibt, Figure, 2 m long, on base, with two lateral
wires 2. 5.
63.253.
- -
idem, with evacuated glass tube on one side and wire on the other, 1 m long 3. 0.
63.254. Resonator after Oudin, with 2 terminals, with ebonite grip for tuning accurately,
Figure 2.8.0
63.255. Variable Self-induction (Exciter Solenoid), Figure 3.6.0
63.256. 2 Small Resonance Coils with ebonite pillars on serpentine stone bases, of different
winding and colour, Figure Each 1. 2. 2. 4.
Cl. 5136,
3002.
1038 Voltaic Electricity. Section 10: Electrical Oscillations. No. 63 257
63 267 A.
63 262. 1 : 8. 53 508. 1 : 6. 63 267 B.
63 267 C.
d.
showing the tuning of a
s.
63.257. Extra Resonance Coil on base, with Geissler Tube, for
receiving station for wireless telegraphy 1. 4.0
63.258. Extra Resonance Coil on base, for showing the screening effect 1. 2.0
For this experiment Coil No. 63,257 must be available in addition to the above.
63.259. 2 Leyden Jars with metal fittings, 26 cm high, medium capacity, cf. Fig. 63,207 . 2. 4.0
63.260. 2 Extra Jars of higher capacity Each 0. 6. 0. l-'.O
63.261. 2 Extra Jars of lower capacity Each 0. 6. 0.12.0
63.262. Oil Condenser with variable capacity, Figure, for use instead of the Leyden
Jars 5. 0.0
63,210. High Tension Transformer after Elster & Geitel, with two secondary coils of different
winding, Fig. 63,210, p. 1031 3.10.0
or :
-- idem, larger. Fig. 63,211, p. 1031 5. 0.0

63,211.
63.208. Spark Micrometer with flat thread, high pitch regulating screw on long ebonite
handle, in glass box, on serpentine si one base. Fig. H3,208, p. 1031
1. 6.0
63.209. idem, with protecting silencer box !. Hi. <>
5759,
A complete special list, with description, of 4973, 1105, 5763,
5765.
Seibt's Apparatus, forwarded on application.
No. 63269. Seibt's Apparatus. Hertz's Experiments. 1039
63 268 A.
63268, 63269. 63 268 B. 63 268 C.
53,508. Resonance Tube on base, with open ends, but can be closed at one end, s. A.
Figure 1. 8.
5.3,500. Tuning Fork Cj

= 256 compound vibrations, with grip 1. 0.
53.510.
- -
idem, c.2 = 512 compound vibrations 0. 18.
53.511.
- - i d e m, g 2 = 768 compound vibrations 0.18.0
Apparatus for the Experiments on Electric Power Rays,

after Prof. Heinrich Hertz.
(of. Hertz, Untersuchungen iiber die Ausbreitung elektrischer Kraft, Leipzig, 1895, Johann
Ambrosius Barth.)
63.267. Apparatus after Grimsehl for repeating Hertz's Fundamental Experiments, Figs. A C
(Grimsehl, Figs. 10571059) 3. 0.
In these apparatus, as in the original Hertzian Experiments, the secondary spark in the so-call-
ed resonator is used as indicator. The induction coil should have a spark about 10 cm long.
63.268. 2 Parabolic Mirrors, one with Hertzian transmitter (oscillator), the other with a
coherer (resonator), Figure s, together with a tuned electric bell for signalling, 2
Dry Cells, 1 Wire Grating, 2 Sheet Iron Screens and 1 small Metal Plate for setting the
distance of the oscillator balls (Richarz, Neuere Fortschritte auf dem Gebiete der Elek-
nd
trizitat, 2 Edn., pp. 66 75), without the induction coil or accumulators illus-
trated 4. 0.0
In this set, in which a coherer (Branly Tube) is used as indicator, the following experiments can
be made: rectilinear expansion of waves
screening effect, reflection (Fig. B), polarisation
(Fig. A),
(Fig. C). The following
paraffin prism No. 63,269 is used for refraction. The induction coil should
have a spark-length of not more than 2 3 cm. Description and precise directions for use are ap-
pended.
63.269. Paraffin Prism, F gui r e, with board and wood wedges 1. 16.
CI. 5879,
5877, 5905, 587R.
1040 Voltaic Electricity. Section 10: Electrical Oscillations. No. 63 270
63 270 A. 1:8.
63 270 C. 1:12. 63270D. 1 : 12. 63 270 E. 1 : 10.
63 270 F. 1:8. 63 270 G. 1:12.
63,270. Complete Set for demonstrating all essential Experiments with Hertzian Waves and s. .1.
Wireless Telegraphy, after Weinhold, Figs. A

J (W. D., Figs. 611619 [556564]) 16.10.0
The apparatus comprises:
1 complete Receiver on marble with metal protecting case, Branly Tube (Coherer), clapper, variable-
sensitivity relay, accumulator and dry cell, Fig. A;
1 Transmitter (Vibrator or Radiator) with horizontal spark gap, Fig. B;
2 concave Mirrors with holders, mi hoard, for reflection, etc.; Figs. C and D.
1 plane Glass Mirror for reflection:
1 Stand for the connecting leads, cf. Figs. D and G;
1 Sheet Iron Slab, 1 Board coated with Tinfoil, 1 Wire Net, 1 Glass Plate and Wire Grating for re-
flection:
1 Paraffin Prism with pasteboard screen, coated with Tinfoil, and holder, for refraction, Fig. E:
2 Glass Mirrors for interference, Fig. F;
1 Mirror in frame for polarisation, Fig. G;
1 Mirror with Glass Cup (as lens) in frame, for polarisation, Fig. H;
J Supports:
1 Transmitter for wireless telegraphy, Fig. J.
Cl 6133,6183.
6135,6139,6138.
6134,6137.
No. 83277. Hertzian Experiments. 1041
63 270 J. 1:8.
63 270 H. 1:10. 63275. 1 : 5.
63 274 A. 1:4. 63 274 B. 1:5.
63.271. Hertzian Wave Transmitter (Vibrator), after Weinhold, separately, Fig. 63,270 B S. d.
(W. D., Fig. 613 [558]) 0.12.0
63.272. Transmitter for Wireless Telegraphy after Weinhold, alone, Fig. 63,270 J (W. D.,
Fig. 619 [564]) 1.16.0
63.273. Branly Tube after Weinhold, separately (W. D., Fig. 611 [556]) 0. 6.0
63.274. Complete Exciter for short Waves after Prof. Jagadis Chunder Bose (Ztschr. f. d.
phys. u. chem. U. 10, p. 149), Figs. A and B 12. 0.0
The apparatus consists, as shown in Fig. 63,274 A, of a frame with manipulator, 1 Storage
Battery, 1 Induction Coil, 1 Interrupter the knob of which projects above the cover of the apparatus,
and one small Radiator in oil vessel with concave copper mirror. The entire device can be placed
in a protecting box formed of an iron and a copper sheet metal jacket, Fig. B, thus obviating the
influence of magnetic and electric waves on the apparatus. The waves emitted by the radiator can be
propagated through the tube inserted in the jacket.
The apparatus is ready for use when closed since the interrupter can be operated externally by
the push mentioned. The secondary batteries can be cut out by means of the plug visible in
Figs. 63,274 A and B.
Two double discs can be screwed out of the protecting jacket (Fig. B) in order to be able to
observe the two spark gaps.
63.275. 1 Coherer for above, on stand, Figure 1. 4.0
61,280. 1 Pointer Galvanometer for above 2.10.0
63,277. 1 Simple Optical Bench and a simple Goniometer for same, with cylindrical lens,
1 plane mirror, 1 cylindrical mirror, 1 prism, 2 half -cylinders, 2 copper wire gratings
for polarisation 9. 0.0
Cl. 4514
0136, 3016
3014. 3015 66
63 280. 1 : 18.
63278. 1:18.
63283. 1:10.
63281. 1:18. 63285. 1:3.
Large Pattern Apparatus for Hertzian Wave Experiments.
63.278. 2 Parabolic concave Mirrors after Garbasso, Figure, 0.7 m high, 1.2 m aperture,
0.12 m
focal distance, composed of two wood formers and a mimber of well-rounded
nickelled sheet iron strips 27 cm long and 5 cm width 4. 10.
63.279. - -
idem, same size, after Zehnder, of three wood formers and a number of per-
pendicular wires, constructed as a wire mirror (Wieden. Ann. d. phys. Vol. 52, 1894, p. 55) 4. 10.
63.280. Octagonal Wire Grating in Wood Frame, 0.7x0.7 m, Figure, can be used verti-
cally and horizontally, stretched with copper wires 1. 4.0
63.281. Large Pitch Prism, Figure, with refracting angle of 30, 1.2 side length and m
0.7 mhigh, composed of three single prisms. Bach prism consists of a wood box into
which hard pitch is run in G. IL*. o
63.282. 2 Screens of Sheet Zinc on Wood Frames, 1 m long, 0.7 m high, for reflection experi-
ments Each 0.14.0 1. s. o
63.283. Primary Conductor after /Hinder, Figure, on special wood stand with levelling
screws (Wied. Ann. d. I'liysik, Vol. 52, 1894, p. 52) 2. 0.
The halves of the primary conductor are cylinders made of brass tubing, brass spheres being
soldered on one end and simple arched surfaces on the other. The conductor wires are secured 1>\
conical plugs. The primary conductor halve* are enclosed in a pasteboard box having a glass front wall.
t'l. 3020,3021,3023,
3022. 3024, 3025.
X... 63 287. Hertzian Experiments. Stationary Electric Waves. 1043
63 287. 1 : 8.
63.284. Secondary Conductor after Zehnder, Figure, on wood stand having leivellng s. d.
screws (Wied. Ann. Vol. 52, 1894, p. 53) 1. 4.
63.285. Discharge Tube after Zehnder, Figure 0. 18.
The tube has two leads for connecting with the secondary conductor halves and three leads for
connecting with the high-voltage accumulator or the shunt current of the induction coil replacing the
current of the accumulator (cf. Zehnder, Wied. Ann., Vol. 47, 1892, pp. 77 and 90; Vol. 49, 1893, pp. 549
and 724; Vol. 52, 1894, p. 34).
High-voltage Storage Batteries: see p. 856.
63.286. Apparatus for demonstrating and measuring Stationary Electric Waves on Wires
after Lecher, Figure (Wied. Ann., Vol. 41, 1890, p. 850), without Lecher tube or
induction coil 6. 0.
The apparatus consists of two pairs of zinc disc 400 mm

diameter, fixed on insulating stand and
provided with connecting terminals; two of these discs are capable of motion so as to be able to vary
the mutual distance of the discs. At the centre of the baseboard is the spark gap formed of two 30 mm
In a^s spheres, 7.5mm distance apart, these spheres being nickelled and fixed on ebonite pillars. These
discharge spheres are in direct connection willi the two fixed zinc discs by wires, and wires 1 mm thick
lead from the movable zinc discs to two terminals, on ebonite pillars, at a mutual distance of 300 mm.
From here two parallel running wires 9 m long lead to a heavy, adjustable iron pillar stand. Of the
two wire clips, provided with ebonite insulating knobs, one is arranged for suspension and for easily
sliding along, and the other for fixing by screws.
(>:!. i>7. --idem, modified by Weinhold (W. D. Fig. 609 and 610 [554 and 555]), without
Lecher tube or induction coil, Figure 2. 10.
Cl. 3030.
3580. 66*
1044 Voltaic Electricity. Section 10: Electrical Oscillations. No. 63 288 -
63 288. 1 : 6.
63289. 1:8.
63 291. 1 : 15.
s. d.
63,288. Lecher Tube for Apparatus Nos. 63,28663,287 0. 4.0
63.289. Apparatus after Walter Biegon von Czudnochowsky, for demonstrating stationary
Electric Waves on Wires, Figure; simple pattern (Ztschr. f. d. phys. u. chem. II. 16,
1903, p. 345); without tube or spark coil 2. 0.0
Two foot terminals No. 60,172 ( 0. 6. each) and a helium tube No. 63,295 are necessary for
the experiments with this apparatus.
t
63.290. Exciter for stationary Wire Waves, after Grimsehl (Ztschr. f. d. phys. u. chem. U. 21,
1908, p. 9; Physik. Ztschr. 8, 1907, p. 485) 4. 0.
Supplied with the apparatus are: 2 copper wires, wire holder with terminals. 3 bridges and a
small helium tube.
63.291. Aron's Tube, Figure, for demonstrating electrical Oscillations (Wied. Ann., 45,
p. 553, 1892,) without exciter or induction coil 1. 16.
Oneof the experimental arrangements similar to Lecher's is used. From the secondary zinc
plates opposite the exciter plates, at a mutual distance of 30 mm, two 2 thick aluminium wires mm
are conducted parallely 3.5 m
through the air and 2.5 through the 60 m
diameter Aron tube, the mm
wire in the tube being of the same length as that outside. The glass tube is connected by a length
of tubing with the water air pump and evacuated to a pressure of 10 20 mercury column. mm
With this arrangement the tube is usually .seen to light up over its entire length in the darkened
room. If, however, the free portion of the leads is bridged over, the light is generally extinguished.
By sliding the bridge, however, it is possible to generate stationary electric waves so that the tube
shows one more or non-luminous nodal points.
63.292. Apparatus after Ooolidge-Blondlot, for demonstrating electric Waves, Figure

(Wied. Ann. 67, 1899, p. 578^, consisting of a modified Blondlot Exciter with ebonite
protecting jacket, on stand with glass pillar, a Tension Device on stand, 2 Copper
Wires cadi 0,2 mm
thick and 5.5 m
long, and 6 Bridges of different size 4. 0. d
In this apparatus use is made either of a Lecher Tube at bridge or wires lighting up in vaeuo
are employed, but the waves are visible by the luminesence of the wires in free air.
In order to obtain as strong oscillations in the secondary circuit of the exciter as is po>-il>]e.
the exciter is of the same size as the primary oscillating circuit and is brought as near to it as possible.
With a view to attaining this the two circuits are separated simply by mica plates of a total thickness
of '2 mm and are contained in an oil bath, thus preventing any sparking over in the secondary. The
primary circuit is constructed in two parts, the distance apart being regu'ated by insulating screws
fitted on the ebonite cover of the appara.ni-
The following are necessary for working the apparatus: 1 Induction Coil of l.">o 2(Hi mm spark-
length; 1 spark Micrometer No. 63,208 or 63,209; 1 High-tension Transformer \o. (i:>.^10 and 1 Leyden
Jar No. (ii>..VS-_>.
Directions for use sent on application.
>(>. Leyden Jar, height 26 cm, with terminals 1 . 0.
63,293. Wavemeter after Drude, with air condenser for determining the period of oscillation
and, consequently, the wave-length in the oscillation circuits for wireless telegraphy
(I)rudes Annalen, 9, 1902, p. 615), Figure. Without vacuum tube 5. 0.
The apparatus consists of a small air condenser with two 1 mm thick parallely stretched copper
wires connected to it, these wires being fixed to a wood baseplate m long. An electrodeless vacuum -1
tube is used as indicator. \Vuve-lengths from \~2 to .">< in can be determined with ease.
Cl. 3581.3031.
3n.n.
No. 63301. Stationary electric Waves. 1045
63294. 1:8.
63 292. 1 : 7.
63 293. 1 : 15.
03. 294. Wavemeter after Drude, with oil condenser, especially for determining the duration l.
of oscillation of wire coils (Drudes Ann., 9, 1902, p. 293), Figure, without helium
tube 8. 0.
63,294 a. Tesla Transformer with Leyden Jar, after Drude, for above (Drudes Ann., 9, 1902,
p. 293) 2. 8.
63. 295. Helium Tube for vise with the Drude Wavemeters, Pliicker form with two electrodes 0.15/0
03.296. -- idem, with one electrode 0. 14.

j
- - d e m,
03.297. i without electrode 0. 12.
- - d e m,
03.298. i
cylindrical pattern with one electrode 0. 14.
03.299. Apparatus for Measuring the Dielectric Constant of Liquids, after Drude (Wied. Ann.,
61, 1897, p. 466) 5. 0.
03.300. --id e m, after Schmidt, for determining the Dielectric Constant of Crystals (Drudes
Ann., 9, 1902, p. 919) 5. 0.
63.301. Model after (iarbasso. for Explaining the Hertzian Resonance Phenomena (Ztschr. t.
d. phys. u. chem. U. 15, 1902, p. 331, Fig. 7; Fr. phys. Techn. I, 2, Fig. 3284) . . 13. 0.0
Cl. 3582, 4695.

urn;..
1046 Voltaic Electricity. Section 10: Wireless Telegraphy (Radio-telegraphy). No. 63 302 -
63 302 A. 1:5.
63 302 B. 1:8.
63 305 A. 1 : 7.
63 305 B. 1:7.
Wireless Telegraphy (Radio-telegraphy).
(a) Apparatus for small-scale Experiments. L s. d.
63,302. Wireless Telegraphy Demonstration Apparatus, consisting of a Transmitting Station,

Fig. A, with radiator and 2 resonators; and a Receiving Station, Fig. B, with coherer.
tapper and '2 resonators 2. S. (I
The apparatus is very efficient -it short distances. The spark is generated either liy a Miiall
induction coil of 30 50 mm spark length or by an influence machine. One cell is necessary fin-
working tin- secondary station. An accurate description i> appended to each apparatus.
63,305. Wireless Telegraphy Demonstration Apparatus, perfected pattern; consisting of a

Transmitting Station, Fig. A, with an oscillator having three spark gaps and two reso-
nators; and a Receiving Station, Fi<r. M, with coherer, relax, tapper, _ resonators and
terminals for two circuits 5. 0.
Cl. 3041.
3042.
3013.
3044.
No. 63310. Wireless Telegraphy. 1047
63 309 A. 1:7.
f
63 308. 1 : 15.
63 309 B. 1:7.
s. d.
63.308. Apparatus for comparative Explanation of Wireless and Ordinary Telegraphy, Figure 2. 4.
For explaining ordinary telegraphy the apparatus is assembled as in the illustration. Instead
of the push the .simple connecting wire given in with the apparatus can be inserted at the point of inter-
ruption so that the bell works continuously. After the push is inserted the modus operandi of the
house telegraph should be explained. Between push and bell any length of conductor can be supposed;
such a conductor is absolutely necessary in this arrangement for connecting the transmitting and
receiving station.
If instead of the push the coherer supplied is inserted, the entire apparatus represents the
receiver only in a wireless telegraphy system. The coherer establishes a local circuit if the spark
from an induction coil, an influence machine, or the like, is allowed to spring over in the same room.
A conductor is not necessary between transmitter and receiver.
63.309. Wireless Telegraphy Demonstration Apparatus after Marconi; comprising a Trans-

mitting Station, Fig. A, with Eighi radiator of 100 and 40 mm
size of sphere, in a lock-up
polished carrying case fitted with handle; and a Receiving Station, Fig. B, with one
coherer, 1 polarised relay, 1 electric tapper, 2 resonators, 2 switches and 4 dry cells, in
polished lock-up carrying case having four levelling screws and handle 13. 0.
The apparatus is specially suitable for better-class schools and colleges.
63.310.
- -
idem, smaller, with Rigid radiator 80 and 30 mm size of spheres, cf. Fig. 63,309 A
and B 10. 0.
Cl. 4125, 3045,

3046.
1048 Voltaic Electricity. Section 10: Wireless Telegraphy (Radio-telegraphy). NO. 63 siz-
es 312 A. 1:4.
63 312 B. 1:4. 62 329. 1 : 5.
;/!..'!!:.'.Portable Apparatus for demonstrating Wireless Telegraphy. Fiys. A and H: comprising

a Transmitting Station with Hirhi radiator in polished lock-up wood box
230x195x150 mm: and a Receiving Station with .Marconi coherer, a sensitive, adjustable
polarised relay, an electric tapper. 2 switches and 1 dry cells, also in polished lock-up
wood box L'.'io I'.C, , 15(1 mm 14.0.0.
(
'iniiplrtr description of the :i|>]>;n:il us -cut on ;i]>)>lic;ilioii.
(I. 3053,
3047,
30.14, 2619.
Xo. 63 32;>. Wireless Telegraphy. 1049
63 323 A. 1:13. 63 323 B. 1:13.
s. d.
63,317. Electric Bell for calling . ...... '. .................. 0. 4.0
62.326. Morse Ink Writer, small pattern, cf. Fig. 62,325, p. 959, without cell ...... 2. 0.0
62.327. Morse Ink Writer, with clockwork, on polished mahogany board, Figure on p. 959 4. 0.0
63,319.
- - i d e m, with one bell and two switches combined on one board, Figure. . 5. 0.0
61,147. Morse Key, Fig. on p. 868 .......................... 0.10.0
63,323. Complete Wireless Telegraphy Demonstration Apparatus after Prof. Braun, Figs. A
and B. without induction coil, -Morse key. Morse wiiter, or cells .......... 26. 0.0
The transmitting
station contains a spark gap, a Leyden jar battery, a transformer, and a mass
2.5 m
high with transmitting wire and an anti-capacity for same. The mass is constructed of bamboo,
being composed of three parts which can be inserted in each other. The jib at the end of the mass
t\v<> pulleys in order to allow of the
transmitting wire being drawn up.
The receiving station, in addition to containing the mass with the receiving wire and anti-
capacity, has an oscillation circuit formed of a condenser and self-induction coil, the coherer, the
relay, a bell, the tapper and a small auxiliary condenser.
An induction coil having a spark-length of only 30 mm is sufficient to work the apparatus.
Complete description is appended to each apparatus.
As Morse Writer No. 62,327 can be used or, better still, the following:
(>:.'. .".29.Standard Ink Writer, Figure, with detachable spring drum, horizontal paper roll in
the base (which can be removed), on polished mahogany socket .......... 12.10.0
62.332. Extra price for Automatic Release, very practical ............... 1.10.0
63,325. Coherer Tester ............................... 1. 0.0
Cl. 3049,3049'.
1050 Voltaic Electricity. Section 10: Wireless Telegraphy (Radio-telegraphy). No. 63 326
63 326 A. l : r>.
63 326 B. 1:5.
63,326. Complete Wireless Telegraphy Demonstration Apparatus after SLaby-Arco, Figs. A D, *
with aerials as in No. 63,327 21. 0.
The Transmitting Station consists of an induction coil with platinum intenupter, adjustable
spark gap, 2 Leyden Jars, a variable self-induction coil and a Morse key.
The Receiving Station contains a tuning coil, a small condenser, a relay, a coherer, the tapper
and a dry cell.
Morse Ink Writers, <!'. Nos. 62,327, 62,329 and 62,332.

A complete description of the apparatus forwarded on application.
Fig. A, Trans-
1
<;:;. .".I 7. Wireless Telegraphy Demonstration Apparatus, "Telefunken" System;
mitter; Fig. B, Receiver; Fig. C, Transmitter and aerial system; without Morse Writer
or Alarm 23. (i.
The connections of this apparatus are in exact accordance with the modern method of eon
necting up this system, such as employed in the larger Telefunkon plants having high frequency
oscillation circuits.
The apparatus comprises a complete Transmitting and Receiving Apparatus (without Writer)
and receiving. The table included in the illustration
also two identical aerial systems for transmitting
is not covered by the above price.
Description and instruction!, for use on application.
Suitable Morse Ink Writers: see under Xos. 62,327, 62,329 and 62,:;.;i'.
Cl. 3051,
SOW.
No. 63330. Wireless Telegraphy. 1051
Spark 0>p
--0 O Tapper
BO,
Hammer
Interrupter n I
Switch I
I
ells ; ,
I
i -(k-"4
J
Tuning Coil
Short Circuited Spark Gap

Avnai of Connections of the Receiving Station of the
Diagram
Diagram of Connections of the Transmitting Station Slaby-Arco system.
of the Slaby-Arco system.
63 326 D.
63 326 C.
63 327 A. 1:5.
63 327 B. 1:5.
63 327 C. 1:20. 63 328. 1 : 5.

s. d.
63.328. Branly Tube, Figure, filled with small iron screws, for demonstration .... 0. 16.
63.329. Automatic Needle Coherer after Bleckrode 0. 6.0

nd
63.330. Coherer after Pantenius (Kolbe, Elek.-Lehre, 2 Edn., Vol. 2, 1905, Fig. 80A) . . 1. 4.0
Cl. 6598, 65M9,
8583,
3584.
3585, 3870.
1052 Voltaic Electricity. Section 10: Wireless Telegraphy (Radio- telegraphy). No. 63331
63332,63333. 1:7. 63 337. 1 = 3.
s. d.
63.331. Thermocouple, F g u i r e, after Rubens, can be used MS a Wave Detector .... 1. 0.

As galvanometer for above use can be made of an astatic or a moving-coil mirror galvanometer
of low resistance and high sensitivity.
Valve Tube as Audion (Wave Detector): see under Xo. 63,136, p. 1024.
(b) Small-cale Apparatus for Wireless Telegraphy.

63.332. Righi Radiator, Figure, consisting of baseboard and two ebonite pillars on tin-
free ends of eaeli of which a brass rod with brass sphere rotates in hinges, together \\ith
terminals, but without the accessories illustrated 2. 0.
63.333. Key, Figure, with extra-thick platinum contacts and long ebonite push . . . "2. -2.
63.334. Key, Figure, for heavy currents 1.12.0

The key is such manner that the arc formed on interrupting, and forced upwards
arranged in
by its own heal. is not deleterious to the apparatus. One of the contacts is interchangeable, bi'in.':
made of carbon; it must always be connected with the positive pole of the current lead.
The key. which is specially adapted for working induct inn coils having Wehnelt Interrupter, is
nl extraordinary resisting powers as constructed.
63.335. Morse Key for currents to 50 amperes. Figure, with thick platinum contacts and
electromagnetic spark extinguisher 8. 0.0
The key is intended for heavy currents as produced when working the induction coil with the
\Velmeli break.
63.336. Adjustable Steel Coherer, with filling material 1. 6.0
63.337. Device for Clipping and Shaking the Coherer, Figure, suitable for Cohere] No. 63,336.
Price without Coherer 3. 10.
63.338. Round pattern polarised Relay, Figure, having resistance of approx. 7,0(10 ohms,
with four polarising cells for preventing sparking 9. 0.0
-
( 1. 4675. 3058, 3059.
3055. 6171.
No. 63 348. Wireless Telegraphy. 1053
MAX KQHL CHEMMTZ
63 338. 1 : .->. 63 341. 1 : 10.
63 340. 1:10. 63 345. 1 : 4.
63,3:59. Round Relay No. 63,3.38,Coherer No. 63,336, and Shaking Device No. 63,337, mounted s. d.
together on one polished mahogany slab, with all leads and the necessary terminals 15. 0.0
Standard Ink Writers: see Nos. 62,329/32, p. 1049.
63.340. Assembled Receiving Station, Figure, comprising 1 adjustable steel Coherer

No. 63,336, 1 clip and shaking device No. 63,337 for same, 1 round pattern polarised
relay No. 63,338, and 1 standard ink writer No. 62,329 with automatic release No. 62,332,
mounted together on one polished mahogany board 29. 10.
63.341. Magnetic Detector after Marconi, Figure, complete with telephone and 110 Volt
D. C. motor 11. 0.0
This apparatus splendidly adapted for demonstrations.
is
If a motor for different voltage or current is desired, this should be stated when ordering.
63.345. Zickler Tube for opto-electric Telegraphy, Figure, with quartz plate and adjustable
quartz lens (Ztschr. f. d. phys. u. chem. U. 12, 1899, p. 43; E. T. Z., 1898, pp. 474
and 487) 3. 0.0
Opto-electric Telegraphy by Zickler's method is based on the phenomenon of a spark gap allowing
he sparks to pass when submitted to radiation from ultra-violet light, the sparking ceasing, however,
i
when radiation is stopped. The spark gap is enclosed in an evacuated glass tube having a quartz
window at one end in front of this window is fitted a sliding, convex, quartz lens which condenses the
;
ultra-violet rays on the cathode. The ultra-violet rays are shut off by inserting a thick glass plate in
the luminous pencil of the arc lamp.
As to the source of light to use, an electric arc lamp (say, that of a projection lantern), the
condenser of which has been removed, is sufficient for demonstration purposes. For condensing the
light on the tube it is advisable to use the following quartz lens when the distance in question is
somewhat large.
63.346. Quartz Lens 38 mm diameter 0. 12.
63.347. Glass Plate, 200x150x8 mm 0. 3.0
63,348. Geissler Tube for Zickler's opto-electric Telegraphy 0. 3.

The
Geissler tube is put in series with the induction coil and spark gap. While the Geissler Tube
only gives a dull glow when there is no sparking over in the Zickler tube, it lights up much brighter
with the passage of sparks.
Cl. 2623, 3048,

3057.3061.
1054 Voltaic Electricity. Section 11 : Telephony and Microphony. No. 63360
53 587 B. 1:4.
53 587 A. 1 = 4.
63 360. 1 : 7. 63362. 1:4. 63 369. 1 : 4.
Section 11: Telephony and Microphony.

53,587. Telephone after Ph. Beis, consisting of transmitter, Fig. 53.587 A, and Eeceiver,
s. d.
Fig. 53,587B
4. 0.0
Between transmitter and receiver called by Reis himself the reproducing apparatus a bat in y
is so connected up that the two are traversed in series by the current. The latter should be of such
strength that the armature of the small magnet on the transmitter is attracted; for this purpose
3 4 Bunsen cells or storage cells should suffice, according to the distance between both stations.
63.360. Apparatus for Explaining the of the Telephone,

Working (Ztschr. f. d. Figure
phys. u. chem. IT.
2, p. 133; Kolbe, Einf. i. d. Elektrizitatslehre, Vol. 2, Fig. 78 A) 2. 2.0
The apparatus consists of two powerful bar magnets on to which two wire coils are slipped; the
coils are connected with each other. In front of one of the magnets a small iron piece is suspended
so as to be capable of oscillation. If the thick iron plate given in with the apparatus is brought up
to the other at regular intervals (say, to the beat of the pendulum oscillation) until it makes
magnet
contact, and then removed, the small iron piece in front of the first magnet is set into oscillatory
is
motion, which can be increased until the iron piece is finally attracted by the magnet.
63.361. Telephone in Glass Case. Figure, with ebonite mountings; all internal parts quite
'
visible 0.16.0
Figure, in ebonite sheath with double flexible 0.12.0

63.362. Telephone after Bell,
63,367. Round Pattern Telephone, F g i u r e, double-pole, with niekelled cap, ebonite mouth-
niece and twin flexible 0. 8.0
63.369. Receiver with lateral ear-piece, F i g u i e, with horse-shoe magnet, niekelled di.i-
16.0
plintgm case, ebonite piece and twin flexible
().
thoroughly well constructed

Figure, 1. 0.0
63.370. Precision Telephone,
63.373. 20 metres Twin Flexible, with wire ends for connecting up
two telephones . . 0. 6.
Fig. 600 [549J) 6.0

63.374. Microphone after Weiuho'd, simple, Figure (W. I). 0.
lh
63.375. Microphone after Hughes. Figure (M. P., <l
Kdn., Ill, Fig. 800)
Cl. 1178, 3066 3068,
0. 8.
1177,
3500, 3067 3069.
Xov 63 379. Telephony and Microphony. 1055
63 374. 1:5.
63370. 3:10.
63378. 1:10.
63 375. 1 : 5. 63 379. 1 : 8.
63.377. Model of a Micro-telephone Station, Figure, excellently adapted for demonstration s. d.
purposes . 2.10.0
The model can be worked and gives good results. A microphone is built open upon a polished
baseplate, being fitted totwo pillars and rotating about a horizontal axis. In addition the board is
fittedwith all the necessary leads and terminals, an induction coil, the secondary winding of which
can be moved along a perpendicular slide so as to be able to vary the inductive action.
In addition, two telephones pertain to the apparatus. One of these telephones is built in section
and can be taken to pieces to show the internal construction. Supplied with the apparatus is twelve
metres twin telephone flexible with pin ends.
63.378. Model of a complete Telephone Installation, consisting of two stations, Figure,

very comprehensive and quite workable. The connections are in accordance with those
usually adopted in practice for domestic and factory installations 7.10.0
63,379. Apparatus for Telephonic Lecture Experiments, after Dr. Heilbrun, Figure (E. T.
Z., 1908, p. 341), with two different microphones, precision telephone, and a phono-
graph cylinder j
9. 0.
The apparatus consists of a phonograph, the sound pin of this being connected with a microphone.
It is thus possible to transmit to some distance the musical selection, etc., contained on the record.
The apparatus is very well adapted also for demonstrating the difference in action of different micro-
phones and telephones. It is practicable to insert a galvanometer (preferably No. 61,528) in the circuit.
Cl. 3070, 3074, 6127,
3079,
3075, 5200.
1056 Voltaic Electricity. Section 11: Telephony and Microphony. Xo. 63 380
63 380. 1 : 6. 63 381. 1 : 4.
1 : 4. 63 383. 1 : 6.
63,38(1. Loud-speaking Telephone, Figure, consisting of an extra-sensitive Microphone

with large induction coil, a Precision Telephone with sound horn, three large Dry Cells
and 20 m
insulated Twin Flexible ...'... 4. 0.
The loud effect of the Telephone is excellent; s) -li. son.a'. and whistling are reproduced
verv loud.
63,381. Micro-telephone Station for short-distance work (in same house, etc.), for battery
Figure, with granular carbon microphone, stem telephone, bell with steel dome,
automatic hook switch, induction coil, key and terminals, in polished walnut case. Each 1. 0.
For the microphone and call together two cells No. 60,787 per station are necessary.
63.382. -
idem, for magneto-call, Figure Kaeli 2. 8.
One cell (No. 60,787) per station is necessary for the microphone.
Stations NOB. 63,381 and 63,382 are very practical for connecting >eparate r us l>iivctor'~ (
room and porter's dwelling). Except for the wire material (No. ti2.:t.~>i. p. mil) and the cells, nothing
further is necessary. The erecting can be dune without special preliminary knowledge.
C'l. 3080, 79 K.
80 F, 6011.
No. 63389. Telephony. Telephonograph. Speaking Arc Lamp. 1057
63 384 A. 63 384 B.
63.383. Telephonograph after Poulsen, for permanently fixing and conveniently repeating a s. d.
telephonic conversation, (cf. E. T. Z., 1901, p. 57, 181; Drudes Annalen d.

Figure
Physik, 3, 1900, p. 754), with microphone for transmitting, two telephones for receiving,
and the necessary cells, also two steel discs and demagnetizing device 11. 0.
The
fluctuations in a current produced by a microphone are carried through a magnetizing coil,
which guided over a hardened steel plate in a spiral line, in a similar manner as employed in gramophones.
is
The fluctuations in magnetization of the steel plate which are permanently recorded, suffice to induce
currents in the coil of the magnet when the latter is again guided over the steel plate, these currents
giving in the telephone an accurate and surprisingly plain reproduction which can be repeated at
will of the sounds originally conducted into the microphone.
63.384. Demonstration Apparatus for Wireless Telegraphy with electric Waves, consisting of
a Transmitting Station, Fig. A, and a Receiving Station, Fig. B, for single direction
working 27. 10.
Direct Current at 220 volts is necessary for working. Complete description sent on application.
- - two stations which can both transmit and

63.385. idem, consisting of receive, for reci-
procal working 37. 10.
Complete Apparatus for Experiments with the Speaking Arc Lamp, Figure on p. 1058,
consisting of:
50,892. Arc Light Hand Regulator (D. C. of at least 80 volts and 10 amps is necessary) . i
2. 2.0
63.386. Series Resistance for the Arc Lamp, for connecting to 110 120 Volts 0. 18.
Or:
63.387. Series Resistance for the Arc Lamp for connecting to 220 volts 2. 0.
63.388. Self-induction Coil 2. 10.
63.389. Microphone with Switch and Eegulating Eesistance 2. 0.
Cl. 81AF, 81BP.

67
1058 Voltaic Electricity. Section 11: Telephony and Microphony. No. 63 390
63 395, 50 892, 63 386, 63 388, 63 389. 1 : 8.
Complete Apparatus for Experiments with the Speaking Arc Lamp after Weinhold (W. D., <i
Fig. 601), consisting of:
Arc Light Hand Regulator and Resistance: see Nos. 50,892, 63,386 and 63,387, p. 1057.
63.390. Induction Coil, Figure 3. 4.
63.391. Microphone with Switch and Regulating Resistance, and 1 Fuse with simple current
indicator for same 3. 0.
Additional Apparatus for above so as to be able to demonstrate the automatically singing

(whistling) arc lamp also, consisting of:
63.392. Small Induction Coil (W. D., Fig. 604), with aluminium ring for Thomson's Experiment 0. 16.
61,122. Switch 0. :5. (i
63.393. Paper Condenser in wimple wood box, approx. 8 mfd 2. o. o
63.394. Staged Paper Condenser, with four steps, for use instead of No. 63,393; this permits
of obtaining a simple melody with the arc (electric piano) since the pitch varies with
the capacity cut in 6. 0.
Apparatus for Demonstrating Photophony, Figures, consisting of:
50,892. Arc Light Hand Regulator (I). C. of at least 80 volts and 10 amps, is necessary) . 2. 2.0
63,3S(i. Series Resistance for Arc Lamp, for 110 volts, Figure 0.18.0
63.387. Series Resistance for Arc Lamp, for 220 volts 2. 0.
63.388. Self-induction Coil, Figure 2.10.0
Cl. 3087.
No. 63398. Speaking Arc Lamp. Photophone. 1059
63 390. 1 : 4.
63 397, 63 370. 1 : 8.
63 398. 1 : 6
s. d.
63,389. Microphone with Switch and Eegulating Eesistance 2. 0.0
63.395. Condenser Lens on Stand 2. 0.0
63.396. Water Box for protecting the Selenium Cell from too great a heat 1. 0.0
63.397. Concave Mirror with Selenium Cell, Figure. Price exclusive of battery illustrated
and of telephone 5. 10.
63,370. Precision Telephone 1. 0.
Xos. 50,892 63,395 form the Transmitting Station, and NOB. 63,396, 63,397 and 63,370 the Re-
ceiving Station. Tlif source of current can be provided from 15 to 20 accumulators or 20 to 26 dry
jells, or other suitable cells in series.
63,398. Photophonic Transmitting Station for Acetylene Light, Figure, with manometric
capsule with sound horn, with pointed burner and interchangeable parabolic reflector;
including also Acetylene Generator and short length of rubber tubing ....... 4. 4.
A small acetylene flame at the focus of the concave mirror is influenced by the sound waves
striking on the manometer capsule, the variations in intensity of the flame being propagated as a
parallel bundle of light and being transformed again into sound waves by the secondary station
No. 63,397.
As Receiving Station for above use is made of Nos. 63,397 and 63,370.
Cl. 5358, 1961,
1960. 67*
1060 Voltaic Electricity. Section 11: Telephony and Microphony. No. 63 lOO-
eS 400. 1 : 7.
63402. 2:5. 63 403. 1 : 2. 63407.
63.400. Photophonic Apparatus for Acetylene Light, for showing the sensitivity of Selenium s. d.
to Light, Figure, mounted on board, with manometric capsule, sound horn, pointed
burner, highly sensitive Selenium cell and reflector, switch and terminals; including
Acetylene Generator but not battery or telephone 6. 0.0
The apparatus constructed in a like manner to No. 63,398, the only difference being that a
is
Selenium cell and a spherical reflector take the place of the parabolic reflector. To complete the
apparatus there should be a source of current (see remark to No. 63,397) and a telephone No. 63,370.
Battery and Telephone are put in series with the Selenium Cell. It can be shewn that the transmission
of the sound waves only results from the fluctuations in light by the fact that transmission ceases
when an opaque body is held between acetylene flame and Selenium Cell.
- -
63.401. idem, with a Parabolic Reflector, which can be fitted instead of the Selenium
Cell so as to be able to use the apparatus as a photophonic transmitting station also,
in accordance with Fig. 63,398 6. 10.
Selenium Cells.
63.402. Selenium Cell, flat rectangular shape, in wood box, Figure, from 20,000 to
80,000 ohms resistance. The ratio of resistances in brightly lighted and darkened state
is at least 1 : 10
Selenium Cells, round pattern, with metal slide, Figure:

List No. 63 03 63,404
Diameter of Aperture 25 mm
1.16.0
63,406. Stand with joint, for Nos. 63,40263,405

No. 63414. Selenium cells. Thermo-electricity. 1061
63 411. 1 : 4. 63 412. 1 : 4.
63408,63409. 1:5. 63 410. 1 : 7. 63 414. 1 : 4.
63,407. Selenium Cell, cylindrical, in evacuated glass tube with ebonite mount and
'
s. a.
terminals,
Figure 3.15.0
63,408. Flat Selenium Cell, maximum sensitivity, in metal casing with slide, Figure, without
stand; resistance, unilluminated, say, 100,000 ohms 4. 0.0
63.409. Stand for above, Figure 0. 5.
63.410. Apparatus for Shewing the Sensitivity of Selenium to Light, Figure, consisting of:
1 Selenium Cell, 1 polarised Eelay of variable sensitivity, 2 Dry Cells, 1 electric Bell,
2 Switches: all mounted together on one polished mahogany stand 6. 0.
In addition to the two dry cells supplied with the apparatus, which are used for working the
bell, a 15 20 volt battery is necessary for the Selenium Cell. When the box of the Selenium Cell is
opened in bright light, the bell rings, and ceases when the box is closed.
Section 12: Thermo-electricity. Miscellanea.

63.411. Thermo-electric Apparatus after Seebeck, Figure, consisting of a copper stirrup s. d.
soldered on a bismuth rod, on stand, with a magnetic needle (M. P., 9 th Edn., Ill,
Fig. 812; W. u. E. phys. Prakt., 4
th
Edn., Fig. 326) 0.16.0
63.412. Thermo-electric Rectangle, Figure, of antimony and bismuth, on stand, with one
magnetic needle 0. 16.
63.413. Rod-shaped Thermocouple, of antimony and bismuth, with terminals soldered on 0. 8.0
63.414. Thermocouple after Pouillet, Figure, on adjustable stand (M. P., 9

th
Edn., Ill,
Fig. 816) 1. 0.0
To the ends of a bismuth rod, provided with rectangular arms, copper wires are soldered, which
lead to two insulated terminals fastened on the apparatus. The form of the thermocouple permits
of the two junctions being immersed in liquids of different temperatures.
Cl. 3092, 3093,

5106, 1955, 3094.
1062 Section 12: Thermo-electricity. Miscellanea. No. 63416
63417. 1 : 5!
52 069. 1 : .-,. 63416. 1:2. 63 418. 1 : 2.
63419. 1:3. 63420. 1:8.
52,069. Rotating Thermocouple for the Whirling Table, Figure, cylindrical pattern, of *
iron and German silver, with spring contacts sliding on the cylinder 0. !.">.<>
On rotating, heating in the cylinder takes place by the friction of the spring, the friction causing
a current, which flows from iron to German silver or vice-versa according to the position of the spring.
63.416. Needle-shaped Thermocouple, Figure (M. P., 9

lh
Edn., Ill, Fig. 825), for intro-
ducing into plant and animal tissues 0. 10.
63.417. Thermocouple, F i
g u r e, after Friedr. C. G. Miiller (M. T., Fig. 234), of iron and
constantan 0. 8.
63.418. Thermo-cell, F i
g u r e, after Friedr. C. G. Muller (M. T., Fig. 233) 0. 1. 8
63.419. Thermo-pile after Melloni, Figure, Demonstration Model, with three bismuth-
antimony cells on stand, with two terminals 0.18.0
63.420. Apparatus for Determining Temperature with Thermocouple, Figure (\V. u. E.

th
phys. I'rakt., 4 Edn., Fig. 327), with adjustable stand, L> baths and 2 thermometers L'. 10.
The thermocouples consist of an approx. 3 mm thick German silver wire which at a and resper- \>
tively is soldered to a copper wire of same thickness; glass tubes are slipped over the vertical ends
of these copper wires at a and b and reach to the junctions. The junctions themselves are immersed
in reagent glasses Tilled with paraffin oil or petroleum. The sheet iron vessels are filled with water and
are provided with thermometers.
Cl. 3883,
Thermo-piles for Charging Accumulators: see p. s.v.i 680.3006,4522,
Thermo-piles for Shewing Thermal Differences: see Section "Heat". 2098, 3097.
N o.
7
63 431 Thermo-electricity. 1063
63 428. 1 : 5.
63 422. 1 : 5.
63425. 1:11. 63 441. 1 : 7.
Noe's Thermopiles, Figure (M. P., 9 th Edn., Ill, Fig. 835), the e. m. f. of a cell is
approx. 0.06 volt, that of a pile of 25 cells, for example, equalling 1.5 volt:
List No. 63,421 63,422 63,423
Number of Cells 12 20 25
0.15.0 1.4.0 1.10.0
- -
63.424. idem, larger model, with 25 cells
These thermo-piles have the cells arranged star-shaped and are supplied without heating device.
They can be heated with any Bunsen Burner or spirit lamp.
63.425. 2 Thermopiles after Noe, consisting of 20 cells each, with 2 spirit Bunsen burners,
>'ii (SUV
Thermopiles
1064 Section 12: Thermo-electricity. Miscellanea. No. 63 442
63 445.
63 443. 1 : 4. 63 446.
63 442. 1 : 6. 63447.
63.442. Electrothermic Apparatus after Schumann, Figure (M. P., 9 th Edn., Ill,
s. d.
Fig. 842) 2. 0.0

Bismuth rods are soldered on to both sides of an antimony rod. The junctions are enclosed in
the bulbs of two air thermometers, so that the Joule effect is produced in both bulbs in the same
manner, but the Peltier effect in the opposite manner. The liquid pointer gives opposite deflections
when opposite currents are conducted through.
63.443. idem, smaller, Figure, for objective projection 1.12.0

The tubes with the liquid indicators are fitted in front of a transparent scale in order to render
the phenomenon simultaneously visible to all the audience.
The Peltier Effect can also be shewn with the Kolbe Differential and Double Thermoscope
(see "Heat" Section).
63.444. Thermocouple after Wunder (Ztschr. f. d. phys. u. chem. U., 24, 1911), Figure
on p. 1065. The current density produced by heating the thermocouple is sufficient
to allow the magnet to carry an armature 1. 0.0
Mathematical Instruction Models.

63.445. Model after Meffert, for Explaining the Pythagorean Theorem, Figure 0. 18.
63.446. idem, different pattern, Figure 0.15.0

- -i d e m,
63,447. for proving the theorem that the areas of like polygons are as the squares
of homlogous sides, Figure 0. 8.0
Mineralogy.
100 Minerals, selected pieces, carefully chosen and arranged in compartment s :
List Xo. 63,452 63,453

Average Size of the Minerals, cm 5x6 7x9
2.10.0 4.5.0
The collection comprises: I. Elements: Graphite, Sulphur, Bismuth, Copper. II. Sulphides: Real-
gar, Antimonite, Native molybdenum-sulphide, Galena, Cinnabar, Zinc blende, Magnetic Pyrites, Red
Nickel Pyrites, Pyrite, Marcasite, Grey cobalt-ore, Arsenical Pyrites, Copper Pyrites, Fahlerz. Oxides: m.
Rock Crystal, Smoky Quartz, Amethyst, Quartz, Agate, Flint, Zirconium, Rutil, Tin Stone, Pyrolusite,
Psilomelane, Corundum, Emery, Iron-glance, Red Iron-stone Titanic Iron, Opal, Brown Iron-stone.
IV. Haloid Salts: Rock Salt, Fluorspar, Cryolite. Carnallite. V. Ahuninates, Ferrites, Borates: Spinel,
Magnetic Iron Ore, Boracite. VI. Nitrates, Carbonates: Sodium Nitrate, ('ale-spar (crystallised), Calc-
spar (cleavage piece), Dolomite Spar, Magnesite, Zinc-spar, Iron-spar. Aragonite, Strontianite, Cerussite,
Amalachite. VH. Sulphates, Tugstates: Anhydrite, Heavy Spar. Cnele-iin. Lead Snlphte. <;ypsum, Ala-
baster, Alunite, Seheelite, Wolframite. Vlll. Phosphates: Apatite, Phosphorite, Pyromorphite. IX. Sili-
cates: Cyanite, Topaz, Staurolite, Tourmaline, Kpidote, Vesuvian. Garnet, Olivin. Bronzite, Augite,
Actinolite, Hornblende. Nepheline. Xosean, Leucite, Orthoclase, Sanidin, Microglin. Albite, Oligoclase,
Labradorite, Natrolite, Desmine, Chabasite, Biotite, Muscovite, chlorite. Serpentine, Talc, Kaolinite.
X. Organic Compounds: Ozokerite. Asphalt, Anthracite, Coal.
This collection mav l>e subject to slight variation acconlini; to our stock of good pieces.
d. 6154,
408, 5152,
3109, 5153.
No. 63 463. Minerals. 1065
63 444.
63462 63463.
100 Minerals in lacquered wood box, with compartments: s. d.
List No. 63,455 63,456

Average Size of Minerals, cm 5x6 7x9
3. 5. 5. 10.
100 Minerals in finely polished wood box, with compartments:

List No. 63,458 63,459
Average Size of Minerals, cm 5x6 7x9
4. 0. 6. 0.
250 Minerals, collection for teaching purposes, Figure, the most important samples being
good and instructive specimens. Of the crystallised minerals stages or crystals are
selected which show plainly the characteristic crystallic shapes.
Average Size 5x7 7x9 cm
Without Box
(
{ Ligt ^ 63 46Q 63,461

15.0.0 24. 0.
In nice stained oak cabinet, with 5 drawers and ( List No. 63,462 63,463
small cardboard boxes, Figure . . . .
\ 18. 10. 28. 0.
I. Elements: Diamond, Graphite, Crystallised and heavy; Arsenic, Bismuth, Gold, Silver (wire
and sheet form), Copper. II. Sulphides: Realgar, Orpiment, Antimonite, Molybdenum-glance, Galena,
Crystallised, hexahedral and massive, Silver-glance, Copper-glance, Cinnahar, Zinc-blende, crystallised
and compact, Fibrous-blende, Magnetic Pyrites, Millerite, Red-Nickel Pyrites, Pyrite, hexahedral and
pyrito-hedral crystallised, Cobalt-glance, Grey cobalt ore, Marcasite, Arsenical Pyrites, Copper
Pyrites, crystallised and compact ;Variegated Copper ore, Antimony - silver - blende, Fahlerz.
in. Oxides: Rock Crystal, Smoky Quartz, Amethyst, Common Quartz, Cat's Eye, Tiger's
Eye, Ferruginous Quartz, Rose-quartz, Chalcedony, Agate, Jasper, Silicious Schist, Flint, Tridymite,
Zircon, Rutile, Anatase, Tin Stone, Pyrolusite, Psilomelane, Wad, Braunite, Hausmannite, Red copper
ore, Red tin-ore, Corundum, cryst. and Emery, Iron-glance, Red iron-stone, Red Hematite and Titanic
Iron, Hyalite, Opal, Silica, Bauxite, Goethite, Lepidokrokite, Brown iron-ore, Kidney ore, Manganite.
IV. Haloid Salts: Sylvine, Rock-salt, cleavage-piece and compact, Fluorspar, hexahed. cryst., octohed.
cryst., and cleavage-piece; Cryolite, Carnallite, Kainite, Atacamite. V. Aluminates, Ferrites, Borates:
Spinell, rare, blue and black, Franklinite, Magnetic iron-ore, octahed. cryst., duodecahed. cryst. and
compact (attractor); Chrysoberyll, Boracite, Tinkal. VI. Nitrates, Carbonates: Sodium nitrate, Calc-
spar, rhoinbohed., scalenohed. prismat. cryst., cleavage-piece and double spar, Marble, Compact Lime,
Calc-tuff, Chalk, Dolomite-spar, Magnesite, Zink-spar, Iron-spar, Sphaerosiderite, Carbonaceons Iron-
stone, Manganese-spar, Aragonite, chisel-shaped, acute pyramidal and triplet, Witherite, Strontionite,
Cerussite, Malachite, Vitreons Copper. VEL Sulphates, Chromates, Molybdates, Tungstates, Uranates:
Glauberite, Anhydrite, Heavy spar, col. cryst., white cryst. and compact; Coelestine, Lead Sulphate,
Gypsum, cryst. and cleavage-piece; Fibreous Gypsum, Alabaster, Alunite, Copper Sulphate (blue Cop-
peras), Red lead-ore, Scheelite, Wulfenite, Wolframite, Uranium-pitch ore. Vlll. Phosphates, Arseniates:
Monazite, Apatite, brown cryst., transp. cryst. and compact, Phosphorite, Staffelite, Pyromorphite,
brown and green; Pharmakolite, Cobalt-bloom (earthy), Wavellite, Kallaite. IX. Silicates. Titanates:
Andalusite, Chiastolite, Disthene, Rhaetizite, Topaz, Staurolite, Datolite, Tourmaline, black and red;
Axinite, Zoisite, Epidote, Vesuvian, Hessonite, common Granite, Melanite, Syrope, Almandine, Cor-
dierite, Beryl, Olivine, Silicious Zinc-ore, Dioptose, Chondrodite, Bronzite, Hypersthene, Wollastonite,
Diopside, Diallag, Augite (common cryst. and basaltic), Omphacite, Rhodonite, Anthophyllite, Tremolite,
Actinolite, Asbestos, Hornblende, comm. cryst. and basaltic, Glaukophane, Scapolite, Melilite, Nepheline,
Sodalite, Noseane, Hanyne, Lapis-lazuli, Leucite, Adular, Orthoclase, Karlsbad twins, Baveno Twin,
cleavage-piece and iridescent, Sonadin, Mikroline, Albite, Perikline, Oligoclase, Labradorite, Anorthite,
Apophyllite, Analcim, Natrolite, Prehnite, Stilbite, Desmine, Phillipsite, Chabosite, Biotite, Phlogopite,
Zinnwaldite, Lepidolite, Muscovite, Paragonite, Ottrelite, Chorite, Serpentine, rare and common, Meer-
schaum, Talc, Kaolinite, Pyrophyllite, Bolus, Sphene, green cryst. and brown (Titanite). X. Organic
Compounds: Mellite, Petroleum, Ozokerite, Amber, Asphalt, Anthracite, Coal, Brown-coal, Lignite, Peat.
In addition we supply any other desired collection of minerals: Prices on application.
Cl. 5068, 3592.

1066 Section 12: Miscellanea. Xo 63 472
b t ,c, = Octohedron.
Tesseral System.
63 472 B. a2 .
I),, c,
= Pointed :\
b,, c,
.
= Obtuse
quadrate Pyramid (21'). quadrate Pyramid (P).
63 472 C. 63 472 D.
= Obtuse
63 472 A. 1:8.
Rhombic Pyramid.
63 472 F.
= Aciltr
Rhombic Pyramid.
63 472 E.
''i- ''2 (&11 axes inclined

c, (inclined for- c, (inclined for- "2-
d = hexagonal
ward) = Acute mono ?li a,, b,, c,,
lie ward)^ Obtuse mono:linic towards each other) = Acute
triclinia Pyramid. Pyramid.
[Pyramid. Pyramid.
63 472 G. 63 472 H. 63J472J. 63 472 K.
63,472. Axial Cross after Nestler, Figs. A K, for demonstrating the fundamental forms . s. d.
of all six crystal systems (octohedra and pyramids) 1. 6.
All the axial halves consist of two tubes which telescope in each other and which can be firmly
clamped in different positions by a spring on the outer tube engaging in notches in the inner tube.
Elastics are drawn through the ends of the axes representing the edges of the pyramids.
Some examples
are shewn in Figs. 63,4728 63,472 K. In these the vertical axis is designated
by the others by b, c and d; and the individual rest-points of the vertical axis
a, reckoned from
the central point are designated by 0, 1, 2, 3, and those of the other axes by 1, 2, 3.
Collection of Copies of Precious Stones, Figure, ideal crystallization forms, imitated in

shape and colour, approx. 25 in size. mm
Number of Stones . 12 24 36 50 60 88
In Cardboard / List No. 63,473 63,474
Box ... I 0. 14. 1.4.0
f
List No. 63,479
In Case .
I 1.0.0
No. 6350.5. Minerals. 1067
63 480. 1 : 3. 63 486. 1 : 3.
63 489. 1 : 5. 63 499. 1 : 7.
63,487 12 Diamond Copies, the same as No. 63,486, together with Nassack, Pigott and s. d.
Pascha of Egypt 1. 10.
63.488. 15 Diamond Copies, the same as under Nos. 63,486 63,487, together with Shah,
Kaiserin Eugenie, Polar Star 1. 12.
63.489. 22 Diamond Copies, the same as under Nos. 63,486 63,488, Figure together with
Green Diamond of Dresden, Tiffany, Stewart, Diamant des Herrn (Dresden), Este, Star of
'
South Africa, Jubilee 2. 8.
Crystal Models of cut crystal glass, 30 70 mm in size, Figure:

No. of Specimens C 12 20 30 40 60 72 90
In Card- (List No. 63,490 63,491 63,492 63,493 63,494 63,495 63,496 63,497
board Box \ 0. 10. 0. 18. 1. 10. 2. 0. 2.12.0 3.15.0 4.10.0 5.10.0
Tnp fListNo. 63,498 63,499 63,500 63,501 63,502 63,503 63,504 63,505
e
\ 0. 18. 1. 14. 2. 8. 3. 4. 4. 2. 6. 10. 7. 10. 9. 0.
<'l. 3593, 3595,

3596, 3597.
1068 Section 12: Miscellanea. No. 63 507
63 507 A. 1:3. 63507B. 1:3.
63531. 1:5.
63.507. 15 Models of Crystals^composed of glass discs, with enclosed base of cardboard, s. d.
Fig. 63,507 A
or with axes of coloured threads, Fig. 63,507 B, well mounted and cemented;
size of the single crystals 15 25 cm 2. 10.
The collection contains the most important fundamental shapes.
63.508. 16 Models of Crystals, of glass, for demonstrating simple combinations of holohedrie

and hemihedric forms, the combinations of pasteboard, enclosed 4. 15.
63.509. 30 Models of Crystals, of glass, with coloured axes drawn in, representing the simple
fundamental forms, cf. Fig. 63 507 B, 15 25 cm in size 6. 0.
63.515. 10 Models of Crystals shewing the most important Intersecting Doublets; the various
single crystal individuals fitted by glass of different tint for demonstration, 15 25 cm
in size 4. o. <>
Prices on application for other collections.
63.516. 30 Models of Crystals, of Wood, representing the simple main forms, 5 cm average sixe 1. 10.
63.517.
-- idem, average size 10 cm 3.15.0
63.518. 30 Wood Crystal Models, large, light construction, for demonstration purposes, the
simple main forms, of pear-tree wood, hollow, size 20 25 cm r. 0.
63.520. 50 Wood Crystal Models, specially collected for High Schools and Colleges, including
in addition to the chief types, different combinations and doublets, average sixe em ."> _. Id. <>
63.521. --idem, average size 10 cm (J. !.'>.<)
63.522. 80 Wood Crystal Models, 5 cm in size, after Prof. C. Hintze 5. 0.
63.523. - -
idem, size 10 cm 14. 5.
a. 3150, sir.i,
8168.
No. 63 536. Cristal Models. Anatomical Models. 1069
63 532. 1 : 5. 63534. 1:10. 63 536. 1 : 3.
63535. 1:1.
s. d.
63.524. 150 Wood Crystal Models, size 5 cm, after Prof. C. Hintze 9.15.0
63.525. idem, size 10 cm 28.15.0
52,227. Hardness Scale after Mobs, Fig. 52,227, p. 312, with large stone specimens, porcelain
slab, diamond style, and bar magnet, in wood box 0.18.0
63.531. Blow-pipe Set, Figure, with blow-pipe having pierced platinum point, forceps
platinum sheet, 6 platinum wires and 10 reagents 1. 4.0
Microscopes for Observing Liquid Crystals after Lehmann: see pp. 183 and 536 of this list.
Anatomical Models, of Clay Paste and Painted true to Nature.

We supply all Anatomical Models, and shall be glad to
quote to requirements. The following are a few examples.
I. Large-scale Sectional Models.
63.532. Heart, the front wall of which should be lifted off so as to render the four cavities
with their openings and valves visible simultaneously, .
Figure
'
0. 15.
- -
63.533. idem, smaller pattern , 0.10.0
II. Actual size Specimens.
63.534. Torso, Figure, with the thoracic and abdominal viscera 3.10.0
63.535. Tongue, Figure, can be taken to pieces , 0. 7.0
63.536. Urinary Organs, Figure, can be taken apart 0.13.0

Cl. 3164,3167, 317-2,
Ear, Larynx, and Eye Models: see "Acoustics"
and "Optics" Sections. 3171.
1070 Section 12: Miscellanea. No. 63 550
63 554. 1 : 7.
63 550. 1 : 6.
Cocon I Cocon [Cocon Cocon Cocon
63551. 1:4. 63 553. 1 : 20. 63555. 1 : 4.
63552. 1 : 4.
Cl. 3158, 3162,
:;i.-iii. :U61.3lG:;,
3160,
No. 63 556. Miscellanea. 1071
63556. 1 : 14.
p
1072 Appendix. No. 63 560
APPENDIX.
63 561. 1 : 7. 63 566. 1 : 8.
63 569. 1 :
63 570 G.
u. s. d.
63.560. Pendulum Dynmeter after Friedr. C. G. Miiller, improved type (Ztschr. f. d. phys.
chem. U., 23, 1910, p. 17), with two bar magnets 100x12x8 mm with agate cap . 4.10.0
63.561. Influence Machine after Topler with 20 rotating

discs 300 mm diameter, Figure,
for motor drive (M. P., 9
th 32. 0.
Edn., Ill, Fig. 161)
63.562. Self-exciting Influence Machine after Wimshurst,

with double rotation, with two glass
discs 90 cm diameter, cf. Fig. 60,442, p. 820, with glass case, without table or the other
accessories illustrated 24. 10.
- - with 4 glass discs 90 cm diameter 41. 0.0

63.563. idem,
us No. 63,562, but without glass case IS. 10.
63.564. Machine
35. 0.
63.565. Machine as No. 63,563, but without glass case
63.566. Leyden Jar Battery with two jars 40 cm high in parallel, Figure 2. 0.
- - with two jars 60 cm 3. 0.0

63.567. idem, high
cm 4. 0.0
63.568.
- - idem, with two jars 80 high
63.569. Condenser after Cavendish, Figure,

with three brass plates and a plate each of
10. 0.
ebonite, glass, resin, and paraffin wax
Cl. 5950, 2980,
6174, 6897.
No. 63589 Miscellanea. School Experiments with Rb'ntgen Rays. 1073
63 585. 1 : 9.
Sliding Resistances, patterns A F, p. 869, are if specially ordered, supplied also s. d.
arranged vertically accordance with Fig 63,570 G, and with one or two contact brushes.
in
The latter arrangement permits of numerous adaptations as shunt resistance.
Extra Price for vortical arrangement, cf. Fig. 63 560 G, with one contact brush:
Pattern A B C D E F
List No. 63,570 63,571 63,572 63,573 63,574 63,575
0.3.0 0.3.8 0.4.8 0.4.8 0.5.0 0.5.0
- with two contact brushes
idem, :
List No. 63,576 63,577 63,578 63,579 63,580 63,581

0. 8. 0. 8. 8 0.9.8 8
0. 10. 0. 11. 8
0. 12.
63.582. Cathode Ray Tube after F. Braun, cf. Figure 61,499, p. 898, with osmose
regeneration 1. 8.0
Since the tubes, in a similar manner to the Rontgen tubes, become harder in use, it is advisable
to fit the regenerating device, which permits of introducing gas into the i_iterior.
63.583.
- -
idem, larger, 1 m long, with screen 130 mm diameter, cf. Fig. 61,500, p. 898,
with osmose regeneration 3. 8.0
- -
63.584. idem, after Braun-Wehnelt, cf. Fig. 61,501, p. 898, with osmose regene-
ration 2. 3.0
63.585. Switchboard for Accumulators, Figure, specially adapted for electro-chemical

purposes, for connecting to pressures up to 16 volts and currents to 20 amps. . . . 9. 0.0
The switchboard, of marble with wood frame, contains: 1 precision voltmeter 25 volts, 1 volt-
meter switch, 1 precision ammeter 20 amps., 1 main switch, 1 stepped sliding resistance permitting
regulation in fine steps and over a wide range, also 1 terminals.
Apparatus for School Experiments with Rontgen Rays.

(Cf. in this connection our complete Introduction, sent on request.)
Induction Coils with Accessories, X-ray Tubes, Fluorescent Screens: see pp. 978 986.
62,730. Carton with Strips of various Metals, also Glass 0. 10.
63.586. Carton with a Glass Strip 6 mm thick and an Aluminium Sheet Strip 0.5 mm thick 0. 4.0
63.587. Fluorescent Screen, size 8x16 cm 0. 4.0
63.588. Phalanges in Glass Tube after Weinhold, fqr shewing that X-rays do not undergo
any appreciable refraction or reflection (W. D., p. 875) 0. 6.0
63.589. Metal Disc with Insulating Grip, for shewing ionisation of the air (cf. Fig. 4 of the
Introduction) 0. 6.0
Cf. in this connection also Nos. 62,731/2, p. 986.
CL G20S.
1074 Appendix. Nr. 63 590 - 63 604.
63 602. 1 : 7. 63 604. 1 : 6.
Dry Plates, specially manufactured for X-ray purposes, each plate packed twice in light tight s. d.
paper:
List No. 63,590 63,591 63,592 63,593
Size, cm 9x12 13x18 18x24 24x30
Per dozen, 0. 2. 8 0. 4. 5 0. 8. 5 0. 14. 5
"Rapidfolien", extremely active, grainless, intensifying screens for radiographic work:

List No. 63,594 63,595 63,596 63,597
Size, cm 9x12 13x18 18x24 24x30
Each, 0.10.0 0.18.0 1.10.0 2.6.0
"Rapidfolien'' reduce the time of exposure to from Vso" to Vzo" the time ordinarily necessary.
The 1 1
They are specially recommended for use with influence machines and small spark coils.
X-ray Negatives, original photos of the Human Body:

List No. Plate Size Object
cm
63,598 13x18 Hand 0. 8.0
63,599 18 X 24 Knee, Foot or Shoulder 0. 10.
63,600 24x30 Skull 0. 12.
63,601 30x40 Thorax 0. 18.
63,602. Rontgen Show Case, desk form, for observing Negatives, Figure, with glow lamp,
for plates 24 x 30 cm 1. 10.
63.603. idem, for plates to 30x40 cm, with two glow lamps 2. 0.0
Voltage of lamps should be given, or otherwise the Show Cases are supplied for 110 volts.
63.604. Thermopile after Indrikson, Figure (Kolbe-Skellon, Introduction to Electri-

city, Part II, Fig. 141 C) 2. 0.0
ci. tioii. UTS.

Estimates of Cost for Physical Apparatus. 1075
Estimates of Cost for Physical Apparatus.

For estimates as to equipments for Physical and Chemical Lecture Booms, Preparation Boom,
Museums, Students' Workrooms, compiled with due consideration to the means available, and which
generally include a lecture table: see pp. 99 106 (Vol. I).
For estimates as to Projection Lanterns and Accessories: see pp. 189 and 190. Estimates as
to Kohl's Megadiascope (Universal Projection Apparatus) and special fittings: see p. 1230 (sewn in
after p. 192, Vol. I).
Table of prices of Physical Apparatus for projection purposes: see pp. 1094 1096, which
supersede pp. 190 192 in Vol. I.
It is assumed in the following collection of estimates that the requisite fittings are at hand,
and especially the necessary museum cupboards for the apparatus, a connection to a gas lead and
an electric lead supplied with D. C., including for the latter a suitable experimental switchboard,
also a projection apparatus together with projection screen and a window obscuring device.
Attention should be paid to the fact that in the case of platinum objects or apparatus in
which the use of platinum essentially influences the price, the prices will undergo variation with
any change in the price of platinum.
Estimates Nos. 14. Collections of Apparatus in accordance with Standard Requirements.
The Standard List (Normalverzeichnis) was presented and accepted at the Fifth General
Meeting of the Society for Promoting Instruction in Mathematics and the Natural Sciences, Elber-
feld, Autumn 1896 (see also Unterrichtsblatter fur Mathematik und Naturwissenschaften, 2, 1896,
page 24).
The Collections of Apparatus included in the following pages each form an entire whole;
they can, however, should the full amount not at once be available, be installed little by little in
such manner that the apparatus of Collection 1 included in the column "1 st Acquirement" should be
ordered first, while, in a similar manner, the apparatus given under "2 nd Acquirement" should be
ordered additionally in the following or in a number of successive school years.
If, however, the apparatus for each branch of Physics are desired complete at the outset,
the apparatus for the various branches can be ordered successively.
The numbers given in special columns refer to the "Standard List" mentioned above. The
order is, however, kept in accordance with the present Price List.
In perusing the estimates it should be noted that only such apparatus pertain to a collection
in which the price is inserted in the corresponding price column. Price Lists containing only these
apparatus can be obtained from us.
Collection 1 in addition to containing all apparatus mentioned as generally necessary for

Higher Institutions in the "Normalverzeichnis fur die physikalischen Sammlungen der hoheren Lehr-
anstalten", include, as well, all apparatus indicated as being desirable. Moreover, a series of appa-
ratus has been considered which are now generally ordered at the same time.
Collection 2 contains, under the objects designated by "1 st Acquirement", all apparatus
designated as necessary for "Higher Educational Institutions" and, in addition, an ample number
of apparatus generally considered as desirable, and of new apparatus. The apparatus designated
"2 nd Acquirement" are in part designated as desirable and have, in part, been introduced during the last
year or two. This Collection includes, like the previous one, an induction coil sufficient for produc-
ing Bontgen Bays, for Tesla high frequency experiments, etc.
Collection 3 comprises under the apparatus designated as "1 st Acquirement" only those articles
which are indicated as generally necessary for Higher Educational Institutions. For the "2 nd Acquire-
ment", which reaches nearly as high a sum as the "1 st Acquirement", a number of the apparatus
considered as desirable and a few more recent apparatus have been included.
Collection 4 is intended for the minor institutions (such as the "Progymnaskn" in Germany).
It comprises for the "I 8t Acquirement" all apparatus designated as generally necessary for these
nd
institutions; and for the "2 Acquirement" all those generally designated as desirable. By restricting
the selection of the latter, the total sum can be diminished. This Collection is also well adapted
for Continuation Schools, etc.
1076 Estimates of Cost for Physical Apparatus.
Object
Object
Object
Object
Object
Object
Object
Object
1086 Estimates of Cost for Chemical Supplies.
Estimates as to Equipments: see Vol. I.
The prices may be changed for platinum goods at the time of ordering in proportion to th<
price prevailing for platinum.
Collection 5.
This Collection contains the articles designated as generally necessary and desirable in the "Standard Code"
(further particulars on p. 1075). A Collection of Chemicals in small quantities, with bottles for same provided with
inscription, also in small quantities, is appended.
Apparatus, Supplies and Materials for General Use. Further Supplies und Apparatus.
Standard- s. d.
These objects are selected conforming the collection Code
No. 3 re Physical apparatus and can be dispensed with when 269
50,961. Retort for generating oxygen . 0. 12.
a common class room is employed for physics and chemistry.
51,282. Hydrogen generating apparatus
Standard- s. d. (Kipp's) 270 0. 10.
Code Apparatus'for electrolysis and syn-
thesis of water 271 1. 4. 6
Apparatus, supplies and materials 1~,
1(
like p.1076, collection No. 3, !' I
i^-i4i\
13 5 - n 51,282. Sulfuretted-hydrogen-generating
Apparatus 272 0. 10.
and 2d acquirement 273
11 43-1 46 J 51,407. 3 Spherical tubes 0. 2.
51,533. Analytical balance, also suitable 51,417. 3 Eudiometers 271 0. 12.
for specific gravity determinations . 142 7. 15. 62,220. 3 U-shaped tubes with platinum
51,578. Outfit for specific gravity deter- and carbon electrodes 275 3. 10.
minations 0. 9. 51.252. Gasometer, 30 1. capacity . . . 276 2 5.
51,637. Rider weights 142 0. 5. 6 51.253. idem, 50 1. capacity ... 276 3. 0.
51,642. Precision weights, from 1 mg to 12. 6. 2

200 g 142 0. 15. 6
14 Chemicals and Bottles for same.
51,570a. Pillar tare balance 1. 8.
Short pan for above 14 0. 5.
The inscription on the bottles contains both
the chemical formula and the written out
51,657. Precision weights, from 100 mg
to 1000 g 15 0. 16. 6 description given below.
For a more complete collection with larger
25. 0. 5
supply of chemicals, see p. 1090.
Ill different solid and 39 different liquid s. d.
chemicals 10.
Special Supplies. 1. Solid Chemicals.
51,232. Water bath with insertion rings 116 0. 8. S Sulphur

51,256. Gasometer of glass 117 2. 0. S Flowers of Sulphur
51.339. Pneumatic trough 118 1. 0. s Sulphur Turnings
51.340. 5 Glass receiving cylinders ... 119 0. 5. 1 s Sulphur in rods
51,378. 3 Measuring flasks, without stop- S0 3 Sulphur Trioxide (fused solid
pers, 25, 100 and 500 com cap. . . 120 0. 1. 7 in glass tube)
3 Measuring flasks, with stoppers, H 3B0 3 Boric Acid, artificial
250 and 1000 com
50, 120 0. 3. H 3 B0 3 Boric Acid, natural
51.341. 10 Measurings cylinders with lip 120 1. 1. 9 Na 2 B 4 7 Borax, artificial
51.322. 3 Pulverising dishes 121 0. 3. 5 Na 2 B,0 7 Borax, natural
Platinum crucible withlid, 12 g C Graphite
weighing, 12 com capacity (Price is C Carbon
subject to fluctuation) 122 4. 5. Br Bromine
51,364-51,366. 6 Hessian crucibles in KBr Potassium Bromide
3 sizes 123 0. 0. 8 I Iodine
51,309. Crucible tongs 124 0. 1. Tincture of Iodine
51.323. Blow pipe collapsible 125 0. 2. KI Potassium Iodide
51,403. 2 Gas washing flasks 126 0.1. 10 Potassium Iodide Starch Paper
51,395. Drying tube 126 0. 4. HF1 Diamond Ink
51.382. 6 Retorts without tubes .... 127 0. 2. 3 SiO., Kieeelgai
51.383. 6 Retorts with tubulure and P Phosphorus, white
ground in stopper 127 0. 4. 3 P Phosphorus, red
51.386. 3 Receivers for retorts, without Thomas Meal
tube 127 0. 1. 1 Guano.
51.387. 3 Receivers for retorts, with 1 tube 127 0. 1. 5 As Arsenic
51.388. 3 Receivers for retorts, with As 2 O 3 White Arsenic
1 tube and ground-in stopper . . . 127 0. 1. 10 Sb Antimony
51,390. 4 Funnel tubes 128 0. 0. 11 SbS Sulphide of Antimony
51.346. 30 Test glasses in 3 sizes ... 129 0. 1. 7 Taitarised Antimony
51.347. Test glass stand 129 0. 1. 6 Starch
51.172. 2 Cocks of pressed glass .... 130 0. 2. Meal (lor Bengal Light*)
51.173. Three-way cock 130 0. 2.
Indigo
51.174. Brass tap with 2 undulated hose Litmus
pieces 130 0. 2. 6 Sugar
51.401. 30 hardened filters in 3 sizes of H,(C 4 H.O.l Tartaric Arid
4, 11 and 24 cm diameter .... 131 0. 2. 3 K Potassium
51.402. 50 Sheets of filter paper, medium KCI Potassium Chlorate
thick 131 0. 6. 6 KOH Caustic Pota-li
54.858. 2 Simple cylindrical thermometer K..S Poiiissiiiiii Sulphide
for to 100 C 132 0. 2. KN0 3
Potassium Nitrate
54.859. Cylindrical thermometer for Potassium Sulphate
20" to -+-360 C 132 '). 3. o Potassium Carlmiinlc
II. \-2. 5 KC10, Kainite
Estimates o! Cost for Chemical Supplies.
1087
Na Sodium 2.
NaCl Liquid Chemicals.
Sodium Chloride
NaCl Cattle Salt XaOII Caustic Soda
NaOH Sodium Hydrate
10 Ml Caustic Potash
Na 2 CO 3 Sodium Carbonate H 3N Liquor Ammonii
Na 2 S0 4 Sodium Sulphate
HC1 Muriatic Acid, crude
Sodium Sulphite
HC1 Muriatic Acid, pure
Sodium Thiosulphate HNO, Nitric Acid, crude
Sodium 11X0.. Nitric Acid, pure
NaNO, Nitrate
NaNO. Chili Saltpeter HN0 3 Nitric Acid, fuming
(NH 4 )(N0 3 ) Ammonium Nitrate H 2 S0 4 Sulphuric Acid
NaHC0 3 Sodium Bicarbonate (CH 3 )(COOH) Acetic Acid, dilute
(NH 4 )C1 Ammonium Chloride H,0 2 Hydrogen Superoxide
CaS0 4 Powdered Plaster cs" 2 Carbon Bisulphide
CaCO, Chalk, powdered C.,H 6 OH Alcohol, absol.
CaC 2 Calcium Carbide c;H n OH Amyl Alcohol
CaP Calcium Phosphide, for mak- C,,H 10 N 2 2 Indigo Solution
ing II 3 P (C 2 H S ) 2 Ether (dark glass)
BaCl 2 Barium Chloride P in CS.. Phosphorus dissolved in Car-
Ba(OH) 2 Barium Hydroxide bon Bisulphide
Sr(N0 3 ) 2 Strontium Nitrate Tincture of Litmus
Mg Magnesium Wire KJ Potassium Iodide
Mg Magnesium Tape KS 2 Potassium Sulphide
Mg Magnesium Powder K 2 C0 3 Potassium Carbonate
MgS0 4 Epsom Salts Soluble Glass
Al Aluminium Bars Na 2 S0 4 Glauber Salt
Al Aluminium Wire Na 2 CO, '
Soda
Al Aluminium Powder Na 2 S0 3 Sodium Sulphite
Al Aluminium Foil KC10 Eau de Javelle
A1 2 (S0 4 )3 Aluminium Sulphate
CaCl 2 Calcium Chloride
ALK 2 (S0 4 ) 4 Common Alum Ca(OH) 2 Calcium Hydroxide
Fe 2 3 Ferric Oxide Chloride of Lime Solution
Fe Iron Powder K.,Cr 2 0, Potassium Bichromate
FeS0 4 Ferrous Sulphate KMn0 4 Potassium Permanganate
FeS Iron Sulphide Fe 2 (S0 4 )3 Ferric Sulphate
K 3 Fe(CN) 6 Potassium Ferricyanide FeCl 3 Iron Chloride (dark glass)
K 4 Fe(CN) 6 Potassium Ferrocyanide ZnSO 4 Zinc Sulphate
MnO, Manganese Dioxide CuS0 4 Copper Sulphate (dark glass)
KMn"0 4 Potassium Permanganate CuCl 2 Cupric Chloride
(dark glass) HgCl, Mercuric Chloride (dark
ZnO Zinc Oxide glass)
ZnS0 4 Zinc Sulphate Pb(N0 3 ) 2 Lead Nitrate
CrO 3 Chromium Trioxide PtCl 4 Platinum Chloride (dark
KXr0 4 Potassium Ctromate glass)
KÔ, Potassium Bichromate
Cr 2 3 Chromium Sesquioxide
s. d.
(II 4 N) 2 Cr 2 0, Ammonium Bichromate 51,370. 105 Bottles for reagents, of 100 ccm, with
Zn Zinc wide neck for solid chemicals with burnt-in
Mn Manganese black inscription and tall stoppers, of trans-
Cr Chromium 0. 1. 1 each
CoCl 2 parent glass, 5. 13. 9
Cobalt Chloride
51,370. 5 idem, of brown glass, 0. 1. 2 1 /., each 0. 6.
CuO Cupric Oxide 51,370. 34 idem of 100 ccm with narrow neck for
CuS0 4 Copper Sulphate (dark glass) fluids, of transparent glass, 0. 1. 1 each 1. 16. 10
CuCL Cupric Chloride 51,370. 5 idem of brown glass,
.
0. 1. 2 1 /., each 0. 6.
PbO Lead Oxide
Pb 3 4 White Lead 15. 12.
Pb(N0 3 2 ) Lead Nitrate
(CH 3COO) 2 Pb Lead Acetate
AgNO, Silvsr Nitrate (dark glass)
Ag Silver Sheet Total Cost of Collection 5.
Mercury Chloride (dark glass)
Supplies for General Use 25. 0. 5
Sfo'' Mercury Oxide (dark glass) 5
Special supplies 11. 12.
Mercury Further supplies and apparatus 2
gf Cadmium 12. 6.
Bi Chemicals and bottles 15. 12. 7
Bismuth
Sn Tin Rods 64. 11. 7
Sn Tinfoil
SnCl, Stannic Chloride If for instructions in chemistry and physics
SnS, " Stannic Sulphide common rooms are employed, the sum
Pt Platinum Sheet diminishes for 25. 0. 5, so that the
Au Gold Sheet result is 39. 11. 2
Collection 6.
Chemical Supplies, Materials and Apparatus after the indications of Prof. Friedr. C. G. Miiller, Brandenburg.
Supplies for pupils' exercises, assembled by Prof. Schaefer, Kecklinghausen.
For Real-
Stands, Small Tables, Supports.
For Real- For anstalten
anstalten
Number s. d.
Gymnasia
Number 8. d. Number s. d.
51,104. Universal stand
(Bunsen's) with ac-
2. 4. 2. 4.
51,
Estimates of Cost for Chemical Supplies. 1089
For For For For

Realanstalten Gymnasia Eealanstalten Gymnasia
Number s. d. Number s. Number s. d. Number s. d.
.51, 351. Crystallising dishes 10 0. 6. Cylinder with wide
Flasks with side neck and ground-in
neck, 500 com 2 ... 0. 2. stopper
1000 ccm 2. . . . 0. 2. 11 250 mm high, 80 mm
Combustion tubes, diam 2 0. 4. 6
350 mm
long, 20 mm 300 mm high, 60 mm
wide 20 0. 8. 10 0. 4. diam 3 0. 5.
- idem, shut at one end 10 0. 5. 5 0. 2. 200 mm high, 60 mm
.">l.:(tu. Hessian crucibles, diam 2 0. 2. 9
8 cm high 3 0. 0. 3 130 mm high, 40 mm
Graphite crucible, diam 2 0. 1. 4
95 x55 mm .... 2 0. 1. Glass plate, round,
51.413. Burettes with matt on one side 20 cm 1 0. 0. 7
pinch cock, 50 ccm. 1 0. 2. 6 Joining stopcocks,
100 ccm .... 1 0. 4. 6 3 mm outlet .... 2 0. 3. 2 0. 3.
51,415. Floaters for above, Three-way-cock,
each 0. 0. 8 .... 2 0. 1. 4 3 mm outlet .... 2 0. 6. 4 2 0. 6. 4
51.414. Burettes with glass Three-way-piece
stopcock, 100 ccm . 1 0. 4. 8 with 2 stopcocks . . 1 0.
51,342. Measuring glass 51,174. Brass tap with
with stopper, 250 ccm 1 0. 2. 5 hose pieces .... 1 0.
51,341. Measuring cylinder 51,168. T -piece for hose
with lip, 100 ccm . 1 0. 1. 3 unions 1 0.
200 ccm .... 1 0. 1. 7 1 0.1. 51,17d. + -piece for hose
500 .... 1 0. 2. 3 connections .... 0.
1000 . . . . 1 0. 4. 1 51,256. Gasometer of glass,
51,379. Measuring flasks, 15 litres capacity . . 4. 0. 1 2. 0.
with stoppers, 100, 51,253. Gasometer (Pepys';
250, 500 and 1000 ccm 4 0. 4. 2 4 0. 4. 50 liters
capacity 3. 0.
51,411. Overflow pipettes, 51,282. Gas
generating
2 of each size of 1, 5, apparatus (Kipp's),
10, 25 and 50 ccm . 10 0. 5. 10 0. 5. 1000 ccm 1. 0.
51.352. Porcelain dishes, 51,403. Gas washing flasks
2 each of 60, 70, 85, (Bunsen's), 500 ccm 0. 3.
100, 125 and 155 mm 12 0. 4. Separatory funnel,
idem, 260 mm . . 2 6. 4. 50 ccm 0.
Porcelain dishes, idem, 150 ccm . . 0.
2 each of 70, 100 and 51,407. Spherical tubes,
155 mm 6 0. 2. 2 sets 4.
Small porcelain 51,409. U- tubes (desiccat-
dishes for combustion ing tubes), 2 each of
experiments, 42 mm 80, 130 and 180 mm 0. 2.
of diam 10 0. 1. 6 idem, 210 mm . . 0. 2.
51.353. Porcelain cru- Test glasses, cups,
cibles, 2 sets .... 16 0. 8. 8 50 ccm 0.
idem, 30 ccm alone 3 0. 1 . 100 ccm 0.
Glowing capsules Mercury trough,
of porcelain .... 5 0. 3. 300 ccm, of porcelain 2.
Glass rods, up to Double-shelled flask
10 mm
thick 0,5 kg ... 0. 0. 10 0,5 kg 0. 0. 10 (Dewar's), 200 mm
Sieve-plates of por- long, with foot 1
celain, mm ...
40 1 0. 0. 5 I
-
51,339. Pneumatic trough
idem, of 70 mm . 1 0. 0. 8
Sieve-funnel of 51,322. Pulverising dishes,
porcelain, 80 mm . 1 0. 0. 7
70, 100 and 130 mm
idem, 70 and 130mm
idem, 125 mm . . 1 0. 1.
Watch 5 1 ,320. Mortar with pestle
">!.::!49.
glasses. ?
each of 50, 65, 80 51.355. Flat iron dish,
and 100 mm .... 8 0. 2. 6 80 mm ....
ol.'?50. Watch glass 51.356. 100 mm .
clamps, 1 set ... 4 0. 1. 3 -- 150 mm

Glass bell with flat 51.357. .
Iron tubes, 50 cm
stopper
300 mm mm long, 2 cm wide, open
high, 120 Iron tube, 40 cm
diam 1 0. 3. 7
300 mm high, 150 mm long, closed at one side_
diam 1 d. 4. 5 Total ."
250 mm high, 100 mm

diam 1 0. 2. 10
150 mm high, 80 mm
diam 1 0. 1. 7
i
'ylinder with foot
and brim
200 mm high, 50 mm
diam 2 0. 1. 4
300 mm high, 50 mm
diam 2 0. 1. 7
400 mm high, 80 mm
diam 2 0. 3. 8
250 mm high, 80 mm
diam. . 2 0. '2. 5
For Realanstalten For Gymnasia Solid Reagents for Demonstrations and Laboratory
Number s. d. Number s. d. Use. (The figures given indicate size of bottle in crm.
51,319. Phosphorus spoon, The Collection for Gymnasia contains only the sub-
of iron 3 0. 1. stances marked *).
Spoon of glass, For Colleges For Grannar Schools

with spatulum ... 3 0. 2. 6 No. No.
s. d. s. d.
Horn spoon with 145 18. 15. 30 3. 15. o
spatulum, 150 mm 500 H 2 2 Hydrogen Superoxide (3%)

long 1 0. 0. 5 *500 S Sulphur
180 mm long . . 1 0. 0. 6 *300 S Flowers of Sulphur
220 mm long . . 1 0. 0. 9 300 HjBO, Boric Acid
Casting ladle, 300 Na-B,'O,
"
Borax
50 com 1 0. 0. 6 300 C Graphite
200 ,
1 0. C. 9 *300 C Charcoal
51,325. Blowpipe .... 1 0. 1. 1 0. 1. 300 C Animal Charcoal
51,331. Cork boring ap- 300 C Burnt Black
paratus with 8 steel *300 CS 2 Carbon Bisulphide
1 1. 0. 50 Fluorescein
piercers
51.334. Sharpener for 50 Phenolphtalein
cork-borers .... 1 0. 1. 6 50 Methyl Orange
51.335. Cork press ... 1 0. 3. 6 *100 Br Bromine
52,547. Hydrometers, for 100 KBr Potassium Bromide
heavy and light liquids 2 0. 4. *100 I Iodine
Glazier's diamond 1 0. 4. 100 I Tincture of Iodine
Cracking coals . . 10 0. 1. 10 0. 1. 100 KI Potassium Iodide
Glass tongs ... 1 0. 2. 1 0. 2. 100 Potassium Iodide Starch Paper
Brush for small Fluorsilicic Acid
beakers 1 0. 0. 9 200 HF1 \ Fluoric Acid
Brushes for large Rubber flask /
beakers 1 0. 1. 6 1 0. 1. 6 500 Si0 2 Kieselgur
Brush for test glasses 1 0. 0. 5 *300 P \
dark glass / Phosphorus, white
Glass knife with
handle 1 0. 1. 3 300 P Phosphorus, red
Iron spatulum, 100 As Arsenic
210 mmlong ... 1 0. 0. 6 1 0. 0. 6 100 As 2 O 3 White Arsenic
Mortar-cleaner of 100 Sb Antimony
horn, 60 mm... 1 0. 0. 1 100 SbS Antimony Sulphide
100 mm 1 0. 0. 3 100 Tartarised Antimony
Capsulator, 90 mm 300 Glycerine
1 0. 0. 5 300 Oxalic Acid
long
120 mm
long . . 1 0. 0. 6 *300 Starch
Casting mould for 50 Indigo
bars, cast iron ... 1 1. 5. *100 Litmus
Planed cast iron *300 Sugar
x 25 x 2 cm 300 Paraffin Wax
plate, 20 1 0. 5.
Hammer for mine- 500 KMgCl 3 Carnallite
1 0. 2. 300 Rochelle Salt
ralogical purposes .
Total ... 4. 4. 6 0. 7.
100 K Potassium
300 KC1 Potassium Chloride
*300 KOH Caustic Potash
Materials, Chemicals, Bottles and Boxes. 300 CyK Potassium Cyanide
50,947. Steel flask (bomb) 300 K 2 S Potassium Sulphide
for 1000 litres oxygen 1 1.16. 300 KCyS Sulphocyanide of Potassium
, 50,948. Oxygen charge 1000 . 1 0. 10. 500 KNO a Potassium Nitrate
50.951. Foot board for 300 KNO 2 Potassium Nitrite
oxygen cylinders . . 1 0. 5. 300 K 2 S0 4 Potassium Sulphate
50.952. Lever key for 300 KHSO 4 Potassium Bisulphate
oxygen flasks ... 1 0. 6. 500 K 2 C0 3 Potassium Carbonate
51,292. Mercury, chemi- 500 KC10 3 Potassium Chlorate
cally pure 5 kg 2. 0. 3 kg 1.4. 300 Potash Soap
."> 1 .295. Mercury box, 3 kg 100 K 2 Cr0 4 Potassium Chromate
capacity 1 0. 6. 1 0. 6. 500 KaCrjOj Potassium Bichromate
51,402. Filter paper, me- 100 | ft '
r
13
,
100 \ n ,o *500 Na Sodium
- * ~>
dium thick sheets j
.sheets/ . .
sheets/ *500 NaCl Sodium Chloride, purr
White blotting 1000 ) ,
l< -
2 u
100
\ 1
' 2 500 NaCl Common Salt
r
paper for washing sheets/ sheets/ 300 NaOH Sodium Hydrate
.
>l,401. Hardened filters, 500 Na 2 C0 3 Sodium Carbonate
11 cm diam 20 0. 1. 2 500 Na 2 C0 3 .10H 2 Soda Crystals
Parchment paper . 0. 0. 6 500 Na 2 S0 4 .10H 2 Sodium Sulphate
Parchment tube, 300 HNaSO., Sodium Bisulphite
5 cm wide 2m 0. 0. 7 300 NaCjH.,0.. Sodium Acetate
Watch
springs for *500 Na.jS.jO., Sodium Thiosulphate
burning in oxygen . 20 0. 2. 500 NaNO, Sodium Nitrate
Bteefflask for 10kg 300 Sodium Oleinate
carbonic acid ... 1 1. 16. 300 Na.HP0 4 Sodium Phosphate
Charge of carbonic *500 CaO Burnt Lime
acid 10 kg 0. 12. 500 (NH 4 )(NO 3 )
Ammonium Nitrate
Cloth bag for solid 300 NaHCO 3
Sodium Bicarbonate
carbonic acid ... 1 0. 3. *500 (NH,)C1 \nimonium Chloride
Asbestos wool, BB- 500 Ammonium Carbonate
IH-SIII- paper ....kg 1 0. 2. 300 Ammonium Molybilate
Glass wool ... 100 g 0. 3. 800 Sodio-Ammonic Phosphate
Hollow glass peai Is loo 0. 3 (
300 Ammonium Dvalate
10. 1. 3 3. 5. 100 (NH 4 ),Cr,O, Ammonium Bichromate
300 Ca Metallic Calcium For For

500 CaS0 4 Burnt Gypsum Realanstalten Gymnasia
500 CaC0 3 Chalk, powdered Number s. d. Number s. dr.
500 Soda Lime (granular) 51,370. 100 ccm .... 29 1. ll. 5 5 0. 5. 5

500
500
CaClj Calcium Chloride (granular)
Lime
51,370. 300 .... 68 4. 16. 4 13 0. 18. 5
Chloride of
500 CaC 2 Calcium Carbide 51,370. 500 .... 31 2. 12. 11 10 0. 17. 1
300 BaCl. Barium Chloride 51,370. Bottles of dark

300 Ba(OH) 2 Barium Hydroxide glass for solid chemi-
300 BaO 2 Barium Superoxide cals, 50 ccm capacity,
300 Sr(OH) Strontium Hydrate with wide openings,
300 Sr(N0 3 )2 Strontium Nitrate enamel labels, burnt-
300 in black inscriptions
Mg Magnesium
*300 Mg Magnesium Tape and flat stopper . . 1 1. 1
*300 Mg Magnesium Powder 51,370. 100 ccm .... 2 2. 10 0. 1. 5

500
*100
MgSO,.7HoO
Al
Epsom
Aluminium
Salts
51,370. 300 .... 1 0. 1. 7 0. 1. 7
100 Al Aluminium Wire Caoutchouc bottle

for HF1, 200 ccm 1 4.
100 Al Aluminium Powder
*100 Al Aluminium Foil Liquid Chemicals . 49 7. 10. 12 0. 18.
100 A1 2 (S0 4 3 Aluminium Sulphate
500 NaOH
)
*500 A1 2 K 2 (S0 4 4 .24H 2

) Potassium Alum. \ Caustic Soda
Ferric oxide (rubber stopper) /
*300 Fe Iron (powdered)
500 NaOH Sodium Hydroxide, normal
500 FeS0 4 Ferrous Sulphate 500 KOH \
Caustic Potash
500 FeS Iron Sulphide (rubber stopper) /
300 K 3 Fe(CN) 6 Potassium Ferricyanide *500 H 3 N Liquor Ammonii
300 K 4 Fe(CN) e Potassium Ferrocyanide *500 HCl Muriatic Acid, crude
300 Ni *500 HC1 Muriatic Acid, pure
Nickel, sheet and wire
300 NiS0 4 Nickel Sulphate 500 HCl Muriatic Acid, normal
50 Mn 500 HNO 3 Nitric Acid, crude
Manganese *500 HN0 3 Nitric Acid, pure
300 MnSOj Manganous Sulphate
*300 Mn0 500 HNO, Nitric Acid, fuming
2 Manganese Dioxide, granular. 500 H..SO,
300 Zn Zinc (granular, pure) Sulphuric Acid, pure
300 Zn Powdered Zinc 500 H..S0 4 Sulphuric Acid, dilute
300 ZnO Zinc Oxide 500 H 2 SO 4 .S0 3 Sulphuric Acid, fuming
300 ZnS0 4 Zinc Sulphate 500 (CH 3 )(COOH) Acetic Acid
100 Cr 2 Chromic Oxide 500 HoO "2 Hydrogen Superoxide (3%)
3
100 Cr Chromium 500 CS" 2 Carbon Bisulphide
100 Cr0 3 Chromium Trioxide *500 C 2 H 6 OH Alcohol
50 Co Cobalt Metal 300 C 5 H,,OH Amyl Alcohol
50 CoCl 2 Cobalt Chloride *300 C,,H 10 N 2 2 Indigo Solution
50 Co 2 Cobalt Oxide *500 (C,H,) 2 Ether
3
*300 Cu *500 Litmus Solution
Copper (granular, porous) 300 KI
*300 CuO Potassium Iodide
Cupric Oxide (granular, porous)
*500 CuS0 4 100 KCyS Potassium Sulphocyanide
Copper Sulphate
100 Bremen Green 300 (NH 4 2 S
) Ammonium Sulphide
100 Schweinfurt Green
300 K 2 CO 3 Potassium Carbonate
300 CuCl 2 300 Na 2 SO, Glauber Salts
Cupric Chloride
300 PbO Lead Oxide 500 Na 2 C0 3 Soda
300 Pb0 2 Lead Superoxide 300 Na 2 SO 3 Sodium Sulphite
300 Pb 3 O 4 White Lead 300 Water Glass
300 Lead Nitrate 300 CH 3 COONa Sodium Acetate
Pb(N0 3 ),
300 (CH 3 COO) 2 Pb Lead Acetate 300 KCiO Eau de Javelle
100 Hg Mercury
300 NH 4 C1 Ammonium Chloride
100 HgCl 2 Calomel 300 CaCl, Calcium Chloride
100 Hg 2 Cl 2 \ 300 Ammonium Molybdate
(dark glass) /
Mercuric Chloride 300 K 2 Cr 2 0, Potassium Bichromate
100 HgJ 2 Mercuric Iodide 300 KMnO 4 Potassium Permanganate
100 HgS Cinnabar 300 FeCl 3 Ferric Chloride
*100 HgO 300 ZnSO 4 Zinc Sulphate
\
Mercuric Oxide *300 CuSO 4 Copper Sulphate
(dark glass) /
50 Cd Cadmium 300 HgCl 2 Mercuric Chloride
50 CdS0 4 Cadmium Sulphate 300 Hg 2 (N0 3 ).,
Mercurous Nitrate
50 Ag Silver, sheet
300 Pb(NO 3 ).,
Lead Nitrate
50 100 PtCl, Platinous Chloride
AgN0 3 \
Silver Nitrate 100 N0 3 Ag \
(dark glass) / Silver Nitrate
50 Bi Bismuth (dark glass) /
*300 Sn Tin (rods and foil) 300 Tannic Acid
300 SnCl 2 Stannic Chloride 100 CdS0 4 Cadmium Sulphate
300 Pink Salt *500 Benzine (petrol)
300 Pt Platinum Sheet *500 Petroleum
300 Au Gold Sheet 500 Soap Solution
51.370. Bottles 51,370. Bottles for liquids,

for solid
100 ccm capacity,
chemicals, 50 ccm ca- with narrow neck,
pacity, with wide enamel label, burnt-in
openings, enamel labels, black inscription and
burnt-in black inscrip-
tion and flat stopper.
flat stopper .... 3 0. 3. 3
300 ccm 22 2 o 10
The inscription con-
51,370. . . . 1. 11. 0. 2.
sists generally of the 51,370. 500 . . . 21 1. 15. 10 10 0. 17. 1

chemical formula and 500' with
the designation . . 12 0. 12. rubber stopper . . . 0. 3. 5
69*
For Roalsantalten For Gymnasia For Realanstalten For Gymnasia

Number s. d. Number 8. d. Number s. d. Number s. d.
51,370. 2000 com, store 51,370. Bottles for liquid
bottles for hydro- chemicals of the or-
chloric acid, crude, ganic collection, with
normal, pure and sul- inscription, 50 ccm 2 0. 2.
phuric acid .... 0. 12. 51,370. -- 100 ccm . . , (i 0. 6. 6
51.370. 5000 ccm, for 51,370. 300 . . 16 1. 3. 6
aqua destillata . . . 0. 6. 51,370. 500 . . 3 0. 5. 2
51,370. Bottles of dark Total 63. 3. 11 11. 1. 10
glass for liquid chemi-
cals, 100 ccm capacity,
with narrow neck,
enamel label, burnt-in Tubing, Wires, Terminals, Stoppers.
black inscription and
flat stopper .... 0. 1. 3
51.154. Flexible leads,
51,370. Store bottle with 2,5 sq. mm, 60 cm long 2 0. 2. 6
wide opening, glass
stopper, 1000 ccm ca-
51.155. - 90 cm long .2 0. 3.
51,157. 150 cm long . 2 0. 4. 4
pacity, for burnt lime 0. 2. 1
51,163. Rubber tubing~
Store bottle with No. 2/0 2m 0. 0. 6
wide opening and cork No. 1/0 2m 0. 0. 8
stopper, 2000 ccm ca- No. 3 2 m 0. 2. 4 2 m 0. 2. 4
pacity, for NaCl
dium chloride
so-
. . . 0. 3. 3
No. 6 2m 0. 3. 4
51,165. Rubber tubing,
Store bottle with
gray, for connecting
narrow neck, with
cork stopper, 2000 ccm
up gas burners . . 6m 0. 6. 3 m 0. 3.
51,336. Rubber stoppers,

for lime water . . . 0. 3.
2 each of 16, 18, 20,
Boxes of sheet me- 23, 25, 28, and 30 mm
tal, 1000 ccm, with without holes ... 14 0. 4. 9 14 0. 4. 9
label, for cuttings of Rubber stoppers,
51,336.
sheet-zinc, pieces of with holes, 16, 18, 20,
marble, cement, clay,
sand 6 0. 9.
23, 25, 28 and 30 mm 14 0. 5. 4 14 (). 5. 4
60,172. Foot or stand
clamps (Holtz's) . . 3 0. 18.
61,093. Terminals for con-

Collection of Organic Chemicals. necting two wires . 3 0. 1.
61,098. Terminals for

Solid Chemicals 32 4. 5. strips and wires . . 5 0. ~2. 1 1
300 Oxalic Acid 300 Collodion Wool Pinch cocks ... 3 0. 0. 11

300 Tartaric Acid 50 Fuchsine Total . 2. 15. 0. 15.
300 Citric Acid 300 Naphtaline
300 HgCy 2 300 Anthracene
300 Urea 50 Alizarine
300 Hydroquinone 300 Paraffin Wax Apparatus for General Use.
100 Picric Acid 300 Camphor
100 Pyrogallic Acid 300 Common Rosin 51,233. Water bath with
300 Benzoic Acid 300 Wax m constant level ... 1 0. 18.
100 Acid
Salicylic 300 Shellac
Asbestos air-baths
500 Grapo Sugar 300 Tallow after 4 0. 10.
500 Crude Sugar 300 Cocoanut Oil Junghahn . .
Drying closet of
300 Honey 300 Glue
300 Lactose 5C Morphia
!
copper, 25 x 15 x 15 cm 1 1.10.
.500 Starch 50 Quinine 51.397. Desiccator (Fre-
300 Gun-cotton 50 Cafein senius') 1 0. 4.
51,370. Bottles for solid 51.398. (Scheibler's),

chemicals of the orga- with porcelain inset 2 0. 10.
nic collection, 50 ccm 51,537. Analytical balance

capacity, with wide without iron or steel
openings, enamel label, with aluminium
burnt-in black inscrip- earn, rider slide, glass
Earts,
tion and flat stopper 5 < . 5. case agate planes, to
5L370. 100 ccm ... ., 0. 3. 3 carry 200 grams, sen-
57.310. 300 21
. 1. . 9. 9 . sitivity 0,2 mg ... 1 8. 10.
51,581. Hydrostatic ba-

51,370. 500 3 0. 5. 1
lance, to carry 1 kg 1 3. 10.
Liqird Chemicals 27 3. 0. .
51,625. Analytical weights,

300 CHC1.. Chloroform 300 Benzene to' 200 g ... set
1 mg 1 1. 17.
:in:i CH.,o"lI Methyl Alcohol 300 Toluene Rider 1 set 0. 5. (>
300 CH 2 O Formaldehyde 300 Nitrobenzene 51,637. weights .
100 CHOOH Formic Acirt 300 Aniline 51,651. Precision weights,

r.oo C., 11,01 Alcohol
1 300 Phenol 10 mg to 1000 g . . 1 set 0. 17.
100 Aldehyde 300 Creosote 54,097. School spectrum

300 Acetic Acid 300 Toluidene apparatus 1 4. 10.
500 Ether 300 Terpentine Oil with
54.129. Glass tul.es
inn Nitric Ether 300 Bone-oil ... 12 0. (i. o
300 Olive Oil platinum lugs
100 Acetic Kther
300 Amyl Alcohol 300 Linseed Oil 54.130. Stands for holding
the glass tubes 2 0. 8.
Inn Amyl Acetate 50 Clove Oil . .
100 Lactose 50 Oil of Citron 54,214. 10 Reagents for

500 Glycerine spectrum experiments 10 0. 15.
For Eealsantalten For Gymnasia

Number s. d. Number s. d.
54,400. Microscope with
optical outfit for 60
to 1400 diameters,
joint fo- tilting coarseB
and fine tube focus-
sing, illuminating ap
paratus with iris aia-
phragm, with tripleZ
revolving nose-piece 1
54,850. Demonstration
thermometer ....
54,859. Cylindrical thermo-
meter for 20 to
+ 360 C
Cooler, Liebig's,
300 mm long .
500
Crucible of nickel,
with covering, 25 ccm
Crucible of quartz
glass, transparent,
Crucible of platinum,
capacity, 12 g weighing
Platinum wire, 0,35
mm, piece of 300 mm
- 0,25 mm, piece
of 300 mm . . .
Sheet-platinum,
40 x 40 x 0,03 mm
Spongy platinum .
Platinum asbestos 10 g
Total
1094 Physical Apparatus for Projection.
Physical Apparatus for Projection.

This collection replaces and cancels that given in Vol. I, pp. 190 192.
The following pages contain a list of those pieces of physical apparatus which are used in
conjunction with -the projection lantern.
Further details as to these illustrations, references to literature on the subject etc. are to
be found in this sams catalogue under the respective list numbers.
We
hold a large selection of photographs, diapositives, microscopical preparations etc. When
requiring such, we should be glad if application be made for our complete list of these, stating in
connection with which branch of the sciences the photographs and preparations are chiefly desired.
Projection lanterns, accessories and auxiliary apparatus for projection purposes (for projecting
horizontal objects etc.) see vol. I of this list which will be sent on request.
Measurement of Lengths, An?les, Introduction.
51.423. Linear vernier model, with forward vernier 1. 5.

51.424. idem, with rear vernier 1. 5.
51,488. Circular vernier model 1. 5.
51,750. Divisibility of fuchsin 0. 2.
Mechanics.
s. d.
52,131. Foucault's pendulum experiment after
Edelmann 9. 10.
62,138. Harmonic vibrations 2. 0.

52.588. Jet of water is composed of drops . . 1. 6.
52.589. Parabolic form of Water Jets 0. 16.
52.590. idem, with 4 coloured discs, larger . 2. 0.
52,647. Piezometer after Weinhold 2. 5.
52,660. Plateau's apparatus 1. 0.
52,671. Demonstrating surface tension 0. 4.
52,675. Dropping apparatus for surface tension 0. 6.
52.677. Wide tube and capillary tube .... 0. 4.
52.678. idem, for surface tension 0. 3.
52.679. 2 wide tubes with capillary tubes . . . 0. 8.
52.680. Wide tube with 5 capillary tubes . . . 0. 6.
52.684. 5 Different capillary tubes 0. 2.
52.685. Capillary tubes with plane parallel glass

vessel 0. 12.
52.686. 5 Capillary tubes with stand 0. 8.
52.687. Capillary tubes alone 0. 1.
52.689. Behaviour of wetting and non-wetting

liquids in a conical tube
0. 2.
52.688. 5 Capillary tubes of different shapes . . 0. 3.
52.690. Set capillary tubes 0. 4.
52.691. Migration of a mercury drop 0. 8.
52.692. Capillary plates 0. 3.
52.693. idem, with stand 0. 10.
52.694. idem, larger, with adjustable angle . 0. 16.
Wave Motions.
53,150. Apparatus for Demonstrating wave

Physical Apparatus for Projection. 1095
8. d. s. d.
)4.075. Laminated mirror after Oosting .... 2. 10. - idem,
having 55 mm diam. objective 4. 0.
.-)L',043. Oscillating prism for the
52,044.
whirling table 1. 5. 54.516. idem, having 60 mm diam. objective 4. 0.
idem, larger 1. 10.
54.141. Collimator tube and micrometer gap for 54.517. Fresnel's apparatus, size of mirrors
demonstrating the spectrum 1. 4.
30 x40 mm 2. 2.
54,144. Revolving device for arc lamps .... 54.518. idem, size of mirrors 40 x 50 mm . 2. 8.
50,922. 6 Cored carbons filled with salts ... 0.

1. 0.
9.
54.519. idem, size of mirrors 50 x 60 mm . 3. 0.
54,176. 6 Small flasks with absorbent liquids 0. 10.

54.520. Fresnel's apparatus, simple, size of mirrors
- idem, 9
liquids
.
0. 15.
30 x 40 mm 1. 4.
54.178. idem, 12 liquids 1. 0. 54.521. idem, size of mirrors 40 x 50 mm . 1. 12.
54,180. Absorption box, 55 x 35 x 10 mm ... 0. 3. 54,52<3. idem, size of mirrors 50 x 60 mm . 2. 0.
54,186. Hollow crystal glass cubes, 50 mm . . 0. 3. 54.523. Interference mirror on stand, with micro-
54.190. Double absorption box 0. 12. meter motion 7. 0.
54.191. Absorption vessel, wedge-shaped .... 12.
54.524. idem, without micrometer motion 4. 16.
54.194. Absorption vessel for gases
.
1. 10.
54.195. idem, for filling with gases .... 0. 8.
54.525. Ocular micrometer after Fresnel .... 6. 0.
54,527. Interference apparatus after Grimsehl 3. 10.
54.196. Stand for holding absorption boxes,
.
54,529. Interference apparatus after Classen . . 2. 10.

troughs, preparations 1. 0.
54.536. Interference Prism (bi-prism) after
54.197. 3 Gelatine plates for absorption experi-
Fresnel 8
ments 0. 2.
1.
54.537. Billet's half-lenses 2. 10.
54.198. 3 Coloured glass plates
. .
0. 3.
54.538. Lens for observing the interference bands 0. 16.
54.199. Coloured plate 0. 13. 54.540. Large bench for interference and diffrac-
54.200. idem, simpler 0. 6. tion experiments 27. 0.
51.201. Absorption colour plate for reflected light 0. 4. 54.541. Diaphragmic disc with Schwerd apertures 1.10.
54.202. 5 Crystal with
plates absorption 53.907. Cylindrical lens on stand, 60 mm
diameter 1. 4.
phenomena 2. 10. 53.908. idem, 80 mm diameter 1. 10.
54.225. Bunsen-burner for -eversing the sodium 54.560. Photographed grating after Nobert 0. 18.
. .
line 0. 14. 54.561. Copy of a genuine Rowland Grating 1. 4.

. .
54.226. Stand with illuminating tube for

reversing
54.565. Photographed diffraction grating 0. ...
5.
the strontium line 0. 16. 54.566. Diffraction grating after Rowland. Price
on application.
54.233. Solar spectrum, transparent .... 1. 0.
Further diffraction gratings and stands see
54.319. Apparatus for imitating the irradiation of
the moon's crescent
page 549.
0. 8. 54.575. Phase reversing plate, after Wood ...
0. 10.
54.320. Lantern slides after Plateau for demon- 54.576. Circular photographed grating 1. 0.
strating irradiation 0. 3. 51,066. Projection diffraction -chromoscope, with
54.324. Projection stroboscope 1. 0. optical bench 11. 10.
54.325. 3 Extra discs for above 0. 6. 51,066a. idem, without optical bench 10. ...
0.
54.326. Projection with 54.584. Dust glass for colour rings 0. 4.
stroboscope showing
dancers 1. 4. 54.585. Reflecting stephanoscope after von
51.067. Cinematograph 7. 10. ft
Lommel 0. 16.
51.068. Films for 1 metre length 0. 1. 6 54.586. idem, larger 1.6
54,32^. Anorthoscope 1. 6. 52,047. Polarisation apparatus for the whirling
54.328. Apparatus for optical table
fatigue and the 1. 10.
successive colour-contrast 0. 6.
54.590. Polarisation apparatus after Weinhold . 2. 8.
54.331. idem, after Weinhold 0. 10.
54.591. Further Set of Glass Plates, as polariser 0. 18.
54.332. Apparatus for successive and simultaneous 54.592. Polarisation apparatus after Duboscq . 3. 12.
colour-contrast 0. 8.
54.593. Polarisation apparatus on stand .... 4. 15.
54,3,,,
.. 2 Coloured glass plates for simultaneous 54.594. Demonstration polariser after Grimsehl . 1. 2.
contrast . . 0. 6.
54.595. Demonstration analyser after Grimsehl . 1. 15.
54,334. Apparatus for showing the contrasted 54.596. Plate of mirror glass with haft . . . 0. 6.
colours as coloured shadows . . ... 0. 12.
54.597. Glass tube for polarisation in liquids . 1. 8.
54.338. Projection plate for 54.598. Auxiliary apparatus for demonstrating
optical illusions,
showing parallel lines the calc-spar cross 2. 0.
apparently diverging 0. 6.
54.339. 2 Plates for above, showing 54.599. Demonstration polarisation apparatus
parallel lines
after Grimsehl
apparently bent 0. 3. 1. 10.
54.340. idem, four right angles are showing 54.600. Simple polarisation apparatus with tour-
apparently acute and obtuse in pairs ... 0. 3.
maline plates 3. 0. d
54.343. 2 Plane parallel glass vessels for 51,074. Polarisation apparatus for objective de-
objec-
tively demonstrating the colours of pigment monstration 7. 0.
mixtures 0. 16 54.601. 1 Set of preparations 3. 5.
54.346. 2 Colour discs for the 54.602. Large projection-polarisation apparatus
mixing of coloured
lights and the superposing of layers of trans- after Duboscq and von Lang 34. 0.
parent colours 1. 5.
54,614. Column of glass plates ....
1. 16.
9605. Projection chromoscope after Ives ... 13. 0.
54.626. Polarisation apparatus after Mach ...
13. 0.
Photographs for above each 0. 7.
54.627. Wedge compensator after Babinet 5. ...
0.
54,350. Colour top with mixed colour effects . 1. 0.
54.628. Compensator after Soleil 6. 10.
51.003. Small transparent projection screen . . 0. 10.
C4,634. Large Paalzow optical bench 34. 0.
54.501. Small metal frame for 54,635. Small Paalzow optical bench
soap solution for 16. 0.
demonstrating the colours of thin plates . 0.
. 2. . Auxiliary apparatus referring to polari-\
54.505. Newton's colour glasses, 70 mm diameter 0. 16. sation and refraction, polarisation prepara-l.,
54.506. idem, 100 mm diameter 0. tions, spectrum phenomena, microscopical!,
54.507. idem, 120 4. phenomena, interference and diffraction seel
54.508. idem, 150 .'.'.''.'.'. 12. pages 559 561 J
54.509. Newton's colour glasses, with stand, 54.641. Glass press for showing the double re-
rotary, 70 mm diameter 12. fraction by pressure 1. 2.
54.510. idem, 100 mrn diameter . 18. 54.642. Fresnel's press 2. 15.
54.511. idem, 120 ,, 2. 4. 54.643. Glass bending press 1. 2.
54.512. idem, 150 \ 2. 10. 54.654. Rapidly annealed glasses 2. 10.
54.514. Interference Fresnel's
Apparatus for 54.655. Crossed annealed glasses 0. 10.
mirror experiment, for projection
apparatuses Preparations of gypsum, mica, Prices as per
having 43 mm diameter objective .... 4. 0. and quartz see pages 564 566
calc-spar \
| se'eclion
1036 Physical Apparatus for Projection.
Heat. s. (1.
54.788. Glass sphere with tube closed at top, for Absolute Lecture Electrometer, as suggested
showing the expansion of liquids 0. 1. 8 by Braun, for projection, see No. 60,211 to
54.789. idem, with open tube 0. 1. 8 60,215 and 60,216.
54.790. idem, without filling for expansion Volts 01500 01500 3500
of air 0. 1. 8 graduated from IOC to 100 500 to 500 100 to 100 Volte
54,806. Apparatus for linear expansion of rigid 2.18.0 2.7.0 3.2.0
bodies 2. 10. idem.
54.819. Projection water dilatometer 0. 7. Volts 3500 10 000
54,827. Expansion-anomaly of water after Wais 0. 8. graduated from 500 to 500 500 to 500 Volts
54,832. Glass tube for circulation of water . . 0. 8. 2.10.0 3.12.0
54,837. Apparatus after Riihlmann for showing 60,217. Metal beaker for graduating 3. 0.
the expansion of water at constant pressure 0. 12. 60,223. Pendulum electrometer (Weinhold's), for
54.854. 3 small thermometers with different verifying Coulomb's law 4. 5.
liquids 0. 16. 60.280. Leaf electrometer 2. 8.
54.855. Projection thermometer, divided from 60.281. Accessories for graduating 2. 8.
40 to +50 C 0. 6. 60,283. i d e m,
by Faraday's" method . . . 0.16.
54.856. idem, divided from 10 to +160 C. 0. 6. 60,324. Standard condenser for aluminium electro-
54.857. Projection thermometer with long stem,
meter by Kolbe . . . .' 0. 18.
divided from to +30 C., graduation Vio 0. 12. 60,649. Repulsion apparatus (Puccianti's) ... 0. 16.
55,015. Freezing thermometer 0. 7.

55,036. Apparatus after Boutigny for the Leiden- Voltaic Electricity.
frost experiment 2. 0.
60,682. Zinc and copper plates for electrometer
55,090. Andrews' Press for compressing and lique- (Grimsehl's) (see Voltaic Electricity) .... 1. K.. <>
fying carbonic acid 2. 4.

60.703. Pile electrometei 3. 5.
55,123. Apparatus for the critical temperature 60.704. idem, with open piles 3. 15.
phenomena 0. 6.
60,739. Small projection cell (Kolbe's) 0. 8.
55,123a. Protecting case for above 0. 12.
61,293. Vertical galvanpscope 1. 13.
55,254. Sectional model of a steam cylinder . . 2. 6.
61,384. Projection moving coil galvanometer . . 4. 0.
55,291. Apparatus for demonstrating thermal 61,562. Demonstration of hot wire instruments
conduction in metal rods 0. 12. after Scotti 1. 10.
55,296. Apparatus for demonstrating the different 62,115. Apparatus for showing the generation of
thermal conductivity of copper, lead and wood 0. 14. heat by the electric current 0. 10.
55,301. Gypsum slab for showing the elliptical 62,188. Voltameter 0. 12.
propagation of heat in crystals 0. 5.
62.216. Apparatus for objectively demonstrating
55,311. Apparatus after Despretz, for showing electrolytic decompositions and crystalli-
decrease of temperature with distance. . . 0. 16. zations 0. 14.
55,342. Small flat flask for filling with carbon 62.217. Saturn's tree inset for above 0. 4.
bisulphide and Jodine 0. 1. 9
62,231. Apparatus for electric endosmose ... 0. 10.
55.345. Plane parallel vessel for alum solution . 0. 12.
62.237. Migration of a drop of mercury by the
55.346. the same, entirely of glass 0. 5.
inequality of surface tension produced electro-
55.347. Absorption of heat rays 0. 16.
lytically 0. 8.
o
62.238. Capillary galvanoscope, after Weinhold . 0. 12.
Magnetism. 62,280. Electromagnet after Weinhold 2. 4.
60,072. Molecular magnet model 1. 16.

62,365. Apparatus after Topler, for the existence
of the magnetic curves 1. 4.
60,079. 2 Small magnets, 1 horseshoe and 1 bar
0. 5.
62,370. Explaining the lines of force theory after
magnet Berghoff (horizontal projection) 4. 0.
60.082. Iron Powder, per 250 g 0. 1. 9
62,422. Apparatus for the rotation of liquid con-
60.083. Sifter for above 0. 1. 6
ductors (horizontal projection) 0. 12. (l
60,089. Declination needle 0. 9.

4.
62,483. Showing damping by induction (hori-
60,096. Dipping circle 1.
zontal projection) 0. 18.
60.137. Magnetic pendulum, as suggested by 62.903. Demonstration apparatus for rotating
Russner 7. 10.
6. 0.
field experiments
60.138. -- The same apparatus, for placing on
62.904. 4 Glow wires for above 1. 0.
the optical bench of projection apparatus . 6. 5.
62,931. Apparatus for demonstrating the flow
of current in three-phase conductors . . . 1. 10. ()
Static Electricity. 63,443. Electrothermic apparatus after Schumann 1.12.

60,186. Electroscope (v. Beetz's) 1. 2.
60,196. Aluminium electrometer (Kolbe's) '. . . 3. 0. Divers Apparatus.
60,197 60,199. Accessories to the aluminium 55.414. Radiophone after Weinhold 0. IS. o
electrometer 0. 16. 55.415. with a zinc sector disc 0. 14.
60,202. Aluminium leaf electrometer (Grimsehl's) 3. 10. 55.503. Rotary star chart 2. 0.
60,203 60,205 and 60,208 60,210. Accessories 1. 18. 55.504. Universal clock 1. 8.
60.206. Graphite Conductor for demonstrating 63,181. Electrometer for investigating radio-
the potential drop in electric leads .... 1. 10. active substances 4. 0. o
60.207. idem, with graduation 1. 17. 63,183. Electrometer after Curie 6. 0.
Alphabetical Name and Subject-matter Index. 1037
Alphabetical Name and Subject-matter Index.

Page Page Page
Acoustic apparatus after Dvorak Alluard, Hygrometer 652
463, 464 Alphabetical index 1097
- after 449
- attraction and Ebbinghaus 463
prof. Alternating action of currents and
Abbe, Indicating apparatus 537 . .
- bellows
repulsion .
magnets 966971
Abbe-Listing, Refractive indices 479 425, 426 -alternating current trans-
-
- reaction wheel 464

Abbreviations VIII former, see vol. I.
Aberration, chromatic Acoustics 418 464 - and three
. . .
488, 495 phase current
spherical 495 Actinometer 651 10001006
Action of gunpowder 626 -
Absolute electrometers
- of polarisers charges and discharges of
803, 804, 811, 841844 - of water vapour
847 condensers 898
- .... 631 - current bell
expansion of water 594 961
- vacuum-tube Adapter for connecting a number - 994 992
1016 dynamos . . .
Absorbent liquids and colour of thermometers 586 - motors 1006

Additional accessories for Grim- -
plates 516, 517 reflecting galvanoscope 892
Absorptiometer 411
-
sehl's electrometer ....
803 - transformer
864, 1006 1008
apparatus for speaking arc - -direct current
Absorption boxes 516, 560 transformers,
- colour 516, 517 lamp 1058 see vol. I.
plates - series of
of coloured light tuning forks 445 - 293
. . . 516, 517 -
. . .
gyroscopic tree
- of gases 411 voltage coils 903 Alternator 1003, 1004
- of heat 644648 Addition to optical disc 488, XV
. . Altimetric thermometer 578 ....
of heat experiments with Additive and subtractive colour Altitudinal barometers. 374 376 .
Kolbe's thermoscope . . . 596 synthesis 528, 529 Aluminium and copper ring 1009 . .
- .... Adhesion 302 - dish

troughs and vessels 516 - and cohesion tube 602
- vessel for
experiments with - of non
....
405 - egg after Thomson . . . .1004
Kolbe's thermoscope wetting liquids 360 - foil 814
598 . . .
. . .
- vessel for Adjustable gap 512, 545, 546, 560 - leaf electrometer 812
polarisation appa- .802, 809,
-
ratus 561 magnet system 959 electroscope
- mirror and bi-convex lens 413
Acceleration and tension meter 257 799, 800, 808, 812, 836
- apparatus - 503
257 rotary stage for atmospheric
- sounder 810
Accessories for accumulators 857 861 electricity 836
- for aluminium electrometer 812 - stand for the - lever
lamp of Kolbe's 265
- for balances -
240 thermoscope
- steel coherer
596 ring and silk threads . . . 260
- for franklinisation
- for
822 .... - tables
1052 . Alum slab 596, 597
gas burners 208 205 Alvergniat, Air thermometer 582 . .
- for lecture tables see vol. I. Aeolipile 630 Amalgam, Kienmayer's . . . 816
- for microscopy 538 Agate mortar 215 Amalgamated felt 797
- for Air balloon experiments 367, 368 - zinc
optical bench 472 - baths
.
plate 813
- for 210 Amalgam-cells 1026
projection apparatus see -
vol. I. buoyancy 367 Amber, piece 814
- for - chamber 366 American clamps
quadrant electrometers 204
- column, 433 - freezer
842, 843 vibrating 214
- for - concussion 419
reflecting galvanometers 878 - condenser
apparatus . . .
Amici, Prism system 503
Accessories for school galvano- 813 Ammeters 901 911
- 812 Ammonia tube
meter 877 plates 613
- for - displacement method for de-
spectrum apparatus 511 518 Ampere's Rule 968
- for vacuum 400 402 termining vapour density 614 - Stand 966 968
pumps, .
-
Accessory apparatus for Kolbe's elasticity 366 Amsler's Planimeter 230
- engines 629
thermoscope . 595 598
. . Anaglyphon (plastoscope) . . . 529
- gun 410
for Looser's thermoscope Analogue for the charge and dis-
589504 -ionisation
- is not heated
986, 1025 charge of a condenser 336 . .
Accommodation of the
eye (Schei- by thermal rays 645 Analysis of oscillatory discharge 837
- - of the spectrum
ner's experiment) 524 .... -
pressure experiments 402 404 .499 518
. .
Accumulator acid 857 pumps 386 399 Analyser after Delezenne 546, 564
- water exhaust
Accumulators 854 857 pumps see Analysing apparatus for vibrations 300
- for
measuring ....
930, 933
vol. I.
- reaction wheel Analytical balances . 231 233
. .
- for resistance
galvanometers 586 . . . 404, 407 Analytical weights ... 241, 242
Accumulator-switchboard 1073 . . Airship propeller 357 Anatomical models 1069
Accurately ground mirror 968 . . .
Air tester 656 Anchor escapement 333
- thermometer 377 380, 581 584 Andrews, Calorifere 619
Acetylene gas burners, see vol I.
- thermometer, demonstration 365 Andrews' Press for liquefying
generators, see vol. I.
Achromatic lens system
-
495 .... - thermometer, electric
-
. . 829 .
gases 608
prism 502, 503 thermoscope 567 Anemometer 658
Achromatised double refracting - weighing 402 Aneroid barograph ... 377, 651
prisms 563 Airy, Double pendulum .
297, 451 - barometers 375 377
Achromats, Zeiss' 892 Alarm clocks 244, 245 - for demonstrations 402 . .
Acid for accumulators

- proof black
.857 . . . Al Biruni, Small flask and watch -
thermoscope ....... 588
staining of table glass 345 Angle lever 270
tops see vol. I. Alcoholimeter 347 - apparatus 281
Acids and bases, mixed .... 625 Alexander, Hydrometer .... 348 - mirror 475
See also the Subject-matter Index in vol. I.

1098 Alphabetical Name and Subject-matter Index.
Page Page Pge

Angle mirror for Geissler tubes 1017 Armatures of dynamos, explained Ayrton-Mather, Mirror galvano-
- for photometering glow 990, 991 meter 888, 889
470 662 - -Perry, Double commutator 935
lamps Armillary sphere
- of altitude, measuring 483 . .
Armstrong, Steam electric machine 816 Azimutally mounted telescopes
- of elevation 263 Arno, Electrostatic rotary field 541, r>\-2
- of incidence and of reflection motor 827
in percussion experiments 303 Aron's Tube 1044
- of incidence of light, mea- Arrangement for hydrostatic tests 238 B
465, 466 - for 1029
suring parallax-free reading .
- of incident light and body Arrhenius, Internal friction of li- Babinet, Fall chords 253
colour 528 364 - 34S
quids Hydrometer
- of incident light and lumi- Arrhenius, Resistance vessel .931 .
-
Polariscope 556
nous intensity 474 d'Arsonval's Apparatus 1032 . . .
- Vacuum pump stopcock . 387
- measuring 228 230, 479
. .' .
Arzberger and Zulkowsky, Air -
Wedge compensator . . . .V>(i
- of prisms determined 479 . . .
pump, see vol. I. v.Babo, Apparatus for elongation
- thermometer 578 Asbestos dishes 210 of paladium 853
- with
obliquely placed tubes 281 Ascension, capillary .362 364 . .
- Gas generating apparatus 213 .
Angular velocity and moment of Aspiration psychrometer 655 . . .

Bach, Breaking model 30<> ....
inertia 290 Aspirators 212, 213 Back impact of outflowing liquids
- increases with decreasing See also vol. I. and gases 352
moment of inertia .... 277 Aspirator action shown with Kol- Bacteriology, laboratory table,
Annealed glasses 490 be's thermoscope 598 see vol. I.
Annex for Bunsen burner . . . 208 Assay furnace, electric 938 940 .
Bag for photographic camera. . 522
Assembled receiving station 1053 -
of rubber 212
Anomaly of water expansion . 573 . .
Anorthoscope 526 Astatic galvanometer 876 Balance and sets of weights

Anschutz, Stroboscope 526 - magnet needles 786, 787, 949
. 231244, XV
Ansell, Gas indicator 410 - mirror galvanometer 883 . . . beam '21^
Anticyclones and antimonsoons, Astigmatic test card 523 chemico-technical 234 236, 623
theory 286, 658 Astronomical telescope demon- dynamic 252
Anti-parallel cranks 314 stration 473 electric 804
- and - explained
Antiphone and telephone receiver terrestrial telescopes 270
930, 935 541543 - galvanometer 875
Anti-vibration suspension . . . 885 - eyepiece for telescopes. . . 543 gas balance 367
See also vol. I. model 531 - 795
telescope, magnetic
-
Antolik, Poly chord 441 Asynchronism, demonstration 1004 pan 286, 310, 571
- Riders of aluminium wire 441 -
.
Atmospheric electricity, electro- Poggendorff's i>57
Aperture goniometer 466 meter for 814 with copper disc 1009
Condenser bed, see - electroscope for .... 836 Ball bearing 302
Apostoli,
Attachments for piezometers. 359 - Gore's 627
special list .
Attachment with 3 disconnected - governor, Watt's 281

Apparatus and instrument tables,
see vol. I. tubes 281 Heron's 381, 382
- cupboards see vol. I. Attraction, acoustic 463 on double cord -if in
- for
general use ... 201220 capillary 360 rotating IIHMI
room (see Museum, vol. I.) of mass 300 valve 408
- with mirrors 504 Atwood's Fall machine . 253 255 Ballistic galvanometers calibrated
Apparently continuous light . . 287 Audibility limits 444 976, 101-2
Appendix 10721074 Audion 1052 Balloons of collodion 368

Apple Cutter 403 Auditorium equipment see vol. I. Balloons of indiarubber 366 ....
Appunn, Siren disc 283, 420 . . . Auer burner with slotted chimney 843 Balmain's Phosphorescent paint 520
Aiago and Biot, Gas prism 502 . .
-
lamp with reflector .... 539 Bamboo-stands with screens see
- August, Cup and ball 280 vol.
Magnetism of rotation 287, 977 I.
Aragonite 560 August, Psychrometer 654 Band brake 252, 327

Arbor wheel .... 266, 270, 275 Autogram disc, thermoscopic 600 . .
- spiral for
magnetizing .957 .
Arc, electric 406 Automatically singing arc lamp 1058 Bardeleben, Gas generating appa-
Arc in vacuo . . 938 Automatic induction indicator 971 . ratus 213
- lamp for proj ection apparatus, mercury vacuum pump 398 . . Baretter set 933
see vol. I. - needle coherer . 1051
. . . . Barium platino-cyanide, fluores-
- mercury vapour arc release 959, 1049 cent ."'lit
lamp 515 Auxiliary apparatus and accesso- -platino-cyanide screens 986, 1027
models 996 ries to Kolbe's electrostatic Barker's Mill 353
singing (whistling) 1058 . .
apparatus 814 Barlow's Wheel "-tin
speaking 1057, 1058 . .

- for air
pumps 402 .... Bar machine sl.~i
-transformers, see vol I. - for demonstrating the magnets .... 785, 786. lo2.->
- light after F. C. G. Miiller 473 . .
calc-spar cross 552 Baro-Hygrograph 651
for projection lamps, see for generating solid air 610 - 651
-1'sychrograph
vol. I.
- for influence machines - -Thermograph 651
hand regulator 1057, 1058 823830 Barometer 372375
see also vol. I. - for
microscopes . . . .537 - demonstration . . . :>(>'>, 371
for Paalzow's optical n-
lantern 474 standing l
Archenhold, Explaining ebb and bench 559 tubes 370, 371, 602,
. . .
(in:!
flow 661 - for projection see vol. I. Barometrical pressure gauge 370, (ill
Archiinedian law 343 - for whirling table .280 289 Baroscope 3<>4. .o-_>
- spiral disc 318 - electroscope .... 802, 812 Barrel's Fall apparatus ....
- water screw 357 outfit for Junkers' calori- Bars for pyrometers
meter 624 - of same weight 349
Arco-Slaby, Wireless telegraphy 1050
Arc triangle 318 -
parts for work stand 201, 202 Base for measuring glasses. . .217
Arendt, Lecture tables see vol. I. tarardi V. \ I. Baseplate for crossed glasses . 4!>O
- Metal
strips 350 Axes, stable and unstable . . . 282 Bass fiddle how 1 In
Argand burner for placing in the Axial ercs alter N'esller. . . 1066 Batavian glass drops :!IJ
influence machine 825 .... Ayrton, Laboratory galvano- Bathometer 3SO

with slotted chimney 843 . meter ....... . . 889 Battery alternating current a]>|>a
1001
Universal shunt. sss. r'atus
Argon tubes ">'"> . . ,s<i:i

Page Page Page

Battery box 886 Bertram, Lever apparatus 270 . . .
Boiling tubes for testing thermo-
- for high tension 811 - 261 meters 580, 581
Parallelogram of forces . .
of accumulators. 855 857 Bertrand, Quadruple quartz plate 566 - vessel for ebullition
. .
showing
- of Grove cells 853 Berzelius Lamp 209 at higher pressure 605 ....
- of Leyden jars . 832, 833, 1072 Bevel wheels ...... 321, 322 water 626
Bauernberger, Lines of force of cur- Bezold, Continuous progression of Du Bois, Half ring electromagnet
rent conductors 963, 965 . . tones 439, 445 954, 956
Baume. Hydrometers 346 Bianchi, Vacuum pumps 387 389 Raymond, Interrupter 866 . .
Baumhauer, Press for producing Bichat, Simplified absolute electro- - Slide induction
appa-
doublets 312, 566 meter 811 ratus 975
Beakers 217 Bichromate of potassium 853 - Rubens, Astatic mirror
. . .
gal-
- with evacuated double walls 610 Biconcave lens .
557, 560, XV
. . vanometer 883
Beam with counter guide 316 . . .
Bicycle ball bearing 302 - Iron clad
galvanometer 884 . .
- without rotating axis 316 Biegon, Stationary electric waves 1044 312
. . .
Bologna Flasks
Bearings for Nicol prism 557, 560 Biernacki, Composition of rota- Bolometers 648
Beckley, Anemometer 658 tions 259 Bolt and nut 312
Beckmann, Apparatus for molecu- - Gas 859 409
tap Boomerang
lar weight determination 615 . Bifilar suspension, model 886 . . .
Borda, Linear expansion 570 . . .
- Mrtastatic thermometer 578 Half-lenses 546 Bored carbons and solid cs. 513
. .
Billet, . .
- 513 Binoculars 540 Borers for cork stoppers 216

Spectrum lamp . . .
lamp demonstration Biology class rooms, see vol. I. Boring and turning chuck, see
table see vol. I. Biot and Arago, Gas prism . . 502 vol. I.
- Thermometer 615 Bi-prism after Fresnel .... 546 Bose, Exciter for short waves 1041
Beclar, Kndosmometer .... 410 Bismuth spiral 956 Bottger, Producing ice by evapo-
Becquerel, Phosphoroscope 285, 520 Black board for dust figures in ration 607
Beer, Double refraction .... 564 air plates 442 Bottle cells 849
v. Beetz, Chronograph .... 256 Blackboard stands see vol. I. Mariotte's 380
- 800 Black mirror 554 Bottles for liquids 218
Electroscope
- Lecture galvanometer 881 - mirror for drawing 478 - for .218
. . . . .
reagents or powders .
- Spark chronograph with with mount 559 - with

tu- glycerine-water mixtures 485
ning fork 248 Bladders, burst 403 Bottomley, Melting an ice block
-
Tuning fork
chronograph - of rubber 406 through by means of a heavy
(spark chronograph) 463 . . . Blast burner , 209 loaded wire 601
Behaviour of water when freezing - table see acoustic bellows 425,426 Bouguer, Photometer 467
or boiling 574 see also vol. I. Bourdon, Tube 375, 402
Bebrend, Flow of current in three- Bleckrode, Automatic needle co- - -barometer 357
phase conductor .... 1005 herer 1051 Boutigny, Leidenfrost's experi-
Behrendsen, Heating on compres- Blind, electric 806 ment 602
sion and cooling on expan- for darkening rooms, see vol. I. Bow-shaped joint of copper and
sion 626 spot of the eye 523 zinc 839
Bela Gati, Baretter set .... 933 Blondlot-Coolidge, Electric waves 1044 Box for mercury 215
366 -
Bell, diving Simplified absolute electro- for preserving plants, see vol.1.
- electric 961 meter 811 - for rubber part of hydraulic
- gasometers 212 Blood circulation 381 bellows 337
- of glass, calibrated .211 597 - for
. . .
Blotting paper discs storing glass parts of sex-
- of glass on wood base. 443 Blower, double 425 manometer 599
. .
tuple
- 443 - for 438
vibrating Blowing tables 425, 426 tuning forks
- with clockwork 405 see also vol. I. - 926
telephone
1054 - with siren 423 - with salts for
Bell,Telephone spectrum ex-
Bellows, acoustic .... 425, 426 Blow-pipe 216 periments 517
- 336 1069 Boxes and stands for the accesso-
hydraulic Blow-pipe set
- model 406 Bliimel, Indices of refraction . 486 ries of Kolbe's thermoscope 598
- of rubber 838 Board for explaining star and and stands for the accesso-
see also vol. I. delta connection 1005 ries of Looser's thermoscope 594
Belt gear disengaged 328 for metal receivers of Kolbe's support 206
- gears 328 thermoscope 596 Boyle's law 365
Benches, Lecture (see Lecture -
levelling 205, 206 - apparatus 377 . . . 379
tables) vol. I. - suspended, for galvano- Boys, Gravitation balance . . . 300
Binding elasticity 304 meters 879 Lens disc for stroboscopic
- model 305 see also vol. I. 526, 837
analyses
- moment 304 with 3 prismatic blocks . . 275 Brachio-telescope, model . . . 531
- 559, 564 Boat, combustion 220 Bracket for galvanometer 879, 883
press for glass . . . .
Bennet, Pile electrometer . . 840.

Bock, Centre of gravity .... 274 see also vol. I.
Bent brass tube 207 Eye's model 522 Brake ... 1 327
- crankshaft 304 - Model of 444 - dynamometers 332
larynx
lever 315 Body colour and angle of incident Branly, Coherer tube ... 1051
- tubing 220 528 - Induction currents of higher
light
Beranger's Flat balance .... 241 Bohnenberger, Conservation of the order 975
Berard and De la Roche, Specific plane of rotation 292 .... Tube 1041
heat of gases 621 - Electrometer 809 Brass and wood pendulums 266 . .
Berghoff, Lines of force theory 963 - Machine 282 - balls with different masses 280
Bert helot, Calorimeter for deter- -
-Fechner, Electrometer 840 . .
- and wood ball on double
mining calorific value of fuels 625 Boiler for steam engines 634 636 cord 260
Alvergniat, Air thermo- Weinhold's Steam b. 213, 569 - condenser plates 803
meter 582 - with stand 571 - cube for pressure propagation 335
- Total heat of
steam. 622 285 - disc with 3 magnetic needles 1011
. . .
Boiling by friction
Berthollet, Mixing (diffusion) of - flasks 219 - 1033
plates
gases
-
410 - 606 plate with steel rod 442
. . .
point . . .
Bertin, Commutator 867 - determination 580 - rod with base and magnetic
Bertram, Acoustic bellows 426 . . .
- stand 203 rod 1011
- 282 - tube for Beckmanns appa- - rod with ebonite handle 797
Clearing cloudy liquids . . . .
- Inclined 268 ratus 615 rod with 2 balls 812

plane . .

Page Page Page

Brass sphere 822 Bunsen, Spectrometer 505 Can of sheet 102!)
- on stem 567 - Table of
spectra 518 Capacity measuring !K!.">
with fine holes .... 335 Universal stand ..... 202 meter 813
- with ring 567 Voltameter 941 - of electrometer determined 811
- stands for Melloni's appa- Bunte-Rischbieth's Gas burette 220 Cap for school-spectroscope 510 . .
ratus 645 Buoyancy and metacentre appa- - of platinum with Bunsen

- tube, bent 207 ratus 342, 345 burner 643, 645
- with rock salt slabs . 646 Buoyancy experiments 334 .... Capillarity 362 364
- wire spiral 414 - of air 367 Capillary attraction and repulsion 360
Brauer, Band brake 252 Burette holder 203 - dropper for mercury .215 . .
Braun, Absolute lecture electro- Burettes, Mohr's 220, XV - electrometer 946

meter 803 Burette stand 203 - galvanoscope !I4(>
- Alternator 1003 - with -
communicating vessel. 346 hygrometer 653
- Cathode ray tube 899, 1073
. Burner for Bunsen's univeisal tubes 334
-
Three-phase motor 1003
. . . stand 202 Capstan 313, 330
- Two - for monochromatic .612
phase alternating cur- light 512 .
Capsule, double walled . . .
rent motor 1003 Burners for sensitive flames .418 .

- for bolometer (il it
- Wireless
telegraphy ....
1049 Burning glass for dark rays 644 . .
Capsules 939, XV
- -Wehnelt, Deflection tube .1024 Bursting bladders 403 Carbon capsules 939, XV
Bravais, Double plate 565 Bussy, Heat generated by mixing clamps 938
- 556 liquids 625 - crucible 217, 938
Polariscope
306 Busts of Physicists and Chemists, - dish 21S
Breaking model
tests 311 see vol. I. - 501
disulphide prism
Breath figures, Moser's .... 410 Buth. Horizon 661 - filament
lamp 996
Breathing of human beings . . 408 Buzzing sound induction appa- for electric furnace .
938, 939
- lines,
Breguet, Metallic thermometer . 581 ratus . 930 .
photograph 550
Breitenlohner, Spirit lamp . . . 512 - oxysulphide tube 613
- 852
Bresina, Chemical harmonica . . 430 plates, spare
Brewster, Stereoscope 524 - resistance see vol. I. ...
Brezina, Coloured plates for inter- rods for arc lamps
ference phenomena . . . 564 201, 513, 938, 939, 996
Brick with fitting 410 Cables for electric furnaces 939 . . see also vol. I.
241 - 962 - terminals 865
Bridge balance qf telegraphs
models 276 Cage of wire 808 after Briisch 996
- for Noack's experiments 810 .
Cagniard de Latour, Siren 420 . . . Carbonic acid generator 609 ....
Brix, Calorimeter for determining Cailletet, Liquefaction of gases 809 . tubes 613
heat of vaporisation 621 . . . Calcium chloride cylinders 219 . . . Cardan's coupling . . . 316, 317
Broad aluminium and copper ring!009 Calc-spar 560, 1027 Cardboard disc 1025
Brodhun-Lummer, Photometer - cross, demonstration 552,565 sheets with magnetic strips
head - and and bars 788
469(467) plate glass plate
Browne, Boyle's (Mariotte's) law 379 with letters .... 563, 565 Card board with metal strips . 986
511 - 565, 566 Tangent electrometer 801
Browning, Pocket spectroscope .
preparations . .
Carl, . .
- Sparking pillars and spark - rhombohedra 566 Carre, Freezing apparatus 405 . . .
tubes 514 Calderon's Double plate .... 566 Ice machines 600
656 211 - 608
Bruhns, Rain gauge Calibrated glass bells Refrigerator
Brunn. Syphon barometer 373 . . .
Calibrating and testing thermo- (
'arriage and spring dynamometer 258
meters 225 - with movable rollers
Bruno, Centrifugal force appa- 2.~>1 . . .
ratus : ... 277 ballistic galvanometers 976, 1012 Carrier for suspending rules 222 . .
Briisch, Carbon clamps .... 938 - device for gas meters 624 . . .
Carrying case for chronographs 249
- terminals 996 - electrometers 810 - cases for induction coils 982 .
- Double switch contact rheo-

Calipers for cover glass 538 .... - case for electroscope 1029 . .
- for model theodolites 532

stat see vol. I. Caliper with vernier 223 .
-
Experimental switchboard see Callendar, Mechanical equivalent
- for photometer 466 ....
-
vol. I. of heat 629 power of a magnet measured 788
Brushes for reagent glasses etc. 220 Calorifere 419 Cartesian diver . 334, 382, 383
. .
Buff. Circuit breaking device. 975 . Calorific value of fuels 622 625 . Carton with strips of metals.
- Demonstration balance 239 . .
- of hydrogen 622 glass etc K'73
- Unidirected and
opposed cur- Calorimeters, electric 936, 937. .
Cartridge for Parr calorimeter 623 .
rents 968 - for determining specific (ab- Cascade battery 832, s:t:i
616 622 - electric 406
Buignet, Heat generated by mix- sorbed) heat . . .
- for Case for balance 238

ing liquids 625 determining the heat of
494 combustion 623 625 - for calorimeter 624
Built-up model of lenses. . . .
Bulb with phosphorescent cross or Calorimeter thermometer - for electrometers Io21>

mineral 1034 577, 623, 624 - for gas meter l>24
.411 vessel 618 - for quadrant electrometers S42
Bunsen, Absorptiometer . . .
- Burners 208 936 - with phosphorescent sub-

Caloriscope
- Burner for contraction
appa- Cam disc 318 stances ">!!'. "''Jit
ratus 568 Camera lucida 530 - with quartz fibres 843 ....
for reversing the sodium obscura 530 - with razor etc. for micros-
line 518 - demonstrated 483, 496 .
copy 538
- Burner for
spirit 209 Cameras photographic 520 522 .
Catacautery 477
for universal stand 202 . . Cam motion 318 Cathetometert -'24
- Cell 848 - shaped cogs with excentric Cathode ray tube 899, 1024. 1073
Demonstration photometer 467 axes 321 Catskin. rubber 797
Kffusiometer for determining Campbell-Stokes, Sunshine re- Caustic line 476. 477
614 corder 652 soda 849
vapour density
- Eudiometers 220 Cunal ray tube 1022 Cavendish, Attraction of mass . :!OO
- Gas indicator 410 Candle holder 474, 812, 813
. . . Condenser 1O72
- Ice calorimeter 616 - Jablochkoff's 996 Cedarwood-oil-tubc 494
Photometer 407, 472 Candles, standard 472 ( lor transport-
'eilin.i: arrangement
-
Photometer, demonstrating 497 Cannon for demonstrating the ing purposes see vol. I.
Reversal of sodium line 517 . . action of a couple of forces 262 Celestial globe r,i;i

Page Page Page

Cello bow 440 Circuit-breaking device 975 .... Collection of apparatus for re-
Cells, electric, for demonstrations Circular double refraction 563 . . . flection and refraction . . 493
844848 - groove with circular slot 312 .
- of apparatus for the laws of
for ordinary use . 848 853 - motion diagraph 260 mechanics 265
- st.-nulard 844, 845 -
photographed grating 549 . . .
- of auxiliary apparatus for the
- with
potassium or sodium 1026 - stout copper wires 1034 . . . influence machine .... 825
<Ylluloid top for Bunsen cells 848 .
- vernier model 228, 229
. . .
- of chemical supplies 1085 1093
<
'entering device for goniometer 482 - wave motion .... 415, 416 -
of microscopical prepara-
Central force electromagnet .278 .
Circulating syphon 381 tions 538
- 488 Circulation of the blood .381 1085
pencils of rays . . of physical apparatus 1075
Centre of gravity 267, 274,
. . 275 - of water 573, 574 Collections of physical apparatus
- of gravity figures 274 Clack valve, model 408 for projection 1094 1096 . .
Centrifugal apparatus 277, 280 Clamp for exciting tuning forks 440 - of
. .
preparations for spectrum
- balance .......... 281 - universal 204 experiments 517
- force 276 282 - (Westien's) 202 - of radioactive preparations 1027
- governor, equilibrium con- Clamping stand 368 Collimator lens 560
ditions 316 Clarinet mouthpiece 427 - tube with micrometer gap . 513
-
mercury interrupter .... 983 Clark, Standard cell .
844, 845
. .
Collodion balloons 368
- pendulum 258 Classen, Interference apparatus Colour bottles for microscopy 539
-
psychrometer 655 545, XV -
-contrast, successive and
.
- 385 room equipments

pump Class see vol. I.
simultaneous .... 527
-
pump and blower .... 282 Claw coupling 326
discs
526,
284, 504, 529
- 276 587
railway Clay cylinders for pyrometers .
- dissipation 479
Chain for connecting electric ma- Clearing cloudy liquids 277, . 282 - filters (gelatine slabs)528 . . .
chines and apparatus. 824 . .

Clemens, Coupling 317 - formation
- transmission by polarisation 562 .
328 Clement and Desormes, Specific 544

Chalcolite plate 517 heat of gases 621 glasses (Newton's rings) . .
- of thin plates 543, 544

<'hiinge device for telescope 543 - Suction action 408
. . .
. . . . .
- in colours, see
- gears 326 Clinical thermometer 578 projection
- of state vo!. I.
600615 Clip for branches 866 - 544
- of state (experiments with the 1053 ring apparatus
Clipping device for coherer 1052, - 947
592 Clock movements 333 rings, Nobili's
thermoscope) 529
Channel balance 342 - universal 662 synthesis
- 600
Chappuis, Gas thermometer 582 - with electric contact 246 thermoscope (Rebenstorff's)
. . . . .
- 529
- with 10 seconds top
Chancing devices for accumulators signal . . 245
284
857861 Closed iron ring with coils .991 .
Coloured convex surface . . .
- switchboard - mercurial - flames 513 515

859 pressure gauge. 369 .
.... 660 1029 glass plates 516

Charts, meteorological Closing discs for electrometer - interference
Chart of stars 662 Clutch engager with screw 326 . . rings 544
- leaves, 642
Chassis for locomotive .... 637 Coating for rubber slab 822 .... - plates
thermoscopic . . . .
517
800 Cocks for tubing 207 516,
Chatlock, Electroscope - after Brezina
Checking the penetrative power Coddington glass ....... 530 - shadows
564
527
of X-rays 986 Coefficient of expansion
- wool in
Chemical balances. 244 portfolio 529
. . . 231 569572, 575, 576 559
- experiments with Looser's of gases 377 Column of glass plates . .
554,
593 - of linear expansion Columns of air, vibrating . . . 426
thermoscope 570, 571 .
- harmonica 430 - of pressure increase .... Combining rotations 292

576
- Combustion boat 220
laboratory see vol. I.
Cogs, cam shaped, with excentric - heat calorimeter 625
- spectrum
apparatus .... 508 axes 321
- tubes
. . .622
220
- store cupboards see vol. I. Coherer 1051, 1052, 1053
- supplies, estimates 1085 1093 - for short waves Communicating tubes . . .
334, 342
.1041 . . .
- water vessels
Chemicals .... 1086, 1090, 1091 - tester 1049
814
see also vol. I. Cohesion and adhesion 360, 361 .
Commutator 866868
- double 935
Chcmico-technical balances - and adhesion tube 405 .... - for transforming current .1004
234, 235, 623 - 360
plates - 883
Chemistry Class Rooms, see vol. I. - syphon 360 multiple
- Lecture Tables, see vol. I
Coil for generating a homogeneous Comparative explanation of wire-
Chime 825 less and ordinary telegraphy 1047
magnetic field 1012
Chimney cowls, sucking action 408 - for Comparators 225
- for Bunsen burner .... 208 showing induction by
earth-field 972 Comparing resistance of different
Chladni's Figures 442 911
Chlorine tube 613
Coils for galvanometer 883 .... materials
- two tones of pipes .... 462
- for iron clad
galvanometer. 884
Chopper for ice 214 - on stand 899 Comparison glow lamps .
470, 471
Chord, fall through it 258 - with handles - of superficial colours . . 544 .
- 950
siren 421 resistances for Wheatstone
Wave machine Coin-reprints 948 918
Christiani, . . . 416 bridge . . . .
Christiansen, Mechanical equiva- Cold thermometer 610 792

- water float 345 Compass
lent of heat 629 - needle 786
Chromatic aberration 488, 495 . . Colladon, Apparatus for total re- Compensated water dilatometers 572
Chronographic tuning fork 455 flection 494 294
. .
Compensating pendulum 245,
Compensator (Babinet's) ....
- 659
Chronographs 248, 249 Eddy apparatus 556
Chronometers 249 Collapsible apparatus for astrono- - for resistance thermometer 587
Chronoscope 244 mical geography 662 Complementary colours produced 528
- 248 Collection for fluorescence ex- - series of tuning forks 445
(Ilipp's) . . .
Church bells tested 438 periments 518, 519 Complete exciter for short waves 1041
Cinematograph 526 of accessories for Kolbe's - installation for interference
see also vol. I. thermoscope . . . 595 598 diffraction experiments 560
and
Cinematographic photos .... 899 - of accessories for Looser's Composition of impact forces 258 .
Circle dividing engine 228 thermoscope .589594 . .

- of rotations 259
- Jamin's for measurement of - of apparatus for magnetism, Compound microscope, model . 531
reflection, refraction and po- frictional contact and ther- - motions 258 260
larisation ... . 499 moelectricity ...... 787 -
parallel vibrations 453

Page Page Page

Compressed air 610 Conneeting chain 824 Copper wire fine bare 814
Compressibility of gases . 359, 603 flexibles 935 - zinc cell 845
- of 358, 359 leads 822, 930 - standard 844
liquids
654 - Cord drive
Compression hygrometer . . .
piece with platinum foil 847
. . 32K
- measured 310 rod with guides for stroke - gear for
rotating colour discs
- of gases and temperature 325 279, 504
doubling
change 626 switchboard for galvano- Cords for fall experiments 253 . . .
- 407 meters
pump 888 of indiarubber 414
Compressive and tensive strain 269 - syphon 381 Core transformer 1007, 1008
. . .
Compressor pumps 395 wires 810 Cork borers 216

Concave and convex lenses 494 496 Conservation of the centre of - press 216
and convex mirror .... 477 gravity 251 Cornet mouthpiece 427
- mirrors 596, 643 - of the plane of oscillation 283 Corrigenda XV., see also vol. I.,
mirror with selenium cell 1059 Constant-action mercury vacuum p. II.
Concentration cells 947 pump 398 Cosine theory of mechanics . . 260
Concentric nodal lines .... 442 -
battery 846 Cosmology ....... 660 662
Condensation of gases and vapours 592 cell 846 Coulomb, Brass ball on insulating
Condenser 811, 833, 834, 900, 933935 - of capillarity 362 stand 807
after Cavendish, 1072 Constantan resistances for experi- -
Magnetic magazine .... 786
- bed ments with Kolbe's thermos- Law
(Apostoli's) see special list 794, 795, 809
864 598 - for 804, 805
electrolytic cope electricity .
- for 800 Constituents of air balloon appa- Torsion balance 794

electroscope
- for Paalzow
optical bench ratus 367, 368 - Tribometer .... 301, 302
557, 560 Constriction, electric 836 Coulombmeter 943
- (staged) for 291
singing arc lamp 1058 Contact device for Foucault's pen- Counteraction apparatus 290,
- lens for dulum 298 Counter-motion anti-parallel
photophonic appa-
-
ratus 1059 -
lamp after Reynier .... 996 cranks 314
plates 803, 810 rheostat 915 Counter of speed 999
- spherical 811 - ring for turbine interrupter 984 - trade winds 658
- standard - thermometer
. 813 . . 580 Counting mechanism 324, . . 326
Condensing and dispersing lenses, Containing box for tuning forks 438 for whirling tables . . 280
explanation 488 Contents VII. Couple of forces 262
- lens 494 496 Continuity, laws .... 251, 289 Coupling with friction cone 326 . .
Conditions of sale IV. Continuous progression of tones Couplings 315317

- of heat see
cooling action 406 439, 445 - connecting and disconnecting
-
Conducting resistance and tempe- vapour spectra 512 devices 326, 327
rature 912, 913 Contraction apparatus .... 568 Covered pipes 426, 428
- wires 810 of an extended rubber tube Cover glass calipers 538
Conduction of heat by solids, by heat 571 glasses 538
demonstrated with Kolbe's of a vibrating bar 433 Cow hide back 521
sextuple manometer . 599 . . of bodies 567 Cranes 330. 331
- of heat in mica 1020 of gases and temperature Crank and slot 315
- of heat (with Looser's ther-
change 626 - gears 314. 315
moscope) 590 - of liquids 361 rectangle :>!>
- of
liquids and gases (experi- Contrast back ground and mirror shaft 314
ments with Kolbe's ther- device see vol. I. Crankshaft, bent 3<>4
moscope) 597 Contrasted colours as coloured - with

moving parts .... :tn.">
- thermal 638 648 shadows 527 Critical periodicity of a force . 297

Conductivity of electrolytes 929 933 Contrast photometer 467 pressure see iodine tubes . 60]
- of heat see thermal con- Convection of heat in water 573 - <iP2
. .
temperature phenomena . .
duction 638 648 of water 573 Crookes, Apparatus for experi-

- vessel 930, 931 ments on radiant matter 1018
Converging polarised light passing .
Conductor after Kolbe .... 913 through a calc spar plate 562
- Radiometer 649
ball 805 Convex and concave gypsum Crossed annealed glasses 560, 564
- of current 950 plates 564 - coils after Ferraris 1003 ....
- rails on lecture tables, see - and concave mirror .
477, 478
- currents 968. 969
vol. I. - lens 473 glasses -t'.Hi
- with 807 Coolers 210 -

prisms after Newton. 500
sharp point . . .
( which can be leng-

'oncluctors, Cooler stand 203 Cross pendulum 297
thened - 207
805 Coolidge-Blondlot, Electric waves 1044 -piece for hose-connections .
Com- and its perspective image 529 - -shadow tube milt

.
Cooling action of gases . 406, 642
.
of crystal glass 503 - of gas by pressure diminution 591 slots 315

- 328 600 - sprocket chain 3 Hi
pulley drive vessel for explosion ball . .
Cones (Seger's) for pyro metric - for Hofmann's - thermoelectric 1063

apparatus 614
measurements 587 Copies of genuine Rowland grating 549 Cross, Vacuum scale .... 1016
- with stand for
equilibrium - of precious stones. . 1066, 1067 Crova, Wave machine 41(1
demonstrations 274 Copper and zinc plates .... 839 Crown
-
glass prisms -19(i
Cone transmission by belt 328

. . .
- and zinc rods in cork mount piece for Bunsen burner 'Jos
toothed - wheel with lantern wheels
Congruent elliptical (access, to Kolbe's thermos- . '3'2\
wheels 321 cope) 598 Crucibles 217. 218

Conical crank rectangle .... 316 - condenser
plates 803 Crucible tongs 215
- mirror 476 - disc and 287 Cryophorous 608
rotating magnet .
-
pendulum 293 - rotating ....... 952 Cryptoscope '-'sti
resonators 450 dish with wire triangle .602 .

Crystal glass cone 503
- thrust crank chain .... 316 -
-mercury iodide 639 Crystallisation 364
- tube for
showing the brha- -plating apparatus .... 948 - microscope 536
viour of wetting and not- - rod with 6 receivers . .599 .
Crystallisations, electrolytic . . 944
363 - screen, blackened 645 Crystallising dishes 217
wetting liquids
valve 408 stirrup 1033 CryttlJ models .... 10671069
Conic refraction 564 - 853 - plates 517
sulphate
Connecting and disconnecting de- \ollameter 943 thermal conduction
for
vices 326, 327 wire 206, 207 experiments 590

Page Page Page

Cube after Leslie 646 Cylindrical mirror 476 Demonstration goniometer 479, 480
- and its perspective image . 529 - nickel piece 787 - of current curves . . 897 900
- mirror 431 -
pieces of dynamo steel 955, 956
-
photometers .... 467, 468
of crystal glass 612 - quadrant electrometer . . 843 - polarisation apparatus . 552 .
- of sheet iron .... 810, XV resonators 450 polariser 551

(
'ulics, fluorescing 518 - spring transmission .... 328 quadrant electrometer . . . 843
- hollow 230 - tachometer attachment .281 . rules 222
Cubical expansion coefficient 571 .
- thermometers 577, 578
. . . slide rule 230
Cubic centimetre 349 wire baskets 801 thermometers 577
- decimetre 230 voltmeters 901905
- -inch-vessel 230 Densimeters 348
-
pipes 428 Densities of gases and vapours 613
Cup and ball 280, 828 Density, maximum of water 573 . .
- of electricity 806, 807, 812

Cupboard for accumulators and . .
thermopile 861 Dalton's Apparatus for vapour of magnetic field 1011 ....
Cupboards for influence machines 824 tension experiments 604 . . .
Depression, capillary 362 364 . . .
- for museum: see vol. I. - Law 603 Deprez-d'Arsonval, Dead-beat

Cup of Tantalus 380 Dalton-Re^nault.Tension of steam 602 universal measuring instru-
Cupric oxide plate 849 Damping action of induction 976, 977 ment 902
849 - effect of electromagnet 952, 953 - demonstration galvano-
Cupron cell
Curie, Electrometer 1028 Dancing balls 826 meter 905
Curled solenoid 968 Daniell CeU 849 - galvanometer 886
Current calorimeters. 936, 937
. .
High tension battery 811 . . . milli-ammeters .... 908
-circuit fall trough 248 .... -
Hygrometer 652 Depth measurement 339
- conduction and distribution 865 Darcy, Velocity of flow 354 .... Descent of bodies 257, 258
. . .
- conductor for explaining the Dark rays of heat 644 Desk, portable, see vol. 1.
dynamo 988 - room equipment see vol. I. Desormes and Clement, Specific
- conductor Kolbe's 950 Dasymeter 402 heat of gases 621
- of silver and platinum Davy, Reflection of heat in vacuo 406 Desormes, Suction action . . . 408
wire 936 - Safety lamp 640 Despretz, Comparing gas tensions 603
- curves 897 900 -Thermal reflection in vacuo 642 - Compressibility of gases . . 359
- direction determined .911 . . Dead beat hot wire instruments 905 - Decrease of temperature with
- 906 distance 640
-flow in three-phase conduc- precision instruments
-
.
tor 1005 - portable 908, 909 Dessiccating tubes 220

- heat measured 936, 937
. . .
- universal measuring in- Dessiccators 219
key 930 strument 902 Detachable tangent galvanometer 872
- measurements, electromag- Decade bridges 925 Detectors of waves .1051. 1053 .
netic 871 911 - resistances 922, 923 Determination of boiling point 580 .
Dechant, Torricelli's experiment 372 - of freezing point 580

regulators for experimental
purposes see vol. I. ... Declination, explained 789, 790 . . Detonation balls 601
Curves, magnetic 962 - needle . . .- 790 Device after Faraday for freezing
- of Lissajous ....
451 455 Decomposing cell 943 mercury
- Steinhauser
607
Curve top 292 - water 940942 524
Curvilinear propagation of light Decrease of heat with distance - for absorption of heat rays 645 .
484, 485 (demonstrated with Kolbe's - for chronographs 250

Curvimeter 223 thermoscope) 597 for clipping and shaking" the
Cutter of apples 403 of magnetic force with dis- coherer 1052
- for
Cyanogen tube 613 tance 794, 795 generating a powerful in-
Cydoidal double railway. . . . 267 - of pressure in tubes. 334 . . . duction current .... 1013
gear with bevil wheels . . 324 - of temperature with distance 640 for receiving an ox's eye 523
-
path of the centre of gravity 274 Deflection of cathode rays 899 . .
Dewar, Cylindrical beaker with
Cycloid formation 318 - of the magnet needle 949, 950 evacuated walls 611
-
gear system 319 static 297 Dew-point finder after Looser 594 .
- tube Dia- and paramagnetic experi-

Cyclones and monsoons, theory 1022, 1024
286, 658 - (see vacuum tube) 1034 . ments 977
Cylinder chronograph 248 Deformation of a parallelepipedic Diagraph for circular motions . 260
-
hemispherical ended .... 806 body by shearing stresses. 307 - for projectiles 264
- indicator ........ 223 -
permanent on exceeding the Dialysis 365
- lens 560 elastic limit .......
308 Diamagnetism . . . 952, 953, 954
- of lead and wax 302 Delachanal and Mermet, Spark Diamond copies. . . .1066, 1067
- of the steam engine . . 631 633 tube 514 Diaphragm with two holes. 900 . .
- of wire net 812 De la Roche and Berard, Speci- Diaphragmic cylinder 473
- for mirror and fic heat of gases .621 - disc with Schwerd's apertures 547
perforated, . . .
lens experiments .... 473 Delaying ebullition 605, 606

. . .
Diapositives for projections. See
- stroboscopic .... 417,525 Deleuil, Vacuum pump 389 .... special list.
Cylinders of glass . 216, 217
. .
Delezenne, Analyser 546, 564 . . .
- of telephotographs 933 ....
- of steel 444 Dellmann, Electrometer .801 . . .
Dichroscopic magnifier 563 ....
- of wood and cork 280 Delta connection 1005 Didymium glass cube 518
Cylindrical bar magnets 974 .... Demonstration accumulators 854 857 plate 517
- beaker with evacuated double - ammeters 901905 Dielectric constants 838, 935, 1045
.
walls 611 552 Dierbach's Burner 209

analyser
- bellows: see vol. I. - aneroid barometers . 375, 402 Difference between two kinds of
- bodies 350 - balances 238240 electricity 829
- condenser 834 - barometer tubes . . 370, 371 - in specific resistance 936 . . .
- electrometer 811 - calorimeter 622 Differential air thermometer 582 . .
- escapement 333 . cells 845848 and double thermoscope after

- glass for showing resonance 443 - double oscillograph .... 900 Kolbe 595
- glass measure 624 - electric melting furnace 938 . . barometer 370
- vessel with 4 liquids 350 .
- electrolytic rectifier .... 865 - epicycloidal gear 324, 325 . .
- lens 496, 548 875 galvanometer see school gal-

galvanometer
- with
prism 528 - gas burette 220 vanometer 876
530 indicator ....... 410 - see sine galvanometer 873 .
magnifying glass

Page Page Page

Differential prism 502 Divisibility of fuchsin 250 Drebbel, Thermoscope 568
- tackle 266, 271 Dobereiner, Hygrometer .... 652 Drenteln. Resonance apparatus 443
- thermometer Tinder box Sound interference tube
(thermoscope) 588 410 . . 4H-J
- Dobrovolski, Ammeter
thermoscope 588, 595 905 Dressing machine 354
- wheels 324 Dolezalek and Kriiger, Current Mini
Driving device
- windlass 329 848
flowing through a liquid .
Drop of potential 810
Diffraction and interference - Quadrant electrometer 843 . .
Dropping apparatus (surface ten-
543550, 556, 560 Dolger, Tuning fork exciter sion) 302
- apparatus 548 440 - pipette 362
clamp
- chromoscope 550 Donny, Water hammer .... 606 vessel for mercury 215 . . . .
- on the Paalzow optical Doppler's Principle 283 Drude, Dielectric constant of li-
bench 561 Doppler, Theorem 935 quids 1045
Diffusion of gases . . . 410, 411 Double absorption box . . . .516 - Tesla transformer with
Ley-
-
photometer 468 - and differential thermoscope den jar 1(I4.">
Digester, Papin's 606 after Kolbe 595 - Wavemeter .... 1044, 1045
Dilatation thermometer ....
588 barrel vacuum pumps Drum armature 991
Dilatometers ....571, 572, 575 389. 392394 -
pyrometer 569
Diminution of pressure appa- -
bridge, Thomson's .... 927 rheostat 916
ratus 354 bulb for gas expansion . . 250 stroboscopic ....417, 525
Dimming switch, see vol. I. - calorimeter 618 -
Tyndall's 486
Dip circle 787, 790, 791 chamber air thermometer . 582 Drumstick for striking tuning
Dipping needle 790 commutator 935 forks 439, 440
Direct current dynamo, explain- - conductor with plug contact Dry cells 850, 935
ing 988 for experiments with Kol- - cell battery box 886
dynamos ....
992 994 be's thermoscope 598 Drying and draining apparatus. 282
for machine drive cone on inclined stand - apparatus for the air
. . 274 pump 401
see vol. I. - coupling, Cardan's .... 317 - cylinders 219
- motor 992, 997 - cycloidal railway 267 device for paper tube 797 . . .
-
-direct current transformers, - electric pendulum . . . .811 - tubes 219
see vol. I. whirl 825 Dry-plates 1074
- vision
prism .... 502 (560) - excentric with reverse motion 318 Du Bois, see letter B
- spectroscope 509 fan 405 Duboscq, Polarisation apparatus 551
Directing magnet for galvano- - gap . . 512 -
Projection polarisation appa-
meters 875 glass vessels for comparison ratus .~>.~>2
Direction of current determined 911 of electric resistance 599 . . .

Dubrowsky, Influence machine
Disc, machine 815, 816 grating 548 813, 817
Poggendorff's .
287, 1017
. .
- gun 252 - -Loossr, Aspirator action 598 . .
- shaped lever, explained 275 . .

- hooks for
suspending rods 797 Ducos du Hauron, Anaglyphon
- stroboscopic 432, 525 hook weights 260, 273, XV
. .
(plastoscope) '<-'.>
- water meter 355 - inlet channel slide valve 633 .

Ducrue, Projection parabola 264 . .
- with hole and 250 868 Duhamel, Vibrograph 456

glass lid . .
key
- with Schwerd 547 - for Wheatstone bridge. 919 Dulong, Thermal radiation appa-
apertures . .
- with 284 968 ratus 648

spectrum colours . . needle
- with uranium oxide 1029
. . .
- oscillograph 900 Dulong and Petit, Calorimeter 62o .
- - Linear 570
Discharge and mechanical motion 837 pachy trope 1003 expansion .
- chock, magnetic and induc- pendulum 297 -

Mercury expansion 574
tive effect 829 - after Airy 451 Dulong and Petit 's Law .617. . .
- electrometer 841 electrodynamic 969 .... Dumas, G-as and vapour densities 613
key 868 magnetic 787 Duplex barometer 371, 372
- oscillatory character 1038 - pin 319 - pressure gauge 369
. . .
gearing
- tube after Zehnder ....
1043 -
plate after Bravais 565 .... - vacuum pumps .... 392394
- for resonance vibrations 838 566 Duration of luminous impression 525
plates, double refracting .
Discharger 834, 835, 1033 -

prism on stand 500 Diirr, Boiler 636
- with 811 radiometer 1021 Dust figure apparatus 434, 442, 44(1
pendulum
- refracting prisms 560 - figures, Chladni's 44 -2
Discharging water-drawing wheel 357
Discontinuous syphon - refraction 416, 556, 562 566 -
38 1 .
proof lock-up cupboards for
Disengaging belt gear 328 - regulating cock 825 influence machines sJ . . .
-
I
Dishes for crystallising ..217

. .
- roller 827 Duter, electric constriction . . situ
- for 215 rotation influence machines Dutrochet, Endosmometer lid I
pulverising . . .
- of asbestos 210 819821 Dvorak, Mechanical effects of

Dismountable transformer 1006, 1007 - screen 646 sound 463. Id I
Dispersing lens 494- 496 siren 422, 423 Dynameter after Ramsden . . .VI it
Displacement of a floating body - socket, universal 202 Dynamic balance -,~>2
344 348 - sphere on stand 410 Dynamics and statics 265 . . 411
- of phase produced ....
900 spherical condenser .811 . . .
Dynamoelectric induction in dy-
Displacing apparatus* 345, 346
. . strand for resistance thermo- namos 987 '.ml
- bodies 346 meter 587 - -'ss
- cylinder principle
250 - thermoscope (Looser's) . . 589
1029 502
Dynamometer -.">-
Dissipation cylinder trough after Hallnaclis . .

- models (friction brakes) . . :>.'!-
Di>solving tension of salts 364 - universal coupling 317

. .
Dynamometers for cloth and

Distillation tables see vol. I. vessels of glass 597
399 - walled yarns see special list.
Distilling apparatus for merrury capsule (112 - 310
(spring balances)
Distributing apparatus . 805, 806 Dove, Chord siren 421
in-
Distribution, electric 811 - Polarisation
polyoscope 563 . .
Dynamometrical measuring
- of magnetism in a bar magnet struments 910, 911
788 Draining and drying apparatus. L'SL'
- of pressure in tubes 33(i 408 Dynamos, direct current, for ma-
. . .
Draught apparatus
Diver, Cartesian .... 382, 383 - boxes, draught pipes, see chine drive, see vol. I.
991
Divided circle and index for Nicol vol. I. explanatory models .987 .
559 for generating current 992 9!t4

prisms Drawings for showing the blind
Dividing engines .... 227, 228 spot 523 Dynaphor. Heil's (The apparatus
ruler 222 Drawn brass tube ( Hebenstorff'.s) cannot be furnished). 861. X \
Diving bell 366 41!), 569 Dynmeter 7SI5. 1072

Page Page Page

E Electric constriction 836 Electromagnet for explaining the
- contact thermometer .
580, 581 dynamo 988
Ear. model 444 - dancing balls 826 string galvanometer .891, 892
Earth induction 288 - dial 246 with foot terminals. . .1012
.
- inductor 972 406, 830 on

egg Electromagnetic action
- minimum thermometer . . 650 - endosmose 945 flexible conductors .... 971
- thermometer 650 - equivalent of heat 936, 937 Electro-magnetic current measure-
. .
Earthenware basins, see vol. I. experiments with Kolbe's ments 871911

Ebb and flow 661 thermoscope 598
Electromagnetic induction, quan-
- with Looser's thermo-
Ebbinghaus, Interval apparatus titative measurements 1012 . .
and tonometer 448 scope 593 - instruments 906

Ebert, Phosphorescent lamp 1034 - glow 'lamp 452, 995, 996 - motor 957, 958
. . . . .
Ebert and Wiedemann, Calori- - harmonica 430 - for Geissler tubes 958, 1017
meter 618 - horizontal pendulum 798 - release for fall machines
. . .
-. 254 .
Ebonite discs 810.1025 - incandescent lamp 843, 878 . .

- soft iron demonstration in-
for gramophones .461 . .
-
laboratory furnaces 940 .... struments 904
- electro phorus 814 lighting . 995, 996
- 813 - lines of force 813 Electromagnetic telegraphy 958 962
plate
-
plates for influence machines 824
- machines 815 822 Electromagnetic units, introduc-
- tion 10101013
plate for the screening effect 812 measuring instruments. 871 911
-
- - .938 940 Electromagnetism .949 971

814, 1029
. . .
rod melting furnaces . .
- flint glass rod etc. 797, 798 - mortar 826 Electrometer 801804, 809, 810, 812,
with amalgamated leather - motor for Parr calorimeter 623 841844
- absolute
rubber 812 - for radiophone 649 .... - balance
803, 804
844
- with brass terminals 866 .
- for siren 423
- table, insulating - to be used as - capacity 811
809 whirling - capillary
Ebullition 605 table 280 946
- see also Boiling phenomena - - for atmospheric electricity 814
motors 997, 1000 - for investigating radioactive
- under low
pressure ....
606 - for
darkening devices, substances
Echelon grating after Michelson 507 see vol. I.
1028
658, 659 - needle 811 Kolbe's 809
Eddy apparatus - with pile 840
Eddy currents generated 977 . . .
- oscillations 10301053
- - quadrant electrometer
Edelmann. Cylindrical quadrant pendulum . . . 798, 805, 811
electrometer 843 pistol 825 828, 841843
- Pall
apparatus .... 255, 256 -
potential 809, 810
Electromotorical force at the li-
mits of 2 electrolytes
- Foucault's 298 - 1039 847 . .
pendulum . . .
power rays Electron theory ....
- - 1025, 1026
Physical work stand .201
. .
pyrometer 584
Eder and Valenta, Continuous - radiometer 1020, 1021 Electrophorus 814, 815
512 - railway (model) 998 Electro-plating apparatus 948 . . .
vapour spectra
Edison Accumulators 857 - resistance comparison with Electroscopes 799 802, 808, 811,
- Effect 1026 Kolbe's manometer 599 . . .
812, 1025, 1028, 1029
- small
-
Phonograph 460, 461 - thermometers 585 .... 809
.....
1025
Effect, Zeeman's 507 standard clock 247 Electroscopic powder
Efficiency measurement ....
252 thermometer 829 Electrostatic apparatus as sug-
Efflux method for determining - thunder cloud 827 gested by B. Kolbe .811814
- tourbillion - demonstration voltmeter 905
vapour densities 614 828 .
- water baths - measurements, Noack's 810

Effiisiometer 411, 614 210 . .
- waves, - motor 826, 827

Egg, electric 406, 830 stationaiy 1043, 1044 . .
- of aluminium 1004 - whirl 825 Electrothermic apparatus 1064 . . .
-
-shaped conductor ....
806 Electricity at the ends of an Elementary electrostatic measure-
Egyed, Mechanical model of elec- elongated conductor 806 . . .
ments 810
trolysis 945 -
produced by temperature Elements of machines 312 ....
Eichhorn, Universal Gasometer. 212 838 Elevation-angle 263
changes or pressure . . .
Einthoven, Electromagnet string -

provision of, see vol. I. Elliptical propagation of heat 639 .
- static - toothed wheels 321

galvanometer 891 797 838
Eisenlohr. Glass balloon with gly- - voltaic 839949 wave motion 415, 416
cerine-soap solution 543
. . .
Electro-chemistry 940 949 Elongation of paladium on ab-
- Glass 853
globe for Newton's sorbing hydrogen . . . .
Electrochemistry: laboratory - of a wire by current heat 937
rings 285 tables see vol. I.
- Plane of oscillation ....
283 Electrodeless tube. 1025, 1034 . . . Elster and Geitel, Electrometer 801
Elastic impact 302 Electrodes, electrolytic 947 .... -
-
Electroscope 1029 . . .
- limit 311 - for electrolytic rectifier 864 . . High tension trans-

- line 306 .966 971 former 1031, 1038
Electrodynamic actions .
-
Elastics, lined with copper wire 825 Electro -dynamic pendulum 969 . . Potassium cell . . 1026
Elasticity 302 312 -
-dynamics 949- 971 Quadrant electro-
- of air 366 942 meter 843
Electrolysis of water . . .940
Elder pith ball 1025 Electrolyte resistance 933 . . .928 - Vacuum deflection
Electric action of points 827 . . .
Electrolytes for cells 853 tube 1034
- arc 406 - e. m. f. at their limits. 847 .
- Zamboni pile . . . 809
- assay furnace .938940 943, 944 Emery disc for hardness tests 281
. . .
Electrolytic apparatus . .
.
- balance 804 - condenser 864 Emission of heat 644 648

- bell 961 - decompositions and crystalli- - of heat (experiments with
- for wireless sations 944 Kolbe's thermoscope) 596
telegraphy . .
apparatus 1048 - demonstration apparatus. 945 .

Emsmann, Universal wheel appa-
- in receiver 405 - 946 ratus 320
forge
- blind 806 - 928, 982 Emulation of the visual 524 fields
interrupter .
- cascade 406 - rectifiers 863865 Enamelled kettle 214

- charge of a body 807 - resistances measured 886. . . Enclosed vacuum pumps 395, 396 .
- conduction in gases .... 1014 - salt for rectifiers 864 Endosmometer .

364, 365, 410
. .
- shown with - stand 947 Endosmose, electric 945

conductivity,
Kolbe's sextuple mano- Electromagnet . . . 950 958, 973 - of gases 410
meter 599 - for Beckmann's apparatus 615 Energy, total and thermal 937 . .

70
Page Page Page

Engaging and disengaging ar Expansion coefficient of 576
air . .
Felt,amalgamated 797
rangements 326, 327 coefficient of gases 377, 574, 575 Female scale for dividing engine 228
Engelmeyer, Kinegrapb 259, XV . . flasks 572 Ferraris, Crossed cods 1003 . . . . .
Engines, gas, see vol.

- internal combustion, see vol. I.
I. of a vibrating bar .... 433 Fessel, Top 2! 12
of gases 250, 410 Fessel and Pliicker, causing an
- with
dynamos, see vol. I. of gases and temperature induction current .... iiVii
Engler and Sieveking. Electro- change 626 Wave machine 415, 416
scope 1029 of liquids and gases Feussner, Accumulator battery s.">7 .
-
Fontactoscope 1029 .... 567, 568, 577, 594 Fibres of quartz 843, 883
Enlarging apparatus, photogra- of mercury 574 Fiddle bow 440
phic, see vol. I. of solids 567' Field and opera glasses ,540 ....
Epicycloid formation 318 of water, absolute .... 594 goniometer 229
Epicycloidal gear 324 thermal (with Looser's ther- intensity, measuring .
955, 956
system 319 moscope) 589 magnetic ......
96-' 965
with bevil wheels . . 326 Experimental barometer . . . 372 Figures for the centre of gravity 274
Epidiascope see vol. I. switchboards see vol. I. - of gypsum 5r>5
Equal arm lever 265, 269 Explosion ball 600 - LiSSHJOUS 455 451
Equal limb rotating slot and crank 315 Extending thermometers . . . 585 Filament of glow lamp 523 ....
-limb syphon 381 Extension, measured . . . . .310 Filings of iron 789
-
weight figures 360 - of wires 303, 304 Fillet with two lens mounts 498 . .
Equalisation of pressure 336 .... External circuit, heating. 847 . . .

Filling pipette for barometer tubes 602
of rotating masses 262 .... Extra carbons 938, 939 Film pack slide 521
Equality of inducing and induced -
-current 976 Films for cinematographs 526 . . .
808 - discs for 526 see also vol.

electricity stroboscope . . . I.
photometers 465 468 globe for Mang's apparatus 662 Filter paper 220
Equilateral crank gear
-
.... 314 jars 1038 - stand 203
rock-salt prism 596 - 550 Filtration apparatus for mercury 399
plates of solar spectrum .
Equilibrium apparatus. . .273 276 resonance-coil 1038 Final velocity of a body 258 . . .
- conditions 289, 270 Eye and phenomena of vision Finder for telescope 543
i
figures 274 522529 Fins bare copper \\ire 814 ....
- of gases 365 385 526, 527 - motion for 543
-fatigue telescopes . . .
- of
liquids 334 358 human, explaining .... 496 Finkener's P.urner 209
- of vapour tsnsions .... 695 .
-model 522, 523 Fire engine 385
Equinoctial precession . . . .661 Eyepiece, astronomical, for tele- syringe 626
Equipment of class rooms and scopes 543 Fhmament views, stereoscopic . .">_' 4
laboratories see vol. I. Fischer, Fork electroscope . . .801
- of Water pyrometer 587
workshop, see vol. I.
Equivalent of heat, electric. 936, 937 Fischinger, Dynamometer . . . 252
- of heat, mechanical 285, 286, 627 Fixed nut with rotary screw
Erdmanu. Freezing water in li- spindle . 313 . .
quid air 612 Fabry and Perot, Interference screw spindle with rotary
Ergin motors see vol. I. plate 507 progressive screw-nut 313 . .
Erlemann, Sliding and plug rheo- Factory of Max Kohl A G. . V sounders 809
stat 914 Fahrenheit, Hydrometer .... 346 wire frame 988
Errata XV Fall apparatus 253 258 Fixing device for suspended board 883
see also vol. I. cords 253 Flame collector 801, 814
Escapement pendulum. 258, 297 . .
- cylinder 404, 405 images 284
Estimates as to equipments of machines 253 256 - 428
pipe
class rooms and laboratories - 253 Flames, sinning 430
pipes
see vol. I. pistol 263 Flasks . ?19
- as to Physics and Chemistry through the chord ..258 . . for washing gas 220
equipments, see vol. I. trough for shutting a current- with absorbent liquids. 516 . .
- as to Flat balances
physical and chemical circuit 248 'J41
10751093 - tube 404, 405 electrodes 947
apparatus
- tor induction coil
Megadiascopes, see vol. I. Falling of a liquid in vacuo 606 . 955. !>.~>i>
- for outfits 1094 1096 - slide for cinematographic - ring, Schuckert's 990
projection
- of cost for chemical supplies photos 899 selenium cell loin
10851093 Fan 405 Flattening a sphere 281. 360
. . . .
- of cost for
appa- physical Fanlight darkeners see vol. I. Fleeming, Standard cell Ml . . . .
ratus 1075 1HS5 Faraday, Freezing mercury. 607 . .

Fleischer, Cell 850
lltliri igniting 813, 826 - Beaker .so;
Fleming-Crookes, Cross shadow
Eudiometers 220 - Glass block 955, 956 tube 1019
- and glass cup 941 - Induction current when an
Flexible cord 1054
Evacuated bulbs 1034 electromagnet is magne- leads 206
- double vessel 597 tized 973
lighting cable, see vol. I.
- Method for
Evaporation and thermal con- graduating an wire netting 811
sumption 597 electrometer 810
- Muslin net Flicker photometer head. -Itl'.i . . .
apparatus 210 808

- ice Flint glass prisms 4!9, 5lil>
608 Rotation of a conductor 970, 971 - rod, ebonite rod etc. 797, T'.'s
- of ether o.-, Second law !i44
Float apparatus 344
Excentrie 318 Farcot, Parabolic governor 637 . .
- inverted 880
- drive with guides .... 317 - Slide valve cylinder 632. . .
Flo; lerfor burettes -'-'<>

slot 317 Fatigue, optical 526
Floating current '.His
Exciter clamp (or tuning forks 440 Favre and Silbermann, Oalorimein
- for short waves lot I for determining the heat of Flow and ebb 661
- for stationary wire waves - of current in three-phase
. 1044 combustion (>2:i
- solenoid conductor 1005
. .' lo:!7 Heating of the air - 345. 355
Exner, Electrometer 801 on compressing and cooling velocity
on expansion 626 Fluid Compass 792
Expansibility of saturated steam 604
- Fluorescein screen 1073
Expansion and elasticity of wires 303 Mercury calorimeter (il'.l
- and jolting 311 Fechner-Hohnenberger, Pile elec- Fluorescence 518. 519
- anomaly of water 573 .... trometer ... S4o .
s| truin 51!)

Page Page Page

Fluorescent liquids 519 Fresnel, Glass press 559, 564 .... Garbasso, Model for explaining the
- 519 Interference prism (bi-prism) 546 Hertzian resonance pheno-
portfolio
screens 986 Mirror experiment 544, 545, 561 mena 1045
Fluorspar cube 518,1027 Ocular micrometer .... 545 Parabolic concave mirrors 1042 .
- 556 Garthe, Crossed currents 969

Flushing tables, see vol. I. Parallelepiped . . .
l-'ly- wheel and toothed gearing 313 . Prism for showing circular Gas-absorption trough ....
516
Focus-inn stage ror micro-photo- double refraction 563 - and vapour condensation (ex-
graphic apparatus ....539 Freyer, Mechanically movable periments with Looser's ther-
Foghorn 429 plates for illustrating dyna- moscope) 592
Folding camera 520, 521 mos and motors 990 - and vapour densities 613, 614 .
csll 847 Frick, Dalton's law apparatus . 603 -balance 367

- magnifier 530 - Inclined
plane 267 burette for demonstrations 220
Fontu'-ioscope 1029 -
Parallelogram of forces . .261 - burners (Bunsen's) ....
208
Foot or stand clamp 799, 866, 1010 - Percussion
apparatus 303 . . .
- calorimeter 621
Force action of a weight 251 - 295 cell 853
. . .
Reversing pendulum . . .
- lines 788, 830 - Screw apparatus 273 - Coulomb-meter 943

- electric 813 - Stable equilibrium 274 .... dilatometer 575, 576
- pump 383 385 -
Wedge apparatus 272 - distributing device see vol. I.
- pumps see also vol. I. Frictional contact electricity 787 . . endosmose 410
table 262 - electric machines 815, 816 . . .
engine 629
Force;! oscillations 297 Friction brake 332 engines and dynamos, see
Forceps for shunting 916 cone coupling 326 vol. I.
- for aluminium heat 285, 626 flame manometer 284, 432, 433
smoothing the
leaves 814 - internal, of liquids 364 .... generating apparatus .213 . .
Forces and Motion . . . .251 264 - of journals' 302 plant see vol. I, also
- couple of . 262 sliding 268, 301, 302 vol. II, p. XV
impact, composition . . . 258 wheels 327 harmonica 430
-
parallelogram of . . .260 262 Frieirichs and Greiner, Mercury igniting apparatus 825....
Forge, electrolytic 946 vacuum pump 397 indicators 410
Fork electroscope 801 839 -
Frog's leg experiment lamps see vol. I.
-
-shaped tube for interference 462 Froment, Electromagnetic motor 958 - measuring jar for voltameter 941
Formation of the cycloid, epicy- Fuchs, Counteraction apparatus 291 meter 624
cloid, hypocycloid, involute 318 - Pendulum race 281 calibrating device . . 624
- of the screw line 273 Fuess, Heliostat, see vol. I. - osmose, shown with Kolbe's
Forming ice by evaporation 405 . .
Fulgurator (spark tube) 514 .... thermoscope 598
Fortin, ( istern barometer 372, 374, 375 Fulminating flask 828 - pressure governor .... 624
Foster, Heating effect of current 936 - 835 see also vol. I.
plate
Foucault-currents 288 slab 828 - regulator 860
- Pendulum 283, 298 - tube 828 - 502
prism
- Photometer 468 Fundamental electric experiments 798 - reaction wheel 407
- Prisms 565 - experiments, voltaic 839 842 .
regulator 207, 208
- Rotating
copper disc. 952
. . .
- laws of
magnetism 787 .... - sodium lamp 562
Fountain, Heron's 382 - resistance experiments 911 . .
-
tap, Biernacki's 859
- intermitteat 382 - theories of optics 496 - thermometers .... 581 584
Fourneyron, Turbine 357 Funnel, magic 380 voltameter 942
Fourth aggregate condition .1018 . tubes 219 washing flasks 220
Fox -tail rubber 797 Funnels 219 Gaseous bodies, equilibrium, mo-
Fractional gram weights 243
. . . Furnaces, electric 938 940 tion and molecular effects
Frahm, Resonance top .... 2^9 Fuses, heavy current 938 365411
Frame of oak 260, 265 Gases, cooling action ... . . 406
Frames with pendulums 293, 294 - 359
.
liquefied by pressure^ . . . .
Frankel, Astigmatic test card 523 . Gasoline carburetter, see vol. I.

Frankland, Reversal of sodium 6 Gasometers 211, 212
line 518 Gati, Bela, Baretter set ....
933
Franklin, Electrode holder 822 . .
Galilei, thermometer
Air (ther- Gaugain, Tangent galvanometer 872
- Press with 401
portrait pattern 826 moscope) 567, 581 Gauges, barometric
Franklin's Law 799 - escapement pendulum 258, 297 for wires and holes '.' 223 '. . .
'
- Plate 835 - Inclined 257 Gauss Stands 204, 205
. . .
plane
Rose 822 - telescope 531 Gay-Lussac, Apparatus for prov-
Franklinization 822 Gall, Chain transmission . . . 328 ing Dalton's law ....
603
Franz, Thermal conduction in Gallows, portable 206 - Gas and vapour densities 613
'rods 633 Galton's Whistle 445 Gas dilatometer. 575 . . .
Fraunhofer, Line-demonstration 5<i4 Galvanic cells 844 853 Law of gases 574
- Lines,
photographs .... .">.">( i - demonstration cells 845 . . 848 - Tension of water
vapour 604
- Refractive indices .... 479 - sources of current 839 . . . 865 Gearing for laboratories ....
998
- Screw micrometer .... 225 Galvani's Experiment 839 - for two intersecting axes. 322
Free axes 282 Galvanometer, different types871 897 Gearings with screws, cranks,
- fall 256, 257 - for resistance links, rods, and
(recording) joints
Fice/.er, american ...... 214 thermometer 586 discs . . 313318
Fie. /.ing air and oxygen. 610, 612
.
- lamp, see vol. I. Gehrke-Lummer, Interference
- 405 507
apparatus scales 879, 880 plate
-
mercury 607 - scales see also vol. I. - Interference spectro-
- - shunts 509
point determination 580
. . . 893 scope
- thermometer 600 - suspension 884 - Oscillograph tube 897
- water 574, 600 see also vol. 652
I. Geissler, Hypsometer
- water in
liquid air .... 612 Galvanometers for thermocouples -
Mercury air pump, demon-
Frequency of tuning forks 455 457 (pyrometers) 585 stration 365
Fresenius' >essiccators
1 .... 219 - tangent galvanometers 871 873 -
Mercury vacuum pump . . 397
- Spray flask 220 . .
Galvanoscope, capillary .... 946 - Spectrum tubes 515
Fresnel, Explanation of the rota Galvanoscopes 875 tubes 406, 830, 10141017
tion of the plane of polari- 560 - for Zickler's opto-electric
Gap, adjustable 512, 545, 546,
sation 259 (551) with micrometer screw'
'
:
. . 648 telegraphy 1053
i }'

70*
Page Page Page

Geissler, tubes with fluorescence Glass prisms 499, 500 Graduating an electrometer . . sin
phenomena 519 receiving cylinders .216 . . . Gramme-Pacinotti-Machine . . . 289
- tube
rotating device . . . 286 - resonator '. 449, 450, 464
. . .
Gramme, Ring armature .987 991
Geitel: see Elsterand Geitel rods with amalgamated Gramophone 461
Gelatine plates 516 leather 814 Graphic reproduction of current
slabs as colour filters 528 - with balls 801, 1010 curves 897 900
. . .
glass
General gear system 319 - slab 810 Graphite conductor 803
mechanics 251 264 - for using Rosetti's ful- - crucibles 939
name and subject index .1097 .
minating plate as a Frank- dish 218
- use, - sliding resistances see vol. I.
apparatus and supplies lin's plate 835
201220 - sphere for weighing air . . 402 Grassmann, Vacuum pump stop-
Generating a powerful induction - with tube 567 cock :is;
current 1013 with 2 stopcocks . . . 576 Grating spectroscope 509, 5lo
. . .
- apparatus for gas

- electricity by influence
.213, XV . .
- spiral ..... .... 303 Gratings for diffraction experi-
806 . .
- stoppers 216 ments 548, 549
- 610 - tube for
liquid air determining the spe- S 'Gravesande, Elasticity of wires 303
- of alternating current .1012 cifk gravity of gases 367 -
. . .
Parallelogram of forces . . 2(>1
- of heat by current .936 940 - for
.
polarisation experi- Sphere with ring 567
- of heat by mechanical work ments 552 Gravitation balance ::uo
- for
(experiments with Kolbe's testing 857 Gravity, centre 267, 274,
. . . 275
thermoscope) 5P7 -
turning on isolated stand 798 - specific 342 350
- of heat by mixing liquids 625 - with iron
filings 789 . . .
specific of gases 367
- of heat on freezing .... 600 - with mount, closed
by tester . 857
Generator for carbonic f.cid . . 609 rock salt slabs 646 Gray, Gyrostat 2!1
Gerdien (not Gerdium) Cylindrical - with platinum 512 Greiner and Friedrichs, Mercury
lugs . .
condenser 834 - vessel, cracked vacuum pump

spiral shape 303 397
- for
Gardium, to be read Gerdien, Cy- mercury and coloured Grenet, Bottle cell 84!
lindrical condenser .... 834 water ?81 Grimsehl. Aluminium leaf electro-
German hoisting jack 330 - spare 852 meter sn-j
- - with 6 receivers -
rapid balance 2-11 599 . . .
Analyzing apparatus for vi-
Geschoser, Extra current . . . 976 - with ether and alcohol 612 . . brations 3i MI
Geyser, models ......

630, 631 Globe on insulated stand 822 . . .
-
Auxiliary apparatus for de-
Geysers see vol. I. - terrestrial 660 monstrating the calc sp-n-
Giifard, Injector model 637 .... Glow lamp 452 cross 5.vj
949 - filament 523 - Bar machine s
Gilding apparatus ! .",
Glan's Prisms 566 - in receiver -

.406, 996 .
Built-up model of lenses. . 4'.M
Glan- Thompson Prisms .565 - for mirror and lens ex- - Bnnsen-burner with
. . .
pan
<Mass discs with airspace for in'rr- periments 473 and cylinder for reversing
ference phenomena 544 . . .
- holders and lens mount 499 the sodium line .11*
- background see vol. I. - for the Edison effect .1026 - Carbon filament lamp !MH> . . .
balloon for hanging to the - for thermal and total - Coil for generating a homo-
whirling table .281
. . . . .
energy 937 geneous magnetic field .1012 .
- balloon with glycerine

soap - for thermal conduction - Collimator tube with micro
solution . 543 and convection 641 meter gap 51.'!
- bell, calibrated 211 -
photometer 470 - Colour ring apparatus for
- on wood base 443 .... - resistance 899 determining wave length 544 .
with lead weight 346 . . .

-
ring, Grimsehl's 478 . . .
- Composition of motions 25S . .
with 4 pendulums 443 . . stand 995 - Concentration cells .... !M7

- block, -
Faraday's 955, 956 . . . stand with Edison socket 973 Copper and zinc plates 839 . .
blowing tables see vol. I. -

lamps 995, 996 Cryophorus ........ 608
-
body after Kplbe 494 - (comparison lamps) 470, 471 -
Decomposition cells .... 944
floating in cold water 345 . with holders 935 Demonstration analyser 552 . .
demonstration in- - - Demonstration polarisation

;ise for light oscillograph tube. 897
'
. .
struments 901, 902 Glycerine-clay-sphere 281 apparatus 552

- -cases for
setting on gas- Glycerin-water mixtures 485.... - Demonstration polariser 5."i . . I
exhauate, see vol. I. Gnomon 229, 244 Detachable tangent galvano-

-cocks 207 Gocht, Alarm clock 245 meter NT-'
- cube 494 Goerz, Trie'der binoculars 540 . . .
-
Determining wave length of
- cylinder for Beckmann's app. 615 Gold leaves between glass plates 544 light 55, 5.s
- for the acoustic reaction Goldschmidt, baro- - Dielectric constants !i:!5
Levelling . . . .
wheel 4fi4 meter 376 - Double 252

gun
- cylinder with cooling ring . 573 Goldstein Tubes 1022, 1023 -
Dropping vessel for mercury 215
- with Goniometer for aperture-angle 466 - Electric air thermometer S2!
heating device . 573 . .
- drops, Batavian 312 - for

optical demonstrations
- Electric
equivalent of heat !K!7
47!). 480 - !Mt
globe for showing Newton's Electrolytic apparatus 9-1.'!.
285 - for students' use 480 -
Electrolytic conduction '.'_".>
rings . . .
gratings 548 Goniometers .... 229, 479 482 -

Electrolytic demonstration
- micrometer 537 316 945
Gooch, link t
apparatus
-
-
pearls 220 Gore's Ball 627 Electromagnet with foot ter-
- 1012
piercing apparatus . .
828, 829 Gotschlich, Aperture goniometer 466 minals
- Kxciter for stationary wire
plate column 554 Gotze, Magnetic field .964, 965
. .
- for refraction .Magnet stand and movable waves 1"! I

experi-
ments 491 armature coil 988 -
Kxpcrimcntal introduction of
- for the Hall effect .1026 - Ohm's law, 917 electromagnetic units 1010 1013
.
explaining. . .
the screening effect 812 - Parallel >u helium of conduc- tin' dynamo !iss
I'm- Kvplainini; . .
- with letters and calc-spar tors 917 - with 2 lens mount-- in*
Fillet
plates 563 565 -

Rotary solenoid 968 -
Folding cell M7
220, 1053 - Synchronism and a-\ n l-'rcsncl's mirror for student's
plates
for influence machines elinmisin 1004 UM' 545
823, 824 Goubet's Coupling 317 - Gas balance 3(i7
- with ;'ir Lr ap 494 (Jovernor. centrifugal (Watt's) 3Hi.li:;7 - Glass tube for polarisation
press ........ a.')!!. r,(14 Graduated circle for telescope 543 .
experiments 552

Page Page Page

Grimsehl, Glow lamp model . . 996 Gypsum membrane, model . . 562 Hartl, Reaction apparatus 352 . . .
- Glow lamp ring 478 figures . 565 -

Recording the parallelograms
lamps for thermal con- star and butterfly . . 560 of motion 259
duction and convection ex- - co- - 407
plates for complementary Repulsion apparatus . . .
periments 641 lours ....

560 - Screw apparatus .....
273
- Goniometer and spectrum preparations .....564, 565 - Simple polarisation appara-
apparatus 481 slab 596, 597 tus 354
- Graphite conductor ....803 - and heating rod 639 . . .
- Stable and unstable axes 282 .
- Hertz' fundamental experi- wedge 564 - Torsion moment and con-

ments 1038 - with movable hyperbolae 560 . ditions of equilibrium 270 . .
- Hot wire ammeter for demon-

Gyroscope, Foucault's 298 - Total and partial reflection 494
- Tribometer
stration 905 Gyroscopes 291, 292 301
- Influence of 293 -
temperature on Gyroscopic Tree, oscillating . .
Wedge apparatus 272
resistance 913 Gyrostat 291 Hartwich, Hydrostatic paradox
- Interference 545 334, 341
apparatus. . .
- Joule's law 937 Hausser, Lenard's phosphoroscope 520

- Lantern with Xernst lamp 513
- Magnetic .1010
H Hauy, Electricity produced by
or
pole balance . temperature changes
- Mechanical equivalent of Haedicke, Float 344 pressure 838
heat 627 - Metacentre and buoyancy . 345 Heart model 1069
- Model of a gypsum membrane 562 Hagen, Antivibration suspension - shaped slot 318
shewing the passage of of galvanometer 884 -treatment with X-rays and
-
converging polarised light Mercury vacuum pump . . 397 high frequency: see special
through a calc-spar plate. 562 Hagenbach, Angle of elevation . 263 list.
- Moment of inertia
apparatus 290 Hahn, Electric calorimeter . . 936 Heat 567649
- Nernst Monochord 441 - and work 626 637
lamp for demonstra-
- - and work
tion 995 .
Recording device (frequency (experiments with
- Optical eye 523 of a tuning fork) .... 455 Kolbe's thermoscope)
- and work
597 . .
- Oscillation analysing appa- -

Tangent galvanometer . .871 (experiments with
- Wheats tone slide wire Looser's thermoscope) .591
ratus 837 bridge 919 .
- Overflow vessel 250 Haidinger, Dichroscopic magnifier 563

- engines 629 637
- Piezometer 358 - 506 - equivalent, electric 936, 937
Interference-ring-system . . . .
- Pistol for determination of .341 - experiments with Kolbe's

Haldat, Pressure of liquids .
mass 252 Half cylinder for the metacentre 345 thermoscope 595
- Pistol, - lenses, Billet's - from chemical combinations
target and stand for 546
studying the trajectory 263 .
ring electromagnet 954, 956
. . (Looser's thermoscope) 593 . .
- Polarisation Hall effect 1026 - generated by

apparatus for mixing liquids 625
student's use 554 Haller, Celestial globe 661 - in the internal and external
- Polarisation in double re- 502 circuit 846, 847
Hallwachs, Differential prism .
fracting substances . 562

. .
Hamilton, Conic refraction 564 . .
- mechanical .... 285, 286, 627
- Pole balance 796, 801 Hammer for striking tuning forks of combustion . .622 625
. .
- .1012 439, 440 - of neutralisation 625

determining cell . .
- Hammerl. Passage of current in - of vapourisation 621

Projection (Cosine theory) of
mechanics 260 the Gramme ring ....
989 -
propagation 638 648
- Rainbow apparatus .... 503 Hand balances 241 - reflection in vacuo .... 406
- Reaction cannon 260 - regulation for projection lan- - supply for radiant heat 649 . .
- Refraction and reflection ap- terns, see vol. I. Heating apparatus for calorime-
paratus 485 regulator for arc-light . . . 1057 tric experiments 617
- - boxes for
Reversing the sodium and see also vol. I. paraffin embed-
strontium line 518 tachometer 999 dings, prices on application
- Screw apparatus 273 - 540 - effects of electric current936 940
telescopes
- Shunting small potential dif- Handles for induction coils . . 974 effect of electric current (with
ferences 1013 Hanging board for apparatus and Kolbe's thermoscope) 599 . .
- Synthesis of vibration . .417 galvanometers, see vol. I. - of electric current (with

- Tensive and compressive Hankel, Electrometer 841 Looser's thermoscope) 593 . .
strain 269 Hann, Psychrometer tables .655 . of mercury by electric cur-

- Thermal and total energy. 937 Hardness scale 312,1069 rent 937
- Tone manometer 429 - tests: see .281 Heavy current action of 938
emery disc . .
fuses,
-
U-shaped decomposition ves- Harmonica, chemical 430 - multiple commutator. 869
sel 944 Harmonic vibration ....
298, 299 Hefner, Standard lamp .471
. . .
- Vertical rule 222 Harris, Lightning conductor 835 . . Heil, Dynaphor 860, XV
(cannot
- Voltameters 942 Hartl, Apparatus for the liquid be furnished)
- Wave motions 413 pressure 340 Heilbrun, Telephonic lecture in-
- Centrifugal pump and blower 282 struments 1055
Grimsehl-Rebenstqrfl, Compensa-
ted water dilato meter 572 . . - Commutator 867 Heim, Discharge key 868
<;Hps with connecting leads 973 . . - Comparison of superficial Heliographs for signalling. Parti-
Grooved glass with electrodes . 943 colours 544 culars on application.
Grove, Batteiy 853 - Curvilinear path of the rays 485 Ileliostats see vol. I.
- 849 - - with solar 539, 540
Cell
Draining and drying appa- microscope .
Gas cell 853 ratus 282 Heliotrop after Steinheil . . . 483

-
Thermal conduction of gases 641 - Float 345 Helium tubes 515, 1045
Uriiol. Klectric tourbillion . 828
. . - Foucault's gyroscope . . . 298 Hellesen dry cells 850
Gruey, Polygonal pendulum . . 293 - Glass box for total reflection 494 Hellmann, Rain Gauge .... 657
Guide, Peaucellier's 316 - Glow lamp filament in re- v. Helmholtz, Double siren 422, 423 .
(inides with 2 cranks 324 - Kcsonators

ceiver 406, 996 450, 451
Gillcher, Thermopile 859 -
Indicating balance .... 240 -
-
Vibration microscope . . . 457
van Gulik, Doppler's principle . 283 - Molecule model . . 301
. . . Vowal apparatus . . .
459, 460
Gun, activated by compressed air
- double
410 - Moment of inertia .... 289 Hematometer 538
-!">- -
Optical disc 488490 Hemispheres of Magdeburg . . 402
Gunpowder, action 626 - Outflow apparatus .... 351 Hemispherical-ended cylinder. . 806
- Pressure increase
vpsum and mica combination. .">(>.">
apparatus 339 Henley, Discharger 835
-
plates r>3s -
Projectile apparatus 263 . . .
- Quadrant electrometer . . 828

Page Page Page

Henniger, Kft'usiometer .411 . . .
Holtz, Demonstration galvano- Ice machines 214. HIM i
Heron's Ball 334. 381, 382, 404

. . meters 875 - melting ~>7 1
- Foot or stand -
explained 366 clamp 799,866, 1010 producing by evaporation i>o7,(>os
- Influence machines, seeWims-
Fountain 382 Igniting ether 813, s-_'i;
-
Rotating ball (sphere) 407, 630 hurst machine. .819 821 . .
gases s _'.">
543 - Tube 1016 - the
Herschel, Solar prism vapour of alcohol . . . 'Jsr,
-
Telescope demonstrated .531 . Hook with cramp 266 Illuminating gas, testing appa-
Hertz, Electric power rays .1039 . Hook's Gearing 322 ratus. Ask for quotations.
Hertzian \Vave transmitter .1041 . Hooked weights 261, XV - lens .V!
1
.)
- waves, wave machine 412 I Humiliation and colour impression 529

. . .
Hope, Stratification of aqueous
Hesehus, Spring balance (dyna- masses 573 Illusions, optical 5-Js
mometer) 310 Hopkin, Experiment on resonance 442 Immersion batteries . . . 851. s:>j
Hessian crucibles 218 Horizon 661 body, indifferent 354
364 Horizontal component of terres- - tubes
Heumann, Striation apparatus . :',(!!
Hexano gas generator see vol. I. trial magnetism 796 Impact pressure of liquids 353. 354
- galvanoscopes 876 884 Incandescent burner with
Heydweiller, Mirror electrometer 844 gas
- gas engines 629, 630
Heylandt, Geneiating liquid air 610 chimney 878
- intensity of terrestrial mag-
High-capacity influence machines gas lamp 474
netism 796 - 843
822, 823 lamp
- 768 - .512 515
frequency and tension appa- pendulum vapour spectra . . .
.10301035 - Incidence of light, measuring 4M;

ratus (Tesla's) . .
projection apparatus see vol. I. . .
- apparatus for Arsonvali- 662 Inclination apparatus 7!>o

Hprizontarium
sation and other therapeu- Hermann. Commutator .... 867 - explained 789. Tim
tical purposes, see special Horn with reed 429, 464 Inclined Plane 257, 258, 267, --'(is
list without reed 427, 464 Incomplete journal :ilJ
-
pressure iron boiler 634 .... Horse-hair, longitudinally vibrat- Increase of pressure downward-
- tension battery 811 ing 442 338, :::!!i
rheostat 924 Horseshoe electromagnet. 950, 973 . of volume when water freezes (>oo
- transformerl031, 1032, 1038 - 785, 786 Indefinite forces 305
magnets
-
-vacuum pumps magnet with homogeneous Index, alphabetic 1097
390394, 397399 field 789 Indiarubber balloon :ii(i
- - cords 414
- voltage accumulator battery 856 magnet with induction coil 971
Horst'ord. Conducting resistance Indicating apparatus
Hillig, Electrolytic demonstration
.~>.'i7
of liquids 929 - balances 24O

apparatus 945
- Pendulum apparatus . . . 296 Hose unions 207 Indicator cylinder 223
Wave machine 413 Hot water heating model 574 . . . for resistance thermometers 58(>
248 wire instruments 907 - for resonance vibrations. . 838
Hipp's Chronoscope
Hittorff's Tube 1016
- instrument, principle 904, 905 - for
specific gravity .... 347
House and its perspective image 529 of direction of field. . . . 79o
Hoffmann, Diffraction apparatus - with tower and lightning of gases 41o
for determining wave length 548
conductor 836 of induction, automatic . . 971
Hofler, Rail apparatus (inclined
253, 258 Hrabowsky, Tension and accele- Indices of refraction 48(>
plane) ration apparatus 257 .... Indifferent equilibrium 273, 274 . .
Hohnann, Faraday's second law 944 Huber, Boyle's (Mariotte's) law 379 immersion body 354
- Combination of hydrogen
Hughes, Microphone 1054 Individual periodicity of a system 297
and oxygen
- Pocket
945
511
Human beings' breathing 408 . . . Indrikson, Thermopile 1074 ....
spectroscope . . .
eye, explaining 496 Induced radioactivity 1027

Vapour density 614
- Voltameter 942
Hummel-Schuckert Ammeter. 905 .
Inducing and induced electricity
Huyghenian construction of pheno- 804808
Hofrnann-Janssen, Spectroscope 509 mena in crystals 563 .... Induction apparatus with buzzing
Hoisting and transporting ma- Hydraulic analogon of the Leyden sound 93(>
chines (models) .328332 . .
jar 837 with tuning fork inter-
devices for maps, plans, see bellows 336 rupting 92S
vol. I.
press .334, 337, 338,
. . XV coils . 974, 978 982, 1058, XV
jack 330 ram 334, 353, 354 and bar magnet . . . U7L'
Holder for candle .... 812, 813 Hydririn generator see vol. I. and horse-shoe magnet . 97 1
- for carrying crystal and gyp- 955
Hydrodynamical explanation of flat
sum plates 646 current 917 for calibrating ballistic
- for conductivity vessel . . 930 Hydrogen, bombs for, see vol. I. galvanometers 97*>
Hydrometer ....
- for fluorescent cubes . . . 518 237, 346, 348 - coils for measuring electro-
- for Franklin electrode . . . 822 Hydrometer for accumulators 857 .
lytic resistances 886
for porcelain dishes and cru- - for
showing maximum den- coils for Thomson's experi
cibles 217 sity of water 573 ment 1058
- for retorts 203 334, 336 - coilswith interrupters .981
Hydrostatic apparatus . . .
with, terminals 996 balances 238 - without interrupter . . 980

812 - 341 - commutator 981
Hollow balls paradox
- ball for electrometer .
802, 812 Hygrometers ....
652 654, s _'.". currents
- indicator
971 1013
copper ring with tube 1009 Hyperbolical toothed wheels 323 . . '.'7 1
_
. .
cube 230 II
ypocycloid formation 318 .... measured '''!.">
- of crystal glass .... 612 .319 - spirals 813, HKi:

llypocycloidal gear system. .
- cylinder 580, 652 - unipolar

for balloon experi- Ilypsoineter
ments 368 Hypsometric thermometer 578 . . . Inductive effect of discharge shock S2!i
- cylinder free
- repulsion 10081010
for showing
electricity 807 Inequality of surface tension 363. '.Mi,
- cylinder of sheet brass KO9 . .
Inertia, demonstration .... L'5 1
- hemisphere and plane plate Jin moment 289. --".HI
beam with - of water 339

sphere with closing scnu
- iron lioo I traveller see vol. I.
Ice-breaking machine
-"'
lenses *!') (>ol pendulum '
- lOi - calorimeter 616, 617

- 251
polished metal sphere . . . to]>
- chopper 214 Influence electricity Sod
prisms 501, .")(>_'
- 491 608 - machines 81(5823. 1072

prism after Silbermann . . evaporating . .'
- sphere on insulating handle 806 forming 405 machine, model . . . 813, S17

1111
Alphabetical Name and Subject-matter
Page
Page
Page 3
Kitchen balance
Iron stink cupboards see vol. I.
Influence of temperature on re- Kitller, Standard cell
tables, see vol. I. ... 372 jj
912, 9) Kleiler, Duplex barometer

sistance
conduction 638 weights calibrated .... 244
Ingenhouss, Thermal
*
.441 Electric balance
03 with hooks . . .
Injector, model
Ink writer, Morse's
408,
J5J
/
_ weights
wire mantle for glowing char-
6 43
Lateral pressure apparatus 3
Magnetic balance
79
613 coal
Inset for piezometer 359, 603, 607, 525 Universal spring balance . . 3
Irradiation of the moon's crescent
Knapp, Ophthalmotrope ....
522
Instructional model of a gas
Isochromatic wave surfaces, mo-
engine ]** dels 563 Kccb, Single phase alternating 8t>2
Insulated translator pillar . . .
550 current rectifier

wire fork \
Ives, Diffraction chromoecope.
see also vol. I.
.
Koenig, Inclined plane .... 2
Insulating stand . . . 798, 799, 829 529 Manometric flame pipe . . 4

Projection chromoscope
. .
25
stool 302 Massive forks with stand . 4
Ivory ball with marble slab
. .
- table of ebonite 80.* 4

hammer for tuning forks . 440 Sound analysis apparatus .
1074
Intensifying screens Tone impact apparatus . .
Intensity of field, measuring.

. I
Wave siren
_ of fight 465474 Koenigsberger, Direct vision prism
Interchangeable coil with tube o02 (580)
suspension. .... 888
Kohl, High-Vacnum PumpS __ 399
Interference and diffraction Jablcchkoff's Candle
996 o 39
543550, 556, 560, XV Jack with 3 legs 330 Motor mercury interrupter983 .
490
images Jamin, Absorption of liquids by Rotary mercuiy high vacuum
mechanism <>25 364 398, 3
porous bodies pump
_ minor 544, 545 Circle 499
Kb'hler, Electric thunder cloud 827 .
after Fresnel 561 Laminated magnet .... 78c

Kohlrausch, Bridge
_ of sound 461, 462
41
Janssen-Hofrnann, Spectroscope S09 Condenser
\
AA
of wave motions . . .413 /
Japanese mirror
478 Demonstration ammeter and
_ plate
507
546
Jars for powder 21 t voltmeter *
886
tables.
Electrolytic resistances
t . .
prism (Fresnel's) Jelinek, Psychrometer
.
544 * 801
Jet interrupter Electi ometer
506 of water is composed of drops 351 8
ring system, Haidinger's. Resistance vessel
spectroscope
509
Joiner's tools see vol. I. Total reflectometer .... 499
- 50/
sec interference plate. Joint of copper and zinc f
. . . .
Universal bridge
Intermittent fountain 382 ..... Jolly, Air thermometer .... 582
Velocity of migration of
ions 946
wheel with external and in- Spring balance
309 Voltameter 942
ternal teeth .......
326
Jolting and expansion
.... 3
Kolbe, Aluminium electrometer
Intel nal combustion engines
see 4 802, 80J
Joly, Diffusion photometer.
. .
356 Aluminium leaf electroscope 800

vol. I. Jonval Turbine
friction of liquids . . ^
Joule, Electromagnet
951
Ampere's stand .....
heat of cells 840 Law 936, 937 Automatic current-direction
toothed wheels . . .319, 320
. - Mechanical equivalent of indicator
International Weston standaid heat Auxiliary electroscope . . .
cell
845
Journal with bearing 312 Coloured cylinders .... 2
. . . *
Journals' friction 302 Condenser 833
Interrupter, electrolytic
.
= 380 Conductor ',

Interrupters Jug, magic \
for induction coils. . .982984 Jung, Microtome cutter . . . .
Constant cell
Interrupter, Wehnelt's
. 1010, XV Junkers, Calorimeter for techni- Current circuit fall trough 248
,
Interrupting wheel
-
cal calorific value determi- Current conductor .... 950
Interval apparatus .... 447, 44, nations Cylindrical bodies of the
Intrinsic brilliancy, measuring.
467 same weight 350
Introduction to Physics . . . . 250 Demonstration barometer
- to the experiments with Kol- tube 371
595
be's thermoscope Demonstration photometers 467
to the use of Looser's ther- and double
589 Kaehler, Burette stand
203 .... Differential
595
(in German)
. .
moscope .
thermoscope
Invariability of static momentum
26 Kahlbaum, Constant action mer-
Electro-dynamic double pen-
.... cury vacuum pump ...
2
- volume of liquids 3
dulum s
451
Inverted float 380 Kaleidophone
476 Electrometer .... 802, 8
B Kaleidoscopes Electrostatic apparatus 811
Investigating metal spectra ....
. .
31i - for polarised light

Involute formation Experiments on induction
. S
103
gear system
Kann, Copper stirrup
Flexible wire netting . . . 811
_ j-
Joule's law 937
. .
system for rack and pinion

3 . . .
945
self-induction 976 . .
Gas voltameter
Iodine tubes 601 Proving
.
4
295 Glass body
Kater, Reversing pendulum
. .
lonisation of air 485 Hofmann voltameter

by Roentgen rays. 1025 Kepler, Light refraction apparatus Inductive effect of discharge
944, 940 Kettle enamelled for the volati- 829
Ion's migration velocity . .
shock
.787 sation of ammonium nitrate 214
Iron and steel bars Insulated wire fork *
- bar on stand and two wire Key, electric .... 86e 868, 930
. . . .
950 for Wheat stone bridge. 919 . . Key with mercuiy contact. 867 4
Light -refraction apparatus
.
spirals
- with copper wire winding 972 for wireless telegraphy appa-
!052 Mach's optical apparatus
ratus
base for measuring instiu- 960 Model of moving coil galva-
ments 907 Morse's
867 nometer
.... with mercuiy contact
Paper electroscope .... 866
. . .
clad galvanometer 884 79S

Jj
- dish 217
"89
Kienrnayer,
Kiessling,
Amalgam
Parchment strips . .
*
79 Pressure terminals ....
846
filings
Kinegraph 259, XV Projection cell
-free lecture table see vol. I. 25^ Reflection and refraction in
- museum cupboards see vol. I. Kinetic deteimination of mass .
48 5
water
Kinnersley, Electric thermometer
8
789 Rheostat for relative resis-
powder 213
- ring for making ring arma- Kipp, Gas generating apparatus 913
991 Kirchhoif, Law 911 ~~ 9 tance
ture ?l School pattern Wheatstone
* Table of spectra 518
ring with wire turns
. . *
600 Kirchhoii-Thomson, Electrometer bridge
- sphere (explosion ball). S 44 School rheostat 914
810 balance
stands and double cone
in vo
See also the Subject-matter Index
. I.
Page Page Page

Kolba, Sextuple manometer . . 599 Landolt, Elongation of paladium Lenard, Bismuth spiral .... '.ir.r.
- Small voltaic cell 845 on absorbing' hydrogen 853 . .

-
Phoshoroscope ,~>2(i
Specific heat apparatus . . 6 IB - Vacuum gauge 368 Lengths, measuring . . . .221 228
- Steatite 797 833 Lens apparatus 496
piece Lane, Measuring jar
-
Tangent galvanometer . . . 872 v. Lang, Projection polarisation cylindrical 560
-
Testing electroscope .... 802
apparatus 553 disc after Boys . . . 526, 837
-
Tliermoscope 595 - Spectrometer 506 holder 473
-
Trough cell 847 Lantern slide of the curve of of short focal length . 546
. .
- Universal stand $68, XV maximum density 573 .... - on stand !(()()
Kolosy, Compression hygrometer 654 Lantern slide of the trajectory 264 stands 496
Kommerell, Power shunt 893 . . .
- slides for
explaining alter-
Lenses arranged in dioptres . . 498
Koneck, Steel cylinder for calori- nating machines 1001 concave and convex 494, XV . .
metric experiments .... 623 for wave condensing and dispersing,

explaining
Kbnig, Comparing two tones of motions . 413 demonstrated 488
pipes 462 - for 649
of all branches of science. radiophone
-
Phonautograph 456 - for telescope and
Please write for list. microscope
- Sensitive flame burner .418 demonstrations 473
.
wheels 321 . . .
Wave siren disc 283, 420

. . - with Nernst 513 in case 495
619 lamp
Kopp, Calorimeter of rock salt 646
653 Laplace and Lavoisier, Linear .936
Koppe, Capillary hygrometer . .
.571 Lermantoff, Caloriscope . . .
- Curve top 292 expansion coefficient . .

- .365
616 Properties of gases . . .
- Rotational and successive Laplace, Ice calorimeter . . . .

Cube
256
Leslie, for showing different
motion 282 Lapsometer emission of heat 646
Korn, Phototelegraphy .... 932 Large brass conductor 1033 - Differential thermometer . 588
Kbrner, Model of molecule 301, 567 Large optical bench for inter- Letter and Sorting balance . .241
Korolkow, Absolute electrometer 804 ference and diffraction ex- Levelling barometer 376
Kottenbach, Fall apparatus 256 . .
periments 547 board 205, 206
-
Krajevitch, Syphon barometer 373 .
photometer bench 470 Level model 335
- - quadrant
Krebs, Distributing apparatus 806 .
tuning forks with sliding 483
Kvoeker, Calorimeter for deter- weights 438 Lever apparatus 270
mining combustion heat 625 . Larynx, models 444 - bent 315
Kriiger and Dolezalek, Current Lateral pressure apparatus 353 . . .
equal armed 269
flowing through a liquid 848 . Lathe, see vol. I. of aluminium 2(>5
Krupp, Gun trajectory ....
264 Lavoisier and Laplace, Linear ex- stand 270, 275
Kriiss, Optical flame measuring pansion coefficient .571 . . .
switches 866
apparatus see Hefner lamps 47 1
:
Lavoisier, Ice calorimeter 616 . . .
Leyden jar 810, 830832,
Kiihne, Optical eye 523 Laws of magnetic induction .971 . 836,1025, 1033, 1035, 1038
Kiuidt. Covered pipe 428 - of mechanics, collection of battery 832, 1030, 1072
.
- Dust 434 265 - for

figure apparatus . . .
apparatus Coolidge-Blondlot's
- Manometer 419 - of pendulum 260 apparatus 1044
- Manometer in Trussevitch - of reflection 474 - for resonance experi-
stopcock-arrangement 598 . .
Lead balls and hardwood balls 302 .
ments 838
- 838 - base, with test ball si is
Pyro-electric apparatus . .
copper and zinc strips 839

. . . .
Kunzi'te 1027
648
cap for electroscope ....808 Lichtenecker, Optical eye . . . 523
Kurlbaum, Bolometer -
plate and ether thermometer Stability parallelepiped . . 275
Kurz. Moment of inertia for the piezometer ....
289 . . .
359 Liebig, Cooler 21 o
-
plate on ebonite rod . . . 814 Liebreich, Ice machine 214 ....
- 465
plate with hammer and por- Light-angle-measurer
celain bowl 612 Light magnet system for galvano-
meter 883
Leads, connecting 822
Labial pipes 426429 flexible 206 propagation and intensity . -)(>">
Laboratory equipment see vol. I. -reflection 474 483

- furnaces, heavy current on lecture - refraction 483499
electrically heated 940 table, see vol.
- galvanometer 889
I.
Lighting, electric ....
995, 996
- 536 Leading and lagging current prod-
microscope uced 900 Lightning arrester apparatus 928
test
- stand 205 - conductor 835, 836
- switchboards, see vol. I. Leaf electrometer .... 810, 812
- electroscopes Ligroin lamps 531
- tables, see vol. I.
1025
Limatura ferri alcoholisata 789
.... Leaning Tower 274 . . .
La Cour, Phonic wheel 463

and leading current prod-
MI: Leather rubber, amalgamated, Limelight apparatus: sec vol. I.
see ebonite rod 812 punetiform 473

uced 900
Limit, elastic 311
Lahire Guides 324 Le Chatelier, Electric pyrometer 584
849 Limits of audibility 439, 444
Lalande Cell Lecher, Stationary electric waves
. . .
1043, 1044 Linde's Machine, plate of

Lambert, Demonstration photo-
meter 467 - Tube 1044 sketches 610
Lambrecht, Aspiration psychro- 850 Linear bolometer 648
Leclanche Cell
graph 655 Lecture electrometer 803 expansion 568571
- 655 - galvanometer -
thermopile 647
Aspiration psychrometer . .
881
- 653 - room equipment, see vol. I. vernier model 22 1
1'olymerer
- Weather
telegraph 654 .... Leduc, Cohesion and adhesion
Lines elastic
- FraunhoJer s. demonstration 504
306
Laminated magnet 786
tube 361. 4(ir.
of force, electric 788, 8 1 3, 830, 1010
- mirror 504
650 Leduc-Regnault, Differential baro- .962- -!'>,:,
Lamont, Earth thermometer . .
meter 370
of force, theory. . .
645 of spectra 560

Lamp, Locatelli's
- reading apparatus 896 Lehmann, Crystallisation micro- Links 316
- resistance 858, 899 scope 536 Linnemann, Thorium light burner,
see also vol. I. Paper electroscope .... T'.i'.i
M6 vol. I.
- for experiments with Tube for demonstrating va- Lippich, 1'olarisatioii apparatus
Kolbe's thennoscope 598 . . . pour tension 604 561. 562
Lamps for reflecting galvano- Leidenfrost's Experiment 602 . . .
Lippmann, Capillary electrometer 946
meters S7H Lelande, Cell, to be read Lalande I
lUcharge and mechanical
- with slotted 84:5 cell 849 motion 837
chimney . -

Page Page Page

Lippmaim Equality of induced Mace de Lepinay, Polariser and Mahler, Experiments on the theory
and inducing electricity and analyser 550 of electrons 1025
screen action 808 Mach, Commutating device see Maltese cross 326
Liquefaction of gases .608 . . 613 Cascade battery 832 Malzl's Metronome 248
601 -
Liquefying ice Density of electricity . 807. .
Mang, Apparatus for astronomi-
Liquid air generated 610 Dielectric constants .... 838 cal
geography 662
- carried over to the negative - 486
Light-refraction apparatus .
Manganin shunts and series resi-
pole 945 -
Optical apparatus .... 498 stance 885
- films, vibrating 443 - 433
Organ pipe Mangle gear 320, 321
- 501, 502 - Pendulum apparatus 297 wheel 325
prisms . . .
- 560 -
prism, Wernicke's Polarisation apparatus 556. . Manometer flame method for
resistance 1024 - 258
Quadruple inclined plane. .
comparing two tones 462 . .
- for electrometer leaf 803 .

- Tare balances 236 - Kundt's 419
- Wave machine - tone manometer
Liquids endeavour to contract 361 . 412 429
of different specific gravity 350 Machine elements . . . .
312, 313 Manometric experiments with Kol-
Liquid resistance 929 933 - power, provision of, see vol. I. be's 598
thermoscope
Lissajous' Vibration curves 451 455 Maey's Work rail 252 with Looser's thermo-
Listing-Abbe, Refracting indices 479 Magazine, magnetic 786 scope 594
Literature, abbreviations VIII . .
Magdeburg hemispheres ....
402 - flame
pipe 428
Litre vessel 230 Magic funnel 380 Map holders, see vol. I.
Lloyd, Conic refraction 564 .... - jug 380 Marble slab with ivory ball . . 302
Locatelli, Lamp 645 - mirror 475 .1053
Marconi, Magnetic detector .
Lock up cupboards for influence - mirror

- pitcher
(Japanese mirror) 478 .
- Wireless telegraphy .... 1047
machines 824 380 Marine chronometer 249
Locomotive, models 637 tun 380 Mariotte's Bottle 380
Lodestone 785 Magnesia capsules 939 Law 365, 377379
Lodge, Leyden jar 836 Magnesite capsules 939 Martius-Matzdori, Stereoscopic
-
Leyden jar for resonance - crucibles 218, 939 lustre 525
experiments 838 Magnesium lamp 522 Mascart, Insulating stand . . 798
- Resonance experiment 1035 . . .
- sulphate 853 - Quadrant electrometer. . . 841
Loessner's Evaporation apparatus 210 - 522 Masked rotating slot and crank 325
tape
Logarithmic spiral, wheels shaped Magnet model, molecular 788 . . . Mass apparatus 251
according to it 321 stand and movable armature attraction 300
v. Lommel, Reflecting stephano- coil 988 - determination 252
550 -
scope suspension for iron clad gal- Masses, rotating, equalised 262 . .
Longitudinal dividing engines vanometer 884 Massive tuning forks 435, 458, 464
227, 228 - system for galvanometer. 883 . Materials for general use .201 220
- vibration of bars - (Miiller's) for
433 Magnetic and electric experiments general purposes 220
- waves 411 417 with the goniometer .481 - various, for
. .
workshop, see vol. I.
Longitudinally vibrating horse- - balance 795 Mathematical instruction models. 1064
hair 448 - curves 962 Mather- Ayrton, Mirror galvano-
Long stem thermometer 578.... - detector (Marconi's) 1053 . . . meter 888, 889 .
Loose pulleys 271 - double 787 Matrices 948

pendulum
Looser, Dew point finder 594 - effect of a
. . .
discharge shock 829 Matter-index 1097
- Double
thermoscope. 589 . . .
- experiments 787 Maximum density of water 573 . .
- Thermal conduction appa- - fieldand short-circuited ar- - thermometers 579

ratus 639 mature 289 Maxwell, Inertia pendulum 251 . .
Looser-Dubrofski, Aspirator action 598 hammer break 975 - Pendulum . 294

Lorenz, Double pendulum 297 . . .
- induction 971 1013 Wave tube 336
Loud speaking telephone .1056 . .
- machine 973 Measurement of efficiency 252 . . .
Lowe, Psychrometer 656 - of magneto-electric ma- - of the velocity of light 465 . .
Lowering of melting point 607 . . . chines 987 - of time 244 250

- of the melting point of water 359 - magazine 786 Measuring accumulator 930, 933 . .
Lowest position of boiling point 606 - needle 786 - apparatus for the textile in-
Low pressure water lead, see - with
compass card 792 . .
dustry see special list.
vol. I. - with
glas tube
* ....
968 - condensers 935
Lowy, Projectile apparatus . 262 .
-
pendulum 796 - cylinders .... 216, 217, 346
381 -
Luhrne, Pipette pole balance 1010 flasks 219
Luminosity of places . .
465, 466 Magnetising spiral 950 glasses with stopper. 217 . . .
Luminous index 872 Magnetism 785 796 -

jar, Lane's 833
- intensity and - of rotation - of lengths,
angle of in- 287, 977 angles, surfaces,
cidence 474 Magnetized steel gives tones 420 . . and volumes .221. 230
. .
- needle 795 Magnetizing ring after Elihu staff 223

- sphere, Thomson's .1024 . . . Thomson 1010 - wire 930
Lummer, Bolometer 648 - for Mechanical effects of sound 463, 464
two-phase current. 899
Lummer-Brodhun, Photometer Magneto-electric induction ma- - equivalent of heat 285, 286, 627
head - models after
469 (467) chine 973 prof. Eug.Meyer XIV
Lummer-Gehrcke, Interference - electric machine 987 see also the apparatus
plate 507 - electric principle 288, 987, 988 called under the name of
- Interference
spectro- - generator 961, 962 Prof. Meyer's.
scope 509 Magnetometer 793, 794 - model for 945
electrolysis . . .
Lummer-Straubel, Mercury arc Magnetometrical measurements 877 .

Mechanically movable plates for
lamp 515 Magnifier, dichroscopic ....
563 illustrating dynamos and
Lunarion 662 Magnifiers for thermometer of ca- motors 990
Lustre, stereoscopic 524 lorimeter 624 Mechanics, demonstrations . .481
Magnifying glass 530 - general 251 264
- with cross-wires. - of
227 . . .
liquids and gases .334 411
M Magnus, Liquefying gases 359, 613 .
- of solids 265 333
- Thermal conduction of
gases 641 Mechanic's tools, see vol. I.
Mac Farlane Moore, Vacuum tube Mahler, Calorimeter for deter- Medal reprints 948
illumination 1025 mining calorific value of Medical laboratory equipment see
Mac Leod, Vacuum gauge . . . 370 fuels .625 vol. I.

Page "Page Page

Medium-high water-drawing wheel 358 Metal strips 349, 350 Micro -telephone station . lo.v>. io,->n
MeJfert, Pythagorean theorem ex- - tubing 207 Microtomes ,537, f>:!s
plained 1064 Metallic bodies for specific heat (i!7 Microtome cutter alter .lung . .Tils
Megadiascopes, see vol. I. - thermometer 581 - knife r>:is
Megaphone 419 Metastatic thermometer 578, 615

. . Middle-shot water wheel ....
:!,">(>
Megascopes see vol. I.

Meteorological apparatus. .650 660 Migration of a drop of mercuiy 363, !M u
Meidinger, Cell 850 - charts 660 - of ions "944, 946
-
Draught apparatus .... 408 Metre rule 221 Milk glass and plate glass scales s;i.~>
Melde, Universal kaleidophone . 451 Metronomes 248, 615 Mill, Barker's 3.-,:!
- Wave
apparatus 415 Meutzner, Breathing of human - Woltman's :;.v>
Melloni, Apparatus for experi- beings 408 Milli;:iiiineteis <H is

ments on heat i'4."> - Eeflection of light .... 474 - for
high tension list;
- Thermopile 646, 647, 1062, 1063 slide valve cy-
Meyer, Compound Millikan, Foice table L'tii'
Melta lid 1029 linder 632 Millimeter rule -221

Melting by pressure increase .601 .
Meyer, Eugen, Bending model 305 . scale 221
capsules 939 Bent crankshaft 304 Minerals 1064 1065
- crucibles 938, 939 Centre of gravity 267 Mineral cupboard see vol. I.
- furnaces, electric 938 940 Crankshaft with moving parts 305 537
. . .
Mineralogical microscope . . .
- in the .953 - Defoi mation of a

magnetic field . .
parallel- Mineralogy 1064 1069
of ice 574 epipedic body by shearing Minimum thermometers .... ,~>7!>
- 607 stresses 307 Mirror apparatus 504
point
- lowered
by pressure . 359. -
Equilibrium conditions of the (Fresnel's) .... 544, 54r>
Membrane phonautograph 456 316 - 475
. . .
centrifugal goveinor . . .
arrangement after Porro .
- pipe as model of the larynx 444 - Mohr's law on the elastic line 306 box, rotating 284, 431, 898
.
- reed pipe 429 Regulator model, for demons- chamber with telescope 891 . .
- singing 1009 trating the surface law, - demonstration .475 478

. . .
- valve 409 increase of angular velocity - electrometer 844

Membranes, vibrating 442, 443 . . . with decreasing moment of - galvanometers 877 884, 1013
.
Mercadier, Radiophone 649 .... inertia 277 - on stand 442

Mercurial barometer, recording 377 .
- Resonance
apparatus 300 . . .
- reading model 230
-
pressure gauges 369 Rivetting model 306 rotary 484
- - rule ... 221
- vacuum
gauge ........ 369 Spring pendulum 297
Mercury 214 - Statically indefinite forces on sextant 482, 483
- arc lamp after Lummer- a bearing 305 524
stereoscope
Straubel 515 - Surface .277, 290 653
principle . .
Mithof, Hygrometer
- air pump . . . . . .397 399 - Transverse
strength apparatus 304 Mitre gearings 321, 322
- Meyer, V., Air-displacement me-
air pump, demonstration . . 365 Mitscherlich, Apparatus for per-
board 214 thod of determining vapour manent spectra 513
calorimeter 619 density 614 - Gasometer 211
- compensating pendulum for Meyerstein, Hollow prism .501 . .
- Polarisation
apparatus . . ."til
standard clock 247 - Refractive indices ..47!' . . Mixed colours -S4

- distilling apparatus .... 39!) Mica and gypsum plate ....538 Mixing coloured rays and mate-
drop, migrating 363 ..... combinations 565 rial colours 528. 5J!
- expansion 574 condensers ...... 933, 934 heat <>_'.->
- filtration apparatus 399 .... disc 810 - method calorimeters . . . (il'.i

- gasometer 211 - plates for condensers 813 . . . of gases 41d
-
high vacuum pump 399 .... preparations 564 - the spectrum colours . . . 504
- 983 slab 59G Mixture of radium and zinc sul-
interrupters .
jet interrupter 984 Michel, Resistance to breaking phide 1027

press 399 strain 30G Models anatomical 1069
resistance thermometer 937 . .
Michelson, Echelon grating 507 . . Model for equalisation of rotating .
- shower apparatus 403 Micro-balance 232 masses L'I>_
- spectrum lamp 515 - gas burner 615 - geyser 630. <;:u
- supplies for work with m. 214, 215 Micrometer for spark lengths 811, 834 - of air and gas engines 62!(, l>:io
- switch 867 - gauge 220 - of balances 275, '27
- thermometer and water ther- - for
spectrometer 506 . . . - of circular vernier 228, . . -'_'!'
mometer 577 - -
(ring micrometer) for tele- of compound microscope. . ">:!]
-
trough 1009 scopes 543 - of controller 99S
- vacuum
pumps .397 399
. . .
- screw-micrometer 225 of and diamonds
ciystals
vapor lamp 1026 Microphones 1054 1067 KMiii
-
vapor rectifier: 862 Microphone for photophonic ap- - of 987 991
dynamos
see also vol. I. paratus 1059 - of ear 444
Meridiancircle, model .531 . . .
- for speaking arc lamp 1057, 1058 of hot water heating . . . 574
Mermet and Delachanal, Spark Microphony 1054 1060 of human eye ....
522, .">_:!
tube 514 Micro-photographic apparatus 539 - of 33S
.
hydraulic press
Metacentre and buoyancy 345 . . .
Microprojection, see vol. I. - of larynx 444
Metal baronieteis 375 377 Microscopes 533 537 of linear verniers --1
- beaker for Microscope, demonstrating 4!>7 - of machine elements and
graduatiiifiBraun's . . .
electrometer 803 demonstration 473 parts and of complete ma-

- coating for rubber slab 822 . . for circle dividing engine . i'L!S chines 312 :m
- compensating pendulum for - for
projections 560 - of microphone station . .1055
standard clock 247 See also vol. I. nl minor reading L'.'io
- cube with hollow cube 230 . .

- for reading scales . . . 226, 227 of minor sextant 482
- disc with insulating grip. .1073 - vibration in -l.">7. l-~>s o molecule 301, 567
- drum stick 44(1 Microscopic phenomena . . f>.~6, .Mil. of pump 383 385
- polarisation apparatus
lovers 265, 269 . . 5 .">.". lit
ship's screw :!57
- receiver 596 leading electioineter. . . . Ml - of steam engine . . .631 (i.'!7
mils for conduction experi- Microscopical preparations . . . 53S of stopcock for \ acmmi pumps :is7
ments 597 - specimens 540 of turbine 356, I!:. 7
- split-re, nickeled ">ts Micmscopy lamps see vol. I. of ventilator '-'>>-
stand for magnet stirrups. 884 tables see vol. I. of water meter 355

Page Page Page

Model Tables of toothed gears 318, 319 Miihlenbein, Model of convex and Miiller, Friedr. C. G., Reduction
- theodolite 532 concave mirror 477 tables for gas volumes mea-
Modulus of Young 308 - Models of lenses 494 sured wet 615
Mohr, Burettes 220, XV - Thermal conduction . . . 638 - Reflection apparatus . . . 475
- Densimeter 348 Miiller, Friedr. C. G., Action of - Resistance spirals . . . .912
- Hardness scale
(Name reads 626 - Rods of different substances
gunpowder
correctly Mohs) 312 .Air thermometer 583 for thermal conduction ex-
- Law on the elastic line 306 - Arbor wheel 270, 275 639
. .
periments
- Pillar tare balance .... 236 - Arc light 473 -
Rolling cylinder for recording
Specific gravity balance 237 . .
Arrangement for elasticity, the cycloidal path of the
Mohs, Hardness scale 312, 1069
. .
expansion and breaking tests 312 centre of gravity ....
274
Molecular effects of gaseous bodies - Balance
galvanometer 875 . . .
- Self - correcting air thermo-
- Boyle's (Mariotte's) law 378 meter 583
410, 411 . .
of liquids .... 358365 -

Breaking tests 311 - Sheet cardboards with con-
- of solids 301312 - Calorific value of hydrogen 622 ducting wires 9<>4
- magnet model 788 - Calorimeter vessel .618
. . .
- Short-circuited armature in
- weight determination . 615
. .
- Channel balance 342 the magnetic field 289....
Molecule model 301, 567
- Closed iron ring with coils 991 - Short-circuited rotor 1004 . . .
Moment of bending 304 - Compass 793 -

Simple Wheatstone bridge 919 .
- ofinertia .... 277. 289, 290 - Conductivity of electrolytes 929 - Soft iron rod 789
of torsion 270 Crossed currents 968 - Specific gravity of gases 367 .
269 -
Dasymeter (baroscope) 402 - Spring balance 309
Momentum, static . .
- theorem 269 - Demonstration thermometer 577 - Square conductor for Am-

- Dilatation thermometer 588 968
Monochord 440, 441 . .
pere's rule
Monochromatic light 512 - Diminution of pressure appa- - Stability 275
prism
Monophase alteinating current ratus 354 Steel rings for magnetizing. 786
992 994 - Distribution of pressure 336 Thermo -cell 1062
dynamo -
. .
Monsoons and cyclones, theory 286 Dropping apparatus .362. .

-
Thermocouple 1062
Montgolfier, Hydraulic ram . . 353 Drum rheostat 916 Torsional force model 309 . . .
Morin, Fall machine 256 -

Duplex pressure gauge 369. . Torsional strength 309....
Morse Ink writer 959 Dynmeter 795 Torsion pendulum 298
- for Earth inductor 972 - Tube
wireless tele- .
expansion apparatus 570 .
- 967 - Universal
graphy 1049 Electrodynamic action . .
apparatus for the
- key 868, 960, 1049
-
Equipment of class rooms: laws of mechanics 266....
- for 50 amp -
1052 see vol. I. U-shaped decomposing cell 943
- Telegraph - -
958 960 Experimental barometer 372 . U-tube for liquids of different
- Fall machine 256 342
Mortar 215 gravity
- electric 826 - Friction brake 332 - Various materials for general
Moser, Breath figures 410 - Friction on journals .... 302 purposes 220
- Flow of current in three- - Gas dilatometer 576 - Vertical galvanometer . . . 875
1005 - Grooved glass with electrodes 943 Voltameter 942
phase leads
- - Water chamber (optical eye) 523
Motion and forces .251
. . 264
. Heating of mercury by the
259 electric current 937 - Water jet projectile appa-
Motions, compound, explained .
- 634 ratus 264

Motion of gases 386 409 High pressure iron boiler .
of heated air 576 - Hofmann voltameter .942. .

- Wind vane and wind wheel 282
- of liquids 350 358 - Horse-shoe magnet with in- -
Winding formers 991
- mechanical and discharge 837 . duction coil 971 - Wood protractor 22*
- rotational and successive 282 .
-
Hydrostatic apparatus. 336. .
- Zinc-copper cell .....
847
- Immersion tubes 349 Miiller G., Ozone generating tube 1017
Motor driving stand for influence
machines 824
- Inclined plane .... 258, 268 Miiller J., Laws of reflection. 474 .
Motor, electromagnetic 957, 958

. .
- Indicator cylinder .... 223 Light-refraction apparatus 483 .
- - Inductive effect of discharge 829 Miiller -

electromagnetic, for Geissler
Recknagel, Hydrostatic
- Iron 336
tubes 958, 1017 ring for making ring apparatus
- electrostatic 826, 827
at mature 991 Multiple commutators 868,869,883,981
- Lecture table: see vol. I. 965
- for
gas, petrol, electricity etc. : Multiplication effect
- Lever stand 968
see vol. I. 275 Multiplier demonstration . . .
- Lines of force
generators, see vol. I. image 964, 965 .
Multiplier, model 876
- - Luminous index 872 Nobili's 880
mercury interrupters 983 . . .
- Luminous needle 795 Muriatic acid tube, 613

Motz, Condenser 833
Moulds for ice regelation .601 Magneto electric machine 987 . Museum, equipment: see vol. I.
Mounts for Nicol prism .... 565

. .
- Mercury resistance thermo- Muslin net, Faraday's .... 808
meter 937 Mutual induction, measuring . 935
Mousson, Apparatus for liquefy- - Model of a 523
ing ice 601 moving coil Myopia
- Spectroscope 510 galvanometer with bifilar
suspension 886
Mouthpiece, universal 420
Movable conductor after Miihlen-
- Model of a
multiplier .876. . N
-
Multiplication effect 965
. . . Name index 1097
bein 968 - Optical bench ....... 473 Tubes with carbonic acid 613
Natterer,
Movement of the clock 333 .... - Osmose 365 Needle coherer 1051
- of the -
single images of both - Parabolic and circular mirror electric 811
eyes 524 for catacauteiy 477 Galvanometers . . . 884, 885
Moving coil galvanometers 884 892 - Parallel mirrors 475 - shaped thermocouple 1062 . . .
- galvanometer, models 886 .

Pascal's law 339 - telegraph 958
- 933 Pasteboard models, showing vacuum pump 397
pointer galvanometer .
Neesen, Mercury
- magnet galvanometers 874 884 the ring system 563 Nernst lamp for demonstration. 995
- system of galvanometer not - Pendulum dynmeter. .1072
. .
- for galvanometer 883 . . .
withdrawable 904 - Pendulum frame 294 - for projectors: see vol. I.

Miihlenbein, Alternating action of - Photometer screen ....
474 - with condenser, lens and
currents and magnets 967, 968 - Precision gas voltameter 942 . wall bracket 879
- Burette for specific gravity Precision pulleys 270 - with
protecting cylinder 878-
determinations 346 - Protractor on stand 493
. . . with shade: see vol. I.
- 483 - Punctiform limelight 473
Light refraction apparatus . . .
Velocity of ions !I44

Page Page Page

Nestler, Axial cross 1066 Ocular glass micrometer .... 537 Oscillations forced 'JUT
Nets of wire 210 - micrometer (Fresnel's) . . . 545 - of liquids 298
Neumann, Heating apparatus - net micrometer 537 Oscillatory character of dis-
(Neumann's tap) 617 - prism for telescope .... 543 charges 837, 1036
- Light refraction apparatus 484 - spectroscope for telescope 543
. .
discharges, stroboscopic
Neutralisation heat 625 - with gap for demonstration 526
analysis
- of opposite kinds of electri- goniometer 479 Oscillographs 900
city 799 Odstrcil, Apparatus for Coulomb's Oscillograph tube 897
Newton, Colour disc 504 law 809 Osmose apparatus 364, 365 . . .
- Colour glasses 544 - Pendulum electrometer 804, 812 - of gases, shown with Kolbe's
- Crossed prisms 500 Oerstedt, Deflection of magnet thermoscope 598
-
Reflecting telescope, model 531 needle 949 Osram metal filament glow lamps 995
- 543 - Piezometer 358, 359 Ostwald, Air bath 210
Rings, interference 285, .
529 Field goniometer 229 - Capillary electrometer 946

Transparent colour disc . .
Ohmann, . . . . . .
- Tube
(fall tube) 404,
. . . 405 Ohm for school use 913 - Clare standard cell 844 ....
Niaudet, Tuning fork clock . . 463 - single 915 Conductivity of electrolytes
Nicholson, Hydrometer .... 346 Ohm's Law 911931 930, 931
812 - - 930
Nickeled hollow balls hydrodynamic expla- Measuring wire
- metal sphere 548 nation 917 Thermostat 930
-
plane mirror 596 Ohmmeter 928 - Vessel for
conductivity meas-
Nickelin wire 870 Oil-condenser with variable ca- uring 930
Nickel-plating 949 pacity 1038 Otto, Horizontal gaz engine 629, 630
Nickel-steel compensating pen- Oil-damping 891 Oudin, Currents of high frequency
dulum for standard clock . 247 Oil-insulated high tension trans- and voltage 1035
565 former 1035 -
Nicol Prisms High frequency apparatus:
- Prism in brass mount . . . 559 Oil transformer for high tension 1031 see special list.
Nicol with sharp edges .... 560 Oil-vacuum pumps ....390 397 Resonator 1037
Niembller, Endosmometer . . . 365 Oldham, Coupling 315 Outfit for specific gravity de-
- Mechanical demonstration of Olszevski, Demonstration appa- terminations 237
the laws of refraction . . 493 ratus for generating liquid Outfits, photographic 522
Nippoldt, Telephone bridge . . . 928 air 610 Outflow apparatus . . . 350, 351
Nitrogen dioxide tube 613 Costing, Laminated mirror 504 . . .
- experiments .... 334, 354
369 - 411
Nitrosyl chloride tube 613 Open mercurial pressure gauge .
velocity of gases
Nitrous oxide tube 613 objective 558, 560 Outflowing gases 408
- 428 Over-cooling of water 600
Noack, Apparatus for the study pipe
of potential .... 809, 810 Opera and field glasses ....
540 Overflow apparatus 574
Burner for monochromatic 522 - 220
Ophthalmotrope pipettes
light 512 Oppelt, Siren disc .... 283, 420 vessels 2,~>o
- Compensated water dilato- Oppolzer, Reading machine 250 . .
Overlapping of the images . . . 524
meter 572 Opposed and unidirected currents 968 Overshot water wheel . . 355, 356
-
Discharge tube for resonance Opposite kinds of electricity neu- Overtone apparatus 447
vibrations 838 tralised 799 Oxidation-reduction cells . . . 847
-
Explaining of Wheatstone Optics 465566 Oxygen bombs see vol. I.
498 - burners, see vol. I.

bridge 917 Optical apparatus, Mach's . . .
- Goniometer for student's use 480 - Zwick's 496 retorts, see vol. I.
- 612 - bench 497 Ozone generating tube . .1017
Liquefying gases . .
- School galvanometer .881 . .

- after F. C. G. Miiller . 473
Voltaic fundamental experi- - after Paalzow .556 . 558
ments 839842 - after Weinhold .... 472
- Zamboni pile 809 - for explaining micro-
Nobert, Photographed grating 549 .
scope and telescopes . . .531
947 - for interference and Paalzow, Optical benches .556-^558
Nobili, Colour rings dif-
-
Multiplier 880 fraction experiments . . . 547 Oscillatory character of dis-
Nodal lines, concentric 442.... - for short wave apparatus 1041 charges 1036
- point of tuning fork 439 . . .
- disc after Hartl 488490,
. XV Volumnometer 380
Node position of a swinging horse- - experiments with the gonio- Pachy trope for induction coils 981 .
hair 442 meter 481 Pacinotti, Ring armature 288, 987 .
Nee, Thermopiles 1063 eye 523 Pacinotti-Gramme .Machine 289 . . .
Nollet, Percussion apparatus . . 303 fatigue 526 Paddle wheel 357

- illusions 528 Page, Electromagnetic motor
Nbrrenberg, Mica combinations 565 (
. .i~>7 . .
- Polarisation 553 - instruments 530 543 Pair of bulbs after Violle 651
apparatus . . . . . .
- Sound interference tube . . 461 - measuring instruments 499 . . of cpils for galvanometer 882 .
- Subjective colours .... 527 - outfits for projection lan- - of plates, Volta's 839
Nut. rotary 313 terns: see vol. I. - of spur wheels with weights :>2!l
- 587 Paladium-hydrogen apparatus 853
pyrometer .
Opto-electrical experiments . 1026 .

Palmer, Micrometer gauge -'-J3 . . .
Opto-electric telegraphy .... 1053 Palmieri, Earth inductor '.'7- . . .
Oral cavity, resonance .... 439 I'.lcctrophorus 815

OisU stand 260, 265 Organ pipe Mach's 433 Pamphlet by Dr. Zwick .... 4'J7
297 - mouthpiece 427 Pan of balance 2tn, 2sil.311, 571
Oberbeck, Cross pendulum . . .
Double pendulum 297 Oscillating cross slot 315 Pannellings for lecture theatres
538 - double crank 314 etc.: see vol. I.
Object carrier
- holder, rotary . . . 557, 560 - movement 325 Pantenius, < 'oherer 1 o.M
micrometer 537 - 285, 504
- prism Paper balances: see special list.
513 - slot and crank 314 condenser 900, 934, 1013
Objective chemical spectra. . . . . .
- for solar microscopes . . 540

. steam cylinder 631 -r- condenser for singing arc
558, 560
- thrust crank 314 I""-*
open lamp
- reading device 890 Oscillation analysing apparatus. 837 electroscopes 799, 811
telescope 890 Oscillations and vibrations shown for filtring 2-_'o
Oblateness of a sphere of oil . 281 with the stroboscopic cy- '

membrane's 442, 4-4.'i
Observation tube 560, 562 linder . 283 - strip for recording pressure
Octagonal wire grating . . . .1042 electric 1030 lo:>3

Page Page Page

Paper strip with baryum platino- Pendulum discharger 811 Phase displacements produced 900 .
519 - dynmeter 1072 - reversing plate 549

cyanide
- tassel 825 - electric .... 798, 805, 811 Phenomena of critical temperature 612
- tube drying device .... 797 - electro-dynamic 969- Philosophical preparations . . .1071
- wheel (wind wheel) .... 464 - electrometer .... 804, 812 Phonautograph 456, 457
Papin, Digester 606 - escapment 333 Phonautographic cylinder . . . 456
I 'arii- and diamagnetic experi- - for moment of inertia . . 290 .
- recording 455 457
ments 977 Galilei's 258 Phonic wheel after La Cour . . 463
Parabola of projectiles 264 .... - laws 260 Phonographs 460, 461
Parabolic and cylindric mirror for - magnetic 796 Phonometer 464
thermal reflection 642 .... - of brass and wood .... 266 Phosgene tube 613
- concave mirrors 643 . . . . .
- of variable length 266 Phosphorescence .... 519, 520
concave mirrors after Gar- - polygonal 293 - in the electric shadow 1020 . . .
basso 1042 - race 281 Phosphorescent lamp 1021, 1034

. .
- form of water
jet 352 - stands 293, 294 paint 520
- governor 637 see also vol. I. - substances 519, 520
- mirror 476 - v. Waltenhofen's
Phosphorogenic action of radiant
- mirrors for Hertz's experi- 952, 955, 956, 976 matter 1018
ments 1039, 1040 Watt's 281 Phosphoroscope 285, 520
Parachute, model 409 - with measurable Phosphorous spoon 215
directly
Paradox hydrostatic 341 length 294 Photograph, connection scheme
Puraff in block 813 with dissymmetrical system of oscillograph 900
engines: see vol. I. of masses 282 - of the solar spectrum 550 . . .
- 986
lamp with slotted chimney Penetrative power of X-rays . .
Photographed grating after
843, 878 Penn, Slide valve 633 Nobert 549
- 809, 813 Penseler, Action of heavy current Photographic enlarging apparatus
plate :
- Ki:i!l fuses 938 see vol.

prism I.
Parallactically mounted
telescopes
-
Parallelogram of motion 258 . .
- outfits 522
542, 543 Pepys' Gasometer 211 - recording apparatus for
Parallax-free reading of deflection Percussion apparatus . 302, 303
.
galvanometers 892
leaves 1029 - trough 302 - work tables, see vol. I.
Parallel copper wires 1034 Perforated cylinder for mirror and Photography 520
522
- crank 314 lens experiments 473 Photometer 466
470
- mirrors' 475 - cylindrical pillar ..... 531 Photometer bench .
467, 470, 472
- switching of conductors 917 . . Period of oscillations determined 1044 - demonstrating 497
Parallelepiped (Fresnel's) 556 . . .
- of swing increased ..891
. .
- screen 465, 472, 474
Parallelepipedic wood blocks 206 . .
Periodicity, critical 297 Photometric accessories for opti-
Parallelogram of forces .260 262 .
- of a system 297 cal bench 472
- of motions 258, 259 Permanent magnet string galva-
- experiments 474
260 nometer 892 - 587
Parallelograms of pasteboard . .
pyrometer
Parallelogram of path 258 - spectra .- 513 Photometry board: see vol. I.
- Watt's KKio
316 Permeability of heat rays with Photophony 1058
Paramagnetism .
952, 953, 954
. . Kolbe's thermoscope 596 . . . Photos for projection chromo-
Parasite plate 617 Pernter, Psychrometer tables 655 . .
scope 529
Parchment strips 799 Perot and Fabry, Interference Phototelegraphy, Korn's .... 932
Parr, Calorimeter for the calorific plate 507 Physical apparatus, estimates
value determination of fuels 623 Perrin, Vacuum tube 1026 10751085
Parts, auxiliary, for work stand Perry and Ayrton, Double com- - for
projection
201, 202 mutator 935 10941096, XV
Pascal, Apparatus 334, 339, 340
. .
Perspective images 529 - testimonials IX XIV
. .
Pascal's Law 336, 339 Pesograph 256 - balances 231244

Pasteboard cylinder with bottom 598 Petit, Thermal radiation appa-
- work stand 201, 202
- model of the Schroeder ratus 648 Picein (Walter's) .220
step
view 525 Petit and Dulong's law .617
. . . Piece of steatite 814
- models, showing the ring - Linear
expansion 570 .
- of wire with lugs 311
563 - - thin sheet steel 786
system Mercury expansion 574
Pastille press 615 Petroleum baths for standard re- Piercing glass 828, 829
Path of projectiles 258 sistances 920, 921 Piezometer and insets . . 358, 359
- of rays in lenses 495 498, 531 PettenkoSer's Experiment 410 . . .
- inset for comparing gas
- of rays in mirrors 617 tensions 603
Pettersson, Heating apparatus .
477, 490493, 497 Pfaundler, Andrew's calorifere 619 .

- for the liquefaction of
-
parallelogram of 258 - Automatic induction indi- 613
gases
Pearls of glass 220 cator 971 Pigment mixtures ....... 528
Peaucellier,Guide 316 - Current calorimeter ....
937 Pile driver 332
Pedometer 223 - Double chamber (differential) - electrometer 840
on air thermometer 582 - Volta's 840
Pellat, Experiments liquid
pressure 340, XV -
Electricity resides on the
- Zamboni's .809, 810, 840, 1029
Peltier Effect see also Differential surface 807 Pillar, perforated cylindrical . .531
588 - 828 - tare balance 236
thermoscope Fulminating slab
shown with Kolbe's -
Heating apparatus for calori- Pin gearing 319
thermoscope see Tubular metric experiments .617
. . .
Pipes 426433
receiver with rods of anti- - 493 Pipe for higher tones of tone series 445
Light-refraction apparatus .
mony and bismuth 598 - 452 - mouthpieces 427

. . .
Lissajous figures
- Thermoelectric cross . . . 1063 - Pacinotti-Gramme machine - with 4 nozzles 420
- experiment . . .
1063, 1064 289, 987 Pipettes 220
- Wave machine
Pendulum, Airy's double p. . . 451 417 Pipette for barometer tubes 602 . .
- apparatus 296, 297 Pfeffer, Endosmometer ....

365 - Luhme's 381 -. .
- for vibration curves 451 . . Pt'laum, Electric harmonica 430 . .

Pistol, electric 825
- ball 283 Phalanges in glass tube .... 1073 for determinations of mass 252
- centrifugal 258 Pharmaceutical lecture table see :
- for fall
experiences ....
263
- -
clock with electric contact 621 vol. I. target and stand 263
-
compensating 245 - spectrum apparatus .... 508 Piston rod of steam cylinder. 637 .

Page Pag* Pg
Piston vacuum pumps. 394 . .386 Poggendorif, Switch 853 Position of nodes of a horse-hair 442
Pitchblende 1027 Pohl, Mercury switch 867, 1013. .
Poske, Compensated water dilato-
Pitch prism 1042 Pointer galvanometer 933 meter f>72
Pitcher, magic 380 for short wave apparatus 1041 -
Tangent galvanometer . . . sTI
Pitot, Tube for velocity of flow 354 Poin 's action, electric 827 .... Potassium bichromate *.">:;
Plane, inclined 257, 258, 267, 268

. Poison siphons 381 cell Ki2i>
- mirror
478, 596 Polarisation (of light) Potential difference and potential
- of rotation conserved 292
-
. . .
550556, 559, 560 drop 803, 826, 839
parallel glass vessels 528 . . . Polarisation apparatus 285, 550 556 Potential drop in the neighbour-
-
-
parallel vessel 645 - for Ilartl's disc 490 .... hood of a conductor . . . 810
plate and hollow hemisphere 240 investigations on
for electric 809, 810
Planet wheels 324 minerals and foodstuffs 538 . . Potentiometer !I27
Planimeter 230 - fortechnical purposes 561, 562
Pouillet,Compression apparatus 4 117
Plano-convex lens 495 battery 1000 Pyrheliometer i>;>2
Plans of class rooms see vol. I. by magnetizing forces Sine and tangent galvano-
Plante, Cell 853 953, 955, 956 meter 873
Plaster models for the isochro- in double refracting sub- 1061
Thermocouple
matic wave surfaces .563 . .
stances, model 562 Poulsen, Telephonograph . . . .lor, 7
Plastic vision of both eyes. 524 . . outfit for spectrometer 505 Powder Iu2.">
. .
electroscopic
Plasticity "... 308 -
polyoscope 563 jars 2IS
Plastoscope (anaglyphon) 529 . . .
projection apparatus: see - spray 443
Plateau, Equal weight figures 360 . vol. I. Power, carrying, of a magnet . 788
-
Flattening a sphere 360 .... -
spectroscope 554 gas (gasoline) generators: see
- Irradiation 525 tube for demonstrations 552 . . vol. I.
Plate condenser 811 Polariscopes 561, 562 shunt 893
- glass and milk - after Savart
glass scales 895 556 tickle 266, 271
- 499 Polarised relay - transmission
prism .960, 1052, 1053
. . 997 999
- slab, body and Polariser-action 847
sliding Prandtl, Angular changes at the
balance pan for friction ex- and analyser after Mac6 de edges of a body by shearing
periments 268 Lepinay 550 stresses 307
- 354 and batteries
hemisphere
- valve
Polarising cells . . 853 Rotating disc and weighted
408 Pole balance 796 bar 290
Plates, capillary
- for adhesion
364 - Grimsehl's 801 Precession, equinoctial .... 661
experiments 302 .
magnetic 1010 Precious stone copies . '. 1066, 10117
- for 986 - supplementary .1011 Precision balances
ionising experiments . .
" parts . . . .233 2.'iti
- for
optical illusions .... 528 - determining cell 1012 bridges 924, 925
- for vacuum
pumps .... 400 - finders 858 capillary electrometer . . . 946
- of alum, borax, -
sugar, calc- finding paper 858 compass 792, 911
spar, agate, crown and flint - interrupters 866 condensers 933, !K!4
glass, sal ammoniac . . . 646 Polemoscope 475 hot wire ammeter !)lo . . . .
- of black glass, citric acid and Polished plane mirror 878 - instruments iioii
mica 646 Polychord 441 - instruments, dead beat 908, 909
- of brass 1033 293 milliammeters 908
- of Polygonal pendulum
glass
- of mirror
220 Polymeter, Lambrecht's .... 653 moving coil galvanometer . ssf>
glass with haft 552 .
Polyoscope 563 - pulleys 270
- of 809 500 ....
paraffin Polyprism rheostats 921, 922, 930
- of quartz 646 Grimsehl's 494 - spectrometer 505
- 1074 292 2o7
photographic Polytrope stopcock
- 442 -
vibrating Poncelet, Dynamometer (spring telephone 1054, lo.y.i
Platform weighing machine . . 276 balance) ....'.... 310 weights 241 244
Platinum bowl for silver volta- Wheel 356 work stand 202
meter 943 Ponderomotive effect 1012 Preface Ill
- cap with Bunsen burner 643, 645 Porcelain crucibles 217 Preliminary pumps 390, 394, 399 .
- crucibles 218 - dishes 217

j
Preparation cupboards: see vol. I.

- dish with wire 602 - rod and ebonite rod 810 - cylinders 217
triangle . . . . .
- 943 - room and Workshop equip-

plate for copper voltameter Porosity of solids 403
- stirrer for Beckmann's 615 Porous bodies 364 ment: see vol.
app. I.
- tetahedra
- wire
615 - partition walls 410 stand (microscope) .... 5.'17
glow light 474 Porro, Mirror arrangement . . . 475 table: see vol. I.
wire netting
- worked
430 Prism combination .... 503 Preparations for polarisation phe-
up in furnaces . . 940 Portable apparatus for wireless nomena 553, 554, 564
. . 566
Pliicker-Fessel, Causing an in-
telegraphy 1048 - for spectrum experiments 517 .
duotion current 976 -

bridge 927 - of quartz 5tl(i
- Wave machine . . . 415, 416 - electric measuring instru- -
pressed and impressed 312. ."idii .
Plug and sliding rheostat

- commutator
. . 914 .
ments ...... .908 911 radioactive 1026, 11127
867 electrometer 801 Presbyopia 523
Plumb bob 22!) j
electroscope 1028 Pi-ess with terminals
contact . SliT
- line 229 - experimental switchboards. - for
rale-spar doublets . . . 312
Plunging syphon 381 Bee vol. I. - for corks 2111
Pneumatic densimeters .... 348 gallows 2ix; for glass :.:>!. 5H-I
- fire syringe 626 - indicator for resistance ther- for liquel'vinu nascs .... tins
- 216 mometers 586 - for 215. c
trough mercury :f!i .'
-
troughs on lecture tables: see
- iron table for - for
photometer pa~t illes lil.">
\-oi: i. bench 470 for producing sliding sur-

Pocket chronometer 249 - lecture tables: see vol. I. faces . .
.Mill
spectroscopes .... 510, 511 -

moving coil galvanometer hydraulic. . 337, 338, 334, XV
- voltmeter 858 SM. ss.-, - with rail 826
port pattern . . .
Poggendorff, Balance 257 resistance testing set 112(1 . . . and impressed prepara-
-
Hohnenberger's machine 282, 292 stand for steel cylinders 609 . . tions 312, 566
-
Polarising battery 853 stink-cupboards; see vol. I. change 419
- Rheochord 912 Pol trait sand busts of famous chemists. - in bent or constricted
- 287. 1017 tubes 354
Stroboscopic disc . .
physicists etc., see vol. I.

Page Page Page

Pressure critical 601 Protecting case for quadrant Radiation calorimeters 620
diminution cools gas . . . 591 electrometers 842 thermal 639
- drop in tubes 334 screen for observing melting tube 642
- flask. Schneider's 366 process 939 thermometer 651
- gauges 368, 369 Protractor on stand .... 493 1052
229, Radiator, Righi's
- gauge for valve 610 524 Radioactive preparations
regulation .
Pseudoscopic vision . . . 1027
-
governor 624 Psychrograph 655 Radioactivity 10261029
- increase coefficient .... 575 Psychrometer 654 656 Radiometer, electric . .
1020, 1021
increases downwards 338, 339, XV tables 655 Radiometers 649
- level 368, 419 Puccianti, Apparatus for repelling Radiophone 649
- of the air 403 air bubbles 838 649 ....
-
Radiophonic apparatus
propagation 335 Pulley blocks 266 Radio-telegraphy .1046
. 1053
. .
- of gases 368 Pulley drive 328 Radium bromide 1026

-
regulator 426 Pulleys 265 - cell 1026
- terminals
865, 866 - on cramps 266 Radius of curvature 498
- tubes for 359 - precision 270
- tube with
piezometers . . .
Ragona Scina, Contrasted colours 527
piston and plugs 335 Pulse hammer 606 Rail apparatus (Roller's) 253, 258 .
PriniM- v conductor after Zehnder 1042 Puluj, Fall tube 405 Rails for inserting in floor of lec-
Prism apparatus 502 -
Lamp 1021 ture room: see vol. I.
Prismatic rule 221 - Mechanical equivalent of Railway, centrifugal 276
- 516 heat - electric
troughs 285, 286, 627 998
- Radiant electrode matter
Prism, disc and cylinder of card- 1020 .
Rainbow, explanation 488
board 474 Pulverising dishes 215 Rainbow generating 503
- double - tube of glass 408 Rain gauges
refracting 560, 565, 566 656, 657
- for carbon 501 383 385 358
disulphide . . .
Pump-models Raising the sluices
- for 275 Pumps, air, 386 399, see also Ram hydraulic
stability 353, 354
- of 499, 500 vol. I.
glass Ramsden, Dynameter for tele-
- of rock salt 646 Punctiform limelight 473 543
scopes
- 285 Pycnometer 250, 349 - Electric machine 816
oscillating . . . . .
-
reflecting 475 Pyramidal rectangular prism 503 . .
Rapid balance, German . . . .241
- stands 500 Pyrheliometer 652 1074
Rapidfolien
systems .
502, 503
.
'
Pyro-electric apparatus 838 .... Rapidly annealed glasses 490, 560, 564
with cut in the form of a vase 494 Pyrometer 584587 Ratchet gears 326
with its hollow mould 312 . . .
- calorimetric 587 Ratio of velocity of light in air,
- for water and glass 465
Producing ice by evaporation 607 . expansion experiments
Progression, continuous, of tones 568, 569 Rays of electric power . . . .1039
439, 445 (Le Chatelier's), electric . . 584 Reaction apparatus .... 352, 353
- optical, after Wanner 587 - cannon 262
Projectile apparatus .262 264 . . .
. . .
- diagraph Pyrometric cones 587 - float 352

264
- Pyrophone 430 - 352, 353
parabola 263, 264 pressure
- Pythagorean theorem 1064 - vessel for Parr calorimeter. 623
path 258
-
pistol 263
- wheel .
353, 404, 407,
. . XV
- wheel, acoustic
Projection-anorthoscope .... 526
Q - wheel for steam
464
- 603
apparatus and accessories:
see vol. I.
Quadrant 483 Reading devices for mirror in-
- cell 846 - electrometer struments 893 896
828, 841
. 843
.
- device for thermometer
- 529 227 . .
chromoscope Quadrants for weighing patterns
- device for Foucault's of yarn, paper etc., see glass 250
pen- - machines for
dulum 298 special list. diagrams. 249, 250
- grade scale for aluminium - 226
Quadrilateral crank gear . . .314 microscope
.
- for 227
electrometer 802, 812 Quadruple inclined plane . . . 257 dividing engine . .
-
Ualcidoscope 476 - quartz 566 telescopes 225, 890
plate -
lens for interference images 490 telescopes for electrometer 1029
Quantity and velocity of outflow 351
.
- - telescopes for mirror instru-

microscope 560 Quarter wave gypsum and mica
See also vol. I. 565
ments 893 896
plates
-
moving coil galvanometer 886 .
Quartz fibre electrometer . . .841 Reagent stands with reagent
- oculars 892 - fibres bottles 219
843, 883
-
polarisation apparatus 552, 553 .
- lenses 519, 566, 1053 Reagents for spectrum experi-
- screen with stand 465 - and left rotating 560
ments 617
plate, right
screens see vol. I, also vol. II 646 Rebenstorff, Aluminium dish. 602 .
:
plates - Base for
p. III. -
preparations 566 measuring glasses. 217
- Capillary ascension .361
stroboscope 526 Quick-break lever switches. . . 866 - Conservation of sound
. . .
- 419
theory of mechanics. 260 . .
- thermometers
. . .
Quincke, Oscillations, stroboscopic - Colour thermoscope .... 600
577 demonstration ....
283, 417
- voltameter !(41 - Sound interference tube .461 .
Compensated water dilato-
- water dilatometer 572 - meter 572
Stroboscopic cylinder 283, 417 .
-
- wave machines - Displacing -apparatus . . . 345
. . . .
41"), 41(1 Velocity of sound 434 - Drawn brass tube ."><;<>
Pro .>. Cation of heat . . . .638 648 -
- of light 465 474 Experiments with air balloons 367
- Heat supply for radiant heat 649
- of pressure :)34 R - Influence
- of direction of
of pressure in liquids . . . 335
- of .... 368 Rabe, Turbine for Parr calori- grain on thermal conduction
pressure of gases meter 623
- of sound .... 639, 640
405, 418. 41il - Metallic bodies for deter-
Rabs, Burner 208
Propeller 409 Rack and pinion
- of 319 mining specific heat and
airship 357 - motion,
guided plate with proving Dulong and Petit's
Properties of gases 365 groove 324 law 617
Protecting case for critical tem- - with - Parabolic and
spur wheel motion. 320 .
cylindrical mir-
perature apparatus . . . .612 Radial turbines 357 ror 476, 642
- for 883 Radiant heat experiments (with - Radiation tube
galvanometer . . .
642
for phototelegraphic Looser's thermoscope) 591 . .
- Radiometer 649
apparatus . . 933 - matter experiments 1018 1022 . Sensitive flames ... .419

Page Page Page

Rebenstorff, Surface tension 361,362 Reflection, see also refraction Resistances for shunt experi-
- Thermal conduction and con- and total reflection 483 . . . ments 912
vection 642 Reflectometer 499 - sliding 869, 870, XV
- Thermal conduction in metal Reflector for solar rays .... 488 Resonance apparatus 300
rods 638 Refraction of heat 645 coils 1037
- Thermal supply for radiant - of light .... 479, 483499 electric 838
heat 642 see also double re- - experiment, Hopkin's . . . 442
-
Thermoscopic coloured sheets fraction 562 Lodge's 103.1
600, 642 - sound 419 -
of generating current of high
- Vertical rule 222 Refractive indices ....
479, 486 frequency and voltage 1(3."> . .
Voltameter 941 Refrigerator after Carre ....608 - mechanical -2!I7

-
weighted flask with gauze Regelation of ice 601 of electric waves 1037
seal 339 Regnault, Air thermometer. .581 .
- of oral cavity 439
- Wire
spiral with ebonite - Calorimeter .
618, 619, 621
.
-
phenomena 443
handle 808 - - hertzian
Expansibility of saturated I ( 1 1 .">
- -Grimsehl, Compensated wa- steam 604 -

top 299
ter dilatometer 572 -
Expansion of gases 575.... - tube 449, 1039
Receivers for air pumps . . . .401 - Gas calorimeter 621 Resonator 44!>. 4.~>o
- for Kolbe's thermoscope . 596 -
Heating apparatus for calori- - after Oudin 1037
- for retorts 219 metric experiments 617 . . .
- and tuning fork 4:!'J
with carbon rods 406 - 652 - 464
Hygrometer floating
- with lateral ear 1054 - Piezometer 359 - with 4 4(14
piece . . .
apertures
- with metal rods 599 - Standard barometer 372.... Resultant of 2 directions -_v.s . . .
Receiving cylinders 216 - Volumnometer 380 Retardation of freezing ....

IK is
- station for wireless tele- Dalton, Tension of steam. 602 freezing, see water hammer <>ui;
graphy 1053 - -Leduc, Differential baro- Retarding ebullition .(id,"). r>ui>
. . .
Reciprocating motion 324 meter 370 Retort holder 203, 368

Recknagel-Miiller, Hydrostatic Watt, Tension of water Retorts 219
336 604 - for
apparatus vapour generating oxygen, see
Recoil of a system of masses . 261 Regulating cock 207 vol. I.
Re-combining the resolved light 528 - resistance for turbine inter- Reusch, Mica combination . . . ,~>ii,"i
Recorder (storm) 659 984 - Light refraction 493

rupters apparatus
246 - Press
Recording apparatus for galvano- Regulator clock 312, .-.lit;
meters 892 - double switch contact, see Reversal of sodium and strontium
- drums 456, 457 vol. I. line 517. .".is
- galvanometer for resistance - for the wind pressure 426 . . . Reverse gear for locomotives. 633 .
thermometer 586 - model 277 - motion excentric 318

-
hygrometer 654 Reichenbach, Pitot's tube 354 . . .
Reversing gear with bevil wheels :$.>.">
- mercurial barometer . . . 377 Reichert, Gas regulator 207.... - with spur wheels 324 . . .
- -369 Ice calorimeter 617 - 2!(5

pressure gauge pendulum
656 - 408 - 475
psychrometer Injector (steam jet pump) .
prisms
- rain 657 -
Rotating mirror 284 switch 1000
gauge
- the
parallelograms of motion 259 Reimann, Hydrometer 237.... Revolving device for carbons 5 . I ''>
440, 455 457 460, 1054 - nose-pieces for solar micro-

tuning fork. . .
Reis, Telephone
- water 658 Relative resistance 913 scopes VI
gauge 1 1
1034 960, 961 - stereoscope apparatus

Rectangle of tubes Relays . . . .>_'4
thermo-electric 1061 Relay for dynaphor 860 Rheochords !"!_'

- Rheostat after Wheatstone
Rectangular cross sprocket chain 316 polarised 1052, 1053 . . I'll'
glass box 484, 485 Release, automatic 959 for high tension !li>4
- 474 - electromagnetic, ma- - Kolbe's 913
platinum wire glow light. . for fall
-
prisms of plate glass 494 . . . chines 254 Richter, Model of a gas engine ii-_':i
- rock salt 596 Releasing device for Woltman's Rider, Slide valve cylinder li.'t--'
prism . .
Rectifiers for charging accumu- mill 355 Riders of aluminium wire . . . 441
lators with alternating or Rendtorff's Acceleration appara- Riess, Discharge M.'i-l
.862 865 257 -

three-phase current tus si>."i
Distributing apparatus . .
- for direct current, see vol. I. Repeating spectrometer .... 506 - Electric air thermometer . 829
- mercury vapor, see vol. I. - theodolite 533 - Inductive effect of
discharge
Rectilinear face toothing 319 . . .
Repelling air bubbles by electri- shock vj<)
- 465 838 - Spark micrometer s:!4
propagation of light . . .
city . . . .
Reduction oxidation cell 847 . . .

- of electricity 828 Righi Radiator in.vj
- tables for gas volumes, meas- Replenisher 842 Right and left rotating quartz
ured wet 615 Reprints of coins, medals . . . 948 plate .".(in
Reed Pipes .... 429, 450, 464 Repulsion, acoustic 463 Rincing tables, see vol. I.
References as to darkening de- -
apparatus 407 Ring armature 987 991
vices, see vol. I. - capillary 360 - governor 637
- as to equipments, see vol. I. - of wave motions 413 - micrometer for telescopes . 543
- as to projection lanterns and Residing of electricity on the sur-
- Pacim.tti's . -JSs
skiopticii. see vol. I. face 807, 808 system of crystals "><>:>
884 336 - with hook

Reflecting galvanometers .877 Residuum, formation L'S-J
- goniometer - with
481, 482 Resistance coils 913 pendulum suspension 1009 .
887 - comparison with Kolbe's ma- Rings for magnetizing 7sr>

moving coil galvanometer .
. . . .
- 475 nometer 599 for showing the flattening of

prisms
- stephauoscope 550 - experiments 911 the earth '-'SI
- model 531 - of a body to the reception of Rijke.'s experiment 430

telescope,
Reflection apparatus . . . 474, 475 motion 251 Rischbieth's (ias burette .... --'<>
of heat 645 - of electrolytes . . . .928933 Ritchie, Demonstration photo-

of heat in vacuo 406 plug 886 meter 467
474483 - -
- of light thermometer ~>x~>
Electromagnetic and electric
- of sound (with Kolbe's ther-
- to
breaking strain .... 3IK> motors 957, 9.">s
598 - vessels for electrolytes 930. H31 - Emissive and absorptive
moscope)
- of thermal rays (experiments Resistances 911913 power of heat 647
Photometers 467. is
with Kolbe's thermoscope) 596 experimental, see also vol. I.

Page Page Page

Ritchie, Top 957 Rotation of plane of polarisation 551 Samojloff, Stroboscopic disc . . 432
De la Rive,Floating current . 968 - of plane of polarisation by Sand baths 211
- Rotation of electric luminous 956 - influence machine .816
magnetising forces 953, 955, . . .
- 292 Saturated steam 602

flux 1017 plane conserved
Rivetting model 306 Rotations combined 292 Saturation apparatus 957
Roberval, \\Yih bridge .... 276 composed 259 Saturn's ring apparatus .281 . . .
Robinson, Anemometer .... 658 Round paper membrane 442. . .

- tree 944
l!ock crystal 560 -
pattern barometers ....
376 Saussure, Capillary hygrometer 653
- 500 - electric instruments 906 908 -
Electroscope for atmospheric
prisms
- slab 596, 597 -
telephone 1054 electricity 836
Rock salt lenses 646 - with antiphone 935 . .
Savart, Polariscope 556
- prisms 596, 646 - soft iron bars 788 - Resonance
apparatus 443 . . .
slabs 646 spirit level 335 Toothed wheels .

283, 420
. .
Rocker, Trevelyan's .... 420, 627 Rousseau, Photometer ....

469 Say, Stereometer 380
Rod-shaped thermocouple . . .1061 Rowland, Diffraction gratings and Scale, female, for dividing engine 228
Rod with hook 282 same 549 - for electrometer reading 843
copies of . .
Rods of different materials for - of the solar Scales for galvanometers 879, 880, 895
Photographs
thermal conduction experi- spectrum 550 - see also vol. I. p. 22
ments 639 - Water battery 841 Schiit'fer, Overflow apparatus 574 .
Roget's Spiral 969 Rubber bag 212 Schafiers, Apparatus for experi-
827 - balloon with 403 ments with gases and va-
Roller, double electrostatic. . .
stopcock . .
Rollers on cramps 260 bellows 838 pours 365

274 - bladder 406 van Schaik, Resonance top 299
Rolling cylinder . .
- Wave
Roman balance 276 contracting by heat 571 . . .
apparatus 412
Rombohedra of calc-spar . . . 566 - cords 414 Scheibler, Dessiccator 219
Rontgen-ray equipments for me- discs 401 Scheiner, Accommodation of the
dical use see special list. - with handles 302 eye 524
Rontgen ray induction coils 978 982 - slab 822 Schellen, Float apparatus . . . 344
-rays, school experiments . 1073 - stoppers ....216, 624, 1029 Schiff, Calorimeter 621
- show case 1074 - tubing 207, 624 Schleiermacher, Apparatus for the
- for air pumps .401 laws of centrifugal force
Rope wave apparatus 414 . . . 277 .
Rosenberg, Angle of incident light vessel 338 Schlick, Ship oscillations 297 . . .
and body colour 528 .... Rubens, Linear thermopile 647 . .

Top 292
- Glass cube 494 -
Thermocouple to be used as Schmidt, Dielectric constant of
- wave detector 1045
Mixing coloured rays and 1052 crystals
material colours 528
. . . . .
- and Dubois, Astatic mirror - Electrometer for radioactive
- Oscillatory motions 414 .... galvanometer 883 measurements 1029
-
Producing smoke eddies 658 . . Du Bois, iron clad galvano-
-
Top .291
- Reflection
apparatus 475 . . . meter 884 Schmitz's Drying tubes ....
219
-
Theory of cyclones, trade Rudberg's Boiling tube ....
581 Schneider, Experiments with gases 366
winds 286, 658 Riihlmann, Expansion of gases at Schoentjes, Baroscope 367
- Universal
optical apparatus 491 constant pressure ....
574 - Specific heat apparatus 616 . .
Rosetti, Fulminating plate 835 . . .

- Pacinotti's ring 288 Scholars' laboratory, see vol. I.
Rostovzeff, Reflection of sound Rulimer, Oscillograph tube. 897 . . stand camera 521
waves 598 Ruhmkorff, Commutators 866 . . .
- work room, see vol. I.
646 - 954 - tables, see vol. I.
Rotary bar Large electromagnet. . . .
- with divided circle for Ruler 221 School accumulator batteries 855 857
Kolbe's thermoscope 596 . . .
- for blackboard, see vol. I. - barometers 372, 373
- converters, see vol. I. Rules, Millimetre and metre 221, 222 clocks 247
- field motor, electrostatic . 827 Rumford, Demonstration calori- - experiments with Rontgen-
- vacuum
high pump .... 397 meter 623 rays 1073, 1074
- mercury high vacuum pump - Demonstration
photometer 467 galvanometer .876, 880, 881
398, 399 - Dilatation thermometer 588 . .
- magnetometer 794
- mirror 484 - Photometers 467 - pattern Wheatstone bridge. 918
- nut - Thermal radiation -
313 apparatus 648 projection apparatus, see vol.1.
- object holder .... 557, 560 - Thermometer in vacuo 645 . .
- rheostat, Kolbe's ..... 914
- oil vacuum pumps . .394 397 Rung 330 rheostats of manganin 924 . . .
- reagent stand 219 Russner, Horizontal component of - spectroscope 510

solenoid 968 terrestrial magnetism 796 . .
spectrum apparatus ....
508
- star chart 662 - Magnetic pendulum ....
796 - telegraph 959
Rotating bah 1009 Rutherford, Prism 503 telescope 542
- Heron's 407, 630 Schreibsr, Storm Recorder 659 . . .
- copper disc 952,1009 Schroeder, Step view 525

- device for Geissler tubes. 286 .
Schubert, Centrifugal psychro-
- s
disc and weighted bar, meter 655
Prandtl's 290 - Flat 990
Sacerdote, Cohesion and adhesion ring
- double crank 314 tube 361, 405 Hummel, ammeter .... 905
- field experiments 1001 219 Schultze, Carriage with movable
Safety funnels
- Geissler tubes 1017 - 640 rollers 251
lamp
- iron disc with copper ring 1009 . - tubes 219 Schulz, Glass block 516
- - valve Demonstration baro-
magnet with copper disc 287, 977 409 Schulze,
masses equalised 262 Sail cloth blinds, see vol. I. meter 372
- mirrors .... 284, 431, 898 Sal ammoniac 853 - Syphon apparatus 381
- of electric luminous flux .1017 -
-ammoniac vapour appa- Schumann, Electrothermic appa-
- slot and crank 315 ratus 465 . ratus 1064
- sphere, Heron's 407, 630 Schwedofi, Demonstration balance 240
. . .
Salcher, Circular motion diagraph 260
- 289, 1062 - 793 - Sine electrometer 804
thermocouple . . .
Magnetometer
[{citation of a magnet under the -
Projectile diagraph ....
264 Schwerd, Disc with apertures for
influence of a current 970 . . Sale conditions IV diffraction phenomena 547 . .
- of a movable current 970 . . . Salt for electrolytic rectifiers 864 . Scott, Phonautograph . 456, 457
. .
- of liquid conductors . . .971 Salt solution vapour tension 602 . . Scotti, Principle of hot wire in-
- of magnetism 287, 977 Salts for spectrum experiments. 517 struments 904

71
Page Page Page

Screen action 808 Series resistance subdivided 904 . .
Sike, Hydrometer 347
fluorescing 986,1073 rheostats, precision .921, 922.
Silbermann, Compression pump 407
for mirror and lens images 473 wound motors ....
997, 998 Hollow prism 491
for projection see vol. I; Set of accessories for microscopy 538 - Refraction and reflection . 487
vol. II p. XV. - of glass plates 551 - and Pavre, Calorimeter for
- of Bristol board 285 of hooked weights .261 . . .
determining the heat of com-
of sheet zinc 1042 - of preparations for polari- bustion 623
- with clamp 900 sation experiments .553 . .
- Compression and expan-
with ground glass disc, for of resistances 913 sion of air 626
interference experiments 545 . of Tesla apparatus 1034.... Mercury calorimeter lil'i
with rotary disc 646 of weights Silver coin with pyramid mirror 952
Screening effect 812 236, 241244, 304, 481, 623 -plated copper plate for Mo-
-
Screw apparatus 273 Set of weights with hooks 266 . . ser's breath figures. . . . 410
flyer 409 Sextant 482, 483 voltameter 943
jack 313 Sextuple manometer after Kolbe 599 Silvered and blackened glass flasks 644
line, formation 273 Shadows, coloured 527 Silvering apparatus 949
micrometer 225 Shaking and rubbing tubes . . 830 Simple machines 313
motion for coils 882 device for coherer 1052 Simplified absolute electrometer 811
press 314 Sharpener for cork borers . . . 216 Simultaneous colour contrast . ~i-~
spindle, rotary 313 Shearing stress 306 Sine and tangent galvanometers
thread with ratchet brace 314 .
- stresses occurring in pairs . 307 872, 873
toothing 322, 323 Sheet brass hollow cylinder . . 809 electrometer 804
winding gear 330 iron cone 408 vibration 299
with right and left-handed cube 810 Singing arc lamp 1058
thread 313 cylinder with holes . . 338 flames 430
with 2 threads 314 electrodes 514 membrane 1009
Sealing wax and sulphur rod etc. flasks 596 water hammer 606
797, 798 hollow sphere 806 Single arm balance 23(1
Secondary cells 853 pendulum 296 constituents of air-balloon

clock 248 - strip for elastic limit, apparatus 367, 368
conductor (Zehnder's) 1043 . . .
viscosity and strength . .311 ohm 915
Seconds contact for standard tube 809 phase alternating current rec-
clock 247 - metal pieces 802, 812 tifier 862865
pendulum 246 Shell type transformer 1008.... -tooth wheel and star wheel 326
watch 244 Shielding box against explosions Sinks (for laboratory) see vol. I.
Section of a cylinder with 2 see vol. I. Siphon with marking rings .281 .
equilibrium positions 345 . . .

Ship oscillations 297 Sire, Archimedian principle 343 . .
Sections of telegraph cables 962 . .

Ship's capstan 330 -
Hydrostatic paradox .341. .
Sectional model of the steam- - compass 792 -

Polytrope 292
cylinder 631633 screw 357 Rotational motion can gene-
models of valves 408, 409. . . siren 423 rate successive motion 282 . .
models of water meters 355 . . Shoe guide 312 Siren discs 283, 420
Seddig, Lines of force 830 with writing point for tuning Sirens 420423
Seebeck, Thermo-electric appa- fork 440 Six, Thermo metrograph . . . .579
ratus 1061 Shore turning cranes 331 Skeletons of men and animals .1071
Seger, Cones for pyrometric meas- Short-circuited armature in the Skioptica see vol. I.
urements 587 magnetic field 289 Skutsch, Model of Schlick's top 292
Segner, Reaction wheel see Bar- rotor in the rotary mag- Slab for the parallelogram of
ker's mill 353 netic field 1004 motions 258
Water wheel 334 beam balance 232 - with pair of pulleys . . . 4!i."i
triangular .
Seibt,Resonance of electric waves!037 waves 1041 Slaby-Arco, Wireless telegraphy lo.">i>
Selenium cells . . 933, 1060, 1061 Show cases, see vol. I. Slide induction apparatus . . . 975
thermometer. 583 Shower of mercury 403 -rest lathe see vol. I.
Self-correcting air
-exciting influence machine Shunt dynamo 992994 microtome 538
817, 1072 dynamos see also vol. I. rule 230
induction coil. . . .
1057, 1058 for galvanometer .883
. . 885 wire bridges 918, 919
- induction, measuring . . . 935 for hot wire ammeter . . . 910 resistance 915
976 - for mirror galvanometers 893 Slider for measuring bridges 926 . .
proved .
- standards 976 for reflecting galvanometers 879 stage and aluminium bush 794
variable 1037 for sine and tangent galvano- Sliding and plug rheostat 914
. . .
Semi-cylindrically bent plates . 617 meter 873 body, plate glass slab and
- 596 - 886 balance pan for friction
-cylindrical double screen .
plug
receiver for Kolbe's ther- resistances for experimental experiments 268
moscope 596 work, see vol. I. friction .... 268, 301, 302
Senarmont, Polariscope .... 556 with interpolation .920 . resistances
Prism 565 - universal 888 869, 870, 944, 998, 1073, XV
Thermal conduction in wound motor .... 997, 998 see also vol. I.
639 Shunting forceps 916 resistance for dynamo models 988
crystals
Sensitive flames 418, 419 small potential-differences .1013 resistances in vertical ar-
thermoscopic sound 600 .... Shutter hetiostat, see vol. I. rangement Iu7:i
Sensitivity of ear to sound 439 . . Siemens Armature ....

988, 990 Slit annex for Bunsen burner 208 .
of selenium 1060, 1061 Ozone generating tube .1017 . Slot and crank 314, :m
Sine and tangent galvano- excentric 317
Separate windings for galvano- 358
meter 891 meter 873 Sluice raising apparatus . . .
219 Unit 913 Small arc lamp

Separating funnels 539
445 - Water 587 colour bottles
Series of tuning forks pyrometer
resistance 1010, XV Sieve annex for Bunsen burners 208 - disc with rotary suspension 429
- for arc lamps. 1057, 1058 . of the Vestals 380 - electric motors !>!>7
- resistances for experiments Sieveking, Fontactoscope .1029

. . . flask and watch glass . . . .''>!.">
with Kolbe's thermoscope 598 Sifter for iron powder ....

789 - flasks with absorbent liquids 516
flat flask for showing the
for galvanometers 885 . .
Signalling device for resistance
909 .... thermometers 586 durk rays 644
for voltmeters

Alphabetical Name and Sub :
ect-matter Index. 1123
Page Page Page

Small glass tube with platinum lugs 512 Spark chronograph .... 248, 463 SpiritBunsen burner . . 209
-
jjvpsum plate 565 - discharges, stroboscopic ana- - lamp 209
- house and its perspective lysis 526 - lamp, Breitenlohner 's 512
529 - micrometer 811, 834, 1031, 1038 level 335
image .
- induction coils 982 tubes 514 and plumb bob 229

- coil for Thomson's ex- for metal spectra 514 . . .
- sodium lamp 562
periment 1058 Sparking pillars 980, 985 Splintering glass vessels .... 829
- metal frame for soap solution 543 Spatial vision 524 Spoons 215
- mirror and total reflecting 215 220
Spatulas Spray flask
531 1057, 1058 - for
prism Speaking arc lamp . . .
fitting over door for use
- thermograph 579 Special optical outfit for mega- in case of fire, see vol. I.
- thermometers 577 diascope XV Sprengel, Mercury vacuum pump 397
-
tripod with vessel for sucking Specific gravity balance .
233, 237
.
Spring balance .286, 309, 310
. . .
an egg 403 determinations, outfit - for

showing centrifugal
- tube with mercury ....
494 for 237 force 281
- 436 - (displacing method)
tuning forks 250
. .
dynamometer and carriage 258
- Weinhold
optical bench .531 .
- indicators .... 346, 347 - pendulum 297
- window 560 - of air ...'.,.. 402, 576 - thermometer 651
- wood board 1025 of gases 367 - vacuum
gauge see vol. I.
Smee Cell 849 - tester 857 Spring, Elastic limit 308
Smelting crucibles 218 heat 616622 Spur wheels 318 321
Smoke condenser 827 -
experiments with Kol-
1
with screw toothing 322 .
- eddies 658 be'sthermoscope 597 Square conductor 968

see vol. I. with Looser's ther- formed of tubes 567
Soap bubble apparatus .... 812 moscope 590 glass slab 810
Soda caustic 849 of gases 626 paper membrane 442
Sodium bichromate 853 resistance 911 screw thread 313
cell 1026 difference 936 Squirrelcage rotor 1004
- 562 538, 540 274
lamp Specimens, microscopical. .
Stability apparatus
- line, reversal 517, 518 - parallelepiped
Spectra of incandescent vapours 275
- sulphate solution, supersatu- 512515 prism 275
rated 364 tables 518 Stable equilibrium .... 273, 274
- tube 518 Spectrograph 508 and unstable axes .... 282
Soffit curtain see vol. I. Spectrometers 505, 506 Staff for measuring 223
Soft iron rod 789 Spectrophotometer.'see ocular with Staged paper condenser for sing-
Solar microscopes ....
539, 540 gap 479 ing arc lamp 1058
- 543
prism, Herschel's Spectroscope 509 511 Stage for prisms 560
- radiation thermometer 651 for telescope 543 - for .646
. .
setting up prisms . .
spectrum 518 see also reflecting goniometer 482 - with stand, platinum
spiral
- 550 499 518 and 645
photographs Spectrum analysis spirit lamp
Soleil, Compensator 556 - apparatus .. 481, 505
. .511 Stahlberg, Reflection apparatus 475
-
Wedge compensation 560 . . .
- see also demonstration - Refraction apparatus . . . 493
Solenoid on stand, for using with goniometer 479 box 484
Hartl's balance 240 - demonstration .499 504
. . .
Stamp, plate, mould and frame
- with 968 - lamp demonstration table see for pressing carbonic acid
pointer
Solid air generated .
610, 612
. . . vol. I. plates 609
- oxygen 612 - 512 515
lamps Stand, Ampere's 966, 967
and hollow cylinder for the - 556, 560 and boxes for the accessories
phenomena
Archimedian law .343. . .
projection see vol. I. of Kolbe's thermoscope 598 .
- half 274 - tube and boxes for the accessories

cylinder . . .
509, 515
- semi-circle ....
274 stand with condenser of Looser's thermoscope 594 .
ozone 612 and electromagnet .... 509 camera 521, 522

Solution, supersaturated ....
364 Speed counter 999 - clamps 414, 799
Sondhaus' Lens 419 Sphere of glycerine clay .281 . .
- for absorption vessels etc. 516 .
Sorting balance 241 plane and arched plate for achromatic lenses 495 . . .
- balances for
yarns and pat- for equilibrium experiments 274 for barometer tubes .371 . .
terns see special list. with ring 567 for burette holders 203 ....
Sound analysis apparatus . . 459
.
Spherical and chromatic aber- - for
clamping carbon rods 973 .
- 442 - for clamping Geissler tubes. 101 7

figure disc ration 495
- interference tube 461, 462 - concave mirrors. concave and convex
. . .
596, 643 . . . for
- 405, 418 condenser 811 mirrors 477
propagation
radiometer 464 flask for concentrating dark for filtering 203
- refraction 419 644 for fixing vibrating bodies 454
rays
- thermoscopic 600 - mirrors 477, 478 (holder) for fluorescent cubes 518
- 434 resonators 450 for holding glass tubes .512
velocity .
- vibrations imitated . .
415, 417 tubes 220 for lenses 496
Sounders, fixed 809, 810,
. . . XV Spherometers 223 for magnetic needles 786 . . .
Sources of galvanic current 839 865 Spies, Explanation of Wheatstone - for Melloni's apparatus 645 . .
Spare carbon plates 852 bridge 918 for model theodolites . . . 532
- cartridge for Parr calorimeter 623 -
Mercury vacuum pump 398 . . for Paalzow opt. bench . . 557
- cupric oxide plate ....
849 Spinthariscope 1027 - for photometric accessories 473
- electrodes for electrolytic rec- Archimedian 318 - for physical work .201, 202
Spiral disc, . . . .
tifiers 864 - for induction experiments . 813 - for platinum crucibles and
glass vessel 852 - logarithmic, toothed wheels dishes 218
glow lamp 878 shaped according to it 321 . .
- for platinum electrodes 947 . .
- 522 969 500

magnesium tape Roget's for prisms
- mercury arc - spring for showing the force-
lamp 515 for reagents, with bottles 219 .
- parts for influence machines - for

action of a weight .251 . . .
rope wave apparatus 414 . .
823, 824 - models for imitating - for Rowland grating 549 . . .
- selenium cell 933 sound vibrations 415 .... - for selenium cells 1060, 1061
. .
- wick tube for Hefner wheel with toothed wheel - for .510
lamp 472 324 . school spectroscope .
- zinc 849, 852 - with 1009 .515

plate glow lamp for spectrum tubes . . .

71*
Page Page Page

Stand for the iron har of con- Steindel, New wave machine 415, XV Sulfuric acid cryophorous . . 608
....
.
traction apparatus 568 Schemer's

-
Steinhauser, experi- Sulphate of copper 853
for vacuum tube 1023 ment 524 Sulphur and sealing wax rod etc.
- for X-ray tubes 986 Steinheil. Hollow prism .... 501 797, 798
-
-
Gauss' . .
204, 205
'.
Step cone transmission .... 328 Sulphuretted hydrogen tube . . 613
heliostat see vol. I. Stephanoscope 550 Sulphurous acid liquefied . . . 612
- - tube
insulating 798, 799 Stephenson's Link 316 v. 613
- terminals 866 - Reverse
gear for locomo- Sundial 244
- -with
apparatus for the laws tives 633 Sunshine recorder 652
of mechanics ....
265, 266 -
Thermometer screen . . . 650 Superficial colours 544
- with 293, 294 998
- with
pendulums . . .
Stepped gearing for laboratories .
Superheated steam 602
202 -
stays sliding resistance 870 Supersaturated sodium sulphate
- with steel pivot 464 Step view, Schroeder's .... 525 solution 364
Standard barometer 372 Stereometer 380 Supplementary outfit for photo-
- candles 472 524 522
Stereoscope graphy
- cells 844, 845 524
Stereoscopic lustre Supplies for general use .201 220
.
clock, electric 247 views 524 - for work with

- condenser
.
mercury 214, 215
813 Stern, Tone *ariators 446 Support boxes 206
- copper-zinc cell 844 Stink-cupboards, see vol. I. Supports, wood 206
- ink writer 959, 1049 Stirrer apparatus 947 Surface bolometer 648
- metre 222 - of platinum for Beckmann's goniometer 229
-
photometer bench 467 .... app 615 - law see
regulator model . . 277
- resistances 919 921 -
Stirring rod 220 measuring 230
rules 222 Stirrup, copper 1033 - 290, 291
principle
- self-induction 976 Stock cells 850 tension 361, 363
- thermometer 578 induction
-
Stohrer, Magnetic Suspended board for reflecting
tuning forks 436 machine 973 galvanometers 879
on resonance boxes 438 Stokes, Fluorescence spectrum . 519 see also vol. I.
fork with resonator 439 . .
- Sunshine recorder .... 652 Suspension board, see vol. I.
Standing barometer 402 Stool insulating 825 Swiss pattern thermometer 581 . .
Star burner attachment 210 . . .

Stools, laboratory see vol. I. Switch apparatvis for producing
- chart 662 207 900
Stopcock phase displacements . . .
- -connection 1005 Stopcock models (vacuum pumps) 387 Switchboard, experimental see
- spectra table 518 Stopcock vacuum pumps 386, 387 . vol. I.
Starke-Wehnelt, Electrolytic inter- Stopper of rubber 1029 Switchboards for accumulators

rupter 928 Stoppers 216 860, 861, 1073
Starting and regulating resistance 997 Stop watch 244 - for
charging accumulators 859
State, change of 600 615 Storing box for luminous sources 474 Switch contact rheostat 915. 916
. .
Statically indefinite forces 305 Storm recorder 659 - for 250

. . .
chronographs
Static deflection
- electricity
297 Strahlende Elektrodenmaterie, - for machine tools ....
326
797 838 1020 - for 1058
pamphlet . . .
singing arc lamp . . .
momentum 269 Straight pile driver 332 Symmetrical double gap 479 . . .
Statics and dynamics .265 411 . . Strain on the chord rivets .306 .
Synchronism, demonstration 1004 . .
Stationary electric waves 1043, 1044 Strand for resistance thermo- Synthesis of colours 529
Station barometers ....
373, 374 meter 587 - of the spectrum .499 518
. .
- 959 Stratification of liquid masses 573 - of vibration 417

telegraph .
Statoscope for balloons .651 . . .

Straubel, Mercury arc lamp . 515.
Syphon 380, 381
Steam barometer 601 Strength, torsional 309 - apparatus 381
boiler 569 Striation apparatus 364 barometers 372, 373
- Weinhold's 213 String galvanometers . . .
891, 892 - explaining 371
- capsule 645, 647 induction coil 935 fountain 404
engine 637 631 Strings, vibrating 440 442 mercury 404
- cylinder 633 631 249 - pressure gauge 369
Strip Chronograph
generator for electric machine 816 - vacuum 360, 361
Strips for stroboseopic cylinder
- 408
jet pump 283, 525 with rubber ball for accumu-
- lead on lecture tables, see - of parchment 799 lators 857
vol. I. - of steel and zinc 581 Szekely, Boyle's (Mariotte's) law 378
- '
429
pipe . .
Stroboscopes 283, 417, 525,
. . 526 Szymanski, Earth inductor 972 . .
piston 631 283, 417 - Electrometer 801

Stroboseopic cylinder . . .
- reaction wheel 407, 630 .... - demonstration of a vibrating Pressure change in sound
- saturated and superheated. 602 air column 433 waves 419
tension 602 discs .... 283, 432, 453, 525 Lines of force theory 964 . . .
Steatite piece 814 tuning fork 433 - -Thomson, Mirror galvano-

- see 4 rods of glass etc. 797 meter 883
Stromann, Optical demonstration
- with handle 797 487
apparatus
Steel bars 444 Strontium line, reversal .518 . . .
- on resonance box 434 . . . Student's spectroscope . . . .510

- coherer,
adjustable 1052 .... work room
see vol. I.
- cylinder containing com-
Stuffing box receiver 401
pressed air 610 Stump!, Interval apparatus 447 . . Table balance 241
- for calorimetric experi- Triad apparatus 449 draught exhaust see vol.
- I.
ments 623 Subjective colours 527 for hydrostatic balance . . 240

- for carbonic acid 609 . . . Successive colour contrast 526, 527 . - for projection lanterns, see
- cylinders 444 key 868 vol. I. ...
- flasks for compressed hy- - for 205
Sucking action of chimney cowls 408 setting up ;ippiirjiius. .
drogen and oxygen, see vol. I. - of flwoing water 354 . . .

- for setting up concave mir-
- rings for magnetizing . . . 786 - an egg 403 rors 643
ruler 222 Suction phenomena of outflowing - of spectra 518
- spheres for lines of force 408 - terminals 865
gases
curves 962 - 383 Tachometer 999
- wire for
pump
glowing experiments 996 - with attachment 281
electromagnetic
Steinbrinck, Vacuum syphon. 360 . motor 958 for whirling tables .... 280

Page Page Page

Tackle 266, 271 Test card, astigmatic 522 Thermo regulator 207, 208
- frame . 271 - certificate for thermometers 585 Thermoscope 588 600
Tangent electrometer 801 disc 810 Thermoscope after Weinhold for
- galvanometer .871 . . . 873 - on ebonite rod .... 805 showing maximum of
- electroscope
galvanometer ring for school 802, 812 density 573
galvanometer 877 - glasses 217 - for radiant heat 588, 643
Tangential wheel 356 - glass holder 217 - (Drebbel's) 567
Tantalus Cup 380 - stand 217 567
(Galilei's)
Tap 207 - needle 786 595
(Kolbe's)
- (Neumann's), calorimetric - pieces for calorimeter 618 589
. . .
(Looser's)
heating apparatus .617 . . . Tester for coherer 1049 - (Rebenstorff's) 600
Tape measure 223 Testimonials XI XIV - used as manometer .... 594
Tare balances 236 Testimonials as to Fittings, see - (Weinhold's) .573, 588,. . 643
Target, pistol and stand 263 . . . vol. I.
Thermoscopic coloured sheets 600, 642
Tassel of paper 825 - re experimental switchboards, - sound 600
Taudin-Chabot, Cycloidal gear. 324 see vol. I. Thermostat, Ostwald's .... 930
Technical balances 234, 235 .... - re laboratory
apparatus sup- Thick artificial corks 597
- decade resistances 923 .... plied, see vol. I. Thierfelder, Cycloidal double rail-
- measuring instruments 905 911 - re projection
.
apparatus, see way 267
- polarisation .561 vol. I. Thin liquid films 543
apparatus .
Tecln's Burner 209 Testing and calibrating thermo- -

plates and their colours 543, 544
Telefunken system of wireless meters 225 - walled dish of sheet
copper 607
-
telegraphy 1050 apparatus for thermometers . 581 Thoma, Hematometer 538
962 - condenser
Telegraph cables, sections . . . 935 Thompson, Cone for producing a
Telegraphy, electromagnetic 958 . .
- church bells 438 rainbow 503
- wireless .
1040, 1046
. 1053
.
- electroscope 802, 812 - Wave machine for Hertzian
Telephone .... 460, 10541060 -
illuminating gas. Ask for waves 412
-
bridge 928 quotations - Glan prisms 565
- for measurements 886 Tetrahedra of platinum 615 .... Thomson, Aluminium egg .1004 . .
- installation 1055 Thenard and Gay-Lussac, Tension - inductive of

Experiments
- receiver with
antiphone 930, 935 of vapours 604 ;
repulsion 1008
Telephonic lecture instruments 1055 Theodolite models 532 - Double bridge 927
1057 Theodolites 532, 533 -
Telephonograph Lowering of the melting point
Telephony 10541060 Theorem, Doppler's 435 by pressure 607
- wireless 1057 - Luminous sphere
, .
Theory of electrons 1025, 1026 . . . 1024
Telescope 540 543 - of lines of force .962 965 - loin
. .
Magnetizing ring
Telescope, demonstrating 473, 497 . Thermal conduction in metal rods -
Repelling action of electric
- for 890 638640, 590, 596, 599 10081010
reading galvanometers . field
- for and gases
reading mirror instru- nt liquids
-
Replenishes 842
ments 893 640648, 597, 599 - Vacuum tube 1023
- for
reading scales . 225 .... consumption, on evapora- - -Kirchhoff, Electrometer
-models 531 ting 597 balance 844
- with scale 891 - convection in and
liquids Mascart, Quadrant electro-
Telurion-Lunarion 662 gases 641, 642 meter 841
Temperature change on expansion - effects of electric current Szymanski, Mirror galvano-
and contraction of gases. 626 936940, 588, 593, 598 meter 883
- determining with thermo-
energy and total energy 937 . .
Weinhold, Quadrant electro-
couple 1062 - expansion 567 584, 589
. . . meter 842
- drop in solids 640 - reflection Thorium light burners see vol. I.
642, 643
- - supply for radiant heat.
drop in a solid, see also 599 . . 642 .
Thornycroft, Boiler 636
- influence on resistance .912 . Thermo-cell 1062 Three phase and alternating cur-
Tempered steel wires 788 Thermocouple (electric pyro- rent 10001006
Tenfold solenoid 968 meter) 584 Three phase continuous current
- wire frame 968 - for
inserting in the hydraulic transformer, see vol. I.
Tensile apparatus, see monochord 441 press 601 -phase current dynamo 992 994
- forces measured 310 - rotating 289, 1062 - model 1003
Tension and acceleration meter 257 - (wave detector) 1052 - motors 1006
- model 307 Thermoelectric cross 1063 - electrolytic rectifiers. 864 .
- of steam 602 606 motor

Thermo-electricity 787, 1061 1064 1000, 1002, 1003
. .
- of surface .361 363 -

. . . : .
Thermographs 579, 651 -three-phase transformer 1008
- of water vapour .601 606 . . Thermo -Hygrograph 651 - transformer,
Tensive force of vapours 365 . . .
-
-magnetic apparatus. 796 . . . see also vol. I.
Tensive and compressive strain 269 Thermometer 576 587, 930, 935
. .
- -port slide valve cylinder
Terminal board for galvanometers 879 - electric 829 631633
Terminals 865, 866 - for calorimeter
623, 624 .... -way cock 207
Terquem, Burner for monochro- - for low 610 for screw
temperatures. . . .
Throwing apparatus
matic light 512 - for schools 578 409
flyers
Terrestrial globe 660 - for 651 Thrust crank chain 316
springs
- - for standard cell ....
magnetism, horizontal inten- 845 Thrusts in a crankshaft 304
sity 796 - in vacuo 645 Thunder cloud, electric .... 827
- 541 543 - Time is necessary for the change
telescope mercury resistance th. 937 . .
- - metastatic
telescope, model 531 615 of condition of motion . .251
Tesla, High frequency experi- - on stand for concave mirror Tinder box 410
ments 1030 1036 experiments 643 Tinfoil screen 647
-
Lamp 1034 screen 650 Tipping device for steel cylinders 609
-
Three-phase motor .
1002, 1003 - tested and calibrated 225 . . . Tone impact apparatus . . . .461
-Transformer with Leyden - 581 - manometer 429
testing apparatus
jar 1045 579 - variator 446
Thermometrograph
Test apparatus for lightning ar- Tongs for crucibles 215
Thermopiles for demonstrations
rester 928 1062, 1063, 1074 - for 215
- ball
mercury
810 - for generating currents 859, 860 Tongue, anatomical model 1069 . .
- on ebonite rod .... 805 - for Tonometers 446 448

optical experiments 646, 647 . .

Page Page Page

Tonometric apparatus .446 451
. .
Tree, Saturn's 944 Tuning forks with resonators
Tool boards, see vol. I. Tremery, Astatic magnetic needle 786 439, 458, 4.->!i
- cupboards see vol. I. Trevelyan's Rocker ....
420, 627 with sliding weights
Tooth and worm gears .318 326. Triad apparatus 449 438, 439, 458
Toothed gear for oscillating move- Triangles of wire 210 Turbine after Rabe 623
ment 325 - on stand 274 - interrupter 984
gearing with fly-wheel 313 . .
Triangular paper membrane . . 443 models 356, 357
wheel connecting and dis- - 428
prismatic pipe Turning cranes 331
connecting device .... 326
- screw thread 313 gear with partially toothed
- wheels, Savart's 283, 420
. . . Tribometer 301, 302 bevel wheels 326
wheels with excentric axes 321 Trick, Slide valve: see Double inlet - moment 304
- with intermediate wheel 320 channel slide valve . . . 633 Turntable 331
Top 251, 291 Trieder binoculars. 540 Turret clock movement .333
. . .
- apparatus 293 Tripods 210 Tweezers 215

- for rotating colour discs 504, 529 Tripod stand for barometer tubes 371 Twin flexible 1054
- of celluloid for Bunsen cells 848 for photographic appa- Two phase alternator 1003, 1004
. .
Schlick's 292 ratus 522 -phase current dynamo 992 994

Topler, Demonstration apparatus Trough cell 847 motor 1002, 1003
for statics and dynamics . 267 for mercury 1009 Tyndall. Contraction apparatus 568
- Influence machine 817, 818, 1072 - for percussion
experiments. 302 Cooling effect of gases 642 . .
Magnetic curves 962 for wave motions .413

. . . Drum (light-refraction appa-
- Manometric flame pipe 428 - form 502 ratus) 486
. .
prisms
Photometer screen .... 472 -
pneumatic 216 Electrophorus 815
Pressure level .... 368, 419 -
pneumatic on lecture tables, Expansion of gases ....
568
- Stroboscopic disc 432, 526
. . . see vol. I. -
Melting of bodies in the
Hagen-Neesen, Mercury Trussevitch, Kundt's manometer 419 magnetic field 953
vacuum pump 397 - Reflection of sound waves. 598 Model geyser 631
Torricelli's experiment . .370 372 Tube after Aron 1044 - Percussion trough .... 302
- law 351 - after Lecher 1044 Propagation of sound .419
. .
Torsional elasticity .... 308, 309 - expansion apparatus 569, 570

. Reflection of light .... 474
force model 309 level model 335 - Silver coin with
pyramid
- oscillations and moment of - receivers with metal wires 599 . mirror 953
inertia 290 sheet iron XV -
Specific heat 616
- strength 309 Tubes, electrodeless 1034 -
Temperature change on com-
- for barometric
Torsion balance 794 experiments pression and expansion of
- moment 270 370, 371 gases 626
- 298 - for combustion 220
pendulum
Torso, model 1069 - for
demonstrating vapour
Total and thermal energy 937 . . . tension 604 U
Total free magnetism is zero. 793 .
fork-shaped, for interference 462
- reflection in the water jet 352 - for liquids of different gravity 342 Unaxial circular polarising nii<-;i
- for combination 565
of light 483 499 spectrum demonstrations 515
reflectometer 499 for total reflection .... 494 Undershot water wheel 355. .356 .
Tourbillipn, electric
828 with carbonic acid . .613
. .
Unequal thermal conduction 639 . .
555 - with closed Unidirected and opposed currents 968

Tourmaline plates pressure gauges 336
tongs 555 with iodine 601 Uniform and non-uniform motions 258
with light and dark cross .1020 - 403
Towbridge, Tangent galvano- pressure in all directions .
meter 873 with liquefied gases .613

. .
Unipolar Induction ....
288, 976
Tower, leaning 274 - with 426 Units, electromagnetic .1010 1013
pistons
with lightning conductor 835 .
- with stand for Hopkin's ex- - of resistance 913
T-piece for hose unions 207.... periment 442 Universal-apparatus for astrono-
Trade winds 658 Tubing, bent 220 mical geography 662
263, 264 - of rubber 207 - apparatus for the laws of
Trajectory
Tralles, Hydrometer 346 - of rubber for air pumps. 401 . mechanics 266
Transformer .
.898,1006 1008
. . Tubular magnet coil 1019 clamp 204
- electric, see also vol. I. receiver 598 clock 662
- for 864 - stand for photographic ca- - coupling, double 317
alternating current . .
for high tension (Elster and meras 522 double socket 202
Geitel's) 1031,1032 Tun, magic 380 dynamo 992994
model 991 Tuned pipe for Kundt's mano- -
galvanometer 885
Transfusion 410 meter 419 gas burner -i>!l
- 598
Transit case for fontactoscope 1029 .
pipe on stand gasometer -\-2
Translator pillar 959 Tuning fork apparatus .452 455
.
hydrometer 347
Transmission of motion .313 333.
- chronograph . .248, 256
.
-
hydrostatic apparatus . . . 334
of motion by belt, cord and see also spark chronograph 463 kaleidophone i.il
chain 328 fork clock 463 - measuring instruments. 902, 903

of power 997 999 curves on stand . 455. .
- mouthpiece 420
Transmitter for Hertzian waves 1041 exciter clamp .... 440 - optical apparatus ..488. 493
- 926
Transparent colour discs 504, 529 . forks pattern Wheatstone bridge
galvanometer scale ....
880 435440, 456, 463, 464, 1039, XV - scale holder on reading tele-
-
projection screens, see vol. I.
- chronographic .... 455 scope 894
solar spectrum 518 - for
demonstrating curves shunt 888, 893
- 955, 956
Transporting and hoisting ma- 452, 455 slider
chines (models) .328332 . . for limit of audibility 444 .
sliding resistance 870
Transverse strength apparatus 304 . for Quincke's apparatus 434 socket -'"-'
vibrations of rods 434 .... - for resonance 439.

. . 443 spring balance 310
Transverse waves 412 417 - for resonance tube . . 449 stand 202, 968, XV
215 - on resonance boxes 436, 437 - for spectroscopes ."> I i
Trap for mercury

. . .
Traverser with pit 331 Stroboscopic 433 for spectrum experi-

with electromagnetic ments 512
Travelling and altitudinal baro- -
meter 374 drive 436 wheel apparatus 320
crane 331 - with recording device. 456 Unstable equilibrium . . . 273, 274

A'phabetical Name and Sulrect-ma'ter Index. 1127
Page Page Page

Uppenborn, Diffusion of liquids 364 Vertical arrangement of sliding Water box for protecting the sele-
- Induction resistances 1073 nium cell 1059
apparatus for resis-
tance determinations of galvanometer 874, 875 calorimeter 618
electrolytes 928 see dead beat universal - chamber (optical eye) . .523 .
I'ranite plate 517 instrument 902 circulation 573, 574

Uranium cube 518 galvanoscopes 875 - decomposing apparatus 940942
- glass plate 518 - rules 222, 223 dilatometer 572
- metal 1027 Vessel for conductivity measuring 930 -drawing wheel, discharging
- 1027 - for dialysis 365 357, 358
pitchblende
Uranotrope 661 - for
light-absorbing liquids 516 .
- expansion, absolute .... 594
1069 - for preserving ice blocks 214 574
Urinary organs .
freezing of
U-shaped absorption-box 516 . . . of 1 cubic inch 230 gauge 658
U-shaped decomposing cell 943, 944 Vestal sieve 380 hammer 605, 606
U-shaped glass tube for electro- Vibrating air columns .... 426 influence machine . . . .816
973 - bars 433440 blowers see vol. I.
lysis jet
I'
-shaped tube for heating of strings, plates, bells .440 443 - is composed of drops. . 351
mercury 937 Vibrations analyzed 300 - 264
projectile apparatus . .
U-tubes 220 and oscillations: see Strobo- - lead 354

mouthpiece
U-tubes for oscillations of liquids 298 scopic cylinder. . . . 283,417 meters 354, 355
Uviol mercury vapour lamp .1026 . Vibration curves 451 455 motor 357
harmonic 298, 299 - 587
pyrometer (Siemens') . . .
screw, Archimedian .... 357

- microscope 457, 458
see also tuning fork siren 421
clock 463 - tap 207
of an air column 433 thermometer 577
Vacuum bulb 1016 of liquid films 443 trap for Weinhold's calori-
bulb with butterfly . . . .1021 of sounds 415, 417 meter 618
- double bulb 1022 -
planes of the light .... 563 - trough for Paalzow optical
gauges 368370 Vibrator after Weinhold . . .1041 bench 557
- pumps 386399 Vibrographs 456 -
vapour tension 602
Kohl's system Vice, parallel see vol. I. vapour, working action . .631
390394, 398, 399 View of factury V vessels, communicating . . 814
- piston pumps 386394
. . .
Views, stereoscopic 524 wheels 355, 356
- scale 1016 Violet glass plate 519 Watt, Ball governor . . .
281, 637
-siphon 360, 361 Violle, Actinometer 651 Low pressure engine .
634, 636
tube 1016, 1036 Pair of bulbs 651 Parallelogram 316
- tube after Perrin 1026 Viscosity test pieces 311 - Pendulum 281
- illumination 1025 Vogel, Float apparatus 344 .... Planet wheels 324
- with diamonds 1022 .... - Pocket
spectroscope .511 . .
Regnault, Tension of water
- with minerals etc. 1021, 1022 see also Polarisation appa- 604
vapour
- with piece of metal sjieet!022 ratus 554 Wattmeter for demonstration 905 .
- with stratified light. .1025 - Spark tube (fulgurator) 514 . . Wave apparatus 411417,
. . XV
- vibrator 1025 - Star spectra table 518 - detectors (coherers) 1051, 1052 .
Valenta and Eder, Continuous va- Volkmann, Rope wave apparatus 414 Hertzian 10391045
pour spectra 512 Volta's Pair of plates 839 - length determining 544, 548 . .
Valve models 408, 409 - Pile 840 - spectrometer 506

- tube 1021, 1024 Voltage coils, additional 903 . . ,
- machines ....
411 417, XV
- as audion 1052 Voltaic cell 845 ; -meter 1044, 1045
Vanderfliet, Flexible wire netting 811
- electricity 839 949 motions 411 417
Vane water meter 355 Voltameters 940 943 - siren 423
Vaporiser as aspirator 598 .... Voltmeters 901 911 disc 283, 420
Vapour and gas condensation Volume gauges for oxygen flasks transmitter for Hertzian
(experiments with Looser's see vol. I. waves 1041
thermoscope) 592 - 216, 217. 230 413
measuring . . .
trough
- apparatus for sal-ammoniac 465 of gases determined 346 . . . tube 336
- densities 613, 614 Volumnometer 380 Waves, stationary. .1043,
. . 1044
- in an air-filled space .601 Vowel apparatus 459, 460 Wax
. .
cylinders for phonographs. 461
Vapourisation heat 621 V-shaped glass tube 944 Waxed wire for house telegraph 961
Vapours mixed with gases 604 . . Weather telegraph 654
- spectra, continuous .512 793
. . .
Weber, Compass
- tension 602 - Free
vibrating steam pipe. 429
Variable angle prism
- self-induction
502 W Light-angle-measurer . . . 465
1037 Magnetometer 794
tuning forks 438, 439, 458
. .
Walferdin, Metastatic thermo- Photometer 469
Variator of tones 446 meter 578 Trough for wave motions. . 413
Various materials for general pur- Wall bracket and wall arm . . 842 -
Unipolar induction . . . .976
220 - for galvanometer 883 313
poses . . .
Wedge
Varying magnitude of inclination 790 crane 331 - apparatus 272
Vater, Model of steam cylinder v. Waltenhoien, Pendulum compensator 556, 560
with different slide valves 633 952, 955, 956, 976 friction wheels 327
Velocity and quantity of outflow - Magnetic saturation .... 957 - of gypsum 564
350, 351, 353 Walter's Picein Wedges, of wood 206
- angular 290 Wanka, Top apparatus .... 293 Wedge-shape air plates .... 544
- of flow 354, 355 Watch glasses 217 Wedgwood, Pyrometer .... 587
- of ions' migration 944, . . 946 glass clamps 217 Wehnelt, Interrupter 982, 1010, XV
- of light 491 Water - Oscillograph 900
-
465, air pump see vol. I.
sound
of 434 - for Valve tubes 1024
preliminary ex-
Ventilator model 282 hausting 399 Starke, Electrolytic inter-
Vernier-caliper 223 - bath 210 rupter 928
- model, circular .... 228, 229 -
battery 809, 841 Weighing machines, models . . 276
- linear 221 behaviour on freezing or boil- pan for demonstration ba-
Versed sine motion . .318 ing 574 lance . . . 240

Page Page Page

Weight bridge, Roberval's 276 . . .
Weinhold, A., Modelôf reflecting Whirl, electric 825
- dilatometer 571, 572 - for
galvanometer 878 fitting on I he high tension
Weighted flask with gauze seal 339 - Oil-insulated
high tension transformer In:!:!
Weights for balances ..241 244
. transformer 1035 Whirling apparatus 2S1
- for - - tables XV
elasticity in bending Optical bench 472 278, 27^,
-
apparatus 304 Optical bench for explaining Whirlpool :!.->(
- with double hooks 260, 273
. .
microscope and telescopes. 531 Whistle, Galton's n;>
- with hooks 266, 441 - .801
Paper tube electroscope .
Whistling arc lamp ld,">s
Weight thermometer 572 - Peltier's thermoelectric ex- White metal sheet plate . . . 812
Weiler, Demonstration aneroid periment 1063 slab r.'.Mi
barometer 375 Pendulum for the moment Wichert, Electrometer . . . .841

- Double
pachytrope ....
1003 of inertia 290 Wide burner attachment . . . 210
- Tesla-motor 1003 - Pendulum laws 260 - tube and
rupillary tube. . :i(>2
-
Three-phase current model 1003 -
Phalanges in glass tube . . 1073 Wiedemann. Calorimeter .... tils
Weinhold A., Air thermometer. 583 Piezometer 358 - Calorimeter for liquids . . <>!!>
- Alternating and three-phase - Plateau's
apparatus .... 360 -
Electrolysis of salt solutions
current machine 1000 Polarising battery .... 853 and migration of ions !U4 . .
- Alternating current reflecting - Porro prism combination . 503 Gas calorimeter 621
892 - Precision work stand 202 -
galvanoscope . . .
Measuring the liquid carried
- Alternating current trans- -
Radiophone 649 over to the negative pole !)4.~>
former 1008 Reflecting galvanometer . . 877 -
Mercury filtration apparatus :i!i!)
- Archimedian 343 - Refraction and reflection ap- - Mirror galvanometer .SSI
principle . . . . .
- Attraction of mass ....

300 paratus 484 - Model geyser (>30
- Behaviour of saturated and Resistance experiments .911 -
.
Moving coil mirror galvano-
superheated steam ....
602 - Retardation of freezing 608 . . meter 887
- Reversal of sodium line
Branly tube 1041 517 . .
- Thermal
conduction in rods 639
- Calorimeter 618 -
Reversing pendulum 295 . . .
Wiedemann, G. Electric needle. 811
- Calorimeter for high tempera- - Rotation of liquid conduc- Wien, Standards of self-induction 976
tures 620 tors 971. Wild, Double plate 565
- Capillary galvanoscope 946 - Set of Tesla .1034 - Wind vane
. .
apparatus . (i.">s
- Coil for showing induction - Small steam boiler .... 569 Willemite 1027
Speaking arc lamp .... 1058
972 - Wimshurst, Influence machines
by earth field
Stability apparatus .... 274
- Complete set for demonstrat- - 819821, 1072
ing Hertz's experiments - Standard copper zinc cell 844 . Wind chests 4 _'.-,. 42(i
and wireless telegraphy. .1040 - Stationary electric waves 1043 .
- see also vol. I.
- Condenser 833 Steam-boiler 213 - on lecture table, see vol. I.
- Contact device for Foucault's - Steam
capsule ....
645, 647 - Fan 405 ,
pendulum 298 Steatite piece 797 Winding gear 330

- Coulomb's law for electricity 804 - Syphon . 381 Windlass 313, 328330
- 608 -
Thermal conduction of gases 642 Windlass for yarns, see special list
Cryophorous .
- Cylindrical beaker with evac- -

Thermoscope 573, 588 Windmill of cardboard 409, ."(i .
uated quadruple walls 611 . .

Thermoscope for radiant heat 643 Window darkeners see vol. I.
-
Damping by induction 976 . .
- Tube level model 335 Wind pressure regulator . . . 42t>
- Demonstration air thermo- - Vacuum syphon . . .
360, 361 vane . . lir.x
meter 584 - Vernier model 221 - and wind wheel . . . 2s2

- Demonstration - Vessel for dialysis 365 - wheel of 4 (14
goniometer paper
- 458
479, 480 Vibration microscope . . .
Winding formers !>!M
- Water
- Demonstration
photometer 468 decomposing appara- Wingen, Photometers . . . 46(>. KIT
-
Discharge electrometer 841 . . tus !>41 Winkelmann, Vacuum double
- - Water bulb
Drawings for showing the jet projectile appa-
blind spot 523 ratus 264 Winter, Ring for disc elect rie
- Drum armature 991 - Wheatstone
bridge 926 .... machines 816
-
Electricity at the end of an - Wireless
telegraphy 1040 .... Wire baskets and hollow sphere 801
Weisbach, Outflow apparatus 350 - sos
elongated conductor . . . 806 .
cage
-
Electromagnet 952 Weiss, Electromagnet 956, 957 . . . coil ....
962, 965, 966. '.17 1
- Fall cylinder 404 - fork, insulated 802
Well-springs 334, 351
- Fall machine 253 - frame on wood board SHIS
(Atwood's) .
Wernicke, Liquid prisms. 502, 560 .
. . .
- Foucault's pendulum 298 - gauge 223

Wertheim, Tones of steel when
. . .
- - 1140
Freezing of water, melting of magnetized 420, 957 gauze cylinder
ice, boiling water 574
Wesselhoft, Distributing appara- globe film. .-,!I7
- Gas endosmose apparatus 410 grating -Vis

.
tus 805 - for
- Gas flame manometer 432, 433 Hertzian wave ex-
Westien, Universal clamp 202 . . .
- Gay-Lussac's law of the ex- lot 2

Weston, Standard cell .... 845 periments
- net 210
pansion coefficient of gases 574
- Westphal, Single arm balance. . 236 - cylinder si 2
Grating spectroscope for Zee-
man-phenomenon ....
509 Wheatstone Bridges
-
918,
. . . . 919 - tongs 59S
- Hertz' experiment .1040
. . . Bridge explained 917, . . . 918 netting, flexible 811
- 868 sns
- Hertzian wave transmitter 1041 Bridge key spiral with ebonite handle,
-
-
- Inclined plane 268 Bridge on galvanometer . . s77 triangles 2lo
- Induction coils 974 Kaleidophone 451 waxed !(>!
- Influence machine ....
822
- Mirror
stereoscope .... 524 Wires, conducting . '2(>C,. Sin. lli.->4
- Inverted float 380 Photometer 468 of constantan, German sil-

- Laws of reflection ....
474
- Precision
bridges . . . 924. !i2.~>
ver etc '" 1
Linear expansion 569 Rheostat 912 of copper . . . -'or,. _'<>:. !tll

- - Vibration curves .451 455 Wireless telegraphy Into. HMIi -lo.-,3
Lodge's resonance experi-
. .
- Wave machine 4 Hi
ment 1035
- -Kirchhoff bridge
-
telephony lo,">7
-
Longitudial wave machine 411 .
'.121.
Wislicenus, I'ranotrope ...
Mercury distilling apparatus 399 Wheel, Barlow's 969 Withdrawable condenser . .
-
Microphone 1054 sector and small spur wheel Wittmann, Oscillograph .... '.too
- Mirror galvanometer .1013 . . 319, 320 Wolf, Safety lamp 640

Model of a three-phase motor 1000 suspension .'i2ll Wollaston, Camera lucida . . . ">30
Model of balance beam 275 . .

- with movable paddles . . 357 (VII . .... 847

Page. Page
WollastOn, t'l.yonliorous .
(HIS Work and heat 626637, 591, 597 Yarn-\viridlcs see special list.
Ilypsomeler .... 662 - bench sec vol. I.

Young, Modulus 308
Pi-ism 509 Working of the telephone 1054 . . .
goniometer
'4 4S1 Work rail 252
Wolpert. Air tester 856 Workshop equipment see vol. I.
Woltman, Mill :!.v> Work stand, physical 201, 202
. . .
'Vater mi'ter 355 Worm, and wheel 323 Zahlbruckner, Declination and in-
Wommelsdorf, Influence machine S22 -earing .... 313, 323, 324 clination 7S!I
Wood liars, which sound . . . 4.'jl! Woulff's Flasks 219 -
Liquid's pressure 340
blocks, parallclepipedic . . 2O(i Wright, Gypsum and mica com- - Monocliord 441
- cone with brass tube bination 565 809, 810, S4o
. . . lili'.l
Zamboni, Pile . . .
- with
pins 284 W -shaped decomposition cell . 944 - Pile with
protecting neck .10211
cylinder with paper .surface ~l',i Wunder, Thermocouple .... 1064 Zeeman-Kttect 507, .",o'.i
frame, hook and wire for melt- Zehnder, Battery of accumulators 856
linl
discharge tube 1043
- stretched with cardboard m>2 -
Primary and secondary con-
- with loud ductor 1042, 1043
ring
models of crystals ....
Iniis X Zeiss, (ptical apparatus for string
<
prism wit h Huygheuian cons- galvanometer 892

truct ions 563 -Telescopes 543
- X-ray equipments for medical use
protract .or 229 -ee special
Zenith prism for telescopes 543 . .
list.
pyramid with brass tube liHil .
- induction coils .978 981 Zickler, Tube 1053
- rod 2iit
. . .
Zinc condensor plate 803

scales with T-.-haped cross- X-ray negatives 1074
-copper cell
-
845, 847
section 894 X-ray tubes 985 - disc, ....
1026
- tubes for evacuation amalgamated
-
slabs, cut with and aciu-.- by one's -
plate 839
the grain 596 self 1016 - 813
school experiments 1074
amalgamated
stand for measuring instru- .
1(573, for wire coil 962, 967
. . .
ments 908 - 852

plate, spare
- for 286 1027
I'uliij's apparatus .
sulphide screen
for vacinini tube . . . 1023 Zirconium plate 617
supports 206 Zollner,Double radiometer . . 1021
wedges . ... . 206 Zwick, Lens apparatus .... 496
Wood's Metal 601 -
Myopia and presbyopia . . 523
Wood, Phase reversing plate . 549 Yaru-assorters see special list. -
Optical apparatus .... 496
Wooll, Slide valve cylinder 632 - for connecting 803 Voltameter 941
. .
apparatus .
The pages 1201 1240 are bound in voL I.

r
\
RETURN
1 5 1969 6
REC'D LD
'
OqC 1
General Library
I76B .
,versKyo,Calir
Berkeley
GENERAL LIBRARY -
U.C. BERKELEY

Pricelist No 5023 Kohl Rich

Uploaded by

Copyright:

Available Formats

You might also like

Pricelist No 5023 Kohl Rich

Uploaded by

Document Information

Original Description:

Copyright

Available Formats

Share this document

Share or Embed Document

Sharing Options

Did you find this document useful?

Is this content inappropriate?

Copyright:

Available Formats

Pricelist No 5023 Kohl Rich

Uploaded by

Copyright:

Available Formats

Price List ho. 50, Vols. II and III.

Apparatus and Supplies for general use. Introduction to Physics.

Mechanics. Wave Theory. Acoustics. Optics. Heat. Meteorology.

Electrically driven Whirling Table with double Gearing.

Telegraphic Address: Physik. Fully paid-up Share Capital:

50, II III e. All imitation or reproduction of Block strictly prohibited. 01.6224.

presenting large sums are concerned, should this be necessary.

The prices given are for delivery and payment at Chemnitz.

Duties, payable in certain countries on accounts, should be met by the buyer.

per>peetive drawings the scale usually applies to one dimension only.

Gold Medal. Leipzig 1897.

Chicago 1893. Chicago 1893.

Administration Buildings, Mechanical Workshops and Cabinet Shops

Gold Medal. International Exhibition. Paris 1900.

Grand Prix. St. Louis 1904.

Cl. 4780, 4790, 4781,5664,

We have obtained the following awards at exhibitions:

International Exhibition, Brussels, 1910. 3 Grands Prix.

International Exhibition, St. Louis, 1904. !

Cl. 6589, 6590,

Equipments: see List 50, Vol. I.

de Ch. B o u r e t und Libreria de Hachette y Cia.

Jul. Springer, Berlin.

Some Testimonials as to Physical Apparatus.

Trier, 13 th April, 1911. Innsbruck, 15 th March, 1911.

Essen, 18 th 'February, 1911.

Iterlin-Wilmersaorf, 14 th April, 1911.

its old and renowned reputation. satisfaction of the Baron.

Marburg, 12 th February, 1911.

Ma lines, 11 th February, 1911.

(Jlarisegg bei Steckborn, 9 th February. 1911. Go Id a p, 6 th December, 1910.

their contents. The packing is perfect, etc.

The consignment has met with my complete sat is -

I'iiction and I beg to thank you for it.

I would remark, in conclusion, that we are perfectly Rich. Miiller, Seminaroberlehrer.

Convent vom Allerheiligst. Sacrament, Davos 3 rd

We are very satisfied with the Physical Apparatus A. Rzewuski.

Alexander Mailer. Obergymn.-Lehrer. st

Since only during the last few days that we have

Kecskemet i, 27 th October, 1910. A q u i 1 a, Italy, 15 th June, 1910.

Dir. Racsch, P. D., Oberrealschule.

I have great pleasure in repeating to-day my high

Real- und Gewerbeschullehrer H. Schmid. Oberlehrer Dr. Lotzbeyer,

Vilna, 3 rd October, 1910.

Berlin, 16 th August, 1910. St. Gallen, 28 th March, 1910.

Mannliches Gymnasium, Ufa.

A u b u r n, Ala., 5 March, 1910. th

Essen 22 nd At the commencement of the present ye?r I obtained

Komo t a u, 19 th February, 1910. Droyssig b. Zeitz, 27

Etteaheim, 22 nd December, 1909.

Ley sin, Canton de Vaud, 12 th February, 1910. Riga, 19 th December, 1909.

W. Stefko, Moscow. C. Krause,

Hernosand, 27 January, 1910.

25 th name which I work many thanks for

Sarospatek, 24 th January, 1910. Tar now. i_'r' November,

Wo 1 o g d a, 9 th October, 1909. R a t i bo r, 26 th June, 1909.

Villingen, 25 th June, 1909.

The apparatus are excellent.